2.2 - Prototypes-SPEC (DIV21-33) - 2022.07.19

PHASE 4 – TENDER DOCUMENTS
(NEIGHBOURHOOD – PROTOTYPE)
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Document 5.2, Volume 2.2: DIV. 21 - 33
January 2022
DOCUMENT 5
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
INDEX
VOLUME 1
DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (UNDER SEPARATE COVER)
VOLUME 2.1
DIVISION 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS
SECTION 02 3000 SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION
DIVISION 03 CONCRETE
SECTION 03 1000 CONCRETE FORMING & ACCESSORIES

03 3000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 4100 PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
03 4800 PRECAST CONCRETE SPECIALTIES
03 4900 GLASS-FIBRE-REINFORCED CONCRETE (GFRC)
03 5200 LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE
03 5300 CONCRETE TOPPING/SCREED
03 5416 SELF-LEVELLING SCREED
03 5419 SAND CEMENT SCREED
03 6000 GROUTING
DIVISION 04 MASONRY
SECTION 04 2200 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

04 2226 AUTOCLAVED AERATED CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
DIVISION 05 METALS
SECTION 05 1200 STRUCTURAL STEEL

05 3100 STEEL DECKING
05 5000 METAL FABRICATIONS
05 5213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
05 7313 GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
05 7500 DECORATIVE FORMED METAL
05 7513 ALUMINUM SCREENS
DIVISION 06 WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES
SECTION 06 1000 ROUGH CARPENTRY

06 4000 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06 6116 SOLID SURFACING
06 8400 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) LADDERS
DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 07 1113 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

KEO/19-3262-0000 /1 Index
12 Neighborhood Centers
Public Authority for Housing & Welfare, Kuwait
07 1352 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING
07 1354 THERMOPLASTIC SHEET WATERPROOFING
07 1416 COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING
07 1613 POLYMER MODIFIED CEMENT WATERPROOFING
07 1800 TRAFFIC COATINGS
07 1900 WATER REPELLENTS
07 2100 BUILDING INSULATION
07 2500 WEATHER BARRIER
07 3216 PRECAST CONCRETE ROOF PAVERS
07 4243 COMPOSITE METAL WALL PANELS
07 4649 FIBER CEMENT SHEATHING BOARD
07 5200 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING
07 6113 STANDING SEAM SHEET METAL ROOFING
07 6200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07 8116 CEMENTITIOUS FIREPROOFING
07 8400 FIRESTOPPING
07 8700 FIRE & SMOKE CURTAINS
07 9200 JOINT SEALANTS
07 9513 EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES
DIVISION 08 OPENINGS
SECTION 08 1113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

08 1400 WOOD DOORS
08 3113 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
08 3323 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
08 3326 OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES
08 4000 ALUMINIUM WORKS
08 4229.23 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES
08 4323.19 GLAZED PARTITION
08 4413 GLAZED ALUMINIUM CURTAIN WALLS
08 4423 POINT SUPPORT STRUCTURAL GLASS WALL SYSTEM
08 5850 OPERABLE SMOKE VENTING PANELS
08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE
08 8000 GLAZING
08 8300 MIRRORS
08 9000 LOUVERS AND VENTS
DIVISION 09 FINISHES
SECTION 09 2116 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

09 2400 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
09 2713 GLASS FIBER REINFORCED GYPSUM (GRG) FABRICATIONS
09 3013 CERAMIC TILING
09 5113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09 5126 GYPSUM TILE/PANEL CEILING
09 5133 ACOUSTICAL METAL PAN CEILINGS
09 5133.23 OPEN METAL GRID CEILINGS
09 5200 GYPSUM BOARD SUSPENDED CEILING
09 6340 STONE FLOORING
09 6400 WOOD FLOORING
09 6513 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
09 6516 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
09 6519 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
KEO/19-3262-0000 /2 Index
09 6536 STATIC-CONTROL RESILIENT FLOORING
09 6616 TERRAZZO FLOOR TILE
09 6700 FLUID APPLIED FLOORING
09 6813 TILE CARPETING
09 6816 SHEET CARPETING
09 6900 ACCESS FLOORING
09 7813 METAL INTERIOR WALL PANELING
09 8413.13 ACOUSTICAL WOOD WALL PANELS
09 9100 PAINTING
DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES
SECTION 10 1413.13 INTERIOR SIGNAGE

10 1453 TRAFFIC SIGNAGE
10 2113 TOILET COMPARTMENTS
10 2226 OPERABLE PARTITIONS
10 2600 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
10 2616 IMPACT RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION
10 2813 TOILET ACCESSORIES
10 4400 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
10 5100 LOCKERS
10 5500 POSTAL SPECIALTIES
10 7316 CANOPIES
DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT
SECTION 11 2429 FALL PROTECTION SYSTEMS

11 2600 UNIT KITCHENS
11 5313 SAFEGUARD LABORATORY FUME HOODS
11 6800 PLAY EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURES
DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS
SECTION 12 2413 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES

12 3553.13 METAL LABORATORY CASEWORK
12 4813 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS
12 9300 SITE FURNISHINGS
DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 13 1213 SWIMMING POOLS AND WATER FEATURES

13 3100 FABRIC STRUCTURES
13 3100.13 SHADE STRUCTURES
13 3123 TENSIONED FABRIC STRUCTURES
DIVISION 14 CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
SECTION 14 2100 ELEVATORS

14 2100.13 ELEVATORS TABULATION
VOLUME 2.2
KEO/19-3262-0000 /3 Index
DIVISION 21 FIRE SUPPRESSION
SECTION 21 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION

21 0513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
EQUIPMENT
21 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
21 0548 VIBRATION AND NOISE CONTROLS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
21 1000 WATER BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
21 1339 FOAM WATER SYSTEM
21 2200 CLEAN AGENT FIRE EXTINGUISHER SYSTEM
21 3000 FIRE PUMPS
DIVISION 22 PLUMBING
SECTION 22 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

22 0513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
22 0516 EXPANSION FITTING AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
22 0519 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
22 0523 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
22 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
22 0548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
22 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
22 0700 PLUMBING INSULATION
22 1116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
22 1119 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 1123.13 DOMESTIC WATER PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS
22 1200 FACILITY GROUND MOUNTED POTABLE WATER STORAGE TANKS
22 1223 INDOOR WATER STORAGE TANKS
22 1300 SANITARY, WASTE AND VENT PIPING & STORM WATER PIPING
22 1319 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 1323 SANITARY WASTE INTERCEPTORS
22 1329 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS
22 1429 SUMP PUMPS
22 3200 DOMESTIC WATER FILTRATION EQUIPMENT
22 3300 ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
22 4000 PLUMBING FIXTURES
22 6113 COMPRESSED AIR EQUIPMENTS FOR DENTAL
22 6219 DENTAL AIR AND VACUUM PIPING
DIVISION 23 HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
SECTION 23 0100 HVAC SYSTEM – GENERAL DESCRIPTION

23 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
23 0513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENT FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
23 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC.
23 0700 HVAC INSULATION.
23 0800 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC.
KEO/19-3262-0000 /4 Index
23 0900 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC.
23 0993 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS.
23 1113 FACILITY FUEL-OIL PIPING.
23 2300 REFRIGERANT PIPING.
23 3113 METAL DUCTS.
23 3119 HVAC CASINGS
23 3300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES.
23 3413 AXIAL HVAC FANS.
23 3413.13 HIGH PLUME DILUTION LABORATORY EXHAUST FAN
23 3416 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS.
23 3600 AIR TERMINAL UNITS.
23 3713 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES.
23 4100 PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION.
23 7313 AIR HANDLING UNITS
23 8126 SPLIT SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS
23 8127 DX VRF SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS
23 8216 AIR COILS
DIVISION 25 INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
SECTION 25 0000 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM

25 0000.1 BAS POINT SCHEDULE – HVAC (VRF)
25 0000.2 BAS POINT SCHEDULE – PLUMBING
25 0000.3 BAS POINT SCHEDULE – ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL
SECTION 26 0500 COMMON REQUIREMENT FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

26 0519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES (0-1000V)
26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 0533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 0536 CABLE TRAYS AND LADDER FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 0543 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
26 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 2413 SWITCHBOARDS
26 2416 DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
26 2419 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS
26 2726 WIRING DEVICES
26 2813 FUSES
26 2816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
26 2913 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
26 2923 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
26 3100 SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAIC SYSTEM
26 3110 SOLAR ENERGY ELECTRICAL POWER GENERATION TESTING
26 3120 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF SOLAR ENERGY
26 3213 ENGINE GENERATORS SET WITH FUEL DAY TANK
26 3353 STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
26 3533 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION EQUIPMENT
26 3600 TRANSFER SWITCHES
26 4113 LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES
26 5119 LED INTERIOR LIGHTING
DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS
KEO/19-3262-0000 /5 Index
SECTION 27 1000 ANALOGUE TELEPHONE SYSTEM
27 1100 COMMUNICATION CABLING SYSTEM
27 1116 COMMUNICATIONS RACKS FRAMES AND ENCLOSURES
27 1323 COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING
27 1513 COMMUNICATIONS COPPER HORIZONTAL CABLING
27 2133 WIFI SYSTEM
27 2223 IP DATA AND COMPUTER SYSTEM
27 4116 AV SYSTEM
27 4133 SMATV, IPTV AND DIGITAL INFORMATION DISPLAY SYSTEM
27 4220 QUEUE MANAGEMENT STSTEM
27 5116 MASJID SOUND SYSTEM
27 5117 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM
27 5223 EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM FOR SPECIAL NEED PERSON
DIVISION 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 28 1300 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM

28 1913 PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
28 2300 SECURITY VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM
28 3100 FIRE DETECTION & ALARM SYSTEM
DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK
SECTION 31 1000 SITE CLEARING

31 2000 EARTHWORKS
31 2319 DEWATERING
31 3116 TERMITE CONTROL
31 5000 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION
DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 32 1116.16 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES

32 1318 EXPOSED AGGREGATE CONCRETE FINISHING
32 1400 UNIT PAVING
32 1500 AGGREGATE SURFACING
32 1716 MANUFACTURED TRAFFIC-CALMING DEVICES
32 1816.13 PLAYGROUND PROTECTIVE SURFACING
32 3249 EXTERIOR STONE CLADDING
32 8100 AUTOMATIC IRRIGATION SYSTEM
32 9100 PLANTING PREPARATION
32 9113 SOIL PREPARATION
32 9300 PLANTS
32 9400 PLANTING ACCESSORIES
32 9700 PLANTING MAINTENANCE
DIVISION 33 UTILITIES
SECTION 33 1100 WATER DISTRIBUTION NETWORK

33 1219 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUYION FIRE HYDRANTS
33 3000 SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES
33 3102 HDPE GRAVITY SEWER PIPE AND FITTINGS
33 4000 STORMWATER DRAINAGE UTILITIES
VOLUME 2.4 - APPENDICES
APPENDIX A GEOTECHNICAL REPORT

KEO/19-3262-0000 /6 Index
APPENDIX B ACOUSTIC REPORT
APPENDIX C FINISHES LIST
APPENDIX D SANITARYWARE AND FIXTURES
APPENDIX E DOOR HARDWARE SETS
END OF INDEX
KEO/19-3262-0000 /7 Index
SECTION 21 0500
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
PART 1 - GENERAL
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This Section includes the following:

a) Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
b) Mechanical sleeve seals.
c) Sleeves.
d) Escutcheons.
e) Grout.
f) Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
g) Painting and finishing.
h) Concrete bases.
i) Supports and anchorages.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred
spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,
unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished

occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient

temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical
contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.
E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather
conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
F. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:

a) EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
b) NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:

a) Mechanical sleeve seals.
b) Escutcheons.
KEO/19-3262-0000 21 0500/1 Common Work Results for Fire Suppression
B. Welding certificates.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1,
"Structural Welding Code--Steel."
B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
a) Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
b) Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding
processes involved and that certification is current.
C. Electrical Characteristics for Fire-Suppression Equipment: Equipment of higher

electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is
approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit
sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified,
equipment shall comply with requirements.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through
shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of
dirt, debris, and moisture.
B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and
bending.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during
progress of construction, to allow for fire-suppression installations.
B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place

concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for fire-suppression items
requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors
are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."
1.07 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Fire Protection Systems
1. Fire water storage tanks, pumps and pumping scheme.
a) Sprinkler system will be provided in the basement of all buildings (where exists).
b) Duration of operation will differ based on the protection of the building
c) For buildings protected by maximum 2 fire hose reel, the flow of the fire pump
shall be not less than 36 GPM with a fire tank minimum capacity 500 US gallon
(1.9 m3)

d) For buildings protected by more than 2 fire hose reels, the flow of the fire pump
shall be not less than 36 GPM with a fire tank minimum capacity 1000 US gallon
(3.8 m3)
e) Wet risers with 65 mm landing valves in the staircases will be used to protect the
building with basement exceeding 3000m2 . Tank and pumps (one main, one
standby and one jockey) will be located at basement. the pump capacity needs to
be 1000 gpm and the tank need to be enough for 1 hour (230 m3).
f) As per KFD , If the area of the building is 1500- 3000m2 the owner or the
consultant has the choice one of the international codes NFPA or FOC to be
followed for the ordinary hazard and they have to choose or select the type of
pumps as flexible long coupled end suction or horizontal split case electrical
pumps with jockey pump and in this case the pump capacity needs to be 500
gpm and the tank need to be enough for 30 min (60 m3).
g) As per KFD , If the area of the building is 1000- 1500m2 the owner or the
consultant has the choice one of the international codes NFPA or FOC to be
followed for the ordinary hazard and they have to choose or select the type of
pumps as flexible long coupled end suction or flexible couple electrical pumps
with jockey pump and in this case the pump capacity needs to be 1000L/min
(256 gpm) and the tank need to be enough for 45 min (45 m3).
h) Quadruple fire brigade connection will be provided at the boundary wall of the
buildings to allow the fire department to supplement the fire water in the fire
network.
i) Wall mounted 6kg dry powder fire extinguishers will be provided to protect the
electrical rooms.
j) Fire protection system comprising of one set of fire pumps (electric, with
emergency backup from diesel generators and jockey pump) located at central
utility building basement level to serve the fire suppression systems for the
project.
k) Pressure in any fire zone is limited to 20 bars (maximum).
l) Quadruple fire brigade connection will be provided at the boundary of the
building to allow the fire department to supplement the fire suppression water
reserve supply.
m) Pressure reducing stations shall be introduced where the pressure exceeds the
allowable limits.
Ground Total
Floor Built Required
Building Building
No. Name
Floors Foot Up Type of
Print Area Protection
m2 m2
sprinkler
LBF + LGF + L01 + hose reel
C1 Supermarket 7781.7 26817.1
LLRF + LURF landing
valve
Society
sprinkler
C2 Development LGF+L01+LLRF+LURF 2359.8 4114
+hose reel
Center
Social Unit LGF + L01 + LLRF +
C3 756.1 1384.5 hose reel
Building LURF
Citizen LGF + L01 + LLRF +
C4 1013 1609.4 hose reel
Services LURF
LGF + L01 + LLRF + Sprinkler +
C5 Police station 1528.4 3152.7
LURF Hose reel
sprinkler (in
Municipality LBF + LGF +
C6 720 720 basement)
Building LLRF+LURF
+hose reel
Masjid,
Ablution,
LGF + L01 + LLRF +
C7 Imam & 2787.3 3834.5 hose reel
LURF
Called
Building
LGF + L01 + LLRF + sprinkler
C8 Post Office 1176.4 2433.2
LURF +hose reel
Health Care sprinkler
LGF + L01 + LLRF +
C9 & Ambulance 3746.3 7241.3 +hose reel
LURF
Center + LV
Trade
Control & sprinkler (in
LBF + LGF + L01 +
C10 Consumer 552.6 1995.8 basement)
L02+ LLRF+LURF
Protection +hose reel
Center
LGF + L01 + LLRF + sprinkler
C11 Library 1799.4 2921
LURF +hose reel
sprinkler
LBF+LGF + L01 + +hose reel +
C12 Children Club 2359.8 4114
LLRF + LURF Landing
Valve
C13 Gas Branch LGF + LLRF+LURF 253 253 hose reel
Building
No. Name Fire Requirements
C1 Supermarket At Basement:
1- Conceret Tank (230 m3).
2- Conventenioal (1000 gpm) Fire Pumps
(1W+1S + 1J).
C2 Society Center At Roof (Fire):

1- Tank: Separate GRP Tank (60 m3)
(Selection: 6x4x3).
2- Pumps: Horizontal Split Case Pumps
(1W+1S+ 1J). (500 gpm)
C3 Social unit At Roof (Fire):
2- Pumps: Booster vertical Pumps (2W).
(100 gpm each)

C4 Citizen Services At Roof (Fire):
2- Pumps: Booster vertical Pumps (2W).
(100 gpm each)
Building
C5 Police station At Roof (Fire):
(Selection: 6x4x3).
(1W+1S+ 1J). (500 gpm)
C6 Municipality 1- Fire Tank:
Separate GRP Tank (11 m3)
2- Fire Pumps: End Suction pump (1W).

(500 L/min each (selection 150 gpm))
+ Jockey Pump (Vetical inline) (50L/min
(selection 15 gpm).).
C7 & C7A Masjid At Roof (Fire) on masjed only:

2- Pumps: Booster vertical Pumps (2W). (36
gpm )
Building
C8 Post Office At Roof (Fire):
2- Pumps: End Suction Pumps (1W) + 1 jocky
pump. 1000 L/MIN (265 gpm )
C9 Health Care At BASEMENT:

2- Conventenioal Fire Pumps (1W+1S + 1J).
C10 MOCI 1- Fire Tank:

Separate GRP Tank (11 m3)
2- Fire Pumps:End Suction pump (1W). (500

L/min each (selection 150 gpm))
+ Jockey Pump (Vetical inline) (50L/min
(selection 15 gpm).).
Building Name
No.
Fire Requirements
C11 Library At Roof (Fire):
(Selection: 6x4x3).
(1W+1S+ 1J). (500 gpm)
C12 Children Club AT BASEMENT

2- Conventenioal Fire Pumps (1W+1S + 1J).
C13 Gas branch At Roof (Fire):

2- Pumps: Booster vertical Pumps (1W). (36
gpm )
2. Automatic Sprinkler System

a) The building with basement will be fully protected with automatic water sprinkler system
according to NFPA-13.
a) The sprinkler system will be fed from the combined wet riser system.
b) Floor control assemblies and installation control valves will be provided to control the
architectural fire zones.
c) Quick response sprinklers will be provided to isolate the fire zones.
d) Sprinklers will protect suspended ceilings and closed plenums with a void greater than
80 cm high.
3. Wet Riser System

a) Combined, wet risers installed in the stairways will be used to serve the sprinkler
system, 65mm landing valves and 25mm hose reel.
4. Hose Reel System and Fire Extinguishers

a) Indoor fire hose-reel stations shall be installed in buildings in compliance with the
relevant NFPA codes.
b) Each indoor fire hose reel station should be equipped with:
1) Red lacquered steel cabinet.
2) 25mm, 30 mm long hose reel
3) 6kg dry powder, portable fire extinguisher
4) 2 gal pressure water fire extinguisher
c) Portable and trolley mounted fire extinguishers will be provided to protect the following
areas:
LOCATION FIRE EXTINGUISHER TYPE
Kitchens, Electrical, Mechanical and Telecom Multipurpose Dry Chemical

Rooms
Electrical Substation (Transformers Room) Dry Chemical Trolley Mounted

5. Foam – Deluge System
a) Foam – Deluge system with open type sprinklers shall be used to protect the emergency
generator room.
6. Clean Agent Systems

a) Clean agent systems shall be provided to protect the Main Computer Rooms
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
a) Subject to approved manufacturers list by PAHW.
b) The product or manufacturers listed are included for the purpose of establishing
minimum quality standards. Products of equal quality or better might be
considered if produced by a specialized manufacturer whose products are equal
in every respect and have been in similar service for not less than five years.
The products must also have a local distributor and must be backed with a
professional service centre. The decision of acceptability shall rest with the
Engineer’s representative.
c) Products to be provided shall be from the manufacturer approved from KFSD &
civil Defense.
2.02 Products to be provided shall be from the manufacturer approved from KFSD & civil
DefensePIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
A. Refer to individual Division 21 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and
joining methods.
B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.03 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to individual Division 21 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed
below.
B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping
system contents.
a) ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum
thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.
a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze
flanges.
b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel
flanges.
b) AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, unless otherwise
indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux
according to ASTM B 813.
E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-
duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for
refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for
wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
2.04 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular
space between pipe and sleeve.
a) Sealing Elements: EPDM/NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe.
Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
b) Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element.
c) Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of
length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for
each sealing element.
2.05 SLEEVES
A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed

with welded longitudinal joint.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with
plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange.
Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
a) Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
E. Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
F. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
G. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing
flange for attaching to wooden forms.
2.06 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to
closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that
completely covers opening.
B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-

plated finish.
C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.

a) Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.
a) Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
E. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chrome-plated
finish.
F. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed/exposed-rivet hinge, set screw or

spring clips, and chrome-plated finish.
G. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate.
H. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.
2.07 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement

grout.
a) Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
b) Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
c) Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections

specifying piping systems.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of
piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and
calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install
piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in

equipment rooms and service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas
at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless
specifically indicated otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel
removal.
F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G. Install piping at indicated slopes.
H. Install piping free of sags and bends.
I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system
operating pressure.
L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the
following:
a) New Piping:
a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-
pattern type.
b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-
plated finish.
c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips.
d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-
piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
e. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-
piece, stamped-steel type.
f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece or
split-casting, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
g. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
stamped-steel type or split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge
and set screw.
h. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type
with polished chrome-plated finish.
i. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel
type with concealed or exposed-rivet hinge and set screw or spring clips.
j. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type.
k. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with set
screw or spring clips.
l. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-
plate type.
M. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
N. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.
O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor
and roof slabs.
P. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board
partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.
a) Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment
areas or other wet areas 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.
Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure
clamping ring if ring is specified.
b) Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.
c) Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear
space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve
materials:
a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150).
b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger, penetrating
gypsum-board partitions.
c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane
waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section
of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches (50 mm) above finished
floor level. Refer to Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim"
for flashing.
1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.
d) Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve
and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and
location of joint. Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and
installation.
Q. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and

mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear
space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
a) Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches (150 mm) in diameter.
b) Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches (150 mm) and larger in
diameter.
c) Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing
elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve.
Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe
and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to
expand and make watertight seal.
R. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves.
Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for
1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical
sleeve seals.
a) Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing
S. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and
floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to
Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for materials.
T. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
U. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-

in requirements.
3.02 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to
tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube
Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and
Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs
and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
a) Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry
seal threading is specified.
b) Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are
corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open
welds.
G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes
and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt
threads.
I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and
fittings according to the following:
a) Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and
solvent cements.
b) CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.
3.03 PAINTING
A. Painting of fire-suppression systems, equipment, and components is specified in

Division 09 Sections "Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting."
B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with
materials and procedures to match original factory finish.
3.04 CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment

manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.
a) Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches
(100 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit.
b) Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise
indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full
perimeter of the base.
c) Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through
concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.
d) Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's
setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with
items to be embedded.
e) Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported
equipment.
f) Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.

g) Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete and
reinforcement as specified in Division 03 Section "[Cast-in-Place Concrete]
[Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete]."
3.05 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and
elevation to support and anchor fire-suppression materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
3.06 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and
anchor fire-suppression materials and equipment.
B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to
view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install
fasteners without splitting wood members.
C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.
3.07 GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for fire-suppression equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and
other equipment base plates, and anchors.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout.
3.08 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
A. Provide a written monthly report to the employer, detailing the maintenance work
performed, including dates, parts replaced etc.
B. Provide all necessary maintenance staff experienced in fire protection works such as
engineers, supervisors, operators, technicians, helpers etc. for effective maintenance
and operations of all systems. Submit to the engineer for approval the qualification
details of all maintenance staff.

C. The contractor shall keep permanently on the site sufficient number of operation and
maintenance staff to fulfil the obligation of the contract. Contractor shall provide the
following minimum staff:
a) One engineer for all Services 20% of time.
b) One supervisors 100% of time.
D. Provide all spare parts for replacements made necessary due to wear and tear of
equipment, provide all consumable parts, short life parts, oil, grease, filters, chemicals,
etc. and all tools and maintenance equipment required for proper operation and
complete maintenance of the work.
E. Provide all routine operational maintenance and full preventive maintenance as

recommended by the equipment and systems in proper operating condition.
F. Include for complete routine maintenance and corrective and preventive maintenance
with the requirement of the contract document as follow:
a) Defect liability / breakdown maintenance, inclusive of replacement parts.
b) Preventive maintenance as scheduled, inclusive of replacement parts and
consumables.
c) Submit the schedule of routine operational and preventive maintenance for all
equipment for the employer’s/engineer approval.
d) Attending to emergencies, which may damage property or endanger lives, even
outside normal working hours.
G. The Employer's personnel shall be allowed to witness or participate (without damages

interference) in the above activities.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 21 0513
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and poly-phase, general-

purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac
power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or
shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.
1.02 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible

with the following:
1. Motor controllers.
2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.
3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.
4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are
specified in fire suppression equipment schedules or Sections.
B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.
C. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.
2.02 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet
(1000 m) above sea level.
B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate

connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with
indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering
service factor.
KEO/19-3262-0000 21 0513/1 Common Motor Requirements for Fire Suppression Equipment

2.03 POLYPHASE MOTORS
A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.
B. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.
C. Service Factor: 1.15.
D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.

1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding.
2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.
E. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.
F. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.
G. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust
loading.
H. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.
I. Insulation: Class F.
J. Code Letter Designation:

1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.
2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.
K. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for
motor frame sizes smaller than 324T.
2.04 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring

connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in
motor terminal box, suited to control method.
B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features
coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.
1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish,
designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time
rise pulses produced by pulse-width modulated inverters.
2. Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F
insulation.
3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.
4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally
protected motors.
C. Severe-Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor.
2.05 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and
requirements of specific motor application:
1. Permanent-split capacitor.
2. Split phase.
3. Capacitor start, inductor run.
4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.
B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.
C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial
and thrust loading.
D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.
E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to

motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating
of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor
temperature returns to normal range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION

SECTION 21 0529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
Technical Specification document is issued as a supplement to local construction specification.

The local construction specification shall form the basis of the Project Specification. In case of
contradiction or discrepancy between local construction specification and Technical
Specification, CONTRACTOR shall incorporate whichever is more stringent. Where a question
remains on which requirement is more stringent, CONTRACTOR shall submit the issue to
Client and/or Client Representative in writing. The decision of Client and/or Client
Representative shall be considered to be final.
A. Pipe and equipment hangers and supports.
B. Anchors, equipment bases and supports.
C. Sleeves and seals.
D. Flashing, counter flashing and pipe stacks.
E. Fire stopping.
1.02 Related Sections:
A. Division 21 Section "Water-Based Fire-Suppression Systems" for pipe hangers for fire-
suppression piping.
B. Division 21 Section "Vibration and Noise Controls for Fire Suppression Piping and
Equipment" for vibration isolation devices.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. General:
1. The following documents form part of the Specifications to the extent stated.
Where differences exist between codes and standards, the one affording the
greatest protection shall apply.
2. Unless otherwise noted, the referenced standard edition is the current one at the
time of commencement of the Work.
3. Refer to Division 21 Section "Common Results for Fire Suppression" for codes
and standards, and other general requirements.
B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

KEO/19-3262-0000 21 0529/1 Hangers and Supports for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment
1. NFPA-13 Installation of Sprinkler Systems
2. NFPA-14 Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems
C. UL Fire Resistance Directory, latest edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Division 21 Section "Common Results for Fire Suppression –
Quality Assurance."
B. Submit shop drawing of hanger and support spacing, framing and attachment methods.
C. Submit fire stopping systems for every application.
A. Comply with Division 21 Section "Common Results for Fire Suppression."
B. Supports for Sprinkler Piping: Comply with NFPA 13.
C. Supports for Standpipes: Comply with NFPA 14.
D. Do not use black steel devices, components, fasteners, etc. within the Clean Room
interstitial space or in any related airflow path. Steel items shall be plated, galvanized,
painted, or coated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
2.02 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hangers for Pipe Sizes ½ (12.7 mm) to 1-1/2 Inch (38 mm): electro-galvanized,
adjustable swivel ring, UL listed.
B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches (50.8 mm) and Cold Pipe Sizes 6 Inches (152.4 mm)
and Over: electro- galvanized, adjustable, clevis, UL listed.
C. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches (152.4 mm) and Over: electro-galvanized
Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron roll, double hanger.
D. Pipe Supported Tight to Wall, Floor, or Ceiling: 12 gauge channel electro-galvanized

complete with pipe clamps, nuts, bolts, and end caps.
E. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp, UL listed.
F. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches (101.6 mm): electro-galvanized adjustable pipe
saddle, locknut nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
2.03 HANGER RODS
A. Steel, threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously threaded.
2.04 ATTACHMENTS TO STRUCTURE
A. Inserts for new formed concrete construction: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel
shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for
reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.
B. For Support on New Concrete: Electro-Galvanized steel headed bolts.
2.05 SUPPORTS, BRACING, AND ACCESSORIES
A. Miscellaneous Steel: Angles, channels, brackets, rods, clamps, etc., of new materials
conforming to ASTM A36. electro-galvanize all steel parts after fabrication where used
outdoors or inside the penthouse.
B. Fasteners: All bolts and nuts, except as otherwise specified, shall conform to ASTM
Standard Specifications for Low Carbon Steel Externally and Internally Threaded
Standard Fasteners, Designation A307. Bolts shall have heavy hexagon heads, and
nuts shall be of the hexagon heavy series. All bolts, washers, nuts, anchor bolts,
screws and other hardware used outdoors or inside the penthouse shall be galvanized,
and all galvanized nuts shall have a free running fit. Provide bolts of ample size and
strength for the purpose intended. All ferrous metal components below grade shall be
stainless steel.
C. Sheet Metal Screws: Plated, size 10 minimum.
2.06 COUNTER FLASHING
A. Metal Flashing: 26-gauge galvanized steel.
B. Flexible Flashing: 47-mil thick sheet butyl; compatible with roofing.
C. Caps: Steel, 16 gauge.
2.07 EQUIPMENT CURBS
A. See Arch. and Structural Drawings for the design detail of the equipment curb.
2.08 SLEEVES
A. Adjust-To-Crete, AMI Products, or equal, 24 gauge, electro-galvanized adjustable

sleeve, up to 6 (150 mm) diameter.
2.09 Fireproofing OF floor and wall penetrations
A. Materials and installation shall comply with U.L. "Fire Resistance Directory", for
Through-Penetration for Fire stop Devices, latest edition.
2.010 FABRICATION
A. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction.
Provide for continuous insulation wrapping.
B. Design hangers for installation without disengagement of supported pipe.
2.011 FINISHES
A. Prime-paint exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in
crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.
1. Steel in the Clean Room interstitial space is considered exposed.
B. Hot-dip galvanized outdoors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 ATTACHMENTS TO STRUCTURE
A. Concrete Structure: Locate anchors from any edge condition and at a spacing to obtain
maximum working loads specified in the applicable ICC report.
1. See structural drawings for additional restrictions for locating anchors.
B. Steel Structure: Attach at beam axis. Avoid eccentric loads wherever possible.
C. Rating: Ultimate strength at least five times the imposed load.
D. Submit for structural review all pipe hanger locations, point loads and structural
attachment details for pipes 6 inches (152.4 mm) and larger.
E. Coordinate installation so that attachments to structure are made prior to fireproofing. If

attachments must be made after fireproofing, then thoroughly clean area of fire proofing
before welded or bolted attachments are made and replace fireproofing as necessary.
Fireproofing material shall match existing.
3.02 Supports, Bracing, and Accessories
A. Set all machines and devices dead level, except where pitch or slope is specified or
shown. Securely fasten to the structure unless shown otherwise. Use dry pack cement
grout to obtain complete contact between structure and equipment.
B. This Section is responsible for the concrete work for the support of equipment provided
by this Section. Coordinate locations with anchor bolts before concrete is placed.
C. Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Support horizontal piping as follows:
Pipe Size Maximum Hanger Hanger Diameter

Spacing
1/2 to 1-1/4 inch (12.7 to 31.75 mm) 6 feet 6 inches (2 3/8 inch (9.5 mm)
m)
1-1/2 to 2 inch (38.1 to 50.8 mm) 10 feet (3 m) 3/8 inch (9.5 mm)
2-1/2 to 3 inch (63.5 tto 76.2 mm) 10 feet (3 m) 1/2 inch (12.7 mm)
4 to 6 inch (101.6 to 152.4 mm) 10 feet (3 m) 5/8 inch (15.9 mm)
2. Install hangers to provide at least 1/2 inch (13 mm) space between finished
covering and adjacent work.
3. Place a hanger within 12 inches (300 mm) of each horizontal elbow.
4. Use hangers with at least 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) vertical adjustment.
5. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet (1.5 m)
maximum spacing between hangers.
6. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor
at hub.
7. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide
multiple or trapeze hangers. Use specified pipe shields (if applicable). Trapeze
size, and support size and spacing shall be governed by the cumulative weight of
the supported piping. Maximum trapeze deflection shall be 1/240th of the span
on a maximum stress of 15,000 psi (103.5 MPa), whichever is more stringent.
8. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.
9. Brace piping longitudinally and transversely as specified and indicated on the
drawings.
10. Support all pipe from the building structure so that there is no apparent deflection
in pipe runs. Fit piping with steel sway braces and anchors to prevent vibration
and/or horizontal displacement under load when required. Do not support from,
or brace to, ducts, other pipes, conduit, or any materials except building
structure. Piping or equipment shall be immobile and shall not be supported or
hung by wire, rope, plumber's tape, plastic ties, or blocking of any kind. Vertical
piping running between floors shall be additionally supported at mid points in a
rigid and immobile fashion. Any exposed or concealed piping which can be
physically moved, and which is not properly supported will not be accepted, and
additional support or bracing will be required.
11. Install and secure all equipment with anchors and braces to floors, structural
members and walls with sufficient backing, to prevent vibration and/or horizontal
displacement under load and seismic force as hereinbefore specified. Follow
manufacturer's recommendations for the installation of vibration isolators where
required for all equipment requiring such.
D. Equipment Bases and Supports:

1. Provide templates, anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring
equipment.
2. Construct support of steel members. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to
structure. Level equipment installed on steel rails using shims to compensate for
the deflection of the steel.
3. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration-isolation components are installed.
E. Sleeves:
1. Set sleeves in position in formwork. Provide reinforcing around sleeves.
2. Extend sleeves through floors 1 inch (25 mm) above finished floor level. Caulk
sleeves full depth and provide floor plate.
3. Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close-off space
between pipe or duct and adjacent work with fire-stopping insulation and caulk
airtight. Provide close-fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of
penetration.
4. Install chrome-plated steel escutcheons at finished surfaces.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 21 0548
VIBRATION AND NOISE CONTROLS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Inertia bases.
B. Vibration isolation.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASHRAE HAND BOOK 1999, HVAC Applications.
A. Conform to ASHRAE average noise criteria curves.
B. Ensure structural integrity by avoiding resonance and by restricting vibration.
C. Do not exceed the allowable noise level, 70 dBA measured at a distance of 1200 mm (4
feet) from source, by proper engineering of equipment assemblies.
1.04 SPEED AND BALANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR ROTATING EQUIPMENT
A. Fans and other rotating mechanical equipment shall not operate at speeds in excess of
80 % of their true critical speed.
B. Vertical vibration of rotating equipment shall not be greater than the levels indicated.
The vibration shall be measured on the equipment or steel frame equipment base when
the equipment is mounted on its vibration isolation mounts. If the equipment has an
inertia base, the allowable vibration level is reduced by the ratio of the equipment weight
alone to the equipment weight plus the inertia base weight.
Equipment Speed Vibration Displacement (Mils Peak-to-Peak)

Under 600 rpm 4
600 to 1000 rpm 3
1000 to 2000 rpm 2
Over 2000 rpm 1
KEO/19-3262-0000 21 0548/1 Vibration and Noise Controls for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings, product data, samples and manufacturer's installation

instructions.
B. Include data for each equipment and size of unit showing isolation type, efficiency,
stiffness, natural frequency, and transmissibility at lowest operating speed of equipment,
actual load, static deflection under actual load etc.
C. Submit manufacturer's certificates in respect of static and dynamic loading, fundamental

frequency, average noise level at full load conditions etc. of all equipment.
D. Indicate vibration isolator locations, on general layout and plant room detail drawings.
E. Flexible pipe connector shop drawings data to include maximum allowable temperature
and pressure rating, overall face to face length, live length, hose wall thickness, and
fundamental frequency of assembly.
F. Submit manufacturer's certificates that the vibration isolators are properly selected and
installed in equipment assemblies, to meet with, or to exceed the Contract requirements.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site, store and protect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following:
1. Subject to approved manufacturers list by PAHW.
2. The product or manufacturers listed are included for the purpose of establishing
3. Products to be provided shall be from the manufacturer approved from KFSD &
civil Defense.
C. Products to be provided shall be from the manufacturer approved from KFSD & civil
DefenseAll metal parts of vibration isolation units installed out of doors shall be hot dip
galvanised, cadmium plated, or neoprene coated after fabrication. Galvanising shall
meet ASTM salt spray test standards and Federal test standard No. 14.
D. Isolators types are scheduled to establish minimum standards. At the Contractor's

option, labour saving accessories can be an integral part of isolators supplied to provide
initial lift of equipment to operating height, hold piping at fixed elevations during
installation and initial system filling operations, and similar installation advantages.
Accessories must not degrade the vibration isolation system.
E. Static deflection of isolators shall be as shown on the schedule. All static deflections
stated are the minimum acceptable deflection for the mounts under actual load. Isolators
selected on the basis of rated deflection are not acceptable.
2.02 BASES
A. Type "A" - INTEGRAL BASES: This type is generally applicable for packaged chillers,
pumps, Air Handling Units, Air conditioning Units etc. which are supplied with factory
fabricated rigid base which can be mounted directly on vibration isolators. Equipment
manufacturer's recommendations should be sought for the number, locations and
weight distribution to select and install vibration isolators.
B. Type "B" - STEEL STRUCTURAL BASES: This type is generally subdivided into closed
frame type (Type B1) and rails type (Type B2). These are steel bases fabricated either
as per the approved shop drawing or as per the equipment manufacturer's
recommendation. These are used for equipment not having a rigid base. The type B1
shall be used where the vibration isolators are located within the equipment base and
type B2 shall be used when the vibration isolators are outside the equipment and the
type B2 base acts as a cradle. The minimum depth shall be 4 inches.
C. TYPE "C" CONCRETE INTERTIAL BASES: This type generally consists of structural
steel, fabricated pouring form with reinforcing bars. The concrete shall be poured on
site. The minimum depth shall be 6 inches.
D. TYPE "D" - ROOF CURBS: This type is generally used for Roof top Air Handling Units
with direct cutting through roof slab under the units. These roof curbs shall be supplied
by the unit manufacturer. The manufacturer's recommendations should be sought for
the number, locations and weight distribution to select and install vibration isolators.
E. TYPE "E" - HOUSE KEEPING PADS: These are concrete bases used for all equipment
with or without moving parts and shall be suitable for taking up the static and dynamic
loads (if any). Size base to extend 10 cms beyond equipment base in all directions and
minimum10 cms above finished floor level. Roughen floor slab beneath base for bond
and or provide rebar dowels in floor slab. Locate anchor bolts (welded on to a rebar
framework to maintain spacing) with templates supplied by the equipment manufacturer.
Provide steel angle frame with anchorage lugs at the corners. Also see table 3.03 for
exact heights.
F. TYPE "F" - FLOATING CONCRETE BASE: This is similar to Type "E" (House keeping
pads) but isolated at the bottom and all the side by either pre-compressed glass fiber
pads or Heavy density seasoned cork. The thickness of isolating pads vary from 25 to
100 mm (1 to 4 inch) depending on the application.
G. TYPE "G" - STRUCTURAL STEEL STANDS: These shall be provided to support

equipment, which are not floor mounted or hung from structure. Construct with structural
steel members and attach to wall or floor as appropriate. Provide factory fabricated
saddles or mounts for equipment as required.
2.03 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A. TYPE "1" - ISOLATING PADS: This type of vibration isolators shall be generally used
where the vibrating force is transmitted directly to ground or the vibrating force is very
small compared to the absorption capacity of the structural slab at higher levels.
B. TYPE "1A" - NEOPRENE RUBBER PADS: These shall be cross-ribbed, in multiple

layers or of sandwich type to achieve the required deflection. The adhesive used in
fabricating the pads shall be as recommended by the manufacturer.
C. TYPE "1B" - GLASS FIBER PADS: These shall be of pre-compressed fiberglass

construction and suitable to take upto 34 kg/sq.cm. (500 psi) load. The pads shall be
coated with elastometric neoprene rubber spray to protect the glass fiber and increase
the damping effect.
D. TYPE "1C" - CORK PADS: The cork pads shall be constructed from natural cork
granules compressed and steam baked to form slabs and shall have a density of 96 to
106 kg/cu.M (6 to 6.6 lbs/cu.ft). The cork pads shall be treated with hot Bitumen Asphalt
coating for protection of cork.
E. TYPE "2" - MOLDED NEOPRENE RUBBER MOUNTS: These shall be used where a
greater deflection is required than that for pads. The maximum deflection allowable is 12
mm (0.5 inch) on these rubber mounts. The normal shape of mount is conical with a
captive insert for attaching to equipment base.
F. TYPE "3" - FREE STANDING SPRING ISOLATORS: These shall be constructed with
open type stable spring and load plates at top and bottom with an adjustable bolt for
levelling. Neoprene rubber acoustical treatment shall be provided to prevent
transmission of very high frequency vibration and noise. The spring shall be so designed
that the horizontal stiffness is more than 75 % of vertical stiffness. The rated loads and
deflections for these springs shall allow additional 50 % travel to that of the rated
deflection before the springs are compressed solid, to accommodate any errors in actual
load distribution.
G. TYPE "4" - RESTRAINED SPRING ISOLATORS: These are similar to type "3", but with
additional restraints in the vertical direction. These isolators shall have hold down bolts
to limit vertical movement. The restraints should have adequate clearance so that they
are activated only when a temporary restraint is needed.
H. TYPE "5" - HOUSED SPRING ISOLATORS: These isolators are similar to type "4"
except that they consist of two telescoping houses. The contact surfaces of houses are
separated by resilient inserts such as Neoprene Sponge or equivalent material.
I. TYPE "6" - RUBBER HANGERS: These are similar to type "2" except that the conical
rubber mold is housed in a steel casing and have a through hole for the hanger rod. The
assembly should allow for 20 to 35 degrees angular movement for the hanging rod
without metal to metal contact.
J. TYPE "7" - SPRING HANGERS: These are similar to type "3" except that the spring is
mounted in a steel casing and used for suspension only. The assembly shall allow for
20 to 25 degrees angular movement for the hanging rod without metal to metal contact.
K. TYPE "8" - COMBINATION RUBBER & SPRING HANGER: This is a combination of

type "6" and "7" having all the specified characteristics therein.
L. TYPE "9" - THRUST RESTRAINTS: These are similar to type "7", but installed in pairs
to counteract the thrust caused by air pressure.
M. TYPE "10" - AIR SPRINGS: These shall consist of constant dry air supplying equipment
and air bellows. These shall be used where 150 mm (6 inch) or greater deflection is
required and natural frequencies do not exceed 80 Hz.
2.04 RESILIENT PENETRATION SLEEVE
A. This shall consist of a sleeve 25 mm (1-inch) larger all round than that of the penetrating
element and fabricated out of steel pipe or sheet metal as the condition warrants. The
sleeve length shall be 25 mm (1 inch) extra on both sides of the penetrated construction.
The annular space is filled with resilient material such as Neoprene sponge or type 1B
material and ends sealed with approved sealant compatible with the resilient material.
2.05 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTIONS
A. Flexible pipe connections shall be fabricated of multiple plies of nylon cord, fabric, and
neoprene, vulcanised so as to become inseparable and homogeneous. Straight
connections shall be formed in a double sphere shape. Elbow connections shall have a
single sphere shape at the curve of the unit. Flexible connections shall be able to accept
compressive, elongative, transverse, and angular movements.
B. The flexible connections shall be selected and specially fitted, if necessary, to suit the
system temperature, pressure, and fluid type.
C. Use bellow type metal flexible connectors with braided steel wire armour when they are
located in outdoor areas where the type described above will be damaged due to sun
radiation.
D. Connectors for pipe sizes 50 mm (2 inch) nom. dia. or smaller shall have threaded
female union couplings, made up of compatible material like cast iron for steel and
bronze for copper piping, on each end. Larger sizes shall be fitted with metallic flange
couplings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION
A. GENERAL
1. Refer to PART 2 - PRODUCTS of this specification for vibration isolation devices
identified on the schedule or specified herein.
B. MAJOR EQUIPMENT
1. Unless otherwise shown or specified, all floor mounted major equipment shall be
set on concrete housekeeping pads as per recommendations of the
manufacturer. See schedule of mounting pads in this section.
2. Types and minimum static deflections of vibration isolation devices for major
equipment items shall be as scheduled on the drawings or specified here under.
3. Flexible duct connections shall be installed at all fan unit intakes, fan unit
discharges, and wherever else shown on the drawings.
4. Flexible pipe connections shall be installed at all pipe connections to vibration
isolated equipment in the positions shown on the drawings.
5. Electrical connections to vibration isolated equipment shall be flexible, as called
for in the electrical portion of the specification.
6. Snubbers or thrust restraints shall be installed on equipment as called for in the
schedule on the drawings or specified here under.
C. MISCELLANEOUS MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

1. Miscellaneous pieces of mechanical equipment such as domestic hot water
circulation pumps, hot water heat exchangers, storage tanks, and expansion
tanks shall be vibration isolated from the building structure by Type 2 or type 6
isolators unless their position in the piping system requires higher degrees of
isolation as called for under Pipe Isolation.
D. PIPING
1. Provide flexible pipe connections in piping connected to vibration isolated
equipment, as called for and shown on drawings.
2. Anchor piping at the system side of the flexible connector.
3. Inlet and outlet piping of all pumps should have flexible connections.
4. All piping within mechanical rooms should be supported with spring isolated
hangers. Piping should not rigidly contact structural elements.
5. All pipe/conduit penetrations of portions, floors/ceiling slabs must be sealed
airtight with acoustic sealant or mineral fiber and fire code compound.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT
A. General
1. Locations of all vibration isolation equipment shall be selected for ease of
inspection and adjustment as well as for proper operation.
2. Installation of vibration isolation equipment shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
B. Isolation Mounts
1. All vibration isolators shall be aligned squarely above or below mounting points of
the supported equipment.
2. Isolators for equipment with bases shall be located on the sides of the bases,
which are parallel to the equipment shaft unless this is not possible because of
physical constraints.
3. If a housekeeping pad is provided, the isolators shall bear on the housekeeping
pad and the isolator base plate shall rest entirely on the pad.
4. Hanger rods for vibration isolated support shall be connected to structural beams
or joists, not from the floor slab between beams and joists. Provide intermediate
support members as necessary.
5. Vibration isolation hanger elements shall be positioned as high as possible in the
hanger rod assembly, but not in contact with the building structure, and so that
the hanger housing may rotate a full 360 degrees about the rod axis without
contacting any object.
6. Parallel running pipes may be hung together on a trapeze, which is isolated from
the building. Isolator deflections must be the largest determined by the provisions
for pipe isolation. Do not mix isolated and non-isolated pipes on the same
trapeze.
7. No pipes or equipment shall be supported from other pipes or equipment.
8. Resiliently isolated pipes shall not contact the building construction or other
equipment.
9. The installed and operating heights of vibration isolators supporting any
equipment shall be identical. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal
operation.
10. Adjust all levelling bolts and hanger rod bolts so that the isolated equipment is
level and in proper alignment with connecting ducts or pipes.
C. Bases
1. No equipment unit shall bear directly on vibration isolators unless its own frame
is suitably rigid to span between isolators and such direct support is approved by
the equipment manufacturer. This provision shall apply whether or not a base
frame is called for on the schedule. In the case that a base frame is required for
the unit because of the equipment manufacturer's requirements and is not
specifically called for on the equipment schedule, a base frame recommended by
the equipment manufacturer shall be provided.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, there is to be a minimum operating clearance of 38-
mm (1 1/2 inch) between inertia bases or steel frame bases and the floor
beneath the equipment. Position isolator mounting brackets and adjust isolators
so that the required clearance is maintained. The clearance space shall be
checked by the Contractor to ensure that no construction debris has been left to
short circuit or restrict the proper operation of the vibration isolation system.
D. Flexible Pipe Connections

1. Select flexible connections with axial and transverse movements, more than that
of the connected equipment. Use control cables where there is a chance of
exceeding the allowable axial movement.
2. Provide bronze union ends for flexible connections of 50-mm (2-inch) nom. dia.
and less, when used with copper piping.
E. Thrust Restraints
1. Snubbers shall be adjusted to clear the equipment base and to provide lateral
restraint during on / off cycling, but be out of contact during normal operation of
the equipment.
2. Thrust restraints shall be attached at the centreline of thrust and symmetrically
on each of the units. Adjust the restraints to limit equipment movement to the
specified limit.
F. Resilient Penetration Sleeves / Seals

1. Penetration seals shall maintain an airtight seal around the penetrating element
and shall prevent rigid contact between the penetrating element and the building
structure. Fit the sleeve tightly to the building construction and seal airtight on
both sides of the construction penetrated with acoustical sealant.
3.03 SCHEDULE OF MOUNTING FOR FIRE PROTECTION EQUIPMENT
No. EQUIPMENT BASE ISOLATOR DEFLECTION mm (inch)

TYPE
1. Fire Pumps Type F 1C 12 (1/2)
2. Jockey Pumps Type F 1C 12 (1/2)
3. Control Panels Type E None
END OF SECTION
SECTION 21 1000
WATER BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes the following fire-suppression piping inside the building:
1. Wet-pipe sprinkler systems.
2. Wet standpipe system.
3. Deluge sprinkler systems.
4. First aid hose reel systems.
5. External fire hydrants.
B. Related Sections include the following:

1. List below only products and equipment that the reader might expect to find in
this Section but are specified elsewhere.
2. Division 10 Section "Fire Extinguisher Cabinets" and "Fire Extinguishers" for
cabinets and fire extinguishers.
3. Division 21 Section Foam-Water Systems and Clean-Agent Fire Extinguishing
Systems for extinguishing systems.
4. Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm" for alarm devices not specified in
this Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. High-Pressure Piping System: Fire-suppression piping system designed to operate at

working pressure higher than standard 175 psig (1200 kPa).
B. Underground Service-Entrance Piping: Underground service piping below the building.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
A. Combined Standpipe and Sprinkler System: Fire-suppression system with both

standpipe and sprinkler systems. Sprinkler system is supplied from standpipe system.
B. First aid fire hose reel system: Includes NPS 1 (DN 25) hose stations. Has open water-
supply valve with pressure maintained and is capable of supplying water demand.
C. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing

water and that is connected to water supply. Water discharges immediately from
sprinklers when they are opened. Sprinklers open when destroys frangible device.
Hose connections are included if indicated.
D. Deluge Sprinkler System: Open sprinklers are attached to piping connected to water
supply through deluge valve. Fire-detection system in same area as sprinklers opens
KEO/19-3262-0000 21 1000/1 Water Based Fire Suppression Systems
valve. Water flows into piping system and discharges from attached sprinklers when
valve opens.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Standard Piping System Component Working Pressure: Listed for at least 175 psig
(1200 kPa).
B. High-Pressure Piping System Component Working Pressure: Listed for 250 psig (1725
kPa) minimum or 300 psig (2070 kPa).
C. Seismic Performance: Fire-suppression piping shall be capable of withstanding the

effects of earthquake motions determined according to NFPA 13
1.5 SUBMITTALS

1. Piping materials, including dielectric fittings, flexible connections, sprinkler
specialty fittings.
2. Grooved joint products shall be shown on drawings and product submittals and
shall be specifically identified with the applicable manufacturer’s style or series
number.
3. Pipe hangers and supports, including seismic restraints.
4. Valves, including listed fire-protection valves, unlisted general-duty valves, and
specialty valves and trim.
5. Sprinklers, escutcheons, and guards. Include sprinkler flow characteristics,
mounting, finish, and other pertinent data.
6. Hose connections, including size, type, and finish.
7. Hose stations, including size, type, and finish of hose connections; type and
length of fire hoses; finish of fire hose couplings; type, material, and finish of
nozzles; and finish of rack.
8. Fire department connections, including type; number, size, and arrangement of
inlets; caps and chains; size and direction of outlet; escutcheon and marking; and
finish.
9. Alarm devices, including electrical data.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13,
that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic
calculations.
1. Sprinklers shall be referred to on drawings and shall be specifically identified by
the listed manufacturer’s style or series designation. Trade names and
abbreviations are not permitted.
D. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance
with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. Include
"Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping" and "Contractor's
Material and Test Certificate for Underground Piping."
E. Welding certificates.
F. Field quality-control test reports.

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For hose stations and sprinkler specialties to include
in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
H. Manufacturer's printed brochures and catalogs (one original and three copies) with
relevant information highlighted (or irrelevant information struck out), along with write up
of selection criteria.
I. General piping layout drawings to a scale not smaller than 1:50.
J. Equipment installation and piping layout double line drawings of plant rooms, water
storage tanks, etc. clearly indicating all fittings, supports, valves and control gear to a
scale of 1:20. Submit sections and elevations as required by the Construction Engineer.
K. Typical floor plans indicating shafts, riser locations etc. to a scale of 1:50.
L. Builders work layout plans to a scale of 1:100/1:50 as above, along with shaft detail
plans to 1:10.
M. Installation details of:

1. Assemblies like fire cabinets, installation control valves (ICVs), fire brigade
breaching inlets, flow measuring stations and items of similar nature to a scale of
1:10.
2. Sprinklers, air release valves and items of similar nature to a scale of 1:1.
3. Sleeves and penetrations, equipment foundations etc. to a scale of 1:5.
N. Electrical wiring diagrams (NTS) and panel installation details (1:20).
O. Calculations / details to substantiate the shop drawings.
P. Test and performance certificates of equipment, where required.
Q. Printout of hydraulic calculations of sprinkler system piping executed by an NFPA

approved computer program, along with shop drawings.
R. Submit three (3) hard bound copies of "operation and maintenance manual", with
complete data for each piece of equipment installed, as detailed below:
1. The cover shall contain:
a. The title - Fire protection system operation and maintenance manual.
b. Names:
1) The Owner.
2) The Engineer.
3) The Contractor/subcontractor.
2. The Manual shall contain:
a. Table of contents.
b. Fire protection materials submittal with the AE approval.
c. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
d. Manufacturer's internal wiring diagrams.
e. Manufacturer's assembly details.
f. Replacements parts / materials, number listing and description.
g. Preventive maintenance schedules listing frequency of service and or
replacement
h. Lubricants, commercial equivalents and schedules of use.
i. Name and address of manufacturer's sales and service agencies and
local representative / distributor including telephone and telex numbers.

j. Name and address of Contractor's maintenance department including
emergency contact telephone number.
3. Arrange the contents of the manual in sections with tags, grouping each class of
equipment as fire extinguishers; fire cabinets; ICVs; valves; fire protection
specialties; monitoring and alarm systems etc.
4. Arrange contents of each section in sequence as listed above.
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing fire-
suppression systems and providing professional engineering services needed to
assume engineering responsibility.
a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations.
B. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX.
C. Submit certificate for AE approval.
D. All grooved joint couplings, fittings, valves, and specialties shall be the products of a
single manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be of the same manufacturer as the grooved
components.
1. All castings used for coupling housings, fittings, valve bodies, etc., shall be date
stamped for quality assurance and traceability.
E. NFPA Standards: Fire-suppression-system equipment, specialties, accessories,

installation, and testing shall comply with the following:
1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."
2. NFPA 14, "Installation of Standpipe, Private Hydrant, and Hose Systems."
3. NFPA 24, "Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances."
4. NFPA 88 A – Standard for Parking Structures
5. NFPA 72 – Standard on Automatic Fire Detectors
F. Conform to the requirements of Local Civil Defense Department.
G. The works covered by this Section shall be executed by contractors, engaged in the
installation of fire protection systems as primary business for at least five (5)
immediately preceding years and having Class I registration as Fire Protection
contractors with the Local Civil Defense Department. Employ specialist subcontractors,
with local representation, for the execution of the special fire protection systems.
H. Use only those products specifically listed / approved for Fire protection services by
Underwriters Laboratories Incorporated USA, Factory Mutual Testing Laboratories USA,
and KFD.
I. Materials incorporated in the work covered by this Section shall be unused, new
products in good condition. Materials spoiled due to improper storage or mishandling
shall be rejected.
J. Materials of similar nature shall be products of the same manufacturer. Mixing up

products of different standards or those of different manufactures shall not be permitted
for the same service.

K. Materials to equivalent British (BS), German (DIN) and Japanese (JIS). Furnish copies
of the current version of the reference standards for comparison, if so required by the
Engineer / AE
L. All copper alloys used in the construction of valves, pipe fittings, fire protection
specialties etc., which comes in contact with water, shall be dezincification resistant
type.
M. Confirm to AWS code in respect of welding materials and procedures and employ
welders certified in accordance with ASME Section 9.
N. Test certificates for materials used in the work covered by this Section, from approved
independent laboratories or testing agencies, shall be furnished at no extra cost if
required by the Engineer.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair/

maintain or replace components of the system that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Faulty operation of the system, controls, or accessories.
b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
use.
2. Warranty Period for Pumps and Controls: Two years from date of KFD approval .
3. Warranty Period for the system Accessories: Two years from date of KFD
approval
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates
ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounting, steel cabinet with hinged cover,
with space for minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include
number of sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include
separate cabinet with sprinklers and wrench for each type of sprinkler on Project.
1.10 SPARE PARTS, TOOLS AND MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT

1. In addition to the spare parts, tools and maintenance equipment provided by the
Contractor pursuant to his obligations to maintain the systems specified herein
throughout the Contract Maintenance and Defect’s Liability Period, the
Contractor shall, prior to completion of the Construction Works, supply the spare
parts, tools and maintenance equipment specified herein for use after the expiry
of such Maintenance and Defect’s Liability Period, and store the same in a
location in the building designated by the Engineer. Such specified spare parts,
tools and maintenance equipment shall not be used by the Contractor during the
period of Maintenance and Defect’s Liability unless in an emergency and as
expressly authorized by the Engineer and shall be compensated as soon as
possible.
2. All spare parts, tools and maintenance equipment shall be provided in original
packing, clearly labelled and referenced. Provide complete schedules of spare
parts and maintenance equipment clearly cross referenced with the “as-built”
record drawings and with operation and maintenance instructions manuals.
3. All spare parts, tools and maintenance equipment shall be as recommended by
the equipment manufacturer and shall be subject to the final approval of the
Engineer.
4. Supply four new complete sets of tools for the proper operation, routine
maintenance and adjustment of all components and equipment.
5. Spares and maintenance equipment & Specialties shall include but not limited
to:
a. Three (3) nos of gate valves of each type and size used in the project.
b. Three (3) nos of butterfly valves of each type and size used in the project.
c. Two (2) nos of ball valves, globe valves, plug valves of each type and size
used in the project.
d. Two (2) nos of check valves, drain valves of each type and size used in the
project.
e. Grooved joint couplings for 5% of each type and size used in the project (if
used).
f. Washers, gaskets, stem seals, seat rings of 5% of each type and size of
renewable valves used.
g. Sprinklers: Supply spare sprinklers as specified elsewhere within this
Section of the Specifications.
h. Two (2) nos flow switches of each type and size used in the project.
i. Two (2) nos supervisory gate and butterfly valves of each type and size
used in the project.
j. Two (2) nos alarm check valves of each type and size used in the project.
k. Two (2) nos globe valves of each type and size used in the project.
l. Two (2) nos automatic air release valves of each type and size used in the
project.
m. Two (2) nos automatic ball drip of each type and size used in the project.
n. Two (2) nos sprinkler line testers of each type and size used in the project.
o. Two (2) nos sprinkler of each type and size used in the project.
p. Six nos of pressure gauges of each type and size used in the firefighting
systems.
6. The Contractor shall provide with the tender a separate priced list of spare parts
recommended for two years duration after the free maintenance period. This
spare parts list will be recommended by the manufacturer for fire protection
works and valid for a two year period, but whose total cost does not form part of
the tender lump sum.
7. If any defect that arises during the maintenance period is not remedied by the
Contractor within a reasonable time, the Engineer may arrange for the work to be
done at the contractor’s expense.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Subject to approved manufacturers list by PAHW.

B. The product or manufacturers listed are included for the purpose of establishing
minimum quality standards. Products of equal quality or better might be considered if
produced by a specialized manufacturer whose products are equal in every respect and
have been in similar service for not less than five years. The products must also have a
local distributor and must be backed with a professional service centre. The decision of
acceptability shall rest with the Engineer’s representative.
Defense.
2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Threaded-End, Standard-Weight Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, ASTM A 135, or

ASTM A 795, hot-dip galvanized where indicated and with factory- or field-formed
threaded ends.
1. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ASME B16.1.
2. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3.
3. Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4.
4. Steel Threaded Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M or
ASTM A 106, Schedule 40, seamless steel pipe hot-dip galvanized where
indicated. Include ends matching joining method.
5. Steel Threaded Couplings: ASTM A 865 hot-dip galvanized-steel pipe where
indicated.
B. Plain-End, Standard-Weight Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, ASTM A 135, or

ASTM A 795 hot-dip galvanized-steel pipe where indicated.
1. Locking-Lug Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron body with retainer lugs that require
one-quarter turn to secure pipe in fitting.
C. Plain-End, Standard-Weight Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, ASTM A 135, or

ASTM A 795 hot-dip galvanized-steel pipe where indicated.
1. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, and ASME B16.9 or ASME B16.11.
2. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5.
D. Grooved-End, Standard-Weight Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, ASTM A 135, or

ASTM A 795, hot-dip galvanized where indicated and with grooved ends.
1. Grooved-Joint Piping Systems:
a. Grooved-End Fittings: UL-listed, ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting with
OD matching steel-pipe OD.
b. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings: UL 213 and AWWA C606, rigid pattern,
unless otherwise indicated; gasketed fitting matching steel-pipe OD.
Include ductile-iron housing with keys matching steel-pipe and fitting
grooves, rubber gasket listed for use with housing, and steel bolts and
nuts.
1) Rigid: Coupling housings with offsetting, angle-pattern bolt pads
shall be used to provide system rigidity and support and hanging in
accordance with NFPA-13, fully installed at visual pad-to-pad offset
contact. Couplings that require gapping of bolt pads or specific
torque ratings for proper installation are not permitted. Installation-
Ready, for direct stab installation without field disassembly.
2) Flexible: Use in locations where vibration attenuation and stress
relief are required.

2.3 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Assembly shall be copper alloy, ferrous, and insulating materials with ends matching
piping system.
B. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated assembly, designed for 250-psig (1725-kPa)

minimum working pressure at 180 deg F (82 deg C). Include insulating material that
isolates dissimilar materials and ends with inside threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
C. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated companion-flange assembly, for 175-psig (1200-

kPa) minimum working-pressure rating as required for piping system.
D. Dielectric Flange Insulation Kits: Components for field assembly shall include CR or
phenolic gasket, PE or phenolic bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing
washers.
E. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized steel with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining
and threaded ends and 300-psig (2070-kPa) working-pressure rating at 225 deg F
(107 deg C).
F. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining,
with combination of plain, threaded, or grooved ends and 300-psig (2070-kPa) working-
pressure rating at 225 deg F (107 deg C).
G. Dielectric Waterway: Copper silicon casting conforming to UNS C87850 with grooved
and/or threaded ends.
2.4 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Flexible connectors shall have materials suitable for system fluid. Include 250-psig
(1725-kPa) minimum working-pressure rating and ends according to the following:
1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded.
2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged.
3. Option for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Grooved for use with grooved-end-
pipe couplings.
B. Bronze-Hose, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, bronze, inner tubing covered with

bronze wire braid. Include copper-tube ends or bronze flanged ends, braze welded to
hose.
C. Stainless-Steel-Hose/Steel Pipe, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, stainless-steel, inner

tubing covered with stainless-steel wire braid. Include steel nipples or flanges, welded
to hose.
D. Stainless-Steel-Hose/Stainless-Steel Pipe, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, stainless-

steel, inner tubing covered with stainless-steel wire braid. Include stainless-steel
nipples or flanges, welded to hose.
E. Three flexible type grooved joint couplings may be used in lieu of flexible connectors at
equipment connections in applicable piping systems. The couplings shall be placed in
close proximity to the vibration source.
2.5 SPRINKLER SPECIALTY FITTINGS

A. Sprinkler specialty fittings shall be UL listed / FM approved, with 175-psig (1200-kPa)
minimum working-pressure rating, and made of materials compatible with piping.
Sprinkler specialty fittings shall have 250-psig (1725-kPa) minimum working-pressure
rating if fittings are components of high-pressure piping system.
B. Outlet Specialty Fittings:

1. Mechanical-T and -Cross Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron housing with gaskets,
bolts and nuts, and threaded, locking-lug, or grooved outlets.
2. Snap-On and Strapless Outlet Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron housing or casting
with gasket and threaded outlet.
C. Sprinkler Drain and Alarm Test Fittings: Cast- or ductile-iron body; with threaded or
locking-lug inlet and outlet, test valve, and orifice and sight glass.
D. Sprinkler Branch-Line Test Fittings: Brass body with threaded inlet, capped drain outlet,
and threaded outlet for sprinkler.
E. Sprinkler Inspector's Test Fitting: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with threaded inlet and
drain outlet and sight glass.
F. Drop-Nipple Fittings: UL 1474, adjustable with threaded inlet and outlet, and seals.
2.6 LISTED FIRE-PROTECTION VALVES
A. Valves shall be UL listed / FM approved, with 175-psig (1200 kPa) minimum pressure
rating.
B. Gate Valves with Wall Indicator Posts:

1. Gate Valves: UL 262, cast ductile-iron body, bronze mounted, with solid disc,
non-rising stem, operating nut, and flanged or grooved ends.
2. Indicator Posts: UL 789, horizontal-wall type, cast-iron body, with operating
wrench, hand wheel extension rod, locking device, and cast-iron barrel.
C. Ball Valves: Comply with UL 1091, except with ball instead of disc.
1. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
2. NPS 2 and NPS 2-1/2 (DN 50 and DN 65): Bronze body with threaded ends or
ductile-iron body with grooved ends.
3. NPS 3 (DN 80): Ductile-iron body with grooved ends.
D. Butterfly Valves: UL 1091.

1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Bronze, cast-iron, or ductile-iron body wafer type
or with flanged or grooved ends. Seat shall be pressure responsive, and the stem
offset from the disc centerline to provide complete 360-degree circumferential
seating.
E. Check Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: UL 312, spring-assisted swing type for
vertical or horizontal installation, cast ductile-iron body with flanged or grooved ends.
F. Gate Valves: UL 262, OS&Y type.

1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Cast ductile-iron body with grooved or flanged
ends.

G. Indicating Valves: UL 1091, with weatherproof actuator housing, integral indicating
device, and ends matching connecting piping.
1. Indicator: Electrical, 125-V ac, prewired, single-circuit, supervisory switches
2. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Ball or butterfly valve with bronze body and
threaded ends.
3. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Butterfly valve with cast- or ductile-iron body;
wafer type or with flanged or grooved ends. Seat shall be pressure responsive,
and the stem offset from the disc centerline to provide complete 360-degree
circumferential seating.
2.7 SPECIALTY VALVES
A. Sprinkler System Control Valves: UL listed / FM approved, cast- or ductile-iron body

with flanged or grooved ends, and 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum pressure rating.
Control valves shall have 300-psig (2070-kPa) pressure rating if valves are components
of high-pressure piping system.
1. Alarm Check Valves: UL 193, designed for horizontal or vertical installation, with
bronze grooved seat with O-ring seals, single-hinge pin, and latch design.
Include trim sets for bypass, drain, electrical sprinkler alarm switch, pressure
gauges, retarding chamber, and fill-line attachment with strainer. Valve internal
components shall be replaceable with valve in the installed position.
a. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain without valves and separate from main
drain piping.
b. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain with check valve to main drain piping.
2. Deluge Valves: UL 260, cast ductile-iron body, hydraulically operated, low
differential-pressure type. Include bronze seat with O-ring seals, trim sets for
bypass, drain, electrical sprinkler alarm switch, pressure gauges, drip cup
assembly piped without valves and separate from main drain line, fill-line
attachment with strainer, and push-rod chamber supply connection. Valve shall
be externally resettable, and all internal components shall be replaceable with
valve in the installed position.
a. Wet, Pilot-Line Trim Set: Include gauge to read push-rod chamber
pressure, globe valve for manual operation of deluge valve, and
connection for actuation device.
b. Dry, Pilot-Line Trim Set: Include dry, pilot-line actuator; air- and water-
pressure gauges; low-air-pressure warning switch; air relief valve; and
actuation device. Dry, pilot-line actuator includes cast-iron, operated,
diaphragm-type valve with resilient facing plate, resilient diaphragm, and
replaceable bronze seat. Valve includes threaded water and air inlets and
water outlet. Loss of air pressure on dry, pilot-line side allows pilot-line
actuator to open and causes deluge valve to open immediately.
B. Pressure-Regulating Valves: UL 1468, brass or bronze, NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2-1/2
(DN 40 and DN 65) 400-psig (2760-kPa) minimum rating. Include female NPS inlet and
outlet, adjustable setting feature, and straight or 90-degree-angle pattern design as
indicated.
1. Finish: Rough Chrome-plated.
C. Automatic Drain Valves: UL 1726, NPS 3/4 (DN 20), ball-check device with threaded
ends.
2.8 MANUAL CONTROL STATIONS

A. Manual Control Stations: UL listed / FM approved, hydraulic operation, with union,
NPS 1/2 (DN 15) pipe nipple, and bronze ball valve. Include metal enclosure labeled
"MANUAL CONTROL STATION" with operating instructions and cover held closed by
breakable strut to prevent accidental opening.
2.9 CONTROL PANELS
A. Description: Single-area, two-area, or single-area cross-zoned type control panel as

indicated, including NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure, detector, alarm, and solenoid-valve
circuitry for operation of deluge valves. Panels contain power supply; battery charger;
standby batteries; field-wiring terminal strip; electrically supervised solenoid valves and
polarized fire alarm bell; lamp test facility; single-pole, double-throw auxiliary alarm
contacts; and rectifier.
1. Panels: UL listed and FM approved when used with thermal detectors and
Class A detector circuit wiring. Electrical characteristics are 120-V ac, 50 Hz,
with 24-V dc rechargeable batteries.
2. Manual Control Stations: Electric operation, metal enclosure, labeled "MANUAL
CONTROL STATION" with operating instructions and a cover held closed by
breakable strut.
3. Manual Control Stations: Hydraulic operation, with union, NPS 1/2 (DN 15) pipe
nipple, and bronze ball valve. Include metal enclosure labeled "MANUAL
CONTROL STATION" with operating instructions and cover held closed by
breakable strut.
2.10 SPRINKLERS
A. Sprinklers shall be UL listed / FM approved, with 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum

pressure rating.
A. Sprinklers shall be glass bulb type, with wrench boss integrally cast into the sprinkler
body to reduce the risk of damage during installation. (Wrenches shall be provided by
the sprinkler manufacturer that directly engage the cast wrench boss).
B. Automatic Sprinklers: With heat-responsive element complying with the following:

1. UL 199, for nonresidential applications.
2. UL 1626, for residential applications.
3. UL 1767, for early-suppression, fast-response applications.
C. Sprinkler Types and Categories: Nominal 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) orifice for "Ordinary"
temperature classification rating, unless otherwise indicated or required by application.
1. Open Sprinklers: UL 199, without heat-responsive element.
a. Orifice: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm), with discharge coefficient K between 5.3 and
5.8.
b. Orifice: 17/32 inch (13.5 mm), with discharge coefficient K between 7.4
and 8.2.
D. Sprinkler types, features, and options as follows:

1. Concealed ceiling sprinklers, including cover plate.
2. Extended-coverage sprinklers.
3. Open sprinklers.
4. Pendent sprinklers.
5. Pendent, dry-type sprinklers.
6. Quick-response sprinklers.
7. Sidewall sprinklers.
8. Upright sprinklers.
E. Sprinkler Finishes: Chrome plated.
F. Special Coatings: Wax, lead, and corrosion-resistant paint.
G. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler
mounting applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers
are specified with sprinklers.
1. Ceiling Mounting Chrome-plated steel, 2 piece, with 1-inch (25-mm) vertical
adjustment.
2. Sidewall Mounting: Chrome-plated steel one piece, flat.
H. Sprinkler Guards: Wire-cage type, including fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.
I. Escutcheons and guards shall be listed, and supplied for use with the sprinkler by the
sprinkler manufacturer.
J. The Connection to Sprinkler head from Main/Branch Fire Pipe line can be flexible hose
pipe suitable for use with pendant or sidewall sprinkler heads. These connections shall
be FM/UL and compatible to be installed in concrete wall or ceiling penetrations.
1. The hose assembly includes 28 mm diameter braided, annular corrugated
stainless steel - 304 flexible pipe with zinc-plated steel male adapter nipple for
connection to branch line piping
2. The Flexible Pipe connection shall be braided of annular corrugation construction
and to have various sizes of lengths to suit the site conditions in order to avoid
unnecessary bends.
3. The braided hose shall be UL listed; braided hose with a bend radius to 2” to
allow for proper installation in confined spaces
a. The hose shall be listed for [(4) bends at 31” length] [(5) bends at 36”
length] [(8) bends at 48” length] [(10) bends at 60” length] [(12) bends at
72” length]
4. Each Flexible Sprinkler Connection shall be with complete package assembly
comes with suspended ceiling rail support brackets with special Inlet/Outlet
fittings. Flexible drop assembly components must be supplied from a single
source to comply with UL requirements
5. The mounting open-gate bracket system locates and secures the sprinkler in the
required position within the ceiling system with special outlet fittings provide a
reasonable amount of adjustment both laterally and vertically for flush and
precise sprinkler installation. The bracket shall allow installation before the ceiling
tile is in place
6. Flexible Sprinkler connections shall be FM-approved and UL-listed for rigorous
tests for hydrostatic pressure, vibration, friction loss, corrosion and water
hammer. Every hose shall be leak-checked at the factory
7. Flexible Sprinkler connection Test Pressure shall be minimum 28 bar and the
Working Pressure shall not be less than 12 bar. The Temperature rating shall be
compatible with FM/UL sprinkler heads.
8. Union joints shall be provided for ease of installation. The bracket shall allow
installation before the ceiling tile is in place.
2.11 HOSE CONNECTIONS

A. Description: UL 668, brass or bronze, 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum pressure rating,
hose valve for connecting fire hose. Include angle or gate pattern design; female NPS
inlet and male hose outlet; and lugged cap, gasket, and chain. Include NPS 2-1/2
(DN 65) as indicated, and hose valve threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching
local fire department threads.
1. Valve Operation: Nonadjustable type, unless pressure-regulating type is
indicated.
2. Finish: Rough metal or chrome-plate
2.12 EXTERNAL FIRE HYDRANTS.
A. All fire hydrants shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with latest BS 750,
“Type 2”, and its amendments.
1. Fire hydrants shall be screw down type with captive stopper.
2. Fire hydrants shall be medium, fixed type stopper. Simple drain plug with needle
hole.
3. Fire hydrants shall be installed as shown on the drawing and as directed by the
Engineer and Fire Department.
4. Fire hydrant shall be pillar type supplied by an approved supplier of Fire
Department.
2.13 HOSE STATIONS
A. Description: UL 47, semiautomatic hose stations. Include brass rack nipple, hose rack,
and the following:
1. Valve: UL 668, brass or bronze, 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum pressure rating,
90-degree-angle-pattern hose valve with female NPS inlet and outlet, unless
otherwise indicated.
a. Valve Operation: Nonadjustable type, unless pressure-regulating type is
indicated.
2. Threads and Gaskets: NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department threads.
3. Flow-Restricting Devices: NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65), brass, adjustable for NPS 2-1/2
(DN 65) fire hose inlet.
4. Fire Hose: NFPA 1961 and UL 219, lined fire hose with couplings, gaskets, and
nozzle. Include the following fire hose materials:
a. Jacket: Natural, synthetic, or combination of natural and synthetic threads
b. Lining: Rubber, plastic, or combination of rubber and plastic compounds
c. Cover: Rubber, plastic, or combination of rubber and plastic compounds.
5. Nozzles: UL 401.
6. Drain Valves: UL 1726.
7. Mountings: Pipe clamp or wall bracket for freestanding and escutcheon for
cabinet-mounted units.
B. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) Hose Station: NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) hose valve with male threaded
outlet, cap, and chain and NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) hose valve; hose reel with water-retention
device and pins for folded, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) lined hose; and NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) lined
hose with swivel inlet coupling and nozzle.
1. Hose-Reel Finish: Red enamel
2. Hose Valve and Trim Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
3. Fire Hose: Lined, 100-foot (30-m) length.
4. Nozzle: Polished brass, adjustable from shutoff to fog spray or straight stream.

C. NPS 1 (DN 25) Hose-Reel Hose Station: NPS 1 (DN 25) hose valve; hose reel with
water-retention device and pins for NPS 1 (DN 25) lined hose; and NPS 1 (DN 25) lined
hose with swivel inlet coupling and nozzle.
1. Hose-Reel Finish: Red enamel.
2. Hose Valve and Trim Finish: Rough chrome-plated.
3. Fire Hose: Lined, (30-m) length.
4. Nozzle: Polished brass adjustable from shutoff to fog spray or straight stream.
2.14 MONITORS
A. Description: Stationary, single-waterway-type monitor. Include the following features:

1. Waterway: NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) minimum, brass or stainless-steel tube.
2. Operation: Lever handle.
3. Horizontal Rotation: 360 degrees with locking device.
4. Vertical Rotation: 80-degree elevation and 60-degree depression with locking
device.
5. Nozzle: UL 401, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65), brass, adjustable from fog spray to straight
stream to shutoff.
2.15 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Wall-Type, Fire Department Connection: UL 405, 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum

pressure rating; with corrosion-resistant-metal body with brass inlets, brass wall
escutcheon plate, brass lugged caps with gaskets and brass chains, and brass lugged
swivel connections. Include inlets with threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching
local fire department sizes and threads, outlet with pipe threads, extension pipe nipples,
check devices or clappers for inlets, and escutcheon plate with marking similar to
"AUTO SPKR"
1. Type: Flush, with four inlets and square or rectangular escutcheon plate.
2. Type: Exposed, projecting, with two inlets and round escutcheon plate.
3. Finish: Polished chrome-plated
B. Exposed, Freestanding-Type, Fire Department Connection: UL 405, 175-psig (1200-

kPa) pressure rating; with corrosion-resistant-metal body, brass inlets with threads
according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department sizes and threads, and
bottom outlet with pipe threads. Include brass lugged caps, gaskets, and brass chains;
brass lugged swivel connection and drop clapper for each hose-connection inlet; 460-
mm (18-inch) high, brass sleeve; and round, floor, brass escutcheon plate with marking
"AUTO SPKR"
1. Finish Including Sleeve: Polished chrome-plated
C. At the low point near each fire department connection, provide a 90-degree elbow with
drain connection to allow for localized system drainage.
2.16 ALARM DEVICES
A. Alarm-device types shall match piping and equipment connections.
B. Water-Motor-Operated Alarm: UL 753, mechanical-operation type with pelton-wheel

operator with shaft length, bearings, and sleeve to suit wall construction and 250-mm -
(10-inch) diameter, cast-aluminum alarm gong with red-enamel factory finish. Include
NPS 3/4 (DN 20) inlet and NPS 1 (DN 25) drain connections.
C. Electrically Operated Alarm: UL 464, with [150-mm (6-inch) minimum-] [200-mm-(8-
inch-) minimum-] [250-mm (10-inch)] diameter, vibrating-type, metal alarm bell with red-
enamel factory finish and suitable for outdoor use.
D. Water-Flow Indicator: UL 346, electrical-supervision, paddle-operated-type, water-flow

detector with 250-psig (1725-kPa) pressure rating and designed for horizontal or vertical
installation. Include two single-pole, double-throw circuit switches for isolated alarm and
auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete with factory-set, field-
adjustable retard element to prevent false signals and tamperproof cover that sends
signal if removed.
E. Pressure Switch: UL 753, electrical-supervision-type, water-flow switch with retard

feature. Include single-pole, double-throw, normally closed contacts and design that
operates on rising pressure and signals water flow.
F. Valve Supervisory Switch: UL 753, electrical, single-pole, double-throw switch with

normally closed contacts. Include design that signals controlled valve is in other than
fully open position.
2.17 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Description: UL 393, 90- to 115-mm (3-1/2- to 4-1/2-inch) diameter, dial pressure gauge
with range of 0 to 250 psig (0 to 1725 kPa) minimum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for hose connections and stations to verify actual locations of
piping connections before installation.
B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable thicknesses, fire- and smoke-rated
construction, framing for hose-station cabinets, and other conditions where hose
connections and stations are to be installed.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS, GENERAL
A. Shop welds pipe joints where welded piping is indicated.
B. Do not use welded joints for galvanized-steel pipe.
C. Flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings with finish
and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating may be used in
aboveground applications, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Piping between Fire Department Connections and Check Valves: Galvanized,

standard-weight steel pipe with threaded ends; cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings;
and threaded joints.
E. Pipes
SERVICE LOCATION TYPE
Sprinkler system piping All Galvanized carbon /steel
up to 80 mm nom. dia sch. 40, seamless.
Sprinkler system piping All Black, carbon steel Sch.
100mm nom dia. And 40, seamless.
larger
Hose Reel System piping All Galvanised wrought
upto 50mm nom.dia. steel, schedule 40
seamless
3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated,
the following requirements apply:
1. Listed Fire-Protection Valves: UL listed and FM approved for applications where
required by NFPA 13 and NFPA 14.
a. Shutoff Duty: Use ball, butterfly, or gate valves.
3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Division 21 Section "Common Work Results for Fire Suppression" for basic
piping joint construction.
B. Threaded Joints: Comply with NFPA 13 for pipe thickness and threads. Do not thread
pipe larger than NPS 3 (DN 80) with wall thickness less than Schedule 40 unless
approved by authorities having jurisdiction and threads are checked by a ring gauge and
comply with ASME B1.20.1.
C. Twist-Locked Joints: Insert plain-end piping into locking-lug fitting and rotate retainer
lug one-quarter turn.
D. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Use UL-listed tool and procedure. Include use of specific
equipment, pressure-sealing tool, and accessories.
E. Mechanically Formed, Copper-Tube-Outlet Joints: Use UL-listed tool and procedure.

Drill pilot hole in copper tube, form branch for collar, dimple tube to form seating stop,
and braze branch tube into formed-collar outlet.
F. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with listed coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts.
1. Ductile-Iron Pipe: Radius-cut-groove ends of piping. Use grooved-end fittings
and grooved-end-pipe couplings.
2. Steel Pipe: Square-cut or roll-groove piping as indicated. Use grooved-end
fittings and rigid, grooved-end-pipe couplings, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Copper Tube: Roll-groove tubing. Use grooved-end fittings and grooved-end-
tube couplings.
4. Dry-Pipe Systems: Use fittings and gaskets listed for dry-pipe service.
5. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s latest published installation
instructions.
6. Pipe ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections and roll marks in
the area from pipe end to (and including) groove.

7. Gasket shall be manufactured by the coupling manufacturer and verified as
suitable for the intended service.
8. A factory trained representative (direct employee) of the coupling manufacturer
shall provide on-site training for contractor’s field personnel in the use of grooving
tools, application of groove, and product installation. The representative shall
periodically visit the job site and review installation to ensure best practices in
grooved joint installation are being followed. Contractor shall remove and replace
any improperly installed products.
G. Dissimilar-Metal Piping Joints: Construct joints using dielectric fittings compatible with
both piping materials.
1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Use dielectric unions, couplings, or nipples.
2. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Use dielectric flanges.
3. NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Use dielectric flange insulation kits.
3.5 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 21 Section "Common Work Results for Fire Suppression" for basic
piping installation.
B. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate

general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as
practical.
C. Install underground ductile-iron service-entrance piping according to NFPA 24 and with

restrained joints. Encase piping in corrosion-protective encasement.
D. Use approved fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and
reductions in pipe sizes.
E. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Unions are
not required on flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved joints.
F. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-
1/2 (DN 65) and larger connections.
G. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff
valve, sized and located according to NFPA 13.
H. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.
I. Install sprinkler zone control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to
standpipes when sprinkler piping is connected to standpipes.
J. Install drain valves on standpipes.
K. Install ball drip valves to drain piping between fire department connections and check
valves. Drain to floor drain or outside building.
L. Install alarm devices in piping systems.
M. Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFPA 13 for hanger materials.

1. Install standpipe system piping according to NFPA 14.
2. Install sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13.

N. Earthquake Protection: Install piping according to NFPA 13 to protect from earthquake
damage.
O. Install pressure gauges on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at
top of each standpipe. Include pressure gauges with connection not less than NPS 1/4
(DN 8) and with soft metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between
gauge and valve. Install gauges to permit removal, and install where they will not be
subject to freezing.
P. Pressurize and check dry-pipe sprinkler system piping and air-pressure maintenance
devices and air compressors.
Q. Fill wet-standpipe system piping with water.
R. Fill wet-pipe sprinkler system piping with water.
S. Seismic conditions may require flexible connectors in piping.
3.6 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install listed fire-protection valves, specialty valves and trim, controls, and specialties
according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 14 and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised-open, located to control sources of

water supply except from fire department connections. Install permanent identification
signs indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.
C. Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead
of check valves in potable-water supply sources.
D. Specialty Valves:
1. Alarm Check Valves: Install in vertical position for proper direction of flow,
including bypass check valve and retarding chamber drain-line connection.
2. Deluge Valves: Install in vertical position, in proper direction of flow, in main
supply to deluge system.
3.7 SPRINKLER APPLICATIONS
A. Drawings indicate sprinkler types to be used. Where specific types are not indicated,
use the following sprinkler types:
1. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers
2. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Pendent, concealed sprinklers, as indicated.
3. Wall Mounting: Sidewall sprinklers.
4. Spaces Subject to Freezing: Upright, pendent, dry sprinklers; and sidewall, dry
sprinklers as indicated.
5. Deluge-Sprinkler Systems: Upright and pendent open sprinklers.
6. Special Applications: Extended-coverage, flow-control, and quick-response
sprinklers where indicated
a. Sprinkler Finishes:
b. Upright and Sidewall Sprinklers: Chrome plated in finished spaces
exposed to view; rough bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to view;
wax coated where exposed to acids, chemicals, or other corrosive fumes.
c. Concealed Sprinklers: Rough brass, with factory-painted cover plate
(color to match ceiling color).
d. Residential Sprinklers: Dull chrome.
3.8 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION
A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of narrow dimension of acoustical

ceiling panels and tiles.
B. Do not install pendent or sidewall, wet-type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing. Use
dry-type sprinklers.
C. Do not install sprinklers that have been dropped, damaged, or show a visible loss of
fluid. Never install sprinklers with cracked bulbs.
D. Sprinkler bulb protector shall be removed by hand after installation. Do not use tools or
any other device(s) to remove the protector that could damage the bulb in any way.
E. The Connection to sprinkler head from Main/Branch Fire Pipe line can be flexible hose
pipe suitable for use with pendant or sidewall sprinkler heads. Failure to follow
manufacturer installation instructions is not accepted to avoid compromising assembly
listing.
3.9 HOSE-CONNECTION INSTALLATION
A. Show hose-connection locations, sizes, and special devices on Drawings.
B. Install hose connections adjacent to standpipes, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install freestanding hose connections for access and minimum passage restriction.
D. Install NPS 1 (DN 25) hose-connection valves with flow-restricting device, unless
E. Install NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) hose connections with quick-disconnect NPS 2-1/2(DN 65)
and flow- restricting device, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Install wall-mounting-type hose connections in cabinets. Include pipe escutcheons, with

finish matching valves, inside cabinet where water-supply piping penetrates cabinet.
Install valves at angle required for connection of fire hose. Refer to Division 10 Section
"Fire Extinguisher Cabinets" for cabinets.
3.10 MONITOR INSTALLATION
A. Install monitor bases securely attached to building substrate.
3.11 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION INSTALLATION
A. Install wall-type, fire department connections in vertical wall.
B. Install freestanding-type, fire department connections in level surface.

1. Install protective pipe bollards on three sides of each fire department connection.
C. Install ball drip valve at each check valve for fire department connection.

3.12 CONNECTIONS
A. Coordinate piping installations and specialty arrangements with schematics on Drawings

and with requirements specified. If Drawings are explicit enough, these requirements
may be reduced or omitted.
B. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
C. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
D. Install ball drip valves at each check valve for fire department connection. Drain to floor
drain or outside building.
E. Connect piping to specialty valves, hose valves, specialties, fire department

connections, and accessories.
F. Electrical Connections: Power wiring specified in Division 26.
G. Connect alarm devices to fire alarm.
H. Ground equipment according to Division 26.
I. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power

Conductors and Cables."
J. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published

torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.13 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in
NFPA 13 and NFPA 14.
3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and
retest until no leaks exist.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
3. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
4. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems
Acceptance" Chapter.
5. Flush, test, and inspect standpipe systems according to NFPA 14, "System
Acceptance" Chapter.
6. Coordinate with fire alarm tests. Operate as required.
7. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire department equipment.
B. Report test results promptly and in writing to the Architect and Engineer.
3.15 TESTING OF PRESSURIZED PIPING

A. The pipes shall be jointed, plugged and shall have been in position for at least 24 hours,
before the tests are carried out.
B. The piping shall be tested for line, gradient and water tightness. Furnish all
C. Labor and necessary testing instruments such as gauges. as directed by the Engineer.
A minimum of 2 nos. identical pressure gauges shall be installed at extremities of the
piping circuit to be tested.
D. Fill the piping with clean fresh water, leaving all high points open to allow for purging of
air. Allow a soaking period of at least 24 hours for cement lined pipes.
E. Pressure test the system using manual pumps in increments of 25 percent of the test
pressure. Allow a standing period of 10 minutes after each pressure increment.
Pressure testing using motor driven pump is not permitted.
F. Do not over pressurise the system under any circumstance. If the test pressure is close
to the maximum permissible working pressure of any of the system components, install
calibrated pressure relief valves in the tested circuit.
G. Prior to testing keep all valves and control devices in open position. After completion of
pressure test, close each valve one at a time starting from the pressure release end, so
as to ensure tightness of the valve.
H. The piping shall be hydrostatically tested to a pressure of 200psi (1380 Kpa) or 50psi
(350 Kpa) above the system working pressure, whichever is greater. The pressure shall
be maintained for at least 2 hours. Allow for pressure fluctuations due to ambient
temperature variations. Record the circuit temperature along with the pressure readings.
I. Check for leaks by swabbing with a dry tissue. Drop in pressure to the order of 10 Kpa
per hour, but without any visible leaks, shall be considered as acceptable.
1. Do not subject sprinklers to the test pressure.
2. Test the piping in segments during the progress of the work. Maintain an official
log book for recording the tests carried out on sections of piping, including test
pressure, date of test and approval signature of Engineer's representative
witnessing the test.
3.16 SYSTEM FLUSHING AND CHARGING
A. Drain the complete piping after completion of all tests and flush with fresh water
intended for fire protection services. Do not leave any segment of the piping partially
filled with water at any time, to prevent the occurrence of internal corrosion.
B. Leave all air release outlets open to purge the air in the system and fill the system
gradually using the manual pump.
3.17 PROTECTION
A. Give the following protective coatings / wrappings to piping, on completion of the works.
All piping above louvered ceilings shall be painted red as further described in
architectural finish schedule.
B. Exposed, black steel piping:

1. Two coats of red oxide primer.
2. Two coats of fire red enamel paint.
C. Concealed (in shafts/false ceiling) black steel piping:

1. Two coats of red oxide primer.
2. Two coats of coal tar enamel.
D. Exposed galvanised iron piping:

1. Two coats of zinc chromate primer.
2. Two coats of fire red enamel paint.
E. Concealed (in shafts/false ceiling) galvanised iron piping:

1. Two coats of zinc chromate primer.
2. Two coats of coal tar enamel.
F. Black steel piping - buried:

1. Two (2) coats of red oxide primer.
2. One (1) layer of asphalt impregnated felt wrap with 25 mm overlaps.
3.18 SYSTEM TEST
A. Check and repair leakages, if any.
3.19 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.
B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.
C. Protect sprinklers from damage until Substantial Completion.
3.20 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain specialty valves.
B. KFD / CD Compliance: Comply to latest KFD / CD regulations and requirements, and obtain
approval from them
END OF SECTION

SECTION 21 1339
FOAM WATER SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

A. This Section includes fixed, low-expansion, Fire-extinguishing systems and the

following:
1. Adjust list below to suit Project.
2. Concentrate piping and piping specialties.
3. Proportioning tanks and proportioning devices.
4. Foam concentrate.
5. Discharge devices.
6. Monitoring and alarm devices.

1. Division 21 Section "Water-Based Fire-Suppression Systems" for water supply
and foam-water piping materials and specialties and controls.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. AFFF: Aqueous film-forming foam.
B. AR-AFFF: Alcohol-resistant aqueous film-forming foam.
C. ATS: Acceptance Testing Specifications.
A. Description: Engineered, fixed, deluge, automatically actuated, low-expansion, or AR-

AFFF fire-extinguishing system for flammable-liquid fires. System includes diaphragm
proportioning tanks and devices as described in NFPA 16.
KEO/19-3262-0000 21 1339/1 Foam Water Systems

A. Standard Piping System Component Working Pressure: Listed for at least 175 psig
(1200 kPa).
B. Minimum design parameters to be used in accordance with the authorities having

jurisdiction are as follows:
1. Solution: 3 percent foam-water solution.
2. Sprinkler Spacing: Maximum of 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) per sprinkler, and
maximum 12-foot (3.7-m) spacing.
3. Design Density: Minimum 0.16 gpm /sq. ft. (0.108 L/s per sq. m).
4. Foam Supply: Minimum 10 minute discharge time.
5. Water Supply: Minimum 60 minutes.
6. Remote Area: Open-sprinkler systems shall discharge over the entire system
area.
1.05 SUBMITTALS

1. Piping and equipment seismic restraints.
2. Valves.
5. Discharge devices. Include flow characteristics.
6. Monitoring and alarm devices. Include electrical data.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field
assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
3. Design Calculations: For amount of foam concentrate required for each hazard
area.
4. Plans: Show the following:
a. Foam-solution proportioning tanks and devices, piping, discharge devices,
monitoring and alarm devices, and accessories.
b. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
c. Fire alarm panel.
d. Equipment and furnishings.
C. Permit-Approved Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 16, that have
been approved by authorities having jurisdiction. Include design calculations.
D. Welding certificates.
E. Field quality-control test reports.
F. Details for full hydraulic calculations as per site condition.
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For foam fire extinguishing to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01
Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1. Valves and specialties.
4. Discharge devices. Include flow characteristics.
5. Monitoring and alarm devices.
A. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
C. FMG Compliance: Provide components that are FMG approved and that are listed in
FMG's "Fire Protection Approval Guide."
D. UL Compliance: Provide equipment listed in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory."
1.07 WARRANTY

maintain or replace components of Foam system that fail in materials or workmanship
use.
2. Warranty Period for the System and Controls: Two years from date of KFD
approval.
3. Warranty Period for the System Accessories: Two years from date of KFD
approval.
1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS
contents.
1. Discharge Devices: Not less than 20 percent of amount of each type installed.
2. Foam Concentrate: Not less than 20 percent of amount installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Defense.
2.02 PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, ASTM A 135, ASTM A 106, or ASTM A 795, Type E or
S, Grade A or B, Schedule 40, with factory- or field-formed threaded ends.
1. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ASME B16.1.
2. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3.
3. Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4.
4. Butt-Weld Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, Grade WPB, Schedule 40, carbon-
steel butt-weld fittings.
5. Steel Threaded Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M or
ASTM A 106, Schedule 40, seamless steel pipe. Include ends matching joining
method.
6. Steel Threaded Couplings: ASTM A 865.
B. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 312/A 312M, Schedule 40, with factory-formed threaded or
beveled ends; ASTM A 376/A 376M for seamless pipe; or ASTM A 213/A 213M,
ASTM A 249/A 249M, and ASTM A 269 for seamless and welded tubing.
1. Class 150 Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3 and MSS SP 114.
2. Butt-Weld Fittings: ASTM A 403/A 403M.
3. Flanges, Forged Fittings and Flanges, and Socket-Weld Fittings:
ASTM A 182/A 182M.
4. Bar Stock and Compression Fittings: ASTM A 276 and ASTM A 479/A 479M.
C. Red Brass Pipe: ASTM B 43, Schedule 40, with factory- or field-formed threaded ends.
1. Threaded Flanges and Fittings: ASTM B 584.
D. Refer to Division 21 Section "Common Work Results for Fire Suppression" for basic
joining materials.
2.03 VALVES
A. Ball Valves: Bronze body with threaded or flanged ends. Comply with UL 1091, except
with stainless-steel ball instead of disc.
2.04 SPECIALTIES
A. Show tank capacity on Drawings.
B. Concentrate Storage Tank: Buna-N, bladder-type proportioning tank complying with

UL 162 and ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII. Include bladder,
internal piping, fill and drain, pipe assembly, glass sight gage, piping, and valves.
Concentrate to be contained in the bladder.
1. Orientation: Horizontal design with saddle or Vertical design supports on legs.
C. Proportioning Controller: Venturi type complying with UL 162 and of capacity to match
design at minimum and maximum flow.
D. Concentrate Control Valve: Water-operated ball or deluge valve designed to open with
flow through the proportioning controller.

E. Concentrate Strainers: Bronze body and stainless-steel mesh strainer with minimum
0.125-inch (3.2-mm) perforations to remove solids that would block system components.
F. Provide devices that comply with NFPA 16, are compatible with the foam concentrate,
and are designed to be drained and cleaned.
2.05 FOAM CONCENTRATE
A. Description: AFFF liquid concentrate, complying with NFPA 11 and UL 162, for making
foam-water fire-extinguishing foam solution.
2.06 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Description: Comply with UL 393, with 3-1/2-inch- (90-mm-) minimum diameter dial, 0-
to 300-psig (0- to 2070-kPa) dial range, and caption "WATER" or "CONCENTRATE" on
dial face.
2.07 DISCHARGE DEVICES
A. General: Discharge devices shall be listed and approved by UL and FMG.
B. Retain closed, non-air-aspirating sprinklers for wet-pipe, dry-pipe, and preaction

systems. Retain open, non-air-aspirating or air-aspirating sprinklers for deluge systems.
C. Sprinklers: Open, air-aspirating or non-air-aspirating type complying with UL 162 and

suitable for discharging foam.
D. Spray Nozzles: Foam-water spray nozzles including foam generator and distributing
deflector complying with UL 162 and designed to distribute foam or water in the absence
of foam solution in a special pattern peculiar to a particular head.
2.08 MONITORING DEVICES
A. Valve Supervisory Switches: UL 753, electrical, single pole, double throw, with normally
closed contacts. Include design that signals controlled valve is in other than fully open
position.
2.09 ALARM DEVICES
A. Description: UL listed or FMG approved, low voltage, and surface mounting. Alarm and
monitoring devices are specified in Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CONCENTRATE STORAGE TANK INSTALLATION
A. Install proportioning tanks on concrete bases. Concrete bases are specified in

Division 21 Section "Common Work Results for Fire Suppression."

B. Install tanks level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and
referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange
units so controls and devices needing service are accessible.
3.02 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Flanged pipe and fittings and flanged joints may be used to connect to specialties and
accessories and where required for maintenance.
B. AFFF-Concentrate Piping: Steel pipe, malleable iron threaded fittings, and threaded
joints.
C. AFFF-Concentrate Piping: Steel pipe with welded fittings and joints.
D. AR-AFFF-Concentrate Piping: Brass or Stainless-steel pipe, threaded fittings, and

joints.
E. AR-AFFF-Concentrate Piping: Stainless-steel pipe with welded fittings and joints.
A. Install piping and other components level and plumb.
B. Refer to Division 21 Section "Common Work Results for Fire Suppression " for basic
pipe installation and joint construction.
C. Install proportioning tanks anchored to substrate.
D. Install pipe and fittings, valves, and discharge devices according to requirements listed
in NFPA 16, "Installation of Deluge Foam-Water Sprinkler and Foam-Water Spray
Systems."
1. Support piping using supports and methods according to NFPA 13.
2. Install seismic restraints for proportioning tanks and piping systems.
3. Install monitoring and alarm devices according to NFPA 16 and NFPA 72.
3.04 CONNECTIONS
A. Coordinate piping installations and specialty arrangements with schematics on Drawings

and with requirements specified in Division 21 Section "Water-Based Fire Suppression
Systems."
B. Piping installation requirements are specified in Division 21 Section "Water-Based Fire

Suppression Systems." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and
specialties.
C. Provide concentrate control, maintenance service, and drain valves with piping to permit
maintenance of the foam concentrate with continuous sprinkler system service.
D. Install proportioning controller in fire-suppression piping to provide coverage to area

indicated on Drawings.
E. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

F. Connect electrical devices to building's fire alarm system. Electrical power, wiring, and
devices are specified in Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm."
3.05 LABELING
A. Install labeling on piping, equipment, and panels according to Division 22 Section

"Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
3.06 CHARGING SYSTEM
A. Fill proportioning tanks with foam concentrate after field quality-control testing is
complete and satisfactory results have been achieved.
A. Inspection: Engage the services of a qualified professional engineer to inspect installed

fire-extinguishing systems, prepare installation report, and certify that installation
complies with the Contract Documents, calculations, and requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction.
B. Comply with operating instructions and procedures in NFPA 16, "Acceptance Tests"
Chapter. Include the following tests and inspections to demonstrate compliance with
requirements:
1. Check mechanical items.
2. Inspect equipment and fire-extinguishing foam concentrate, and check mountings
for adequate anchoring to substrate.
3. Check electrical systems.
4. Flush piping.
5. Perform acceptance test.
6. Perform pressure test.
7. Perform operating test.
8. Perform discharge test.
9. Correct malfunctioning equipment, then retest to demonstrate compliance.
Replace equipment that cannot be satisfactorily corrected or does not perform as
specified and indicated, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Repeat
procedure until satisfactory results are obtained.
C. Report test results promptly and in writing to the Architect and Engineer.
D. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. After installing foam fire-extinguishing piping system and after electrical circuitry
has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.
2. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in
NETA ATS, "Inspection and Test Procedures" and "System Function Tests."
Certify compliance with test parameters.
4. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start systems to
confirm proper unit operation.
E. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 21 2200
CLEAN AGENT FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL

A. This Section includes clean-agent extinguishing systems and the following:

1. Piping and piping specialties.
2. Extinguishing-agent containers.
3. Extinguishing agent.
4. Detection and alarm devices.
5. Control and alarm panels.
6. Accessories.
7. Connection devices for and wiring between system components.
8. Connection devices for power and integration into building's fire alarm system.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. ATS: Acceptance Testing Specifications.
B. EPO: Emergency Power Off.
A. Clean-agent fire-extinguishing system shall be an engineered system for total flooding of

the hazard area including the room cavity below the ceiling and below the raised floor.
Provide separate zones above and below the raised floor. If smoke is detected below
the raised floor, agent shall be discharged in the under-floor zone only. If smoke is
detected above the raised floor, agent shall be discharged in zones above and below
the floor.
A. Design clean-agent extinguishing system in accordance with authorities having

jurisdiction. Design system for Class A, B, or C fires as appropriate for areas being
KEO/19-3262-0000 21 2200/1 Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing System

protected and include safety factor. Use clean agent indicated and in concentration
suitable for normally occupied areas.
B. Performance Requirements: Discharge HFC 227ea within 10 seconds and maintains

7.0 percent concentration by volume at 21 deg C for 10-minute holding time in hazard
areas.
1. HFC 227ea concentration in hazard areas greater than 9.0 percent immediately
after discharge or less than 5.8 percent throughout holding time will not be
accepted.
2. System Capabilities: Minimum 4278 kPa calculated working pressure and 2484
kPa initial charging pressure.
C. Performance Requirements: Discharge IG-541 within 120 seconds and maintains 38.5
percent concentration by volume at 21 deg C for 10 minute holding time in hazard
areas.
1. IG-541 concentration in hazard areas greater than 40 percent immediately after
discharge or less than 32 percent throughout holding time will not be accepted.
2. System Capabilities: Minimum 15-MPa calculated working pressure upstream
from orifice union, minimum 6895 kPa calculated working pressure downstream
from orifice union, and 15 MPa initial charging pressure.
D. Cross-Zoned Detection: Devices located in two separate zones. Sound alarm on

activating single-detection device, and discharge extinguishing agent on actuating
single-detection device in other zone.
E. Verified Detection: Devices located in single zone. Sound alarm on activating single-
detection device, and discharge extinguishing agent on actuating second-detection
device.
F. System Operating Sequence: As follows:

1. Actuating First Detector: Visual indication on annunciator panel, energize
audible alarm and visual alarms (slow pulse), shut down air-conditioning and
ventilating systems serving protected area, close doors in protected area, and
send signal to fire alarm system.
2. Actuating Second Detector: Visual indication on annunciator panel, energize
audible and visual alarms (fast pulse), shut down power to protected equipment,
start time delay for extinguishing-agent discharge for 30 seconds, and discharge
extinguishing agent. On agent discharge, release pre-action valve to allow water
to fill sprinkler system.
3. Extinguishing-agent discharge will operate audible alarms and strobe lights
inside and outside the protected area.
4. All coordination and interfacing shall be done by the general contractor.
G. System Operating Sequence: System shall be cross-zoned, air-sampling detectors and

photoelectric detectors reporting to a fully programmable microprocessor-based control
panel programmed to operate as follows:
1. If one photoelectric detector and air-sampling detector reaches the third detection
level (Fire 1), agent discharge will be initiated as described for the third detection
level (Fire 1) below.
2. Air-Sampling System:
a. First Detection Level (Alert): Mild audible and visual indication on
annunciator panel. Strobe lights flash slowly in the protected area.
b. Second Detection Level (Action): Strong audible and visual indication on
annunciator panel. Strobe lights flash rapidly in the protected area.

c. Third Detection Level (Fire 1): Strong audible and visual indication on
annunciator panel. Energize horn(s), bell(s), and strobe light(s) in the
protected area and outside entry doors. Shut down air-conditioning and
ventilating systems serving the protected area, and close doors in the
protected area. Send signal to fire alarm system, initiate 30 second time
delay for extinguishing-agent discharge, and discharge extinguishing
agent. At agent discharge, terminate power to equipment in the protected
area, and release preaction valve to allow water flow to sprinkler system.
d. Fourth Detection Level (Fire 2): Same as Fire 1.
3. All coordination and interfacing shall be done by the general contractor.
H. Manual stations shall immediately discharge extinguishing agent when activated.
I. Operating abort switches will delay extinguishing-agent discharge while being activated,
and switches must be reset to prevent agent discharge. Release of hand pressure on
the switch will cause agent discharge if the time delay has expired.
J. EPO: Will terminate power to protected equipment immediately on actuation.
K. Low-Agent Pressure Switch: Initiate trouble alarm if sensing less than set pressure.
L. Power Transfer Switch: Transfer from normal to stand-by power source.
1.05 SUBMITTALS

1. Extinguishing-agent containers.
2. Extinguishing agent.
3. Discharge nozzles.
4. Control panels.
5. Detection devices.
6. Manual stations.
7. Switches.
8. Alarm devices.
9. Pipe hangers and supports, including seismic restraints.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Include

design calculations. Include the following for hazard-area enclosure, drawn to scale:
1. Plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Indicate
dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly,
components, and location and size of each field connection.
3. Design Calculations: For weight, volume, and concentration of extinguishing
agent required for each hazard area.
4. Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show ceiling penetrations, ceiling-mounted items, and
the following:
a. Extinguishing-agent containers, piping, discharge nozzles, detectors, and
accessories.
b. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
c. Other ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles,
speakers, sprinklers, and access panels.
5. Occupied Work Area Plans: Show the following:
a. Controls and alarms.

b. Extinguishing-agent containers, piping and discharge nozzles if mounted
in space, detectors, and accessories.
c. Equipment and furnishings.
6. Access Floor Space Plans: Show the following:
a. Extinguishing-agent containers, piping, discharge nozzles, detectors, and
accessories.
b. Method of supporting piping.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
D. Maintenance Data: For components to include in maintenance manuals.
E. Details for full hydraulic calculations as per site condition.
A. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to

practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those
performed for installations of clean-agent extinguishing systems that are similar to those
indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of

clean-agent extinguishing systems and are based on the specific system indicated.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

1.07 WARRANTY

maintain or replace components of clean agent system that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
use.
2. Warranty Period for the System and Controls: Two years from date of KFD
approval.
3. Warranty Period for the System Accessories: Two years from date of KFD
approval.
contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner.
1. Detection Devices: Not less than 20 percent of amount of each type installed.
2. Container Valves: Not less than 10 percent of amount of each size and type
installed.
3. Nozzles: Not less than 20 percent of amount of each type installed.

4. Extinguishing Agent: Not less than 100 percent of amount installed in largest
hazard area. Include pressure-rated containers with valves.
5. Contractor shall submit information about local supplier and service provider for
future recharge of extinguishers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Defense.
2.02 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 piping applications Article retained for applications of pipe, tube, fitting,
and joining materials.
B. Piping, Valves, and Discharge Nozzles: Comply with types and standards listed in
NFPA 2001, Section "Distribution," for charging pressure of system.
2.03 PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type S, Grade B or ASTM A 106, Grade B;
Schedule 40, seamless steel pipe.
1. Threaded Fittings:
a. Malleable-Iron Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 300.
b. Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 300, unless Class 600
is indicated.
2. Forged-Steel Welding Fittings: ASME B16.11, Class 3000, socket pattern.
3. Grooved-End Fittings: FMG approved and NRTL listed, ASTM A 47/A 47M
malleable iron or ASTM A 536 ductile iron, with dimensions matching steel pipe
and ends factory grooved according to AWWA C606.
system contents.
1. ASME B16.21, non-metallic, flat, asbestos-free, 3.2 mm maximum thickness,
unless thickness or specific material is indicated.
C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel.
D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-
duty brazing.
E. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for
2.04 VALVES
A. General: Brass, suitable for intended operation.
B. Container Valves: With rupture disc or solenoid and manual-release lever, capable of
immediate and total agent discharge and suitable for intended flow capacity.
C. Valves in Sections of Closed Piping and Manifolds: Fabricate to prevent entrapment of

liquid, or install valve and separate pressure relief device.
D. Valves in Manifolds: Check valve; installed to prevent loss of extinguishing agent when
container is removed from manifold.
2.05 EXTINGUISHING-AGENT CONTAINERS
A. Description: Steel tanks complying with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
Section VIII, for unfired pressure vessels. Include minimum working-pressure rating that
matches system charging pressure, valve, pressure switch, and pressure gage.
1. Finish: Manufacturer's standard color, enamel or epoxy paint.
2. Manifold: Fabricate with valves, pressure switches, and connections for multiple
storage containers, as indicated.
3. Manifold: Fabricate with valves, pressure switches, selector switch, and
connections for main- and reserve-supply banks of multiple storage containers.
4. Storage-Tank Brackets: Factory- or field-fabricated retaining brackets consisting
of steel straps and channels; suitable for container support, maintenance, and
tank refilling or replacement.
2.06 FIRE-EXTINGUISHING CLEAN AGENT– FM 200
A. Clean Agent: HFC 227ea, heptafluoropropane.
2.07 DISCHARGE NOZZLES
A. Equipment manufacturer's standard one-piece brass or aluminum alloy of type,

discharge pattern, and capacity required for application.
2.08 MANIFOLD AND ORIFICE UNIONS
A. Description: NRTL-listed device with minimum 15 MPa pressure rating, to control flow
and reduce pressure of IG-541 gas in piping.
1. DN 50 and Smaller: Piping assembly with orifice sized for system design
requirements.
2. DN 65 and Larger: Piping assembly with nipple sized for system design
requirements.
2.09 CONTROL PANELS

A. Description: FMG approved or NRTL listed, including equipment and features required
for testing, supervising, and operating fire-extinguishing system.
B. Power Requirements: 240-V ac; with electrical contacts for connection to system
components and fire alarm system, and transformer or rectifier as needed to produce
power at voltage required for accessories and alarm devices.
C. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type 1, enameled-steel cabinet.

1. Mounting: Recessed flush with surface/Surface.
D. Supervised Circuits: Separate circuits for each independent hazard area.

1. Detection circuits equal to the required number of zones, or addressable devices
assigned to the required number of zones.
2. Manual pull-station circuit.
3. Alarm circuit.
4. Release circuit.
5. Abort circuit.
6. EPO circuit.
E. Provide the following control-panel features:

1. Electrical contacts for shutting down fans, activating dampers, and operating
system electrical devices.
2. Automatic switchover to standby power at loss of primary power.
3. Storage container, low-pressure indicator.
4. Service disconnect to interrupt system operation for maintenance with visual
status indication on the annunciator panel.
F. Annunciator Panel: Graphic type showing protected hazard-area plans and locations of
detectors, abort, EPO, and manual stations. Include lamps to indicate device-initiating
alarm, electrical contacts for connection to control panel, and stainless-steel or
aluminum enclosure.
G. Standby Power: Lead-acid or nickel-cadmium batteries with capacity to operate system

for 72 hours and alarm for minimum of 15 minutes. Include automatic battery charger,
with varying charging rate between trickle and high depending on battery voltage that is
capable of maintaining batteries fully charged. Include manual voltage control, dc
voltmeter, dc ammeter, electrical contacts for connection to control panel, and suitable
enclosure.
1.10 DETECTION DEVICES
A. Description: Comply with NFPA 2001 and NFPA 72, and include the following types:
1. Ionization Detectors: Comply with UL 268, dual-chamber type, having sampling
and referencing chambers, with smoke-sensing element.
2. Photoelectric Detectors: Comply with UL 268, consisting of LED light source and
silicon photodiode receiving element.
3. Remote Air-Sampling Detector System: Includes air-sampling pipe network, a
laser-based photoelectric detector, a sample transport fan, and a control unit.
4. Comply with UL 268 and NRTL listed, operating at 24-V dc, nominal.
5. Pipe Network: CPVC tubing connects control unit with calibrated sampling holes.
6. Smoke Detector: Particle-counting type with continuous laser beam. Sensitivity
adjustable to a minimum of four preset values.
7. Sample Transport Fan: Centrifugal type, creating a minimum static pressure of
12.5 Pa at all sampling ports.
8. Control Unit: Multi-zone unit as indicated on Drawings. Provides same system
power supply, supervision, and alarm features as specified for the control panel
plus separate trouble indication for airflow and detector problems.
9. Signals to the Central Fire Alarm Control Panel: Any type of local system trouble
is reported to the central fire alarm control panel as a composite "trouble" signal.
Alarms on each system zone are individually reported to the central fire alarm
control panel as separately identified zones.
1.11 MANUAL STATIONS
A. General Description: Surface/Semi-recessed FMG approved or NRTL listed, with clear

plastic hinged cover, 240-V ac or low voltage compatible with controls. Include contacts
for connection to control panel.
B. Manual Release: "MANUAL RELEASE" caption, and red finish. Unit can manually
discharge extinguishing agent with operating device that remains engaged until
unlocked.
C. Abort Switch: "ABORT" caption, momentary contact, with green finish.
D. EPO Switch: "EPO" caption, with yellow finish.
1.12 SWITCHES
A. Description: FMG approved or NRTL listed, where available, 240-V ac or low voltage
compatible with controls. Include contacts for connection to control panel.
1. Low-Agent Pressure Switches: Pneumatic operation.
2. Power Transfer Switches: Key-operation selector, for transfer of release circuit
signal from main supply to reserve supply.
3. Door Closers: Magnetic retaining and release device or electrical interlock to
cause the door operator to drive the door closed.
1.13 ALARM DEVICES
A. Description: FMG approved or NRTL listed, low voltage, and surface mounting, unless
B. Bells: Minimum 150 mm diameter.
C. Horns: 90 to 94 dBA.
D. Strobe Lights: Translucent lens, with "FIRE" or similar caption.
1.14 ELECTRICAL POWER AND WIRING
A. Electrical power, wiring, and devices are specified in Division 26.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with hazard-area
leakage requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting work
performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
A. Flanged pipe and fittings and flanged joints may be used to connect to specialties and
accessories and where required for maintenance.
B. Fittings Working Pressure: 4278 kPa minimum.
C. Flanged Joints: Class 300 minimum.
D. DN 50 and Smaller: Schedule 40, steel pipe; malleable-iron threaded fittings; and
threaded joints.
E. DN 65 and DN 80: Schedule 40, steel pipe; steel, grooved-end fittings; steel, keyed
couplings; and grooved joints.
F. DN 100 and Larger: Schedule 40, steel pipe; steel, grooved-end fittings; steel, keyed
couplings; and grooved joints.
G. Piping between Storage Containers and Orifice Union:

1. Flanged pipe and fittings and flanged joints may be used to connect to
specialties and accessories and where required for maintenance.
2. Fittings Working Pressure: 15 MPa minimum.
3. Flanged Joints: Class 600 minimum.
4. All Sizes: Schedule 80, steel pipe; forged-steel welding fittings; and welded
joints.
H. Piping Downstream from Orifice Union:

1. Flanged pipe and fittings and flanged joints may be used to connect to
specialties and accessories and where required for maintenance.
2. Fittings Working Pressure: 6900 kPa minimum.
3. Flanged Joints: Class 300 minimum.
4. All Sizes: Schedule 40 steel pipe; forged-steel welding fittings; and welded
joints.
3.03 CLEAN-AGENT EXTINGUISHING PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install clean-agent extinguishing piping and other components level and plumb and
according to manufacturers' written instructions.
B. Refer to Division 21 Section "Common Work Results For Fire Suppression" for basic
pipe installation and joint construction.
C. Grooved Piping Joints: Groove pipe ends according to AWWA C606 dimensions.
Assemble grooved-end steel pipe and steel, grooved-end fittings with steel, keyed
couplings and lubricant according to manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Install extinguishing-agent containers anchored to substrate.

E. Install pipe and fittings, valves, and discharge nozzles according to requirements listed
in NFPA 2001, Section "Distribution," and in ASME B31.1.
1. Install valves designed to prevent entrapment of liquid or install pressure relief
devices in valved sections of piping systems.
2. Support piping using supports and methods according to NFPA 13 and
Division 22 Section "Hangers And Supports For Plumbing Piping And
Equipment/Hangers And Supports For Hvac Piping And Equipment."
3. Install seismic restraints for extinguishing-agent containers and piping systems.
4. Install control panels, detection system components, alarms, and accessories,
complying with requirements of NFPA 2001, Section "Detection, Actuation, and
Control Systems," as required for supervised system application.
3.04 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to extinguishing-agent containers to allow service and

maintenance.
C. Connect electrical devices to control panel and to building's fire alarm system. Electrical
power, wiring, and devices are specified in Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and
Alarm."
3.05 LABELING
A. Install labeling on piping, extinguishing-agent containers, other equipment, and panels

according to NFPA 2001.
B. Install signs at entry doors for protected areas to warn occupants that they are entering
a room protected with a clean-agent fire extinguishing system.
C. Install signs at entry doors to advise persons outside the room the meaning of the
horn(s), bell(s), and strobe light(s) outside the protected space.
A. Comply with operating instructions and procedures of NFPA 2001, Section "Approval of
Installations." Include the following tests and inspections to demonstrate compliance
with requirements:
1. Check mechanical items.
2. Inspect extinguishing-agent containers and extinguishing agent, and check
mountings for adequate anchoring to substrate.
3. Check electrical systems.
4. Check enclosure integrity. Comply with NFPA 2001, Section "Enclosure
Inspection," and Appendix C, "Enclosure Integrity Procedure."
5. Perform functional pre-discharge test.
6. Perform system functional operational test including, EPO, abort, and manual
release.
7. Check remote monitoring operations.
8. Check control-panel primary power source.
9. Perform "puff" test on piping system, using nitrogen.

B. Perform field-acceptance tests of each clean-agent extinguishing system when
installation is complete. Perform system testing only after hazard-area enclosure
construction has been completed and openings sealed. Comply with operating
instructions and procedures of NFPA 2001, Section "Approval of Installations." Include
the following to demonstrate compliance with requirements:
1. Perform functional pre discharge test.
2. Perform system functional operational test.
3. Check remote monitoring operations.
4. Check control-panel primary power source.
5. Perform "puff" test on piping system, using nitrogen.
C. Correct malfunctioning equipment, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace

equipment that cannot be corrected or does not perform as specified and indicated, then
retest to demonstrate compliance. Repeat procedure until satisfactory results are
obtained.
1. Report test results promptly and in writing to the Architect and Engineer.
1. After installing clean-agent extinguishing piping system and after electrical
circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.
2. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in
NETA ATS, Sections "Inspection and Test Procedures" and "System Function
Tests." Certify compliance with test parameters.
4. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to
confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units,
replace with new units, and retest.
6. The contractor shall be responsible for sealing and securing the protected
spaces against loss and or leakage during the 10 minutes “Hold Period”.
3.07 CLEANING
A. Each pipe section shall be cleaned internally after preparation and before assembly by
means of swabbing, using a suitable nonflammable cleaner. Pipe network shall be free
of particulate matter and oil residue before installing nozzles or discharge devices.
3.08 SYSTEM FILLING
A. Preparation:
1. Verify that piping system installation is completed and cleaned.
2. Check for complete enclosure integrity.
3. Check operation of ventilation and exhaust systems.
B. Filling Procedures:
1. Fill extinguishing-agent containers with extinguishing agent and pressurize to the
indicated charging pressure.
2. Install filled extinguishing-agent containers.
3. Energize circuits.
4. Adjust operating controls.
3.09 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain clean-agent

extinguishing systems. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION

SECTION 21 3000
FIRE PUMPS AND CONTROLLER
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes electric and diesel driven, split-case, vertical turbine, end section
and jockey pumps centrifugal fire pumps and the following:
1. Fire-pump controllers and automatic transfer switches.
2. Fire-pump accessories and specialties.
3. Pressure-maintenance pumps, controllers, accessories, and specialties.
4. Alarm panels.
5. Flow meter systems.
A. Pump Equipment, Accessory, Specialty, and Piping Pressure Rating: 175 psi (1200 -
kPa) maximum working-pressure rating, unless otherwise indicated.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated include rated capacities, certified
pump performance curves with each selection point indicated, operating characteristics,
and furnished accessories and specialties for each fire pump and pressure-maintenance
pump.
B. Shop Drawings: For fire pumps and drivers, fire-pump controllers, fire-pump
accessories and specialties, pressure-maintenance pumps, pressure-maintenance-
pump controllers, and pressure-maintenance-pump accessories and specialties.
Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural
analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that fire pumps

and drivers and fire-pump controllers, pressure-maintenance pumps, accessories, and
specialties will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 21 Section "Vibration and
Seismic Controls for Fire-Suppression Piping and Equipment." Include the following:
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual
test of assembled components or on calculation.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without
separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic
forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic
event."
KEO/19-3262-0000 21 3000/1 Fire Pumps and Controllers
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
D. Product Certificates: For each type of fire pump and fire-pump controller, signed by
product manufacturer.
E. Source quality-control test reports.
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire pumps and drivers, pressure-maintenance
pumps, controllers, accessories and specialties, alarm panels, and flow meter systems
to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
H. Details for full hydraulic calculations to size the fire pumps.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire pumps, pressure-maintenance pumps, and controllers

through one source from a single manufacturer for each type of equipment.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of fire
pumps, pressure-maintenance pumps, and controllers and are based on specific
systems indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."

NFPA 70, Article 100, by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
D. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction pertaining to materials, hose

threads, and installation.
E. Comply with NFPA 20, "Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection," for fire pumps, drivers,
controllers, accessories, and their installation.
F. Fire pump to be UL/FM listed, approved by AHJ (Authority Having Jurisdiction).
A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.
B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.
C. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions for handling.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of fire pumps that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
a. Faulty operation of pumps, controls, or accessories.
use.
2. Warranty Period for Pumps and Controls: Two years from date of KFD approval .
3. Warranty Period for Accessories: Two years from date of KFD approval
1.07 SPARE PARTS & MAINTENANCE
A. Provide complete spare parts and maintenance equipment for two (2) years
maintenance of all the equipment furnished under this section. Spare parts in a
location designated by the Engineer or the Employer.
B. All spare parts and maintenance equipment shall be provided in original packing,
clearly identified and labelled. Provide complete schedules of spare parts and
maintenance equipment clearly cross-referenced with the “Record Drawings” and
maintenance instructions and manuals.
C. All spare parts and maintenance equipment shall be as recommended by the

equipment manufacturer and shall be subject to the final approval of the Engineer.
D. Spare parts and maintenance equipment provided shall, as a minimum, equal the
items used during the two (2) years maintenance period. The Contractor shall
carefully log all spare parts utilized during maintenance period.
E. Provide spare parts and maintenance equipment for all pumps, control panel etc.
requiring maintenance and replacement.
F. Provide two new complete sets of tools for the proper operation, routine maintenance
and adjustment of all components and equipment.
1.08 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with structure department.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2. The product or manufacturers listed are included for the purpose of establishing
Products to be provided shall be from the manufacturer approved from KFSD &
civil Defense.
2.02 FIRE PUMP (Horizontal Split Case) (FM, UL, approved by AHJ)
A. Type: Single stage, non-self-priming, long-coupled, centrifugal volute pump with axial
suction port, radial discharge port and horizontal shaft. The pump shall be of back pull-
out design that enables the removal and dismantling of the motor, couplings, bearing
bracket and impeller without disturbing the pump housing and pipework. The pump
speed shall not exceed 2900 rpm.
B. Materials of construction:
1. Impeller Bronze.
2. Shaft Stainless steel.
3. Coupling Guard Stainless steel.
4. Casing Cast iron.
5. Bearing Bracket Cast iron
6. Case wearing ring Bronze.
7. Seal Mechanical.
8. O Ring EPDM.
C. Capacity: See schedules on drawings for nominal flow and pressure ratings. Pumps
shall have name-plate stating these parameters, permanently attached to the casing.
D. Electrical motor, type and construction shall be as follows:

1. Type Squirrel cage induction, delta wound.
2. Enclosure TEFC (IP 55).
3. Efficiency Class IE3
4. Power factor 0.85 Minimum at full load.
5. Insulation Class F.
6. Temperature rise Class B.
7. Electrical supply 415 v / 3 ph / 50 Hz.
E. Motor power rating: See schedules on drawings for motor power ratings. The motor
shall be rated for continuous operation at 150 % of the pump nominal flow. Additional
capacity available from motor service factors exceeding unity may be used in working
out the motor power ratings in limiting cases. The motor acceleration period (star to
delta change over) shall not exceed 10 seconds.
2.03 FIRE PUMPS (End Suction) (FM, UL, approved by AHJ)
A. Type: Floor-Mounted, End-Suction, Close-Coupled Or Flexibly-Coupled, single

stage, centrifugal type of 2900 rpm speed.
B. Materials of construction:
1. Impeller - Bronze
2. Shaft - Stainless steel
3. Casing - Cast iron
4. Case wearing ring - Bronze
5. Seal - Mechanical
6. Base plate - Cast iron / fabricated steel
C. Accessories: compound gauge at suction and pressure gauge at discharge and

flexible connections at suction and discharge.
D. Working pressure: Pump casing and flanges shall be suitable for a working water
pressure of 1379 Kpa (200 psig) working water pressure at 121 deg.C (250 deg.F)
E. Capacity: See schedules on drawings for nominal flow and pressure ratings.
Pumps shall have name plates stating these parameters, permanently attached to
the casing.
F. Electrical motor: Refer to and comply with the requirements of Section 15245.
Type and construction shall be as follows:
1. Type - Squirrel cage induction, Delta Wound.
2. Enclosure - TEFC (IP 55).
3. Service factor - 1.0.
4. Power factor - 0.85 Minimum at full load
5. Insulation - Class F
6. Temperature rise - Class B
7. Electrical supply - 415 v / 3 ph / 50 Hz.
Motor power rating: See schedules on drawings for motor power ratings. The motor
shall be rated for continuous operation at 150% of the pump nominal flow. Additional
capacity available from motor service factors exceeding unity may be used in working
out the motor power ratings in limiting cases. the motor acceleration period (star to delta
change over) shall not exceed 10 seconds
2.04 FIRE-PUMP CONTROLLERS (FM, UL)
A. The controller shall be of the combined manual and automatic type suitable for star
(Wye) - delta starting at 415 v / 3 ph / 50 Hz supply. Refer to schedules on drawings for
power ratings. The panel components / functions shall be as listed below.
1. Mains isolator switch (4 pole) and circuit breaker combination, mechanically
interlocked to operate with a single, flange mounted, external handle. The
interlocking shall be such that the circuit breaker (with minimum 22 kAmps
rupturing capacity) will engage or break the load current. Both of the above shall
be suitable for padlocking in ON or OFF position and shall be interlocked with the
panel door; restricting access to the controller with the switch in ÒN' position,
except by a hidden tool operator defeater. Provide external emergency release
for the circuit breaker.
2. Audio visual earth leakage alarm
3. Power on (supply healthy) indicator wired through normally closed contacts of the
power available relays to give true indication. Loss of power in any one phase
shall cause the light to go off.
4. Control circuit healthy indicator.
5. Pump on demand indicator.
6. Pump run indicator.
7. Manual, pump start and stop push buttons.
8. Emergency start lever with latch.
9. Adjustable star to delta change over timer (consult motor manufacturer for
change over timing.)
10. Adjustable, 10-300 psi, combination pressure gauge switch, mounted on the
enclosure flange. Extend piping to outside of the panel with union. Pressure
switch shall be wired for automatic start only.
11. Starter contactor with auxiliary relays.
12. Fused control power circuit, with voltage not exceeding 240 v / 1 ph / 50 Hz. Use
transformers where appropriate.
13. Terminal block for interlocking wiring.
14. Earthing bar for equipotential bonding.
15. Set of terminals / relays with volt free contacts for connecting to building
automation system and remote alarm panel
2.05 FIRES-PUMP ACCESSORIES AND SPECIALTIES

A. Match fire-pump suction and discharge ratings as required for fire-pump capacity rating.
Include the following:
1. Automatic air-release valve.
2. Suction and discharge pressure gages.
3. Eccentric-tapered reducer at suction inlet.
4. Concentric-tapered reducer at discharge outlet.
5. Test-Header Manifold: Ferrous body for hose valves. Manufacturer's standard
finish. Include bronze or cast-iron, exposed-type valve header with nozzle
outlets; and round, brass escutcheon plate with lettering equivalent to "PUMP
TEST CONNECTION."
6. Flow meter.
7. Finish: Manufacturer's standard factory-applied red paint.
8. Nameplate: Complete with capacity, Country of origin, Quality certificates ,
characteristics, UL & FM approval and other pertinent data.
2.06 PRESSURE MAINTENANCE PUMPS (Jockey & hose reel PUMP)
A. Pressure-Maintenance Pumps, General: Factory-assembled and -tested pumps with

electric-motor driver, controller, and accessories and specialties.
1. Type: Vertical, multistage centrifugal type of 2900 rpm speed.
2. Materials of construction: Multistage centrifugal pumps.
a. Impeller Stainless steel or bronze
b. Shaft Stainless steel 316.
c. Stage housing Stainless steel.
d. End housing Stainless Steel.
e. Seal Mechanical.
3. Accessories: Compound gauge at suction and pressure gauge at discharge and
flexible connections at suction and discharge.
4. Capacity: As per condition hydraulic calculations for flow and pressure ratings.
5. Finish: Manufacturer's standard color paint applied to factory-assembled and -
tested unit before shipping.
6. Nameplate: Complete with capacity, Country of origin, Quality certificates ,
characteristics, UL & FM approval and other pertinent data.
B. Controllers: UL 508; factory-assembled, -wired, and -tested, across-the-line type for

combined automatic and manual operation.
1. Enclosure: UL 508 and NEMA 250, Type 2, wall-mounting type for field electrical
wiring.
a. Finish: Manufacturer's standard color paint applied to factory-assembled
and -tested unit before shipping.
2. Rate controller for scheduled horsepower and include the following:
a. Fusible disconnect switch.
b. Pressure switch.
c. Hand-off-auto selector switch.
d. Pilot light.
e. Running period timer.
C. Accessories and Specialties: Match pressure-maintenance-pump suction and discharge

ratings as required for pump capacity rating. Include the following:
1. Circulation relief valve.
2. Suction and discharge pressure gages.
D. Pressure-Maintenance-Pump Characteristics and Specialty Data:

1. Electric-Motor Driver Size: 2900 rpm, 3 phase, 50 Hz.
2.07 ALARM PANELS (FM, UL and approved by AHJ)
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -wired remote panel complying with UL 508 and
requirements in NFPA 20. Include audible and visible alarms matching controller type.
1. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 2, remote wall-mounting type.
a. Finish: Manufacturer's standard red paint applied to factory-assembled
and -tested unit before shipping.
2. Features: Include manufacturer's standard features and the following:
a. Motor-operating condition.
b. Loss-of-line power.
c. Phase reversal.
d. Low-water alarm.
2.08 FLOW METER SYSTEMS (FM, UL and approved by AHJ)
A. Description: Fire-pump flow meter system that indicates flow to not less than 175
percent of fire-pump rated capacity. Include sensor of size to match pipe, tubing, flow
meter, and fittings.
1. Pressure Rating: 1200-kPa minimum.
2. Sensor: Venturi, annubar probe, or orifice plate, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Flow meter: Compatible with flow sensor with dial not less than 115 mm in
diameter or manufacturer's equivalent size.
4. Permanently Mounted Flow meter: Suitable for wall mounting with copper tubing
to connect to flow sensor.
5. Portable Flow meter: With two 3.7-m hoses, in carrying case.
2.09 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Description: UL 393, 90- to 115-mm diameter dial with range of 0- to 2070-kPa

minimum. Include caption "WATER" on dial face.
2.010 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, non-

shrink and nonmetallic grout, suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Properties: Non-staining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
B. Design Mix: 34.5-MPa, 28-day compressive strength.
2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test and inspect fire pumps with their controllers according to NFPA 20 for certified
shop tests.
B. Verification of Performance: Rate fire pumps according to requirements indicated.
A. EXECUTION
2.011 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, concrete bases, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance
with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of fire pumps.
B. Examine roughing-in for fire-suppression piping to verify actual locations of piping

connections before fire-pump installation.
2.012 CONCRETE BASES
A. Install concrete bases to be coordinated with structure department of dimensions

indicated for fire pumps, pressure-maintenance pumps, and controllers. Refer to
Division 21 Section "Common Work Results for Fire Suppression."
1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise
indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centres around full perimeter of
base.
2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through
concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates,
diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported
equipment.
2.013 INSTALLATION
A. Install and align fire pump, pressure-maintenance pump, and controller according to
NFPA 20.
B. Install pumps and controllers to provide access for periodic maintenance including
removal of motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.
C. Set base-mounting-type pumps on concrete bases. Disconnect coupling halves before

setting. Do not reconnect couplings until alignment operations have been completed.
1. Support pump base plate on rectangular metal blocks and shims or on metal
wedges having small taper, at points near anchor bolts, to provide 19- to 38-mm
gap between pump base and concrete base for grouting.
2. Adjust metal supports or wedges until pump and driver shafts are level. Verify
that coupling faces and pump suction and discharge flanges are level and plumb.
D. Install suction and discharge piping equal to or greater than diameter of fire-pump
nozzles.
E. Install valves that are same size as piping connecting fire pumps, bypasses, test
headers, and other piping systems.
F. Install pressure gages on fire-pump suction and discharge at pressure-gage tapings.
G. Support pumps and piping separately so weight of piping does not rest on pumps.
H. Refer to Division 21 Section "Common Work Results for Fire Suppression" for basic
piping installation and joint construction.
I. Install piping accessories, hangers and supports, anchors, valves, meters and gages,
and equipment supports.
J. Install flow meters and sensors where indicated. Install flow meter-system components
and make connections according to manufacturer's written instructions.
K. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but

not specified to be factory mounted. Furnish copies of manufacturers' wiring diagram
submittals to electrical Installer.
2.014 ALIGNMENT
A. Align fire-pump and driver shafts after complete unit has been leveled on concrete base,
grout has set, and anchor bolts have been tightened.
B. After alignment is correct, tighten anchor bolts evenly. Fill base plate completely with
grout, with metal blocks and shims or wedges in place. Tighten anchor bolts after grout
has hardened. Check alignment and make required corrections.
C. Align piping connections.
D. Align pump and driver shafts for angular and parallel alignment according to HI 1.4 and
to tolerances specified by manufacturer.
2.015 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in Division 21 Section "Water-Based Fire-

Suppression Systems." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and
specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to pumps and equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect water supply and discharge piping to fire pumps with flexible connectors.
Connect water supply and discharge piping to pressure-maintenance pumps with
flexible connectors. Refer to Division 21 Section "Water-Based Fire-Suppression
Systems" for flexible connectors.
D. Connect flow meter-system sensors and meters according to manufacturer's written

instructions.
E. Connect controllers to pumps.
F. Connect fire-pump controllers to building fire-alarm system. Refer to Division 28

Sections "Fire Detection and Alarm."
G. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for

Electrical Systems."
H. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation,
including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
B. Perform field tests for each fire pump when installation is complete. Comply with
operating instructions and procedures in NFPA 20 to demonstrate compliance with
requirements. Where possible, field correct malfunctioning equipment, and then retest
to demonstrate compliance. Replace equipment that cannot be satisfactorily corrected
or that does not perform as indicated, and then retest to demonstrate compliance.
Verify that each fire pump performs as indicated.
C. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
2. Final Checks before Start-up: Perform the following preventive-maintenance
operations and checks:
a. Lubricate oil-lubrication-type bearings.
b. Remove grease-lubrication-type bearing covers, flush bearings with
kerosene, and clean thoroughly. Fill with new lubricant according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
c. Disconnect coupling and check electric motor for proper rotation.
Rotation shall match direction of rotation marked on pump casing.
d. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand. If pump is bound or if it drags
even slightly, do not operate until cause of trouble is determined and
corrected.
3. Starting procedure for pumps is as follows:
a. Prime pump by opening suction valve and closing drains, and prepare
pump for operation.
b. Open sealing-liquid supply valves if pump is so fitted.
c. Start motor.
d. Open discharge valve slowly.
e. Observe leakage from stuffing boxes and adjust sealing-liquid valve for
proper flow to ensure lubrication of packing. Do not tighten gland
immediately, but let packing run in before reducing leakage through
stuffing boxes.
f. Check general mechanical operation of pump and motor.
2.017 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire pumps, drivers, controllers, and pressure-
maintenance pumps.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 22 0500
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
2. Transition fittings.
3. Dielectric fittings.
4. Mechanical sleeve seals.
5. Sleeves.
6. Escutcheons.
7. Grout.
8. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
9. Painting and finishing.
10. Concrete bases.
11. Supports and anchorages.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,
unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.


contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.
F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:

1. UPVC: Unplasticised poly vinyl chloride plastic.
2. PPR: Polypropylene random copolymer.
3. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
4. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.
5. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
6. PVC: Poly vinyl chloride plastic.
7. HDPE: High Density Polyethylene.
KEO/19-3262-0000 22 0500/1 Common Work Results for Plumbing
G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:
1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
1.03 SUBMITTALS

4. Escutcheons.
B. Welding certificates.
A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1,
B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and
1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding
C. Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical

characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in
writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are
appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified,
D. The plumbing works shall be executed by contractors, engaged in the installation of

plumbing systems as primary business for at least ten (10) immediately preceding years
and having Grade I registration as mechanical contractors with the Central Tenders
Committee of the government of Kuwait.
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through
B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and
bending.
1.06 COORDINATION
progress of construction, to allow for plumbing installations.

C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for plumbing items requiring
access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are
specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."
1.07 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (in general)
A. Plumbing Systems
1. Water Supply Systems
For buildings with basement level
Connection/s from the city freshwater mains with meter shall be piped to a
common pressure break water tank at basement for the building. Domestic
transfer set will be used to draw water from the pressure break tank and transfer it
to GRP tank at roof level, Water will be supplied to the users’ points in the upper
floors by booster pump
The capacities of water tanks will vary depending on the number of the occupants
in the building.
Electrical Unit water heaters will be provided in the wet areas (in the ceiling void)
to produce the required hot water.
For buildings without basement level
Connection/s from the city freshwater mains with meter shall be piped to the GRP
tank at roof level, Water will be supplied to the users’ points in all floors by booster
pump
The capacity of the stored water shall be size on two days storage in the elevated
roof tank.
Electrical Unit water heaters will be provided in the wet areas (in the ceiling void)
to produce the required hot water.
Building
No. Name Domestic Requirements
C1 Supermarket Basement:
1-Tanks Volume: 60 m3
2- Pumps: Transfer Pumps
(1W+1S).
Roof:
1- Tanks Volume: 20 m3 (selection
4x4x1.5).
2- Pumps: Booster Pumps (2W +
1S).
C2 Society Center At Roof (Domestic):
1- Tanks Volume Domestic (85m3)
(6.5x10x1.5)
1S).

C3 Social unit At Roof (Domestic):
(4x2x1.5)
1S).
C4 Citizen Services At Roof (Domestic):
(4x3x1.5)
1S).
C5 Police station At Roof (Domestic):

1- Tanks Volume Domestic
(42.5m3) (9x4x1.5)
1S).
C6 Municipality At Roof:
1- Tank: Separate GRP Tank (4
m3) (Selection: 2x2x1.5)
2- Domestic Pumps: Vertical
Booster Inline (1W+1S).
C7 & C7A Masjid At Roof (Domestic):

1- Tanks Volume Domestic :
a. Ablution= 65 m3
b. Masjed= 15 m3
c. Imam Residential= 25 m3
(4x4x2)
2- Pumps: .
a. Ablution= Booster Pumps (1W
+ 1S)
b. Masjed= Booster Pumps (1W +
1S)
c. Imam Residential= Booster
Pumps (1W + 1S)
C8 Post Office At Roof (Domestic):
(5.5m3) (3x2x1.5)
1S).
C9 Health Care At Roof (Domestic):
(20.5m3) (4x4x1.5)
1S).

C10 MOCI At Roof:
1- Tank: GRP Tank for Fire and
Domestic (24 m3) (selection:
4x5x1.5).
2- Pumps: Booster Pumps
(1W+1S)
C11 Library At Roof:
1- Tank: GRP Tank (33 m3)
(Selection: 5x5x1.5).
2-Pumps: Booster Pumps
(2W+1s).
C12 Children Club At Roof:
1- Tank: GRP Tank (32 m3)
(Selection: 6x4x1.5).
2-Pumps: Booster Pumps
(2W+1s).
C13 Gas branch At Roof (Domestic):
1- Tank: Combined GRP Tank for
Fire and Domestic (1.8 m3)
(selection: 2x1x1).
2- Domestic Pumps: Vertical
Booster Inline (1W+1S).
2. Sanitary Waster and Vent System
Combined vented drainage and wastewater risers will be provided to serve the
buildings
Drainage of all fixtures, drains and equipment are of gravity drainage type. All
stacks will be full size extend through roofs and connected to the city mains
through inspection chambers.
Double sealed cover will be designed for all inspection chambers
3. Storm Drainage System
All roof drains and area drains will be collected through a gravity storm water
drainage system and free discharged to grade levels.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
2.02 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and
joining methods.
B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.

below.
system contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum
flanges.
flanges.
2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, unless otherwise
C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by
piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux
F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-
G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for
H. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:

1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235.
2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.
3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.
I. Multilayer (PE & Aluminum): Screw joints, press fitting, composite compression and
clamp as appropriate.
J. HDPE: Butt weld/eletroweld sleeve, coupling/ring seal socket/expansion socket and

screw threaded joint as appropriate.
2.04 TRANSITION FITTINGS
A. AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to
and with ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
1. Approved Manufacturers: Subject to approved manufacturers list by PAHW.
2. Underground Piping NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or
coupling.
3. Underground Piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-
type coupling.
4. Aboveground Pressure Piping: Pipe fitting.

B. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings CPVC and PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's
Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one
solvent-cement-joint end.
C. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Adaptors: One-piece fitting with manufacturer's SDR 11

equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-
joint end.
D. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: MSS SP-107, [CPVC] [PVC] [CPVC and PVC] four-
part union. Include brass end, solvent-cement-joint end, rubber O-ring, and union nut.
E. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Drainage Piping:

ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve ends same size as piping to be joined, and
corrosion-resistant metal band on each end.
2.05 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded,
solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig (1725-kPa)

minimum working pressure at 180 deg F (82 deg C).
D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-

psig (1035- or 2070-kPa) minimum working pressure as required to suit system
pressures.
E. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges,

full-face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt
sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.
2. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig
(1035- or 2070-kPa) minimum working pressure where required to suit system
pressures.
F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive,

thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working
pressure at 225 deg F (107 deg C).
G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic
lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM/NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe.
Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element.
4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of
2.07 SLEEVES

plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
E. Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
F. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
G. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing
2.08 ESCUTCHEONS

plated finish.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.

finish.
F. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed hinge, set screw or spring clips, and
chrome-plated finish.

2.09 GROUT

grout.
1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections


removal.
operating pressure.
following:
1. New Piping:
pattern type.
plated finish.
e. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-
piece, stamped-steel type.
f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece or
g. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
stamped-steel type or split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge
and set screw.
h. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type
i. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel
type with concealed or exposed-rivet hinge and set screw or spring clips.
j. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type.
k. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with set
l. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-
plate type.
M. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
N. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.
O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor
and roof slabs.
P. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board
partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.
3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear
materials:
a. PVC/Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150).
floor level. Refer to Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim"
for flashing.
4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve
location of joint. Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and
installation.

Q. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches (150 mm) in diameter.
2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches (150 mm) and larger in
diameter.
3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing
R. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves.
sleeve seals.
S. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and
floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to
Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for materials.
T. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
U. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-

in requirements.
assembly.
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are
welds.
threads.
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and
solvent cements.
2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes.
3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC
socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number
PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
5. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
6. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138
Appendix.
K. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.
L. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth
or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.
2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
M. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join
according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions.
3.03 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and
at final connection to each piece of equipment.
2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves
and at final connection to each piece of equipment.
3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect
piping materials of dissimilar metals.
3.04 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting

heights are not indicated.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems
and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement

of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum
interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
3.05 PAINTING
A. Painting of plumbing systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09

Sections "Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting."
3.06 CONCRETE BASES

1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches
3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through
4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's
equipment.
6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
7. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete and
reinforcement as specified in Division 03 Section "[Cast-in-Place Concrete]
[Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete]."
A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.
elevation to support and anchor plumbing materials and equipment.

anchor plumbing materials and equipment.
3.09 GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for plumbing equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other
equipment base plates, and anchors.
A. Provide a written monthly report to the employer, detailing the maintenance work
performed, including dates, parts replaced etc.
B. Provide all necessary maintenance staff experienced in plumbing works such as

engineers, supervisors, operators, technicians, helpers etc. for effective maintenance
and operations of all systems. Submit to the engineer for approval the qualification
details of all maintenance staff.
C. The contractor shall keep permanently on the site sufficient number of operation and
maintenance staff to fulfil the obligation of the contract. Contractor shall provide the
following minimum staff:
1. One engineer for all Services 20% of time.
2. One supervisors 100% of time.
D. Provide all spare parts for replacements made necessary due to wear and tear of
equipment, provide all consumable parts, short life parts, oil, grease, filters, chemicals,
etc. and all tools and maintenance equipment required for proper operation and
complete maintenance of the work.
E. Provide all routine operational maintenance and full preventive maintenance as

recommended by the equipment and systems in proper operating condition.
F. Include for complete routine maintenance and corrective and preventive maintenance
with the requirement of the contract document as follow:
1. Defect liability / breakdown maintenance, inclusive of replacement parts.
2. Preventive maintenance as scheduled, inclusive of replacement parts and
consumables.
3. Submit the schedule of routine operational and preventive maintenance for all
equipment for the employer’s/engineer approval.
4. Attending to emergencies, which may damage property or endanger lives, even
outside normal working hours.
G. The Employer's personnel shall be allowed to witness or participate (without damages

interference) in the above activities.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 22 0513
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-

1.02 COORDINATION

with the following:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
specified in plumbing equipment schedules or Sections.

service factor.
KEO/19-3262-0000 22 0513/1 Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment


G. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust
loading.

1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.
2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.

insulation.
protected motors.
2. Split phase.
C. Bearings: Pre-lubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial
and thrust loading.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 22 0516
EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal-bellows expansion joints.
2. Rubber expansion joints.
3. Flexible-hose expansion joints.
4. Pipe bends and loops.
5. Alignment guides and anchors.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. BR: Butyl rubber.
B. Buna-N: Nitrile rubber.
C. CR: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.
D. CSM: Chlorosulfonyl-polyethylene rubber.
E. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
F. NR: Natural rubber.
A. Compatibility: Products shall be suitable for piping system fluids, materials, working
pressures, and temperatures.
B. Capability: Products shall absorb 200 percent of maximum axial movement between
anchors.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data and Sample: For each type of product indicated.
B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each anchor and alignment guide indicated to comply
with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and
sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for thermal expansion of piping
systems and for selecting and designing expansion joints, loops, and bends.
KEO/19-3262-0000 22 0516/1 Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping

2. Anchor Details: Detail fabrication of each anchor indicated. Show dimensions
and methods of assembly and attachment to building structure.
3. Alignment Guide Details: Detail field assembly and attachment to building
structure.
4. Schedule: Indicate type, manufacturer's number, size, material, pressure rating,
end connections, and location for each expansion joint.
C. Welding certificates.
D. Product Certificates: For each type of pipe expansion joint, signed by product
manufacturer.
E. Maintenance Data: For pipe expansion joints to include in maintenance manuals.
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. Steel Shapes and Plates: AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
2. Welding to Piping: ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Metal-Bellows Expansion Joints: ASTM F 1120, circular-corrugated-bellows type with

external tie rods.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
2. Metal-Bellows Expansion Joints for Copper Piping: Single- or multiple-ply
phosphor-bronze bellows, copper pipe end connections, and brass shrouds.
3. Metal-Bellows Expansion Joints for Steel Piping: Single- or multiple ply
stainless-steel bellows, steel pipe end connections, and carbon-steel shroud.
4. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) unless otherwise indicated.
5. Configuration: Single- or double-bellows type, unless otherwise indicated.
6. End Connections Flanged or weld.
B. Rubber Expansion Joints: ASTM F 1123, fabric-reinforced rubber with external control
rods and complying with FSA's "Technical Handbook: Non-Metallic Expansion Joints
and Flexible Pipe Connectors."
2. Arch Type: Single or multiple arches.
3. Spherical Type: Single or multiple spheres.
a. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Ratings for NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4
(DN 40 to DN 100): 150 psig (1035 kPa) at 220 deg F (104 deg C).
b. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Ratings for NPS 5 and NPS 6
(DN 125 and DN 150): 140 psig (966 kPa) at 200 deg F (93 deg C).
c. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Ratings for NPS 8 to NPS 12
(DN 200 to DN 300): 140 psig (966 kPa) at 180 deg F (82 deg C).
4. Material: EPDM.
5. End Connections: Full-faced, integral, steel flanges with steel retaining rings.

2.02 ALIGNMENT GUIDES
A. Description: Steel, factory fabricated, with bolted two-section outer cylinder and base
for alignment of piping and two-section guiding spider for bolting to pipe.
2.03 MATERIALS FOR ANCHORS
A. Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex head.
C. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers.
D. Mechanical Fasteners: Insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug anchor for use in
hardened portland cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate for
application.
1. Stud: Threaded, zinc-coated carbon steel.
2. Expansion Plug: Zinc-coated steel.
3. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.
E. Chemical Fasteners: Insert-type-stud bonding system anchor for use with hardened
portland cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate for application.
1. Bonding Material: ASTM C 881, Type IV, Grade 3, 2-component epoxy resin
suitable for surface temperature of hardened concrete where fastener is to be
installed.
2. Stud: ASTM A 307, zinc-coated carbon steel with continuous thread on stud,
unless otherwise indicated.
3. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.
F. Concrete: Portland cement mix, 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) minimum. Comply with
requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for formwork,
reinforcement, and concrete.
G. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink,

nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXPANSION-JOINT INSTALLATION
A. Install manufactured, nonmetallic expansion joints according to FSA's "Technical

Handbook: Non-Metallic Expansion Joints and Flexible Pipe Connectors."
B. Install expansion joints of sizes matching size of piping in which they are installed.
C. Install alignment guides to allow expansion and to avoid end-loading and torsional
stress.

3.02 PIPE BEND AND LOOP INSTALLATION
A. Install pipe bends and loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required to partly
absorb tension or compression produced during anticipated change in temperature.
B. Attach pipe bends and loops to anchors.

1. Steel Anchors: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME B31.9 and ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
2. Concrete Anchors: Attach by fasteners. Follow fastener manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.03 SWING CONNECTIONS
A. Connect risers and branch connections to mains with at least five pipe fittings, including
tee in main.
B. Connect risers and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings,
including tee in riser.
C. Connect mains and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings,
including tee in main.
3.04 ALIGNMENT-GUIDE INSTALLATION
A. Install guides on piping adjoining pipe expansion fittings and loops.
B. Attach guides to pipe and secure to building structure.
3.05 ANCHOR INSTALLATION
A. Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by

ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.
B. Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to piping
and to structure. Comply with ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1.
C. Construct concrete anchors of poured-in-place concrete of dimensions indicated and

include embedded fasteners.
D. Install pipe anchors according to expansion-joint manufacturer's written instructions if

expansion joints are indicated.
E. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for expansion fittings, guides, and anchors
installed on or in concrete.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 22 0519
METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1. Thermometers.
2. Gages.
3. Test plugs.
4. Water Meter
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 22 Section "Facility Water Distribution Piping" for domestic and fire-
protection water service meters outside the building.
2. Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for domestic and fire-protection
water service meters inside the building.
3. Division 23 Section "Liquefied Petroleum Gas" for gas meters.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. CR: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.
B. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data and Sample: For each type of product indicated; include performance
curves.
B. Shop Drawings: Schedule for thermometers and gages indicating manufacturer's

number, scale range, and location for each.
C. Product Certificates: For each type of thermometer and gage, signed by product
manufacturer.
D. All manufacturers subject to approvals from PAHW.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 METAL-CASE, LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS
A. Subject to approved manufacturers list by PAHW
KEO/19-3262-0000 22 0519/1 Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping

B. Case: Die-cast aluminum9 inches (229 mm) long.
C. Tube: Red or blue reading, mercury filled, with magnifying lens.
D. Tube Background: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale

markings.
E. Window: Glass.
F. Connector: Adjustable type, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in horizontal
plane, with locking device.
G. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for thermowell installation and of length
to suit installation.
H. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to

maximum of 1.5 percent of range.
2.02 PLASTIC-CASE, LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS
B. Case: Plastic, 9 inches (229 mm) long.
C. Tube: Red or blue reading, mercury or organic-liquid filled, with magnifying lens.
D. Tube Background: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale

markings.
E. Window: Glass or plastic.
F. Connector: Adjustable type, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in horizontal
G. Stem: Metal, for thermowell installation and of length to suit installation.
H. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to

2.03 DIRECT-MOUNTING, VAPOR-ACTUATED DIAL THERMOMETERS
B. Case: Dry type, drawn steel or cast aluminum4-1/2-inch (114-mm) diameter.
C. Element: Bourdon tube or other type of pressure element.
D. Movement: Mechanical, connecting element and pointer.
E. Dial: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings.
F. Pointer: Red or other dark-color metal.
G. Window: Glass.

H. Ring: Stainless steel.
I. Connector: Adjustable type, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in horizontal
J. Thermal System: Liquid- or mercury-filled bulb in copper-plated steel, aluminum, or

brass stem for thermowell installation and of length to suit installation.
K. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to

2.04 REMOTE-MOUNTING, VAPOR-ACTUATED DIAL THERMOMETERS
B. Case: Dry type, drawn steel or cast aluminum4-1/2-inch (114-mm) diameter with holes
for panel mounting.
C. Element: Bourdon tube or other type of pressure element.
D. Movement: Mechanical, connecting element and pointer.
G. Window: Glass.
I. Connector: Bottom/Back union type.
J. Thermal System: Liquid- or mercury-filled bulb in copper-plated steel, aluminum, or

brass stem for thermowell installation and of length to suit installation.

2.05 BIMETALLIC-ACTUATED DIAL THERMOMETERS
B. Description: Direct-mounting, bimetallic-actuated dial thermometers complying with

ASME B40.3.
C. Case: Dry type, stainless steel with 5-inch (127-mm) diameter.
D. Element: Bimetal coil.
G. Window: Glass.

I. Connector: Adjustable angle type.
J. Stem: Metal, for thermowell installation and of length to suit installation.

2.06 THERMOWELLS
B. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type metal fitting made for insertion into piping and
of type, diameter, and length required to hold thermometer.
2.07 PRESSURE GAGES
B. Direct-Mounting, Dial-Type Pressure Gages: Indicating-dial type complying with

ASME B40.100.
1. Case: Dry type, drawn steel or cast aluminum4-1/2-inch (114-mm)] [6-inch (152-
mm) diameter.
2. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Pressure Connection: Brass, NPS 1/4 (DN 8), bottom-outlet type unless back-
outlet type is indicated.
4. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.
5. Dial: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale
markings.
6. Pointer: Red or other dark-color metal.
7. Window: Glass.
8. Ring: Stainless steel.
9. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half scale.
10. Vacuum-Pressure Range: 30-in. Hg of vacuum to 15 psig of pressure (100 kPa
of vacuum to 103 kPa of pressure).
11. Range for Fluids under Pressure: Two times operating pressure.
C. Remote-Mounting, Dial-Type Pressure Gages: ASME B40.100, indicating-dial type.

1. Subject to approved manufacturers list by PAHW
2. Case: Dry type, drawn steel or cast aluminum, 4-1/2-inch (114-mm) diameter
with holes for panel mounting.
3. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Pressure Connection: Brass, NPS 1/4 (DN 8), bottom-outlet type unless back-
outlet type is indicated.
5. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.
6. Dial: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale
markings.
7. Pointer: Red or other dark-color metal.
8. Window: [Glass] [Glass or plastic] [Plastic] <Insert other>.
9. Ring: Stainless steel.
10. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half scale.

11. Vacuum-Pressure Range: 30-in. Hg of vacuum to 15 psig of pressure (100 kPa
of vacuum to 103 kPa of pressure).
12. Range for Fluids under Pressure: Two times operating pressure.
D. Pressure-Gage Fittings:
1. Subject to approved manufacturers list by PAHW
2. Valves: NPS 1/4 (DN 8) brass or stainless-steel needle type.
3. Snubbers: ASME B40.5, NPS 1/4 (DN 8) brass bushing with corrosion-resistant,
porous-metal disc of material suitable for system fluid and working pressure.
2.08 TEST PLUGS
B. Description: Corrosion-resistant brass or stainless-steel body with core inserts and

gasketed and threaded cap, with extended stem for units to be installed in insulated
piping.
C. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F (3450 kPa at 93
deg C.
D. Core Inserts: One or two self-sealing rubber valves.

1. Insert material for water service at 20 to 200 deg F (minus 7 to plus 93 deg C)
shall be CR.
2. Insert material for water service at minus 30 to plus 275 deg F (minus 35 to plus
136 deg C) shall be EPDM.
E. Test Kit: Furnish one test kit(s) containing one pressure gage and adaptor, [one] [two]
thermometer(s), and carrying case. Pressure gage, adapter probes, and thermometer
sensing elements shall be of diameter to fit test plugs and of length to project into piping.
1. Pressure Gage: Small bourdon-tube insertion type with [2- to 3-inch- (51- to 76-
mm-)] diameter dial and probe. Dial range shall be [0 to 200 psig (0 to 1380
kPa)].
2. Low-Range Thermometer: Small bimetallic insertion type with [1- to 2-inch- (25-
to 51-mm-)] <Insert other> diameter dial and tapered-end sensing element. Dial
ranges shall be 25 to 125 deg F (minus 4 to plus 52 deg C).
3. High-Range Thermometer: Small bimetallic insertion type with [1- to 2-inch- (25-
to 51-mm-)] diameter dial and tapered-end sensing element. Dial ranges shall be
[0 to 220 deg F (minus 18 to plus 104 deg C)].
4. Carrying case shall have formed instrument padding.
2.09 WATER METER SPECIFICATION
B. Meters shall be of solid-state construction without mechanical moving parts. Meters

shall be designed and manufactured to internationally recognized standards and
approved by a recognized accreditation authority such as Water Resources Advisory
Commission (WRAC).
C. Meters shall be Automatic Meter Reading (AMR) enabled while retaining the facility to
provide visual readings at an integral LCD display.

D. Meters shall meet the following minimum specification and retain accuracy throughout
the life of the meter:
1. Approved accuracy ISO 4046 / BS 5728 Class C
2. Pipe size up to 50mm / 2-inch diameter
E. Operating Specification:
1. Max. water temperature + 60 deg.C
2. Working pressure 16 bar
3. Maximum pressure rating 20 bar
4. Pressure loss at qs <1 bar
F. Display:
1. LCD max. 99,999 m3
2. LCD min. 1 m3 (1.000 litre)
3. Meter reading LCD display + remote via
AMR.
G. Environmental:
1. Ingress protection IP68 / EN 60529
2. Storage temp. - 10 to + 60 deg.C
3. Ambient temp. range -10 to + 85 deg.C
4. Battery life > 10 years.
H. Minimum required features:

1. Meter shall provide an encoded output using an M-bus compatible data
stream.
2. Data output shall enable identification and report of leakage
3. Meter shall not record air and record incidents of air presence.
4. Monitor and record no-flow conditions
5. Display and record tamper and fraud
6. Battery to be field replaceable without compromising meter accuracy and IP
rating.
I. Approvals:
1. Meters shall be approved by an internationally recognized authority for use
with potable water.
2. Meters shall be manufactured under accredited BS EN ISO 9001 quality
conditions
3. Meters shall be manufactured under accredited BS EN ISO 14001
environmental conditions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 THERMOMETER APPLICATIONS
A. Install liquid-filled-case-type, bimetallic-actuated dial thermometers at suction and

discharge of each pump.
B. Provide the following temperature ranges for thermometers:

1. Domestic Hot Water: 30 to 180 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions (Minus 1 to
plus 82 deg C, with 1-degree scale divisions).
2. Domestic Cold Water: 0 to 100 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions (Minus 18 to
plus 38 deg C, with 1-degree scale divisions).
3.02 GAGE APPLICATIONS
A. Install dry-case-type pressure gages for discharge of each pressure-reducing valve.
B. Install dry-case-type pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump.
3.03 INSTALLATIONS
A. Install direct-mounting thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions.
B. Install remote-mounting dial thermometers on panel, with tubing connecting panel and
thermometer bulb supported to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing length.
C. Install direct-mounting pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe
at most readable position.
D. Install remote-mounting pressure gages on panel.
E. Install needle-valve and snubber fitting in piping for each pressure gage.
F. Install permanent indicators on walls or brackets in accessible and readable positions.
G. Install connection fittings for attachment to portable indicators in accessible locations.
H. Install thermometers and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service
and maintenance for thermometers, gages, machines, and equipment.
I. Install water meters as indicated on the drawings and connect to BMS for automatic
billing issuance.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 22 0523
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes the following general-duty valves:

1. Bronze angle valves.
2. Cast-iron angle valves.
3. Bronze check valves.
4. Gray-iron swing check valves.
5. Spring-loaded, lift-disc check valves.
6. Bronze gate valves.
7. Cast-iron gate valves.
8. Bronze globe valves.
9. Cast-iron globe valves.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. The following are standard abbreviations for valves:

1. CWP: Cold working pressure.
4. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic.
5. TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data and Sample: For each type of valve indicated. Include body, seating, and
trim materials; valve design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections;
arrangement; dimensions; and required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its
application. Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights;
furnished specialties; and accessories.
A. ASME Compliance for Ferrous Valves: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for dimension
and design criteria.
B. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.
KEO/19-3262-0000 22 0523/1 General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping

A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.
2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.
3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling.
4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.
6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.
B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection.
2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew-point temperature.
If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight
enclosures.
C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not
use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
2.02 VALVES, GENERAL
A. Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of valves.
B. Bronze Valves: NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller with threaded ends, unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Ferrous Valves: NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger with flanged ends, unless otherwise
indicated.
D. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for
system pressures and temperatures.
E. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Valve Actuators:
1. Gear Drive: For quarter-turn valves NPS 8 (DN 200) and larger.
2. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types.
3. Lever Handle: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 (DN 150) and smaller, except plug
valves.
4. Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for
every 10 plug valves, for each size square plug head.
G. Extended Valve Stems: On insulated valves.
H. Valve Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast-iron valves, ASME B16.5 for steel valves, and
ASME B16.24 for bronze valves.

I. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.
2.03 BRONZE ANGLE VALVES
A. Bronze Angle Valves, General: MSS SP-80, with ferrous-alloy handwheel.
B. Type 2, Class 125, Bronze Angle Valves: Bronze body with PTFE or TFE disc and
union-ring bonnet.
2.04 CAST-IRON ANGLE VALVES
A. Cast-Iron Angle Valves, General: MSS SP-85, Type II.
B. Class 125, Cast-Iron Angle Valves: Bronze mounted with gray-iron body and bronze
seats.
2.05 BRONZE CHECK VALVES
A. Bronze Check Valves, General: MSS SP-80.
B. Type 2, Class 125, Bronze, Horizontal Lift Check Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic
disc and bronze seat.
C. Type 2, Class 125, Bronze, Vertical Lift Check Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic
disc and bronze seat.
D. Type 3, Class 125, Bronze, Swing Check Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and
seat.
E. Type 4, Class 125, Bronze, Swing Check Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc
and bronze seat.
2.06 GRAY-IRON SWING CHECK VALVES
A. Gray-Iron Swing Check Valves, General: MSS SP-71.
B. Type I, Class 125, gray-iron, swing check valves with metal seats.
C. Type II, Class 125, gray-iron, swing check valves with composition to metal seats.
2.07 SPRING-LOADED, LIFT-DISC CHECK VALVES
A. Lift-Disc Check Valves, General: FCI 74-1, with spring-loaded bronze or alloy disc and
bronze or alloy seat.
B. Type I, Class 125, Wafer Lift-Disc Check Valves: Wafer style with cast-iron shell with
diameter matching companion flanges.
C. Type II, Class 125, Compact-Wafer, Lift-Disc Check Valves: Compact-wafer style with
cast-iron shell with diameter made to fit within bolt circle.

D. Type III, Class 125, Globe Lift-Disc Check Valves: Globe style with cast-iron shell and
flanged ends.
E. Type IV, Class 125, Threaded Lift-Disc Check Valves: Threaded style with bronze shell
and threaded ends.
2.08 BRONZE GATE VALVES
A. Bronze Gate Valves, General: MSS SP-80, with ferrous-alloy handwheel.
B. Type 1, Class 125, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with nonrising stem and bronze
solid wedge and union-ring bonnet.
C. Type 2, Class 125, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with rising stem and bronze solid
wedge and union-ring bonnet.
2.09 CAST-IRON GATE VALVES
A. Cast-Iron Gate Valves, General: MSS SP-70, Type I.
B. Class 125, NRS, Bronze-Mounted, Cast-Iron Gate Valves: Cast-iron body with bronze
trim, nonrising stem, and solid-wedge disc.
C. Class 125, OS&Y, Bronze-Mounted, Cast-Iron Gate Valves: Cast-iron body with bronze
trim, rising stem, and solid-wedge disc.
D. Class 125, NRS, All-Iron, Cast-Iron Gate Valves: Cast-iron body with cast-iron trim,
nonrising stem, and solid-wedge disc.
E. Class 125, OS&Y, All-Iron, Cast-Iron Gate Valves: Cast-iron body with cast-iron trim,
rising stem, and solid-wedge disc.
2.10 BRONZE GLOBE VALVES
A. Bronze Globe Valves, General: MSS SP-80, with ferrous-alloy handwheel.
B. Type 1, Class 125, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and union-ring
bonnet.
C. Type 2, Class 125, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with PTFE or TFE disc and
union-ring bonnet.
2.11 CAST-IRON GLOBE VALVES
A. Cast-Iron Globe Valves, General: MSS SP-85.
B. Type I, Class 125, Cast-Iron Globe Valves: Gray-iron body with bronze seats.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting performance.
corrected.
B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion.
Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement
during shipping and handling.
C. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats
made accessible by such operations.
D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for
proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material
composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.
F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
A. Refer to piping Sections for specific valve applications. If valve applications are not
indicated, use the following:
1. Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly, or gate valves.
2. Throttling Service: Angle, ball, butterfly, or globe valves.
3. Pump Discharge: Spring-loaded, lift-disc check valves.
B. If valves with specified CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with
higher CWP ratings may be substituted.
C. Domestic Water Piping: Use the following types of valves:

1. Lift Check Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Type 2, horizontal or vertical,
bronze.
2. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Type 4, bronze.
3. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Type II, gray iron.
4. Spring-Loaded, Lift-Disc Check Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Type IV.
5. Spring-Loaded, Lift-Disc Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Type I or
II, cast iron.
6. Gate Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Type 1 or 2, bronze.
7. Gate Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Type I, OS&Y, bronze-mounted
cast iron.
8. Globe Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Type 2, bronze.
9. Globe Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Type I, bronze-mounted cast iron.
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings

indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow
service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
C. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
E. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
F. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.
2. Dual-Plate Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position, between flanges.
3. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into
service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking
occurs.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 22 0529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes the following hangers and supports for plumbing system piping
and equipment:
1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.
2. Trapeze pipe hangers.
3. Metal framing systems.
4. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
5. Fastener systems.
6. Pipe stands.
7. Pipe positioning systems.
8. Equipment supports.

1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for
trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports.
2. Division 21 Section "Water-Based Fire-Suppression Systems" for pipe hangers
for fire-suppression piping.
3. Division 22 Section "Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping" for pipe
guides and anchors.
4. Division 22 Section "Vibration and Noise Controls for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment" for vibration isolation devices.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.
B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers

and Supports."
A. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting
combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of

supported equipment and connected systems and components.
KEO/19-3262-0000 22 0529/1 Hangers and Supports and Plumbing Piping and Equipment
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data and Sample: For the following:

1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.
2. Fiberglass pipe hangers.
3. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
4. Powder-actuated fastener systems.
5. Pipe positioning systems.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show

fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:
1. Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components.
2. Metal framing systems. Include Product Data for components.
3. Fiberglass strut systems. Include Product Data for components.
4. Pipe stands. Include Product Data for components.
C. Welding certificates.
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural

Welding Code--Steel."
B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
B. STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
C. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer

to Part 3 "Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger
and support types. Use FM approved Hangers and Supports for Fire Fighting piping.
D. Subject to approved manufacturers list by PAHW.
E. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.
F. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
G. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for
support of bearing surface of piping.
2.02 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly

made from structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-
bolts.
2.03 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Description: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel

channels and other components.
B. Subject to approved manufacturers list by PAHW.
C. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.
D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
2.04 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS
A. Description: 100-psig- (690-kPa-) minimum, compressive-strength insulation insert

encased in sheet metal shield.
B. Subject to approved manufacturers list by PAHW.
C. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I
calcium silicate.
D. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of
pipe.
E. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
F. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches (50 mm) beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating
below ambient air temperature.
2.05 FASTENER SYSTEMS
A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement

concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and
building materials where used.
2. Approved alternatives/substitutions under provision of the General Conditions of
Contract.
B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type [zinc-coated] [stainless] steel, for

use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
Contract.
2.06 PIPE STAND FABRICATION
A. Pipe Stands, General: Shop or field-fabricated assemblies made of manufactured

corrosion-resistant components to support roof-mounted piping.
B. Compact Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic unit with integral-rod-roller, pipe clamps, or V-
shaped cradle to support pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration.
Contract.
C. Low-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: One-piece stainless-steel base unit with plastic roller, for
roof installation without membrane penetration.
a. Subject to approved manufacturers list by PAHW.
b. Approved alternatives/substitutions under provision of the General
Conditions of Contract.
D. High-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: Assembly of base, vertical and horizontal members, and
pipe support, for roof installation without membrane penetration.
2. Base: Stainless steel.
3. Vertical Members: Two or more cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel,
continuous-thread rods.
4. Horizontal Member: Cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel rod with plastic or
stainless-steel, roller-type pipe support.
E. High-Type, Multiple-Pipe Stand: Assembly of bases, vertical and horizontal members,

and pipe supports, for roof installation without membrane penetration.
2. Bases: One or more plastic.
3. Vertical Members: Two or more protective-coated-steel channels.
4. Horizontal Member: Protective-coated-steel channel.
5. Pipe Supports: Galvanized-steel, clevis-type pipe hangers.
F. Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe support made from

structural-steel shape, continuous-thread rods, and rollers for mounting on permanent
stationary roof curb.
2.07 PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS
A. Description: IAPMO PS 42, system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for positioning
piping in pipe spaces for plumbing fixtures for commercial applications.
Contract.
2.08 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-

steel shapes.
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and
galvanized.
B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink
and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping
systems and equipment.
B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment
that will not have field-applied finish.
D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments

are in direct contact with copper tubing.
E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
F. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as

specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated
or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to DN 750).
2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F (49
to 232 deg C) pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16 (DN 100 to DN 400), requiring up to 4
inches (100 mm) of insulation.
3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension
of pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 (DN 20 to DN 600), requiring clamp flexibility and up
to 4 inches (100 mm) of insulation.
4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes,
NPS 1/2 to NPS 24 (DN 15 to DN 600), if little or no insulation is required.
5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 15
to DN 100), to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe
erection.
6. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension
of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8 (DN 20 to DN 200).
7. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated
stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 15 to DN 200).
8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated
stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 15 to DN 200).
9. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of
noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2 (DN 15 to DN 50).
10. Split Pipe-Ring with or without Turnbuckle-Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11):
For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8 (DN 10 to
DN 200).
11. Extension Hinged or 2-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of
noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 3 (DN 10 to DN 80).
12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15
to DN 750).
13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or
contraction.
14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36
(DN 100 to DN 900), with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor
flange.
15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36
(DN 100 to DN 900), with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor
flange and with U-bolt to retain pipe.
16. Adjustable, Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support
for pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 (DN 65 to DN 900), if vertical adjustment is
required, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
17. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30
(DN 25 to DN 750), from 2 rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion
and contraction might occur.
18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, NPS 2-1/2
to NPS 20 (DN 65 to DN 500), from single rod if horizontal movement caused by
expansion and contraction might occur.
19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42
(DN 50 to DN 1050), if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and
contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.
20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to
NPS 24 (DN 50 to DN 600), if small horizontal movement caused by expansion
and contraction might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary.
21. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes,
NPS 2 to NPS 30 (DN 50 to DN 750), if vertical and lateral adjustment during
installation might be required in addition to expansion and contraction.
G. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping

system Sections, install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers,
NPS 3/4 to NPS 20 (DN 20 to DN 500).
2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers,
NPS 3/4 to NPS 20 (DN 20 to DN 500), if longer ends are required for riser
clamps.
H. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches (150 mm) for
heavy loads.
2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) piping
installations.
3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.
4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various
types of building attachments.
5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232
deg C) piping installations.
I. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to
suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-
joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.
3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange
of beams, channels, or angles.
4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange
of beams.
5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if
loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.
6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required
tangent to flange edge.
8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.
9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of
steel I-beams for heavy loads.
10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of
steel I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.
11. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to
structural steel.
12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from
above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb (340 kg).
b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb (680 kg).
c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb (1360 kg).
13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is
required.
15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to
linear horizontal movement where headroom is limited.
J. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with
insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by
manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
K. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping
movement.
2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not
exceed 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).
3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger
with springs.
4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or
thermal expansion in piping systems.
5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping
system from hanger.
6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and
limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping
system from base support.
7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and
limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping
system from trapeze support.
8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of
stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected
equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-
adjustment capability. These supports include the following types:
a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.
b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.
c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze
member.
L. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are
not specified in piping system Sections.
M. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are
not specified in piping system Sections.
N. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building

attachments where required in concrete construction.
O. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply
and waste piping for plumbing fixtures.
3.02 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install
hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from
building structure.
B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange
for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated
trapeze pipe hangers.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe
size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified
above for individual pipe hangers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being
supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1.
C. Fiberglass Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with applicable portions of MSS SP-69 and
MSS SP-89. Install hangers and attachments as required to properly support piping
from building structure.
D. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and
support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.
E. Fiberglass Strut System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and
support together on field-assembled fiberglass struts.
F. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.
G. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete
slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick in concrete after concrete is placed and
completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool
manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's
operating manual.
2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and
completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
H. Pipe Stand Installation:

1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounting Type: Assemble components and
mount on smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane.
2. Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand
and mount on permanent, stationary roof curb. Refer to Division 07 Section
"Roof Accessories" for curbs.
I. Pipe Positioning System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and
waste piping connections to each plumbing fixture. Refer to Division 22 Section
"Plumbing Fixtures" for plumbing fixtures.
J. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts,
washers, and other accessories.
K. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.
L. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping
systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action
of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
M. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
N. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install
additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers,
NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete
inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars
through openings at top of inserts.
O. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and
stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
P. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so
maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not
exceeded.
Q. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project
through insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger
shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9 for building
services piping.
2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier
is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel
weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger if pipe is
installed on rollers.
3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier.
Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel
weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger if pipe is
installed on rollers.
4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 8 to DN 90): 12 inches (305 mm) long and
0.048 inch (1.22 mm) thick.
b. NPS 4 (DN 100): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick.
c. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): 18 inches (457 mm) long and
d. NPS 8 to NPS 14 (DN 200 to DN 350): 24 inches (610 mm) long and
e. NPS 16 to NPS 24 (DN 400 to DN 600): 24 inches (610 mm) long and
5. Pipes NPS 8 (DN 200) and Larger: Include wood inserts.
6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.
7. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping
insulation.
3.03 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to

support equipment above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.
C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
3.04 METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and
equipment supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that
cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and
with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and
contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to

achieve indicated slope of pipe.
B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches (40
mm).
3.06 PAINTING
A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas
immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop
painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils
(0.05 mm).
B. Touch Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 09
painting Sections. Section "High-Performance Coatings."
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 22 0548
VIBRATION AND NOISE CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Inertia bases.
B. Vibration isolation.
A. Ensure structural integrity by avoiding resonance and by restricting vibration.
B. Do not exceed the allowable noise level, 70 dBA measured at a distance of 1200 mm (4
feet) from source, by proper engineering of equipment assemblies.
1.03 SPEED AND BALANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR ROTATING EQUIPMENT
A. Fans and other rotating mechanical equipment shall not operate at speeds in excess of
80 % of their true critical speed.
B. Vertical vibration of rotating equipment shall not be greater than the levels indicated.
The vibration shall be measured on the equipment or steel frame equipment base when
the equipment is mounted on its vibration isolation mounts. If the equipment has an
inertia base, the allowable vibration level is reduced by the ratio of the equipment weight
alone to the equipment weight plus the inertia base weight.
Equipment Speed Vibration Displacement (Mils Peak-to-Peak)

Under 600 rpm 4
600 to 1000 rpm 3
1000 to 2000 rpm 2
Over 2000 rpm 1
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings, product data, samples and manufacturer's installation

instructions.
B. Include data for each equipment and size of unit showing isolation type, efficiency,
stiffness, natural frequency, and transmissibility at lowest operating speed of equipment,
actual load, static deflection under actual load etc.
KEO/19-3262-0000 22 0548/1 Vibration and Noise Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment
C. Submit manufacturer's certificates in respect of static and dynamic loading, fundamental
frequency, average noise level at full load conditions etc. of all equipment.
D. Indicate vibration isolator locations, on general layout and plant room detail drawings.
E. Flexible pipe connector shop drawings data to include maximum allowable temperature
and pressure rating, overall face to face length, live length, hose wall thickness, and
fundamental frequency of assembly.
F. Submit manufacturer's certificates that the vibration isolators are properly selected and
installed in equipment assemblies, to meet with, or to exceed the Contract requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
B. TYPE "1" - ISOLATING PADS: This type of vibration isolators shall be generally used
where the vibrating force is transmitted directly to ground or the vibrating force is very
small compared to the absorption capacity of the structural slab at higher levels.
C. TYPE "1A" - NEOPRENE RUBBER PADS: These shall be cross-ribbed, in multiple

layers or of sandwich type to achieve the required deflection. The adhesive used in
fabricating the pads shall be as recommended by the manufacturer.
D. TYPE "1B" - GLASS FIBER PADS: These shall be of pre-compressed fiberglass

construction and suitable to take upto 34 kg/sq.cm. (500 psi) load. The pads shall be
coated with elastometric neoprene rubber spray to protect the glass fiber and increase
the damping effect.
E. TYPE "1C" - CORK PADS: The cork pads shall be constructed from natural cork
granules compressed and steam baked to form slabs and shall have a density of 96 to
106 kg/cu.M (6 to 6.6 lbs/cu.ft). The cork pads shall be treated with hot Bitumen Asphalt
coating for protection of cork.
F. TYPE "2" - MOLDED NEOPRENE RUBBER MOUNTS: These shall be used where a
greater deflection is required than that for pads. The maximum deflection allowable is 12
mm (0.5 inch) on these rubber mounts. The normal shape of mount is conical with a
captive insert for attaching to equipment base.
G. TYPE "3" - FREE STANDING SPRING ISOLATORS: These shall be constructed with
open type stable spring and load plates at top and bottom with an adjustable bolt for
levelling. Neoprene rubber acoustical treatment shall be provided to prevent
transmission of very high frequency vibration and noise. The spring shall be so designed
that the horizontal stiffness is more than 75 % of vertical stiffness. The rated loads and
deflections for these springs shall allow additional 50 % travel to that of the rated
deflection before the springs are compressed solid, to accommodate any errors in actual
load distribution.
H. TYPE "4" - RESTRAINED SPRING ISOLATORS: These are similar to type "3", but with
additional restraints in the vertical direction. These isolators shall have hold down bolts
to limit vertical movement. The restraints should have adequate clearance so that they
are activated only when a temporary restraint is needed.
I. TYPE "5" - HOUSED SPRING ISOLATORS: These isolators are similar to type "4"
except that they consist of two telescoping houses. The contact surfaces of houses are
separated by resilient inserts such as Neoprene Sponge or equivalent material.
J. TYPE "6" - RUBBER HANGERS: These are similar to type "2" except that the conical
rubber mold is housed in a steel casing and have a through hole for the hanger rod. The
assembly should allow for 20 to 35 degrees angular movement for the hanging rod
without metal to metal contact.
K. TYPE "7" - SPRING HANGERS: These are similar to type "3" except that the spring is
mounted in a steel casing and used for suspension only. The assembly shall allow for
20 to 25 degrees angular movement for the hanging rod without metal to metal contact.
L. TYPE "8" - COMBINATION RUBBER & SPRING HANGER: This is a combination of

type "6" and "7" having all the specified characteristics therein.
M. TYPE "9" - THRUST RESTRAINTS: These are similar to type "7", but installed in pairs
to counteract the thrust caused by air pressure.
N. TYPE "10" - AIR SPRINGS: These shall consist of constant dry air supplying equipment
and air bellows. These shall be used where 150 mm (6 inch) or greater deflection is
required and natural frequencies do not exceed 80 Hz.
2.02 VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT BASES
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:

the following:
C. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Isolation Technology, Inc.
2. Mason Industries.
3. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.
4. Approved alternatives/substitutions under provisions of General Conditions of
Contract.
D. Type "A" - INTEGRAL BASES: This type is generally applicable for packaged chillers,
pumps, Air Handling Units, Air conditioning Units etc. which are supplied with factory
fabricated rigid base which can be mounted directly on vibration isolators. Equipment
manufacturer's recommendations should be sought for the number, locations and
weight distribution to select and install vibration isolators.
E. Type "B" - STEEL STRUCTURAL BASES: This type is generally subdivided into closed
frame type (Type B1) and rails type (Type B2). These are steel bases fabricated either
as per the approved shop drawing or as per the equipment manufacturer's
recommendation. These are used for equipment not having a rigid base. The type B1
shall be used where the vibration isolators are located within the equipment base and
type B2 shall be used when the vibration isolators are outside the equipment and the
type B2 base acts as a cradle. The minimum depth shall be 4 inches.
F. TYPE "C" CONCRETE INTERTIAL BASES: This type generally consists of structural
steel, fabricated pouring form with reinforcing bars. The concrete shall be poured on
site. The minimum depth shall be 6 inches.
G. TYPE "D" - ROOF CURBS: This type is generally used for Roof top Air Handling Units
with direct cutting through roof slab under the units. These roof curbs shall be supplied
by the unit manufacturer. The manufacturer's recommendations should be sought for
the number, locations and weight distribution to select and install vibration isolators.
H. TYPE "E" - HOUSE KEEPING PADS: These are concrete bases used for all equipment
with or without moving parts and shall be suitable for taking up the static and dynamic
loads (if any). Size base to extend 10 cms beyond equipment base in all directions and
minimum10 cms above finished floor level. Roughen floor slab beneath base for bond
and or provide rebar dowels in floor slab. Locate anchor bolts (welded on to a rebar
framework to maintain spacing) with templates supplied by the equipment manufacturer.
Provide steel angle frame with anchorage lugs at the corners. Also see table 3.03 for
exact heights.
I. TYPE "F" - FLOATING CONCRETE BASE: This is similar to Type "E" (House keeping
pads) but isolated at the bottom and all the side by either pre-compressed glass fiber
pads or Heavy density seasoned cork. The thickness of isolating pads vary from 25 to
100 mm (1 to 4 inch) depending on the application.
J. TYPE "G" - STRUCTURAL STEEL STANDS: These shall be provided to support

equipment, which are not floor mounted or hung from structure. Construct with structural
steel members and attach to wall or floor as appropriate. Provide factory fabricated
saddles or mounts for equipment as required.
2.03 FACTORY FINISHES
A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.
B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested

equipment before shipping.
1. Powder coating on springs and housings.
2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanize metal components for
exterior use.
3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use.
4. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic-control devices to
indicate capacity range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION
A. General
1. Refer to PART 2 - PRODUCTS of this specification for vibration isolation devices
identified on the schedule or specified herein.
B. Major Equipment
1. Unless otherwise shown or specified, all floor mounted major equipment shall be
set on concrete housekeeping pads as per recommendations of the
manufacturer. See schedule of mounting pads in this section.
2. Types and minimum static deflections of vibration isolation devices for major
equipment items shall be as scheduled on the drawings or specified here under.
3. Flexible duct connections shall be installed at all fan unit intakes, fan unit
discharges, and wherever else shown on the drawings.
4. Flexible pipe connections shall be installed at all pipe connections to vibration
isolated equipment in the positions shown on the drawings.
5. Electrical connections to vibration isolated equipment shall be flexible, as called
for in the electrical portion of the specification.
6. Snubbers or thrust restraints shall be installed on equipment as called for in the
schedule on the drawings or specified here under.
C. Miscellaneous Mechanical Equipment

1. Miscellaneous pieces of mechanical equipment such as domestic hot water
circulation pumps, hot water heat exchangers, storage tanks, and expansion
tanks shall be vibration isolated from the building structure by Type 2 or type 6
isolators unless their position in the piping system requires higher degrees of
isolation as called for under Pipe Isolation.
D. Piping
1. Provide flexible pipe connections in piping connected to vibration isolated
equipment, as called for and shown on drawings.
2. Anchor piping at the system side of the flexible connector.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT
A. General
1. Locations of all vibration isolation equipment shall be selected for ease of
inspection and adjustment as well as for proper operation.
2. Installation of vibration isolation equipment shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
B. Isolation Mounts
1. All vibration isolators shall be aligned squarely above or below mounting points of
the supported equipment.
2. Isolators for equipment with bases shall be located on the sides of the bases,
which are parallel to the equipment shaft unless this is not possible because of
physical constraints.
3. If a housekeeping pad is provided, the isolators shall bear on the housekeeping
pad and the isolator base plate shall rest entirely on the pad.
4. Hanger rods for vibration isolated support shall be connected to structural beams
or joists, not from the floor slab between beams and joists. Provide intermediate
support members as necessary.
5. Vibration isolation hanger elements shall be positioned as high as possible in the
hanger rod assembly, but not in contact with the building structure, and so that
the hanger housing may rotate a full 360 degrees about the rod axis without
contacting any object.
6. Parallel running pipes may be hung together on a trapeze, which is isolated from
the building. Isolator deflections must be the largest determined by the provisions
for pipe isolation. Do not mix isolated and non-isolated pipes on the same
trapeze.
7. No pipes or equipment shall be supported from other pipes or equipment.
8. Resiliently isolated pipes shall not contact the building construction or other
equipment.
9. The installed and operating heights of vibration isolators supporting any
equipment shall be identical. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal
operation.
10. Adjust all leveling bolts and hanger rod bolts so that the isolated equipment is
level and in proper alignment with connecting ducts or pipes.
C. Bases
1. No equipment unit shall bear directly on vibration isolators unless its own frame
is suitably rigid to span between isolators and such direct support is approved by
the equipment manufacturer. This provision shall apply whether or not a base
frame is called for on the schedule. In the case that a base frame is required for
the unit because of the equipment manufacturer's requirements and is not
specifically called for on the equipment schedule, a base frame recommended by
the equipment manufacturer shall be provided.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, there is to be a minimum operating clearance of 38-
mm (1 1/2 inch) between inertia bases or steel frame bases and the floor
beneath the equipment. Position isolator mounting brackets and adjust isolators
so that the required clearance is maintained. The clearance space shall be
checked by the Contractor to ensure that no construction debris has been left to
short circuit or restrict the proper operation of the vibration isolation system.
D. Flexible Pipe Connections

1. Select flexible connections with axial and transverse movements, more than that
of the connected equipment. Use control cables where there is a chance of
exceeding the allowable axial movement.
2. Provide bronze union ends for flexible connections of 50-mm (2-inch) nom. dia.
and less, when used with copper piping.
E. Thrust Restraints
1. Snubbers shall be adjusted to clear the equipment base and to provide lateral
restraint during on / off cycling, but be out of contact during normal operation of
the equipment.
2. Thrust restraints shall be attached at the center line of thrust and symmetrically
on each of the units. Adjust the restraints to limit equipment movement to the
specified limit.
F. Resilient Penetration Sleeves / Seals

1. Penetration seals shall maintain an air tight seal around the penetrating element
and shall prevent rigid contact between the penetrating element and the building
structure. Fit the sleeve tightly to the building construction and seal airtight on
both sides of the construction penetrated with acoustical sealant.
3.03 SCHEDULE OF MOUNTING FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
No. EQUIPMENT BASE ISOLATOR DEFLECTION mm (inch)

TYPE
1. Unitary Pumps Type F 1C 6 (1/4)
3. Packaged Pump Sets Type F 1C 38 (1 ½)
on elevated slabs
4. Packaged Pump Sets Type F 1C 6 (1/4)
on raft
5. Control Panels Type E None
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.
B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating
height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of
contact during normal operation.
C. Adjust active height of sprint isolators.
D. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of

operation.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 22 0553
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1. Equipment labels.
2. Warning signs and labels.
3. Pipe labels.
4. Stencils.
5. Valve tags.
6. Warning tags.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each
identification material and device.
C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the
proposed content for each label.
D. Valve numbering scheme.
E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.
1.03 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.
C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 Subject to approved manufacturers list by PAHW.
KEO/19-3262-0000 22 0553/1 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment

2.02 EQUIPMENT LABELS
A. Metal Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Stainless steel, 0.025-inch (0.64-mm)] [Aluminum,
0.032-inch (0.8-mm) minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes
for attachment hardware.
2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not
less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).
3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is
less than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72
inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing
distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of
principal lettering.
4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel [rivets] [rivets or self-tapping screws] [self-tapping
screws].
5. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with
substrate.
B. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical
engraving, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment
hardware.
2. Letter Color: Black.
3. Background Color: [White.
4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71
deg C).
5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not
less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).
6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is
less than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72
inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing
distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of
principal lettering.
7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with
substrate.
C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number,

Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the
Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.
D. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-

inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing
numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the
Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment
schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
2.03 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS
A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving,
1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
B. Letter Color: Red.

C. Background Color: Black.
D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71 deg C).
E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than
2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).
F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less
than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830
mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include
secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification
instructions.
2.04 PIPE LABELS
A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with

lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.
B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to [partially cover] [cover
full] circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive

backing.
D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to
accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate
flow direction.
2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) high.
2.05 STENCILS
A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; and minimum
letter height of 3/4 inch (19 mm) for access panel and door labels, equipment labels,
and similar operational instructions.
1. Stencil Material: Aluminum.
2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, acrylic enamel black unless otherwise indicated.
Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form.
3. Identification Paint: Exterior, acrylic enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1
2.06 VALVE TAGS
A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) letters for piping system
abbreviation and 1/2-inch (13-mm) numbers.

1. Tag Material: Stainless steel, 0.025-inch (0.64-mm) minimum thickness, and
having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.
2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook.
B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond paper.
Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag),
location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or
modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and
similar special uses.
1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
2.07 WARNING TAGS
A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of

plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.
1. Size: Approximately 4 by 7 inches (100 by 178 mm).
2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire.
3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or
"DO NOT OPERATE."
4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of
identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible
primers, paints, and encapsulants.
3.02 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.
B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.
3.03 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 09 Section.
B. Stenciled Pipe Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured
pipe labels, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe labels complying with
ASME A13.1, on each piping system.
1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background.
2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking.
C. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished
spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and
plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:
1. Near each valve and control device.
2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal
units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of
concealed piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) along each run. Reduce intervals
to 25 feet (7.6 m) in areas of congested piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced
labels.
D. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Domestic Water Piping:
a. Background Color: Black.
b. Letter Color: Blue.
2. Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage Piping:
a. Background Color: White.
b. Letter Color: Black.
3.04 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION
A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves
within factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and
lawn-watering hose connections; and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures
and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.
B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color
scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:
1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:
a. Cold Water: 2 inches (50 mm), round.
b. Hot Water: 2 inches (50 mm), round.
2. Valve-Tag Color:
a. Cold Water: Natural.
b. Hot Water: Natural.
3. Letter Color:
a. Cold Water: Black.
b. Hot Water: Black.
3.05 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION
A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items
where required.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 22 0700
PLUMBING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Piping insulation.
B. Jackets and accessories.
1.02 RELATED WORKS
A. Division 22
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C 195 - Mineral fiber thermal insulation cement.
B. ASTM C 547 - Mineral fiber pre-formed pipe insulation.
C. ASTM C 552 - Cellular glass block and pipe thermal insulation.
D. ANSI/ASTM C553 - Mineral fiber Blanket and Felt Insulation.
E. ANSI/ASTM C612 - Mineral fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation.
F. ASTM B 209 - Aluminum and aluminum alloy sheet and plate.
G. ASTM E 84 - Surface burning characteristics of building materials (also NFPA

255 and UL 723).
H. ASTM E 96 - Permeance test procedures.
A. The work under this section shall include all labor, services, materials and equipment as
required for the proper installation of the piping and equipment insulation as hereinafter
specified and subject to the terms and conditions of the contract.
B. Applicator: Company specialized in piping and equipment insulation application with ten
(10) years minimum experience.
C. The Insulation materials shall be absorbing the noise.
KEO/19-3262-0000 22 0700/1 Plumbing Insulation

D. Materials shall have a self-extinguishing characteristic and shall not release toxic by-
products in combustion; flame spread / fuel contributed / smoke developed rating in
accordance with ASTM E 84, NFPA 255 and UL 723.
E. All insulation materials and accessories for piping and equipment shall meet the
requirements of The National Building Code, Section 200 and The National Fire Code,
Section, 220. Ratings shall be determined by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., "Method
of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials". All accessories and
materials such as coatings, adhesive and sealer are to be shipped to the job in
unopened containers as received from the manufacturer. These accessory materials are
to be applied at can consistency and are not to be diluted in any form.
1. All insulating materials shall have composite fire and fuel contributed and smoke
hazard ratings for insulation, jacket or facing, and adhesive used to adhere the
facing or jacket to the insulation. Rating as tested in accordance with ASTM E-
84 shall be less than:
a. Flame Spread - 25
b. Fuel Contributed & smoke developed - 50
2. All accessories, including adhesives, mastics, tapes, cements, etc., shall have
the same component ratings as listed above.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data, samples and manufacturer's installation instructions.
B. Submit schedule listing product description, list of materials and thickness for each
service, and locations.
C. Submit maintenance data and replacement material lists for each type of insulation.
Include this data in the maintenance manual.
D. Submit for The Engineer’s representative review, one sample of each type of insulation
with jackets and finishes representing the finished application of the particular insulating
material. Each sample shall be coded in a manner that will facilitate matching of the
respective sample with the schedule list and job application.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.02 PIPING INSULATION
A. Insulation Material
1. Type A: Pre-formed glass fiber sectional insulation; `ksi' value of 0.032 at 24
deg.C (`K' value of 0.23 at 77 deg.F), non-combustible; density 64 kg/cu.M (4

lbs/cu.ft), complete with factory applied kraft reinforced aluminum foil vapour
barrier, with self-sealing adhesive joints.
2. Type B: Pre-formed plastic cellular foam sectional insulation, `ksi' value of 0.035
at 24 deg.C (`K' value of 0.28 at 75 deg.F).
3. Type C: Aluminum foil backed, foamed plastic, self adhesive insulation tapes;
`ksi' value of 0.04 at 24 deg.C (`K' value of 0.28 at 75 deg.F).
B. Vapor Barrier Jackets

1. Kraft reinforced aluminum foil vapor barrier with two coats of anti-fungicidal
vapour barrier coating with self-sealing adhesive joints.
C. Protective Jackets
1. All vapor barrier material on top of insulation shall be polyester membrane
(synthetic fibre composition) with waterproof anti fungicidal vapor barrier mastic
fire resistive to NFPA 255. The polyester membrane shall have a mesh size of 9
x 8 (openings per square inch) with a maximum service temperature of 250°F.
Average weight of polyester cloth shall be 0.9 oz/sq. yard
2. Aluminum jackets: 0.70mm thick with corrugated finish.
D. Accessories
1. Insulation bands: Kraft reinforced aluminum foil tapes of minimum 50 mm (2 inch)
width, with self sealing adhesive.
2. Metal jacket bands: 10 mm (3/8 inch) wide; 0.38 mm (0.015 inch) thick aluminum.
3. Polyester membrane adhesive coating: Compatible with insulation, non-
flammable type, tough, vapour barrier, antifungicidal, abrasion resistant, applied
by brush or spray.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Install materials after piping has been tested and approved and painted with two coats
of approved primer paint, where applicable.
B. Clean piping of all dirt prior to installation.
C. Clean surfaces for adhesives.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Continue insulation with vapour barrier through penetrations.
C. In exposed piping, locate insulation cover seams in least visible locations.
D. On insulated piping with vapour barrier, insulate fittings, valves, unions, flanges,
strainers, flexible connections, and expansion joints.
E. On insulated piping without vapour barrier and piping conveying fluids 60 °C (140 °F) or
less, do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of
insulation at such locations.

F. Provide an insert, not less than 150 mm (6 inch) long, of same thickness and contour as
adjoining insulation, between support shield and piping, but under the finish jacket, on
piping 50 mm (2 inch) nom. dia. or larger, to prevent insulation from sagging at support
points. Inserts shall be cellular glass or other heavy density insulating material suitable
for the planned temperature range. Factory fabricated inserts shall be used.
G. Where glass fiber rigid sectional insulation is specified, insulate fittings flanges and
valves by applying mineral wool cement, maintaining thickness of insulation same as for
adjoining pipe. Finish with jacketing as specified.
H. Neatly finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
I. Provide mitered bends on insulation shells at pipe fittings and finish neatly.
J. Use adhesives at joints of cellular plastic insulation.
K. No covering or insulation materials shall be applied to any piping or item of equipment

until all tests have been completed and the work is proven sound and free from any
defects
L. Insulation on all pipe strainers shall have removable cover for cleaning.
3.03 INSULATION SCHEDULE FOR PIPING
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PIPING TYPE PIPE SIZE THICKNESS
(Section 2.02A) mm (inch) mm (inch)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A. Domestic hot water supply

piping
1. In partition walls, or chases C All sizes 6 (1/4)
2. All other areas A 50 (2) and
under 19 (3/4)
65 (2 1/2)
and over 25 (1)
B. Domestic cold water supply B All sizes 12 (1/2)

piping in ceiling spaces
used as HVAC return
plenums.
C. Storm water drainage B All sizes 12 (1/2)

piping in ceiling spaces
used as HVAC return
plenums.
3.04 PROTECTIVE JACKETS
A. Domestic hot water supply, return and piping in plant areas: Canvas jacketing with
adhesive coating shall be applied.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 22 1116
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes domestic water piping and water meters inside the building.
B. Water meters will be furnished and installed by utility company.
C. Water meters will be furnished by utility company for installation by Contractor.
D. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 22 Section "Facility Water Piping Specialties" for water distribution piping
specialties.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. PP-R: Polypropylene random plastic.
A. Provide components and installation capable of producing domestic water piping

systems with 125 psig (860 kPa), unless otherwise indicated.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data and Samples: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings and water meters.
B. Water Samples: Specified in Part 3 "Cleaning" Article.
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping System Components and Related Materials," for
plastic, potable domestic water piping and components. Include marking "NSF-pw" on
piping.
C. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1
through 9," for potable domestic water piping and components.
KEO/19-3262-0000 22 1116/1 Facility Water Distribution Piping

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.02 REFERENCES
A. DIN 16833 Non-cross linked pipes of polyethylene with increased temperature

resistance (PE-RT) 5 layers pipes).
B. ANSI B 16.3 - Malleable iron threaded fittings class 150 and 300.
C. ANSI B 2.1 - Pipe threads.
D. ANSI B 16.5 - Steel flanges.
E. ANSI B 16.1 - Cast iron flanges.
F. BS 4375 - PTFE tape for pipe thread sealing application.
G. DIN 8078 Polypropylene (PP) Pipes, general quality requirements.
H. DIN 8077 Polypropylene (PP) Pipes, dimensions.
I. DIN 16962ff Pipe Joint assemblies and fittings for polypropylene pressure pipes.
J. ANSI B 16.18- Cast bronze solder joints pressure fittings.
K. ANSI B 16.21- Non-metallic gaskets for pipe flanges.
L. API 600 - General design specifications for gate, globe and check valves.
M. ANSI B 16.34- Pressure temperature ratings for valves.
N. ANSI B 16.10- Face to face dimensions of cast iron gate, globe and check valves.
O. ANSI B 16.24- End flange dimensions of bronze valves.
P. ANSI B 16.1 - End flange dimensions of cast iron valves.
Q. ASME Sec. 9 - Welding and brazing qualifications.
R. AWS A 5.8 - Brazing filler metal.
S. AWS D 10.9 - Standard for building services piping.
T. ASME - Boiler and pressure vessel code.
U. ASTM D 3212 - Flexible elastomeric joints.
V. ASTM F 477 - Electrometric seals (gaskets) for joining plastic pipe.
W. ANSI B 2.1 - Pipe threads.
X. ANSI B 16.1 - Cast iron flanges.

2.03 PIPES AND FITTINGS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A. Fresh water Below grade up Polypropylene PP-R

supply connection to above FFL PN-20
to water tank/ and in buildings
tanker fill lines
B. Fresh water supply; Risers Polypropylene PP-R

cold, hot and hot up to wet areas PN-20
water return
C. Cold & Hot Inside wet area Polypropylene PP-R

Water Piping PN-20
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.04 PIPES
A. The polypropylene pipes exposed to direct sunlight should be permanently UV-

protected.
2.05 JOINTS
A. Type of joints.
1. Polypropylene (PP-R): Socket fusion, electro fusion or compression as
appropriate.
B. Pressure ratings of joints. All figures stated are working water / air pressures (WOG) at
121 deg.C (250 deg.F).
1. PP-R pipe : 2000 Kpa (290 psig).
2.06 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS
A. For pipe sizes 50 mm (2 inch) nom. dia. and under:

1. Unions of respective materials, solvent or fusion ends.
B. For pipe sizes 65 mm (2 1/2 inch) nom. dia. and over:

1. Plastic piping: Flanges of respective materials, solvent or fusion ends.
2. Use compressed fiber gaskets at all flanges (use of rubber gaskets is prohibited).
C. All flanges, unions and couplings shall be pressure rated as the pipe joints.
2.07 VALVES
A. Bronze and cast-iron, general-duty valves are specified in Division 22 Section "General-
Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."
B. All Valves shall be pressure rated as the pipe joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXCAVATION
A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth

Moving."
3.02 PIPE AND FITTING APPLICATIONS
A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be
used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flanges may be used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Grooved joints may be used on aboveground grooved-end piping.
D. Under-Building-Slab, Water-Service Piping on Service Side of Water Meter: Refer to

Division 22 Section "Facility Water Distribution Piping."
A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated,
the following requirements apply:
1. Shutoff Duty: Use bronze ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and
smaller. Use cast-iron butterfly or gate valves with flanged ends for piping
NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
2. Throttling Duty: Use bronze ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and
smaller. Use cast-iron butterfly valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2
(DN 65) and larger.
3. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.
B. Cast-iron, grooved-end valves may be used with grooved-end piping.
C. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing
fixtures or equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to
plumbing fixtures that do not have supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping
NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Use butterfly or gate valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65)
and larger.
D. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal
piping, and where required to drain water piping.
1. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and branches.
2. Install stop-and-waste drain valves where indicated.
A. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe
penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required
to make installation watertight.
B. Install wall penetration system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall.
Make installation watertight.
C. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with
valve, inside the building at each domestic water service entrance.
D. Install domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain and
plumb.
E. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility

company's requirements.
A. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-
free-alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with grooved-end-pipe or grooved-end-tube coupling

housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's
written instructions.
3.06 WATER METER INSTALLATION
A. Rough-in domestic water piping for water meter installation according to utility
company's requirements.
B. Water meters will be furnished and installed by utility company.
C. Install water meters according to AWWA M6 and utility's requirements.

1. Install displacement-type water meters with shutoff valve on water-meter inlet.
Install valve on water-meter outlet and valved bypass around meter unless
prohibited by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Install turbine-type water meters with shutoff valve on water-meter inlet. Install
valve on water-meter outlet and valved bypass around meter unless prohibited
by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Install compound-type water meters with shutoff valves on water-meter inlet and
outlet and on valved bypass around meter. Support meters, valves, and piping
on brick or concrete piers.
4. Install fire-service water meters with shutoff valves on water-meter inlet and
outlet and on full-size valved bypass around meter. Support meter, valves, and
piping on brick or concrete piers.
5. Install remote registration system according to standards of utility and of
authorities having jurisdiction.
3.07 CONNECTIONS
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to
join dissimilar piping materials.
D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve, and extend
and connect to the following:
1. Booster Pumps: Cold-water suction and discharge piping.
2. Water Heaters: Cold-water supply and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated,
but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections.

3. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 22 Section "Plumbing
Fixtures."
4. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than
equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection.
Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
A. Inspect domestic water piping as follows:

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and
approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before
inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of
authorities having jurisdiction:
a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before
concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having
jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance
with requirements.
3. Re-inspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test
or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for re-inspection.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Test domestic water piping as follows:

1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air
bound and that piping is full of water.
2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have
been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit
separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and
unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was
covered or concealed before it was tested.
4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above
operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials.
Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test
pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof
until satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
3.09 ADJUSTING
A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.
2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.
3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.
4. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and plugs used for temporary sealing
of piping during installation.
5. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.
6. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified
for application where used and are clean and ready for use.
7. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and
operation.
3.10 CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing domestic water piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired before using.
2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having
jurisdiction or, if methods are not prescribed, procedures described in either
AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or as described below:
a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not
appear at outlets.
b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least
50 ppm (50 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to
stand for 24 hours.
2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least
200 ppm (200 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for
three hours.
c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming
from system after the standing time.
d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.
Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.
B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.
B. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work
progresses.
3.11 PROTECTION: Give the following protective coating / wrapping to piping. All piping
above louvered ceilings shall be painted black.
C. Buried plastic piping in areas subjected to traffic loading:

1. Encasement with minimum 10cm thick, class K 140, plain concrete.
2. Colored metal coated plastic foil warning grids.
D. Plastic piping exposed to direct sunlight:

1. One layer of self adhesive, aluminum foil backed kraft tape with 10% overlap.
2. One layer of “Densopol 60” with 50% overlap.
3. Heavy canvas jacketing with Benjamin Foster finish.
E. Insulated plastic piping in technical areas and below grade pipe trenches.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 22 1119
FACILITY WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes the following domestic water piping specialties:

1. Vacuum breakers.
2. Backflow preventers.
3. Strainers.
4. Hose bibbs.
5. Drain valves.
6. Air vents.

1. Division 22 Section "Plumbing Equipment" for water filters in domestic water
piping.
A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig (860 kPa),
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data and Samples: For each type of product indicated.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

B. NSF Compliance:
1. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for
plastic domestic water piping components.
2. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects;
Sections 1 through 9."
KEO/19-3262-0000 22 1119/1 Facility Water Piping Specialties
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Subject to the approved manufacturers list by PAHW.
2.02 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. Intermediate Atmospheric-Vent Backflow Preventers:

1. Standard: ASSE 1012.
2. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications.
3. Size: NPS 3/4 (DN 20).
4. Body: Bronze.
5. End Connections: Union, solder joint.
6. Finish: Chrome plated.
B. Hose-Connection Backflow Preventers:

1. Standard: ASSE 1052.
2. Operation: Up to 10-foot head of water (30-kPa) back pressure.
3. Inlet Size: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 (DN 15 or DN 20).
4. Outlet Size: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.
5. Capacity: At least 3-gpm (0.19-L/s) flow.
C. Backflow-Preventer Test Kits

1. Description: Factory calibrated, with gages, fittings, hoses, and carrying case
with test-procedure instructions.
2.03 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
A. Y-Pattern Strainers
1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; cast iron with interior lining
complying with AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, epoxy coating and] for NPS 2-1/2
(DN 65) and larger.
3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-
1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Perforation Size:
a. Strainers NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: 0.020 inch (0.51 mm).
b. Strainers NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): 0.045 inch (1.14 mm).
c. Strainers NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: 0.10 inch (2.54 mm).
6. Drain: Factory-installed, hose-end drain valve.
2.04 HOSE BIBBS
A. Hose Bibbs:
1. Standard: ASME A112.18.1 for sediment faucets.
2. Body Material: Bronze.
3. Seat: Bronze, replaceable.
4. Supply Connections: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 (DN 15 or DN 20) threaded or solder-
joint inlet.
5. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.
6. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa).
7. Vacuum Breaker: Integral or field-installation, nonremovable, drainable, hose-
connection vacuum breaker complying with ASSE 1011.
8. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze, or chrome or nickel plated.
9. Finish for Service Areas: Rough bronze.
10. Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated.
11. Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle or operating key.
12. Operation for Service Areas: Operating key.
13. Operation for Finished Rooms: Operating key.
14. Include operating key with each operating-key hose bib.
15. Include integral wall flange with each chrome- or nickel-plated hose bib.
2.07 DRAIN VALVES
A. Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves.
2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig (2760-kPa) minimum CWP.
3. Size: NPS ¾ (DN 20).
4. Body: Copper alloy.
5. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable.
7. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel.
8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.
9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with
ASME B1.20.7 and cap with brass chain.
B. Gate-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP-80 for gate valves.
2. Pressure Rating: Class 125.
3. Size: NPS ¾ (DN 20).
4. Body: ASTM B 62 bronze.
5. Inlet: NPS ¾ (DN 20) threaded or solder joint.
6. Outlet: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 and cap with brass
chain.
C. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for ball valves or MSS SP-80 for gate valves.
2. Pressure Rating: 200-psig (1380-kPa) minimum CWP or Class 125.
3. Size: NPS ¾ (DN 20).
4. Body: Copper alloy or ASTM B 62 bronze.
5. Drain: NPS 1/8 (DN 6) side outlet with cap.
2.08 AIR VENTS
A. Bolted-Construction Automatic Air Vents:

1. Body: Bronze.
2. Pressure Rating: 125-psig (860-kPa) minimum pressure rating at 140 deg F (60
deg C).
3. Float: Replaceable, corrosion-resistant metal.
4. Mechanism and Seat: Stainless steel.
5. Size: NPS 3/8 (DN 10) NPS ½ (DN 15) minimum inlet.
6. Inlet and Vent Outlet End Connections: Threaded.

B. Welded-Construction Automatic Air Vents:
1. Body: Stainless steel.
2. Pressure Rating: 150-psig (1035-kPa) minimum pressure rating.
3. Float: Replaceable, corrosion-resistant metal.
4. Mechanism and Seat: Stainless steel.
5. Size: NPS 3/8 (DN 10) minimum inlet.
6. Inlet and Vent Outlet End Connections: Threaded.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 22 Section “Common Work Results for Plumbing” for piping joining
materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.
B. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems
and to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination.
Comply with authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system.
2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with
air-gap fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at
least two pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air-gap
device attached to or under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are not
acceptable for this application.
3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.
C. Install water regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and bypass with memory-stop
balancing valve. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet.
D. Install water control valves with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and bypass with globe
valve. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet.
E. Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted.
F. Install temperature-actuated water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on
inlets and with shutoff valve on outlet.
1. Install thermometers and water regulators if specified.
2. Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified.
G. Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each control valve, water pressure-
reducing valve, solenoid valve, and pump.
H. Install air vents at high points of water piping. Install drain piping and discharge onto
floor drain.
I. Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain
trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust
valve for proper flow.
J. Install drainage-type, trap-seal primer valves as lavatory trap with outlet piping pitched
down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or
inlet fitting.

K. Install trap-seal primer systems with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a
minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust
system for proper flow.
3.02 CONNECTIONS

indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties.
B. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section “Grounding and Bonding for

Electrical Systems.”
C. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section “Low-Voltage Electrical Power

Conductors and Cables.”
3.03 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment

nameplate or sign on or near each of the following:
1. Pressure vacuum breakers.
2. Intermediate atmospheric-vent backflow preventers.
3. Water pressure-reducing valves.
4. Calibrated balancing valves.
5. Primary, thermostatic, water mixing valves.
6. Manifold, thermostatic, water-mixing-valve assemblies.
7. Photographic-process, thermostatic, water-mixing-valve assemblies.
8. Primary water tempering valves.
9. Outlet boxes.
10. Supply-type, trap-seal primer valves.
11. Trap-seal primer systems.
B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate

safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in
addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 22 Section
“Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.”
A. Perform the following tests and prepare test reports:

1. Test each pressure vacuum breaker and double-check, detector-assembly
backflow preventer according to authorities having jurisdiction and the device’s
reference standard.
B. Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest as
specified above.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves.
B. Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves.

C. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated water mixing valves.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 22 1123.13
DOMESTIC WATER PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
This Technical Specification document is issued as a supplement to Local Construction

Specification. The Local Construction Specification shall form the basis of the Project
Specification. In case of contradiction or discrepancy between Local Construction
Specification and Technical Specification, CONTRACTOR shall incorporate whichever is
more stringent. Where a question remains on which requirement is more stringent,
CONTRACTOR shall submit the issue to Client and/or Client Representative in writing. The
decision of Client and/or Client Representative shall be considered to be final.
A. This Section includes constant and variable speed, multiplex, packaged booster
pumps for domestic water piping systems.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. VFC: Variable frequency controller(s).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each packaged booster pump specified. Include certified
performance curves with operating points plotted on curves; and rated capacities of
selected models, furnished specialties, and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: For packaged booster pumps and accessories. Include plans,
elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. .
1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural
analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators
and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.
3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and
attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor
slides and rails and equipment mounting frames.
4. Wiring Diagrams: Detail power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that packaged

booster pumps, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in
Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment." Include the following:
KEO/19-3262-0000 22 1123.13/1 Domestic Water Packaged Booster Pumps

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on
actual test of assembled components or on calculation.
event."
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity
and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification
is based and their installation requirements.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each packaged booster pump to include in
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of

packaged booster pumps and are based on the specific system indicated.

C. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9 for piping.
D. Regulatory Requirements
1. Conform to the requirements and recommendations of the following organizations:
a. National Sanitation Federation (NSF) / Water Regulations

Advisory Service (WRAS)
b. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).
c. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC).
2. All equipment shall have labels attached permanently, indicating:
a. Name of manufacturer.
b. Model no. and serial no.
c. Certified ratings.
d. Maximum operating parameters
E. Packaged booster pumps shall be listed and labeled as pumping systems by testing
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.06 WARRANTY

replace components of packaged booster pumps that fail in materials or workmanship
a. Faulty operation of pumps, controls, or accessories.
b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond
normal use.
2. Warranty Period for Pumps and Controls: Two years from date of Substantial
Completion.
3. Warranty Period for Accessories: Two years from date of Substantial
Completion.
maintenance of all the equipment furnished under this section. Spare parts in a
location designated by the Engineer or the Employer.
B. All spare parts and maintenance equipment shall be provided in original packing,
clearly identified and labelled. Provide complete schedules of spare parts and
maintenance equipment clearly cross-referenced with the “Record Drawings” and
maintenance instructions and manuals.
C. All spare parts and maintenance equipment shall be as recommended by the

equipment manufacturer and shall be subject to the final approval of the Engineer.
D. Spare parts and maintenance equipment provided shall, as a minimum, equal the
items used during the two (2) years maintenance period. The Contractor shall carefully
log all spare parts utilized during maintenance period.
1.08 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER
2.02 QUALIFICATIONS
A. The manufacturer shall have a minimum of twenty years’ experience in the design,
manufacture and testing of pumps.
2.03 MULTIPLES, CONSTANT-SPEED BOOSTER PUMPS
A. Packaged pump sets should be factory assembled and manufacturer/supplier shall

assume unit responsibility.
B. Pumps: Vertical multistage, centrifugal type of 2900 rpm speed. All wetted areas shall
be of stainless steel 316. Booster sets shall be of variable speed nature, with individual
VFD controller for each pump on the set, maintaining a constant discharge pressure
by continuously matching the pump speed relative to the actual water consumption in
the network. Transfer pump sets and A/C make up pump sets shall work on pressure
networks (similar to booster pump sets but without VFD controllers) with delayed
action float valves in the fed tanks controlling their operation. Pumps materials of
construction shall be as follows:
1. Pump body Stainless steel AISI 316.
2. Lower support (where applicable) Stainless steel AISI 316.
3. Impeller Stainless steel AISI 316.
4. Diffuser Stainless steel AISI 316L.
5. Upper spacer (where applicable) Stainless steel AISI 316L.
6. Outer sleeve Stainless steel AISI 316L.
7. Shaft Stainless steel AISI 316 (min.)
8. Adapter Cast iron.
9. Base (where applicable) Aluminum.
10. Wear ring (where applicable) Technopolymer PPS
11. Coupling Aluminium on pumps up to 4 KW Cast
iron (for all sizes)
12. Upper head (where applicable) Stainless steel AISI 316.
13. Seal housing Stainless steel AISI 316.
14. Mechanical seal Silicon carbide/carbon/EPDM.
15. Elastomers EPDM.
16. Coupling protection Stainless steel AISI 304.
17. Shaft sleeve Tungsten carbide
18. Bushing Ceramic (pumps up to 20m3/hr)
19. Tungsten carbide (other pumps)
20. Bushing for diffuser (where applicable) Carbon
21. Fill/Drain Plugs: Stainless steel AISI 316.
22. Tie Rods Stainless steel AISI 431.
23. Pumps shall be suitable for handling potable water (WRAS certified).
C. System piping shall be type “K” copper with brazed joints. Manifold ends shall be
flanged.
D. Valves:
Pumps with suction and discharge connection 2” and smaller shall each be fitted with
bronze PN 25 gate valves at the suction and discharge sides and brass spring loaded
self closing check valve at the discharge side.
Pumps with suction and discharge connections 2 1/2” or bigger shall each be fitted
with internally and externally epoxy coated ductile iron valves in PN 16 or PN 25 flange
pressure ratings (according to pump closed valve head) at the suction and discharge
sides and wafer style self closing check valve at the discharge side.

E. Base Frame: Fabricated steel, with resilient mounting for pumps, where required.
F. Pressure vessel (for pressure controlled sets only): Welded steel construction with
butyl rubber diaphragm, hooded charging valve, suitable for 10 bars, or 25 bar
pressure rating (based on pump closed valve head), pre-charged with nitrogen.
Pressure tanks in pressure ratings of PN 16 and above must have flanged
connections.
The pressure tank capacity shall be suitable for limiting the number of pump starts to
15 per hour.
G. Relief Valve: Provide suitable bypass pressure relief valve from discharge to suction
manifolds to prevent pump operation at shutoff head.
H. Accessories: Compound gauge at suction manifold and pressure gauge at discharge

manifold; flexible connections at suction and discharge connections.
I. Pump Motor:
Pump motor shall fall within the range normally referred to as efficiency Class 1.
Pump motors shall be standard and easily found on the market. On pumps with higher
heads, this shall be achieved through an axial load compensation system.
Please refer Section 22 0513 for other details.
J. Finishing: The assembly shall be given two (2) coats of primer and one coat of gloss
enamel at the factory.
K. VFD Controllers:
The microprocessor based variable speed pump set controller shall have the following
features:
The controller shall be able to maintain a constant system pressure, a constant

differential pressure, or a constant flow in the system depending on the Engineer’s
choice. For this, the controller shall be starting or stopping the pumps sequentially
according to the rate of consumption.
The controller shall also be able to flow a system curve i.e. it shall be able to achieve
automatic motor speed regulation in order to compensate for increased friction losses
in the system during periods of high water demand.
The controller shall include one VFD for every pump in the pumping system. The
controller can be pump mounted or stand mounted. In this case the controller shall
consist of multiple VFD (depending on the number of pumps) fixed in one control
panel.
The controller shall have an IP 55 enclosure with thermal resistor for mounting inside
the motor terminal box.
It shall be possible to mount the controller on any fan cooled standard 240/415 volt,
three phase TEFC motor with Class F insulation where the motor fan will provide the
necessary cooling for the controller.
The controller shall prevent motor noise from occurring by generating, through the
frequency converter in the controller a sinus evaluated pulse with modulated output
voltage with a switching frequency, selectable between 2.5 kHz and 8 kHz.
The controller shall have an internal protection against overload and short circuit. It
shall work controlled with sinusoidal current synthesis and dynamic over current
limitation.
The controller shall have a control unit incorporated in it containing foil covered push
buttons and a two line display to show the set value, the operational status, the hours
of operation, the output frequency, the control and fault signs in plain text, programmed
in different languages up to the client’s choice.
The Controller shall have dry contacts for “pump running” and a summarized “pump
fault” for communication with an external Building Automation System (BAS).
The controller shall have RS 485 interface for communication between multiple pumps
in a multi pump system.
The Controller has three color LEDs for signalling “Power On”, “Pump Run”, and
“Pump Fault”.
It shall be possible to lock the controller completely or in parts via a password.

1. The controller shall contain terminals for.
2. External Start/Stop.
3. External low water protection.
4. Motor thermal resistor.
5. Dry contact for “Pump Running” indication.
6. Dry contact for “Pump Fault” indication.
7. Analogue output signal of 0-10 VDC (speed or actual value).
8. Digital input for switch over between 2 different set points.
9. Analogue input (4-20mA or 0-10V) for remote set point.
10. Input for actual value sensor 4 – 20 mA, including the supply voltage of 15 VDC
for a two wire transmitter.
11. RS 485 interface.
12. Motor connections.
13. Connections for the power supply.
In a multi pump system the controller built-in microprocessor shall ensure the following
features:
Automatic operation of lead and leg pumps, according to the demand.

Cyclic changeover of lead and leg pumps, also in case of a failure.
Start of the next pump in case that one pump gets out of order.
Programmable daily test run.
The controller shall show, at any time, the last 5 errors that have occurred.
The controller shall be able to stop the pumps immediately when there is no
consumption via an integrated pressure controller.
The controller shall allow for the control of the pressure or the differential pressure
along a system curve. It shall be possible to control the flow rate of the pump internally
without the need for additional flow measurement. The discharge of the pump shall
be calculated via the motor speed indirectly and it shall be possible to program the
controller to compensate for varying friction losses following a programmable system
curve.
It shall also be possible to program separate “conveyor limit” whereby the unit will stop
and indicate an error in case the pump does not reach this limit within a programmable
time. This feature shall be used for the dry run protection of the pump set.
It shall be possible to use the included power supply to supply the external pressure
or flow sensor, which will give a 4-20 mA signal to the controller.
The controller shall be supplied with anti-condensation heaters that shall switch on
when the units are in the standby mode.
Each controller shall be supplied with a pressure transducer (wherever the system is
a constant pressure system), transducer connection cable and transducer mounting
hardware as standard. The pressure transducer shall be of stainless steel AISI 316
with a viton gasket and shall be designed for a pressure of 10 bar or 25 bar depending
on the application. If constant flow is required then an orifice plate with a differential
pressure transducer is available. The measured differential pressure shall then be
converted into flow and shall be used to adjust the pump running speed.
L. Capacity: Schedules on Drawings for types and capacities.
2.01 MOTORS
A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type,
and efficiency requirements for motors.
1. Motor Sixes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so
driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for
electrical devices and connections specified in NFPA 70.
2.02 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Description: Corrugated, bronze inner tubing covered with bronze wire braid. Include
copper-tube ends or bronze flanged ends, braze-welded to tubing. Include 175-psig
(1200-kPa) minimum working-pressure rating and ends according to the following:
1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded. Provide flanged ends if pump has
flanged connections.
2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged.
2.03 BUILDING-AUTOMATION-SYSTEM INTERFACE
A. Provide auxiliary contacts in pump controllers for interface to building automation

system. For details refer to building automation system point schedule.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for packaged booster pumps to verify actual locations of

connections before booster pump installation.
3.02 CONCRETE BASES

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases. Verify structural requirements with
structural engineer.
B. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated for packaged booster pumps. Refer to
Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."
indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around full perimeter
of base.
diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be imbedded.
4. Install anchor bolts to elevation required for proper attachment to supported
equipment.
C. Cast-in-place concrete materials and placement requirements are specified in

Division 03.
3.03 SELECTION
A. Pump motors shall be selected for the maximum loading of the selected impeller.
B. Pumps shall be selected with the operating points within 20 % on either side of the
maximum efficiency point.
C. The maximum and minimum impeller sizes shall not be selected for unit pumps, as far
as possible.
D. Coded colors shall be used for finishing equipment of different services.
3.04 COORDINATION
A. The size of door ways and other accesses to technical areas shall be coordinated to
ensure that these are amply sized to allow for the movement of equipment.
B. Hooks, rails or other provisions shall be provided to allow for hoisting or movement of
equipment in technical areas.
C. Data on heat loss to surroundings from equipment located in air conditioned areas
shall be furnished to the HVAC trade.
D. Data on the required power supplies shall be furnished to the Electrical trade.
3.05 INSTALLATION
A. Clearances shall be provided around equipment for operation, maintenance and

ventilation.
B. Manufacturer's installation instructions shall be complied with in all respects.
C. Lifting devices shall be attached to equipment only at designated points. The

equipment shall not be dropped or subjected to any kind of shock.

D. The services of manufacturer's specialist representative shall be provided for
commissioning of equipment.
3.01 CONNECTIONS
A. Coordinate piping installations and specialty arrangements with schematics on

Drawings and with requirements specified in piping systems. If Drawings are explicit
enough, these requirements may be reduced or omitted.
B. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings

C. Connect domestic water piping to packaged booster pumps. Install suction and
discharge pipe equal to or greater than size of unit suction and discharge headers.
1. Install flexible connectors on piping connections to unit suction and discharge
piping. Install flexible connectors same size as piping.
2. Install shutoff valves on piping connections to each booster pump suction and
discharge piping. Install ball, butterfly, or gate valves same size as suction and
discharge piping. General-duty valves are specified in Division 22 Section
"General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."
3. Install union or flanged connections on pump suction and discharge piping at
connection to domestic water piping.
4. Install piping adjacent to packaged booster pumps to allow service and
maintenance.
D. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for

E. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power

3.02 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Retain first paragraph below to require a factory-authorized service representative to

perform startup service.
B. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform the following startup

service:
1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
2. Check piping connections for tightness.
3. Clean strainers if any.
4. Verify that pump controls are correct for required application.
C. Perform the following startup checks for each pump of packaged booster pump unit
before starting:
1. Verify bearing lubrication.
2. Prime pumps by opening suction valves and closing discharge valves, and
prepare pumps for operation.
3. Start motors.
4. Open discharge valves slowly.
5. Adjust settings.

D. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial
Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting packaged booster pumps to suit
actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project outside normal
occupancy hours for this purpose.
A. Install identifying equipment markers and equipment signs on booster pumps.

Labeling and identification materials are specified in Division 22 Section "Identification
for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
3.04 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain packaged booster pumps. Refer to
Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training"
END OF SECTION

SECTION 22 1200
FACILITY RCC POTABLE-WATER STORAGE TANKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes RCC reservoirs for storage of domestic and fire-suppression
water.
B. For Underground/Above ground reinforced concrete storage tanks see Architectural

drawings.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. CR: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.
B. NR: Natural rubber.
C. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
D. RCC Reinforced Cement Concrete
A. Structural Performance: Surface water-storage tank, including structural reinforcement

and foundation, shall be capable of withstanding the effects of dead and live gravity
loads and winds of 161 km/h.
B. Seismic Performance: Surface water-storage tank, including structural reinforcement

and foundation, shall be capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Thermal Movements: Surface water-storage tank, including structural reinforcement

and foundation, shall allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum
change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of
joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental
effects. Base engineering calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both
solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 67 ⁰C, ambient; 100 ⁰C, material surfaces.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, accessories, appurtenances, and furnished

specialties for each water-storage tank indicated. Indicate dimensions, wall thickness
KEO/19-3262-0000 22 1200/1 Facility RCC Potable-Water Tanks

insulation, finishes and coatings, required clearance, methods of assembly of
components and piping connections.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show

fabrication and installation details for each water-storage tank, including the following:
1. Tank, roof, and shell openings.
2. Safety railings and ladders.
3. Plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
4. Structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
5. Power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Bacteriological test results.
D. Field quality-control test reports.
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employ a qualified structural engineer to prepare calculations,

Shop Drawings, and other structural data for fabrication and erection of surface water-
storage tanks.
1. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for surface water-storage tanks,
accessories and specified appurtenances including Shop Drawings, based on
testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies
similar to those indicated for this Project.

C. Comply with NFPA 22, "Water Tanks for Private Fire Protection," for surface water-
storage tanks for fire-suppression water supply.
D. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects, Sections 1
to 9," for potable-water storage tanks. Include appropriate NSF marking.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Section 03 1000.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER
2.02 PUDDLE FLANGES FOR RCC WATER STORAGE TANK(S)
A. Puddle flanges shall be used for all connections to RCC water storage tanks. Details on
the Drawings shall be referred to for minimum dimensions.
B. Puddle flanges fabricated from schedule 80 wrot steel pipes and welding neck steel
flanges shall be used for connections to ferrous piping. The assembly shall be hot dip
galvanized after fabrication. For potable water tanks use stainless steel 316 pipes and
welding neck flanges.
C. Integral flanges with studs / cap nuts at wall face and loose, split flanges shall be used
to flash tanking membranes at the puddle flange.
2.03 FLOAT VALVE(S)
A. Modulating Type: Angle pattern, single seated, hydraulically operated, pilot controlled,
diaphragm type, normally closed valves of cast iron construction with flanged ends
complete with pilot assembly, type `K' copper capillary lines, mounting plate, plastic float
and operating rod, adjustable stops etc. complete.
B. Delayed Action Float Valves: Angle / globe pattern, single seated, hydraulically
operated, pilot controlled, diaphragm type, normally closed valve of cast iron
construction with flanged ends complete with pilot assembly, type 'K' copper capillary
lines, mounting plate, plastic float and operating rod, adjustable stops etc. complete.
2.04 SUCTION STRAINERS
A. For potable water: Shall be fabricated from line size stainless steel 316. Minimum total
area of perforations (6 mm size) shall be four (4) times the sectional area of the pipe.
B. For Non-potable water: Food grade epoxy coated cast iron body with integral flange and
12 mm perforations Fasteners shall be of corrosion resistant material like stainless steel
or high tensile brass.
2.05 VENTILATOR(S) FOR RCC WATER STORAGE TANK(S)
A. L-shaped pipe (schedule 80 wrot steel) with integral puddles at the water storage tank
wall, hot dip galvanized after fabrication; fitted with coated cast iron vandal proof hooded
vent cap with counter flashing collar, deep protective hood and recessed securing
screws
B. Air passages shall be covered with fine copper or plastic wire mesh to prevent the entry
of flies and pests into the tank.
2.06 LADDERS FOR RCC WATER STORAGE TANK(S)
A. Refer to Section 05 5000 “Metal Fabrication”.
2.07 ACCESS DOORS FOR RCC WATER STORAGE TANKS
A. Refer to Section 08 3113 “Access Doors and Frames”.
2.08 LEVEL INDICATORS FOR WATER STORAGE TANK(S)
A. Raw water storage tank

1. Controller / indicator with required nos. of switch assemblies in each tank.
2. Remote indicator panel in the plant room, containing the following:
a. Mains isolator interlocked with the door and power on indicator (red).
b. Remote indicator
c. High / low level indicators.
d. Alarm buzzer with test and mute facility.
e. Set of terminals / relays for inter connection with the filtration transfer
pump set, Building automation system etc.
3. The following functions shall be accomplished:
a. Water level indication (dial shall be calibrated in imperial gallons and
cubic meters).
b. High / low water audio-visual alarms.
c. Low water-cut out of booster pump set.
d. On site adjustment of alarm set points.
e. Provision (relays or volt free contacts) for hook up with the Building
Automation System for critical alarms.
B. Filtered Water Storage Tanks

1. Controller / indicator, with required Nos. of switch assemblies.
2. Remote indicator panel.
a. As in item A.1 above.
3. The following functions shall be accomplished:
a. Water level indication.
b. High / low water audio-visual alarms in the indicator panel.
c. Low water cut-out of domestic booster pump set at fire reserve level.
d. On site adjustment of alarm set points.
e. Provision for hook up with the Building automation system for critical
alarms.
2.09 ELECTRICAL WORKS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Conduiting: Heavy duty galvanized iron conduits (surface mounted) and painted sheet
steel trunking shall be used for wiring.
B. Wiring: Stranded copper 1.5 mm2, PVC insulated wires with crimped on, sheathed
terminal lugs shall be used for all interconnecting wiring. Joints shall not be allowed in a
single wire length. Terminals shall be numbered using slip-on ferrules for quick
identification.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CONCRETE, SURFACE WATER-STORAGE TANK INSTALLATION
A. Tank Wall: Construct tank wall and install accessories and appurtenances according to
AWWA D110 and the following:
1. Construct cast-in-place core wall with steel diaphragm. Install solid neoprene
bearing pad and (225-mm-) wide waterstop between wall and wall footing.
2. Install steel diaphragm. Apply shotcrete to interior of diaphragm to form core
wall.
a. Seal vertical joints in diaphragm with polysulfide, polyurethane, or epoxy
sealant; or double-fold with a mechanical seamer.

b. Sand blast exterior of core wall to provide a well-pitted surface free from
curing compounds, laitance, and form oils. Use (7.3 kg) of silica sand
(No. 16 grit) per square (meter) of surface area.
c. After sandblasting, wind wires or strands around exterior of core wall
separating wires by at least 2.5 wire diameters or (10 mm) to ensure that
mortar will be located between wires. Do not install wires at horizontal
level of pipe penetrations.
d. After installation of wires or strands, apply at least 3 coats of wet-mix
shotcrete to exterior of tank wall in layers of at least (10 mm) thick for a
minimum total thickness of (38 mm). Apply shotcrete when temperature
range is at least (2 deg C) and rising to a maximum temperature of (35
deg C). Do not apply shotcrete if temperature is (5 deg C) and falling.
e. Fill voids in wall-to-base joint and seal around waterstops, base pads, and
sponge fillers with polyurethane filler.
B. Tank Wall: Construct tank wall and install accessories and appurtenances according to
AWWA D115 and the following:
1. Install vertical prestressed wall with threadbars and screw nut anchors.
2. Sand blast exterior of core wall to provide well-pitted surface free from curing
compounds, laitance, and form oils. Use (7.3 kg) of silica sand (No. 16 grit) per
square (meter) of surface area.
3. Apply at least 3 coats of wet-mix shotcrete to exterior of tank wall in layers of at
least (10 mm) thick for a minimum total thickness of (38 mm). Apply shotcrete
when temperature range is at least (2 deg C) and rising to a maximum
temperature of (35 deg C). Do not apply shotcrete if temperature is (5 deg C) and
falling.
C. Floor: Reinforced, cast-in-place concrete. Slope floor 1.0 to 1.5 percent from highest
point to water outlet pipe. Pour monolithically without cold joints and provide
mechanical float finish.
D. Dome Roof: Install reinforced, cast-in-place concrete with circumferential

prestressing. Place (150-mm) waterstop between roof and wall.
1. Install curb on roof perimeter with at least 6 downspouts spaced 60 degrees and
no more than (15 m) apart.
E. Flat Slab Roof: Install reinforced, cast-in-place concrete with drop panels and support
having reinforced, cast-in-place concrete columns. Place solid neoprene bearing pads
and (150-mm) waterstop between roof and wall. If voids are present between wall and
roof after use of solid bearing pads, fill voids with closed-cell CR pads and soft mastic.
1. Install curb on roof perimeter with at least 6 downspouts spaced 60 degrees and
no more than (15 m) apart.
F. Install construction and maintenance hatch near wall and ladder.
G. Install ventilators at highest point of roof. Install others where indicated.
3.02 PUDDLE FLANGES
A. Puddle flanges shall be erected in the form work perpendicular to the wall face and
rigidly to resist displacement during pouring of concrete.
B. Verticality of the flange faces and alignment of bolt holes with connecting equipment
(valves etc.) shall be checked and ensured.
C. The openings in the form work, around puddle flanges, shall be sealed so as to avoid
leakage (and resultant honey combing) and undesirable formation of concrete.
D. Alignment of the puddle flanges shall be checked (and adjusted if necessary)

immediately after pouring of the concrete.
3.03 SUCTION STRAINERS
A. Suction strainers shall be installed on all supply connections from water storage tanks,
with bend down elbows in low level connections.
3.04 FIELD PAINTING
A. Surface preparation is specified in Division 09 painting Sections and Section "High-

Performance Coatings."
B. Apply paint according to AWWA D102.
C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Apply primer to cleaned areas and where shop finish has been
damaged during shipping, handling, and erection. Apply prime coat to a dry film
thickness of (0.08 to 0.13 mm) for tank interior and to a dry film thickness of (0.05 to
0.08 mm) for exterior tank and support surfaces.
D. Tank Shell Interior Finish Coats: Apply 2 coats of interior finish paint above bottom ring
to a dry film thickness of (0.1 to 0.13 mm). Apply interior finish paint to surfaces below
bottom ring to a dry film thickness of (0.2 to 0.25 mm).
E. Tank Shell and Steel Support Exterior Coats: Apply intermediate paint to a dry film
thickness of (0.05 to 0.08 mm). Apply finish paint to a dry film thickness of (0.05 to 0.08
mm).
F. Concrete tanks do not require painting.
G. Paint concrete, surface water-storage tanks according to Division 09[painting Sections

and Section "High-Performance Coatings."
H. Tank Exterior Lettering and Logo: Apply one coat or two coats of urethane paint to a dry
film thickness of (0.05 to 0.08 mm) for each application.
I. Overflow Pipe: Paint pipe exterior that is outside tank and structure as indicated for tank
exterior.
J. Exterior Ladders: Paint as indicated for tank shell exterior.
K. Do not paint if ambient temperature is less than (10 deg C) or is expected to drop below
(5 deg C) in the next 18 hours. Do not paint if temperature of steel surface is higher
than (52 deg C). Do not apply paint if surfaces are wet or damp, if precipitation is
expected, or if relative humidity will exceed 85 percent. Do not spray paint when wind
velocity exceeds (24 km/h). Maintain at least a 24-hour waiting period between coats.
Provide adequate ventilation in tank during painting to maintain clear atmosphere and
provide explosion-proof flood lighting and spot lighting.
L. Complete daily painting to allow time for paint to dry before condensation is expected.

3.05 LADDERS AND ACCESS DOORS
A. Inserts shall be installed in the form work for tank walls in a manner similar to that of
puddle flanges and good alignment shall be attained.
B. Fasteners and cap nuts of corrosion resistant material shall be used for fixing the ladder
to the tank walls.
3.06 LEVEL INDICATION AND CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION AND PANELS
A. The power supply requirements to the system shall be coordinated with the Electrical
works. Conduiting and wiring to the source shall be included in this Section.
3.07 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
A. Blank flanges / plugs shall be temporarily installed on the piping connections to enable
the civil works contractor to test the water tightness of concrete tanks.
B. The inside of the tank shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, washed down with water
and drained.
3.08 GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES
A. The Employer shall be furnished with guarantee and warranty certificates, duly
registered with the manufacturer.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 22 1223
INDOOR WATER STORAGE TANKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes potable and non-potable water storage tanks and related
accessories for indoor installation.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. GRP: Glass-reinforced plastic.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished

specialties, and accessories. Indicate dimensions, wall thickness, insulation, finishes
and coatings, required clearances, methods of assembly of components, and piping
connections.
B. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that indicated

steel, potable-water storage tanks, accessories, and components will withstand
seismic forces defined in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
forces specified."
b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without
event."
C. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that potable-water

storage tanks comply with requirements.
D. Source quality-control test reports.
E. Purging and disinfecting reports.
KEO/19-3262-0000 22 1223/1 Indoor Potable Water Storage Tanks


potable-water storage tanks and are based on the specific system indicated.
B. ASME Compliance for Steel Tanks: Fabricate and label steel, potable-water storage
tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1,
where indicated.
C. ASME Compliance for GRP Tanks: Fabricate and label GRP, potable-water storage
tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section X, where
indicated.
D. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic
potable-water storage tanks and components. Include appropriate NSF marking.
E. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects, Sections 1
to 9," for potable-water storage tanks. Include appropriate NSF marking.
1.05 COORDINATION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
2.02 QUALIFICATIONS
The manufacturer shall have a minimum of twenty years’ experience in the design,
manufacture and testing of pumps
2.03 MANUFACTURED GRP WATER STORAGE TANK
A. A copy of the manufacturer’s catalogue detailing, manufacturing process, materials,

efficient design, construction, operational maintenance instruction and precautions to
be taken by end users, shall accompany every tank sale. Literature provided shall
advice end user to carry out periodic inspection of tank for water leaks, loose bolts,
vent clogging, rusty components, algae growth etc. It should also include a note-
referring, client to governing current regulations regarding metering and house
connection requirement.
B. Tanks should be suitable for storage at atmospheric pressure, of potable cold drinking
water at 50 deg. C.
C. Supplier shall take necessary measures to satisfy relevant authority that potable water
tanks supplied for use within its domain meets all requirements detailed here forth.
This shall be repeatedly done every five years or as and when called for by the
authority having jurisdiction. Whenever the raw ingredient, composition or process of
manufacture of a particular component part is changed or modified, the affected
component part shall have to be tested and certified as to its fitness for use and
compliance with articles detailed here forth. All testing and inspection costs shall be
borne by the Contractor.
D. No fiber shall project out of any tank panel. The internal surface of the shell or panel
shall be smoothly finished and free of defects such as crazing, delaminating, blister,
wrinkles, crevice and pinholes to prevent sticking of foreign matters such as dust,
moss, algae, bacteria, scale formation and rust. If necessary, tank interior should be
coated with an approved material for algae resistance.
E. The use of in-situ G.R.P. lamination inside the tank for whatever purpose it may be,
shall not be permitted.
F. Flexible connectors shall be used – wherever necessary – to avoid stress and vibration
transfer to the water tank.
G. Manufacturer’s instructions and guidelines concerning storage on tank parts and

accessories general site conditions of final tank location, erection method, usage and
operation of the water tank shall be strictly observed.
H. Tanks shall be erected, tested and commissioned for use only by the manufacturer or
by an installer approved by him.
I. Upon completion of erection, tank shall be tested as per the manufacturer’s guideline
and then cleaned and disinfected be the erector or under his direct supervision. Water
shall be sampled and tested.
J. Supplier shall maintain and preserve a record of every tank sale, until the expiry of the
tank guarantee, updating, it upon completion of every stage of work to reflect the
required information detailed below.
Every tank assembled shall be provided with a serial number.
A record shall be kept ready for inspection – along with relevant certificates – by the
relevant ministry authorized personnel and shall contain the following information:
1. Tank type, size, capacity, serial number and other specific details.
2. Client name & address.
3. Location of point of use (Plot & Sector).
4. Name of tank assembler.
5. Date of sale.
6. Date of erection completion.
7. Date of successful testing.
8. Ministry approval date.
K. A name plate (stamp may be acceptable) of size not less than 20 x 15 cm should be
securely imposed to tank exterior in a clearly visible and accessible location preferably
on tank side, by stainless steel 316 bolts and nuts or similar approved arrangement.
Plate shall be made of material not affected by weather conditions. The following data
should be engraved on the plate with lettering color different to that of the plate. Color
shall not be affected by weather conditions:
 Name of manufacturer or brand (trade) name.

 Serial number.
 Tank capacity/volume (in Cubic meters or Imp. Gallons).
 Date assembled.
L. Resins used in the manufacturing of G.R.P. panels, should be fully cured before
installation and usage. Tests for 100% cure shall be conducted as per relevant test
methods of B.S. 4994.
M. Sides, bottom, and roof panels shall have uniform mass per unit area. Unless
otherwise specified, 6 mm minimum thickness and 17.5 kg/m2 minimum mass should
be used.
N. Refer to the related drawings for details such as mass, dimensions, nominal and
effective capacity, tank type, location etc.
O. The centre of the panels to be curved/ pressed to evenly distribute the stress applied
to it.
P. The roof panels shall be embossed for ultraviolet resistance and slip resistance (for
workman).
Q. The tank panel joints shall be completely sealed with a special gasket which must not
deteriorate under repeated changes of temperature for a long time.
R. The manhole panel shall have a 600mm diameter hinged type manhole hatch.
S. All domestic water tanks used for drinking purpose shall be protected from excessive
heat, direct sun and ultra-violet rays. Tanks exterior shell/panel fasteners, supports,
etc. shall be protected against weather conditions for the duration of the Guarantee
Period. Tanks shall either be insulated, kept in-doors or under a protective structural
shed.
2.04 METHOD OF MANUFACTURE

A. G.R.P. sectional tanks manufactured from unsaturated Isothalic Polyester resins shall
be Hot Press moulded process.
B. Hand lamination will only be permitted for special panels e.g. inlets or outlets, etc. with
the prior approval of the Engineer.
2.05 APPROVAL OF LOCAL HEALTH AUTHORITIES

A. A guarantee of fitness for storing of domestic cold potable water shall be obtained from
concerned local government agency. Certificate provided should cover accessories
and all component parts of the water tank in question.
2.06 GUARANTEE CERTIFICATE:

A. Manufacturer, importer or supplier of the water tank shall provide a certificate of
guarantee, against manufacturing and erection defects covering a period of ten years
from the date of the ministry approval. During the guaranteed period, tank component
parts and accessories found corroded, deteriorated or defective shall be replaced or
made good at his cost.
B. This Guarantee shall extend to cover all components inclusive of structural
components and tank accessories. Scope of this Guarantee shall be clearly defined
in the Guarantee Certificate.
2.07 TRANSPARENCY:
A. Tank should be opaque to help reduce evaporation of disinfectant and inhibit Algae
growth. Maximum measured light transmission value inside a closed cover; ready for
use thank shall not exceed 0.1%.
2.08 TANK SHELL/PANEL COLOUR:

A. Color of tank shell/panels and protective wrapping/coating shall be such as to aid in
reducing the heat Absorption Factor.
2.09 METALLIC COMPONENT PARTS & ACCESSORIES:

A. All metallic parts in contact with water such as panel bracing, tie rods, angle plates,
roof supports etc., shall be of stainless steel 316 A/4 grade. If other than Stainless
Steel 316 A/4 grade parts and accessories are used, a non-metallic plastic shrinkable
tube or an approved similar protective material shall be applied to these parts.
B. Tanks shall preferably be externally braced for ease of maintenance, cleaning and
hygienic considerations.
2.010 AIR VENTS:

A. At least one capped or down facing air vent shall be installed per water tank. One
additional vent shall be provided for 40 M2 of tank area or at a spacing of 7 m
whichever is lesser.
B. One of the vents shall be adjacent to a lid above the float valve. Vents shall be
designed to prevent ingress of dust and foreign matter into the tank interior and should
be cleaned by end user at regular intervals.
2.10 MANHOLES (MH):

A. At least one manhole shall be provided for each water tank, for tanks with more than
one compartment, each compartment shall be provided with manhole. Manhole shall
have an elevated, lockable lid cover with gasket and a locking mechanism. Manhole
shall have a clear opening of 60 cm in diameter if circular, of 60 cm minimum width if
rectangular. Each MH should be provided with a set of one internal and one external
access ladders as detailed.
2.11 TANK PARTITIONING:

A. If tank is internally partitioned, each compartment shall be treated as an independent
water tank as far as these regulations are concerned.
B. Partitions must extend to full height of the tank; each compartment should be capable
of supporting water on either side with one side empty.
2.12 INLET FITTING:

A. Each water tank shall have a complete arrangement of flanged water inlet fitting,
suitable for connection to tank supply pipe. Tank inlet shall be provided with a suitable
and approved arrangement for shutting off water supply once tank is filled. This may
be by a mechanical, electrical or a combination of the two methods. Water jet shall be
directed away from tank sides and joints.

B. Inlet fitting shall allow for a minimum of 300 mm tank full free board (air gap). For tanks
of small inlet diameter air gap shall be > 200 mm. Inlet fitting shall be located adjacent
to the manhole for ease of maintenance.
2.13 OUTLET FITTING:

A. Each water tank shall have a complete arrangement of flanged water outlet fitting,
suitable for connection to the tank distribution pipe.
2.14 INTERNAL ACCESS LADDER:

A. Each water tank of depth > 1.5 m shall be permanently equipped with rigid internal
ladder of non-metallic (e.g. ABS, UPVC, or similar approved material) or of stainless
steel grade 316.
2.15 EXTERNAL ACCESS LADDER:

A. Each water tank of depth > 1.5 m shall be permanently equipped with rigid external
ladder of material capable of withstanding prevailing weather conditions.
2.16 INSULATION OF TANK SHELL/PANELS:

A. An insulated water tank is defined as a water tank having not less than 90% factory
insulation coverage (encapsulated) of its shell or its sides, bottom and roof panels for
paneled tanks. Insulation shall be at least 40 mm thick of expanded polystyrene
(density grade 30) or Polyurethane foam 25 mm thick, 40 kg/m3 insulating material.
Insulation shall not be exposed to external weather conditions; it shall be covered with
an external permanently fixed cover made of the same materials used in the GRP
panels which should be resistant to ultra violet radiation, weather protective and water-
tight.
2.17 FLANGES, BOLTS & NUTS:

A. Bolts in contact with water may be used provided that bolt heads are cap-protected by
non-metallic material such as food quality rubber. Bolts above water level could be
suitably protected by resin coats or similar.
B. Panels shall preferably be externally bolted for case of tank-maintenance, cleaning
and hygienic considerations.
2.18 All connections made to tank side and base panels shall be externally flanged. Tank
panels shall be cut and all flanges connected by the tank supplier or under his direct
supervision.
2.19 SEALANT MATERIALS:

A. Sealant material used should be non-toxic, flexible and resistant to ultra-violet rays.
Sealant should preserve these qualities for the expected life duration of the tank.
B. Internal tank joints of bottom and side panels shall be made flush with tank panel to
prevent accumulation of deposits and facilitate cleaning. Sealant should not be
allowed to protrude out of joints hindering thereby the cleaning process aiding dirt
accumulation and allowing tear off. Where sealant has extruded, it must be trimmed
back flush with tank panel.
2.20 TANK DRAINING:
A. Each tank shall be supplied with at least one concave section Bottom Panel fitted with
necessary arrangement to drain water. Drain Panel shall be located directly below MH
Panel or adjacent to it. Tank bottom shall be sloped or so designed that water is
effectively channeled to Drain Panel leaving no water accumulated within the tank.
Minimum drain size shall be one size larger than the inlet pipe.
2.21 TANK ROOF DRAINING:

A. For tanks installed outdoors without a protective shed above them, tank roof shall have
1% minimum slope towards one or two sides or any other effective system for tank
roof draining. No water should be allowed to accumulate on tank roof. Roof joints shall
be made flush with panel to prevent dirt accumulation.
2.22 FLOAT VALVE(S)

A. Modulating Type: Angle pattern, single seated, hydraulically operated, pilot controlled,
diaphragm type, normally closed valves of cast iron construction with flanged ends
complete with pilot assembly, type `K' copper capillary lines, mounting plate, plastic
float and operating rod, adjustable stops etc. complete.
B. Delayed Action Float Valves: Angle / globe pattern, single seated, hydraulically
operated, pilot controlled, diaphragm type, normally closed valve of cast iron
construction with flanged ends complete with pilot assembly, type 'K' copper capillary
lines, mounting plate, plastic float and operating rod, adjustable stops etc. complete.
2.23 OVER FLOW PIPE FITTING:

A. Each water tank shall be supplied with a complete arrangement of flanged water over-
flow fitting, suitable for connection to the tank overflow pipe. Overflow pipe shall
preferably be located adjacent to inlet pipe. Overflow pipe shall be one size larger than
tank inlet pipe.
2.24 WARNING PIPE FITTING:

A. Each water tank of size (gross volume) equal to or more than 7m3 shall be supplied
with complete arrangement of overflow warning fittings suitable for connection to the
tank overflow warning pipe. Overflow warning pipe diameter shall be 15 mm.
B. Overflow warning pipe shall be connected to an elbow and a maximum 10 cm long
down pipe and left to discharge at high level. Overflow warning pipe shall be so located
that it is clearly visible to caretaker at all times.
C. Other systems of overflow warning such as an audible and/or visible alarm may be
used in replacement of the aforementioned system subject to the Engineer approval
before installation.
D. Water tanks having similar over-flow water levels, supplied by one common tank feed
pipe and located together as a group, could be equipped with one overflow warning
pipe installed in one of the tanks in the group.
2.25 WATER LEVEL INDICATING FITTING:

A. Tanks of depth 2m and above shall be equipped with a visual, ultra-violet resistant
water level indicator arrangement.
B. Water tanks having similar tank full water levels, supplied by one common tank feed
pipe and located together as a group, could be equipped with only one water level
indicator installed in one of the tanks in the group.
2.26 TANK FOUNDATION AND PROTECTIVE SHED:

A. Tank foundation and shed should be of rigid construction, permanent in nature made
up of durable weather resistant material. Expected life of shed and foundation shall
be more than or similar to that of tank itself.
B. Sheds and foundations shall be the responsibility of the contractor who shall maintain
them good for their intended use.
C. Tank foundation or support pad shall be rigid non-bending and shall be smooth and
have a leveled surface.
D. Tanks of 1.5 m high and above shall be installed on a steel skid as per
recommendation of the manufacturer.
E. Externally bolted paneled base tanks shall have 60 cm minimum clear access below
its base panels. Other thanks shall be at least 40 cm above the finish floor level of the
surrounding area. Shed roof shall extend, beyond the boundaries of the water tank, by
one meter or half the height of the shed, whichever is larger. Roof access above a
closed manhole cover shall not be less than 80 cm clear.
2.27 CHARACTERISTICS OF G.R.P.:

G.R.P. Panels shall comply with the following requirements:
1. Toxicity Nil
2. Micro Biological Growth Nil
3. Ultra-violet Rays Stabilized/Resistant
4. Opacity Min. 99.9% BS 2782
5. Cavity Max. 2%
6. Water Absorption Max. 0.2% BS 7491
7. Tensile Strength
(Longitudinal transversal) Min. 1000 kg.cm2 BS 2782
8. Young’s Modulus Min. 1.40 x 105 kg/cm2
9. Flexural Strength Min. 1650 kg/cms2 BS 2782
10. Barcol Hardness Min. 50 BS 7282
11. Impact strength No cracking BS 2782
12. Shear strength Min. 870 kg/cm2 BS 2782
13. Thermal expansion Min 2.2 x 10 -5/Cº
14.1 Thermal conductivity max 0.22 kcal/m hr Cº
14.2 Thermal conductivity (insulated) Max 0.02 kcal/m hr Cº
15 Coefficient of overall thermal transmission
15.1 Water – Panel – Air Max 0.9 kcal/m2 h. Cº
15.2 Water – Insulated Panel – Air Max 0.9 kcal/m2 h. Cº
16 Glass Content Min. 30% BS 2782
17 Resin Content Min. 48%
18 Specific Gravity 1.8
2.28 REFERENCES:
Unless elsewhere specified, latest of these standards shall apply:
BS 3396 Woven glass fiber fabrics for plastic reinforcement.

BS 3496 E-glass fiber chopped strand mat for reinforcement of polyester
and other liquid laminating systems.
BS 2749 E-glass fiber woven roving, fabrics for the reinforcement of
Polyester and epoxy resin system.
BS 4994 Design and Construction of vessels and tanks in reinforced plastics.
BS 6920 Suitability of non-metallic products for use in contact with water
Intended for human consumption with regard to water quality.
BS 7491 Glass fiber reinforced plastic cistern for cold water storage.
BS EN ISO 9001: Quality Systems – specification for design, development,
Production, installation and servicing.
2.29 ELECTRICAL WORKS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Conduiting: Heavy duty galvanized iron conduits (surface mounted) and painted sheet
steel trunking shall be used for wiring.
B. Wiring: Stranded copper (1.5 mm2), PVC insulated wires with crimped on, sheathed
terminal lugs shall be used for all interconnecting wiring. Joints shall not be allowed in
a single wire length. Terminals shall be numbered using slip-on ferrules for quick
identification.
A. Test and inspect potable-water storage tanks according to the following tests and
inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Non-pressure Testing for Potable-Water Storage Tanks: Fill tanks to water
operating level to ensure structural integrity and freedom from leaks. Hold
water level for two hours with no drop in water level. Repair or replace tanks
that fail test with new tanks, and repeat until test is satisfactory.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CONCRETE BASES
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated for tanks. Refer to Division 22 Section
"Common Work Results for Plumbing."
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install water storage tanks on concrete bases, level and plumb, firmly anchored.
Arrange so devices needing servicing are accessible.
1. Install horizontal tanks on concrete piers and factory-fabricated or fabricated
steel supports and saddles.
B. Anchor tank supports and tanks to substrate.

1. Use steel or FRP straps over or around plastic tanks.
C. Install tank seismic restraints.

D. Install thermometers and pressure gages on water storage tanks and piping, if
indicated. Thermometers and pressure gages are specified in Division 22 Section
"Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."
E. Install the following devices on tanks where indicated:

1. Tank vents on non-pressure tanks.
2. Connections to accessories.
F. After installing tanks with factory finish, inspect finishes and repair damages to
finishes.
3.03 CONNECTIONS

B. Install piping adjacent to potable-water storage tanks to allow service and

maintenance.
C. Connect water piping to water storage tanks with unions or flanges and with shutoff
valves. Connect tank drains with shutoff valves and discharge over closest floor
drains.
1. General-duty valves are specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves
for Plumbing Piping."
a. Valves (DN 50) and Smaller: Gate or ball.
b. Valves (DN 65) and Larger: Gate or butterfly.
c. Drain Valves: (DN 20) gate or ball valve. Include outlet with, or nipple
in outlet with, ASME B1.20.7, 3/4-11.5NH thread for garden-hose
service, threaded cap, and chain.
2. Water Piping Connections: Make connections to dissimilar metals with
dielectric fittings. Dielectric fittings are specified in Division 22 Section
A. Perform the following final checks before filling:

1. Verify that air pre-charge in pre-charged tanks is correct.
2. Test operation of tank accessories and devices.
3. Verify that pressure relief valves have correct setting.
a. Manually operate pressure relief valves.
b. Adjust pressure settings.
4. Verify that vacuum relief valves are correct size.
a. Manually operate vacuum relief valves.
b. Adjust vacuum settings.
B. Filling Procedures: Follow manufacturer's written procedures. Fill tanks with water to
operating level.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect potable-water storage tanks.

B. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction
or, if method is not prescribed, use procedure described in AWWA C652 or as
described below:
1. Purge water storage tanks with potable water.
2. Disinfect tanks by one of the following methods:
a. Fill tanks with water-chlorine solution containing at least (50 mg/L) of
chlorine. Isolate tanks and allow to stand for 24 hours.
b. Fill tanks with water-chlorine solution containing at least (200 mg/L) of
chlorine. Isolate tanks and allow to stand for three hours.
3. Flush tanks, after required standing time, with clean, potable water until chlorine
is not present in water coming from tank.
4. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat
procedure if biological examination made by authorities having jurisdiction
shows evidence of contamination.
C. Prepare written reports for purging and disinfecting activities.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 22 1300
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING & STORM WATER PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes the following for storm, soil, waste, and vent piping inside the
building:
1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.
2. Special pipe fittings.
3. Encasement for underground piping.

1. Division 22 Section "Plumbing Equipment."
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. UPVC: Unplasticised poly vinyl chloride plastic.
B. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
C. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
D. LLDPE: Linear, low-density polyethylene plastic.
E. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
F. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
G. UPVC: Unplasticized Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
H. TPE: Thermoplastic elastomer.
A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum

working pressure, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping and Storm Water Piping: 10-foot head of water.
2. Sanitary/Storm Sewer, Force-Main Piping: 150 psig (1035 kPa).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data and Samples: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.
B. Shop Drawings:
KEO/19-3262-0000 22 1300/1 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping & Storm Water Piping
1. Design Calculations.
2. Controlled – Flow Storm Drainage System: Include calculation, plans and
details.
C. Field quality-control inspection and test reports.
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for
plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and
vent piping; "NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping; "NSF-tubular" for plastic continuous
waste piping; and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.02 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and
joining materials.
2.03 UPVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. UPVC pipes and fittings: DIN 1953 & 8062 / 1986 class 6 bar.
2.04 JOINTS
A. Type of joints.
1. UPVC: Solvent welded joints. Use flanged spigots / sockets where required.
B. Pressure ratings of joints. All figures stated are working water / air pressures (WOG) at
121 deg.C (250 deg.F).
1. UPVC: 1034 Kpa (150 psig)
2.05 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS
A. For pipe sizes 50 mm (2 inch) nom. dia. and under:

1. UPVC: Unions of respective materials / solvent, or fusion ends
B. For pipe sizes 65 mm (2 1/2 inch) nom. dia. and over:

1. Plastic Piping: Flanges of respective materials, solvent or fusion ends.
2. Use compressed fiber gaskets at all flanges (use of rubber gaskets is prohibited).
C. Dielectric connections: Use dielectric unions with one end malleable iron threaded and
the other end copper solder for pipe sizes 50 mm (2 inch) nom. dia. and under. Use
dielectric flanged fittings for pipe sizes 65 mm (2 1/2 inch) nom. dia. and above. Both
unions and flanges shall have water impervious isolation barrier certified to withstand a
minimum 600 volts on a dry line with no flashover.
D. All flanges, unions and couplings shall be pressure rated as the pipe joints.
2.06 SPECIAL PIPE FITTINGS
A. Flexible, Non-pressure Pipe Couplings: Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric,

sleeve-type, reducing or transition pattern. Include shear ring, ends of same sizes as
piping to be joined, and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening
mechanism on each end.
1. Sleeve Materials:
a. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926,
UPVC.
b. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, UPVC or other material compatible
with pipe materials being joined.
B. Shielded Non-pressure Pipe Couplings: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve

with full-length, corrosion-resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension
band and tightening mechanism on each end.
C. Rigid, Unshielded, Non-pressure Pipe Couplings: ASTM C 1461, sleeve-type reducing-

or transition-type mechanical coupling molded from ASTM C 1440, TPE material with
corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
D. Wall-Penetration Fittings: Compound, ductile-iron coupling fitting with sleeve and flexing
sections for up to 20-degree deflection, gaskets, and restrained-joint ends complying
with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber
gaskets, and steel bolts.
2.07 CONCRETE FOR MANHOLES
A. All concrete elements of any class for drainage works, whether precast or in-situ, shall
be carried out in accordance with other Section.
1. Plain cement concrete: This work shall include, but not by way of limitation,
supply and casting of sulphate resisting concrete as shown on Drawings and
shall be of the following classes (unless specified elsewhere to the contrary):
a. Class C 140 for bed or haunch or encasement to pipes.
b. Class C 140 for benching including 2 cm thick, smooth hard finish.
c. Class C140 for blinding
2. Reinforced cement concrete: This work shall include, but not by way of
limitation, supply and casting of all class C 300 Ordinary Portland Cement
reinforced concrete elements, whether precast or in-situ, incorporated in the
storm water works as shown in the drawings.
B. Reinforced concrete elements shall be measured by number and the rate shall include
for; but not by way of limitation; temporary work, formwork, moulds, reinforcement
during testing, expansion and construction joints and all other things necessary to
accomplish the work in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications and the
instruction of the Engineer.
2.08 CAST IRON ACCESSORIES FOR MANHOLES

A. Manhole covers and frames: Cast iron covers for manholes shall be recessed type,
square, heavy duty for manholes at streets, medium duty for manholes in paved areas
and , double seal with closed key holes conforming to BS 497. They shall be of sound
manufacture and free from projections or voids and shall be treated with two coats of an
approved tar compound.
B. Step irons shall be of galvanized cast iron conforming to BS 1247. The weight of the
step iron shall not be less than 3.20 lbs. and shall be 10 inch long and 6 inch wide.
C. The sanitary house connection shall be carried out with the external inspection chamber
using the Vitrified Clay pipes conforming to B.S.65.
2.10 STEELWORK
A. Structural steel shall comply with the requirements of BS 15. Dimensions and
properties of beams, T-bars etc. shall comply with the requirements of BS 4.
B. Bolts, nuts, etc. shall comply with the requirements of BS 916 or BS 1768 whichever is
applicable.
C. Welding shall be carried out by approved welders in accordance with the requirements
of BS 1856 or BS 2642, whichever shall be applicable and BS 2645. Electrodes shall
fulfill the requirements of BS 639.
Unless otherwise specified, structural steel work shall be rust protected in general
conformance with BS 5493 and as follows. After erection all rust and scale and loose
paint shall be removed by means of sand blasting or by steel wire brush or other
approved means. All surfaces shall immediately thereafter be coated with two coats of
bituminous paint, thick Inertol 49 or similar approved product. The coating shall be
applied in dry weather. Prior to the second coating, the first coating shall be absolutely
dry.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXCAVATION
A. Refer to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
A. Installations exposed to sunlight shall remain of cast iron conforming to the British
standard (B.S 416) and shall be connected to UPVC pipes using special fitting made of
UPVC and rubber.
B. Pipes and fittings:

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Soil, waste and All UPVC

vent 50 mm nom.
dia. and above
Storm & waste water Above and UPVC
drainage below grade
Water tank drainage Above grade UPVC

and overflow
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to
building sanitary sewers.
B. Install wall-penetration fitting at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall.
Make installation watertight.
C. Make changes in direction for soil, storms and waste drainage and vent piping using
appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep
1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal
to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are
installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows,
and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90
degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes
are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
D. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to
grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of
piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written
instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain
swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.
E. Install soil, storm and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes,
unless otherwise indicated:
1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3
(DN 80) and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4
(DN 100) and larger.
2. Horizontal Sanitary/storm Drainage Piping: 1 percent downward in direction of
flow.
3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.
F. Install UPVC soil and waste drainage and vent piping according to ASTM D 2665.
G. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section

B. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-
free-alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
C. UPVC Nonpressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2665.
3.05 CONNECTIONS
B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting
to join dissimilar piping materials.
C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller
than required by plumbing code.
2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes
indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but
not smaller than required by plumbing code.
4. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if
indicated, and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for
connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
D. Connect force-main piping to the following:

1. Sanitary Sewer: To exterior force main or sanitary manhole.
2. Sewage Pumps: To sewage pump discharge.
A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before

inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities
1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or
closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to
observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
B. Re-inspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or
inspection, make required corrections and arrange for re-inspection.
C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
D. Test sanitary, storm drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities
having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:
1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have
been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit
separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage
and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was
3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except
outside leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system
and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water (30
kPa). From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection,
water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.
4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and
traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and
watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they
leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg
(250 Pa). Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure
this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional
air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas
and water leaks.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof,
6. Test Procedure: Test storm drainage piping, exceptout leaders, on completion of
roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of
overflow, but not less than 10 foot head of water (30 kPa). From 15 minutes
before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop.
Inspect joints for leaks.
E. Test force-main piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in

absence of published procedures, as follows:
1. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced force-
main piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was
2. Cap and subject piping to static-water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above
operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials.
Isolate test source and allow standing for four hours. Leaks and loss in test
pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
3. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof,
3.07 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and
debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
3.08 SETTING OUT AND EXCAVATION OF TRENCHES FOR BELOW GRADE MAINS
A. Trenches shall be excavated only after completion of site development work like
backfilling, if any. Care shall be taken to ensure that no heavy equipment shall be
worked or moved over piping, which is not designed to take up such loads.
B. Clear the existing ground levels along the line of all mains, particularly at all manholes,
building connections etc.
C. Where long lengths of piping mains are to be laid in trenches at slight slope, sight rails
should be fixed across the trench at intervals of at least 5 meters at a height equal to the
length of the boning rod to be used above the required invert level of the drain or sewer
at the point where the sight rail is fixed. There shall be not less than two sight rails in
position on each length of the main under construction.
D. The trench shall be excavated to the actual required depth such that the pipe shall bear
uniformly on undisturbed ground at every point between joint holes.
E. The Contractor shall examine any unfitting or weak ground material which may be found
below the pipe laying level and report the same in writing to the Engineer, before laying
any pipe. In such cases, the unsuitable material shall be removed and made up by
backfilling, at additional cost to the Owner.
3.09 INSTALLATION - PARTICULAR FOR BELOW GRADE MAINS
A. Handle pipes with utmost care so as not to subject the pipes to shocks which may crack
or break the internal lining, if any. Cement lined pipes which are cut to length on site
shall be tapered at their spigot ends by a grinder and a fast drying coal tar coat applied
at the uncoated areas.
B. The pipes shall be laid directly on the undisturbed bottom of the trench with special
recesses made for the joints or placed on a concrete bed. The pipes must be aligned
carefully both in line and level. Wooden supports must not be placed under the pipes.
Precautions shall be taken to prevent dirt from entering the pipe.
C. Ductile iron pipes shall be wrapped up with polyethylene sleeving before laying.
Adhesive tapes shall be used to secure the sleeving at socket and spigot ends. Plastic
coated wire shall be used to secure the encasement at every one third length of the
pipe. After jointing is done and testing completed, encasement shall be pulled to close
the whole joint and be secured with plastic coated wire strapping. The pipes shall be laid
with the folded part of the polyethylene encasement on the crown of the piping.
D. Piping shall be protected against the ingress of foreign material before the pipe is placed
in the trench. If the case is such that the pipe can not be laid, in the trench and in place,
without getting earth into it; each end shall be covered with a heavy, tightly woven
canvas bag of suitable size before lowering the pipe into the trench. The bag shall be
left there until the connection is to be made to the adjacent pipe.
E. When jointing pipes, a mark shall be made to check the position of the end of the barrel.
Leave a gap of 5 to 10mm between the ends of the pipes, for piping with flexible joints.
F. The joints shall be left exposed until the line is pressure tested and approved by the
Engineer.
G. Deviations from given levels may not be greater than + or - 1 cm at any point and
gradients not greater than 1/20 of the given value.
3.10 BACKFILLING OF PIPE TRENCHES
A. All surplus, suitable and approved excavation material shall be used for backfilling the
trenches.
B. All backfill material shall be free of cinders, ashes, refuse, vegetable or organic matter,
boulders, stones or other material which are unsuitable for the purpose, in the opinion of
the Engineer.
C. Excavations shall be backfilled without unnecessary delay, but not before completion of
testing of the piping. The first 30 cm fill shall only be compacted by hand tamping;
subsequent layers being compacted by power tampers as approved by the Engineer.
No heavy mechanical equipment shall be used for backfilling or compaction.
D. The pipe trenches shall be backfilled and compacted to a minimum of 95 % of AASHOT

- 180 density, in layers of not exceeding 15 cms and fills shall be brought up
simultaneously on the full width of the trench.
3.11 INSTALLATION OF MANHOLE ACCESSORIES
A. Frame of manhole cover shall not be cast in together with roof slab of manhole.
B. Covers and frames shall be fixed in such a way to match adjacent surface levels with
tolerance not exceeding + or -3mm. Before the Defects Liability Period expires, check
all manhole covers and readjust them if they are in excess of above mentioned
tolerance.
C. Fix all cast iron accessories to concrete manholes using cement and sand mortar (1:3)
3.12 PROTECTION: Give the following protective coating / wrapping to piping. All piping
above louvered ceilings shall be painted black.
A. Buried plastic piping under grade slabs within or outside building lines and in areas
subjected to traffic loading:
1. Encasement with minimum 10cm thick, class K 140, plain concrete, 20mm (3/4
inch) thick bitumen emulsion impregnated fiber board and other suitable material
shall be provided across the encasement at flexible joints to maintain flexibility of
the piping.
2. Coloured, metal coated, plastic foil warning grids.
B. Concealed (in shaft – false ceiling, embedded in slabs and walls):

1. Plastic foil as sound insulation (12mm thickness).
C. Plastic piping: Buried within / below raft foundations:

1. Monolithic concrete channel enclosing the pipe with waterproofing membrane
extended under the same when pipe work is below the raft level.
D. Plastic piping exposed to direct sunlight:

1. One layer of self adhesive, aluminium foil backed kraft tape with 10% overlap.
2. One layer of "Densopol 60" with 50% overlap.
E. Exposed UPVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of
water based latex paint.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 22 1319
SANITARY, STORM AND WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes the following sanitary drainage piping specialties:

1. Cleanouts.
2. Floor drains.
3. Roof flashing assemblies.
4. Through-penetration firestop assemblies.
5. Miscellaneous sanitary and storm drainage piping specialties.
6. Flashing materials.
7. Roof drains.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
B. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.
C. HDPE: High-density polyethylene plastic.
D. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
E. PP: Polypropylene plastic.
F. UPVC: Unplasicised Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Sample as directed by the engineer.
C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for frost-resistant vent
terminals.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For drainage piping specialties to include in

KEO/19-3262-0000 22 1319/1 Sanitary, Storm and Waste Piping Specialties

A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified
testing agency.

C. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic
sanitary piping specialty components.
1.05 COORDINATION
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
B. Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.02 CLEANOUTS
A. Floor Cleanouts:
1. Floor cleanouts shall be made of UPVC with chrome plated or stainless steel
closure cover.
B. Ground Cleanouts:
1. Ground cleanouts shall be made of UPVC with 300 x 300 mm light duty,
single seal cast iron cover and frame. CLEANOUT to be written in Arabic and
English.
2. Ground cleanouts to be installed as per the tiles levels.
2.03 FLOOR DRAINS
A. UPVC Floor Drains

1. Pattern: Floor drain.
2. Body Material: UPVC.
3. Outlet: Side, size 3 inch.
4. Cleanout: Required, size 1 inch.
5. Top or Strainer Material: Stainless steel.
6. Auxiliary Inlet: 3 nos. each 2 inch.
7. Top Shape: Square.
8. Trap Pattern: Standard P-trap.

2.04 ROOF FLASHING ASSEMBLIES
A. Description: Manufactured assembly made of 4.0-lb/sq. ft. (20-kg/sq. m), 0.0625-inch-

(1.6-mm-) thick, lead flashing collar and skirt extending at least 6 inches (150 mm) from
pipe, with galvanized-steel boot reinforcement and counterflashing fitting.
1. Open-Top Vent Cap: Without cap.
2. Low-Silhouette Vent Cap: With vandal-proof vent cap.
3. Extended Vent Cap: With field-installed, vandal-proof vent cap.
2.05 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP ASSEMBLIES

1. Standard: UL 1479 assembly of sleeve and stack fitting with firestopping plug.
2. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent stack.
3. Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral
nailing flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
4. Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48/A 48M, gray-iron, hubless-pattern, wye branch with
neoprene O-ring at base and gray-iron plug in thermal-release harness. Include
PVC protective cap for plug.
5. Special Coating: Corrosion resistant on interior of fittings.
2.06 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY AND STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Open Drains:
1. Description: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-
spigot, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings. Include P-trap, hub-and-spigot riser section;
and where required, increaser fitting joined with ASTM C 564, rubber gaskets.
2. Size: Same as connected waste piping with increaser fitting of size indicated.
B. Sleeve Flashing Device:

1. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron fitting, with clamping device, that forms
sleeve for pipe floor penetrations of floor membrane. Include galvanized-steel
pipe extension in top of fitting that will extend 2 inches (51 mm) above finished
floor and galvanized-steel pipe extension in bottom of fitting that will extend
through floor slab.
2. Size: As required for close fit to riser or stack piping.
C. Stack Flashing Fittings:

1. Description: Counterflashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for
terminating roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe.
2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.
D. Vent Caps:
1. Description: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design.
Include vented hood and setscrews to secure to vent pipe.
2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.
E. Expansion Joints:
1. Standard: ASME A112.21.2M.
2. Body: Cast iron with bronze sleeve, packing, and gland.
3. End Connections: Matching connected piping.
4. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent piping.
2.07 FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum
weights and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:
1. General Use: 4.0-lb/sq. ft. (20-kg/sq. m), 0.0625-inch (1.6-mm) thickness.
2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 3.0-lb/sq. ft. (15-kg/sq. m), 0.0469-inch (1.2-mm) thickness.
3. Burning: 6-lb/sq. ft. (30-kg/sq. m), 0.0938-inch (2.4-mm) thickness.
B. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152/B 152M, of the following minimum weights and
thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:
1. General Applications: 12 oz./sq. ft. (3.7 kg/sq. m or 0.41-mm thickness).
2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 8 oz./sq. ft. (2.5 kg/sq. m or 0.27-mm thickness).
C. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and
0.04-inch (1.01-mm) minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include G90
(Z275) hot-dip galvanized, mill-phosphatized finish for painting if indicated.
D. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-mil

(1.01-mm) minimum thickness.
E. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.
F. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar
accessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being
installed.
G. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.
H. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.
2.08 ROOF DRAINS
A. Metal Roof Drains:

1. Pattern: Roof drain.
2. Body Material: Cast iron.
3. Combination Flashing Ring and Gravel Stop: Required.
4. Outlet: Bottom/Side.
5. Dome Material: Bronze.
6. Adaptor: Cast iron to PVC.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining
materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.
B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the
following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4 (DN 100). Use NPS 4 (DN 100) for
larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.
2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) for piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and
smaller and 100 feet (30 m) for larger piping.
4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
C. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with
finished floor.
D. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types
indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.
E. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains
flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.
2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor
drainage. Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area
radii:
a. Radius, 30 Inches (750 mm) or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but
not less than 1/4-inch (6.35-mm) total depression.
b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches (750 to 1500 mm): Equivalent to 1 percent slope.
c. Radius, 60 Inches (1500 mm) or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope,
but not greater than 1-inch (25-mm) total depression.
3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain
and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where
penetrated.
4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless
F. Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend
through roof.
G. Install flashing fittings on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.
H. Install through-penetration firestop assemblies in plastic [conductors] [and] [stacks] at

floor penetrations.
I. Assemble open drain fittings and install with top of hub 1 inch (25 mm) above floor.
J. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with
waterproof membrane.
K. Install vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof.
L. Install expansion joints on vertical stacks and conductors. Position expansion joints for
easy access and maintenance.
M. Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting-type specialties.
N. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless
trap is indicated.
O. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations
and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal
protruding pipe fittings.
P. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane manufacturer's
written installation instructions. Roofing materials are specified in Division 07.
1. Install roof-drain flashing collar or flange so that there will be no leakage between
drain and adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where
penetrated.
2. Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance.
Q. Install manufactured, gray-iron downspout boots at grade with top 6 inches (152 mm)
above grade. Secure to building wall.
3.02 CONNECTIONS

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
3.03 FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes
are required. Join flashing according to the following if required:
1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6.0-lb/sq. ft. (30-kg/sq. m), 0.0938-inch
(2.4-mm) thickness or thicker. Solder joints of lead sheets 4.0-lb/sq. ft. (20-
kg/sq. m), 0.0625-inch (1.6-mm) thickness or thinner.
2. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets.
B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in
floors and roofs with waterproof membrane.
1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10
inches (250 mm), and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm)
around pipe.
2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200
mm) around sleeve.
3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least
8 inches (200 mm) around specialty.
C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.
D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.
E. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially
made flashing fittings, according to Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
F. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure
flashing into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.
G. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or
debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 22 1323
SANITARY WASTE INTERCEPTORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes the following types of interceptors outside the building:
1. Grease interceptors.
2. Oil interceptors.
3. Sand interceptors.
4. Sediment interceptors.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. FOG: Fats, oils and greases.
C. HDPE: High-density polyethylene plastic.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of metal and plastic interceptor indicated. Include materials
of fabrication, dimensions, rated capacities, retention capacities, operating
characteristics, size and location of each pipe connection and accessories for the
following:
1. FOG disposal systems.
3. Grease removal devices.
B. Shop Drawings: For each type and size of cast-in-place-concrete interceptor indicated.
1. Include materials of construction, dimensions, rated capacities, retention
capacities, location and size of each pipe connection, furnished specialties, and
accessories.
2. Include reports and calculations for design mixes of concrete.
C. Shop Drawings: For each type and size of precast concrete interceptor indicated.
1. Include materials of construction, dimensions, rated capacities, retention
capacities, location and size of each pipe connection, furnished specialties, and
accessories.
KEO/19-3262-0000 22 1323/1 Sanitary Waste Interceptors

D. Coordination Drawings: Interceptors, drawn to scale, on which the following items are
shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items
involved:
1. Interceptors.
2. Piping connections. Include size, location, and elevation of each.
3. Interface with underground structures and utility services.
E. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that FOG disposal

systems, grease interceptors, grease removal devices, oil interceptors, accessories, and
components will withstand seismic forces. Include the following:
event."
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For drainage piping specialties to include in

1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Interruption of Existing Sewer Services: Do not interrupt services to facilities occupied

by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after
arranging to provide temporary sewer services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed
interruption of service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of sewer services without Construction
Manager's written permission.
contents.
1. Cultures: Provide 3.8-L bottles of bacteria culture recommended by
manufacturer of FOG disposal systems equal to 200 percent of amount installed,
but no fewer than 3.8-L bottles.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

2.02 GREASE INTERCEPTORS
A. Grease Interceptors:
1. Standard: ASME A112.14.3 and PDI-G101, for intercepting and retaining fats,
oils, and greases from food preparation wastewater.
2. Plumbing and Drainage Institute Seal: Required.
3. Body Material: Cast iron.
4. Interior Lining: Corrosion-resistant enamel.
5. Exterior Coating: Corrosion-resistant enamel.
6. Body Extension: Required.
7. End Connections: Flanged.
8. Cleanout: Integral or field installed on outlet.
9. Mounting: Recessed, flush with floor.
10. Flow-Control Fitting: Required.
11. Operation: Automatic recovery.
2.03 OIL AND SAND INTERCEPTORS
A. Oil Interceptors: Cast-in-place-concrete or precast concrete structure complying with

requirements of Local AHJ.
B. Oil Interceptors: Construct bottom, sidewalls, and top of reinforced, cast- in-place
concrete. Include waste oil and vent connections, manholes and piping or openings to
draw off oil and to permit wastewater flow.
2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Concrete Paint: SSPC-Paint 16, coal-tar, epoxy polyamide
B. Metal Paint: SSPC-Paint 16, coal-tar, epoxy polyamide
C. PE Film: ASTM D 4397, 0.10-inch (0.25-mm) thickness sheet.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install precast concrete interceptors according to ASTM C 891. Set level and plumb.
B. Clean and prepare concrete surfaces to be field painted. Remove loose efflorescence,
chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen surface as required to
remove glaze. Paint the following concrete surfaces as recommended by paint
manufacturer:
1. Cast-in-Place-Concrete Interceptors: All exterior, except bottom and all interior.
2. Precast Concrete Interceptors: All exterior and interior.
C. Install sheet PE film on earth where cast-in-place-concrete interceptors are to be built.
D. Clean and prepare metal surfaces to be field painted according to SSPC- PA 1. Paint
the following metal surfaces according to SSPC-PA 1 and SSPC-Paint 16:
1. Metal Interceptors: All surfaces except baskets, screens, and strainers.
2. Plastic Interceptors: All metal surfaces except baskets, screens, and strainers.
3. Metal Manhole Frames and Covers Including Grates all surfaces.
4. Do not paint metal surfaces with factory-applied, corrosion-resistant coating.
E. Set metal and plastic interceptors level and plumb.
F. Prepare and paint metal components, to be field painted, according to SSPC-Paint 16.
G. Repair and restore protective coatings to original condition.
3.02 CONNECTIONS

B. Make piping connections between interceptors and piping systems.
A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment

nameplate or sign on or near each of the following:
2. Grease removal devices.
4. Solids interceptors.
B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate

safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in
addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 22 Section
"Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
END OF SECTION

SECTION 22 1329
SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL

Specification. In case of contradiction or discrepancy between Local Construction Specification
and Technical Specification, CONTRACTOR shall incorporate whichever is more stringent.
Where a question remains on which requirement is more stringent, CONTRACTOR shall
submit the issue to Client and/or Client Representative in writing. The decision of Client and/or
Client Representative shall be considered to be final.
A. This Section includes the following sewage pumps and accessories for sanitary
drainage piping systems in buildings:
1. Submersible sewage pumps.
2. Packaged, submersible sewage pump units.
3. Packaged, wastewater pump units.

1. Division 22 Section "Sump Pumps" for applications in storm-drainage systems.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of sewage pump specified. Include certified
performance curves with operating points plotted on curves; and rated capacities of
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each sewage pump to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.

sewage pumps and are based on the specific system indicated.

KEO/19-3262-0000 22 1329/1 Sanitary Sewerage Pumps

C. Regulatory Requirements
a. National Sanitation Federation (NSF) / Water Regulations Advisory Service (WRAS)
d. Maximum operating parameters.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. When warranties are required, verify with Owner's counsel that special warranties stated
in this Article are not less than remedies available to Owner under prevailing local laws.
B. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of sewage pumping stations that fail in materials or workmanship
a. Structural failures including shell.
b. Faulty operation of sewage pumps, controls, or accessories.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
use.
2. Warranty Period for Shells: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
3. Warranty Period for Sewage Pumps and Controls: Two years from date of
Substantial Completion.
Completion.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases and pits.

maintenance of all the equipment furnished under this section. Spare parts in a location
designated by the Engineer or the Employer.
B. All spare parts and maintenance equipment shall be provided in original packing, clearly
identified and labelled. Provide complete schedules of spare parts and maintenance
equipment clearly cross-referenced with the “Record Drawings” and maintenance
instructions and manuals.
C. All spare parts and maintenance equipment shall be as recommended by the equipment
manufacturer and shall be subject to the final approval of the Engineer.
D. Spare parts and maintenance equipment provided shall, as a minimum, equal the items
used during the two (2) years maintenance period. The Contractor shall carefully log all
spare parts utilized during maintenance period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
2.02 SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMPS
A. Submersible, Quick-Disconnect Sewage Pumps: Factory-assembled and -tested,

simplex or duplex, single-stage, centrifugal, end-suction, submersible, direct-connected
sewage pumps complying with MEW&MPW code and standard for submersible sewage
pumps and with SWPA's "Submersible Sewage Pumping Systems (SWPA) Handbook"
for guide-rail supports. Include reverse-flow assembly.
1. Casing: Cast iron, with open inlet, legs (or guide-rail supports) that elevate pump
to permit flow into impeller, and vertical discharge with companion flange for
piping connection.
2. Impeller: ASTM A 532/A 532M, abrasion-resistant cast iron; statically and
dynamically balanced, open or semi-open, nonclog design and capable of
handling solids; overhung, single suction, and keyed and secured to shaft.
3. Pump and Motor Shaft: Stainless steel with factory-sealed, grease-lubricated
ball bearings and double mechanical seals.
4. Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor-start type; with built-in overload protection;
lifting eye or lug; and three-conductor, waterproof power cable of length required
and with grounding plug and cable-sealing assembly for connection at pump.
Comply with Division 22 Section "Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing
Equipment."
a. Moisture-Sensing Probe: Internal moisture sensor and moisture alarm.
b. Motor Housing Fluid: Air or oil.
5. Guide-Rail Supports: Include the following for each sewage pump:
a. Guide Rails: Vertical pipes or structural members, made of galvanized
steel or other corrosion-resistant metal, attached to baseplate and basin
sidewall or cover.
b. Baseplate: Corrosion-resistant metal plate, attached to basin floor,
supporting guide rails and stationary elbow.
c. Pump Yoke: Motor-mounted or casing-mounted yokes or other
attachments for aligning pump during connection of flanges.
d. Movable Elbow: Pump discharge-elbow fitting with flange, seal, and
positioning device.
e. Stationary Elbow: Fixed discharge-elbow fitting with flange that mates to
movable-elbow flange and support attached to baseplate.
f. Lifting Cable: Stainless steel; attached to pump and cover at manhole.
B. Submersible, Quick-Disconnect Grinder Pumps: tested, simplex or duplex single-stage,

centrifugal, end-suction, submersible, direct-connected grinder pumps complying with
MEW&MPW code and standard for submersible sewage pumps and with SWPA's
"Submersible Sewage Pumping Systems (SWPA) Handbook" for guide-rail supports.
1. Casing: Cast iron, with open inlet, legs (or guide-rail supports) that elevate pump
to permit flow into impeller, and vertical discharge with companion flange for
piping connection.
2. Impeller: Bronze or stainless steel; statically and dynamically balanced, with
stainless-steel cutter, grinder, or slicer assembly and capable of handling solids;
overhung, single suction, and keyed and secured to shaft.
3. Pump and Motor Shaft: Stainless steel with factory-sealed, grease-lubricated
ball bearings and double mechanical seals.
4. Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor-start type; with built-in overload protection;
lifting eye or lug; and three-conductor, waterproof power cable of length required
and with grounding plug and cable-sealing assembly for connection at pump.
Comply with Division 22 Section "Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing
Equipment."
a. Moisture-Sensing Probe: Internal moisture sensor and moisture alarm.
b. Motor Housing Fluid: Air or oil.
5. Guide-Rail Supports: Include the following for each sewage pump:
a. Guide Rails: Vertical pipes or structural members, made of galvanized
steel or other corrosion-resistant metal, attached to baseplate and basin
sidewall or cover.
b. Baseplate: Corrosion-resistant metal plate, attached to basin floor,
supporting guide rails and stationary elbow.
c. Pump Yoke: Motor-mounted or casing-mounted yokes or other
attachments for aligning pump during connection of flanges.
d. Movable Elbow: Pump discharge-elbow fitting with flange, seal, and
positioning device.
e. Stationary Elbow: Fixed discharge-elbow fitting with flange that mates to
movable-elbow flange and support attached to baseplate.
f. Lifting Cable: Stainless steel; attached to pump and cover at manhole.
C. Pump Discharge Piping: Factory or field fabricated, UPVC pipes, schedules 40 / PN16 ,
ASTM D 1785.
D. Controls: NEMA 250, Type 1enclosure, pedestal mounted unless wall mounting is
indicated; with three mechanical- or mercury-float or micropressure switches in
NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosures; mounting rod; and electric cables. Include automatic
alternator to alternate operation of pump units on successive cycles and to operate
multiple units if one pump cannot handle load.
1. Float Guide: Pipe or other restraint for floats and rods in basins of depth greater
than 60 inches (1500 mm).
2. High-Water Alarm: Rod-mounted, NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosure with
mechanical- or mercury-float or micropressure -switch alarm matching control
and electric bell; 120-V ac, with transformer and contacts for remote alarm bell.
E. Capacities and Characteristics: See Equipment Schedule on Plans.
2.03 PACKAGED, WASTEWATER PUMP UNITS
A. Submersible Units: Factory-assembled and -tested, single-stage, centrifugal, end-

suction, automatic-operation, submersible effluent pump unit.
B. Capacities and Characteristics: See Equipment Schedule on Plans.
C. Electrical Characteristics: See Equipment Schedule on Plans.
2.04 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM INTERFACE

system. Include the following:
1. On-off status of each pump.
2. Alarm status.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for plumbing piping to verify actual locations of sanitary drainage
and vent piping connections before sewage pump installation.
3.02 CONCRETE
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated for pumps and controllers. Refer to
indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around full perimeter of
base.
equipment.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install sewage pumps according to applicable requirements in MEW&MPW code and

standard for submersible sewage pumps.

B. Install pumps and arrange to provide access for maintenance including removal of
motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.
C. Suspend wet-pit-mounted, vertical sewage pumps from basin and pit covers. Make
direct connections to sanitary drainage piping.
D. Set submersible sewage pumps on basin and pit floors. Make direct connections to
sanitary drainage piping.
1. Anchor guide-rail supports to basin and pit bottoms and sidewalls or covers.
Install pumps so pump and discharge pipe disconnecting flanges make positive
seals when pumps are lowered into place.
E. Install sewage pump basins and connect to drainage and vent piping. Brace interior of
basins according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent distortion or collapse
during concrete placement. Set basin cover and fasten to basin top flange. Install cover
so top surface is flush with finished floor.
F. Construct sewage pump pits and connect to drainage and vent piping. Set pit curb
frame recessed in and anchored to concrete. Fasten pit cover to pit curb flange. Install
cover so top surface is flush with finished floor.
G. Install packaged, wastewater pump unit basins on floor or concrete base unless
recessed installation is indicated. Make direct connections to drainage and vent piping.
H. Support piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps.
3.04 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste and
Vent Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to sewage pumps to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect sanitary drainage and vent piping to pumps. Install discharge piping equal to
or greater than size of pump discharge piping. Install vent piping equal to or greater
than size of pump basin vent connection. Refer to Division 22 Section "Sanitary
Drainage and Vent Piping."
1. Install check and shutoff valves on discharge piping from each pump. Install
unions on pumps having threaded pipe connections. Install valves same size as
connected piping. Refer to Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for
Plumbing Piping" for general-duty valves for sanitary waste piping.


A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

instructions.
3. Disconnect couplings and check motors for proper direction of rotation.
4. Verify that each pump is free to rotate by hand. If pump is bound or drags, do
not operate until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
B. Start pumps without exceeding safe motor power:

1. Start motors.
3. Check general mechanical operation of pumps and motors.
C. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
D. Remove and replace damaged and malfunctioning components.

1. Pump Controls: Set pump controls for automatic start, stop, and alarm operation
as required for system application.
2. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated, or if not
indicated, for normal operation.
E. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial

Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied
conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project outside normal occupancy hours for this
purpose.
3.06 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain controls and pumps.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 22 1429
SUMP PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL

A. This Section includes the following sump pumps and accessories, inside the building, for
building storm drainage systems:
1. Submersible sump pumps.
2. Sump pump basins and pits.

1. Division 22 Section "Sanitary Sewerage Pumps" for application in sanitary
drainage systems.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of sump pump specified. Include certified
performance curves with operating points plotted on curves, and rated capacities of
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each sump pump to include in emergency,

sump pumps and are based on the specific system indicated.

C. Regulatory Requirements

KEO/19-3262-0000 22 1429/1 Sump Pumps
a. National Sanitation Federation (NSF) / Water Regulations Advisory Service (WRAS)
d. Maximum operating parameters
1.05 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases and pits.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. When warranties are required, verify with Owner's counsel that special warranties stated
in this Article are not less than remedies available to Owner under prevailing local laws.
B. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of packaged sump pumps that fail in materials or workmanship
a. Structural failures including shell.
b. Faulty operation of sump pumps, controls, or accessories.
use.
2. Warranty Period for Shells: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
3. Warranty Period for Sump Pumps and Controls: Two years from date of
Completion.
maintenance of all the equipment furnished under this section. Spare parts in a location
designated by the Engineer or the Employer.
KEO/19-3262-0000 22 1429/2 Sump Pumps

B. All spare parts and maintenance equipment shall be provided in original packing, clearly
identified and labelled. Provide complete schedules of spare parts and maintenance
equipment clearly cross-referenced with the “Record Drawings” and maintenance
instructions and manuals.
C. All spare parts and maintenance equipment shall be as recommended by the equipment
manufacturer and shall be subject to the final approval of the Engineer.
D. Spare parts and maintenance equipment provided shall, as a minimum, equal the items
used during the two (2) years maintenance period. The Contractor shall carefully log all
spare parts utilized during maintenance period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
2.02 SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMPS
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, duplex single-stage, centrifugal, end-

suction, submersible, direct-connected sump pumps complying with MEW&MPW code
and standard for submersible sump pumps.
B. Casing: Cast iron; with cast-iron inlet strainer, legs that elevate pump to permit flow into
impeller, and vertical discharge with companion flange for piping connection.
C. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze or stainless steel; statically and dynamically
balanced, semi open non clog design, overhung, single suction, keyed and secured to
shaft.
D. Pump and Motor Shaft: Stainless steel, with factory-sealed, grease-lubricated ball
bearings and double-mechanical seals.
E. Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor-start type, with built-in overload protection; three-
conductor waterproof power cable of length required, and with grounding plug and
cable-sealing assembly for connection at pump. Comply with requirements in
Division 22 Section "Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment."
1. Moisture-Sensing Probe: Internal moisture sensor with moisture alarm.
F. Pump Discharge Piping: Factory or field fabricated, PVC pipes, schedules 40 / PN 16.
G. Basin Pit Cover: Cast iron or steel with bituminous coating and strong enough to
support controls.
H. Controls: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure, pedestal mounted unless wall mounting is
indicated; with three mechanical- or mercury-float or micro pressure mechanical-float
KEO/19-3262-0000 22 1429/3 Sump Pumps
mercury-float micro pressure switches in NEMA 250, Type 6
enclosures; mounting rod; and electric cables. Include automatic alternator to alternate
operation of pump units on successive cycles and to operate multiple units if one pump
cannot handle load.
1. Float Guide: Pipe or other restraint for floats and rods in basins of depth greater
2. High-Water Alarm: Cover-mounted, compression-probe alarm, with electric bell;
120-V ac, with transformer and contacts for remote alarm bell.
3. High-Water Alarm: Rod-mounted, NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosure with
mechanical- or mercury-float or micro pressure mechanical-float mercury-float
micro pressure-switch alarm matching control and electric bell; 120-V ac, with
transformer and contacts for remote alarm bell.
I. Capacity and Characteristics: See equipment schedule on plans.
2.03 FREE STANDING DRAINAGE PUMP UNITS
A. Submersible Units: Factory-assembled and -tested, single-stage, centrifugal, automatic-

operation, submersible, drainage pump unit.
1. Pump Body: Stainless steel.
2. Impeller: Brass or stainless steel.
3. Pump Seals: Mechanical type.
4. Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor-start type, with built-in overload protection.
Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Common Motor Requirements
for Plumbing Equipment."
5. Power Cord: Three-conductor, waterproof cable of length required but not less
than 72 inches (1830 mm), with grounding plug and cable-sealing assembly for
connection at pump.
6. Control: Float switch.
B. Capacity and Characteristics: See equipment schedule on plans.
2.04 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM INTERFACE

system. Include the following:
1. On-off status of each pump.
2. Alarm status.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in of plumbing piping to verify actual locations of storm drainage

piping connections before sump pump installation.
3.02 CONCRETE
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated for pumps and controllers. Refer to
KEO/19-3262-0000 22 1429/4 Sump Pumps

1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor.
Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers
around full perimeter of base.
equipment.
3.03 SUMP PUMP INSTALLATION
A. Install sump pumps according to applicable requirements in in MEW&MPW code and

standard for submersible sewage pumps.
B. Install pumps and arrange to provide access for maintenance including removal of
motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.
C. Set submersible sump pumps on basin or pit floor. Make direct connections to storm
drainage piping.
D. Construct sump pump pits and connect to drainage piping. Set pit curb frame recessed
in and anchored to concrete. Fasten pit cover to pit curb flange. Install cover so top
surface is flush with finished floor.
E. Install packaged, pedestal, drainage pump units and make direct connection to storm
drainage piping.
F. Support piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps.
3.04 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Facility Storm

Drainage Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and
specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to sump pumps to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect storm drainage piping to pumps. Install discharge piping equal to or greater
than size of pump discharge piping. Refer to Division 22 Section "Facility Storm
Drainage Piping."
1. Install flexible connectors adjacent to pumps in discharge piping.
2. Install check and shutoff valves on discharge piping from each pump. Install
unions on pumps having threaded pipe connections. Install valves same size as
connected piping. Refer to Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for
Plumbing Piping" for general-duty valves for drainage piping.



KEO/19-3262-0000 22 1429/5 Sump Pumps
instructions.
3. Disconnect couplings and check motors for proper direction of rotation.
4. Verify that each pump is free to rotate by hand. If pump is bound or drags, do
not operate until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
B. Start pumps without exceeding safe motor power:

1. Start motors.
3. Check general mechanical operation of pumps and motors.
C. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
D. Remove and replace damaged and malfunctioning components.

1. Pump Controls: Set pump controls for automatic start, stop, and alarm operation
as required for system application.
2. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated, or if not
indicated, for normal operation.
E. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial

purpose.
3.06 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain controls and pumps.
END OF SECTION
KEO/19-3262-0000 22 1429/6 Sump Pumps

SECTION 22 3200
DOMESTIC WATER FILTRATION EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL

A. This Section includes the following types of water filtration equipment for water systems
in buildings:
1. Multimedia sand filters.
2. In-line water filter.
3. Irrigation screen filter.
4. Water Purification System (Reverse Osmosis).
1.02 DEFINITIONS
C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
F. ppm: Parts per million.
G. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Detail water filtration equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions,
weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and
location and size of each field connection.
C. Certificates of Shop Inspections and Data Reports: For products required to have
ASME label, signed by product manufacturer.
KEO/19-3262-0000 22 3200/1 Domestic Water Filtration Equipment

E. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that water filtration

equipment, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces. Include the
following:
event."
F. Source quality-control test reports.
G. Field quality-control test reports.
H. Startup service test reports.
I. Operation and Maintenance Data: For water filtration equipment to include in

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of water filtration equipment through one source
from a single manufacturer.

water filtration equipment and are based on the specific system indicated.
C. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

E. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1
through 9," for all components that will be in contact with potable water.
A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities

occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then
only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements
indicated:
1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than two days in advance of proposed
interruption of water service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of water service without Construction Manager's
written permission.

B. Feedwater Analysis: Contractor to obtain feed water analysis from reputable water
treatment provider and design the water filtration equipment based on actual quality of
water available
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with Architectural and Structural
Drawings.
contents.
1.08 WARRANTEE

replace components of water filter that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
a. Faulty operation of controls.
use.
c. Impurities washed out of system during backwashing period.
d. Effluent turbidity greater and color darker than incoming water.
e. Fouling of underdrain system and filtering layers with turbidity or by dirt,
rust from filter equipment, while operating according to manufacturer's
written operating instructions.
2. Commercial Water Filterer, Warranty Period: From date of Substantial
Completion.
a. Filter Tanks: Two years.
b. Controls: Two years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
2.02 Multimedia Sand Filters:

1. Description: Factory-fabricated and -tested, duplex, multimedia, sand-filter
system of filter tank(s), media, piping, and controls for filtration efficiency 99%
removing sediment particles 10 microns and larger from feed water.
a. Tank Construction:
1) Fabricate and label FRP filter tanks to comply with ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code: Section X, if indicated.
2) Fabricate supports and base and attachment to tank with
reinforcement strong enough to resist filter movement during a
seismic event when filter base is anchored to building structure.
b. Pipe Connections NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded according to
ASME B1.20.1.
c. FRP Tank Pipe Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Type A,
integral; Designation F, 150-psig (1.034-MPa) pressure category flanges
of grade same as tank material according to ASTM D 5421.
d. Service Valve(s): Diaphragm-type hydraulically operated.
e. Piping: Stainless-steel pipe, stainless-steel fittings, and flanged, grooved,
or threaded joints.
f. Safety Valves: Automatic air vent.
g. Controls for Duplex Tank System: Automatic, electric time clock for
control of filter system flow and backwash cycles; factory wired for single,
external electrical connection. System operation shall be continuous with
bypass piping and not more than one tank in backwash cycle at same
time.
h. Support: Skid mounting.
2. Capacity and Characteristics:
a. See equipment schedule on plans.
2.03 SELF CLEANING INLINE WATER FILTER WITH AUTOMATIC BACKWASH
A. Type: Inline water filter with automatic backwash with 20 micron (900 mesh
approximate), the connections shall be NPT threaded tailpieces with union on inlet and
outlet. Materials of construction shall be as follows:
Body and Sump Brass
Screen Stainless Steel
Internal Construction Acetal Copolymer
Seals NBR
Ball Valve Brass with PTFE Seals
B. Inlet Pressure: Minimum 22 psi and maximum 400 psi
C. Inlet Temperature: 158ºF (70ºC).
D. Automatic Backwash Control: Bayonet mounted shaft of 24 Vac motor and timer
replaces ball valve manual control for automatic backwash at programmed intervals
complete with 24V transformer with the following specifications:
Power: 4 VA
Current: 170 mA
Voltage: 24 Vac
Cycle Time: 20 Seconds (approximate)
Timer: Variable.
E. Capacity: Schedule on drawing shall be referred to for capacity ratings.
2.04 IRRIGATION SCREEN FILTER
A. Type: Single barrel configuration screen filters with automatic backwash.
B. Function: Turbidity removal to 200-mesh filtration fineness in once through application.
C. Construction: Rated (150 psig), internally and externally epoxy coated stainless steel
(type 316) housing, with quick release covers and integral supports, welded inlet and
outlet pipes with flanged/grooved ends. Ports for air release valve, clean and dirty water
sampling cocks and pressure gauges at inlet and outlet and stainless steel (type 316)
screen.
D. Accessories: Air bleed valve, sampling cocks, pressure gauges, ball type valves on the
flushing lines.
2.05 WATER PURIFICATION SYSTEM (REVERSE OSMOSIS)
A. Description: Complete packaged reverse osmosis (RO) water treatment system

producing high purity water by removal of dissolved mineral, bacteria, particles and
organic impurities. Designed for continuous automatic operation. The system shall
include activated carbon pre-filtration and UV. RO system operation will be controlled
by the water level in the product storage tank.
B. Manufacturer shall have been engaged in the manufacture of reverse osmosis systems
as a primary product for at least ten years. The ten year requirement supersedes any
conflicting requirement in other parts of the project specification.
C. Project Conditions:
1. Influent Water Analysis:
a. The system shall be fed by potable water (MEW), below are guidelines of
potable water quality:
1) pH 6–8
2) Maximum Free Chlorine 0.5 ppm
3) Conductivity <600 μs/cm
4) TDS <400 ppm
5) Total Hardness <200 ppm
b. The Contractor should confirm the analysis with current samples and
tests.
2. Design Parameters:
a. Product Water Capacity: 75 liter per minute
b. Product Water Quality
1) pH 6–8
2) TDS <20 ppm
3) Total Hardness Nil
c. Daily Hours of Water Demand: 24 Hours
d. Operating Temperature Range: <50 oC
3. Reference Standards
a. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).
1) B40.100-1998 – Pressure Gages and Gage Attachments.
b. ASTM International (ASTM):
1) A269-04 Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel
Tubing for General Service.
2) D1785-06 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules
40, 80 and 120.
c. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
1) B300-04 Hypochlorites.
2) B301-04 Liquid Chlorine.
3) C651-99 Disinfecting Chlorine.
d. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
1) ICS-6-1993 (R2001) – Industrial Control and System Enclosures.
e. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1) 70-50 National Electrical Code.

f. Department of Heat and Human Services, Food and Drug Administration
(FDA)
1) CFR-21, Chapter1, Part 175.300, Resinous and Polymeric
Coatings.
D. Reverse Osmosis System

1. Packaged automatic reverse osmosis system mounted on steel frame, designed
for project conditions. Equipment arranged on the frame to allow easy access for
operating, maintenance and repair.
2. Performance Requirements:
a. Membrane reject ratio: 98% minimum. TDS of product is 2% maximum
of input TDS.
b. Product rate: 70% minimum. Maximum amount of water to drain 30% of
input.
3. RO Membrane Elements:
a. Thin-film composite with FRP over-wrap, anti-telescoping device, u-cup
brine seal. The design salt rejection shall be 98% based on 200 ppm
water at 225 psig at 77 degrees F.
4. RO Element Housings:
a. Type FRP membrane housing with PVC end caps held in place with
stainless steel bands. Each housing assembly complete with one set of
O-rings and O-ring lubricant. Provide cleaning connections.
5. High Pressure Pumps and Motors:
a. Vertical multistage high efficiency centrifugal type with Type 304 stainless
steel casing, shaft, impellers. Tungsten carbide and ceramic shaft seals.
Cast iron frame with flanged piping connections. Premium efficiency
TEFC motor selected to be non-overloading on the entire performance
curve.
6. Manual Valves:
a. Pump Throttle Valve: Type 316 stainless steel ball valve, socket welded.
b. Concentrate Throttle Valve, Recycle Throttle Valve: Globe valve,
stainless steel, rated for 300 psi minimum.
c. Inlet Isolation Valve, Product and Concentrate Check Valves: PVC with
EPDM seats and seals.
d. Feedwater Sample Valve, Product Water Sample Valve: PVC plug valve
with EPDM seats and seals.
e. High Pressure Sample Valve: Type 316 stainless steel plug valve.
7. Automatic Valves:
a. Automatic Inlet Shut Off Butterfly valves, Class 150, Wafer, Cast Iron
Body, Nylon Coated Disc, EPDM Seat, with electronic motor actuator,
220V/1PH/50Hz, NEMA 4 Enclosure, Piston Indicator.
b. Automatic Membrane Flush Valve: Provide for purging the membranes
with fresh water upon machine shout down.
8. Piping:
a. Low Pressure Feed, Reject and Recycle Piping (75 psi and under): ASTM
D1785, Schedule 80 PVC, socket welded and flanged.
b. RO Product Tubing From Each Membrane Housing: ASTM D1785,
Schedule 80 PVC, socket welded and flanged.
c. Low Pressure Control and Pressure Gage Tubing: Polyethylene.
d. High Pressure Reject and Recycle Piping (above 75 psi): ASTM A269,
Type 304 Schedule 10 stainless steel with butt welded joints.
e. High Pressure Control and Pressure Gage Tubing: 1000 psi burst nylon.
9. Controls:

a. Electronic PLC or microprocessor controller providing automatic control
for all operating functions. Motor starter panel. All in epoxy coated steel
enclosure rated NEMA 4. All wiring factory-installed and tested. Comply
with Section 16127, CABLES, LOW VOLTAGE (600 volts and below) and
NFPA 70.
b. Autoflush indicator and control to flush RO concentrate at shut down or at
predetermined intervals.
c. Warning Alarms: Low quality product, low feed pressure, high feed
temperature.
d. Automatic Shutdowns and Alarms: Low feed pressure, low product
quality, pretreatment out of service, storage tank full.
e. Status Indicators: Low feed pressure, low product quality, pretreatment
out of service, storage tank full.
f. Pump Motor Starter: Comply with Section 16155, MOTOR STARTERS.
g. Miscellaneous Controls: Elapsed run time indicator, alarm horn, chemical
pump receptacles, convenience receptacles, auxiliary contacts.
10. Instrumentation and Displays
a. All instrumentation readout panel-mounted in epoxy coated steel
enclosure enclosures rated NEMA 4. All factory wiring. Comply with
NFPA 70.
b. Digital flow indicators for feed, product, reject, recycle.
c. Pressure gages for inlet, cartridge filter outlet, RO feed, RO concentrate,
and RO product. Refer to paragraph below.
d. Conductivity indicator measuring product quality with digital displays,
alarm relays and automatic temperature compensation.
e. Conductivity probe mounted in the RO product.
11. Skid and Frame Assembly:
a. RO machine shall be built on a skid and frame constructed of welded
structural carbon steel. The entire surface shall be sand-blasted and
coated with high solids epoxy coating.
E. Activated Carbon Filter:

1. The water filtration equipment shall be designed by the manufacturer to work as
a total system. The system shall be provided by the Contractor complete with
filter tanks, activated carbon with control valves and accessories and piping to
connect the filter into the water system and make it operational, the filter should
be sized for RO machine inlet flowrate, to removes chlorine to prevent membrane
damage.
2. Vessel: The filter vessels shall be fabricated from fiber glass, it shall be designed
for a working pressure of 150 psi. The tank shall have a single point header to
distribute raw water and collect backwash water evenly over the top surface of
the bed. The lower distributor will be hub-radial design fabricated entirely of
schedule 80 PVC.
3. Filter Media: 12 x 40 mesh bituminous coal-based activated carbon, supported
on gravel.
4. Backwash Cycle: Electric actuated butterfly valves with pre-sized drain line flow
control orifice. The cycle shall be controlled and adjusted by a PLC controller.
5. Piping: Schedule 80 PVC internal piping, distributor and face piping. Provide
automatic air vent and inlet outlet pressure gauges and inlet and outlet sampling
ports. Provide manual isolation valves of filtration system to enable maintenance
of filter.
F. Softener

1. Single softener should be sized for RO machine inlet flow rate, designed to
remove hardness to prevent scale on RO membranes. The softener shall be
provided by the contractor complete with softener tank, brine tank, resin, control
valves, accessories and piping to connect the softener into the water system and
make it operational.
2. Vessel: The softener vessels shall be fabricated from fiber glass, it shall be
designed for a working pressure of 150 psi. The tank shall have a single point
header to distribute raw water and collect regeneration/backwash water evenly
over the top surface of the bed. The lower distributor will be hub-radial design
fabricated entirely of schedule 80 PVC.
3. Softener Media: High quality resin, supported on gravel, and should allow 50%
expansion during the time of backwash.
4. Backwash Cycle: Electric actuated butterfly valves with pre-sized drain line flow
control orifice. The cycle shall be controlled and adjusted by a PLC controller.
5. Piping: Schedule 80 PVC internal piping, distributor and face piping. Provide
automatic air vent and inlet outlet pressure gauges and inlet and outlet sampling
ports. Provide manual isolation valves of filtration system to enable maintenance
of filter.
6. Operation Hours: The softener should allow 24 continuous working hours.
G. RO Water Storage Tank:

1. Free-standing, closed-top, flat-bottom, top access manway, PVC bulkhead
fittings for high and low level alarm switches, RO permeate inlet, RO permeate
discharge and drain. Install 0.2 micron tank vent filter at the top head. Vented to
atmosphere.
2. Materials of Construction: Fiberglass.
3. Tank Water Level Control: Adjustable float switch that signal starting and
stopping RO pump. High and low level alarm switches.
H. UV Disinfection Unit
1. UV disinfection unit should be installed inline after the RO plant to ensure
microbiological free water supply. The performance rating shall be greater than
99% destruction if bacteria and viruses at rated flow.
2. Chamber Material: Stainless Steel 316.
3. Dosage shall be greater than 30 mj/cm2 @254 nm.
I. Pressure Gages:
1. ASME B40.100, Grade A, 1% accuracy, 110 mm (4-1/2 inches) diameter, all
metal case, bottom connected. White dials, black hands graduated from 0 to 700
kPa (0 to 100 psi) and identity labeled.
J. Water Testing Equipment

1. Furnish water testing equipment in a portable cabinet specially made for the
installed equipment. Include sufficient materials for 6 months of normal testing
procedures.
2. Test kit to measure total water hardness, free chlorine, pH.
K. Tests:
1. Operating: Tests shall be run in presence of consultant engineer.
2. Procedure:
a. Operate RO system at constant maximum required capacity for one hour
after RO product water is produced. When necessary, waste product
water to sewer to maintain above flow rate. Product water production

shall begin when a sample shows that product water complies with
requirements.
b. Demonstrate all features of the control system including diagnostics and
flow and cycle indications.
A. Hydrostatically test before shipment to minimum of one and one-half times pressure
rating.
B. Prepare test reports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of filters and
separators.
B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections
before equipment installation.
C. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where filters and separators will be
installed.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 CONCRETE BASES
A. Anchor filters and separators to concrete bases.

indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around full perimeter of
base.
equipment.
5. Concrete base construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section
3.03 SAND-FILTER INSTALLATION
A. Install sand-filter tanks on concrete bases, level and plumb.

1. Prepare sand-filter tank distribution system and underbed for filter media and
place specified sand and other media into tanks.
B. Install seismic restraints for sand-filter tanks and accessories and anchor to building
structure.
3.04 CONNECTIONS

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C. Make piping connections between water filtration equipment and dissimilar-metal water
piping with dielectric fittings. Dielectric fittings are specified in Division 22 Section
D. Install shutoff valves on feed water-inlet and filtrate-outlet piping of each water filtration
equipment filter and separator, and on inlet and outlet headers.
1. Metal general-duty valves are specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty
Valves for Plumbing Piping."
E. Install pressure gages on feedwater-inlet and filtrate-outlet piping of each water filtration
equipment filter and separator. Pressure gages are specified in Division 22 Section
"Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."
1. Exception: Water filtration equipment with factory-installed pressure gages at

locations indicated.
F. Install valved bypass water piping around each water filtration equipment filter and
separator.
1. Metal general-duty valves are specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty
Valves for Plumbing Piping."
2. Water piping is specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping."
G. Install drains as indirect wastes to spill into open drains or over floor drains.
H. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for

I. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power


B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
confirm proper unit operation.
C. Remove and replace water filtration equipment that does not pass tests and inspections
and retest as specified above.

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service for carbon

and sand filter water filtration equipment.
instructions.
B. Sample water after startup and at three consecutive seven-day intervals (total of four
samples), and prepare certified test reports for required water performance
characteristics.
3.07 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain carbon and sand filter water filtration
equipment.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 22 3300
ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
B. This Technical Specification document is issued as a supplement to Local

Construction Specification. The Local Construction Specification shall form the basis
of the Project Specification. In case of contradiction or discrepancy between Local
Construction Specification and Technical Specification, CONTRACTOR shall
incorporate whichever is more stringent. Where a question remains on which
requirement is more stringent, CONTRACTOR shall submit the issue to Client and/or
Client Representative in writing. The decision of Client and/or Client Representative
shall be considered to be final.
A. This Section includes the following electric water heaters:

1. Commercial, storage electric water heaters.
2. Unit Electric Water Heaters.
3. Water heater accessories.
4. Hot water circulating pumps
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of water heater indicated. Include rated
capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.
C. Product Certificates: For each type of commercial and instantaneous electric water
heater, signed by product manufacturer.
D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that commercial

water heaters, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces. Include the
following:
event."
KEO/19-3262-0000 22 3300/1 Electric Domestic Water Heaters
E. Source quality-control test reports.
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For electric water heaters to include in emergency,
H. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of electric water heaters through one source

electric water heaters and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to
Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."

D. ASME Compliance: Where indicated, fabricate and label commercial water heater
storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII,
Division 1.
E. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects;
Sections 1 through 9," for all components that will be in contact with potable water.
1.05 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with Architectural and Structural
Drawings.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to

repair or replace components of electric water heaters that fail in materials or
a. Structural failures including storage tank and supports.
b. Faulty operation of controls.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond
normal use.
2. Warranty Period(s): From date of Substantial Completion:
a. Commercial Electric Water Heaters:
1) Storage Tank: Five years.
2) Controls and Other Components: Five years.

A. Spares and maintenance equipment shall include but not limited to

1. Element for each type, 1 set gaskets, magnesium anode.
2. Deliver spare parts to Employer stores.
3. Obtain Engineers approval for the delivered spare parts.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
2.02 QUALIFICATIONS
The manufacturer shall have a minimum of twenty years’ experience in the design,
manufacture and testing of pumps
2.03 COMMERCIAL ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
A. Type Vertical, storage type.
B. Storage section: ASTM rated and certified (150 psi), Duplex Stainless Steel shell
insulated with 90 mm removable cfc free foam insulation in an aluminum casing.
C. Connections: Bronze nipples for cold water inlets, hot water outlet, threaded T&P relief
valve and drain valve ports, flanged connection for element plate.
D. Anodic protection: Extruded magnesium anode attached to shell.
E. Recovery section: Immersion ceramic core type element assembly with screw in type,
removable without draining tank. The elements housed in removable IP-54 Stainless
Steel housings/barrels multiple stages, with individual overheating protection 110°C
and built-in 2- pole Thermostat with temperature adjustment 30°C - 90°C for each
heating stage.
F. Accessories: Power on indicator; temperature indicator and combination stop, check,

drain, safety valve / expansion tank at the inlet, automatic air and vacuum vent, dial
thermometer, pressure gauge, flanged inspection cover 400 mm fitted galvanic
insulation kits for piping connections.
G. Control Panel: IP55 protection (dust, spray), mounted and fully wired with power on
lamp, test buttons and heater indicator lamps for all stages. Power cut-off when
opening control panel door. Off-peak control timer include element protection circuit
against over heating due and manual override switches. Heater indicator LED for each
heating stage. Power-on LED, auto-off-manual switch for each of the 3 stages, electronic
temperature sensor, off-peak control timer with programmable stage cascading control
and LCD digital display. Individual fault indication (blinking heater indictor) of short circuit
or safety cut-out tripping for each heating stage and volt free output contacts for Building
Management System "HEATING FAULT STAGE TO BMS". Integrated 230V power

sockets for non-sacrificial electric anodes. All elements electrically tested, wired and pre-
assembled for easy installation.
H. Capacity: Schedule on drawing shall be referred to for details of selection and capacity
ratings.
2.04 UNIT ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
A. Type Vertical/horizontal wall mounted, storage type.
B. Storage Section: ASME rated and certified (125 psi), glass lined steel shell insulated
with 25mm (1 inch) thick high density fibreglass or polyurethane foam, enclosed in
square ware sheet metal jaketing, with wall mounting brackets fixed on the shell.
C. Connections for cold water inlet with diffuser and hot water outlet with upstand pipe.
D. Anodic protection: Extruded magnesium anode attached to shell.
E. Recovery section: Immersion type elements assembly with screw in type, copper
faced heat resistant plastic base. Heating element shall be made of nickel chromium
wire embedded in magnesium oxide and sheathed in copper incolloy tubes. Watt
density shall not exceed 7.75 / 11.63 per sq. cm. (50 / 75 per sq. inch) for copper
incolloy.
F. Thermostats: Immersion type with an operating range of 20 to 82.2 deg. C and built-
in over-temperature limiter with manual reset.
G. Accessories: Power on indicator, temperature indicator and combination stop, check,

drain, safety valve at the inlet and T&P relief valve.
H. Capacity: Schedules on drawing shall be referred to for details of selection and

capacity ratings.
2.05 WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES
A. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped and
complying with ASME PTC 25.3. Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat
input, and include pressure setting less than water heater working-pressure rating.
Select relief valves with sensing element that extends into storage tank.
B. Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped and complying with
ASME PTC 25.3. Include pressure setting less than water heater working-pressure
rating.
C. Water Heater Stand and Drain-Pan Units: High-density-polyethylene-plastic, 18-inch-

(457-mm-) high, enclosed-base stand complying with IAPMO PS 103 and IAS No. 2.
Include integral or separate drain pan with raised edge and NPS 1 (DN 25) drain outlet
with ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.
D. Water Heater Stands: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated steel stand for
floor mounting and capable of supporting water heater. Include dimension that will
support bottom of water heater a minimum of 18 inches (457 mm) above the floor.

E. Water Heater Mounting Brackets: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated
steel bracket for wall mounting and capable of supporting water heater.
F. Drain Pans: Corrosion-resistant metal with raised edge. Include dimensions not less
than base of water heater and include drain outlet not less than NPS 3/4 (DN 20).
G. Piping Manifold Kits: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated inlet and outlet
piping arrangement for multiple-unit installation. Include piping and valves for field
assembly that are capable of isolating each water heater and of providing balanced
flow through each water heater.
H. Piping-Type Heat Traps: Field-fabricated piping arrangement according to

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 or ASHRAE 90.2.
I. Water Regulators: ASSE 1003, water-pressure reducing valve. Set at 25-psig-

(172.5-kPa-) maximum outlet pressure, unless otherwise indicated.
J. Thermal Expansion Tank: Thermal expansion tanks shall be sized in accordance with
the tank manufacturer's instructions.
2.06 HOT WATER CIRCULATING PUMPS
A. Type: In-line centrifugal type of 2900 rpm speed, single/twin units. Materials of
construction shall be as follows:
1. Impeller …………. Bronze/Stainless Steel.
2. Shaft …………….. Stainless Steel.
3. Casing …………… Bronze/Stainless Steel.
4. Seal ……………… Mechanical.
B. Connections: Union ends for copper piping or flanged ends, as appropriate.
C. Accessories: Pressure gauges at inlet and outlet, dielectric flanges where required,
bronze gate valves at inlet and outlet bronze non-slam check valve at outlet.
D. Control Panel” Division 26 shall be referred to for details.
E. Capacity: Schedule on drawings shall be referred to for details of selection and

capacity ratings.
A. Test and inspect water heater storage tanks, specified to be ASME-code construction,
according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
B. Hydrostatically test water heater storage tanks before shipment to minimum of one
and one-half times pressure rating.
C. Prepare test reports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION

A. Install commercial water heaters on concrete bases.
1. Exception: Omit concrete bases for commercial water heaters if installation on
stand, bracket or suspended platform.
2. Concrete base construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section
B. Install water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design,
and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.
Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are accessible.
C. Install seismic restraints for light-commercial and commercial water heaters. Anchor
to substrate.
D. Install combination temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage
tanks. Use relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend
commercial-water-heater relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic water
piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest
floor drain.
E. Install combination temperature and pressure relief valves in water piping for water
heaters without storage. Extend commercial-water-heater relief-valve outlet, with
drain piping same as domestic water piping in continuous downward pitch, and
discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.
F. Install water-heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open
drains or over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping
for water heaters that do not have tank drains. Refer to Division 22 Section "Domestic
Water Piping Specialties" for hose-end drain valves.
G. Install thermometer on outlet piping of water heaters. Refer to Division 22 Section

"Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers.
H. Install thermometers on inlet and outlet piping of household, collector-to-tank, solar-

electric water heaters. Refer to Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing
Piping" for thermometers.
I. Install pressure gage(s) on inlet and outlet of commercial electric water- heater piping.
Refer to Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for pressure
gages.
J. Install expansion (compression) tank on cold water supply to commercial water heater.
K. Assemble and install inlet and outlet piping manifold kits for multiple water heaters.
Fabricate, modify, or arrange manifolds for balanced water flow through each water
heater. Include shutoff valve, thermometer in each water heater inlet and outlet, and
throttling valve in each water heater outlet. Refer to Division 22 Section "General-Duty
Valves for Plumbing Piping" for general-duty valves and to Division 22 Section "Meters
and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers.
L. Install water regulator, with integral bypass relief valve, in booster-heater inlet piping
and water hammer arrester in booster-heater outlet piping.
M. Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of water heater storage tanks
without integral or fitting-type heat traps.
N. Fill water heaters with water.
O. Charge compression tanks with air.
3.02 CONNECTIONS

B. Install piping adjacent to water heaters to allow service and maintenance. Arrange
piping for easy removal of water heaters.
C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for

D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power


inspect, test and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation,
including connections, to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
1. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no
leaks exist.
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, confirm proper
operation.
C. Remove and replace water heaters that do not pass tests and inspections and retest
as specified above.
3.04 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain commercial and instantaneous electric
water heaters. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION

SECTION 22 4000
PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes the following conventional plumbing fixtures and related
components:
1. Faucets for lavatories, bathtubs, bathtub/showers, showers, and, sinks.
2. Laminar-flow faucet-spout outlets.
3. Toilet seats.
4. Protective shielding guards.
5. Fixture supports.
6. Dishwasher air-gap fittings.
7. Hot-water dispensers.
8. Water closets.
9. Lavatories.
10. Bathtubs.
11. Individual showers.
12. Kitchen sinks.

1. Division 10 Section "Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories."
2. Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for backflow preventers,
floor drains, and specialty fixtures not included in this Section.
3. Division 22 Section "Plumbing Equipment" for water filters.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
B. Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by
people with disabilities.
C. Cast Polymer: Cast-filled-polymer-plastic material. This material includes cultured-

marble and solid-surface materials.
D. Cultured Marble: Cast-filled-polymer-plastic material with surface coating.
E. Fitting: Device that controls the flow of water into or out of the plumbing fixture. Fittings
specified in this Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, shower heads
and tub spouts, drains and tailpieces, and traps and waste pipes. Piping and general-
duty valves are included where indicated.
F. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.
KEO/19-3262-0000 22 4000/1 Plumbing Fixtures

G. PMMA: Polymethyl methacrylate (acrylic) plastic.
H. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
I. Solid Surface: Nonporous, homogeneous, cast-polymer-plastic material with heat-,

impact-, scratch-, and stain-resistance qualities.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of plumbing fixture indicated. Include selected fixture and
trim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports.
Indicate materials and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow-control rates.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures to include in emergency,

D. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each
category through one source from a single manufacturer.
1. Exception: If fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a
single manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified
for that category.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and

Usable Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act" ; and
Public Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act" ; for plumbing fixtures for people
with disabilities.
D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy

Policy Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.
E. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health
Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.
F. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are
compatible.
G. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
plumbing fixtures:
1. Enameled, Cast-Iron Fixtures: ASME A112.19.1M.
2. Slip-Resistant Bathing Surfaces: ASTM F 462.
3. Solid-Surface-Material Lavatories and Sinks: ANSI/ICPA SS-1.
4. Stainless-Steel Residential Sinks: ASME A112.19.3.
5. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M.
6. Water-Closet, Flush Valve, Tank Trim: ASME A112.19.5.
7. Water-Closet, Flushometer Tank Trim: ASSE 1037.
H. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
lavatory and sink faucets:
1. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Side Spray: ASME A112.18.3M.
2. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Hose-Thread Outlet:
ASME A112.18.3M.
3. Diverter Valves for Faucets with Hose Spray: ASSE 1025.
4. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1.
5. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011.
6. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.
7. Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.
8. NSF Potable-Water Materials: NSF 61.
9. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
10. Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951.
11. Supply Fittings: ASME A112.18.1.
12. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.
I. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
bathtub and shower faucets:
1. Backflow Protection Devices for Hand-Held Showers: ASME A112.18.3M.
2. Combination, Pressure-Equalizing and Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets:
ASSE 1016.
3. Deck-Mounted Bath/Shower Transfer Valves: ASME 18.7.
4. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1.
5. Hand-Held Showers: ASSE 1014.
6. High-Temperature-Limit Controls for Thermal-Shock-Preventing Devices:
ASTM F 445.
8. Manual-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444.
10. Pressure-Equalizing-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444 and ASSE 1016.
11. Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951.
12. Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444 and ASSE 1016.
J. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
miscellaneous fittings:
1. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.
2. Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A112.18.1.
3. Dishwasher Air-Gap Fittings: ASSE 1021.
4. Manual-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037.
5. Plastic Tubular Fittings: ASTM F 409.
6. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.
7. Sensor-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037 and UL 1951.
K. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
miscellaneous components:
1. Disposers: ASSE 1008 and UL 430.
2. Dishwasher Air-Gap Fittings: ASSE 1021.
3. Flexible Water Connectors: ASME A112.18.6.
4. Floor Drains: ASME A112.6.3.
5. Grab Bars: ASTM F 446.
7. Hot-Water Dispensers: ASSE 1023 and UL 499.
8. Off-Floor Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1M.
10. Plastic Shower Receptors: ANSI Z124.2.
11. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5.
12. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to

repair or replace components of whirlpools that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
a. Structural failures of unit shell.
b. Faulty operation of controls, blowers, pumps, heaters, and timers.
use.
2. Warranty Period for Residential Applications of Shells: Two years from date of
contents.
1. Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type and
size installed.
2. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type and
size installed.
3. Provide hinged-top wood or metal box, or individual metal boxes, with separate
compartments for each type and size of extra materials listed above.
4. Water-Closet Tank, Repair Kits: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type
installed.
5. Toilet Seats: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER
2.02 COLOR SCHEMES
A. Refer to Appendix C for the colour schemes.
B. When coloured sanitary fixtures are specified, the colour shall be finalised in co-
ordination with other finishing elements in the wet areas.
2.03 TOILET AND BATHROOM ACCESSORIES

A. Refer to Appendix C for details of toilet and bathroom accessories.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to
verify actual locations of piping connections before plumbing fixture installation.
B. Examine cabinets, counters, floors, and walls for suitable conditions where fixtures will
be installed.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to

manufacturers' written instructions.
B. Install off-floor supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounting fixtures.

1. Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures.
2. Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste piping.
3. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible
fixtures.
C. Install back-outlet, wall-mounting fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to supports.
D. Install floor-mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping or building

substrate.
E. Install wall-mounting fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports.
F. Install floor-mounting, back-outlet water closets attached to building floor substrate and
wall bracket and onto waste fitting seals.
G. Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework.
H. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.
I. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to
water distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces
behind fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for
operation.
1. Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valves if supply stops are not specified with
fixture. Valves are specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for
Plumbing Piping."
J. Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly
connected to sanitary drainage system.
K. Install tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly connected to
drainage system.

L. Install tanks for accessible, tank-type water closets with lever handle mounted on wide
side of compartment.
M. Install toilet seats on water closets.
N. Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if
faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.
O. Install water-supply flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at
stop valves.
P. Install faucet flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if
faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.
Q. Install shower flow-control fittings with specified maximum flow rates in shower arms.
R. Install traps on fixture outlets.

1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps.
2. Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated.
S. Install disposer in outlet of each sink indicated to have disposer. Install switch where
indicated or in wall adjacent to sink if location is not indicated.
T. Install dishwasher air-gap fitting at each sink indicated to have air-gap fitting. Install in
sink deck. Connect inlet hose to dishwasher and outlet hose to disposer.
U. Install hot-water dispensers in back top surface of sink or in countertop with spout over
sink.
V. Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and
within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal
protruding fittings. Escutcheons are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work
Results for Plumbing."
W. Set bathtubs in leveling bed of cement grout.
X. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and countertops using sanitary-type, one-
part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Sealants
are specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
3.03 CONNECTIONS

B. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and
vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.
A. Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for locations
where installed.

B. Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified
components.
C. Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and
components.
D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace
malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units
operate properly.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
fixtures, fittings, and controls.
B. Operate and adjust hot-water dispensers and controls. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning units and controls.
C. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning
methods and materials. Do the following:
1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall
strainers and spouts.
2. Remove sediment and debris from drains.
B. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished fixtures, faucets, and fittings,

inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.
B. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing
by Owner.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 22 6113
COMPRESSED AIR & VACUUM EQUIPMENTS FOR DENTAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES:
A. Dental Air Compressors
B. Auxiliary equipment for Dental Compressed Air Plant
C. Dental Vacuum Pumps
D. Auxiliary equipment for Dental Vacuum Plant
E. Control Panels
1.2 REFERENCES:
A. B.S. 1701 - Filters
B. B.S. 5169 - Air Receivers
C. B.S. 2951 - Rough Vacuum Pumps
D. B.S. 1780 - Vacuum Gauge
1.3 SUBMITTALS

1. Special-purpose valves.
2. Dental air and vacuum specialties.
B. Wiring diagrams for laboratory gas alarm system. Differentiate between

manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Coordination Drawings and Piping Diagrams: For laboratory air and vacuum piping
and specialties, including relationship to other services that serve same work areas.
Show connections to laboratory fume hoods and casework.
D. Piping Certification: Certificates of compliance with EN 13348 for pre-cleaned copper

tubing.
E. Inspection and Test Reports: Specified in "Field Quality Control" Article in Part 3 of
this Section.
F. Certificates of Inspections and Tests: From an independent testing agency, specified

in "Testing Agency Services" Article in Part 3 of this Section.
KEO/19-3262-0000 22 6113/1 Compressed Air & Vacuum Equipment for Dental
G. Maintenance Data: For special-duty valves and specialties to include in maintenance
manuals specified in Division 1.
A. Testing Agency Services: Employer will provide independent testing agency services
under separate contract to inspect, test, and certify medical gas piping and
components, except for inspections and tests specified in "Field Quality Control"
Article in Part 3 of this Section.
B. Compressors, pumps and auxiliary accessories shall have a certificate issued by

reputed testing laboratories to provide their suitability for the medical installation
services.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency acceptable to

Engineer, with the experience and capability to conduct inspection and testing
services indicated, without delaying the Work
D. Source Limitations: Obtain laboratory air and vacuum specialties through one source
E. Source Limitations: Provide laboratory air and vacuum specialties compatible with
existing systems.
F. Source Limitations: Provide laboratory air and vacuum specialties from manufacturer
of existing specialties, compatible with existing systems.
G. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated specialties specified in this

Section that are listed and labeled.
1. Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.
H. Comply with Health Technical Memorandum No. 2022
I. Contractor is responsible to provide the latest updated and developed materials

available during the construction period for all the specified items including all related
procedures, manufacturing and fabrication process, installation and workmanship.
1. Where discrepancy or conflict occurs between the materials to be used during
the construction period and the ones that were listed in the tendering and
pricing process, the latest technology will prevail under the condition of
Engineer’s approval to all materials submittals and do not subject to extra
cost.
2. Any material to be used during the construction period and that was not listed
in the tendering and pricing process, the latest technology is to be supplied
under the condition of Engineer’s approval to this material submittal.
A. Deliver and store large laboratory air and vacuum piping specialties on shipping
skids, small specialties in containers, and piping with end protection.
B. Store precleared and sealed pipe, fittings, valves, and specialties with sealing plugs
and sealing packaging intact.

C. Label pipe, fittings, valves, and specialties that have not been precleaned, and that
have been precleaned but have seal or packaging that is not intact, with temporary
labels indicating that cleaning is required before installation.
1.6 SYSTEM INTERFACES
A. All electrical works starting from the outgoing terminals of switch fuses/submain
switchboards onwards, for laboratory and medical gas equipment are included in this
Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
B. Components such as fuses, contractors, indicators, timers… etc. which may require
replacement in future, shall be products of the same standard / manufacture as that
of the electrical works of the Project.
C. Pumps, compressors and control panels shall be from those manufacturers who
have local agents certified to check, test adjust and commission this equipment.
2.2 DENTAL AIR COMPRESSORS
A. General
1. The compressor air system package composed of two compressors, two air
reservoirs, valves, connections, sequence control panel shall be provided to
regulate the function of the compressors, air intake with filter and after
Refrigeration Air Dryer.
2. Components such as fuses, contactors, indicators, timers, etc. which may

require replacement in future, shall be products of the same
standard/manufacture as that of the electrical works of the Project.
3. The air compressor shall be Reciprocating or Screw type Compressor. A

compressor with innovative features, reliable, compact, noiseless and able to
produce compressed air. Super version shall be used with noise level only 53
- 63 dB(A).
4. The compressor package are completely wired and equipped with all
interconnecting pipes and fittings, include a belt driven compressor element
totally enclosed fan - cooled electric motor together with lubrication, cooling
and regulating system with control panel for start / stop switch and the
emergency stop button.
5. Total integration of refrigerant dryer, compressed air filters, air tank, stop start
system with piston type inlet check valve, (all as one component) results in a
complete compressed air system including all connections and outlets valves.

6. The control panel comprises the following:
- gauge indicating the working pressure.
- hour – meter indicating the total motor running time.
- switch to start to stop the compressor.
- dew-point gauge.
- automatic operation lamp.
- emergency stop button.
7. The compressor should have regulating system includes pressure switch,

electro – pneumatic regulator, temperature shut-down switch and motor
overload relay.
8. The compressor shall be combined with low noise levels, down to 63 Db. The
unit shall be tank mounted type with air receiver capacity of 500 lit.
9. Compressor capacity is as noted on Drawing and maximum working pressure

of 10 bar.
B. Compressors
1. Reciprocating or Screw type, two stage, air cooled, belt driven by electric
motor, adequately guarded, or direct driven as appropriate.
C. Air Intake
1. b
D. Aftercoolers
1. Air blast operation with motor driven fan. Each aftercooler is fitted with
thermometers giving inlet and outlet temperatures and has automatic drain
with manual bypass.
E. Compressor Motor
1. Squirrel cage AC motor, drip-proof or totally enclosed fan cooled, constructed

to BS 2613 and BS 2960, with Class E insulation, suitable for 415 volt 3
phase 50 Hz 4 wire supply.
F. Air Receiver
1. Vertical cylindrical vessel constructed to BS 5169/1977 Class 3 Grade D,

complete with relief valve, pressure gauge, auto-drain with manual bypass.
Water capacity approximately equal to the free air delivery/minute of one
compressor.
G. Filter Dryer Assembly
1. Air leaving the receive is passed through twin pre-filters, two oil removal filters
to a double twin column dryer assembly with its own control box and timer.
2. Pre-filters are in accordance with BS 2831 with an efficiency of 95% when

tested with test dust No. 2. Oil filters are of the absorption type, removing
99% of oil and water particles between 5 and 40 microns.
3. The dryers are double absorber, heat reactivated and each is fully automatic
using mobile sorbead dessicant. Re-activation is on a 4 hour heating /2 hour
cooling cycle. The dew point alarm is located in this assembly, with its sensor
in the outgoing pipe and actuates the automatic change over to the reserve
dryer.
4. A separate 240 volt SP supply is required for this assembly.
5. The air shall contain no more than:

Water 115 mg/cubic meter
Dry particulate 0.01 mg/cubic meter
Oil mist <0.01 mg/cubic meter
Oil vapour <0.03 mg/cubic meter
Carbon monoxide 5.0 mg/cubic meter
Carbon dioxide 450 mg/cubic meter
H. Filter/Pressure Control
1. Distribution pressure is controlled by two regulators in parallel, each with its

own after-filter, arranged so that the air supply is not interrupted during
maintenance of either.
I. Delivered Air
1. Each litre of air at STP will not contain more than 0.0005 mg of oil mist,
particulate 0.5mg/m3, or more than 5.5mg/m3 (5ppm) of carbon monoxide, or
900mg/m3 (500 ppm) of carbon dioxide. Other substances will not exceed
the limits permitted in BS 4275. Dew point will be at atmospheric pressure.
Minus 40° (C or F), or better.
J. Control Panel
1. A three compartment panel with protection to IP65 contains motor starters,

isolators, fuses ammeters and hour run meters in the two lower
compartments. The starters are to IEC 292-1 and BS 775, direct-on-line or
star-delta as appropriate.
2. The upper compartment has two control pressure switches and an alarm
pressure switch, hand/auto switches, run on timers (to limit the number of
starts), pneumatic solenoid valves and various indication and control circuitry.
K. Pressure Reducing Valve
1. Pressure Regulators: Bronze body, direct-acting, spring-loaded, manual

pressure-setting adjustment and rated for 1720 kPa (250 psig) inlet pressure
except where otherwise indicated.
2. Type: Diaphragm-operated
3. Pressure Regulators (Pressure-Reducing Valves): Aluminium alloy or plastic

body, diaphragm-operated, direct-acting, spring-loaded, manual pressure-
setting adjustment and rated for 1720 kPa (250 psig) inlet pressure except
where otherwise indicated.
L. Automatic Drain Valves:
1. Corrosion-resistant metal body and internal parts, rated for 1380 kPa (200
psig) minimum working pressure, capable of automatic discharge of collected.
M. Air Dryer:
1. The compressed air dryer shall be of the refrigerated type designed for
operating at the rated system pressure (13 bar). The dryer shall be capable
of delivering air at a dew point of 3°C as Mark or equal and approved.
N. Air Filters:
1. High efficiency oil removal filter particle removal down to 0.01 micron including
water and oil aerosols providing a maximum remaining oil aerosol content of
0.01 mg/m3 at 21°C all as Mark or equal and approved.
2.3 DENTAL VACUUM PUMPS
A. General
1. Composed of two sets, each has one Pump, separator, and individual control
for each set and sequence control panel to regulate the performance of the
two sets as per load requirements. A condensation water separator shall be
installed at lowest point before connection to the pumps. Exhaust pipe shall
be filtered via bacteria filter with separation rate 99.997% subject to a part
size of 0.3 ppm.
2. The installation will consist of simplex dental (Wet Suction) vacuum pumps,
complete with starter/control panel, air liquid separator, amalgam separator
and buffer tank. These assemblies should be installed in the incoming main
distribution pipe. Pump exhausts should be run to atmosphere, to discharge
well clear of windows or air intake. A transparent flask and valve is provided
for each exhaust. These are used to provide condense traps close to the
pump outlets.
3. Pipework and valving is arranged so that each motor-pump unit, each

filter/trap assembly and the receiver can be by-passed to facilitate
maintenance.
B. Vacuum Pumps
1. The electrical motor driven Centrifugal or Rotary Vane Vacuum Pumps.

Vacuum pump set generates the vacuum maintained in a receiver of such
capacity that prevents frequent cycling of the vacuum pump, which is
controlled by a vacuum switch on a start / stop sequence. Low ultimate
pressure and high suctions capacities at 1 hPa (mbar) operating pressure as
model R5 series of Busch. It shall be rugged design, proven rotating vane
principle and high quality build standards. Driven by standard motors directly
connected to the pump. Suction flange with integrated non-return valve in
order to prevent venting of the vacuum system.
2. The main vacuum line is passed through a combined filter, drainage trap and
sight tube assembly before entering the receiver.
3. The exhaust of the vacuum pumps are taken out through muffler assembly
and discharged on the roof.
4. Type: Single stage, air cooled rotary type with close coupled motor mounted
on a horizontal / vertical cylindrical receiver.
5. Materials of construction shall be of the following:

Separator : Fabricated Steel
Piping : UPVC/Galvanized Steel
6. The Vacuum Pumps System shall be equipped with:

2 Vacuum pumps, flow 160m3/h, end vacuum 0.1 mbar - 5.5 kw 415V
3 Phase 50 Hz IP54
1 Horizontal vacuum tank of 1000 liters.
2 Aspiration filters, polyester 160/202/250/302
1 Control panel, - elect.pot+maniobra+digital-tmb 1001, #2x5.5kw,
TA=415v
C. Separator/Receiver:
1. Welded steel construction with corrosion resistant treatment internally and

externally, inspection access with threaded plug, mounting platform for the
vacuum pumps, jack support legs with anchor bolt holes, etc. The receivers
and all the accessories shall be manufactured and tested to BS 169. Actual
capacity shall comply with the requirement of approved laundry requirements.
D. Waste Treatment & Discharge
1. The waste water flows on through the secretion tank down into the buffer tank
via the pre-separator and the amalgam separator. Due to the position of the
ball check valve and an evacuation pipe that evens out the pressure between
the buffer tank and the secretion tank, the same level of under-pressure is
achieved in the entire system to guarantee a steady flow between the
separators. A power-operated, overflow safety device shuts down the suction
motor when the system is full. When the suction motor stops, negative
pressure levels are reversed causing the ball check valve to open and the
buffer tank is emptied.
E. Vacuum Conditions
1. The whole installation, including the distribution pipework is designed to give a

vacuum of not less than 160 mbar with a flow rate of approx. 300 lpm for each
dental unit.
F. Control Panel
1. Equipment has to be supplied with 3-phase and zero voltage and grounded as
described here. When installing, kae sure to check that the motor circuit
switch complies with the suction motor’s rated output current. Check that the
short-circuiting terminal is correctly fitted to the junction box in the suction
motor. When installing the suction motor and the start-up box, the box is
connected to the power supply through a 5x2.5 mm2 cable using a multipole
safety switch, which must be shut down when servicing the equipment. 16-
amp delay action fuse. The powered wires are connected at “1”. “2”, “3”, and
the neutral wire to “4” in the connection terminal in the start-up box. The
suction motor is connected to the start-up box via a 4x1.5 mm2 cable.
2. The time-relay, is set to 10-20 seconds to allow the suction motor to shut
down 10 to 20 seconds after the suction system has not been in use. The
power-operated overflow safety device in the secretion tank is linked in series
with the chair control unit, so that the suction motor is shut down when the
tank is full.
G. Operation
1. Each pump has a built-in safety mechanisms for safe operations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DENTAL AIR COMPRESSORS
A. Air inlet point location should be agreed with the medical officer.
B. The air inlets shall not be effected by rain, dust, fumes and noxious vapours.
C. Effective silencing shall be applied to comply with I.S.O. rating of 75.
D. Install flexible connections at suction and discharge to prevent carry over

compressor vibration to system piping. Anchor piping immediately after the flexible
connections.
3.2 DENTAL VACUUM PUMPS
A Exhaust gases should be discharged outdoors above roof level of the pump house
and away from windows and other air intakes.
B. Install flexible connection at suction and discharge to prevent carry out pump
vibration to system piping. Anchor piping immediately after the flexible connections.
3.3 CONTROL PANELS
A. Panels shall be fabricated from minimum mm thick sheet steel and have
continuously welded butt joints. Apply two (2 coats) of red oxide primer and two (2
coats) of baked on enamel. All required holes and cuts shall be done at the factory.
B. All internal wiring shall be done in a neat and professional manner, using cable ties,
slip-on spiral plastic bundle sheaths etc. Provide ample free length to allow full
swing of doors.
C. Provide suitable legs, drilled for bolting down to house keeping pads.
D. Wall mounted panels shall be stiffened with profiled sections welded to the back
plate, as required. Top of wall mounted panels shall be at 180 cms above F.F.L.
E. All panels shall have enclosure to IP-44 as minimum requirement and anti-
condensation heater within.
3.4 INSPECTIONS, TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
A. Dental Gas Pumps and Compressors
1. Prior to Start-up
i. Check pump shaft for free rotation.
ii. Check system power supply voltage.
iii. Check oil/water level in pumps/compressor.
iv. Check tightness of belts.
v. Check valves open/closed position as instructed by operation manual.
vi. Check the tight positioning of filters.
2. Start-up
i. Check and correct, if necessary the direction of rotation of the

pump/compressor, by momentary operation of the emergency start
lever.
ii. Start the pump on manual mode.
iii. Check the motor full load current by manipulating the floor.
iv. Check the pressure relief valve for proper operation by gradually
closing the test valve.
v. Check the pump/compressor and motor bearing bearings for signs of

overheating.
3.5 WARRANTY
H. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair/

maintain or replace components of the compressed air and vacuum components that
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond
normal use.
2. Warranty Period for the System and Controls: Two years from date of
3. Warranty Period for the System Accessories: Two years from date of

END OF SECTION

SECTION 22 6219
DENTAL AIR & DENTAL VACUUM PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes piping and related specialties aboveground and inside the building
for the following systems:
1. Compressed air, designated "Dental air."
2. Vacuum System , designated "Dental Vacuum."

1. Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages" for thermometers, pressure gages, and
fittings.
2. Division 22 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints" for
Dental air manifolds and anchoring.
3. Division 22 Section - Compressed Air & Vacuum Equipments for Dental
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene.
B. TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene.
C. PVC: Rigid Poly Vinyl Chloride
1.3 SUBMITTALS

1. Special-purpose valves.
B. Coordination Drawings and Piping Diagrams: For Dental air & Dental vacuum piping
and specialties, including relationship to other services that serve same work areas.
Show connections to Dental fume hoods and casework.
C. Piping Certification: Certificates of compliance with EN 13348 for pre-cleaned copper

tubing.
D. Inspection and Test Reports: Specified in "Field Quality Control" Article in Part 3 of this
Section.
E. Certificates of Inspections and Tests: From an independent testing agency, specified in

"Testing Agency Services" Article in Part 3 of this Section.
F. Maintenance Data: For special-duty valves and specialties to include in maintenance

manuals specified in Division 1.
KEO/19-3262-0000 22 6219/1 Dental Air & Dental Vacuum Piping
A. Testing Agency Services: Employer will provide independent testing agency services
under separate contract to inspect, test, and certify medical gas piping and components,
except for inspections and tests specified in "Field Quality Control" Article in Part 3 of
this Section.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency acceptable to Engineer,

with the experience and capability to conduct inspection and testing services indicated,
without delaying the Work
C. Source Limitations: Obtain dental air & dental vacuum specialties through one source
D. Source Limitations: Provide dental air & dental vacuum specialties compatible with
existing systems.
E. Manufacturer to have a minimum of 5 years reference of installed and commissioned

projects in Kuwait
F. International Standards to be conformed to : ASTM D1785, ASTM D1784, NSF standard

14, CSA standard B1373
G. Source Limitations: Provide dental air & dental vacuum specialties from manufacturer of
existing specialties, compatible with existing systems.
H. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated specialties specified in this Section
that are listed and labeled.
1. Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.
I. Comply with HTM.
J. Contractor is responsible to provide the latest updated and developed materials

available during the construction period for all the specified items including all related
procedures, manufacturing and fabrication process, installation and workmanship.
1. Where discrepancy or conflict occurs between the materials to be used during
the construction period and the ones that were listed in the tendering and pricing
process, the latest technology will prevail under the condition of Engineer’s
approval to all materials submittals and do not subject to extra cost.
2. Any material to be used during the construction period and that was not listed in
the tendering and pricing process, the latest technology is to be supplied under
the condition of Engineer’s approval to this material submittal.
A. Deliver and store large dental air & dental vacuum piping specialties on shipping skids,
small specialties in containers, and piping with end protection.
B. Store precleared and sealed pipe, fittings, valves, and specialties with sealing plugs and
sealing packaging intact.
C. Label pipe, fittings, valves, and specialties that have not been precleaned, and that have
been precleaned but have seal or packaging that is not intact, with temporary labels
indicating that cleaning is required before installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 PIPES AND TUBES
A. General: Applications of the following pipe and tube materials are indicated in Part 3
"Piping Applications" Article.
B. Copper Tube: EN 13348 Type X, seamless, drawn temper. for dental air.
C. PVC Type I, Grade I, with a cell classification of 12454 and shall meet, or exceed, the r
equirements of ASTM D1784 for dental vacuum.
2.3 PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS
A. General: Applications of the following pipe and tube fitting materials are indicated in Part
3 "Piping Applications" Article.
B. Precleaned, Wrought-Copper Fittings: EN 1254, solder-joint, pressure type. Fittings may

be factory cleaned, purged, and sealed according to EN 1254 or field cleaned, purged,
and sealed as specified below in "Preparation" Article.
C. Wrought-Copper Fittings:EN 1254, solder-joint, pressure type.
D. Bronze-Tube Flanges
E. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Bronze hose, covered with bronze wire braid with copper-tube
or bronze-flanged ends brazed to hose.
F. All materials shall be PVC Type I, Grade I, with a cell classification of 12454 and shall
meet, or exceed, the requirements of ASTM D1784. All compound components shall be
listed with NSF and meet the requirements of NSF Standard 61 as suitable for potable
water
G. Socket : All PVC Schedule 80 fittings shall meet, or exceed, the dimensional and
tolerance requirements of ASTM D2467
H. Threaded : All PVC Schedule 80 threaded fittings shall meet, or exceed, the
dimensional and tolerance requirements of ASTM D2464
A. General: Applications of the following piping joining materials are indicated in Part 3
"Piping Applications" Article.
B. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP copper-phosphorus-series alloys. Flux is

prohibited unless used with bronze fittings.
C. Threaded-Joint Tape: PTFE plastic.

D. Gasket Material: ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, and suitable for oxygen
service.
E. All PVC Schedule 80 fittings/sockets shall meet, or exceed, the dimensional and toleran
ce requirements of ASTM D2467.
F. All PVC Schedule 80 threaded fittings shall meet, or exceed, the dimensional and toler
ance requirements of ASTM D2464.
G. General: Solvent-cemented joints should be utilized when working at or near

maximum temperatures. Use flanged joints, unions, or roll grooved couplings where
disassembly is necessary at elevated temperatures.
Note : Contractor shall ensure the use of proper pipe cutters, beveling and deburring
tools before making the joints.
H. Solvent cements : Use 711 PVC cement with P-70 Primer.
P-70 Primer : Professional grade, industrial strength primer essential for proper
softening and preparation of PVC and CPVC pipe and fitting surfaces. Specially
recommended for use on Schedule 80 (PN 10 and higher) and large size pipe. Meets
and exceeds :ASTM F 656 NSF/ANSI 14 NSF/ANSI 61
711 cement : Heavy bodied, medium setting gray Low VOC PVC cement for all classes
and schedules with interference fit through 12" diameter. Meets and exceeds: ASTM D
2564 NSF/ANSI 14 NSF/ANSI 61 CSA B137.3 CSA B181.2
2.5 SPECIAL-DUTY VALVES
A. Dental Air Valves: Pre-cleaned for oxygen service and factory sealed.
B. Ball Valves,: BSEN 13485 3-piece, brass valves bolted-body construction; chrome-
plated brass ball, full port; blowout proof; bronze or brass stem; PTFE or TFE seats and
seals; threaded or solder-joint end connections; and vinyl-covered steel lever handle
with locking device.
C. Safety Valves: Bronze body with settings to match system requirements.

1. Pressure Safety Valves: ASME construction and labeled.
D. Pressure Regulators: Brass or bronze body and trim; spring-loaded, diaphragm-

operated, relieving type; manual pressure-setting adjustment; rated for 1725-kPa (250-
psig) minimum inlet pressure; and capable of controlling delivered air pressure within
5.0 kPa for each 100-kPa (0.5 psig for each 10-psig) inlet pressure.
E. Shutoff Valves:
1. Copper Tubing: Copper-alloy ball valve with manufacturer-installed ASTM B 819,
copper-tube extensions.
2. PVC Piping:
a. NPS 4 (DN 100) and Smaller: [Copper-alloy ball valve with manufacturer-
installed ASTM B 819, copper-tube extensions] [PVC ball valve].
b. NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: PVC butterfly valve.
2.6 ALARM SYSTEM

A. Description: Compatible alarm panels, remote sensing devices, and other related
components where indicated and where required by NFPA 99 and NFPA 99C. Include
the following Dental gas systems:
1. Dental air.
2. Dental Vacuum
B. Components: Designed for continuous service and operation on power supplied from
220-V, ac power source to alarm panels. Include connections for 24- or 12-V, ac low-
voltage wiring to remote sensing devices. Include step-down transformers where
required.
C. Dew-Point Monitors: Continuous line monitors having panel with gage or digital display.
Include pipeline sensing element, electrical connections for alarm system, factory- or
field-installed valved bypass, and a visual and cancelable audio signal for dryer site and
master alarm panels. Activate alarm when pressure dew point rises above 3.9 deg C (39
deg F) at 380 kPa (55 psig).
D. Alarm Panels: Factory-wired, audible, and color-coded visual signals that indicate
specified functions.
1. Mounting: Recess.
2. Enclosure: Fabricated from minimum 1.2-mm thick steel or minimum 1.25-mm
thick aluminum, and with knockouts for electrical and piping connections.
E. Special Features: In addition to manufacturer's standard features, include the following:

1. Master Alarm Panels: Separate trouble alarm signals, pressure gages, and
indicators for Dental gases. Signal alarms at master alarm panels when the
following conditions exist:
a. Dental Air: When pressure drops below 275 kPa (40 psig) or rises above
415 kPa (60 psig), back-up air compressor is in operation, pressure drop
across filter assembly increases more than 13.8 kPa (2 psig),
b. High-Pressure Dental Air: When pressure drops below 1100 kPa (160
psig) or rises above 1380 kPa (200 psig).
F. Computer Interface Cabinet: Wall-mounting, welded-steel, control cabinet with gasketed

door, mounting brackets, grounding device, and white-enamel finish. Include factory-
installed signal circuit boards, power transformer, circuit breaker, wiring terminal board,
and internal wiring capable of interfacing 20 alarm signals.
2.7 TEST GASES
A. Nitrogen for Pressure Testing: CGA G-10.1, oil free, dry, and at least Grade D.
B. Nitrogen for Flow Testing: CGA P-9, oil free and dry.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Cleaning: If factory-precleaned and -capped piping is unavailable or if pre-cleaned

piping must be rec-leaned because of exposure, follow procedures for alkaline washing
and meet cleanliness requirements.
B. Protect cleaned piping before and during installation.

A. Dental Air Piping:
Copper water tube with wrought-copper fittings and brazed joints.
B. Dental vacuum Piping:
PVC Type I, Grade I, with a cell classification of 12454 and shall meet, or exceed, t
he requirements of ASTM D1784 for dental vacuum.
A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
installation and joint construction.
B. Install piping next to equipment, accessories, and specialties to allow service and
maintenance.
C. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure
rating may be used, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Flanges may be used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Install supports and anchors according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports."
1. Spacing between Hangers: As described in NFPA 99 and NFPA 99C.
F. Install vacuum piping with 1 percent slope downward in direction of flow.
G. Valve Applications: Use ball valves specified in this Section for main shutoff and zone
valve duties.
H. Purge Dental air piping using oil-free, dry nitrogen after installing piping but before
connecting to service-outlet valves, alarms, and gages.
I. Install eccentric reducers, if available, where vacuum piping is reduced in direction of

flow, with bottoms of both pipes and reducer fitting flush.
J. Install unions in PVC vacuum piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller adjacent to each
valve and at final connection to each machine, specialty, and piece of equipment.
K. Install flanges in PVC vacuum piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger adjacent to flanged
valves and at final connection to each machine, specialty, and piece of equipment.
L. PVC-to-Copper Joints: Join transition fitting PVC socket end as solvent-cemented joint
to PVC pipe and join fitting end with insert to copper tube as threaded joint.
M. Flanged Joints:
1. Copper Tubing: Install flange on copper tubes. Use pipe-flange gasket between
flanges. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to HTM-02-01 for bolting
procedure.
2. PVC Piping: Install PVC flange on PVC pipes. Use pipe-flange gasket between
flanges. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to HTM-02-01 for bolting
procedure.

3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect Dental air piping to equipment, accessories, and specialties with unions. Install
with ball valve on both sides, and strainer at inlet connection.
1. Install flexible piping connectors on air piping to Dental air compressors piping to
Dental chairs.
2. Install thermometers on l Dental air-compressor discharge and air-receiver tanks.
3. Install pressure gages on Dental air-compressor discharge piping.
4. Install pressure regulators downstream from Dental air compressors, dryers,
purification units, and filter assemblies.
B. Ground electric-powered specialties.

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's
published torque-tightening values.
C. Arrange for electric-power connections to specialties and devices that require power.
Electric power, wiring, and disconnect switches are specified in Division.
A. Install labeling on piping, valves, valve-box covers, air manifolds, and alarm panels
according to NFPA 99 and NFPA 99C. Use the following or similar captions and color-
coding for specialties:
1. Dental Air: Black or white letters on yellow background.
2. Label Dental air piping to indicate system operating pressure.
3. Install continuous underground warning tape during backfilling of trench for
underground Dental air piping.
B. Refer to Division 22 Section "Mechanical Identification" for labeling and identifying

materials.
A. Dental Air Piping Tests: Perform the following:

1. System Clearing: Purge Dental air piping using oil-free, dry nitrogen after
installing piping but before installing service outlets, alarms, and gages.
2. Pressure Test: Subject each section of Dental air piping, except high-pressure
Dental air piping, to test pressure of 1035 to 1380 kPa (150 to 200 psig). Subject
high-pressure Dental air piping to test pressure of 1725 kPa (250 psig) with oil-
free, dry nitrogen before attaching system components, after installing service
outlets, and before concealing piping system. Maintain test until joints are
examined for leaks by means of soapy water.
3. Standing-Pressure Test: Install assembled system components after testing
individual piping systems as specified above. Subject systems to 24-hour
standing-pressure test at 20 percent above normal line pressure, but not less
than 455 kPa (66 psig).
4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system until satisfactory
results are obtained.
5. Repair Dental air systems and replace components that fail tests specified.
6. Report test results in writing to Engineer.
B. Field Quality Control for Vacuum Piping:

1. Testing Agency: Engage qualified testing agency to perform field tests and
inspections of vacuum piping in nonmedical laboratory facilities and to prepare
test and inspection reports.
2. Tests and Inspections:
a. Piping Leak Tests for Vacuum Piping: Test new and modified parts of
existing piping. Cap and fill vacuum piping with oil-free, dry nitrogen. Isolate
test source and let stand for four hours to equalize temperature. Refill
system, if required, to test pressure; hold for two hours with no drop in
pressure.
1) Test Pressure for Copper Tubing: 150 psig (1035 kPa).
2) Test Pressure for PVC Piping: 100 psig (690 kPa).
b. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
c. Inspect filters for proper operation.
3. Remove and replace components that do not pass tests and inspections and
retest as specified above.
3.7 TESTING AGENCY SERVICES
A. Description: Engage the services of an independent testing agency complying with

requirements of Division 1 Section "Quality Control" to inspect, test, and certify Dental
air system as specified below. Inspect, test, and certify complete Dental systems
according to NFPA 99 and NFPA 99C. Inspect, test, and certify each Dental air system,
including piping, outlets and inlets, specialties, alarm panels and devices, safety
devices, gas sources, and equipment.
B. Prepare written reports of test results, including corrective action.
C. Certify that systems comply with specified requirements, that tests were properly
performed, and that test results were satisfactory.
D. Inspect outlets and inlets, gages, alarms, and zone valves for proper labeling for service
and function.
E. Inspect manifold supply systems for installation and operation according to NFPA 99,
Chapter 4 and NFPA 99C.
F. Phase I Tests: Perform the following tests using dry nitrogen after installing Dental air
system but before connecting new systems to existing gas sources:
1. Outlet and Inlet Cross-Connection Test: Pressurize 1 gas system to 345 kPa (50
psig), with other systems at atmospheric pressure, and access each outlet with
an appropriate adapter and test gage. Repeat procedure for each system.
2. Outlet and Inlet Cross-Connection Test: Pressurize each system in 69-kPa (10-
psig) increments and access each outlet with an appropriate adapter and test
gage.
3. Alarm System Test: Test for operation of functions specified in "Alarm System"
Article, within limits required.
4. Pressure Test: Test systems at operational pressure with system components
installed. No leaks are allowed. Conduct tests by zone.
5. Particulate Sampling: Test positive-pressure terminal outlets, using a 0.45-micron
filter, for evidence of solid particulate contamination. Allowable limit is 2 mg/cu.
m.
6. Systems Purity: Test terminal outlets and gas source for contaminant levels as
defined below. Excessive contaminant levels will require additional purging of
outlets within a specific zone until levels are within the following limits:
G. Phase II Tests: After Phase I testing has been completed, test completed Dental air
system using applicable gas for each system. Completed systems have outlets and
inlets, alarms, and gages installed; and gas supply systems installed and ready for
operation.
1. Final Purging: Introduce applicable gas for each system into respective piping
systems. Purge installed outlet valves to remove nitrogen test gas present from
Phase I testing.
2. Outflow Analysis: Analyze gas at positive-pressure outlets to confirm delivery of
proper gas at proper concentration level. Minimum allowable concentration levels
are defined by USP-NF, "U.S. Pharmacopeia 23--National Formulary 18" and the
following CGA Commodity Specifications:
3. System Delivery Pressures: Test pressure piping systems to confirm supply
sources are set to deliver gas at the following nominal pressure levels:
a. Dental Air Systems, except High-Pressure Air: 345 to 380 kPa (50 to 55
psig) at maximum flow.
H. Certification: Certify that specified inspections, tests, and procedures have been
performed and report results in writing to Engineer. Include the following:
1. Inspections performed.
2. Procedures, materials, and gases used.
3. Test methods used.
4. Results of tests.
3.8 COMMISSIONING
A. Startup Services: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect alarm

system installation and to provide startup service.
B. Before startup, perform the following checks:

1. Tests of piping systems are complete.
2. Dental air-compressor inlet filters and piping.
3. Dental vacuum- vacuum pump inlet filters/separator and piping.
4. System has equipment vibration-control supports and flexible pipe connectors,
and equipment is properly attached to substrate.
5. Safety valves have setting that is greater than Dental air-compressor discharge
pressure, but not greater than pressure rating of system components.
6. Water is supplied to water-cooled equipment.
7. Proper seismic restraints have been checked.
C. Startup Procedures: Follow manufacturer's written procedures. If no procedures are

prescribed by manufacturer, proceed as follows:
1. Energize circuits.
2. Check Dental air pressures.
3. Adjust operating controls, including pressure settings.
D. Operate and adjust operating and safety controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment discovered by service representative.
3.9 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Employer's maintenance

personnel in procedures for alarm system startup and shutdown, and to adjust, operate,
and maintain Dental air piping systems. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and
Training."
END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 0100
HVAC SYSTEMS – GENERAL DESCRIPTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes general description of Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning
systems.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 23 0100 – HVAC Systems General Description.
B. Section 23 0500 – Common Work Results for HVAC.
C. Section 23 0513 – Common Motor Requirement for HVAC Equipment.
D. Section 23 0593 – Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC.
E. Section 23 0700 – HVAC Insulation.
F. Section 23 0800 – Commissioning of HVAC.
G. Section 23 0900 - Instrumentation and Control for HVAC
H. Section 23 0993 - Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls
I. Section 23 1113 - Facility Fuel Oil Piping
J. Section 23 2113 - Hydronic Piping, Valves And Accessories
K. Section 23 2300 – Refrigerant Piping.
L. Section 23 3113 – Metal Ducts.
M. Section 23 3119 - HVAC Casings
N. Section 23 3300 – Air Duct Accessories.
O. Section 23 3413 – Axial HVAC Fans.
P. Section 23 3413-13 - High Plume Dilution Laboratory Exhaust Fan
Q. Section 23 3416 – Centrifugal HVAC Fans.
R. Section 23 3600 - Air Terminal Units
S. Section 23 3713 – Diffusers, Registers and Grilles.

KEO/19-3262-0000 23 0100/1 Hvac Systems – General Description
T. Section 23 4100 - Particulate Air Filtration
U. Section 23 7313 - Modular Indoor And Outdoor Air Handling Units / fresh Air Handling
Units
V. Section 23 8126 – Split- System Air – Conditioners.
W. Section 23 8127 - DX VRF Split System Air Conditioners
X. Section 23 8216 – Air Coils.
1.03 HVAC CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATION
A. HVAC Contractor executing this work shall be having minimum 10 years of experience
in the installation of similar HVAC system and shall meet all requirement by PAHW
quality control department.
B. Refer to division 01 for general requirements.
C. Technical team during construction. 1 engineer, 3 supervisors and adequate technicians

in each package.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit monthly status reports of the following:

1. Materials submittal and approval.
2. Materials receipt at site.
3. Shop drawings submittal and approval.
4. Progress drawings, marked in separate colors for each month.
B. Submit construction program

1. Bi-weekly bar charts.
2. Testing and commissioning program
C. Submit 4 copies of the product data and shop drawings. Allow for (4) weeks for review
and approval, before placing order or commencing work.
1. Manufacturers printed brochures and catalogues (one original and three copies)
with relevant information highlighted, along with write up of selection criteria.
2. General piping and ducting layout drawings to a scale not smaller than 1:50.
3. Equipment installation and piping layout, double line drawings clearly indicating
all fittings, supports, valves etc. to a scale of 1:20. Submit sections and wall
elevations as appropriate.
4. Typical floor plans indicating shafts, risers locations etc. to a scale of 1:50.
5. Builder's work layout plans to a scale of 1:100/1:50 as above.
6. Electrical & control wiring diagrams (NTS) and panel installation details (1:20).
7. Calculations/details to substantiate the shop drawings.
8. Test and performance certificates of equipment, where required.
9. Provide composite shop drawings and sections.
D. Submit as-built drawings in accordance with Contract requirements.
E. Submit three (3) copies of “Operation & Maintenance Manual” with complete data for
each piece of equipment installed and as detailed below:
a. The title: Operation & Maintenance Manual – HVAC Services
b. The name of:
1) The Employer
2) The Consultant
3) The Contractor
a. Table of Contents – Submit sample for approval.
b. HVAC material submittals with the Engineer’s and or local authorities’ s
approval.
c. Manufacturer’s installation, Operation & Maintenance instructions.
d. Manufacturer’s internal wiring diagrams.
e. Manufacturer’s assembly details.
f. Replacements, parts number listings and description.
g. Lubrication materials, equivalents and schedules.
h. Name and addresses of Manufacturer, Sales and Service Agency and
Local Representative/Distributor.
i. Name and address of Contractor’s Maintenance Department, including
emergency contact telephone number.
j. Equipment Warranties.
k. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Report.
l. Equipment start-up and test report.

HVAC systems units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to
Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."

NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction,
C. Energy-Efficiency: Equal to or greater than prescribed by local authorities.
D. Conform to the requirements of the following:

1. Local Codes, Ordinances, Rules and Regulations.
ASHRAE : American Society of Heating, Refrigeration& Air-
conditioning Engineers.
ASHRAE Handbooks -ASHRAE Refrigeration
-ASHRAE Fundamentals
-ASHRAE Systems & Equipment
-ASHRAE Applications
ASHRAE Standards : ASHRAE/ANSI 90.1
ASHRAE/ANSI 62.1
ASHRAE 55
ASHRAE 52.1
ASHRAE Guideline 1.1 & 1.5 HVAC commissioning
ASHRAE Standard 202 Guideline as minimum requirements
MEW : Ministry of Electricity and Water
MPW : Ministry of Public Works (specs)
IBC : International Building Code.
IMC : International Mechanical Code
IFC : International Fire Code.
KFD : Kuwait Fire Department
SMACNA : Sheet Metal and Air-conditioning Contractor’s National
Association.
- HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible.
- HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting & Balancing
Standards.
DW144 : Specification for Sheet metal ductwork.
DW171 : Standard for Kitchen Sheet Metal Ductwork.
NFPA 90A : Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning & Ventilating
Systems.
NFPA 90B : Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating & Air-
Conditioning Systems.
NFPA 92A : Recommended Practice for Smoke-Control Systems.
NFPA 92B : Guide for Smoke Management Systems in Malls, Atria,
and Large Areas.
NFPA 96 : Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of
Commercial Cooking Operations.
NFPA 96 : Life Safety Code.
C.I.B.S.E Guide A : Environmental Design.
C.I.B.S.E Guide B1 : Heating.

C.I.B.S.E Guide B2 : Ventilation and Air-Conditioning.
C.I.B.S.E Guide H : Building control systems
C.I.B.S.E : Commissioning Code A: Air distribute system
: Commissioning Code C: Automatic Controls.
: Commissioning Code L: Lighting Controls.
: Commissioning Code M: Commissioning Management.
: Commissioning Code W: Water Distribution Systems
AMCA : Air Moving and Conditioning Association.
ASME : American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
ARI : Air conditioning Refrigeration Institute (USA).
ASTM : American Society of Testing and Materials
ANSI : American National Standard Institute.
BSI : British Standards Institute.
BSRIA : Building Services Research and Institute Association
DIN : Deutsches Institute for Normung
IEE : Institute of Electrical Engineers
ISO : International Organization for Standardization.
NBS : National Bureau of Standards.
NEMA : National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association.
UL : Underwriter’s Laboratories Inc.
LPC : Loss Prevention Council.
OSHA : Occupational Safety and Health Administration.
BS 5839-1 : The design, Installation, Commissioning & maintenance
for fire detection and fire alarm systems
1.06 SCOPE
A. The work covered by this Section consists of manufacture, supply, installation and
maintenance of the heating, ventilation and air-condition installation of the project and
includes the design, manufacture, Inspection and testing at manufacturer’s premises,
packing for export shipments, insurance, delivery to site, erection, setting to work,
adjusting, testing, balancing and handing over in perfect operating and running condition

including maintenance and all necessary associated electrical works. The works is
described in this Specification, Drawings and the Bills of Quantities.
B. All HVAC equipment shall be in compliance with local codes and international codes &
standards as specified in clause no. 1.05 D.
1.07 DESCRIPTION
A. The drawings, specifications, schedules of equipment and bill of quantities and all other
contract documents are complementary to each other and any material, equipment,
plant or works called for either part shall be furnished by the contractor and included in
the contract as if called for by all parts. Should the tenderer discover any conflict,
discrepancy, error or omission.
B. The employer shall issue his instructions to all tenderers by supplement notices and
each tenderer shall comply with and allow in his rates for complying with such
instruction before submitting his tender on the prescribed date.
C. The contractor shall take into consideration that the drawings are meant to shown the
general picture and layout without much details and shall not reflect the final execution
of the works. The contractor shall furnish all drawings, sketches and all details required,
and all items, parts and material necessary to make the installation complete and ready
to operate without any additional cost in price whether such items are particularly
specified or not.
D. The contract drawings shall indicate the extent and general arrangement of the specified
systems. If any deviations from the contract documents are deemed necessary by the
contractor, details of such deviations and reason therefore shall be submitted as soon
as practicable to the engineer for approval. No such deviations shall be made without
the prior written approval of the engineer.
E. The works covered by this specification in general shall be sized, located and performed
as indicated on the drawings and in the specifications. They shall be installed and
adjusted in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and these specifications to
ensure that they fulfill the design condition. However, the contractor shall be responsible
for checking and making sure that the system design, drawings and schedule of all
equipment satisfy the design requirements. The design, drawings and schedules shall
not relieve the contractor of his obligation towards proper selection and functioning of all
specified equipment. If, after the systems are in operation, any equipment and any work
should appear inconvenient, abnormal, or give unsatisfactory operation after
adjustment, the contractor shall replace them with a type selected by the engineer and
shall make any other changes that may be necessary without any additional charges to
the employer.
F. The contractor shall install the works as closely as possible to the layout shown and the
layout shall be checked and exact locations shall be determined by the dimensions of
the equipment approved. The contractor shall be responsible for co-ordination of his
drawings for space clearance with the works of other trades and services affecting his
works and shall consult the architectural and structural drawings for all dimensions,
openings, clearances, partitions, false ceilings, beams, expansions joints, structural
supports, foundation details, etc. before submitting the working drawing for approval.
1.08 SPECIALIST SUB-CONTRACTORS QUALIFICATIONS

A. The Heating, Ventilation and Air-conditioning works shall be executed by one of the air-
conditioning specialist sub-contractors approved by the Central Tenders Committee for
the Grade II or Grade III and PAHW.
1.09 PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS
A. The Ministry of Public Works Particular Specifications shall be applied unless otherwise
mentioned in the technical specifications.
1.10 ENGINEERING TECHNICAL CATALOGUES
A. The tendered shall enclose with his offer the original engineering technical catalogues
for all air conditioning equipment and machines.
B. The catalogues should show such as dimensions, performance, characteristics,

capacities, wiring diagrams and controls, performance curves, charts, layout drawings,
model numbers and all other data published by the manufacturer to demonstrate in
compliance with the specifications.
C. Non submittal or incomplete submittal of catalogues will result in the disqualification of

the tender offer.
D. Evaluation of the complete catalogue will be done based on contract specification.
1.11 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The contractor shall be deemed to have included for all materials, labor etc. for the
complete installation of the plant whether detailed under contract documents or not.
B. Should the Tenderer discover discrepancy in the tender documents, he shall notify the
Employer in writing in reasonable time during the tendering stage period.
C. The Contractor shall be obliged towards proper selection of all specified equipment. If,
any work give unsatisfactory operation, the Contractor shall replace them with a type
selected by the Engineer and shall make any other changes that may be necessary
without any additional charges to the Employer.
D. The Contractor shall install the works as closely as possible to tender drawings layout,
but shall make without additional cost any changes in routing to meet job condition.
1.12 ELECTRICAL SCOPE OF HVAC CONTRACTOR
A. Electrical works scope starts from outgoing terminals of the isolator/ switch-fuses / sub-
main switchboards provided by Electrical Contractor.
1.13 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, products to be

provided shall be from the manufacturer having minimum ten (10) years of experience in
the same product and approved by the Engineer.

PART 2 - SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
2.01 DESIGN CONDITIONS
A. Outside Design Conditions:

1. Summer 118.4°F Dry Bulb and 80.8 °F Wet Bulb
B. Inside Design Conditions:

1. Design Dry Bulb (DB) & Relative humidity: 23.9°C (75.0 °F) DB & 50(±10) % RH
in residential spaces.
2.02 HVAC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The HVAC systems for the project consist of the following:

1. VRF/VRV system will be used for air-conditioning complete with refrigerant
piping, accessories, and controls.
2. VRF/VRV Heat Pump will be used for winter heating as per the load calculation.
3. DX units shall be provided for back up cooling or small standalone spaces.
4. All required controls and building management system.
5. Ventilation and Air distribution systems.
6. Smoke ventilation system (if applicable) as per the drawings.
2.03 AIR QUALITY CONTROL
A. Air quality should comply with ASHRAE Standard 55-2004 Thermal Environmental
Condition for Human Occupancy.
2.04 VENTILATION SYSTEM
A. The fresh air is introduced via infiltration in compliance with ASHRAE standard 62.1,
and IMC.
2.05 ENERGY CONSERVATION
A. Ministry of Electricity and Water (MEW Kuwait) Energy Conservation program code of
practice MEW/R-6 (2018) & R-7 (2010) will be applied in all design aspects. The
contractor must comply and implement any revised or new regulation from MEW without
any extra cost or time.
B. External Walls and slab: Refer to architecture specification for wall and slab construction
details. Overall, U value shall not exceed 2018 MEW regulation.
Wall U-value: U = 0.397 W/m². C (0.070 Btu/h. ft².ºF)
C. Walls between air conditioned and non-conditioned space ( partitions) shall have U –
Value not to exceed 2.6 W/m². C for shafts , lifts and stair case
D. Roof: Refer to architecture specification for roof construction details. Overall, U value
shall not exceed 2018 MEW regulation.
Heavy construction Roof: U = 0.256 W/m². C (0.045 Btu/h. ft².ºF)

E. External glazing: Building external glazing type is chosen to conserve energy and to
meet MEW regulations, Glass specifications: U = 1.14 W/m². C (0.2 Btu/h. ft².ºF) &
Maximum solar heat gain coefficient (SHGC) = 0.22 .
2.06 SMOKE CONTROL SYSTEMS
A. Smoke Control system shall be based on the KFF (Kuwait Fire Force) requirement at
that time of construction. The contractor shall be responsible for the implementation of
any above-mentioned requirement from KFF.
B. All smoke ventilation fans shall be approved by KFF.
C. The contractor shall be approved by KFF.
2.07 CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Building Management System shall be provided to manage, monitor and control HVAC
system.
B. Stand-alone control system shall be based on thermostat and local switches wherever
BMS is not applicable.
C. Follow latest regulation of MEW while selecting thermostat for A/C units.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 COORDINATION
A. Study all drawings and specifications and familiarize with the Structural and
Architectural details.
B. Ensure that the works under this section are compatible with the Architectural finishes,
prior to placing orders, fabrication and installation.
C. Co-ordinate with the Electrical works for the exact power requirements and location and
type of the interface. Furnish all information as required by the local authority having
jurisdiction for obtaining approvals.
D. Where work is installed in close proximity, to or will interfere with other works, take
necessary measures for satisfactory space arrangements. Prepare composite shop
drawings to a suitable scale, showing how the work is installed in relation to other work.
E. Ensure the sufficiency of dimensions of the plant areas, doors etc. and the suitability of
slabs and other structural members for placement, operation and maintenance of
equipment.
F. Resolve conflicts in requirements with other works. Refer to the owner representative
only those that cannot be solved, without changes to structure or those, which involve
major changes to system design.
G. Contractor shall prepare coordinated working drawings with all required information,
submit to the relevant trades and obtain their approval.

H. Air Distribution System exposed to view shall be painted with color and finish as per
owner representative approval.
3.02 INSPECTION, TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
A. Submit factory testing certificates for all A/C units before shipment. Include in these
certificates the machine capacity, power consumption, noise and vibration performance
when tested in operation conditions with specified capacity. Submit all calculations to
derate the capacity for the design conditions compared to the test conditions.
B. At this performance test, measure electrical data during start up period including starting
current, starting power factor and voltage dip (if any).
C. Examine areas and conditions under which VRF cooling units are to be installed. Do not
proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
D. The Contractor shall provide all testing instruments and accessories complete with valid
calibration certificate to the presence of the Engineer as directed below or elsewhere
for approval.
E. Carry out the testing, adjusting and balancing of the HVAC Equipment and systems
under provisions of section 23 0593.
3.03 START – UP
A. Start-up VRF cooling units, in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions. Test
controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
B. Balance VRF systems to verify its capacity and balanced delivery of air for each space.
3.04 TRAINING OF EMPLOYER’S PERSONNEL
A. Provide services of manufacturer’s technical representative for 1-half day to instruct

Employer’s personnel in operation and maintenance of VRF cooling units.
3.05 VARIATION / CLAIMS
A. Contractor shall not make any claims/variation due to re-routing of HVAC ducts, pipe
etc. to meet site requirements. In case of any disparity in schedule parameters and
capacities, always provide higher capacity resulting from all design parameters as
scheduled. Contractor shall not claim any variation while submitting any equipment,
which consumes less or more electrical power than shown on schedule during any
stage of the project.
3.06 GUARANTEE PERIOD (DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD)
A. Contractor shall be completely responsible for repairing, replacing with new to the
satisfaction of Owner, all and any HVAC installed system found defective or not
satisfactorily operating, for a period specified in division 01, without any extra cost to the
Owner.
B. Defects liability period shall be two years from substantial completion.
C. Maintenance strategy & Engineering staff required for maintenance. Adequate

Engineers, Supervisors and Technicians shall be provided as per the terms and
conditions of the contract.
A. Contractor shall include in his offer for complete operation and maintenance of the
installed HVAC plant for a period specified in division 01. This offer shall include all man
power, material, parts, labor etc, (all inclusive).
B. Extra man power shall be provided as required to accomplish the maintenance work.
3.08 EQUIPMENT WARRANTY PERIOD
A. Whenever equipment warranty period is mentioned in the specification, manufacturer

will provide warranty certificate for the mentioned period from the date of substantial
completion..
B. The contractor shall make sure that HVAC system shall be capable to operate on
temporary power without affecting the warranty and defects period of the equipment, as
specified in division 01.
C. Refer to section 23 8126 for compressor warranty of split unit .
D. Warranty shall include complete regular maintenance for all HVAC equipment.
3.09 LOCAL CODE REQUIREMENTS AND APPROVAL
A. All HVAC equipment installed shall meet all MEW regulations including watts/sqr mtr,
KW/TON. All HVAC equipment shall be procured and installed only after obtaining
MEW approval. HVAC contractor shall submit all calculations to Engineer for approval.
B. Furnish all information as required by the authorities to obtain approvals without the
assistance of designer. The designer may provide design cooling load zonal
calculations, at his discretion, if such calculations are required by authority.
C. Contractor shall take necessary approval from KFD if any smoke ventilation system is
required by KFD during the time of construction.
A. In addition to the spare parts, tools and maintenance equipment provided by the
Contractor at the Maintenance Period, the Contractor shall supply spare parts, tools and
maintenance equipment specified herein for use after the expiry of such Maintenance
Period, and store the same in a location in the building designated by the owner. Such
specified spare parts, tools and maintenance equipment shall not be used by the
Contractor during the period of maintenance unless in an emergency and as expressly
authorized by the Engineer.

B. Spare Parts and consumables are as recommended by the manufacturers for one-year
service including but not limited to the following:
1. Refrigerants as recommended by manufacturers.
2. Refrigerant valves and accessories as recommended by manufacturers.
3. 5% (of total numbers per bid pack) for each type/size of motor for indoor unit fan.
4. 5% (of total numbers per bid pack) for each type/size of Motor for each outdoor
Fan Size.
5. 5% (of total numbers per bid pack) set of bearing for each type/size.
6. 5% (of total numbers per bid pack) Set of Filters for Each indoor unit Size.
7. 5% (of total numbers per bid pack) Wall / Window mounted exhaust fan.
8. 5% (of total numbers per bid pack) spare motor type for each inline fan.
C. All spare parts, tools and maintenance equipment shall be provided in original packing,
clearly labeled and referenced. Provide complete schedules of spare parts and
maintenance equipment clearly cross referenced with the “as-built” record drawings and
with operation and maintenance instructions manuals.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 0500
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. The Instructions to Tenderers, Form of Tender, Main Conditions of contract, Note on

Pricing, the Preliminary Section and any Supplementary Conditions of Contract apply to
and are part of this Division and all subsections.
B. Sections of this Services Specification which relate to other Divisions are not intended to
supersede the specifications of these divisions, but to guide the Contractor in tendering
and performance. In no event shall a quality less than that indicated here be acceptable.
C. The precedence of various Documents and Drawings shall be as determined in the

General Contract Documents, subject to the limitation that any item shown or required in
any of the documents or drawings shall be considered by the Contractor to be included
in all Documents.
D. The scope of works includes the supply, delivery to site, installation, testing,
commissioning, demonstrating and staff training of the various complete systems
outlined in this specification and on the drawings and documentation including liaison
with the Main Contractor, Authorities, Master Plan Developer and their representatives
and Consultants as necessary for the duration of the works and the defects liability
period
E. The contractor will be responsible for reaching an agreement on their Program with the
Main Contractor and coordinating every aspect of their design, submissions, approvals
as well as installation, testing, commissioning and handover works with them
F. Wherever the term authorities is indicated, it shall mean statutory authorities, the master
plan developer or their representatives and services provider.
G. The contractor shall Check issued drawings and accept responsibility for proper
performance of all mechanical and plumbing systems in accordance with relevant
standards and codes and design parameters listed hereinafter
H. The contractor shall provide all items, articles, materials, samples, operations, sundries,
labour, supervision, guarantees, allowances for overhead and profit, etc., to achieve a
fully functionable and acceptable system
I. The contractor shall consider the specifications as an integral part of the work together
with the drawings. Consider any item or subject omitted from one but mentioned or
reasonably implied on the other as properly and sufficiently indicated and provide the
same under the work of this division.
KEO/19-3262-0000 23 0500/1 Common Work Results For Hvac

J. The Contractor shall be responsible for developing his own take off of materials and is to
make this available as requested to the Consultant.
A. This section includes the following scope of work:

1. Examination of Site and Drawings
2. Permits, Fees and Inspection
3. Contract Drawings
4. Construction Drawings
5. Shop Drawings and Material submission
6. Record Drawings
7. Temporary Service
8. Coordination and Cooperation
9. Protection and Storage
10. Existing work and Equipment
11. Site Supervision
12. Scheduling of Work
13. Joining Materials
14. Transition fittings, Dielectric fittings
15. Mechanical sleeve seals and Sleeves
16. Escutcheons and Grout
17. Workmanship
18. Materials and Equipment
19. Site Cleaning
20. Accessibility
21. Cutting and Patching
22. Inserts, Sleeves, Escutcheons and Curbs
23. Access Panels and Doors
24. Flashing
25. General Welding Requirements
26. Test for Welding Qualification
27. Testing of Welded Piping Installation
28. Painting, Identification and Valve Tags
29. Flushing and Cleaning Systems
30. Inspection, Testing and Adjusting
31. Temporary Usage
32. Inspection of the Work
33. Operating Instruction to Owner
34. Commissioning of Services
35. System Acceptance
36. Correction after completion
37. Guarantees/Warranty
38. Maintenance
39. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
40. Joining Materials
41. Transition fittings, Dielectric fittings
42. Mechanical sleeve seals and Sleeves
43. Escutcheons and Grout
44. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
45. Painting and finishing.
46. Concrete bases.
47. Supports and anchorages.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
spaces, pipe and duct chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above
ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.


contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and chases.
F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:

1. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.
2. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
3. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
4. uPVC: Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride
G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:

1.04 HVAC CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATION
A. HVAC Contractor executing this work shall be having minimum 10 years’ experience in
the installation of similar HVAC system and having required registration as Mechanical
Contractor with Central Tender Committee.
B. Contractor shall appoint one Graduate Mechanical HVAC Engineer for site work,
(Society of Engineers approved) with minimum 10 years’ experience in similar HVAC
installations and one foreman of 10 years of experience in similar HVAC installations.
The name, qualification and experience of the nominated engineer / foreman shall be
submitted to Engineer for approval.
1.05 EXAMINATION OF SITE AND DRAWINGS
A. Visit the site of the proposed works and obtain all information as to existing conditions
and limitations and all proposed works on adjacent sites and in adjacent areas which
might affect the works on this site, whether by Private Individuals or by Government
Authorities or others.
B. Examine the documents including the Specifications and Drawings of all other Divisions
before bidding and again before commencing any portion of the works.
C. Neither the Owner nor the Consultant will be responsible for any claim for extra work or
expense resulting from the failure of the Contractor to be fully aware of Site Conditions,
Drawing implications, etc.
1.06 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS
A. Arrange for inspection of all work by the Authorities having jurisdiction over the works.
This is to occur on an on-going basis throughout construction to avoid delays at the
termination of the project. On completion of the work present to the Consultant, for the
Owner, final unconditional approval certificates of the Inspecting Authorities and the
master plan developer or their representatives.
B. Pay fees / charges as levied by statutory authorities for inspections, approvals,

temporary services connections at no additional cost to contract unless noted otherwise.
The Fee for the permanent connections shall be by the employer, however the
contractor should make the payment to utilities authorities and will be reimbursed by the
employer (client).
C. Before commencing any work on site, submit the required number of copies to the
relevant Authorities for checking and approval. Follow the progress of such drawings to
permit the timely approval of them by the Authorities. Comply with any changes
requested by the Authorities but notify the Consultant immediately of any such change
for proper processing of these requirements. The Contractor, working on a regular basis
with the Authorities is expected to know which changes are likely at the time he bids the
job, and no extra cost will be allowed for such changes.
1.07 CONTRACT DRAWINGS
A. The drawings for services works are performance drawings, diagrammatic, and intended
to convey the scope of work and indicate general arrangement and approximate
locations of apparatus, fixtures, pipe and duct runs, etc. The drawings do not intend to
indicate architectural or structural details, nor do they show any fabrication or installation
details.
B. Do not scale drawings. Obtain accurate dimensions to structure and architectural items
from drawings of those trades. Confirm by site measurement. Verify location and
elevation of all services (Water, Electrical, Telephone, Sanitary, Storm Drainage, Gas,
etc.) before proceeding with the work.
C. Make at no extra cost, any changes or additions to materials, and/ or equipment

necessary to accommodate structural conditions (pipes or ducts around beams,
columns, etc.)
D. Alter, at no additional cost, the location of materials and/ or equipment as directed,

provided that the changes are made before installation and do not necessitate additional
material.
E. Install all ceiling mounted components (Diffusers, grilles, etc.) in accordance with the
reflected ceiling drawings which are to be prepared by the Contractor and coordinated
with all trades. These must be submitted for approval and be approved before any work
commences on site.
F. Leave space clear and install all work to accommodate future materials and/or
equipment as indicated and/or supplied by another division of work of the contract.
Install all pipe runs, conduit runs, cable trays, etc., to maintain maximum headroom and
clearances, and to conserve space in shafts and ceiling spaces and under floors, and to
provide adequate space for service and maintenance.

G. Confirm on the site the exact location of outlets and fixtures. Confirm also location of
outlets and fixtures provided by any other division of work under the contract.
H. All passwords at all levels (operational, supervisory, and programming) to be handed

over to the Client Representative as part of the handover process at the time of
construction completion and issuance of the Substantial Completion Certificate and
should apply particularly to the IBMS, Access Control, CCTV, and Fire Alarm System
1.08 CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS
A. Prepare fully coordinated drawings in conjunction with all trades concerned, showing
sleeves and openings for all passages through structure and all insert sizes and
locations.
B. Prepare composite construction drawings in colour fully dimensioned, of piping and

equipment in tunnels, shafts, mechanical equipment rooms and areas, and all other
critical locations to avoid a conflict of trades. Composite drawing shall include all MEP
services in coordination with the structure and false ceiling heights given in the
Architectural drawings. Base equipment drawings upon shop drawings and include but
do not necessarily limit to, all details pertaining to access, cleanouts, tappings, sleeves,
electrical connections, drains, location and elevation of pipes, ducts, conduits, etc.,
obtained from consultation with, and agreement of, all trades involved.
C. The location of final fix items such as supply / return air diffusers and sprinkler heads
shown in the contract drawings are indicative only. Contractor shall co-ordinate with the
reflected ceiling plans and Interior design drawings and agree the actual location in
relation to other items such as light fittings, smoke detectors, speakers etc. Final
location should be based on the approved reflected ceiling plans prepared by Contractor
and obtain approval from the Architect / Engineer.
D. Prepare drawings of equipment bases, pump pits, anchors, inertia slabs, floor and roof
curbs, wall openings, trenches, pertaining to mechanical work.
E. Prepare all drawings to scale as agreed with the Consultant. Forward these drawings,
approved by all trades concerned to the Consultant for his records. Provide soft copies
and provide printed copies in a number as specified elsewhere in the Contract but not
less than four sets.
F. Bind one complete set of construction drawings showing "as built" conditions in each
operating and maintenance instruction manual. The extent of these drawings will be
indicated to the Contractor in advance by the Consultant.
1.09 SHOP DRAWINGS AND MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Submit monthly status reports of the following:

1. Materials submittal and approval.
2. Materials receipt at site.
3. Shop drawings submittal and approval.
4. Progress drawings marked in separate colors for each month.
B. Submit construction program

1. Bi-weekly bar charts (90 day look ahead).
2. Testing and commissioning program

C. Submit 4 copies of the product data and shop drawings. Allow for 21 days for review
and approval, before placing order or commencing work.
with relevant information highlighted, along with write up of selection criteria.
2. General piping and ducting layout drawings to a scale not smaller than 1:50.
3. Equipment installation and piping layout, double line drawings of Plant Rooms,
AHU Rooms, etc. clearly indicating all fittings, supports, valves etc. to a scale of
1:20. Submit sections and wall elevations as appropriate.
4. Typical floor plans indicating shafts, risers locations etc. to a scale of 1:50.
5. Builder's work layout plans to a scale of 1:100/1:50 as above.
6. Electrical wiring diagrams (NTS) and panel installation details (1:20).
7. Calculations/details to substantiate the shop drawings.
8. Test and performance certificates of equipment, where required.
9. Submit plant room 2 Sections composite drawing showing all services 1:20 scale.
10. Provide composite shop drawings and sections.
D. Submit as-built drawings in accordance with Contract requirements.
E. Submit three (3) copies of “Operation & Maintenance Manual” with complete data for
each piece of equipment installed and as detailed below:
a. The title: Operation & Maintenance Manual – HVAC Services
b. The name of:
1) The Employer
2) The Consultant
3) The Contractor
a. Table of Contents – Submit sample for approval.
1) HVAC material submittals with the Engineer’s and or local
authority’s approval.
2) Manufacturer’s installation, Operation & Maintenance instructions.
3) Manufacturer’s internal wiring diagrams.
4) Manufacturer’s assembly details.
5) Replacements, parts number listings and description.
6) Lubrication materials, equivalents and schedules.
7) Name and addresses of Manufacturer, Sales and Service Agency
and Local Representative/Distributor.
8) Name and address of Contractor’s Maintenance Department,
including emergency contact telephone number.
9) Equipment Warranties.
10) Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Report.
11) Equipment start-up and test report.
F. Submit Product Data: For the following:

4. Escutcheons.
G. Welding certificates.
H. Submit shop drawings and samples for materials and equipment as listed in this and in
each subsequent section.

I. Provide Soft Copies and printed copies in a number as specified elsewhere in the
contract documents. The Consultant may retain the sample of each item at his
discretion until the completion of the contract
J. Present a schedule of shop drawings and material submittal after award of the contract
and not later than what is specified in the contract documents, indicating the anticipated
date when the drawings will be submitted for review. Assume full responsibility for timely
submission of all drawings. Allow a minimum of two weeks for the Consultant's review
K. Drawings production and presentation is a Contractual matter and any delay on the
Contractor's behalf in making these submissions will be considered a Contractual delay
and may be subject to Contractual penalties and other remedies as determined by the
Consultant.
L. The Consultant will only consider shop drawings bearing the stamp of the Contractor
and all Subcontractors involved. Check for all pertinent information such as physical
dimensions, make, performance, electrical characteristics and indicate the intended use
and location before submitting these drawings. Use reference symbols or enumeration
to correspond to the design drawings.
M. Assume responsibility for accuracy of equipment dimensions related to space available,

accessibility for maintenance and service, compliance with inspection authorities’ codes.
Ensure that shop drawings indicate the shipping and working weights of all equipment.
N. The submission of samples will be subject to the same procedure as that of shop
drawings. One set of such samples shall be required to be brought to site and kept there
after approval till substantial completion.
O. Prepare drawings in conjunction with all trades concerned, showing sleeves and
openings for all passages through structure and all insert sizes and locations.
P. Prepare composite construction drawings, fully dimensioned, of piping and equipment in

tunnels, shafts, mechanical equipment rooms and areas, and all other critical locations
to avoid a conflict of trades.
Q. Base equipment drawings upon shop drawings and include but do not necessarily limit
to, all details pertaining to access, cleanouts, tappings, sleeves, electrical connections,
drains, location and elevation of pipes, ducts, conduits, etc., obtained from consultation
with, and agreement of, all trades involved.
R. Prepare drawings of equipment bases, pump pits, anchors, inertia slabs, floor and roof
curbs, wall openings, trenches, pertaining to mechanical work.
S. The Consultant is not responsible for any delays caused by the inadequacy of the
Contractor's drawings or his failure to obtain initial or subsequent approval. Any time
taken by the Contractor to obtain approval after the originally scheduled date will be
considered as a delay to the contract caused by the Contractor.
T. When drawings are marked "resubmit specified item", the Contractor is to resubmit the
item as originally specified or as may be determined to be equivalent by the Consultant.
The Consultant is the sole arbiter of whether any item is satisfactory or equivalent.
U. When drawings are marked "rejected" a complete resubmission of the particular drawing
is necessary, subject to the same conditions as outlined above.

V. The Consultant's review shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations
from the Contract documents, unless he has, in writing, called the Consultant's attention
to such deviations at the time of submission of drawings. The Consultant's review shall
be construed to apply to, and only to, general arrangements and shall not relieve the
Contractor from the entire responsibility. Any approval by the Consultant shall be on the
understanding that any item submitted shall be ordered with options and modifications
to fully meet the specification. Any fabrication, erection, setting out or other work done in
advance of receipt of stamped drawings shall be done entirely at the Contractor's risk
and cost.
W. Furnish prints of the reviewed details to all other parties who may require them for
proper coordination of their work and furnish all information necessary for the work as a
whole.
X. Obtain Manufacturers' installation directions to aid in the proper execution of the work.
Submit two copies of such directions to the Consultant prior to installation, for use in
inspecting the work.
Y. Bind one complete set of checked shop drawings into each operating and maintenance
manual.
1.010 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. As the job progresses, mark on one set of prints to accurately indicate the status of
installed work. Have the white prints available for inspection at the site at all times and
present them for scrutiny at all job meetings. Obtain the Contractor's approval before
forwarding these to the Consultant. Submit two sets of white prints to the Consultant for
checking and approval.
B. Upon approval, submit one set of soft copy and five sets of white prints to the consultant
for onward transmission to the client.
C. Show on the record drawings the installed inverts of all services entering and leaving the
building and the property. Dimension underground services at key points of every run in
relation to structure and building. Record all elevations for underground services in
relation to floor level of the building and give reference datums to Municipal
benchmarks.
D. Indicate exact location of all services left for future work. Show and dimension all work
embedded in the structure.
1.011 TEMPORARY SERVICES
A. Do not use any of the permanent service facilities during construction, unless specific
written approval is obtained from the Consultant and the Owner or where specifically
allowed elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
B. The use of permanent facilities for temporary services will not affect, in any way, the
commencement day of the period in which the correction after completion is the
Contractor's responsibility. Such period will commence only when the overall project is
completed, and certificates of acceptance are issued.

C. In the event that mains power is not available or is not of sufficient capacity during
construction, supply, install and operate diesel generator(s) of the correct capacity
(which must be approved by the Consultant.)
D. Any generator must have full safety features and must be maintained regularly to ensure
site power at all times.
1.012 EXISTING WORK AND EQUIPMENT
A. Before this Contractor undertakes work in any area he must prepare a list of deficiencies
in that area which affect his works, or which could possibly be construed as being
caused by himself if not noted. In the event that such deficiency list is not prepared, then
he shall be deemed responsible for such deficiencies. Any list shall be brought to the
attention of the Consultant forthwith.
1.013 SUPERVISION
A. The Subcontractor will maintain at site, as necessary for the performance of the
Contract, qualified personnel and supporting staff, with proven experience in erecting,
testing, and adjusting projects of comparable nature and complexity.
B. Before commencing work the Contractor will submit details of the proposed Engineers
and Supervisors, including copies of their Certificates. If in the Consultant's opinion the
proposed Engineers or Supervisors are not adequately qualified or are otherwise
unacceptable, the onus is on the Contractor to submit alternates until such approval is
given.
C. Where the Contractor's or Subcontractor's staff is or becomes during the Contract

deficient in the choice of adequate or acceptable personnel, the Contractor is to remedy
the situation by appropriate measures.
D. Approval of the Contractor's or Subcontractor's Engineers or Staff shall in no way

prevent the withdrawal of that approval at any time during the Contract should the
Consultant so desire. In the event of such disapproval then the Contractor will be
required to rectify the position as stated above within 14 days.
E. In the event of any negligent or severely detrimental behavior the Consultant has the
right to order the removal from site of any Engineer, Supervisor, or worker on a
"forthwith" basis.
F. The Contractor will remedy the situation on a similar forthwith basis and in any event will
not be allowed to proceed with any area of work which as a result is left without proper
supervision or technical backup until such time as the Consultant is again satisfied by
the measures taken.
1.014 WORK TO CONTINUE
A. Unless specifically instructed otherwise by the Consultant the works are to continue to
completion in the most expeditious manner.
1.015 STANDARDS AND AUTHORITIES

A. All equipment and installations shall be in accordance with International Standards and
local Codes and Regulations.
B. Obtain approval of shop drawings / Asbuilt drawings from all Authorities having
jurisdiction. All costs towards such approvals to be borne by the contractor.
A. All refrigerant piping assembled at site shall consist of copper tubing to ASTM
specification B -88 type “k” hard drawn and soldered joints. Joints fittings shall be of
wrought copper or cast brass. Where required for gauges etc. tubing not larger than
3/8” may be of type “k” soft ( annealed) with flared tube or double ferrule
compression fitting suitable for high pressure . flux and solder, recommended by
the manufactures of tubing and fittings and, shall only be used during
installation.
B. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1,
C. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and
1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding
D. Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical

characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in
writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are
appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified,
1.017 PROTECTION, DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect all mechanical, plumbing & electrical works from damage. Keep all equipment
dry and clean at all times.
B. Cover all openings in equipment and materials. Cover all temporary openings in ducts
and pipes with polyethylene sheets or caps until final connection is made. The quality of
such cover must be determined with due regard to how long it may be until final
connection
C. Be responsible for and make good any damages caused directly or indirectly to any
walls, floors, ceilings, woodwork, brickwork, finishes, services, roads, gardens, etc.
D. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through
E. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and
bending.
1.018 COORDINATION AND COOPERTATION

progress of construction, to allow for HVAC installations.

C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for HVAC items requiring access
that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in
Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."
D. Confer with all trades installing equipment which may affect the work of this division and
arrange equipment in proper relation with that equipment installed under all Divisions of
the Contract.
E. Furnish all items to be built in by others, in time, complete with all pertinent information,
commensurate with the progress of the work.
F. Store materials neatly and out of the way and clean up all refuse caused by the work
daily.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

2.02 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
A. Refer to individual Division 23 Refrigerant piping Section for pipe, tube, and fitting
materials and joining methods.
2.03 JOINING MATERIALS (If Applicable)
below.
system contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum
flanges.
flanges.
2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, unless otherwise
C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1(hot dip galvanized), carbon steel, unless

D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by
piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux
F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-
G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for
H. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:

1. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.
2. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
I. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer.
2.04 TRANSITION FITTINGS (If applicable)
A. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: CPVC and PVC one-piece fitting with

manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert,
and one solvent-cement-joint end.
B. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Adaptors: One-piece fitting with manufacturer's SDR 11

equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-
joint end.
C. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: MSS SP-107, CPVC and PVC four-part union.
Include brass end, solvent-cement-joint end, rubber O-ring, and union nut.
2.05 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS (If Applicable)
A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded,
solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig (1725-kPa)

minimum working pressure at 180 deg F (82 deg C).
D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-

psig (1035- or 2070-kPa) minimum working pressure as required to suit system
pressures.
E. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges,

full-face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt
sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.
1. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig
(1035- or 2070-kPa) minimum working pressure where required to suit system
pressures.

F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive,
thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working
G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic
lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working
1. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include
type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element.
2.07 SLEEVES

plain ends and integral water stop, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Under deck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
E. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing
2.08 ESCUTCHEONS

plated finish.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated

finish.
F. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed hinge, set screw or spring clips, and
chrome-plated finish.
2.09 GROUT

grout.
1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 WORKMANSHIP
A. Install equipment, ductwork, conduit and piping in a workmanlike manner to present a

neat appearance and to function properly to the satisfaction of the Consultant. Install
ducts and pipes parallel and perpendicular to the building planes. Install all piping and
ductwork concealed in chases, behind furring, or above ceiling, except in unfinished
areas. Install all exposed systems neatly and group to present a neat appearance.
B. Install all gauges, thermometers, etc., to permit easy observance.
C. Install all equipment and apparatus which requires maintenance, adjustment, or

eventual replacement with due allowance for this.
D. Install control valves to guarantee proper sensing. Shield elements from direct radiation
and avoid placing them behind obstructions.
E. Install all panels and boards, etc., to permit easy operation.
F. Include in the work all requirements of Manufacturers as shown on their drawings.
G. Replace all work unsatisfactory to the Consultant without extra cost and to the standard
required by the Consultant. This applies to any item which is found to be defective in
service during the maintenance period, or extended maintenance period as appropriate.
H. Where height dimensions are given, the installation shall be reasonably expected to be
within 1/8" (3mm) of the design dimensions. Where room centre or proportion
dimensions are not shown these shall be reasonably expected to be located on site to
within 1/2" (13mm) of actual position.
I. Items displaying a horizontal dimension or edge must be plumbed with a level and must
be to the Consultant's satisfaction. Any apparent discrepancy between "level" electrical
items and adjacent items MUST be reported immediately to the Consultant.
3.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. All materials used on the project shall be brand new and of high quality. Obtain approval
of all manufacturers from the Consultant and the Owner.
B. "New" is defined as newly manufactured, "state of the arts," tested and proven item of
equipment. Items which have been held in stock for any extended period of time by
either the Manufacturer or the Supplier will be rejected.
C. All materials used on this project shall bear the third-party quality assurance stamp like
British Standard Kitemark, UL, FM, NFPA, WRAS, DVGW and/or other quality
assurance authority as stated herein elsewhere.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Each day as the work proceeds and on completion, clean up, vacuum, wipe down,
remove labels and markings from equipment and remove from the premises all rubbish,
surplus material, equipment, machinery, tools, scaffolds, and other items used in the
performance of the work. Clean out dirt and debris and leave the buildings clear and
free from rubbish, waste, dust, dirt, debris and sand. Equipment is to be spotless and in
‘Brand New’ condition at handover complete with new or thoroughly cleaned filters and
in a condition acceptable to the Consultant.
B. Where electrical items form part of the visible finish in the rooms, protect from over-
painting, etc. and give all items a final cleaning before handing over of the project.
3.04 ACCESSIBILITY
A. Each item of equipment shall be located so as to be accessible for maintenance or

repair without removing adjacent structures, equipment, piping, ducts, or other
materials. For the large Air Handling units the Contractor shall ensure that these can be
built up on site from components which can be taken into the area. Any openings,
framing or special lifting equipment which may be required shall be included by the
General Contractor.
B. Any item of equipment needing maintenance shall be located so as to be accessible for

maintenance or repair without removing adjacent structures, equipment, piping, ducts,
or other materials.
3.05 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Inform all other Divisions in time concerning required openings. Obtain the approval of
the Consultant before doing any cutting.
B. Obtain the approval of the Consultant before doing any cutting. Supporting members of
any floor, wall or the building structure shall only be cut and in such a manner as
approved by the Consultant. All reinstatement work must be done to the same standard
as the original work.
3.06 INSERTS, SLEEVES, ESCUTCHEONS AND CURBS
A. Under this section supply necessary sleeves and other inserts to other trades.

B. Use only factory made, threaded or toggle type inserts as required for supports and
anchors, properly sized for the load to be carried. Place inserts only in portions of the
main structure and not in any finishing material.
C. Use factory made expansion shields where inserts cannot be placed, but only where
approved by the Consultant and for light weights.
D. Do not use powder activated tools except with the written permission of the Consultant.
E. Supply and locate all inserts, holes, anchor bolts, and sleeves in good time when walls,
floors, and roof are erected.
F. Pass insulation unbroken where pipe or duct is insulated. Size sleeves to provide
adequate clearance all around and in accordance with specialist supplier’s
recommendations.
G. Use the following materials for pipe sleeves:

1. Through all interior walls above grade use uPVC Class C pipes, machine cut,
flush with finished structure. For nonmetallic pipe crossing in fire wall use steel
pipe (medium).
2. Through all exterior walls above grade use uPVC Class C pipes, machine cut,
flush with finished structure inside and to suit flashing on outside. Puddle flange
to be used as mentioned in clause3.08.
3. Through all exterior walls below grade and all other waterproof walls use uPVC
Class D sleeves, machine cut. Check flashing specification for further details.
4. Through all waterproof floors, janitor's closets, mechanical rooms, kitchens,
roofs, use uPVC Class 150 sleeves, machine cut. Extend sleeves 100 mm above
finished floor upwards and cut flush with underside of floor. Refer to flashing
detail through waterproof floors.
5. Provide 100 mm high, 100 mm wide watertight concrete curbs with 20 mm
chamfered edges around all pipes passing through waterproof floors except
where furred in. Read Concrete specification before proceeding with curbs. All
gaps to be filled up with waterproof type sealant.
6. Where uPVC pipes/ other pipework material passes through fire rated
walls/partitions, provide fire rated sleeves.
H. Pack all sleeves between the insulated pipe and the sleeve or where un-insulated
between the pipe and the sleeve with loose fibreglass insulation. Seal the annular space
as follows:
1. For all horizontal sleeves in exposed areas, use a seal equal or better fire rated
than the wall to be sealed.
2. For all vertical sleeves through roofs, janitor's closets, equipment rooms, use
permanently resilient silicone-based sealing compound, non-inflammable and
waterproof (fire sealant). Ensure that the seal is compatible with floor and ceiling
finishes. Check the room finishing schedules for further details and clarify if
necessary with the Consultant.
3. Cover exposed floor and wall pipe sleeves in finished areas with satin finish
chrome or nickel-plated solid brass or with satin finished stainless steel
escutcheons with non-ferrous set screws. Split cast plates of the screw locking
type may not be used. Do not use stamped steel friction type split plates Through
roofs, provide curbs and sleeves as shown on drawings and to suit flashing
requirements.
I. Use the following sleeving for ducts:

1. For rectangular duct openings through walls and floors a removable hardwood/
GI box-out shall be provided of the required size. Soft wood or plywood will not
be acceptable. Hardwood shall be further protected with anti termite paint /
solvent.
2. Through fire walls, build fire dampers into wall, or make detailed fixing in
accordance with DW 144 / NFPA 90A & UL 555/ SMACNA Standards.
3. Through floors where ducts are not furred in or enclosed in a duct shaft, provide
100 mm high and 100 mm wide watertight concrete curbs, with 25 mm
chamfered edges all around. Extend sleeves where used flush to top of curb.
Read Concrete Specification before proceeding. Through floors where duct is
enclosed in a duct shaft or furred in, provide the watertight curbs at the extreme
top and bottom only.
J. After ducts are installed, pack the opening and seal the packing as follows:
1. Use fibreglass insulation for packing except through curbed concrete floors
where asbestos braid must be used.
2. Seal the asbestos braid packing in openings through floors with permanently
resilient silicone base non-inflammable waterproof compound. Press duct
supports firmly down into caulking before bolting it down to curb.
3. Through all vertical walls seal the fibreglass packing using permanently resilient
silicone-based water proof sealant.
K. Brace duct sleeves and box-outs to retain their position and shape during the pouring of
concrete and other work.
L. Provide bracing for each duct at every passage through structure to prevent sagging.
M. Cover exposed pipework, gullies, duct sleeves and openings in exposed areas. Use 100
mm galvanized steel escutcheons in the form of a duct collar or screw fixed pipework
cap or similar approved protection. Over curbs extend the collar 30 mm down the side of
the curb, similar to counter flashing Fix collar in ace with Cadmium plated screws.
3.07 ACCESS PANELS AND DOORS
A. Install all concealed mechanical equipment requiring adjustment or maintenance in

locations easily accessible through access panels or doors. Install systems and
components to result in a minimum number of access panels. Indicate access panels on
as-built drawings.
B. Provide the respective Division of work with panels, doors or frames, complete with all
pertinent information for installation.
C. Ensure that access doors are installed in a manner to match the building grids where
applicable
D. Prepare detail drawings showing location and type of all access doors in coordination
with other trades before proceeding with installation and hand these to the Contractor to
obtain approval.
E. Size all access doors to provide adequate access and commensurate with the type of
structure and Architectural finish. Should it be necessary for persons to enter, provide a
minimum opening of 600 x 450 mm.
F. Ensure proper fire rating of access doors in fire separations

G. Lay-in type ceiling tiles, if properly marked may serve as access panels.
H. Provide panels in glazed tile walls of 2.6mm thick 304 alloy stainless steel, no. 4 finish,
with recessed frame secured with stainless steel, countersunk, flush-headed screws.
I. Provide panels in plaster surfaces with dish shaped door and welded metal lath, ready
to take plaster. Provide a plastic grommet for door key access.
J. Provide other access doors of welded 2.6 mm thick steel, flush type with concealed
hinges, lock and anchor straps, complete with factory prime coat. Submit details to
Consultant for approval.
3.08 FLASHING
A. Flash all mechanical and electrical parts passing through or built into a roof, an outside
wall, or a waterproof floor.
B. Provide uPVC or GI sleeves (depending on pipe material) with puddle flanges for
services crossing water proofed walls in basement.
C. Provide UPVC or stainless steel (depending on pipe material) puddle flanged

connections where pipework penetrates walls of the water storage tank. The puddle
flange shall have bitumen coating.
D. All flashing shall suit roof angle and shall extend a minimum of 400 mm on all sides.
Leave the flashing as directed by the Contractor for him to build into the roofing system
to render a completely watertight connection.
E. Provide counter flashing on all stacks, ducts, and pipes passing through roofs to fit over
flashing or curb.
F. Flash pipes through waterproof floors as per approved detail.
G. Provide pipes and sleeves passing through outside walls with lead or copper flashings
and as directed by the Consultant. All visual aspects of such sleeves to be approved by
the Consultant.
H. Pay special attention to the waterproofing conditions of basements and walls and floors
that may exist. Cooperate at all times with the waterproofing trade and do not cut or
destroy any waterproofing seal without the consent of the waterproofing trade.
I. Provide piping sleeves passing through waterproof walls with asphalt roofing felt
wrapped around so as to leave a 25 x 50 mm recess on both sides of the wall. These
recesses and the space between pipe and sleeve will be caulked by the General
Contract, Moisture protection, or Waterproofing, Division.
3.09 GUARANTEES/ WARRANTY PERIOD (DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD)
A. The Contractor shall guarantee all material and workmanship for at least 2 years after
the issue of final completion certificate and take over by the Engineer and Owner.
Extended warranty for particular items/ equipment shall be as specified in related
specification sections.

B. All warrantees from equipment suppliers shall be vested in the Owner, regardless of
whether the Contractor who supplied the equipment is still associated with the project or
not. Detailed Warranty list for MEP equipment shall be provided by contractor for
Engineer’s approval.
C. Guarantees will be full guarantees and will include all Parts, Labor, overhead, profit,
incidental charges and sundries.
D. Where damage is caused to any other item by any failure of the item guaranteed, then
the guarantee shall also include the costs incurred in rectifying that damage.
E. Contractor shall be completely responsible for repairing, replacing with new to the
satisfaction of Owner, all and any HVAC installed system found defective or not
satisfactorily operating, for a period of two year from the date of handing over
completion certificate to the client, without any extra cost to the Owner.
F. Warranty shall include complete regular maintenance for all HVAC equipment.
3.010 MAINTENANCE DURING DLP
A. Maintenance is defined as the Contractual Liability to maintain the equipment in working

condition till the end of Defects Liability Period (DLP).
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 23 Section 23 2300

removal.
operating pressure.
following:
1. New Piping:
pattern type.
plated finish.
e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece or
f. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type
g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with set
h. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-
plate type.
2. Existing Piping: Use the following: (If Applicable)
a. Chrome-Plated Piping: Split-casting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated
finish.
b. Insulated Piping: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed or
exposed-rivet hinge and spring clips.
c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-
casting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish.
d. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting,
cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish.
e. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-casting, cast-brass type
f. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with set
g. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting,
floor-plate type.
M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor
and roof slabs.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.
3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear
materials:
a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150).
floor level. Refer to Division 07 Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing
and Trim for flashing.
4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve
location of joint. Refer to Division 07 Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants for
materials and installation.
N. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and

1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches (150 mm) in diameter.
2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches (150 mm) and larger in
diameter.
O. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: (If Applicable) Install cast-iron "wall

pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select
sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for
installing mechanical sleeve seals.
P. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and
floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with fire stop materials. Refer to
Division 07 Section 07 8400 - Fire Stopping for materials.
Q. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
R. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-

in requirements.
assembly.

welds.
threads.
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and
solvent cements.
2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M.
3. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC
socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number
PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
4. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
K. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.
L. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth
or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.
2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
M. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join
3.013 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and
at final connection to each piece of equipment.
2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves
and at final connection to each piece of equipment.
3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect
piping materials of dissimilar metals.
3.014 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting

heights are not indicated.
B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems
and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install HVAC equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of

components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference
to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
3.015 PAINTING
A. Painting of HVAC systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09

Section 09 9100 – Maintenance of Painting and Coating.
3.016 CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct suitable concrete bases for the elevated support of all floor mounted
equipment. Furnish, for the Engineer's approval, scaled layouts of all required bases,
with dimensions and location to column center lines, and templates, anchors bolts and
accessories, necessary for base construction.
B. Refer to HVAC standard details for concrete bases.
A. Refer to Division 05 Section 05 5000 -Metal Fabrications for structural steel.
elevation to support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment.
anchor HVAC materials and equipment.
3.019 GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for HVAC equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other
equipment base plates, and anchors.

3.020 VARIATION / CLAIMS
A. Contractor shall not make any claims/variation due to re-routing of HVAC ducts, pipe
etc. to meet site requirements. In case of any disparity in schedule parameters and
capacities, always provide higher capacity resulting from all design parameters as
scheduled. Contractor shall not claim any variation while submitting any equipment,
which consumes less or more electrical power than shown on schedule during any
stage of the project.
3.021 LOCAL CODE REQUIREMENTS AND APPROVAL
A. All HVAC equipment installed shall meet all local regulations including watts/sqr mtr,
KW/TON. All HVAC equipment shall be procured and installed only after obtaining
authorities approval. HVAC contractor shall submit all calculations to Engineer for
approval.
B. Furnish all information as required by the authorities to obtain approvals without the
assistance of designer. The designer may provide design cooling load zonal
calculations, at his discretion, if such calculations are required by local authority.
C. All smoke ventilation system and location of fire dampers and smoke dampers shall
meet KFF requirement. This system shall be installed only after getting KFF approval
on drawing.
A. In addition to the spare parts, tools and maintenance equipment provided by the
Contractor during the Maintenance Period, the Contractor shall supply spare parts, tools
and maintenance equipment specified herein for use after the expiry of such
Maintenance Period and store the same in a location in the building designated by the
owner. Such specified spare parts, tools and maintenance equipment shall not be used
by the Contractor during the period of maintenance unless in an emergency and as
expressly authorized by the Engineer.
B. Contractor shall supply spare parts as listed in the respective specification section for all
the equipment and other required items to two years operation as minimum. Service
including but not limited to the following:
1. Refrigerants .
2. Fan belts, filters, bearings etc. for each type for unit, fans etc.
3. Spare filter dryers.
4. Spare motor type for each fan, and unit.
All spare parts, tools and maintenance equipment shall be provided in original packing, clearly
labeled and referenced. Provide complete schedules of spare parts and maintenance
equipment clearly cross referenced with the “as-built” record drawings and with operation and
maintenance instructions manuals
END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 0513
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-

1.02 COORDINATION

with the following:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

provided shall be from the manufacturer having minimum ten (10) years of experience in the
same product and approved by the Engineer.
specified in HVAC equipment schedules or Sections.
D. System Power Supply Ratings

1. The components of the electrical system shall be suitable for the following
system power supply ratings:
a. 415 volts / 3 phase / 50 hertz.
b. 230 volts / 1 phase / 50 hertz.
2. Tolerances of the system power supply shall be as follows:
a. Voltage ± 6 %.
KEO/19-3262-0000 23 0513/1 Common Motor Requirements For Hvac Equipment
b. Frequency ± 4 %


service factor.

G. Bearings: Re-greasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust
loading.

1. Motors 11kw and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.
2. Motors Smaller than 11kw: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.


insulation.
protected motors.
2. Split phase.
C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial
and thrust loading.

2.07 EC MOTORS
A. Motor: Electronically commutated high-efficiency, programmable brushless DC

motor; resiliently mounted on motor board. Shaded pole motors are not acceptable.
Single speed motors are not acceptable.
B. Complete with and operated by single phase integrated controller/inverter that

operates the wound stator and senses rotor position to electronically commutate the
stator.
C. Motor shall maintain a minimum of 70% efficiency over its entire operating range.
D. Bearings: PR lubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial
and thrust loading.

temperature returns to normal range
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CONDUITS, TRUNKING AND CABLE TRAYS

A. Fix conduits to walls/ceilings with two piece clamps, spaced at not more than 120cm.
B. Trunking shall be attached to walls by brass screws in plastic expansion plugs.
C. Cable tray hangers shall be attached to ceilings with expansion anchors and studs.
Support vertical cable trays by bolting to steel angles, extending from floor to ceiling.
D. The general arrangement of power distribution in the plumbing and fire protection plant
rooms shall be as follows:
1. Rise from electrical panel to cable trays. Drop to wall mounted/free standing
panels, in cable trays.
2. Rise from panels to another layer of horizontal network of cable trays. Drop to
motors in cable trays.
E. Use flexible PVC conduits with termination bushes for connecting valve monitor
switches to ceiling roses. Attach the conduit to pipe work with cable ties/metallic straps,
where required.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 0593
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Choose the applicable clauses from this section and carryout the testing, adjusting and
balancing procedure.
B. This Section includes Testing, Adjusting & Balancing (TAB) to produce design
objectives for the following:
1. Air Systems: All Air Systems and associated equipment and apparatus of
mechanical work of Constant-volume air systems.
2. Space pressurization testing and adjusting. (If applicable)
3. Vibration measuring.
4. Sound level measuring.
5. Smoke-control systems testing and adjusting. (If applicable)
6. Indoor-air quality measuring.
7. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly.
8. Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section.
9. Commercial Refrigeration Systems and associated equipment and apparatus of
mechanical work.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to
reduce fan speed or adjust a damper.
B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including sub-mains,

branches, and terminals, according to indicated quantities.
C. Barrier or Boundary: Construction, either vertical or horizontal, such as walls, floors,

and ceilings that are designed and constructed to restrict the movement of airflow,
smoke, odors, and other pollutants.
D. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors
of high air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat
is withdrawn from a person's skin than is normally dissipated.
E. NC: Noise criteria.
F. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield

repeatable results.
G. RC: Room criteria.
KEO/19-3262-0000 23 0593/1 Testing, Adjusting And Balancing For Hvac

H. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.
I. Smoke-Control System: An engineered system that uses fans to produce airflow and
pressure differences across barriers to limit smoke movement.
J. Smoke-Control Zone: A space within a building that is enclosed by smoke barriers and
is a part of a zoned smoke-control system.
K. Stair Pressurization System: A type of smoke-control system that is intended to

positively pressurize stair towers with outdoor air by using fans to keep smoke from
contaminating the stair towers during an alarm condition.
L. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of
measurement. In a closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump.
M. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the
suction side.
N. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that
cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
O. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance

ratings of a fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the
fan was performance tested.
P. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
Q. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or
leaves the distribution system.
R. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of systems or equipment.
S. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Firm: The entity responsible for performing and
reporting TAB procedures.
1.03 RELATED SECTIONS: Related work to be coordinated and used in conjunction with
this specification includes but is not restricted to:
A. Section 23 0800 – Commissioning of HVAC
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASHRAE 111, Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Building
Heating, Ventilation, Air-conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems.
B. NEBB - Procedural Standards for Testing Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental

Systems, 4th Edition.
C. ADC - Test Code for Grilles, Registers, and Diffusers.
D. SMACNA - HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
E. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
F. BSRlA - Commissioning of VAV systems in Building; Application Guide 1/91;

G. BSRlA - Commissioning Water Systems Application Principles; Application Guide
2189.3
H. BSRlA - Commissioning HVAC Systems Division of Responsibilities; Technical

Memoranda 1188.1
I. BSRlA- Commissioning Management how to achieve a fully functioning building;

application Guide 512002
J. BSRlA- Pre Commissioning of Pipe work Systems, 2nd Edition; Application Guide
112001.1
K. BSRlA- Commissioning of building service installation –a guide for designers,

contractors and facilities managers. Construction Quality Forum (CQF) special report.
L. BSRlA- Achieving minimum outdoor air- commissioning and test procedures; application
Guide 1712000.
M. BSRlA- Guidance to the standard Specification for vibration testing of building services
installations; Facilities Management Specification 7.
N. BSRlA- Commissioning of Pipe work Systems – design considerations; application

Guide 20195.
O. ClBSE - Water Distribution Systems; Commissioning Code W.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Division 01 for general requirements and contractual dates.
B. Qualification Data: , Submit 3 copies of evidence that TAB firm and this Project's TAB
team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
C. Contract Documents Examination Report: , Submit 3 copies of the Contract Documents

review report as specified in Part 3.
D. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Submit 3 copies of TAB strategies and step-by-step
procedures as specified in Part 3 "Preparation" Article. Include a complete set of report
forms intended for use on this Project.
E. Submit test sheet formats, drawings, schemes etc. for approval prior to commencement
of work
F. Certified TAB Reports: Submit two copies of reports prepared, as specified in this
Section, on approved forms certified by TAB firm.
G. Sample Report Forms: Submit two sets of sample TAB report forms.
H. Include identification and types of instruments used and their most recent calibration
date with submission of final test report
I. Warranties specified in this Section.

A. TAB Firm Qualifications: Engage an independent, certified TAB firm with at least 8
years of successful testing, adjusting, and balancing experience on projects with testing
and balancing requirements similar to those required for this project
B. Certification requirements: TAB firm to be certified by AABC or NEBB.
C. TAB Conference: Meet with Owner's and Architect's representatives on approval of

TAB strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details.
Ensure the participation of TAB team members, equipment manufacturers' authorized
service representatives, HVAC controls installers, and other support personnel. Provide
seven days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.
1. Agenda Items: Include at least the following:
a. Submittal distribution requirements.
b. The Contract Documents examination report.
c. TAB plan.
d. Work schedule and Project-site access requirements.
e. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.
f. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.
D. Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includes
the following:
1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified
TAB reports.
2. Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the procedures
specified and referenced in this Specification.
E. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB firm's forms approved by a Commissioning
Authority.
F. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in ASHRAE 111, Section 5

“Instrumentation.”
G. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every six months or more

frequently if required by instrument manufacturer.
1. Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicates date of
calibration and the name of party performing instrument calibration.
A. Do not proceed with testing, adjusting, and balancing work until work has been
completed and is operable. Ensure that there is no latent residual work still to be
completed, and the system has started-up. Start-up shall include the following :
1. All equipment operable in safe and normal condition.
2. Temperature control systems installed complete and operable.
3. Proper thermal overload protection in place for electrical equipment.
4. Air Systems
a. Final filters clean and in place. If conditions warrant, the Contractor shall
install temporary media in addition to the final filters.
b. Duct systems clean of debris.
c. Correct fan rotation.
d. Volume dampers in place and open.
e. Coil fins cleaned and combed.
f. Access doors closed, duct, and caps in place.
g. All outlets installed and connected.
h. Duct systems leakage shall not exceed the rate specified.
1.08 COORDINATION
A. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates
and times.
B. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems
have been satisfactorily completed.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. National Project Performance Guarantee: Provide a guarantee forms stating that TAB
firm comply and guarantee the following provisions:
1. The certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to the
Contract Documents.
2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and
installation limits.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 TEST INSTRUMENTS
A. Utilize test instruments and equipment for TAB work required, of type, precision, and
capacity as recommended by the Commissioning Authority.
B. All equipment shall be properly calibrated with certification providing that recent
calibration has taken place.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine installed work and conditions under which testing is to be done to ensure that
work has been completed, cleaned and is operable. Do not proceed with TAB work
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Tester
B. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to
discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and
equipment.
1. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions
of Contract.
2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells,
flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers,
are required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of
these balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing
and for efficient system and equipment operation.
C. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.

D. Examine Project Record Documents described in Division 01 Section "Project Record
Documents."
E. Examine design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design

assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of
philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
F. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. Relate
performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that
can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or
part of a system. Calculate system effect factors to reduce performance ratings of
HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from those presented when
the equipment was performance tested at the factory. To calculate system effects for air
systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," Sections 7
through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Duct Design," Sections 5 and 6.
Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions.
G. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that
testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections have
been performed.
H. Examine system and equipment test reports.
I. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing
devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices,
balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and
that their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for
efficient system and equipment operation.
J. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and
balancing.
K. Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed, bearings are
greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for
operation.
L. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, to verify that they are
accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.
M. Examine plenum ceilings used for supply air to verify that they are airtight. Verify that
pipe penetrations and other holes are sealed.
N. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight
fins.
O. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and
controls.
P. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:

1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices are operated by the intended
controller.
2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller.
3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of
fully closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in mixing boxes, and
variable-air-volume terminals.
4. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including two-way valves and three-
way mixing and diverting valves, are properly connected.
5. Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight,
drafts, and cold walls.
6. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions.
7. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract
Documents.
8. Controller set points are set at indicated values.
9. Interlocked systems are operating.
10. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to indicated values.
Q. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures.

Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set
points if different from indicated values.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.
B. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make
instruments available to Engineers Representative to facilitate spot checks during
testing. Retain possession of instruments and remove at completion of services.
C. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the
following:
1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.
2. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
3. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
4. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open (If available)
5. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
6. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required
and access to balancing devices is provided.
7. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations
can be met.
3.03 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures
contained in ASHRAE 111 and this Section.
B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the
minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing
and balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to
those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications
for this Project. Obtain prior engineer approval for the use of plastic plugs with retainers
may be used to patch drilled holes in ductwork and housings.
C. Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent
identification material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-
speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings.
D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements English] units.

3.04 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet
volumes with required fan volumes.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.
D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow
measurements.
E. Check airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and
exhaust-air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
I. Check for airflow blockages.
J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.
L. Check for proper sealing of air duct system.
3.05 INITIAL TRIAL TESTS
A. After completion of the works, the contractor shall and as directed by the engineer
demonstrate to the engineer that the installation is adjusted and regulated correctly to
fulfill the function for which it has been designed the contractor shall test adjust balance
and regulate the section concerned as necessary until the required conditions are
obtained. Include for continuity and insulation tests on all electrical works and tests all
interlocks safety cutouts and other protective device to ensure correct functioning. All
such tests shall be carried out in the presence of the engineer and full records of the
values obtained shall be prepared along with the final settings.
3.06 RELIABILITY TESTS
A. After finishing the initial trial tests to the satisfaction of the engineer, the contractor will
be responsible for running reliability tests of all plants and equipments.
B. The reliability tests shall be made under the full responsibility of the contractor and he
shall provide full - time skilled operators for running the plants during the whole test
period
C. Each reliability test shall last for a period of 31 consecutive days during which time the
whole of the plant under test shall operate continuously without adjustment or repair to
the satisfaction of the engineer. In the event of any repair to the adjustment having to be
made other than normal running adjustment, The test shall void and the installation shall
be re - tested after the re-adjustments or repairs have been completed a test shall not
be void due to circumstances outside the control of the contract.
D. The whole reliability tests of the refrigeration and cooling plants shall take place during
the period between 30th of may and 15th of September, and for the heating plants
during the period between 1st December, and 15th of February meanwhile the following
tests and readings shall be made by the contractor in the presence of the engineer and
results shall be recorded and submitted in a tabulated form .
E. Room Inside Conditions (for each room):

1. Inside room DB & WB temperatures
2. Air CMF supply and return or exhaust
3. Air motion where applicable
4. Noise - level at each take – off.
3.07 AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT
A. Air quantities shall be obtained by anemometer and velocimeter readings and all
necessary adjustments shall be made to obtain the specified quantities of air indicated
at each inlet and outlet.
B. Following readings shall be made, one on the suction side of the fan and one on the
discharge side of the fan:
1. Total C.F.M. supplied by each supply fan.
2. Total C.F.M. exhausted by each exhausted fan.
3. Total C.F.M. return air to each supply fan.
4. Total static pressure of each fan.
5. Motor speed, fan speed and input ampere reading for each fan.
6. Average velocity on intake side of each fan.
7. Noise level.
C. Cooling Coils:
1. For any conditioner the following tests shall be performed and submitted in
tabulated form to the engineer.
a. Average velocity over intake - side of each coil face
b. Entering air temperature (D.B. & W.B.)
c. Discharge air temperature (D.B. & W.B.)
D. Electric Motors
1. For each motor
a. Speed in R.P.M.
b. Amperes for each phase
c. Power input in K.W.
3.08 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS (Fancoil Units / Fans)
A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed
listed by fan manufacturer.
1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:
a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as
practicable and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and
transitions.

b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible
connection.
c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near
the fan as possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream
from duct restrictions.
d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the
plenum that houses the fan.
B. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit,
rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.
1. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance
personnel must change filters.
C. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat
recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.
D. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static
pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with
calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend
corrective action to align design and actual conditions.
E. Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than
indicated speed. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical
connections to accommodate fan-speed changes.
F. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-
motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full
cooling, full heating, economizer, and any other operating modes to determine the
maximum required brake horsepower.
G. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to
indicated airflows within specified tolerances.
1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and
adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for
Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and
inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone.
2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted.
Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within
specified tolerances.
H. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.

1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's
written instructions and calculating factors.
I. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified
tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than
extractors and the dampers at air terminals.
1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of
indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations
prescribed by the Contract Documents.
2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.

3.10 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS
A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following
data:
1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers.
2. Motor horsepower rating.
3. Motor rpm.
4. Efficiency rating.
5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers (If applicable): Test for proper

operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for
the controller to prove proper operation. Record observations, including controller
manufacturer, model and serial numbers, and nameplate data.
3.11 PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS
A. Verify proper rotation of fans.
B. Measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures.
C. Record compressor data.
3.12 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS
D. Electric-Heating Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:

1. Nameplate data.
2. Airflow.
3. Entering- and leaving-air temperature at full load.
4. Voltage and amperage input of each phase at full load and at each incremental
stage.
5. Calculated kilowatt at full load.
6. Fuse or circuit-breaker rating for overload protection.
E. Refrigerant Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:

1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
2. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
3. Airflow.
4. Air pressure drop.
5. Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature.
6. Power rating KW/TR
3.13 PROCEDURES FOR TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENTS
A. During TAB, report the need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the
automatic temperature-control system.
B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of two
successive eight-hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of
final temperature settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied.

C. Measure outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures.
3.14 PROCEDURES FOR VIBRATION MEASUREMENTS (If applicable)
A. Use a vibration meter meeting the following criteria:

1. Solid-state circuitry with a piezoelectric accelerometer.
2. Velocity range of 0.1 to 10 inches per second (2.5 to 254 mm/s).
3. Displacement range of 1 to 100 mils (0.0254 to 2.54 mm).
4. Frequency range of at least 0 to 1000 Hz.
5. Capable of filtering unwanted frequencies.
B. Calibrate the vibration meter before each day of testing.

1. Use a calibrator provided with the vibration meter.
2. Follow vibration meter and calibrator manufacturer's calibration procedures.
C. Perform vibration measurements when other building and outdoor vibration sources are
at a minimum level and will not influence measurements of equipment being tested.
1. Turn off equipment in the building that might interfere with testing.
2. Clear the space of people.
D. Perform vibration measurements after air and water balancing and equipment testing is
complete.
E. Clean equipment surfaces in contact with the vibration transducer.
F. Position the vibration transducer according to manufacturer's written instructions and to

avoid interference with the operation of the equipment being tested.
G. Measure and record vibration on rotating equipment over 3 hp (2.2 kW).
H. Measure and record equipment vibration, bearing vibration, equipment base vibration,
and building structure vibration. Record velocity and displacement readings in the
horizontal, vertical, and axial planes.
1. Fans and HVAC Equipment with Fans:
a. Fan Bearing: Drive end and opposite end.
b. Motor Bearing: Drive end and opposite end.
c. Equipment Casing: Top and side.
d. Equipment Base: Top and side.
e. Building: Floor.
f. Ductwork: To and from equipment after flexible connections.
g. Piping: To and from equipment after flexible connections.
2. HVAC Equipment with Compressors:
a. Compressor Bearing: Drive end and opposite end.
b. Motor Bearing: Drive end and opposite end.
c. Equipment Casing: Top and side.
d. Equipment Base: Top and side.
e. Building: Floor.
f. Piping: To and from equipment after flexible connections.
I. For equipment with vibration isolation, take floor measurements with the vibration
isolation blocked solid to the floor and with the vibration isolation floating. Calculate and
report the differences.
J. Inspect, measure, and record vibration isolation.

1. Verify that vibration isolation is installed in the required locations.
2. Verify that installation is level and plumb.
3. Verify that isolators are properly anchored.
4. For spring isolators, measure the compressed spring height, the spring OD, and
the travel-to-solid distance.
5. Measure the operating clearance between each inertia base and the floor or
concrete base below. Verify that there is unobstructed clearance between the
bottom of the inertia base and the floor.
3.15 PROCEDURES FOR SOUND-LEVEL MEASUREMENTS
A. Perform sound-pressure-level measurements with an octave-band analyzer complying

with ANSI S1.4 for Type 1 sound-level meters and ANSI S1.11 for octave-band filters.
Comply with requirements in ANSI S1.13, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Calibrate sound meters before each day of testing. Use a calibrator provided with the
sound meter complying with ANSI S1.40 and that has NIST certification.
C. Use a microphone that is suitable for the type of sound levels measured. For areas
where air velocities exceed 100 fpm (0.51 m/s), use a windscreen on the microphone.
D. Perform sound-level testing after air and water balancing and equipment testing are
complete.
E. Close windows and doors to the space.
F. Perform measurements when the space is not occupied and when the occupant noise
level from other spaces in the building and outside are at a minimum.
G. Clear the space of temporary sound sources so unrelated disturbances will not be
measured. Position testing personnel during measurements to achieve a direct line-of-
sight between the sound source and the sound-level meter.
H. Take sound measurements at a height approximately 48 inches (1200 mm) above the
floor and at least 36 inches (900 mm) from a wall, column, and other large surface
capable of altering the measurements.
I. Take sound measurements in dBA and in each of the 8 unweighted octave bands in the
frequency range of 63 to 8000 Hz.
J. Take sound measurements with the HVAC systems off to establish the background
sound levels and take sound measurements with the HVAC systems operating.
1. Calculate the difference between measurements. Apply a correction factor
depending on the difference and adjust measurements.
K. Perform sound testing at critical locations on Project for each of the space types; offices,
bedrooms, auditorium, classrooms, conference, spaces with NC 25 or lower,
mechanical rooms, etc. If testing multiple locations for each space type, select at least
one location that is near and at least one location that is remote from the predominant
sound source.
K.L. Refer to acoustic report for internal and external noise levels.
3.16 PROCEDURES FOR SMOKE-CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING (If Applicable)

A. Follow local authorities standards and codes on smoke ventilation system
B. Before testing smoke-control systems, verify that construction is complete and verify the
integrity of each smoke-control zone boundary. Verify that windows and doors are
closed and that applicable safing, gasket, and sealants are installed. Report
deficiencies and postpone testing until after the reported deficiencies are corrected.
C. Measure and record wind speed and direction, outside-air temperature, and relative
humidity on each test day.
D. Measure, adjust, and record airflow of each smoke-control system with all fans that are
a part of the system operating as intended by the design.
E. Measure, adjust, and record the airflow of each fan. For ducted systems, measure the
fan airflow by duct Pitot-tube traverse.
F. After air balancing is complete, perform the following pressurization testing for each
smoke-control zone in the system:
1. Verify the boundaries of each smoke-control zone.
2. With the HVAC systems in their normal mode of operation and smoke control not
operating, measure and record the pressure difference across each smoke-
control zone. Make measurements after closing doors that separate the zones.
Make one measurement across each door. Clearly indicate the high and low
pressure side of each door.
3. With the system operating in the smoke-control mode and with each zone in the
smoke-control system activated, perform the following:
a. Measure and record the pressure difference across each door that
separates the smoke zone from adjacent zones. Make measurements
with doors that separate the smoke zone from the other zones closed.
Clearly indicate the high and low pressure side of the door. Doors that
have a tendency to open slightly due to the pressure difference should
have one pressure measurement made while held closed and another
measurement made with the door open.
b. Continue to activate each separate zoned smoke-control system and
make pressure difference measurements.
c. After testing a smoke zone's smoke-control system, deactivate the HVAC
systems involved and return them to their normal operating mode before
activating another zone's smoke-control system.
d. Verify that controls necessary to prevent excessive pressure differences
are functional.
G. Operational Tests:
1. Check the proper activation of each zoned smoke-control system in response to
all means of activation, both automatic and manual.
2. Check automatic activation in response to fire alarm signals received from the
building's fire alarm and detection system. Initiate a separate alarm for each
means of activation to ensure that the proper operation of the correct zoned
smoke-control system occurs.
3. Check and record the proper operation of fans, dampers, and related equipment
as outlined below for each separate zone of the smoke-control system.
a. Fire zone in which a smoke-control system automatically activates.
b. Type of signal that activates a smoke-control system, such as pull station,
sprinkler water flow, or smoke detector.
c. Smoke zone(s) where maximum mechanical exhaust to the outside is
implemented and no supply air is provided.
d. Positive pressure smoke-control zone(s) where maximum air supply is
implemented and no exhaust to the outside is provided.
e. Fan(s) "ON" as required to implement the smoke-control system.
Multiple- or variable-speed fans should be further noted as "MAX.
VOLUME" to verify that the intended control configuration is achieved.
f. Fan(s) "OFF" as required to implement the smoke-control system.
g. Damper(s) "OPEN" where maximum airflow must be achieved.
h. Damper(s) "CLOSED" where no airflow should take place.
i. Auxiliary functions to achieve the smoke-control system configuration
such as changes or override of normal operating pressure and
temperature-control set points.
j. If standby power is provided for the smoke-control system, test to verify
that the system functions while operating under both normal and standby
power.
H. Conduct additional tests required by authorities having jurisdiction. Unless required by

authorities having jurisdiction, perform testing without the use of smoke or products that
simulate smoke.
I. Prepare a complete report of observations, measurements, and deficiencies.
J. Contractor shall be responsible for providing a completely operational, design & built,
smoke exhaust system approved by local civil defense authority without additional cost.
3.17 PROCEDURES FOR INDOOR-AIR QUALITY MEASUREMENTS
A. After air balancing is complete and with HVAC systems operating at indicated
conditions, perform indoor-air quality testing.
B. Observe and record the following conditions for each HVAC system:
1. The distance between the outside-air intake and the closest exhaust fan
discharge,, flue termination, or vent termination.
2. Specified filters are installed. Check for leakage around filters.
3. Cooling coil drain pans have a positive slope to drain.
4. Cooling coil condensate drain trap maintains an air seal.
5. Evidence of water damage.
6. Insulation in contact with the supply, return, and outside air is dry and clean.
C. Measure and record indoor conditions served by each HVAC system. Make
measurements at multiple locations served by the system if required to satisfy the
following:
1. Bed rooms
2. Living roomsand Diwania
3. Each and every appartments.
D. Measure and record the following indoor conditions for each location two times at two-
hour intervals, and in accordance with ASHRAE 113:
1. Temperature.
2. Relative humidity.
3. Air velocity.
4. Concentration of carbon dioxide (ppm).
5. Concentration of carbon monoxide (ppm).
6. Nitrogen oxides (ppm).
7. Formaldehyde (ppm).
3.18 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION
A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned.
B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely
affect control functions.
C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual
measurements.
D. Check the operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers).
E. Check free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve
operators.
F. Check the sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device
positions and correlate with airflow and water flow measurements. Note the speed of
response to input changes.
G. Check the interaction of electrically operated switch transducers.
H. Check the interaction of interlock and lockout systems.
I. Check main control supply-air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations.
J. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine whether the system
operates on a grounded or nongrounded power supply.
K. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations.
3.19 TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10
percent.
2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent.
3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 10 percent.
4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 5 percent.
3.20 REPORTING
A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as

specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for
systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing
devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend
changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for
performance measuring and balancing devices.
B. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed

procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of
deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a
separate report for each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple
floors.

3.21 FINAL REPORT
A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond

paper, in three-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced
systems.
B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing
and balancing engineer.
1. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
C. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field report data, include the following:
1. Fan curves.
2. Manufacturers' test data.
3. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
4. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include Shop
Drawings and Product Data.
D. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data in
the final report, as applicable:
1. Title page.
2. Name and address of TAB firm.
3. Project name.
4. Project location.
5. Architect's name and address.
6. Engineer's name and address.
7. Contractor's name and address.
8. Report date.
9. Signature of TAB firm who certifies the report.
10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the
report. Number each page in the report.
11. Summary of contents including the following:
a. Indicated versus final performance.
b. Notable characteristics of systems.
c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract
Documents.
12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings.
14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports varies from
indicated values.
15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:
a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.
b. Conditions of filters.
c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.
e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch
diameter.
f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.
g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.
h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems.
Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following:
1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.
2. Water flow rates.
3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.
5. Terminal units.
6. Balancing stations.
7. Position of balancing devices.
F. Air-Handling Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:
1. Unit Data: Include the following:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and unit size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Unit arrangement and class.
g. Discharge arrangement.
h. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
i. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in
inches (mm).
j. Number of belts, make, and size.
k. Number of filters, type, and size.
2. Motor Data:
a. Make and frame type and size.
b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in
inches (mm).
3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Total airflow rate in cfm (L/s).
b. Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).
f. Preheat coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).
g. Cooling coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).
h. Heating coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).
i. Outside airflow in cfm (L/s).
j. Return airflow in cfm (L/s).
k. Outside-air damper position.
l. Return-air damper position.
m. Damper position.
G. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports:

1. Coil Data:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Coil type.
d. Number of rows.
e. Fin spacing in fins per inch (mm) o.c.
f. Make and model number.
g. Face area in sq. ft. (sq. m).
h. Tube size in NPS (DN).
i. Tube and fin materials.
j. Circuiting arrangement.
a. Airflow rate in cfm (L/s).
b. Average face velocity in fpm (m/s).
c. Air pressure drop in inches wg (Pa).
d. Outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C).
e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C).
f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C).
g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C).
h. Water flow rate in gpm (L/s).
i. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa).
j. Entering-water temperature in deg F (deg C).
k. Leaving-water temperature in deg F (deg C).
l. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types.
m. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig (kPa).
n. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F (deg C).
H. Electric-Coil Test Reports: For electric furnaces, duct coils, and electric coils installed in
central-station air-handling units, include the following:
1. Unit Data:
b. Location.
c. Coil identification.
d. Capacity in Btuh (kW).
e. Number of stages.
f. Connected volts, phase, and hertz.
g. Rated amperage.
h. Airflow rate in cfm (L/s).
i. Face area in sq. ft. (sq. m).
j. Minimum face velocity in fpm (m/s).
a. Heat output in Btuh (kW).
b. Airflow rate in cfm (L/s).
c. Air velocity in fpm (m/s).
d. Entering-air temperature in deg F (deg C).
e. Leaving-air temperature in deg F (deg C).
f. Voltage at each connection.
g. Amperage for each phase.
I. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:
1. Fan Data:
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Arrangement and class.
g. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
h. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in
inches (mm).
2. Motor Data:
a. Make and frame type and size.
b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in
inches (mm).
g. Number of belts, make, and size.
a. Total airflow rate in cfm (L/s).
b. Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
e. Suction static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
J. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a
grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following:
1. Report Data:
a. System and air-handling unit number.
b. Location and zone.
c. Traverse air temperature in deg F (deg C).
d. Duct static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
e. Duct size in inches (mm).
f. Duct area in sq. ft. (sq. m).
g. Indicated airflow rate in cfm (L/s).
h. Indicated velocity in fpm (m/s).
i. Actual airflow rate in cfm (L/s).
j. Actual average velocity in fpm (m/s).
k. Barometric pressure in psig (Pa).
K. Compressor and Condenser Reports: For refrigerant side of unitary systems, stand-
alone refrigerant compressors, air-cooled condensing units, or water-cooled condensing
units, include the following:
1. Unit Data:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Unit make and model number.
d. Compressor make.
e. Compressor model and serial numbers.
f. Refrigerant weight in lb (kg).
g. Low ambient temperature cutoff in deg F (deg C).
a. Inlet-duct static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
b. Outlet-duct static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
c. Entering-air, dry-bulb temperature in deg F (deg C).
d. Leaving-air, dry-bulb temperature in deg F (deg C).
e. Condenser entering-water temperature in deg F (deg C).
f. Condenser leaving-water temperature in deg F (deg C).
g. Condenser-water temperature differential in deg F (deg C).
h. Condenser entering-water pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).
i. Condenser leaving-water pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).
j. Condenser-water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa).
k. Control settings.
l. Unloader set points.
m. Low-pressure-cutout set point in psig (kPa).
n. High-pressure-cutout set point in psig (kPa).
o. Suction pressure in psig (kPa).
p. Suction temperature in deg F (deg C).
q. Condenser refrigerant pressure in psig (kPa).
r. Condenser refrigerant temperature in deg F (deg C).
s. Oil pressure in psig (kPa).
t. Oil temperature in deg F (deg C).
u. Voltage at each connection.
v. Amperage for each phase.
w. Kilowatt input.
x. Crankcase heater kilowatt.
y. Number of fans.
z. Condenser fan rpm.
aa. Condenser fan airflow rate in cfm (L/s).
bb. Condenser fan motor make, frame size, rpm, and horsepower.
cc. Condenser fan motor voltage at each connection.
dd. Condenser fan motor amperage for each phase.
L. Vibration Measurement Reports:

1. Date and time of test.
2. Vibration meter manufacturer, model number, and serial number.
3. Equipment designation, location, equipment, speed, motor speed, and motor
horsepower.
4. Diagram of equipment showing the vibration measurement locations.
5. Measurement readings for each measurement location.
6. Calculate isolator efficiency using measurements taken.
7. Description of predominant vibration source.
M. Sound Measurement Reports: Record sound measurements on octave band and dBA
test forms and on an NC or RC chart indicating the decibel level measured in each
frequency band for both "background" and "HVAC system operating" readings. Record
each tested location on a separate NC or RC chart. Record the following on the forms:
1. Date and time of test. Record each tested location on its own NC curve.
2. Sound meter manufacturer, model number, and serial number.
3. Space location within the building including floor level and room number.
4. Diagram or color photograph of the space showing the measurement location.
5. Time weighting of measurements, either fast or slow.
6. Description of the measured sound: steady, transient, or tonal.
7. Description of predominant sound source.
N. Indoor-Air Quality Measurement Reports for Each HVAC System:

1. HVAC system designation.
2. Date and time of test.
3. Outdoor temperature, relative humidity, wind speed, and wind direction at start of
test.
4. Room number or similar description for each location.
5. Measurements at each location.
6. Observed deficiencies.
O. Instrument Calibration Reports:

1. Report Data:
a. Instrument type and make.
b. Serial number.
c. Application.
d. Dates of use.
e. Dates of calibration.
3.22 INSPECTIONS
A. Initial Inspection:
1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly
check measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final
test and balance readings documented in the Final Report.
2. Randomly check the following for each system:
a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets.
b. Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of terminals.
c. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor.
Compare the reading to the set point.
d. Measure sound levels at two locations.
e. Measure space pressure of at least 10 percent of locations.
f. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position.
g. Note deviations to the Contract Documents in the Final Report.
B. Final Inspection:
1. After initial inspection is complete request that a final inspection be made. TAB
firm test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of
[Owner] / engineer.
2. [Owner] / Engineer can randomly select measurements documented in the final
report to be rechecked. The rechecking shall be limited to either minimum 15
percent of the total measurements recorded, or the extent of measurements that
can be accomplished in a normal 2 business days.
3. If the rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements
documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the
measurements shall be noted as "FAILED."
4. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total
measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing
shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected.
5. TAB firm shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the
final report and balancing device settings to include all changes and resubmit the
final report.
6. Request a second final inspection. If the second final inspection also fails,
Owner shall contract the services of another TAB firm to complete the testing and
balancing in accordance with the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the
services from the final payment.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 0700
HVAC INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 INSULATION GENERAL
A. The whole of the insulation work shall be carried out by an approved specialist insulation
Contractor. All allowances shall be included for arranging a specialist subcontract
accordingly and for informing the specialist Sub-contractor of all conditions relating to
the Contract and for coordinating his works with the remainder of the works.
B. All allowances shall be included for informing the specialist Sub-contractor of all details
of the building structure, program arrangements, and other relevant details at the time of
tender and for all necessary visits to site by the Sub-contractor or his workers.
C. All insulation shall be in accordance with British Standard Specifications (unless

specified elsewhere), A.S.T.M standards and Codes of Practice in all respects.
D. In addition to complying with the relevant standards, all insulating material shall be free
from Asbestos and with low VOC.
E. Insulating materials shall be acceptable only if they are equal to or better than the
grades or classes of fire resistance as follows:
1. B.S. 476 Part 5 Class P, (Not easily ignitable.)
2. B.S. 476, Part 6, (Fire Propagation Index a maximum of 12.6.)
3. B.S. 476, Part 7, Class 1, (Surface spread of flame.)
4. B.S. 476 Part 9, (Production of emitted smoke shall not give more than 35%
obscuration of the light beam.)
F. All insulation finishes, and coverings shall be classified as Class 0 surface spread when
tested in accordance with B.S. 476, Part 6 & Part 7. (OR) insulation should have Flame
Spread Index (FSI) of less than 25 and Smoke Developed Index (SDI) less than 50
when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 and also complying to FM4924
G. All adhesives, mastics, coatings, sealers and primers shall be classified as Class 1
surface spread when tested in accordance with B.S. 476, part 7, and shall have low
VOC content. They shall not in any way attack the insulation or the surface to which the
insulation is being applied and shall be suitable for the working temperatures.
1. Insulation Materials:
a. Cellular glass / Fibre Glass
b. Flexible elastomeric / Elastomeric rubber
c. Mineral fiber / Mineral wool
KEO/19-3262-0000 23 0700/1 Hvac Insulation
d. Polystyrene.
e. Closed Cell.
f. Physically crosslinked Polyolefin insulation
g. Polyurethane
h. Styrofoam
2. Fire-rated insulation systems.
3. Insulating cements.
4. Adhesives.
5. Mastics.
6. Lagging adhesives.
7. Sealants.
8. Factory-applied jackets.
9. Field-applied jackets.
10. Tapes.
11. Securements.
12. Corner angles.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity,
thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each
type of insulation and hanger.
2. Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation.
3. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.
4. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for
each type of insulation.
5. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and
access panels.
6. Detail application of field-applied jackets.
7. Detail application at linkages of control devices.
8. Detail field application for each equipment type.
B. Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket indicated. Identify each Sample,
describing product and intended use.
1. Sample Sizes:
a. Submit samples of all types of insulation for approval. Submit pipe
insulation samples 300 mm long x 25 mm inside x 125 mm outside
diameter, and flat samples 300 mm x 300 mm x 25 mm, minimum size.
b. Submit with samples, the full technical brochures.
c. Where the specification calls for additional treatments, such as wrapping
and waterproofing, submit also a completed sample of similar size.
d. All samples after approval are to be retained on site to be a reference for
future work.
C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation
materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated.
Include dates of tests and test methods employed.

E. Field quality-control reports.
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed three (3)
years minimum experience.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-

test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per
ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, UL 723; FM 4924 by a testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket
materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate
markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-
developed index of 50 or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-
developed index of 150 or less.
C. Mockups: Before installing insulation, build mockups for each type of insulation and
finish listed below to demonstrate quality of insulation application and finishes. Build
mockups in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. Use
materials indicated for the completed Work.
D. Insulation material shall comply with the following British Standard (OR) equivalent
American Standards:
1. BS 476 (Part 4,5, 6, 7,9)
2. BS 874
3. BS2972
4. BS3958 (Part 4,5)
5. BS 5422
6. BS6676 (Part 1)
A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with

appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use
temperature.
B. Protect insulation from moisture and dirt by inside storage and enclosure and polythene
wrapping in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in
Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application,
duct Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for equipment
insulation application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish
and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied
jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.

1.07 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems. Insulation application

may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.
B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each

area of construction.
1.08 MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit maintenance data for each type of mechanical insulation. Include this data,
product data and certifications in the maintenance manual.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

2.02 GENERAL:
A. Thermal insulation shall be of an approved material with thermal conductivity not higher
than 0.042 w/m °C (0.29 Btu/hr. Ft. sq. °F Inch) measured at an average temperature of
35°C (95°F). The thermal insulation shall be non-corrosive to the metal, water repellent,
fire retardant, sustenance to vermin and easily cut and fitted to shape during application.
B. The insulation (fiberglass) shall be provided with an approved fire retardant vapor barrier
jacket to prevent moisture penetration to the insulation. Vapor barrier shall also be
applied to all joints and edges.
C. The insulation shall be fixed into the material surface by means of an approved
adhesive compound that has no corrosion effect on the metal and thoroughly applied to
the metal surface and insulation.
D. The insulation and finishing shall be carried out by skilled labor, and before thermal
insulation is applied, all metal surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and treated with an
approved corrosion inhibitor.
E. Insulation shall be applied in such a manner that air circulation within the insulation or
between the insulation and pipe, duct or equipment is completely prevented. Pipe
insulation shall fit snugly on the pipe and duct insulation shall be adhered to the duct
surface with special adhesive.
F. All insulation joints shall be firmly butted together, made absolutely tight and finished
smooth. Vapor barrier jackets shall have 50mm minimum overlaps. Longitudinal
overlaps on exposed works shall be made towards ceiling or wall.
G. All insulation shall be made continuous through sleeves, openings and pipe hangers.
The hanger shall be of size to fit around the insulation and jacketing.

H. Insulation shall be applied in such a manner as to permit expansion and contraction of
the metal without causing damage to insulation or surface finish.
I. Openings made in the insulation shall be provided with metal frames to protect the
edges of the insulation, and vapor sealed.
2.03 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Insulating materials shall have thermal conductivity values not more than those listed as
follows:
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MATERIAL TYPE THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY.
W/M/DEG.C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Mineral wool Sectional 0.04
Mineral wool Slabs 0.04
Fibre Glass All 0.034
Closed Cell All 0.035
(elastomeric foam)
Polyurethane Sectional 0.025
Styrofoam Rigid 0.026
Polyolefin All 0.032
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
All conductivity figures are rated at an average temperature of 23 deg C.or mean
temperature of 35 deg C.
B. The insulation thickness for pipes and ducts shall be verified by the specialist supplier/
manufacturer to confirm no condensation.
C. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
D. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride
content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
E. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable
according to ASTM C 795.
F. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the
manufacturing process.
G. Smoke toxicity report to be provided.
H. Calcium Silicate:
1. Preformed Pipe Sections: Flat-, curved-, and grooved-block sections of
noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a non-asbestos fibrous
reinforcement. Comply with ASTM C 533, Type I.
2. Flat-, curved-, and grooved-block sections of noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous
calcium silicate with a non-asbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply with ASTM C
533, Type I.
3. Prefabricated Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585 for
dimensions used in preforming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and
flanges.
I. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed,
rigid, hermetically sealed cells. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in
"Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
1. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I.
2. Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III.
3. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV.
4. Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II,
Class 1.
5. Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory-Applied [ASJ] [ASJ-SSL]: Comply with
ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 2.
6. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.
J. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with

ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.
K. The closed cell elastomeric rubber insulation shall have following characteristics in
addition to clause 1.05 above:
1. Water vapour permeability - 0.09 ugm/Nh, BS 4370/2
(= 7000 to DIN 52615) (OR) < 0.05
Perm-inch
2. Density - 50 ±10 kg / m3 or 2.54Lb / ft3 to 3.75Lb /
ft3
3. Closed cell content - > 90%.
4. Corrosion risk assessment - Din 1988 / 7 Certified.
5. Noise reduction - Din 4109 up to 32 dB (A).
6. Thermal conductivity of 0.035 w/mk at 35°C mean temperature to BS 874 PART
2 – 86 (DIN 52613, 52612). or ASTM C518
The insulation thickness for pipes and ducts shall be verified by the specialist
supplier/ manufacturer to confirm no condensation.
L. Mineral Fiber Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C
1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket
requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
2. High-Temperature, Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 553,

Type V, without factory-applied jacket.
3. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB.
For duct and plenum applications, provide insulation with factory-applied FSK
jacket. For equipment applications, provide insulation with factory-applied FSK
jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied
Jackets" Article.
4. High-Temperature, Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 612,

Type III, without factory-applied jacket.
5. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:

a. Type I, 850 deg F (454 deg C) Materials: Comply with ASTM C 547, Type
I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ-SSL. Factory-applied jacket

b. Type II, 1200 deg F (649 deg C) Materials: Comply with ASTM C 547,
Type II, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ-SSL. Factory-applied jacket
M. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Semirigid board material with factory-applied
FSK jacket complying with ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with
properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu.
m) or more. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F (55 deg C) is 0.29 Btu x in./h x
sq. ft. x deg F (0.042 W/m x K) or less. Factory-applied jacket requirements are
specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
N. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe Insulation Wicking System: Preformed pipe insulation complying

with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with absorbent cloth factory applied to the entire
inside surface of preformed pipe insulation and extended through the longitudinal joint to
outside surface of insulation under insulation jacket. Factory apply a white, polymer,
vapor-retarder jacket with self-sealing adhesive tape seam and evaporation holes
running continuously along the longitudinal seam, exposing the absorbent cloth.
O. Fire Classification: Fire classification ‘A1’ as per EN 13501; when tested as per BS EN
ISO 1182 & EN ISO 1176 for Base fibers. And Fire classification of B-s1-d0 as per EN
13501 for Faced products
P. Mineral Fiber Insulation to have moisture absorption: <1.00 % by volume when tested in
accordance with ASTM C1104
Q. Mineral Fiber Insulation to have Water vapor permeance: Water vapor barrier
Aluminium facing shall achieve water vapor permeance of not more than 0.02 perm
when tested as per ASTM E96
R. Resistance to Fungus: Insulation shows no evidence of fungal growth when tested as

per ASTM C1338
S. Insulation Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
Glass fibers shall be EUCEB certified or equivalent.
T. Phenolic:
1. Preformed pipe insulation of rigid, expanded, closed-cell structure. Comply with
ASTM C 1126, Type III, Grade 1.
2. Block insulation of rigid, expanded, closed-cell structure. Comply with ASTM C
1126, Type II, Grade 1.
3. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.
4. Factory-Applied Jacket: Requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets"
Article.
a. Preformed Pipe Insulation: ASJ.
b. Board for Duct and Plenum Applications: ASJ.
c. Board for Equipment Applications: ASJ.
U. Physically cross-linked polyolefin foam with factory applied reinforced aluminium foil.
Insulation shall have the following specifications:
1. Physically cross-linked, closed cell polyolefin foam with factory applied reinforced
aluminium foil and factory applied acrylic adhesive backing.
2. Exceed the minimum thickness to prevent condensation.
3. Density: 25 kg/m3 (foam core only).
4. Thermal Conductivity (ASTM C518): Maximum 0.032 W/m.°K at mean
temperature 23°C.
5. Water absorption: <0.2 % v/v.
6. Water Vapour permeability (ASTM E96): Maximum 2.3 x 10-15 kg/Pa.s.m,
(µ>80,000).
7. Service Temperature Range: - 80°C ~ +80°C (adhesive backing).
8. Zero mould growth when tested to ASTM G21.
9. Fire Rating:
a. Class 0 to BS476 Parts 6 and 7.
b. Euroclass B-S2,d0 classification according to EN 13501Part 1.
c. Complies with NFPA 90A and B (ASTM E84 25/50 rating).
d. Complies with FM 4924 fire performance criteria and “FM Approved” by
FM Approvals certification body.
10. Smoke Density and Toxicity:
a. Complies with the requirements of International Maritime Organization
Resolution MSC 61(67) Part 2.
b. Dm<200 (ISO 5659 Part 2 gas analysis); combustion gases CO, HCl, HF,
NOx, HBr, HCN and SO2 to be within the maximum allowable
concentrations of International Maritime Organization Resolution MSC
61(67) Part 2.
2.04 FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEMS
A. Fire-Rated Board: Structural-grade, press-molded, xonolite calcium silicate, fireproofing

board suitable for operating temperatures up to 1700 deg F (927 deg C). Comply with
ASTM C 656, Type II, Grade 6. tested and certified to provide a 2-hour fire rating by a
NRTL acceptable to authority having jurisdiction.
B. Fire-Rated Blanket: High-temperature, flexible, blanket insulation with FSK jacket that is
tested and certified to provide a 2-hour fire rating by a NRTL acceptable to authority
2.05 INSULATING CEMENTS
A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.
B. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 196.
C. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with

ASTM C 449/C 449M.
2.06 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for
bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Calcium Silicate Adhesive: Fibrous, sodium-silicate-based adhesive with a service

temperature range of 50 to 800 deg F (10 to 427 deg C).
C. Cellular-Glass, Phenolic, Polyisocyanurate, and Polystyrene Adhesive: Solvent-based

resin adhesive, with a service temperature range of minus 75 to plus 300 deg F (minus
59 to plus 149 deg C).
D. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II,
Class I. Insulation Adhesive & tape: As per manufacturer’s recommendation
E. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
F. Polystyrene Adhesive: Solvent- or water-based, synthetic resin adhesive with a service

temperature range of minus 20 to plus 140 deg F (29 to plus 60 deg C).
G. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C,
Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
H. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.
I. Physically crosslinked adhesive: shall be suitable for indoor and outdoor use in high
humidity envinronments and shall meet Class 0 requirements when tested for fire
performance to BS 476 Part 6 and Part 7.
2.07 LAGGING ADHESIVE
A. Adhesive shall be a flexible, fire resistive compound suitable for vapour sealing
insulated ducts and pipes.
B. Adhesive shall be suitable for indoor and outdoor use and in high humidity
environments.
C. Water vapour permeance shall not exceed 0.05 perms at 0.030-inch dry film thickness
when tested in compliance with ASTMF 1249.
D. When tested for surface burning characteristics in compliance with ASTM E84, flame
spread index shall be less than 25 and smoke developed index less than 50.
E. Adhesive shall be UL classified and shall meet or exceed the requirements of NFPA
90A and 90 B 25/50.
2.08 FUNGICIDAL PROTECTIVE COATINGS
A. Fungicidal protective coatings shall be applied over external surfaces of chilled water
pipes and interior and exterior surfaces of ductwork.
B. Coating shall be a polyacrylate copolymer emulsion specially formulated for long term
fungicidal activity with no loss of activity on aging. It shall prevent the spread of molds
and odour causing bacteria on the applied surface.
C. Coating shall meet the requirements of NFPA 90A and 90B.
2.09 MASTICS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply
with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.
B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below
ambient services.
1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm (0.009 metric
perm) at 43-mil (1.09-mm) dry film thickness.
2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 29 to plus 82
deg C).
3. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight.
4. Color: White.
C. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.
1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm (0.03 metric perm) at 35-mil
(0.9-mm) dry film thickness.
2. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F (Minus 18 to plus 82 deg C).
4. Color: White.
D. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below ambient
services.
1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm (0.033 metric perm) at 30-
mil (0.8-mm) dry film thickness.
deg C).
4. Color: White.
E. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient
services.
1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 3 perms (2 metric perms) at 0.0625-
inch (1.6-mm) dry film thickness.
deg C).
3. Solids Content: 63 percent by volume and 73 percent by weight.
4. Color: White.
2.10 SEALANTS
A. Joint Sealants:
1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
2. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.
deg C).
4. Color: White or gray.
B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:

2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
deg C).
4. Color: Aluminum.
C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:
2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
deg C).
4. Color: White.
2.11 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications.
When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive
covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.
4. FSP Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with polyethylene
backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.
5. PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4-mil- (0.10-mm-) thick, white PVDC
biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.02 perms (0.013 metric
perms) when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame-spread index of 5
and a smoke-developed index of 20 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
6. PVDC Jacket for Outdoor Applications: 6-mil- (0.15-mm-) thick, white PVDC
biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.01 perms (0.007 metric
perms) when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame-spread index of 5
and a smoke-developed index of 25 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
7. PVDC-SSL Jacket: PVDC jacket with a self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-
based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip.
8. Vinyl Jacket: White vinyl with a permeance of 1.3 perms (0.86 metric perms)
when tested according to ASTM E 96, Procedure A, and complying with
NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.
2.12 FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH
A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric for Pipe Insulation: Approximately 2 oz./sq. yd. (68 g/sq. m)
with a thread count of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. inch (4 strands by 4 strands/sq. mm)
for covering pipe and pipe fittings.
B. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric for Duct and Equipment Insulation: Approximately 6 oz./sq.
yd. (203 g/sq. m) with a thread count of 5 strands by 5 strands/sq. inch (2 strands by 2
strands/sq. mm) for covering equipment.
C. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. (34 g/sq. m) with a thread count of
10 strands by 10 strands/sq. inch (4 strands by 4 strands/sq. mm), in a Leno weave, for
duct, equipment, and pipe.
2.13 FIELD-APPLIED CLOTHS
A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I, plain weave, and
presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd. (271 g/sq. m).
2.14 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing.
C. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784,

Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and
forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.
1. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.
2. Color: Color-code jackets based on system.
3. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field
fabricate.
a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves,
flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical
joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories.
4. Factory-fabricated tank heads and tank side panels.
D. Aluminum Jacket:
1. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005,
3105 or 5005, Temper H-14.
a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing.
b. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.
c. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 3-mil- (0.075-mm-) thick, heat-
bonded polyethylene and kraft paper.
d. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- (0.075-mm-) thick, heat-
bonded polyethylene and kraft paper.
e. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:
a) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.
b) Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-
radius elbows.
c) Tee covers.
d) Flange and union covers.
e) End caps.
f) Beveled collars.
g) Valve covers.
h) Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers
are not available.
E. Underground Direct-Buried Jacket: 125-mil- (3.2-mm-) thick vapor barrier and

waterproofing membrane consisting of a rubberized bituminous resin reinforced with a
woven-glass fiber or polyester scrim and laminated aluminum foil.
2.15 TAPES
A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic
adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.
1. Width: 3 inches (75 mm).
2. Thickness: 11.5 mils (0.29 mm).
3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch (1.0 N/mm) in width.
4. Elongation: 2 percent.
5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch (7.2 N/mm) in width.
6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic
adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136.
6. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
C. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.

D. Aluminum-FSK Tapes: Aluminum FSK Tapes to be used with glass wool insulation
having FSK/FRK facing. Plain Aluminum Foil Tape should be used with FSK/FRK faced
glasswool insulation. The adhesive used shall be acrylic adhesive and thickness
excluding substrate shall not be less than 195 micron. Temperature resistance to be
from 30 deg F to 250 deg F and peel adhesion not to be lower than 83 oz/inch width.
Tensile strength not be lower than 22 lbs/inch width and rolling tack to be 7-7/8” or
better with a 7/16” ball. Tapes used should not be lower than 3 inch (72 mm) width.
Confirms BS 476 Part 6, Part 7 with fire propagation Index, I=1.5. Water Vapor
Transmission value 0.304 g/h/m2 as per ASTM E 96 standards. Average Tensile
Strength of 16.17 N/mm2 and Elongation 11.49% as per ASTM D 638:03 standards.
Global Warming Potential value 0 and Ozone Depletion Potential value 5.
E. Alum Glass Cloth Tape: Alum glass Cloth Tape to be used with Glass wool insulation
having a similar facing. Aluminum Foil Thickness to be minimum of 7 micron and Alum-
Glass Cloth backing to be a minimum of 120 micron. Peel Adhesion to be 25 N/25 mm
or better, and rolling tack to be 20 cm for a 11 mm ball or better. Service temperature to
be 20 deg C or better. Confirms BS 476 Part 6 and Part 7, Class O. Fungal Resistance
rating of 2 as per ASTM G 21-96. Average Tensile Strength of 47 kgf/25mm width as
per ASTM D 638 standards. Global Warming Potential value 0 and Ozone Depletion
Potential value 5.
2.16 SECUREMENTS
A. Bands:
1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316;
0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick, 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide with wing or closed seal.
2. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted
to accept metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.
B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:

1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed
for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch- (3.5-mm-) diameter shank, length to
suit depth of insulation indicated.
2. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel
pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch- (3.5-mm-)
diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-
inch (38-mm) galvanized carbon-steel washer.
3. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate
welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness
indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place.
Comply with the following requirements:
a. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.76
mm) thick by 2 inches (50 mm) square.
b. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-
inch- (2.6-mm-) diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
c. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with
demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates
indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.
4. Nonmetal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate
fastened to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness
indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place.
Comply with the following requirements:
a. Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) thick by 1-1/2
inches (38 mm) in diameter.
b. Spindle: Nylon, 0.106-inch- (2.6-mm-) diameter shank, length to suit depth
of insulation indicated, up to 2-1/2 inches (63 mm).
c. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with
demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates
indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.
5. Self-Sticking-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle
that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position
indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following
requirements:
a. Baseplate: Galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) thick by 2
inches (50 mm) square.
b. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-
inch- (2.6-mm-) diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
c. Adhesive-backed base with a peel-off protective cover.
6. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-
(0.41-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to
hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in
diameter.
a. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel
insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.
7. Nonmetal Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from
0.016-inch- (0.41-mm-) thick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to
hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in
diameter.
C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) wide,

stainless steel or Monel.
D. Wire: 0.062-inch (1.6-mm) soft-annealed, galvanized steel.
2.17 CORNER ANGLES
A. Stainless-Steel Corner Angles: 0.024 inch (0.61 mm) thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch (25 by
25 mm), stainless steel according to ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or
316.
2.18 APPLICATION
A. Ductwork Insulation
1. Concealed supply, return, fresh air and extract air ducts- Fibre Glass
a. Unless otherwise indicated insulate all ductwork with 25 mm thick, 24
Kg/M3 density aluminium foil faced fibreglass duct insulation. Fasten the
insulation with adhesive on 200 to 250 mm centres. Butt all joints tightly
and seal all breaks and joints by adhering Aluminium foil vapour barrier
tape or sheet with a fire-retardant adhesive.
b. Insulate flexible connections and connections to diffusers with 25 mm
thick, 24 Kg/M3 density reinforced aluminium foil faced, flame resistant
flexible fiberglass insulation. Overlap onto adjacent insulation and seal
with adhesive duct tape to give good closure.
c. Where ductwork is installed in ceiling voids and masonry shafts, which are
not used as return air plenums insulate with 50mm thick, 48 Kg/M3
density aluminium foil faced rigid fibreglass duct insulation.
d. Finish all duct insulation with a 20x20 (thread/inch) woven glass cloth
cover adhered between two coats of fire resistant fungicidal protective
lagging adhesive.
2. Exposed supply return and extract air ducts- Fibre Glass

a. For ducts exposed inside conditioned spaces, insulate as described above
for concealed air ducts using 25mm thick aluminium foil faced fiberglass
boards with density 48 kg/M3.
b. Then apply a 20 x 20 (thread/inch) woven glass cloth cover adhered
between two coats of fire resistant fungicidal protective lagging adhesive.
c. Exposed ductwork within conditioned areas shall be clad with plain
aluminium sheet 0.9mm or thicker.
d. For ducts exposed in non-air-conditioned areas, insulate using the method
described for concealed ducts, but using insulation with a minimum
thickness of 50 mm, 48 Kg/M3 density rigid fiberglass insulation. Then
apply a 20x20 (thread/inch) woven glass cloth cover adhered between
two coats of fire resistant fungicidal protective lagging adhesive. Then
cover with plain sheet Aluminium, 0.7 mm or thicker.
e. For AC ducts exposed to sun light, insulate using the method described for
concealed ducts, but using insulation with a minimum thickness of 75 mm,
48 Kg/M3 density rigid fiberglass insulation. Then apply a 20x20
(thread/inch) woven glass cloth cover adhered between two coats of fire
resistant fungicidal protective lagging adhesive.
f. All ductwork exposed externally to the building, installed on roof and within
plant rooms is to be clad with plain aluminium, 0.7 mm or thicker.
Where ducts penetrate the building shell, the duct shall be flashed and
waterproofed before any insulation is applied.
3. Concealed Supply, Return, Fresh Air and Extract air ducts- Closed Cell
Elastomeric rubber
a. Insulate all GI rectangular supply, return, fresh air and extract air ductwork
within air-conditioned areas with 13mm thick closed cell elastomeric foam
sheets with a density of 50±10kg/m3 .
b. The ductwork within non-air-conditioned areas shall be insulated with 25
mm thick, 50±10kg/m3 density closed cell elastomeric rubber insulation.
c. Insulate flexible connections and connections to diffusers with 25 mm
thick, 24 Kg/M3 density reinforced aluminum foil faced, flame resistant
flexible fiberglass insulation. Overlap onto adjacent insulation and seal
with adhesive duct tape to give good closure.
d. Extract duct from commercial kitchen hoods shall be insulated with 50mm
thick, 48 Kg/m3rockwool insulation with aluminium foil finish.
4. Exposed supply, return, fresh air and extract air ducts- Closed Cell Elastomeric
rubber
a. For ductwork exposed in non-air-conditioned areas, insulate using 25 mm
closed cell elastomeric foam sheets .
b. For ductwork exposed directly to sun light, insulate with 32 mm thick,
50±10kg/m3 closed cell elastomeric rubber insulation sheets withUV
resistant cladding.
c. All ductwork in exposed areas (at roof, in car parking areas and
mechanical rooms) shall be clad with aluminium plain sheet of 0.7 mm
thickness. The cladding in mechanical rooms shall be up to 2.5 m from
finish floor level.
d. Where ducts penetrate the building shell, the duct shall be flashed and
waterproofed before any insulation is applied.
B. Concealed Supply, Return, Fresh Air and Extract air ducts - Physically crosslinked
polyolefin foam:
1. Building Internal Areas
Supply, return and extract air ducts for all ductwork shall be insulated with
physically cross-linked polyolefin foam with factory applied reinforced aluminium
foil. Insulation shall have the following specifications:
a. Physically cross-linked, closed cell polyolefin foam with factory applied
reinforced aluminium foil and factory applied acrylic adhesive backing.
b. Exceed the minimum thickness to prevent condensation.
c. Density: 25 kg/m3 (foam core only).
d. Thermal Conductivity (ASTM C518): Maximum 0.032 W/m.°K at mean
temperature 23°C.
e. Water absorption: <0.2 % v/v.
f. Water Vapour permeability (ASTM E96): Maximum 2.3 x 10-15 kg/Pa.s.m,
(µ>80,000).
g. Service Temperature Range: - 80°C ~ +80°C (adhesive backing).
h. Zero mould growth when tested to ASTM G21.
i. Fire Rating:
1) Class 0 to BS476 Parts 6 and 7.
2) Euroclass B-S2,d0 classification according to EN 13501Part 1.
3) Complies with NFPA 90A and B (ASTM E84 25/50 rating).
4) Complies with FM 4924 fire performance criteria and “FM Approved”
by FM Approvals certification body.
j. Smoke Density and Toxicity:
1) Complies with the requirements of International Maritime
Organization Resolution MSC 61(67) Part 2.
2) Dm<200 (ISO 5659 Part 2 gas analysis); combustion gases CO, HCl,
HF, NOx, HBr, HCN and SO2 to be within the maximum allowable
concentrations of International Maritime Organization Resolution
MSC 61(67) Part 2.
k. Schedule of thicknesses (must exceed minimum thickness to prevent
condensation):
1) Conditioned spaces: minimum 12mm.
2) Unconditioned spaces, shafts: minimum 15mm.
3) Plant rooms: minimum 20mm.
l. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for installing insulation around
ductwork and fittings.
2. Exposed supply, return, fresh air and extract ducts- Physically Crosslinked
Polyolefin Foam.
3. Supply, return and extract air ducts for all ductwork shall be insulated with
physically cross-linked polyolefin foam with factory applied reinforced UV and
puncture resistant aluminium foil. Insulation shall have the following
specifications:

reinforced UV and puncture resistant aluminium foil and factory applied
acrylic adhesive backing.
temperature 23oC.
(µ>40,000).
g. UV Resistance (ISO 4892-3): No change in performance or appearance
after 3000 hours QUV exposure.
h. Puncture Resistance (ASTM D4833): > 400 N.
i. Service Temperature Range: - 80°C ~ +80°C (adhesive backing).
j. Zero mould growth when tested to ASTM G21.
k. Fire Rating:
l. Schedule of thicknesses (must exceed minimum thickness to prevent
condensation):
1) Conditioned spaces: minimum 12mm.
2) Unconditioned spaces, shafts: minimum 15mm.
3) Plant rooms: Minimum 20mm.
4) Exposed to Sun: Minimum 32mm.
m. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for installing insulation around
ductwork and fittings.
C. Chilled Water Pipework Insulation -Fibre Glass (If Applicable)

1. Chilled water pipes other than preinsulated pipes shall be generally insulated
with rigid sections of aluminium foil faced glass fibre insulation with density of 65
Kg/m3 having a thermal conductivity factor of 0.034 w/m.k at 10 deg. C.
2. Internal chilled water pipes (inside buildings) shall be insulated by 40mm thick
rigid insulation for pipes upto 40mm dia and 50mm for pipe sizes 50mm dia and
above.
3. External chilled water pipes (on roofs and in chiller yard) shall be insulated by
50mm thick rigid insulation for pipe sizes up to 40 mm dia and 75 mm for for
50mm dia and above.
4. External Chilled water pipes exposed to Sun shall be insulated by 75mm thick
rigid insulation.
5. For both internal and external pipes the insulation shall be finished with a water
proof 20x20 (thread/inch) woven glass cloth cover painted with two coats of
approved anti fungal lagging adhesive.
6. Where insulated pipework is run on roof, in plant room and chillers yard it shall
be clad using an outer covering of plain aluminium sheet of 0.7mm or thicker.
7. Where exposed, insulated pipework runs through occupied or public areas it shall
be clad using an outer covering of plain aluminium sheet of 0.7 mm or thicker.
D. Chilled Water Pipework insulation- Closed Cell Elastomeric Rubber (If Applicable)
1. The following pipes shall be insulated with closed cell elastomeric rubber
insulation with following thickness:
a. Chilled Water Pipes in Conditioned Areas:
1) Insulate with closed cell elastomeric foam sheet. Thickness of
insulation shall be 19mm with 50±10kg/m3 density for pipes up to
50mm dia.
2) Pipes 65mm dia & bigger., thickness of insulation shall be 25mm.
b. Chilled Water pipes at Roof, Riser shafts and in Plant Room Areas:
1) Insulate with closed cell elastomeric foam rubber sheet. Thickness of
insulation shall be 32mm with 50±10 kg/m3 density for pipes up to
50mm.
2) Apply 0.7mm aluminium cladding plain sheet on top of insulation.
Roof insulation shall be UV resistant.
3) Pipes 65mm dia and above, thickness of insulation shall be 32mm.
4) Apply 0.7mm aluminium cladding plain sheet on top of insulation.
E. Chilled Water Pipework, Hot, Cold; Refrigerant insulation- Physically crosslinked

polyolefin foam insulation. (If Applicable)
1. Building Internal areas
2. Water pipes, other than pre-insulated pipes and hot water pipes embedded in
block walls, shall be insulated with physically cross-linked polyolefin foam with
factory applied reinforced aluminium foil. Insulation shall have the following
specifications:
reinforced aluminium foil.
temperature 23°C.
(µ>80,000).
g. Service Temperature Range: - 80°C ~ +100°C.
h. Zero mould growth when tested to ASTM G21.
i. Fire Rating:
j. Smoke Density and Toxicity:
1) Complies with the requirements of International Maritime
Organization Resolution MSC 61(67) Part 2.
2) Dm<200 (ISO 5659 Part 2 gas analysis); combustion gases CO, HCl,
HF, NOx, HBr, HCN and SO2 to be within the maximum allowable
concentrations of International Maritime Organization Resolution
MSC 61(67) Part 2.
k. Schedule of thicknesses (must exceed minimum thickness to prevent
condensation):
1) Chilled water (conditioned spaces): minimum 20mm.
2) Chilled water (unconditioned spaces, shafts, plant rooms): minimum
20mm.
F. External to the Building, Installed on Roof

1. Water pipes other than pre-insulated pipes shall be insulated with physically
cross-linked polyolefin foam with factory applied reinforced UV and puncture
resistant aluminium foil. Insulation shall have the following specifications:
reinforced UV and puncture resistant aluminium foil.
temperature 23oC.
(µ>40,000).
g. UV Resistance (ISO 4892-3): No change in performance or appearance
after 3000 hours QUV exposure.
h. Puncture Resistance (ASTM D4833): > 400 N.
i. Service Temperature Range: - 80°C ~ +100°C.
j. Zero mould growth when tested to ASTM G21.
k. Fire Rating:
3) Complies with FM 4924 fire performance criteria and “FM Approved”
by FM Approvals certification body.
l. Schedule of thicknesses (must exceed minimum thickness to prevent
condensation):
1) Chilled water: minimum 25mm.
2) Chilled water exposed to Sun: 32mm.
m. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for installing insulation around
pipework and fittings
G. Refrigerant pipework insulation

1. Refrigerant pipework shall be insulated with closed cell synthetic rubber foam
insulation, 19mm thick and finished as described for chilled water pipes.
2. For exposed pipes at roof and in unconditioned areas insulate with 25 mm
thickness UV resistant insulation and apply 0.7mm aluminium cladding plain
sheet or approved equal as per the recommendation from the manufacturer.
H. Condensate drain pipework (If Applicable)

1. Condensate drain PipeWorks shall be insulated with 13mm thick, 24 kg/M3
density closed cell elastomeric rubber sheet .
2. For exposed pipes at roof and in unconditioned areas insulate with 25 mm
thickness UV resistant insulation and apply 0.7mm aluminium cladding plain
sheet.
I. Diesel Engine Exhaust Pipe

1. Diesel engine exhaust pipe and muffler shall be insulated with 100mm thick
Rockwool insulation.
J. Internal Acoustic Lining

1. Supply, return and extract air ducts for all ductwork shall be insulated with
minimum 15mm thick open cell rubber insulation. Insulation shall have the
following specifications:
a. Open cell rubber insulation with self adhesive and inbuilt additive like
microban (EPA certified) to resist the growth of any microorganism.
b. Density: 140±10kg/m3 (foam core only).
c. Thermal Conductivity (ASTM C518): Maximum 0.045 W/m.°K at mean
temperature 23oC.
d. Service Temperature Range: - 80°C ~ +80°C (adhesive backing).
f. Zero mould growth when tested to ASTM G21.
g. Noise Reduction Coefficient 0.54 (ISO 354).
h. Fire Rating:
1) Class 0 to BS476 Parts 6 and 7. (OR) Class 1 to BS 476 part 7

i.
Ensure that the substrate surface is clean, dry and at ambient temperature
prior to installation.
j. Seal all joints with specified reinforced aluminium foil tape.
Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for installing insulation around ductwork and fittings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and
other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free
of defects.
2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials
that will adversely affect insulation application.
B. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in
contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
C. All material delivered to site shall be new and fully dried out and so maintained
throughout the progress of the works.
D. All insulating materials shall be stored in storage sheds, and in accordance with the
Manufacturer's recommendations.
E. In order to ensure that the insulation applied is in all respects in accordance with the
specification, sections shall, as required by the Consultant, be cut from the finished
insulation.
F. The Contractor is to allow in his price for the removal and replacement of two sections of
each type of insulation.
G. If, however, defects are revealed, further sections shall be cut out for inspection, and all
cutout sections shall be replaced at no cost to the Contract.
H. If further defects are revealed then the Consultant shall have the right, when in his
opinion it is necessary, to issue instructions for any part or the whole of the insulation to
be removed and replaced. The replacement with new insulation shall be to the
satisfaction of the Consultant and the cutting out and replacing shall be at no cost to the
Contract.
I. Particular attention shall be paid to the finished appearance of all thermal insulation
which must present a neat and symmetrical appearance running true in line with pipe
layouts, etc.
J. Any rough, irregular and badly finished surfaces shall be stripped down and re-insulated
to the Consultant's satisfaction.
K. In certain cases, the type of insulation specified will require a painted finish, in addition
to identifying bands and any signs which are to be applied.
L. All systems are to have been tested and approved by the Consultant prior to installation
of insulation.
M. Manufacturer shall have production process control in accordance with ISO 9002 / UNI
EN 29002 or any other equivalent standard.
N. In case of heavy ducts and pipes wherein the supports are fixed directly on ducts / pipes
the supports shall be also insulated with a thermal break / barrier.
O. The insulation thickness for pipes and ducts shall be verified by the specialist supplier/
manufacturer to confirm no condensation and temperature loss.
3.03 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even
surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping
including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses
required for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in
insulation system schedules.
C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service.
Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in
either wet or dry state.
D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and
specialties.
G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints
with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at
hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on
anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to
structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier
mastic.
3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal
insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended
by insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install
shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger,
support, and shield.
K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate

and wet and dry film thicknesses.
L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.
2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide strips, of same material
as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples
along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches (100 mm) o.c.
3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Install
insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to
receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at
[2 inches (50 mm)] [4 inches (100 mm)] o.c.
a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material
manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.
5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and
joints and at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its
nominal thickness.
N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and
cracking due to thermal movement.
O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged
areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches (100 mm) beyond damaged areas. Adhere,
staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.
P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices.
2. Testing agency labels and stamps.
3. Nameplates and data plates.
4. Manholes.
5. Handholes.
6. Cleanouts.
3.04 PENETRATIONS
A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof

penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof
surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor
insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor
insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches (50
mm) below top of roof flashing.
4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation
flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation

continuously through wall penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall
surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor
insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor
insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing
at least 2 inches (50 mm).
4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire
Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation

continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. Terminate insulation
at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate
damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2
inches (50 mm).
1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for
Firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.
F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Duct: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations that are not fire
rated. For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire
damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match
adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2
inches (50 mm).
2. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.
3. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in
Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
3.05 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION (If Applicable)
A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to
eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus
twice the thickness of pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer
circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet
insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.
4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface
being insulated.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.

2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface
being insulated.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation
when available.
2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and
sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing
and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.
3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's
recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of
air to surface being insulated.
3.06 FIBERGLASS / MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION (If Applicable)
A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and
tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and
protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure
laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not
staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as
recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier
mastic and flashing sealant.

1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket
insulation.
4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap
seams at least 1 inch (25 mm), and seal joints with flashing sealant.
E. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe
insulation when available.
2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered
sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation.
Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.
F. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe
insulation when available.
2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe
insulation to valve body.
3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation
without disturbing insulation.
G. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and
insulation pins.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per
unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head,
capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides
of vertical ducts as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches (450 mm) and smaller, place
pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches (75 mm)
maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches (450 mm), place pins
16 inches (400 mm) o.c. each way, and 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from
insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against
surface at cross bracing.
c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and
plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.
f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend
parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with
tape matching insulation facing.
4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a
continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams
and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches (50 mm) from 1 edge and 1
end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-
inch (13-mm) outward-clinching staples, 1 inch (25 mm) o.c. Install vapor barrier
consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and
sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.
a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain
vapor-barrier seal.
b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F (10
deg C) at 18-foot (5.5-m) intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-
barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt
end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface
to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less
5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) on longitudinal seams
and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18
inches (450 mm) o.c.
6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation
section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows
with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation
surface with 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide strips of same material used to insulate
duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins
spaced 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.
H. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and
insulation pins.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per
unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head,
capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides
of vertical ducts as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches (450 mm) and smaller, place pins
along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches (75 mm) maximum
from insulation end joints, and 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches (450 mm), space pins
16 inches (400 mm) o.c. each way, and 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from
insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against
surface at cross bracing.
c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and
plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend
parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape
matching insulation facing.
4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a
continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams
and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches (50 mm) from 1 edge and 1
end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-
inch (13-mm) outward-clinching staples, 1 inch (25 mm) o.c. Install vapor barrier
consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and
sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.
a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain
vapor-barrier seal.
b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F
(10 deg C) at 18-foot (5.5-m) intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-
barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along
butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and
surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the insulation thickness
but not less than 3 inches (75 mm).
5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation
section for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as
possible to outside and inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and
flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation
surface with 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide strips of same material used to insulate
duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins
spaced 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.
3.07 PHENOLIC INSULATION INSTALLATION (If Applicable)
A. General Installation Requirements:

1. Secure single-layer insulation with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch (300-mm)
intervals and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.
2. Install 2-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches
(75 mm). Secure inner layer with 0.062-inch (1.6-mm) wire spaced at 12-inch
(300-mm) intervals. Secure outer layer with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch
(300-mm) intervals.
B. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands
without deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and
protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient services, secure
laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders on below ambient
services, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive
as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier
mastic and flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of block
insulation of same material and thickness as pipe insulation.
D. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed insulation sections of same material as straight segments of
pipe insulation. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

3.08 POLYSTYRENE INSULATION INSTALLATION (If Applicable)
A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of insulation with tape or bands and tighten bands without
deforming insulation materials. Orient longitudinal joints between half sections in
3 and 9 o'clock positions on the pipe.
2. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor barriers, do not staple
longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive or tape as
recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier
mastic.
3. All insulation shall be tightly butted and free of voids and gaps at all joints. Vapor
barrier must be continuous. Before installing jacket material, install vapor-barrier
system.

2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, same
thickness of adjacent pipe insulation, not to exceed 1-1/2-inch (38-mm)
thickness.
circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of polystyrene
block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed section of polystyrene insulation to valve body.
3.09 FIELD APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION (If Applicable)
A. Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation
with factory-applied jackets.
1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at seams
and joints.
2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick coats of lagging
adhesive.
3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.
B. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.
2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.
3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- (75-
mm-) wide joint strips at end joints.
5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed
insulation with vapor-barrier mastic.
C. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at longitudinal
seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end
joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure
jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. and at end joints.
3.10 FIRE RATED INSULATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Where fire-rated insulation system is indicated, secure system to ducts and duct
hangers and supports to maintain a continuous fire rating.
B. Insulate duct access panels and doors to achieve same fire rating as duct.
C. Install firestopping at penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Fire-stop systems are

specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
3.11 FINISHES
A. Duct, Equipment, and Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket
Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 09
painting Sections.
1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket
material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.
a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats
of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual
inspection of the completed Work.
D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Perform tests and inspections.
C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied
jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of
inspection shall be limited to one location (or as required by the engineer) for
each duct system defined in the "Duct Insulation Schedule, General" Article.
2. Inspect field-insulated equipment, randomly selected by Architect, by removing
field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation.
Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location (or as required by the
engineer) for each type of equipment defined in the "Equipment Insulation
Schedule" Article. For large equipment, remove only a portion adequate to
determine compliance.
3. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by
removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their
installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three (or as required by the
engineer) locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three
locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations of
welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of
flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule,
General" Article.
D. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals
noncompliance with requirements.
3.13 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:

1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.
2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air.
3. Indoor, concealed return located in nonconditioned space.
4. Indoor, exposed return located in nonconditioned space.
5. Indoor, concealed, Type I, commercial, kitchen hood exhaust.
6. Indoor, exposed, Type I, commercial, kitchen hood exhaust.
1. Indoor, concealed oven and warewash exhaust.
2. Indoor, exposed oven and warewash exhaust.
3. Outdoor, concealed supply and return.
4. Outdoor, exposed supply and return.
B. Items Not Insulated:

1. Fibrous-glass ducts.
2. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
3. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.
4. Factory-insulated plenums and casings.
5. Flexible connectors.
6. Vibration-control devices.
7. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.
3.14 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE (Fiberglass)
A. Thermal insulation shall be made of fiberglass or equivalent material with reinforced

aluminium foil external coating, factory applied with resin bonded internal layer to give
flat and resilient surface. The insulation for all ductwork exposed to outside and those in
plant rooms shall be rigid slab type and for the remaining ductwork flexible blanket type
shall be used.
B. The density of insulation shall be minimum 24 Kg/cubic meter for flexible blanket type
and 48 Kg/cubic meter for rigid type and thickness shall be as below:
1. Supply air duct in non-air conditioned areas - 50mm
2. Supply air duct in air conditioned areas - 25mm
3. Return air duct in non-air-conditioned areas - 25mm
4. Return air duct in air-conditioned areas - NIL
5. Fresh air duct in air-conditioned areas - 25mm
6. Supply and Return air ducts exposed to outside ambient temperature -75mm
C. Insulation shall be secured to duct work with 50x50mm G.I sheet metal strips of 22
gauge fixed to corners and tightened with wire at 150mm intervals. The strips may be
suitably grooved to take the wire fasteners. Transverse duct connections such as pocket
joints and flanges shall be additionally insulated with 100mm wide, 25mm thick
insulation and covered with 20mm wide, 8 oz. canvas equally overlapped on either side
and finally coated with 2 coats of approved paint.
D. All duct work exposed to outside, shall be covered with 0.7mm thick aluminium metal
jacketing (smooth finish) and shall be treated for waterproofing prior to cladding i.e. wrap
the insulation with 0.5mm thick polyethylene sheet and secure with adhesive. All duct
work insulation exposed to view shall be finished with 227 gm canvas finished with 2
coats of fire retardant and waterproof paint.
E. Internal duct lining for acoustic insulation where applicable shall not be less than 25mm
thick fiberglass mat faced, flexible blanket of fine fibers with securely bonded surface
mat coated with black neoprene or approved equal. Lining shall be applied with 100%
coverage of fire resistive approved adhesive compound and mechanical fastenings
according to the manufacturer's instructions. Acoustic lining shall be cleared 20cm on
each side of the duct heater where applicable. Duct lining density shall be 24 Kg/cubic
meter. Acoustic lining shall be treated against fungus growth. Increase duct sizes where
acoustic lining is used. Duct sizes shown on the drawings are inside clear dimensions.
3.15 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK INSULATION
A. General: Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written

instructions, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that
insulation serves its intended purpose.

B. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces.
C. Clean and dry ductwork prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure
complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered.
D. Maintain integrity of vapour barrier on ductwork insulation, and protect it to prevent

puncture and other damage.
E. Extend ductwork insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar
ductwork penetrations, except where otherwise indicated.
F. Fibrous Glass Duckwork: Do not insulate fibrous glass ductwork.
G. Lined Ductwork: Except as otherwise indicated. Omit insulation on ductwork where

internal insulation or sound absorbing linings have been installed
H. Ductwork Exposed to Weather: Protect outdoor insulation from weather by installing

outdoor protective finish or jacketing as Specified elsewhere.
I. Corner Angles: Install corner angles on external corners of insulation on ductwork in

exposed finished spaces before covering with jacketing.
3.16 PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT
A. Protection: Provide protection to the insulation work during remainder of construction

period, to avoid damage and deterioration.
B. Replace damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units with
vapour barrier damage and moisture saturated units.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 0800
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes requirements for commissioning the HVAC system and its
subsystems and equipment.

1. Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for general
requirements for commissioning processes that apply to this Section.
2. Section 23 0593 – Testing, Adjusting & Balancing for HVAC.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Architect: Includes Architect identified in the Contract for Construction between Owner
and Contractor, plus consultant/design professionals responsible for design of HVAC,
electrical, communications, controls for HVAC systems, and other related systems.
B. BoD: Basis of Design.
C. BoD-HVAC: HVAC systems basis of design.
D. TAB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.
1.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. The following responsibilities are in addition to those specified in Division 01 Section

"General Commissioning Requirements.":
1. Attend procedures meeting for TAB Work.
2. Certify that TAB Work is complete.
3. Attend TAB verification testing.
4. Provide measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data, and data
acquisition equipment to record data for the complete range of testing for the
required test period.
5. Review control designs for compliance with the OPR and BoD, controllability with
respect to actual equipment to be installed, and recommend adjustments to
control designs and sequence of operation descriptions.
6. Review the Contract Documents before developing TAB procedures.
a. Verify the following:
1) Accessibility of equipment and components required for TAB Work.
2) Adequate number and placement of duct balancing dampers to
allow proper balancing while minimizing sound levels in occupied
spaces.
KEO/19-3262-0000 23 0800/1 Commissioning Of Hvac
3) Adequate number and placement of balancing valves to allow
proper balancing and recording of water flow.
4) Adequate number and placement of test ports and test
instrumentation to allow reading and compilation of system and
equipment performance data needed to conduct both TAB and
commissioning testing.
5) Air and water flow rates have been specified and compared to
central equipment output capacities.
1.04 COMMISSIONING DOCUMENTATION
A. The following are in addition to documentation specified in Division 01 Section "General

Commissioning Requirements."
B. Test Checklists: Contractor shall develop test checklists for HVAC systems,
subsystems, and equipment, including interfaces and interlocks with other systems.
Contractor shall prepare separate checklists for each mode of operation and provide
space to indicate whether the mode under test responded as required. In addition to the
requirements specified in Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements,"
checklists shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Calibration of sensors and sensor function.
2. Testing conditions under which test was conducted, including (as applicable)
ambient conditions, set points, override conditions, and status and operating
conditions that impact the results of test.
3. Control sequences for HVAC systems.
4. Strength of control signal for each set point at specified conditions.
5. Responses to control signals at specified conditions.
6. Sequence of response(s) to control signals at specified conditions.
7. Electrical demand or power input at specified conditions.
8. Power quality and related measurements.
9. Expected performance of systems, and equipment at each step of test.
10. Narrative description of observed performance of systems, and equipment.
Notation to indicate whether the observed performance at each step meets the
expected results.
11. Interaction of auxiliary equipment.
12. Issues log.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. The following submittals are in addition to those specified in Division 01 Section

"General Commissioning Requirements."
B. Testing Procedures: Contractor shall submit detailed testing plan, procedures, and
checklists for each series of tests. Submittals shall include samples of data reporting
sheets that will be part of the reports.
C. Certificate of Readiness: Contractor shall compile certificates of readiness certifying that

systems, equipment, and associated controls are ready for testing.
D. Certificate of Completion of Installation, Prestart, and Startup: Contractor shall certify

that installation, prestart, and startup activities have been completed. Certification shall
include completed checklists as specified in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and
Balancing for HVAC."
E. Certified Pipe Cleaning and Flushing Report: Contractor shall certify that pipe cleaning,
flushing, hydrostatic testing, and chemical treating have been completed (If applicable).
F. Test and Inspection Reports: Contractor shall compile and submit test and inspection
reports and certificates, and shall include them in systems manual and commissioning
report.
G. Corrective Action Documents: Contractor shall submit corrective action documents.
H. Certified TAB Reports: Contractor shall submit verified, certified TAB reports.
I. Local Codes, Ordinances, Rules and Regulations. Refer to section 23 0100
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 TESTING PREPARATION (As Applicable)
A. Prerequisites for Testing:

1. Certify that HVAC systems and equipment have been completed, calibrated, and
started; are operating according to the BoD and Contract Documents; and that
Certificates of Readiness are signed and submitted.
2. Certify that HVAC instrumentation and control systems have been completed and
calibrated; are operating according to the BoD and Contract Documents; and that
pretest set points have been recorded.
3. Certify that TAB procedures have been completed, and that TAB reports have
been submitted, discrepancies corrected, and corrective work approved.
4. Test systems performance after approval of test checklists for systems and
equipment.
5. Set systems and equipment into operating mode to be tested (e.g., normal shut
down, normal auto position, normal manual position, unoccupied cycle,
emergency power, and alarm conditions).
6. Verify each operating cycle after it has been running for a specified period and is
operating in a steady-state condition.
7. Inspect and verify the position of each device and interlock identified on
checklists. Sign off each item as acceptable, or failed. Repeat this test for each
operating cycle that applies to system being tested.
8. Check safety cutouts, alarms, and interlocks with smoke control and life-safety
systems during each mode of operation.
9. Annotate checklist or data sheet when a deficiency is observed.
10. Verify equipment interface with monitoring and control system and TAB criteria;
include the following:
a. Supply and return flow rates for VAV and constant volume systems in
each operational mode.
b. Operation of terminal units in both heating and cooling cycles.
c. Minimum outdoor-air intake in each operational mode and at minimum
and maximum airflows.
d. Building pressurization.
e. Total exhaust airflow and total outdoor-air intake.
f. Operation of indoor-air-quality monitoring systems.

11. Verify proper responses of monitoring and control system controllers and sensors
to include the following:
a. For each controller or sensor, record the indicated monitoring and control
system reading and the test instrument reading. If initial test indicates
that the test reading is outside of the control range of the installed device,
check calibration of the installed device and adjust as required. Retest
malfunctioning devices and record results on checklist or data sheet.
b. Report deficiencies and prepare an issues log entry.
12. Verify that HVAC equipment field quality-control testing has been completed and
approved. Contractor shall direct, witness, and document field quality-control
tests, inspections, and startup specified in individual Division 23 Sections.
B. Testing Instrumentation: Install measuring instruments and logging devices to record

test data for the required test period. Instrumentation shall monitor and record full range
of operating conditions and shall allow for calculation of total capacity of system for each
mode of operation. For individual room cooling tests, provide temporary heaters to
impose a cooling load indicated in BoD. Operational modes include the following:
1. Occupied and unoccupied.
2. Warm up and cool down.
3. Economizer cycle.
4. Emergency power supply.
5. Life-safety and safety systems.
6. Smoke control.
7. Fire safety.
8. Stair pressurization system.
9. Temporary upset of system operation.
10. Partial occupancy conditions.
11. Special cycles.
3.02 TAB VERIFICATION
A. TAB Preparation:
1. Contractor shall provide data required for "Pre-Field TAB Engineering Reports"
specified in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."
a. Contractor shall use this data to certify that prestart and startup activities
have been completed for systems and equipment installation.
B. Ductwork Air Leakage Testing:

1. Ductwork air leakage testing shall be performed according to Division 23 Section
"Metal Ducts.
2. On approval of preliminary ductwork air leakage testing report, the Contractor
shall coordinate verification testing of ductwork air leakage testing. Verification
testing shall include random retests of portions of duct section tests, reported in
preliminary ductwork air leakage testing report. The Contractor shall perform
tests using the same instrumentation (by model and serial number) as for original
testing.
C. Verification of Final TAB Report:

1. Contractor shall select, at random, 10 percent of report for field verification. The
Contractor shall use the same instruments (by model and serial number) that
were used when original data were collected.
2. Failure of an item is defined as follows:
a. For all readings other than sound, a deviation of more than 10 percent.

1) For sound pressure readings, a deviation of 3 dB. (Note:
Variations in background noise must be considered.)
3. Failure of more than 10 percent of selected items shall result in rejection of final
TAB report.
D. If deficiencies are identified during verification testing, Contractor shall take action to
remedy the deficiency. The Engineer shall review final tabulated checklists and data
sheets to determine if verification is complete and that system is operating according to
the Contract Documents.
E. The Engineer shall certify that TAB Work has been successfully completed.
3.03 TESTING (As Applicable)
A. Testing to be done in accordance with standards listed in the section.
B. Test systems and intersystem performance after test checklists for systems,
subsystems, and equipment have been approved.
C. Perform tests using design conditions whenever possible.

1. Simulate conditions by imposing an artificial load when it is not practical to test
under design conditions and when written approval for simulated conditions is
received from Engineer. Before simulating conditions, calibrate testing
instruments. Set and document simulated conditions and methods of simulation.
After tests, return settings to normal operating conditions.
2. Alter set points when simulating conditions is not practical and when written
approval is received from Engineer.
3. Alter sensor values with a signal generator when design or simulating conditions
and altering set points are not practical. Do not use sensor to act as signal
generator to simulate conditions or override values.
D. Scope of HVAC Contractor Testing:

1. Testing scope shall include entire HVAC installation, from central equipment for
heat generation and refrigeration through distribution systems to each
conditioned space. It shall include measuring capacities and effectiveness of
operational and control functions.
2. Test all operating modes, interlocks, control responses, responses to abnormal
or emergency conditions, and verify proper response of building automation
system controllers and sensors.
E. Detailed Testing Procedures: The Engineer with HVAC Contractor shall prepare
detailed testing plans, procedures, and checklists for HVAC systems and equipment.
F. Boiler Testing and Acceptance Procedures: Testing requirements are specified in

Division 23 boiler Sections. Engineer shall review and comment on submittals, test
data, inspector record, and boiler certification and shall compile information for inclusion
in systems manual.
G. HVAC Instrumentation and Control System Testing:

1. Field testing plans and testing requirements are specified in Division 23 Sections
"Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and "Sequence of Operation for HVAC
Controls".

H. Pipe cleaning, flushing, hydrostatic tests, and chemical treatment requirements are
specified in Division 23 piping Sections. The Contractor shall prepare pipe system
cleaning, flushing, and hydrostatic testing plan. Plan shall include the following:
1. Sequence of testing and testing procedures for each section of pipe to be tested,
identified by pipe zone or sector identification marker. Markers shall be keyed
Drawings for each pipe sector showing the physical location of each designated
pipe test section. Drawings keyed to pipe zones or sectors shall be formatted to
allow each section of piping to be physically located and identified when referred
to in pipe system cleaning, flushing, hydrostatic testing, and chemical treatment
plan.
2. Description of equipment for flushing operations.
3. Minimum flushing water velocity.
4. Tracking checklist for managing and ensuring that all pipe sections have been
cleaned, flushed, hydrostatically tested, and chemically treated.
I. Refrigeration and Heat-Generation Systems Testing: Contractor shall prepare a testing

plan to verify performance of boilers, chillers, cooling towers, refrigerant compressors
and condensers, heat pumps, and other refrigeration systems. Plan shall include the
following:
1. Sequence of testing and testing procedures for each item of equipment and
section of pipe to be tested, identified by identification marker. Markers shall be
keyed to Drawings showing the physical location of each item of equipment and
pipe test section. Drawings shall be formatted to allow each item of equipment
and section of piping to be physically located and identified when referred to in
the system testing plan.
tested.
J. HVAC Distribution System Testing: Contractor shall prepare a testing plan to verify
performance of air, steam, and hydronic distribution systems; special exhaust; and other
distribution systems. Include HVAC terminal equipment and unitary equipment. Plan
shall include the following:
1. Sequence of testing and testing procedures for each item of equipment and
section of pipe to be tested, identified by identification marker. Markers shall be
keyed to Drawings showing the physical location of each item of equipment and
pipe test section. Drawings shall be formatted to allow each item of equipment
and section of piping to be physically located and identified when referred to in
the system testing plan.
tested.
K. Vibration and Sound Tests: Contractor shall prepare testing plans to verify performance
of vibration isolation and seismic controls.
L. Deferred Testing:
1. If tests cannot be completed because of a deficiency outside the scope of the
HVAC system, the deficiency shall be documented and reported to Engineer.
Deficiencies shall be resolved and corrected by appropriate parties and test
rescheduled.
2. If the testing plan indicates specific seasonal testing, appropriate initial
performance tests shall be completed and documented and additional tests
scheduled.
M. Testing Reports:
1. Reports shall include measured data, data sheets, and a comprehensive
summary describing the operation of systems at the time of testing.
2. Include data sheets for each controller to verify proper operation of the control
system, the system it serves, the service it provides, and its location. For each
controller, provide space for recording its readout, the reading at the controller's
sensor(s), plus comments. Provide space for testing personnel to sign off on
each data sheet.
3. Prepare a preliminary test report. Deficiencies will be evaluated by Engineer to
determine corrective action. Deficiencies shall be corrected and test repeated.
END OF SECTION

SECCTION 23 0900
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including
control components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory-wired
controls.

1. Division 23 Section “Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping” for measuring
equipment that relates to this Section.
2. Division 23 Section “Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls” for
requirements that relate to this Section.
1.02 DISCRIPTION
A. Scope
1. The control system stated herein is intended to define functional requirements of
an acceptable system. Contractor shall, in his tender, highlight and allow for
alterations / modifications to the system or the system components; which in his
opinion are necessary to accomplish the purpose of maintaining predetermined
environmental conditions and other requirements at no additional cost.
Contractor shall not make any system modifications, including operating
parameters, control settings, etc. without prior written approval of the Client.
2. Supply and install a complete, state of the art, open architecture control system
based on true BACNET for the control, operation and monitoring of mechanical
and electrical systems in the Building. Provide all required services, materials
and equipment necessary for the successful operation of the entire control
system.
3. Provide the engineering, installation supervision and labor, calibration, software,
programming etc. necessary for a complete and fully operational control system.
4. Control system shall consist of, but not limited to the followings, sensors,
indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other
apparatus, accessories, and software connected to distributed controllers
operating in multiuser, multitasking environment
5. Refer only to the applicable clauses as per the project requirement.
B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere

1. Control sequences are specified in Automatic Control sequence” sections of
HVAC specifications.
2. Refer to other relevant sections of the HVAC specifications and manufacturers
manuals as applicable for installation of instrument wells, valve bodies and
dampers etc. in HVAC systems.
KEO/19-3262-0000 23 0900/1 Instrumentation And Control For Hvac

3. Refer to other relevant sections of plumbing, fire fighting specifications and
electrical and fire alarm specifications to understand scope of work.
4. Refer to schedule of points and system schematics to understand detailed scope
of work.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. DDC: Direct digital control.
B. I/O: Input/output.
C. Lon Works: A control network technology platform for designing and implementing
interoperable control devices and networks.
D. MS/TP: Master slave/token passing.
E. PC: Personal computer.
F. PID: Proportional plus integral plus derivative.
G. RTD: Resistance temperature detector.
1.04 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
A. Comply with the following performance requirements:

1. Graphic Display: Display graphic with minimum 20 dynamic points with current
data within 10 seconds.
2. Graphic Refresh: Update graphic with minimum 20 dynamic points with current
data within 8 seconds.
3. Object Command: Reaction time of less than two seconds between operator
command of a binary object and device reaction.
4. Object Scan: Transmit change of state and change of analog values to control
units within six seconds.
5. Alarm Response Time: Annunciate alarm within 45 seconds.
6. Program Execution Frequency: Run capability of applications as often as five
seconds, but selected consistent with mechanical process under control.
7. Performance: Programmable controllers shall execute DDC PID control loops,
and scan and update process values and outputs at least once per second.
8. Reporting Accuracy and Stability of Control: Report values and maintain
measured variables within tolerances as follows:
a. Water Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F (0.5 deg C).
b. Water Flow: Plus or minus 5 percent of full scale.
c. Water Pressure: Plus or minus 2 percent of full scale.
d. Space Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F (0.5 deg C).
e. Ducted Air Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F (0.5 deg C).
f. Outside Air Temperature: Plus or minus 2 deg F (1.0 deg C).
g. Dew Point Temperature: Plus or minus 3 deg F (1.5 deg C).
h. Temperature Differential: Plus or minus 0.25 deg F (0.15 deg C).
i. Relative Humidity: Plus or minus 5 percent.
j. Airflow (Pressurized Spaces): Plus or minus 3 percent of full scale.
k. Airflow (Measuring Stations): Plus or minus 5 percent of full scale.
l. Airflow (Terminal): Plus or minus 10 percent of full scale.
m. Air Pressure (Space): Plus or minus 0.01-inch wg (2.5 Pa).
n. Air Pressure (Ducts): Plus or minus 0.1-inch wg (25 Pa).
o. Carbon Monoxide: Plus or minus 5 percent of reading.
p. Carbon Dioxide: Plus or minus 50 ppm.
q. Electrical: Plus or minus 5 percent of reading.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer’s technical literature for each control device.
Indicate dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics,
finishes for materials, and installation and startup instructions for each type of product
indicated.
1. DDC System Hardware: Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity,
manufacturer, and model number. Include technical data for interface
equipment, control units, transducers/transmitters, sensors, actuators, valves,
relays/switches and control panels.
2. Controlled Systems: Instrumentation list with element name, type of device,
manufacturer, model number, and product data. Include written description of
sequence of operation including schematic diagram.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of
each field connection.
1. Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer, and model
number.
2. Schematic flow diagrams showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, and
control devices.
4. Details of control panel faces, including controls, instruments, and labeling.
5. Written description of sequence of operation.
6. Schedule of dampers including size, leakage, and flow characteristics.
7. Schedule of valves including flow characteristics.
8. DDC System Hardware:
a. Wiring diagrams for control units with termination numbers.
b. Schematic diagrams and floor plans for field sensors and control
hardware.
c. Schematic diagrams for control, communication, and power wiring.
9. Control System Software: List of data (connected and calculated) point
addresses, output schedule, and operator notations.
10. Controlled Systems:
a. Schematic diagrams of each controlled system with control points labeled
and control elements graphically shown, with wiring.
b. Scaled drawings showing mounting, routing, and wiring of elements
including bases and special construction.
c. Written description of sequence of operation including schematic diagram.
d. Points list.
C. Data Communications Protocol Certificates: Certify that each proposed DDC system
component complies with ASHRAE 135.
D. Data Communications Protocol Certificates: Certify that each proposed DDC system
component complies with LonWorks.
E. Samples for Verification: For each color required, of each type of thermostat or sensor
cover.
F. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: Include the following:
1. Software operating and upgrade manuals.
2. Program Software Backup: On a magnetic media or compact disc, complete with
data files.
3. Device address list.
4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.
5. Software license required by and installed for DDC control systems.
G. Software Upgrade Kit: For Owner to use in modifying software to suit future systems
revisions or monitoring and control revisions.
H. Field quality-control test reports.
I. Operation and Maintenance Data: For HVAC instrumentation and control system to
include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items
specified in Division 01 Section “Operation and Maintenance Data,” include the
following:
1. Interconnection wiring diagrams with identified and numbered system
components and devices.
2. Keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator
function.
3. Inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and
calibration tolerances.
4. Calibration records and list of set points.
A. Installer Qualifications: Automatic control system manufacturer’s authorized

representative who is trained and approved for installation of system components
required for this Project.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in BS

wiring regulation, NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
C. Comply with ASHRAE 135 for DDC system components.
A. Factory-Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this Section are

indicated to be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping of control devices to
equipment manufacturer.
B. System Software: Update to latest version of software at Project completion.
1.08 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate location for ease and maintenance of thermostats, humidistat and other
exposed control sensors with plans and room details before installation.
B. Coordinate equipment with Division 28 Section “Intrusion Detection” to achieve

compatibility with equipment that interfaces with that system and with building master
clock.
C. Coordinate equipment with Division 28 Section “Access Control” to achieve compatibility
with equipment that interfaces with that system.
D. Coordinate equipment with Division 27 Section “Clock Systems” to achieve compatibility

with equipment that interfaces with that system.
E. Coordinate equipment with Division 28 Section “PLC Electronic Detention Monitoring

and Control Systems” to achieve compatibility with equipment that interfaces with that
system.
F. Coordinate equipment with Division 26 Section “Network Lighting Controls” to achieve

compatibility with equipment that interfaces with that system.
G. Coordinate equipment with Division 28 Section “Fire Detection and Alarm” to achieve
compatibility with equipment that interfaces with that system.
H. Coordinate equipment with Division 26 Section “Electrical Power Monitoring and

Control” to achieve compatibility of communication interfaces.
I. Coordinate equipment with Division 26 Section “Panelboards” to achieve compatibility

with starter coils and annunciation devices.
J. Coordinate equipment with Division 26 Section “Motor-Control Centers” to achieve

compatibility with motor starters and annunciation devices.
K. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03
Section “Cast-in-Place Concrete.”
contents.
B. Spare Parts furnished under this clause shall not be used during the maintenance
period without the written permission of the owner (Contractor shall procure spare parts,
tools etc., fulfill his obligations to operate and maintain the system in the contract
period).
C. Spare parts as recommended by the manufacturer, including but not limited to the
following shall be furnished to the owner.
1. 1 no. Back-up Battery for Laptop Computer.
2. 1 no. DDC Controller of each type
3. 2 nos. of each type of thermostats and humidistat
4. 2 nos. of each type of two way and 3 way control valve motors
5. 2 nos. of each type of damper motors
6. 1 no. Kilowatt Transmitter
7. 3 nos. Pressure Transmitter
8. 3 nos. Temperature Sensors
9. 6 nos. Differential Pressure Switches
10. 10 nos. VAV Space Sensors
11. 2nos. Ordinary Space Sensors
12. 1no. Outdoor Air Temperature Sensor

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

2.02 DDC EQUIPMENT
A. Diagnostic Terminal Unit: Portable notebook-style, PC-based microcomputer terminal

capable of accessing system data by connecting to system network with latest state of
the art configuration.
B. Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with programmable, nonvolatile,

random-access memory; local operator access and display panel; integral interface
equipment; and backup power source.
1. Units monitor or control each I/O point; process information; execute commands
from other control units, and devices.
2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status.
Functions include the following:
a. Global communications.
b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O.
c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.
d. Software applications, scheduling, and alarm processing.
e. Testing and developing control algorithms without disrupting field
hardware and controlled environment.
3. Standard Application Programs:
a. Electric Control Programs: Demand limiting, duty cycling, automatic time
scheduling, start/stop time optimization, night setback/setup, on-off control
with differential sequencing, staggered start, antishort cycling, PID control,
DDC with fine tuning, and trend logging.
b. HVAC Control Programs: Optimal run time, supply-air reset, and enthalpy
switchover.
c. Chiller Control Programs: Control function of condenser-water reset,
chilled-water reset, and equipment sequencing.
d. Programming Application Features: Include trend point; alarm processing
and messaging; weekly, monthly, and annual scheduling; energy
calculations; run-time totalization; and security access.
e. Remote communications.
f. Maintenance management.
g. Units of Measure: Inch-pound and SI (metric).
4. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Control units shall use ASHRAE 135 protocol and
communicate using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) datalink/physical layer protocol.
5. LonWorks Compliance: Control units shall use LonTalk protocol and
communicate using EIA/CEA 709.1 datalink/physical layer protocol.
C. Local Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with electronically

programmable, nonvolatile, read-only memory; and backup power source.
1. Units monitor or control each I/O point and process information.
2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status.
Functions include the following:
a. Global communications.
b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O.
c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.
3. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Control units shall use ASHRAE 135 protocol and
communicate using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) datalink/physical layer protocol.
4. LonWorks Compliance: Control units shall use LonTalk protocol and
communicate using EIA/CEA 709.1 datalink/physical layer protocol.
D. I/O Interface: Hardwired inputs and outputs may tie into system through controllers.
Protect points so that shorting will cause no damage to controllers.
1. Binary Inputs: Allow monitoring of on-off signals without external power.
2. Pulse Accumulation Inputs: Accept up to 10 pulses per second.
3. Analog Inputs: Allow monitoring of low-voltage (0- to 10-V dc), current (4 to 20
mA), or resistance signals.
4. Binary Outputs: Provide on-off or pulsed low-voltage signal, selectable for
normally open or normally closed operation with three-position (on-off-auto)
override switches and status lights.
5. Analog Outputs: Provide modulating signal, either low voltage (0- to 10-V dc) or
current (4 to 20 mA) with status lights, two-position (auto-manual) switch, and
manually adjustable potentiometer.
6. Tri-State Outputs: Provide two coordinated binary outputs for control of three-
point, floating-type electronic actuators.
7. Universal I/Os: Provide software selectable binary or analog outputs.
E. Power Supplies: Transformers with Class 2 current-limiting type or over current

protection; limit connected loads to 80 percent of rated capacity. DC power supply shall
match output current and voltage requirements and be full-wave rectifier type with the
following:
1. Output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak to peak.
2. Combined 1 percent line and load regulation with 100-mic.sec. response time for
50 percent load changes.
3. Built-in overvoltage and over current protection and be able to withstand 150
percent overload for at least 3 seconds without failure.
F. Power Line Filtering: Internal or external transient voltage and surge suppression for
controllers with the following:
1. Minimum dielectric strength of 1000 V.
2. Maximum response time of 10 nanoseconds.
3. Minimum transverse-mode noise attenuation of 65 dB.
4. Minimum common-mode noise attenuation of 150 dB at 40 to 100 Hz.
2.03 UNITARY CONTROLLERS
A. Unitary Controllers shall be LONMARK / BACNET certified and shall support, but not be
limited to, the following types of systems to address specific applications described in
the “Automatic Control Sequence Section” portion of this specification.
B. Unitary controllers shall support the following library of control strategies to address the
requirements of the sequences described in the “Automatic Control Sequence Section”
portion of this specification
C. Unitary Controllers shall provide an auxiliary binary output to serve as the interface to an
associated lighting relay and a provision for occupancy sensing overrides, as required.
Based upon the status of either an occupancy sensing device, the Unitary Controller
shall provide a contact output to automatically turn on or off the lights and either an
Economy or Comfort mode. This accommodates occupant requirements while reducing
electrically consumption. Economy/Comfort and Lighting overrides shall be served by
the same occupancy override input.
D. Temporary Override Mode

1. Temporary Occupancy Mode: The controller interface to the zone temperature
sensor shall allow of an optional momentary switch to change the mode of the
controller from economy to comfort and optionally interlock the room lights for a
preset amount of time.
2. Boost Mode: The controller interface to the zone temperature sensor shall allow
for an optional momentary switch to override the controller’s output to full heating
or cooling. This command shall be active for a preset amount of time, to
anticipate a substantial change in the room’s load.
2.04 ANALOG CONTROLLERS
A. Step Controllers: 6- or 10-stage type, with heavy-duty switching rated to handle loads
and operated by electric motor.
B. Electric, Outdoor-Reset Controllers: Remote-bulb or bimetal rod-and-tube type,

proportioning action with adjustable throttling range, adjustable set point, scale range
minus 10 to plus 70 deg F (minus 23 to plus 21 deg C), and single- or double-pole
contacts.
C. Electronic Controllers: Wheatstone-bridge-amplifier type, in steel enclosure with

provision for remote-resistance readjustment. Identify adjustments on controllers,
including proportional band and authority.
1. Single controllers can be integral with control motor if provided with accessible
control readjustment potentiometer.
D. Fan-Speed Controllers: Solid-state model providing field-adjustable proportional control

of motor speed from maximum to minimum of 55 percent and on-off action below
minimum fan speed. Controller shall briefly apply full voltage, when motor is started, to
rapidly bring motor up to minimum speed. Equip with filtered circuit to eliminate radio
interference.
E. Receiver Controllers: Single- or multiple-input models with control-point adjustment,

direct or reverse acting with mechanical set-point adjustment with locking device,
proportional band adjustment, authority adjustment, and proportional control mode.
1. Remote-control-point adjustment shall be plus or minus 20 percent of sensor
span, input signal of 3 to 13 psig (21 to 90 kPa).
2. Proportional band shall extend from 2 to 20 percent for 5 psig (35 kPa).
3. Authority shall be 20 to 200 percent.
4. Air-supply pressure of 18 psig (124 kPa), input signal of 3 to 15 psig (21 to 103
kPa), and output signal of zero to supply pressure.
5. Gages: [3-1/2 inches (89 mm)] in diameter, 2.5 percent wide-scale accuracy,
and range to match transmitter input or output pressure.
2.05 SENSOR - GENERAL
A. Sensors shall be capable of sensing the range expected for the point at the specified
accuracy.

B. Input / output sensors and devices shall be closely matched to the requirements of the
DDC for accurate, responsive, noise free signal input / output.
C. Thermistor(s) can be used only in situations where RTD is not available. In no case shall
computer inputs be derived from pneumatic sensors. In no case shall thermocouple be
used.
D. Wall mounted sensors and thermostats in public areas shall be protected from
unauthorized use with clear covers.
2.06 THERMOSTAT
A. Thermostat shall be microprocessor based, digital type and compatible with the control
system.
B. Thermostats shall work from software programmed memory and application control
program that is resident within the same enclosure as the input / output circuitry.
C. Thermostat shall be provided with LED indication of communication and controller

performance without cover removal.
D. Thermostat shall be provided with remote setpoint adjustment and momentary override
button to circumvent day/night programming.
E. Application program shall be resident inside the thermostat circuitry.
F. FCU thermostat shall be provided with 3 position slide switch for manual control of fan
speed apart from auto mode position and cool/heat change over.
G. Sensor for VAV Boxes and Small FCU’s: It shall be basic user function; LCD display,
set point adjustment and tenant override.
H. Sensor for AHU and large FCU’s: It shall be full user function; LCD display, network-
variable access and tenant override and shall conform to current industry standards.
I. Sensor / thermostat shall offer password protection.
J. Multiple network variables shall be accessible and editable from sensor / thermostat.
2.07 TEMPERATURE SENSORS
A. Type: Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) with the following characteristics:

1. Provide linear precision resistance elements and resistance averaging element
for temperature sensing
B. Dew-point sensor shall employ a non-reactive organic bobbin material to give precise
dew-point reading with accuracy of not more than  1.50F. The unit shall incorporate an
integral draft shield as part of the instrument for air velocities in excess of 50 fpm. Dew-
point sensor shall operate over a minimum range suitable to application. One additional
bobbin assembly shall be provided with each dew-point sensor.
C. Earth temperature sensors for greenhouse applications will have a range of -50 to
+90C, pre-wired and have enclosure to IP 65.

D. Average Temperature Sensor for Air Ducts: A single PT 1000 sensor over a length of
3.6 m shall be used for sensing the average temperature in large air ducts with. Sensor
holders shall be included for installation.
E. Outdoor temperature sensors (also combined with humidity sensors) will be suitable for
-40 to +60°C range and have an extra cover for protection and shielding from sun. Pre-
wired and terminal block versions shall be available.
2.08 WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR
A. Strap-on temperature sensors, for measuring the temperature in a water pipe, shall
have a range of -50 to +110C. Pre-wired and terminal block versions shall be available
and shall be mounted on the pipe with a clamp.
B. Water temperature sensors will be provided with a separable copper, Monel or stainless
steel well.
C. Immersion temperature sensors, for measuring temperature in water pipes, with the
following characteristics:
1. Range of -50 to +130C
2. Pre-wired and terminal block versions shall be available
3. Mounted in the pipe with a well
4. Lengths from 95 to 300 mm shall be available.
5. Material shall be copper, brass or stainless steel depending on type
D. Fast temperature sensors, for detecting fast temperature changes, with the following
characteristics:
1. Stainless steel construction suitable for direct mounting into the pipe
2. Pre-wired, available with a NTC 20 element.
3. Lengths of 75, 220 and 300 mm, adjustable to pipe diameters.
2.09 PRESSURE SWITCHES / SENSORS
A. Differential pressure transmitters shall have the following characteristics:

1. Output signal: 0 to 10 volts
2. Pressure ranges: Selectable by jumper.
3. Zero point: Adjustment by potentiometer.
4. Display: 3-½ digit LCD, where required; with service and operation LED visible
and Neuron button accessible from outside.
5. Enclosure: IP 65.
6. Accessories: 2 M long silicone pressure hose and pressure joints
2.10 HUMIDISTAT / RELATIVE HUMIDITY SENSOR
A. Non-organic resistance type with adjustable set point and single pole, double throw
mercury switch, suitable for 24 volts, 1 phase, 50 hertz supply; with the following
operating ranges:
1. Temperature: 2 C to 57C (25F to 135F)
2. Humidity: 5 % to 95 % RH (non-condensing)
B. Relative Humidity Sensors:

1. Capacitance type with 10 to 90 % RH range.
2. Duct mounted sensors shall be provided with a sampling chamber.
3. Wall mounted sensors shall be provided with covers identical to temperature
sensors.
2.11 DUCT SENSORS
A. Air duct temperature sensors will have a range of -40 to +120°C. Pre-wired and
terminal block versions shall be available to mount in and outside the duct. Duct
temperature sensors will be rigid stem or averaging type as specified in the sequence of
operation
B. DDC duct sensors shall match the requirements of the associated controller
incorporating an electrical signal to insure exact and proportional relationship between
the measured variable and the transmitted signal.
2.12 OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A. Occupancy sensor shall be of the passive infrared or ultrasonic receiver type. As a

minimum the occupancy sensor shall provide adjustments for timed-on delay and
sensor sensitivity. Also equipped as appropriate with daylight sensor lockout, sensitivity
control, and 180-degree field of view with vertical sensing adjustment; for flush
mounting.
2.13 WATER FLOW SWITCHES / SENSORS
A. Water Flow Switches: UL listed, adjustable differential pressure or flow type as specified
in the sequence of operation or data point summary. Devices shall be pressure rated, as
required. Differential pressure switches shall have manifold with isolating valve for
servicing. Water flow switches shall open an electrical contact as the differential
pressure falls below a pre-adjusted pressure range setting.
B. Water Flow Sensors: Analogue, solid state, precision, industrial type with stainless steel
meter body, flow element and manifold with isolating valves for calibration and
maintenance. Maximum error shall not exceed 0.5% of range. Pressure rated as
required.
2.14 AIR FLOW STATIC / DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSORS / SWITCHES
A. Air Flow and Static Pressure Sensors: Analogue, high accuracy type suitable for low
velocity pressures encountered, with 4 to 20 mA output and adjustments for zero and
range. These shall be selected for approximately 50 % over range and connected to the
airflow measuring station, using lines for testing and calibration, through isolating valves
B. Differential and Static Pressure Sensor and Switches

1. Fan proof-of-flow switches shall be UL listed, adjustable set point and differential
pressure type
2. Switches shall be piped to fan discharge except where fans operate at less than
one inch WG.
3. For fractional horsepower and non-ducted fans, relays or auxiliary contacts with
maximum pressure rating of 250 Pa (1 inch WG) may be used.

2.15 STATUS SENSORS
A. Status Inputs for Fans: Differential-pressure switch with pilot-duty rating and with
adjustable range of 0- to 5-inch wg (0 to 1240 Pa).
B. Status Inputs for Pumps: Differential-pressure switch with pilot-duty rating and with
adjustable pressure-differential range of 8 to 60 psig (55 to 414 kPa), piped across
pump.
C. Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Comply with ISA 50.00.01, current-sensing fixed- or
split-core transformers with self-powered transmitter, adjustable and suitable for 175
percent of rated motor current.
D. Voltage Transmitter (100- to 600-V ac): Comply with ISA 50.00.01, single-loop, self-
powered transmitter, adjustable, with suitable range and 1 percent full-scale accuracy.
E. Power Monitor: 3-phase type with disconnect/shorting switch assembly, listed voltage
and current transformers, with pulse kilowatt hour output and 4- to 20-mA kW output,
with maximum 2 percent error at 1.0 power factor and 2.5 percent error at 0.5 power
factor.
F. Current Switches: Self-powered, solid-state with adjustable trip current, selected to

match current and system output requirements.
G. Electronic Valve/Damper Position Indicator: Visual scale indicating percent of travel and
2- to 10-V dc, feedback signal.
H. Water-Flow Switches: Bellows-actuated mercury or snap-acting type with pilot-duty

rating, stainless-steel or bronze paddle, with appropriate range and differential
adjustment, in NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.
2.16 GAS DETECTION EQUIPMENT
A. Carbon Monoxide Detectors: Single or multichannel, dual-level detectors using solid-

state plug-in sensors with a 3-year minimum life; suitable over a temperature range of
32 to 104 deg F (0 to 40 deg C); with 2 factory-calibrated alarm levels between [35 and
200] ppm.
B. Carbon Dioxide Sensor and Transmitter: Single detectors using solid-state infrared
sensors; suitable over a temperature range of 23 to 130 deg F (minus 5 to plus 55
deg C) and calibrated for 0 to 2 percent, with continuous or averaged reading, 4- to 20-
mA output;, for wall mounting.
C. Oxygen Sensor and Transmitter: Single detectors using solid-state zircon cell sensing;
suitable over a temperature range of minus 32 to plus 1100 deg F (0 to 593 deg C) and
calibrated for 0 to 5 percent, with continuous or averaged reading, 4- to 20-mA output;
for wall mounting.
2.17 OUTSIDE AIR MONITORING STATION
A. The outside air monitoring station shall consist of outside air temperature and relative
humidity sensors at roof level. The sensors shall be shielded from direct sunlight, and
shall be located away from any exhaust air outlets or other sources of heat which could

affect the accuracy of the temperature reading. The temperature and relative humidity
shall be transmitted globally to all systems requiring these values.
2.18 ACTUATORS - GENERAL
A. Damper / valve motors shall be sized to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide
smooth modulating action or two position action as specified.
B. Permanent split capacitor or shaded poles type motors of 24V/1 phase/50 Hz power
supply with oil immersed and sealed gear trains. Motors installed in outdoor locations
and in outside air intakes shall be furnished with ‘O-Ring” gaskets designed to make
motors completely weatherproof. Internal heater shall be provided to permit normal
operation at - 40 C (- 40 F).
C. Spring returned motors sized for running torque rating of 1.73 Kg-M (150 inch-lb.) and
break away torque rating of 150 inch pounds shall be provided where indicated on
drawings or stipulated in operational sequence. Spring shall be integral spiral type in
enclosed housing designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches,
auxiliary switches or feedback potentiometer. Running time of spring for 90 degree
should not be more than 15 seconds in case of damper motor and 18 sec in case of
valve stroke.
D. Non-spring return motors sized for running torque rating of 1.73 Kg-M (150 inch-lb.) and
breakaway torque rating of 3.46 Kg-M (300 inch-lb.) shall be provided for:
1. Dampers larger than 2.32 M2 (25 ft2).
2. Valves larger than 65 mm (2½ inch).
E. Electrical scope shall be from the outgoing terminal of isolators provided by electrical
discipline. It shall also include zonal transformers to supply actuators.
2.19 VALVE ACTUATORS
A. Auxiliary switches and an external position indicator shall be available. Voltage feedback
valve position to the controller shall be included.
B. Actuators shall be suitable for 24 or 240 volts / 1 phase / 50 Hertz power supply and
selected to close valves against pump shut off head.
C. Actuators shall have enclosures to IP 44 (IP 54 for exposed type) as minimum.
D. Run time shall be 100 second per 90° and provide 7 Nm torque.
E. Modulating Actuators shall provide flexibility by allowing 2-10 volts / 0-10 volts switching
and reversible operating direction and available in 5, 10 and 30 Nm torque ranges.
F. Small Rotary Floating Actuators shall be pre-wired and be available in 24 volts ac and
240 volts ac versions.
G. Actuators shall be rated for ambient condition of 55 C & 95% RH.
H. Actuators shall be modulating or ON/OFF type from MA or VDC signals.
I. Butterfly Valve Actuators shall:

1. Provide modulating or on / off control for air conditioning systems.
2. Be protected against overload and blocking.
3. Have quick and easy mounting without special linkages and parts.
4. Have manual operation without removing the actuator
5. Have long life at a high nominal torque level.
6. Have auxiliary switches and a feedback potentiometer as optional features.
7. Actuators shall have 24 VAC or VDC input signal.
8. Actuators should be selected for maximum torque for smooth actuation of the
valves without loading the motor.
9. Actuators shall have limit switches, voltage input, fail safe operational UL / CSA
certification. The limit switches should be monitored by the control system.
10. Actuators shall have provision for manual operation of the valve.
2.20 DAMPER ACTUATORS
A. Small Linear Actuators with Spring Return

1. Small linear actuators with spring return will provide modulating and floating
control together.
2. Modulating actuator types shall be microprocessor-controlled for exact
positioning, and their direction of movement shall be reversible
B. Large Linear Actuators.

1. Large linear actuators shall be used together with controllers end switch
providing switched or floating single-pole / double-throw outputs or controllers
with modulating control outputs.
2. These shall have a standard mechanical interface where no linkage is required,
and no calibration or adjustments shall be necessary. Linkages, if any, shall be
part of standard accessory.
3. They shall be capable of simple manual operation and the option of spring-return
and non-spring-return models to guarantee a wide range of applications.
4. Modulating actuators without spring return shall also provide a failsafe function in
case of a faulty connection
5. It shall be possible to add auxiliary switches or a high temperature kit for high
performance applications
C. Actuators without Spring Return.

1. Direct coupled damper actuators without spring return shall be compatible with a
proportional controller or a floating single-pole / double-throw control switch
2. These actuators shall be able to be mounted directly on round and square
damper shafts, and the angle of rotation shall be able to be limited to certain
angles.
3. Simple installation and maintenance shall be ensured by a de-clutch button for
manual adjustment, field-added or directly-implemented auxiliary switches, and a
position indicator.
4. These products shall be suitable for air dampers, ventilation flaps, louvers, air
handlers and VAV units
D. Actuators with Spring Return

1. Spring return actuators shall combine safety and control functionality and provide
on / off, floating, and modulating control interfaces with a wide range of available
accessories.
2. These actuators shall have a bi-directional fail-safe functionality and a self-
centring shaft adapter or exchangeable hub insert to fit on all dampers quickly
and securely.

3. A manual override, a highly visible position indicator, dual-point mounting options
and auxiliary switches shall ensure quick start-up and service.
4. These products shall be suitable for ventilation and air-conditioning systems for
ventilation flaps and air handlers where the fail-safe functionality is required.
2.21 CONTROL VALVES
A. General: Designed to high quality specifications for reliable long time use, with the
following:
1. Equal percentage or modified parabolic flow characteristics, rangeability of 30:1
for fan-coils and VAV reheat coils and 50:1 for large coils.
2. Actual valve coefficient value (Cv) shall not deviate from the curve Cv and quoted
CV by more than 10 %.
3. Adjustable stroke limitation, pressure compensation and integrated flow control to
ensure optimisation in hydraulic systems with high differential pressures and high
temperatures.
4. Optimised range, leakage rate, temperature range and close-off pressure.
5. Indicators clearly marked to show fully open and closed positions.
B. Two-way Valves:
1. Type: Bronze with threaded ends (up to and including 50 mm ND) ductile / cast
iron with flanged ends (65 mm ND and above), globe pattern, two port valve with
the polished stainless steel trim and spring-loaded, self-adjusting, Teflon packing.
2. Control valves shall be selected for a maximum pressure drop of 34.5 kPa (5
psig) and shall be either equal or one size smaller than pipe size.
3. The seat shall be replaceable type of chrome nickel.
4. The spindle/stem shall be stainless steel.
5. Plug shall be made of stainless steel for sizes less than 100 mm, for 100 and
larger it shall be made of gun metal/bronze.
6. Valves to have either replaceable composition disk or stainless steel ball.
7. wo way valves shall be modulating type.
2.22 CONTROL DAMPERS
A. Type: Automatic, ON / OFF type suitable for leak-tight shut-off.
B. Frame: Fabricated from minimum 1.5 mm (16 gauge) galvanized steel sheets with holes
for enclosed duct mounting.
C. Blades: Fabricated from minimum 1.5 mm (16 gage) galvanized steel sheets, stiffened
as appropriate, with maximum blade width of 200 mm (8 inch). Blades shall be secured
to 12 mm (½ inch) diameter zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated hardware. Nylon thrust
bearings shall be provided for each blade. Blade linkage hardware shall be of zinc-
plated steel and brass.
D. Operating Temperature Range: - 29 to 93 C (- 20 to 200 F).
E. Type for standard applications: Parallel or opposed blade design with optional closed-
cell neoprene edging.
F. Type for low-leakage applications: Parallel or opposed blade design with inflatable seal
blade edging or replaceable rubber seals, rated for leakage at less than 10 cfm/ft2 of

damper area, at differential pressure of 1,000 Pa (4 inch WG) when damper is being
held under torque of 22.7 Kg (4.17 ft-lb).
G. Outside air dampers shall have adjustable minimum settings so that ventilation can be
adjusted for each space or room.
2.23 WATER METERS
A. Provide screwed or Flanged Water meters suitable for Cold or Hot water
B. For Cold Water Fluid Temperature range - 0º to 40ºC (ice free) and Maximum working
pressure, as required.
C. For Hot water Fluid temperature range - 0º to 90ºC (ice free) and Maximum operating
pressure, as required.
2.24 KILO WATT HOUR METER (KWH METERS)
A. Provide KWH meters that gives open collector pulsed output signal or analog.
B. Signals shall be 4-20mA or 0-10VDC
C. Use voltage and current transformers provided with motor starters to provide signals to
the CPU for KW monitoring
2.25 CONTROL CABLE
A. Electronic and fiber-optic cables for control wiring are specified in Division 27 Section
“Communications Horizontal Cabling.”
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. When installation of the system is complete, Forward to the Engineer data relevant to
point index, functions, limits, sequences, interlocks, and other pertinent information for
the system.
B. Verify that conditioned power supply is available to control units.
C. Prior to on-line operation, calibrate equipment, verify transmission media operation and
perform in the presence of the Engineer a complete demonstration and readout of the
computer real-tile responsibilities of surveillance and command. This demonstration,
having satisfactorily met previously approved submittals, shall, with the Engineers
written acceptance, allow commissioning of the control system for on-line operation.
D. Upon successful completion of system generation, requested the Engineer in writing to

inspect and approve the satisfactory operation of the control system, sub-system(s) and
accessories. After all items appearing on the snag list are completed, make a second
written request for system approval to the Engineer. As each or all items are approved,
obtain signature of the Engineer. Make a copy of this report for the Engineer

E. Provide a detailed cross-check of each sensor within the system by making a
comparison between the reading at the sensor and a calibrated standard.
F. Pressure Switches to be checked for switching thresholds settings.
G. Provide a cross-check of each control point within the system by making a comparison
between the control command and the field-controlled device.
H. Verify that all systems are operable from local controls in the specified failure mode
upon panel failure or loss of power.
I. Humidity sensors to be checked for accuracy using a wet / dry bulb thermometer.
J. All high priority alarm conditions to be simulated and the appropriate

display/printer/pager/email etc responses verified.
K. Control interlocks and safety devices shall be simulated and verified.
L. The control contractor shall revisit the site after handover to check and adjust the
parameters for the control to optimize settings.
M. Calibration of all devices will be demonstrated using instruments carrying valid

certification (to be made available for inspection prior to the demonstration).
3.02 COORDINATION
A. Contractor shall ensure that the work under this section shall not interfere with those of
other trades. Where work is installed in close proximity to or will interfere with work of
other trades, the Contractor shall assist in working out satisfactory space arrangements.
Only those, which cannot be solved without changes to structure or those, which
involves major changes to system design shall be referred to the Engineer.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install software in control units. Implement all features of programs to specified

requirements and as appropriate to sequence of operation.
B. Connect and configure equipment and software to achieve sequence of operation

specified.
C. Verify location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with
Drawings and room details before installation. Install devices [60 inches (1530 mm)]
above the floor, or as directed by engineer.
1. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern.
D. Install guards on thermostats in the following locations:

1. Entrances.
2. Public areas.
3. Where indicated.
E. Install automatic dampers according to Division 23 Section “Air Duct Accessories.”
F. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 23

Section “Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment.”
G. Install hydronic instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 23
Section “Hydronic Piping.”
H. Install refrigerant instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to

Division 23 Section “Refrigerant Piping.”
I. Install duct volume-control dampers according to Division 23 Sections specifying air

ducts.
J. Forward to the Engineer submittal data relevant to valve schedules damper schedules
and other pertinent equipment information requiring approval prior to field installation.
Upon receipt of approval, proceed with installation, set up, calibrating and checking out
the various control and monitoring system.
K. DDC shall be protected from interference by the operation of hand held radio
transmitters, radio pagers, etc., within 1 metre of the equipment.
L. Any modifications made to the system shall be incorporated into the operations and
maintenance manuals, and other documentation affected.
3.04 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION
A. Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Division 26 Section “Raceway and
Boxes for Electrical Systems.”
B. Install building wire and cable according to Division 26 Section “Low-Voltage Electrical
Power Conductors and Cables.”
C. Install signal and communication cable according to Division 27 Section

“Communications Horizontal Cabling.”
1. Conceal cable, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and
piping are exposed.
2. Install exposed cable in raceway.
3. Install concealed cable in raceway.
4. Bundle and harness multiconductor instrument cable in place of single cables
where several cables follow a common path.
5. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect
against abrasion. Tie and support conductors.
6. Number-code or color-code conductors for future identification and service of
control system, except local individual room control cables.
7. Install wire and cable with sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for
vibration of piping and equipment.
D. Connect manual-reset limit controls independent of manual-control switch positions.

Automatic duct heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power controllers.
E. Connect hand-off-auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when

switch is in hand position.
F. Conduits and wiring shall be properly supported and run in a neat and workmanlike
manner; run parallel to or at right angles to building structure when exposed and in
equipment rooms.
G. Wiring shall be installed in such a way that minimises coupling of electromagnetic and
electrostatic interference on low voltage signals and data wiring, in order to avoid
disturbance of DDC equipment operation. This shall preferably be achieved by, but not
limited to:
1. Physical separation of greater than 50 mm between the power supply cables and
the signal and data cables
2. Use of braided screen mains cable, dressed close to metalwork, where mixed
wiring is unavoidable (Tenderers shall clearly specify the methods by which he
intends to eliminate any such interference with his signal and data transmission).
A. Manufacturer’s Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

confirm proper unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and
retest.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
4. Pressure test control air piping at 30 psig (207 kPa) or 1.5 times the operating
pressure for 24 hours, with maximum 5-psig (35-kPa) loss.
5. Pressure test high-pressure control air piping at 150 psig (1034 kPa) and low-
pressure control air piping at 30 psig (207 kPa) for 2 hours, with maximum 1-psig
(7-kPa) loss.
6. Test calibration of [electronic] controllers by disconnecting input sensors and
stimulating operation with compatible signal generator.
7. Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating
control set points are as required.
8. Test each control loop to verify stable mode of operation and compliance with
sequence of operation. Adjust PID actions.
9. Test each system for compliance with sequence of operation.
10. Test software and hardware interlocks.
C. DDC Verification:
1. Verify that instruments are installed before calibration, testing, and loop or leak
checks.
2. Check instruments for proper location and accessibility.
3. Check instrument installation for direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion
depth, and other applicable considerations.
4. Check instrument tubing for proper fittings, slope, material, and support.
5. Check installation of air supply for each instrument.
6. Check flow instruments. Inspect tag number and line and bore size, and verify
that inlet side is identified and that meters are installed correctly.
7. Check pressure instruments, piping slope, installation of valve manifold, and self-
contained pressure regulators.
8. Check temperature instruments and material and length of sensing elements.
9. Check control valves. Verify that they are in correct direction.
10. Check air-operated dampers. Verify that pressure gages are provided and that
proper blade alignment, either parallel or opposed, has been provided.
11. Check DDC system as follows:

a. Verify that DDC controller power supply is from emergency power supply,
if applicable.
b. Verify that wires at control panels are tagged with their service
designation and approved tagging system.
c. Verify that spare I/O capacity has been provided.
d. Verify that DDC controllers are protected from power supply surges.
D. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment and repeat testing

procedures.
3.06 ADJUSTING
A. Calibrating and Adjusting:

1. Calibrate instruments.
2. Make three-point calibration test for both linearity and accuracy for each analog
instrument.
3. Calibrate equipment and procedures using manufacturer’s written
recommendations and instruction manuals. Use test equipment with accuracy at
least double that of instrument being calibrated.
4. Control System Inputs and Outputs:
a. Check analog inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span.
b. Check analog outputs using milli-ampere meter at 0, 50, and 100 percent
output.
c. Check digital inputs using jumper wire.
d. Check digital outputs using ohmmeter to test for contact making or
breaking.
e. Check resistance temperature inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span
using a precision-resistant source.
5. Flow:
a. Set differential pressure flow transmitters for 0 and 100 percent values
with 3-point calibration accomplished at 50, 90, and 100 percent of span.
b. Manually operate flow switches to verify that they make or break contact.
6. Pressure:
a. Calibrate pressure transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span.
b. Calibrate pressure switches to make or break contacts, with adjustable
differential set at minimum.
7. Temperature:
a. Calibrate resistance temperature transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of
span using a precision-resistance source.
b. Calibrate temperature switches to make or break contacts.
8. Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers without positioners, following the
manufacturer’s recommended procedure, so that valve or damper is 100 percent
open and closed.
9. Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers with positioners, following
manufacturer’s recommended procedure, so that valve and damper is 0, 50, and
100 percent closed.
10. Provide diagnostic and test instruments for calibration and adjustment of system.
11. Provide written description of procedures and equipment for calibrating each type
of instrument. Submit procedures review and approval before initiating startup
procedures.
B. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.

C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial
conditions. Provide up to [three] visits to Project during other than normal occupancy
hours for this purpose.
3.07 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstration of the control system to the End User for acceptance shall be carried out
after a full system test has been passed and one weeks notice has been given to the
commissioning Engineer.
1. Field Equipment Demonstration shall include but not limited to the followings:
a. Automatic control operation shall be verified by introducing an error into
the system and observing the proper corrective system response.
b. Selected time and set point schedules shall be verified by changing the
schedule and observing the correct response on the controlled outputs.
c. An output channel will be commanded (on/off, stop/start, adjust, etc.) and
operation verified.
d. An analog input channel will be verified for proper operation.
e. A digital input channel will be verified by changing the state of the field
device and observing the appropriate change of displayed value.
f. Typical occupancy control device function shall be demonstrated.
g. If a point should fail testing, perform necessary repair action and retest
failed point and all interlocked points.
2. The specialist control Contractor shall commission and handover the system to
the client or client’s representative on a point-to-point basis.
3. Services of competent personnel, having at least five (5) years experience in the
field and who have gained an intimate understanding of the project throughout its
design stages, shall be provided by the Contractor to commission the control
system.
4. Contractor shall prepare and submit a program of commissioning; clearly stating
other disciplines involved and services required for each activity.
5. Where work is being carried out in an occupied building the management of the
building shall be kept fully informed regarding the nature of the testing and
commissioning. Steps shall be taken to ensure that any possible hazards or
inconvenience that may arise due to the testing and commissioning shall be
minimized.
6. System Handover shall include but not limited to the followings:
a. Any issues required corrective actions to be documented and agreed date
determined for clearance.
b. All access levels and passwords recorded and backed up.
c. Two Copies of all system and database files supplied on CD with
appropriate identification.
d. Two bound hardcopies of Maintenance manuals including datasheets for
each item of equipment.
e. Two bound hardcopies of Operations manuals including safety checks
and start-up and close down procedures.
f. Six (6) hardcopies of control system drawings matching the installed
networks, equipment and peripheral connections, plus two soft copies of
CAD drawings on separate CDs.
g. Two bound hardcopies of the Flow charts of the control software
programs utilized in the Temperature Control System.
h. Two bound hardcopies of the Control Programs used in each DDC
controller.
i. Consumables, printer ribbons, printer paper at agreed levels.
j. All keys necessary for access to panels and equipment.
k. Training of engineers and operators to be checked complete or program
for completion agreed.
l. Operating and maintenance cautions and instructions.
m. Recommended spare parts list with contact details for suppliers.
3.08 TRAINING
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner’s maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC instrumentation and controls. Refer to
Division 01 Section “Demonstration and Training.”
B. The control Contractor shall provide detailed on-site and off-site operation and
programming training to selected client staff. Training will be carried out separately for
both engineering and operator staff. Factory trained control engineers and technicians
shall provide training sessions for the client’s personnel. Training shall include but not
limited to the followings:
1. Explanation of drawings, operations and maintenance manuals
2. Overview of HVAC system
3. Walk-through of the job to locate control components.
4. Use of Occupancy Controls.
5. Use of Keypad/Display devices with customised menus.
6. Use of Overrides and Passwords.
7. Use of Datalogs, Time Schedules and Alarms handling.
8. Communication Controller, DDC Controller, ASC operation/function.
9. Operator control functions including graphic generation and field panel
programming.
10. Explanation of adjustment, tuning, calibration and replacement procedures.
11. Since the Client may require personnel to have more comprehensive
understanding of the hardware and software, additional training must be
available from the control contractor. If such training is required by the Client, it
will be contracted at a later date.
3.09 MAINTANENCE
A. The specialist contractor shall maintain the system and its operation for a period as
stipulate in the contract documents
B. The contractor shall cover preventive maintenance, breakdown call out, replacement of
consumable items and a list of recommended spares for holding by the client.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 0993
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes control sequences for HVAC systems, subsystems, and
equipment.

1. Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" for control
equipment and devices and for submittal requirements
2. VRF System control Sequence
3. Smoke Exhaust/Make up Air Fans
4. Stair case Pressurization Fans
5. Lift Pressurization Fans
6. General Extract Fans
7. Make up air Fans
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 23900- INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS FOR HVAC
B. Section 23 0593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING & BALANCING FOR HVAC

1. Refer to control narratives on drawings.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. DDC: Direct digital control.
B. VAV: Variable air volume.
1.04 GENERAL
A. The HVAC system controls (air temperature, volume, static pressure, etc.) shall be the
responsibility of the HVAC System Contractor. HVAC Contractor shall utilize the
services of a leading BAS control specialist.
B. The HVAC Contractor shall obtain all automatic temperature control equipment and
provide full and comprehensive automatic temperature control schematics and
interconnecting wiring diagrams of all specified system. BAS Contractor shall install the
necessary automatic temperature control equipment in ducts or pipes, as provided by
control specialist.
KEO/19-3262-0000 23 0993/1 Sequence Of Operations For Hvac Controls

C. The HVAC Contractor thereafter adjust, calibrate and commission the entire automatic
control system. HVAC Contractor shall take advise of control specialist on the
positioning of all thermostats, detectors, and valves, etc. to ensure their correct function
within the specified range of operation.
D. The HVAC Contractor shall include for the installation of all items of control equipment
such as immersion wells, control valves, damper motors, thermostats or detectors in
pipe line walls or ducts etc.
E. The HVAC Contractor shall also include for the installation of low voltage power
(including transformer, wiring and all accessories) wiring to all HVAC equipment
wherever necessary.
F. HVAC contractor shall coordinate with fire alarm contractor so all necessary controls,
control wiring for each HVAC equipment are provided up to fire alarm panel.
G. Operational sequences stated herein are intended to define functional requirements of

an acceptable system. Contractor shall, in his tender, highlight and allow for alterations /
modifications to the system or the system components; which in his opinion are
necessary to accomplish the purpose of maintaining predetermined temperature and
humidity during all seasons and other requirements:
1.05 CONTROL LOGIC - GENERAL
A. Provide necessary interlocks between HVAC equipment that either run together or run
when other stops.
B. The set points for temperature, humidity, pressure, flow, power consumption. pH level
run time etc. shall be adjustable.
C. Time delay(s) on plant start-up:

1. A time delay (adjustable) shall be provided between starting of each plant /
equipment, under normal control or power failure, to avoid high loading of the
power distribution system
D. Duty / Standby Selection:

1. Selection of duty pump / fan / chiller shall be via a rotational point, alternating the
duty equipment every seven days (adjustable) or at any other method set such
as:
a. Pre-defined hours run total
b. Failure of the duty equipment
2. Changeover shall occur when the equipment is off
3. In the event of a failure being detected, the duty shall be switched off, and after a
time delay (adjustable), the standby shall be started
4. Duty and standby equipment shall not be allowed to run simultaneously.
E. Manual Command Operation:

1. All plant shall have the facility to be manually operated
2. During any manual operation period all plant interlocks shall operate as if under
normal occupancy control.
F. Extended Time Operation:

1. All plant shall have the facility to operate outside normal hours
2. The software shall be written so that extended times can be easily entered.
G. Sense filter pressure drop for each filter bank by means of differential pressure sensing
device which closes and latches an electrical contact when the filter pressure differential
exceeds and adjustable pressure range settings. In the event that the pressure drop
across the filter becomes indicative of a dirty filter condition, an alarm shall be provided.
HVAC contractor should advise the pressure drop value for dirty filter condition.
H. Provide differential pressure sensing devices for all fans. This point shall be used as
start / stop feedback for points specified as status on the point list.
I. Water flow for each pump shall be indicated by means of a differential pressure switch,
which opens an electrical contact as the differential pressure falls below a pre-adjusted
pressure range setting.
J. Use auxiliary contacts provided with motor controls of fans and pumps for start / stop
feedback
K. Provide three-mode relays at the motor control stations for hand/off/auto control
L. The HVAC equipment shall sound an alarm at

1. Commanded on, but the status is off.
2. Commanded off, but the status is on
3. VFD fault.
4. Status Runtime exceeds a user definable limit
1.06 FIXED SPEED DRIVES
A. Following a command to run, equipment shall be proven running by sensing the

operational condition by appropriate sensing device, after a suitable time delay.
B. If the equipment is not proven after the delay time, an alarm shall be raised, and the
equipment shall be switched off.
1.07 OUTSIDE AIR STATION
A. Outside air monitoring station shall consist of outside air temperature and relative
humidity sensors at roof level. Sensors shall be shielded from direct sunlight and shall
be located away from any exhaust air outlets or other sources which could affect the
accuracy of the reading. Temperature and relative humidity values shall be transmitted
globally to all systems requiring these values
1.08 ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS CONTROL SEQUENCE (If Applicable)
A. Plant Configuration
1. The Energy Recovery Unit shall comprise of an AHU supply air fan and extract
fan provided with variable speed motor, DX cooling coil / CHW cooling coil with
modulating valve, Enthalpy Wheel, 2 banks of filters (panel & bag filters) and 1
bank of filter on exhaust side, temperature & RH sensors and set of modulating
dampers.
B. AHU Supply and Exhaust Fan Monitoring and Start/Stop

1. The motor control center serving the 100 % fresh air AHU and the extract fan
shall have a "HAND- OFF-AUTO" switch. It shall be possible to start the FAHU
and the extract fan directly when the switch positions are in manual. When this
switch is in "AUTO" position, the DDC controller takes charge. For this purpose,
the "AUTO" position of the switch is monitored on BAS.
2. The air flow switches AFS are mounted across the FAHU supply & extract fan to
detect airflow. Each airflow switch is connected to a digital input of the DDC
controller.
3. The FAHU fans and control status shall be controlled/ monitored on BAS as
shown on the control schematics.
C. Temperature Control and Humidity Monitoring

1. Temperature sensor shall be located in the supply air duct. The supply air
temperature shall be maintained precisely at the desired set point via the 2-way
modulating PICV valve located on the chilled water coil (or refrigerant control
valve in case of DX-Coil).
2. Temperature sensor shall be located in the return air duct and the return air
temperature shall be monitored by BAS.
3. Temperature and RH sensors are also provided before and after the heat wheels
for monitoring purpose.
D. Dirty Filter Status

1. For the FAHU, there shall be one differential pressure switch DPS, one across
each filter bank. If the air pressure exceeds the setting on the differential
pressure switch, a signal is relayed to the DDC, which shall give a dirty filter
alarm.
E. Other Temperature / RH Monitoring Points

1. An outside air combined temperature and RH sensor is located in a shaded area
that will monitor the ambient temperature and relative humidity.
2. A temperature sensor is located at the discharge of the enthalpy heat recovery
wheels to monitor the coil entry temperature.
3. Pressure sensors shall be located on the supply air duct and return air duct to
monitor the respective duct pressures.
F. Fire Mode Operation:

1. In case of Fire alarm signal the system will be automatically shut down from the
Fire Alarm system.
G. Motorized Damper
1. The FAHU shall be provided with on/off motorized damper on the intake air duct
which will be normally open in case of unit operation and closes in case of unit is
off.
2. The BAS shall control the operation of the damper and monitor the status of the
damper.
1.09 RECIRCULATING AIR HANDLING UNITS (AHU’s) CONTROL SEQUENCE (If

Applicable)
AHU Unit shall comprise of Supply fan, CHW / DX cooling coil with modulating
Control Valve & Filter banks (panel and bag filters as applicable) and set of dampers.
A. Temperature Control
1. The BAS shall take over the operations of the AHUs when the Hand-Off-Auto
switch is in the ‘AUTO” position. The AHUs shall be switched on automatically as
per the dictates of the time channels defined in the DDC controllers. Under

normal conditions the AHUs shall run in the ‘AUTO’ mode. The AHUs shall run in
the “hand” mode only for testing purposes.
2. The Temperature sensor shall be located in the return air duct. The
Temperatures shall be maintained precisely at the desired set point by
Modulating the 2-way PICV control valve located on the chilled water coil (or
refrigerant control valve in case of DX-Coil). Necessary control shall be provided
to limit the low supply air temperature.
B. Dirty Filter Status

1. A Differential pressure switch is located across the filter. In case the filter gets
clogged beyond the value set in the differential pressure switch, a contact is
made which the DDC controller recognizes.
2. The DDC controller raises an alarm after a pre-determined time delay.
3. The ‘overload trip’ condition of the motor is monitored at the DDC controller via a
volt-free contact from the Motor Control Centre.
C. AHU Fans Monitoring and Start/Stop

1. The motor control centre serving the AHU shall have the "HAND-OFF-AUTO"
switches. The airflow switch AFS is mounted across the Supply fan to detect
airflow. The airflow switch is connected to a digital input of the DDC controller.
2. When the Fire Alarm Panel relays a Fire Alarm to the DDC Panel the DDC
Controller will shut down the AHU.
3. For other points, which are to be monitored by the BAS, please refer to the Data
Points Schedule and control schematics.
D. Safety Controls:
1. Smoke detectors approved for duct installation shall be installed by fire alarm
contractor and hard wired to automatically shut down fans. For this purpose,
smoke detectors shall be provided as follows:
a. At a suitable location in the return air stream prior to mixing with outdoor
air, and
b. At a suitable location in the main supply duct, if required.
E. Smoke detectors shall be provided with auxiliary contact and connected to fire alarm
interface, for remote indication. Smoke detector shall comply with NFPA/90A
F. Return / supply / thermostat / air sensor will modulate cooling coil control valve to
maintain the desired discharge air temperature.
1. Sensors located in return air duct will be used for constant air volume AHUs
2. Sensors located in supply air duct will be used for variable air volume AHUs
G. The AHU supply fan shall start based on a predetermined time schedule in the DDC
controller or on load requirement. Controls shall be energized when flow is proven. The
supply fan shall run continuously with outside air damper open to an adjustable
minimum position.
H. AHU condition will be monitored by differential pressure switch (installed across the fan)
and an alarm signal will be generated in the event of a discrepancy between the start-
stop command and the corresponding differential pressure switch.
I. Variable frequency drives shall operate based the static pressure sensor located on the
¾ of the longest supply duct run upstream on the AHU. The set point shall be
established during testing adjusting and balancing (TAB).

J. Warm Up/Pre-Cool Cycle: For a predetermined period of time (adjustable), prior to
occupancy of space, operate the air handling units continuously on 100% return air at
full cooling, when the system is on cooling in order to bring the space temperature to the
occupancy level.
K. Unoccupied Mode: The AHU supply fan shall be switched OFF and the controls shall be
de-energized. However, if the space temperature exceeds 30 deg C. in summer, the
DDC controller shall revert the AHU to the night cycle mode and cycle the fan with full
cooling.
L. The AHU filters shall be monitored by differential Pressure Switch and alarmed when
dirty.
M. Electrical and control panels shall be installed inside AHU Room (or nearby AHU).
N. AHUs (and fresh air supply and exhausted fans) will be scheduled to a holiday program.
O. If the electric heater battery was operating immediately prior to a shutdown command,
then:
1. Supply and / or return fans will run-on for a period of 15 minutes in order to
dissipate residual heat from the electric heater battery, after which time the fans
shall be stopped.
2. Air flow and thermal cut-out interlocks shall be provided for heater.
P. AHU indications shall be available for display at a Portable Operators Terminal.
Q. Fixed time commands for AHU: On receiving stop command from the fixed time
program:
1. Supply fan and extract fan shall stop
2. Fresh air and extract dampers shall close
3. Heater battery steps shall be switched off
4. Cooler battery control valve shall be driven closed to the coil
R. Alarm on Failure: In the event of a supply or extract fan failure, as detected by its
differential pressure switch and / or its starter contractor auxiliaries, the failed fan shall
be shut down and an alarm shall be raised.
S. AHU shall not re-enter the normal automatic control sequence until the fault on the fan
has been cleared.
T. In AHU, a velocity controller installed in the fresh air intake guarantee minimum fresh air
as total flow is reduced by ensuring that dampers are open sufficiently to provide the
minimum flow required.
1.010 FAN COIL UNITS CONTROL SEQUENCE (If Applicable)
A. FCU controllers for public areas and service / utility rooms shall be connected to the
BASworkstation for monitoring and control of FCU’s via Return air sensor behind the
FCU.
B. A low voltage digital room thermostat with built – in 3 – speed switch and capable of
communicating with DDC will command the control valve to maintain design
temperature in space.
C. Fan coil units shall be provided with an intelligent unitary controller.

D. Each FCU shall be provided with a fan start relay, electric heater battery (if required)
stage relays, 2-way chilled water PICV control valve and actuator and space / return air
temperature sensor. Chilled water valve shall open upon loss of power to the actuator.
E. Thermostat shall be suitable for wall mounting for high level and concealed type units.
For floor-mounted units the switch shall be integral part of the unit.
F. Differential pressure switches will monitor and report fan status.
G. Space / return air temperature sensors shall provide out of limits alarms when the
sensed temperature rises 2.0 C (adjustable) above or below set-point. Alarms shall be
inhibited when the FCU is shutdown or for a timed period of 30 minutes (adjustable)
after plant start up.
H. Space thermostat / temperature sensor shall be located adjacent to the room light
switch or as agreed with the Engineer.
1.011 TERTIARY CHILLED WATER PUMP CONTROL SEQUENCE (If Applicable)
A. Chilled water pumps shall be switched on locally or remotely through the BMS.
B. The pump set will operate as duty, and 1 standby depending on the VFD will modulate
speed to keep a constant loop pressure. The standby pump shall operate as a duty
pump according to a schedule, and in case of other pump failure.
C. The chilled water treatment automatic dosing system shall be provided with all the
necessary electrical wiring and controls for the complete package efficient and
satisfactory operation.
D. The pumps are driven by a variable frequency drive (VFD). VFD driven will be working
based on the reading from the differential pressure sensor (dp) placed between the
header supply and return lines at the hydraulically most remote location in the system.
the pumps are operated in a sequence so that when one pump is running at full speed
another pump is turned on and its speed is increased so that the pressure difference set
point is achieved. The number and the running speed of the pumps are determined by
the cooling load of the building at that particular time. The remote dp set point will be
maintained between maximum and minimum pressures. the maximum pressure limit is
the pressure required to provide full flow to all chilled water control valves
simultaneously (per tab). The minimum pressure limit is the pressure correlating to the
lowest speed the pump motor is allowed to be operated as per motor specification and
tab.
E. The PICV shall be controlled by the building side chilled water temperature and the
return chilled water temperature of the primary circuit. The electrically activated control
valve of PICV will respond to control signal from the controller.
1.012 VRF SYSTEM CONTROL SEQUENCE
A. Intelligent controller shall be providing for all VRF systems. Each group / VRF system
shall be connected to one main controller. Each system controller shall monitor and
control their system, (indoor units & outdoor units). The required control shall be as per
manufacturer recommendation to ensure efficient and optimum operation. All required
and necessary wiring, controls, interconnection instrument, each VRF system controller

shall be integrated to main BMS shall be provided as recommended by the
manufacturer.
1.013 DIRECT EXPANSION UNITS CONTROL SEQUENCE
A. A low voltage digital room thermostat capable of communicating with DDC will maintain
design temperature in space.
B. DX units shall be provided with an intelligent unitary controller.
C. Thermostat shall be suitable for wall mounting for high level and concealed type units.
For floor-mounted units the switch shall be integral part of the unit.
D. Differential pressure switches will monitor and report fan status to DDC.
E. Space thermostat / temperature sensor shall be located adjacent to the room light
F. The BMS (if applicable) shall monitor the DX split units for the unit panel healthy
monitoring.
1.014 SMOKE EXHAUST/MAKE UP AIR FANS CONTROLS (If Applicable)
A. The smoke fans and make up air fans shall be directly controlled by the fire alarm panel.
The fans shall be directly interlocked with the fire alarm panel. There shall be a
motorized damper on the exhaust duct connecting the smoke exhaust fans and on the
makeup air duct to each floor.
B. The fans shall operate directly on receipt of fire alarm signal. However, the fans run
status is monitored on BMS through a digital input signal to DDC from differential
pressure air flow switch mounted across each fan.
C. The smoke/ makeup air fans shall have a dedicated duct risers and branch ducts
connected to each floor. The branch ducts shall have motorized on/off dampers. The
dampers shall open at the fire floor based on a fire alarm signal. Motorized dampers on
all other floors without fire shall remain closed.
D. After the fire event the smoke exhaust fans shall be operated to purge the smoke from
affected levels.
E. ALARMS:
1. Alarms will be generated on the BMS in case of following conditions:
a. Fan trip
b. Fire Alarm
1.015 STAIRCASE/LIFT PRESSURIZARION FANS CONTROLS (If Applicable)
A. Auto Mode – Fan Monitoring & Start/Stop:

1. Each staircase/Lift pressurization fan shall be directly controlled by Fire Alarm
System. However, override facility shall be available to enable or disable the fan
from BMS. In the event of smoke or fire detected by Fire Alarm System, first the
fresh air motorized damper will be opened, and the fan will be started by the Fire
Alarm System. Fire Alarm signal will be reported to DDC.
2. Pressure relief damper shall be provided at the supply duct to staircase to relief
the excess pressure in the staircase beyond 50 Pa (limit to be adjustable).
3. The motor control center serving the fan shall have "HAND-OFF-AUTO"
switches. It shall be possible to start the fan directly when the switch position is in
“HAND”. When this switch is in "AUTO" position, the DDC controller will take
charge. For this purpose, the "AUTO" position of the switch shall be monitored.
B. ALARMS:
1. Alarms shall be generated on the BMS in case of following conditions:
a. Staircase/Lift differential pressure exceeds pre-defined high limit of 65 Pa
(adjustable)
1.016 SMOKE CONTROL SEQUENCES (If Applicable)
A. In case of fire, the fire alarm panel shall command the following:
1. Shut-off AHU / FCU and normally working fans in the smoke zone
2. Energize lift well and stairwell pressurization fans.
3. Close or open motorized dampers in accordance to smoke control scheme, and
upon proof of the intake dampers open, the associated fans shall operate.
4. Open exterior doors by the use of door actuators to allow fresh air in.
5. Energize smoke ventilation fans shall be working during fire mode to provide safe
egress route.
B. All necessary wiring, piping, conduits, etc., shall be installed and brought to the nearest
fire alarm panel.
C. The signals from the smoke system fans shall be made available at the building
automation system. Make all necessary control wiring connection to smoke control
panel.
D. Smoke ventilation system and air conditioning fans shall be connected to and operable
from the fire alarm control panel. As well as, provision shall be made, in the BAS or
otherwise, for manually stopping HVAC system in the event of fire.
E. Stair pressurization fans shall be with VFD connected to pressure sensor at mid-point in
stairwell to give full speed operation between pressure of 50 Pascal (minimum
emergency operation level) to 120 Pascal. When the pressure in the stairwell reaches
more than 50 Pascal the fan speed will reduced accordingly
F. Basement smoke ventilation system: The basement is provided with fresh air supply and
smoke exhaust fans. The motorized dampers shall be interlocked with the supply and
smoke exhaust fans.
G. Atrium system: Natural intake and exhaust. During fire/smoke mode the ground floor
lobby doors and smoke exhaust ventilators in the skylights open automatically.
1.017 GENERAL EXTRACT/ MAKE UP AIR FANS- CONTROLS (If applicable)
A. Auto Mode – Fan Monitoring & Start/Stop

1. The motor control center serving the fans shall have a "HAND-OFF-AUTO"
switch. It shall be possible to start the fans directly when the switch position is in
“HAND”. When this switch is in "AUTO" position, the DDC controller will charge.
For this purpose, the "AUTO" position of the switch shall be monitored.

2. The fans will be started automatically when the “HAND-OFF-AUTO” switch is in
“AUTO” position and the time channel is activated.
3. A differential pressure air flow switch shall be connected across the fan, which
proves the air flow status. The air flow switch shall be connected to digital input
of the DDC controller. When the fan is commanded to switch-on and no air flow
is detected across the fan, after a delay of 60 secs (adjustable) air flow fail alarm
will be generated by the BMS and the fan will be switched-off.
B. ALARMS:
1. Alarms will be generated on the BMS in case of following conditions:
a. No air flow detected across the fans in the event of fans being
commanded to switch-on (Fan will be commanded to shutdown)
b. Fan is not running in Auto Mode
1.018 VAV BOXES OPERATING SEQUENCE (If Applicable)
A. VAV Boxes with VAV DDC controller shall be provided in space as shown. The space
thermostat with digital display and set point adjustment shall control the VAV to maintain
space temperature at the desired set-point.
B. All information available in VAV Boxes controller to be available to BAS. Also VAV Box
controller to be networked together to the BAS to provide information for control of AHU
based on space load conditions.
C. When the AHU is in the heating mode, the control action of the VAV controller shall be
reversed.
D. Space thermostat / temperature sensor shall be located adjacent to the room light
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 1113
FACILITY FUEL OIL PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes fuel-oil and diesel-fuel-oil distribution systems and the following:
1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings.
2. Piping and tubing joining materials.
3. Piping specialties.
4. Valves.
5. Vertical, steel, fuel-oil ASTs.
6. Horizontal, steel, fuel-oil ASTs.
7. Containment-dike, steel, fuel-oil ASTs.
8. Insulated, steel, fuel-oil ASTs.
9. Concrete-vaulted, steel, fuel-oil ASTs.
10. Steel, fuel-oil USTs with STI-P3.
11. Composite, steel, fuel-oil USTs.
12. Jacketed, steel, fuel-oil USTs.
13. FRP fuel-oil USTs.
14. Fuel-oil AST accessories.
15. Fuel-oil UST accessories.
16. Fuel-oil storage tank piping specialties.
17. Fuel-oil storage tank pumps.
18. Fuel-transfer pumps.
19. Fuel maintenance system.
20. Liquid-level gage system.
21. Leak-detection and monitoring system.
23. Grout.
24. Concrete bases.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. AST: Aboveground storage tank.


D. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred
spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above
ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
KEO/19-3262-0000 23 1113/1 Facility Fuel Oil Piping

E. FPM: Vinylidene fluoride-hexafluoropropylene copolymer rubber.
F. FRP: Glass-fiber-reinforced plastic.
G. UST: Underground storage tank.
1.03 RELATED WORK
A. Division 23, Section 23 0548 – Mechanical Vibration and Sound Controls
B. Division 23, Section 23 0700 – Mechanical Insulation
A. All installation of fuel system should comply with NFPA Standards.
B. Delegated Design: Design restraint and anchors for fuel-oil piping, ASTs, and
equipment, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional
engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
C. Seismic Performance: Factory-installed support attachments for AST shall withstand

the effects of earthquake motions determined according to NFPA Standards.
1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of
any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the
unit will be fully operational after the seismic event.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, and dimensions of individual components and profiles. Also include,
where applicable, rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics,
and furnished specialties and accessories.
1. Piping specialties.
2. Valves: Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection
data of selected models.
3. Each type and size of fuel-oil storage tank. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
4. Fuel-oil storage tank accessories.
5. Fuel-oil storage tank piping specialties.
6. Fuel-oil storage tank pumps.
7. Fuel-oil transfer pumps.
8. Fuel maintenance system.
9. Liquid-level gage system.
10. FM approved Leak-detection and monitoring system.
B. Shop Drawings: For facility fuel-oil piping layout. Include plans, piping layout and
elevations, sections, and details for fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for
multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the
same to building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion
joints and loops.
1. Shop Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch per foot (1:50).
2. For fuel-oil storage tanks and pumps, include details of supports and anchors.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For fuel-oil piping and equipment indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and
sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Detail fabrication and assembly of anchors and seismic restraints.
2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints.
3. Detail fabrication and assembly of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple
pipes, and attachments of the same to building structure.
D. Coordination Drawings: Plans and details, drawn to scale, on which fuel-oil piping is
shown and coordinated with other installations, using input from installers of the items
involved.
E. Site Survey: Plans, drawn to scale, on which fuel-oil piping and tanks are shown and
coordinated with other services and utilities.
F. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.
G. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For ASTs, accessories, and components, from

manufacturer.
H. Brazing certificates.
I. Welding certificates.
J. Field quality-control reports.
K. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuel-oil equipment and accessories to include in
L. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
A. Brazing: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
B. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to

AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
C. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME

Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
E. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for fuel-oil piping materials,
installation, testing, and inspecting.

F. Comply with requirements of the EPA and of state and local authorities having
jurisdiction. Include recording of fuel-oil storage tanks and monitoring of tanks and
piping.
G. Comply with NFPA 30, "Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code," and NFPA 31,
"Installation of Oil Burning Equipment," for fuel oil piping materials, components,
installations, testing, and inspecting.
H. Comply with PEI RP100-87 Recommended Practices for Installation of Underground

Liquid Storage Systems.
A. Lift and support fuel-oil storage tanks only at designated lifting or supporting points, as
shown on Shop Drawings. Do not move or lift tanks unless empty.
B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through
C. Store pipes and tubes with protective PE coating to avoid damaging the coating and to
protect from direct sunlight.
1.08 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair

or replace components of fuel-oil storage tanks and flexible, double-containment piping
and related equipment that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
1. Storage Tanks:
a. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following when used for
storage of fuel oil at temperatures not exceeding 150 deg F (66 deg C):
1) Structural failures including cracking, breakup, and collapse.
2) Corrosion failure including external and internal corrosion of steel
tanks.
b. Warranty Period: 30 years from date of Substantial Completion.
2. Flexible, Double-Containment Piping and Related Equipment:
a. Failures due to defective materials or workmanship for materials installed
together, including piping, dispenser sumps, entry boots, and sump
mounting adapters.
b. Warranty Period: 30 years from date of Substantial Completion.
A. Requirements of the general conditions of contract shall be referred to an complied with

appropriate without prejudice to requirement stated herein.

B. Following spare parts shall be furnished, properly packed and labeled with equipment
no location.
1. Two nos. of Valves for each type and size of valves used in the project.
2. Two sets of replaceable elements such as seats for each type and size valves
used.
3. Two set of replacement elements such as impeller, case wearing ring (if used),
bearings and seals for each type and size of fuel pumps
4. Tow nos. of Fuel level sensors for each type and size of tank used in the project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

provided shall be from the manufacturer having minimum five (5) years of experience in
2.02 TANK GAUGES
A. Provide an electric gauging system compatible with tank size that provides a continuous
signal. Gauging system shall be unaffected by change in the specific gravity of the tank
liquid. A high / low level alarm switch shall be mounted on the gauges. Provide all
contacts and necessary connection as required for monitoring the levels by the control
system.
B. Scales to be calibrated on one side in litres graduated for equal litre units based on
actual tank dimensions, on the other side in millimetre/centimetre graduated for every 6
mm of tank depth.
C. Each gauge shall be filled with red indicating fluid having a specific gravity of not more
than 3.0.
D. Connections between tank and gauges shall consist of double copper tubing encased in
flameproof covering. The copper tubing shall be not less than 3 mm (1/8") O.D. and
provided with suitable end connections.
E. Tank fittings shall be provided with a 38 mm (1 1/2") male pipe thread with a stuffing box
and stuffing box nut through which 13mm (1/2") pressure pipe extends. The pressure
fitting shall be provided with a 13 mm (1/2") female pipe thread. Tank fittings and
pressure fittings shall be made of solid bar stock to prevent leak possibilities.
2.03 FUEL OIL PIPING
A. Provide all diesel fuel oil piping, fill lines, water tight fill boxes, vents, vent caps, flame
arresters to vent pipes as required by NFPA, tank foot valves, quick closing spring
actuated fusible link valves on supply and return and other accessories.
B. All piping shall be provided with ground joint unions at piece of apparatus to facilitate
connecting and disconnecting.
C. All piping, unless otherwise specified, shall be standard weight black wrought iron pipe
with standard galvanized malleable iron fittings. All valves shall be designed for 610
kg/m2 (125 lb/ft2) steam working pressure. Provide relief valves. Underground fuel
piping shall be extra heavy with galvanized malleable iron fittings and shall be painted
with asphaltum.
D. Galvanized steel vent pipe lines shall run from the fuel oil storage tanks, carried to the
proper height within building construction and terminating with vent fittings. Fittings shall
be "Bronze Ventilating Brick" with thickness of 20 mesh bronze wire gauge in front of
louvered opening, as manufactured by Preferred Utilities Mfg. Corp..
E. Oil suction line piping shall be tested at 625 mm (25") vacuum prior to backfilling.
F. Install the fuel oil piping inside a secondary containment piping system of fiber glass UL
listed reinforced epoxy resin red thread pipe with split two-piece fittings. The
containment pipe shall be one pipe size larger than the fuel piping.
2.04 DIESEL OIL PUMPING AND STRAINING SET
A. Provide packaged type duplex fuel oil pumping and straining set (with one electrical
pump with flame proof motor) with a capacity of two times the total fuel consumption of
engine at full load. Pump sets shall be factory assembled, piped, wired and tested.
Pumps shall be activated by a switch in the day tank. Provide one manual pump of
equal capacity and make necessary piping connections with valves.
B. Support base shall be fabricated of not less than 6 mm steel plate with 75 mm side rails
continuously welded to form a 25 mm high overflow lip, complete with 13 mm drain plug.
Strainer and pumps shall be bolted to individual bases, which, in turn, are welded to the
support base.
C. Piping shall be complete to suction, discharge and return line connections. Provide gate
valves and unions arranged to permit removal of either pump while the system is in
operation. Install check valves and relief valves on pump outlet and gate valves on the
inlet side of pressure gauges.
D. Suction strainer shall be flanged connection, duplex type, one-piece, cast-iron body,
ASTM A 48 Class 30, with 1.2 mm perforation brass baskets.
E. Oil pump set shall be factory assembled on a structural steel channel beam base to
include pumps, motors, flexible couplings etc. Pump set shall be suitable for diesel oil.
F. Valves
1. Gate valves to be bronze body, screwed connection, 1378 kPa.
2. Check valves to be bronze body, angle type, screwed connection, stamped 413
kPa, adjustable 275 to 550 kPa, similar to Bailey No. 118.
2.05 ENGINE EXHAUST SYSTEM
A. Exhaust pipes shall be of Schedule 40 black steel and of adequate size to ensure that
back pressure does not exceed the value specified by the manufacturer.
B. The exhaust pipe shall be connected through airtight flexible coupling to the engine.
Bends in exhaust pipe shall have a radius of not less than three times the pipe diameter.

C. Exhaust pipes shall be adequately lagged with 75mm thick (minimum) calcium silicate
moulded insulation having a density of 175 kg/m3 (11 lb/ft3) and canvassed so that the
surface temperature does not exceed 60oC.
D. When exhaust pipes pass through walls or roof a suitable weatherproof sleeve or
thimble shall be provided to isolate exhaust pipe from the building. A silencer of heavy
duty residential type shall be provided in the exhaust system and it shall also be lagged.
E. Exhaust pipes and mufflers shall be supported from the ceiling by special vibration
isolating hangers and the pipe shall be slanted away from the engine and a condensate
trap fitted at the lowest points. Approved rain caps shall be installed at the discharge
end of the exhaust pipes on the roof.
2.06 FUEL OIL DAY TANK
A. Fuel supply to the engines shall be maintained by daily service tanks of sufficient
capacity for minimum eight (8) hour operation of the sets (or as specified on drawing)
when running at full load. The tanks shall be welded 2mm thick sheet steel construction
treated to resist corrosion, and mounted on suitable angle iron steel structure. Each tank
shall be provided with oil strainer, vent pipe, high and low level control switches, drain
valve, engine supply and return piping connections, daily tank supply and overflow
piping connections, dial type level indicator and electrically operated solenoid valve with
manual reset lever. The engine supply connection shall terminate 25mm above bottom
of tank and provided with a valve. Upon receiving a signal from control panel indicating
a fire in the generator room, actuate each solenoid valve to shut down the fuel supply
lines to the engine.
2.07 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS
A. See Part 3 piping schedule articles for where pipes, tubes, fittings, and joining materials
are applied in various services.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.
1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern.
2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, for butt and socket
welding.
3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground
joint, and threaded ends.
4. Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, minimum Class 150,
including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end
connections, and facings:
a. Material Group: 1.1.
b. End Connections: Threaded or butt welding to match pipe.
c. Lapped Face: Not permitted underground.
d. Gasket Materials: Asbestos free, ASME B16.20 metallic, or
ASME B16.21 nonmetallic, gaskets compatible with fuel oil.
e. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, cadmium-plated steel.
5. Protective Coating for Underground Piping: Factory-applied, three-layer coating
of epoxy, adhesive, and PE.
a. Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat-shrink PE sleeves.
C. Drawn-Temper Copper Tube: Comply with ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type A).
1. Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought copper, streamlined pattern.
2. Bronze Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.24, Class 150.
a. Gasket Material: Asbestos free, ASME B16.20, metallic, or ASME B16.21
nonmetallic, gaskets compatible with fuel oil.
b. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, cadmium-plated steel.
D. Annealed-Temper Copper Tube: Comply with ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M,
Type A).
1. Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought copper, streamlined pattern.
2. Flare Fittings: Comply with ASME B16.26 and SAE J513.
a. Copper fittings with long nuts.
b. Metal-to-metal compression seal without gasket.
c. Dryseal threads complying with ASME B1.20.3.
2.08 DOUBLE-CONTAINMENT PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Flexible, Double-Containment Piping: Comply with UL 971.

1. Pipe Materials: PVDF complying with ASTM D 3222 for carrier pipe with
mechanical couplings to seal carrier, and PE pipe complying with ASTM D 4976
for containment piping.
2. Fiberglass sumps.
3. Watertight sump entry boots, pipe adapters with test ports and tubes, coaxial
fittings, and couplings.
4. Minimum Operating Pressure Rating: 10 psig (69 kPa).
5. Plastic to Steel Pipe Transition Fittings: Factory-fabricated fittings with plastic
end matching or compatible with carrier piping, and steel pipe end complying with
ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.
6. Include design and fabrication of double-containment pipe and fitting assemblies
with provision for field installation of cable leak-detection system in annular space
between carrier and containment piping.
B. Rigid, Double-Containment Piping: Comply with UL 971.

1. RTRP: ASTM D 2996 or ASTM D 2997 carrier and containment piping and
mechanical couplings to seal carrier and containment piping or individually
bonded joints.
a. Minimum Operating-Pressure Rating for RTRP NPS 2 and NPS 3 (DN 50
and DN 80): 150 psig (1035 kPa).
b. Minimum Operating-Pressure Rating for RTRP NPS 4 and NPS 6
(DN 100 and DN 150): 125 psig (860 kPa). Compliance with UL 971 is
not required for NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger piping.
c. Fittings: RTRF complying with ASTM D 2996 or ASTM D 2997, and made
by RTRP manufacturer; watertight sump entry boots, termination, or other
end fittings.
2. Include design and fabrication of double-containment pipe and fitting assemblies
with provision for field installation of cable leak-detection system in annular space
between carrier and containment piping.
2.09 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Flexible Connectors: Comply with UL 567.

1. Metallic Connectors:
a. Listed and labeled for aboveground and underground applications by an
NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

b. Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze or stainless-steel,
wire-reinforcing protective jacket.
c. Minimum Operating Pressure: 150 psig (1035 kPa).
d. End Connections: Socket, flanged, or threaded end to match connected
piping.
e. Maximum Length: 30 inches (762 mm).
f. Swivel end, 50-psig (345-kPa) maximum operating pressure.
g. Factory-furnished anode.
2. Nonmetallic Connectors:
a. Listed and labeled for underground applications by an NRTL acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
b. PFTE bellows with woven, flexible, bronze or stainless-steel, wire-
reinforcing protective jacket.
c. Minimum Operating Pressure: 150 psig (1035 kPa).
d. End Connections: Socket, flanged, or threaded end to match connected
piping.
e. Maximum Length: 30 inches (762 mm).
f. Swivel end, 50-psig (345-kPa) maximum operating pressure.
g. Factory-furnished anode.
B. Y-Pattern Strainers:
1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain
connection.
2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged ends
for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
3. Strainer Screen: 60 -mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket
with 50 percent free area.
4. CWP Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa).
C. Basket Strainers:
1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, high-tensile cast iron with bolted cover and bottom
drain connection.
2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged ends
for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
3. Strainer Screen: 60-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket
D. T-Pattern Strainers:
1. Body: Ductile or malleable iron with removable access coupling and end cap for
strainer maintenance.
2. End Connections: Grooved ends.
3. Strainer Screen: 60-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket
E. Manual Air Vents:

1. Body: Bronze.
2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous.
3. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew.
4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2 (DN 15).
5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8 (DN 6).
7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F (107 deg C).
A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for fuel oil.
B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials
appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
C. Brazing Filler Metals: Alloy with melting point greater than 1000 deg F (540 deg C)
complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M. Brazing alloys containing more than 0.05 percent
phosphorus are prohibited.
D. Bonding Adhesive for Fiberglass Piping: As recommended by fiberglass piping

manufacturer.
2.11 MANUAL FUEL-OIL SHUTOFF VALVES
A. See valve schedule in Part 3 for where each valve type is applied in various services.
B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller for Liquid
Service: Comply with UL 842.
2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.
3. Dry seal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3.
4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in the valve schedule.
5. Service Mark: Initials "WOG" shall be permanently marked on valve body.
C. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Comply with
UL 842.
2. Flanged Ends: Comply with ASME B16.5 for steel flanges.
3. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in the valve schedule.
D. One-Piece, Bronze Ball Valve with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.

1. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.
2. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
3. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof.
4. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof.
5. Packing: Separate packnut with adjustable-stem packing threaded ends.
6. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in the valve schedule.
E. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.
2. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze.
4. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof.
5. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing.
F. Two-Piece, Regular-Port Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.
2. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze.
4. Seats: Reinforced TFE.
5. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing.
2.12 SPECIALTY VALVES
A. Pressure Relief Valves: Comply with UL 842.

1. Listed and labeled for fuel-oil service by an NRTL acceptable to authorities
2. Body: Brass, bronze, or cast steel.
3. Springs: Stainless steel, interchangeable.
4. Seat and Seal: Nitrile rubber.
5. Orifice: Stainless steel, interchangeable.
6. Factory-Applied Finish: Baked enamel.
7. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 150 psig (1035 kPa).
8. Relief Pressure Setting: 60 psig (414 kPa).
B. Oil Safety Valves: Comply with UL 842.

2. Body: Brass, bronze, or cast steel.
3. Springs: Stainless steel.
4. Seat and Diaphragm: Nitrile rubber.
5. Orifice: Stainless steel, interchangeable.
6. Factory-Applied Finish: Baked enamel.
7. Manual override port.
8. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 60 psig (414 kPa).
9. Maximum Outlet Pressure: 3 psig (21 kPa).
C. Emergency Shutoff Valves: Comply with UL 842.

2. Double poppet valve.
3. Body: ASTM A 126, cast iron.
4. Disk: FPM.
5. Poppet Spring: Stainless steel.
6. Stem: Plated brass.
7. O-Ring: FPM.
8. Packing Nut: PTFE-coated brass.
9. Fusible link to close valve at 165 deg F (74 deg C).
10. Thermal relief to vent line pressure buildup due to fire.
11. Air test port.
12. Maximum Operating Pressure: 0.5 psig (3.45 kPa).
D. Mechanical Leak Detector: Comply with FM / UL 842.

2. Body: ASTM A 126, cast iron.
3. O-Rings: Elastomeric compatible with fuel oil.
4. Piston and Stem Seals: PTFE.
5. Stem and Spring: Stainless steel.
6. Piston Cylinder: Burnished brass.
7. Indicated Leak Rate: Maximum 3 gph (3 mL/s) at 10 psig (69 kPa).
8. Leak Indication: Reduced flow.
2.13 HORIZONTAL, STEEL, DOUBLE WALL FUEL-OIL AST
A. Description: UL 142 and STI F921, double-wall, horizontal, steel tank; with primary- and
secondary-containment walls and interstitial space.
B. Construction: Fabricated with welded, carbon steel; suitable for operation at

atmospheric pressure and for storing fuel oil with specific gravity up to 1.1 and with
maintained temperature up to 150 deg F (66 deg C).
C. Supports: Manufacturer's standard structural steel welded to tank.
D. Supports: Manufacturer's standard type, steel or cast-iron cradles, for field installation.
1. Number of Supports: .
E. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. Capacity: as per drawings.
2. Diameter: As per drawings
3. Length: As per drawings
4. Connection Sizes:
a. Fill Line: As per drawings
b. Vent Line: As per drawings.
c. Outlet: As per drawings.
d. Return: As per drawings.
e. Gage: As per drawings.
5. Manholes:
a. Number Required: As per drawings.
b. Diameter: As per drawings.
6. Fuel-Oil Grade Number: As per drawings.
2.14 JACKETED, STEEL, FUEL-OIL UST
A. Description: Jacketed, horizontal, steel tank; complying with UL 58, and with plastic or
fiberglass jacket and corrosion-protection system according to UL 1746 and STI F922.
B. Construction: Tank fabricated with welded carbon steel, and jacket fabricated with
plastic or fiberglass and vacuum-sealed interstitial space; suitable for operation at
atmospheric pressure and with integral leak-detection device. Tank fabricated for the
following loads:
1. Depth of Bury: 3 feet (1 m) from top of tank to finished surface.
2. External Hydrostatic Pressure: To withstand general buckling with safety factor
of 2:1 if hole is fully flooded.
3. Surface Loads: AASHTO's "Specifications for Highway Bridges," H-20 axle
loads of 32,000 lb (14 515 kg).
C. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. Capacity: As per drawings.
2. Diameter: As per drawings.
3. Length: As per drawings.
4. Connection Sizes:
5. Fill Line: As per drawings.
6. Vent Line: As per drawings.
7. Outlet: As per drawings.
8. Return: As per drawings.
9. Gage: As per drawings.
10. Manholes:
a. Number Required: As per drawings.
b. Diameter: As per drawings.
11. Fuel-Oil Grade Number: As per drawings.
2.15 SHOP PAINTING OF AST
A. Apply manufacturer's standard prime coat to exterior steel surface of AST and supports.
B. Prepare exterior steel surface of AST and tank supports.
C. Shop Cleaning: After fabrication, blast clean according to SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3.
D. After cleaning, remove dust or residue from cleaned surfaces.
E. If surface develops rust before prime coat is applied, repeat surface preparation.
F. Apply manufacturer's standard prime coat to shop-cleaned, dry surface same day as
surface preparation.
G. Apply manufacturer's standard two-component, epoxy finish coats.
2.16 FUEL-OIL UST ACCESSORIES
A. Tank Manholes: 22-inch- (560-mm-) minimum diameter; bolted, flanged, and gasketed,
with extension collar; for access to inside of tank.
B. Steel Tank Masonry Supports: Two 6-by-6-by-3/8-inch (150-by-150-by-10-mm) steel

angles, long, located longitudinally on tank on each side of manholes and continuously
welded in place.
C. Threaded pipe connection fittings on top of tank for fill, supply, return, vent, sounding,
and gaging, in locations and of sizes indicated. Include cast-iron plugs for shipping.
D. Striker Plates: Inside tank, on bottom below fill, vent, sounding, gage, and other tube
openings.
E. Lifting Lugs: For handling and installation.
F. Ladders: Carbon-steel ladder inside tank, anchored to top and bottom. Include
reinforcement of tank at bottom of ladder.
G. Supply Tube: Extension of supply piping fitting into tank, terminating 6 inches (150 mm)
above tank bottom and cut at a 45-degree angle (1:1 slope).
H. Sounding and Gage Tubes: Extension of fitting into tank, terminating 6 inches (150 mm)
I. Containment Sumps: Fiberglass with sump base, add-on extension pieces as required,
sump top, lid, and gasket-seal joints. Include sump entry boots for pipe penetrations
through sidewalls.
J. Sump Entry Boots: Two-part pipe fitting for field assembly and of size required to fit
over pipe. Include gaskets shaped to fit sump sidewall, sleeves, seals, and clamps as
required for liquid-tight pipe penetrations.
K. Anchor Straps: Storage tank manufacturer's standard anchoring system, with straps,
strap-insulating material, cables and turnbuckles, of strength at least one and one-half
times maximum uplift force of empty tank without backfill in place.
L. Filter Mat: Geotextile woven or spun filter fabric, in 1 or more layers, for minimum total
weight of 3 oz./sq. yd. (101.7 g/sq. m).
M. Overfill Prevention Valves: Factory fabricated or shop or field assembled from

manufacturer's standard components. Include drop tube, cap, fill nozzle adaptor, check
valve mechanism or other devices, and vent if required to restrict flow at 95 percent of
tank capacity and to provide complete shutoff of filling at 99 percent of tank capacity.
2.17 FUEL-OIL AST ACCESSORIES
A. Tank Manholes: 22-inch- (560-mm-) minimum diameter; bolted, flanged, and gasketed;
centered on top of tank.
B. Tank Manholes: 22-inch- (560-mm-) minimum diameter; bolted, flanged, and gasketed;
on top and at side of tank.
C. Threaded pipe connection fittings on top of tank, for fill, supply, return, vent, sounding,
and gaging. Include cast-iron plugs for shipping.
D. Threaded pipe connection fittings on top or sides of tank as indicated, for fill, supply,
return, vent, sounding, and gaging. Include cast-iron plugs for shipping.
E. Striker Plates: Inside tank, on bottom below fill, vent, sounding, gage, and other tube
openings.
F. Lifting Lugs: For handling and installation.
G. Ladders: Carbon-steel ladder inside tank, anchored to top and bottom, and located as
indicated. Include reinforcement of tank at bottom of ladder.
H. Ladders: Carbon-steel ladder outside tank, anchored to top and side wall. Comply with
requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for exterior steel ladder.
1. Cage: Include welded steel cage around ladders for tanks 20 feet (6 m) high or
higher.
I. Supply Tube: Extension of supply piping fitting into tank, terminating 6 inches (150 mm)
J. Sounding and Gage Tubes: Extension of fitting into tank, terminating 6 inches (150 mm)

2.18 FUEL-OIL STORAGE TANK PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Fitting Materials: Cast iron, malleable iron, brass, or corrosion-resistant metal; suitable
for fuel-oil service.
1. Surface, Flush-Mounted Fittings: Waterproof and suitable for truck traffic.
2. Aboveground-Mounted Fittings: Weatherproof.
B. Spill-Containment Fill Boxes: Flush mounting, with drainage feature to drain oil into
tank, threaded fill-pipe connection, and wrench operation.
C. Fill Boxes: Flush mounting, with threaded fill-pipe connection and wrench operation.
D. Locking Fill Boxes: Flush mounting, with locking-type inner fill cap for standard padlock
and threaded fill-pipe connection.
E. Supply and Sounding Drop Tubes: Fuel-oil supply piping or fitting, inside tank,
terminating 6 inches (150 mm) above bottom of tank, and with end cut at a 45-degree
angle (1:1 slope).
F. Pipe Adapters and Extensions: Compatible with piping and fittings.
G. Suction Strainers and Check Valves: Bronze or corrosion-resistant metal components.
H. Foot Valves and Antisiphon Valves: Poppet-type, bronze or corrosion-resistant metal

components.
I. Weatherproof Vent Cap: Cast- or malleable-iron increaser fitting with corrosion-resistant

wire screen, with free area at least equal to cross-sectional area of connecting pipe and
threaded-end connection.
J. Metal Manholes: 22-inch- (560-mm-) minimum diameter frame and cover. Furnish
manhole units of adequate size for access to fittings if size is not indicated.
K. Monitoring Well Caps: Locking pipe plug and manhole.
2.19 DUPLEX HORIZONTAL DISPLACEMENT FUEL-OIL TRANSFER PUMP SETS
A. Description: Comply with HI M109.

2. Type: Positive-displacement, rotary type.
3. Impeller: Steel gear with crescent.
4. Housing: Cast-iron foot mounted.
5. Bearings: Bronze, self-lubricating.
6. Shaft: Polished steel.
7. Seals: Mechanical.
8. Base: Steel.
9. Pressure Relief: Built in.
10. Discharge Check Valve: Built in.
B. Drive: V-belt with guard, gear reducer, or direct close coupled.
C. Controls:
1. Run pumps to maintain minimum manifold pressure with outdoor-air temperature
less than 60 deg F (16 deg C) .
2. Run pumps on seven-day schedule.
3. Stage pumps on pressure at a common supply manifold.
4. Alternate pumps to equalize run time.
5. Alarm motor failure.
6. Manual reset dry-run protection. Stop pumps if fuel level falls below pump
suction.
7. Deenergize and alarm pump locked rotor condition.
8. Alarm open circuit, high and low voltage.
9. Indicating lights for power on, run, and off normal conditions.
10. Interface with automatic control system is specified in Division 23 Section
"Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" to control and indicate the following:
a. Start/stop pump set when required by schedule, fuel-fired appliance
operation, day tank level control, or weather conditions.
b. Operating status.
c. Alarm off-normal status.
D. Motor: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure
type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section "Common
Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven
load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for
electrical devices and connections specified in Division 26 Sections.
E. Piping Furnished with Pumps: Steel with ferrous fittings and threaded or welded joints.
F. Strainers Furnished with Pumps: Duplex, basket type with corrosion-resistant-metal-

screen baskets.
G. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. Number of Stages: As per drawings.
2. Capacity (Each Pump): As per drawings.
3. Inlet Vacuum: As per drawings.
4. Discharge Pressure: As per drawings.
5. Inlet and Outlet Size: As per drawings.
6. Motor Speed: As per drawings.
7. Motor Horsepower (Each Pump): As per drawings.
8. Electrical Characteristics (Pump Set):
a. Volts: 240.
b. Phase: Three.
c. Hertz: 50.
d. Full-Load Amperes: Insert value.
e. Minimum Circuit Ampacity: Insert value.
f. Maximum Overcurrent Protection: .
2.20 FUEL MAINTENANCE SYSTEM
A. Description: Factory fabricated and wired fuel maintenance system for fuel-oil filtration;
with enclosure, filter, fuel-oil pump, and controls; FM approved, listed, and labeled by an
NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 3R, painted steel containing pumps, filters,
accessories, and controls. Hinged door on the front of enclosure.
2. Pump: Comply with HI M109, steel-gear-with-crescent, positive-displacement,
direct- coupled, rotary-type.
3. Materials: Cast-iron housing; bronze bearings; steel shaft; mechanical seals;
and built-in, pressure relief bypass valve.
4. Motor: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor,
enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 23
Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
a. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough
so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range
above 1.0.
b. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for
electrical devices and connections specified in Division 26 Sections.
5. Piping: Steel with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints or wrought-steel
fittings and welded joints.
6. Multistage Filter: Spin-on, replaceable types.
a. Stage 1: 100-mesh strainer.
b. Stage 2: Centrifuge to separate particulates and water from oil.
c. Stage 3: Coalescing water and particulate filter.
d. Stage 4: 30-micron particulate removal.
e. Stage 5: 10-micron particulate removal.
f. Stage 6: Minimum 99.5 percent water removal with see-through bowl and
water-sensor probe.
g. Stage 7: 1.5-micron particulate removal.
7. Multiple-Tank Manifolds:
a. Manifold fabricated of Schedule 80, black steel pipe and threaded nipples
for two tanks.
b. Solenoid valves for supply and return piping to each tank.
c. Strainers for each tank supply connection.
8. Programmable Logic Controller:
a. Alarm on maximum 15-in. Hg (51-kPa) vacuum at pump suction indicating
plugged filter.
b. Alarm on high water level in filter.
c. Alarm leak in enclosure.
d. Touch screen; with minimum 2-line, 20-character, backlit, LCD display.
e. Controller strip heater with thermostat.
9. Interface with automatic control system is specified in Division 23 Section
"Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" to control and indicate the following:
a. Start/stop system when required by schedule.
b. Operating status.
c. Alarm off-normal status.
B. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. Capacity (Each Pump): As per drawings.
2. Maximum Suction Lift: As per drawings.
3. Inlet and Outlet Size: .
4. Motor Horsepower:
5. Electrical Characteristics (Pump Set):
a. Volts: 240
b. Phase: Three.
c. Hertz: 50.
d. Full-Load Amperes: .
e. Minimum Circuit Ampacity: .
f. Maximum Overcurrent Protection: .

2.21 LIQUID-LEVEL GUAGE SYSTEM
A. Description: Calibrated, liquid-level gage system complying with UL 180 with floats or
other sensors and remote annunciator panel.
B. Annunciator Panel: With visual and audible, high-tank-level and low-tank-level alarms,
fuel indicator with registration in gallons (liters), and overfill alarm. Include gage volume
range that covers fuel-oil storage capacity.
C. Controls: Electrical, operating on 240 V ac.
D. The level sensor should have facility to give signal to BAS.
2.22 LEAK-DETECTION AND MONITORING SYSTEM
A. Cable and Sensor System: Comply with UL 1238.

1. Calibrated, leak-detection and monitoring system with probes and other sensors
and remote alarm panel for fuel-oil storage tanks and fuel-oil piping.
2. Include fittings and devices required for testing.
3. Controls: Electrical, operating on 240 V ac.
4. Calibrated, liquid-level gage complying with UL 180 with floats or other sensors
and remote annunciator panel.
5. Remote Annunciator Panel: With visual and audible, high-tank-level and low-
tank-level alarms, fuel indicator with registration in gallons (liters), and overfill
alarm. Include gage volume range that covers fuel-oil storage capacity.
B. Hydrostatic System: Comply with UL 1238.

1. Calibrated, leak-detection and monitoring system with brine antifreeze solution,
reservoir sensor, and electronic control panel to monitor leaks in inner and outer
tank walls.
2. Include fittings and devices required for testing.
4. Calibrated, liquid-level gage complying with UL 180 with floats or other sensors
and remote annunciator panel.
5. Remote Annunciator Panel: With visual and audible, high-tank-level and low-
tank-level alarms, fuel indicator with registration in gallons (liters), and overfill
alarm. Include gage volume range that covers fuel-oil storage capacity.
2.23 FUEL OIL
A. Fuel Oil: ASTM D 396, Grade No. 1.
B. Diesel Fuel Oil: ASTM D 975, Grade Low Sulfur, high volatility.
2.24 SLEEVES
A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized
steel, plain ends.
B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron

pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.
1. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe.
Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe and sleeve.
2. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel.
length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one nut
and bolt for each sealing element.
2.26 ESCUTCHEONS
A. General Requirements for Escutcheons: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons

and floor plates, with ID to fit around pipe or tube and with OD that completely covers
opening.
B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Escutcheons: Deep-drawn brass with polished chrome-plated

finish.
C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Escutcheons: With set screw.

D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Escutcheons: With concealed hinge and set screw.

E. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Escutcheons: With set screw and chrome-plated finish.
F. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Escutcheons: With concealed hinge, set screw or spring

clips, and chrome-plated finish.
G. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Escutcheons: Cast-iron floor plate.
H. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Escutcheons: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.
2.27 GROUT

grout.
1. Characteristics: Posthardening, volume adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, PE film warning tape

manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches
(152 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of
utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection,
detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches (762 mm) deep;
colored yellow.

2.29 CONCRETE MANHOLES
A. Precast Concrete Manhole Sections: ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M), base and
concentric-cone sections with integral ladder or steps.
B. Cast-Iron Frame and Cover: Heavy-duty, water-resistant, cast-iron manhole frame,

gasket, and bolted cover; 24-inch- (609-mm-) diameter, inside opening dimension; 8-
inch (203-mm) frame riser height.
A. Pressure test and inspect fuel-oil storage tanks, after fabrication and before shipment,
according to ASME and the following:
1. Horizontal, Double-Wall Steel ASTs: UL 142, STI F921, and STI R931.
Affix standards organization's code stamp.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for fuel-oil piping system to verify actual locations of piping
connections before equipment installation.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 EARTHWORK
A. Comply with requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating,

trenching, and backfilling.
3.03 PREPARATION
A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off fuel oil to premises or piping section.
B. Comply with NFPA 30 and NFPA 31 requirements for prevention of accidental ignition.
3.04 OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install underground fuel-oil piping buried at least 18 inches (457 mm) below finished
grade. Comply with requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating,
trenching, and backfilling.
1. If fuel-oil piping is installed with less than 12 inches (305 mm) of cover to finished
grade, install in containment piping.
B. Steel Piping with Protective Coating:

1. Apply joint cover kits to pipe after joining, to cover, seal, and protect joints.
2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective
coating manufacturer. Review protective coating damage with Architect prior to
repair.
3. Replace pipe having damaged PE coating with new pipe.
C. Install double-containment, fuel-oil pipe at a minimum slope of 1 percent downward
toward fuel-oil storage tank sump.
D. Install vent pipe at a minimum slope of 2 percent downward toward fuel-oil storage tank
sump.
E. Assemble and install entry boots for pipe penetrations through sump sidewalls for liquid-
tight joints.
F. Install metal pipes and tubes, fittings, valves, and flexible connectors at piping
connections to AST and UST.
G. Install fittings for changes in direction in rigid pipe.
H. Install system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system
operating pressure.
I. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe

sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Install sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm)
annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
J. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves.
sleeve seals.
K. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble

mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten
bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make
watertight seal.
L. Install pressure gage on suction and discharge from each pump. Pressure gages are
specified in Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."
3.05 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of
calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as
indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
B. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure
during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.
C. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment
rooms and service areas.
removal.
F. Install piping free of sags and bends.

G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
H. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

1. New Piping:
pattern type.
b. Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
c. Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
stamped-steel type.
d. Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece-brass type
e. Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-
steel type and set screw.
f. Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with
polished chrome-plated finish.
g. Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type with
concealed hinge and As per drawings As per drawings or spring clips.
h. Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type.
i. Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with set
screw.
j. Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate
type.
I. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and
floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with
requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
J. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
K. Comply with requirements for equipment specifications in Division 22 and Division 23

Sections for roughing-in requirements.
L. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, or utility spaces; above ceilings; below
grade or floors; and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view.
M. Prohibited Locations:
1. Do not install fuel-oil piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or trash
chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or
elevator shafts.
2. Do not install fuel-oil piping in solid walls or partitions.
N. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level
side down.
O. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.
P. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller at final connection to each piece of
equipment and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required on flanged devices.
Q. Do not use fuel-oil piping as grounding electrode.
R. Install Y-pattern strainer on inlet side of fuel-oil pump.

A. Install manual fuel-oil shutoff valves on branch connections to fuel-oil appliance.
B. Install valves in accessible locations.
C. Protect valves from physical damage.
D. Install metal tag attached with metal chain indicating fuel-oil piping systems.
E. Identify valves as specified in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and
Equipment."
F. Install pressure relief valves in distribution piping between the supply and return lines.
G. Install one-piece, bronze ball valve with hose end connection at low points in fuel-oil
piping.
H. Install manual air vents at high points in fuel-oil piping.
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
welds.
D. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified

processes and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.
1. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
2. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at
field welds and where damage to coating occurs during construction.
Tube" Chapter.
F. Flanged Joints: Install gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application.
Install gasket concentrically positioned.
G. Flared Joints: Comply with SAE J513. Tighten finger tight, then use wrench according
to fitting manufacturer's written recommendations. Do not overtighten.
H. Fiberglass-Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join

3.08 FUEL-OIL AST INSTALLATION
A. Install tank bases and supports.
B. Connect piping and vent fittings.
C. Install ground connections.
D. Install tank leak-detection and monitoring devices.
E. Install steel ASTs according to STI R912.
F. Install insulated and concrete-vaulted, steel ASTs according to STI R942.
G. Fill storage tanks with fuel oil.
3.09 FUEL-OIL UST INSTALLATION
A. Excavate to sufficient depth for a minimum of 3 feet (1 m) of earth cover from top of tank
to finished grade. Allow for cast-in-place, concrete-ballast base plus 6 inches (150 mm)
of sand or pea gravel between ballast base and tank. Extend excavation at least 12
inches (300 mm) around perimeter of tank.
B. Set tie-down eyelets for hold-down straps in concrete-ballast base and tie to reinforcing
steel.
C. Place 6 inches (152 mm) of clean sand or pea gravel on top of concrete-ballast base.
D. Set tank on fill materials and install hold-down straps.
E. Connect piping.
F. Install tank leak-detection and monitoring devices.
G. Install containment sumps.
H. Backfill excavation with clean sand or pea gravel in 12-inch (305-mm) lifts and tamp
backfill lift to consolidate.
I. Install filter mat between top of backfill material and earth fill.
J. Install steel USTs with the STI-P3 corrosion-protection system according to STI R821
and STI R891. Protect anodes during tank placement and backfilling operations.
K. Install composite, steel USTs according to STI R913 and STI R891.
L. Install jacketed, steel USTs according to STI R923 and STI R891.
M. Install FRP USTs with FRP hold-down straps, manhole extensions, and manhole risers.
N. Fill storage tanks with fuel oil.
3.10 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Pipe hanger and support and equipment support materials and installation requirements
are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and
Equipment."
B. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and
minimum rod sizes:
1. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) and Smaller: Maximum span, 84 inches (2130 mm);
minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm).
2. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40): Maximum span, 108 inches (2740 mm); minimum rod size,
3/8 inch (10 mm).
3. NPS 2 (DN 50): Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10
mm).
4. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): Maximum span, 11 feet (3.4 m); minimum rod size, 1/2 inch
(13 mm).
5. NPS 3 (DN 80): Maximum span, 12 feet (3.7 m); minimum rod size, 1/2 inch (13
mm).
mm).
C. Support vertical steel pipe at each floor and at spacing not greater than 15 feet (4.5 m).
D. Install hangers for horizontal, drawn-temper copper tubing with the following maximum
spacing and minimum rod sizes:
1. NPS 3/4 (DN 20) and Smaller: Maximum span, 60 inches (1524 mm); minimum
rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm).
2. NPS 1 (DN 25): Maximum span, 72 inches (1830 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8
inch (10 mm).
3/8 inch (10 mm).
4. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): Maximum span, 96 inches (2440
mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm).
1/2 inch (13 mm).
mm).
7. NPS 4 (DN 100): Maximum span, 11 feet (3.4 m); minimum rod size, 5/8 inch
(16 mm).
E. Support vertical copper tube at each floor and at spacing not greater than 10 feet (3 m).
3.11 FUEL-OIL PUMP INSTALLATION
A. Submersible Pumps:
1. Suspend pumps from supply piping and anchored to bottom of tank.
B. Transfer Pumps:
1. Install pumps with access space for periodic maintenance including removal of
motors, impellers, and accessories.
2. Set pumps on and anchor to concrete base.
C. Install two-piece, full-port ball valves at suction and discharge of pumps.
D. Install mechanical leak-detector valves at pump discharge.

E. Install Y-pattern strainer on inlet side of simplex fuel-oil pumps.
F. Install check valve on discharge of simplex fuel-oil pumps.
G. Install suction piping with minimum fittings and change of direction.
H. Install vacuum and pressure gage, upstream and downstream respectively, at each
pump to measure the differential pressure across the pump. Pressure gages are
specified in Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."
3.12 FUEL MAINTENANCE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install suction line, with foot valve, at one end of storage tank, 1 inch (25 mm) from the
bottom of tank.
B. Install return line at the opposite end of storage tank from suction line.
3.13 LIQUID-LEVEL GAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install liquid-level gage system. Locate panel inside building where indicated.
3.14 LEAK-DETECTION AND MONITORING SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install leak-detection and monitoring system. Install alarm panel inside building where
indicated.
1. Double-Wall, Fuel-Oil Storage Tanks: Install probes Use factory-installed integral
probes in interstitial space.
2. Single-Wall, Fuel-Oil Storage Tanks: Install probes as indicated.
3. Double-Containment, Fuel-Oil Piping: Install leak-detection sensor probes in
fuel-oil storage tank containment sumps and at low points in piping.
4. Install liquid-level gage.
3.15 CONNECTIONS
A. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
B. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final
connection to each piece of equipment having threaded pipe connection.
C. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at
final connection to each piece of equipment having flanged pipe connection.
D. Connect piping to equipment with ball valve and union. Install union between valve and
equipment.
A. Nameplates, pipe identification, and signs are specified in Division 23 Section

"Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment
nameplates and signs on or near each service regulator, service meter, and earthquake
valve.
1. Text: In addition to identifying unit, distinguish between multiple units, inform
operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency
precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations.
C. Install detectable warning tape directly above fuel-oil piping, 12 inches (304 mm) below
finished grade, except 6 inches (152 mm) below subgrade under pavements and slabs.
Terminate tracer wire in an accessible area, and identify as "tracer wire" for future use
with plastic-laminate sign.
1. Piping: Over underground fuel-oil distribution piping.
2. Fuel-Oil Storage Tanks: Over edges of each UST.
3.17 FIELD PAINTING OF AST
A. Prepare and touch up damaged exterior surface of AST and supports as specified in
"Shop Painting of AST" Article.
B. Prepare exterior steel surface of AST and tank supports.
C. Field Cleaning: After fabrication, blast clean according to SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3
cleaning, remove dust or residue from cleaned surfaces.
D. If surfaces develop rust before prime coat is applied, repeat surface preparation.
E. Prepare surface of AST and supports and apply painting systems according to
specifications in Division 09 Section "High-Performance Coatings" for severe
environment finish for ferrous metal.
3.18 FIELD PAINTING OF ABOVEGROUND PIPING
A. Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for painting interior and
exterior fuel-oil piping.
B. Paint exposed, exterior metal piping, valves, and piping specialties, except components
with factory-applied paint or protective coating.
1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.1D.
a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel (flat).
d. Color: Gray.
C. Paint exposed, interior metal piping, valves, and piping specialties, except components
with factory-applied paint or protective coating.
1. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI INT 5.1Q.
a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Interior latex (flat).
d. Color: Gray.
2. Alkyd System: MPI INT 5.1E.
a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd (flat).
d. Color: Gray.
D. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-applied finishes with
materials and by procedures to match original factory finish.
3.19 CONCRETE BASES

1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches
3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through
equipment.
B. Use 3000-psig (20.7-MPa) , 28-day, compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement

as specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including
connections.
C. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations,
including connections, and to assist in testing.
D. Tests and Inspections:

1. Tanks: Minimum hydrostatic or compressed-air test pressures for fuel-oil storage
tanks that have not been factory tested and do not bear the ASME code stamp or
a listing mark acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
a. Single-Wall Tanks: Minimum 3 psig (20.7 kPa) and maximum 5 psig (34.5
kPa).
b. Double-Wall Tanks:
1) Inner Tanks: Minimum 3 psig (20.7 kPa) and maximum 5 psig
(34.5 kPa).
2) Interstitial Space: Minimum 3 psig (20.7 kPa) and maximum 5 psig
(34.5 kPa), or 5.3-in. Hg (18-kPa) vacuum.
c. Where vertical height of fill and vent pipes is such that the static head
imposed on the bottom of the tank is greater than 10 psig (69 kPa),
hydrostatically test the tank and fill and vent pipes to a pressure equal to
the static head thus imposed.
d. Maintain the test pressure for one hour.

2. Piping: Minimum hydrostatic or pneumatic test-pressures measured at highest
point in system:
a. Fuel-Oil Distribution Piping: Minimum 5 psig (34.5 kPa) for minimum 30
minutes.
b. Fuel-Oil, Double-Containment Piping:
1) Carrier Pipe: Minimum 5 psig (34.5 kPa) for minimum 30 minutes.
2) Containment Conduit: Minimum 5 psig (34.5 kPa) for minimum 60
minutes.
c. Suction Piping: Minimum 20-in. Hg (68 kPa) for minimum 30 minutes.
d. Isolate storage tanks if test pressure in piping will cause pressure in
storage tanks to exceed 10 psig (69 kPa).
3. Inspect and test fuel-oil piping according to NFPA 31, "Tests of Piping"
Paragraph; and according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
4. Test liquid-level gage for accuracy by manually measuring fuel-oil levels at not
less than three number or describe procedure different depths while filling tank
and checking against gage indication.
5. Test leak-detection and monitoring system for accuracy by manually operating
sensors and checking against alarm panel indication.
6. Start fuel-oil transfer pumps to verify for proper operation of pump and check for
leaks.
8. Bleed air from fuel-oil piping using manual air vents.
E. Fuel-oil piping and equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and
inspections.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.21 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain liquid-level gage systems leak-detection and
monitoring systems.
3.22 OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Underground fuel-oil piping shall be one of the following. Size indicated is carrier-pipe
size.
1. Flexible, double-containment piping.
2. Rigid, double-containment piping.
B. Underground fuel-oil-tank fill and vent piping shall be one of the following:
1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Steel pipe, steel or malleable-iron threaded fittings,
and threaded joints. Coat pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.
2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and welded
joints. Coat pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.
C. Containment Conduit: Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Coat
pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.
D. Aboveground fuel-oil piping shall be one of the following:

1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Steel pipe, steel or malleable-iron threaded fittings,
and threaded joints.
2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and welded
joints.
3. Drawn-temper copper tube with wrought-copper fittings and brazed joints.
3.23 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Aboveground fuel-oil piping shall be one of the following:

1. NPS 1/2 (DN 15) and Smaller: Steel pipe.
2. NPS 5/8 to NPS 2 (DN 18 to DN 50): Steel pipe, steel or malleable-iron threaded
fittings, and threaded joints.
3. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Steel pipe, steel fittings, and welded or flanged
joints.
4. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.
5. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints.
6. Annealed-temper copper tube, brass fittings, and flared joints.
7. Drawn-temper copper tubing, copper fittings, and brazed joints.
3.24 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL FUEL-OIL SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Distribution piping valves for pipe NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller shall be one of the
following:
1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim.
2. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim.
B. Distribution piping valves for pipe NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger shall be one of the
following:
1. Two-piece, full regular-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim.
2. Bronze, nonlubricated plug valve.
C. Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be one of the following:
1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim.
2. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim.
3.25 FUEL OIL PIPEWORK
A. Install all fuel oil pipework as per standards.
B. Oil suction line piping shall be tested at 0.25" vacuum prior to backfilling. The test shall
be witnessed by consultant and Engineer.
C. The system indicated in the tender documents is for guidance only, contractor shall
ensure complete design, supply and installation of the fuel system in accordance with
KNPC regulations whether indicated in the contract documents or not without additional
cost. The contractor shall obtain necessary approval from KNPC and all other
END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 2300
REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning applications.

1. Section 23 8126 – Split- System Air – Conditioners.
2. Section 23 8127 – VRF Split- System Air – Conditioners.
3. Section 23 0700 - HVAC Insulation
A. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-134a:

1. Suction Lines for Air-Conditioning Applications: 115 psig (793 kPa).
2. Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications: 225 psig (1551 kPa).
3. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: 225 psig (1551 kPa).
B. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-407C:

C. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-410A:

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this article according to the conditions of the contract.
B. Product Data: For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated. Include
pressure drop, based on manufacturer's test data, for the following:
1. Thermostatic expansion valves.
2. Solenoid valves.
3. Hot-gas bypass valves.
4. Filter dryers.
5. Strainers.
6. Pressure-regulating valves.
C. Shop Drawings: Show layout of refrigerant piping and specialties, including pipe, tube,
and fitting sizes, flow capacities, valve arrangements and locations, slopes of horizontal
runs, oil traps, double risers, wall and floor penetrations, and equipment connection
details. Show interface and spatial relationships between piping and equipment.
KEO/19-3262-0000 23 2300/1 Refrigerant Piping
D. Refrigerant piping indicated on Drawings are diagrammatic. Size piping and design
actual piping layout, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and pipe and tube
sizes to accommodate, as a minimum, equipment provided, elevation difference
between compressor and evaporator, and length of piping to ensure proper operation
and compliance with warranties of connected equipment.
E. Refrigerant pipes to be sized to meet the actual sensible and total cooling capacity as
provided in the equipment schedule based on the actual distance between the Indoor
and Outdoor units.
F. Welding certificates.
G. Field quality-control test reports.
H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to
include in maintenance manuals.
I. Critical Refrigerant Concentration calculations for all critical spaces required by

ASHRAE Standard 15 and 34 for engineer’s review.
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
B. Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems."
C. Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components."
D. UL standard : Provide products complying with UL 207, “ Refrigerant-Containing

components and accessories, Non electrical”, or UL 429,”Electrically operated valves” .
E. Listing and Labeling : Provide products specified in this section that are UL Listed and
Labeled.
F. ASHRAE 34 : Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems and Designation and

Classification of Refrigerants
1.05 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store piping in a clean and protected area with end caps in place to ensure that piping
interior and exterior are clean when installed.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
These items are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."
1.07 Definitions
A. NRTL: National Recognized Testing Laboratory.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

2.02 REFRIGERANT PIPING FOR SPLIT SYSTEMS
A. All refrigerant piping assembled at site shall consist of copper tubing to ASTM
specification B -88 type “k” hard drawn and soldered joints. Joints fittings shall be of
wrought copper or cast brass. Where required for gauges etc. tubing not larger than
3/8” may be of type “k” soft ( annealed) with flared tube or double ferrule
compression fitting suitable for high pressure . flux and solder, recommended by
the manufactures of tubing and fittings and, shall only be used during
installation.
B. Refrigerant piping system shall be designed so as to :

1. Ensure proper feed to evaporators.
2. Provide practical line sizes without excessive pressure drop.
3. Protect the compressors by : (1) preventing the trapping of oil in any part
of System, (2) minimizing the loss of lubricating oil from the compressor at all
times and (3) Preventing the liquid refrigerant from entering the compressor
during Operation and shut-down.
4. Gauges and meters etc., supported directly on piping shall be properly
leveled
C. Refrigerant stop valves shall be of back seating, key operated, seal up type .
Valves which are to be in constant use shall have hand wheels and shall be of
backless type . Valves connected in copper tubing shall have solder type ends
or flanged ends and soldered flange adapters.
D. Accessories for field assembled piping systems like oil separators, liquid receivers, heat
exchangers, expansion valves, strainers, sight glass, etc., shall be installed as per
manufacturers recommendations and specifications.
2.03 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K or L (ASTM B 88M, Type A or B) ASTM B 280,
Type ACR.
B. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.
C. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.
D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32. Use 95-5 tin antimony or alloy HB solder to join
copper socket fittings on copper pipe.
E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.
F. Flexible Connectors:

1. Body: Tin-bronze bellows with woven, flexible, tinned-bronze-wire-reinforced
protective jacket.
2. End Connections: Socket ends.
3. Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4-inch (20-mm) misalignment in
minimum 7-inch- (180-mm-) long assembly.
4. Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 500 psig (3450 kPa).
2.04 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS (If Applicable)
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; Type, Grade, and wall
thickness as selected in Part 3 piping applications articles.
B. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, for welded joints.
C. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, steel, including bolts, nuts, and
gaskets, bevel-welded end connection, and raised face.
D. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials
appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
E. Flanged Unions:
1. Body: Forged-steel flanges for NPS 1 to NPS 1-1/2 (DN 25 to DN 40) and ductile
iron for NPS 2 to NPS 3 (DN 50 to DN 80). Apply rust-resistant finish at factory.
2. Gasket: Fiber asbestos free.
3. Fasteners: Four plated-steel bolts, with silicon bronze nuts. Apply rust-resistant
finish at factory.
4. End Connections: Brass tailpiece adapters for solder-end connections to copper
tubing.
F. Flexible Connectors:
1. Body: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, stainless-steel-wire-reinforced
protective jacket
2. End Connections:
a. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: With threaded-end connections.
b. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: With flanged-end connections.
2.05 VALVES AND SPECIALTIES (As Applicable)
A. Diaphragm Packless Valves:

1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze; globe design with straight-
through or angle pattern.
2. Diaphragm: Phosphor bronze and stainless steel with stainless-steel spring.
3. Operator: Rising stem and hand wheel.
4. Seat: Nylon.
5. End Connections: Socket, union, or flanged.
6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig (3450 kPa).
B. Packed-Angle Valves:
1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze.
2. Packing: Molded stem, back seating, and replaceable under pressure.
3. Operator: Rising stem.
4. Seat: Nonrotating, self-aligning polytetrafluoroethylene.
5. Seal Cap: Forged-brass or valox hex cap.
6. End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged.
C. Check Valves:
1. Body: Ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; globe pattern.
2. Bonnet: Bolted ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; or brass hex plug.
3. Piston: Removable polytetrafluoroethylene seat.
4. Closing Spring: Stainless steel.
5. Manual Opening Stem: Seal cap, plated-steel stem, and graphite seal.
6. End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged.
7. Maximum Opening Pressure: 0.50 psig (3.4 kPa).
D. Service Valves:
1. Body: Forged brass with brass cap including key end to remove core.
2. Core: Removable ball-type check valve with stainless-steel spring.
3. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene.
4. End Connections: Copper spring.
E. Solenoid Valves: Comply with ARI 760 and UL 429; listed and labeled by an NRTL.
1. Body and Bonnet: Plated steel.
2. Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless steel.
4. End Connections: Threaded.
5. Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by
location with 1/2-inch (16-GRC) conduit adapter, and 24/115/208 -V ac coil.
8. Manual operator.
F. Safety Relief Valves: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; listed and
labeled by an NRTL.
1. Body and Bonnet: Ductile iron and steel, with neoprene O-ring seal.
2. Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.
3. Seat Disc: Polytetrafluoroethylene.
4. End Connections: Threaded.
G. Thermostatic Expansion Valves: Comply with ARI 750.

1. Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Forged brass or steel.
2. Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.
3. Packing and Gaskets: Non-asbestos.
4. Capillary and Bulb: Copper tubing filled with refrigerant charge.
5. Suction Temperature: 40 deg F (4.4 deg C)
6. Superheat: Adjustable.
7. Reverse-flow option (for heat-pump applications).
8. End Connections: Socket, flare, or threaded union.
9. Working Pressure Rating: 700 psig (4820 kPa) 450 psig (3100 kPa)
H. Hot-Gas Bypass Valves: Comply with UL 429; listed and labeled by an NRTL.
1. Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Ductile iron or steel.
2. Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.
3. Packing and Gaskets: Non-asbestos.
4. Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless steel.
6. Equalizer: Internal/External.
7. Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by
location with 1/2-inch (16-GRC) conduit adapter, and 24/115/208 -V ac coil.
8. End Connections: Socket.
9. Set Pressure.
10. Throttling Range: Maximum 5 psig (34 kPa).
2.06 REFRIGERANT PIPING SPECIALTIES (As Applicable)
A. Straight-Type Strainers:
1. Body: Welded steel with corrosion-resistant coating.
2. Screen: 100-mesh stainless steel.
3. End Connections: Socket or flare.
B. Angle-Type Strainers:
1. Body: Forged brass or cast bronze.
2. Drain Plug: Brass hex plug.
3. Screen: 100-mesh monel.
C. Moisture/Liquid Indicators:
1. Body: Forged brass.
2. Window: Replaceable, clear, fused glass window with indicating element
protected by filter screen.
3. Indicator: Color coded to show moisture content in ppm.
4. Minimum Moisture Indicator Sensitivity: Indicate moisture above 60 ppm.
D. Replaceable-Core Filter Dryers: Comply with ARI 730.

1. Body and Cover: Painted-steel shell with ductile-iron cover, stainless-steel
screws, and neoprene gaskets.

2. Filter Cartridge: Pleated media with integral end rings, stainless steel support,
ARI 730 rated for capacity.
3. Filter Dryer Cartridge: Pleated media with solid core sieve with activated alumina,
ARI 730 rated for capacity.
4. Wax removal cartridge: Pleated media with solid core sieve with activated
charcoal and desiccant with integral gaskets.
5. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless-steel support.
6. Desiccant Media: Activated alumina/charcoal.
7. Designed for reverse flow (for heat-pump applications).
9. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 (DN 8) connections at entering and leaving sides for
pressure differential measurement.
10. Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig (14 kPa)
11. Rated Flow tons (kW).
E. Permanent Filter Dryers: Comply with ARI 730.

1. Body and Cover: Painted-steel shell.
2. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless-steel support.
3. Desiccant Media: Activated alumina/charcoal.
4. Designed for reverse flow (for heat-pump applications).
6. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 (DN 8) connections at entering and leaving sides for
pressure differential measurement.
7. Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig (14 kPa)
8. Rated Flow: tons (kW).
F. Mufflers:
G. Receivers: Comply with ARI 495.

1. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; listed and labeled by an
NRTL.
2. Comply with UL 207; listed and labeled by an NRTL.
4. Tappings: Inlet, outlet, liquid level indicator, and safety relief valve.
5. End Connections: Socket or threaded.
H. Liquid Accumulators: Comply with ARI 495.

2. End Connections: Socket or threaded.

I. Flexible Connectors: 3450 kPa operating pressure; seamless tin-bronze or stainless
steel core, high tensile bronze braid covering, solder end connections and synthetic
covering; dehydrated, pressure tested minimum 180mm long.
J. Insulation: Refer to section 23 0700 - HVAC Insulation.
2.07 REFRIGERANTS

provided shall be from the manufacturer listed in section 23 9000 - Approved Vendors
List (AVL).
B. ASHRAE 34, R-134a: Tetrafluoroethane.
C. ASHRAE 34, R-407C: Difluoromethane/Pentafluoroethane/1,1,1,2-Tetrafluoroethane.
D. ASHRAE 34, R-410A: Pentafluorothane/Difluoromethane.
E. And or all refrigerant acceptable by MEW & PAHW
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting performance of refrigerant piping. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
A. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.
B. All refrigerant pipes shall be installed to allow access for maintenance.
C. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic

Mechanical Materials and Methods.
D. Install piping in short and direct arrangement with minimum number of joints, elbows
and fittings.
E. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment
rooms and service areas.
F. Arrange piping to allow normal inspection and service of compressor and other
equipment. Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and
inspection.
G. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent wall and hangers, or
between pipes for insulation installation. Use sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings,
sized to permit installation of full-thickness insulation.
1. Insulate suction lines and liquid lines together.
2. Do not install insulation until system testing has been complete and all leaks
have been eliminated.
H. Install branch lines to parallel compressors of equal length, and pipe and identically and
symmetrically.
I. Install copper tubing in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where copper tubing will be
exposed to mechanically injury.
J. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:

1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope of 0.4 percent
downward away from compressor.
2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope of 0.4 percent downward to
compressor.
3. Install traps and double risers where indicated and when required to entrain oil in
vertical runs.
4. Liquid lines may be installed level.
K. Use fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
L. Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not
permitted, unless expressly indicated.
M. Reduce pipe size using eccentric reducer fittings installed with level side down.
N. Install unions to allow removal of solenoid valves, pressure-regulating valves, expansion

valves, and at connections to compressors and evaporators.
O. Install flexible connectors at the inlet and discharge connection, at right angles to axial
movement of compressor, parallel to crankshaft.
P. Install replaceable-core filter-dryers, with isolation valves and valve bypass.
Q. Install refrigerant valves according to manufacturer's written instructions.
R. When brazing, remove solenoid-valve coils; remove sight glasses; and remove stems,
seats, and packing of valves, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do
not apply heat near bulb of expansion valve.
S. Electrical wiring for solenoid valves is specified in Division 16 Sections. Co-ordinate

electrical requirements and connections.
T. Mount expansion valves close to evaporator.
U. Install pressure relief valves as required by ASHRAE 15.
V. Charge and purge systems, after testing, and dispose of refrigerant following ASHRAE
15 procedures.
W. Charge system as follows:

1. Install filter-dryer core after leak test, but before evacuation.
2. Evacuate refrigerant system with vacuum pump, until temperature of 1.7 deg C is
indicated on vacuum for minimum of 5 hours.
3. Maintain vacuum for a minimum of 5 hours.
4. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas and charge of 14 kPa.
3.03 VALVE AND SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS

A. Install diaphragm pack less packed-angle valves in suction and discharge lines of
compressor.
B. Install service valves for gage taps at inlet and outlet of hot-gas bypass valves and
strainers if they are not an integral part of valves and strainers.
C. Install a check valve at the compressor discharge and a liquid accumulator at the
compressor suction connection.
D. Except as otherwise indicated, install diaphragm packless packed-angle valves on inlet

and outlet side of filter dryers.
E. Install a full-sized, three-valve bypass around filter dryers.
F. Install solenoid valves upstream from each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass valve.
Install solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top.
G. Install thermostatic expansion valves as close as possible to distributors on evaporators.

1. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb.
2. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using two bulb
straps. Do not mount bulb in a trap or at bottom of the line.
3. If external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect
suction-line pressure at bulb location.
H. Install safety relief valves where required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
Pipe safety-relief-valve discharge line to outside according to ASHRAE 15.
I. Install moisture/liquid indicators in liquid line at the inlet of the thermostatic expansion
valve or at the inlet of the evaporator coil capillary tube.
J. Install strainers upstream from and adjacent to the following unless they are furnished
as an integral assembly for device being protected:
1. Solenoid valves.
2. Thermostatic expansion valves.
3. Hot-gas bypass valves.
4. Compressor.
K. Install filter dryers in liquid line between compressor and thermostatic expansion
valve, and in the suction line at the compressor.
L. Install receivers sized to accommodate pump-down charge.
M. Install flexible connectors at compressors.
3.04 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
C. Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide), during brazing or
welding, to prevent scale formation.

D. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube
Handbook."
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe
and Tube."
1. Use Type BcuP, copper-phosphorus alloy for joining copper socket fittings with
copper pipe.
2. Use Type BAg, cadmium-free silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.
F. Threaded Joints: Thread steel pipe with tapered pipe threads according to
ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends
to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry-
welds.
G. Steel pipe can be threaded, but threaded joints must be seal brazed or seal welded.
H. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M.
I. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
threads.
3.05 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hanger, support, and anchor products are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and
Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
B. Install the following pipe attachments:

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet (6
m) long.
2. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet (6 m) or
longer.
3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet (6 m) or
longer, supported on a trapeze.
4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
5. Copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact
with copper pipe.
C. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod
sizes:
1. NPS 1/2 (DN 15): Maximum span, 60 inches (1500 mm); minimum rod size, 1/4
inch (6.4 mm).
2. NPS 5/8 (DN 18): Maximum span, 60 inches (1500 mm); minimum rod size, 1/4
inch (6.4 mm).
inch (6.4 mm).
3/8 inch (9.5 mm).
3/8 inch (9.5 mm).
inch (9.5 mm).
3/8 inch (9.5 mm).
8. NPS 3 (DN 80): Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (9.5
mm).
(13 mm).
D. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod
sizes:
1. NPS 2 (DN 50): Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (9.5
mm).
2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): Maximum span, 11 feet (3.4 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch
(9.5 mm).
3. NPS 3 (DN 80): Maximum span, 12 feet (3.7 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (9.5
mm).
(13 mm).
E. Support multifloor vertical runs at least at each floor.
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Comply with ASME B31.5, Chapter VI.
2. Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor,
condenser, evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure if they are not
rated above the test pressure.
3. Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system separately at not less
than the pressures indicated in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.
a. Pressure test with nitrogen to 1380 kPa. Perform final tests at 186-kPa
vacuum and 1380 kPa using halide torch or electronic leak detector.
b. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout
duration of test.
c. Test joints and fittings with electronic leak detector or by brushing a small
amount of soap and glycerin solution over joints.
d. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory
results are achieved.
3.07 SYSTEM CHARGING
A. Charge system using the following procedures:

1. Install core in filter dryers after leak test but before evacuation.
2. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to 500 micrometers
(67 Pa). If vacuum holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging.
3. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig (14
kPa).
4. Charge system with a new filter-dryer core in charging line.

3.08 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat.
B. Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to
fluctuating suction pressure.
C. Adjust set-point temperature of air-conditioning or chilled-water controllers to the system

design temperature.
D. Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, according
to manufacturer's written instructions:
1. Open shutoff valves in condenser water circuit.
2. Verify that compressor oil level is correct.
3. Open compressor suction and discharge valves.
4. Open refrigerant valves except bypass valves that are used for other purposes.
5. Check open compressor-motor alignment and verify lubrication for motors and
bearings.
E. Replace core of replaceable filter dryer after system has been adjusted and after design
flow rates and pressures are established.
3.09 CLEANING
A. Before installation of copper tubing other than Type ACR, clean tubing and fittings with
trichlorethylene.
3.010 PRESSURE TESTS:
A. After installation is completed but before piping is furred in or before insulation is

applied, all piping and equipment shall be tested for leaks under 450 psig. For high
pressure side and 300 psig, for low side if refrigerant 22 is used, using n2 (nitrogen) or
approved gas.
B. Any leaks or faults discovered during such tests shall be remedied at once by the
contractor at his own expenses and the tests repeated until the engineer is satisfied that
the section under tests is sound and the engineer ‘ s decision whether the test is sound
or not shall be final.
3.011 VACUUM TESTS :
A. Before charging the system with the refrigerant, it must be dehydrated through, using a
high efficiency vacuum pump and vacuum indicator. Dehydrating operation shall
continue until a reading of 35 FWB at a pressure of 0.204” HG absolute is reached.
3.012 COMMISSIONING
A. Charge system using the following procedures.

1. Install core in filter dyer after leak test, but before evacuation.
2. Evacuate refrigerant system with vacuum pump until temperature of 1.67 deg C
is indicated on vacuum dehydration indicator.
3. During evacuation, apply heat to pockets, elbows, and low spots in piping.
4. Maintain vacuum on system for minimum of 5 hours after closing valve between
vacuum pump and system.
5. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 14 kPa.
6. Complete charging of system, using new filter-dryer core in charging line. Provide
7. Full-operating charge.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 3113
METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes metal ducts for supply, return, outside, and exhaust air-distribution
systems in pressure classes from minus 500 to plus 2500Pa. Metal ducts include the
following:
1. Rectangular ducts and fittings.
2. Single-wall, round, and flat-oval spiral-seam ducts and formed fittings. (If
Applicable)
3. Double-wall, round, and flat-oval spiral-seam ducts and formed fittings. (If
Applicable)
4. Duct liner.
5. Fire Rated Ductwork.

1. Section 23 3713 "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles" for factory- and field-
fabricated casings for mechanical equipment.
2. Section 23 0700 "HVAC Insulation" for duct insulation.
3. Section 23 3300 "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices,
duct-mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.
4. Section 23 0593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing” for adjusting and balancing
of air-distribution systems.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications on manufactured products and

factory-fabricated ductwork, used for work of this Section.
B. Shop Drawings: CAD-generated and drawn to scale not greater than 1:100. Show
fabrication and installation details for metal ducts.
1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections,
components, and attachments to other work.
2. Duct layout indicating sizes and pressure classes.
3. Elevations of top and bottom of ducts.
4. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines.
5. Fittings.
6. Reinforcement and spacing.
7. Seam and joint construction.
8. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.
9. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project.
10. Duct accessories, including access doors and panels.
11. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment,
vibration isolation, and seismic restraints.
KEO/19-3262-0000 23 3113/1 Metal Ducts
C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following
items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the
items involved:
1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.
2. Other systems installed in same space as ducts.
3. Ceiling- and wall-mounting access doors and panels required to provide access
to dampers and other operating devices.
4. Ceiling-mounting items, including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,
sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.
E. Field quality-control test reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with
performance requirements.
F. Record Drawings: Indicate actual routing, fitting details, reinforcements, supports, and
installed accessories and devices.
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural

Welding Code--Steel," for hangers and supports, AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--
Aluminum," for aluminum supporting members and AWS D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding
Code," for duct joint and seam welding.
B. NFPA Compliance:
1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems”, unless
2. NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems”,
C. Comply with NFPA 96, "Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking
Operations," Ch. 3, "Duct System," for range hood ducts, unless otherwise indicated.
D. IMC Compliance: Comply with Section 6, Duct Systems of International Mechanical

Code (IMC).
E. Mockups, for Engineering Building and Operations Facility:

1. Before installing duct systems, build mockups representing pressure classes
higher than 500Pa. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements,
using materials indicated for the completed Work, and include each of the
following features and fittings:
a. Five transverse joints.
b. One access door(s).
c. Two typical branch connections, each with at least one elbow.
d. Two typical flexible duct or flexible connector connections for each duct
and apparatus.
e. Perform tests specified in Part 3 "Field Quality Control" Article. Modify
mockup construction and perform additional tests as required to achieve
specified minimum acceptable results.
2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at
time of Initial Acceptance.
KEO/19-3262-0000 23 3113/2 Metal Ducts

F. Unless accepted otherwise by the Engineer, use manufactures and installers that
employ a Quality Management System complying with the program described in ISO
9001-2000, or similar system.
1. DW144 : Specification for Sheet metal ductwork.
2. DW171 : Standard for Kitchen Sheet Metal Ductwork. (If Applicable)
3. SMACNA : Sheet Metal and Air conditioning Contractor’s National
Association.
- HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible.
- HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting & Balancing Standards
A. Protect shop-fabricated and factory-fabricated ductwork, accessories and purchased

products from damage during shipping, storage and handling. Prevent and damage and
prevent dirt and moisture from entering ducts and fittings
B. Where possible, store ductwork inside and protect from weather. Where necessary to
store outside, store above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

the same product and approved by the Engineer
2.02 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thickness, and duct construction methods, unless
otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller
marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel:

1. Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and having Z275
coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces
exposed to view.
2. ASTM A527 galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming quality, having zinc-coating
designation of G90 in conformance with ASTM A525. Mill phosphatized for
exposed locations
C. Stainless Steel (if applicable)

1. ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 316, and having a No. 2D finish for concealed ducts,
and for exposed ducts No. 4 finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view.
2. ASTM A167 stainless steel sheets; Type 304, sheet metal gauge and
construction shall conform to recommendations in SMACNA duct construction
standards, metal and flexible, latest edition.
D. Flexible Ducts
1. UL 181, Class 1, aluminum-polyester composite film with latex adhesive,
supported by helical wound spring steel wire; fiberglass insulation; aluminized
KEO/19-3262-0000 23 3113/3 Metal Ducts
vapor barrier film and PVC jacket, K value of 0.23 maximum @ 75 F mean
temperature.
2. Pressure Rating: 2,500 Pa (10-inch WG) positive.
3. Maximum Velocity: 25 M / Sec. (4,900 fpm)
4. Temperature Range: - 30 C to 140 C (-22 F to 284 F).
E. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws.
F. Sealant: Non-hardening, water resistant, fire resistive, compatible with mating

materials; liquid used alone or with tape, or heavy mastic.
G. Hanger Rod: Galvanized; continuously threaded.
2.03 DUCT LINER
A. Fibrous-Glass Liner: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with NAIMA AH124.
1. Materials: ASTM C 1071; surfaces exposed to airstreams shall be coated to
prevent erosion of glass fibers.
a. Thickness: 25mm, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.037 at 24 deg C mean temperature.
c. Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and
smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
d. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C
916.
e. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel suitable for adhesive
attachment, mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct
without damaging liner when applied as recommended by manufacturer
and without causing leakage in duct.
2. Tensile Strength: Indefinitely sustain a 23kg tensile, dead load test
perpendicular to duct wall.
3. Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation and without
projecting more than 3mm into airstream.
4. Adhesive for Attaching Mechanical Fasteners: Comply with fire-hazard
classification of duct liner system.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Duct Liner: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.
1. Materials: Unicellular polyethylene thermal plastic, preformed sheet insulation
complying with ASTM C 534, Type II, except for density.
a. Thickness: 19mm, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.034 at 24 deg C mean temperature.
smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM C 411.
d. Liner Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer and
complying with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.
2.04 SEALANT MATERIALS
A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of
adhesive or mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric
strips and mastics.
B. Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing,

polymerized butyl sealant formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.
KEO/19-3262-0000 23 3113/4 Metal Ducts
C. Flanged Joint Mastic: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealant
complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.
D. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.
2.05 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel

fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.
1. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate
concretes or for slabs more than 100mm thick.
2. Exception: Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-
aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 100mm thick.
B. Hanger Materials: Galvanized sheet steel or threaded steel rod.

1. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods
or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after
installation.
2. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards--Metal and Flexible" for steel sheet width and thickness and for steel
rod diameters. Where duct sizes exceed these guidelines, the spacing and rod
size shall not exceed the recommended maximum load rating for the proposed
rod size.
3. Galvanized-steel straps attached to aluminum ducts shall have contact surfaces
painted with zinc-chromate primer.
C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws;
compatible with duct materials.
D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.
1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.
2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel support materials.
3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum support materials unless materials are
electrolytically separated from ducts.
2.06 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION
A. Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction
according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" and
complying with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod
applications, and joint types and intervals. Where duct sizes exceed those listed in the
referenced standards, the duct manufacturer shall determine the proper material
thickness and reinforcement requirements in accordance with SMACNA’s Chapter 7,
Functional Criteria, "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and
rigidity class required for pressure class.
2. Deflection: Duct systems shall not exceed deflection limits according to
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
B. Transverse Joints: Prefabricated slide-on joints and components constructed using

manufacturer's guidelines for material thickness, reinforcement size and spacing, and
joint reinforcement.
KEO/19-3262-0000 23 3113/5 Metal Ducts

C. Formed-On Flanges: Construct according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards--Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, using corner, bolt, cleat, and gasket details.
1. Duct Size: Maximum 750mm wide and up to 500Pa pressure class.
2. Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh lock sealed with noncuring polymer sealant.
D. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 480mm and
larger and 0.9mm thick or less, with more than 0.93 sq. m of nonbraced panel area
unless ducts are lined.
E. Rectangular Ducts Gages

Maximum Width
In Inches (mm) Gage
Up to 18 (450) 24
19 to 42 (475 to 1050) 22
43 to 54 (1075 to 1350) 20
55 to 72 (1375 to 1800) 18
73 and Over (1825) 18
2.07 APPLICATION OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS
A. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent
adhesive coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with
multiple layers of duct liner is prohibited.
B. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal
nosing.
C. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.
D. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-
edge overlapping.
E. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts,
unless duct size and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints
necessary.
F. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 12.7 m/s.
G. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 100mm from corners and at intervals not
exceeding 300mm transversely; at 75mm from transverse joints and at intervals not
exceeding 450mm longitudinally.
H. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that
have either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate
edge facings at the following locations:
1. Fan discharges.
2. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.
3. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are greater than
2500 fpm (12.7 m/s) or where indicated.
I. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers, turning
vane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other
KEO/19-3262-0000 23 3113/6 Metal Ducts

buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts,
screws, rivets, or welds.
2.08 ROUND DUCT AND FITTING FABRICATION (If Applicable)
A. Fabricate supply ducts of galvanized steel, with spiral lockseam, according to

SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible." Duct sizes not
available in spiral lockseam shall be longitudinal, continuous butt weld or continuous
seam weld in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Type RL-
4. Where duct sizes exceed those listed in the referenced standards, the duct
manufacturer shall determine the proper material thickness and reinforcement
requirements in accordance with SMACNA’s Chapter 7, Functional Criteria, "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
B. Diameter as applied to flat-oval ducts in this Article is the diameter of a round duct with a
circumference equal to the perimeter of a given size of flat-oval duct.
C. Round, Longitudinal- and Spiral Lock-Seam Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts of

galvanized steel according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal
and Flexible."
D. Duct Joints:
1. Ducts up to 500mm in Diameter: Interior, center-beaded slip coupling, sealed
before and after fastening, attached with sheet metal screws.
2. Ducts 535 to 1830mm in Diameter: Three-piece, gasketed, flanged joint
consisting of two internal flanges with sealant and one external closure band with
gasket.
3. Ducts Larger than 1830mm in Diameter: Companion angle flanged joints per
SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2.
4. Round Ducts: Prefabricated connection system consisting of double-lipped,
EPDM rubber gasket. Manufacture ducts according to connection system
manufacturer's tolerances.
E. 90-Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," with metal thickness specified
for longitudinal-seam straight ducts.
F. Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with reduced entrance to branch taps and with no
excess material projecting from fitting onto branch tap entrance.
G. Fabricate elbows using die-formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Unless

elbow construction type is indicated, fabricate elbows as follows:
1. Mitered-Elbow Radius and Number of Pieces: Welded construction complying
with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible,"
2. SMACNA requires that metal thickness of fittings be equal to or greater than that
of ducts. First two subparagraphs and associated subparagraphs below are
extracted from manufacturer's catalog where metal thickness exceeds that of
straight ducts.
3. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness
for pressure classes from minus 500 to plus 500Pa:
a. Ducts 75 to 915mm in Diameter: 0.85mm.
b. Ducts 940 to 1270mm in Diameter: 1.0mm.
c. Ducts 1320 to 1525mm in Diameter: 1.3mm.
KEO/19-3262-0000 23 3113/7 Metal Ducts
d. Ducts 1575 to 2130mm in Diameter: 1.6mm.
4. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness
for pressure classes from 500 to 2500Pa:
a. Ducts 75 to 660mm in Diameter: 0.85mm.
b. Ducts 685 to 1270mm in Diameter: 1.0mm.
c. Ducts 1320 to 1525mm in Diameter: 1.3mm.
d. Ducts 1575 to 2130mm in Diameter: 1.6mm.
5. 90-Degree, 2-Piece, Mitered Elbows: Use only for supply systems or for
material-handling Class A or B exhaust systems and only where space
restrictions do not permit using radius elbows. Fabricate with single-thickness
turning vanes.
6. Round Elbows 200mm and less in Diameter: Fabricate die-formed elbows for
45- and 90-degree elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees
only. Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle configurations or nonstandard diameter
elbows with gored construction.
7. Round Elbows 225 through 355mm in Diameter: Fabricate gored or pleated
elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees unless space restrictions require mitered
elbows. Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle configurations or nonstandard
diameter elbows with gored construction.
8. Round Elbows Larger than 355mm in Diameter and All Flat-Oval Elbows:
Fabricate gored elbows unless space restrictions require mitered elbows.
9. Die-Formed Elbows for Sizes through 200mm in Diameter and All Pressures
1.0mm thick with 2-piece welded construction.
10. Round Gored-Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as non-elbow fittings specified
above.
11. Pleated Elbows for Sizes through 355mm in Diameter and Pressures through
2500Pa: 0.55mm.
H. PVC-Coated Elbows and Fittings: Fabricate elbows and fittings as follows:

1. Round Elbows 100 to 200mm in Diameter: Two piece, die stamped, with
longitudinal seams spot welded, bonded, and painted with PVC aerosol spray.
2. Round Elbows 225 to 660mm in Diameter: Standing-seam construction.
3. Round Elbows 710 to 1525mm in Diameter: Standard gored construction,
riveted and bonded.
4. Other Fittings: Riveted and bonded joints.
5. Couplings: Slip-joint construction with a minimum 50mm insertion length.
2.09 FIRE RATED DUCTWORK:
A. Fire rated ductwork Shall be applicable for Smoke extract system, Car park ventilation
system, kitchen extract system, corridor pressurization system and all emergency
ventilation system.
B. Fire rated ductwork shall be NON coated galvanized steel with integral flanges.
C. Fire rated ductwork shall provide at least 2 Hrs fire rating as per BS 476 Part 24 and BS
5588 Part 9 standard.
D. Fire rated ductwork shall be tested, assessed and certified by independent laboratories
such as Warrington or British Research BRE.
E. The system shall be assessed by another independent certifying authority such as

LPCB or certifier or similar auditor to ensure the standards and norms are being
adhered in fire and safety products supply and installation.
KEO/19-3262-0000 23 3113/8 Metal Ducts
F. Non-coated fire rated duct system shall be local fire department / Civil Defense approval
and third party approval certificate is suitable for applications where fire rated ductwork
is required as per BS476: Part 24 and ISO6944.
G. The approval of non-coated fire rated duct system is subject to third party approval
certificate – Certifier CF761.
H. Non-coated fire rated ductwork is acceptable equal for use in applications of fire rated
ductwork where specifications may refer to any coated duct systems without any
prejudice so as long as performance criteria such as fire resistance required rating is
met.
I. The Fire Rated ductwork shall be tested for both Type A (Fire Outside) and Type B (Fire
Inside and Outside) as per BS 476; Part 24:1987 (ISO 6944:1985) to meet design
guidelines in accordance to BS 5588: Part 9:1989, Method 3, for both horizontal and
vertical ductwork test.
J. The Fire Rated Ductwork should be

constructed in accordance with the
Manufacturer Guide to provide:
1. Stability (min 120– max
240) minutes
2. Integrity (min 120– max
240) minutes
3. Insulation (min 120) minutes
4. when tested to the
requirements of BS 476: Part
24 by approved laboratory at
temperature of 1160°C for 4
hours ( ISO 834 : 1975 (E)
Fire Resistance Test
Standard Time –
Temperature Curve ), with
valid civil defense
certification mentioning Certificate No & testing reference confirmation.
K. The ductwork should be capable of providing Type A (fire outside) or Duct B (fire inside)
fire containment and, under normal non-fire operating conditions, should conform to the
pressure classification of the current HVCA DW/144 Specification for Sheet Metal
Ductwork.
L. Static pressure limits:
Pressure level Range

Pressure/Velocity Class Positive Negative
Pressure Pressure
Down to - 500
Low Class A Up to + 500 Pa Pa
Up to + 1000 Down to - 750
Medium Class B Pa Pa
Up to + 2000 Down to - 750
High Class C Pa Pa
Up to + 2500 Down to - 750
High Class D Pa Pa
KEO/19-3262-0000 23 3113/9 Metal Ducts
NOTE that these classifications are to DW /144 requirements
1. It is mandatory that the manufacturer/installer is working to a Quality Assurance

System based upon the ISO 9001 series.
2. The fire rated ductwork shall be tested for both Uninsulated and Insulated ducts
with proper certification.
3. The fire rated ductwork should meet SMACNA, DW-144, NFPA requirements.
4. The fire rated ductwork system shall have valid certification from approved
laboratory and the same should be reflected on the Civil defense certificate with
certificate number.
5. The complete fire rated duct system including supports, hangers, joints, gaskets,
sealants, volume control dampers, fire rated sound attenuators should be tested
as a complete system and approved by Civil defense.
6. Fire rated ductwork shall be constructed and protected to ensure that the
stability, integrity and insulation (if required) of the ductwork system is maintained
for the required duration. Supports and fixings
7. shall be of sufficient strength and arranged to ensure that the ductwork is
maintained in position throughout the period.
8. Where the duct passes through compartment walls the space between the duct
and the wall shall be reinforced and packed with proprietary fire stopping material
to maintain the stability and integrity of the system for the required period and
shall match the integrity of the compartment wall.
9. The Kitchen ductwork system shall be fabricated with stainless steel as per
NFPA 96. The joints shall be fully welded. Insulation for Kitchen ducts shall be
tested and approved. The Kitchen ducts shall be tested as per BS-476 Part 24
for stability, Integrity and Insulation criteria and have valid civil defense approval.
10. All installation and design of fire rated ductwork shall be in accordance with
“ASFP - Fire rated and smoke outlet and industry guide to design and
installation”
11. The contractor shall follow manufacturers installation guidelines for supports,
hangers, sealants, gaskets, clamps as approved by civil defense certificate. The
duct shall be installed by civil defense approved contractor only, supplier shall
provide supply certificate for delivered material if installation is done as per
guidelines.
12. The fire rated duct manufacturer shall provide previous 5 years track record at
least for 10 projects to assure manufacturers credibility and manufacturing
capabilities.
13. The construction schedule of the Fire Rated Ductwork shall be followed as per
manufacturers approved test report and test conducted during testing.
M. In addition to above the fire rated ducts should meet requirements as mentioned below.
1. Fire rated Ductwork for Smoke Control Systems (both exhaust and make-up air
ducts) shall be of at least 2-hour fire resistance rated.
2. Where a duct passes through other fire compartments of higher rating, the duct
shall be constructed to have the same rating of that compartment. The rating
shall apply to fire exposure from both interior and exterior of the duct or structure.
3. Such fire rating of smoke control system ducts shall be evaluated and approved
for fire rating as well as for Stability, Integrity and Insulation Criteria for fire rating.
4. The complete duct system including supports, hangers, joints, gaskets, sealant
etc. shall be in compliance with the approved test standards and fire rating
criteria.
5. Ducts for Smoke control systems (Type A, Rated for both fire outside and Type
B, fire outside and inside, 1 hour and 2 hour fire rated, tested and approved for
KEO/19-3262-0000 23 3113/10 Metal Ducts

fire rating, stability, integrity and non-combustible insulation as per BS 476, Part
24 or EN-1366.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 DUCT APPLICATIONS (If applicable)
A. Construct and install each duct system for the specific duct pressure classification, duct
seal class and duct leakage class indicated in the Duct System Schedule article of this
section.
B. All ducts shall be galvanized steel except as follows:

1. Where indicated stainless steel.
2. Range Hood Exhaust Ducts: Comply with NFPA 96 and IMC
a. Concealed: Carbon-steel sheet.
b. Exposed: Not less than 1.3 mm type 316 or 304, stainless steel with
finish to match kitchen equipment and range hood.
c. Weld and flange seams and joints with liquid and grease-tight continuous
external weld.
3. Dishwasher Hood Exhaust Ducts:
a. Type 304 or 316, stainless steel with finish to match kitchen equipment
and range hood. Weld and flange seams and joints.
b. Aluminum, with seams and laps arranged on top of duct.
3.02 DUCT INSTALLATION
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Not all
required fittings or offsets are shown, the Contractor shall coordinate the installation with
other trades and provide all necessary offsets and fittings.
B. Construct and install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards--Metal and Flexible," and IMC, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install round and flat-oval ducts in lengths not less than 3.7m unless interrupted by
fittings.
D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
E. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, size, and shape and for connections.
F. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct.
Secure couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 300mm, with a
minimum of 3 screws in each coupling.
G. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and parallel and
perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.
H. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and
permanent enclosure elements of building. Ductwork located in high bay spaces, where
the floor-to-floor clearance is in excess of 5.5 meters, shall be installed no higher than
600 mm above finished ceiling.
I. Install ducts with a clearance of 25mm, plus allowance for insulation thickness.
KEO/19-3262-0000 23 3113/11 Metal Ducts
J. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid
partitions unless specifically indicated.
K. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting
layouts, and similar finished work.
L. Seal all joints and seams. Apply sealant to male end connectors before insertion, and
afterward to cover entire joint and sheet metal screws.
M. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults
and electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.
N. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and
exterior walls and are exposed to view, conceal spaces between construction openings
and ducts or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as ducts.
Overlap openings on 4 sides by at least 38mm.
O. Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and
exterior walls, install appropriately rated fire dampers, sleeves, and firestopping sealant.
Fire and smoke dampers are specified in Section 23 "Duct Accessories." Firestopping
materials and installation methods are specified in Section 23 "Through-Penetration
Firestop Systems."
P. Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to withstand, without damage to
equipment, seismic force required by applicable building codes. Refer to SMACNA's
"Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems."
Q. Protect duct interiors from the elements and foreign materials until building is enclosed.
Follow SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction."
R. Supply and return air ductwork, outside the building shall be single wall, insulated, and
finished with a weatherproof aluminum jacket (If Applicable).
3.03 RANGE HOOD EXHAUST DUCTS, SPECIAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS (If

applicable)
A. Install ducts to allow for thermal expansion through 1110 deg C temperature range.
B. Install ducts without dips or traps that may collect residues unless traps have continuous
or automatic residue removal.
C. Install access openings at each change in direction and at intervals defined by NFPA
96; locate on sides of duct a minimum of 38mm from bottom; and fit with grease-tight
covers of same material as duct.
D. Do not penetrate fire-rated assemblies except as permitted by applicable building codes.
3.04 DUCT LINER APPLICATIONS (If applicable)
A. Duct liner application is allowed immediately upstream and downstream of air handling
equipment and up to 3m downstream of air terminal units, unless accepted by Engineer.
3.05 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING

KEO/19-3262-0000 23 3113/12 Metal Ducts
A. Seal duct seams and joints according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards--Metal and Flexible" for duct pressure class indicated.
B. Seal ducts before external insulation is applied.
3.06 HANGING AND SUPPORTING
A. Install rigid round, rectangular, and flat-oval metal duct with support systems indicated in
B. Support horizontal ducts within 600mm of each elbow and within 1200mm of each
branch intersection.
C. Support vertical ducts at maximum intervals of 5m and at each floor.
D. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth
of failure (proof-test) load.
E. Install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
F. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely

cured.
1. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate
concretes or for slabs less than 100mm thick.
3.07 CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 23 "Duct

Accessories."
B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for
branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections, unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections according to SMACNA's "HVAC Air
Duct Leakage Test Manual" and prepare test reports:
1. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate
leakage testing and for compliance with test requirements.
2. Test approximately 25 percent of the installed ductwork having a SMACNA Duct
Construction Class of 1000 Pa (4 inches water column) or above. The ductwork
to be tested shall be randomly selected by the EMPLOYER.
3. Follow the procedures outlined in SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test
Manual, latest edition.
4. Testing apparatus and procedures shall be reviewed and accepted by the
Employer before the start of tests. Tests shall be carried out in the presence of
the Employer who shall verify the test results. Contact the Employer to
coordinate the time of testing.
5. The leakage amount shall not exceed the SMACNA leakage class indicated in
the Duct System Schedule.
6. Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is equal to or less than maximum
allowable.
KEO/19-3262-0000 23 3113/13 Metal Ducts
7. Submit a test report for Employer review. The test report shall be in accordance
with the reporting requirements in the SMACNA Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.
3.09 DUCT SYSTEM SCHEDULE
A. Supply Air Systems - Variable Air Volume

1. From the fan and air-handling unit discharge to the variable air volume unit inlet:
a. SMACNA seal class: A
b. SMACNA duct construction class: 1000 Pa.
c. Minimum leakage class: 3
2. From the variable air volume unit discharge to the air outlet neck:
a. SMACNA duct construction class: 500 Pa.
b. Minimum SMACNA seal class: A
c. SMACNA leakage class: 12
B. Supply Air Systems - Constant Volume:

1. Rectangular duct:
2. Round duct:
C. Return Air and Transfer Air Systems

a. SMACNA duct construction class: Plus or minus 500 Pa.
b. Minimum SMACNA seal class: B.
c. SMACNA leakage class: 12.
2. Round duct:
b. Minimum SMACNA seal class: B.
D. Outside Air Systems

b. Minimum SMACNA seal class: A.
2. Round duct:
E. Exhaust Air Systems

1. Toilet:
2. Kitchen:
b. Minimum SMACNA seal class: Welded.
KEO/19-3262-0000 23 3113/14 Metal Ducts
F. Special Exhaust Air System
1. SMACNA duct construction class: Plus or minus + 1500 Pa.
3.010 DUCTWORK APPLICATION SCHEDULE

___________________________________________________________
AIR SYSTEM MATERIAL
(FOR PRESSURE CLASS CLASSIFICATION REFER TO SMACNA DUCT
CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS)
___________________________________________________________
1. Supply return and exhaust Galvanised Steel

air ducts
(Risers, Plant Room ductwork,
Exposed ductwork and Large size ductwork)
2. Low Pressure ductwork for Galvanised steel / Pre-insulated Duct
Indoor units (Section 23 3114)
3. Carpark Ventilation (Supply and Exhaust) Galvanized Steel Fire Rated
Ductworks
4. Smoke Extract and Fresh air make up Duct Galvanized Steel Fire Rated
5. Stairwell Pressurization Duct Galvanized Steel Fire Rated
Note:
1. All exposed to view ducts with insulation (if any) shall be covered with aluminium
jacketing minimum 0.7mm thick.
3.011 CLEANING NEW SYSTEMS
A. Mark position of dampers and air-directional mechanical devices before cleaning, and
perform cleaning before air balancing.
B. Use service openings, as required, for physical and mechanical entry and for inspection.
1. Create other openings to comply with duct standards.
2. Disconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.
3. Remove and reinstall ceiling sections to gain access during the cleaning process.
C. Vent vacuuming system to the outside. Include filtration to contain debris removed from
HVAC systems, and locate exhaust down wind and away from air intakes and other
points of entry into building.
D. Clean the following metal duct systems by removing surface contaminants and deposits:
1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).
2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling
supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers,
and drive assemblies.
3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil
section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers
and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and
drains.
4. Coils and related components.
5. Return-air ducts, dampers, and actuators except in ceiling plenums and
mechanical equipment rooms.
6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.
KEO/19-3262-0000 23 3113/15 Metal Ducts

E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:
1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract
contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.
2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning.
Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being
cleaned are under negative pressure.
3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces
without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.
4. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit
duct liner to get wet.
5. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan
operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning
materials; comb and straighten fins.
F. Cleanliness Verification:
1. Visually inspect metal ducts for contaminants.
2. Where contaminants are discovered, re-clean and re-inspect ducts.
END OF SECTION
KEO/19-3262-0000 23 3113/16 Metal Ducts

SECTION 23 3119
HVAC CASINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes HVAC casings for field-erected and / or factory fabricated air-
handling systems and for housing mechanical equipment.
1.02 CASING INSULATION
A. Thermal Conductivity and Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): As defined in

ASTM C 168. In this Section, these values are the result of the formula Btu x in./h x sq.
ft. x deg F (W/m x K) at temperature differences specified. Values are expressed as Btu
(W).
1. Example: Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 (0.037).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For factory-fabricated casings, sealant materials, and acoustic liner
materials.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to

other work. Show fabrication and installation details of the following:
1. Reinforcement and spacing.
2. Seam and joint construction.
3. Access doors, including frames, hinges, and latches.
4. Filter, coil, humidifier, and other apparatus.
5. Hangers and supports, including methods for building attachment, vibration
isolation, seismic restraints, and casing attachment.
6. Interior lighting, including switches.
C. Product Certificates: For factory-fabricated casings, signed by product manufacturer.

1. Show sound-absorption coefficients in each octave band lower than those
scheduled when tested according to ASTM C 423.
2. Show airborne sound transmission losses lower than those scheduled when
tested according to ASTM E 90.
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to [AWS D1.1, "Structural

Welding Code--Steel," for hangers and supports and AWS D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding
vs seamed welding.
KEO/19-3262-0000 23 3119/1 Hvac Casings
1.05 COORDINATION
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in section 23.
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These
items are specified in section 23 "Roof Accessories."
1.06 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANLDING.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and
having [G90 (Z275)] [G60 (Z180)] coating designation; ducts shall have mill-
phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed to view.
B. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on

galvanized sheet steel casings.
C. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches
(900 mm) or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than mm36
inches (900 mm).
D. Miscellaneous Materials and Products: Types and sizes required to comply with HVAC
casing system requirements, including proper connection of ducts and equipment.
2.03 DUCT LINER
A. Fibrous-Glass Liner: Comply with NFPA 90A and NAIMA AH124.

1. Materials: ASTM C 1071; surfaces exposed to airstream shall be coated to
prevent erosion of glass fibers.
a. Thickness: [1/2 inch (13 mm)] [1 inch (25 mm)] [1-1/2 inches (38 mm)].
b. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 at 75 deg F (0.037 at 24 deg C)
mean temperature.
smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM C 411.
d. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A and ASTM C 916.
e. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel suitable for adhesive
attachment, mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to casing
without damaging liner when applied as recommended by manufacturer
and without causing leakage in casings.
1) Tensile Strength: Indefinitely sustain a 50-lb- (23-kg-) tensile,
dead-load test perpendicular to casing wall.
KEO/19-3262-0000 23 3119/2 Hvac Casings
2) Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation and
without projecting more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) into airstream.
3) Adhesive for Attaching Mechanical Fasteners: Comply with fire-
hazard classification of duct liner system.
2.04 SEALANT MATERIALS
A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of
adhesive or mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric
strips and mastics.
B. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: Flexible, adhesive sealant, resistant to UV light
when cured, UL 723 listed, and complying with NFPA requirements for Class 1 ducts.
C. Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing,

polymerized butyl sealant formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.
D. Flanged Joint Mastics: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealant

complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.
E. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.
2.05 SHOP- AND FIELD-FABRICATED CASINGS (Non Hospital application)
A. Fabricate casings according to SMACNA's "[HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal

and Flexible] [Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standards]."
B. Shop fabricate casings, to greatest extent possible, with a minimum number of joints
and to minimize field fabrication and assembly.
C. Fabricate casings with standing seams and angle reinforcements. Fabricate close-off
sheets from casing sides, top, and bottom to damper, coil, and filter frames. Fabricate
close-off sheets at joints between stacked coils. Bolt close-off sheets to frame flanges
and housings. Support coils on stands fabricated from galvanized-steel angles or
channels.
D. Reinforce casings with galvanized- or painted-steel angles.
E. Seal joints with liquid-type, high-pressure duct sealant to eliminate air leakage.
F. Fabricate drain pans for cooling coils, humidifiers, and eliminator blade sections in
casings with external connections and vented deep-seal traps for drainage piping with
3/4-inch (20-mm) pipe connections. Fabricate and reinforce drain pans of same
material and thickness as housing, 2 inches (50 mm) deep with rolled edges. Solder
seams.
G. Fabricate casings with reinforced openings for access doors at least 20 inches (500
mm) wide by 48 inches (1200 mm) high and located for access to each item of
equipment housed. Refer to Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for access
doors.
H. Fabricate casings to receive flexible or outlet connectors for fans. Refer to Division 23
Section "Air Duct Accessories" for flexible connectors.
KEO/19-3262-0000 23 3119/3 Hvac Casings

I. Static-Pressure Classifications: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate HVAC casings
according to the following:
1. Before Fans: 2-inch wg (500 Pa), 3-inch wg (750 Pa)
2. After Fans: 2-inch wg (500 Pa), 3-inch wg (750 Pa) 4-inch wg (1000 Pa) 6-inch
wg (1500 Pa) 10-inch wg (2500 Pa)
2.06 FACTORY-FABRICATED CASINGS (Hospital Application)
A. Description: Double-wall, insulated, pressurized equipment casing.
B. Panel Fabrication: Solid, galvanized sheet steel exterior shell and solid, galvanized
sheet steel interior shell; with 2- or 4-inch (50- or 100-mm) space between shells, as
indicated.
1. Fabricate with a minimum number of joints.
2. Weld exterior and interior shells to perimeter; to interior, longitudinal, galvanized-
steel channels; and to box-end internal closures. Paint welds.
3. Exterior Shell Thickness: 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) minimum.
4. Interior Shell Thickness: 0.034 inch (0.85 mm) minimum.
5. Interior Shell Thickness: 0.034 inch (0.85 mm) minimum, with 3/32-inch (2.4-
mm) perforations at 3/16-inch (5-mm) staggered spacing for 23 percent open
area.
6. Fabricate perimeter and interior, longitudinal channel members with galvanized-
steel shapes.
7. Fill each panel assembly with insulating material that is noncombustible, inert,
mildew resistant, and vermin proof, and that complies with NFPA 90A.
8. Fabricate panels with tongue-and-groove, continuous self-locking joints effective
inside and outside each panel.
C. Trim Items: Fabricate from a minimum of 0.052-inch (1.3-mm) galvanized sheet steel,
furnished in standard lengths for field cutting.
D. Access Doors: Fabricate personnel access doors at least 24 by 60 inches (600 by 1500
mm) and other access doors in sizes indicated.
1. Fabricate doors of same thickness as panels, with a minimum 0.040-inch (1.0-
mm) solid, interior and exterior, galvanized sheet steel shell.
2. Install a minimum of two ball-bearing hinges and two wedge-lever-type latches,
operable from inside and outside. Install doors to open against air pressure
differential. Install neoprene gaskets around entire perimeters of door frames.
3. Fabricate windows in doors consisting of double-glazed, wire-reinforced safety
glass with an air space between panes and sealed with interior and exterior
rubber seals.
E. Structural Performance: Fabricate plenum to be self-supporting and capable of

withstanding internal static pressures as scheduled, without any panel joint exceeding
deflection of L/200 where "L" is the unsupported span length within completed casings.
1. Fabricate outdoor casings to withstand wind load of 15 lbf/sq. ft. (720 N/sq. m)
and snow load of 30 lbf/sq. ft. (1440 N/sq. m).
2. Acoustic Performance: Certified by an independent acoustical testing agency
listing sound-absorption and transmission-loss characteristics of panel
assemblies.
3. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 at 75 deg F (0.037 at 24 deg C) mean
temperature.
KEO/19-3262-0000 23 3119/4 Hvac Casings

F. Static-Pressure Classifications: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate HVAC casings
according to the following:
1. Before Fans: 2-inch wg (500 Pa) 3-inch wg (750 Pa).
2. After Fans: 2-inch wg (500 Pa) 3-inch wg (750 Pa) 4-inch wg (1000 Pa) 6-inch
wg (1500 Pa) 10-inch wg (2500 Pa).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine concrete bases and roof curbs for compliance with requirements for conditions
affecting installation and performance of HVAC casings.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install casings according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and

Flexible." Comply with recommended spacing of sheet metal screws and with
requirements for casing sealing and trim positioning.
B. Apply sealant to joints, connections, and mountings.
C. Field-cut openings for pipe and conduit penetrations; insulate and seal according to
D. Support casings on floor or foundation system. Secure and seal to base.
E. Support components rigidly with ties, braces, brackets, seismic restraints, and anchors
of types that will maintain housing shape and prevent buckling.
F. Align casings accurately at connections, with 1/8-inch (3-mm) misalignment tolerance

and with smooth interior surfaces.
G. Maintain duct seal class integrity throughout casings.
3.03 LINER INSTALLATION (Non Hospital Application)
A. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent
adhesive coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with
multiple layers of duct liner is prohibited.
B. Apply adhesive to liner that faces direction of airflow not receiving metal nosing.
C. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.
D. Fold and compress liner in corners of casings or cut and fit to ensure butted-edge
overlapping.
E. Do not apply liner with longitudinal joints, except at corners of casings, unless casing
size and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints necessary.
F. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in casings.

KEO/19-3262-0000 23 3119/5 Hvac Casings
G. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches (100 mm) from corners and at intervals
not exceeding 12 inches (300 mm) transversely; at 3 inches (75 mm) from transverse
joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches (450 mm) longitudinally.
H. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that
have either channel or "Z" profile or are integrally formed from casing wall. Fabricate
edge facings at the following locations:
1. Fan discharges.
2. Intervals of lined casing preceding unlined casing.
3. Upstream edges of transverse joints in casings.
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections according to SMACNA's "HVAC Air
Duct Leakage Test Manual" and prepare test reports:
1. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system
or section being tested. If pressure classes are not indicated, test entire system
at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above
maximum design operating pressure. Give seven days' advance notice for
testing.
2. Determine leakage from entire system or section of system by relating leakage to
surface area of test section. Comply with requirements for leakage classification
of ducts connected to casings.
3. Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is equal to or less than maximum
allowable.
END OF SECTION
KEO/19-3262-0000 23 3119/6 Hvac Casings

SECTION 23 3300
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1. Backdraft dampers.
2. Volume dampers.
3. Motorized control dampers. (If Applicable)
4. Fire dampers. (If Applicable)
5. Ceiling fire dampers. (If Applicable)
6. Smoke dampers. (If Applicable)
7. Combination fire and smoke dampers. (If Applicable)
8. Duct silencers. (If Applicable)
9. Turning vanes.
10. Duct - Mounting Access Doors.
12. Flexible ducts.
13. Duct accessory hardware.

1. Division 23 Section 23 3113 “Metal Ducts”
2. Division 23 Section 23 3114 - Pre-Insulated Ductwork
1.02 SUBMITTALS

1. Backdraft dampers.
2. Volume dampers.
3. Motorized control dampers.
4. Fire dampers.
5. Ceiling fire dampers.
6. Smoke dampers.
7. Combination fire and smoke dampers.
8. Duct silencers.
9. Turning vanes.
10. Duct-mounted access doors.
12. Flexible ducts.
1. Special fittings.
2. Manual-volume damper installations.
KEO/19-3262-0000 23 3300/1 Air Duct Accessories
3. Motorized-control damper installations.
4. Fire-damper, smoke-damper, and combination fire- and smoke-damper
installations, including sleeves and duct-mounting access doors.
C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale and coordinating

penetrations and ceiling-mounting items. Show ceiling-mounting access panels and
access doors required for access to duct accessories.
A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and
NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
B. Comply with “ASHRAE” & “SMACNA”
C. Comply with “DW 144”
A. Requirements of the General Conditions of Contract and Section 23 0100 shall be

referred to and complied with in all respects, without prejudice to this clause.
B. Following spare parts shall be furnished, properly packed and labelled with equipment
no. / location.
1. Two (2) nos. of fusible links of Fire dampers of each type and size used in the
project.
2. Four (4) sets of Motor with damper blades and actuators for each type and size
of Smoke control dampers used in the Project.
3. Four (4) sets of Motors with damper blades and actuators for each type and size
of Motorized volume control dampers used in the project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and
having G60, Z180, G90 or Z275 coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized
finish for surfaces exposed to view.
C. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 480/A 480M.

D. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy 3003, temper H14; with mill
finish for concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.
E. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy 6063, temper T6.
F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on

galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel
ducts.
G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches
(900 mm) or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches
(900 mm).
2.03 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS
A. Description: Multiple-blade, parallel action gravity balanced, with center-pivoted blades

of maximum 6-inch (150-mm) width, with sealed edges, assembled in rattle-free manner
with 90-degree stop, steel ball bearings, and axles; adjustment device to permit setting
for varying differential static pressure.
B. Frame: 0.052-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.063-inch- (1.6-mm-)

thick extruded aluminum, with welded corners and mounting flange.
C. Blades: 0.050-inch- (1.2-mm-) thick aluminum sheet.
D. Blade Seals: Neoprene.
E. Blade Axles: Nonferrous or Galvanized steel.
F. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum or Galvanized steel.
G. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.
2.04 VOLUME DAMPERS
A. General Description: Factory fabricated, with required hardware and accessories.

Stiffen damper blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers
in a fixed position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to
seal duct consistent with pressure class.
1. Pressure Classes of 3-Inch wg (750 Pa) or Higher: End bearings or other seals
for ducts with axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of
operating shaft.
B. Standard Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-blade design

as indicated, standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and suitable for
horizontal or vertical applications.
1. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized or stainless sheet steel channels,
minimum of 0.064 inch (1.62 mm) thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames
with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls and flangeless frames where
indicated for installing in ducts.
2. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 0.064-inch- (1.62-mm-) thick, galvanized or stainless
sheet steel.

3. Aluminum Frames: Hat-shaped, 0.10-inch- (2.5-mm-) thick, aluminum sheet
channels; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls; and
flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts.
4. Roll-Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.10-inch- (2.5-mm-) thick aluminum sheet.
5. Extruded-Aluminum Blades: 0.050-inch- (1.2-mm-) thick extruded aluminum.
6. Blade Axles: Galvanized or steel Stainless steel.
7. Bearings: Oil-impregnated bronze or Stainless-steel sleeve.
8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.
9. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
C. Low-Leakage Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-blade

design as indicated, low-leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and suitable for
horizontal or vertical applications.
1. Steel Frames: Hat, U or Angle-shaped, galvanized sheet steel channels,
minimum of 0.064 inch (1.62 mm) thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames
with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls and flangeless frames where
indicated for installing in ducts.
2. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 0.064-inch- (1.62-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel.
3. Aluminum Frames: Hat, U or Angle-shaped, 0.10-inch- (2.5-mm-) thick,
aluminum sheet channels; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to
walls and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts.
4. Roll-Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.10-inch- (2.5-mm-) thick aluminum sheet.
5. Extruded-Aluminum Blades: 0.050-inch- (1.2-mm-) thick extruded aluminum.
6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel Stainless steel.
7. Bearings: Oil-impregnated bronze or Stainless-steel sleeve thrust or ball.
8. Blade Seals: Felt or Neoprene.
9. Jamb Seals: Cambered stainless steel or aluminum.
10. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel or Aluminum.
D. Jackshaft: 1-inch- (25-mm-) diameter, galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing

assembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper
assemblies.
1. Length and Number of Mountings: Appropriate to connect linkage of each
damper in multiple-damper assembly.
E. Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch-
(2.4-mm-) thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch (19-mm) hexagon locking nut. Include
center hole to suit damper operating-rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated
duct mounting.
2.05 MOTORIZED CONTROL DAMPERS (If Applicable)
A. General Description: AMCA-rated, parallel or opposed-blade design; minimum of

0.1084-inch- (2.8-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel frames with holes for duct mounting;
minimum of 0.0635-inch- (1.61-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel damper blades with
maximum blade width of 8 inches (203 mm).
1. Secure blades to 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-
plated hardware, with nylon blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-
plated steel and brass, ends sealed against spring-stainless-steel blade
bearings, and thrust bearings at each end of every blade.
2. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F (minus 40 to
plus 93 deg C).
3. Provide opposed-blade design with inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable
rubber seals, rated for leakage at less than 10 cfm per sq. ft. (51 L/s per sq. m) of
damper area, at differential pressure of 4-inch wg (995 Pa) when damper is being
held by torque of 50 in. x lbf (5.6 N x m); when tested according to AMCA 500D.
2.06 FIRE DAMPERS (If Applicable)
A. Fire dampers shall be labeled according to UL 555.
B. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 or 3 hours.
C. Frame: Curtain type with blades inside airstream Curtain type with blades outside
airstream and Multiple-blade type; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-)
thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.
D. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Thickness: 0.052 or 0.138 inch (1.3 or 3.5 mm) thick as indicated and
of length to suit application.
2. Exceptions: Omit sleeve where damper frame width permits direct attachment of
perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor, and thickness of damper
frame complies with sleeve requirements.
E. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.
F. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel.

In place of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick, galvanized-
steel blade connectors.
G. Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring.
H. Fusible Links: Replaceable, 165 deg F (74 deg C) 212 deg F (100 deg C) rated.
2.07 CEILING FIRE DAMPERS (If Applicable)
A. General Description: Labeled according to UL 555C; comply with construction details

for tested floor- and roof-ceiling assemblies as indicated in UL's "Fire Resistance
Directory."
B. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, round or rectangular, style to suit ceiling construction.
C. Blades: Galvanized sheet steel with refractory insulation.
D. Fusible Links: Replaceable, 165 deg F (74 deg C) 212 deg F (100 deg C) 285 deg F
(141 deg C) rated.
2.08 SMOKE and COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS (If Applicable)
A. General Description: Labeled according to UL 555S. Combination fire and smoke

dampers shall be labeled according to UL 555 for 1-1/2-hour rating.
B. Fusible Links: Replaceable, 165 deg F (74 deg C) rated.
C. Frame and Blades: 0.064-inch- (1.62-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel.
D. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 0.052-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel;

length to suit wall or floor application.
E. Damper Motors: Modulating and two-position action.
1. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements
for HVAC Equipment."
2. Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Motors: With oil-immersed and
sealed gear trains.
3. Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism where
indicated. Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for
service or adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf (17 N x m)
and breakaway torque rating of 150 in. x lbf (17 N x m).
4. Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outside-Air Intakes: Equip with O-ring gaskets
designed to make motors weatherproof. Equip motors with internal heaters to
permit normal operation at minus 40 deg F (minus 40 deg C).
5. Nonspring-Return Motors: For dampers larger than 25 sq. ft. (2.3 sq. m), size
motor for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf (17 N x m) and breakaway torque
rating of 300 in. x lbf (34 N x m).
6. Electrical Connection: 115 V, single phase, 60 Hz.
2.09 DUCT SILENCERS (If Applicable)
A. General Description: Factory-fabricated and -tested, round or rectangular silencers with

performance characteristics and physical requirements as indicated.
B. Fire Performance: Adhesives, sealants, packing materials, and accessory materials

shall have fire ratings not exceeding 25 for flame-spread index and 50 for smoke-
developed index when tested according to ASTM E 84.
C. Rectangular Units: Fabricate casings with a minimum of 0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick,

solid galvanized sheet metal for outer casing and 0.022-inch- (0.55-mm-) thick,
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) perforated galvanized sheet metal for inner casing.
D. Round Units:
1. Outer Casings:
a. ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) galvanized sheet steel.
b. Up to 24 Inches (600 mm) in Diameter: 0.034 inch (0.85 mm) thick.
c. 26 through 40 Inches (660 through 1000 mm) in Diameter: 0.040 inch
(1.0 mm) thick.
d. 42 through 52 Inches (1060 through 1300 mm) in Diameter: 0.052 inch
(1.3 mm) thick.
e. 54 through 60 Inches (1370 through 1500 mm) in Diameter: 0.064 inch
(1.62 mm) thick.
f. Casings fabricated of spiral lock-seam duct may be one size thinner than
that indicated.
2. Interior Casing, Partitions, and Baffles:
a. ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) galvanized sheet steel.
b. At least 0.034 inch (0.85 mm) thick and designed for minimum
aerodynamic losses.
E. Sheet Metal Perforations: 1/8-inch (3-mm) diameter for inner casing and baffle sheet
metal.
F. Fill Material: Inert and vermin-proof fibrous material, packed under not less than 5
percent compression.
1. Erosion Barrier: Polymer bag enclosing fill and heat-sealed before assembly.

G. Fabricate silencers to form rigid units that will not pulsate, vibrate, rattle, or otherwise
react to system pressure variations.
1. Do not use nuts, bolts, or sheet metal screws for unit assemblies.
2. Lock form and seal or continuously weld joints.
3. Suspended Units: Factory-installed suspension hooks or lugs attached to frame
in quantities and spaced to prevent deflection or distortion.
4. Reinforcement: Cross or trapeze angles for rigid suspension.
H. Source Quality Control:

1. Acoustic Performance: Test according to ASTM E 477.
2. Record acoustic ratings, including dynamic insertion loss and self-noise power
levels with an airflow of at least 2000-fpm (10-m/s) face velocity.
3. Leak Test: Test units for airtightness at 200 percent of associated fan static
pressure or 6-inch wg (1500-Pa) static pressure, whichever is greater.
2.010 TURNING VANES
A. Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and

Flexible" for vanes and vane runners. Vane runners shall automatically align vanes.
B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) wide, vane, curved

blades of galvanized sheet steel set 3/4 inch (19 mm) o.c.; support with bars
perpendicular to blades set 2 inches (50 mm) o.c.; and set into vane runners suitable for
duct mounting.
C. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated

faces and fibrous-glass fill.
2.011 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS
A. General Description: Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.
B. Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and rectangular; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal
with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. Include vision
panel where indicated. Include 1-by-1-inch (25-by-25-mm) butt or piano hinge and cam
latches.
1. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.
2. Provide number of hinges and locks as follows:
a. Less Than 12 Inches (300 mm) Square: Secure with two sash locks.
b. Up to 18 Inches (450 mm) Square: Two hinges and two sash locks.
c. Up to 24 by 48 Inches (600 by 1200 mm): Three hinges and two
compression latches with outside and inside handles.
d. Sizes 24 by 48 Inches (600 by 1200 mm) and Larger: One additional
hinge.
C. Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and round; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with
insulation fill and 1-inch (25-mm) thickness. Include cam latches.
1. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with spin-in notched frame.
D. Pressure Relief Access Door: wall and duct mounting; fabricated of galvanized sheet
metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. Include
vision panel where indicated, latches, and retaining chain.
1. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.
E. Seal around frame attachment to duct and door to frame with neoprene or foam rubber.
F. Insulation: 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.
2.012 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS (As Applicable)
A. General Description: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and

adhesives complying with UL 181, Class 1.
B. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 5-3/4 inches (146 mm)
wide attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch- (70-mm-) wide, 0.028-inch- (0.7-mm-) thick,
galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch- (0.8-mm-) thick aluminum sheets. Select metal
compatible with ducts.
C. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.
1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd. (880 g/sq. m).
2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch (84 N/mm) in the warp and 360 lbf/inch (63 N/mm)
in the filling.
3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 93 deg C).
D. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with
weatherproof, synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.
in the filling.
E. High-Temperature System, Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric coated with silicone

rubber.
in the filling.
F. High-Corrosive-Environment System, Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric with chemical-

resistant coating.
in the filling.
2.013 FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A. Noninsulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically

wound, spring-steel wire.
1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa) positive and 1.0-inch wg (250 Pa)
negative.
2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm (20.3 m/s).
3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F (Minus 23 to plus 71 deg C).
B. Noninsulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, black polymer film supported by

helically wound, spring-steel wire.
1. Pressure Rating:4-inch wg (1000 Pa) positive and 0.5-inch wg (125 Pa) negative.
C. Noninsulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, multiple layers of aluminum laminate

supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire.
1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa) positive and 1.0-inch wg250 Pa
negative.
D. Noninsulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyester film

with latex adhesive supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire.
1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa) positive and 1.0-inch wg250 Pa
negative.
E. Noninsulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 0, interlocking spiral of aluminum foil.

1. Pressure Rating: 8-inch wg (2280 Pa) positive or negative.
F. Insulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically

wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene or aluminized vapor
barrier film.
negative.
G. Insulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, black polymer film supported by helically

wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene or aluminized vapor
barrier film.
negative.
H. Insulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, multiple layers of aluminum laminate

supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene or
aluminized vapor barrier film.
negative.
I. Insulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyester film with
latex adhesive supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation;
polyethylene or aluminized vapor barrier film.
negative.
J. Insulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 0, interlocking spiral of aluminum foil;

fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene or aluminized vapor barrier film.
1. Pressure Rating: 8-inch wg (2280 Pa) positive or negative.
K. Flexible Duct Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten
band with a worm-gear action, in sizes 3 through 18 inches (75 to 450 mm) to suit duct
size.
2.014 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE (If Applicable)
A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw
cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of
length to suit duct insulation thickness.
B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to
gasoline and grease.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION
A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116,
"Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.
B. Provide duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel

accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in
stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.
C. Install backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and
where indicated.
D. Install volume dampers in ducts with liner; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner.
E. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where
branches lead from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install at a minimum of
two duct widths from branch takeoff.
F. Provide test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.
G. Install fire and smoke dampers, with fusible links, according to manufacturer's UL-
approved written instructions.
H. Install duct silencers independent of ducts with flexible duct connectors, lagged with
loaded vinyl sheet on inlets and outlets.
I. Install duct access doors to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories
and terminal units as follows:
1. On both sides of duct coils.
2. Downstream from volume dampers, turning vanes, and equipment.
3. Adjacent to fire or smoke dampers, providing access to reset or reinstall fusible
links.

4. To interior of ducts for cleaning; before and after each change in direction, at
maximum 50-foot (15-m) spacing.
5. On sides of ducts where adequate clearance is available.
J. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, rectangular access doors:

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches (200 by 125 mm).
2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches (300 by 150 mm).
3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches (460 by 250 mm).
4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches (530 by 355 mm).
5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches (635 by 355 mm).
6. Body Plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches (635 by 430 mm).
K. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, round access doors:

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 inches (200 mm) in diameter.
2. Two-Hand Access: 10 inches (250 mm) in diameter.
3. Head and Hand Access: 12 inches (300 mm) in diameter.
4. Head and Shoulders Access: 18 inches (460 mm) in diameter.
5. Body Access: 24 inches (600 mm) in diameter.
L. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, pressure relief access doors:
1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 7 inches (175 mm) in diameter.
2. Two-Hand Access: 10 inches (250 mm) in diameter.
3. Head and Hand Access: 13 inches (330 mm) in diameter.
4. Head and Shoulders Access: 19 inches (480 mm) in diameter.
M. Label access doors according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and
Equipment."
N. Install flexible connectors immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with

fans and motorized equipment supported by vibration isolators.
O. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg (1250 Pa) and higher, cover flexible
connectors with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.
P. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with maximum 12-inch (300-mm)
lengths of flexible duct. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions.
Q. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts directly or with maximum
60-inch (1500-mm) lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.
R. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with liquid adhesive plus tape or adhesive plus
sheet metal screws.
S. Install duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.
3.02 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.
B. Adjust fire and smoke dampers for proper action.
C. Final positioning of manual-volume dampers is specified in Division 23 Section "Testing,

Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."

END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 3413
AXIAL HVAC FANS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1. Tubeaxial fans.
2. Vaneaxial fans.
3. Mixed-flow fans.
4. Smoke Exhaust fans
5. Glass / Wall mounted fan
1.02 RELATED SECTION: Related work to be coordinated and used in conjunction with this
specification includes but is not restricted to:
A. Section 23 0548 – Vibration and Seismic Control. Of HVAC Piping and Equipment.
B. Section 23 3113 – Metal Ducts
C. Section 23 0513 – Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment.
D. Section 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook
B. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes
C. AMCA 300 - Test Code Sound Rating Air Moving Devices.
D. AMCA 301 - Method of Calculating Fan Sound Rating from Laboratory Test
E. AMCA 303 – Application of Sound Power Level Ratings for Fans
F. ANSI/AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
G. ANSI/AFBMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
H. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard, Metal and Flexible.
KEO/19-3262-0000 23 3413/1 Axial Hvac Fans

A. Project Altitude: Base fan performance ratings on actual Project site elevations above
sea level.
B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.
C. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210.
D. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300.
E. Fabrication Conform to AMCA 99.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each
type of product indicated and include the following:
1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.
2. Certified fan sound-power ratings.
3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.
4. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts.
5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
6. Fan speed controllers.
2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and
seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.
3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and
slides and rails, and base weights.
C. Coordination Drawings: Show fan room layout and relationships between components
and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of
support, and weight on each support. Indicate and certify field measurements.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For axial fans to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.

B. AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and shall be
licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
C. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA
standards.

A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations,

with protective crating and covering.
B. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to final locations, according
to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.
1.08 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.
1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS (If Applicable)
contents.
1. Belts: One set(s) for each belt-driven unit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

2.02 GENERAL
A. Fans shall be capable of accommodating static pressure variations of plus or minus 10

percent.
B. Base performance on sea level conditions.
C. Statically and dynamically balance fans to eliminate vibration or noise transmission to

occupied areas.
D. Fans for out door installation shall be weather protected and provided with anticorrosion
paint.
E. Fans used for kitchen exhaust shall be inline bifurcated type complete with grease trap
and drain connection.
F. Static - pressures given in the equipment Schedules are only for guidance. The
Contractor should submit static pressure calculations for all fans for approval before
ordering the equipment’s. The Contractor should give the required fan and motor h.p.
Without additional cost. The contractor may propose lower motor hp as per the
calculations and as approved.

G. Contractor shall select fans for low noise application and shall provide all necessary
measures such as provision of sound attenuators, Acoustic enclosures, acoustic lining
to limit sound to acceptable noise levels. Contractor shall submit noise calculations for
the selected fan and attenuators/and or acoustic enclosures for the approval prior to
ordering the equipment.
2.03 TUBEAXIAL FANS (As Applicable)
A. Description: Fan wheel and housing, factory-mounted motor with belt drive or direct
drive, an inlet cone section, and accessories.
B. Housings: Steel Galvanized steel or Aluminum or Fiberglass-reinforced plastic or

Stainless steel with flanged inlet and outlet connections. (See Equipment Schedule)
C. Wheel Assemblies: Cast or extruded aluminum with airfoil-shaped blades mounted on

cast-iron wheel plate keyed to shaft with solid-steel key.
D. Wheel Assemblies: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic cured under pressure with airfoil-

shaped blades keyed to stainless steel shaft.
E. Wheel Assemblies: Cast aluminum, machined and fitted to shaft.
F. Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after
installation.
1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size (as per NEMA): 1.2
2. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel designed to operate at no more
than 70 percent of first critical speed at top of fan's speed range.
3. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at
factory.
4. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp; fixed pitch for
use with larger motors. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of
adjustment range at fan design conditions.
5. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt
drives.
6. Belt Guards: Fabricate of steel for motors mounted on outside of fan cabinet.
7. Motor Mount: Adjustable base.
8. Shaft Bearings: Radial, self-aligning ball or roller bearings.
a. Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, L10 of 100,000 hours.
b. Roller-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 11, L10 of 100,000 hours.
c. Extend lubrication lines to outside of casing and terminate with grease
fittings.
G. Accessories:
1. Companion Flanges: Rolled flanges of same material as housing.
2. Inspection Door: Bolted door allowing limited access to internal parts of fan, of
same material as housing.
3. Propeller Access Section Door: Short duct section bolted to fan inlet and outlet
allowing access to internal parts of fan for inspection and cleaning, of same
material as housing.
4. Swingout Construction: Assembly allowing entire fan section to swing out from
duct for cleaning and servicing, of same material as housing.
5. Mounting Clips: Horizontal ceiling or Vertical mounting clips welded to fan
housing, of same material as housing.

6. Horizontal Support: Pair of supports bolted to fan housing, of same material as
housing.
7. Vertical Support: Short duct section with welded brackets bolted to fan housing,
of same material as housing.
8. Inlet and Outlet Screens: Wire-mesh screen on fans not connected to ductwork,
9. Backdraft Dampers: Butterfly style, for bolting to the discharge of fan or outlet
cone, of same material as housing.
10. Shaft Seal: Elastomeric seal and Teflon wear plate, suitable for up to 300 deg F
(149 deg C).
11. Motor Cover: Cover with side vents to dissipate motor heat, of same material as
housing.
12. Inlet Vanes: Adjustable; with peripheral control linkage operated from outside of
airstream, bronze sleeve bearings on each end of vane support, and provision for
manual or automatic operation of same material as housing.
13. Inlet Bell: Curved inlet for when fan is not attached to duct, of same material as
housing.
14. Inlet Cones: Round-to-round transition of same material as housing.
15. Outlet Cones: Round-to-round transition of same material as housing.
16. Stack Cap: Vertical discharge assembly with backdraft dampers, of same
H. Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor

Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
1. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.
2. Direct-Driven Units: Encase motor in housing outside of airstream, factory wired
to disconnect switch located on outside of fan housing.
I. Factory Finishes:
1. Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coat before final assembly.
2. Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat after assembly.
3. Coatings: Epoxy Zinc or Synthetic resin Color-match enamel or Hot-dip
galvanized Powder-baked enamel.
a. Apply to finished housings.
b. Apply to fan wheels.
J. Capacities and Characteristics: (See Equipment schedule on plan)
2.04 VANEAXIAL FANS (As Applicable)
A. Description: Fan wheel and housing, straightening vane section, factory-mounted motor
with belt drive or direct drive, an inlet cone section, and accessories.
1. Variable-Pitch Fans: Internally mounted pneumatic electric electronic actuator,
externally mounted positive positioner, and mechanical-blade-pitch indicator.
B. Housings: Steel Galvanized steel Aluminum Fiberglass-reinforced plastic Stainless

steel. (See Equipment Schedule on Plan)
1. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Flanges.
2. Guide Vane Section: Integral guide vanes downstream from fan wheel designed
to straighten airflow.
C. Wheel Assemblies: Cast aluminum with airfoil-shaped blades mounted on cast-iron

wheel plate keyed to shaft with solid-steel key.

D. Wheel Assemblies: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic cured under pressure with airfoil-
shaped blades keyed to stainless steel shaft.
E. Wheel Assemblies: Cast-aluminum hub assembly, machined and fitted with threaded
bearing wells to receive blade-bearing assemblies with replaceable, cast-aluminum
blades; factory mounted and balanced.
F. Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after
installation.
factory.
drives.
6. Belt Guards: Fabricate of steel for motors mounted on outside of fan cabinet.
fittings.
G. Accessories:
1. Companion Flanges: Rolled flanges of same material as housing.
2. Inspection Door: Bolted door allowing limited access to internal parts of fan, of
3. Propeller Access Section Door: Short duct section bolted to fan inlet outlet inlet
and outlet allowing access to internal parts of fan for inspection and cleaning, of
4. Swingout Construction: Assembly allowing entire fan section to swing out from
duct for cleaning and servicing, of same material as housing.
5. Mounting Clips: Horizontal ceiling Vertical mounting clips welded to fan housing,
6. Horizontal Support: Pair of supports bolted to fan housing, of same material as
housing.
7. Vertical Support: Short duct section with welded brackets bolted to fan housing,
8. Inlet and Outlet Screens: Wire-mesh screen on fans not connected to ductwork
9. Backdraft Dampers: Butterfly style, for mounting with flexible connection to the
discharge of fan or direct mounted to the discharge diffuser section of same
10. Stall Alarm Probe: Sensing probe capable of detecting fan operation in stall and
signaling control devices. Control devices and sequence of operation are
specified in Division 23 Sections "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and
"Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls."
11. Flow Measurement Port: Pressure measurement taps installed in the inlet of fan
to detect and signal airflow readings to temperature-control systems. Control
devices and sequence of operation are specified in Division 23 Sections
"Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and "Sequence of Operations for HVAC
Controls."
12. Shaft Seal: Elastomeric seal and Teflon wear plate, suitable for up to300 deg F
(148 deg C).
housing.
14. Inlet Vanes: Adjustable; with peripheral control linkage operated from outside of
airstream, bronze sleeve bearings on each end of vane support, and provision for
manual or automatic operation of same material as housing.
housing.
H. Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor

I. Factory Finishes:
3. Coatings: Epoxy or Synthetic resin Color-match enamel Hot-dip galvanized or
Powder-baked enamel.
J. Capacities and Characteristics: (See Equpment schedule on plan)

1. Vibration Isolators: Spring isolators Restrained spring isolators <Insert type>
having a static deflection of 1 inch (25 mm) <Insert deflection>.
2.05 MIXED-FLOW FANS (As Applicable)
A. Description: Fan wheel and housing, straightening vane section, factory-mounted motor
with belt drive, and accessories.
B. Housings: Steel or Galvanized steel.

1. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Outer mounting frame and companion flanges.
2. Guide Vane Section: Integral guide vanes downstream from fan wheel designed
to straighten airflow.
3. Mixed-Flow Outlet Connection: One or Two flanged discharge(s) perpendicular
to fan inlet.
C. Wheel Assemblies: Cast aluminum with airfoil-shaped blades mounted on cast-iron

wheel plate keyed to shaft with solid-steel key.
D. Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after
installation.
factory.
drives.
fittings.
E. Accessories:
1. Mounting Clips: Horizontal ceiling or Vertical mounting clips welded to fan
housing, of same material as housing.
2. Inlet and Outlet Screens: Wire-mesh screen on fans not connected to ductwork
3. Backdraft Dampers: Butterfly style, for mounting with flexible connection to the
discharge of fan or direct mounted to the discharge diffuser section of same
housing.
housing.
F. Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor

G. Factory Finishes:
3. Coatings: Epoxy or Synthetic resin or Color-match enamel or Hot-dip galvanized
Powder-baked enamel.
H. Capacities and Characteristics: (See Equipment Schedule on plan)

1. Vibration Isolators: Spring isolators Restrained spring isolators or having a
static deflection of 1 inch (25 mm).
2.06 SMOKE EXTRACT FANS (As Applicable)
A. Description: Units are designed to permit operation at extreme elevated temperatures

for a known time period under smoke operation. Fans to be capable of withstanding
temperatures of up to 300⁰C generally for up to 1 hour duration as per Local Civil
Defense / Fire Brigade Requirements. Roof units shall include a cowl of fiberglass or
aluminum.
B. Construction: Casings shall be heavy gauge, mild sheet steel, roll formed and welded,
then hot dipped galvanized to BS 729. Hubs shall be die cast aluminum alloy. Fan shall
be complete with adjustable pitch aerofoil impellers with blades pressure die cast
aluminum alloy or polyester powder coated steel.
C. Motor: Motors shall be foot mounted totally enclosed metric type to IP55, with sealed for
life bearings, standard industrial paint finish and Class H insulation to BS 4999 Part 20,
IEC 34/1, suitable for operating at high temperatures, motors are to be wired using high
temperature rated weatherproofed cable to an IP55 protected terminal box mounted on
the outside of the unit casing.
D. Units are to be designed and manufactured with procedures as defined in BSEN ISO
9001: 1994. EEC Directives shall be met. Motor shall be tested for high temperature
operation in accordance with BS 7346 (Part 2) and PR EN 12101-3.
E. Performance: Fan unit is tested to either National or European draft standards. Smoke
extract axial fans shall be tested to ISO 5801 (1997) – Airside Performance, and BS 848
Part 2 (1985) – Sound level performance.
F. Accessories: Fans shall be complete with the following accessories:

1. Mounting feet
2. Anti Vibration mounts
3. Matching Flanges
4. Inlet Cones
5. Non Return Dampers and Wire Guards
G. For Variable frequency drive (VFD) specification, refer Electrical Specification.
2.07 GLASS / WALL MOUNTED FAN
A. All window or wall mounted extract fans shall be suitable for Kuwait outdoor conditions.
They shall be provided with outside baffles for protection against weather. Fans shall be
completely enclosed designed with draft proof automatic electrically operated shutters.
A. Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan
Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300,
"Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-
Certified Ratings Seal.
B. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of
rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory
Methods of Testing Fans for Rating."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install axial fans level and plumb.
B. Support floor-mounting units using spring isolators or restrained spring isolators having
a static deflection of 1 inch (25 mm). Vibration- and seismic-control devices are
specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and
Equipment."
1. Secure vibration and seismic controls to concrete bases using anchor bolts cast
in concrete base.
C. Install floor-mounting units on concrete bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork

requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
D. Install floor-mounting units on concrete bases designed to withstand, without damage to

equipment, the seismic force required by authorities having jurisdiction. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-
Place Concrete."
E. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and spring hangers
with vertical-limit stops having a static deflection of 1 inch (25 mm). Vibration-control
devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC
Piping and Equipment."
F. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
G. Label fans according to requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Identification for

HVAC Piping and Equipment."
3.02 CONNECTIONS
A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 23 Section-
23 3113. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make
final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in
Section 23 3300 "Air Duct Accessories."
1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that
connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper
thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect
switches.
3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify
fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive
system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.
5. Adjust belt tension.
6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.
8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in
connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.

9. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation, adjust fan to indicated rpm, and
measure and record motor voltage and amperage.
10. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.
11. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
B. Adjust belt tension.
C. Lubricate bearings.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 3413.13
HIGH PLUME DILUTION LABORATORY EXHAUST FAN
PART 1 - GENERAL
1. High-Plume Dilution Laboratory Exhaust Fans
1. All sections, drawing plans, specifications and contract documents.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/AMCA Standard 99-10, "Standards Handbook"
B. ANSI/AMCA Standard 204-05, "Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans"
C. ANSI/AMCA Standard 210-07, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic

Performance Rating"
D. AMCA Publication 211-05, "Certified Ratings Program – Product Rating Manual for Fan
Air Performance"
E. AMCA Standard 260-07, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Induced Flow Fans for Rating"
F. ANSI/AMCA Standard 300-08, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans"
G. AMCA Publication 311-05, "Certified Ratings Program – Product Rating Manual for Fan
Sound Performance"
H. AMBA Method of Evaluating Load Ratings of Bearings ANSI-11 (r1999)
I. ANSI/AMCA Standard 500-D-12, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Dampers for Rating"
J. ANSI/AMCA Standard 500-L-12, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating"
K. SMACNA - Medium Pressure Plenum Construction Standard
L. ANSI/AIHA Z9.5-2012 – Laboratory Ventilation
M. ASHRAE - Laboratory Design Guide
N. OSHA guideline 1910.212 – General requirements for Machine Guarding.

(www.osha.gov)
KEO/19-3262-0000 23 3413.13/1 High Plume Dilution Laboratory Exhaust Fan

O. OSHA guideline 1910.219 – General requirements for guarding safe use of mechanical
power transmission apparatus. (www.osha.gov)
P. OSHA guideline 1926.300 – General requirements for safe operation and maintenance
of hand and power tools. (www.osha.gov)
Q. UL Standard 705, “Power Ventilators”
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide dimensional drawings and product data on each high-plume dilution laboratory
exhaust fan assembly.
B. Provide fan curves for each fan at the specified operation point, with the flow, static
pressure and horsepower clearly plotted.
C. Provide nozzle velocity of exhaust fan, total exhaust flow, and discharge plume rise at
specified wind velocity.
D. Strictly adhere to QUALITY ASSURANCE requirements as stated in section 1.4 of this

specification.
A. Performance ratings: Conform to ANSI/AMCA Standards 210, 260 and 300. Fans must
be tested in accordance with AMCA Publications 211, 260 and 311 in an AMCA
accredited laboratory and certified for air and sound performance. Fan shall be licensed
to bear the AMCA ratings seal for air performance (AMCA 210), sound performance
(AMCA 300), and induced flow fan for high plume dilution blowers (AMCA 260).
Manufacturers that are not licensed to bear the AMCA 210 and 260 ratings seal, must
provide performance witness testing (at the manufacturer's expense), per paragraph
1.4.D.
B. Classification for Spark Resistant Construction shall conform to ANSI/AMCA Standard

99.
C. Each fan shall be vibration tested before shipping, as an assembly, in accordance with
ANSI/AMCA Standard 204. Each assembled fan shall be test run at the factory at the
specified fan RPM and vibration signatures shall be taken on each bearing in three
planes - horizontal, vertical, and axial. The maximum allowable fan vibration shall be
less than 0.10 in. /sec peak velocity; filter-in reading as measured at the fan RPM. This
report shall be provided at no charge to the customer upon request.
D. Manufacturers that do not comply with paragraph 1.4.A must also provide, at the owner
and engineer's option and manufacturer's expense, witness testing of fan discharge and
entrainment airflow, performed in an AMCA accredited laboratory, in accordance with
AMCA 210 and 260. This test shall verify the critical and safety related dilution
performance of the high plume dilution blower, as stated by the manufacturer.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Deliver materials to site in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers and packaging,
with labels clearly indicating manufacturer, material, products included, and location of
installation.
B. Store materials in a dry area indoor, protected from damage, and in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions. For long term storage, follow manufacturer’s Installation,
Operation and Maintenance manual.
C. Handle and lift fans in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Protect materials
and finishes during handling and installation to prevent damage. Follow all safety
warnings posted by the manufacturer.
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not operate fans for any purpose until ductwork is clean, filters are in place,
bearings have been lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Provide two year manufacturer warranty from the date of substantial completion.
B. Refer to the “General Requirements and Scope of Works” for additional warranty
requirements.
1.08 SPARES
A. Supply two sets of belts for each fan.
B. Contractor shall provide all required spares as specified in the “General Requirements
and Scope of Works”.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

2.02 GENERAL
A. Fans shall have the performance and duty as stated elsewhere.
B. Fans shall be selected to deliver the required air volume flow rate and meet the noise
levels indicated.
C. Any allowances required to meet manufacturing tolerances shall be included.
D. All fan resistances stated have been calculated based on a particular selection of
equipment. The installer shall recalculate the total system resistances based on

the final selection of plant and installation drawings and revise the fan resistance as
necessary to achieve the design air volume flow.
E. Similarly, if the fan power requirements and sound power level changes, the installer
shall reselect the necessary motor size, wiring and suitable attenuation to achieve the
noise levels stated elsewhere at no additional cost.
F. The installer shall ensure that the fan is capable of generating sufficient pressure to
meet the required volume flow in the ductwork system as installed including any effect
on fan performance from suction and discharge connections.
G. Fan resistances shall take account of pressure drop across filters in dirty conditions.
H. Individual components shall, in addition to the requirements of this section, comply with
other relevant sections of this specification.
I. Manufacturing drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer of all fans for approval prior
to manufacture.
J. Fans shall be installed in a manner strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations.
K. Manufacturer’s test certificates, acoustic data and fan curves shall be submitted to the
Engineer. Fan curves shall indicate performance under all likely operating conditions.
L. Fans shall be constructed to proven design standards and shall be capable of

withstanding the pressures and stresses developed during continuous operation at
the selected duty, during starting, during stopping and during speed and duty
changes. Fan casings shall be of substantial construction, adequately stiffened and
braced to prevent vibration and drumming. Bolted inspection covers shall be provided to
allow easy access to internal working parts. Lubrication points shall be extended to
accessible positions external to the casings.
M. Externally mounted fans and internal exposed surfaces on fans handling outside air
shall be protected against corrosion.
N. Fans and drives shall be resiliently mounted. Mountings and supports shall be arranged
to prevent undue movement of fans relative to adjacent ductwork systems or building
structure.
O. Fans and drives shall be mounted on rigid base-frames or support structures to

ensure that proper alignment is maintained.
P. All fans shall be capable of operating at ambient temperatures of 50 degree Celsius and
the casing material shall be able to withstand sun radiation temperature up to 85 degree
Celsius.
Q. All fans used for life safety operations or hazardous operations shall be subject to Civil
Defense Department approval.
R. Base fan performance at standard conditions (density 0.075 Lb. /ft3).
S. Fans selected shall be capable of accommodating static pressure and flow variations of
+/- 15% of scheduled values.
T. Each fan shall be belt driven in AMCA arrangement 9 according to drawings.

U. Each fan to be equipped with 316 stainless steel lifting lugs for corrosion resistance.
V. Fasteners exposed to corrosive exhaust shall be 316 stainless steel.
W. Curb cap shall be hot rolled steel [316 stainless steel] coated with corrosion resistant
coating.
X. Fan assemblies that use flexible connectors that can fail and cause loss of laboratory
containment shall not be acceptable.
Y. Fan assembly shall be designed for a minimum of 125-mph wind loading, without the
use of guy wires.
Z. Motor cover shall be hinged with removable side panels for ease of maintenance to
allow the servicing of the motor and drive.
2.03 CORROSION RESISTANT COATING
A. All fan and system components (fan, nozzle, windband and plenum) shall be corrosion
resistant coated with LabCoat™, a two part electrostatically applied and baked,
sustainable, corrosion resistant coating system. Standard finish color to be RAL 7023,
concrete grey.
B. All parts shall be cleaned and chemically prepared for coating using a multi-stage wash
system which includes acid pickling that removes oxide, increases surface area, and
improves coating bond to the substrate.
C. The first powder coat applied over the prepared surface shall be a zinc rich epoxy
primer (no less than 70% zinc) and heated to a gelatinous consistency (partial cure) at
which the second powder coat of polyester resin shall be electrostatically applied and
simultaneously be cured at a uniform temperature of 400°F.
D. The coating system, a total thickness of up to 6 mils, is not affected by the UV

component of sunlight (does not chalk), and has superior corrosion resistance to acid,
alkali, and solvents. Coating system shall exceed 4000 hour ASTM B117 Salt Spray.
E. Note that 10-20 mil thick wet coating systems pollute the environment (air and water),
and that these manually applied coatings are not uniform over the impeller surface and
can cause fan imbalance and vibration.
2.04 FAN HOUSING AND OUTLET
A. Fan housing shall be aerodynamically designed with high-efficiency inlet, engineered to

reduce incoming air turbulence.
B. Fan housing shall be bifurcated, allowing all drive components, including the motor, to
be serviced without contact of the contaminated airstream. Must be manufactured of
welded steel and meet specification section 2.15 for corrosion resistant coating. No
uncoated metal fan parts will be acceptable.
C. Fan housings that are fabricated of polypropylene or fiberglass that have lower
mechanical properties than steel, have rough interior surfaces in which corrosive,
hazardous compounds can collect, and / or which chalk and structurally degrade due to
the UV component of the sunlight shall not be acceptable.
D. A multi-stage air induction discharge nozzle shall be supplied by the fan manufacturer
be designed to efficiently handle an outlet velocity of up to 7000 FPM. The multi-stage
nozzle shall induce ambient air up to 270% of fan capacity. Nozzle / windband
assemblies that are manufactured by third party vendors or that are fabricated of plastic
or resins, having mechanical properties less than steel shall not be acceptable.
E. An integral fan housing drain shall be used to drain rainwater when the fan is de-
energized.
F. An access door shall be supplied for impeller inspection and service.
G. Fan assembly shall be AMCA type C spark resistant construction minimum or as noted
on the schedule.
2.05 FAN IMPELLER
A. Fan impeller shall be mixed flow design with non-stall characteristics. The impeller shall
be electronically balanced both statically and dynamically exceeding AMCA Standards.
B. Fan impeller shall be manufactured of welded and coated steel. Reference specification
clause 2,03 for corrosion resistant coating.
C. Fan impellers that are fabricated of polypropylene or fiberglass that have lower
mechanical properties than steel and lower maximum tip speeds are not acceptable.
D. Vacuum Seal: Fan impeller shall include a secondary fan blade located on the impeller
back plate. This secondary impeller shall create a negative pressure at the shaft
opening; preventing hazardous or toxic exhaust fumes from escaping through the
housing shaft opening. Mechanical shaft seals that wear out and need to be replaced or
seal systems that use hoses or tubes that can leak, are not acceptable.
2.06 BYPASS AIR PLENUM
A. For constant volume systems, the fan / nozzle assembly shall be connected directly to
roof curb and exhaust duct without the need of the bypass air plenum. Fans mounted
directly to roof curb shall be provided with a damper tray located in the roof curb for
mounting of the gravity isolation damper.
B. For variable volume systems, a bypass air plenum shall be provided. The plenum shall
be provided with bypass air damper(s) for introducing outside air at roof level upstream
of the fan, complete with bypass air weatherhood and bird screen.
C. The plenum shall be constructed of welded and coated steel and meet specification
clause 2,03 for corrosion resistant coating. Plenums that are fabricated of plastics or
resins that are combustible and have mechanical properties less than steel shall not be
acceptable.
D. The bypass air plenum shall be mounted on factory fabricated roof curb provided by the
fan manufacturer, as shown on the project drawings (See section 2.5).
E. Fan designs that use inlet flexible connectors that can leak causing loss of lab exhaust

F. Bypass air damper(s) shall be opposed-blade design for airflow control, airfoil design,
fabricated of 316 stainless steel for structural rigidity as standard. Bypass damper(s)
shall have plated steel damper rods, stainless steel sleeved bearings, 301 stainless
steel jamb seals and the blades shall have polymer edge seals. Damper model shall be
equal to or exceed a heavy duty control damper, Greenheck HCD-130. Damper blade
drive linkage shall be set by manufacturer and welded to eliminate linkage slippage. All
damper access and service (drive actuators) shall be performed outside of the
contaminated airstream.
G. If stated in the schedule notes, an optional, integral bypass air packed acoustic
attenuator fabricated of stainless steel construction shall be provided by the fan
manufacturer (if shown on the drawings).
H. Fan isolation damper(s), shall be parallel-blade design, airfoil design, fabricated of steel
[304 stainless steel construction] for structural rigidity as standard. Damper(s) shall be
coated up to 4 mils of chemically resistant Hi-Pro Polyester resin, electrostatically
applied and baked. Isolation damper(s) shall have plated steel damper rods (if specified
as 304 stainless steel damper, stainless steel damper rods will be provided), stainless
steel sleeved bearings, 301 stainless steel jamb seals and the blades shall have
polymer edge seals. Damper model shall be equal to or exceed a heavy duty control
damper, Greenheck HCD-130. Damper blade drive linkage shall be set by manufacturer
and welded to eliminate linkage slippage. All damper access and service (drive
actuators) shall be performed outside of the contaminated airstream.
I. Isolation damper actuator(s), if scheduled shall be factory mounted and shall be wired to
a step-down transformer. Actuator and transformer are located in a weatherproof
enclosure.
J. Blower / Plenum vibration isolation shall be limited to neoprene / cork vibration pads.
2.07 BYPASS AIR PLENUM CURB
A. Exhaust system manufacturer shall supply a structural support curb for the plenum of
specified height as shown on the drawings.
B. Curb shall be fabricated of a minimum of 12 gauge corrosion-resistant coated steel and

structurally reinforced.
C. Curb shall be insulated.
D. When properly anchored to the roof structure, the standard curb / plenum / blower
assembly shall withstand wind loads of up to 125 mph without additional structural
support.
2.08 FAN MOTORS AND DRIVE
A. Motors shall be premium efficiency, standard NEMA frame, 1800 or 3600 RPM, TEFC
with a 1.15 service factor. A factory-mounted NEMA 4X disconnect switch shall be
provided for each fan.
B. Motor maintenance shall be accomplished without fan impeller removal or requiring

maintenance personnel to access the contaminated exhaust components. Drive
arrangement shall be AMCA arrangement 9. Direct drive arrangement 4, or direct drive

arrangements requiring access and handling of hazardous and contaminated fan
components for motor replacement are not acceptable.
C. Drive belts and sheaves shall be sized for 200% of the fan operating brake horsepower,
and shall be readily and easily accessible for service, if required. Drive shall consist of a
minimum of two belts under all circumstances.
D. Fan shaft to be turned and polished of 1040 steel material [316 stainless steel] as
standard, coated with corrosion resistant coating.
E. Fan shaft bearings shall be Air Handling Quality, ball or roller pillow block type and be
sized for an
F. L-10 life of no less than 200,000 hours. Bearings shall be fixed to the fan shaft using
concentric mounting locking collars, which reduce vibration, increase service life, and
improve serviceability. Bearings that use setscrews shall not be acceptable.
G. All shaft bearings and non-permanently lubricated motors shall have stainless steel
braided extended lube lines with Zerk fittings.
H. Belt drive motors shall have ventilated motor cover. Motor cover shall be hinged with
removable side panels for ease of maintenance to allow the servicing of the motor and
drive(s).
2.09 FANS WITH AIR FLOW MONITORING SELECTED SHALL INCLUDE THE
FOLLOWING
A. Flow monitoring station shall monitor the pressure difference between the fan inlet and
the smallest diameter of the inlet cone.
B. Volumetric flow to be calculated from empirically derived formulas based on testing by

the fan manufacturer.
C. Flow monitoring station shall not use air restricting flow devices that reduce fan
performance or create additional fan sound.
D. Two (2) equidistantly spaced sensor orifices to be drilled in the smallest diameter of the
inlet cone venturi. Flow tubes from each venturi sensor shall be extended to a
termination location mounted on the fan housing.
E. High-pressure flow port(s) shall be mounted in low velocity fan inlet. Flow ports from the
high-pressure sensor shall extend to a termination location mounted on the fan housing.
F. Termination location shall include a low-pressure connection, a high-pressure

connection and a listing of the empirically determined flow rate coefficient.
G. Flow monitoring station shall accurately measure the pressure differential to within +/-
3%.
H. Flow monitoring station to be installed by the fan manufacturer as part of the standard
fan assembly.
I. Flow monitoring station to be supplied with electronics package that includes pressure
transmitter and LCD digital readout.

J. Material:
K. Tubing: black polyethylene, UV resistant, chemically inert tubing, interior and exterior
(standard), Temperature range: -100 - 175°F (-73 - 80°C)
L. Tube Fittings: Stainless steel compression fittings, interior. Brass compression fittings,
exterior
2.010 FANS WITH A FAN MONITORING SYSTEM SELECTED SHALL INCLUDE THE
FOLLOWING
A. Fan Monitor shall include all the following:

1. NEMA-4 / IP56 Enclosure rating
2. Factory calibrated, plug and play wiring
3. 120-240 VAC or 24 VAC/VDC input voltage
4. Two analog sensor inputs using any of the following: 4-20 mA, 0-10 VDC, 2-10
VDC
5. Three selectable isolated outputs matched to inputs: 4-20 mA, 0-10 VDC, 2-10
VDC
6. Temperature range: -4 to 140°F (-20 to 60°C)
7. LCD display with touch panel interface
8. English or metric readings
9. ETL Listed
B. One of the following sensor packages

1. Bearing Vibration
2. Current
3. Current and Vibration
4. Bearing Temperature
5. RPM and Current
6. Airstream Temperature and Pressure
C. Bearing Vibration: Used to detect and monitor vibration on fan shaft bearing(s) or motor
bearing.
1. Velocity vibration sensor, corrosion resistant stainless steel casing
2. Temperature Range: -40 to 185°F (-40 to 85°C)
3. Input Voltage: 10 VDC minimum, 30 VDC maximum
4. Output Signal: 4-20 mA
5. Accuracy: 5% transverse sensitivity, ±2% repeatability
6. Each kit includes sensor unit, base and cable.
D. Fan monitor programmed with fault setting for alarm and IO for trend analysis indicating
bearing condition.
E. Current Sensor: Used to detect current (amps) usage of motor.

1. Current sensor with analog output, operating power induced from monitored
wiring
2. NEMA 4/4X, 6 (IP 66/67) polycarbonate mounting enclosure
3. Temperature Range: 5 to 104°F (-15 to 40°C)
4. Output Signal: 0-10 VDC
5. Maximum Motor Current: 100 Amps
6. Maximum distance from fan monitor: 100 feet (30 m)
7. Accuracy: ±1%, 2 to 100% FSO

F. Fan monitor to provide fault setting for alarm, run time value for maintenance and power
usage.
G. Bearing Temperature: Used to detect and monitor temperature on fan shaft bearings.
1. J type thermocouple terminal ring with wiring
2. Push button temperature transmitter with LED for visual sensor fault and
programming mode
3. NEMA 4X (IP 66) transmitter mounting enclosure
4. Temperature Range:
a. Temperature Terminal Ring: 32 to 482°F (0 to 250°C)
b. Transmitter: -4 to 158°F (-20 to 70°C)
5. Input Voltage: 24 VDC
7. Accuracy: ±0.9°F (±0.5°C)
H. Fan monitor programmed with fault setting for alarm and IO for trend analysis indicating
future bearing health and real-time temperature status reading.
I. RPM: Used to detect rpm of fan.

1. Inductive proximity sensor with nickel plated brass construction
2. Frequency to analog converter and transmitter
3. NEMA 4X (IP 67) transmitter enclosure
4. Temperature Range: 32 to 120°F (0 to 50°C)
5. Input Voltage: 9 VDC minimum, 32 VDC maximum
7. Maximum distance from fan monitor: 100 feet (30 m)
8. Accuracy: ±0.1%
J. Fan monitor to provide fault setting for alarm exceeding maximum limit, actual run time
and maintenance for fan bearing lubrication, motor lubrication and belt replacement.
K. Airstream Temperature: Used to detect system process temperature.

1. Thermocouple stainless steel construction
2. Push button temperature transmitter with LED for visual sensor fault and
programming mode
3. NEMA 4X (IP 66 with supplied mounting enclosure
4. Temperature Range:
a. Temperature Probe: -148 to 212°F (-100 to 100°C)
b. Transmitter: -4 to 158°F (-20 to 70°C)
5. Input Voltage: 24 VDC
7. Accuracy: ±0.9°F (±0.5°C)
L. Fan monitor to provide a system fault for high and/or low temperature and active status
reading.
M. Pressure: Used to detect system pressure or pressure differential.

1. Two (2) pressure probes with stainless steel tip and integral mounting bracket
2. Differential pressure transmitter
3. NEMA 4X (IP 66) enclosure for transmitter
4. Temperature Range: 0 to 150°F (-18 to 66°C)
5. Input Voltage: 10 to 35 VDC
6. Output Signal: 0 to 10 VDC
7. Accuracy: ±1%

N. Fan monitor to provide a system fault alarm and active status reading.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install with resilient mountings and with flexible electrical leads.
C. Install flexible connections specified in Section 23 3300 between axial fan inlet and
discharge ductwork. Ensure metal bands of connectors are parallel with minimum 25
mm flex between ductwork and axial fan while running.
D. Install fan restraining snubbers; Adjust snubbers to prevent tension in flexible

connectors when fan is operating.
E. Provide fixed sheaves required for final air balance.
F. Provide safety screen where inlet or outlet is exposed.
G. Provide back-draft dampers on discharge of exhaust fans and as indicated.
H. Provide access to adjustable blade axial fan wheels for varying blade angle setting.
Adjust blades for varying range of volume and pressure.
I. Provide floor mounted axial fans with reinforced legs. Provide ceiling suspended units
with support brackets bolted to casing flange.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 3416
CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1. Airfoil centrifugal fans.
2. Backward-inclined centrifugal fans.
3. Forward-curved centrifugal fans.
4. Plenum fans.
5. Plug fans.
1.02 RELATED SECTION: Related work to be coordinated and used in conjunction with this
A. Section 23 0548 – Vibration and Seismic Control. Of HVAC Piping and Equipment.
B. Section 23 3113 – Metal Ducts
C. Section 23 0513 – Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment.
D. Section 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook
B. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes
C. AMCA 300 - Test Code Sound Rating Air Moving Devices.
D. AMCA 301 - Method of Calculating Fan Sound Rating from Laboratory Test
E. AMCA 303 – Application of Sound Power Level Ratings for Fans
F. ANSI/AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
G. ANSI/AFBMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
H. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard, Metal and Flexible.
KEO/19-3262-0000 23 3416/1 Centrifugal Hvac Fans

A. Project Altitude: Base fan performance ratings on actual Project site elevations above
sea level.
B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.
C. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210.
D. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300
1.05 SUBMITTALS
type of product indicated and include the following:
1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.
2. Certified fan sound-power ratings.
3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.
4. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts.
3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and
C. Coordination Drawings: Show fan room layout and relationships between components
and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of
support, and weight on each support. Indicate and certify field measurements.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For centrifugal fans to include in emergency,


B. AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and shall be
licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
C. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA 1.
A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations,

with protective crating and covering.
B. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to the final location,
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.
1.08 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.
1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS (If Applicable)
contents.
1. Belts: One set(s) for each belt-driven unit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

2.02 AIRFOIL CENTRIFUGAL FANS (If Applicable)
A. Description: Factory-fabricated, -assembled, -tested, and -finished, belt-driven

centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect
switch, drive assembly, and support structure.
B. Housings: Formed panels to make curved-scroll housings with shaped cutoff, with
doors or panels to allow access to internal parts and components.
1. Panel Bracing: Steel angle- or channel-iron member supports for mounting and
supporting fan scroll, wheel, motor, and accessories.
2. Horizontally split, bolted-flange housing.
3. Spun inlet cone with flange.
4. Outlet flange.
C. Airfoil Wheels: Single-width-single-inlet and double-width-double-inlet construction with

curved inlet flange; heavy backplate; hollow die-formed, airfoil-shaped blades
continuously welded at tip flange and backplate; and cast-iron or cast-steel hub riveted
to backplate and fastened to shaft with set screws; and special coating.
D. Shafts: Statically and dynamically balanced and selected for continuous operation at
maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower, with final alignment and belt
adjustment made after installation.
1. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway. Ship with protective
coating of lubricating oil.
2. Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of first critical speed at top of
fan's speed range.

E. Prelubricated and Sealed Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block-type ball bearings.
1. Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, Ll0 at 120,000 hours.
2. Roller-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 11, Ll0 at 120,000 hours.
F. Grease-Lubricated Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block-type, tapered roller

bearings with double-locking collars and two-piece, cast-iron housing.
G. Grease-Lubricated Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block-type, ball or roller

bearings with adapter mount and two-piece, cast-iron housing.
H. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after
installation.
1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.5
2. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing; dynamically
balanced at factory.
3. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp ; fixed pitch for
drives.
5. Belt Guards: Fabricate to comply with OSHA and SMACNA requirements of
diamond-mesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or equivalent, prime
coated. Secure to fan or fan supports without short circuiting vibration isolation.
Include provisions for adjustment of belt tension, lubrication, and use of
tachometer with guard in place.
6. Motor Mount: Adjustable for belt tensioning.
I. Accessories:
1. Scroll Access Doors: Shaped to conform to scroll, with quick-opening latches
and gaskets.
2. Cleanout Door: Quick-opening, latch-type gasketed door allowing access to fan
scroll, of same material as housing.
3. Scroll Drain Connection: NPS 1 (DN 25) steel pipe coupling welded to low point
of fan scroll.
4. Companion Flanges: Rolled flanges for duct connections of same material as
housing.
5. Variable Inlet Vanes: With blades supported at both ends with two permanently
lubricated bearings of same material as housing. Variable mechanism
terminating in single control lever with control shaft for double-width fans.
6. Discharge Dampers: Assembly with parallel or opposed blades constructed of
two plates formed around and to shaft, channel frame, and sealed ball bearings;
with blades linked outside of airstream to single control lever of same material as
housing.
7. Inlet Screens: Grid screen of same material as housing.
8. Shaft Cooler: Metal disk between bearings and fan wheel, designed to dissipate
heat from shaft.
9. Spark-Resistant Construction: AMCA 99.
10. Shaft Seals: Airtight seals installed around shaft on drive side of single-width
fans.
11. Weather Cover: Enameled-steel sheet with ventilation slots, bolted to housing.
J. Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor
K. Capacities And Characteristics: See Equipment Schedule on plan.
2.03 BACKWARD-INCLINED CENTRIFUGAL FANS (If Applicable)

B. Housings: Formed panels to make curved-scroll housings with shaped cutoff; with
4. Outlet flange.
C. Backward-Inclined Wheels: Single-width-single-inlet and double-width-double-inlet

construction with curved inlet flange, backplate, backward-inclined blades welded or
riveted to flange and backplate; cast-iron or cast-steel hub riveted to backplate and
fastened to shaft with set screws.
1. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway. Ship with a protective
fan's speed range.



installation.
1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.5.

drives.
I. Accessories:
and gaskets.
2. Cleanout Door: Quick-opening, latch-type gasketed door allowing access to fan
scroll, of same material as housing.
of fan scroll.
housing.
6. Discharge Dampers: Assembly with parallel or opposed blades constructed of
two plates formed around and to shaft, channel frame, and sealed ball bearings;
with blades linked outside of airstream to single control lever of same material as
housing.
heat from shaft.
fans.

K. Capacities And Characteristics: See Equipment Schedule on Plan.
2.04 FORWARD-CURVED CENTRIFUGAL FANS (If Applicable)

B. Housings: Formed panels to make curved-scroll housings with shaped cutoff; with
4. Outlet flange.
C. Forward-Curved Wheels: Black-enameled or galvanized steel construction with inlet

flange, backplate, shallow blades with inlet and tip curved forward in direction of airflow,
mechanically secured to flange and backplate; cast-steel hub swaged to backplate and
fastened to shaft with set screws.
fan's speed range.

2. Roller-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 11, Ll0 at 120,000 hours..


installation.
drives.
I. Accessories:
and gaskets.
2. Cleanout Door: Bolted Quick-opening, latch-type gasketed door allowing access
to fan scroll, of same material as housing.
of fan scroll.
housing.
6. Discharge Dampers: Assembly with parallel opposed blades constructed of two
plates formed around and to shaft, channel frame, and sealed ball bearings; with
blades linked outside of airstream to single control lever of same material as
housing.
heat from shaft.
fans.

K. Capacities and Characteristics: See Equipment Schedule on Plan.
2.05 PLENUM FANS (If Applicable)

centrifugal fans consisting of wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch,
drive assembly, and support structure.
B. Airfoil Wheels: Single-width-single-inlet construction with smooth-curved inlet flange;

heavy backplate; hollow die-formed, airfoil-shaped blades continuously welded at tip
flange and backplate; and cast-iron or cast-steel hub riveted to backplate and fastened
to shaft with set screws; and special coating.
C. Shafts: Statically and dynamically balanced and selected for continuous operation at
fan's speed range.
D. Prelubricated and Sealed Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block-type ball bearings.

E. Grease-Lubricated Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block-type, tapered roller

F. Grease-Lubricated Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block-type, ball or roller


G. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after
installation.
drives.
H. Accessories:
heat from shaft.
fans.
I. Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor

J. Capacities And Characteristics: See Equipment Schedule on Plan.
2.06 PLUG FANS. (If Applicable)

centrifugal fans consisting of wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch,
drive assembly, and support structure.
B. Airfoil Wheels: Single-width-single-inlet construction with smooth-curved inlet flange;

heavy backplate; hollow die-formed, airfoil-shaped blades continuously welded at tip
flange and backplate; and cast-iron or cast-steel hub riveted to backplate and fastened
to shaft with set screws; and special coating.
C. Shafts: Statically and dynamically balanced and selected for continuous operation at
fan's speed range.
D. Prelubricated and Sealed Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block-type ball bearings.


E. Grease-Lubricated Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block-type, tapered roller
F. Grease-Lubricated Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block-type, ball or roller

G. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after
installation.
1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.5
drives.
H. Accessories:
heat from shaft.
fans.
I. Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor

J. Capacities And Characteristics: See Equipment Schedule on Plan.

1. Vibration Isolators: Spring isolators or Restrained spring isolators having a static
deflection of 1 inch (25 mm) .
2. Spark Arrestance Class: A B C.
A. Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan
Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300,
"Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-
Certified Ratings Seal.
B. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of
rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory
Methods of Testing Fans for Rating."

2.08 GENERAL
A. Fans shall be capable of accommodating static pressure variations of plus or minus 10

percent.
B. Base performance on sea level conditions.
C. Statically and dynamically balance fans to eliminate vibration or noise transmission to

occupied areas.
D. Fans for outdoor installation shall be weather protected and provided with anticorrosion
paint.
E. Fans used for kitchen exhaust shall be inline bifurcated type complete with grease trap
and drain connection. Motor and / or drive shall be outside of the air stream. Fan shall
be rated for higher temperature as appropriate
F. Static - pressures given in the equipment Schedules are only for guidance. The
Contractor should submit static pressure calculations for all fans for approval before
ordering the equipment’s. The Contractor should give the required fan and motor hp.
Without additional cost. The contractor may propose lower motor hp as per the
calculations and as approved.
G. Contractor shall select fans for low noise application and shall provide all necessary
measures such as provision of sound attenuators, Acoustic enclosures, acoustic lining
to limit sound to acceptable noise levels as indicated in Section 23 0100 & Acoustic
report. Contractor shall submit noise calculations for the selected fan and
attenuators/and or acoustic enclosures for the approval prior to ordering the equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Do not operate fans for any purpose until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings
lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.
B. Install fans with vibration isolation mountings as specified in section 23 0548.
C. Install flexible connections specified in Section 23 3343 between fan inlet and discharge
ductwork. Ensure metal bands of connectors are parallel with minimum on inch (25mm)
flex between ductwork and fan while running. Flexible connections shall not be used for
fans used for smoke exhaust applications.
D. Provide fixed sheaves required for final air balance.
E. Provide safety screen where inlet or outlet is exposed.
F. Pipe scroll drains to nearest floor drain.
G. Provide back draft dampers on discharge of exhaust fans and as indicated.
H. For all fans (normal/smoke vent fans) provide fan starter switch in the space served by
the fan and location of starter switch to be as indicated on shop drawing or as approved.
Make necessary interconnections with light switch.
I. Install centrifugal fans level and plumb.
J. Support floor-mounting units using restrained spring isolators having a static deflection
of 1 inch (25 mm). Vibration- and seismic-control devices are specified in Division 23
Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
1. Secure vibration and seismic controls to concrete bases using anchor bolts cast
in concrete base.
K. Install floor-mounting units on concrete bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork

requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
L. Install floor-mounting units on concrete bases designed to withstand, without damage to

equipment, the seismic force required by authorities having jurisdiction. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-
Place Concrete."
M. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and spring hangers
spring hangers with vertical-limit stops having a static deflection of 1 inch (25 mm).
Vibration-control devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic
Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
N. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
O. Label fans according to requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Identification for

HVAC Piping and Equipment."
3.02 CONNECTIONS
A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 23

Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make
final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in
Division 23 Section 23 3300 "Air Duct Accessories."
B. Install ducts adjacent to fans to allow service and maintenance.
connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper
thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect
switches.
3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.
fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive
system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.
5. Adjust belt tension.
6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.
connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.
9. Refer to Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for
testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.
10. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
3.04 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Train Owner's maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain centrifugal fans. Refer to Division 01 Section
"Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 3600
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY

1. Single-duct air terminal units
2. Shutoff single-duct air terminal units.
3. Air flow control valve
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include rated capacities, furnished
specialties, sound-power ratings, and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
1. Include a schedule showing unique model designation, room location, model
number, size, and accessories furnished.
C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following
items involved:
1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.
2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
4. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,
sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air terminal units to include in emergency,
Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" include the following:
1. Instructions for resetting minimum and maximum air volumes.
2. Instructions for adjusting software set points.
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of air
terminal units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01
Section "Product Requirements."
KEO/19-3262-0000 23 3600/1 Air Terminal Units

C. NFPA Compliance: Install air terminal units according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the
Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
1.04 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of air terminal units and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures,
HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
A. Requirements of the General Conditions of Contract and Section 23 0100 shall be

referred to and complied with as appropriate, without prejudice to this clause.
B. Following spare parts shall be furnished properly packed and labelled with equipment
no. / location.
1. 6 Nos. of Damper actuator / motor for each type and size.
2. 6 Nos. of Air Flow Transducers for each type and size.
3. Four (4) sets of VAV units complete with controller for each type and size.
4. Two (2) sets of Air Valves for each type and size.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

2.02 SINGLE-DUCT AIR TERMINAL UNITS
A. Configuration: Damber assembly inside unit casing with control components located
inside a protective metal shroud.
B. Casing: Minimum 22-gauge galvanized steel. Internally lined with high density
fiberglass insulation which complies with UL 181 and NFPA 90A.
C. Casing Lining: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick, coated, high density duct liner complying with
ASTM C 1071; secured with adhesive.
1. Air Inlet: Round stub connection for duct attachment.
2. Air Outlet: S-slip and drive connections.
3. Access: Removable panels for access to diverter and other parts requiring
service, adjustment, or maintenance; with airtight gasket.
D. Damper: Damper Assembly shall be made of heavy gauge galvanized steel blades,
mounted in self-lubricating bearings; designed for uniform airflow over the whole face at
all flows. Seals shall be attached to the blades, to ensure tight closure.
E. Erosion Prevention: All exposed insulation edges shall be coated with NFPA 90A
approved sealant to prevent entrainment of fibers in the air stream.
F. The VAV / CAV box shall be with low pressure drop design.
G. Sound Rating of the VAV / CAV box shall be within the rating permitted for the area
served, whether the bypass is fully closed or fully open.
H. Pressure independent, DDC controlled, single duct, variable air volume boxes. The
capacity of each VAV / CAV box is indicated on the Drawings while the schedule
indicates a group of VAV / CAV boxes falling under a selected nominal L/S rating. VAV /
CAV boxes shall be capable of maintaining +/- 5% of the rated air flow in up to 1500 Pa
(6 IWG) pressure.
I. VAV boxes shall reset between minimum and maximum L/S from a room thermostat
without changing orifices or other parts. L/S limiters are not acceptable. DDC
controllers shall be also calibrated and set for the minimum and maximum scheduled air
flow rates.
J. VAV Units shall be suitable for change over function. The control action of the VAV
DDC Controller shall be reversed when the AHU is in the heating mode. Provide
necessary provision for morning warm-up interface with BAS.
K. Electrical and control components shall be situated in a protective enclosure. Fit each
DDC controller with a terminal board on which all field connections are made. Label all
terminals clearly. Provide for field calibration, readjustment volt free contact for remote
control and alarm.
L. Actuator: Shall be electric type suitable for 24 volt power supply and capable of
supplying a minimum torque of 35 in/lb to the damper shaft to exert positive force in both
the opening and closing directions. Actuator shall be easily accessible for maintenance,
without disturbing ductwork. Actuators shall be direct shaft mount type without linkage.
M. Actuators shall be non-spring return type and shall exert positive force in both the
opening and closing directions. Include in each actuators a built in limit to interrupt the
current to the actuator at the constant stroke limit in each direction. Each actuator shall
be energized only when the controller signals change in damper position.
N. Multi-point air flow sensors independent of duct air temperature shall be supplied for
accurate control of air flow.
O. Flow measurement taps shall be provided for easy balancing connections.
P. Individual room sensor / thermostat with digital display shall be provided to control VAV
box (es).
Q. Provide sound attenuators built–in VAV boxes, if the noise levels of VAV boxes found to
be exceeding the set limits.
R. Diverter Assembly: Galvanized-steel gate, with polyethylene linear bearings or

Aluminum blade, with nylon-fitted pivot points.
S. Multioutlet Attenuator Section: With two, three or four 6-inch- (150-mm-), 8-inch- (200-
mm-) or 10-inch- (250-mm-) diameter collars; each with locking butterfly balancing
damper.

T. Electric Heating Coil: Slip-in-type, open-coil design with integral control box factory
wired and installed. Include the following features:
1. Primary and secondary overtemperature protection.
2. Nickel chrome 80/20 heating elements.
3. Airflow switch.
4. Noninterlocking disconnect switch.
5. Fuses (for coils more than 48 A).
6. Mercury contactors.
7. Pneumatic-electric switches and relays.
8. Magnetic contactor for each step of control (for three-phase coils).
U. Electronic Controls: Bidirectional damper operator and microprocessor-based

thermostat.
1. Damper Actuator: 24 V, powered closed, powered open.
2. Thermostat: Wall-mounting electronic type with the following features:
a. Proportional, plus integral control of room temperature.
b. Time-proportional reheat-coil control.
c. Temperature set-point display in Fahrenheit and Celsius.
d. Auxiliary switch shall energize heating control circuit.
e. Changeover thermistor shall reverse action.
2.03 SHUTOFF SINGLE-DUCT AIR TERMINAL UNITS
A. Configuration: Volume control damper assembly inside unit casing with control
components located inside a protective metal shroud.
B. Casing: Minimum 22-gauge galvanized steel. Internally lined with high density
fiberglass insulation which complies with UL 181 and NFPA 90A.
1. Casing Lining: 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, coated, fibrous-glass duct liner complying
with ASTM C 1071; secured with adhesive. Cover liner with nonporous foil and
perforated metal.
2. Casing Lining: Adhesive attached, 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick, polyurethane foam
insulation complying with UL 181 erosion requirements, and having a maximum
flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50, for both
insulation and adhesive, when tested according to ASTM E 84.
3. Air Inlet: Round stub connection or S-slip and drive connections for duct
attachment.
4. Air Outlet: S-slip and drive connections, size matching inlet size.
5. Access: Removable panels for access to dampers and other parts requiring
service, adjustment, or maintenance; with airtight gasket.
C. Volume Damper: Galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self-lubricating bearings.
1. Maximum Damper Leakage: ARI 880 rated, 2 percent of nominal airflow at 6-
inch wg (1500-Pa) inlet static pressure.
2. Damper Position: Normally open.
D. Attenuator Section: 0.034-inch (0.85-mm) steel 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) aluminum sheet

metal.
1. Lining: 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, coated, fibrous-glass duct liner complying with
ASTM C 1071; secured with adhesive. Cover liner with nonporous foil and
perforated metal.
2. Lining: Adhesive attached, 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick, polyurethane foam
insulation complying with UL 181 erosion requirements, and having a maximum

flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50, for both
insulation and adhesive, when tested according to ASTM E 84.
E. Multioutlet Attenuator Section: With two three or four 6-inch- (150-mm-) 8-inch- (200-
mm-) or 10-inch- (250-mm-) diameter collars; each with locking butterfly balancing
damper.
F. Hot-Water Heating Coil (If applicable): Copper tube, mechanically expanded into
aluminum-plate fins; leak tested underwater to 200 psig (1380 kPa); and factory
installed.
G. Electric Heating Coil: Slip-in-type, open-coil design with integral control box factory
wired and installed. Include the following features:
1. Primary and secondary overtemperature protection.
2. Nickel chrome 80/20 heating elements.
3. Airflow switch.
4. Noninterlocking disconnect switch.
5. Fuses (for coils more than 48 A).
6. Mercury contactors.
7. Pneumatic-electric switches and relays.
8. Magnetic contactor for each step of control (for three-phase coils).
H. Electronic Controls: Bidirectional damper operator and microprocessor-based

thermostat with integral airflow transducer and room sensor shall be compatible with
temperature controls specified in other Division 23 Sections and shall have the following
features:
1. Damper Actuator: 24 V, powered closed and powered open.
2. Velocity Controller: Factory calibrated and field adjustable to minimum and
maximum air volumes; shall maintain constant airflow dictated by thermostat
within 5 percent of set point while compensating for inlet static-pressure
variations up to 6-inch wg (1500 Pa); and shall have a multipoint velocity sensor
at air inlet.
I. DDC Controls: Single-package unitary controller and actuator specified in Division 23

Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC."
J. DDC Controls: Bidirectional damper operators and microprocessor-based controller and

room sensor shall be compatible with temperature controls specified in Division 23
Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and shall have the following features:
1. Damper Actuator: 24 V, powered closed.
2. Terminal Unit Controller: Pressure-independent, variable-air-volume controller
with electronic airflow transducer with multipoint velocity sensor at air inlet,
factory calibrated to minimum and maximum air volumes, and having the
following features:
c. Occupied and unoccupied operating mode.
d. Remote reset of airflow or temperature set points.
e. Adjusting and monitoring with portable terminal.
f. Communication with temperature-control system specified in Division 23
Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC."
3. Room Sensor: Wall mounting, with temperature set-point adjustment and access
for connection of portable operator terminal.
K. Control Sequence:
1. Suitable for operation with duct pressures between 0.25- and 3.0-inch wg (60-
and 750-Pa) inlet static pressure.
2. Factory-mounted and -piped, 5-micron filter; velocity-resetting, adjustable, high-
limit control; and amplifying relay.
3. System-powered, wall-mounting thermostat.
2.04 Air flow control valve
A. Construction:
1. 16 gauge spun aluminum valve body with continuous welded seam.
2. Shaft bearing surfaces: Polypropylene (PP) or Polyphenylene Sulfide (PPS).
3. Spring grade stainless steel spring and PPS slider assembly.
4. Supply valves insulated with 3/8" (9.5 mm) flexible closed-cell polymer-based
foam. Flame/smoke rating 25/50. Density is 1.5 lb/ft3 (24.0 kg/m3).
5. Seal wheel material: Polypropylene.
B. Operating Range
1. 32-122 °F (0-50 °C) ambient.
2. 10-90% non-condensing RH
C. Performance
1. Pressure independent over a 0.3"-3.0" WC (75-750 Pa) drop across valve.
2. Volume control accurate to ±10% of airflow command signal.
3. No additional straight duct runs needed before or after the valve.
2.05 INTEGRAL-DIFFUSER AIR TERMINAL UNITS (If Applicable)
A. Configuration: Volume-damper assembly inside unit casing with integral t square-ceiling

louver-face perforated diffuser.
B. Volume Damper: Galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self-lubricating bearings.
1. Damper Position: Normally open.
C. Diffuser: Galvanized-steel insulated plenum with extruded-aluminum or sheet-steel

diffuser, having fixed or variable geometry designed to operate from 100 percent to
minimum airflow, manual adjustment of airflow direction, and white baked-enamel finish.
D. Electric Controls: Damper actuator and thermostat.

1. Damper Actuator: 24 V, powered close.
2. Thermostat: Wall-mounting electronic type with clock display, temperature
display in Fahrenheit and Celsius, and space temperature set point.
E. Electronic Controls: Bidirectional damper operator and microprocessor-based

thermostat with integral airflow transducer and room sensor shall be compatible with
temperature controls specified in other Division 23 Sections and shall have the following
features:
1. Damper Actuator: 24 V, powered closed.
2. Velocity Controller: Factory calibrated and field adjustable to minimum and
maximum air volumes; shall maintain constant airflow dictated by thermostat
within 5 percent of set point while compensating for inlet static-pressure
variations up to 4-inch wg (1000 Pa); and shall have a multipoint velocity sensor
at air inlet.
F. Control Sequence:
1. Suitable for operation with duct pressures between 0.25- and 3.0-inch wg (60-
and 750-Pa) inlet static pressure.
2. Factory-mounted and -piped, 5-micron filter; velocity-resetting, adjustable, high-
limit control; and amplifying relay.
3. System-powered, wall-mounting thermostat.
G. Integral thermally powered actuators, sensing duct and room temperature, control
diffusion dampers.
A. Identification: Label each air terminal unit with plan room number, nominal airflow,
maximum and minimum factory-set airflows, coil type, and ARI certification seal.
B. Verification of Performance: Rate air terminal units according to ARI 880.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install air terminal units level and plumb. Maintain sufficient clearance for normal
service and maintenance.
B. Provide ceiling access doors or locate units above easily removable ceiling components.
C. Support unit individually from structure. Do not support from adjacent ductwork.
D. Co-ordinate VAV box locations with other services and ensure that enough space for
maintenance is available.
E. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.
F. All installation, power supply, conducting and necessary wiring for VAV Units from
outgoing terminal of power point provided by electrical discipline shall be part of this
Section
G. Electrical works by this section shall include providing of central transformers which
shall serve several VAV Boxes and dampers and their interconnecting wiring.
Alternatively, each VAV box can be provided with own transformer and 240 volt power
supply.
3.02 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect ducts to air terminal units according to Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts"
B. Ground units with electric heating coils according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and
Bonding for Electrical Systems."
C. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power

D. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published


1. After installing air terminal units and after electrical circuitry has been energized,
test for compliance with requirements.
2. Leak Test: After installation, fill water coils and test for leaks. Repair leaks and
confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.
C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

instructions and do the following:
a. Verify that inlet duct connections are as recommended by air terminal unit
manufacturer to achieve proper performance.
b. Verify that controls and control enclosure are accessible.
c. Verify that control connections are complete.
d. Verify that nameplate and identification tag are visible.
e. Verify that controls respond to inputs as specified.
3.05 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air terminal units. Refer to Division 01
Section "Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 3713
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Section Includes: Supply and installation of air outlets and inlets Ceiling and wall-
mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.
1. Section 23 3113: Metal Duct
2. Section 23 3114: Pre-Insulated Duct
3. Section 23 3300: Air Duct Accessories
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and
performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise
ratings.
2. Data sheet for each type of outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicating
construction, finish, and mounting details.
3. Performance data for each type of outlet and inlet furnished, including aspiration
ability, temperature and velocity traverses, throw and drop, static pressure drop
and noise criteria ratings at the required cfm. Indicate selections on data. NC
level for all selected air devices to be per the acoustical consultant report.
4. Schedule of outlets and inlets indicating drawing designation, room location,
number furnished, model number, size and accessories furnished.
5. Data sheet for each type of outlet and inlet and accessories furnished, indicating
construction, finish and mounting details.
6. Performance data for each type of outlet and inlet furnished, including aspiration
ability, temperature and velocity transverses, throw and drop, static pressure
drop and noise criteria ratings at the required cfm. indicate selections on data.
7. All air inlets and outlets shall be made of extruded aluminum alloy, polyester
powder coated, oven baked and with a suitable color to the satisfaction of the
Engineer. All air inlets and outlets shall be tested by an approved laboratory and
certified by ADC (Air Diffusion Council) or an approved equivalent Authority.
B. Samples: Submit samples of each type of finish required.
A. Supply and install air outlets and inlets compliance in accordanceGrilles, diffusers,
registers, louvers etc. shall be constructed from extruded aluminum, unless mentioned
otherwise elsewhere.
KEO/19-3262-0000 23 3713/1 Diffusers, Registers And Grilles
B. Grilles, diffusers, registers, etc. are to be furnished with a factory finish to a color
specified by the interior designer.
C. Decorative grille for the fresh air makeup shall be coordinated and approved by interior
designer.
D. Regulatory Requirements
1. ADC Test Code: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in certified laboratory under
the requirements of Air Diffusion Council (ADC) Equipment Test Code 1062
“Certification, Rating and Test Manual”.
2. ANSI / NFPA Standards: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with National
Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standard 90A “Installation of Air Conditioning
and Ventilating Systems”.
1.04 PRODUCTS DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver outlets wrapped in factory-fabricated fiberboard type containers. Identify on

outside of container type of outlet or inlet and location to be installed. Avoid crushing or
bending and prevent dirt and debris from entering and settling in devices.
B. Store outlets and inlets in original cartons and protect from weather and construction
work traffic. Where possible, store indoors; when necessary to store outdoors, store
above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

2.02 CEILING AIR DIFFUSERS
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer’s standard ceiling air

diffusers where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of
materials and components as indicated and as required for complete installation.
B. Performance: Provide ceiling air diffusers that have, as minimum, temperature and
velocity traverses, throw and drop, static pressure drop and noise criteria ratings for
each size device as listed in manufacturer’s current data.
C. Ceiling Compatibility: Provide diffusers with border styles that are compatible with
adjacent ceiling systems and that are specifically manufactured to fit into ceiling module
with accurate fit and adequate support.
D. Types: Provide ceiling diffusers of type, capacity and with accessories as listed on
diffuser schedule.
E. Diffusers shall be square or rectangular suitable for ceiling installation and ductwork
application as shown on project drawings. They shall be provided with rubber gasket or
foam tape at the outer edge of the frame to produce a positive air seal at the mounting
surface. They shall be produced with removable core and provided with equalizing grids.
Faceplates shall be furnished with concealed hinges and clips. Duct collars connecting
duct of diffuser shall be airtight and not interfere with the volume control damper.
F. Supply air diffuser shall be equipped with opposed blade volume damper adjustable
from the face of the diffuser without removing the core.
G. Finish: To be manufacturers standard factory applied matt, baked on enamel in colours

to be selected by Engineer’s Representative to match architectural finishes.
2.03 LINEAR DIFFUSERS (If Applicable)
A. Provide linear diffusers with internal damper vanes, adjustable from face of diffuser
without removing or disturbing installation. These variable vanes shall provide 180
degree discharge pattern, left, right or vertical adjustable in each slot.
B. Connect diffuser frame to acoustically lined plenum. Connect plenum to supply duct or
supply branch takeoff with flexible duct. Provide damper at takeoff from supply branch
duct.
C. Where continuous strips are required, provide strip diffusers with blank off covers for
dummy diffusers.
D. Where linear diffusers are used for return air, the appearance from the room shall be
identical to supply diffusers.
E. Provide similar finish as described above for ceiling air diffusers.
2.04 REGISTERS & GRILLES
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer’s standard products

where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and
components as indicated, and as required for complete installation.
B. Performance: Provide products that have, as minimum, temperature and velocity

traverses, throw and drop, static pressure drop and noise criteria ratings for each size
device as listed in manufacturer’s current data.
C. Wall/Floor Compatibility: Provide registers and grilles with border styles that are
compatible with adjacent wall/ floor systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit
into wall/floor construction with accurate fit and adequate support.
D. Types: Provide registers, grilles and perforated floor panels of type, capacity, and with
accessories as listed on register and grille schedule or as shown on drawings.
E. They shall be furnished with sponge rubber gaskets or foam tape behind the frame to
eliminate air leakage and with nylon bushings or PVC at the blades connection to the
frame to eliminate corrosion and vibration. Free cross-sectional area shall be at least 65
percent.
F. Supply air registers shall have individually adjustable horizontal front blades and vertical
rear blades.

G. Supply air register shall be equipped with key operated, opposed blade volume control
damper.
H. Return and exhaust air registers and grilles shall have fixed single deflection blades set
at an angle 35º.
I. Return and exhaust air registers shall be with key operated, opposed blade volume
control damper.
J. All opposed blade volume control dampers shall be polyester coated even baked with
black color finish.
K. Provide perforated floor tiles specially designed for computer centre floor system.
Provide volume damper operated from the face of floor tile. Limit discharge velocity to
300 FPM.
L. Provide finish as described for ceiling air diffusers.
2.05 CEILING/SIDEWALL/SILL LINEAR REGISTERS/GRILLES
A. Continues 1/8-inch face bars with 1/2 (half) inch centers and 0 or 15 deg. core deflection
to satisfy needed throw.
B. Registered/Grilles complete with accessories shall be of aluminium construction.

Material, finish and colour to be approved by the Engineer.
C. Provide frame with face screw mounting holes or with steel snap-in friction springs as
required per application. Frames shall be provided also with gasket to prevent air
leakage. Heavy duty mounting frame shall be provided for floor / sill application.
D. Provide Registers/Grilles with galvanised steel sheet plenum as required, internally lined
with ½ inch thick acoustic insulation. Circular spigots are provided and fitted with
volume control dampers.
2.06 CEILING/SIDEWALL LINEAR SLOT DIFFUSERS
A. Continues ¾ inch width slot/s with adjustable control vanes and volume control
dampers. It shall be fully adjustable from the face of the diffuser, to any horizontal,
vertical or any intermediate setting of air flow pattern to satisfy needed throw.
B. Linear slot diffusers complete with accessories shall be of extruded aluminium

construction with lengths and numbers of slots as shown on the drawings. Finish and
colour to be approved by the Engineer.
C. Provide concealed mounting brackets fit in a hemmed duct collar or frame to positively
hold the diffuser in ceiling or sidewall installations.
D. Provide diffusers with galvanized steel sheet plenum as required, internally lined with 1
(one) inch thick acoustic insulation. Circular spigots are provided and fitted with volume
control dampers.
2.07 FLOW BAR DIFFUSERS: (LINEAR AND MODULAR SLOT DIFFUSERS) (If Applicable)

A. Provide all materials and equipment required for a complete installation of all linear and
modular slot air distribution systems as shown on the mechanical drawings. The
drawings. The systems shall be complete in every respect and shall include all required
appurtenances. Mechanical contractor shall furnish and install all plenums, hoods,
blank-offs and associated sheet metal components including all duct connections
thereto.
B. Provide all continuous linear slot and modular slot diffusers as shown on the drawings.
The slot diffusers shall integrate into the ceiling system. Where curved linear slot
diffusers are indicated, they shall be stretched formed to the exact radii required. Rolled
or segmented linear slot diffusers will not be accepted.
C. The linear slot diffusers shall have a single slot unless shown otherwise and shall be
capable of being used for supply air, return air, exhaust air or any combination.
D. The linear slot diffusers shall be capable of supporting the ceiling system. Linear
diffusers supported by screws in the flanges or from air plenums are unacceptable. For
lay-in ceiling, provide hanger wire support clips that are integral with the linear slot
diffusers allowing the linear slot diffusers to be supported from the building structure with
ceiling wire. For hard ceilings, provide clips that are integral with the linear slot diffusers
allowing the diffusers to be secured directly to the ceiling framing without the
requirement for hanger supports. Provide spline clips to secure joints and ceiling tees to
the diffusers.
E. Provide ends and corners as required. Ends shall be butt type, field installed, or mitered
picture frame type factory installed, as indicated herein or shown on the drawings.
Corners shall be mitered one-piece unit.
F. Pattern controllers shall be one-piece extruded aluminum, 24 inches long maximum,

positioned between spring loaded spacers. Pattern controllers shall allow the airstream
to be directed flat against the ceiling in either direction or downward as well as allowing
throw reduction every two feet along the entire length of the linear slot diffusers. The
airstream shall be maintained at the ceiling plane and shall not dump when volume is
reduced. Only extruded aluminum pattern controllers are acceptable. Where shown or
noted pattern controllers shall be designed to allow the airstream to be jetted into the
occupied space and be adjustable to vector the airstream as required.
G. Material shall be minimum wall thickness 0.062 inches extruded aluminum. Spring steel
retainers shall be used under the spacers to hold the slot diffusers assembly tightly
together and allow the slot diffusers to be disassembled easily for field trimming.
Materials other than extruded aluminum and spring steel will not be accepted.
H. Flanges exposed to view shall be painted factory standard white. All other surfaces shall
be painted flat black. Provide paint samples if requested.
I. All slot diffusers shall be manufactured by the same manufacturer of the plenums and
hoods. No exceptions shall be allowed. Plenum lengths and entry collar sizes shall be
as indicated on the plan schedules.
J. Plenums shall be minimum 24-gauge galvanized steel and lined inside with black matte
fiberglass insulation. Hoods shall be 51 percent free area and constructed of 24-gauge
perforated sheet metal painted flat black.

K. Where shown on the drawings or otherwise indicated, provide a friction type volume
damper located in the entry collar of the supply air plenum, accessible through the slot
diffuser.
L. Air test and balance of linear and modular slot diffusers systems shall be by this section
and be in accordance with the testing and balancing portion section of the
specifications. Position all Flow Bar pattern controllers in their normal operation
positions and perform all air testing and balancing of all slot diffuser systems in full
accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
M. All slot diffusers shall be performance tested with air plenums as a composite assembly
in full accordance with ASHRAE, and/or ARI standards. If requested, the contractor shall
provide for a visit by the mechanical consulting engineer to the product testing
laboratory to verify performance data and testing procedures. All cost associated thereto
shall be provided at the expense of the contractor.
N. Diffusers shall be selected to achieve a throw to room length ratio which meets the
requirements of the ASHRAE 2001 Fundamentals Handbook, Chapter 32, Table 4, at
both maximum design flow rate, and for VAV systems, at the minimum flow rate
expected during partial occupancy. Diffusers shall be selected to achieve a minimum of
70 percent ADPI over the range of expected loads in the space. The diffusers’ reported
performance shall be based on tests conducted in accordance with ASHRAE Standard
70–2006. ADPI performance on at least one-unit size of the selected diffuser shall have
been tested in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 113–1990, to validate conformance
and applicability to the ASHRAE table.
2.08 DISC VALVES FOR SUPPLY AND EXTRACT AIR
A. Circular disc valves, suitable for supply and extract air, comprising valve ring with
peripheral seal, central disc with threaded spindle and locknut and installation sub frame
with volume flow rate adjustment by rotating the central disc.
B. Face sections sheet steel with electrostatic powder coating, galvanised steel threaded
spindle and lock nut, installation sub frame galvanised sheet steel.
2.09 JET NOZZLES (If Applicable)
A. Jet nozzles suitable for long throw distances with optimum acoustic properties,
preferably used for heating and cooling in critical areas. The adjustment facility –
manual or automatic via internal or externally mounted electric actuation – allows
variation in discharge angle to compensate for changing temperature differences,
adjustment angular range 30° upwards to 30° downwards. The manually adjustable
version can also be rotated through 360°.
B. The fixed jet nozzle consists of an aerodynamically shaped discharge nozzle deep-
drawn in one piece, with fixing holes. Adjustable construction consists of a discharge
nozzle with spherical outlet mounted in housing, a mounting flange and in a circular duct
rear connection spigot for direct connection to a circular duct. Also available with rear-
mounted duct connecting element with peripheral flange and optional spigot or saddle
connection with flange for fixing to the side of rectangular or circular ducts; the rear
contour of the saddle connection is profiled to the duct diameter.

C. The discharge nozzle and face cover ring are in aluminium, the mounting for the eyeball
is with two plastic rings, the connection element and saddle connection are in
galvanised sheet steel.
D. The surface shall be pre-treated, and powder coated in white (RAL 9010) or another
RAL color to suit the architectural finishes (the spigots remain galvanised finish)
2.010 TRANSFER GRILLES
A. It shall consist of two closely spaced grilles with connection collar. The grille shall have
fixed deflection blades set at an angle 35 degrees and parallel to long dimension with
mounting frame. The free area of the transfer grille shall not be less than 65% of the
total face area.
2.011 DOOR GRILLES
A. The frame shall be separate from the blades by an extruded rigid PVC track whish shall
be an integral part of the frame. The blades shall be of V-shapes, mounted in the PVC
track and spaced 12.5 mm on centers
2.012 DISPLACEMENT FLOW DIFFUSERS (IF APPLICABLE)
A. The displacement flow units consist of a casing with a perforated metal face plate (for
one-directional discharge) or additional perforated metal side plates (for three directional
discharge), a rectangular spigot located either on top or at the bottom of the unit as
required, and an internal perforated plate basket for even air distribution.
B. Casing, perforated face plate and perforated sheet steel basket are made of galvanised
sheet steel.
C. Casing and perforated plates are pre-treated, and powder coated white RAL 9010, gloss
level 50 %, any other or another RAL color to suit the architectural finishes. The rear
surface to the casing and the perforated sheet steel basket are coated black RAL 9005
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Provide all grilles, registers or diffusers which are suitable for installation in the ceiling,
wall or floor finishes. Provide all required accessories to facilitate installation.
B. Provide all air distribution devices from one manufacturer unless otherwise noted.
3.02 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which outlets and inlets are to be installed. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install outlets and inlets in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions
and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve
intended functions.
B. Provide an internally lined supply air plenum for all linear grilles, bar grilles and slot
diffusers. The lining shall be 1-inch thick minimum.
C. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork and duct accessories, as necessary to
interface installation of outlets and inlets with other work.
D. Locate ceiling air diffusers, registers, and grilles, as indicated on general construction
“Reflected Ceiling Plans”. Unless otherwise indicated, locate units in center of
acoustical ceiling modules.
E. Install perforated floor panels after full coordination with computer equipment contractor
and as approved by the Engineer’s Representative.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 4100
PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes factory-fabricated air-filter devices and media used to remove
particulate matter from air for HVAC applications.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. DOP: Dioctyl phthalate or bis-(2-ethylhexyl) phthalate.
B. HEPA: High-efficiency particulate air.
C. ULPA: Ultra low penetration air.
D. Section Includes: Factory Fabricated Air Filters devices and media used to remove
particulate matter from air for HVAC applications. Work includes but is not limited to the
following:
1. Pre-filter
2. Final Filter
3. Grease Filter
4. Carbon Filter
5. Air Cleaners
6. Sand Trap Louvers
E. Related Section:
1. Section 23 7313 – Modular Indoor and outdoor Central – Station Air –
Handling Units.
2. Section 23 8123 – Computer – Room Air – Conditioners
3. Section 23 8126 – Split- System Air – Conditioners.
4. Section 23 8216 – Air Coils.
5. Section 23 8219 – Fan Coil Units
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include dimensions; operating characteristics; required clearances and

access; rated flow capacity, including initial and final pressure drop at rated airflow;
efficiency and test method; fire classification; furnished specialties; and accessories for
each model indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and details to illustrate component
assemblies and attachments.
KEO/19-3262-0000 23 4100/1 Particulate Air Filtration

1. Show filter rack assembly, dimensions, materials, and methods of assembly of
components.
2. Include setting drawings, templates, and requirements for installing anchor bolts
and anchorages.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of filter and rack to include in
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of air
filters and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section
"Product Requirements."

C. Comply with ARI 850.
D. Comply with ASHRAE 52.1 and ASHRAE 52.2 (MERV) for method of testing and rating
air-filter units.
E. Comply with NFPA 70 for installing electrical components.
F. Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.
G. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of Air Filters of

type and sizes required whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service
for not less than 10 years.
H. Installer Qualifications: A firm with a least 5 years successful installation experience on

projects.
I. Regulatory Requirements
1. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of ANSI / NFPA 90A and
90B.
2. UL Compliance: Comply with UL Standards pertaining to safety and performance
of air filter units.
3. ASHRAE Compliance: Comply with provisions of ASHRAE Standard 52-76 for
method of testing including a weight test and a dust spot test and require that
values for both be reported (MERV) minimum efficiency reporting values for air
cleaner particle size efficiency and for recording and calculating air flow rates.
4. ARI Compliance: Comply with Section 7.4 of ARI Standard 850-78 for
performance tolerances.
5. DIN-EN 779, EIN-EN 1822 for manufacturing, filters classes, and testing of
coarse dust (pre-filters), fine filters and HEPA filters.
6. AFI: Air Filter Institute.
7. NIST: National Institute of Standard and Technology.

1.05 COORDINATION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

2.02 MATERIALS
A. General:
1. The task of air filters in HVAC systems is not only to protect the ventilated rooms
from too severe a level of contamination but also the HVAC system itself. This is
guaranteed by the use of pre-filters, fine filters of filter classes as specified. Filter
grades are measured in according with ASHRAE standards, filter classes in
accordance with DIN-EN 779 and EUROVENT 4/5.
2. Filters Classification:
a. Pre-filters : G1 to G4 according to DIN-EN 779
EU1 to EU4 according to EUTOVENT 4/5
b. Final filters : F5 to F9 according to DIN-EN 779
EU5 to EU9 according to EUTOVENT 4/5
c. High efficiency particulate
air filters : H10 to H14 according to DIN-EN 1822
d. Ultra low penetration air
filters : U15 to U17 according to DIN-EN 1822
3. The pressure loss of a filter section loaded with duct shall not exceed the values
given in Table-1. Lower final pressure drops can be also specified where
appropriate.
Table-1 – Maximum final pressure drop for filters
Filter Class Final MERV Efficiency

EU Pressure Rating
Classifications Drop
G1 – G2 150 Pa MERV 1-4 Less than 20%
G3 150 Pa MERV 5 Less than 20%
G4 150 Pa MERV 6 20%-30%
G4 150 Pa MERV 6-7 25%-30%
G4 150 Pa MERV 7-8 30%-40%
F-5 200 Pa MERV 8-9 40%-50%
F-5 200 Pa MERV 9-10 50%- 60%
F-6 200 Pa MERV 10-11 60%-70%

F-6 200 Pa MERV 12-13 70%-80%
F-7 200Pa MERV 13-14 80%-90%
F-8 300Pa MERV 14-15 90%-95%
H-11 300 Pa MERV 16 95% DOP

MERV-17 99.99%
U-13-14 300 Pa (HEPA)
The final pressure drops tabulated in Table-1 are typical maximum values for air-
handling units in operation and lower than those used in EN 779 for classification
purposes, for reasons of energy saving, and the performance obtained from tests
according to EN 779 are not necessarily met at these lower pressure drops.
4. Provide temporary rolled disposable filters of Class 4 used as a pre-filters for

AHU’s and FCU’s to protect the units and ductwork from dust during start up
period of the HVAC system.
a. Media : Glass fiber or synthetic or treated foam
b. Separation efficiency of G4 to DIN-EN 779
c. Temperature 80°C
d. Humidity 100% RA
5. Filters Installed in Air Handling Units:
a. Fresh air intake side : 50 mm (2”) thick cleanable washable pre-filter class
G2.
b. Filter section : 100 mm (4”) thick replaceable throw away pre-filter class
G4 plus fine filter class F7.
c. Install carbon filter where is indicated in the drawings.
6. Filters Installed in Fan Coil Units: Provide replaceable throw away panel filter in
rigid frame class G4 with 50mm (2”) thick as specified.
B. Pre-filters:
1. Replaceable (Throw away) Panel Filters: Provide factory-fabricated, viscous-
coated, flat panel type replaceable air filters with holding frames; where shown, in
sizes indicated, with 50mm (2”) thick UL Class 2 throwaway media material;
construct media of interlaced glass fibers, spray with non-flammable adhesive,
frame in throwaway fiberboard casings, and sandwich between perforated metal
grills. Construct ductwork-holding frames of 20 gage galvanised steel, capable of
holding media and media frame in place, and gasketed to prevent unfiltered air
by-passing between media frames and holding members. Provide filters with
rated face velocity of 76 metres per minute (250 fpm), initial resistance of not
greater than 8mm (0.30”) w.g., final rated resistance of 13mm (0.60”) w.g., and
average arrestance of 80%.
2. Cleanable (Washable) Panel Filters: Provide factory fabricated, flat panel type
cleanable air filters with holding frames; where shown, in sizes indicated, with
50mm (2”) thick cleanable filtering media constructed of galvanized woven and
crimped steel screening; with 20 gage galvanized steel frame. Construct
ductwork-holding frames of 18 gage galvanized steel and capable of holding
media and media frame in place, and gasketed to prevent unfiltered air by-
passing between media frames and holding members. Provide cleanable filters
with rated face velocity of 90 metres per minute (300 fpm), initial resistance not
greater than 2.5mm (0.10”) w.g., final rated resistance of 13mm (0.60”) w.g., and
average arrestance of 75%.
3. Foam Filter:
a. Cleanable (washable) panel filters: Provide factory fabricated, flat (zig
zag folded) panel type cleanable air filters with frame, cleanable filtering
media constructed of polyurethane foam on polyether basis in controlled
porosities, filter class G4 as indicated, with aluminium frame.
b. Filter media easily removable from frame for changing or washing
purposes: Provide cleanable filters with rated face velocity between 300 –
350 fpm initial differential pressure according to filter class and
dimensions as indicated.
C. Final Filters
1. Bag Type Filters: Provide factory-fabricated, dry, extended surface pocket type
filters with holding frames where shown, in sizes indicated. Construct media
from ultrafine glass fibers. Divide each pocket into six tubes by sealed stitch
lines running the entire length of the pocket. Construct holding frames of 16
gage galvanized steel 100mm (4”) in depth and provide suitable fasteners and
gasketing to hold media and media frame and to prevent unfiltered air passing
between media frames and holding devices. Supply frames with heavy duty
rotary spring latches that hold the header against the gaskets with force. Provide
a single piece steel header that channels the air directly into each tube through
countered openings in the header. Attach each tube individually to flanges on
the air leaving side of the header with high strength epoxy glue. Design holding
frames which are suitable for bolting together into built-up filter banks. Provide
filters with rated velocity of 152 metres per minute (500 fpm), initial resistance of
10mm (0.40”) w.g. with 90-95% dustspot efficiency, and final rated average
resistance of 25mm (1.0”) w.g.
2. Extended Surface Self-Supporting Filters: Provide factory-fabricated, dry,
extended surface self-supporting filters with holding frame; where indicated.
Equip with UL Class I fibrous media material constructed so that individual pleats
are maintained in tapered form by flexible internal supports under rated airflow
conditions. Construct holding frames of 18 gage galvanized steel and provide
suitable fasteners and gasketing to hold filter units and to prevent unfiltered air
passing between media frames and holding devices. Design holding frames
which are suitable for bolting together into built-up filter banks. Provide filters
with rated face velocity of 76 metres per minute (250 fpm), initial resistance of
6mm (0.25”) w.g. with 90-95% efficiency, and final rated resistance of 25mm
(1.0”) w.g.
D. Very high-efficiency dry filters, HEPA (high-efficiency particulate air) filers, and ULPA
(ultra low-penetration air) filters are made in an extended-surface configuration of deep
space folds of submicrometre glass fiber paper. These filters operate at duct velocities
near 250 fpm, with resistance rising from 0.5 to more than 2.0 in. of water over their
services lift. These filters are the standard for cleanroom, nuclear, and toxic-particulate
applications.
E. Baffle Type Grease Filter:

1. Baffle type grease filters are constructed of formed series of offset solid
aluminium baffles which overlap each other for permanent turning round of the
flow.
2. The filter to be fire resistance, low-weight and easy to clean.
3. Provide filters with average rated face velocity of 300 fpm, average pressure drop
12 mm (0.5” w.g), final rated resistance 20 mm (0.8” w.g).
F. Carbon Filters:
1. Description: Activated carbon filters are constructed from a heavy duty extruded
aluminium profiles with finish quality and mechanically riveted on corners for
strength.
2. Filter Media: Granules of activated carbon.
3. The media is enclosed in multi-layers of corrugated galvanized expanded steel
sheets followed by the original synthetic impregnated activated carbon pads
covered by steel mesh and all are finally enclosed in a high quality perforated
sheets.
G. Sand Trap Louvers:

1. Louvers shall be vertical fixed blade type with blades arranged to provide
tortuous air flow path and thus trap sand.
2. Louver shall have self-emptying drain holes.
3. Louvers shall be constructed of aluminum to ASTM B209 and ANSI.1. Blades
shall be 1.6 mm thick and casing 2.0 mm thick.
4. Maximum louver face velocity shall be 1.2 M/s and maximum pressure drop 50
Pa.
5. Louvers shall be provided with washable filter and an insect screen of aluminum
2 mm X 2 mm mesh mounted on a standard U type frame with miter corners.
Screens shall be secured to the interior face of the louver with self-tapping
stainless steel screws.
6. Size of louvers shall be as indicated on the drawings. Louvers of heights 1125
mm to 2250 shall have central transom and sand chute and for heights 2250 mm
to 4500 mm louver shall have additional central bracing support as
recommended by the manufacturer.
7. Louvers shall have efficiency of 80% with coarse test dust (20 to 200 microns)
and 50% efficiency with fine test dust (1 to 70 microns).
2.03 FILTER HOLDING SYSTEMS
A. At the Contractor’s option select either of the two following frame types. Provide any
necessary empty sections, upstream, downstream and/or side access.
1. Front and Rear Access Filter Frames: Provide filter bank framing system,
constructed of aluminium framing members having minimum thickness of 23mm
(0.90”). Design system for either upstream (front) or downstream (rear) filter
servicing. Cut to size and pre-punch members for easy assembly into modules
of size and capacity as scheduled or noted on the Drawings. Provide
permanently gasketed framing members to prevent bypass of unfiltered air. If
vertical support members are required to prevent deflection of horizontal
members, install so as not to interfere with either installation or operation of
filters. Incorporate separate track for prefilters, removable from front, or
removable from back after removal of after-filters. Provide factory-installed
positive sealing device for each row of filters, to insure seal between gasketed
filter elements. Provide hardware necessary for field assembly.
2. Side Servicing Housings: Provide factory-assembled side servicing housings
with flanges for insertion into ductwork system as indicated. Construct of 16
gage galvanized steel. Provide integral pre-filter tracks to accommodate 50mm
(2”) throw away or cleanable filters. Provide access doors with continuous
gasketing on perimeter and positive locking devices. Incorporate positive-sealing
gasket material on channels to seal top and bottom of filter cartridge frames to
prevent bypass. Arrange so filter cartridges can be loaded from either access
door.
2.04 FILTER GAGES
A. Provide magnetic dial type gauge for each filter bank, with logarithmic curve tube gage,
with integral levelling gage, graduated to read from 0mm to 75mm (0” to 3”) w.g.
1. Provide pressure tips, tubing, gage connections, and mounting bracket.
2.05 Ecology Unit

A. The scope of this section comprises the supply of Ecology unit conforming to these
Specifications and in accordance with the requirement of Drawings and Schedule of
Quantities. Unit should capable for conveying air with maximum temperature up to
80°C in continuous operation.
B. Ecology unit shall be from the ISO 9001, EMS 14001 & OHSAS 18001 on quality
management, the occupational health and safety management system & the
environmental management Certified Company and have the experience of at least 5
Yrs. of continuously engaged in manufacturing.
C. Ecology unit shall be ETL Listed Conforming to UL STD 710 ( Exhaust Hoods for
Commercial Cooking Equipment )
D. FILTERATION SECTIONS:
1. First Stage of filtration system shall include:
Stage1: Electrostatic Precipitation.
Air is drawn by the blower through a washable metal mesh pre-filter & Bag Filter which
traps large dust particles. The remaining particles, some as small as 0.01 microns, pass
into a strong electrical field (ionizing section) where the particulate receives an electrical
charge. The charged particles then pass into a collector plate section made up of a
series of equally spaced parallel plates. Each alternate plate is charged with the same
polarity as the particles, which repel, while the interleaving plates are grounded, which
attract and collect. This section should have following features: -
• Solid State Power Supply
• Spiked Ionizing Blades
• Extra Depth Collector Cells
• Electrical Component Box Mounted out of Air Stream
• Self Glazing Ceramic Insulators: Out of Airstream; Impervious to Liquids; Provide
Operational Longevity and Power Supply Life; Easy to Clean
• Spiked Ionizer: No Ionizing Wires to Replace, Reducing Maintenance and
Replacement Cost
• High Efficiency: Up to 95% on Single Pass.
• Permanent Ionizer/Collector Elements: No Filter Replacement Cost; Just Wash,
Dry and Reinstall
• Low Pressure Drop: Lower Energy Cost to Operate Compared to Media and
Cartridge Units
Stage 2: 2 Inches thick Washable Type metallic panel filters

1. EN 779 : G2
2. Arrestance (ASHRAE 52.1) : 60-80%
3. MERV Rating (ASHRAE 52.2) : MERV1-4
4. Eurovent : EU2
5. Dust Spot Efficiency (ASHRAE 52.1) : 32-40%

Stage 3: 14.96 Inches Thick Synthetic Bag Filter
1. EN 779 : F9
2. Arrestance (ASHRAE 52.1) : 95%
3. MERV Rating (ASHRAE 52.2) : MERV15
4. Eurovent : EU9
5. Dust Spot Efficiency (ASHRAE 52.1) : 95%
Stage 4: Carbon Filter:

a. Durable non-woven polyester base media impregnated with activated
carbon.
The unique combination of high-quality activated carbon and polyester
affords odors and particulate trapping efficiency while maintaining
excellent airflow properties.
E. FAN SECTION:
1. FANS:
2. Fans:
Fans, backward curved, DIDW, shall be licensed to bear the AMCA Air and
Sound Certified Ratings Seal. The test standard used shall be ANSI/AMCA
210-85, ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 51-1985 “Laboratory Method of Testing
Fans for Rating” and AMCA 300 “Reverberant Room Method for Sound
Testing of fans”.
All fans shall be dynamically trim-balanced to ISO1940 and AMCA 204/3 - G2.5
quality grade after assembly.
Fan outlet velocity shall not exceed 10 m/s and maximum fan speed shall be
1450 rpm for fan up to 450 mm dia. For fans above 450 mm dia the outlet
velocity shall be within 11.5 m/sec. and maximum fan speed shall not close to
critical speed.
3. Housing:
Fans housing shall be of an appropriate thickness to prevent vibration and

drumming. The fan scroll shall be attached to the side plate by means of
continuous lock seam or intermittent spot welding. The wheel and inlet cone shall
be aerodynamically designed and constructed to provide maximum performance
and efficiency as published by the manufacturer.
Fans must be physically capable of operating safely at every point of rating at or

below the “minimum performance” limit for that class as defined in AMCA
standard 99-2408-69 “Performance Class of Operating Limits for Centrifugal
Fans”.
4. Fan Wheel:
All Ventilation Fan wheel shall be backward curved inclined non-over loading
type. Fan wheel and housing shall be statically and dynamically balanced to G2.5
quality grade.
5. Shaft:

Shafts shall be made of carbon steel (C40) machined and polished to tolerance
of standard ISO 286-2 - grade g6. Protective coat of anti-rusting shall be applied
to all bare surfaces of the shafts at the factory.
Shafts sizes shall be carefully calculated and designed such that the maximum
operating speed (RPM) shall not exceed 75% of the first critical speed. For any
application that is not a standard product from catalogue of the fan manufacturer
detailed calculation of critical speed characteristic shall be submitted for
approval.
6. Bearings:
Bearings shall be of self-alignment (concentric) type with adaptor sleeve bearing.
Bearings of eccentric locking collar with grub screw type are not acceptable.
Bearing shall be maintenance free with permanently lubricated sealed ball
bearing type. Bearing life shall be at least 75,000 hours based on basic rating
life, L10 of ISO 281 standard.
7. Motors:
Fan motor shall be suitable for 415  10% volts, 50 cycle 3 phase power supply,
squirrel cage, TEFC motor, provided with class F insulation, and of approved
make. Motor nameplate horsepower shall exceed brake horsepower by a
minimum of 10%. Motor shall be designed especially for quiet operation. The fan
and motor combination selected for the particular required performance, shall be
of the most efficient (smallest horse power), so that noise level and power
consumption are lowest.
8. Drive:
Drive to fan shall be provided through belt with adjustable motor. Belt shall be of
the oil resistant type.
Belts and pulleys shall be sized for a minimum 150% of the installed motor
horsepower. The belt speed shall not exceed 30m/s. The pulley shall be of Taper
Lock SPZ, SPA, SPB or SPC type. Conventional type of pulley is not acceptable.
9. Vibration Isolation:
GSS / MS base shall be provided for both fan & motor, built as an integral part,
and shall be mounted on a concrete foundation through vibration spring
isolators/cushy foot mountings.
F. CABINET CONSTRUCTION:
1. Filter Section Module Construction:
a. Filter Section: Pentapost design & have strong three-way angle
joints of reinforced nylon corners to form a rigid frame
structure. Rigid frame work comprises an assembly of
externally chamfered extruded aluminium profile & nylon corner
joints.
b. Inner & Outer Skin: standard pre-coated GI sheet, the double
skin (25/50 mm) is to retain the insulation surface clean & to
have a smooth surface.
c. Cabinet should be designed based on ≤2 m/s Filter across
Velocity.

G. ACCESSORIES
1. Control Panel (Motor Starter, Status Panel for Filter Bank).
2. Fire Damper.
3. Inlet/outlet flexible connectors
4. Ant vibration supports
5. Outlet flange
6. Inverters speed controllers.
7. Weather proof Construction for Fan Section.
8. Control Panel:
a. Control panel to be constructed from heavy gauge steel, suitable for
remote mounting and have front locking screws. Controls to be complete
with timers, relays and lamps to indicate system on, condition of pre-filter,
bag filter, absolute filter, filter missing, fire and odour reducing operation.
b. Controls and interconnecting field wiring to be 24 V AC.
9. Options:
a. Single odour control module.
b. Odour liquid low-level alarm.
c. 24-hour timer for odour control system.
d. Provide UL/ULC listed fire damper actuated by fusible link at outlet.
e. Module to be complete with four pressure switches to monitor pre-filter,
high efficiency, absolute filter and filter missing.
f. Fifth pressure switch for final monitoring (filter missing).
g. Provide terminal strip and all necessary relays and/or interlocks to remote
monitoring of all unit functions via the building’s DDC system. Provide
ability to remotely start and stop kitchen ventilation system via signal from
DDC system. Items to include at terminal strip:
1) System start/stop from DDC.
2) Filter alarm (for each filter).
H. Provide certificate of approval (air) for exhaust emissions as per local authorities.
2.06 All components meet National Building Standards, National Fire Codes, and National
Fire Protection Association (NFPA96) guidelines. They are tested, listed and labeled to
Underwriters Laboratories Standards in Canada and the USA (ULC and UL)
2.07 FRONT- AND REAR-ACCESS FILTER FRAMES
A. Framing System: Aluminum framing members with access for either upstream (front) or
downstream (rear) filter servicing, cut to size and prepunched for assembly into
modules. Vertically support filters prevent deflection of horizontal members without
interfering with either filter installation or operation.
B. Prefilters: Incorporate a separate track, removable from front or back.
C. Sealing: Factory-installed, positive-sealing device for each row of filters to ensure seal
between gasketed filter elements to prevent bypass of unfiltered air.

2.08 SIDE-SERVICE HOUSINGS
A. Description: Factory-assembled, side-service housings, constructed of galvanized steel,

with flanges to connect to duct system.
B. Prefilters: Integral tracks to accommodate 2-inch (50-mm) disposable or washable

filters.
C. Access Doors: Continuous gaskets on perimeter and positive-locking devices. Arrange

so filter cartridges can be loaded from either access door. Provide ribbed bagging rim
behind access door and PVC bags, for bag-in, bag-out arrangement.
D. Sealing: Incorporate positive-sealing gasket material on channels to seal top and

bottom of filter cartridge frames to prevent bypass of unfiltered air.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install filter frames according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Position each filter unit with clearance for normal service and maintenance. Anchor filter
holding frames to substrate.
C. Install filters in position to prevent passage of unfiltered air.
D. Install filter gage for each filter bank.
E. Install filter gage static-pressure tips upstream and downstream from filters to measure
pressure drop through filter. Mount filter gages on outside of filter housing or filter
plenum in an accessible position. Adjust and level inclined gages.
F. Coordinate filter installations with duct and air-handling unit installations.
G. Electrical wiring and connections are specified in Division 26 Sections.
H. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for

3.02 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing air-handling
and air-distribution systems, clean filter housings and install new filter media.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 7313
MODULAR INDOOR AND OUTDOOR AIR HANDLING UNITS/FRESH AIR HANDLING

UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes, modular air-handling units with coils for indoor and outdoor
installations.
B. Thermal Wheel Energy Recovery
C. Heat Pipes for enhanced dehumidification
D. Related Sections include the following:

1. Section 23 0548 – Vibration & Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping & Equipment.
2. Section 23 8216-Air Coils
1.02 REFERENCES
A. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook.
B. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes.
C. AMCA 300 - Test Code for sound Rating Air Moving Devices.
D. AMCA 301 - Method of Publishing Sound Ratings for Air Moving Devices.
E. AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louver, Dampers, and Shutters.
F. ANSI/AFBMA 9 - Load ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
G. ANSI/AFBMA 11- Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
H. ANSI/UL 900 - Test Performance of Air Filter Units.
I. AHRI 410 - Forced Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils.
J. AHRI 430 - Standard for Central-Station Air-Handling Units.
K. AHRI 435 - Standard for Application for Central-Station Air-handling Units.
L. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems.
M. EN 1886 - Ventilation for Buildings – Air Handling Units – Mechanical Performance.
KEO/19-3262-0000 23 7313/1 Modular Indoor And Outdoor Air Handling Units Fresh Air Handling
Units
N. EN 13053 - Ventilation for Buildings – Air Handling Units – Rating and Performance for
Units, Components and Sections.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of modular indoor air-handling unit indicated. Include the
following:
1. Certified fan-performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.
2. Certified fan-sound power ratings.
3. Certified coil-performance ratings with system operating conditions indicated.
4. Motor ratings, electrical characteristics, and motor and fan accessories.
5. Material gages and finishes.
6. Filters with performance characteristics.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and
C. Coordination Drawings: Submit with Shop Drawings. Show mechanical-room layout

and relationships between components and adjacent structural and mechanical
elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support.
Indicate and certify field measurements.
D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that modular

indoor air-handling units, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces
defined in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and
Equipment." Include the following:
forces specified."
event."
E. Field Quality-Control Test Reports: From manufacturer.
F. Static pressures given in the A.H.U. Schedules are only for guidance. The Contractor
shall calculate the external and internal static pressures for all A.H.U.s and shall obtain
Engineer's approval before ordering the equipment’s. The Contractor should provide the
required fan and motor h.p. without additional cost
Units
A. Source Limitations: Obtain modular indoor air-handling units through one source from a
single manufacturer.

modular indoor air-handling units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer
to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."

D. NFPA Compliance: Modular indoor air-handling units and components shall be

designed, fabricated, and installed in compliance with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air
Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
E. Certification: Modular indoor air-handling units and their components shall be factory
tested according to Eurovent or AHRI 430, "Central-Station Air-Handling Units," and
shall be listed and labeled by AHRI.
F. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.05 COORDINATION
items are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."
C. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.
A. Requirements of Section 23 0100 and the General Conditions of Contract shall be

referred to and complied with in all respects, without prejudice to this clause.
B. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and as recommended by the
manufacturer, including but not limited to the following shall be furnished properly
packed and labelled with equipment no. / location to the owner:
1. Gaskets: One set for each access door.
2. Two sets of matched fan belts (V belts) for each type and size of AHU if belt
driven fans used.
3. Two set of Fan bearings of each type and size of AHU fans used in the project.
4. One set of all replaceable filters of full set for all AHUs used in the project.
5. 10 Nos. of AHU door handlers of each size and type used.
6. One no. of electrical motor for each type and size of AHU Fans used.
C. Tools and spare parts supplied under this clause shall be provided in original packing,
clearly labelled and referenced.
Units
D. Spare Parts furnished under this clause shall not be used during the maintenance
tools etc., fulfill his obligations to operate and maintain the system in the contract period)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS-INDOOR AIR HANDLING UNITS
A. Draw-through, modular indoor air-handling units shall be factory assembled and consist
of fans, motor and drive assembly, coils, dampers, plenums, filters, condensate pans,
mixing section, dampers, control devices, 2” thick washable synthetic filter, Long
efficiency bag filter, sand trap louvers ( If shown on the drawings), UV light , electric
heater( If provided in the equipment schedules), and all required accessories. Drain pan
shall extend over the entire coil length & shall be of stainless steel construction for
corrosive resistance and shall be insulated.
B. The Air handling supplier should supply the first line product, which should be AHRI /
Eurovent Certified. The AHRI / Eurovent certificate should show the product series, AHU
sizes, models range, Country of origin etc.
C. On units with VFDs, factory dynamic fan balancing shall be conducted from 14Hz to
50Hz to identify and eliminate critical speeds to ensure stable operation through the
entire operating range of the fan and drive assembly. Field fan balancing is not
acceptable. Forward factory balancing test report to Engineer upon request.
D. Provide factory grommets at all pipe and electrical conduits penetrations through
cabinets.
E. Furnish each unit with a durable, deep etched, .025” thick, factory installed aluminum
identification plate, permanently mounted with the following information:
1. Unit identification as indicated on Contract Drawings.
2. Serial Number.
3. Model Number.
4. Capacity (CFM) and static pressure.
5. Motor HP.
6. Unit power supply: Volts / PH / Amps.
7. Supply Fan Type.
8. Coil GPM and pressure drop.
9. Sales Order #.
10. Date unit manufactured.
2.03 CABINET
A. Cabinet Construction and specifications
Units
1. Air Handling Unit shall be assembled on a heavy galvanized steel channel base
frame. The minimum acceptable height for the base frame is 150 mm for indoor
unit
2. AHUs shall be entirely of double skin construction with Aluminium pentapost
frame and galvanized steel construction for the outer and inner skins. Self
supported modular panels fixed to the baseframe and non-removable panels
supported from inside are not acceptable.
3. The unit panel’s skin thickness should be not less than 1.0 MM for outer and
inner skin. The panels should fabricated of galvanized steel sheet.
4. The outer panel skin should be made of galvanized steel thoroughly degreased
and then phosphatized before application of an average 60micron backed
electrostatic dry powder coating in RAL 7032 color scheme. . The walls from
inside and outside should be completely smooth.
5. All panels should be removable from the casing with quick release fasteners.
Rubber surrounds shall be provided to each panel joint and door to ensure
absolute air tightness. The sealing strips should of cellular rubber with close
pores. The panel shall be mounted flush with the frame members to create a
smooth surface inside and outside.
6. Full size hinged access doors, cam-locks and sturdy handles should be provided
for access section, filters, electric heaters & fans etc.
7. Air handing unit Intake and discharge openings should be fitted with a flanged
duct connection frame.
8. Walk in units should have internal door handles and reinforced floors.
9. The Fan section, Bag filter section, should be supplied with double plastic glass
inspection window not less than 190 Dia. sealed with rubber from the inside and
outside panel skin
10. Material thickness and finishes. Casing material shall exceed 1000-hour, 5% salt
spray solution test at 95F (35C) and 95% relative humidity without any sign of
red rust when tested in accordance with ASTM B-117.
B. Cabinet Insulation
1. The framework should be clad with minimum 60 mm thick, Penta-post frame with
double skinned panel insulated with polyurethane insulation sandwiched having a
density of not less than 48 kg/m³. Thermal conductivity for the casing should not
exceed 0.02W/(mK).
C. Certification
1. The casing should meet Eurovent EN1886 with the following mechanical
characteristics:
Casing Strength D1
Casing Air Leakage Class at - L2
400Pa
Casing Air Leakage Class at L2
+700Pa
Thermal Transmittance Class T2
Thermal Bridging Factor TB2
Filter Bypass Class F9
D. Accessories
Units
2.04 Light fitting 60W, Lamp connected to switch outside the casing shall be provided.FAN
AND MOTOR
A. Multiple fans shall be centrifugal plenum type.
B. Fans shall be equipped with airflow measurement by means of pressure difference

sensor for duty and standby configuration.
C. Direct drive single inlet centrifugal fans shall be backward curved high performance
centrifugal impellors with rotation diffuser, mounted on EC external rotor motor with
integrated control electronics.
D. Impellor shall be made of aluminum, with backward curved, continuously welded blades;
flow optimized inlet nozzle made of galvanized steel with pressure tap.
E. Motorized impellor balanced in two planes (static and dynamic) as per DIN ISO 1940 to
G 6.3 balance quality.
F. EC external rotor motor with Efficiency class IE4, magnets without use of rare earths,
maintenance free ball bearings with long term lubrication, theoretical nominal service life
of atleast 40,000 operating hours, soft start, integrated current limitation, wide input
voltage range 1-phase 200─277V, 50 or 3-phase 380─480V, 50Hz fan suitable for use
with all standard power supply systems with no effect on air performance.
G. Integrated electronics, low noise commutation logic; 100% speed control; PID
controllers; motors with power ratings of 750W shall be provided with an
RS485/MODBUS RTU interface.
H. Terminal box shall be made of aluminum with readily accessible connection area with
spring terminals, environment resistant cable glands or with brought out variable
connection cables (K3G250-AT39 and K3G280-AT04 only.)
I. Fan shall comply with the relevant EMC regulations and requirements with regard to
circuit feedback; documentation and marking conform to the applicable EU directives.
J. Performance data, air performance measurements on inlet side chamber test rig shall
be in accordance with ISO 5801 and DIN 24163, noise measurements in low reflection
acoustic test chamber as per DIN EN ISO 3745.
K. Integrated protective devises:

1. Alarm relay, with floating contacts (250V AC/2 A cos φ = 1).
2. Locked rotor protection.
3. Phase failure protection.
4. Motor soft start.
5. Mains undervoltage detection.
6. Excess temperature protection for electronics and motor.
7. Short circuit protection.
L. Fans shall have a sharply rising pressure characteristic extending through the operating
range and continuing to rise beyond the peak efficiency to ensure quiet and stable
operation. Fans shall have non overloading design with self limiting horsepower
characteristics and shall reach a peak in the normal selection area.
Units
M. Factory Run Test for one AHU: All fans prior to shipment shall be completely assembled
and test run as a unit at the specified operating speed or maximum RPM allowed for the
particular construction type.
N. Blank off panels: Each multiple fan section to be provided with one fan blank off panel to
enable manual isolation of fan for servicing.
O. The following fan options shall be made available for multiple fans:
1. Piezometer Ring: Airflow station shall be factory installed in each fan inlet.
Tubing shall be manifolded so that the measurement is representative of all fans
in the array. The device shall have a measurement accuracy of ±5%.
2. Backdraft damper: Backdraft damper shall be provided for automatic isolation of
individual fans for duty and standby configuration.
P. Shafts: Solid hot rolled steel, ground and polished, with key-way, and protectively
coated with lubricating oil. Critical speed minimum 20% greater than maximum ACMA
class speed.
Q. Fans should capable of accommodating static pressure and airflow variation of minimum
plus or minus 10 percent. Do not increase the speed by more than 20 percent from
specified criteria.
R. Rated Bearing Life: L-50 of 200,000 hours.
S. Control panel shall be supplied by same AHU supplier.
2.05 REFRIGERANT COILS (Applicable for DX type).
A. Performance Ratings: Tested and rated according to AHRI 410 and ASHRAE 33.
B. Minimum Working-Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa).
C. Source Quality Control: Factory tested to 450 psig (3105 kPa).
D. Tubes: ASTM B 743 copper, minimum 0.049 inch (1.245 mm) thick.
E. Fins: Copper, minimum 0.010 inch (0.254 mm) thick.
F. Suction and Distributor Piping: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B) copper tube
with brazed joints.
G. Frames: Galvanized-steel channel frame, minimum 0.0625 inch (1.6 mm) thick for
flanged mounting.
H. Frames: ASTM A 666, Type 316 stainless steel, minimum 0.0625 inch (1.6 mm) thick
for flanged mounting.
I. Capacities and Characteristics: (See equipment schedule on plan)
2.06 WATER COILS (Applicable for chilled water system)
A. Coil Specifications: Refer to Air Coil section with the following superseding
specifications:
Units
1. The coil should be supplied from the same supplier of the Air Handling Unit
Manufacturer
2. The coil body should be mounted on galvanized steel rails so that it can be
withdrawn from the unit casing
3. Coils of fresh air units shall be provided with factory applied epoxy.
4. Chilled water-cooling coils of capacities as indicated on schedules shall be
fabricated from heavy gauge copper tubing expanded into aluminum fins to give
a mechanical bond. Return bends shall be die formed. Headers shall be heavy
section seamless copper tubing with connections made in steel pipe with anti-
corrosion protection paint and with external screw thread. All joints shall be silver
brazed. Fittings shall include plugged vent and drain taps for each section. Coils
in contact with outside air (either mixed or full) shall be provided with factory
applied baked heresite coating and anti-fungal paint.
5. The coil shall be designed to operate at 16 bar NP.
6. Coil-Performance Tests: Factory-test cooling and heating coils, except sprayed
surface coils for rating according to AHRI 410, "Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling
and Air-Heating Coils."
7. Maximum Face Velocity of 2.5 m/s, Coils will be tested to 30 bars, with a
maximum design operating pressure of 16 bars.
2.07 FILTERS
A. Refer to Air Filter section with the following superseding specifications:

1. The filters should be tested and classified based on ASHRAE standard 52 or
equivalent Eurovent standard.
2. The filters should be sealed against the filter frame using a cam lock against a
permanently elastic gasket to a standard compatible with the filter efficiency.
3. Filter material shall be flame-retardant, incombustible, and non-odorous and offer
no sustenance to vermin.
4. The filters should be sealed against the filter frame using a cam lock against a
5. Pressure drop tapping shall be integrated into the frame to allow a manometer or
other pressure measuring apparatus to be fitted.
6. The filters cells should be withdrawal on the inspection side. The filter track shall
be made of stainless steel and with Hand-actuated off-center locking mechanism.
The Filter frame thickness should able to stand the weight for the filters.
7. Filters with performance characteristics. Computer selection sheet must indicate
clean, design (semi dirty) and final recommended pressure drop from filter
supplier
2.08 MIXING SECTION
A. Dampers shall have contra-rotating heavy gage galvanized steel Profiled blades. The
blades shall be fitted with durable neoprene edge seals.
B. Damper axles shall be galvanized steel rotating in Bronze / Nylon bearings with bushes
of plastic.
C. Dampers shall be arranged to operate automatically with one set of linkages.
Units
D. Dampers shall be interconnected by stainless steel push rods and linkages suitable for
motor operation; formed in one unit with plastic bearings and mounted in galvanized
sheet steel frame.
E. Damper motors and fittings, including a position indicator, shall be supplied loose for
fitting on site by the installer.
2.09 OUTDOOR AIR HANDLING UNITS
A. All specifications in this section for indoor units should be applicable for outdoor version
in addition to the following:
1. The outdoor Air Handling Units should be specifically designed for outdoor
installation. Indoor air handlers weatherized for outdoor use not accepted
2. The outdoor units outer joint of the unit should be sealed with permanently
flexible sealing compound.
3. A full-size sloping roof with drip nose for the outdoor units, which is both longer
and wider than the unit and painted in optional color.
4. All outdoor units shall be constructed and delivered on a base fabricated frame
from heavy duty structure galvanized steel channel painted in optional color. The
minimum acceptable height for the base frame is 150 mm.
5. For outdoor extract units the discharge should be fitted with an exhaust hood with
bird screen and the casing drainage shall be provided in the discharge sections.
6. The intake dampers should have contra-rotating stainless-steel profile blades
and fitted internally in a separate section. Also, for the Mixing Box the dampers
should fitted internally.
7. Provide special PVC / epoxy coating for the outer skin.
8. Fresh air inlet shall be through weather proof louver. Case stainless steel drain
pan shall be provided in the intake section.
2.10 THERMAL WHEEL ENERGY RECOVERY
A. Material: Hygroscopic type rotor heat exchanger designed for the transfer of both
sensible and latent heat. Bearings should be permanently lubricated roller type.
B. Other components of the Energy Recovery Units shall be similar to AHU.
C. Thermal efficiency: The thermal wheels efficiency shall be at not less than 75%.
Measured at the recovery side.
D. Modular unit matching with air handling unit modules in all respects comprising, but not
limited to the following to reclaim coolness / heat from the exhaust air and transfer to the
outside air intake:
1. Wheel filled with a matrix of Aluminium foil.
a. Speed controlled drive unit.
b. High performance seal provides tightness around the wheel surround and
between the air inlet and air outlet.
c. The desiccant should be water molecule selective and non-migratory.
d. The desiccant should be molecular sieve 3 Angstrom, so as to keep the
cross contamination to absolute minimum and also ensure the exclusion
of contaminants from the air streams, while transferring the water vapour
molecules.
Units
e. The thermal wheel is equipped with a purge section to enable continuous
wheel cleaning.
E. Casing shall be constructed of 20-gauge steel sheet; treated against corrosion as

appropriate.
1. Drive and controller:
a. Electric motor shall be supplied with suitable electrical power supply
complete with internal thermal overload protection and wired to unit
junction box.
b. Controls shall include starter with overload trip for the drive unit, linked to
start / stop with the air handling unit fan; appropriately integrated with that
of the air handling unit, wired for single electrical power intake.
F. Wheel matrix should be only from pure aluminum foil to allow for quick and efficient
uptake of thermal energy, sufficient mass for optimum heat transfer, maximum sensible
heat recovery during low rotational speed of 20 to 25 rpm.
G. The Desiccant for Enthalpy wheel should be water molecule selective and non-
migratory. The Desiccant should be molecular sieve 3Å, so as to keep the cross
contamination to absolute minimum and also ensure the exclusion of contaminants from
the air streams, while transferring the water vapor molecule. The desiccant should be of
sufficient mass, and should be coated with non-masking porous binder adhesive on the
aluminum substrate (matrix) so as to allow quick and easy uptake and release of water
vapor. The weight of desiccant coating and the mass of aluminum foil shall be in a ratio
so as to ensure equal recovery of both sensible and latent heat over the operating
range.
H. The Rotor/Wheel matrix shall have Equal sensible and latent recovery in the range of 60
to 80%.
I. The Rotor shall be made of alternate flat and corrugated aluminum foil of uniform width.
The Rotor honeycomb matrix foil should be so wound and adhered as to make a
structurally very strong and rigid media un-affected by temperature and humidity
changes.
J. Subject to wheel size, sectioned wheel with pie segments, capable of being assembled
at site can be acceptable as an option.
K. The surface of the wheel/rotor should be highly polished to ensure that the vertical run
out does not exceed ± 1mm for every 1 meter diameter , ensuring negligible leakage.
L. The number of wraps (of alternative corrugated and flat foil ) of the rotor over the radii
shall be very consistent so as to ensure uniform air flow and performance over the entire
face in the air stream. Flute height and pitch will be consistent to a very tight tolerance to
ensure uniform pressure drop and uniform airflow across the rotor face.
M. The rotor shall be non clogging aluminum media, having a multitude of narrow aluminum
channels, thus ensuring a laminar flow and will allow particles up to 800 microns to pass
through it.
N. The rotor should rotate at a speed lower than 20 to 25 rpm, ensuring long life of belts
and reduce wear and tear of seals.
O. The media shall be cleanable with compressed air, or low pressure steam or light
detergent, without degrading the latent recovery.
Units
P. The recovery wheel cassette/casing shall be manufactured from tubular construction to
provide a self supporting rigid structure, complete with access panels, purge sector,
rotor, bearings, seals, drive mechanism complete with belts. The cassette/ casing shall
be finished weather proof painting.
Q. The rotor shall have a field adjustable purge mechanism to provide definite separation of
air flow minimizing the carryover of bacteria, dust and other pollutants, from the exhaust
air to supply air. With proper adjustments the cross contamination shall be limited to less
than 0.04% of the exhaust air concentration.
R. The face and radial seals shall be 4 pass non contact labyrinth seals for effective
sealing and also for minimum wear and tear.
S. The rotor shall be made from epoxy coated sheet aluminum.
2.11 Thermal wheels sensible and enthalpy shall be supplied with electronic speed control
center ( If shown on the schedules). The electronic speed control center shall be fully
integrated to BAS ( building automation system)
2.12 HEAT PIPES FOR ENHANCED DEHUMIDIFICATION
A. General
1. Heat pipes shall be included within the AHU and wrapped around the main
cooling coil. The wrap-around heat pipes precool the fresh/return air allowing
more of the cooling coil surface to be utilized for the removal of moisture. The
dehumidified air is then passively reheated by the heat pipe to the supply
condition. The incorporation of the heat pipe allows for a reduction in the size of
chiller and cooling coil as well as replacing the conventional methods of reheat
and their associated system components.
2. Heat pipes for enhanced dehumidification will comprise a precool fin block
upstream of the main cooling coil linked to a reheat fin block downstream of the
cooling coil by means of ‘wrap-around’ pipes. The heat pipes will be delivered to
the AHU manufacturer fully charged and sealed, for inclusion in the air treatment
section of the AHU.
B. Fins
The external fins shall be of aluminium with a minimum thickness of 0.15mm. Fins shall
be of the continuous plate type to maximize the external surface area rather the
individually finned tube pattern. The fins shall be of the louvered type to optimize the
airside heat transfer and spaced at such a distance as required by the conditions
specified.
C. Tubes
Tubes shall be of refrigeration standard seamless copper C106 for heat exchanger use.
Tube diameter shall be 12mm with a grooved inner surface to enhance the internal
surface area and prevent pooling of liquid. The minimum root thickness of the tube shall
be 0.35mm. The number of rows of tubes shall be selected to suit the application.
Multiple row heat pipes shall have tubes in a staggered, equilateral pattern to optimize
the airside heat transfer.
D. Casing
Casings shall be from galvanized sheet steel with a minimum thickness of 1.6mm. The
casing shall incorporate tube plates and top and bottom plates around both the precool
Units
and reheat heat pipe blocks. Cover boxes shall be provided around the wrap-around
pipes both to protect the exposed pipes and to rigidly join the two sections. Extra sheet
metal shall be provided to ensure rigidity during manufacture and transport.
E. Working Fluid
1. The working fluid shall be refrigerant type classified as ASHRAE safety group A1.
The refrigerant shall be R134a. The heat pipe circuits shall be factory charged
and hermetically sealed with the calculated weight of refrigerant.
2. If working fluid is water, the heat pipe circuit shall be factory charged with the
calculated weight of water and hermitically sealed. Individual heat pipe shall be
manufactured in such a way as to ensure that all non-condensable gases are
removed from the tubes.
F. Circuitry
1. Heat pipes shall be formed from an array of complete loops such that the working
fluid flows around the loop in only one direction i.e. liquid and vapour flow in the
same direction to ensure that returning liquid is not entrained by the vapour.
2. There shall be a multitude of loops in the height of the heat pipe and each loop
shall be individually charged. Heat pipes with header assemblies containing a
single circuit are not suitable as a single leak will render the entire heat pipe
inoperative.
3. When multiple row heat pipes are used the rows shall be connected together in a
counter flow orientation to optimize the performance of the heat pipe. Rows shall
not be manifolded together.
4. Heat pipe loops shall be arranged to slope down to the precool side to allow
gravity assisted liquid return to maximize the internal heat transfer.
G. Performance
Heat pipes shall be designed to comply with the specified conditions when subject to the
air volumes given in the specification. Heat pipe performance shall be independently
type tested and certified in line with the requirements of British Standards BS 5141 pt1 /
European Standards EN 305 & 306 / American Standards AHRI 410 / AHRI 1060 for
testing and rating of heat exchangers. All software used to predict the performance of
heat pipes shall be based upon the results of these independent tests
2.13 SOUND POWER LEVEL
A. Air handling unit sound power data shall be submitted for review. Sound data shall be
given at the supply connections and return connections.
B. Calculations shall be provided for the investigation of the requirements for Sound
Attenuators.
C. Minimum sound attenuation for the casing should be
Octave band, mid frequency, Hz

125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 HZ
15 23 29 31 28 31 33 dB (A)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Units
3.01 SELECTION
A. The size of units shall be selected to fit into the space available.
B. Variable speed AHU shall be provided with VFD’s. VFD’s and controllers shall be
connected to BAS system.
3.02 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in of hydronic, Refrigeration piping, and condensate drainage piping

systems and electrical services to verify actual locations of connections before
installation.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and in conformance with AHRI

435 or equivalent Eurovent standard
B. Concrete Bases: Install floor mounting units on 4-inch- (100-mm-) high concrete bases.
See Division 23 Section "Common Work Results for HVAC" for concrete base materials
and fabrication requirements.
C. Install modular indoor air-handling units with the vibration control devices as specified in
Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
D. For suspended type units provide vibration isolating hangers
E. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around modular indoor air-handling
units for service and maintenance.
F. Air leaks detectable by sound or touch are to be corrected.
G. Air handling units are to be properly supported to prevent flexing, bending or distorting
base rails.
H. All coils are to be cleaned prior to substantial completion if units are used during
construction.
I. Clean all air handling units and return to original manufacturer's condition prior to
substantial completion. Vacuum clean all debris from inside air handling equipment.
J. Install piping to unit with full size 6 inch long dirt leg with 1/2" valve at bottom for
cleaning.
K. Provide for positive gravity drainage of coil condensate. Pipe full size of unit connection.
L. Adjust fan drives as required to obtain scheduled capacities as directed by the Test and
Balance Firm to include sheave and belt replacement.
Units
M. Align belts to eliminate wear and vibration of belts.
N. Verify correct drainage of condensate from condensate pan.
O. Verify correct rotation of fan and wiring of motor.
P. Lubricate all greaseable ball bearings with manufacturer’s suggested lubricant.
Q. Replace filters as required if units are used during construction
3.04 CONNECTIONS

B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect piping to modular indoor air-handling units mounted on vibration isolators with
flexible connectors.
D. Chilled-Water Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 23 Section

"Hydronic Piping." Connect to supply and return coil tappings with shutoff or balancing
valve and union or flange at each connection.
E. Provide condensate drain pipe from the unit.
F. Refrigerant Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 23 Section

"Refrigerant Piping." Connect to supply and return coil tappings with shutoff valve and
union or flange at each connection.
G. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 23

Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make
final duct connections with flexible connections.
H. Electrical: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 26 Sections for power

wiring, switches, and motor controls. For field installed electrical items and wiring,
ensure compliance with manufacturer's wiring and details drawings.
I. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for

J. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published


inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and
electrical connections. Report results in writing.
1. Leak Test: After installation, fill water and steam coils with water and test coils
and connections for leaks. Remove malfunctioning coils, replace with new units,
and retest.
Units
2. Charge refrigerant coils with refrigerant and test for leaks. Remove
malfunctioning coils, replace with new units, and retest.
3. Fan Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to
confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units,
replace with new units, and retest.
4. Automatic Roll Filter Operational Test: Operate filters to demonstrate
compliance with requirements. Test for leakage of unfiltered air while system is
operating. Correct malfunctioning units, then retest to demonstrate compliance.
Remove and replace units that cannot be corrected with new units, and retest.
B. Final Checks before Startup: Perform the following, as minimum:

connections to piping, ducts, and electrical systems are complete. Verify that
proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect
switches.
3. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section.
free fan wheel rotation and smooth bearing operations. Reconnect fan drive
system, align belts, and install belt guards.
5. Lubricate bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts with factory-
recommended lubricants.
6. Set zone dampers to fully open position for each zone.
7. Set face-and-bypass dampers to full face flow.
8. Set outside- and return-air mixing dampers to minimum outside-air setting.
9. Comb coil fins for parallel orientation.
10. Install clean filters.
connected duct systems are in fully open position.
C. Starting procedures for modular indoor air-handling units include the

following:
1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel.
Adjust fan to indicated rpm.[ Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to
achieve design conditions].
2. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage.
3. Manually operate dampers from fully closed to fully open position and record fan
performance.
D. Refer to Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for modular
indoor air-handling system testing, adjusting, and balancing.
3.07 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
Units
3.08 CLEANING
A. Clean modular indoor air-handling units internally, on completion of installation,

according to manufacturer's written instructions. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign
material and construction dirt and dust. Vacuum clean fan wheels, cabinets, and coils
entering air face.
B. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing modular
indoor air-handling and air-distribution systems, clean filter housings and install new
filters.
3.09 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain modular indoor air-handling units. Refer to
Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION
Units
SECTION 23 8126
SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS
A. This Section includes split-system air-conditioning units consisting of separate

evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components. Units are designed for
exposed or concealed mounting, and may be connected to ducts.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers’ technical product data, including rated capacities
of selected model clearly indicated, weights, furnished specialties and accessories; and
installation and start-up instructions. Include performance data in terms of capacities,
outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and
electrical characteristics.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer’s assembly-type shop drawings indicating

dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances, and methods of assembly of
components. Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer’s electrical requirements for power supply wiring
for split D/X cooling units. Submit manufacturer’s ladder-type wiring diagrams for
interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are
factory installed and portions to be field installed.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to include in

G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.

split-system units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01
Section "Product Requirements."
B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the requirements of the Contract

Documents, acceptable manufacturers are to be firms regularly engaged in manufacture
of split D/X cooling units of types and sizes required, whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than ten (10) years.
C. Regulatory Requirements:
1. ARI Compliance
KEO/19-3262-0000 23 8126/1 Split System Air Conditioners
a. Test and rate split D/X cooling units for 135,000 btu/hr capacity or over in
accordance with ARI 360 “Standard for Commercial and Industrial Unitary
Air-Conditioning Equipment”.
b. Test and rate split D/X cooling units under in accordance with ARI 210
“Standard for Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning
Equipment”, and provide Certified Rating. Sound test and rate units in
accordance with ARI 270 “Standard for Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary
Equipment”, and provide Certified Rating.
2. ASHRAE Compliance: Construct refrigeration system of split D/X units in
accordance with ASHRAE Standard 15 “Safety Code for Mechanical
Refrigeration”.
3. UL Compliance: Provide split D/X cooling units which are designed,
manufactured, and tested in accordance with UL requirements.

E. Energy-Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy

Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."
F. Coefficient of Performance: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1,

"Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."
G. Units shall be complied with MEW latest regulation and acceptable to PAHW.
H. Unit shall operate continuously at an ambient temperature of 52degC (125.6degF) for at

least two hours without tripping or overheating.
I. Units shall be provided with all necessary accessories like crank case heater for
condenser, TXV for refrigerant coil, solenoid valves etc.
J. The DX indoor / outdoor units and refrigeration pipes shall be selected based on the
specified actual capacity without deration.
A. Handle split D/X cooling units and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking,
denting and scoring. Do not install damaged split D/X cooling units or components;
replace with new.
B. Store split D/X cooling units and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather,
dirt, fumes, water, construction debris, and physical damage.
C. Comply with Manufacturer’s rigging and installation instructions for unloading split D/X
cooling units, and moving them to final location.
1.05 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for units. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into
bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 03 Section
"Cast-in-Place Concrete."

B. Coordinate size, location, and connection details with roof curbs, equipment supports,
and roof penetrations specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."
C. Coordinate and establish the shortest refrigeration pipe length through wall metal
sleeves.
1.06 WARRANTY

or replace components of split-system air-conditioning units that fail in materials or
B. Special Product Warranty on Compressor: Provide written warranty, signed by the

manufacturer, installer and contractor, agreeing to replace/repair, within warranty period
of 5 years, compressors with inadequate and defective materials and workmanship,
including leakage, breakage, improper assembly, or failure to perform as required;
provided manufacturer’s instructions for handling installing, protecting, and maintaining
units have been adhered to during warranty period. Replacement is not limited to
component replacement only, and it does include labour for removal and reinstallation.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
contents.
1. Filters: One set of filters for each unit.
2. Fan Belts: One set of belts for each unit. (If Applicable)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

2.02 CONCEALED EVAPORATOR-FAN COMPONENTS
A. Chassis: Galvanized steel with flanged edges, removable panels for servicing, and
insulation on back of panel.
1. Insulation: Faced, glass-fiber duct liner.
2. Drain Pans: Galvanized steel, with connection for drain; insulated.
B. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with
ARI 210/240, and with thermal-expansion valve.
C. Fan: Forward-curved, double-width wheel of galvanized steel; directly connected to

motor.

D. Fan Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor
1. Special Motor Features: Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection
and permanent lubrication.
E. Air filters shall be of permanent cleanable and washable type and shall be easily
accessible; thickness shall be minimum 25mm.Wiring Terminations: Connect motor to
chassis wiring with plug connection.
2.03 FLOOR-MOUNTING, EVAPORATOR-FAN COMPONENTS (If applicable)
A. Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends in color selected by
Architect.
1. Discharge Grille: Steel with surface-mounted frame or Welded steel bars forming
a linear grille and welded into supporting panel.
2. Insulation: Faced, glass-fiber, duct liner.
3. Drain Pans: Galvanized steel, with connection for drain; insulated.
ARI 210/240, and with thermal-expansion valve.
C. Fan: Direct drive, centrifugal, with power-induced outside air.

E. Filters: Permanent, cleanable.
2.04 WALL-MOUNTING, EVAPORATOR-FAN COMPONENTS
A. Cabinet: Provide manufacturer's standard casing slim line construction, corrosion

protection coating, and exterior finish. Provide removable panels and/or access door for
inspection and access to internal parts. Insulate casing with 1" thick minimum thermal
insulation. Provide knockouts for electrical and piping connections. Provide condensate
drain connection, and lifting lugs.
ARI 210/240, and with thermal-expansion valve. Provide non-ferrous construction with
aluminum plate fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubes; with brazed tubing
joints. Circuit evaporator to provide full active face on minimum cooling step.
C. Fan: Provide propeller-type, direct-driven fans with permanently lubricated bearings.

2.05 CEILING-MOUNTING, EVAPORATOR-FAN COMPONENTS

A. Cabinet: Provide manufacturer's standard casing slim line construction, corrosion
protection coating, and exterior finish. Provide removable panels and/or access door for
inspection and access to internal parts. Insulate casing with 1" thick minimum thermal
insulation. Provide knockouts for electrical and piping connections. Provide condensate
drain connection, and lifting lugs.
ARI 210/240, and with thermal-expansion valve. Provide non-ferrous construction with
aluminum plate fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubes; with brazed tubing
joints. Circuit evaporator to provide full active face on minimum cooling step.
C. Fan: Provide propeller-type, direct-driven fans with permanently lubricated bearings.

2.06 AIR-COOLED, COMPRESSOR-CONDENSER COMPONENTS
A. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel in color selected by Architect, with
removable panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting
holes in base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of
casing.
B. Compressor: Semi-hermetic (serviceable) or Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater

and mounted on vibration isolation. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-
sensitive overload devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor.
1. Compressor Type: Reciprocating or Scroll.
2. Compressor motor with manual-reset high-pressure switch and automatic-reset
low-pressure switch.
3. Refrigerant Charge: R-407C or R-410A. and or approved by MEW.
C. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with
ARI 210/240, and with liquid subcooler.
D. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.
E. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection.
F. Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 45 deg F (7 deg C).
G. Mounting Base Plate: Polyethylene.
2.07 CRITICAL UNITS (DISTANCE BETWEEN INDOOR AND OUTDOOR ARE

EXCEEDING STANDARD REQUIREMENT)
A. Condensing unit
1. Cu/al condenser coil with inner grooved pipe
2. Scroll compressor for single and tree phase with crank case heater. .
3. Top discharge condenser fan
4. High /low pressure switches.
B. Evaporator unit
1. Direct drive double fan
2. Cu/al evaporator coil with inner grooved pipe.
3. Thermal Expansion valve
4. 1” Aluminum washable filter.
C. Provide oil trap for every 5 meter.
2.08 ACCESSORIES
A. Thermostat: Low voltage with subbase to control compressor and evaporator fan.
B. Thermostat: Wireless infrared functioning to remotely control compressor and

evaporator fan, with the following features:
1. Compressor time delay.
2. 24-hour time control of system stop and start.
3. Liquid-crystal display indicating temperature, set-point temperature, time setting,
operating mode, and fan speed.
4. Fan-speed selection, including auto setting.
C. Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor.
D. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned,
dried, pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both
ends.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which split D/X cooling units are to be installed.
Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. General: Install split D/X cooling units in accordance with manufacturer’s installation
instructions. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in approval locations, and
maintain manufacturer’s recommended clearances.
C. Install ground-mounting, compressor-condenser components on 4-inch- (100-mm-)

thick, reinforced concrete base; 4 inches (100 mm) larger on each side than unit.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-
Place Concrete." Coordinate anchor installation with concrete base.
D. Install ground-mounting, compressor-condenser components on polyethylene mounting

base.
E. Install roof-mounting compressor-condenser components on equipment supports

specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories." Anchor units to supports with
removable, cadmium-plated fasteners.
F. Install compressor-condenser components on restrained, spring isolators with a

minimum static deflection of 1 inch (25 mm). Refer to Division 23 Section "Vibration and
Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

G. Install and connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings.
Install tubing to allow access to unit.
H. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to
be factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer’s wiring diagram submittal
3.02 CONNECTIONS

B. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.
C. Refrigeration piping indicated in the drawings are diagrammatic. Contractor shall verify
the equivalent distance between the indoor and outdoor unit and cross check with pipe
sizes. Provide bigger pipe sizes if required without additional cost to the client.
D. Provide adequate number of traps in the refrigerant line as per the manufacturers
recommendation.
E. Duct Connections: Duct installation requirements are specified in Division 23 Section

"Metal Ducts." Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. Connect
supply and return ducts to split-system air-conditioning units with flexible duct
connectors. Flexible duct connectors are specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct
Accessories."
F. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for

G. Electrical Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Sections for power

wiring, switches, and motor controls. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer
but not specified to be factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer’s wiring diagram
submittal.


instructions. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements.
Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.
2. Balance split D/X unit systems to verify its capacity and balanced delivery of air
for each space
3. Provide Positive equipment ground for split D/X cooling unit components.
3.05 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units. Refer to Division 01 Section
"Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 8127
DX-VRF-VRV SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes DX VRF / VRV split-system air-conditioning and heat pump units
consisting of separate evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components. Units
are designed for exposed or concealed mounting and may be connected to ducts.
B. All indoor and Outdoor Units with DX coils and connected to Outdoor VRF system.
C. VRF system Controls.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
type of product indicated. Include performance data in terms of capacities, outlet
velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and
electrical characteristics.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other
work.
C. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

connection.
D. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
E. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to include in

H. Sustainability Credit Submittals:

1. Manufacturers' product data for refrigerants, including printed statement that
refrigerants are free of HCFCs.
A. Product Options: Drawings shall indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements
of split-system units based on the specific systems indicated.
KEO/19-3262-0000 23 8127/1 Dx-Vrf-vrv Split System Air Conditioners

C. Energy-Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy

Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."
D. Coefficient of Performance: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1,

"Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."
E. Units shall be designed to operate with HCFC-free refrigerants.
F. All the fans shall be coated with anticorrosion paint to avoid any rust.
G. VRF system shall be suitable for operation at the ambient temperature of 0 deg C to 55
degC.
1.04 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for units. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into
bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 03 Section
"Cast-in-Place Concrete."
B. Coordinate size, location, and connection details with roof curbs, equipment supports,
and roof penetrations specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."
1.05 WARRANTY

or replace components of split-system air-conditioning units that fail in materials or
B. Warranty Period: from date of Substantial Completion and shall be in accordance with
specification section 23 9010.
1.06 WARRANTY AND SERVICES
A. Standard Warranty shall be as per contract terms and condition with a 5-year warranty
for compressor. Spare Parts list shall be as per the manufacture’s recommendation for 2
years.
B. Spare Parts furnished under this clause shall not be used during the maintenance
tools etc., fulfill his obligations to operate and maintain the system in the contract
period).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

2.02 VRF / VRV SYSTEM_ GENERAL
A. The condensing unit shall have special design suitable for high ambient climatic
conditions. The system shall be capable of cooling with external ambient temperatures
from –5oC to +55oC and provide heating with ambient temperatures down to –20oC.
Third party test report shall be submitted (minimum 2-hour operation).
B. The Indoor units shall be capable to control proper temperature and humidity in
occupied space under the conditions specified in tender design documents. The
systems shall provide extra Power savings in mild ambient conditions by changing
evaporation temperature of Refrigerant via ‘Variable Refrigerant Technology’.
C. The VRV / VRF system shall control varying flow of refrigerant through the fan coil units,
by means of an electronic expansion valve fitted in each indoor unit.
D. The equipment manufacturer shall be responsible for the manufacture of the

compressor and refrigerant used within the system to maintain integrity of design,
optimize efficiency and reliability of equipment.
E. The VRV / VRF system shall have the ability to sustain refrigerant piping lengths of up to
165m with a level difference up to 50m between fan coil units and condensing unit if the
outdoor unit is located above the highest-level indoor unit. An option shall be available
to increase the level difference of the pipe work to 90m between fan coil units and
condensing unit if the outdoor unit is located above the lowest level indoor unit.
Manufacturer shall submit live computer model to check the pipe lengths.
F. The manufacturer shall ensure that the units selected provide cooling capacity at design
conditions of temperatures (indoor and outdoor) and pipe lengths (vertical and
horizontal).
G. Each independent system shall be capable of having up to 1000m of refrigerant pipe

work installed. The system shall be capable of having up to 90m refrigerant pipe length
from the first refnet joint to the furthest indoor unit, after incorporating relevant system
design guidelines.
H. The VRV / VRF system shall operate with Refrigerant R410A, the refrigerant shall be a
zeotropic blend constituted of a maximum of two different refrigerants providing a
maximum temperature glide of less than 0.17K to avoid fractionation problems.
I. The equipment manufacturer shall be fully certified and registered to comply in the
areas of MEW, local authority having jurisdiction,, Eurovent, ISO9001 and ISO14001.
J. All equipment shall be run tested in accordance with the following procedures prior to
leaving place of manufacture.
1. Pressure tested at 39 Bar & System vacuum test to 2 Torr
2. Refrigerant test to within 0.3% & Run test with Refrigerant Filled in
3. Laser camera check for unit completion and unit shall not be manually handled
afterwards.
4. Electronic leak testing shall be carried out to ensure maximum system refrigerant
containment.
5. Electrical tests shall include flash testing at 1440V AC to ensure that current
leaks above 5mA are detected, megger test at 500V DC to ensure resistance
levels are above 10 mega Ohm and earth continuity tests.
2.03 INDOOR UNIT
A. General- The unit shall be manufactured with Galvanized steel plate partially insulated
with closed cell expanded polyurethane foam.
B. The unit shall be exposed decorative type of, ceiling cassette, ceiling concealed (ducted
split) ceiling suspended, wall mounted, floor mounted exposed and concealed
configuration as shown and specified and detailed below:
C. Units shall be designed for refrigerant R- 410 A for COOLING/HEATING application with
self-contained direct expansion heat pump types evaporating coil gas distributor in fan
coil unit with linear expansion valves. Evaporation coils shall be aluminum fins
mechanically bonded copper tubes Factory leak tested . Fan shall be centrifugal direct
driven types, statically and dynamically balanced and shall on permanently lubricated
bearing. Fan motor shall be low noise with multi-speed (as per recommended by
manufacturer) motor with internal thermostat.
D. All Air handling / FCU/ indoor unit shall be supplied with self-diagnostic functional
thermostats and washable filter or as manufacturer’s recommendations.
E. These units must be connected to a single outdoor unit. Refrigeration system must be
only two pipes network either cooling or heating one time the entire system connected
in their respective group. Each outdoor shall be able to group with minimum 2 to 50
indoor units of different capacities and types with in the total capacity of the connected
out door unit.
F. The flow of refrigerant through the heat exchanger will be controlled by a linear
expansion valve. This valve will be controlled by two pipe thermistors and a return air
thermistor, capable of controlling variable capacity of the indoor unit between 15% and
100%.
G. Each indoor unit to be suitable for fuzzy logic signal 30vdc from the outdoor unit via a 2
core non-polar screened cable.
H. In case of malfunction / power failure on any indoor unit the remaining indoor units and
its corresponding outdoor unit should continue to perform without total system break
down.
2.04 CEILING CASSETTE TYPE
A. Units should have adjustable air outlet such as 1, 2 or 4 ways as per site requirement
with swing louvers and adjustable blades from sides. An airflow control mechanism must
be factory built-in to distribute the air evenly over the vane’s upper and lower surfaces to
prevent the air from hitting the ceilings. Air intake must be from center bottom of the unit
through fixed decorative blade grill and factory supplied washable air-filter.
B. Cassette unit should be equipped with drain water lift up mechanism. Evaporator fan
should be centrifugal turbo fan or sirocco fan multi-speed low noise motor. Refrigerant
pipe and condensate drain connection to be in separate corners for easy installation and
maintenance.
2.05 CEILING CONCEALED (DUCTED)
A. Air handling/ FCU unit shall be of horizontal concealed type.
B. The return air to the unit shall be through the back of the unit as standard however shall
have bottom return option. The heat exchanger coils shall be manufactured from copper
tubes and aluminium fins and have 3 rows of cooling coil. It shall have electronic
expansion valve to control refrigerant flow rate in response to the load variation in the
conditioned space. The expansion valve shall be controlled by an integral computerized
PID control system to maintain correct room temperature. Unit height shall not exceed
245mm for capacities up to 16 kW.
C. The unit casing shall be manufactured from galvanized steel plate and shall be insulated
at all applicable panels. The use of a polystyrene only construction for the outer casing
will not be acceptable. Facility shall be provided for duct connection for introduction of
fresh air to the unit and branch ductwork from the unit.
D. The fan motor shall be DC inverter motor. The unit static pressure shall be automatically
adjustable from the unit wired remote controller (service mode). Unit height Shall not
exceed 250mm.
E. The nominal fan external static pressure shall be from 30 to 140 Pa The sound pressure
level of these indoor units shall in no case exceed 45 dbA at high fan speed mode when
measured 1.5m distance from the unit.
F. A factory installed condensate lift pump shall be provided within the unit and shall be
capable of discharging above the drain outlet. Filed fitted drain pumps will not be
accepted.
G. The basic unit shall consist of cooling coil, one or more centrifugal fans, electric motor
condensate drain pan, and galvanized steel casing and electric junction box.
H. Air will be discharged by the centrifugal fans which shall be of the forward curved non-
overloading type to the front of the unit to allow for field supply ductwork and air outlets
to distribute the air into the room through air out lets.
I. Return air will be brought to the rear of the unit to allow for proper return air to be either
ducted from room or taken from the ceiling void. The fans shall be statically and
dynamically balanced and specially designed for quiet operation. The motor should be
three speed built-in and resiliently mounted with adjustable mounting, direct driven as
J. The condensate drain pan shall be constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel
adequately treated against corrosion, insulated and pitched for positive drainage with
the unit-installed level. The basic unit casing shall be constructed from galvanized steel
plate partially insulated with closed cell expanded urethane foam.
K. The unit shall be provided with washable air filter or as recommended by the
manufacturer, mounted on the box enclosure of the unit in a sealed way to prevent air
by passing.
L. Face velocity through filter/ coil not to exceed 500 F.P.M.
2.06 CEILING CONCEALED (DUCTED) 100 % FRESH AIR UNIT

A. Air handling unit shall be of horizontal concealed type.
B. The air handling basic unit shall consist of cooling coil, one or more centrifugal fans,
electric motor condensate drain pan, and galvanized steel casing and electric junction
box.
C. Air will be discharged by the centrifugal fans which shall be of the forward curved non-
overloading type to the front of the unit to allow for field supply duct work and air outlets
to distribute the air into the room.
D. Fresh air from Outdoor will be brought through sand trap louvers, pre -filter installed in
the inlet of the fresh air duct connected to the air handling unit.
E. The fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced and specially designed for quiet
operation. The motor shall be built-in and resiliently mounted with adjustable mounting,
direct driven or as recommended by the manufacturer.
F. Required amount of treated fresh air shall be discharged through duct to the areas as
shown on the drawing- for capacity and details refer A/C schedule.
G. The condensate drain pan shall be constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel
adequately treated against corrosion, insulated and pitched for positive drainage with
the unit –installed level. The basic unit casing shall be constructed from galvanized
steel plate partially insulated with closed cell expanded urethane foam.
H. The unit shall be provided with high efficiency air filter mounted on the box enclosure of
the unit in a sealed way to prevent air by passing.
I. Face velocity through filter / coil not to exceed 500 F.P.M.
2.07 CEILING SUSPENDED UNITS
A. Shall be of decorative slim dimension for indoor ceiling mounted with front horizontal air
discharge and auto swing louver for proper air distribution. This auto swing vane should
act as a shutter when the unit is turned off. Air intake shall be from the bottom fixed
blade air grill and washable air filter.
B. Evaporator fan should be centrifugal sirocco directly driven by multispeed low noise
motor. Condensate drainpipe connection should be either from left or right side of the
unit to facilitate the site condition.
2.08 WALL MOUNTED UNITS
A. Shall be of decorative slim dimension suitable indoor wall mounting. The unit base shall
be fabricated from galvanized steel sheet and shall be internally insulated to prevent
condensation. The external decorative cabinet shall be of ABS plastic material with
necessary provision for air intake in the center through fixed blade air grill and washable
factory supplied air filter. Air discharge should be through auto flap shutter for uniform
airflow. This flap should act as a shutter when the unit is turned off.
B. The evaporator fan should be centrifugal line flow type directly driven by multi speed low
noise motor. Provision for five ways refrigerant piping and four ways condensate drain
should be feasible in order to connect the unit as per the site condition. All screws

securing the unit should be accessible from the front of unit for easy installation and
maintenance.
2.09 FLOOR MOUNTED EXPOSED AND CONCEALED UNITS
A. Shall be of decorative exposed/concealed as shown in the drawing and schedule. The

unit shall be of slim dimension suitable for indoor floor mounting. The air discharge
should be from front horizontal upper side of unit. Air discharge grill shall be of
adjustable horizontal and vertical guide vanes for uniform cooling. Air intake shall be
from the bottom front side through washable filters factory supplied. Unit should be
suitable for effective air-conditioning in perimeter zones.
B. Floor Mounted Unit shall be with single or two number centrifugal sirocco fan driven by
low noise multi speed motor. Motor and moving parts should be mounted on rubber
mounting to reduce noise and vibrations. Provision for five ways refrigerant piping and
four ways condensate drain should be feasible in order to connect the unit as per the
site condition. All screws securing the unit should be accessible from the front of unit for
easy installation and maintenance.
2.010 HEAT RECOVERY VENTILATOR UNIT (NOT USED)
A. Effective heat recovery and ventilation should be accomplished by the forced expulsion
of stale air with substantial savings by providing efficient heat recovery techniques for
reducing treated fresh air load to the corridor or locations as shown in the drawings and
schedule.
B. The units will be manufactured from galvanized steel plate partially insulated with closed
cell expanded polyurethane foam. Temperature and humidity are to be exchanged
between the supply air and exhaust air.
C. The units will comprise of a semi-permeable cross flow heat exchanger for waste heat
recovery as per drawing and schedule. The unit shall have 2 forward curved centrifugal
fans and motors supplying and extracting through the cross flow heat exchanger at the
same rate, either High or Low fan speed. The units will have electronic bypass damper
control and heat recovery control depending on which mode the unit is set.
D. Inspection door should be factory build to facilitate easy maintenance.
E. High efficiency filter media should be factory built in.
F. Installation must be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Heat

recovery units are to be of ceiling suspended from the same Ac unit manufacturer
compatible with their control systems or individual control by the same manufacturer.
2.011 OUTDOOR AIR PROCESSING UNIT
A. Effective heat recovery and ventilation should be accomplished by the forced expulsion
of stale air with substantial savings by providing efficient heat recovery techniques for
reducing treated fresh air load to the corridor or locations as shown in the drawings and
schedule. The units will be manufactured from galvanized steel plate partially insulated
with closed cell expanded polyurethane foam. Temperature and humidity are to be
exchanged between the supply air and exhaust air.

B. A heat exchanger suitable to connect in the VRF configuration for heating & cooling
function with ozone friendly refrigerant R- 410 A and air purification functions all to be
contained in a single compact unit to keep indoor air fresh. The units will comprise of a
semi-permeable cross flow heat exchanger for waste heat recovery and a DX coil for
heating and cooling as per drawing and schedule. The unit shall have 2 forward curved
centrifugal fans and motors supplying and extracting through the cross flow heat
exchanger at the same rate, either High or Low fan speed. The units will have
electronic bypass damper control and heat recovery control depending on which mode
the unit is set.
C. Inspection door should be factory build to facilitate easy maintenance.
D. High efficiency filter media should be factory built in.
E. Installation must be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. OA

processing units are to be from the same Ac unit manufacturer compatible with their
control systems or individual control by the same manufacturer.
2.012 AIR HANDLING UNITS / FRESH AIR HANDLING UNITS W/ DX COILS
A. Unit shall be rom the same manufacturer or other manufacturer compatible with VRF
outdoor unit.
B. Supply and install as indicated in the schedule of equipment, Air Handling Units (AHUs)
/ Fresh Air Handling Units (FAHUs), each capable of the duty as mentioned in the
schedule of equipment. The space available for the unit to be physically verified at the
site and dimensions of the units shall be selected to fit into the spaces available. Where
necessary the units may be built on site, subject to acceptance of the finished units for
warranty purposes by the original supplier and his local agent.
C. The units shall be double skin construction, draw-thru type comprising of various
sections such as mixing box (wherever the RA, FA is ducted), filter section, heat
recovery components, DX cooling coil, electric heater and fan section as per the details
shown either in the drawings or specified in the schedule of equipment. Fresh air
handling units with heat recovery systems shall be provided with heat recovery wheels /
heat pipes as indicated in the schedule of quantity.
D. Quality Assurance
1. The equipment manufacturer shall strictly adhere to following standards &
specification:
a. ISO 9001:2008 certificate of the manufacturing facility required.
b. The equipment manufacturer shall produce test reports for successfully
carrying out the following tests as per BS EN 1886: 2007 and ISO
3744:2009 standards carried out at TUV-NORD test laboratory in
Germany applicable. The test results should comply with the construction
for Fresh Air Handling Units and the Air Handling Units in contact with
ambient air.
1) Casing strength to CLASS D1
2) Casing air leakage minus 400 Pa to CLASS L1
3) Casing air leakage plus 700 Pa to CLASS L1
4) Thermal transmittance CLASS T2
5) Thermal bridge factor CLASS TB2
6) Filter bypass leakage factor CLASS F9

2. AHU panel insulation shall be injected polyurethane foam be in accordance to
Class O of ISO 1182.2 standards
E. Unit Construction
1. The unit casings shall be of double skinned panels not less than 45-50 MM
thickness. Casing shall be assembled with self supporting modular panel
elements with an integrated base frame made of zincoated steel and sections
along upper sides of the units.
2. The frame work shall be of extruded aluminium thermal break construction using
polyamide profiles for thermal bridging (thermal break using gasket not
acceptable) for all Fresh Air Handling Units and also for all the Air Handling Units
in contact with ambient air.
3. Sheet metal thickness shall be not less than 0.8 MM for the inner skin and 0.8
MM for the outer skin and shall be made from 270 GSM zincated steel sheets.
The outer skin shall be pre-painted galvanised steel sheet having 7 to 9 microns
of primer coat and 20 to 25 microns of polyester coat on the outer surface. For
additional protection, outer surface of the outer skin shall be provided vinyl guard
film for scratch protection. Inside and outside of panel walls shall be completely
smooth.
4. All casing panels shall be insulated with injected CFC free polyurethane foam
insulation and shall be in accordance to Class O of ISO 1182.2 standards. The
insulation density shall be 45 Kg /m³ and having thermal conductivity of 0.022
W/m K.
5. The base frame of the units shall be made from galvanized sheet metal for size
with largest dimensions upto 2500 MM, and hot dip galvanized U-profile for larger
units.
6. Access doors shall be provided with special gasket and locking device. Access
doors 400MM and larger shall be provided with hinges and handles and access
doors with width smaller than 400MM shall be removable type fitted with quick
release flap turn lock with spring pressure arrangement. Sealant between panels
shall be an anti fungicide sealant material.
7. The manufacturer shall guarantee that no condensation shall take place on the
exterior of panels. In the event that any condensation problems appear after
installation, the contractor shall undertake all remedial measures to rectify and to
the satisfaction of the consultants. Any stacked or double height coils shall have
separate drain pans to reduce carry over.
8. Units installed outdoors shall be fitted with weather proof aluminium canopy.
F. Acoustical insulation through the panel:
HZ MID FREQUENCY OCTAVE BAND
500 2000 4000 8000
28 29 31 34
G. Vibration Isolation: The Air Handling Unit shall have internal vibration isolation system
by mounting fan, motor and drive assembly on spring isolators designed for 93%
isolation. The fan discharge shall be connected to the air handling unit casing through

canvas connection to prevent vibration transfer. In addition to the above the entire unit
shall be mounted on additional vibration isolators.
H. Filter Section: Filter cells shall be of standard sizes and shall be obtained from reputed
European manufacturer. The filters shall be sealed against the filter frame using a
1. Pressure drop tapings shall be integrated into the frame to allow a manometer or
filter monitor to be fitted. Filter materials shall be flame-retardant, incombustible,
non-odorous and offer no sustenance to vermin. Each filter section has to be
provided with manometer.
2. The filter material shall be pleated to provide a large effective area. Filter section
should be provided with an inspection door.
3. The contractor shall supply set of all filters per AHU as spares for replacement
after testing and commissioning and prior to handing over of the installation in
accordance with specification section 23 9010.
4. Panel Filter: The Panel filter material shall be synthetic media, pleated to provide
a large effective area and shall be supported by a wire mesh and frame. The filter
cells shall be suitable for side withdrawal on the inspection side. The filter class
shall be EU-4 as per Eurovent 4/5 or G4 as per EN 779.
5. Bag Filter: Bag filters material shall be synthetic media, of standard readily
available sizes. The filters shall be clamped against the frame using a cam
locking bar. The filter class should be EU7 as per Eurovent 4/5 or G7 as per EN
779. Bag filters shall be provided for both Fresh Air Handling Units and Re-
circulated Air Handling Units.
I. Fan & Fan Motor: Fans shall be double inlet, double width, and backward curved
centrifugal type with galvanized steel casings. Fans shall be tested in accordance with
AMCA 300-85. Every individual fan shall be run before delivery to check bearing
condition and vibration. Fan shafts shall be mounted in taper sleeve bearings designed
for continuous operation and a mean useful life of 200,000 hours. Backward curved
impeller should be coated with 60 micron epoxy painting of high quality.
1. Fans shall be designed in accordance to the specified operating class of AMCA
standard 99-2408-69 – performance class limits for centrifugal fans. The impeller
& fan shaft shall be statically and dynamically balanced to a balancing grade of G
2.5.
2. The fan shall be connected to the outlet opening by means of an airtight flexible
connection. Fans shall not exceed a maximum outlet velocity of 12 m/sec.
3. The degree of protection shall be IP55 with mounting method B3 and Class F
insulation for the electric motors.
4. Fan drive shall be rated at 150% of the maximum motor power of the units and
shall be fitted with adjustable belt tension arrangement.
5. Belt guards or screen protection door in Fan section shall be provided in
accordance with CEN Standard.
6. The fan motor shall be suitable for operating 415V, 3Ph, 50Hz electrical power
supply. The fan motor shall be wired to the safety isolation switch or connection
box.
7. The contractor shall select power input and speed of the fan subsequent to
ascertaining system static pressure in accordance with pressure drop
calculations to the approval of the engineer.
8. The fan motor shall meet the safety requirements of the CE and compatible with
variable frequency drives.
9. The motor shall be mounted on a common rigid, galvanized steel base frame.
J. Heat Recovery Wheel (Enthalpy)

1. Fresh air handling units shall be provided with heat recovery wheel (enthalpy)
wherever specified in the schedule of quantity.
2. Wheel matrix should be only from pure aluminium foil to allow for quick and
efficient uptake of thermal energy, sufficient mass for optimum heat transfer,
maximum sensible heat recovery during low rotational speed of 20 to 25 rpm.
3. The Desiccant for Enthalpy wheel should be water molecule selective and non-
migratory.
4. The Desiccant should be molecular sieve and keep the cross contamination to
absolute minimum and also ensure the exclusion of contaminants from the air
streams, while transferring the water vapour molecule.
5. The desiccant should be of sufficient mass, and should be coated with non-
masking porous binder adhesive on the aluminium substrate (matrix) so as to
allow quick and easy uptake and release of water vapour. The weight of
desiccant coating and the mass of aluminium foil shall be in a ratio so as to
ensure equal recovery of both sensible and latent heat over the operating range.
6. The Rotor/Wheel matrix shall have Equal sensible and latent recovery in the
range of 75 to 80%.
7. The Rotor honeycomb matrix foil should be so wound and adhered as to make a
structurally very strong and rigid media un-affected by temperature and humidity
changes.
8. The rotor shall be non clogging aluminium media, having a multitude of narrow
aluminium channels, thus ensuring a laminar flow and will allow particles up to
800 microns to pass through it.
9. The rotor should rotate at a speed lower than 20 to 25 rpm, ensuring long life of
belts and reduce wear and tear of seals. The media shall be cleanable with
compressed air, or low pressure steam or light detergent, without degrading the
latent recovery.
10. The recovery wheel cassette / casing shall be manufactured from tubular
construction to provide a self supporting rigid structure, complete with access
panels, purge sector, rotor, bearings, seals, drive mechanism complete with
belts.
11. The rotor shall have a field adjustable purge mechanism to provide definite
separation of air flow minimizing the carryover of bacteria, dust and other
pollutants, from the exhaust air to supply air. With proper adjustments the cross
contamination shall be limited to less than 0.04% of the exhaust air
concentration.
K. Heat Pipes (Wrap Around Type)

1. FAHUs / AHUs shall be provided with wrap around type heat pipes wherever
specified in the schedule of quantity.
2. Heat pipes shall be included within the FAHU / AHU and wrapped around the
main cooling coil for enhanced dehumidification.
3. The external fins shall be of aluminium with a minimum thickness of 0.15mm.
Fins shall be of the continuous plate type and louvered type. Tubes shall be of
refrigeration standard seamless copper for heat exchanger use. Tube diameter
shall be 12mm with a grooved inner surface and minimum root thickness of the
tube shall be 0.35mm.
4. Casings shall be from galvanized sheet steel with a minimum thickness of
1.6mm. The casing shall incorporate tube plates and top and bottom plates
around both the pre cool and reheat heat pipe blocks.
5. The working fluid shall be refrigerant type classified as ASHRAE safety group Al.
The refrigerant shall be R134A. The heat pipe circuits shall be factory charged
and hermetically sealed with the calculated weight of refrigerant. There shall be a
multitude of loops in the height of the heat pipe and each loop shall be
individually charged. Heat pipes with header assemblies containing a single
circuit are not suitable as a single leak will render the entire heat pipe
inoperative.
6. Heat pipe performance shall be independently type tested and certified in line
with the requirements of British Standards BS 5141 / European Standards EN
305 & 306 / American Standards ARI 410 for testing and rating of heat
exchangers. All software used to state the performance of heat pipes shall be
based upon the results of these independent tests.
7. The heat pipe should have a third party independent test report conducted by a
certified laboratory from U.S.A / Europe.
L. Fresh Air Intakes

1. Sand trap louvers of aluminium construction duly epoxy coated with bird screen
and extruded aluminium, aerofoil construction dampers shall be provided at the
intake section of the unit.
2. Fresh air dampers shall be of opposed blade louver type. Blades shall be made
of extruded aluminium, aerofoil construction and shall be rattle-free. Fresh air
fans and fresh air intakes shall be per the requirements mentioned in the
equipment schedule.
M. Safety Features:All the units must have safety features as under:

1. The fan access door shall be equipped with micro-switch inter locked with fan
motor to enable switching off the fan motor automatically in the event of door
opening.
2. The fan access door shall be provided with a view port and further have wire
mesh screen as an added safety feature bolted on to the unit frame.
3. Fan and motor base shall be properly earthed from the factory.All screws used
for panel fixing and projecting inside the unit shall be covered with PVC caps to
avoid human injury.
N. AHU Controller
1. Air handling unit controller must be from the VRF Outdoor unit manufacturer an
interface to allow connection to third party manufactured/ field supplied Air
handling equipment.
2. The AHU controller shall include but not limited to LEV expansion device’s,
discharge, return air temperature and nessary pipe sensors with temperature
set point by control 0-10 VDC , auto mode error input, etc.
2.013 AIR COOLED VRF DX CONDENSING UNITS (OUTDOOR UNITS)
A. The units shall be air-cooled type incorporating 4 sides heat exchanger coils
manufactured from copper tubes and aluminum fins, factory treated to reduce the effect
of atmospheric corrosion. The unit casing shall be manufactured from (70µ) polyester
powder coated baked enamel finish sheet steel in order to have a high corrosion
resistance and to protect against salt laden environment close to where the units may
be installed. The colour shall be manufacturer’s standard ‘Ivory White’. The air outlet
shall have plastic coated wire guards.
B. The 4 sides Condenser coil Fins shall have Factory applied, Bluefin PE coating or
similar having 1000 hr salt spray withstand test.
C. The outdoor units shall have all inverter driven Scroll compressor(s) electronically
controlled and capable of changing speed to follow the variation in cooling or heating
requirements, and from same manufacturer of main equipment.
D. The compressor shall be scroll type with fixed and orbiting scrolls. The low pressure
refrigerant shall be fed directly into the scroll and the discharge refrigerant shall cool the
motor windings and place the compressor shell under discharge pressure. The
lubrication oil of the compressor shall be fed through the centre of the crankshaft and
then across the complete area of the scrolls from the centre outwards to ensure the
complete contact area is positively lubricated maximizing compressor efficiency and
minimizing wear and tear. HIPOR compressors are not acceptable due to built in oil
pump in compressor/s.
E. The outdoor unit fan motor will be inverter driven ODM (Outer Rotor DC Motor) type and
without shaft and shall operate electronically by sensing operational temperatures,
pressures and ambient temperature and monitoring the dictates of the indoor units. For
Easy commissioning, The Outdoor unit shall be able to communicate and upload /
download data directly from software via VRV / VRF Configurator. The outdoor unit shall
have 3-digit, 7-segment display.
F. The units shall be fitted with all key components such as Inverter compressor(s),
electronic expansion valve(s), oil separator(s), suction accumulator, high pressure
switches, inverter driven fan motors, safety thermostat, over current relay, inverter
overload protection, fuses, necessary solenoid valves, liquid shutoff valves, gas line
shut off valves, short re-cycling guard timer and all necessary sensors for optimized,
safe and trouble free operation. Shall be fitted with an in built Earth Leakage protection.
The access to the internal components for maintenance purposes shall be by removable
panels.
G. Inverter PCBs of outdoor units shall be cooled by a dedicated Refrigerant circuit

mechanism. Other types such as Air cooled PCBs are not acceptable. This feature is for
high ambient condition.
H. It shall be possible to connect up to 64 indoor units, with a connection index ratio

between 50% - 130%, capacity permitting, to one outdoor unit. Additionally, the system
shall allow connection to FAHU/AHU and other indoor unit on same system. The 8, 10 &
12 HP unit shall have a single inverter driven scroll compressor with inverter driven
variable speed propeller type fan(s).The 14 and 16 HP units shall have two off scroll
inverter compressors and will be capable of operating on one compressor under
emergency condition. The units shall be capable of being combined to provide multi
systems using combinations of two or three outdoor units connected to achieve the
capability of higher capacities up to a maximum of 48HP.
I. Free Combination shall be possible to make alternative selections with energy efficient
or space saving as per project requirements
J. The Outdoor Unit Fans shall be capable of overcoming a minimum of 78 Pascal of

external static pressure.
K. All refrigerant connections both internal within the unit and the external connections to
the indoor units shall be brazed. Flared or mechanical connections will not be
acceptable on the outdoor unit.
L. The unit shall have required interface for the advanced online Failure Predictive system
provided by Manufacturer.
M. The system shall be tested by a recognized 3rd party as per AHRI 1230:2010 and shall
meet or exceed relevant Local Standards

N. The casing shall be fully weather proofed for outdoor installation pre-coated galvanised
steel sheets with weather proof paints such as 5Y8/1orsimilar as per JIS ( Japanese
Industrail standard ). It shall be provided with openings for power and refrigerant
connection with removable panels for easy access to all internal components with an
access door for the control panel .
O. The condensing units shall be of the air-cooled type, designed for use with refrigerant R-
410 A for cooling and heating of capacity as shown in the drawings and schedule.
System shall be suitable for a two pipe system with either branch pipe or header pipe
arrangement. The refrigeration process of the outdoor unit to be maintained by
pressure and temperature sensors controlling solenoid valves, check valves and bypass
valves. The heating or cooling mode of the outdoor unit to be controlled by two 4 way
valves which should reverse the cycle of the refrigerant to change the mode of the
outdoor unit. Control shoulld be via a 30 vdc signal generated by the outdoor unit. This
signal to be sent to the indoor units via a 2 core non polar screened cable.
P. The condensing unit shall comprise of propeller fan, fan motor, heat exchanger
(condenser coil) accumulator, sub cooling coil , oil separator, four way valve, for heat
cool model, compressor control box and heat inter change circuit to allow for better
refrigerant distribution and control with Electronic expansion valves.
Q. The refrigeration accessories and safety control should be assembled in a common

casing, wired and tested in the factory. The unit should be supplied from the factory with
an operating charge of refrigerant and dehydrated compressor oil. Extra sub-cooling
should be provided by a Heat Interchange Circuit (HIC), to allow a better refrigerant
distribution and control with electronic expansion valves.
R. The compressors shall be full inverter scroll type only capable of controlling 1 HZ
increments plus, mounted on external spring isolators, provided with crankcase heater
,oil separator and accumulator. Compressor shall be located in a separate section
isolated from the condenser coil and fans.
S. The condenser fans shall be of the Variable speed propeller type, arranged for top air
discharge. The fan shall be weather proofed, statically and dynamically balanced, direct
driven by a totally enclosed and permanently lubricated resiliently mounted electric
motor. Fans shall have safety guards.The fan shall be factory set for zero pascal ESP
with additioanl dip switch to factlity for field adjustment capable of normal operation for
additional requiremt up to 60 Pascal.
T. The condenser coils shall be constructed of heavy gauge seamless copper tubes
mechanically bonded to aluminum plate fins, weather proof treated against corrossion
and saline condition such as herasite, blue guard or factory applied protective coatings.
The coils will be capable of being divided into smaller sectiions to enable the outdoor
unit capacity to match the capacity required by the indoor unit. The coils shall be
circuited for subcooling and shall have guard protection for the condenser fins. Coils to
be leak tested at the factory.
2.014 OUTDOOR UNIT SYSTEM CONTROLS
A. The unit shall be provided with all necessary factory assembled terminal block where in
the power supply should pass through a noise filter to DC reactor with safety device to
protect from rush current to the inverter board for smooth linear compresor operation
along with built in controls such as but not limited to H.P switches, HP&LP sensers

,over current protection thermal switch, magnetic contactors for the compressors and
fan motors.
B. Compressor: Each outdoor unit module shall be equipped with one inverter driven scroll
hermetic compressor. Non-inverter-driven compressors will not be allowed.
C. Inverter: Inverters should be protected by built in factory supplied DC bus current inorder
to control the frequency.
D. Fan Controller: Should include over current protector ,inverter board, and inteligent
power module for linear operation of fan motor to conctrol the fan speed in line with
compressor operation .
E. Main Board: Should include cooling heating auto changeover relay centralized control
transmission board, power supply terminals for main and controls.
F. Refrigerant Cooled Inverter Board: Should have necessary power supply terminals, 105
C rated smoothing capacitor, over current detection resistor Earth leakage protection
and serial transmission point to main board Cooling of inverter board shall provide by
dedicated refrigerant circuit ensuring constant temperature of 40 C. Air-cooled heat sink
will not be approved for middle east climatic zone (T3 )use.
G. Outline of control method:-The out door units should be arranged in the order of
capacity from large to small in case of combination units to meets the total load by
factory buit in dip swithes
H. Startup sequence rotation :- Power supply to be on to allow compressor crank case

heater to be on for 8 to 12 hrs as set by the manufacturer and the system should run
in initial start up mode . Sequence rotation should be prfrormed by the system by its own
built- in function facilitating equal operation time to all our door units
I. Control at Start-up: The upper limit of frequency during the first 3 minutes of the
operation is 50Hz. When the power is turned on, normal operation will start after the
initial start-up mode has been completed (with a restriction on the frequency).
J. By Pass Capacity Control: Solenoid valve factory built-in to by pass high and low
pressure side to facilitate when compressor is started, compressor stops in cool or
heating mode, after operation stops, during oil recovery operations, during low “Hz”
operation, when the high pressure increased or discharge temperature rises.
K. Compressor Frequency control: To maintain the target value of evaporation

temperature in cooling and heating mode, rate of performance 2 ‘Hz’ second across 15
~ 74 range or as recommended by the manufacturer.
L. Variable Refrigerant Temperature (VRT) : System shall be equipped with Target

temperature of evaporation setting n Three modes – Default, Hi Sensible & Powerful
cooling. This should be done by allowing Evaporation temperatute to change
automatically. Based on ambient and load.
M. Oil Return Control:

1. To facilitate the opening and closing electronic expansion valve to prevent rising
discharge temperature, when compressor stop and depending upon the
frequency and outdoor temperature. Field installed oil equalization lines between
modules are not allowed. Prior to bidding, manufactures requiring equalization

must submit oil line sizing calculations specific to each system and module
placement for this project.
2. Sub cool Coil control: Must be fully open at defrosting and according to
superheat detected from the bypass out let temperature of sub cool coil and
discharge temperature.
3. Defrost Control: Operation should start if –5 Deg C or less is detected in piping
temperature for a continuous period of 3 minutes during an hour operation.
4. Control for Liquid level: In the accumulator to heat the refrigerant judging the
refrigerant amount depending on our door air temperature and frequency.
5. Refrigerant Recovery Control: To prevent refrigerant accumulating in the stopped
indoor unit by opening the (LEV) Liner Expansion Valve of the respective unit
and the compressor running till control is satisfied.
6. Condensing Unit (Heat Exchanger) and Fan Capacity Control: As per the indoor
unit load demand either in cooling or heating mode the above factory built control
should control the outdoor unit fan air flow rate with phase control in order to
maintain evaporator temperature on both modes.
2.015 MICROCOMPUTER FOR OUTDOOR UNIT
A. From the same A/C manufacturer factory built- in, in the outdoor unit control panel
weather protected, with self –diagnostic function for easy reading and maintenance. A
four – digit LCD display should give all service information, fault history and must
constantly monitor all operation of respective out door and connected indoor units,
room’s thermostats either in cooling or heating mode.
2.016 ROOM THERMOSTATS, CENTRAL CONTROLS & BMS INTERFACE
A. General:
1. Room thermostat Should be located 1.4 Meter from the finished floor level
location as shown in the drawings and as per site condition, with LCD display,
easy to read, operate with icon display.
2. The VRF Controls Network should be capable of supporting remote controllers,
schedule timers, system controllers, centralized controllers, an integrated web
based interface, graphical user workstation, and system integration to Building
Management Systems.
B. Electrical Characteristics
1. The controls network should operate at 24VDC. Controller power and
communications should be via a common non-polar communications bus.
2. Wiring: Control wiring should be installed in a system daisy chain configuration
from indoor unit to indoor unit, and to the outdoor unit. Control wiring to remote
controllers shall be run from the indoor unit terminal block to the controller
associated with that unit. Wiring should be 2-conductor plus spare wire (in-
accordance with specification section 23 9010) (16 AWG), twisted shielded pair,
and stranded wire, as defined by the VRF system manufacturer Design Tool soft
ware in AutoCAD output.
3. Network wiring should be CAT-5e or more with RJ-45 connection.
C. Remote Controller:
1. The Remote Controller should be capable of controlling up to 16 indoor units
(defined as 1 group).

2. The remote controller should control the following grouped operations: On/Off,
Operation Mode (cool, heat, dry, and fan), temperature set point, fan speed
setting, and airflow direction setting.
3. The Remote Controller should support timer settings of on/off/temperature up to
8 times in a day in 5-minutes increments with Auto Off timer function.
4. The room temperature should be sensed at either the Remote Controller or the
Indoor Unit dependent on the indoor unit dipswitch setting.
5. The Remote Controller should support the Operation lock functions for the
On/Off, operation mode, Set. Temp and vane position.
6. The Remote Controller should support levels of control for both the Administrator
and Maintenance users .The Remote Controller should display a four-digit error
code in the event of system abnormality/error.
7. The Remote controller should be LCD Backlit with simple buttons arrangement.
D. Centralized Controller:
1. Each floor shall have one central controller; location shall be finalized along with
other building services
2. The Centralized Controller should be capable of controlling a maximum of 150
indoor units across the outdoor units. The Centralized Controller should support
operation superseding that of the remote controllers, system configuration,
daily/weekly scheduling, monitoring of operation status, and malfunction
monitoring.
3. The Centralized Controller should have five basic operation controls which can
be applied to an individual indoor unit, a group of indoor units (up to 150 indoor
units), or all indoor units (collective batch operation). This basic control set of
operation controls for the Centralized Controller should include on/off, operation
mode selection (cool, heat, dry, and fan), temperature setting, fan speed setting,
and airflow direction setting.
4. The Centralized Controller should allow the user to define both daily and weekly
schedules with operations consisting of ON/OFF, mode selection, temperature
setting, and vane direction, fan speed, and permit/prohibit of remote controllers.
5. The Centralized Controllers should be equipped with one RJ-45 Ethernet port to
support interconnection with a network PC via a closed/direct Local Area
Network (LAN).
6. The Centralized Controller should be capable of performing initial settings via the
9” high-resolution, backlit, color touch panel on the controller or via a PC.
7. Optional software functions should be available so that the building manager can
securely log into each Centralized Controller to support operation monitoring,
scheduling, error email, personal browser for PCs, and online maintenance
diagnostics. BACnet® / LONWORKS® interface should be available through an
adapter.
E. Building Management system

1. LonWorks® Interface: Required number of interface shall be provided based on
the VRF system manufacturer which should support all indoor units with a
variety of network variables on a per indoor unit basis. Input variables include,
but are not limited to, on/off, operation mode, fan speed, prohibit remote
controller, and filter sign reset. Output variables shall include, but are not limited
to, model size, alarm state, error code, and error address
2. BACnet® Interface: Required number of interface shall be provided based on the
VRF system manufacturer which should support all indoor units with a variety,
shall be compliant with BACnet®/IP (ANSI/ASHRAE 135-1995, 135a) and
UDP/IP of Ethernet (ANSI/ASHRAE 135-1995, 135b).Operation and monitoring
points shall include, but are not limited to, on/off, operation mode, fan speed,
prohibit remote controller, filter sign reset, alarm state, error code, and error
address.
F. Control Wires:
1. A two (2+1 spare) non-polarized transmission line should allow for simple and
foolproof connection of each indoor and remote controller. The cable should be
either factory supplied or as recommended by the local supplier/ dealer. Empty
conduit for the same with pull wire shall be fixed/made available by the main
contractor. The sub Contractor shall be responsible for the interconnecting
control wiring between the indoor and outdoor units and control wiring between
remote controllers, centralised control and relevant components. This work shall
be co-ordinated with the Electrical Sub Contractor for the rooting and trunking of
the cables.
2. All control wiring are to be carried out in 2 core 1.5mm PVC shielded cabling
with colour coding and tagged with ID number at 3 metre intervals as per
schematics for ease of identification and maintenance.
3. Control wiring shall not be run next to power wiring. A minimum space of 100mm
between both control and power cables shall apply.
2.017 REFRIGERANT PIPE WORKS
A. Refrigerant pipe network should be restricted to the following table:

Details Maximum in Mtrs
Total length 1000
Greatest/Equivalent length 165
Greatest Length after the first branch 40
Distance between Indoor & Outdoor (Outdoor Higher) 50 or 90 as per design
Distance between Indoor & Outdoor (Outdoor Lower) 40 as per design
Height difference between Indoor/Indoor 15
B. Suction and discharge refrigerant piping shall be of dehydrated copper tube. They shall
be separately insulated with closed cell rubber foam with a minimum thickness of 19
mm. Both the pipes wrapped with canvas cloths 6 oz applied with white tough washable
abrasion-resistant coating.
C. Piping penetrating walls shall pass through a PVC sleeve with adequate diameter and
sealed according to general specifications. Longest possible lengths of copper pipe
should be utilised to minimise joints on site. Joints in copper pipe shall be brazed.
Brazing shall be carried out to the requirements of the HVCA Code of Practise – Brazing
and Bronze Welding of Copper Pipe and Sheet.
D. Piping penetrating roof slab shall pass through PVC sleeve and to be sealed for
waterproof and the contractor should submit detail-working drawing for the way
proposed for consultant’s approval.
E. Copper pipe straight length “L “type manufactured in line with ASTM B280 hard drawn
cleaned and caped to be used on all possible areas. Soft coils in accordance with ASTM
B 280 and ANSI B 91 can be used to avoid sharp bend within 1 meter to connect the
indoor unit from the main raiser. Contractor/Installer should close both end of copper
pipe at the end of every working day till installation period to ensure no foreign particles
could penetrate inside the system. Installer should allow 5 to 10 psig (OFN) Oxygen
Free Nitrogen as an inert gas through the pipes during all joints/ brazing work is in
process till completion to avoid any carbon deposits and moisture presence in the pipe

work and close both the open ends if any on every end on days work till the final
connection is completed.
F. Prior to the final connection the system should be thoroughly flushed with nitrogen and
pressure tested and this test should be seen and approved by the Consultant/Engineer.
G. Pipework to be properly fixed and supported at a minimum of 1.5 metres centres . All
indoor pipe work should run in cable tray or with proper supports without lagging as
recommended by the local supplier / manufacturer .Roof exposed pipe work should run
in cable tray with aluminum cladding.
H. Pressure test: After installation of pipework, and prior to sealing of insulation joints and
starting of equipment, pipework should be pressure tested. 3(43.5 psig) bar test for 3
minutes minimum, then 15 bar (218 Psig )for 3 minimum, then 33 bar( 478 psgi ) for 3
minutes minimum, then strength test to 41.5 bar(601 psig ) check the system for leaks
and deformation, then lower the pressure back to 33 bar( 478 psig ) and pressure test
24 hours and checked for leaks.
I. Vaccum test :Use a vaccum pupp with reverse flow check valve to Vacuum /dehydrated
to achive the level to5 Torr (650 Pa) and hold at that setting for 12 hours (minimum)
J. Refrigerat charge :
1. The charging should be carried out with an appropriate charging station.
2. Refrigerant charge weight must be calculated, to the actual installed length of
pipework in accordance to VRF manufacturer recommendations by their soft
ware .
3. Break the vaccum in the pipe work with ozne friendly refrigerant recommended
by the manufacturer, same as of the matching refrigerant in the out door unit for
the amount as calculated by the manufacture soft ware for additioanl refrigerant
charge and then open the service valve of the corrresponding out door unit to
equvalise the pressure in the systyem .
2.018 CONDENSATE DRAIN:
A. U PVC drain pipe should be used for the same with insulation to avoid condensation
from pipes connected to nearest floor trap or as directed by the consultant. A cleanout
with U trap should be provided for easy maintenance.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install units level and plumb.
B. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices

securely fastened to building structure.
C. Install ground-mounting, compressor-condenser components on 4-inch- (100-mm-)

thick, reinforced concrete base; 4 inches (100 mm) larger on each side than unit.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-
Place Concrete." Coordinate anchor installation with concrete base.

D. Install ground-mounting, compressor-condenser components on polyethylene mounting
base.
E. Install roof-mounting compressor-condenser components on equipment supports

specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories." Anchor units to supports with
removable, cadmium-plated fasteners.
F. Install compressor-condenser components on restrained, spring isolators with a

minimum static deflection of 1 inch (25 mm). Refer to Division 23 Section "Vibration and
Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
G. Install and connect pre-charged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings.

Install tubing to allow access to unit.
3.02 CONNECTIONS

B. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.
C. Duct Connections: Duct installation requirements are specified in Division 23 Section

"Metal Ducts." Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. Connect supply
and return ducts to split-system air-conditioning units with flexible duct connectors.
Flexible duct connectors are specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."
D. Install refrigerant piping in accordance with Division 23 “Refrigerant Piping”
E. Install refrigerant coils in accordance with Division 23 “Refrigerant Air-Coils”

G. Electrical Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Sections for power

wiring, switches, and motor controls.


B. Complete installation and startup check according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.05 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 8216
AIR COILS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes the following types of air coils that are not an integral part of air-
handling units:
1. Chilled-water. (If applicable)
2. Refrigerant.
3. Electric. (If applicable)

1. Division 23 Sections for air coils that are integral to air-handling units.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each air
coil. Include rated capacity and pressure drop for each air coil.
C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which coil location
and ceiling-mounted access panels are shown and coordinated with each other.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air coils to include in operation and maintenance
manuals.

A. Altitude above Mean Sea Level: 180.4feet (55m).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
KEO/19-3262-0000 23 8216/1 Air Coils

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

2.02 GENERAL
A. Provide extended surface type coils with tubes of copper and fins of aluminum.
B. Space fins 12 per inch maximum and minimum tube Ida. 5/8”. Helical fins may be
crimped. The whole fin shall be without any holes for easy cleaning
C. Flux shall be with high content silver.
D. Fin collar shall cover entire tube, so there is no air contact with tube.
E. Tubes shall be placed in staggered configuration for better heat transfer.
F. Bends in tubes shall be smooth without wrinkles to reduce erosion and pressure drop.
G. Performance rating shall be established at a maximum coil face air velocity of 2.54 mps
(500 fpm) or as per manufacturer standards.
H. Drip / drain pan shall be of sturdy construction and with inherit protection against
corrosion.
I. Protect coils so fins are not damaged. Replace loose and damaged fins. Comb out bent
fins.
2.03 WATER COILS (If Applicable)
A. Performance Ratings: Tested and rated according to ARI 410 and ASHRAE 33 or
equivalent Eurovent standards.
B. Minimum Working-Pressure/Temperature Ratings: 200 psig (1380 kPa), 325 deg F

(163 deg C). Coil shall be tested to 150% of the working pressure or minimum 200 psig.
The pressure test should perform with dry air under water.
F. Headers: Steel with brazed joints, prime coated.
G. Frames: Galvanized-steel channel frame, minimum 0.0625 inch (1.6 mm) thick for slip-
in flanged mounting.
I. Hot-Water Coil Capacities and Characteristics: ( See equipment schedule on plan)
KEO/19-3262-0000 23 8216/2 Air Coils

J. Chilled-Water Coil Capacities and Characteristics: ( See equipment schedule on plan)
2.04 REFRIGERANT COILS
A. Performance Ratings: Tested and rated according to ARI 410 and ASHRAE 33.
B. Minimum Working-Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa).
F. Suction and Distributor Piping: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B) copper tube
with brazed joints.
G. Frames: Galvanized-steel channel frame, minimum 0.0625 inch (1.6 mm) thick for
flanged mounting.
I. Capacities and Characteristics: (See equipment schedule on plan)
2.05 ELECTRIC COILS (if applicable)
A. Coil Assembly: Comply with UL 1995.
B. Heating Elements: Coiled resistance wire of 80 percent nickel and 20 percent

chromium; surrounded by compacted magnesium-oxide powder in tubular-steel sheath;
with spiral-wound, copper-plated, steel fins continuously brazed to sheath.
C. Heating Elements: Open-coil resistance wire of 80 percent nickel and 20 percent

chromium, supported and insulated by floating ceramic bushings recessed into casing
openings, and fastened to supporting brackets.
D. High-Temperature Coil Protection: Disk-type, automatically reset, thermal-cutout, safety

device; serviceable through terminal box without removing heater from duct or casing.
1. Secondary Protection: Load-carrying, manually reset or manually replaceable,
thermal cutouts; factory wired in series with each heater stage.
E. Frames: Galvanized-steel channel frame, minimum 0.0625 inch (1.6 mm) thick for
flanged mounting.
F. Control Panel: Unit or Remote mounted with disconnecting means and overcurrent
protection. Include the following controls:
1. Magnetic contactor.
2. Mercury contactor.
3. Toggle switches; one per step.
4. Step controller.
5. Time-delay relay.
6. Pilot lights; one per step.
7. Airflow proving switch.
KEO/19-3262-0000 23 8216/3 Air Coils
G. Refer to Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" for thermostat.
H. Thermostats: Wall-mounted thermostats, with temperature range from 50 to 90 deg F

(10 to plus 32 deg C), and 2.5 deg F (1.4 deg C) throttling range.
I. Capacities and Characteristics :( See equipment schedule on plan)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine ducts, plenums, and casings to receive air coils for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting coil performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections
before coil installation.
3.02 INSTALLATION (If Applicable)
A. Install coils level and plumb.
B. Install coils in metal ducts and casings constructed according to SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible."
C. Install stainless-steel drain pan under each cooling coil.

1. Construct drain pans according to ASHRAE 62.
2. Construct drain pans to extend beyond coil length and width and to connect to
condensate trap and drainage.
3. Extend drain pan upstream and downstream from coil face.
4. Extend drain pan under coil headers and exposed supply piping.
D. Install moisture eliminators for cooling coils. Extend drain pan under moisture
eliminator.
E. Straighten bent fins on air coils.
F. Clean coils using materials and methods recommended in writing by manufacturers, and
clean inside of casings and enclosures to remove dust and debris.
3.03 CONNECTIONS (If Applicable)

B. Install piping adjacent to coils to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect water piping with unions and shutoff valves to allow coils to be disconnected
without draining piping. Control valves are specified in Division 23 Section
"Instrumentation and Control for HVAC," and other piping specialties are specified in
Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping."
KEO/19-3262-0000 23 8216/4 Air Coils

D. Connect steam piping with gate valve and union and steam condensate piping with
union, strainer, trap, and gate valve to allow coils to be disconnected without draining
piping. Control valves are specified in Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control
for HVAC," and other piping specialties are specified in Division 23 Section "Steam and
Condensate Heating Piping."
E. Connect refrigerant piping according to Division 23 Section "Refrigerant Piping."

G. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power

1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, operate electric
coils to confirm proper unit operation.
END OF SECTION
KEO/19-3262-0000 23 8216/5 Air Coils

SECTION 25 0000
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes supply, installation and testing of Building Automation System
(BAS)
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS OF SPECIFICATION
A. Related sections include but is not limited to:

1. Division 14 Section 14 2100 “Electric Traction Elevators”
2. Division 26 Section 26 0526 “Earthing and Bonding for Electrical Systems”
3. Division 26 Section 26 0529 “Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems”
4. Division 26 Section 26 0533 “Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems”
5. Division 26 Section 26 0536 “Cable Trays for Electrical Systems”
6. Division 26 Section 26 0553 “Identification for Electrical Systems”
7. Division 26 Section 26 2413 “Switchboards”
8. Division 26 Section 26 2416 “Distribution Boards”
9. Division 26 Section 26 2419 “Motor Control Centers”
10. Division 26 Section 26 2923 “Variable Frequency Motor Controls”
11. Division 26 Section 26 3113 “Engine Generators”
12. Division 26 Section 26 3353 “Static Uninterruptable Power Supply”
13. Division 26 Section 26 3533 “Power Factor Correction Equipment”
14. Division 26 Section 26 3600 “Transfer Switches”
15. Division 28 Section 28 4600 “Fire Detection & Alarm System”
B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere

1. Control sequences are specified in "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls"
section 23 0993 of HVAC specifications.
2. Refer to BAS schedule of points to understand detailed scope of work (25 0000-
1,2&3).
3. Refer to other relevant sections of the HVAC specifications (Division 23) and
manufacturers manuals as applicable for installation of all equipment,
instrumentation and related works e.g. instrument wells, valve bodies and
dampers etc. in HVAC systems.
4. Refer to other relevant sections of plumbing, fire fighting specifications, electrical
and fire alarm specifications to understand scope of work.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Advanced Application Controller (AAC): A device with limited resources relative to the
Building Controller (BC). It may support a level of programming and may also be
intended for application specific applications.
KEO/19-3262-0000 25 0000/1 Building Automation System (BAS)

B. Application Specific Controller (ASC): A device with limited resources relative to the
Advanced Application Controller (AAC). It may support a level of programming and may
also be intended for application-specific applications.
C. Building Automation System (BAS): The entire integrated management and control
system.
D. Building Controller (BC): A fully programmable device capable of carrying out a number
of tasks including control and monitoring via direct digital control (DDC) of specific
systems, acting as a communications router between the LAN backbone and sub-LANs,
and data storage for trend information, time schedules, and alarm data.
E. Controller or Control Unit (CU): Intelligent stand-alone control panel. Controller is a

generic reference and shall include BCs, AACs, and ASCs as appropriate.
F. Control Systems Server (CSS): This shall be a computer (or computers) that maintain
the systems configuration, historical trend data and programming database.
G. Gateway: A device, which contains two or more dissimilar networks/protocols, permitting

information exchange between them (ASHRAE/ANSI 135).
H. Local Area Network (LAN): General term for a network segment within the architecture.
Various types and functions of LANs are defined herein.
I. Master-Slave/Token Passing (MS/TP): Data link protocol as defined by the BACnet

standard. (ASHRAE/ANSI 135).
J. Operator Interface (OI): A device used by the operator to manage the BAS including
operator workstations, portable operator terminals and hand held devices.
1.04 SCOPE
A. As part of the BAS, provide a complete, interoperable, open integrated management

system (BAS) for the management of building environmental delivery systems (HVAC /
climate control, plumbing, electrical systems, chillers, boilers, lifts, lighting systems, etc.)
throughout the project.
1. Provide all required services, materials and equipment necessary for the
successful operation of the entire BAS system, including engineering, installation
supervision and labor, calibration, software, programming etc. necessary for a
complete and fully operational system.
2. Provide all equipment, software, programming etc. necessary to integrate the
BAS with the external systems.
3. Provide necessary interfaces:
Fully integrated system is to be provided.
a. Operator workstation interface.
b. Third-party devices interfaces to ensure full functionality
c. All hardware and software should be provided to achieve fully integrated
system
B. Objectives and system capabilities

All the elements used to create the system shall be designed to work as a
homogeneous entity, with primary and secondary plant controllers and all other system
elements fully compatible with each other to ensure:

1. Monitoring and control of DDC controllers, remote devices, programmable logic
controllers including sensors, actuators, etc.
2. Energy Conservation through flexible time programs, duty-cycling and the use of
parameters such as current outside temperature, history of the building and
current inside conditions.
3. Operator Interface to allow general supervision
4. Video display integration
5. Data collection and archiving
6. Alarm management
7. Trending
8. Report generation
9. Network integration
10. Data exchange and integration with other facilities systems using industry
standard techniques.
11. Centralized supervision facility of all required equipment in each building
C. The system shall permit unlimited expansion of both capacity and functionality through
the addition of sensors, actuators, DDC’s, PLC’s, ASC’s, and operator devices.
1.05 SYSTEM STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION
A. The system structure shall be based on three-layer approach: Management,

Automation, and Field layer.
B. Provide the following system components:

1. Servers, communication controllers etc,
2. All software
3. Man-Machine interface through:
a. Operator Workstations
b. Handheld (Portable Operator Terminal)
4. Web based direct digital controllers.
5. I/O modules, application specific controllers etc.
6. All field sensors for all systems, including HVAC, plumbing, fire fighting, fire
alarm, electrical system etc.
7. Wiring over and above Structured Cabling System
8. Any other devices including software interface module etc. required to complete
the system
1.06 SURGE / TRANSIENT PROTECTION
A. Arrangements shall be made for all system equipment to be able to withstand transient
disturbances from the input power supply. Surge Suppressors or other approved means
shall be fitted to all devices input and output points for protection against voltage
transients, spikes etc., where applicable.
B. Controllers shall be isolated against transient disturbances via optical couplers or other
approved means.
1.07 CABLE SPECIFICATION
A. Fibre Optic is to be used as means of communications between buildings.
B. Structured Cabling System shall be used within the buildings as much as practicable
C. In addition, proprietary specification cables most suited to each application as
recommended by manufacturer shall be used.
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electric, and

direct digital control equipment, of types and sizes required, and whose products have
been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 20 years.
B. Installer's Qualifications: Firms specializing and experienced in control system

installations for not less than 10 years. Firms with experience in DDC installation
projects with point counts equal to this project. If installer is a Value Added Reseller
(VAR) of a manufacturer’s product, installer must demonstrate at least 5 years prior
experience with the manufacturer’s products.
C. BAS System Qualifications: System shall be based on Manufacturer's standard

integrated hardware and software product offering, which has been installed and fully
operational in similar service for not less than 5 years.
D. Installer’s Field Coordinator and Sequence Programmer Qualifications: Individual(s)

shall specialize in and be experienced with control system installation for not less than 5
years. Proposed field coordinator shall have experience with the installation of the
proposed product line for not less than 2 projects of similar size and complexity.
Installer shall submit the names of the proposed individual and at least one alternate for
each duty. Submittals shall document this experience with references. The proposed
individuals must show proof of the following training:
1. Product Line Training: Individuals overseeing the installation and configuration of
the proposed product line must provide evidence of the most advanced training
offered by the Manufacturer on that product line for installation and configuration.
2. Programming Training: Individuals involved with programming the site-specific
sequences shall provide evidence of the most advanced programming training
offered by the vendor of the programming application offered by the
Manufacturer.
E. Installer’s Service Qualifications: The installer must be experienced in control system

operation, maintenance and service. Installer must document a minimum 5 year history
of servicing installations of similar size and complexity. Installer must also document at
least a 2 year history of servicing the proposed product line.
F. All new building automation system products on this project shall be provided by a firm
that is a registered ISO 9001:2000 manufacturer at time of bid.
1. The manufacturer of the Building Automation System digital controllers shall
provide documentation supporting compliance with ISO 9001:2000 (Model for
Quality Assurance in Design/Development, Production, Installation and
Servicing).
2. Provide a copy of the registration certificate that contains the ISO 9001:2000
Certification bearing the name of the registered auditor
G. All controllers provided as part of this system and used for indoor applications shall
operate under ambient environmental conditions of 0°C to 50°C dry bulb and 5% to 90%
relative humidity, non-condensing as a minimum.

H. All controllers provided as part of this system and used for outdoor applications shall
operate under ambient environmental conditions of -10 °C to 70° C dry bulb and 5% to
90% relative humidity, non-condensing as a minimum.
I. Acceptable Products:
1. BACnet Testing Laboratory (BTL listed) using Device Profile BACnet Building
Controller (B-BC) or BACnet Advanced Application Controller (B-AAC)
2. LonMark certified with the appropriate Functional Profile to their application so
long as an appropriate LonMark Functional Profile
1.09 RELATED STANDARDS
A. All reference to standards, regulations and requirements of statutory bodies shall mean
the latest published editions at the time of contact.
B. Applicable standards referred to in this Section not limited to:

1. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers
(ASHRAE)
a. ASHRAE 135-2001: BACnet - Building Automation and Control
Networking Protocol
2. Underwriters Laboratories
a. UL 916: Energy management Systems
b. UL 864 UUKL Supervised Smoke Control
3. NEMA Compliance:
a. NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
b. NEMA ICS 1: General Standards for Industrial Controls.
4. NFPA Compliance:
a. NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems" where applicable to controls and control sequences.
b. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC)
5. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
a. IEEE 142 Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and
Commercial Power Systems
6. Electronics Industries Associations
a. EIA-709.1-B-2002: Control Network Protocol Specification
b. EIA-232 Interface Between Data Terminal Equipment and Data Circuit-
c. Terminating Equipment Employing Serial Binary Data Interchange. EIA-
485 Standard for Electrical Characteristics of Generator and Receivers for
use in Balanced Digital Multipoint Systems.
d. TIA/EIA-862 Building Automation Systems Cabling Standard For
Commercial Buildings
7. International / European Standards
a. EN ISO 16484-5
b. EN 15232
8. VDI
a. VDI 3813
1.10 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of the contract.
B. Electronic Submittals: Control submittals and O&M information shall be provided as four
hard copies and electronically in Adobe PDF format. Control drawings shall be
electronically provided in Adobe PDF in a size no less than 11”x17”. Documents will be
converted from their native electronic format directly to Adobe PDF format. Any text
documents scanned as images must be converted to a searchable text format using
OCR (Optical Character Recognition) and reduced in size prior to submission.
C. Qualifications: Manufacturer, Installer, and Key personnel qualifications as described in

Quality Assurance paragraph above.
D. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each control device,
panel, and accessory furnished, indicating dimensions, capacities, performance and
electrical characteristics, and material finishes. Also include installation and start-up
instructions.
E. Samples: Material submittals, relevant samples shall also be submitted for approval.
F. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each control system. Submit a completed
drawing for each air handling unit, system, pump, device, etc. with all point descriptors,
addresses and point names indicated. Shop drawings shall be submitted both on paper
and electronic media. Each shop drawing shall contain the following information:
1. System architecture one-line diagram indicating schematic location of all control
units, workstations, gateways, etc. Indicate address and type for each control
unit. Indicate protocol and type of each LAN. The entire schematic shall be
updated, maintained and submitted.
2. Schematic flow diagram of each air and water system showing fans, coils,
dampers, valves, pumps, heat exchange equipment and control devices. Include
verbal description of sequence of operation. Where applicable indicate
equipment and devices operating via factory controller and details of BAS
interface to factory controller.
3. All physical points shall be indicated with names, descriptors, and point
addresses identified.
4. With each schematic, provide a detailed points list on the drawings with all
physical and virtual points included and functionally grouped. Include names,
descriptors, addresses and point types with applicable range as a minimum.
5. Label each control device with setting or adjustable range of control.
6. Label each input and output with the appropriate range.
7. Provide a Bill of Materials with each schematic. Indicate device identification to
match schematic and actual field labeling, quantity, actual product ordering
number, manufacturer, description, size, voltage range, pressure range,
temperature range, etc. as applicable.
8. Provide a Control Valve Schedule listing valve and actuator information including:
size, Cv, design flow, design pressure drop, manufacturer, model number, close
off rating, control signal, etc. Indicate normal positions of valves with fail
positions.
9. Provide a Control Damper Schedule listing damper and actuator information
including: size, material, blade arrangement, manufacturer, model number,
control signal, close off rating, etc. Indicate normal positions of automatic return
dampers.
10. Provide an Air Flow Monitoring Station Schedule listing the following information:
size, manufacturer, model number, control signal, CFM range, etc.
11. Indicate all required electrical wiring. Electrical wiring diagrams shall include
both ladder logic type diagram for motor starter, control, and safety circuits and
detailed digital interface panel point termination diagrams with all wire numbers
and terminal block numbers identified. Provide panel termination drawings on
separate drawings. Ladder diagrams shall appear on system schematic. Clearly
differentiate between portions of wiring that are existing, factory-installed and
portions to be field-installed.
12. Provide details of control panels, including controls, instruments, and labeling
shown in plan or elevation indicating the installed locations and allocated service
clearances.
13. Points list including all physical I/O and virtual points. Points list shall be
provided in electronic format (EXCEL spreadsheet format is an acceptable
format).
14. Sheets shall be consecutively numbered.
15. Each sheet shall have a title indicating the type of information included and the
HVAC system or other MEP system controlled.
16. Table of Contents listing sheet titles and sheet numbers.
17. Legend and list of abbreviations.
G. Laminated Control Drawings: Provide laminated control drawings within each control
panel for the devices controlled from that panel. System control schematics shall be
mounted adjacent to key pieces of equipment for that system. Panel termination
drawings shall be mounted in proper document holder fixed on inside of the panel door
respective panels inside
H. Control Logic Documentation

1. Submit control logic graphical flow diagrams (for block type programs) or
program listings and logic flow charts (for line type programs) to document the
control software of all control units.
2. Control logic shall be annotated to describe how it accomplishes the sequence of
operation. Annotations shall be sufficient to allow an operator to relate each
program component (block or line) to corresponding portions of the specified
Sequence of Operation. Logic flow charts for line type programs shall graphically
show the logic flow of each application program.
3. Include written description of each control sequence.
4. Include control response, settings, set points, throttling ranges, gains, reset
schedules, adjustable parameters and limits.
5. Sheets shall be consecutively numbered.
6. Each sheet shall have a title indicating the controller designations and the HVAC
system controlled or other MEP system controlled.
7. Include Table of Contents listing sheet titles and sheet numbers
8. For block type programs, any two interconnected blocks that are shown on one
sheet shall be shown with an interconnecting line, with limited use of references.
Any two interconnected blocks that are shown on separate sheets shall include
references to the connected block and the sheet number where the connected
block is located. For line type programs, any program that calls a subroutine
located on a separate sheet shall reference the line number where the subroutine
is located.
I. Submit one complete set of programming and operating manuals for all digital
controllers concurrently with control logic documentation.
J. BAS Start-Up Test Report:

1. Submit Agenda, which shall consist of all required test sheets and checklists as
required for the Pre-commissioning Test Report as specified in Section26 0800 -
Commissioning of Electrical Systems
2. Submit Final Test Report documenting that the BAS has been fully tested,
adjusted and calibrated and is ready for demonstration and commissioning.
Report shall include, but shall not be limited to, completed test sheets and
checklists. Required details of the report shall be as specified in Section26 0800
- Commissioning of Electrical Systems.
K. Operation and Maintenance Materials:

1. Submit documents electronically and hard copies.
2. Submit maintenance instructions and spare parts lists for each type of control
device, control unit, and accessory.
3. Include all submittals (product data, shop drawings, control logic documentation,
hardware manuals, software manuals, installation guides or manuals,
maintenance instructions and spare parts lists) in maintenance manual; in
accordance with requirements of the contract.
L. Manufacturers Certificates: For all listed and/or labeled products, provide certificate of
conformance.
M. Product Warrantee Certificates: submit manufacturers product warrantee certificates

covering the hardware provided.
1.11 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit documents under provisions of the contract.
B. Electronic copies of product data and control shop drawings updated to reflect the final
installed condition.
C. Record copies of approved control logic programming and database will be provided to
the Architect/ Engineer. Accurately record actual setpoints and settings of controls, all
BACnet objects and their properties, and actual sequence of operation, including
changes to programs made after submission and approval of shop drawings and
including changes to programs made during specified testing.
D. Record copies of approved project specific graphic software stored with backup.
E. Maintain project record documents throughout the warrantee period and submit final
documents at the end of the warrantee period
1.12 DELEGATED DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY
A. Notwithstanding the drawings and other information provided to the Contractor, the
Contractor shall be fully responsible for the final design, detailing of the works described
herein, including (without limitation) the comprehensive engineering analysis by a
qualified professional engineer, and shall provide a complete, and secure installation,
which shall meet the specified performance and design requirements indicated and
which shall be fit for their intended purpose. The Contractor indemnifies the Employer
and Design Consultant from any and all claims, costs and expenses arising from any
loss or damage in connection with any error in or failure of the Contractor’s designed
portion of the Works.
A. Warranty Period: 2 years or manufacturer’s warranty period (whichever is greater) from

date of Substantial Completion. The date of substantial completion shall be the date

when all components have been certified by the Consultant and accepted by the Owner
to be complete in accordance with the definition of substantial completion
B. All components and their installations shall be free from defects. Any defective material
or workmanship and any resulting damage to work of other trades shall be replaced or
repaired as directed during the Warranty Period at the contactors expense. Comply with
General Conditions, agreeing to repair or replace any components that have failed
within the warranty period.
A. Requirements of the General Conditions of Contract / Section 23 0100 shall be referred

to and complied with as appropriate without prejudice to requirements stated herein.
B. Following spare parts shall be furnished, properly packed and labelled with equipment
no. / location.
1. 4 # Pressure Transmitter for Air ducts of each type and size used.
2. 4 # Temperature Transmitter for Air ducts of each type and size used.
3. 2 # Pressure Transmitter for Chilled Water of each type and size used.
4. 2 # Temperature Transmitter for Chilled water of each type and size used.
5. 2 # Kilowatt transmitter of each type and size used.
6. 2 # Flow Control Valve Actuator for each type and size used.
7. 2 # Damper Actuator of each type and size used.
8. 4 # Differential Pressure Switches for fans of each type and size used.
9. 2 # Differential Pressure Switches for Pumps of each type and size used.
10. 4 # DDC Controllers of each type and size used.
11. 4 # VAV Damper motors/Actuators of each type and size used.
12. 8 # Room Temperature Sensors of each type and size used.
13. 8 # Pressure probes of each tyye and size used,
14. 4 # VAV controllers of each tyoe and size used.
15. 4# Air flow transducers at VAVs of each type and size used.
16. 2 # Air Flow Measure stations of each type and size used.
17. 2 # Air Velocity Sensors of each type and size used.
18. 1 # Outdoor Air Temperature Sensor.
19. 1 # Outdoor Air Humidity Sensor.
20. 4 # Printer Ribbons.
21. 1 # Toner cartridges for Laser printer.
22. 1 # Battery for Network Controller.
23. 1# Back up Battery for Laptop Computer.
24. 2 set Cartridges for color printer
A. Provide factory shipping cartons for each piece of equipment and control device.
Maintain cartons during shipping, storage and handling as required to prevent
equipment damage, and to eliminate dirt and moisture from equipment. Store
equipment and materials inside and protect from weather.
1.16 LISTING AND LABELING
A. The BAS and components shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL 916) as an
Energy Management System.
B. The BAS shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (864) UUKL for supervised smoke
control.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Approved manufacturers subject to compliance with the requirement of the contract

documents, use only firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of BAS, of types and
capacities required which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less
than twenty (20) years and approved by the Engineer.
2.02 GENERAL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The system shall be based on modular, peer-to-peer networked, distributed control

architecture based on DDC Building Controllers.
B. The system elements shall form an open, interoperable system configured for multi site
access and control.
C. The system shall be fully integrated with third party vendor equipment for all aspects of
the system control and management.
D. The basic elements of the system structures shall be manufacturer's latest standard
products that comply with the specification requirements and are kept in inventory by the
BAS supplier / manufacturer. The components shall not require customizing, other than
adding software programming to perform required functions.
E. The system shall have standalone capability in the event of a network failure. Failure of
any single component or network connections shall not interrupt the execution of control
strategies at the operational devices. In the event of a power failure the BAS controllers
shall continue to be fully operational with full time program capability.
F. The system shall allow standard graphics to be created for configurable devices so that
it is possible for all instances of points for the same device type to use the same
graphic.
G. All starters such as VFD, and other BAS components such as DDC, should match MEW
regulation to withstand severe ambient temperature.
H. BACnet / LonWorks Capability:

1. The building controllers shall be integrated at Management level through
Ethernet TCP/IP (BACnet over IP).
2. BACnet shall also be used 3rd party integrations that are available on BACnet.
3. The system shall provide direct Interfaces to BACnet and LonWorks. The
interface shall provide the functionality necessary to normally operate a Building
Automation System based on LON devices including alarming, data acquisition,
supervisory control, and trending.
4. The LonWorks Interface shall be compatible with any LonWorks vendor whose
products conform to standard LonMark profiles. VAV and FCU controllers are
preferred as Lonmark compliant controllers.
I. Security
1. Data Security shall be assured. Up to date authentication and encryption
techniques shall be used to prevent unauthorized access.
2. Password Protection: A minimum of three levels of password access protection
shall be provided to allow the user / manager to limit control, display, and data
base manipulation capabilities as he deems appropriate for each user, based
upon the assigned password. Passwords shall be exactly the same for all
operator devices. Access shall be supported, for example:
a. Level 1 - Data Access and Display
b. Level 2 - Level 1 + Operator Overrides and Commands.
c. Level 3 - Level 2 + Database Generation and Modification
3. A minimum of four passwords shall be supported at each MMI.
4. User-definable, automatic log-off timers of from 1 to 60 minutes shall be provided
to prevent operators from inadvertently leaving devices logged on.
J. Networking / Communications
1. The system design shall have the ability to monitor and control the system either
via a local network or remotely using standard web browsers through LAN /
Internet.
2. Local Area Network
a. Ethernet TCPIP (Intra-building LAN and Inter-building Campus LAN) shall
be used for operator communication. The network architecture is shown on
drawings.
b. General Network Design:
1) Commonly available, multiple-sourced, networking components
shall be used.
2) Use of an approved, industry standard protocol
3) Access to system data shall not be restricted by a hardware
configuration of the system.
4) All operator devices shall have the ability to access all point status
and application data on the network.
5) Global Data Sharing shall allow point data to be shared between
controllers
K. Supervisory control
1. Server PC and Operating System
a. Web based supervisory software shall not require any proprietary
software to be installed on the Operators workstation.
2. Supervising the BAS System
a. The supervisor shall directly connect to the Controller’s internal / external
web server.
b. The web server shall retrieve logged point data and alarm data if required.
The web server shall provide central alarm management for the entire
system.
c. The web server shall provide central management of logged data for all
input and output
3. Browser Clients
a. The server shall be capable of supporting a minimum of 4 concurrent
clients using Microsoft Internet Explorer or equivalent approved.
b. The web pages shall allow these minimum functions:
1) Displaying of real-time values automatically without requiring a
manual ‘refresh’ of the web page.
2) All graphics shall be stored in the web server without a need for
storage of graphical screens on the client machine.
3) Support for animations in HTML pages
4) Automatically created tables for alarms, set-points, hardware
points and virtual points without the need to create graphics.
5) Automatically created menus and corresponding HTML pages for
data logs and data log groups without the need to create graphics.
6) Automatically created network page with navigation to other
Communication Controllers.
2.03 DDC BUILDING CONTROLLER
A. These shall be BACnet Building Controller profile modular controllers that utilize 32 bit
processors and integrate all control and management functions. Distributed I/O Modules
shall be connected to the Controller.
B. Data Communication
Data communication shall be achieved utilizing:
1. Integrated Ethernet 10/100 Base-T interface for direct communication over IP
networks.
2. Integrated LonWorks interface for direct integration of LonWorks and LonMark
devices, such as distributed I/O modules, Room & Zone controllers or building
automation controllers.
C. The controller shall have an Integrated XML web-server for the full operation of all
application related functionality, data points, time schedules, calendars, parameters,
historical data (trending), data points, alarm buffer, operational hours counter via
standard Browser, such as Internet Explorer. Login shall be with username and
password.
D. There shall be no limit to the number of BACnet objects configured in the controller it
shall have the capability to have minimum 300 Lon network variables.
E. The controller shall be capable of flexible memory expansion at any stage of the product
life.
F. Controller scheduling: a scheduling tool shall be provided for creating, editing and
maintaining controller time schedules. The controller scheduling tool shall be
constructed in a way that allows full compatibility with new controller types.
The controller scheduling tool shall have integrated graphical interface that allows
downloading of schedules to several controllers in a single operation.
G. The controller shall be capable of being constructed with many different combinations of
physical inputs and outputs both analog and/or digital. In addition, it should have analog
and digital software points, including pseudo and global points.
1. Input or output modules of any one type shall be capable of being connected to
the same Controller .
2. The I/O modules shall be LonMark® Association-compliant. The connection to
the Controller shall be via a 2-wire LonWorks® bus. Proprietary communication
will not be acceptable.
3. The remote input/output modules shall consist of the I/O module itself and a
wiring terminal subbase, which allows for direct wiring to the corresponding field
equipment (sensors, actuators, etc.). The wiring subbase shall provide all
required field terminals, i.e. one terminal per signal plus a separate ground for
every signal.

4. It shall be possible to exchange modules during operation without disturbance of
the other modules. It shall be possible to plug in manual disconnects and
manual override modules for start-up and servicing. The manual override
modules shall provide a feedback signal to the building supervisor. The
Controller shall automatically configure and bind its I/O modules without the need
for special tools.
5. The power supply module for each input/output module segment shall be
capable of handling the total module capacity for that segment.
6. Universal Inputs& outputs: The DDC shall provide Inputs which can accept
industry standard analog and digital signals such as 4-20 ma, 0-10 Vdc,
NTC/PTC Thermistors, Potentiometers, digital binary inputs, contact closures,
24Vac detection and pulse counting up to 20Hz. The Universal Inputs will support
a minimum of 15 types of standard NTC/PTC Thermistors, Relay contacts 24Vac
detect NO as outputs.
7. I/O Channels: Inputs & Outputs which can accept industry standard analog and
digital signals such as Active Input 0-10V DC@40Kohm, 9 Bit resolution, Active
output 0-10V DC @20mA max. load, Digital volt free contact @ 25mA not
continuous 24Vac detect and NO 24Vac relay contact 2A continuous / 15A
inrush.
H. DDC Controller and I/O Panels Cabinet

1. Enclose the DDC and I/O modules in a metal cabinet. Construct the cabinet
such that it can be wall or panel mounted and all terminations made during the
construction phase of the Project. Cabinet shall be IP54 enclosures having high
quality factory applied finish.
2. Provide the cabinet with a key lock. All cabinets on the installation shall utilize
one master key.
3. Electrically terminate all control wiring and system communications inside the
cabinets.
I. Control Software Description

1. The DDC Controllers shall have the ability to perform the following pre-tested
control algorithms
a. Two-position control
b. Proportional control
c. Proportional plus integral control
d. Proportional, integral, plus derivative control
2. It shall be possible to use any of the following in a custom process:
a. Any system measured point data or status
b. Any calculated data
c. Any results from other processes
d. User-defined constants
e. Arithmetic functions (+, -, *, /,square root, exponential, etc.)
f. Boolean logic operators (and/or, exclusive or, etc.)
g. On-delay/off-delay/one-shot timers
3. Custom processes may be triggered based on any combination of the following:
a. Time interval
b. Time-of-day
c. Other processes
d. Time programming
e. Events (e.g., point alarms)
J. Programming:

1. The custom control-programming feature shall be via a graphical programming
language (GPL) in each operator workstation documented via English language
descriptors.
K. Global Data:
1. A single process shall be able to incorporate measured or calculated data from
any and all other DDC Controllers or Other Controllers on the network. In
addition, a single process shall be able to issue commands to points in any and
all other DDC Controllers or application specific controllers on the network.
L. Messaging:
1. Processes shall be able to generate operator messages and advisories to
operator I/O devices. A process shall be able to directly send a message to a
specified device or cause the execution of a dial-up connection to a remote
device such as a printer or pager.
2. The system shall be able to be set to alert the operator in the form of emails or
SMS and screen alarms so the problems can be taken care of immediately
M. Data Logging:
1. DDC Controllers shall store point history data for selected analog and digital
inputs and outputs.
2. Any point, physical or calculated may be designated for data logging.
3. Adjustable sample intervals shall be provided for Time Interval Data logs. Each
DDC Controller shall have a dedicated RAM-based buffer for data logs and shall
be capable of storing a minimum of 64,000 data samples in total.
2.04 APPLICATION CONFIGURABLE CONTROLLER
A. These smaller controllers shall be LonMark® Association-compliant/ BACnet Certified.

The controllers shall offer the same standard software capabilities and be able to use
the modular application software or create an application using the engineering software
tool. They shall use the same communications software to ensure total compatibility with
all the other controllers on the system.
1. They shall be fully compatible with the same operator workstation so that data
may be read from any controller.
2. The combination of analog and digital points as inputs and outputs shall be
optimized to suit the application for which the controller is being used.
B. HVAC Applications Specific Controllers (ASC)

1. Each ASC shall operate as standalone controller capable of performing its
specified control responsibilities independently of other controllers in the network.
Each ASC shall be a microprocessor-based, multi-tasking, real-time digital
control processor.
2. Each ASC shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system and
data bases including:
a. Control Processes
b. Energy Management Applications.
c. Operator I/O (Portable Service Terminal)
3. The operator interface to any ASC point data or programs shall be through
operator workstation or portable operator's terminal connected to any ASC on the
network.
4. Power fail Protection: All System set points, proportional bands, control
algorithms, and any other programmable parameters shall be stored such that a
power failure of any duration does not necessitate reprogramming the ASC.
C. Application Descriptions:
1. Fan Coil units and VAV Terminal Unit Controllers:
a. Terminal Unit Controllers shall be LONMARK / Bacnet certified and shall
support, but not be limited to, the control of Fan Coil units and VAV boxes
both Bypass type and shut off type.
b. Terminal unit controllers shall include an inbuilt air flow
c. transducer that shall connect to the terminal unit manufacturer’s standard
air velocity averaging grid to measure directly the average air flow in the
duct.
d. Terminal Unit Controllers shall support the following types of point inputs
and outputs:
1) Proportional Cooling and Heating Outputs
e. Terminal Unit Controllers shall support the following library of control
strategies to address the requirements of the sequences described in the
"Automatic Control Sequence Section " portion of this specification:
1) Daily Schedules
2) Comfort/Occupancy Mode
3) Economy Mode
4) Standby Mode
5) Unoccupied
6) Shutdown
7) Lighting Logic Interlock to Economy Mode
8) Temporary Override Mode
9) Temporary Comfort Mode (Occupancy-Based Control)
10) Boost
f. Occupancy-based Economy / Comfort Mode Control: Each VAV Terminal
Unit Controller shall have a provision for occupancy sensing overrides.
Based Upon the contact status of either a manual wall switch or an
occupancy sensing device, the VAV Terminal Unit Controller shall
automatically select either Economy or Comfort mode.
g. Occupancy-Based Zone Lighting Control: VAV Terminal Unit Controllers
shall provide an auxiliary binary output to serve as the interface to an
associated lighting relay. Based upon the status of an occupancy sensing
device or manual wall switch, the output to automatically turn on or off the
lights. This accommodates occupant requirements while reducing
electrical consumption. Economy/Comfort (described in the previous
section) and lighting overrides shall be served by the same occupancy
override input.
h. Temporary Override Modes
1) Temporary Occupancy Mode: The controller interface the zone
temperature sensor shall allow for an optional momentary switch to
change the mode of the controller from economy to comfort and
optionally interlock the room lights for a present amount of time.
2) Boost Mode: The controller interface to the zone temperature
sensor shall allow for an optional momentary switch to override the
controller's output to full heating or cooling. This command shall
be active for a preset amount of time, to anticipate a substantial
change in the room's load.
3) Alarm Management: Each VAV Terminal Unit Controller shall
perform its own limit and status monitoring and analysis to
maximize network performance by reducing unnecessary
communication
2. Unitary Controllers:

a. Unitary Controllers shall be LONMARK / BACnet certified and shall
support, but not be limited to, the following types of systems to address
specific applications described in the "Automatic Control Sequence
Section" portion of this specification
b. Unitary controllers shall support the following library of control strategies
to address the requirements of the sequences described in the "Automatic
Control Sequence Section" portion of this specification
c. Unitary Controllers shall provide an auxiliary binary output to serve as the
interface to an associated lighting relay and a provision for occupancy
sensing overrides, as required. Based upon the status of either an
occupancy sensing device, the Unitary Controller shall provide a contact
output to automatically turn on or off the lights and either an Economy or
Comfort mode.. This accommodates occupant requirements while
reducing electrically consumption. Economy/Comfort and Lighting
overrides shall be served by the same occupancy override input.
d. Temporary Override Modes
1) Temporary Occupancy Mode: The controller interface to the zone
temperature sensor shall allow of an optional momentary switch to
change the mode of the controller from economy to comfort and
optionally interlock the room lights for a preset amount of time.
2) Boost Mode: The controller interface to the zone temperature
sensor shall allow for an optional momentary switch to override the
controller's output to full heating or cooling. This command shall
be active for a preset amount of time, to anticipate a substantial
change in the room's load.
3) The VAV controllers must be able to communicate with BMS/ BAS
workstations/ servers through the network BMS/ BAS workstations
must be capable of displaying all the operational parameter such
as but not limited to actual air flow, minimum set air flow, maximum
set air flow, actual damper position, damper command, actual
room temperature and temperature set point. It should be possible
for BMS/BAS operator to override any command of change the
temp set point from BMS/BAS workstation. A suitable indication
should appear on the BMS workstation graphic highlighting that the
parameter is in overridden state.
2.05 HARDWARE
A. Servers and Peripherals

1. The IBMS system server computer shall comprise of the following minimum
hardware:
a. Intel Core i7 Processor running at least 2.7 GHz or latest best clock speed
available. .
b. Min 64 GB of registered DDR4
c. A DX8 or better Super VGA graphics card capable of at least 1280x1024
pixel resolution and 65K colors, non-interlaced (70 Hz or better vertical
refresh rate) and 128MB of GDDR RAM. Two graphics cards are required
when the computer will support 4 LCD monitors.
d. Rack mount 21” LCD Monitor(LCD Display)/A full function keyboard/
Mouse pointing device, preferably optical
e. 10 TB SSD in minimum of 3 disks RAID5 configuration.
f. RAID controller card.
g. A DVD / CD ROM RW drive
h. USB ports
i. 10/100/1000 Ethernet card
2. The system shall be capable of supporting up to 40 simultaneous Operator
Workstation connections using a TCP/IP Local Area Network (LAN) subject to
hardware capacity on the server computer. The Network connection must allow
an unlimited number of casual users access to the 40 connections on a first-
come-first-served basis.
3. Servers shall be provided in dual-redundant configuration
4. Servers shall be provided as rack-mounted industrial computers
5. The servers shall be located in Main Computer Room
B. Workstation
1. The Workstation shall comprise the following minimum hardware:
a. Intel Core i7 Processor running at a minimum of 2.7 GHz
b. Min 64 GB DDR4
c. High end graphic card with DVI video out. Two graphics cards shall be
required to support 4 LCD monitors.
d. 1 TB SSD Hard disk drive.
e. DVD +/-RW drive capable of playing DVD and CDROM discs, and
recording on DVDRW, DVDR, and CDRW disks
f. 4 x USB ports
g. Ethernet network card
h. Keyboard and Mouse: 12 function-key keyboard and Mouse pointing
device, preferably optical
2. Operating System Software at the Workstation shall comprise of:
a. Windows 10 or later
b. TCP/IP Networking
c. Graphic Display Building Editor
d. Application software
e. The networking software shall use the industry standard TCP/IP LAN
protocol.
f. All system peripherals shall be capable of being connected to the server
computer via the LAN.
g. Browser: Internet Explorer/ Edge
C. Printers
1. High-quality, high-speed laser printers for hardcopy system printouts.
2. The printer shall be multi font, Color output.
3. It shall have a minimum operating speed of 200 characters / second or higher
4. Printer shall be formatted to print on standard A3 and A4 paper.
5. Minimum of 300 dpi.
6. Refer the system drawings for the location and quantity of the printers.
2.06 PORTABLE OPERATOR'S TERMINAL
A. General: A state of the art Portable Operator's Terminal (POT) shall be provided for
readout of system variables; override; control and adjustment of parameters. The POT
will be handheld and plug directly into individual controllers for power and data.
B. The POT shall be capable of system-wide information from anywhere in the system.
C. Functionality to include ability to:

1. Display / change minimum on / off, maximum off time
2. Set points to a fixed valve/state
3. Display diagnostic results
4. Display sequential all point summary and sequential alarm summary
5. Display / change digital point state, analogue point value
6. Display / change time and date
7. Display / change application and controller parameters
8. Display / change analogue limits
9. Display / change time schedules
10. Display / change routine counts and runtime limits
11. Display / change time / event initiation
12. Display / change programmable off set values
13. Access DDC initialization routines and diagnostics
14. Enable / Disable points, initiators and programs
D. POT shall be complete with command keys, data entry keys, cursor control keys and a
24-character liquid crystal alphanumeric display. Access is to be via self-prompting
menu selection with arrow key control of next menu/previous menu and step
forward/step backward within a given menu.
E. Connection of a POT to a controller shall not interrupt nor interfere with normal peer
network operation in any way, prevent alarms from being transmitted, or preclude
central initiated commands and system modification.
2.07 SYSTEM SOFTWARE FEATURES
A. General
1. All necessary software to form a complete system shall be provided. The
operating system shall be the latest WINDOWS
2. The software programs specified in this section shall be provided as an integral
part of the relevant system components, and shall not be dependent upon any
higher-level computer for execution.
3. Provide all software updates and verify operation in the system. These updates
shall be accomplished in a timely manner, fully coordinated with the system
operators, and shall be incorporated into the operations and maintenance
manuals, and software documentation.
B. Basic Interface Description

1. Operator workstation interface software shall minimize operator training through
the use of English language prompting, English language point identification and
industry standard PC application software. The software shall provide, as a
minimum, the following functionality:
a. Scheduling and override of building operations, Time Scheduling, Holiday
programme
b. Collection and analysis of historical data
c. Conversion of graphics to HTML format for viewing with a Web Browser
without any loss of quality
d. Editing, programming, and storage of controller / system databases, data
logging
e. Interface with any existing personal computer networks owned or
specified for the site
f. Dynamic graphics
g. Analogue closed loop control
h. Optimisation programme
i. Interlocking programme

j. Equipment cycling & lead/lag selection programme, Sequencing
programme
k. Maximum demand load shedding programme
l. Totalisation programme
m. Plant Maintenance monitoring
n. Alarms programme
o. Fault diagnostics software
p. Reaction programme
q. Recovery programme
2. Software shall be provided to enable the following reports, as minimum, to be
generated
a. Maintenance report
b. Alarm report
c. Plant / equipment failure report
d. Power or utility consumption report
e. Analogue trend report
f. Historical event report
3. The history and trend report shall be prepared and generated in the system for all
the data points. Necessary software to back up the history and trend data should
be provided. The backup should happen at a defined interval as agreed during
commissioning and handover to the Client. All the necessary data entries for
history and trend report generation should be done by the Contractor/ Sub
Contractor.
4. The system shall automatically collate log-on/log-off time for each user and shall
record the commands of each user.
5. Should the operating system screen saver be activated, then the system will
automatically log out the current user.
6. Software shall allow the operator to perform commands access and adjustment
of all specified parameters in the control programs of any DDC controller on the
site.
C. Calendars
1. Monthly calendars for a 60-month period shall be provided which allow for
simplified scheduling of holidays and special days in advance. Holidays and
special days shall be user-selected with the pointing device and shall
automatically reschedule equipment operation.
D. Help
1. Help shall be available for all applications and shall provide the relevant data for
that particular screen.
E. Energy Management Applications: Digital Panels shall have the ability to perform any or
all of the following energy management routines
1. Time of Day Scheduling
2. Calendar Based Scheduling
3. Holiday Scheduling
4. Optimal Start
5. Optimal Stop
6. Heating/Cooling Interlock
7. Average/High/Low Signal Select and Reset
F. All programs shall be executed automatically without the need for operator intervention,
and shall be flexible enough to allow user customization. Programs shall be applied to
building equipment described in the "Automatic Control Sequence, Section
1. Optimal Run Time:
a. The Optimal Run time (ORT) program shall control the start-up and
shutdown times of HVAC equipment during both the heating and cooling
seasons to provide the most efficient operating strategy during potentially
energy wasteful periods of the day. The ORT program shall base it
control decisions primarily upon occupancy schedules, outside air
temperature, seasonal requirement, interior room mass temperature of the
building etc.
b. For start-up, ORT program shall use outside air temperature / room mass
temperatures etc. to "learn" the building's thermal characteristic through
an adaptive modeling technique. The adaptive model shall allow the
system to predict how long the building shall take to warm-up (Heating
and buildings shall take to warm-up (Heating mode) or cool-down (cooling
mode) under different outside and inside temperature conditions.
c. For shutdown, ORT program shall use the outside air temperature and
other required factors to determine how early it can shutdown the system
without adversely affecting ventilation requirements.
d. The ORT program shall analyze multiple buildings mass sensors to
automatically determine the seasonal mode and worst case condition for
every day of the year. Analysis shall require occupancy schedule date and
desired mass temperatures etc
e. Optimization Program: This program shall calculate automatically the
optimum start and stop times for HVAC plant consistent with internal and
external temperatures in order to conserve energy
G. Chiller Manager
1. The Chiller Manager (CM) feature shall be controlled and serviced by the Energy
Manager, which is the supervisory program which coordinates the activities of all
energy application features. The Chiller manager shall be a supervisory program
overseeing the functions of Chilled Water Temperature Rest and Chiller
sequencing. The Chiller manager shall be provided to support either Imperial or
Metric units of measurement.
2. Each Chiller manager system shall be assigned a unique identifier and expanded
identifier. The expanded identifier shall be used further identify or label the CM
system.
3. Chiller Manager System, points and parameter shall be defined on-line by the
user. Any addition, modifications, or deletions shall be made on-line.
a. Chilled Water Reset: Chilled water Reset (CHR) program shall be
provided to automatically reset the chilled water temperature to the
highest possible value which will still satisfy the cooling coil requiring the
greatest cooling.
b. Condenser Water Reset: Condensate Water Reset (CWR) program shall
be provided to automatically reset the condenser valve which will still
satisfy the outside wet bulb temperature and the load being handed by all
chillers on the condenser loop.
4. The BAS shall completely integrate with the chillers by taking the values directly
from the microprocessor for its complete control, however the internal chiller
management shall be carried out by the chillers own controls.
H. Maintenance Management Program (MMP)

1. Provide a MMP to run on the BAS to direct the maintenance activities of all
building services related equipment. It shall contain as minimum the following
items listed below
2. The MMP shall be multipurpose program to:
a. It shall automatically schedule and print maintenance work orders.
b. It shall automatically identify all scheduled maintenance parts
requirements (that are to used during the scheduled maintenance event)
through inventory database
c. It shall provide financial analysis of costs associated with the maintenance
activities.
3. The MMP shall generate the maintenance schedules as a function of any and all
of the following:
a. Calendar date
b. Operating time of equipment
c. Occurrence of a system event
4. Capability to enter all technical data of all different services (i.e. preventive
maintenance procedures, spare parts, tools, troubleshooting lists and charts...
etc.) as set in the manufacturers services manuals.
5. When the work order is done, the MMP shall (on the basis of the actual time
spent and materials used fed back by the maintenance staff) calculated the
actual labor and material cost.
6. The MMP shall daily extract maintenance data pertinent to the day, and shall
automatically print a daily maintenance report, which lists the appropriate
maintenance schedules.
7. Inventory Record: The MMP, shall on request by the operator issues a status
report of the materials file. This report shall list:
a. Each type of material, its source, and its unit cost.
b. Amount in material currently in stock.
c. Minimum level of stock at which to re-order with the last previous date on
which the materials was re-ordered.
8. The MMP shall report on request by the operator cumulative cost data. It shall
be possible as well, to obtain automatically on specified day, a monthly report-to-
date, quarterly report-to-date and annually report-to-date.
9. Scheduled Maintenance Parts Inventory Database
a. Refer Section 25 5000
I. Programming Capability: DDC shall be able to execute processes configured by the

user to automatically perform calculations and control routines.
1. Process Inputs and Variables: It shall be possible to use any required data in a
configured process
2. Process Triggers: Configured processes may be triggered based on any
combination of the following:
a. Time of day
b. Calendar Date
c. Other processes
d. Events (e.g point alarms)
3. Data Access: A single process shall able to incorporate measured or calculated
data from any and all other ASCs. In addition, a single process shall be able to
issue commands to points in any and all the ASCs on the local network.
J. Alarm Management: alarm management shall be provided to monitor, buffer, and direct
alarm reports to operator workstations filter alarms to minimize operator interruption due
to non-critical alarms.
1. Point Change Report Description: All alarm or point change reports shall include
the point's description and the time and date of occurrence.
2. Prioritizing: the user shall be able to define the specific system reaction for each
point. Alarms shall be prioritized to minimize nuisance reporting and to speed
operator response to critical alarms. A minimum of three priority levels shall be
provided. Users shall have the ability to manually inhibit alarm reporting for each
point. The user shall also be able to define condition under which need to be
acknowledged by an operator, and/or logged for analysis at a later date.
3. Report Routing: Alarm reports and messages shall be directed to an operator
device.
4. Alarm Messages: In addition, to the point's description and the time and date,
the user shall be able to print, display or store a 60-character alarm message to
more fully describe the alarm condition and / or operator response.
5. Selected alarms shall be routed to mobile phones / PDA’s / email, exact
requirements to be advised by Project Manager during system commissioning
stage
6. Remote Alarm Horn: The alarm horn feature shall be silenced when the critical
alarm is acknowledged.
K. A data collection utility shall be provided to automatically sample, store, and display
system data.
1. Provide data logging capabilities that allow the user to easily monitor and
preserve records of system activity over an extended period of time. Any system
point may be data logged automatically at time-based intervals or changes of
value (Time–Stamped Data logs), both of which shall be user-definable. Data log
data shall be automatically stored for future diagnostics and reporting.
2. Data log report graphics shall be provided to allow the user to view all data
logged point data. Reports may be customized to include individual points or pre-
defined groups of up to 6 points. Provide additional functionality to allow any data
logs to be transferred easily to an off-the-shelf spreadsheet package such as
Microsoft Excel either from archived data on hard disk or directly from any
controller in real time. This must allow the user to perform custom calculations
such as energy usage, equipment efficiency and energy costs and allow for
generation of these reports on high-quality plots, graphs and charts.
3. Provide additional functionality that allows the user to view trended data on data
log graph displays. Displays shall be actual plots of both static and/or real-time
dynamic point data. A minimum of 6 points may be viewed simultaneously on a
single graph, with color selection and line type for each point being user-
definable.
4. Provide capability to print any graph on the system printer for use as a building
management and diagnostics tool.
5. It shall be possible for any point in the BAS system to be data logged on a time
interval basis in real-time on the operator’s workstation PC.
6. All graphical trend displays of data shall be capable of multiple display styles,
including but not limited to 2-D and 3-D line, bar and pie charts.
L. Runtime Totalization: DDC shall automatically accumulate and store runtime hours for
binary input and output points specified in the "Execution" portion of this specification.
1. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit for Runtime totalization.
Unique, user-specified messages shall be generated when the limit is reached.
M. Event Totalization: DDC shall have the ability to count events, such as the number of
times a pump or fan system is cycled on and off.
1. The Even Tantalization feature shall be able to store the records associated with
a minimum of 9,999,999 events before reset.
2. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user-specified
message shall be generated when the limit is reached.

2.08 SYSTEM SOFTWARE
A. The BAS system server shall be based around the Microsoft Windows 32/64 bit multi-
tasking environment, Windows 2010 or latest. The BAS system shall be a true 32-bit
application to take advantage of Microsoft Windows enabling technologies.
B. Standard services supported by the server computer operating system will include the
following:
1. Multi-tasking Multi-user support
2. TCP/IP Network Support with firewalls filtering internet traffic.
3. Graphic Display Building Editor
4. Application software
5. Check pointing and recovery as in Windows Server 2010 or latest
2.09 APPLICATION SERVER SOFTWARE
A. The BAS system server shall consist of BAS application software and database and
utilities for backup.
B. Maintenance servers shall host the maintenance database application
C. Complete latest version of Microsoft Office Suite software shall be provided having
Microsoft Word, Excel, PowerPoint, Access, etc
2.10 APPLICATION WORKSTATION SOFTWARE
A. The workstations will come equipped with web browser and graphics applications and
run-time libraries, network management software, intrusion detection software, database
backup tools, and virus scan software with live virus update.
B. Support of html, xml, Javascript, Java.
C. Biometrics software and hardware for logging into workstation.
2.11 FIELD DEVICES - SENSORS
Sensors shall be capable of sensing the range expected for the point at the specified
accuracy. Input / output sensors and devices shall be closely matched to the
requirements of the DDC for accurate, responsive, noise free signal input / output.
A. Temperature Sensors
Passive temperature sensors with NTC 20K ohm, Balco500 and PT1000 elements shall
be used for different applications.
1. Outdoor temperature sensors (also combined with humidity sensors) with extra
covers for protection and shielding the sun. Prewired and terminal block versions
shall be available. Their temperature range shall be –40 to +60°C.
2. Earth temperature sensors for greenhouse applications. These prewired NTC 20
sensor shall be rated to IP65. Their temperature range shall be –50 to +90°C.
3. Room temperature sensors (also combined with setpoint adjustment and
fan/presence switches). These shall be available with NTC 20, PT1000 and
Balco500 elements in an attractive, appealing housing, with terminal blocks for

wiring. Models shall also be available with LEDs. Their temperature range shall
be –20 to +50°C.
4. Air duct temperature sensors. Prewired and terminal block versions shall be
available to mount in and outside the duct. Their temperature range shall be –40
to +120°C.
5. Strap-on temperature sensors. These shall be used measure the temperature in
a water pipe. Prewired and terminal block versions shall beavailable and shall be
mounted on the pipe with a clamp. Their temperature range shall be –50 to
110°C.
6. Immersion temperature sensors. These shall be used to measure the
temperature in a water pipe. Prewired and terminal block versions shall be
available and shall be mounted in the pipe with a well. Lengths from 95 to 300
mm shall be available. Material shall be copper, brass or stainless steel
depending on type. Their temperature range shall be –50 to +130°C.
7. Fast temperature sensors. These shall be used with domestic hot water
applications in district heat stations and shall detect fast temperature changes.
These shall be pre-wired stainless steel sensors and be available with a NTC 20
element. They shall be mounted directly into the pipe. Sensor lengths shall be
75, 220 and 300 mm. The length shall be adjustable to pipe diameters.
B. Average Temperature Sensor for Air Ducts

1. A single PT 1000 sensor over a length of 3.6m shall be used for sensing the
average temperature in large air ducts with. Sensor holders shall be included for
installation.
C. Stainless Steel Temperature Sensors and Transmitters

1. Stainless steel temperature sensors shall be available with PT 100 and PT 1000
elements and stainless steel temperature transmitters. They shall feature a 2-
wire-system, 4-20 mA output, 12-36 Vdc supply voltage, and shall meet
protection class IP 65.
D. Humidity Sensors
Active humidity sensors shall be available in combination with temperature sensing with
NTC 20K ohm, Balco500 and PT1000 elements for different applications. The operating
voltage for the capacitive humiditiy sensing element shall be 24V. The following types
shall be available:
1. Outdoor humidity sensors with terminal blocks and a temperature range of –30
to .+50°C.
2. Capacitive room humidity sensors with NTC 20, PT1000 and Balco500
temperature sensors, and with terminal blocks, output for humidity of 0 to 1 or 0
to 10V, and a temperature range of –0 to .+50°C.
3. Capacitive air duct humidity sensors with NTC 20, PT1000 and Balco500
temperature sensors, and with terminal blocks, output for humidity of 0-1 or 0-
10V, a temperature range of –0 to +50°C, and mountable on the air duct.
4. Duct mounted sensors shall be provided with a sampling chamber.
5. Wall mounted sensors shall be provided with covers identical to temperature
sensors.
E. Pressure Transmitters
1. Differential pressure transmitters shall be used for controlling pressure in air
conditioning or other ventilation applications, such as filter monitoring, pressure
or flow control, maximum pressure control, etc. The transmitters can be used for
overpressure, vacuum or differential pressure measurement with non-aggressive

gaseous media. The range of the transmitters shall be easy changed by
potentiometers or jumpers.
F. Differential Pressure Transmitters For Air Conditioning

These transmitters shall have an output signal of 0 to 10V, pressure ranges selectable
by jumper, zero point adjustment by potentiometer, and shall conform to protection class
IP 65. Accessories such as 2m silicone pressure hose and pressure joints shall be
included. The following pressure ranges shall be available:
1. 0 to 500 / 1000 Pa selectable by jumper, set to 500 Pa
2. 0 to 1000 / 500 Pa selectable by jumper, set to 1000 Pa
3. 0 to 2000 / 1000 Pa selectable by jumper
4. –500 to + 500 Pa fixed
5. –1000 to +1000 Pa fixed
6. Additional versions shall be available with a 3-½ digit LCD display. These
transmitters shall be available in LON versions conforming to pressure profile
1030, with service and operation LED visible and Neuron button accessible from
outside. Provide as / if shown on the drawings.
G. Pressure Transmitters for Heating, District Heating, Cooling and Other Applications
These pressure transmitter shall be available with welded stainless steel sensors, an
output signal of 0 to 10V, supply voltage of 24Vac +/- 20 % or 24-26Vdc, pressure
ranges selectable by jumper, zero point adjustment by potentiometer, and shall conform
to protection class IP 65. The following pressure ranges (selectable by jumper) shall be
available:
1. 0-1 / 0.5 / 0.2 bar max 3 bar
2. 0-3 / 1.5 / 0.6 bar max 7.5 bar
3. 0-6 / 3 / 1.2 bar max 18 bar
4. 0-10 / 5 / 2 bar max 30 bar
5. 0-25 / 12.5 / 5 bar max 70 bar
6. 0-40 / 20 / 8 bar max 80 bar
7. A 2-½ digit LED display module shall also be available. These transmitters shall
be available in LON versions conforming to pressure profile 1030, with service
and operation LED visible and Neuron button accessible from outside.
H. Differential Pressure Transmitters for Heating, District Heating, Cooling and Other
Applications
These pressure transmitters shall be available with a welded stainless steel sensor, a
pressure connection G ½” (DIN 16 288), an output signal of 0 to 10V, a supply voltage
of 24Vac +/- 20 % or 24-26Vdc, pressure ranges adjustable through zero point and end
point potentiometer, and shall conform to protection class IP 65. The following types
shall be available:
1. pressure range smallest range max. pressure
2. 0-500 mbar, 125 mbar 10 bar
3. 0-1 bar, 250 mbar 15 bar
4. 0-2.5 bar 0.7 bar 15 bar
5. 0-5 bar 1.25 bar 15 bar
6. 0-10 bar 2.5 bar 25 bar
7. A 2-½ digit LED display module shall also be available. These transmitters shall
be available in LON versions conforming to pressure profile 1030, with service
and operation LED visible and Neuron button accessible from outside.
I. Air Quality Sensors

1. Air quality sensors measure the concentration of CO2 or mixed gases (VOC) in
the air and are used to initiate an action such as causing dampers to open or
fans to speed up to bring fresh air in. Sensor elements shall be, depending on
type, metalloxide semiconductors, CO2 sensors, Non Dispersion Infrared (NDIR)
and thermistors. The sensors shall be powered by 24V, with an output signal of
0-10V. The operating range shall be 0 to 45°C. Versions with a display and relay
outputs shall also be available. Room sensors and air duct sensors shall both be
available. Provide as / if shown on the drawings.
2.12 FIELD DEVICES - VALVES
A. Small Linear Valves

1. The small linear 2 or 3 way valves shall be operated with small linear actuators
and thermoelectric actuators for modulating or on/off control of hot and/or chilled
water for fan coil units, small reheaters and recoolers or for steam in HVAC
systems. These valves shall be well suited for applications where space is
limited such as in fan coil units and manifold systems. They shall be designed
for reliable long time use and feature high quality specifications.
2. For district heat applications the valves shall be approved to DIN 32730. These
valves shall feature pressure compensation to ensure optimized flow control in
hydraulic systems with high differential pressures and high temperatures.
B. Threaded Large Linear Valves

1. The threaded large linear 2 or 3 way valves shall be used with large linear
actuators for modulating control in heating, ventilation and air conditioning
systems with hot and/or chilled water, open circuits with fresh water, as well as
steam applications. Both 2-way and 3-way valves shall provide a long lifespan
and feature optimized rangeability, leakage rate, temperature range, close-off
pressure and flow characteristics.
C. 2-Way Flanged Large Linear Valves

1. The 2-way flanged large linear valves shall be used with large linear actuators for
modulating control of hot and chilled water or steam in heating, ventilating and air
conditioning systems. For district heat applications these valves shall be
approved to DIN 32730. Metal to metal seating and self-adjusting packing shall
ensure long life, and the valves shall provide high quality specifications to ensure
state of the art temperature control.
D. 3-Way Flanged Large Linear Valves

1. The 3-way flanged large linear valves shall be used with large linear actuators for
modulating control of hot and chilled water or steam and heating, ventilating and
air conditioning systems. Metal to metal seating and self-adjusting packing shall
ensure long life, and the valves shall provide high quality specifications to ensure
state of the art temperature control.
E. Bubble Tight Butterfly Valves

1. The butterfly valves shall employ an EPDM - HT liner to meet upcoming heating
system standards. No additional linkage shall be required for mounting standard
actuators. These valves are preferred for use in heating and cooling applications
as well as hydraulic shutters for boiler cascades.
2.13 FIELD DEVICES - CONTROL DAMPERS
A. Type: Automatic, ON / OFF type suitable for leak-tight shut-off.

1. Frame: Fabricated from minimum 1.5 mm (16 gauge) galvanized steel sheets
with holes for enclosed duct mounting.
2. Blades: Fabricated from minimum 1.5 mm (16 gage) galvanized steel sheets,
stiffened as appropriate, with maximum blade width of 200 mm (8 inch). Blades
shall be secured to 12 mm (½ inch) diameter zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated
hardware. Nylon thrust bearings shall be provided for each blade. Blade linkage
hardware shall be of zinc-plated steel and brass.
3. Operating Temperature Range: - 29 to 93 C (- 20 to 200 F).
B. Type for standard applications: Parallel or opposed blade design with optional closed-
cell neoprene edging.
C. Type for low-leakage applications: Parallel or opposed blade design with inflatable seal
blade edging or replaceable rubber seals, rated for leakage at less than 10 cfm/ft2 of
damper area, at differential pressure of 1,000 Pa (4 inch WG) when damper is being
held under torque of 22.7 Kg (4.17 ft-lb).
D. Outside air dampers shall have adjustable minimum settings so that ventilation can be
adjusted for each space or room.
2.14 FIELD DEVICES - CONTROL VALVES
A. General: Designed to high quality specifications for reliable long time use, with the
following:
1. Equal percentage or modified parabolic flow characteristics, rangeability of 30:1
for fan-coils and VAV reheat coils and 50:1 for large coils
2. Actual valve coefficient value (Cv) shall not deviate from the curve Cv and quoted
CV by more than 10 %
3. Adjustable stroke limitation, pressure compensation and integrated flow control to
ensure optimisation in hydraulic systems with high differential pressures and high
temperatures.
4. Optimised range, leakage rate, temperature range and close-off pressure.
5. Metal to metal seating and self-adjusting packing to ensure long life, where
appropriate.
6. Indicators clearly marked to show fully open and closed positions
B. Two-way Valves:
1. Type: Bronze with threaded ends (up to and including 50 mm ND) ductile / cast
iron with flanged ends (65 mm ND and above), globe pattern, two port valve with
the polished stainless steel trim and spring-loaded, self-adjusting, Teflon packing.
psig) and shall be either equal or one size smaller than pipe size
5. Plug shall be made of stainless steel for sizes less than 100 mm, for 100 and
6. Valves to have either replaceable composition disk or stainless steel ball.
7. Two way valves shall be modulating type.
C. Three-way Valves:
1. Type: Bronze with threaded ends (up to and including 50 mm ND) / cast iron with
flanged ends (65 mm ND and above), globe pattern, three port valve with
polished stainless steel trim and spring-loaded, self-adjusting, Teflon packing

psig) and shall be either equal or one size smaller than pipe size. Pressure drop
across the bypass shall be equal or greater than coil pressure drop.
5. Parabolic plug shall be made of brass for sizes less than 100 mm, for 100 and
2.15 FIELD DEVICES - ACTUATORS
A. Small Linear Actuators Without Spring Return

1. The small linear actuators shall provide floating or modulating control together
with small linear valves. These actuators are used in fan coil units, induction
units, small reheaters, recoolers, zone control and for domestic hot water
applications. They are employed in electronic temperature control systems using
hot and/or cold water as the controlled medium.
2. The small linear actuators shall be suitable for controllers using floating or
modulating outputs or communications interfaces based on LonWorks®
technology. Controllers with floating outputs track the precise valve position
whereas with controllers with modulating outputs the actuators operate
continuously to the requested valve position. These actuators shall be well-
suited for applications where space is limited and where minimal power
consumption is required. These small linear actuators shall have a flexible
platform which can be adapted to meet requirements for color, cable-length,
auxiliary switches, mechanical interface, and integrated manual adjustment.
B. Large Linear Actuators

1. The large linear actuators shall be used together with controllers providing
switched or floating single-pole/double-throw outputs or controllers with
modulating control outputs. These actuators shall have a standard mechanical
interface where no linkage is required, and no calibration or adjustments shall be
necessary. The actuators shall feature force-limiting end switches to guarantee
that no power is consumed in the end positions and synchronous motors to
ensure a long life span. They shall be capable of simple manual operation and
the option of spring-return and non-spring-return models to guarantee a wide
range of applications. The modulating actuators without spring return shall also
provide a failsafe function in case of a faulty connection. It shall be possible to
add auxiliary switches or a high temperature kit for high performance
applications. They shall be suitable for heating, ventilation, air conditioning,
district heating, domestic hot water or any other application from small to large
buildings and semi-industrial environments.
C. Damper Actuators Without Spring Rreturn

1. The direct coupled damper actuators without spring return shall be compatible
with a proportional controller or a floating single-pole/double-throw control switch.
These actuators shall be able to be mounted directly on round and square
damper shafts, and the angle of rotation shall be able to be limited to certain
angles. Simple installation and maintenance shall be ensured by a declutch
button for manual adjustment, field-added or directly-implemented auxiliary
switches, and a position indicator. These products shall be suitable for air
dampers, ventilation flaps, louvers, air handlers and VAV units.
D. Damper Actuators With Spring Return

1. The spring return actuators shall combine safety and control functionality and
provide on/off, floating, and modulating control interfaces with a wide range of
available accessories. These actuators shall have a bidirectional fail safe
functionality and a self-centering shaft adapter or exchangeable hub insert to fit
on all dampers quickly and securely. Quick start-up and service shall be ensured
by a manual override, a highly-visible position indicator, dual-point mounting
options and auxiliary switches. These products shall be suitable for ventilation
and air-conditioning systems for ventilation flaps and air handlers where the fail
safe functionality is required.
2.16 FIELD DEVICES - WATER FLOW SWITCHES / SENSORS
A. Water Flow Switches: UL listed, adjustable differential pressure or flow type as specified
in the sequence of operation or data point summary. Devices shall be pressure rated, as
required. Differential pressure switches shall have manifold with isolating valve for
servicing. Water flow switches shall open an electrical contact as the differential
pressure falls below a pre-adjusted pressure range setting
B. Water Flow Sensors: Analogue, solid state, precision, industrial type with stainless steel
meter body, flow element and manifold with isolating valves for calibration and
maintenance. Maximum error shall not exceed 0.5% of range. Pressure rated as
required.
2.17 OCCUPANCY SENSORS:
A. Occupancy sensor shall be of the passive infrared or ultrasonic receiver type. As a

minimum the occupancy sensor shall provide adjustments for timed-on delay and
sensor sensitivity.
2.18 OUTSIDE AIR MONITORING STATION
A. The outside air monitoring station shall consist of outside air temperature and relative
humidity sensors at roof level. The sensors shall be shielded from direct sunlight, and
shall be located away from any exhaust air outlets or other sources of heat which could
affect the accuracy of the temperature reading. The temperature and relative humidity
shall be transmitted globally to all systems requiring these values.
2.19 POINT SCHEDULES
A. Refer to Appendix below

1. 25 0000-1 - BAS POINT SCHEDULE - HVAC
2. 25 0000-2 - BAS POINT SCHEDULE – PLUMBING
3. 25 0000-3 - BAS POINT SCHEDULE – ELECTRICAL
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 COORDINATION
A. Contractor shall ensure that the work under this section shall not adversely affect the
work of other trades. Where work is installed in close proximity to or will interfere with
work of other trades, the Contractor shall work out satisfactory arrangements for the
approval of the Engineer.
B. At the operator’s workstation, sufficient 13A mains sockets shall be provided by the
electrical contractor to prevent the need for distribution adapters. Refer to drawings.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Forward to the Engineer submittal data relevant to valve schedules damper schedules
and other pertinent equipment information requiring approval prior to field installation.
Upon receipt of approval, proceed with installation, set up, calibrating and checking out
the various control and monitoring system
B. Conduits and wiring shall be properly supported and run in a neat and workmanlike
manner; run parallel to or at right angles to building structure when exposed and in
equipment rooms.
C. Wiring shall be installed in such a way that minimizes coupling of electromagnetic and
electrostatic interference on low voltage signals and data wiring, in order to avoid
disturbance of DDC equipment operation. This shall preferably be achieved by, but not
limited to:
1. Physical separation of greater than 50 mm between the power supply cables and
the signal and data cables
2. Use of braided screen mains cable, dressed close to metalwork, where mixed
wiring is unavoidable (Tenderers shall clearly specify the methods by which he
intends to eliminate any such interference with his signal and data transmission)
D. DDC shall be protected from interference by the operation of hand held radio
transmitters, radio pagers, etc., within 1 meter of the equipment.
E. Any modifications made to the system shall be incorporated into the operations and
maintenance manuals, and other documentation affected.
3.03 VERIFICATION
A. When installation of the system is complete, Forward to the Engineer data relevant to
point index, functions, limits, sequences, interlocks, and other pertinent information for
the system
B. Prior to on-line operation, calibrate equipment, verify transmission media operation and
perform in the presence of the Engineer a complete demonstration and readout of the
computer real-tile responsibilities of surveillance and command. This demonstration,
having satisfactorily met previously approved submittals, shall, with the Engineers
written acceptance, allow commissioning of the Building Automation System for on-line
operation.
C. Upon successful completion of system generation, requested the Engineer in writing to

inspect and approve the satisfactory operation of the Building Automation System, sub-
system(s) and accessories. After all items appearing on the snag list are completed,
make a second written request for system approval to the Engineer. As each or all
items are approved, obtain signature of the Engineer. Make a copy of this report for the
Engineer

D. Provide a detailed cross-check of each sensor within the system by making a
comparison between the reading at the sensor and a calibrated standard.
E. Pressure Switches to be checked for switching thresholds and hysterises settings.
F. Provide a cross-check of each control point within the system by making a comparison
between the control command and the field-controlled device.
G. Verify that all systems are operable from local controls in the specified failure mode
upon panel failure or loss of power.
H. Humidity sensors to be checked for accuracy using a wet/dry bulb thermometer.
I. All high priority alarm conditions to be simulated and the appropriate workstation
display/printer/pager/email etc responses verified.
J. Control interlocks and safety devices shall be simulated and verified.
K. The BAS Contractor shall revisit the site after handover to check and adjust the
parameters for BAS control to optimize settings.
L. Calibration of all devices will be demonstrated using instruments carrying valid

certification (to be made available for inspection prior to the demonstration).
3.04 DEMONSTRATION AND HANDOVER
A. Demonstration of the BAS system to the End User for acceptance shall be carried out
after a full system test has been passed and two weeks’ notice has been given to the
Architect/ Engineer.
1. Field Equipment Demonstration shall include but not limited to the followings:
a. Automatic control operation shall be verified by introducing an error into
the system and observing the proper corrective system response.
b. Selected time and set point schedules shall be verified by changing the
schedule and observing the correct response on the controlled outputs.
c. An output channel will be commanded (on/off, stop/start, adjust, etc.) and
operation verified.
d. An analog input channel will be verified for proper operation as displayed
at the operators workstation.
e. A digital input channel will be verified by changing the state of the field
device and observing the appropriate change of displayed value.
f. Typical occupancy control device function shall be demonstrated.
g. If a point should fail testing, perform necessary repair action and retest
failed point and all interlocked points.
2. Workstation Demonstration shall include but not limited to the followings:
a. Communication with typical Main Plant and ASC controllers will be
demonstrated.
b. Operator commands will be explained and demonstrated.
c. Selected control sequences shall be demonstrated for proper operation.
d. Review of Time Schedules and Alarm priorities.
e. Selected system reports and logs shall be demonstrated at the System
Workstation.
f. Correct system start-up and shutdown procedures shall be demonstrated.
g. Selected controllers shall be demonstrated to operate in a standalone
mode.
h. The contractor shall demonstrate on-site all of the software features
contained in this specification
3. The specialist BAS Contractor shall commission and handover the system to the
client or client’s representative on a point-to-point basis.
4. Services of competent personnel, having at least five (5) years’ experience in the
field and who have gained an intimate understanding of the project throughout its
design stages, shall be provided by the Contractor to commission the BAS.
5. Contractor shall prepare and submit a programme of commissioning; clearly
stating other disciplines involved and services required for each activity.
6. Where work is being carried out in an occupied building the management of the
building shall be kept fully informed regarding the nature of the testing and
commissioning. Steps shall be taken to ensure that any possible hazards or
inconvenience that may arise due to the testing and commissioning shall be
minimized.
7. System Handover shall include but not limited to the followings:
a. Any issues required corrective actions to be documented and agreed date
determined for clearance.
b. All access levels and passwords recorded and backed up.
c. Four Copies of all system and database files supplied on CD with
appropriate identification.
d. An Operator's Reference Table listing the addresses of all connected
points. Settings shall be shown where applicable.
e. Four bound hardcopies of Maintenance manuals including datasheets for
each item of equipment.
f. Two bound hardcopies of Operations manuals including safety checks
and start-up and close down procedures.
g. Six (6) hardcopies of BAS system drawings matching the installed
networks, equipment and peripheral connections, plus two soft copies of
CAD drawings on separate CDs.
h. Two bound hardcopies of the Flow charts of the control software
programs utilized in the Temperature Control System.
i. Two bound hardcopies of the Control Programs used in each DDC
controller.
j. Consumables, printer ribbons, printer paper at agreed levels.
k. All keys necessary for access to panels and equipment.
l. Training of engineers and operators to be checked complete or program
for completion agreed.
m. Operating and maintenance cautions and instructions.
n. Recommended spare parts list with contact details for suppliers.
3.05 OPERATOR TRAINING
A. Provide operator instruction both prior to Substantial Completion of the Project and
throughout the Maintenance Period. During Defects Liability Period Operator(s) to
attend at Site.
B. The BAS Contractor shall provide detailed on-site and off-site operation and
programming training to selected client staff. Training will be carried out separately for
both engineering and operator staff. Factory trained control engineers and technicians
shall provide training sessions for the client’s personnel. Training shall include but not
limited to the followings:
1. Explanation of drawings, operations and maintenance manuals
2. Overview of HVAC system
3. Walk-through of the job to locate control components.
4. Operator workstation and peripherals.
5. Operation of portable operator's workstation including any wireless equipment.
6. Use of Occupancy Controls.
7. Use of Keypad/Display devices with customized menus.
8. Use of Overrides and Passwords.
9. Use of Data logs, Time Schedules and Alarms handling.
10. Communication Controller, DDC Controller, ASC operation/function.
11. Operator control functions including graphic generation and field panel
programming.
12. Explanation of adjustment, tuning, calibration and replacement procedures
C. Since the Client may require personnel to have more comprehensive understanding of
the hardware and software, additional training must be available from the BAS
Contractor. If such training is required by the Client, it will be contracted at a later date at
no additional cost.
3.06 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
A. Control sequences are specified in "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls" section
23 0993 of HVAC specifications.
3.07 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion of the project or until
issuance of final completion certificate.
B. The contractor during that period shall provide labor and parts warranty on the installed
system. During that period, the contractor shall be responsible for the regular inspection
and maintenance as recommended by the manufacturer.
3.08 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. The Contractor shall prepare fully detailed Operation and Maintenance Manuals for the
system and submit to the Engineer for his approval.
END OF SECTION

Split A/C Units
BAS POINT SCHEDULE
HVAC System (DX- System)
Equipment/Function Description
Note: Exact quantity should be checked from design drawings.

Ventilation Fans (General exhaust and Toilet /Kitchen Exhaust Fans)
Quantity (Refer to drawings &

─
─
Equipment schedule for number of

equipment to obtain No of points)
Point schedule should be read in conjunction with drawings/specs/sequence of operation.
x
x
ON/OFF Status feedback

x
x
Trip Status
x
x
Auto/Manual-HOA Status
Smoke Detector
x
Diff.Pressure switch
Pulsed KWHr Meter
DIGITAL INPUT
Fire Alaram Signal

`Flow Switch
x
Temperature
Humidity
Damper/valves Actuators Feedback
CO Sensor
NO2 Sensor
CO2/Air Quality Sensor
Level Sensor
BTU Transmitter
Flow in USGPM
High duct Static Pressure Sensor

ANALOG INPUT
Stairwell/Lift Static Pressure Sensor

x
Flow in CFM
Pressure / DPSensor
Velocity Sensor
The number of points listed is the minimum. Contractor shall provide any additional point to make sure the system fully complete and fully functional without any additional cost to client
VFD Speed Feedback
Kilowatt
Valves Control
Damper Actuators Controls

Project: 19-3262-0000, 12NHC- C13 - Gas Branch
2 Speed Speed Control

ANALOG OUTPUT
VFD Speed Speed Control
SCR Heating Control
Enable/Disable
x
x
Start/Stop
Open/Close
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
BACnet Data
x
x
Graphics
x
x
General Alarm
x
x
Critical Alarm
x
x
Maintenance Alarm
Chillier Optimization
Time Program
Sequence Control
SOFTWARE
Energy Calculation
Set Point Adjust

x
Fire Alarm System Signal

x
x
Reports
Remarks
BAS POINT SCHEDULE Project: 19-3262-0000, 12NHC- C12 - Children Club
DIGITAL
HVAC System (VRF) DIGITAL INPUT ANALOG INPUT ANALOG OUTPUT
OUTPUT
SOFTWARE




VFD Speed Feedback

Pressure / DPSensor
SCR Heating Control

Pulsed KWHr Meter
Maintenance Alarm
Energy Calculation
Fire Alaram Signal
Sequence Control
Flow in USGPM
BTU Transmitter
Smoke Detector
Set Point Adjust

Velocity Sensor
Enable/Disable
Valves Control
General Alarm
Time Program
BACnet Data
Critical Alarm
Level Sensor
Temperature
`Flow Switch
Flow in CFM
NO2 Sensor
Open/Close
CO Sensor
Trip Status
Start/Stop
Graphics
Humidity
Reports
Kilowatt
Equipment/Function Description Remarks
VRF (For quantity Refer to Plans) Interfaced with BMS for control and monitor.
Unit Start/Stop ─ x x x x x x x BACnet Binary Output for Control
Run Status ─ x x x x x BACnet Binary Input for Monitoring
Fault Status ─ x x x x x x x x x BACnet Binary Input for Monitoring
SetPoint (Sets the set temperature of the indoor units) ─ x x x x x BACnet Analog Output for SP Adjust
FanSpeed Control (Sets the fan speed of all indoor units) ─ x x x x x BACnet Multistate Output for Speed Adjust
FanSpeed Status (Reads the fan speed of all indoor units) ─ x x x BACnet Multistate Input for Speed Value
Filter Status (Reads the Filter Status of all indoor units) ─ x x x BACnet Binary Input for Monitoring
Occupied Cool Setpoint ─ x x x BACnet Analog Value for SP Value
Occupied Heat Setpoint ─ x x x BACnet Analog Value for SP Value
Error Code (Reads the alarm code status of the indoor & Outdoor units) ─ x x x x x BACnet Multistate Input for Error Codes
ConsumptionTotal (Indicates Total consumption) ─ x x x BACnet Analog Input
Refrigerant Flow Value ─ x x x x x x BACnet Analog Input
Compressor Run Status ─ x x x x x x BACnet Binary Input
Cooling coil shall be controlled by VRF
VAV Air Handling Units ,
controller and rest of the points shall be
AHU Nos.(Refer to Plans)
controlled by DDC/BMS
Supply Fan with VFD ─ x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x (0-10v) VFD Feedback to be connected
Supply Air Duct ─ x x x x x x x x x
Return /Exhaust Fan with VFD ( If Applicable refer to the equipment schedule). x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x (0-10v) VFD Feedback to be connected
Return/Exhaust Air Ducts ( If Applicable refer to the equipment schedule). ─ x x x x x x
Mixed Air ─ x x x
Filters ─ x x x x x x
Dampers ─ x x x x x
BACnet Analog Out for Flow Control
Refrigerant Flow Control Command/Set Point Command ─ x x x
Command
Refrigerant Flow Value ─ x x x BACnet Analog Input for Flow Value
Heating Coil Control (where required refer schedules) ─ x x x x x
CO2 Sensor Interlocked with Fresh Air Inlet Motorized damper. x x x x x x x
Energy Recovery Unit ERU (ALL ERUs) controller and rest of the points shall be
Supply Fan with VFD Interlocked with Supply Air Flow Differential Pressure ─ x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x (0-10v) VFD Feedback to be connected
Return/Exhaust Fan with VFD Exhasut Air Flow Differential Pressure ─ x x x x x x x x x x x x x x (0-10v) VFD Feedback to be connected
Supply Air Duct ─ x x x x x x x x x x x
Outside Air Duct ─ x x x x x x x x
Return/Exhaust Air Ducts ─ x x x x x x x x
Supply Air Filters ( All Filters) ─ x x x x
Exhaust Air Filters ─ x x x x
Dampers ─ x x x x x x x
Command
Thermal Wheel ─ x x x x x x x x x x
Heating Coil Control ─ x x x x x
Heat Pipe (as applicable) ─ x x x x
Life Safety Smoke Ventilation Systems

Make up Air Fans with VFDs ─ x x x x x x x x x x x x x (0-10v) VFD Feedback to be connected
Smoke Exhaust Fans ─ x x x x x x x x x x
Motorized Smoke / Fire dampers :

(Qty.as per drawings and Local Authority approved x x x x x x x x
drawings & Civil Defence requirements)
Split A/C Units (Standby) ─ x x x x x x x x x x x
Ventilation Fans (General exhaust and Toilet /Kitchen Exhaust Fans) ─ x x x x x x x x x x x x x

BAS POINT SCHEDULE Project: 19-3262-0000, 12NHC- C11 - Library
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
SOFTWARE




VFD Speed Feedback

Pressure / DPSensor
SCR Heating Control

Pulsed KWHr Meter
Maintenance Alarm
Energy Calculation
Fire Alaram Signal
Sequence Control
Flow in USGPM
BTU Transmitter
Smoke Detector
Set Point Adjust

Velocity Sensor
Enable/Disable
Valves Control
General Alarm
Time Program
BACnet Data
Critical Alarm
Level Sensor
Temperature
`Flow Switch
Flow in CFM
NO2 Sensor
Open/Close
CO Sensor
Trip Status
Start/Stop
Graphics
Humidity
Reports
Kilowatt
Mixed Air ─ x x x
Command
Command
Pressure Independent VAV Box without Reheat- Modulating Volumetric

Damper- (Shutoff Type) Applicable for VAV A/C Systems. Refer to the
Modulating Volumetric Damper- Damper Control ─ x x x x x x x drawings and equiptment schedules.
Zone Temperature ─ x x x x x



BAS POINT SCHEDULE Project: 19-3262-0000, 12NHC- C10 - MOCI Building
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
SOFTWARE




VFD Speed Feedback

Pressure / DPSensor
SCR Heating Control

Pulsed KWHr Meter
Maintenance Alarm
Energy Calculation
Fire Alaram Signal
Sequence Control
Flow in USGPM
BTU Transmitter
Smoke Detector
Set Point Adjust

Velocity Sensor
Enable/Disable
Valves Control
General Alarm
Time Program
BACnet Data
Critical Alarm
Level Sensor
Temperature
`Flow Switch
Flow in CFM
NO2 Sensor
Open/Close
CO Sensor
Trip Status
Start/Stop
Graphics
Humidity
Reports
Kilowatt
Command



BAS POINT SCHEDULE Project: 19-3262-0000, 12NHC- C09 - Health - Ambulance Bldg.
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
SOFTWARE




VFD Speed Feedback

Pressure / DPSensor
SCR Heating Control

Pulsed KWHr Meter
Maintenance Alarm
Energy Calculation
Fire Alaram Signal
Sequence Control
Flow in USGPM
BTU Transmitter
Smoke Detector
Set Point Adjust

Velocity Sensor
Enable/Disable
Valves Control
General Alarm
Time Program
BACnet Data
Critical Alarm
Level Sensor
Temperature
`Flow Switch
Flow in CFM
NO2 Sensor
Open/Close
CO Sensor
Trip Status
Start/Stop
Graphics
Humidity
Reports
Kilowatt
Mixed Air ─ x x x
Refrigerant Flow Control Command/Set Point Command ─ x x x BACnet Analog Out for Flow Control Command
Energy Recovery Unit ERU (ALL ERUs)
Refrigerant Flow Control Command/Set Point Command ─ x x x BACnet Analog Out for Flow Control Command

Fresh / Makeup Air Handling Units ,
Outdoor Air Ducts ─ x x x x x x
Command
Pressure Independent VAV Box without Reheat- Modulating Volumetric

Damper- (Shutoff Type) Applicable for VAV A/C Systems. Refer to the
Modulating Volumetric Damper- Damper Control ─ x x x x x x x drawings and equiptment schedules.
VAV Box with Electric Reheat- Modulating Volumetric Damper- (Shutoff Type)
Applicable for VAV A/C Systems. Refer to the
Modulating Volumetric Damper- Damper Control ─ x x x x x x
drawings and equiptment schedules.
Heating Coil Control (where required) ─ x x x x x

Split A/C Units (Standby)
HVAC System (VRF)
BAS POINT SCHEDULE



─
─

x
x

x
x
Trip Status
x
x
Smoke Detector
x
x
Pulsed KWHr Meter
DIGITAL INPUT
Fire Alaram Signal

x
`Flow Switch
x
Temperature
Humidity
x

CO Sensor
NO2 Sensor
x

Level Sensor
BTU Transmitter
Flow in USGPM

ANALOG INPUT

x
x
Flow in CFM
Pressure / DPSensor
x
Velocity Sensor
VFD Speed Feedback
Kilowatt
Valves Control

Project: 19-3262-0000, 12NHC- C09 - Health - Ambulance Bldg.
ANALOG OUTPUT
SCR Heating Control
Enable/Disable
x
x
Start/Stop
Open/Close
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
BACnet Data
x
x
Graphics
x
x
General Alarm
x
x
Critical Alarm
x
x
Maintenance Alarm
Time Program
Sequence Control
SOFTWARE
Energy Calculation
Set Point Adjust

x

x
x
Reports
Remarks
BAS POINT SCHEDULE Project: 19-3262-0000, 12NHC- C08 - Post Office
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
SOFTWARE




VFD Speed Feedback

Pressure / DPSensor
SCR Heating Control

Pulsed KWHr Meter
Maintenance Alarm
Energy Calculation
Fire Alaram Signal
Sequence Control
Flow in USGPM
BTU Transmitter
Smoke Detector
Set Point Adjust

Velocity Sensor
Enable/Disable
Valves Control
General Alarm
Time Program
BACnet Data
Critical Alarm
Level Sensor
Temperature
`Flow Switch
Flow in CFM
NO2 Sensor
Open/Close
CO Sensor
Trip Status
Start/Stop
Graphics
Humidity
Reports
Kilowatt
Mixed Air ─ x x x
Command
Command



BAS POINT SCHEDULE Project: 19-3262-0000, 12NHC- C07 - Masjid
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
SOFTWARE




VFD Speed Feedback

Pressure / DPSensor
SCR Heating Control

Pulsed KWHr Meter
Maintenance Alarm
Energy Calculation
Fire Alaram Signal
Sequence Control
Flow in USGPM
BTU Transmitter
Smoke Detector
Set Point Adjust

Velocity Sensor
Enable/Disable
Valves Control
General Alarm
Time Program
BACnet Data
Critical Alarm
Level Sensor
Temperature
`Flow Switch
Flow in CFM
NO2 Sensor
Open/Close
CO Sensor
Trip Status
Start/Stop
Graphics
Humidity
Reports
Kilowatt
Mixed Air ─ x x x
Command
Command


BAS POINT SCHEDULE Project: 19-3262-0000, 12NHC- C06 - Municipality
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
SOFTWARE




VFD Speed Feedback

Pressure / DPSensor
SCR Heating Control

Pulsed KWHr Meter
Maintenance Alarm
Energy Calculation
Fire Alaram Signal
Sequence Control
Flow in USGPM
BTU Transmitter
Smoke Detector
Set Point Adjust

Velocity Sensor
Enable/Disable
Valves Control
General Alarm
Time Program
BACnet Data
Critical Alarm
Level Sensor
Temperature
`Flow Switch
Flow in CFM
NO2 Sensor
Open/Close
CO Sensor
Trip Status
Start/Stop
Graphics
Humidity
Reports
Kilowatt
Command


BAS POINT SCHEDULE Project: 19-3262-0000, 12NHC- C05 - Police Station
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
SOFTWARE




VFD Speed Feedback

Pressure / DPSensor
SCR Heating Control

Pulsed KWHr Meter
Maintenance Alarm
Energy Calculation
Fire Alaram Signal
Sequence Control
Flow in USGPM
BTU Transmitter
Smoke Detector
Set Point Adjust

Velocity Sensor
Enable/Disable
Valves Control
General Alarm
Time Program
BACnet Data
Critical Alarm
Level Sensor
Temperature
`Flow Switch
Flow in CFM
NO2 Sensor
Open/Close
CO Sensor
Trip Status
Start/Stop
Graphics
Humidity
Reports
Kilowatt
Mixed Air ─ x x x
Command
Command



BAS POINT SCHEDULE Project: 19-3262-0000, 12NHC- C04 - Citizen Service
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
SOFTWARE




VFD Speed Feedback

Pressure / DPSensor
SCR Heating Control

Pulsed KWHr Meter
Maintenance Alarm
Energy Calculation
Fire Alaram Signal
Sequence Control
Flow in USGPM
BTU Transmitter
Smoke Detector
Set Point Adjust

Velocity Sensor
Enable/Disable
Valves Control
General Alarm
Time Program
BACnet Data
Critical Alarm
Level Sensor
Temperature
`Flow Switch
Flow in CFM
NO2 Sensor
Open/Close
CO Sensor
Trip Status
Start/Stop
Graphics
Humidity
Reports
Kilowatt
Mixed Air ─ x x x
Command
Command


BAS POINT SCHEDULE Project: 19-3262-0000, 12NHC- C03 - Social Unit
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
SOFTWARE




VFD Speed Feedback

Pressure / DPSensor
SCR Heating Control

Pulsed KWHr Meter
Maintenance Alarm
Energy Calculation
Fire Alaram Signal
Sequence Control
Flow in USGPM
BTU Transmitter
Smoke Detector
Set Point Adjust

Velocity Sensor
Enable/Disable
Valves Control
General Alarm
Time Program
BACnet Data
Critical Alarm
Level Sensor
Temperature
`Flow Switch
Flow in CFM
NO2 Sensor
Open/Close
CO Sensor
Trip Status
Start/Stop
Graphics
Humidity
Reports
Kilowatt
Command


BAS POINT SCHEDULE Project: 19-3262-0000, 12NHC- C02 - Society Center
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
SOFTWARE




VFD Speed Feedback

Pressure / DPSensor
SCR Heating Control

Pulsed KWHr Meter
Maintenance Alarm
Energy Calculation
Fire Alaram Signal
Sequence Control
Flow in USGPM
BTU Transmitter
Smoke Detector
Set Point Adjust

Velocity Sensor
Enable/Disable
Valves Control
General Alarm
Time Program
BACnet Data
Critical Alarm
Level Sensor
Temperature
`Flow Switch
Flow in CFM
NO2 Sensor
Open/Close
CO Sensor
Trip Status
Start/Stop
Graphics
Humidity
Reports
Kilowatt
Mixed Air ─ x x x
Command
Command


BAS POINT SCHEDULE Project: 19-3262-0000, 12NHC- C01 - Supermarket & Retail
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
SOFTWARE




VFD Speed Feedback

Pressure / DPSensor
SCR Heating Control

Pulsed KWHr Meter
Maintenance Alarm
Energy Calculation
Fire Alaram Signal
Sequence Control
Flow in USGPM
BTU Transmitter
Smoke Detector
Set Point Adjust

Velocity Sensor
Enable/Disable
Valves Control
General Alarm
Time Program
BACnet Data
Critical Alarm
Level Sensor
Temperature
`Flow Switch
Flow in CFM
NO2 Sensor
Open/Close
CO Sensor
Trip Status
Start/Stop
Graphics
Humidity
Reports
Kilowatt
Mixed Air ─ x x x
Command
Command
Command
Car Park Smoke Exhaust Fans (All SEFs) with VFDs ─ x x x x x x x x x x x x x (0-10v) VFD Feedback to be connected
Car Park Make up Air Fans (ALL FAFs) with VFDs ─ x x x x x x x x x x x x x x (0-10v) VFD Feedback to be connected


Ecology Units
Cooler / Freezer
HVAC System (VRF)
BAS POINT SCHEDULE


─
─
─

x
x
x

x
x
x
Trip Status
x
x
x
Smoke Detector
x
x
Pulsed KWHr Meter
DIGITAL INPUT
Fire Alaram Signal

`Flow Switch
x
Temperature
Humidity
CO Sensor
NO2 Sensor
Level Sensor
BTU Transmitter
Flow in USGPM

ANALOG INPUT

x
x
Flow in CFM
Pressure / DPSensor
Velocity Sensor
VFD Speed Feedback
Kilowatt
Valves Control

Project: 19-3262-0000, 12NHC- C01 - Supermarket & Retail
ANALOG OUTPUT
x
x
SCR Heating Control
Enable/Disable
x
x
x
Start/Stop
Open/Close
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
BACnet Data
x
x
x
Graphics
x
x
x
General Alarm
x
x
x
Critical Alarm
x
x
x
Maintenance Alarm
Time Program
Sequence Control
SOFTWARE
Energy Calculation
Set Point Adjust

x
x

x
x
x
Reports
Remarks
Control Interface with MAHU

BAS POINT SCHEDULE Project: 12NHC
Manual Operator Analog Indication Alarms Energy Conservation

Initiated Command

Maintenance Message
Runtime Toalaization
Analog Totalization
Maintenance Alarm
(Auxiliary Contract)
Analog High Limit

Percentage Open
Analog Low Limit
Holiday Program
Flow in USGPM
Alarm Message
System Display
Pressure / DPS
Setpoint Adjust
Critical Alarm
Temperature
Flow in CFM
DDC Output
Flow Switch
Load Shed
Start/Stop
Kilowatts
Humidity
Quantity
Status
Spare
Spare
Trip
PLUMBING & FIRE PROTECTION
Domestic Water Supply System
Booster Pump (Set) VFD lot x x x x x x x x x
Transfer Pump (Set) lot x x x x x x x x x
Transfer Filtration Pump (Set) lot x x x x x x x x x
Domestic Filters lot x x x x x
Central Water Heaters lot x x x x x
Hot Water Circulation Pump (Set) lot x x x x x x x
Domestic and Fire Water Tanks (tank with two
compartments considered as two tanks) lot x x x x x x x x
Drainage System
Submersible Pumps Sets lot x x x x x x x x
Sump Level Control lot x x x x x x x x
Fire Protection System
Fire Pumps lot x x x x x x x x x x
Jockey Pump lot x x x x x x x x x x
Foam System lot x x x x x x
Clean Agent System lot x x x x x x x
Compressors & Vacuum pumps
Compressors set 1 x x x x x x x x x
Vacuum pumps set 1 x x x x x x x x x
KEO/19-3262-0000
Public Authority for Housing Welfare, Kuwait 25 0000-2 BAS Points Schedule - Plumbing Fire Fighting
ELECTRICAL POINTS MONITORED/ CONTROLLED BY BAS/ IBMS
SL No EQUIPMENT POINTS Action by BAS/IBMS
1 ALL ACBs in MLTB Panel and Generator Panel

Refer to Specification Section 26 2413 - Switchboards, Clause 2.03.C.3 Monitored
2 ALL MCCBs in MLTB and Generator Panel
ON STATUS Monitored
OFF STATUS Monitored
TRIP STATUS Monitored
3 Main/ Sub-Main Distribution Boards [MSB} / [SMSB]
MAIN BREAKER ON STATUS Monitored
MAIN BREAKER OFF STATUS Monitored
4 Distribution Boards [DB]
ON STATUS Monitored
OFF STATUS Monitored
5 Motor Control Centers [MCC]
MAIN BREAKER ON STATUS Monitored
MAIN BREAKER TRIP STATUS Monitored
EACH MOTOR START/STOP Controlled
EACH MOTOR TRIP STATUS Monitored
EACH MOTOR H/O/A (AUTO POSITION) Monitored
6 Variable Frequency Drives [VFD]
EACH MOTOR H/O/A SWITCH STATUS Monitored
EACH MOTOR TRIP ALARM Monitored
EACH VFD SPEED CONTROL Monitored
EACH VFD SPEED FEEDBACK Monitored
EACH VFD FAULT ALARM SIGNAL Monitored
VFD ENABLE/DISABLE COMMAND Controlled
7 Generators
High Level Interface/ Software Integration Monitored
8 ATS
NORMAL POWER Monitored
EMERGENCY POWER Monitored
COMMON FAULT Monitored
9 UPS
10 Fire Alarm System
11 Elevators
Status Monitored
Alarm Monitored
Fire alarm signal Monitored
12 ELR Audio Visual Alarm in Electrical Panels
KEO/19-3262-0000
Public Authority for Housing Welfare, Kuwait 25 0000-3/1 BAS Points Schedule - Electrical
Alarm Monitored
KEO/19-3262-0000
13 Generator Day/ Storage Tank

FUEL LEVELS Monitored
14 Automatic Power Factor Correction
Low Power Factor Monitored
Over Compensation Monitored
Low Voltage Monitored
Over Voltage Monitored
Capacitor Lost Monitored
15 All ICT/ AV/ ELV/ Gate Barrier / Security Systems
Status Monitored
Alarm Monitored
KEO/19-3262-0000
SECTION 26 0500
COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The contractor shall complete, commission and hand over the works in accordance with
the design intent expressed in contract documents. In general, the project comprises the
following works. General elements of scope of work include:
1. Provision of all labour, equipment and materials required to complete the works
according to the Design Intent. Provision means supply, installation, test,
commission and put to operation.
2. Additional hardware, incidentals and any other work necessary for completion of
the works and safe, correct operation of each system, whether such item or work
is detailed in Specifications and on Drawings or not.
3. Verification of existing conditions on site prior to tendering. Arranging with and
paying for the Ministry of Electricity and Water & Renewable Energy (MEW)
authorities to re-route their services should such services exist on site.
4. Temporary power supplies for construction purposes for the duration of the
works.
5. Arranging for and carrying out necessary approvals with the MOC for the
telephone system.
6. Arranging for and carrying out necessary approvals with the Kuwait Fire Force
(KFF) if required.
7. Preparation of shop / construction / installation drawings for approval.
8. Builder's work, ducts, inserts and sleeves required for the works
9. On-site coordination with all other services and trades, liaison with members of
the professional team, attendance on meetings as required.
10. Testing, commissioning and certification that the work has been completed and
inspected in accordance with the requirements of the relevant Regulations.
11. “As Built” drawings, “Operation and Maintenance Manuals” and other project-
specific record documents.
12. Training of the Employer’s staff in the operation of the systems installed.
13. Defects Notification: refer to contract conditions specified in this Section Clause
3.05.
14. Maintenance during the Defect Notification Period: refer to contract conditions in
this Section Clause 3.05.
15. Spare parts: refer to this Section Clause 1.13.
B. Electrical System
1. Containment system (spaces, wire ways, cable ducts, trays, conduits etc.) for
Electrical system.
2. Electrical installations cabling and equipment, switchboards, distribution boards,
earthing system etc.
a. Provision of final sub-circuits and electrical services such as power and
lighting.
KEO/19-3262-0000 26 0500/1 Common Requirements For Electrical Installations
b. Small power, general power outlets and equipment outlets.
c. Provision of internal, external, Exit and emergency lighting.
3. Electrical services for other trades. Power and relevant controls for elevators, fire
protection equipment, air conditioning, ventilation, plumbing and auxiliary
equipment such as kitchen equipment, electric water heaters, electric hand
dryers, etc. Motors, starters, controls and the like, electrically operated doors,
interlocks between electric doors and the fire alarm system where required.
Dampers and other devices operated by signals from fire alarm system. (The
supply and final connections of mechanical equipment is specified in Divisions
21, 22, 23 and 25).
4. Earthing
5. Lighting control and dimming
6. Engine Generators
7. Static Uninterruptible Power Supply
8. Power Factor Correction Equipment
9. Transfer Switches
10. Lightning Protection for Structures
11. Interior Lighting
C. Communications
1. Telephone System
2. Communications Cabling System
3. AV System
4. IPTV/ Digital Signage System
5. Queue Management System
6. Emergency Call System for Special Need Persons
D. Electronic Safety and Security

1. Security Video Surveillance System
2. Fire Detection, Alarm and Emergency Voice Excavation System
E. Integrated Automation
1. Building Automation System
F. Exact location of all equipment and components to be approved on site by the Engineer.
Contractor shall be fully responsible for the final design, detailing of the works described
loss or damage in connection with any error in or failure of the Contractor's designed
1.03 PREQUALIFICATION OF DESIGN BUILD CONTRACTORS:
A. The proposed manufacturer(s) must hold a quality system certificate such as ISO, Key
Mark or equivalent, for his manufacturing assembly process and quality control.

B. The equipment should have at least 10 years of life expectancy.
C. All the main equipment should be from a manufacturer with appropriate standards
compliance and certification from the country of origin.
D. The Supplier of the equipment must be an approved agent or representative of the

manufacturer in the country.
E. The Supplier should be an approved agent for all the installed equipment.
F. The Supplier should be an established company of at least five years.
G. The Supplier must be able to fully support any warrantees associated with the
equipment and the complete installation undertaken by them.
H. The Supplier must be capable of providing and supporting any maintenance activities
associated with the equipment by trained personnel.
I. The Supplier must carry a stock of critical parts in the event of breakdown and must be
able to supply consumables under any planned maintenance schedules within a
maximum agreed time.
J. The Supplier must be able to provide training to any nominated 3rd party operators
using the equipment.
1.04 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM.
A. The electrical system comprises the following subsystems

1. Electrical power distribution
2. Small power installations
3. Earthing
4. Internal and external lighting
B. Earthing system will be provided for, 0.415kV system, and Telecommunications

systems.
C. Lighting Systems
1. Lighting system well-coordinated with the interiors is provided for the entire
project.
1.05 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF COMMUNICATIONS
A. Please refer to Telecommunication specification.
B. Please refer to Telephone System specification
C. Please refer to Door Intercom System Specification.
1.06 DESIGN CONDITIONS
A. Electrical Supply
1. Entire Electrical system shall be designed to Ministry of Electricity and Water &
Renewable Energy (MEW) compliant power supply

2. 3 phase, 4 wires, 415 V, 50 Hertz of adequate capacity and having the following
tolerances:
a. Voltage +/- 6%
b. Frequency +/- 4%
c. Neutral solidly earthed
B. Climatic Condition
1. The climate in Kuwait in the summer months is hot and humid and a humidity of
100% at 30ºC has been recorded.
2. Violent sand and dust storms of several hours duration occur and even on
comparatively still days, fine dust is carried in suspension in the atmosphere.
3. All apparatus and equipment shall, therefore be so designed and constructed
that they operate satisfactorily and without any deleterious effect for prolonged
and continuous periods in the conditions stated above and at the following
ambient temperature conditions:
a. Maximum sun radiation temperature in summer - 84 ºC
b. Maximum ambient temperature in summer - 52 ºC
c. Average max. ambient temperature in summer - 45 ºC
d. Minimum ambient temperature in winter - 6 ºC
e. The altitude of Kuwait may be taken as sea level.
4. The temperature quoted above make no allowance for heat generated from
equipment itself or from any other equipment in the vicinity.
5. The capacity and ratings of all electrical equipment and materials given are,
unless otherwise indicated, for Kuwait climatic conditions. Provide the basis of
the de-rating factors applied in each case.
6. Where specific sizes are indicated eg cable sizes, due allowances have been
made in the design for the climatic conditions of Kuwait and de-rating has been
applied.
7. Where no ratings or sizes are indicated for components and other accessories,
supply equipment which will give trouble free service in the ambient conditions
stated above.
C. Regulation, Codes And Standards

1. Design, manufacturing, erection and testing of all system equipment shall
conform to the following:
a. MEW R1 - Regulations for Electrical Installations (6th Edition 2014)
b. MEW S1 - General Specification for Electrical Installations (4th Edition
2014)
c. MEW R6 - Energy conservation program (2014)
d. BS7671: 2008 Requirements for Electrical Installations by the Institute of
Electrical Engineers, 17th edition and its Amendments (IEE Wiring
Regulations).
e. Recommendations of other relevant British and European Standard
Specifications, the International Electro-technical Commission (IEC),
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
f. Lighting related recommendations and standards of IEE and Society of
Light & Lighting (SLL - CIBSE), Illuminating Engineering Society of North
America IESNA.
g. Lighting will be designed in accordance with Infiniti Retail Environment
Design Initiative (IREDI) Technical Guide, May 2007.
h. ANSI / EIA / TIA Telecommunications Standards, MOC regulations for
telephone installations.
i. Fire Detection and Alarm: NFPA 72, NFPA 101 and Kuwait Fire
Department Standards
j. International Organization for Standards (ISO) Certification.
2. All materials and equipment shall be the best of their respective kind. The
Contractor shall ensure that each proposed category of equipment or material
shall be from approved manufacturers who would assume single-source
responsibility of the product.
1.07 EXISTING SERVICES
A. The contractor is deemed to have visited and inspected the site to familiarize himself
with the existing site conditions and services at tender stage.
B. The contractor shall obtain the existing services record drawings from Kuwait Mucipality
and various utility services departments.
C. Co-ordination between shop drawings, work on site and existing services shall be
carried out by the Contractor.
D. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for rerouting and reconfiguring of existing
services within the site, as well as for any damages to the existing services including
repairs, and penalties imposed by the concerned parties etc. and for removing any site
obstacles such as underground cables, pipes, civil works etc. which is obstructing his
work on site.
E. The Contractor shall also be responsible for liaison with Ministry of Electricity and Water
& Renewable Energy (MEW) and all other government utility departments to disconnect
the existing services supply to the existing site prior to demolishing.
A. Selection and Erection of Equipment.

1. The contractor shall have available to their personnel the standards, codes, rules
and regulations referred to by name in the Specifications bearing in mind that the
final responsibility for the correct selection and erection of equipment rests with
the contractor.
2. Conformity of equipment and material with the relevant standards may be
attested by:
a. an official conformity mark granted by the standards organization
concerned, or
b. a certificate of conformity issued by an internationally recognized
laboratory, or
c. a declaration of conformity from the manufacturer.
3. External influences:
a. Electrical installations should be selected, erected, located and /or further
protected mechanically against damage from external influences based
on IEC-364, IEE Wiring Regulations and applicable local standards, such
as ingress of water, humidity, dust, rust, heat, fire, atmospheric corrosion,
wind, solar radiation, vibration and mechanical stress.
b. Minimum degree of protection provided by an enclosure (IP code) shall be
as follows, unless otherwise indicated more stringently elsewhere in the
Documents:
c. IP44 for wet area and all pump rooms.
d. IP54 for outdoor installations.

e. Hazardous areas (where applicable) include the Chemical & chlorination
locations in the Facility.
B. Single-Source Responsibility:
1. Ensure that each category of selected material or equipment shall be of a
particular range of one manufacturer who would take full responsibility of the
product.
C. Certificate Of Origin:
1. Provide certificate of origin along with the packing list on delivery of material and
equipment.
1.09 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATION AND QUALITY OF STAFF/PERSONNEL
A. Electrical contractor executing this work shall be to the classifications required by

Ministry of Electricity and Water & Renewable Energy (MEW) and shall carry a valid
license. The electrical contractor shall be classified by C.T.C. registration as class-3
minimum, and approved by P.A.H.W. Electrical Contractor shall have minimum 10 year
experience in the installation of similar size and complexity systems.
B. The electrical services installation shall be carried out in a professional manner by

experienced and qualified personnel.
C. Prior to the commencement of works the Contractor shall notify of his intended site
staffing levels.
D. Contractor shall appoint minimum one Graduate Electrical Engineers for the site work,
(at least one of them with A Grade license form Ministry of Electricity and Water &
Renewable Energy (MEW)) with minimum 10 year experience in similar installations.
E. The name, qualifications and experience of the nominated engineers shall be submitted
to the Engineer for approval within 15 days of the receipt of the order to commence the
works.
F. An Electrical Foreman of 15 year experience in similar projects should be full time

available on site for direct follow up and implementation of the electrical works.
G. Qualified and Experienced Electricians shall be available on site to carry out the works
in accordance with the Project program.
1.10 SUBMITTALS:
A. Preparation of Shop Drawings:

1. Tender drawings indicate general layout of the requirements of respective
electrical systems included. Co-ordinate with the drawings of all other trades
(Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, HVAC etc.) and investigate prevailing site
situation prior to commencement of work, taking into consideration the following:
a. The indication and/or description of any item on the Drawings or in the
Specification, unless otherwise specifically stated, imply an instruction to
supply and fix such items.
b. Notes on Drawings referring to individual items of work take precedence
over the Specification.

c. Drawings show the general run of cables, raceways, etc. and the
approximate location of equipment and utilities; symbols and schematic
diagrams are of no dimensional significance.
2. Obtain dimensions not shown on, or which cannot be determined from Drawings.
Do not scale drawings to obtain locations.
3. Notify of conflicting requirements. Where departures from the drawings are
deemed necessary, details of such departure and reasons thereupon shall be
submitted for approval.
4. No such departure shall be made without prior written approval.
5. The prepared shop drawings should be extracted from coordinated combined
services drawings, with dimensions, distances and heights.
6. The change of levels of services routings should be indicated as well as height.
7. Depends on complexities in the areas, up to 5 selected Cross section details in
each drawing should be provided as per Consultant and Client requests.
8. Prepare shop drawings showing all installation details including but not in a way
of limitation, electric service entrance ducts and manholes, exact location of
electrical equipment and outlets (power, light, communication and signal) cable
runs, trenches, electrical equipment mounting details Switch Boards, MCCs,
DBs, Control Panels, Variable Frequency Drives, Generators, Lights, cables and
cable trays, earthing, etc.) all in accordance with the relevant national and
international standards, regulations and codes and to the recommendations of
the manufacturer.
9. Prepare schedule of points of distribution boards. Extent of information and
circuit details required shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer and to
Engineer’s satisfaction.
10. Ensure that all builders work details for various electrical equipment, which are
needed early in the construction program, are well established in the early stages
of construction. This includes, but not in a way of limitations, Ministry of Electricity
and Water & Renewable Energy (MEW) electric service ducts and manholes,
substation civil details make direct contact with the MEW civil department and
obtain their approval, generators and auxiliary services layout, switchgears, cable
routes, telephone entrance ducts and handholes, telephone exchange, Data
communication equipment and others as indicated in the specifications and
drawings.
11. The contractor shall accept full functional responsibility and compliance of all
electrical, communications and fire systems to the regulations, specifications and
standards stipulated in this specification. In cases of conflict between
requirements of local authorities and specified International Standards the former
shall have Precedence, unless otherwise specified more stringent. The
contractor should bring in due course to the attention of the Engineer any
conflicts.
B. Progress Drawings
1. The Contractor shall provide one full set of shop drawings and keep it at the job
throughout the construction period for purpose of recording any changes whether
additions, deletions or relocation resulting thereof from any co-ordination VO’s,
RFI’s and/or site instructions. This set of drawings will be the basis upon which
the contractor will prepare the As-built Drawings.
C. As-built Drawings
1. Upon completion of each facility under this contract, the Contractor shall prepare
and furnish as-built drawings. The as-built drawings shall be a record of the
construction as installed and completed by the Contractor. They shall include all
the information shown on the contract set of drawings and all other related
drawings, modifications, or changes from those drawings, however minor, which
were incorporated in the work, including all additional work not appearing on the
contract drawings, and all changes which are made after any final inspection of
the contract work. In the event the Contractor performed additional work, which
changes the as-built conditions of the facility after submission of the final as-built
drawings, the Contractor shall furnish revised and/or additional drawings and
drawing files as required supporting final as-built condition.
2. The Contractor shall certify and label all systems at the completion of the
installation project, and after any modifications are made to an existing system.
All labeling shall be plastic or metal tags that will withstand fading and/or
corrosion. Labels shall be white, ¾” high by length suitable to have address
printed with ½” black lettering. All labels shall be mechanically fastened to
surface adjacent to device with stainless steel screws or pop rivets. Glue or
plastic strip labels neither shall be used nor will it be accepted.
3. The Main Contractor shall engage qualified and accredited Design Consultant to
upload Construction As Built Documents to the approving Authorities as per
submittal and conditions of such authorities.
4. Contractor shall be responsible for all conditions and completeness level for all
planned or required Field Construction Inspection required for final Authority
approval, including but not limited to the final power and utilities connections by
such Authorities
1.11 WARNING SIGNS, NOTICES AND LABEL
A. Provide warning signs, as well as prohibitions mandatory and safety signs for giving
safety information in accordance with BS 5378 Part 1: 1980 and identify materials and
equipment and circuits so marked for easy recognition in a durable and lasting manner
as required by the BS7671: 2008 Requirements for Electrical Installations.
B. The Contractor shall certify and label all systems at the completion of the installation
project. All labeling shall be plastic or metal tags that will withstand fading and/or
corrosion. Labels shall be white, suitable to be printed with black lettering. All labels
shall be mechanically fastened to surface adjacent to device with stainless steel screws
or pop rivets. Glue or plastic strip labels neither shall be used nor will be accepted.
1.12 TESTING
A. General
1. Testing and commissioning of equipment and services of a specialized nature
shall be supervised by the manufacturers’ technical representative(s).A visual
inspection of the installation should be made to ensure all equipment and
materials comply with the relevant standards and regulations. A checklist for
initial inspection should include those items indicated in the BS7671:2008
Requirements for Electrical Installations.
2. During erection and/or completion, the electrical installation shall be tested
before it is connected to the power supply. Sequence of test and testing
methods shall be as stipulated in the BS 7671.

A. General
1. Submit a list of all spare parts required for two years of proper operation starting
from the date of issue of the Maintenance Certificate.
2. Provide sufficient spare parts as may be required for the proper and satisfactory
operation of the respective electrical equipment or part of equipment.
3. Spare parts required shall include but not necessarily be limited to,
a. Items listed below.
b. Specified elsewhere in other sections of the Contract Documents.
c. Where quantities for each part or equipment are recommended by the
manufacturer.
4. Spare parts shall be delivered to the Owner’s central storage facility.
B. Detailed Pricelist
1. The contractor shall submit with his offer detail prices of the spare parts required
to be provided under the Contract indicating the unit rate of each item.
C. Compulsory Items Required: The following items shall be furnished in all major
equipment rooms (such as HT Room, transformer rooms, LT Room, Electrical Rooms,
Main Telecom Rooms, Site Security Room etc.) prior to project handing over:
1. Rubber mat
2. First Aid Tools
3. Framed single line diagrams, etc.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Refer to individual specification sections for detailed requirements.
B. Prior to placing order for any equipment or material, the contractor shall submit
comprehensive documentation comprising working drawings, catalogues and
descriptive literature of components, maintenance manuals, samples etc for review and
acceptance.
C. Review and acceptance of the Engineer’s Representative does not relieve the
Contractor from his contractual obligations for deviations from the requirements of the
Contract Documents.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
A. General: Sequence, co-ordinate, and integrate the various elements of electrical

systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements:
1. Co-ordinate electrical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other
building components. Proposed location of all equipment cable routes, fittings,
ducts, outlets etc. shown on the drawings is only indicative. Exact location shall
be determined at site during construction.
2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.

3. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during
progress of construction, to allow for electrical installations.
4. Co-ordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set
in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are
constructed.
5. Sequence, co-ordinate, and integrate installations of electrical materials and
equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large
equipment requiring positioning prior to closing the building.
6. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems,
materials, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.
7. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal
data, including co-ordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to
arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognising that portions of
the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where co-ordination
requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to
Engineer.
8. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and
perpendicular to other building systems and components, where installed
exposed in finished spaces.
9. Install electrical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or
replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect
equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other
installations.
10. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems
required to be installed at a specified slope.
11. Permit to Work or Permit to carry out duties within spaces, rooms, systems and
equipment: Contractor to implement control system limiting access to authorized
personnel only after installation of equipment.
12. All electrical installations in the roof shall be protected from the direct sun with
suitable shading
3.02 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wire ways, cable trays, or bus
ways penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall
assemblies.
B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or
formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.
C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall
assemblies unless openings compatible with fire stop system used are fabricated during
construction of floor or wall.
E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.
F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 50 mm above finished floor level.
G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 6.4-mm annular clear space between sleeve and raceway
or cable, unless indicated otherwise.
H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry
1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool
exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.
I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between
sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location
of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants".
J. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions,

ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway
and cable penetration sleeves with fire stop materials. Comply with requirements in
Section 7 "Penetration Fire stopping."
K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with

flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
L. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves

and water tight mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 25-mm annular
clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing water tight mechanical sleeve seals.
M. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to

allow for 25-mm annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing
water tight mechanical sleeve seals.
3.03 WATER TIGHT SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION
A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.
B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway
or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and
sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand
and make watertight seal.
3.04 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply fire stopping to penetrations of fire-related floor and wall assemblies for electrical
installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Fire stopping materials
and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section “Penetration Fire
stopping.
3.05 GUARANTEE PERIOD (DEFECTS NOTIFICATION PERIOD)
A. Contractor shall be completely responsible for repairing, replacing with new to the
satisfaction of Owner, all and any Electrical installed system found defective or not
satisfactorily operating, for a period of 2 years from the date of substantial completion,
without any extra cost to the Owner.
3.06 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance Service

1. Furnish complete service and maintenance of the complete electrical system and
components during the construction contract and warranty & maintenance
period.
2. Contractor shall as precautionary and preventive measures list all anticipated
defects and notify the Owner. This shall include the cleaning, adjusting and
maintaining of all equipment.
3. In case of failure of any of the systems included, the contractor shall rectify and
do necessary work. He shall show deep diligence to any defect within 24 hours.
4. The contractor shall rectify all faults observed and repair or replace parts that
served their expected service life. He shall use parts produced by the
manufacturer of the original equipment.
5. The contractor shall maintain in Kuwait an adequate stock of replacement parts
for emergency purpose and shall have qualified personnel available for the
maintenance work without loss of time.
6. Spares shall be available for a minimum period of two (2) years after hand-over
of works.
7. The maintenance work shall not be assigned or transferred to any subcontractor
without the written approval of the Owner.
8. Train and provide periodical instruction to the Owner’s operating/ maintenance
staff according to an approved logical program.
9. Contractor shall be required to attend to any emergency call during the
maintenance period, within 24 hours of such call.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 0519
LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1. This Section specifies the general requirements for power cables and small
wiring systems. It shall be read in conjunction with other parts of the Project
Documentation.
2. PVC Insulated armored cables (LSF sheath)
3. PVC Insulated armoured cables (PVC sheath):
4. PVC Insulated LSF sheathed (PVC/LSF) cable
5. PVC Insulated PVC sheathed (PVC/PVC) cable
6. Single core PVC wires
7. Heat resistant and high temperature cable
8. Flexible cable
9. 600/1000V rated XLPE insulated cable (LSF sheath)
10. 600/1000V rated XLPE insulated cable (PVC sheath)
11. Fire resistant cables: (up to 25mm²)
12. Fire resistant cables (multi-core up to 400mm²)
13. Mineral Insulated Cable
14. Cable glands
15. Cable sealing compounds
16. Cleats
17. Cable markers

1. Division 26 Section 26 0500 “Common Requirements for Electrical Installations”
4. Division 26 Section 26 0543 “Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical
Systems”
6. Division 26 Section 26 2413 “Switchgear”
7. Division 26 Section 26 2413 “Distribution Boards”
8. Division 26 Section 26 2419 “Motor-Control Centers”
9. Division 26 Section 26 4113 “Lightning Protection for Structures”
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions include:
1. AWA: Aluminium Wire Armoured
KEO/19-3262-0000 26 0519/1 Low Voltage Electrical Cables
2. CuWA: Copper Wire Armoured
3. LSF: Low Smoke Fume
4. LSZH: Low Smoke Zero Halogen
5. PVC: Polyvinyl Chloride
6. SWA: Steel Wire Armoured
7. XLPE: Cross Linked Poly Ethylene

1. BS 1442 Galvanized mild steel wire for armouring cables
2. BS 2484 Straight concrete clay ware covers
3. BS 2897 Aluminium strip armour for cables
4. BS 3506 Un-plasticised PVC pipe for industrial purposes
5. BS 4066 (IEC 332) Tests on electric cables under fire conditions
6. BS 4660 Un-plasticised polyvinyl chloride (UPVC) pipes and plastic fittings of
nominal sizes 100 and 150 for below ground level.
7. BS 5308 Instrumentation cables.
8. BS 5467 (IEC 502) Cables with thermosetting Insulation for electricity supply for
voltages of up to and including 600/1000 V.
9. BS 6004 (IEC 227) PVC insulated cables (non-armoured) for electrical power
10. BS 6007 Rubber insulated cables for electric power and lighting
11. BS 6207 (IEC 245) Mineral insulated cables.
12. BS 6234 Polythene insulation and sheath for cables.
13. BS 6346 PVC insulated cables for electrical supply.
14. BS 6360 (IEC 228) Copper conductors for cables.
15. BS 6500 (IEC 227) Insulated flexible cords.
16. BS 6746 PVC Insulation and sheath of electric cables
17. BS 6899 Rubber insulation and sheath of electric cables
18. BS 7671 Requirements for electrical installations
19. ISO 9000 Quality management and assurance standards.
20. IEC/BS EN 60502-1 Power cables with extruded insulation and their accessories
for rated voltages from 1 kV (Um = 1,2 kV) up to 30 kV (Um = 36 kV) - Part 1:
Cables for rated voltages of 1 kV (Um = 1,2 kV) and 3 kV (Um = 3,6 kV)
21. IEC/BS EN 60228: Conductors of insulated cables
22. BS EN 1025 Zinc or zinc alloy coated non-alloy steel wire for armouring either
power cables or telecommunication cables
23. BS 5467: Electric cables -Thermosetting insulated, armoured cables for
voltages of 600/1000 V and 1900/3300 V
24. BS EN 50525-2-71: Electric cables - Low voltage energy cables of rated voltages
up to and including 450/750 V (U0/U) Cables for general applications.
25. IEC 60227-1: Polyvinyl chloride insulated cables of rated voltages up to and
including 450/750 V - Part 1: General requirements
26. IEC 60227-2: Part 2: Test methods
27. IEC 60227-3: Part 3: Non-sheathed cables for fixed wiring
28. IEC 60227-4: Part 4: Sheathed cables for fixed wiring
29. IEC 60227-5: Part 5: Flexible cables (cords)
30. IEC 60227-6: Part 6: Lift cables and cables for flexible connections
31. BS 2897: Specification for wrought aluminium for electrical purposes. Strip with
drawn or rolled edges
32. IEC 60245-1: Rubber insulated cables - Rated voltages up to and including
450/750 V - Part 1: General requirements
33. IEC 60245-2: Part 2: Test methods
34. IEC 60245-3: Part 3: Heat resistant silicone insulated cables
35. IEC/BS EN 60702-1: Mineral insulated cables and their terminations with a rated
voltage not exceeding 750 V - Part 1: Cables
36. Cable termination shall comply with the following standard specifications:-
37. BS 6121-1: Mechanical cable glands - Armour glands “Requirements and test
methods
38. BS EN 50262: Cable glands for electrical installations
39. IEC/BS EN 60702-2: Mineral insulated cables and their terminations with a rated
voltage not exceeding 750 V - Part 2: Terminations
40. IEC/BS EN 61238-1: Compression and mechanical connectors for power cables
for rated voltages up to 30 kV (Um = 36 kV) - Part 1: Test methods and
requirements
A. Validate suitability of the size of cables selected to be used for the selected electric
energy-operating equipments. Refer to the technical tables of the cables available from
the approved manufacturer, with due consideration to the following parameters,
1. Type of cable and wire
2. Ambient conditions
3. Method of installation
4. The disposition of each cable relative to other cables
5. Fault power level
6. Protective device ratings
B. Voltage drop at the final point of utilization shall not exceed 2.5% measured from the
main electric service of the installations.
C. Voltage drop and current ratings shall be calculated according to BS7671 (latest edition)
Requirements for Electrical Installations and local power supply Authorities.
D. All cables and wires shall be suitable for installation and continuous service in the
ambient conditions described in SECTION 26 0500, and shall be manufactured to ISO
9000 or equivalent.
E. Cable routes and equipment power ratings indicated on the Project Drawings are for
guidance for tendering purposes. The Contractor shall determine exact cable lengths
from site measurements and calculate cable size from the power ratings of the actual
equipment being proposed. The Contractor shall be responsible for any increase in
costs or redesign work associated with proposed equipment, which has different
electrical characteristics than the equipment on which the design was based.
F. Cables selected shall be from manufacturers whose product have been in satisfactory
use in similar services and environments. Substantiate with certification.
1.06 SUBMISSIONS: The following submittals are required:
A. Shop Drawings and Product Data:

1. Submit full technical details including cable sizing calculations and catalogue

2. Including information of each type of cable or wire proposed approval before
ordering
3. Submit copy of test certificates from the manufacturer or an independent testing
authority confirming that cables comply with the Specifications
4. Submit certificate of origin of cables.
5. Submit exact route of the cable runs and relevant items in the shop drawings,
including fixing details and termination details.
6. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Refer to section “Environmental Conditions” in Division 26 0500 - Common

Requirements for Electrical Installations
A. Warranty Period: Shall be as per the contract document.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

documents, use only firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of Low Voltage Electrical
Cables, of types and capacities required which have been in satisfactory use in similar
or service for not less than five (5) years and approved by the Engineer.
2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. The Contractor shall be aware of the need to supply and install all wire and cables for
this Contract, which are most suitable for the special environmental conditions prevailing
in the country.
B. All conductors shall have good fatigue resistance and not be subject to breaks due to
nicks or cuts when terminating.
2.03 CABLES
A. Unless otherwise specified, cables and wires of the following specified voltage ratings
shall be used as indicated.
1. 600/1000 V rated cables: Main and sub-main distribution panels, motor control
centers, circuits serving process equipment
2. 450/750 V rated cables: Final sub-circuit supplies for lighting, socket outlets, etc.
3. 300/500 V rated cables: Instrumentation
4. 250 V rated cables: Extra low voltage wiring, communication circuits where the
maximum voltage is 50 V.
B. General:
1. Conductors shall be high conductivity copper, to BS 6360 (IEC 228) unless
otherwise indicated
2. Flexible cords shall have fine stranded conductors
3. Cable color: In addition to the safety compliance and quality assurance issues,
cables should fully align with those widely-used national and international
standards. Insulation for each conductor shall be color coded or otherwise
identified as required by the local authority regulations. Color coding shall be
maintained throughout the installation.
4. All cables shall be as far as practicable, of one manufacturer only.
C. PVC Insulated armored cables (LSF Sheath):

1. PVC/SWA/LSF cable: 600/1000 V Grade, to BS 6346
2. Conductor: Annealed high conductivity copper, stranded, shaped and laid in an
approved manner
3. Armour: Single layer of galvanized steel wires for multi-core cables
4. LSZH for sheath to BS 6724and insulation BS 6346
5. Cables shall be terminated with compression glands as specified below, giving
adequate mechanical support by locking on the armor and ensuring high earth
continuity.
D. PVC Insulated armoured cables (PVC Sheath):

1. PVC/SWA/PVC cable: 600/1000 V rated, to BS 6346
2. Conductor: Annealed high conductivity copper, stranded, shaped and laid in an
approved manner
3. Armour: Single layer of galvanised steel wires for multicore cables
4. PVC for sheath and insulation to BS 6746
5. Cables shall be terminated with compression glands. Giving adequate
mechanical support by locking on the armour and ensuring high earth continuity.
E. PVC Insulated LSF Sheathed (PVC/LSF) Cable:

1. To BS 6346, 600/1000V Grade, or to BS 6004, 300/500 V Grade
2. Flat twin and three core cable shall be to BS 6004 and incorporate an earth
conductor placed between the red and black cores for two core cable and
between the yellow and blue cores for three core cable
3. Conductor: annealed high conductivity copper, stranded, shaped and laid in an
approved manner
4. LSZH for sheath and insulation: to BS 6724
F. PVC Insulated PVC Sheathed (PVC/PVC) Cable:

1. To BS 6346, 600/1000V rated, or to BS 6004, 300/500 V rated
2. Flat twin and three core cable shall be to BS 6004 and incorporate an earth
conductor placed between the red and black cores for two core cable and
between the yellow and blue cores for three core cable
3. Conductor: annealed high conductivity copper, stranded, shaped and laid in an
approved manner
4. PVC for sheath and insulation: to BS 6746
G. Single core PVC Wires:

1. Cable shall be to BS 6004, rated 450/750 V, with high conductivity copper
conductors and PVC compound insulation. Color coding shall be in accordance
with table 51 A of BS 7671
2. Wires shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and no splice shall be made
except within outlet and junction boxes. A separate neutral wire shall be provided
for each circuit. Wires shall be left sufficiently long enough (minimum 150 mm) to
permit making final connections.
H. Heat Resistant and High Temperature cable:

1. To BS 6500, or BS 6004 300/500 V grade, designated EPR (ethylene
polypropylene rubber) insulated HOFR sheathed, 85 °C or EPR insulated OFR
sheathed, 60 °C. Conductor(s) shall be flexible class 5 tinned copper to BS 6360.
Insulation shall be type GP.1 to BS 6899. Outer sheath shall be HOFR (heat, oil,
fume resistant) or OFR (oil and fume resistant) sheath type RS3 to BS 6899 and
flame retardant to BS 4066 Part 1, temperature rating 60 ° or 85 °C
2. High temperature cable shall be to BS 6500 or BS 6007, designated 300/500 V
grade silicone insulated glass braided, 180 °C. Conductors shall be flexible class
5 tinned copper to BS 6360. Insulation shall be silicone rubber type EI 2 to BS
6899. Outer sheath shall be treated glass fibre braid, temperature rating 180 °C.
I. Flexible Cable:
1. To BS 6007, or BS 6500, rated in accordance with manufacturer’s tables flexible
cables subject to excessive heat shall be insulated as (8) above, (a) or (b) as per
the Project Documentation requirement.
J. 600/1000V rated XLPE Insulated Cable (LSF Sheath):

1. To BS 5467, 600/1000V grade, designated XLPE/SWA/LSF for armored multi-
core cable, and XPLE/LSF for unarmored cable
2. Conductors: plain annealed copper to BS 6360
3. Cable shall comprise of plain copper, stranded circular conductors insulated with
an adequate thickness of extruded cross linked polyethylene (XLPE)
4. Conductors shall be laid up together and warmed circular with suitable performed
fillers and warnings, bound with polythene terephthalate (PTP) tape and covered
with an extruded LSZH sheath, minimum 1.4 mm thick for multicore cable
5. Armored multicore cable shall have steel wire armoring and extruded sheath of
black LSZH
6. Armored single core cable shall have aluminum wire armoring and extruded
sheath of black LSZH
7. Outer sheath of single core cables shall be at least 2.5 mm thick
8. Conductor screen: non-metallic comprising either semi-conducting tape or a layer
of extruded semi-conducting material
9. Prevent void formation in insulation by careful control of its passage through
10. Temperature graded water baths
11. Cable shall be terminated with compression glands as specified below, giving
adequate mechanical support by locking on the armor and ensuring high earth
continuity.
12. Armored single core cable from transformer to LV Panels shall have copper wire
armoring as per Local Electricity & Water Regulatory Authority.
K. 600/1000V rated XLPE Insulated Cable (PVC Sheath):

1. To BS 5467, 600/1000V rated designated XLPE/SWA/PVC for armoured
multicore cable, and XPLE/PVC for unarmoured cable.
2. Conductors: plain annealed copper to BS 6360
3. Cable shall be comprised of plain copper, stranded circular conductors insulated
with an adequate thickness of extruded cross linked polyethylene (XLPE)

4. Conductors shall be laid up together and warmed circular with suitable performed
fillers and warnings, bound with polythene terephthalate (PTP) tape and covered
with an extruded PVC sheath, minimum 1.4 mm thick for multicore cable.
5. Armoured multicore cable shall have steel wire armouring and extruded sheath of
black PVC.
6. Armoured single core cable shall have aluminium wire armouring and extruded
sheath of black PVC.
7. Outer sheath of single core cables shall be at least 2.5 mm thick.
8. Conductor screen: non-metallic comprising either semi-conducting tape or a layer
of extruded semi-conducting material.
9. Prevent void formation in insulation by careful control of its passage through
temperature graded water baths.
10. Cable shall be terminated with compression glands as specified below, giving
adequate mechanical support by locking on the armour and ensuring high earth
continuity.
L. Fire Resistant Cable - General

1. Power supply cables feeding power to equipment such as smoke fans,
pressurization fans, lifts and other life safety equipment shall be fire rated cables.
2. Fire resistant cables shall be used for all equipment related to life safety including
but not limited to the following:
a. Emergency lighting circuits
b. Elevators.
c. Smoke Fans.
d. Stair/Lift/Lobby Pressurization Fans
e. Fire Pump
f. Fire Alarm Control Panel.
g. Complete Fire Alarm, voice evacuation, fire telephone Cabling.
M. Fire Resistant Cables: (Up to 25mm²)

1. Shall be LSOH rated for 450/750V to BS7629.
a. The cable shall meet categories CWZ of BS6387 and shall pass the test
requirements of IEC331. The cable shall comply with BS7622 on smoke
emissions and has acid gas emissions <0.5% when tested to BS6425-1.
Cable shall be flame retardant to BS4066 Pt 1 (IEC332 Pt 1) and reduced
flame propagation to BS4066 Pt 3 (IEC332 Pt 3) category C.
b. The cables shall have the approvals of British Approvals Service for
Cables (BASEC) approved to BS7629 and Loss Prevention Certification
Board (LPCB) approved to BS6387, category CWZ and BS7629.
c. Shall have annealed copper conductors complying BS6360
d. Cable shall be suitable for wiring in conduit 0r in trunking. All cables shall
be installed in accordance with the appropriate regulations, including IEE
or any other national legislation. The cables shall not be used in
hazardous areas, zones, 0, 1 and 2 as defined in BS5345: Part 1.
e. Shall be suitable for continuous operation at temperatures up to 90ºC.
N. Fire Resistant Cables (Multi-Core Up to 400mm²)

1. Fire resistant cable shall maintain circuit integrity during a fire.
2. Shall be available in multi-core designs from 1.0mm2 to 400mm2 in 2, 3, and 4
Core. Shall be Fire resistant to IEC331 and comply with BS6387 categories
CWZ. Shall be approved by Loss Prevention Certification to BS 6387, categories
CWZ.
3. Shall be suitable for use to satisfy the requirements of the BS 5588 Series for the
operation of equipment in the event of fire. Shall be a low smoke zero halogen
(LSOH®) cable, which produces very low quantities of smoke, and virtually no
acidic gas, satisfying BS 6724.
4. Shall be to BS4066 Pt. 1 (IEC332 Pt. 1) with reduced flame propagation to
BS4066 Pt. 3 (IEC332 Pt.3).
5. Armored cable that is highly resistant to third party damage. Easy handling and
installation so similar in design to familiar armored cable, no special installation
skills are required. Shall be rated for 600/1000V and shall be surge resistant. The
cable shall meet the requirements of IEC331 and BS6387 categories CWZ.
When the complete cable is tested in accordance with BS6724 or with BS7622 Pt
2 (IEC 1034-2) it shall meet the minimum light transmittance requirements as
stated in BS6724 or BS7622 Pt 2 (IEC 1034-2). When tested in accordance with
BS6425 Pt 1 (IEC754-1), all non-metallic components shall give a level of HCI
not greater than 0.5%.
6. Shall meet the requirements of BS4066 Pt. 3 category C (IEC332 Pt. 3 category
C).
7. Shall meet the approval of British Approval Service for Cables (BASEC)
approved to BS7846.
a. LPCB approved to BS6387, categories CWZ for cables up to 20 mm
overall diameter.
b. Additional tests passed and witnessed by recognized third parties e.g.
Lloyd’s Register.
8. Shall be plain copper stranded circular conductor complying with SB6360 Class 2
on:
9. Insulation “Mica/Glass Fire Resistant tape covered by an extruded cross-linked
insulation complying with BS7655 type GP8 or type GP6, operating temperature
90ºC.
10. Cores identified as follows:
a. 2 Core black, red
b. 3 Core red, yellow, blue
c. 4 Core red, yellow, blue, black
11. Cores are laid up with fillers and binder tape as appropriate.
12. Bedding “Extruded layer of LSOH® bedding compound.
13. Armour “Single layer of galvanized steel wires.
14. Outer Sheath “extruded LSOH® sheath complying with BS7655 type LTS 1.
15. All cables shall be installed in accordance with the appropriate regulations
including IEE Wiring Regulations or any other national regulations.
O. Mineral Insulated Cable:

1. to BS EN 60702 : Part 1, rated 600/1000V
2. cable shall comprise of a pressure packed magnesium oxide insulation contained
within a continuous soft ductile copper sheath and copper conductors embedded
in the dielectric in standard formation
3. cable termination kit shall comprise of conductor insulation of neoprene sleeving
retained by cone shaped beads beneath a fibre sealing disc. Each conductor
shall be identified with regard to phase etc., by means of sleeving placed over
the neoprene insulation
4. cable seals shall comprise of screw-in-pot type seals, with brass ring glands
designed to accommodate the pot seal.
P. Cable Glands
1. Cable glands shall be used for terminating cables to switch gear, switch boards,
motor control centers, motors and other equipment
2. They shall be brass compression glands and comply with the relevant part of BS
6121, except for MICC cables, which shall comply with BS 6207 Part 2.
3. Glands for armored or screened cables shall have suitable clamps
4. External compression glands shall have close fitting PVC shrouds
5. earthing for armoring and metallic sheaths: suitable brass or copper clamps, and
copper strip conductor in accordance with local power authority requirements,
and not less than 2.5 sq. mm
Q. Cable Sealing Compounds

1. Shall: be tropical grade to BS 1858 or BS 6910 and approved by Cable
manufacturer, of an oil-resisting compound where the difference in level between
cable ends exceeds 6 m.
R. Cleats:
1. shall be approved claw type cast aluminum, gunmetal, plastic or brass of
approved type, two bolts fixing for cables greater than 50 mm diameter.
S. Cable Markers:
1. Shall be precast concrete, minimum size 300 x 300 mm x 100 mm deep
2. The markers shall be engraved “HV CABLE”, “ELECTRIC CABLE”, “ELV
CABLE”, “EARTH PIT” or “CABLE JOINT”, as applicable cable marker
construction details and engravings shall be as per local power authority
regulations.
PART 3 - INSTALLATION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Installing cables:
1. Pull cable into position by hand, where possible using an adequate number of
operative roller guides suitably positioned along cable length.
2. Obtain approval of pulling cables by winch or similar appliance.
3. When pulling by winch or the like, fit a suitable tension gauge into the haulage
line between winch and cable. Pulling tension shall not exceed the limit
recommended by the cable manufacturer.
4. Do not allow cable to twist or rotate about its longitudinal axis.
5. Lay 3 phase groups of single core cables in trefoil formation. If this is not possible
obtain instructions.
6. Install cables to allow any one cable to be subsequently removed without
disturbing the remainder.
7. Maintain an underground cable horizontal separation of a minimum of 150 mm.
8. Remove all damaged cables.
B. Bending Radius:
1. Maintain a bending radius as large as possible. Do not bend cable a radius less
than that specified in the relevant British Standard, Local Electricity & Water
Regulatory Authority or manufacturer’s recommendation, whichever is largest.
C. Underground Cables in U-PVC Ducts:

1. Install cables in ducts where there is hard standing or vehicular passage.
Concrete encase ducts where there is vehicular passage.
2. Cable duct size shall be as specified on the Drawings and shall be to BS 3506
Class B and/or BS 4660.

3. Run cables at least 300 mm clear of other services, whether the latter run parallel
or transverse to cable trench. Use pulling compound, or lubricant to avoid
excessive stress on the cable.
4. Do not fill ducts with cables to more than 60 % of the duct capacity.
5. Provide nylon draw cords in empty ducts.
6. Seal ducts with polyurethane foam or an approved proprietary cable sealing
arrangement.
7. Plug empty ducts with removable caps.
8. Provide ducts having a minimum diameter of 100 mm.
D. Direct Buried Cables:

1. Lay MV and HV cables at depths not less than 700 mm and 1000 mm,
respectively, measured from the final finished ground level after all earthworks
have been completed.
2. Provide 100 mm layer of dune sand on the bottom of the cable trench for the
cables to lay on. Cover the cables with a further 100 mm layer of sand before
backfilling the trench.
3. Protect cables with precast concrete tiles, laid above the top layer of sand.
4. Provide PVC warning tape above the cables or concrete tiles, after partial
backfilling and approximately 300 mm below finished ground level. All backfilling
shall be with dune sand free from stones or other hard particles
5. Provide concrete cable markers at:
a. 20 m intervals for straight runs
b. Road crossings
c. Joints
d. Deviations
e. Entries to buildings
f. Entries to draw pits
6. Inspect the cable installation at each of the different stages above.
E. Cables above Ground:

1. Provide protection where mechanical damage is possible.
2. Protect unarmoured cables by conduit, ducting or trunking.
3. Protect cables from direct sunlight.
4. Provide cable spacing and layouts per table 4A of BS 7671
5. Run cables at least 150 mm from other services.
F. Underground Cables in trenches

1. Install cables in concrete or brick cable trenches with removable covers in areas
of hard standing such as Plant Rooms and Main Electrical Rooms.
2. Lay cables in a single layer on the trench floor. Alternatively support them on the
sides of the trench on cable tray by cleats or ladders.
3. Provide cable spacing and layouts in trenches per table 4A of BS 7671
G. Cable Supports:
1. Support cables in accordance with the methods described in table 4A of BS
7671.
2. Support cables at regular intervals and at spacing a maximum of 400 mm for
cleats for horizontal runs and 550 mm for vertical runs.
3. Vertical cable runs exceeding 100 m shall incorporate tension releasing sections
steel cable supports which shall be provided at 300 mm intervals
4. MICC Cables:
a. Run on surface of walls or ceilings. Where embedded, run in a PVC
trough or conduit.
b. Run cables in square symmetrical lines. Where single core cables are run
in groups, bend the sheaths at maximum 50 mm centers.
c. Fix surface run cables with saddles at maximum 300 mm centers.
H. Heat Resistant Cables:

1. In areas with constant ambient temperatures exceeding 550C , run all final sub-
circuits and distribution circuits in heat resistant cable
2. Make conversion from PVC cable to heat resistant cable with a fixed block
connector housed and fixed into a conduit box or equal, except where the
conversion of cable types emanate from a switch, ceiling rose or similar fixed
connector accessory.
I. Flexible Cables:
1. Flexible cable shall be kept to a minimum and concealed if possible.
2. Mechanical retainment shall not depend on electrical connections.
J. Sealing Cables:
1. Seal both ends of cables immediately after tests.
2. Seal MICC cables immediately after cutting to prevent hygroscopic action by the
dielectric. All cables shall give an infinity test when tested on a 1000 volt Megger
immediately, and 48 hours after sealing.
3. Seal aluminium sheathed cables with a metal cap plumbed to the sheath.
4. Seal plastic sheathed cables with a plastic cap embracing the wires and outer
sheath.
5. Mark cable ends in accordance with the relevant BS.
3.02 CABLE TRAYS
A. Generally:
1. Install cables on trays in a single layer, unless otherwise specified
2. Use purpose made straps or saddles to maintain cables in a neat regular
disposition
3. Secure cables with load bearing cleats securely fixed to the tray. Where trays do
not directly support the cables space cleats, saddles and straps at maximum
centres shall be as recommended by cable manufacturers.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound

used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's
recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips
that will not damage cables or raceway.
D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural

members, and follow surface contours where possible.
E. Support cables according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical
Systems."

F. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.04 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published

B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess
equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced
conductors.
1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor for aluminum conductors.
C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 300 mm of slack.
3.05 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of fire
stopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Fire stopping."
B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or
formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.
C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
D. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:

1. For sleeve rectangle perimeter less than 1270 mm and no side greater than 400
mm, thickness shall be 1.3 mm.
2. For sleeve rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 1270 mm and 1 or more
sides equal to, or greater than, 400 mm, thickness shall be 3.5 mm.
E. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall
assemblies unless openings compatible with fire stop system used are fabricated during
construction of floor or wall.
F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both wall surfaces.
G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 50 mm above finished floor level.
H. Edit paragraph below as required for Project design conditions and seismic-criteria
status.
I. Size pipe sleeves to provide 6.4-mm annular clear space between sleeve and cable
unless sleeve seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria require different clearance.
J. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and
with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.
K. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between
sleeve and cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint
according to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

L. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions,
ceilings, and floors at cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with fire stop
materials according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Fire stopping."
M. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual cables with flexible boot-type

flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
N. Aboveground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and

mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeves to allow for 25-mm annular clear space between
pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
O. Underground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size
sleeves to allow for 25-mm annular clear space between cable and sleeve for installing
mechanical sleeve seals.
3.06 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION
A. Install to seal underground exterior-wall penetrations.
B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for cable
material and size. Position cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve
seals and install in annular space between cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against
pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
3.07 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply fire stopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to
restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to in Division 07 Section 07
8400 "Firestopping."
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections
and prepare test reports.
B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been
energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors, and conductors feeding
the following critical equipment and services for compliance with requirements.
2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test as per BS
standards and Local Electricity & Water Regulatory Authority. Certify compliance
with test parameters.
3. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after
Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in cables and
conductors 25mm2 and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices
are accessible to portable scanner.
a. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared
scan of each splice 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
b. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure
temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values.
Provide calibration record for device.
c. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies
splices checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of
deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after
remedial action.
D. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to
achieve compliance with requirements.
F. The complete installation shall be tested and commissioned by the supplier and the
contractor. The contractor shall be responsible to demonstrate the operation of the
system to the satisfaction of the Client's personnel. The contractor shall submit the
testing and commissioning reports for the Engineers review outlining all deficiencies and
course of action. The contractor shall ensure all deficiencies outlined are rectified,
retested, and certified.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 0526
EARTHING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This section covers the furnishing and installing of a complete Earthing system for the
facility including but not limited to:
1. Earth Continuity Conductors
2. Main Earth Loops
3. Rod Electrodes
4. Earth Pit Covers
5. Equipotential bonding between various system and light non protective system
6. Connectors and exothermic welding

1. Division 26 Section 26 0500 "Common Requirements for Electrical
Installations".
2. Division 26 Section 26 0553 "Identification for Electrical Systems".
3. Division 26 Section 26 4113 “Lightning Protection for Structures”
A. Installation shall be as per BS 7430 -Code of practice for earthing
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labelled as defined in

BS 7430, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked
for intended use.
C. Comply with the requirements of the Local Electricity & Water Regulatory Authority
D. Comply with the requirements of the local telecommunication service provider.

1. BS 7671 Requirements for Electrical Installations. IET Wiring Regulations
2. BS 7430 Code of Practice for Earthing
KEO/19-3262-0000 26 0526/1 Earthing And Bonding For Electrical Systems
3. Local power supply/ telecom Authority Requirements
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Other Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of

Earthing features specified in part 3 “Field Quality Control” Article, including the
following: Inspection Pits, Earthing Arrangements for Derived System, and Earthing for
Sensitive Electronic Equipment’s.
1. Earth Rods
2. Earth Rings
3. ECC, Earthing Busbar
C. Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency’s field supervisor.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For Earthing to include the following in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals:
1. Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of Earthing features at test wells
based on BS 7430
a. Tests shall be to determine if Earth resistance or impedance values
remain within specified maximums, and instructions shall recommend
corrective action if they do not.
b. Include recommended testing intervals.
Contractor shall be fully responsible for the design, detailing of the works described

A. Warranty Period: 2 years or manufacturer’s warranty period (whichever is greater)

from date of Substantial Completion. The date of substantial completion shall be the
date when all components have been certified by the Consultant and accepted by the
Owner to be complete in accordance with the definition of substantial completion
B. All components and their installations shall be free from defects. Any defective
material or workmanship and any resulting damage to work of other trades shall be
replaced or repaired as directed during the Warranty Period at the contactors
expense. Comply with General Conditions, agreeing to repair or replace any
components that have failed within the warranty period.
contents.
B. Spare parts required shall include but not necessarily be limited to,
1. Spare parts recommended by manufacturer for two years of normal operations.
2. Tools recommended for maintenance.
C. Spare parts shall be delivered to the Owner’s central storage facility.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

documents, use only firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of Earthing and Bonding
for Electrical Systems, of types and capacities required which have been in satisfactory
use in similar or service for not less than five (5) years and approved by the Engineer.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. General
1. Products used in the earthing system shall be copper or an approved copper
alloy.
B. Earth continuity conductors

1. Sizes shall be as specified by local power-supply authorities, unless otherwise
indicated, but in no case shall size be less than half that of the associated
phase conductors.
2. Insulation shall be of the same material as insulation in associated sub-circuits.
3. Insulation of PVC or XLDE in Green and/or Green-Yellow color shall confirm to
BS 7430 and Local Electricity & Water Regulatory Authority.
4. Backfill Material: Electrode manufacturer’s recommended material.
C. Main earth loops

1. 25 x 3mm tinned copper tape, unless otherwise indicated
D. Rod electrodes:
1. Shall be the earth rod electrode type, unless impracticable to drive deep into the
particular soil.
2. Earth rod electrodes: 16mm diameter stainless steel, comprising a high strength
steel alloy core with a molten welded copper covering.
3. Shall be 3.6m long, in 1.2m sections coupled by strong bronze couplers.
E. Earth connectors
1. For connection of rod electrodes: bolted type; Copper or Copper Alloy, Bolted
pressure type with at least two bolts. Pipe Connector: Clamp type sized for
pipe. Welded Connectors: Exothermic welding kits of types recommended by
Kit Manufacturer for material being joined in installation condition.
F. Removable earth links

1. Shall comprise a bolted copper link fixed on porcelain insulators and complete
with studs, nuts and washers to take the earth tape and a bolted lug adequately
sized for the final connection of the earth electrode.
G. Bolts, washers and nuts in bolted connections

1. High copper alloy or silicone bronze. Ferrous hardware is not acceptable.
H. Earth pit cover

1. Shall be of heavy duty construction.
2. Shall have a recessed lifting hook.
3. Shall have a brass plate, engraved "Electrical Earth Below No. XXXX" including
identification No. as per the approved drawings.
I. Earthing bus bars for electrical system

1. Shall comprise a bolted copper link fixed on porcelain insulators and complete
with studs, nuts and washers to take the earth tape and a bolted lug adequately
sized for the final connection of the earth electrode.
J. Earthing bus bars for telecommunication system

1. EARTHING bus bars for telecommunication system shall be made of 6mm thick
electro-tin plated and provided with insulators.
K. Bolts, washers and nuts in bolted connections

1. High copper alloy or silicone bronze. Ferrous hardware is not acceptable.
L. Earth rod seals – if required

1. The terminated head of each electrode shall be located in a light weight
inspection pit. The lid of the inspection pit must have a safe working load of
5000 kgs and should be capable of withstanding slow moving vehicular traffic. If
clear earth is not available, then the Specialist Earthing/ Lightning Protection
Installer has to install the earth pit inside the building using double flange earth
electrode seals.
2. The double flange earth seals should be designed for use in concrete slabs of
nominal thickness from 300mm to 5000mm thick.
3. The upper and lower flanges must be moulded and manufactured from high
density polyethylene, accommodating the sealing kit and protective tube for the
earth rod electrode.
4. The sealing arrangement, consisting of improved compression rings and
neoprene ‘O’ rings and must be tested to withstand water pressure up to 80 psi
equal to a 55 meter head of water.
5. There must be a provision to remove the seal cap to facilitate extension of earth
rods during periodic maintenance. The design of the seal assembly should be
such that using a short flatbed screwdriver as lever, the bottom compression

ring can be pushed upwards so that it can be gripped by finger and the ‘O’ ring
can be completely removed.
6. The earth seal flange shall be free from dust / debris, grease/paint before
pouring of the concrete.
7. A specialist installer should be employed to do the installation or shall be done
under the supervision of the manufacturer or the manufacturer’s authorized
representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Circuit Wiring
1. Shall have a green/yellow coloured insulated earth continuity cable connecting
the earth bus or earth terminal in switchboards, switchgears, motor control
centres and panel boards to the motor, equipment, outlet and other device by
earthing lugs. All hand rails and other metal works within 2 m of a potentially
live metal surface shall be earthed.
B. Main Earth Loops

1. Fix in mechanical equipment rooms and other areas indicated on the drawings,
in convenient locations, allowing two return paths to earth.
2. Fix copper tape to structure with copper or brass saddles and/or screws. Make
tees and straight joints by riveting and seating, welding or brazing.
3. Make copper tape joints by exothermic-weld process particularly at the exposed
and wet locations.
4. Make branch connections between main loop and major equipment, such as
switchboards, large motors and motor control boards, with copper tape of same
size as main loop tape.
5. Make other branch connections to equipment with copper conductors of size
not less than half that of the relative phase conductor.
6. For buried connections use exothermic weld.
C. Removable earth links

1. Fix in every main earth lead to enable the electrode system to be disconnected
for testing.
2. Install in an accessible position, above ground as close as possible to the earth
electrode.
D. Exposed earth cables

1. Install and locate to provide maximum mechanical protection, utilising ceiling
corners, suspended ceiling and webs of beams as much as possible.
E. Bolted connections
1. Multiple bolt type.
2. Where bare copper has bolted in connections provide electroplated silver
contact surfaces.
F. Brazed connections
1. Where earthling terminal connections are to be brazed to equipment, thoroughly
clean metal prior to brazing and repaint impaired surfaces to prevent corrosion.

G. Connections between dissimilar metals
1. Protect by:
a. Painting with a moisture resistant bituminous paint or compound, or
b. Wrapping with protective tape to exclude moisture.
H. Equipment Earthing
1. Connect all non-current carrying metallic parts of the electrical/mechanical
installation to the earthing system.
2. Non-current carrying metallic parts of the electrical installation include:
a. Metal conduit cable armor (steel and aluminum) raceways, outlet boxes,
cabinets, and the like.
b. Exposed metal parts of apparatus.
c. Enclosures, doors, grilles, barriers and the like protecting or shielding
electrical equipment from direct access.
3. Series earthing of one piece of equipment to another is not acceptable. Each
item shall be individually connected the earthing system.
I. Main Switchboards, Switchgears, Motor Control Centres Earthing

1. Connect the special earthing lug or bus bars inside the cabinet to the main
earth copper tape.
2. Connect all parts of the switchboards, switchgears and motor control centres
other than "live" parts, to the earth bar in the board in an approved manner.
J. Fire Fighting Equipment Earthing

1. Earth on a separate ring system.
K. Motors Earthing
1. Connect the motor terminal box to the relative earth loop. The terminal must be
mechanically connected to the frame or, where this is not feasible
2. Extend the earthing conductor through an insulated bushed opening in the
connection box and connect to the frame.
L. Distribution Boards Earthing

1. Connect an earthing conductor from the main distribution earth bus bar to an
earth connector welded to the cabinet and earthing bushings on the incoming
and outgoing feeder conduits.
M. Bus Bar Trunking (Bus Ways) Feeders Earthing

1. Connect the green/yellow coded earth bus bar directly to the earth bus-bar in
main switchboard with earth copper tape.
N. Cable Armour Earthing

1. Connect steel and aluminium armour to the earthing system.
O. Cable Tray/Cable Trunking

1. Connect each piece of cable trays/cable trunking and accessories to the
earthing system with couplings and copper links.
2. Comply with the manufacturer’s recommendations, Local Regulations and the
BS 7671.
3. Provide specified cross section copper equipment grounding conductor through
entire length of tray; bond to each component.
P. Earth Rod Electrodes

1. Extensible rods of the same diameter shall be installed in holes drilled into the
ground. If ground conditions permit, rods may be driven into the ground either
manually or mechanically.
2. Bolt earth connectors to the top of the rods, in sufficient number to make
connection with all incoming cables.
Q. Earth Inspection Pit

1. Provide a concrete pit (outside the building)/Polymer pit (within the building
Basement) complete with a heavy duty concrete cover (outside the building) or
Polymer cover (within the building Basement) with recessed lifting hook to the
Engineers written approval, at the head of the earth rod, to protect the rod and
allow access to connections for testing.
R. Earthing Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing
service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
1. Install bus on insulated spacers 25 mm, minimum, from wall 150 mm above
finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame,
across top of doorway, down to specified height above floor, and connect to
horizontal bus.
S. Signal and Communication Equipment: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and
other communication equipment, insulated earthing conductor in raceway from
earthing electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and
central equipment location.
1. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate
earthing conductor on a earthing bus.
2. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate earthing conductor on cabinet earthing terminal.
3. Ensure the potential rise in telecommunications circuits due to power system
earth faults is limited in accordance with BS 6701.
T. Comply with the specified standards and regulations of relevant telecommunications

providers.
U. Earth rod electrodes

1. Drive extensible rods of the same diameter into the ground, either manually or
by power driven hammer, to a suitable depth to obtain low resistively in the
particular soil.
2. Weld earth connectors to the top of the rods, in sufficient number to take all
incoming cables.
3.02 SITE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test earthing systems using ad earth megger test.
B. The resistance of any point in the earth continuity system to the main earth electrode
shall not exceed 1 ohm.
C. Install additional earth electrodes if the above figures are not met.
3.03 TESTING, COMMISSIONING & HANDOVER

A. The complete installation shall be tested and commissioned by the supplier and the
testing and commissioning reports for the Engineers review outlining all deficiencies
and course of action. The contractor shall ensure all deficiencies outlined are rectified,
3.04 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion of the project.
system. During that period, the contractor shall be responsible for the regular
inspection and maintenance as recommended by the manufacturer.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 0529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.
2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.
A. Division 26 Section 26 0500 “Common Requirements for Electrical Installations”
A. Supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported

systems and its contents.
B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of

supported equipment and connected systems and components.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
1. Product Data: For the following:
2. Steel slotted support systems.
3. Nonmetallic slotted support systems.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified class ‘A’ Engineer professional
engineer. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the
following:
1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components.
2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.
3. Nonmetallic slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.
A. Comply with BS Standards and Local Electricity & Water Regulatory Authority.
B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural

Welding Code - Steel."
KEO/19-3262-0000 26 0529/1 Hangers And Supports For Electrical Systems


1.07 COORDINATION

contents.
2. Tools required for maintenance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

documents, use only firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of Hangers and Supports
2.02 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with NEMA-4, factory-fabricated components

for field assembly.
B. Nonmetallic Slotted Support Systems: Structural-grade, factory-formed, glass-fiber-
resin channels and angles with 14-mm- diameter holes.
1. Fittings and Accessories: Products of channel and angle manufacturer and
designed for use with those items.
2. Fitting and Accessory Materials: Same as channels and angles, except metal
items may be stainless steel.
3. Rated Strength: Selected to suit applicable load criteria.
C. Raceway and Cable Supports: As recommended by manufacturer.
D. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings,
designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
E. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of

threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical
conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of
conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported.
Body shall be malleable iron.
F. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel
plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
G. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items
or their supports to building surfaces include the following:
1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland
cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in
hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.
3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to
MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable
for attached structural element.
5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with
ASTM A 325.
6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
2.03 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES
A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit

dimensions of supported equipment.
B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for

steel shapes and plates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Where specific fasteners are not specified or indicated for securing items to in-place
construction, provide appropriate type, size, and number of fasteners for a secure, rigid
installation.
B. Install anchoring devices and other fasteners in accordance with manufacturer’s printed
instructions.
C. Make attachments to structural steel wherever possible.
3.02 APPLICATION
A. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space
supports shall be as required by the BS 7671 –Requirements for Electrical Installations.
B. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted
or other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in
future without exceeding specified design load limits.
C. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used
for 38-mm and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems
above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.
3.03 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so

strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading
limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of
supported components plus 90 kg.
B. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor

and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the
following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:
1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion
anchor fasteners on solid masonry units.
4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
5. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock
washers and nuts or Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying
with MSS SP-69 or Spring-tension clamps].
6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount
cabinets, panel boards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction
boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to
substrate.
C. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid
reinforcing bars.
D. Pull out tests for anchors for densely installed areas as required by Consultants shall be
provided.
E. For heavy installation, calculations on type and size of the anchors, rods and brackets
including support distances should be submitted for Consultant approvals.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for

site-fabricated metal supports.
elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
3.05 CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 100 mm larger in
both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt
diameters from edge of the base.
B. Anchor equipment to concrete base.

equipment.
3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
3.06 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas
immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop
painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 0533
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical
wiring
1. Rigid PVC conduit and fittings
2. Rigid Steel conduit and fittings
3. Flexible Steel conduit and fittings
4. Flexible PVC conduit
5. Hinged cover enclosures and cabinets
6. Cable Trunking
A. Division 26 Section 26 0500 “Common Requirements for Electrical Installations”
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: Cut-away samples of all sizes of conduits, conduit boxes and fittings of each
type fixed to a board and submitted.
B. Product Data: When submitting samples submit manufacturer’s details, catalogues

and copies of test certificates confirming that offered types comply with the
Specification.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings of proposed conduit layouts and obtain approval
before commencing work.
D. Comply with BSEN-IS0-9001: 2015 & applicable codes and standards.
E. Shop Drawings: For the following raceway components. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other work:
1. Custom enclosures and cabinets.
F. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following
items involves:
1. Structural members in the paths of conduit groups with common supports.
2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in the paths of conduit
groups with common supports.
KEO/19-3262-0000 26 0533/1 Raceway And Boxes For Electrical Systems

G. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.
H. Source quality-control test reports.
A. Comply with the requirements of the local Electrical Power Authority.
B. Conform to the related latest BS for metallic and non-metallic conduits and accessories
stipulated in this Section.
C. Coordinate layout and installation of raceway and boxes with other construction
elements to ensure adequate headroom, working clearance, and access.
A. All electrical installations shall be carried out in accordance with the best International
Standards and Codes of Practice specifically with the current issue of IEE Regulations
(BS 7671) and the requirements of the local electrical power supply authority.
B. Wherever reference is made to a British Standard (BS), a British Standard Institution

recognized equivalent European Standard would also comply. Each type of equipment/
material selected shall comply with either the BS or the European Standard.
C. Listed below are the standards and codes referred to in this section.
1. BS 4607 Non-metallic conduits and fittings for electrical
installations rigid PVC conduits and conduit fittings.
2. BS EN 61386-1:2008 Conduit systems for cable management. General
requirements
3. BS EN 61386-21 Specification for conduit systems for electrical
installations
4. BS EN 61386-23:2004 Conduit systems for cable management. Particular
requirements. Flexible conduit systems
5. BS EN 61386-24:2010 Conduit systems for cable management. Particular
requirements. Conduit systems buried underground
6. BS EN 60423 Conduits for electrical purposes. Outside diameters
of conduits for electrical installations and threads
for conduits and fittings
7. BS EN 50085-1:2005 Cable trunking systems and cable ducting systems
for electrical installations. General requirements
8. BS EN 50085-2-1 Cable trunking systems and cable ducting systems
for electrical installations
9. BS 4678-2 Cable trunking. Steel underfloor (duct) trunking
10. BS EN 10346:2015 Continuously Hot-Dip Strip and Sheet of low carbon
steels for cold forming


contents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

documents, use only firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of Raceway and Boxes
2.02 GENERAL
A. Light and power circuits, fire alarm, telephone, signal and other low current system
wiring shall be drawn in conduits unless otherwise indicated
B. Conduit system shall generally be concealed and installed. Minimum conduit size shall
be 20mm diameter.
C. Light and power circuits, fire alarm wiring, telephone wiring, signal wiring and low
current system wiring shall each be run in separate conduit and wire way.
D. Cable insulated for two different categories of circuit shall be segregated.

1. Irrespective of service, conduit and fitting used shall be:
2. Where embedded: heavy gauge rigid PVC complying to BS 4607.
3. Where surface mounted, exposed: galvanized rigid steel conduit (GRS) as per
BS 61386
4. Where installed above false ceilings and in voids: GRS
5. Where installed in flame proof and hazardous areas: GRS
6. From terminal box to machine/ device: flexible steel conduit
7. Liquid tight flexible steel in wet/ damp areas.
2.03 RIGID PVC CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A. Standards:
1. Conduit and fittings shall comply with BS 4607: Part 1 & 2 and CEE Publication
26. In addition, conduit and fittings shall comply with this specification where
requirements are more stringent.
B. Physical Properties:
1. Conduit and fittings shall be:
a. Resistant to high temperatures
b. Non-hygroscopic
c. Self-extinguishing
d. Of adequate insulation resistance and electric strength
e. Inert to all liquid normally discharged from residential, commercial and
industrial premises
f. Suitable for installation, storage and transportation at temperatures
normally below -5°C. or above 85°C. and at these temperatures shall
not:
1) Soften or suffer any structural degradation
2) Show signs of cracking, or deform so that cables cannot be easily
drawn in or are likely to be damaged when drawing in, when bent,
compressed or exposed to extreme temperature
g. Of adequate mechanical strength and thermal stability
h. Suitably and indelibly marked and identified. Markings shall include
nominal size and be easily legible
i. Smooth inside and outside and free from burrs and sharp edges.
Surfaces and corners over which cables may be drawn shall be smooth
and well rounded.
2. Sizes of Conduit:
a. Conduits shall not be less than 20 mm diameter
b. Where size is not indicated: select in accordance with the regulations
and as proper to the number and size of conductors.
Conduit Minimum Wall

Dimension Thickness Heavy
Gauge - mm
20mm 2.1
25mm 2.2
38mm 2.5
50mm 3.4
3. Fittings:
a. Conduit entries shall be designed to ensure a watertight joint.
4. Expansion fittings:
a. Provide fittings that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.06
mm per meter of length of straight run per degree of temperature
change.

b. Provide expansion fittings for each of the following locations and provide
type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature changes
listed below:
1) Outdoor locations not exposed to direct sunlight: 70°C, 5°C
temperature change.
2) Outdoor locations exposed to direct sunlight: 86°C, 5°C
temperature change.
3) Indoor spaces: 70°C, 5°C temperature change.
5. PVC Conduit Boxes:
a. PVC Conduit Boxes can be used through PVC Conduit raceway system
and shall comply with BS 4607
b. metallic conduit boxes as specified elsewhere in this section can be
used alternatively if required for PVC conduit raceway system
c. all boxes shall be provided with tapped brass inserts for fixing the screws
d. all boxes for switches, sockets, outlets, etc., shall be rigid PVC or
metallic type and their dimensions shall be suitable for fixing the
switches, sockets and other accessories.
2.04 RIGID STEEL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A. Rigid Steel Conduit

1. All metallic conduits shall comply with BS 61386 and of Class 4 rigid steel
screwed type having an interior and exterior zinc coating of uniform quality and
appearance throughout all surfaces
2. Conduits shall not be less than 20 mm diameter size, and shall be complete
with all necessary threaded fittings, couplings and connecting devices having
galvanized equivalent finish.
Conduit Minimum Wall

Dimension Thickness Heavy
Gauge - mm
20mm 1.6
25mm 1.6
32mm 1.6
38mm 1.8
50mm 1.8
3. Conduits and fittings shall be manufactured specially for electric wiring

purposes. When manufactured by a continuous weld process, weld heads both
inside and outside the tube shall be completely removed prior to galvanizing
4. All conduits and fittings shall be free from rust or other defects on delivery to the
site and shall be properly stored in covered racking so that it is protected from
mechanical damage and damage by weather and water whilst stored on the site
5. All conduits shall be coupled to boxes and trunking wires using brass male
bushes. All such bushes shall be hexagon headed, heavy duty long threaded
type
6. All conduit expansion couplings used shall be fabricated from material equal or
equivalent to that of the conduit with which the coupling is to be used, having
factory installed packing ring and pressure ring to prevent entrance of moisture.
All coupling shall be equipped with earthing ring or earthing conductor

7. All conduit runs shall be fixed using spacer bar pattern saddles giving not less
than 3 mm clearance between the conduit and the surface to which it is fixed.
Saddles shall have finish to match the conduit and saddle clips shall be secured
to the bar by means of brass screws.
B. Metallic Conduit Boxes:

1. Metallic conduit boxes shall be used throughout metallic conduit raceway
systems, and shall comply with, or be of demonstrated equivalent quality and
performance to BS 61386 requirements. All boxes and covers shall be
galvanized, zinc plated or rust-proof finish equivalent to conduit finish
2. Circular and/or rectangular boxes shall be used for pull boxes and terminating
boxes, according to size and number of conduits connected to box. Boxes shall
be either malleable iron or heavy duty steel construction with welded joints and
tapped holes to receive metal threaded cover retaining screws. Self tapping
screws will not be permitted
3. All boxes, other than those to which a fitting or accessory is to be directly
mounted shall be fitted with covers screwed to the box by brass screws.
Malleable iron covers shall be used with malleable iron boxes and heavy gauge
steel covers shall be used with sheet steel boxes
4. All cover and accessory fixing provisions shall be so positioned that the fixing
screws lie completely clear of cable entering the box. All fixing screws shall be
of brass
5. All boxes installed in exterior locations, plant rooms, ducts, etc., shall be fitted
with approved type gaskets to provide a waterproof seal between box and cover
or other items fitted to the box
6. All boxes provided as junction boxes where cable joints are specified or
permitted, shall be provided with fixed terminal blocks. Such boxes shall be of
suitable size to contain the terminal block and sufficient cable to allow neat
connections to be made. The terminal blocks shall be fixed to the box by brass
screws and shall comprise brass conductor connectors, with brass clamping
screws enclosed in porcelain or other heat resisting insulation material which
will not distort or otherwise have its properties damaged by temperatures below
the highest temperature at which the insulation of any cable connected to it is
destroyed.
2.05 FLEXIBLE CONDUIT AND CONNECTIONS
A. Flexible Conduit:
1. To BS EN 61386-23, watertight, PVC sheathed, spiraled metal type. The
conduit shall be terminated at boxes and equipment by means of approved
compression glands
2. To be of the unpacked type for normal atmospheric conditions and non-
asbestos packaged for damp situations. Adapters shall be of the solid type
3. Flexible conduit shall be used for the final connection of rigid conduit to the
terminal boxes of machines fitted with a means of drive adjustment and/or
where vibrations is likely to occur.
4. Length of flexible conduit for recessed and semi-recessed light fixtures shall be
maximum 1.5 meters.
B. Flexible Connections:
1. Where connections to electrical machines are to be by multicore glands, the
final termination shall be by ring type universal glands and locknuts, and
adequate slack cable in the form of a loop or spiral being left to allow for the
movement of motors necessitated by belt re-tensioning, vibration, etc.
2.06 HINGED COVER ENCLOSURES AND CABINETS
A. Design
1. Surface-mounted or free-standing type, fabricated from zinc coated or
galvanized sheet steel minimum 1.5mm thick, Paint finish as approved for
distribution boards.
2. Fixed cover and padlocked hinged door; operable without obstruction.
3. Protected IP-31 for internal and IP-65 for outdoor use.
2.07 CABLE TRUNKING

A. Steel Trunking and Accessories: Factory made, returned edge surface trunking single
or multi compartment to British Standard BS EN 50085-2-1, Mild steel pre galvanised
manufactured from minimum 1.5mm steel complying with BS EN 10346: 2015
continuously hot-dip coated steel flat products.
B. Trunking Covers: Manufacture to fit firmly on the body. Design of covers and fixings
shall prevent wires entangling on them. Covers shall be attached and removed from
trunking with simple tools.
C. Accessories (Bends, Tees, Flanged Connectors etc.): Factory made by the trunking
manufacture.
D. Multi-compartment Trunking: Provide 1.5mm galvanized steel segregation barriers
without sharp edges.
E. Cable Retaining Clips: Galvanized spring ‘W’ wire type.
F. Cable Support Fixings: Projecting pin type with heat shrunk sleeve.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Contractor shall supply and install a substantial amount of containment as detailed, or

requested within the notes, on Electrical containment drawings. This containment,
regardless of size or location, shall be deemed as ‘PRIMARY CONTAINMENT’. All
other containment not shown on the tender drawings, or requested within the notes,
shall be deemed as ‘SECONDARY CONTAINMENT’ and will be designed and
provided by the Electrical Contractor responsible for the wiring contained therein to the
final devices.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Sets and Bends:

1. Conduits up to 32 mm diameter; form on site with an approved bending
machine using proper formers, guides, springs, etc., taking care not to deform
conduit.
2. Conduits over 32 mm diameter: use coupling fittings.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF CONDUIT
A. General
1. Run conduit in square, symmetrical lines, parallel to or at right angles to walls
and in accordance with the accepted practice
2. Conduit system shall be mechanically continuous and watertight after
installation. All conduit system shall be arranged wherever possible to be self
draining
3. Conduit runs between draw-in positions shall conform to local Regulations
regarding number of bends and extent of straight run
4. Conduit fill shall generally be less than 45%.
5. Keep conduits at least 100 mm from pipes and other non-electrical services
6. Where conduit runs are to be concealed in the structure or are to pass through
floor slabs, the Contractor shall be responsible for marking the accurate
positions of all chases and holes on site. The Contractor shall arrange the
conduit routing to make maximum use of any preformed conduit holes and slots
provided in structural beams. Conduit installation on shear walls shall be kept to
a minimum. All routings necessary on shear walls shall be agreed with the
Engineer’s Representative before work is put in hand
7. Install conduits so as not to interfere with ceiling inserts, lights or ventilation
outlets.
8. Earth continuity of steel conduits shall be mechanically & electrically continuous
throughout.
9. Provide pull wire in all empty conduits.
B. Runs in Reinforced Concrete:

1. Obtain approval for placing PVC conduits before pouring concrete
2. Run conduits in concrete slabs parallel to main reinforcing steel
3. Additional openings in finished slabs, where approved, shall be made by
drilling, not by breaking
4. Conduit boxes shall not be nailed to shuttering boards.
C. Horizontal or Cross Runs:

1. To be avoided in partitions and side walls.
D. Surface Mounted Conduit (including conduit installed above false ceiling):

1. Fix with distance spacing saddles to allow conduits to be taken directly into
accessories without bends or sets.
E. Concealed Conduit:
1. Fix securely to prevent movement before casting of concrete and screeds,
application of plaster and the like
2. Spacing of clips shall be not greater than as follows:
Conduit size Spacing
a. Up to 25 mm 600 mm
b. 32-38 mm 900 mm
c. 50 mm 1000 mm
3. Supports for exposed conduit shall be fixed at each side of bends.
F. Expansion Fittings:
1. Fix in conduit wherever it crosses as expansion joint in the structure to which it
is fixed.

G. Terminations:
1. Make with a flanged coupling, lead washer and hexagonal male brass bush,
where conduit runs terminate in cable trunking, distribution boards or any sheet
metal structure.
H. Conduit Boxes:
1. Fix at all outlet points.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
A. All conduits must be secured to outlet boxes, junction boxes or cabinets by placing
locknuts on outside of box and locknuts and bushings on the inside of box.
B. Conduits connecting recessed fixtures and their adjacent junction boxes must be
flexible metallic conduit 20 mm minimum size and shall be of sufficient length to permit
dropping of the fixture below the ceiling and to gain access to the junction box.
C. Conduit to motors shall be terminated in the conduit fittings on the motors, the final
connection being made with liquid tight flexible conduit and suitable liquid tight
connectors.
D. A green insulated 4 mm2 (minimum) tinned copper earth connection shall be made
between the solid conduit or cable sheath and the equipment, the copper cable being
run inside the flexible conduit. Couplings fitted to removable covers or non-metallic
equipment etc. shall be bonded to the earthing terminal of the equipment etc. Where
changes to flexible conduits occur, a watertight outlet box with threaded entries shall
be inserted and the earth connection made to an internal terminal. The cover screws
shall not be used for earthing connections.
3.05 INSTALLATION OF ENCLOSURES AND CABINETS
A. Anchor enclosures and cabinets securely to wall and structural supports at each
corner.
3.06 INSTALLATION OF CABLE TRUNKING
A. Install trunking with lid on top or side.
B. Support trunking at 1.0m intervals with trapeze type hangers or wall brackets.
C. Retain cables in trunking with cable retaining clips.
D. Support cables in vertical runs with pin-type supports at maximum 15m centers.
E. On vertical runs exceeding 6m support cable with projecting pin-type supports with
heat shrunk sleeve fixed to trunking body by welding or pop riveting.
F. Make connections to accessories with pop riveted or welded joints. Radius or gusset
bends and tees.
G. Provide tinplated copper link at joints and terminations.

H. Fire-stop cable trunking at floor slabs and at fire walls by packing inside the trunking
with mineral wool.
I. Provide galvanized draw wire in every trunking conduit which is left for wires and
cables. Not less than 300mm slack shall be left at each end of the draw wire.
3.07 FIRESTOPPING
A. Install conduits sealing where they enter or leave hazardous locations. Provide
firestopping at fire compartment areas. Locate fittings at suitable, approved, accessible
locations and fill them with approved sealing compound.
B. Fire stopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07

Section 07 8400 "Firestopping."
3.08 CLEANING
A. The conduit outlets when installed and before wiring shall be temporarily closed by
means of well fitting wooden plugs, and immediately before cables are drawn in,
conduits systems shall be thoroughly swabbed out until they are dry and clean.
B. Upon completion of installation of system, including outlet fittings & devices, inspect
exposed finish, remove burrs, dirt & construction debris and repair damages finish
including chips, scratches & abrasions.
3.09 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to Site

Engineer to ensure that coating, finishes & cabinets are with out damage or
deterioration at substantial completion.
B. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc rich paint recommended by

manufacturer.
C. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touch up coatings per
manufacturer’s recommendations.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 0536
CABLE TRAYS AND LADDER FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section to include the supply, installation and missioning of Cable trays, Ladder
racks, Wire basket cable Trays and accessories work in accordance with the Project
Documentation.
1. Cable trays, supports and accessories
2. Wire basket cable trays, supports and accessories
3. Ladder racks, supports and accessories

1. Division 26 Section 26 0500 "Common Requirements for Electrical Installations".
2. Division 26 Section 26 0526 "Earthing and Bonding for Electrical Systems".
3. Division 26 Section 26 0519 “Low Voltage Electrical Cables’
4. Division 26 Section 26 0533 “Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include data indicating dimensions and finishes for each type of cable
tray/ ladder racks indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For each type of cable tray/ ladder racks.

1. Show fabrication and installation details of cable tray/ ladder racks, including
plans, elevations, and sections of components and attachments to other
construction elements. Designate components and accessories, including
clamps, brackets, hanger rods, splice-plate connectors, expansion-joint
assemblies, straight lengths, and fittings.
C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans and sections, drawn to scale. Include scaled cable
tray/ ladder racks layout and relationships between components and adjacent structural,
electrical, and mechanical elements. Show the following:
1. Vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions.
2. Clearances for access above and to side of cable trays/ ladder racks.
3. Vertical elevation of cable trays/ ladder racks above the floor or bottom of ceiling
structure.
D. Field quality-control reports.
KEO/19-3262-0000 26 0536/1 Cable Trays And Ladder For Electrical System

A. Comply with the requirements of the local Electrical power Authority.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain cable tray components through one source from a single
manufacturer.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Select a firm experienced in manufacturing cable trays/

ladder racks, which has a record of successful in-service performance.
D. Comply with ISO 9001:2015

1. BS EN ISO 1461 Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and
steel articles.
2. BS 1449-1.1 Steel plate, sheet and strip. Carbon and carbon-
manganese plate, sheet and strip. General
specification
3. BS EN 61537 Cable management. Cable tray systems and cable
ladder systems
4. BS EN 10025-2 Hot rolled products of structural steels. Technical
delivery conditions for non-alloy structural steels
5. ASTM A 510 Specification for General Requirements for Wire
Rods and Coarse Round Wire, Carbon Steel
6. ASTM A 123 Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings
on Iron and Steel Products
7. ISO 9001 Quality Management Systems
A. Store indoors to prevent water or other foreign materials from staining or adhering to
cable tray/ ladder racks. Unpack and dry wet materials before storage.
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits

recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under
environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
1.08 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of cable tray with other installations.

1. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field
conditions and as approved by the Architect.

contents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

documents, use only firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of Cable Trays and
Ladder for Electrical System, of types and capacities required which have been in
satisfactory use in similar or service for not less than five (5) years and approved by the
Engineer.
2.02 GENERAL
A. The cable tray system shall be of one manufacturer and shall include factory-made
trays, tray fittings, connectors and necessary accessories and supports to form a
complete cable support system.
B. The cable tray system shall include the following factory-made tray elements:
1. Straight cable trays and ladder racks
2. Fittings as horizontal and vertical bends of various angles, crosses, tees, wyes,
reducers, vertical riser elements
3. Connectors
4. All necessary fixing accessories.
C. Manufacturer’s standard accessories shall be used and site fabrication shall not be
permitted.

D. Horizontal run of cables laid on cable tray and exposed to direct sunlight shall be
provided with covering at higher level to allow for ventilation. Cable tray shall be raised
15 cm from finished floor level.
E. Determine the sizes of the cable trays based on the number and size of cables laid on
the cable trays plus 20% space for future growth. Cables laid on cable trays shall be
spaced twice their overall diameter (consider the largest cable as reference). In case of
discrepancy with the contract documents this clause shall prevail, unless approved.
F. Design calculations to validate suitability of selected trays to support permissible cables

loads (weight) over a continuous span in accordance with the recommendations of the
manufacturer. Submit manufacturers loading graphs.
2.03 CABLE TRAYS - MATERIALS AND FINISHES
A. The cable tray material shall be hot rolled or cold rolled steel sheet to
B. BS 1449-1.1:1991. The whole of the tray work, trays, fittings, and supports shall be of
mild steel hot dipped galvanized after manufacture to BS EN ISO 1461:2009. The
thickness of the protective sheath on any element shall not be less than 55 microns.
C. Cable trays shall be constructed from mild steel hot dip galvanized.
D. Insert elements, bolts, screws, pins, etc., shall be mild steel zinc plated.
E. Tray work shall have oval perforations.
F. All trays (straight and fittings) shall be welded construction and be a heavy duty returned
flanged, perforated type, unless specified otherwise. The minimum thickness of heavy
duty returned flanged cable trays shall be 1.5mm for trays up to 300mm wide and
2.0mm for trays up to 600mm wide.
G. Tray components shall be accurately rolled or formed to close tolerances and all edges
rounded. Flanges shall have full round smooth edges.
H. For all trays, flanges shall be a minimum of 50 mm deep, unless otherwise specified.
I. Cable tray width and radius of curved sections shall be selected to suit the number of
cables as shown on drawings and to the approval of the Engineer.
J. Cable trays and accessories installed in hazardous and extremely corrosive

environments shall be heavy duty GRP or 316 S31 grade stainless steel.
2.04 CABLE TRAY SUPPORTS & ACCESSORIES
A. Fittings: Tees, crosses, risers, elbows, and other fittings as indicated, of same materials
and finishes as cable tray.
B. Covers: Same materials and finishes as cable tray.
C. Barrier Strips: Same materials and finishes as cable tray.
D. Cable tray supports and connectors, including bonding jumpers, as recommended by

cable tray manufacturer.
2.05 WIRE BASKET CABLE TRAYS
A. Cable Tray Materials:

1. Carbon steel wire, ASTM A 510, Grade 1008 and corresponding BS / European
Standards. Wire welded, bent, and surface treated after manufacture.
B. Cable Tray Finishes:

1. Hot-Dip Galvanizing after fabrication: ASTM A 123 and corresponding BS /
European Standards.
C. Cable tray shall consist of continuous, rigid, welded steel wire mesh cable management
system, to allow continuous ventilation of cables and maximum dissipation of heat, with
UL Classified splices where tray acts as Equipment Grounding Conductor (EGC).
Provide splices, supports, and other fittings necessary for a complete, continuously
grounded system. Wire mesh cable tray shall have continuous Safe-T-Edge T-welded
top side wire to protect cable insulation and installers.
1. Mesh: 50 x 100 mm.
2. Straight Section Lengths: 3,000 mm.
3. Wire Diameter: Patented design includes varying wire sizes to meet application
load requirements; to optimize tray strength; and to allow tray to remain
lightweight.
4. Safety Edge: Patented Safety Edge technology on side wire to protect cable
insulation and installers’ hands.
5. Fittings: Wire mesh cable tray fittings are field-fabricated from straight tray
sections, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
D. Load Span Criteria:

1. Install and support cable management system in accordance with one of the
following:
a. IEC 61537, with load span criteria of L/200 (to exceed standard
requirements of L/100) and a Safety Factor of 1.7.
2.06 WIRE BASKET CABLE TRAY SUPPORTS & ACCESSORIES
A. Fittings/Supports: Wire mesh cable tray fittings are field fabricated from straight tray
sections, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Supports will include the FAS
(Fast Assembly System) where possible so that screws, bolts, and additional tools are
not required for cable tray mounting; installation time is reduced; and tray path can
adapt to installation obstacles without the need for additional parts. Place supports so
that support span does not exceed as per manufacturer’s recommendations.
1. Ceiling-mounted supports mount to ceiling structure directly or with ¼”, 3/8” or ½”
threaded rod.
2. Wall-mounted supports
3. Underfloor supports mount directly to floor or to floor posts.
4. Splices, including those approved for electrical continuity (bonding), as
recommended by cable tray manufacturer.
5. Accessories: As required to protect, support, and install a cable tray system.
2.07 LADDER RACK
A. Ladder rack shall be supplied and installed in the locations indicated on the drawings.

B. The cable ladder system shall be based on two longitudinal outward facing side
members with returned edge flanges to improve safety during handling, installation and
cable pulling activities. The longitudinal side members shall form the main structural
elements of the cable ladder system and shall be longitudinally ribbed for enhanced
stiffness and rigidity.
C. The profile of the side members shall remain constant for the straight cable ladder and
the cable ladder fittings.
D. The longitudinal side members shall have a height of 125mm and a flange width of
25mm.
E. The longitudinal side member shall have a wall thickness of 2.0mm.
F. The two longitudinal side members shall be connected by individual transverse

members (rungs) which shall be welded at low level to the inside face of the side
members.
G. The transverse members shall be evenly spaced at 300mm centers along the length of
the straight cable ladder.
H. The transverse members shall have a wall thickness of 1.5mm.
I. Ladder racks shall be manufactured from Steel Deep galvanized (generally complying to
grade S355 to BS EN 10025) and shall be deep galvanized after manufacture to twice
the coating thickness specified by BS EN ISO 1461.and capable of carrying cables in a
single layer formation with a maximum deflection of 14mm (between supports) when the
rack is fully loaded.
J. Racks, unless otherwise stated, shall be of heavy duty.
K. The couplers shall be profiled to match the profile of the cable ladder. The couplers shall
be secured using M10 square-shouldered bolts with rounded heads. The bolts shall be
secured with M10 hex nuts and M10 shake-proof washers as standard. The couplers
shall have a slot pattern which prevents slip between adjacent straight ladder lengths
and between cable ladder fittings. The couplers shall have a slot pattern which allows
for easy connection to cut lengths of straight cable ladder without the need for onsite
drilling.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Contractor shall supply and install a substantial amount of containment as detailed, or

requested within the notes, on Electrical containment drawings. This containment,
regardless of size or location, shall be deemed as ‘PRIMARY CONTAINMENT’. All other
containment not shown on the tender drawings, or requested within the notes, shall be
deemed as ‘SECONDARY CONTAINMENT’ and will be designed and provided by the
Electrical Contractor responsible for the wiring contained therein to the final devices.
3.02 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting performance of cable trays. Do not proceed with installation
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of

unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
3.03 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving
the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
3.04 CABLE TRAY/ LADDER RACK INSTALLATION
A. Install as a complete system, including all necessary fasteners, hold-down clips, splice-
plate support systems, barrier strips, hinged horizontal and vertical splice plates,
elbows, reducers, tees, and crosses.
B. In General the distance between two cables on cable tray shall not be less than twice
the diameter of the largest cable.
C. Remove burrs and sharp edges from cable trays/ ladder rack.
D. Fasten cable tray/ ladder rack supports to building structure
E. Make connections to equipment with flanged fittings fastened to cable tray/ ladder rack
and to equipment. Support cable tray/ ladder rack independent of fittings. Do not carry
weight of cable tray/ ladder rack on equipment enclosure.
F. Install expansion connectors where cable tray/ ladder rack crosses building expansion
joint. Space connectors and set gaps according to applicable standard.
G. Make changes in direction and elevation using standard fittings.
H. Make cable tray/ ladder rack connections using standard fittings.
I. Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers according to Division 07 Section
"Firestopping."
J. Sleeves for Future Cables [where required]: Install capped sleeves for future cables
through firestop-sealed cable tray/ ladder rack penetrations of fire and smoke barriers.
K. Workspace: Install cable trays/ ladder rack with enough space to permit access for
installing cables.
L. After installation of cable trays/ ladder rack is completed, install warning signs in visible
locations on or near cable trays/ ladder racks.
3.05 CABLE INSTALLATION
A. Install cables only when cable tray/ ladder rack installation has been completed and
inspected.
B. Fasten cables on horizontal runs with cable clamps or cable ties. Tighten clamps only
enough to secure the cable, without indenting the cable jacket.
C. On vertical runs, fasten cables to tray every 450 mm. Install intermediate supports
when cable weight exceeds the load-carrying capacity of the tray/ rungs.
D. In existing construction, remove inactive or dead cables from cable tray/ ladder rack.
E. Install covers after installation of cable is completed.
3.06 EARTHING - CABLE TRAYS/ LADDER RACK
A. Cable trays/ ladder rack and accessories shall be electrically and mechanically
continuous throughout their length.
B. The entire cable tray/ ladder rack system shall be bonded and 12 mm x 2.5 mm tinned
copper links shall be bolted across each joint in the system by means of bronze nut and
bolts, complete with flat and spring washers.
C. All cable trays/ ladder rack shall be provided with earth continuity copper tape (3 x
25mm) along the whole route of cable trays which shall be bonded to the main earthing
system of the facility. The earth continuity copper tape shall be fixed on cable tray/
ladder rack by means of PVC covered saddles or by other means approved by the
Engineer.
3.07 EARTHING - WIRE BASKET CABLE TRAY
A. Earth cable trays at end of continuous run
B. Earth cable trays against fault current, noise, lightning, and electromagnetic interference
by mounting grounding wire to each 3m cable tray section with earthing clamp as per
manufacturer recommendations
A. After installing cable trays/ ladder racks and after electrical circuitry has been energized,
survey for compliance with requirements. Perform the following field quality-control
survey:
1. Visually inspect cable insulation for damage. Correct sharp corners,
protuberances in cable tray/ ladder rack, vibration, and thermal expansion and
contraction conditions, which may cause or have caused damage.
2. Verify that there is no intrusion of such items as pipe, hangers, or other
equipment that could damage cables.
3. Remove deposits of dust, industrial process materials, trash of any description,
and any blockage of tray/ ladder rack ventilation.
4. Visually inspect each cable tray/ ladder rack joint and each ground connection for
mechanical continuity. Check bolted connections between sections for corrosion.
Clean and retorque in suspect areas.
5. Check for missing or damaged bolts, bolt heads, or nuts. When found, replace
with specified hardware.
6. Perform visual and mechanical checks for adequacy of cable tray/ ladder rack
earthing; verify that all takeoff raceways are bonded to cable tray/ ladder rack.

B. Report results in writing.
3.09 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed cable trays.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by cable
tray/ ladder rack manufacturer.
2. Install temporary protection for cables in open trays/ ladder racks to protect
exposed cables from falling objects or debris during construction. Temporary
protection for cables and cable tray/ ladder rack can be constructed of wood or
metal materials until the risk of damage is over.
3.010 FIRESTOPPING
A. Install sealing fittings wherever cable trays/ ladder racks enter or leave hazardous
locations. Provide firestopping at fire compartment areas. Locate fittings at suitable,
approved, accessible locations and fill them with approved sealing compound.
B. Fire stopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section
07 8400 "Firestopping."
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 0543
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This section specifies the requirements for duct bank and manholes.

1.03 DESCRIPTION
A. Duct bank and manholes shall be provided as specified and shown on the drawings.
1.04 SUBMISSIONS
A. Shop Drawings submission shall include dimensional drawings of the duct bank and
manholes, including sections and elevations, showing the following:
1. Sizes and positions of manholes
2. Duct routing
3. Location of entry to buildings
4. Other pertinent data.
B. Submission of the project data shall be as follows:

1. Full specifications of the enclosure and the components of the equipment with
relevant sheets of manufacturer’s catalogues
2. Confirmation that the equipment complies with the relevant specifications.
A. Comply with the requirements of the local Electrical Power Authority.
B. Coordinate layout and installation of Underground Ducts and Raceways with other
construction elements to ensure adequate working clearance.
KEO/19-3262-0000 26 0543/1 Underground Ducts And Raceways For Electrical Systems

A. All electrical installations shall be carried out in accordance with the best International
Standards and Codes of Practice specifically with the current issue of IEE Regulations
(BS 7671) and the requirements of the local electrical power supply authority.
A. Refer to section “Environmental Conditions” in Division 26 Section “Common

Requirements for Electrical Installations”
contents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

documents, use only firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of Underground Ducts
and Raceways for Electrical Systems, of types and capacities required which have been
in satisfactory use in similar or service for not less than five (5) years and approved by
the Engineer.
2.02 GENERAL
A. Duct Banks and manholes shall confirm to requirements as specified in relevant

standard as applicable.
B. The specification shall be in accordance with latest edition of local and International
regulations.
C. The product selected and proposed shall include manufacturer's instructions that
indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by the product testing
agency specified under Regulatory Requirements.
D. The contractor shall select the product only from the manufacturer specializing in
manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum five years documented
experience of the products being satisfactorily in use in a similar service and climatic
conditions.
E. The contractor shall ensure proper co-ordination with related civil and other project
associated activities prior to the selection of the equipment.
F. The contractor shall clearly show locations and arrangements of fittings on the drawings.
G. To ensure that field measurements are as indicated.
H. Provide detail routing and termination locations of duct bank prior to excavation. for
rough in.
I. Provide locations of manholes prior to excavating for installation.
2.03 RIGID STEEL CONDUIT
A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1 or other approved standard.
B. Fittings: NEMA FB 1 or other approved standard, steel.
2.04 PLASTIC CONDUIT
A. Rigid Plastic Conduit: NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 or 80 PVC or as specified, with fittings

and conduit bodies to NEMA TC 3 or other approved standard.
B. Rigid Plastic Underground Conduit: UL 651A, Type A PVC; UL 651A, Type EB PVC;
High-density polyethylene, Schedule 40 or Fibreglass-reinforced epoxy as specified or
indicated.
2.05 PLASTIC DUCT
A. Plastic Utilities Duct: NEMA TC 6; PVC or ABS Type EB or DB as specified or other

approved standard.
B. Plastic Utility Duct Fittings: NEMA TC 9 or other approved standard.
C. Plastic Communications Duct and Fittings: NEMA TC 10, Type EB or DB as specified

or other approved standard.
2.06 REINFORCED RESIN CONDUIT
A. Conduit and Fittings: NEMA TC 14, Type SW or HW as specified or other approved

standard.
B. Joining Method: Tapered bell and spigot joints, threaded joints or saw-cut system as
specified.
2.07 PRE-CAST CONCRETE MANHOLES
A. Pre-cast concrete manholes shall be as specified as follows:

1. Description: Precast manhole designed in accordance with ASTM C858,
comprising modular, interlocking sections complete with accessories or as
specified.
2. Loading: ASTM C857, Class A-16, A-12, A-8 or A-0.3 as specified.
3. Shape: Square or rectangular with truncated corners or as indicated.
4. Nominal Inside Dimensions: Specified or indicated mm x mm.
5. Corner Panel Dimensions: Specified mm wide.
6. Inside Depth: Specified mm.
7. Wall Thickness: Specified mm.
8. Base Section: Include 75 or specified mm deep x 350 or specified mm round
sump with cast sleeve, and two 25 mm ground rod openings where specified
9. Top Section: Include 1000 mm diameter or other approved size and shape
grooved opening for frame and cover.
10. Riser Casting: 150 or 300 mm as specified or indicated, with manhole step cast
into frame.
11. Frames and Covers: ASTM A48; Class 30B gray cast iron, 686 or 762 mm size
as specified or other approved standard and size, machine finished with flat
bearing surfaces. Provide cover marked ELECTRIC, TELEPHONE or as
directed by the Engineer to indicate utility.
12. Duct Entry Provisions: Single duct knockouts, window knockouts or windows
with plastic duct terminators and diaphragms as specified.
13. Duct Entry Locations: As specified or indicated.
14. Duct Entry Size: 100 or 150 mm as specified.
15. Cable Pulling Irons: Use galvanised rod and hardware. Locate opposite each
duct entry. Provide watertight seal.
16. Cable Rack Inserts: Minimum load rating 365 kg or as specified. Locate at
specified or indicated distance on centre.
17. Cable Rack Mounting Channel: 38 x 19 mm or approved size steel channel, 1.2
m or specified length. Provide cable rack arm mounting slots 38 mm or at
standard centres.
18. Cable Racks: Steel channel, 38 x 19 x 350 mm or other approved size, with
fastener to match mounting channel.
19. Cable Supports: Porcelain, Maple or other approved type clamps and saddles.
20. Manhole Steps: Polypropylene plastic manhole step with 13 mm steel
reinforcement, Cast steps at 300 mm on centre vertically or as specified or
indicated or Ladder: Aluminium rung, approved length, with top hook to engage
manhole step in riser casting. Provide one ladder for each manhole.
21. Sump Covers: ASTM A48; Class 30B gray cast iron or other approved standard.
22. Source Quality Control: Inspect manholes in accordance with ASTM C1037 or
other approved standard.
2.08 ACCESSORIES
A. Underground Warning Tape: 100 mm wide plastic tape, detectable type, coloured yellow
with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines.
2.09 CAST IN PLACE MANHOLE ACCESSORIES
A. Frames and Covers: ASTM A48; Class 30B gray cast iron, 686 or 762 mm size as
specified or other approved standard and size, machine finished with flat bearing
surfaces. Provide cover marked ELECTRIC, TELEPHONE or as directed by the
Engineer to indicate utility.
B. Cable Pulling Irons: Use galvanised rod and hardware.
C. Cable Rack Inserts: Minimum load rating of 365 kg or as approved.
D. Cable Rack Mounting Channel: 38 x 19 mm or approved size steel channel, 1.2 m or

specified length. Provide cable rack arm mounting slots 38 mm or at standard centres.
E. Cable Racks: Steel channel, 38 x 19 x 350 mm or other approved size, with fastener to
match mounting channel.
F. Cable Supports: Porcelain, Maple or other approved type clamps and saddles.
G. Manhole Steps: Polypropylene plastic manhole step with 13 mm steel reinforcement,

Cast steps at 300 mm on centre vertically or as specified or indicated or Ladder:
Aluminium rung, approved length, with top hook to engage manhole step in riser
casting. Provide one ladder for each manhole.
H. Sump Covers: ASTM A48; Class 30B gray cast iron or other approved standard.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 DUCT BANK INSTALLATION
A. Install duct to locate top of ductbank at depths as indicated on drawings or install duct to
locate top of ductbank minimum specified or indicated mm below finished grade.
B. Install duct with minimum slope of 100 mm per 25.4 m (0.33 percent) or as specified or
indicated. Slope duct away from building entrances.
C. Cut duct square using saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut ends.
D. Insert duct to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.
E. Join non-metallic duct using adhesive as recommended by manufacturer.
F. Wipe non-metallic duct dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of adhesive to
entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes, minimum.
G. Install no more than equivalent of two 90-degree bends between pull points.
H. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where required.
I. Terminate duct at manhole entries using end bell.
J. Stagger duct joints vertically in concrete encasement 150 mm minimum.
K. Use suitable separators and chairs installed not greater than 1200 mm on centres.
L. Band ducts together before backfilling or placing concrete.
M. Securely anchor duct to prevent movement during concrete placement.

N. Place concrete under provisions of relevant section. Use mineral pigment to colour
concrete where specified.
O. Provide minimum 75-mm or other specified concrete cover at bottom, top, and sides of
ductbank.
P. Provide specified or indicated steel reinforcing bars in top of bank under paved areas.
Q. Connect to existing concrete encasement using dowels.
R. Connect to manhole wall using dowels.
S. Provide suitable pull string in each empty duct except sleeves and nipples.
T. Swab duct. Use suitable caps to protect installed duct against entrance of dirt and
moisture.
U. Backfill trenches under provisions of relevant section.
V. Interface installation of underground warning tape with backfilling specified in relevant

section. Install tape 150 mm below finished surface.
3.02 PRE-CAST MANHOLE INSTALLATION
A. Excavate for manhole installation under the provisions of relevant section.
B. Install and seal precast sections in accordance with ASTM C891 or other approved
standard.
C. Install manholes plumb.
D. Use precast neck and shaft sections to bring manhole cover to finished elevation.
E. Attach cable racks to inserts after manhole installation is complete.
F. Where specified or indicated, install drains in manholes and connect to site drainage
system or provide DN100 pipe terminating in 1/4 cu m crushed gravel bed under
provisions of relevant section.
G. Damp proof exterior surfaces, joints, and interruptions of manholes after concrete has
cured 28 days, under provisions of relevant section.
H. Backfill manhole excavation under the provisions of relevant section.
3.03 CAST IN PLACE MANHOLE INSTALLATION
A. Excavate for manhole installation under the provisions of relevant section.
B. Formwork: Form inside and outside manhole surfaces in accordance with provisions of
relevant section.
C. Reinforcing: Install reinforcing under the provisions of relevant section.
D. Concrete: Provide air-entrained, 2000 psi (20 mPa) compressive strength at 28 days
under the provisions of relevant section or as specified.
E. Shape: As specified or indicated.
F. Nominal Dimensions: As specified or indicated.
G. Inside Depth: As specified or indicated.
H. Wall Thickness: As specified or indicated.
I. Base: Include 350 mm drain opening and two 25 mm ground rod openings where
specified. Slope to drain at 6.35 mm per m (2 percent).
J. Top: Include 1000-mm diameter or other approved size and shape opening; cast 13-
mm rod in opening to accept ladder hook.
K. Duct Entry: Cast ducts openings in walls as indicated.
L. Cable Pulling Irons: Locate opposite each duct entry.
M. Cable Rack Inserts: Locate at specified mm on centre.
N. Construct brick collar with 760-mm or approved size clear opening to bring cover to
proper elevation.
O. Manhole Steps: Cast steps at 300 or specified mm on centre vertically or install ladder
in each manhole.
P. Attach cable racks to inserts after manhole construction is complete.
Q. Install drains in manholes and connect to site drainage system or provide 100 mm pipe
terminating in 0.25 cu m crushed gravel bed under provisions of relevant section where
specified or indicated.
R. Damp-proof exterior surfaces, joints, and interruptions of manholes after concrete has
cured 28 days, under provisions of relevant section.
S. Backfill manhole excavation under the provisions of relevant section.
3.04 QUALITY CONTROL AND TEST PROCEDURES
A. General
1. The manufacturer shall provide proof of a stringent Quality Control (QC) Plan or
Inspection Test Plan (ITP). In particular the main equipment manufacturing
stages sanctioned by appropriate tests such as: incoming components
inspection, discrete sub-assembly tests and complete functional checks on the
final product. Final inspection and calibration operations shall be documented in
a report drawn up by the supplier’s Quality Inspection department.
2. The Assembly shall not leave the manufacturer’s works until the works test
sheets have been duly approved and stamped by the Engineer and written
permission is obtained for their dispatch to site.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 0553
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1. Identification for raceway.
2. Identification for conductors and communication and control cable.
3. Underground-line warning tape.
4. Warning labels and signs.
5. Instruction signs.
6. Equipment identification labels.
7. Miscellaneous identification products.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.
B. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system

components used in identification signs and labels.
C. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style,
mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical identification

products of types required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than 3 years.
B. Installers Qualifications: Firm with at least 3 years of installation experience with projects
utilizing electrical identification work similar to that required for this project.
C. Comply with the requirements of the local Authorities
KEO/19-3262-0000 26 0553/1 Identification For Electrical Systems


1. IEC 60364 Electrical Installations for Buildings
2. BS 7671 IET Wiring Regulations
3. BS EN 60445 Basic and safety principles for man-machine
interface, marking and identification. Identification of
equipment terminals, conductor terminations and
conductors
4. BS EN 60446 Basic and safety principles for man-machine
interface, marking and identification. Identification of
conductors by colours or alphanumerics
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with

requirements in the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring
diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual, and with those required by
codes, standards. Use consistent designation throughout project.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be applied.
C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

documents, use only firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of Identification for
Electrical Systems, of types and capacities required which have been in satisfactory use
in similar or service for not less than three (3) years and approved by the Engineer.
2.02 RACEWAYS AND METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with latest Edition ANSI A.13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for
minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.
B. Color for Printed Legend:

1. 11kV Power: White Black
2. 415/240V Power: Green
3. Telecommunication: Yellow
4. Fire Alarm: Orange
5. Emergency: Red
6. Security: Brown
C. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather and
chemical resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing end of
legend label.
D. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretension, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeves,

with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place
by gripping action.
E. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretension, flexible, solid-colored acrylic

sleeves, 50mm long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies
and to stay in place by gripping action.
F. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 50 mm wide;
compounded for outdoor use.
2.03 CONDUCTOR AND COMMUNICATION- AND CONTROL-CABLE IDENTIFICATION

MATERIALS
A. Color-Coding Conductor tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 0.08 mm
thick by 25 to 50 mm wide.
B. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit

identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
C. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels: Cut from 0.35mm thick aluminum sheet, with
stamped, embossed, or scribed legend, and fitted with tabs and matching slots for
permanently securing around wire or cable jacket or around groups of conductors.
D. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 50 by 50 by 1.3 mm, with stamped legend, punched for
use with self-locking nylon tie fastener.
E. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.38 mm thick with corrosion-resistant grommet and
polyester or nylon tie for attachment to conductor or cable.
1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black in marker recommended by tag
manufacturer.

2.04 UNDER GROUND LINE WARNING TAPE
A. Description: permanent, bright colored, continuous printed polyethylene tape

1. Not less than 150mm wide by 0.102mm thick.
2. Compounded for permanent direct burial service.
3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core.
4. Printed legend shall indicate type of underground line.
2.05 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS
A. Comply with latest BS Standards
B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive

labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment, unless
C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for

fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application. 6.4-mm grommets in
corners for mounting. Nominal size, 180 by 250 mm.
D. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs: Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted,

cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 1-mm galvanized-steel backing; and with colors,
legend, and size required for application. 6.4-mm grommets in corners for mounting.
Nominal size, 250 by 360 mm.
E. Warning label and sign shall be in both English and Arabic and shall include, but are not
limited to the following legend:
1. Multiple Power Source Warning: “DANGER – ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD –
EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES.”
2. Medium Voltage: “DANGER-MEDIUM VOLTAGE, KEEP AWAY, BURIED
CABLE, DO NOT TOUCH SWITCH.”
3. High Voltage “DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE”, “KEEP AWAY”, “BURIED CABLE”,
“DO NOT TOUCH SWITCH”.
2.06 INSTRUCTION SIGNS
A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1.6 mm thick for signs up to
129 sq. cm and 3.2 mm thick for larger sizes and done in both Arabic and English
languages.
1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face
2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.
3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable
equipment.
2.07 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS
A. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent

process. Minimum letter height shall be 10 mm.
B. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by
thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 10 mm. Overlay
shall provide a weatherproof and ultraviolet-resistant seal for label.

C. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with
white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 10 mm.
D. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw

mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 10
mm.
E. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black, ink or paint. Minimum letter height
shall be 25 mm.
2.08 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, 1-piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon cable
ties.
1. Minimum Width: 5 mm.
2. Tensile Strength: 22.6 kg, minimum.
3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C.
4. Color: Black, except where used for color-coding.
B. Paint: Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 09 painting
Sections.
1. Exterior Concrete, Stucco and Masonry (Other Than Concrete Unit Masonry)
a. Semi-gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer
1) Primer: Exterior concrete and masonry primer.
2) Finish coats: Exterior semi-gloss acrylic enamel.
2. Exterior Concrete Masonry
a. Semi-gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a block filler
1) Primer: Concrete unit masonry block filler.
2) Finish coats: Exterior semi-gloss acrylic enamel.
3. Exterior Ferrous Metal
a. Semi-gloss Alkyd-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
1) Primer: Exterior ferrous-metal primer.
2) Finish coats: Exterior semi-gloss alkyd enamel.
4. Exterior Zinc Coated Metal (except Raceways).
1) Primer: Exterior zinc coated metal primer.
2) Finish coats: Exterior semi-gloss alkyd enamel.
5. Interior Concrete and Masonry (other than Concrete Unit Masonry)
1) Primer: Interior concrete and masonry primer.
2) Finish coats: Interior semi-gloss alkyd enamel.
6. Interior Concrete Unit Masonry
a. Semi-gloss Acrylic Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
1) Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler.
2) Finish coats: Interior semi-gloss acrylic enamel.
7. Interior Gypsum Board
1) Primer: Interior Ferrous-metal primer.
8. Interior Ferrous Metal
1) Primer: Concrete ferrous metal primer.
9. Interior Zinc Coated Metal (except Raceways)
1) Primer: Interior zinc coated metal primer
C. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping stainless steel screws or stainless steel
machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION
A. Raceways and Duct banks More Than 600 V Concealed within Building: 100 mm wide
black stripes on 250mm centers over orange background that extends full length of
raceway or duct and is 300mm wide. Stencil legend “DANGER CONCEALED” HIGH
VOLTAGE WIRING” witn 75mm high black letters on 500mm centers. Stop stripes at
legends. Apply to the following finished surfaces:
1. Floor surface directly above conduits running beneath and within 300mm of a
floor that is in contact with earth or is framed above unexcavated space.
2. Wall surface directly external to raceways concealed within wall.
3. Accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around raceways in vertical shafts,
exposed in the building, or concealed above suspended ceilings.0
B. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V: Identify with “DANGER HIGH
VOLTAGE” in black letters at least 50mm high, with self-adhesive vinyl labels snap
around labels. Repeat legend at 3m maximum intervals.
C. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad cables, 600 V or less, Service, Feeder and
Branch Circuits More Than 13 A: Identify with orange self-adhesive vinyl label snap-
around label self-adhesive vinyl tape applied in bands,
D. Accessible Raceways and Cables of Auxiliary Systems: Identify the following systems
with color-coded, self-adhesive vinyl tape applied in bands, snap around color coding
bands.
1. Fire Alarm System: Red
2. Fire Suppression Supervisory and Control System: Red and Yellow
3. Combine Fire Alarm and Security System: Red and Blue
4. Security System: Blue and Yellow
5. Mechanical and Electrical Supervisory System: Green and blue.
6. Telecommunication System: Green and yellow.
7. Control Wiring: Green and red.
E. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification: For primary and secondary conductors in vaults,

pull and junction boxes, use color-coding conductor tape marker tape aluminum
wraparound marker labels metal tags. Identify source and circuit number of each set of
conductors. For single conductor cables, identify phase in addition to the above.
F. Branch-Circuit Conductor Identification: Where there are conductors for more than
three branch circuits in same junction or pull box, use color-coding conductor tape
marker tape aluminum wrap around marker labels. Identify each ungrounded conductor
according to source and circuit number.
G. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach marker tape to conductors and list
source and circuit number.
H. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm,
control, signal, sound, intercommunications, voice, and data connections.
1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions,
terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.
2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with
system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.
3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams,
and Operation and Maintenance Manual.
I. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground lines warning tape for
power, lighting, communication and control wiring and optical fiber cable. Limit use of
underground line warning tape to direct buried cables. Install underground line
warning tape for both direct buried cables and cables in raceway.
J. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting:
Comply with BS Standards and apply self-adhesive warning labels baked enamel
warning signs metal backed buried butyrate warning signs. Identify system voltage with
black letters on an orange background. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other
access.
1. Equipment with Multiple Power or Control Sources: Apply to door or cover of
equipment including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Power transfer switches.
b. Controls with external control power connections.
2. Equipment Requiring Workspace Clearance According to latest BS Standards:
Unless otherwise indicated, apply to door or cover of equipment but not on flush
panel boards and similar equipment in finished spaces.
K. Instruction Signs:
1. Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs in both English and Arabic
languages to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems
and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend
where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.
2. Emergency Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs in both English and
Arabic languages with white legend on a red background with minimum 10mm
high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer load
shedding.
L. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation

label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation and Maintenance
Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or
master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each
system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring,
and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.
1. Labeling Instructions:
a. Indoor Equipment: Adhesive film label, adhesive film label with clear
protective overlay, self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine
label, Engraved laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise
indicated, provide a single line of text with 13-mm high letters on 38-mm
high label; where 2 lines of text are required, use labels 50 mm high.
b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.
Stenciled legend 100mm high
c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those
appropriate for viewing from the floor.
2. Equipment to Be Labeled:
a. Panel boards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures.
b. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.
c. Electrical switchgear and switchboards.
d. Transformer
e. Electrical Substation
f. Emergency system boxes and enclosures.
g. Motor control centers
h. Disconnect switches.
i. Enclosed circuit breakers.
j. Motor starters.
k. Push-button stations.
l. Power transfer equipment
m. Contactors.
n. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices.
o. Battery inverter units.
p. Battery racks.
q. Power generating units
r. Voice and data cable terminal equipment.
s. Master clock and program equipment
t. Intercommunication and call system master and staff stations
u. Television/audio components and annunciators
v. Fire alarm control panel and annunciator
w. Security and intrusion-detection control stations, control panels, terminal
cabinets, and racks.
x. Monitoring and control equipment.
y. Uninterruptible power supply equipment.
z. Terminals, racks, and patch panels for voice and data communication and
for signal and control functions.
aa. Terminal, racks, patch panel for system integrator, building management
system.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.
B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient
viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using

materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.
E. Attach non adhesive signs and plastic labels with screws and auxiliary hardware
appropriate to the location and substrate.
F. System Identification Color Banding for Raceways and Cables: Each color band shall
completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in
contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and
floors, at 15-m maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 7.6-m maximum intervals in
congested areas.

G. Color-Coding for Phase Neural ground and Voltage Level Identification 11KV, 600 V and
Less: Use the colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit
conductors.
1. Color shall be factory applied
2. Colors for 415/240-V Circuits:
a. Phase A: Red
b. Phase B: Yellow
c. Phase C: Blue
d. Neutral: Black
e. Ground: Yellow and Green
3. Colors for 11 kV Circuits:
a. Phase A: Brown.
b. Phase B: Orange.
c. Phase C: Yellow.
4. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a
minimum distance of 150 mm from terminal points and in boxes where splices or
taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible
unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.
H. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of
conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.
I. Underground – Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous

under-ground line warning tape directly line at 150 to 200mm below finished grade. Use
multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete
envelop exceed 400MM overall
J. Painted Identification: Prepare surface and apply paint according to painting Section.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 2413
SWITCHBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section shall include the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of all
Switchboards including Low Voltage Panel (MLTB), Main Switchboards (MSB), Sub-
main Switchboards (SMSB) in accordance with the specifications and drawings.

3. Division 26 Section 26 2416 "Distribution Boards".
4. Division 26 Section 26 2419 "Motor-Control Centers".
6. Division 26 Section 26 2913 - Enclosed Controllers
7. Division 26 Section 26 2816 - Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
8. Division 26 Section 26 2923 "Variable-Frequency Motor Controllers"
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of switchboard, over-current protective device, transient
surge protection voltage suppression device, ground-fault protector, accessory, and
component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on
features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each switchboard and related equipment.

1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required
clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed
devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:
a. Enclosure types and details for each type.
b. Bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
c. Short-circuit current rating of switchboards and overcurrent protective
devices.
C. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
D. Field quality-control test reports including the following:

KEO/19-3262-0000 26 2413/1 Switchboards

3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that
comply with requirements.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For switchboards and components to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in
Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1. Routine maintenance requirements for switchboards and all installed
components.
2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent
protective devices.
3. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent
protective device.
A. “Design Verification” by type testing shall be performed for complete range of

switchboards as defined in IEC 61439 (Part-1&2) standards through one of the
international laboratories listed under ASTA or KEMA.
B. The prototype assemblies shall be with same components as proposed & shall confirm
to following 9 type tests (design verification by type testing) defined in IEC 61439(Part-
1&2):-
1. Verification of Strength of materials and parts (clause 10.2)
2. Verification of Degree of protection of enclosures (clause 10.3)
3. Verification of Clearances and creepage distances (clause 10.4)
4. Verification of Protection against electric shock and integrity of protective circuits
(clause 10.5)
5. Verification of Dielectric properties (clause 10.9)
6. Verification of Temperature-rise limits (clause 10.10)Temperature rise test shall
be conducted at 50degC lab temperature.
7. Verification of Short-circuit withstand strength (clause 10.11)
8. Verification of Electromagnetic Compatibility- EMC (clause 10.12)
9. Verification of Mechanical operation (clause 10.13)
C. The prototype assemblies shall confirm to following 3 design verification by design rules
as defined in IEC 61439(Part-1&2):-
1. Verification of Incorporation of switching devices and components (clause 10.6)
2. Verification of Internal electrical circuits and connections (clause 10.7)
3. Verification of Terminals for external conductors (clause 10.8)
D. The above Design Verification type test certificate along with drawing and details of the
original tested assembly and comparison study of the proposed board with the certified
assembly, shall be produced from one of these internationally recognized High voltage
Laboratories under ASTA or KEMA.
E. The local switchboard factory must have ASTA Diamond or KEMA Keur certification for
the proposed switchboards to guarantee final product quality.
F. Routine test: The panel assembler shall perform the routine test and provide the test
certificates as defined in IEC standards. The routine test shall include but not limited to
the following:
1. Inspection of the assembly including inspection of wiring and electrical
operational test (IEC Clause 8.3.1);
2. Dielectric test & Insulation resistance test (IEC Clause 8.3.2 & 8.3.4);
3. Checking of protective measures and of the electrical continuity of the protective
circuits (IEC Clause 8.3.3)
4. Functional test as per the approved test procedure.
G. Routine test certificates and test readings shall be submitted to the consultant engineer
for verification.
H. Prior to placing order of the equipment, ensure that the physical dimensions of the
equipment do not infringe the working space required by the applicable standards.
I. Single-Source Responsibility: Ensure that each category of selected material or

equipment shall be of a particular range of one manufacturer who would take full
J. The switchgear manufacturer must have a previous record of satisfactory service for at
least (10) years.
K. Manufacturer shall be specialized in manufacturing & maintenance of all products as

specified under this Section with minimum five years of documented experience in with
same components as proposed. The manufacturer shall be well documented ISO 9001
certified.
L. Routine tests of all main switchboards and motor control centers manufactured by
overseas manufacturer shall be submitted for testing by an internationally approved
laboratory testing agency and test certificates issued accordingly shall be submitted
prior to delivery to shipment. Locally manufactured switchboards and control centers
shall be tested at the manufacturer’s testing laboratory witnessed. The tests shall be
done in accordance with IEC 61439-1&2 and other required tests as approved by the
Engineer.

1. IEC 61439 (Part -1 & 2): Low voltage switchgears and control gears assemblies
2. IEC 60529: Degree of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
3. IEC 60269 (Part 1 to 4), BS 88: Specification for Cartridge Fuses
4. IEC 60255: Measuring Relays & Protection equipments, Electronic Relays
5. BS 1361: Specification for Cartridge Fuses for A.C circuit
6. IEC 60898: Circuit breakers for over current protection for household installation
7. IEC 61008 (Part – 1 & 2): Residual Current Operated Circuit breakers without
integral over current protection (RCCB)
8. IEC 61009 (Part – 1 & 2): Residual Current Operated Circuit breakers with
integral over current protection (RCBO)
9. IEC 60947-1: LV Switchgear & Control Gear – General rules
10. IEC 61869 (Part 1 to 3): Instrument transformers
11. IEC 60947-2: Low voltage switchgear and Control Gear
12. IEC 60947-5 (1 to 9 parts): Control Circuit Devices and Switching Elements
13. IEC 60947-3: Switches, Disconnectors, Switch-disconnectors & Fuse
combination unit
14. IEC 60947-4 (1 to 3 parts): Contactors and motor starters

15. IEC 60947-7(1 to 3 parts): Ancillary Equipments–Terminal Blocks for copper
conductors
16. BS 159: Busbars and busbar connections
17. BS 5685 / IEC 60051: Electric Meters
18. Local power supply Authority Requirements
C. For those parts of equipment, where no mention is made of the relevant standard,
reference is made to the latest IEC standards.
D. In a situation where a conflict occurs between these standards, the most stringent shall
be applied.
1.06 OVER-CURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE CO-ORDINATION
A. The Contractor shall carry out and provide an over-current protective device. Co-
ordination study as part of his material submission, as outlined below:
B. Properly coordinated automatically operated over-current protective devices shall be

provided for this project. The over-current protective devices shown on the drawings
shall be coordinated for adequate continuous current and interrupting capacity to assure
proper over-current protective devices operation under normal and fault conditions in the
system.
C. All over-current protective devices on this project and the first upstream device of the
electrical system shall be coordinated so that they will perform as follows. When two or
more over-current protective devices (including the first upstream protective device of
the system) in series with each other experience current flow greater than their rated
current, the device with the lowest rated current shall trip and/ or open the circuit first
and thereby prevent the higher rated devices from operating.
D. The supplier of the over-current protective devices shall prepare a co-ordination study to
verify the above stated performance requirements. The study shall be documented by
the Supplier and the documents shall include but not be limited to the following:
1. A composite drawing or drawings (on full size, reproducible, log-log paper)
showing the entire electrical system (including the first upstream protective
device of the system) showing all protective device curves (including motor
overloads), short circuit duties, motor starting curves and damage curves for
motors, equipment and conductors. This drawing or drawings shall show that all
protective devices are properly coordinated to perform as stated above.
2. Manufacturer’s over-current operating curves (on full size, reproducible, log-log
paper) for each over-current device. In the case of fuses, both minimum melt and
maximum clearing time curves shall be included.
3. Reproducible copies of all project single line diagrams so marked to show short
circuit duties at all switchboards and motor control centers, and which operating
curve applies to each over-current device on the diagram (the operating curves
shall also be correspondingly marked)
4. A tabulation of the short circuit duties at all switchboards and motor control
centers, sizes and ratings of all over-current protective devices so that the
performance requirements are met. Protective devices which have earth fault
protection features are specifically required to meet this performance
requirement.
E. This documented coordination study shall be submitted for review before the over-
current devices are supplied for the Project.
A. Deliver in sections or lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path.
B. Store indoors in clean dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation.
Protect from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical
damage.
C. If stored in areas subjected to weather, cover switchboards to provide protection from

weather, dirt, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing and
flammable materials from inside switchboards; install temporary cooling to prevent
condensation.
A. Installations Pathway: Remove and replace access fencing, doors, lift-out panels, and
structures to provide pathway for moving switchboards into place.
B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for
Switchboard, including clearances. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

1.010 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switchboards and components with other

construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain
required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors
and panels.
B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
contents.
1. 2% spare molded case circuit breakers of all different frame sizes, but in any
case not less than 2 nos. circuit breakers of each size.
2. 5% spare indicating lamps for each indicating lamp in the switchgear.
3. One set of tools required for switchgear maintenance.
4. Provide complete spare parts as recommended by the manufacturer for different
sizes of ACB.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

documents, use only firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of Switchboards, of types
and capacities required which have been in satisfactory use in similar or service for not
less than ten (10) years and approved by the Engineer.
2.02 GENERAL
A. Provide complete distribution equipment which shall include Low Voltage Panel (MLTB/
Main Switchboards (MSB), Sub-main Switchboards (SMSB) and Feeder Pillars (FP).
2.03 LOW VOLTAGE PANEL (MLTB)
A. General
1. The Low voltage panel shall be of indoor construction, dead front, metal
enclosed multi-cubicle type, free standing, dust and vermin protected, front
operated and of clean and modern appearances.
2. The Low voltage panel shall be assembled and coordinated by one manufacturer
and shall be constructed to Form 4B Type 7 in accordance with the requirements
of IEC61439-1 & 2. The Low voltage panel shall be made of folded steel
construction; minimum 2mm thickness, fully rust proofed and stove enameled.
The panel shall be IP-52 rated.
3. All exposed bolts or screw heads shall be chrome or cadmium plated.
4. All doors and removable covers or plates shall be provided with suitable PVC or
neoprene gaskets to prevent the ingress of dust, vermin and insects.
5. Each unit of the Low voltage panel shall be housed in its own cell fitted with a
hinged door mechanically interlocked in such a manner that the cell door can
only be opened when the switch is in the "OFF" position.
6. Switching units shall be arranged in separate compartments or sections to
prevent when handling the elements in the section and to prevent the spreading
of faults from one section to the other.
7. Adequate cableways shall be provided in the switchboard accessible by hinged
lids or removable covers.
8. The equipment in the switch boards shall be accessible with indicating
instruments mounted not higher than 2 m and the center lines of operating
devices not higher than 1.9 m above Low voltage panel base. The Low voltage
panel shall be properly fixed to the floor with foundation bolts grouted in the floor
or bolted to channels laid across the cable trench.
9. The Low voltage panel shall have top or bottom cable entry as required. Main
incoming cables shall be bottom entry, with necessary cable glands.
10. The Low voltage panel shall contain the air circuits breakers, bus bars, bus
couplers, MCCBs, instruments, etc., as specified hereunder with ratings and
arrangement as shown on the Drawings and shall be complete with all-internal
wiring and connections.
11. The Low voltage panel shall be tested, at the manufacturer’s premises as well as
after installation in accordance with tests stipulated in IEC 61439-1 & 2 and
witnessed. “Design verification” type test certificates shall be submitted as part
of material submittal.
B. Busbars
1. Busbars shall be of electrolytic hard drawn copper to B.S. 159 with rating as
indicated on the Drawings, air insulated and rigidly supported by suitable non-
hygroscopic, anti-tracking insulators so as to withstand forces due to thermal
expansion under normal operating conditions and the fault currents specified and
neatly arranged for 500 V, Hz, 3 phase, 4 wire operation.
2. Busbars shall extend through the length of the board with the same cross section
throughout.
3. Busbars bracing shall maintain the same mechanical strength and current
carrying capacity under normal operating conditions and fault conditions as
indicated on the drawings.
4. Busbars shall be housed in separate adequately ventilated compartment, which
shall not contain any wiring or apparatus other than that required for connection
to busbars. Access to busbars and busbar connections shall be gained only by
removal of covers secured by bolts or studs. Busbars shall be covered with
colored PVC sleeves or painted for phase identification.
C. Air Circuit Breakers

1. The air circuit breakers shall be featuring the followings:
a. Shall be air break, trip free, draw out type with the main contacts encased
in a reinforced polyester casing and offer double insulation from the
operators on the breaker front face.
b. Shall be fully tropicalized (T2) as defined in IEC 60068-2-30 and shall
have salt spray resistance as per IEC 60068-2-11.
c. Shall comply with IEC 60947-2 utilization category B and shall accept
reverse feeding without reduction of performance.
d. Shall comply with the isolating function requirements of IEC 60947.2
section 7.1.2 and shall have minimum 690V 50 Hz operational voltage,
1000 V 50 Hz rated insulation voltage and 12kV withstand surge voltage
(Vimp).
e. 3-pole and 4-pole versions shall have ratings as shown in the drawings.
f. Breaking capacities shall not be less than 65 kA symmetrical for 0.5 sec.
at 415 volt. Evidence of the service breaking capacity (Ics) shall be
produced by test certificates from a member of ASTA or KEMA or CECI,
the internationally recognized HV testing laboratories.
2. The operating mechanism shall be of the O-C-O stored energy spring type with a
closing time less than or equal to 80milliseconds. Electrically operated circuit
breakers shall have the spring charging motor connected so that the springs
remain charged always with the motor disconnected after charging. A standby
manual operating handle for spring charging shall be provided for operating the
circuit breaker in case of power or motor failure. Anti-pumping function shall be
provided by integral devices to prevent re-closing after a close-open operation if
the closing impulse is maintained after the breaker has opened.
3. Each ACB shall be provided with but not limited to the following components and
accessories:
a. auxiliary Contacts
b. arc Chutes
c. folding Extension Rail
d. charging Handle
e. open and Close Push-buttons
f. over Current Trip Indicator
g. key lock on Trip Button
h. Spring Charge Condition Indicator
i. breaker Position Indicator
j. making Current Release
k. automatic Shutters for the B/B Terminal
l. carriage for every size of ACB exceeding 25 KG in Weight
m. operation Counter
n. Shunt trip mechanism.
4. The circuit breaker shall have three positions of the draw-out mechanism, namely
service position where all main and auxiliary contacts are made, test position
where main contacts are open but auxiliary contacts are closed and isolated
position where all contacts are open. Mechanical indication on the front of the
ACB shall be provided to indicate a) main contacts closed 'ON', b) main contacts
open 'OFF', c) springs charged, d) springs discharged e) service position, f) test
position, and g), isolated position for draw-out mechanism.
5. Any attempt to withdraw or insert the breaker when it is 'ON' shall trip the breaker
automatically. An interlocking shall be provided to prevent insertion of a circuit
breaker having a rating higher than the current rating of the ACB cradle.
6. It shall be possible to draw out the circuit breaker with the switchboard door
closed.
7. Insulated safety shutters shall screen all live parts in the ACB cradle when the
breaker is in the isolated or racked out position.
8. The moving contacts comprising the main and arcing contacts shall have visual
wear indicator and be of the spring-loaded type. The main contacts and clusters
shall be site replaceable.
9. The circuit breakers shall have sufficient number of auxiliary contacts for
interlocking system. It shall be possible to connect all auxiliary wirings from the
front face of the air circuit breakers and these wirings shall be taken through a
set of disconnecting contacts, so that all auxiliary wirings are automatically
disconnected in the isolated and draw-out positions.
10. The circuit breakers shall be equipped with making current release (MCR) over-
current and earth leakage protection by means of integral self-powered
microprocessor based solid-state RMS sensing current relays. The long time
over-current protection shall have a setting range between 50 and 100 per cent
of sensor rating in steps of 10%. The corresponding time delay shall be
adjustable from 2 to 25 seconds. The short delayed short circuit protection shall
have a setting range from 2 to 10 times the sensor rating. The corresponding
time delay shall be adjustable from instantaneous to 100 to 500 milliseconds with
a possibility to select time inverse characteristic for improved discrimination. The
instantaneous short circuit protection shall be adjustable from 2 to 12 times rated
current. The earth leakage protection shall have current settings from 25 per
cent of the rated current to 1200 A in steps. The time delay setting shall be
variable from 0.1 sec to 0.5sec.

11. The ACB shall be equipped with a trip unit which shall have the following
functions:
a. The interrupted current & phase currents shall be displayable on the
ammeter. LED's on the front face shall indicate the type of fault.
b. Over-temperature trip shall be a standard feature of the trip unit.
c. The trip unit shall have thermal memory, which should in the event of
repeated overloads of faults memorize temperature rise by using thermal
integration. Internal overheating of the control unit shall be indicated by a
self-monitoring alarm.
12. The ACB used on the bus-section shall be identical to the ACB specified but
without any protection. It has the following indications:
a. Circuit breaker closed.
b. Circuit breaker open.
D. Current Transformers
1. Current transformer shall be of the bar primary type, air cooled and suitably
insulated. They shall be of Class 1 accuracy for measurements and of Class 10
P10 accuracy for protection in accordance with IEC 61869. The secondary
windings shall be rated at 5A.
E. Instruments
1. The measuring instruments shall include ammeters, voltmeters, power factor
meters, maximum demand indicators and selector switches and associated
accessories (such as measuring circuit protection) as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Measuring instruments shall be moving iron vane type, flush pattern with dust
and moisture-proof enclosures. The instruments shall have anti-glare glass
fronts, anti-parallax scales and white faces with black numerals and markings. All
instruments shall be a long scale 240°, with full load indicating approximately at
180° The instrument cases shall be semi-flush mounted and shall be 36 x 36mm
square. Accuracy shall be one per cent of full-scale values. Moving elements
shall be provided with zero adjustments external to the cases, located at face of
dial.
3. Ammeters shall be moving iron type, to BS 89 scaled in accordance to their
circuit breakers. Ammeters shall be capable of withstanding twice the rated
current for ten (10) minutes and overload sustained under fault conditions,
without damage or loss of accuracy.
4. Voltmeters shall be moving iron type to BS 90 scaled 0-500V and provided with
6-position selector switches allowing reading of line to line and line to neutral
voltages.
5. Voltmeters shall withstand twice the rated full-scale voltage, for 1.0 minute,
without damage.
6. Maximum demand indictors shall be of the thermal type with a 20-minute time
delay.
7. Digital indictors for above-mentioned measuring instruments may be provided
subject to approval.
F. Meters
1. Kilowatt-hour meters shall be provided as per the requirements of the local
Electrical Power Authority. They shall be dust and vermin proof and shall be of
robust construction so that they will keep their accuracy over many years of
service under the local climatic conditions. The counters shall be of the
cyclometer type with six digits to give direct reading of power consumptions, the
lowest figure being units and not tenths of units. Pointer type counters are not
acceptable. The calibrating adjustment should be operated by screwdriver only.
Meters should have not less than 5-mm diameter terminal holes and shall be
operated through three suitably rated current transformers and the counter of the
meter should be calibrated to read the primary KWH.
2. All meters shall be handed over to the Power Supply Authorities for calibration
prior to final installation and connection.
3. All Kilowatt-hour meters shall be equipped with a pulse output (equivalent to the
metered energy), to provide an energy consumption scheme at a remote control
and monitoring system.
G. Moulded Case Circuit Breaker

1. The Moulded case circuit breakers shall comply with IEC60947-1 and IEC
60947-2 standards quick make and quick break type free toggle mechanism of
utilization category 'A' having rated service breaking capacity (Ics), suitable for
isolation as per IEC 60947-2. The breaker shall be available in 3 or 4 pole
version. . Evidence of the service breaking capacity (Ics) shall be produced by
test certificates from a member of ASTA or KEMA or CECI, the internationally
recognized HV testing laboratories.
2. All MCCBs shall be factory tested by the manufacturer before dispatch and
routine test certificates shall be available. Random sampling test by the
manufacturer is not acceptable.
3. Breakers contacts shall be made of non-welding and non-corrodible composition.
Circuit breakers shall be actuated by a toggle or handle having ON/OFF/TRIP
markings such that the toggle or handle can only be in OFF position if the poles
are all actually separated. The breaker to be suitable to be equipped with a
locking device in the "isolated" position and there shall be a "push to trip" button
in front to test the operation and the opening of the poles.
4. Tripping Characteristic: Circuit breakers shall have inverse time tripping
characteristic with automatic release secured through action of a combination of
thermal-magnetic or electronic trip units, tripping free the handle in case of an
overload or a short circuit.
5. Motor Mechanism: Circuit breakers shall be suitable to be equipped where
applicable, with a motor mechanism of the stored energy type that could operate
in less than 100ms.
6. All MCCB’s shall be provided with ON/OFF/TRIP auxiliary contacts.
7. Residual Current Device: Circuit breakers shall be suitable to be equipped where
applicable, with a residual current device directly to the circuit breaker case and
shall operate without an auxiliary power supply. The add-on RCDs shall comply
with appendix B of IEC 60947-2 standard.
8. Electronic Trip Unit Circuit Breakers: MCCB with ratings up to 630A shall be
equipped with adjustable thermal and adjustable magnetic or electronic trip units.
The MCCB over 630A frame size shall be equipped with electronic trip units and
shall sense the actual RMS values for the following field-adjustable settings:
a. Instantaneous trip.
b. Long- and short-time pickup levels.
c. Long- and short-time time adjustments.
d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.
9. Communication Capability: The Circuit-breaker shall be equipped with
communication module with functions and features compatible with power
monitoring and control system.
H. Earth Leakage Relays

1. General
2. The relay shall comply with IEC 60755.

3. The relays shall be protected against nuisance tripping cause by switching
surges or by lightning surges.
4. The relays shall be of solid state type (mechanical type shall not be accepted).
5. Self-protected from high magnitude earth-faults and protected against dirt,
vibration and moisture.
6. The relays shall be able to operate in the presence of fault currents with DC
components.
7. Each relay shall accept a wide range of auxiliary supply voltages from 48V to
240V AC and 48V to 300 V DC as per the requirement in the drawings.
8. The sensitivity of relays shall be adjustable as per the requirement in the
drawings. The relays shall have time delay option if required selectable in eight
steps from instantaneous to 1 sec.
9. The size of the relays shall be compact. They shall be suitable for mounting on a
symmetrical rail horizontally or vertically.
10. The relays shall be equipped with one changeover output contact. The continuity
of the measurement circuit shall be monitored to ensure that the toroid circuit is
not open.
11. Current Sensors (Toroids)
a. Shall be a rectangular type for bus-duct feeders
b. Shall be circular/ring type for cable feeders
c. The toroids shall be of the closed type with an inside diameter ranging
from 30 to 200mm.
d. The toroids shall have cable guides to ensure that feeder cable is
centered within the toroid.
e. The maximum link resistance from the toroid to the relay must not exceed
3 ohms.
I. Protection Relays
1. Protection relays shall comply with IEC 60255.
2. Thermal overload relays shall be used for motors ratings, up to and including
11kW, giving protection against:
a. Over-current unbalance
b. Single phase
c. Earth fault
3. For motors rated above 11KW, multi-functional relays shall be used. Multi-
functional relays to include protection, metering, control, monitoring and
annunciating functions. It is envisaged that the following functions are available.
a. Overload
b. Over-current
c. Single phase
d. Earth fault
e. Under voltage
f. Over voltage
4. Plus digital indication of:
a. Relay settings % of FLC that the motor is taking
b. Continuous monitoring of thermal capacity of motor
c. Thermal capacity used during start of motor
d. If tripped, how much time before restart to take place
e. Stall or short circuit trip
f. Earth fault trip
g. Starting
5. Documentary evidence must be produced, showing the current/time
characteristic of each overload at its setting (hot/cold for the thermal overload)
overlaid on the motor manufacturers thermal stability time/current characteristic,
for comparison. Consideration must be given as to the requested method of
starting (DOL, star delta, etc.).
6. All motor overload relays shall include a manual resetting facility.
J. Bus Section Couplers

1. Bus section couplers shall be air circuit breakers, 4-pole as specified above but
without protection.
K. Earth Bus
1. The earth bus shall be copper, minimum half the size of the main busbars
extending throughout the length of the switchboard and fixed to brass nuts
brazed to the steel members of the switchboards. The earth bus shall be
extended at the ends for connection to the earth electrodes and shall have
provision for terminating earth continuity conductors.
L. Circuits And Connections

1. All outgoing circuits shall have separate compartment and/or be screened so that
equipment for any one circuit can be maintained without risk of contact with live
connections on any other circuit.
2. Feeders for circuits rated up to 63A shall be connected to terminal blocks located
in separate compartments at top or bottom, conveniently arranged to facilitate
termination of cables and suitably identified.
3. For feeders rated more than 63A copper links shall be suitably extended, rigidly
supported and covered with colored PVC sleeves or painting for phase
identification.
4. All feeders shall be provided with cable lugs and brass cable glands.
5. Removable gland plates suitable for the glands required for the specified cables
shall be provide. Where cables are single core, the gland plates shall be of a
non-ferrous metal.
6. All control wiring shall be of stranded copper, not less than 2.5 mm2 with PVC
insulation to B.S.231. Control wiring shall be neatly bunched in harness form, or
shall be enclosed in purpose made plastic trunking. Where wiring runs through
sheet steel panels’ holes, suitable grommets shall be provided.
7. Wiring associated with external circuits shall be connected to terminal strips
conveniently arranged.
8. Each connection shall have separate incoming and outgoing terminals and no
more than two wires shall be connected to any terminal.
9. All spare contacts shall be wired to terminal strips suitable positioned.
10. All wiring shall be identified using plastic ferrules at both ends.
M. Energy Monitoring Unit (EMU)

1. Energy monitoring unit shall be a true RMS digital instrument capable for
accurate measurement.
2. Energy monitoring unit shall be provided with backlit LCD display unit combined
with function keys, minimum IP52, shall be mounted locally on the incomer
cubicle door.
3. EMU shall confirm to BSEN 61010-1.
4. EMU shall register all measured values and log current and previous measured
values for reporting and printing purposes.
5. EMU shall be provided with RS-485 port with standard Modbus RTU for Modbus
communication protocol.
6. The following measured parameters for each incoming feeder shall be provided
to Intelligent Building Management System (IBMS) by Energy Monitoring Unit
(EMU):
a. Instantaneous rms values
1) Phase Current (R,Y,B & N)
2) Phase Voltage (RN, YN, BN)
3) Line Voltage (RY, YB, BR)
4) Frequency
b. Power
1) Real, reactive, apparent power total (kW, kVAR, kVA)
2) Power factor total
c. Energy Values
1) Real, reactive, apparent energy (kWh, kVARh, kVAh)
d. Demand Values
1) Real, reactive, apparent demand total (kWd, kVARd, kVAd)
2) Demand current (R, Y, B & N – present and maximum)
e. Power quality measurement
1) Harmonic distortion - THD phase voltage (RN, YN, BN)
2) Harmonic distortion - THD phase current (R, Y, B)
2.04 CONTROL BATTERY SYSTEM AND BATTERY CHARGER
A. System Requirements: 30 V DC Battery shall have number of cells and ampere-hour

capacity based on an initial specific gravity of 1.210 at 25 deg C with electrolyte at
normal level and minimum ambient temperature of 50 deg C. Cycle battery before
shipment to guarantee rated capacity on installation. Arrange battery to operate
ungrounded.
B. Battery: Maintenance free long life Nickel cadmium sealed type complying with
BSEN60623. System batteries shall be suitable for service at an ambient temperature of
50 deg C. Limit variation of current output to 0.8 percent. The battery should be of
adequate capacity to maintain full operation of the relevant load equipment plus an
additional 20 percent, for a period of 8 hours during main failure, assuming a normal
charge condition at the start of the mains failure.
C. All batteries shall be protected from mechanical damage and any accidental electric
shorting. All batteries shall be supplied in banks sized for easy handling and all
interconnections shall be included Batteries shall not be so ventilated that gases do not
permeate into adjacent equipment.
D. Charger: Static-type silicon rectifier equipped with automatic regulation and provision for
manual and automatic adjustment of charging rate. Unit shall automatically maintain
output voltage within 0.5 percent from no load to rated charger output current, with ac
input-voltage variation of plus or minus 10 percent and input-frequency variation of plus
or minus 3 Hz. Other features of charger include the following: The charger shall include
but not limited to the following features:
1. DC ammeter
2. DC Voltmeter: Maximum error of 5 percent at full-charge voltage; operates with
toggle switch to
3. Select between battery and charger voltages.
4. Ground Indication: Two appropriately labeled lights to indicate circuit ground,
connected in series between negative and positive terminals, with midpoint
junction connected to ground by normally open-push button contact.
5. Capacity: Sufficient to supply steady load, float-change battery between 2.20 and
2.25 V per cell and equalizing charge at 2.33 V per cell.

6. Charging-Rate Switch: Manually operated switch provides for transferring to
higher charging rate. Charger operates automatically after switch operation until
manually reset.
7. AC power supply is 240 V, 50 Hz, subject to plus or minus 10 percent variation in
voltage and plus or minus 3-Hz variation in frequency. After loss of ac power
supply for any interval, charger automatically resumes charging battery. Charger
regulates rate of charge to prevent damage due to overload and to prevent fuses
or circuit breakers from opening.
8. Protective Feature: Current-limiting device or circuit, which limits output current to
rating of charger but does not disconnect charger from either battery or ac
supply; to protect charger from damage due to overload, including short circuit on
output terminals.
9. Electrical Filtering: Reduces charger’s audible noise to less than 26Db.
10. Panel shall be of form 4.
2.05 MAIN/SUB-MAIN SWITCH BOARDS
A. General:
1. The main/ sub-switch boards shall comprise of main isolator, bus bars, branch
circuit moulded circuit breakers, earth leakage relays, ammeters, voltmeters,
indicating lamps etc. all housed in a sheet steel cabinet, rust-proof stove
enameled, equipped with a hinged door fitted with a suitable locking device.
2. The assembly of the boards shall be such that the main isolator and the outgoing
MCCBs cannot be reached when the door(s) of the cabinet are open. To gain
access to the components, cables and terminations of a switch board, another
cover metal sheet fastened to the cabinet by screws need to be removed.
3. The switchboards shall be assembled taking into account the requirement of
ample space and adequate clearance to allow for wiring terminations and air
circulation to encounter heat dissipation.
B. Construction
1. The Main/ sub-switch boards shall be floor standing, totally enclosed, cubicle
type, dust protected and vermin proof, containing the main components shown
on the drawings and/or specified herein above.
2. Switchboards shall be factory assembled and constructed to Form 2A Type 2 in
accordance with IEC 61439-1&2, unless indicated otherwise elsewhere in the
Project Documents. The panels shall be IP-52 rated if located indoor and IP-65
rated if located outdoor.
3. Cabinet to be suitable to withstand the fault current stresses available.
4. Cabinet to be constructed from sheet metal panels built up on main/ substantial
rolled steel or folded sheet steel sections framework.
5. Sheet metal for building large panels shall be not less than 16 SWG.
6. Switchboard shall be divided integrally with sheet metal webs to separate low
voltage equipment from instruments and control equipment and to ensure
overheating does not occur.
7. Access doors shall have concealed hinges, stops and interlocks where required,
and a dust excluding gasket contained in a rebate.
8. Door handles shall be the rotating type closing onto ramps, of approved pattern,
finished in a black, hard wearing non-conductive material.
9. Cabinet shall have adequate means for lifting and shall be capable of being
rolled or moved into the installation position and bolted directly to the floor.
10. Switchboards shall have necessary cut-outs, drillings and the point of entry of
feeders.
11. After fabrication, steelwork shall be cleaned; zinc sprayed and stove enameled
with one primer coat, two undercoats and one finishing coat, the surface being
rubbed down after each coat.
12. Finished color: light grey.
13. The Main/ sub-switch boards shall be tested, at the manufacturer’s premises as
well as after installation in accordance with tests stipulated in IEC 61439-1&2 and
witnessed. Type test certificates by the manufacturer shall be submitted as part
of material submittal.
C. Components:
1. Components shall be the product of one manufacturer.
2. Switching and protective devices shall have clear on/off identification.
3. Circuit devices shall be individually mounted in a cubicle form, front accessible
for installation, adjustment and inspection and rear accessible for connection with
line and load connection terminals.
4. Components shall be labeled for easy identification.
D. Internal Wiring:
1. PVC insulated, color coded cables.
2. Factory installed, neatly bunched and supported and extended on to labeled
terminal boards for the connection of external services.
3. Terminals: anti-turn solder less type suitable for cable sizes shown on the
Drawings.
E. Current Limiting Circuit Breakers

1. To be similar to moulded case circuit breakers, but shall be capable of
interrupting heavy short circuits current similar to the cut off characteristic of high
rupturing capacity fuses.
2. To incorporate electromagnetic repulsing mechanism, shall have a breaking
capacity of 100kA at 415 V and shall limit the symmetrical fault current to 3.0kA.
F. Non-Automatic Circuit Breaker

1. Shall be similar to the moulded case circuit breaker in every respect but without
the over current protection.
G. Bus Bars:
1. Electro-tinned, hard drawn, high conductivity copper suitably sleeved for phase
identification.
2. Rating: as indicated on the Drawings.
3. To be adequately supported by porcelain or moulded insulators spaced at
suitable centers so that the complete assembly can withstand the maximum
mechanical stresses to which it may be main/ subjected under fault conditions.
4. To be enclosed in separate compartments and arranged so that all conductors
can be brought onto the bars without undue bending.
5. Bus bar compartments shall not be used as switchboard wiring ways.
6. An earth bus bar, minimum half size of the main bus-bars, shall be provided for
the full length of each switchboard with each separate section of the board
bonded to it.
2.06 FEEDER PILLARS:
A. External Feeders Enclosures

1. The external DB’s enclosures shall be hot dip galvanized steel sheet not less
than 3 mm thick epoxy coated, and shall be easily installed and removed from
the front of the cabinet in assembled form. All devices and equipment shall be
accessible from the front of the panel. All hinges and locks are to be easily
removable/ replaceable. The panel shall be IP-65 rated.
2. Panel shall be provided with a removable gland near the bottom to fix
compression type brass glands along with earth tag. All incoming cables shall
enter cabinet at the bottom and all outgoing cables shall leave at the bottom.
3. The panel dimensions shall be suitable for the enclosed equipment plus 30%
future space capacity.
4. Built in fan and filter shall be suitable for the size of cabinet and shall be switched
on automatically by thermostat at temperature of 38 deg C.
5. The panel shall have full size neutral and earth bar completely bonded to the
main and shall be connected to the door by a braided copper wire. Provision
shall be made in the enclosure to terminate the earth bus-bar with the earth
electrode outside the panel. The earth bar is to be tin plated copper.
6. The cable shall be suitably glanded at the bottom glanding plate, the plate shall
be 1.0 mm minimum thickness, and the glanding plate shall be at level to allow
easy termination from below.
7. The panel door shall have robust weather-proof hinges of stainless steel with
suitable and main/ substantial lockable latching device. A metal pocket for the
schematic diagram and the 'as-built' diagram shall be provided in the enclosure
door. The diagram shall not be stuck to the enclosure. The enclosure door shall
have two locks of flush non-rusting type with separate keys (two numbers) to
each panel. All keys shall have the same profile and design to match all doors.
Non-rusting materials shall mean stainless steel or gun metal.
8. The door shall be designed in a manner that opening of 180 degree can be
attained. An anodized aluminum label, preferably dual color, bearing 'Feeder' in
both Arabic and English, 50 mm size pillar shall be attached to the door in a
proper location and firmly attached with rivets. All hinges are to be gun metal or
stainless.
9. The mounting of Control gear shall allow an easy removal of the control gear and
the Distance between adjacent control gears shall not cause a heat build-up or
heat conduction from one control gear to another.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Comply with the applicable installation requirements of the BS 7671: latest edition –
B. Conform to the requirements of the local power supply authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Install low voltage panel as indicated in accordance with equipment manufacturer's

written instructions and with recognised industry practices to ensure that the equipment
fulfils requirements. Provide earthing connections for the switchboards as indicated on
the drawings. Tighten connections to assure permanent and effective grounding.
D. Prior to energization of the switchboards, check with megger tester to ensure

requirements of IEE Wiring Regulations are fulfilled.
E. Frame and mount printed, basic operating instructions for switchboards, including
control and key interlocking sequences, and emergency procedures, fabricate frame of

finished wood or metal and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on the
front of the switchboards.
3.02 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed wiring and components and provide warning signs as specified
and required. Refer Division 26 Section “Identification for Electrical Services”.
B. Label each switchboard with engraved metal or laminated plastic nameplate mounted
with corrosion resistant screws.
A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Arrange and pay for the services of a factory-authorised
service representative to supervise the pre-testing and adjustment of switchboard
components.
B. Pre-testing: Upon completing installation of the system, perform the following

preparations for tests:
1. Make insulation resistance tests of switchboard buses, components, and
connecting supply, feeder, and control circuits
2. Make continuity tests of circuits
3. Provide set of Contract Documents to test organization. Include full updating on
final system configuration and parameters where they supplement or differ from
those indicated in original Contract Documents.
4. Provide manufacturer's instructions for installation and testing of switchboard to
test organization.
C. Quality Control Testing Program: Conform to the following:

1. Program Objectives: To assure switchboard installation meets specified
requirements, is operational within specified tolerances, provides appropriate
protection for systems and equipment, and is suitable for energising.
2. Procedures: Make field tests and inspections and prepare switchboard for
satisfactory operation in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and
these specifications.
3. Schedule tests and notify at least one week in advance of test commencement
4. Reports: Prepare written reports of test results and observations. Report
defective materials and workmanship. Include complete records of adjustments
and remedial efforts.
5. Labeling: Upon satisfactory completion of tests and related effort. Apply a label
to tested components indicating test results, person responsible, and date.
6. Protective Device Ratings and Settings; Verify indicated ratings and settings and
make the final system adjustments of Overcurrent Protection Devices.
D. Visual and Mechanical Inspections: Include the following Inspections and related work:
1. Inspect for defects and physical damage, testing laboratory, labels, and
nameplate compliance with up-to-date circuit connections.
2. Verify that potential transformers, including their overcurrent protection and
current transformers meet specified requirements.
3. Perform operational test and exercise of mechanical components and other
operable devices in accordance with manufacturer's instruction manual.
4. Check switchboard anchorage, area clearances, and alignment and fit of
components.
5. Check tightness of bolted electrical connections with calibrated torque wrench.
Refer to manufacturer's instructions for proper torque values.
6. Clean switchboard interior and exterior-using manufacturer's approved methods
and materials.
7. Perform visual and mechanical inspection and related work for Overcurrent
Protective Devices
E. Electrical Tests: Include the following items performed in accordance with

manufacturer’s instruction:
1. Insulation resistance test of buses and portions of control wiring that disconnect
from solid state devices through normal disconnecting features.
2. Ratio and polarity tests on current and voltage transformers.
3. Ground resistance test on system and equipment ground connections.
4. Verify appropriate capacity, overcurrent protection, and operating voltage of
control power elements including control power transformer and control power
wiring.
5. Check phasing of alternate supply sources to the same bus.
6. Test overcurrent protective devices as specified for compliance.
F. Retesting: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest

switchboards. Verify by the retests that switchboards meet specified requirements.
A. The complete installation shall be tested and commissioned by a certified third party
independent of the supplier and the contractor. The contractor shall be responsible to
demonstrate the operation of the system to the satisfaction of the Client's personnel.
The third Party testing agency shall submit the testing and commissioning reports for the
Engineers review outlining all deficiencies and course of action. The contractor shall
ensure all deficiencies outlined are rectified, retested, and certified by the third party
testing agency.
B. Infrared Scanning: Within 2 months of handover of the works, perform an infrared scan
of switchboard bus joints and connections. Open or remove metal doors, covers,
inspection plates, and barriers to make joints and connections accessible to a portable
scanner.
C. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform 2 additional follow-up infrared scans of the same
joints and connections, one 4 months after handover and one 11 months after handover.
D. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or

detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device
calibration.
E. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report identifying all connections

checked and describing results of scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected,
remedial action taken and observations after remedial action.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of switchboards. Remove

paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish
to match original finish.
3.06 TRAINING
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train the Employer’s maintenance

personnel as specified below:
1. Train the Employer's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules
related to startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive
maintenance. Training period shall be minimum 3 days and longer if required to
get the employer’s maintenance team familiar with the products operation and
maintenance.
2. Obtain employers staff signatures for attendance and submit as a record that the
training has been completed and to the satisfaction of the employer.
3. Distribute copies of the operation and maintenance manuals during the training
and go thru the content in details. Please note the copies distributed during the
training are not the official copies to be submitted for close out purposes.
4. Schedule training with the Employer, through Engineer, with at least 14 days'
advance notice.
3.07 MAINTENANCE
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 2416
DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
Distribution boards in accordance with the specifications and drawings.

3. Division 26 Section 26 2413 “Switchboards".
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of distribution board, over-current protective device,
accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical
data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each distribution board and related equipment.

1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of
installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:
a. Enclosure types and details for each type.
b. Bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
c. Short-circuit current rating of distribution boards and over-current
protective devices.
d. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual over-
current protective devices and auxiliary components.
C. Field quality-control test reports including the following:

D. Distribution board Schedules: For installation in distribution boards. Submit final

versions after load balancing.
KEO/19-3262-0000 26 2416/1 Distribution Boards

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For distribution boards and components to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in
1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting over-current
protective devices.
2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of over-current
protective device.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain distribution boards, over-current protective devices,

components, and accessories through one source from a single manufacturer.
1. IEC 60898/ BS EN60 898: Specification for circuit breakers for over-current
protection for household and similar
installations.
2. IEC/ BS EN 61008-1-1996 Residual Current Circuit Breakers (RCCB)
without integral over-current protection for
household and similar uses.
3. IEC/ BS EN 61009-1-1996 Residual Current Circuit Breakers (RCBO)
with integral over-current protection for
household and similar uses.
4. IEC 60947-2 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Part
2: Circuit-breakers
5. IEC 60529 Degree of protection of enclosures
6. IEC 61439-3 Distribution boards
A. Do not install panel boards until spaces are enclosed and weather tight wet work in
spaces is complete and dry, work above panel board is complete and temporary HVAC
System is operation and maintain ambient temperature and humidity condition at
occupancy levels during the remaindered the construction period.

1.08 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of panel boards and components with other
construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other

types of equipment, raceways, piping, and encumbrances to workspace clearance
requirements.
contents.
1. 2% spare moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) of all different frame sizes, but
in any case not less than 2 nos. circuit breakers of each size.
2. 5% spare miniature circuit breakers (MCB) of all different frame sizes, but in any
case not less than 2 nos. MCBs of each size.
3. 5% spare of load break switch (isolators) of each size.
4. 5% spare of Residual Current Devices (RCDs)
5. Lamps – provide five percent (5%) lamps of each size and type for indicating
panels and pilot lights installed for different systems.
6. One set of tools required for maintenance.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

documents, use only firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of Distribution Boards, of
types and capacities required which have been in satisfactory use in similar or service
for not less than ten (10) years and approved by the Engineer.
2.02 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
A. Distribution Boards feeding lights, fans, sockets outlets and other appliances:

1. To be totally enclosed, dust protected, vermin proof, recess mounting type,
containing all the necessary switching and protective devices, bus-bars and
molded circuit neutral connector block.
2. Distribution boards shall be of the same manufacturer as the low voltage panel,
switchboard and motor control centers.
B. Cabinet:
1. Construction: robust sheet steel, fully rust proofed and stove enameled. The
Distribution Boards to a minimum of IP 41 if located indoor and IP 65 if located
outdoor and damp locations
2. Cabinet shall have a hinged door fitted with a lock and key.
3. The cabinet shall be constructed so that it is necessary to open the door to
operate miniature circuit breakers. Access to interior components and internal
wiring shall be gained by dismantling and removing a separate barrier within the
enclosure.
4. Gutter extension and barrier should be the same gauge and finishes panel board
enclosure.
5. Directory card: Inside the panel board mounted in transparent card holder.
C. Bus Bars:
1. To be of appropriate current carrying capacity at least equal to the rating of the
main incoming MCCB isolator.
2. To be copper.
D. Neutral & Earth Connector Block:

1. To be of ample size to ensure a separate way is available on the connector block
for the neutral & earth conductor of each circuit.
E. Miniature Circuit Breakers:

1. MCB shall comply with IEC 60898 and shall be symmetrical rail mounted type
available in one, two, three or four poles version.
2. They shall be trip free type with quick make and quick break mechanism.
3. The rated ultimate breaking capacity (Icu) of the MCB's shall be at least equal to
the prospective fault level at the point of the distribution system where they are
installed.
4. The minimum rated ultimate breaking capacity (Icu) of the MCB shall be 10kA as
per IEC 60898 if not indicated on the drawings.
5. It shall be possible to reverse feed the MCB without reduction in performance.
6. Trip ratings as indicated on the schedules of points.
7. The MCB shall have thermal overload trip to accept 5% overload and to trip at
30% of rated current.
8. The instantaneous magnetic trip shall operate at 5 to 10 times the rated current
for 1P, 2P, 3P or 4P breakers, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
9. It shall be possible to replace 3 single-phase units with one 3-phase unit.
10. The breakers shall be of DIN type.
11. Evidence of the ultimate breaking capacity (Icu) shall be produced by test
certificates from one of the internationally recognized High Voltage Laboratories
(ASTA, KEMA or CESI).
12. The operating mechanism shall be mechanically trip free from the operating
handle so as to prevent the contacts from being held closed against short circuit
and overload conditions. It shall be "automatic resetting type".
13. The operating handle shall be of the toggle type with possibility of padlocking
facility and rotary handle.

14. Each pole shall be provided with bi-metallic thermal element for overload
protection and magnetic element for short circuit protection.
15. Current discriminations tables shall be provided for each rating of the breaker.
16. The terminals shall be of the tunnel type (IP-20) in order to minimize the risk of
direct contact.
17. It shall be possible to fit at the site auxiliaries like shunt trip coil, under voltage
release, ON-OFF switch, alarm switch or residual current device 30 or 300 mA
with remote tripping possibility.
F. Lighting Contactors:
1. To IEC 60947-4
2. Single coil, electrically operated, mechanically held type
3. Positive locking shall be obtained without the use of hooks, latches or semi-
permanent magnets.
4. Contactor rating and number of poles: as shown on the drawings
5. Operating coil; suitable for 240V, 50Hz supply
6. Main contacts: double break silver to silver type protected by arcing contacts
7. Contacts: self-aligning, renewable from the front panel
8. Solenoids: shaded pole pattern of such construction that lamination noise is
eliminated
9. Control of contactor: by local or remote switches as indicated. A manual
operating lever shall also be included
10. Separate bus bar shall be provided in the distribution boards for the
11. contactors controlling part of the lighting circuits
12. Lighting contactors controlling all or part of the lighting circuits of distribution
boards shall be mounted in the board enclosures
G. Over Current Protective Device:

1. Residual Current Circuit Breaker with Overload (RCBO)
2. RCBO shall comply with IEC 61009
3. RCBO shall have 10kA breaking capacity as a minimum.
4. RCBO shall have 30mA sensitivity with type B curve tripping characteristics for
power and 300mA C curve for lighting and inductive loads circuits.
5. Test push button shall be incorporated to verify breaker operation.
H. Residual Current Circuit Breaker

1. RCCB shall comply with CEE 227 or IEC 61008 standards. The RCCB shall
provide the functions of isolation, switching and earth leakage protection of
electrical circuits. They shall have a residual current operated electromechanical
release, which operates, without auxiliary source of supply to an earth leakage
fault between active conductor and earth. RCCBs shall incorporate a filtering
device preventing the risk of unwanted tripping due to transient voltage. They
shall provide a high degree of protection against earth faults, fire hazards and
electric shock.
2. RCCBs shall be available in 2 and 4 pole versions with current ratings from 16A
to 100A and an earth leakage trip rating as specified in the schedule of points.
They shall be suitable for operation on 415V, 3 phase, 4 wire, 50 Hz supply.
They shall have an operating temperature from -5 to +60 degree C. RCCB shall
have a trip indication on the front face by a red mark. It shall be possible to
achieve vertical discrimination with RCCBs.
3. RCCB alone shall have a short circuit withstand capacity of 10 kA. RCCB must
be protected with short circuit protective devices installed upstream.
a. RCCB shall consist of the following parts mounted in a robust body of all
insulated material:
b. A current transformer
c. A tripping coil with contact assembly
d. Main supply contact
e. On/off switch
f. A test button
g. A trip free mechanism
4. Where a RCCB is used as a separate item and not housed within a distribution or
switchboard, it shall be housed in a dust protected enclosure to prevent
accidental contact with live terminals.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 DISTRIBUTION BOARD INSTALLATION
A. Distribution board shall be flush mounted/surface mounted to suit the situation and as
directed at site. They shall be installed with the vertical sides plumb and the top of
Distribution Board at 220cm above finished floor level or as directed.
B. The boards shall be properly earthed by connecting an earthing conductor from the
main distribution earth bus bar to an earth connector welded to the cabinet and earthing
bushings on the incoming and outgoing feeder circuits.
C. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
D. Stub four 25mm empty conduits from distribution board into accessible ceiling space or
space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 25mm empty conduits into
raised floor space or below slab not on grade.
E. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after
completing load balancing.
3.02 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section “Grounding and Bonding for

Electrical Systems.”
3.03 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide

warning signs as specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing distribution board
loads. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create
directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.
C. Distribution board Nameplates: Label each distribution board with engraved metal or
laminated-plastic nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.
A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:

1. Test insulation resistance for each distribution board bus, component, connecting
supply, feeder, and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
3. Test all RCCB using high quality, specialized, Engineer’s approved RCD Tester
that is designed to check the trip current and trip time.
3.06 MAINTENANCE
3.08 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panel boards. Remove

paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to
assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 2419
MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
motor-control centers in accordance with the specifications and drawings.

3. Division 26 Section 26 2413 "Switchboards".
5. Division 26 Section 26 0573 “Over current Protective Device Coordination
Study”.
7. Division 26 Section 26 2816 - Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of controller and each type of motor-control center. Include
dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical
characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each motor-control center.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required
a. Each installed unit's type and details.
b. Nameplate legends
c. Short-circuit current ratings of buses and installed units
d. Vertical and horizontal bus capacities
e. UL listing for series rating of over-current protective devices in
combination controllers.
f. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of each motor-
control center unit
2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring for class and type of motor-
control center. Provide schematic wiring diagram for each type of controller.
C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, showing dimensioned layout,

required working clearances, and required area above and around motor-control centers
KEO/19-3262-0000 26 2419/1 Motor-Control Centers
where pipe and ducts are prohibited. Show motor-control center layout and
relationships between electrical components and adjacent structural and mechanical
elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support.
Indicate field measurements.
A. “Design Verification” by type testing shall be performed for motor control centers as
defined in IEC 61439 (Part-1&2) standards through one of the international laboratories
listed under ASTA or KEMA.
B. The prototype assemblies shall be with same components as proposed & shall confirm
to following 9 type tests (design verification by type testing) defined in IEC 61439 (Part-
1&2):-
1. Verification of Strength of materials and parts (clause 10.2)
2. Verification of Degree of protection of enclosures (clause 10.3)
3. Verification of Clearances and creepage distances (clause 10.4)
4. Verification of Protection against electric shock and integrity of protective circuits
(clause 10.5)
5. Verification of Dielectric properties (clause 10.9)
6. Verification of Temperature-rise limits (clause 10.10)
Temperature rise test shall be conducted at 50degC lab temperature.
7. Verification of Short-circuit withstand strength (clause 10.11)
8. Verification of Electromagnetic Compatibility- EMC (clause 10.12)
9. Verification of Mechanical operation (clause 10.13)
C. The prototype assemblies shall confirm to following 3 design verification by design rules
as defined in IEC 61439(Part-1&2):-
1. Verification of Incorporation of switching devices and components (clause 10.6)
2. Verification of Internal electrical circuits and connections (clause 10.7)
3. Verification of Terminals for external conductors (clause 10.8)
D. The above Design Verification type test certificate along with drawing and details of the
original tested assembly and comparison study of the proposed board with the certified
assembly, shall be produced from one of these internationally recognized High voltage
Laboratories under ASTA or KEMA.
E. The local switchboard factory must have ASTA Diamond or KEMA Keur certification for
the proposed switchboards to guarantee final product quality.
F. Routine test: The panel assembler shall perform the routine test and provide the test
certificates as defined in IEC standards. The routine test shall include but not limited to
the following:
1. Inspection of the assembly including inspection of wiring and electrical
operational test (IEC Clause 8.3.1);
2. Dielectric test & Insulation resistance test (IEC Clause 8.3.2 & 8.3.4);
3. Checking of protective measures and of the electrical continuity of the protective
circuits (IEC Clause 8.3.3)
4. Functional test as per the approved test procedure.
G. Routine test certificates and test readings shall be submitted to the consultant engineer
for verification.

H. Prior to placing order of the equipment, ensure that the physical dimensions of the
equipment do not infringe the working space required by the applicable standards.
I. Single-Source Responsibility: Ensure that each category of selected material or

equipment shall be of a particular range of one manufacturer who would take full
J. The switchgear manufacturer must have a previous record of satisfactory service for at
least (10) years.
K. Manufacturer shall be specialized in manufacturing & maintenance of all products as

specified under this Section with minimum five years of documented experience in with
same components as proposed. The manufacturer shall be well documented ISO 9001
certified.
L. Routine tests of all motor control centers manufactured by overseas manufacturer shall
be submitted for testing by an internationally approved laboratory testing agency and
test certificates issued accordingly shall be submitted prior to delivery to shipment.
Locally manufactured switchboards and control centers shall be tested at the
manufacturer’s testing laboratory witnessed. The tests shall be done in accordance with
IEC 61439-1&2 and other required tests as approved by the Engineer.

1. IEC 61439 (Part -1 & 2): Low voltage switchgears and control gears assemblies
4. IEC 60255: Measuring Relays & Protection equipments, Electronic Relays
7. IEC 61008 (Part – 1 & 2): Residual Current Operated Circuit breakers without
integral over current protection (RCCB)
8. IEC 61009 (Part – 1 & 2): Residual Current Operated Circuit breakers with
integral over current protection (RCBO)
10. IEC 61869 (Part 1 to 3): Instrument transformers
combination unit
conductors
17. BS 5685 / IEC 60051: Electric Meters

be applied.
1.06 OVER-CURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE CO-ORDINATION
A. The Contractor shall carry out and provide an over-current protective device. Co-
ordination study as part of his material submission, as outlined below:
B. Properly coordinated automatically operated over-current protective devices shall be

provided for this project. The over-current protective devices shown on the drawings
shall be coordinated for adequate continuous current and interrupting capacity to assure
proper over-current protective devices operation under normal and fault conditions in the
system.
C. All over-current protective devices on this project and the first upstream device of the
electrical system shall be coordinated so that they will perform as follows. When two or
more over-current protective devices (including the first upstream protective device of
the system) in series with each other experience current flow greater than their rated
current, the device with the lowest rated current shall trip and/ or open the circuit first
and thereby prevent the higher rated devices from operating.
D. The supplier of the over-current protective devices shall prepare a co-ordination study to
verify the above stated performance requirements. The study shall be documented by
the Supplier and the documents shall include but not be limited to the following:
1. A composite drawing or drawings (on full size, reproducible, log-log paper)
showing the entire electrical system (including the first upstream protective
device of the system) showing all protective device curves (including motor
overloads), short circuit duties, motor starting curves and damage curves for
motors, equipment and conductors. This drawing or drawings shall show that all
protective devices are properly coordinated to perform as stated above.
2. Manufacturer’s over-current operating curves (on full size, reproducible, log-log
paper) for each over-current device. In the case of fuses, both minimum melt and
maximum clearing time curves shall be included.
3. Reproducible copies of all project single line diagrams so marked to show short
circuit duties at all switchboards and motor control centers, and which operating
curve applies to each over-current device on the diagram (the operating curves
shall also be correspondingly marked)
4. A tabulation of the short circuit duties at all switchboards and motor control
centers, sizes and ratings of all over-current protective devices so that the
performance requirements are met. Protective devices which have earth fault
protection features are specifically required to meet this performance
requirement.
E. This documented coordination study shall be submitted for review before the over-
current devices are supplied for the Project.
A. Deliver motor-control centers in shipping splits of lengths that can be moved past
obstructions in delivery path in professional manner.
1. Handle motor-control centers according to the Instructions of the manufacturer
for the Handling, Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Motor Control
Centers rated not more than 600 Volts.
2. Handle per Internationally recommended practices for installing and maintaining
Motor Control Centers.
1.08 PROJECT CONDITION
A. Do not install Motor-Control Center until spares are enclosed & weather tight, wet work
in spaces is complete & dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintain
ambient temperature & humidity control.
MCCs, including clearances. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

1.010 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of motor-control centers with other construction

including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required
workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
C. Coordinate features of motor-control centers, installed units, and accessory devices with
pilot devices and control circuits to which they connect.
D. Coordinate features, accessories, and functions of each motor-control center, each

controller, and each installed unit with ratings and characteristics of supply circuit,
motor, required control sequence, and duty cycle of motor and load.
contents.
1. 5% spare moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) of all different frame sizes, but
in any case not less than 2 nos. circuit breakers of each size.
2. Lamps – provide five percent (5%) lamps of each size and type for indicating
panels and pilot lights installed for different systems.
3. 5% spare combination magnetic motor starters.
4. 5% spare HRC fuses for each rating.
5. 5% spare of load break switch (isolators) of each size.
6. 5% spare of Residual Current Devices (RCDs)
7. One set of tools required for maintenance.
8. Provide complete spare parts as recommended by the manufacturer for different
sizes of ACB.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

documents, use only firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of Motor Control Centers,
of types and capacities required which have been in satisfactory use in similar or service
2.02 GENERAL
A. Motor control panel and starter control panel shall be of the same manufacturer as the
low voltage panel, switchboard and distribution boards.
2.03 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS
A. Enclosures: Surface-mounting cabinets to comply with environmental conditions at

installed location.
1. The motor control center shall be indoor minimum type IP52 assembled and
coordinated by one manufacturer and shall be constructed to Form 2A Type 2 in
accordance with the requirements of IEC 61439-1&2 unless indicated more
stringent otherwise on the drawings.
2. The motor control center shall be factory fully type tested as well as after
installation in accordance with tests stipulated in IEC 61439-1&2 and witnessed
by the Engineer. Type test certificates by the manufacturer shall be submitted to
the Engineer along with material submittal.
B. Compartments: Modular; individual doors with concealed hinges and quick-captive crew
fasteners. Interlocks on combination controller units requiring disconnecting means in off
position before door can be opened or closed, except by operating a permissive release
device.
C. Wiring Spaces: Wiring channel in each vertical section for vertical and horizontal wiring
to each unit compartment; supports to hold wiring in place.

D. All doors and removable covers or plates shall be provided with suitable PVC or
neoprene gaskets to prevent the ingress of dust, vermin and insects.
E. Short-Circuit Current Rating for Each Section: Equal to or greater than indicated
available fault current in symmetrical amperes at motor-control center location
2.04 BUSBARS
A. Bus bars shall be of electrolytic hard drawn copper to B.S. 159 with rating as indicated
on the Drawings, air insulated and rigidly supported by suitable non-hygroscopic, anti-
tracking insulators so as to withstand forces due to thermal expansion under normal
operating conditions and the fault currents specified and neatly arranged for 500 V, Hz,
3 phase, 4 wire operation.
B. Bus bars shall extend through the length of the board with the same cross section
throughout.
C. Bus bars bracing shall maintain the same mechanical strength and current carrying
capacity under normal operating conditions and fault conditions as indicated on the
drawings.
D. Bus bars shall be housed in separate adequately ventilated compartment, which shall
not contain any wiring or apparatus other than that required for connection to bus bars.
Access to bus bars and bus bar connections shall be gained only by removal of covers
secured by bolts or studs. Bus bars shall be covered with colored PVC sleeves or
painted for phase identification.
2.05 MOTOR STARTERS
A. Refer to Section 26 2913 – Enclosed Controllers
2.06 DIRECT ONLINE [DOL] STARTERS
2.07 STAR-DELTA STARTERS
2.08 SOFT STARTERS
2.09 MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER
A. The moulded case circuit breakers shall comply with IEC60947-1 and IEC 60947-2
standards quick make and quick break type free toggle mechanism of utilization
category 'A' having rated service breaking capacity (Ics), suitable for isolation as per IEC
60947-2. The breaker shall be available in 3 or 4 pole version. . Evidence of the service
breaking capacity (Ics) shall be produced by test certificates from ASTA, KEMA or
CECI, the internationally recognized HV testing laboratories.
B. All MCCBs shall be factory tested by the manufacturer before dispatch and routine test
certificates shall be available. Random sampling test by the manufacturer is not
acceptable.
C. Breakers contacts shall be made of non-welding and non-corrodible composition.

Circuit breakers shall be actuated by a toggle or handle having ON/OFF/TRIP markings
such that the toggle or handle can only be in OFF position if the poles are all actually
separated. The breaker to be suitable to be equipped with a locking device in the
"isolated" position and there shall be a "push to trip" button in front to test the operation
and the opening of the poles.
D. Tripping Characteristic: Circuit breakers shall have inverse time tripping characteristic
with automatic release secured through action of a combination of thermal-magnetic or
electronic trip units, tripping free the handle in case of an overload or a short circuit.
E. Motor Mechanism: Circuit breakers shall be suitable to be equipped where applicable,

with a motor mechanism of the stored energy type that could operate in less than
100ms.
F. Residual Current Device: Circuit breakers shall be suitable to be equipped where

applicable, with a residual current device directly to the circuit breaker case and shall
operate without an auxiliary power supply. The add-on RCDs shall comply with
appendix B of IEC 60947-2 standard.
G. Electronic Trip Unit Circuit Breakers: MCCB with ratings up to 630A shall be equipped
with thermal magnetic or electronic trip units. The MCCB over 630 A frame size shall be
equipped with electronic trip units and shall sense the actual RMS values for the
following field-adjustable settings:
1. Instantaneous trip.
2. Long- and short-time pickup levels
3. Long- and short-time time adjustments
H. Communication Capability: The Circuit-breaker shall be equipped with communication

module with functions and features compatible with power monitoring and control
system.
2.010 PUSH-BUTTON STATIONS, PILOT LIGHTS, AND SELECTOR SWITCHES:
A. Heavy-duty type.
2.011 STOP LOCK-OFF PUSH-BUTTON STATION:
A. Stop lock-off push buttons for motors shall be the mushroom red stay-put type with
automatic latching, the units having to be key operated to be released.
B. Push buttons shall be housed in a surface mounting weatherproof enclosure to IP 65.
C. Push buttons shall be UV stabilized.
2.012 CONTROL RELAYS:
A. Auxiliary and adjustable time-delay relays.

2.013 ELAPSED TIME METERS:
A. Heavy duty with digital readout in hours.
2.014 METERS:
A. Meters shall indicate the following:

1. Ammeter: Output current, with current sensors rated to suit application.
2. Voltmeter: Output voltage.
3. Frequency Meter: Output frequency.
B. The measuring instruments shall include ammeters, voltmeters, power factor meters,
maximum demand indicators and selector switches and associated accessories (such
as measuring circuit protection) as indicated on the Drawings.
C. Measuring instruments shall be moving iron vane type, flush pattern with dust and
moisture-proof enclosures. The instruments shall have anti-glare glass fronts, anti-
parallax scales and white faces with black numerals and markings. All instruments shall
be a long scale 240°, with full load indicating approximately at 180° The instrument
cases shall be semi-flush mounted and shall be 36 x 36mm square. Accuracy shall be
one per cent of full-scale values. Moving elements shall be provided with zero
adjustments external to the cases, located at face of dial.
D. Ammeters shall be moving iron type, to BS 89 scaled in accordance to their circuit

breakers. Ammeters shall be capable of withstanding twice the rated current for ten (10)
minutes and overload sustained under fault conditions, without damage or loss of
accuracy.
E. Voltmeters shall be moving iron type to BS 90 scaled 0-500V and provided with 6-
position selector switches allowing reading of line to line and line to neutral voltages.
F. Voltmeters shall withstand twice the rated full-scale voltage, for 1.0 minute, without
damage.
G. Maximum demand indictors shall be of the thermal type with a 20-minute time delay.
H. Digital indictors for above-mentioned measuring instruments may be provided subject to

the Engineer's approval.
I. Power Monitoring Unit: The unit shall be microprocessor- based and shall be capable of
measuring and indicating incomer currents on each phase, voltages between phases
and phase to neutral, active and reactive powers, power factor and total energy
consumed. The KWH meter reading shall be stored in password protected non-volatile
memory. The unit shall be mounted on the incomer cubicle at a height not more than
1.6m from floor level. The backlit display unit shall be high contrast type, having light
emitting characters, of height not less than 15mm. The unit shall work on the system
voltage, without the need for any separate auxiliary power. The function of power
monitoring unit for remote indication and alarm shall be included.
J. Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: UL-listed or -recognized, microprocessor-based

unit suitable for three- or four-wire systems and with the following features:
1. Inputs from sensors or 5-A current-transformer secondary’s, and potential
terminals rated to 600 V.
K. Switch-selectable digital display of the following:

1. Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
2. Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
3. Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
4. Three-Phase Real Power: Plus or minus 2 percent.
5. Three-Phase Reactive Power: Plus or minus 2 percent.
6. Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent.
7. Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent.
8. Integrated Demand with Demand Interval Selectable from 5 to 60 Minutes: Plus
or minus 2 percent.
9. Accumulated energy, in megawatt hours (joules), plus or minus 2 percent; stored
values unaffected by power outages for up to 72 hours.
10. Mounting: Display and control unit flush or semiflush mounted in instrument
compartment door.
L. Phase-Failure and Under-voltage Relays for Bypass Controllers: Solid-state sensing

circuit with isolated output contacts for hard-wired connection. Provide adjustable
under-voltage setting.
M. Current-Sensing, Phase-Failure Relays: Solid-state sensing circuit with isolated output

contacts for hard-wired connection; arranged to operate on phase failure, phase
reversal, current unbalance of from 30 to 40 percent, or loss of supply voltage; with
adjustable response delay.
A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard grey paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested,

motor-control centers before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive motor-control centers for compliance with
requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.
3.02 APPLICATIONS
A. Select features of each controller to coordinate with ratings and characteristics of supply
circuit and motor; required control sequence; duty cycle of motor, controller, and load;
and configuration of pilot device and control circuit affecting controller functions.
B. Select horsepower rating of controllers to suit motor controlled.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Anchor each motor-control center assembly to steel-channel sills arranged and sized
according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach by bolting. Level and grout sills
flush with motor-control center mounting surface.

B. Install motor-control centers on concrete bases.
3.04 CONCRETE BASES
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Verify structural requirements with
B. Concrete base is specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical
Systems," and concrete materials and installation requirements are specified in
Division 03.
3.05 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify motor-control center, motor-control center components, and control wiring

according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for motor-control centers,

including control sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished
metal, and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of motor-control
centers.
3.06 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Install wiring between motor-control devices according to Division 26 Section "Low-

Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.
C. Connect hand-off-automatic switch and other automatic-control devices where

applicable.
1. Connect selector switches to bypass only manual- and automatic-control devices
that have no safety functions when switch is in hand position.
2. Connect selector switches with motor-control circuit in both hand and automatic
positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts,
high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors.
3.07 CONNECTIONS
A. Conduit installation requirements are specified in other Division 26 Sections. Drawings

indicate general arrangement of conduit, fittings, and specialties.
B. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for


1. Test insulation resistance for each motor-control center element, bus,
component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
perform the following:
1. Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment
installation. Test and adjust controllers, components, and equipment.
2. To assist in field testing of equipment including pretesting and adjusting of solid-
state controllers.
3. Report results in writing.
3.09 ADJUSTING
A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.
3.010 TRAINING

maintenance.
training are not the official copies to submitted for close out purposes.
advance notice.
The third Party testing agency shall submit the testing and commissioning reports for the
Engineers review outlining all deficiencies and course of action. The contractor shall
ensure all deficiencies outlined are rectified, retested, and certified by the third party
testing agency.
3.012 MAINTENANCE

END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 2726
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This section shall include all labor, materials, equipment, appliances and accessories
necessary for the complete performance of all switches, socket outlets etc. In
accordance with the Specifications and Drawings.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for pre
marking wall plates.
C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers'
packing label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through
one source from a single manufacturer. So far as they are available, obtain all wiring
devices and associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source.
A. Applicable standards referred to in this Section:

1. BS 88 Cartridge fuses for voltages up to and including 1000
V a.c and 1500 V d.c
2. BS 546 Specification - Two pole and earthing-pin plugs,
socket outlets and socket-outlet adapters
KEO/19-3262-0000 26 2726/1 Wiring Devices
3. BS 800 Specification for radio interference limits and
measurements for household appliances, portable
tools and other electrical equipment causing similar
types of interference
4. BS 1363 13A Plugs, Switched and Un-switched Socket
Outlets, connection units and adaptors
5. BS EN 60309 Plugs, socket-outlets and couplers for industrial
purposes.
6. BS EN 60669 Part 1 1996 switches for household and similar electrical
appliances
7. BS 3676 Switches for household and similar fixed electrical
installations
8. BS 4177 Cooker Control Units rated 30 Amp. and 45 Amp.
250 volts single phase supply
9. BS 4662 Boxes for flush mounting of electrical Accessories
10. BS 5419 Fuse Switches and Switch Fuses
11. BS 5733 General requirements for electrical accessories
12. BS 67 Specification for Ceiling Roses

1.07 EXTRA METERIALS
contents.
1. Disconnecting Switches (Isolators) and Switch Fuses: 5% spare switch of each
size.
2. Plug fuses – provide ten percent (10%) of the number of each size and type of
fuses installed, but in any case not less than 6 nos. fuses of each size.
3. Wall switches – provide five percent (5%) of the number of each size and type of
wall switch installed.
4. Socket outlets – provide five percent (5%) of the number of each size and type
installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

documents, use only firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of Wiring Devices, of
for not less than five (5) years and approved by the Engineer.
2.02 GENERAL
A. All individual items of materials shall be of the same make throughout the Project unless
specifically approved by the Engineer.
B. All individual items of materials shall be of the same make throughout the Project unless
specifically approved by the Engineer.
C. All wiring accessories face plates finishes shall be as follows:
Location Finishes
Back of House (BOH) Metalclad
Face plate of all Highly polished stainless-
switches, switched steel.
socket outlets, telephone
socket outlets, T.V.
socket outlets, computer
socket outlets…etc, used
for internal installation
D. Wiring shall be carried out in strict accordance with cable sizes and circuit details
provided in load schedules and on drawings. All wirings on multi point sub circuits shall
be carried out as a “loop in” system and no joints at any point in cable runs shall be
allowed.
E. Single phase circuits taken from TP and N Distribution Boards shall have their own
neutral connections.
F. Contractor shall pay attention to segregation of L. V. and wiring system for fire
detection, ICT, AV, security. system which may be either installed by him or by other
specialist sub- Contractors, to ensure that no interaction may occur between various
systems. Segregation of wiring system shall strictly comply with requirements of 16th
edition of IEE regulations, inclusive and equipment.
G. Coloring code and identification of cable cores shall be in accordance with IEE
regulations. All luminaires and wiring accessories shall be as described and specified in
schedule of luminaires and equipment.

2.03 OUTLET BOXES
A. Outlet Boxes:
1. Galvanized one piece pressed steel, sizes and designs shall suit devices to be
fitted and shall be complete with adjustable lugs and earth terminals
B. Outlet boxes mounted externally or in damp locations shall be totally sealed to ensure
water tightness.
2.04 SWITCHES
A. Lighting Switches
1. To BS EN 60669 - 1
2. To be rated 10, 15 or 20 amps depending on connected load, as stipulated in the
Ministry of Electricity and Water & Renewable Energy (MEW) regulations
3. Recessed with concealed conduit, surface pattern elsewhere
4. Quick make and break type
5. Single pole, double pole, one way, two way or intermediate as indicated
6. Surface mounted switches to be metallic and as indicated in the Project
Documentation
7. Flush mounted switches to be of the grid fixing type with finish as noted in the
Project document.
B. Waterproof Switches:
1. To be watertight IP 56 or as indicated in the Project Documentation
2. To be made of polycarbonate for indoor application in damp and wet areas.
C. Switch Plates
1. Where two or more switches are grouped together and connected to the same
phase, multi-gang devices and common plates shall be used.
D. Double Pole Switches:

1. The double pole switches shall be with neon indication lamps and shall be rated
20, 32 or 45 Amps. as indicated on the drawings
2. The face plate shall be marked ‘WATER HEATER’, ‘WATER COOLER’ etc. as
required.
2.05 CEILING ROSES
A. Ceiling roses shall be of the all insulated type conforming to BS 67 with a white finish.
B. Ceiling roses shall be provided with insulated terminals for the switched live, neutral and
protective conductors; loop-in facilities shall be provided
C. Plug-in ceiling roses shall be used in areas, with extensive false ceiling system.
2.06 SOCKET OUTLETS
A. General purpose Socket Outlets:

1. to BS 1363
2. 3 rectangular pin (2P+E) shuttered, with combined switch, rated 13A, 250V.
B. 15A Socket Outlet:

1. to BS 546:1950
2. 3 round pin (2 P + E) shuttered switched pattern complete with plugs.
a. Neon indicator lamp, unless specified otherwise in the Project
Documentation.
C. Weatherproof Sockets:
1. 13A Sockets: to BS 1363
2. 3 rectangular pins, switched type
3. To be water and dust tight enclosure, rated at IP 66 when in use
4. To be made from UV stable thermoplastic material and utilizing a gel gasket seal
and easy to open catch mechanism
D. Shuttered Sockets:
1. The Shutters shall effectively screen & isolate the line & neutral socket outlets to
exclude dust & interference & shall only be operable when the interlocked earth
pin in the associated plug top has been inserted.
E. Socket Outlets Integrated with USB:

1. 13A socket outlets and 2A USB charging outlets comply with BS 5733 and
relevant parts of BS 1363-2 and IEC 61558-2-16.
2. 3 rectangular pin (2P+E) shuttered, with combined switch, rated 13A, 250V.
2.07 SWITCHED SOCKET OUTLET INTERLOCKED - INDUSTRIAL
A. Conforming to BS EN 60309-1-2 and BS EN 60529.
B. Rated 16A / 32A/ 63A, 3P+N+E or 2P+N+E
C. Interlocked and pre-wired with 30mA RCD
D. Protection degree: IP67
E. Provide /16A 32A/ 63A, 3P+N+E or 2P+N+E plug with each socket
2.08 COOKER CONTROL UNITS
A. Cooker control units shall incorporate a 45 Amp double pole switch and neon indicator
light.
B. Cooker control unit shall be provided with lower level Cooker Connection unit
C. Both cooker control unit and connection unit shall be flush mounted.
2.09 FUSED SPUR OUTLETS
A. 240 V fused spur units shall be switched, shall comply with BS 5733 and shall be fitted
with a fuse complying with BS 1362 with a rating as specified.
B. All fused spur units shall be fitted with a neon indicator.
C. Live contacts shall not be exposed under normal operating conditions when replacing a
fuse.

D. 240V fused spur units in plant areas; workshops etc. shall be surface mounted metal
clad and shall comply with BS 1363.
E. The type of fused connection unit, particularly relating to the flex outlet, shall be
authorized by the Engineer prior to the ordering of accessories.
2.010 RCD PROTECTED SWITCH SOCKET OUTLETS
A. Confirming to BS EN 61543: 1996 and BS 7288:1990.
B. 13A rated
C. Tripping current: 30mA
D. Protection degree: IP 56
2.011 JUNCTION, PULL AND TERMINAL BOXES
A. The Junction Box shall be completed with a terminal block suitable for connecting up to
10 mm2 copper conductor (phase, neutral and earth) and an all insulated moulded white
cover plate with removal covers and shall comply with BS 5733.
B. The cover plate shall be raised for connecting outgoing cable.
2.012 UNDERFLOOR SCREED SERVICE OUTLET BOXES
A. Provide segregated one/ two/ three/ four compartment flush installed service and
junction boxes cast in floor screed/ concrete.
B. Provide each service box with 13A twin switched socket outlet and telecommunication
outlet as indicated.
C. Provide boxes manufactured from pressure die cast zinc alloy material, single piece
base frame, trap frame and cover. Base plate shall be 2.5mm galvanized steel riveted to
frame.
D. Cover and trap frame shall have epoxy coated or galvanized finish.
E. Provide leveling bolts with locknuts at the base of height adjustment during screed.
F. Covers shall have 6mm recess to accept floor finish and shall have level adjustment
bolts fitted to the box frame. The bolts are to be of hard drawn brass finished with
cadmium plating.
G. Fixing screws: Brass or cadmium plated steel. Self-tapping screws are not permitted.
2.013 TIMER
A. Timers shall be electronic type, unless specified otherwise in the Project

Documentation.
B. Timers shall be suitable for operation from supply voltage of 240V, 1-phase, and 50Hz
system.
C. Timer output contacts shall be suitable for both a.c. and d.c. control circuits. The
contacts shall be suitable for duty of AC-2 or DC-3 utilization category. The rating of
output contacts shall be coordinated with the application requirements.
D. Timers shall be provided with 2 independent timing scales with sets of change-over
output contacts:
1. 10 200 seconds
2. 0.10 20 seconds
E. ON/OFF indicator shall be provided to monitor the circuit status.
F. Timers shall be either:

1. delay on energization or
2. delay on de-energization type, as per the application requirements
G. Upon supply of rated voltage to the input terminals, the timer shall start, the output relay
remains in rest position. After the set time, the output relay pulls in. The relay resets
after the input supply has been cut-off.
H. Timers shall be suitable for minimum 10 million operations.
I. Degree of protection shall be minimum IP 20.
2.014 PHOTOCELL CONTROL
A. Operation of the contactors for switching on the external lights as indicated in the
distribution board schedule shall be by means of photo electric cell.
B. Photo-electric control switch or cell shall operate from a supply voltage of 240V, 50Hz
and turn ON shall occur at 40 lux and turn OFF at 80 lux.
C. It shall operate with in - 5 C to +80 C temperature range.
D. Photo - electric switches or cell shall be weatherproof complying with BS 5490, IP 54.
2.015 DISCONNECT SWITCHES AND SWITCH FUSES
A. General
1. To be metal clad with front operated handles interlocked with switch fuse case to
prevent opening switch in the “ON” position.
2. Switch shall have “ON/OFF” indication and provision for locking in “OFF”
position.
3. Utilisation category AC 23A.
4. The disconnect switches and switch fuses installed in public places shall have
aesthetically pleasing appearance.
B. Fuse Switch and Switch Fuses

1. To BS 5419
2. Fuses: to BS 88 bolted type, class Q1, certified for 415V and AC 80 duty, rated
as indicated.
3. Fused switch carriages: withdrawable type
4. Fuse switches: ASTA certified to 50kA
C. Disconnect Switches
1. Same design as switch-fuses, with solid copper links in place of fuses
2. Single pole and neutral, or triple pole and neutral
3. Ratings, as indicated.
D. Outdoor Equipment
1. Equipment intended for outdoor use shall be certified by the manufacturer as
being weatherproof and suitable for the use outside in the prevailing conditions.
2.016 LIGHTING CONTROL DIMMER SYSTEM
A. The lighting control dimming system shall include various types of lighting control
modules which provide flexible addressable switching and dimming of the various light
sources.
B. Wall scene set control plate shall be provided
2.017 MOUNTING HEIGHTS
A. The mounting heights of wiring accessories shall be as stipulated in the local power
authority regulations, or as otherwise as indicated on the drawings or approved by the
Engineer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF OUTLET BOXES
A. Location of Boxes:
1. Determine exact location of boxes on site and obtain the Engineer’s approval
before commencing installation
2. Make allowance for overhead pipes, ducts, variations in arrangement, thickness
of finish, window trim, panelling and other construction when locating boxes.
3. Outlet boxes in all food preparation areas shall be recessed such that all wiring
devices shall be mounted flush with walls.
B. Fixing:
1. Fix outlet boxes securely
2. Fix exposed outlet boxes to permanent inserts or lead anchors with machine
screws.
C. Mounting Heights:
1. Mount boxes as indicated or as approved by the Engineer
2. Where mounting height is not shown or specified, obtain instructions
3. Boxes for similar equipment: mount at uniform heights within same or similar
areas.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF SWITCHES
A. Lighting Switches:
1. Locate at the strike side of the door, approximately 150 mm from the edge of
door frame

2. Plates shall be installed with all four edges in continuous contact with finished
wall
3. Plates shall be installed with an alignment tolerance of 1.5 mm
4. All switch assembly louvered plates shall have their earthing terminal connected
to the earth terminal attached to the switch box by an insulated 2.5 mm2
protective conductor.
B. All sockets, switches, disconnect switches, fused switches, etc. located in food
preparation areas shall be mounted flush to wall.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF JUNCTION, PULL AND TERMINAL BOXES
A. Generally:
1. Fix junction, pull and terminal boxes where indicated and where required to
facilities pulling of wires and cables and connection of future appliances
2. Locate boxes as inconspicuously as possible, but accessible after work is
completed.
B. Pull Boxes:
1. Fix at maximum 10m spacing and to limit the number of bends in conduit to not
more than two 90° bends.
3.04 TESTING
A. Test all switches, socket outlets etc. for correct polarity and continuity of conductors in
the presence of and to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.
B. Carry out live phase to earth loop impedance tests at all switches and socket outlets
with an approved earth loop impedance tester to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.
Ensure that all device plates have satisfactory earth continuity to the protective
conductor system.
C. Test all socket outlets for instantaneous tripping of associated distribution board current
operated earth leakage circuit breaker using testing equipment, approved by the
Engineer.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 2813
FUSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Cartridge fuses rated 600 V and less for use in switches, distribution boards,
switchboards, controllers and motor-control centers

2. Division 26 Section 26 2413 “Switchboards".
5. Division 26 Section 26 0573 “Over current Protective Device Coordination
Study”.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include the following for each fuse type indicated:
1. Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance,
electrical characteristics, and ratings.
2. Let-through current curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics.
3. Time-current curves, coordination charts and tables, and related data.
B. Ambient Temperature Adjustment Information: If ratings of fuses have been adjusted to

accommodate ambient temperatures, provide list of fuses with adjusted ratings.
1. For each fuse having adjusted ratings, include location of fuse, original fuse
rating, local ambient temperature, and adjusted fuse rating.
2. Provide manufacturer's technical data on which ambient temperature adjustment
calculations are based.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuses to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
1. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance
Data," include the following:
a. Let-through current curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics.
b. Time-current curves, coordination charts and tables, and related data.
c. Ambient temperature adjustment information.
KEO/19-3262-0000 26 2813/1 Fuses

A. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses from a single manufacturer.

combination unit
be applied.

1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum

fuse size.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
contents.
1. Fuses: Quantity equal to five percent of each fuse type and size, but no fewer
than two of each type and size.
B. Spare parts shall be delivered to the Owner’s central storage facility.

KEO/19-3262-0000 26 2813/2 Fuses

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers subject to compliance with the requirement of the contract documents,

use only firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of Fuses, of types and capacities
required which have been in satisfactory use in similar or service for not less than five
(5) years and approved by the Architect/ Engineer.
2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES
A. Characteristics: nonrenewable cartridge fuse; class and current rating indicated; voltage
rating consistent with circuit voltage.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of

sizes and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.
B. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be

applied to fuse ratings.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without
removing fuse.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labels indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each fused
switch.
3.4 MAINTENANCE

KEO/19-3262-0000 26 2813/3 Fuses
system and submit to the Architect/ Engineer for approval.
END OF SECTION
KEO/19-3262-0000 26 2813/4 Fuses

SECTION 26 2816
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes the following individually mounted, enclosed switches and circuit
breakers:
1. Molded-case circuit breakers.
2. Molded-case switches.
3. Enclosures.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and
component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and
manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics,
ratings, and finishes.
1. Enclosure types and details for types other than IP55.
2. Current and voltage ratings.
3. Short-circuit current rating.
4. UL listing for series rating of installed devices.
5. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices and auxiliary components.
6. Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating
of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of
overcurrent protective device.
B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C. Wiring Diagram for power, signal, and control wiring.
D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that enclosed

switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and components will withstand seismic
forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical
Systems" Include the following:
KEO/19-3262-0000 26 2816/1 Enclosed Switches And Circuit Breakers

1. Basis of Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual
forces specified."
event."
E. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
F. Field quality-control test reports including the following:

G. Manufacturer's field service report.
H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include
in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in
1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches
and circuit breakers.
2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of circuit breaker.

combination unit
conductors

be applied.
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and

capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the
International Electrical Testing Association or is a recognized testing laboratory (RTL) as
defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the International
Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in
Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
B. Comply with BS/ IEC Regulations.
C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for
enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and
adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with
other construction, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces.
Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access
doors and panels.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
contents.
1. Potential Transformer Fuses: 10% of each type installed.
2. Control-Power Fuses: 10% of each type installed.
3. Fuses and Fusible Devices for Fused Circuit Breakers: 10% of each type
installed.
4. Fuses for Fusible Switches: 10% of each type installed.
5. Fuses for Fused Power Circuit Devices: 10% of each type installed.
6. Spare Indicating Lights: 10% of each type installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

use only firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of Enclosed Switches and Circuit
Breakers, of types and capacities required which have been in satisfactory use in similar
or service for not less than five (5) years and approved by the Architect/ Engineer.
2.2 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND SWITCHES
A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: Comply with applicable BS, with interrupting capacity to
meet available fault currents.
1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level
overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable
magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-
mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.
3. Electronic Trip-Unit Circuit Breakers: RMS sensing; field-replaceable rating plug;
with the following field-adjustable settings:
a. Instantaneous trip.
b. Long- and short-time pickup levels.
c. Long- and short-time time adjustments.
d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.
4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller.
5. Integrally Fused Circuit Breakers: Thermal-magnetic trip element with integral
limiter-style fuse listed for use with circuit breaker and trip activation on fuse
opening or on opening of fuse compartment door.
B. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories:

1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
2. Lugs: Mechanical style with compression lug kits suitable for number, size, trip
ratings, and conductor material.
3. Communication Capability: Circuit-breaker-mounted communication module with
functions and features compatible with power monitoring and control system
specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control.”
4. 240-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75 percent of rated
voltage.
5. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage with field-
adjustable 0.1- to 0.6-second time delay.

6. Auxiliary Switch: Two SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts
mimic circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker
contacts.
7. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key
shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.
8. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking
ground-fault protection function.
C. Molded-Case Switches: Molded-case circuit breaker with fixed, high-set instantaneous

trip only, and short-circuit withstand rating equal to equivalent breaker frame size
interrupting rating.
Features and Accessories:
1. Standard frame sizes and number of poles.
2. Lugs: Compression type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor
material.
3. Earth-Fault Protection: Comply with BS / IEC standards; remote-mounted and
powered type with mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup
and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip
unit; and three-phase, zero-sequence current transformer/sensor.
4. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact.
5. Under-voltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without
intentional time delay.
6. Auxiliary Contacts: Two SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts
mimic switch contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of switch contacts.
7. Alarm Switch: One NO contact that operates only when switch has tripped.
8. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit switch operation; key shall be
removable only when switch is in off position.
9. Electrical Operator: Provide remote control for on, off, and reset operations.
10. Accessory Control Power Voltage: self-powered 240-V ac. Provide fully
protected control transformer. .
D. Molded-Case Switch Accessories:

1. Lugs: Mechanical style with compression lug kits suitable for number, size, trip
ratings, and material of conductors.
2. Shunt Trip: 240-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75
percent of rated voltage. Provide "dummy" trip unit where required for proper
operation.
3. Under voltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage with field-
adjustable 0.1- to 0.6-second time delay. Provide "dummy" trip unit where
required for proper operation.
4. Auxiliary Switch: Two SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts
mimic circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker
contacts.
5. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit operation; key shall be
removable only when switch is in off position.
2.3 ENCLOSURES
A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: IP 55 indoors or IP 67 outdoors to comply with

environmental conditions at installed location.
1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: IP 55.
2. Outdoor Locations: IP 67
3. Kitchen or Wash-Down Areas: IP 67 stainless steel.
4. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: IP 67
5. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:
IP 67.
6. Hazardous Areas: As indicated in Drawings
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for
compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
3.2 CONCRETE BASES
Division 03.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with applicable portions of BS for installation of enclosed switches and circuit
breakers.
B. Mount individual wall-mounting switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height,
unless otherwise indicated. Anchor floor-mounting switches to concrete base.
C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section

"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
D. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets
and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide

warning signs as specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Enclosure Nameplates: Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic

nameplate as specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing

B. Prepare for acceptance testing as follows:
1. Inspect mechanical and electrical connections.
2. Verify switch and relay type and labeling verification.
3. Verify rating of installed fuses.
4. Inspect proper installation of type, size, quantity, and arrangement of mounting or
anchorage devices complying with manufacturer's certification.
C. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the
following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Test mounting and anchorage devices according to requirements in Division 26
Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
2. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection as per BS /
IEC standards. Certify compliance with test parameters.
3. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
4. Infrared Scanning:
a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than
60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each
enclosed switch and circuit breaker. Open or remove doors or panels so
connections are accessible to portable scanner.
b. Follow-Up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared
scan of each unit 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
c. Instruments, Equipment and Reports:
1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature
or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide
calibration record for device.
2) Prepare a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and
circuit breakers included and describes scanning results. Include
notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and
observations after remedial action.
3.6 TRAINING

maintenance.
4. Schedule training with the Employer, through Architect/ Engineer, with at least 14
days' advance notice.

testing and commissioning reports for the Architect/ Engineers review outlining all
deficiencies and course of action. The contractor shall ensure all deficiencies outlined
are rectified, retested, and certified.
3.8 MAINTENANCE
3.10 ADJUSTING
3.11 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, vacuum dirt and debris from interiors; do not use
compressed air to assist in cleaning.
B. Inspect exposed surfaces and repair damaged finishes.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 2913
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes ac, enclosed controllers rated 600 V and less, of the following
types:
1. Direct online (DOL) starters
2. Star-delta starters
3. Soft starters

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed controller. Include dimensions and
manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics,
ratings, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each enclosed controller.

b. Nameplate legends.
c. Short-circuit current rating of integrated unit.
d. Listed and labeled for series rating of overcurrent protective devices in
combination controllers.
e. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual
overcurrent protective devices in combination controllers.

required working clearances, and required area above and around enclosed controllers
where pipe and ducts are prohibited. Show enclosed controller layout and relationships
between electrical components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show
KEO/19-3262-0000 26 2913/1 Enclosed Controllers

support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate field
measurements.
D. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and testing agency.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed controllers to include in emergency,

1. Routine maintenance requirements for enclosed controllers and all installed
components.
protective devices.
G. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been
installed and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor
nameplate full-load currents.
H. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors
have been installed and arrange to demonstrate that dip switch settings for motor
running overload protection suit actual motor to be protected.

combination unit
conductors
be applied.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain, within 160 km of

Project site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency
maintenance and repairs.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed controllers of a single type through one source

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in BS
Standards, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked
for intended use.
D. Comply with BS and IEE Regulations.
E. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for
enclosed controllers, minimum clearances between enclosed controllers, and for
adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions and
clearances.
A. Store enclosed controllers indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to
prevent condensation. Protect enclosed controllers from exposure to dirt, fumes, water,
corrosive substances, and physical damage.
B. If stored in areas subject to weather, cover enclosed controllers to protect them from
weather, dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing
and flammable materials from inside controllers; install electric heating of sufficient
wattage to prevent condensation.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of enclosed controllers with other construction

including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required
workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These
D. Coordinate features of enclosed controllers and accessory devices with pilot devices
and control circuits to which they connect.
E. Coordinate features, accessories, and functions of each enclosed controller with ratings
and characteristics of supply circuit, motor, required control sequence, and duty cycle of
motor and load.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
contents.
1. Spare Fuses: Furnish one spare for every five installed, but no fewer than one
set of three of each type and rating.
2. Indicating Lights: Two of each type installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

use only firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of Enclosed Controllers, of types and
capacities required which have been in satisfactory use in similar or service for not less
than five (5) years and approved by the Architect/ Engineer.
2.2 GENERAL
A. Enclosed controllers shall be of the same manufacturer as the low voltage panel,
switchboard, motor control center and distribution boards.
2.3 MOTOR STARTERS
A. All Motor starters shall comply with IEC 60947-4. The components of the starter shall be
type tested and ASTA certified to achieve Type 2 co-ordination in accordance with IEC
60947-4.
B. The Manufacturer shall supply certified test results to confirm that the starter has been
tested to substantiate designs according to applicable standards. The tests shall verify
not only the performance of the unit and integrated assembly, but also the suitability of
the enclosure venting, rigidity and bus bracing. In addition, the unit shall be factory
tested in accordance with applicable standards.
C. The Manufacturer shall be prepared to show proper evidence of having tested for noise
immunity on both input and output power connections

D. Motor starters shall comply with the requirements of the local power supply authorities
E. Motor starters shall be rated to carry the full load current of its rated duty at its most
severe load conditions. All starters shall be capable of at least 20 starts per hour at
100% full load torque.
1. Motor starters shall be housed in a separate cubicle compartment of the relevant
motor control center and each starter cubicle shall contain the following
components, or as otherwise indicated on the Project Drawings or Project
Documentation.
2. 1 No. triple pole MCCB/ MPCB or fuse switch, as indicated on the Project
Drawings, externally operated and interlocked with the cubicle door. There shall
be provision for padlocking in the OFF position.
3. 1 No. motor protection relay.
4. 1 No. set of auxiliary relays and timers required to provide the necessary
indication and control sequence. Timers shall be totally enclosed dust proof.
5. 1 No. set of main motor terminals and auxiliary terminals for remote controls
and indications.
6. 1 No. set of terminals for remote lock-off and emergency stop push buttons.
7. 1 No. control circuit transformer, where applicable.
8. 1 No. anti-condensation heater, if specified.
9. 1 No. set of power factor correction capacitors with separate fuses for all drives
above 11 kW, to give a power factor of not less than 0.95, if specified.
10. 1 No. Thermistor relays where applicable.
11. Shall contain a totally enclosed dust proof timer.
F. The following equipment shall be mounted on the door of the starter cubicle, or as
otherwise indicated in the Drawings.
1. 1 No. ammeter with selector switch and current transformer fitted with
suppressed scale to read motor running and starting current with red pointer to
indicate full load current for each motor rated 25HP and above.
2. 2 No. pilot lamps to indicate “SUPPLY ON” (Green) and “MOTOR RUNNING”
(Red).
3. 1 No. pilot lamp to indicate “MOTOR FAILED” (Amber).
4. 1 No Pilot lamps (a separate lamp for each motor fault conditions).
5. 1 No. “Hand/OFF/AUTO” Selector switch
6. 1 set “Start/Stop” push button
7. 1 No. externally operated overload reset push button
8. 1 Lamp test push button
2.4 DIRECT ONLINE [DOL] STARTERS
A. DOL starters shall consist of a TP/SP contactor for switching direct on line in
accordance with IEC 60947-4-1 and fitted with auxiliary contacts.
B. Contactors shall be selected for category AC-3 duty.
2.5 STAR-DELTA STARTERS
A. Star-delta starters shall be provided with contactors as for DOL starters, arranged in
such a manner to ensure the star contactor opens before the delta contactor closes.

B. The period of running in star and the transition time shall be controlled by adjustable
solid state type timers.
C. For closed transition type star-delta starters, further requirements shall be wire wound
porcelain core resistor banks of sufficient thermal rating to allow three (3) consecutive
starts of 30 seconds starting period followed by a 15 minutes rest and another 30
seconds starting period. Resistance value shall be chosen to give high starting current
with low transient current. A thermal cut out shall be provided for transient resistor
banks. Starter cubicles incorporating resistor banks shall be well ventilated with vermin
proof and dust ventilation louvers.
D. Panel Top Units:

1. The rotor resistance may be mounted within separate cubicles mounted on top of
the control panel. These cubicles shall be identical in construction to the control
panel and dummy cubicles shall be provided as necessary tonsure uniform
height of the entire control panel.
2. The cubicles shall be provided with adequate ventilation louvers and access to
the resistance units shall be by means of a lockable, hinged front door.
3. Cable connections to the main control panel shall be via suitable cable glands to
maintain the integrity of the control panel enclosure.
2.6 SOFT STARTERS
A. REFERENCES & STANDARDS.

1. The soft starter shall be designed, built and tested according to the latest editions
of applicable UL standards. The soft starter shall be certified by Underwriters
Laboratories (UL) & Canada Standards Association (CSA).
B. DESIGN SPECIFICATION;
1. The solid-state reduced-voltage starter shall be UL and CSA listed. The solid-
state reduced-voltage starter shall be an integrated unit with power SCRs, logic
board, paralleling bypass contactor, and electronic overload relay enclosed in a
single molded housing.
2. The SCR-based power section shall consist of six (6) back-to-back SCRs and
shall be rated for a minimum peak inverse voltage rating of 1500 volts PIV.
3. Units using triacs or SCR/diode combinations shall not be acceptable.
4. Resistor/capacitor snubber networks shall be used to prevent false firing of SCRs
due to dV/dT effects.
5. The logic board shall be mounted for ease of testing, service and replacement. It
shall have quick disconnect plug-in connectors for current transformer inputs, line
and load voltage inputs and SCR gate firing output circuits.
6. The logic board shall be identical for all ampere ratings and voltage classes and
shall be conformally coated to protect environmental concerns.
7. The paralleling run bypass contactor shall energize when the motor reaches 90
of full speed and close/open under one (1) times motor current.
8. The paralleling run bypass contactor shall utilize an intelligent coil controller to
limit contact bounce and optimize coil voltage during varying system conditions.
9. Starter shall be provided with electronic overload protection as standard and
shall be based on inverse time-current algorithm. Overload protection shall be
capable of being disabled during ramp start for long acceleration loads via a DIP
switch setting on the device keypad.
10. Overload protection shall be adjusted via the device keypad and shall have a
motor full load ampere adjustment from 30 to 100% of the maximum continuous
ampere rating of the starter.
11. Starter shall have selectable overload class setting of 5, 10, 20 or 30 via a DIP
switch setting on the device keypad.
12. Starter shall be capable of either an electronic or mechanical reset after a fault.
13. Units using bimetal overload relays are not acceptable.
14. Over temperature protection (on heat sink) shall be standard.
15. Starters shall provide protection against improper line-side phase rotation as
standard. Starter will shut down if a line-side phase rotation other than A-B-C
exists. This feature can be disabled via a DIP switch on the device keypad.
16. Starters shall provide protection against a phase loss or unbalance condition as
standard. Starter will shut down if a 50% current differential between any two
phases is encountered. This feature can be disabled via a DIP switch on the
device keypad.
17. Start shall provide protection against a motor stall condition as standard. This
feature can be disabled via a DIP switch on the device keypad.
18. Starter shall provide protection against a motor jam condition as standard. This
feature can be disabled via a DIP switch on the device keypad.
19. Starter shall be provided with a Form C normally open (NO), normally closed
(NC) contact that shall change state when a fault condition exists. Contacts shall
be rated 60 VA (resistive load) and 20 VA (inductive load). In addition, an LED
display on the device keypad shall indicate type of fault (Overtemperature, Phase
Loss, Jam, Stall, Phase Reversal and Overload).
20. The following control function adjustments on the device keypad are required:
a. Selectable Torque Ramp Start or Current Limit Start
b. Adjustable Kick Start Time: 0–2 seconds
c. Adjustable Kick Start Torque: 0–85%
d. Adjustable Ramp Start Time: 0.5–180 seconds
e. Adjustable Initial Starting Ramp Torque: 0–85%
f. Adjustable Smooth Stop Ramp Time: 0–60 seconds.
21. Units enclosed in motor control centers shall be of the same manufacturer as that
of the circuit breaker and motor control center for coordination and design issues.
22. Maximum continuous operation shall be at 115% of continuous ampere rating.
23. Pump Control Option – Provide control algorithm for pump start-up and shut
down sequences. Control algorithm shall reduce the potential for water hammer
in a centrifugal pump system. Upon a start command, the speed of the motor is
increased, under the control of the IT. Soft Starter microprocessor, to achieve a
gentle start. After the speed has reached its nominal value, the bypass
contactors close and the pump. Upon a stop command, the bypass contactors
are opened and the motor speed is decreased in a tapered manner, to gradually
slow the flow until the motor is brought to a stop. The start and stop ramp times
are user adjustable and are to be set for the application requirements. The pump
control option shall be factory installed.
2.7 ENCLOSURES
A. Local starter panels for equipment will be freestanding or wall mounting type unless
otherwise indicated to comply with environmental conditions at installed location
1. Indoor Locations: IP 52.
2. Outdoor Locations: IP 65.
3. Kitchen Areas: IP54, stainless steel.
4. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: IP54.
2.8 ACCESSORIES
A. Devices shall be factory installed in controller enclosure, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Push-Button Stations, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: heavy-duty type.
C. Stop and Lockout Push-Button Station: Momentary-break, push-button station with a

factory-applied hasp arranged so padlock can be used to lock push button in depressed
position with control circuit open.
D. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable time-delay relays.
E. Elapsed Time Meters: Heavy duty with digital readout in hours.
F. Meters: Panel type, 64-mm minimum size with 90- or 120-degree scale and plus or
minus 2 percent accuracy. Where indicated, provide transfer device with an off position.
Meters shall indicate the following:
1. Ammeter: Output current, with current sensors rated to suit application.
2. Voltmeter: Output voltage.
3. Frequency Meter: Output frequency.
G. Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: Listed and labeled by acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction, microprocessor-based unit suitable for three- or four-wire systems
and with the following features:
1. Inputs from sensors or 5-A current-transformer secondaries, and potential
terminals rated to 600 V.
2. Switch-selectable digital display of the following:
a. Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
b. Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
c. Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
d. Three-Phase Real Power: Plus or minus 2 percent.
e. Three-Phase Reactive Power: Plus or minus 2 percent.
f. Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent.
g. Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent.
h. Integrated Demand with Demand Interval Selectable from 5 to 60
Minutes: Plus or minus 2 percent.
i. Accumulated energy, in megawatt hours (joules), plus or minus 2 percent;
stored values unaffected by power outages for up to 72 hours.
3. Mounting: Display and control unit flush or semi flush mounted in instrument
compartment door.
H. Phase-Failure and under voltage relays: Solid-state sensing circuit with isolated output
contacts for hard-wired connection. Provide adjustable under voltage setting.
I. Current-Sensing, Phase-Failure Relays for Bypass Controllers: Solid-state sensing

circuit with isolated output contacts for hard-wired connection; arranged to operate on
phase failure, phase reversal, current unbalance of from 30 to 40 percent, or loss of
supply voltage; with adjustable response delay.
A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested

enclosed controllers before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive enclosed controllers for compliance with
requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.
corrected.
3.2 APPLICATIONS
A. Select features of each enclosed controller to coordinate with ratings and characteristics
of supply circuit and motor; required control sequence; duty cycle of motor, controller,
and load; and configuration of pilot device and control circuit affecting controller
functions.
B. Select horsepower rating of controllers to suit motor controlled.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. For control equipment at walls, bolt units to wall or mount on lightweight structural-steel
channels bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks
complying with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
B. Install freestanding equipment on concrete bases.

"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
D. Enclosed Controller Fuses: Install fuses in each fusible switch. Comply with
requirements in Division 26 Section "Fuses."
3.4 CONCRETE BASES
Division 03.
3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify enclosed controller, components, and control wiring according to Division 26

Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
A. Install wiring between enclosed controllers according to Division 26 Section "Low-


applicable.
2. Connect selector switches with enclosed controller circuit in both hand and
automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-
pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors.
3.7 CONNECTIONS



1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller element, bus, component,
connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

1. Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation.
Test and adjust controllers, components, and equipment.
2. Assist in field testing of equipment including pretesting and adjusting of solid-
state controllers.
C. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection, except
optional tests, Motor Control - Motor Starters. Certify compliance with test
parameters.
3.9 ADJUSTING
3.10 TRAINING

maintenance.

3.12 MAINTENANCE
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 2923
VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This section describes the type of frequency converter shall be supplied for fan and
pump speed control. The frequency converter shall not be a general purpose product,
but a dedicated HVAC engineered design.

1.03 DEFINITIONS
1. BAS: Building automation system.
2. IGBT: Integrated gate bipolar transistor.
3. LAN: Local area network.
4. PID: Control action, proportional plus integral plus derivative.
5. PWM: Pulse-width modulated.
6. VFD: Variable frequency drive
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of VFD. Include dimensions, mounting arrangements,
location for conduit entries, shipping and operating weights, and manufacturer's
technical data on features, performance, electrical ratings, characteristics, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each VFD.

b. Nameplate legends.
c. Short-circuit current rating of integrated unit.
d. Listed and labeled for series rating of over-current protective devices in
combination controllers by authorities having jurisdiction.
e. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of each motor-
control center unit.
KEO/19-3262-0000 26 2923/1 Variable Frequency Motor Controllers
2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring for VFDs. Provide schematic
wiring diagram for each type of VFD.

required working clearances, and required area above and around VFDs where pipe
and ducts are prohibited. Show VFD layout and relationships between electrical
components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations,
type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate field measurements.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For VFDs, all installed devices, and components to
include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items
specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the
following:
1. Routine maintenance requirements for VFDs and all installed components.
protective devices.
3. Addressing sequence of operations, Input/output hardwire and data
communications connections to BAS, Fire Alarm System, remote field devises
and the VFD configuration that are loaded by keypad or PC.
F. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been
installed and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor
nameplate full-load currents.
G. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors
have been installed and arrange to demonstrate that dip switch settings for motor
running overload protection suit actual motor to be protected.
H. Harmonic analysis studies shall be performed for all large motor loads (over 37.3kW) or
large quantities of smaller motor loads to verify compliance, or where VFD\s are added
to existing services with high harmonic content. The building primary services entrance
shall be considered the Point of Common Coupling (PCC) for establishing current
harmonic limits. Total harmonic voltage distortion (THD) shall not exceed 5% at any
point in the building distribution system, except in separately derived systems dedicated
to the harmonic producing equipment.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications:
1. The manufacturer shall demonstrate a continuous period of manufacture and
development for at least 20 years.
2. The frequency converter shall be supported locally by the manufacturer who will
provide full technical support, spares holding and troubleshooting capability from
their own local facility. A training course shall be provided by the manufacturer to
the consultant / contractor / maintenance engineers.
3. Equipment supplied must conform to recognized International Standards and be
manufactured to ISO 9001 quality standards and carry the CE and C-tick mark
on EMC Compliance.
B. Frequency converters shall be suitable for use in either a ‘Stand Alone’ mode complete
with all necessary protection or as part of a centrally controlled system via a serial

communication loop to the main Building Automation System (BAS) via in-built EIA 485
port or other high level interface as required by the BAS.
C. Tests Functionality: Every AC Drive has to be tested functionally. The inverter part of the
AC Drive or each inverter module at least has to be tested by running it with a motor at
full nominal load. A test report of the tests made shall be delivered by the Frequency
Converter Manufacturer on engineer’s request.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain VFDs of a single type through one source from a single
manufacturer.
E. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, showing dimensioned layout,

required working clearances, and required area above and around VFDs where pipe
and ducts are prohibited. Show VFD layout and relationships between electrical
components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations,
type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate field measurements.
F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

BS/IEC Standards, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and
marked for intended use.
1. NEMA ICS7 Industrial Control and Systems Variable Speed Drives

2. UL 508C UL Standard for Safety Power Conversion Equipment
3. IEC 61800 Adjustable speed Electrical power drive systems
4. IEC 60255-149 Overload Relays
5. IEC 60146.1 Semiconductor Converters – General Requirements and
Line Commutated
6. IEC 60447 Man-Machine Interface Actuating Principles
7. IEC 61000-4-2 Immunity Tests
8. IEC 61000 Electromagnetic Compatibility
A. Deliver VFDs in shipping splits of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in
delivery path.
B. Store VFDs indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent
condensation. Protect VFDs from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances,
and physical damage.
C. If stored in areas subject to weather, cover VFDs to protect them from weather, dirt,
dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing and
flammable materials from inside controllers; install electric heating of sufficient wattage
to prevent condensation.

contents.
1. Specify one full set of spare fuses in each driver
2. Spare parts recommended by manufacturer.
A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation, capable of driving

full load without de-rating, under the following conditions, unless otherwise indicated:
Refer to section “Environmental Conditions” in Division 26 0500 - Common
VFDs, including clearances between VFDs, and adjacent surfaces and other items.
Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

1.011 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of VFDs with other construction including conduit,
piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and
required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
C. Coordinate features of VFDs, installed units, and accessory devices with pilot devices
and control circuits to which they connect.
D. Coordinate features, accessories, and functions of each VFD and each installed unit
with ratings and characteristics of supply circuit, motor, required control sequence, and
duty cycle of motor and load.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

documents, use only firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of Variable Frequency
Motor Controllers, of types and capacities required which have been in satisfactory use
in similar or service for not less than twenty (20) years and approved by the Engineer.
2.02 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES – TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The frequency converter (VFD) shall be rated for 3 phase, 400V +/-10%, 50/60 Hz
mains supply. At full speed, full load the VFD shall be able to deliver full rated motor
voltage (400 V) and therefore full rated motor output torque over the +/- 10% mains
voltage range.
B. The VFD shall continue to deliver full motor output torque even if the supply is at 400 V -
10% continuously.
C. The voltage to frequency ratio shall be suitable for centrifugal pump and fan control to
optimize energy usage.
D. The VFD shall incorporate an automatic energy optimization function to dynamically

optimize the voltage to the motor throughout the operating range of application. This
function is to ensure the magnetization of the motor is optimum at all speeds and loads
to optimize motor energy consumption.
E. The use of high efficiency motors with the VFD shall be considered as an acceptable
alternative to this function.
F. The VFD shall be rated for connection to any point in the supply network with a
prospective short circuit current of up to 100kA.
G. If additional components are required to meet this rating, these should be housed inside
the VFDs enclosure.
H. The VFD shall work in conjunction with any IEC standard design motor (IEC 60034-17)
and shall not require dv/dt or sinus filters for cable lengths of less than 50 metres, shall
not require the motors to be derated, or cause the motor temperature to rise above the
Class B rise expected on normal mains operation.
I. If the VFD cannot maintain Class B temperature rise even when running at low speeds
(<10Hz), then the motor shall be oversized and derated or an external blower for cooling
the motor shall be required.
J. If the VFD requires motor’s compliance with IEC 60034-25 (inverter duty rated motors),
this need to be clearly stated in the manufacturer’s data sheets and offers.
K. The VFD shall limit motor terminal pulse voltage (peak voltage and rise time) to below
that defined in IEC 60034-17 with a minimum 30m motor cable. If the motor terminal
peak voltages are above these limits, the VFD shall include an output filter (dv/dt filter or
sinus filter) or inverter duty rated motors shall be required.
L. The VFD shall incorporate an Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA) function for the
induction motors (IM) as well as permanenet magner motors (PMM). The AMA function
shall ensure tuning of the VFD to the motor in order to optimize motor performance,
improve start capabilities and compensate for motor cable variances. This function shall
be carried out with the IM / PMM at standstill (i.e. without spinning the motor) and
without the need to decouple the motor from the driven load.
M. The VFD shall be capable of controlling parallel motors (IM as well as PMM) of mixed
ratings, and allow disconnection of any motor whilst running without causing tripping.
The VFD shall be capable of running with no motor connected for service functions.
N. The VFD shall be fully tested at the frequency converter manufacturers works, including
motor loading. Certificates of Compliance should be available on request.
O. The VFD shall be of sufficient capacity to provide a quality wave form so as to achieve
full output torque of the motor, without causing additional heat rise under the following
operating conditions:
1. Rated input voltage 400 V +/- 10%, 3 phase, 48-62Hz +/- 1%.
2. Output voltage range 0 to full mains input voltage, 3 phase even at full mains
voltage -10% input.
3. Minimum efficiency at 100% load= 97% at 20% load = 92%
4. Working ambient temperature range -10C to +45C full load with no derating,
humidity to 95% RH, and vibration of 0.7G RMS in 3 directions.
5. Switching frequency within 2 kHz to 14kHz
6. The VFD shall have a manually adjustable carrier frequency that can be
adjusted in 0.5khz increments to allow the user to select the desired
opereating characteristics. It shall also able to perform automatically reduce
its carrier frequency to avoid tripping due to thermal overload.
P. The VFD shall allow connection of motors one frame size larger and 4 sizes smaller
than the nominal converter rating.
Q. The VFD shall be limited to 110% of rated current for 60 seconds.
R. The VFD shall accept 0-10 VDC and 0/4-20 mA inputs as a control signal.
S. The VFD shall provide two output relays, 2A , 230V to provide status signals including -
ready, run and tripped and be programmable for other selected information.
T. The VFD shall provide two analogue outputs of 0/4-20 mA, programmable to transmit
motor current, motor power, sensor feedback, speed or other variables to the BAS.
These shall alternatively be programmable as two digital outputs providing 24Vdc to
signal a choice of 27 status conditions to the BAS.
U. The VFD shall log and display total kWh consumed and total hours run by the motor
without additional instrumentation with the facility to reset these counters. The
inaccuracy of kWh meter shall not exceed 7% and the manufacturer must provide a
certificate from a credible international organization such as NABERS, TUV etc.
confirming the inaccuracy of the kWh meter to be within 7%
V. 20 preset speeds shall be available (programmable values) for duties such as night
setback, smoke extract and morning boost settings.
W. The VFD shall provide 4 skip frequencies of adjustable bandwidth to overcome
mechanical or air resonance.
X. A parameter lock shall be incorporated to prevent unauthorized resetting of parameters.
Y. VFD acoustic noise shall not exceed 75dBA at full load and 60dBA at 50% load.
Z. VFD shall meet ISO 13373 standard for Condition Monitoring and
AA. Diagnostics of Machines offer Predictive Maintenance such as motor status winding
monitoring before failure and vibration monitoring.
BB. The VFD shall design heat sink cooling fan for 10 years without the need for
replacement every 3 to 5 years
2.03 VFD DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Harmonics:
1. The VFD shall comply IEC 61000-3-12 and be fitted with a harmonic filter
(D.C. link or equivalent) on both inductive and capacitive elements to control
the main borne harmonics. The filter shall be mounted within the same
enclosure of the VFD. Any externally fitted harmonic filter or harmonic filter
that causes voltage drop shall be rejected.
B. EMC:
1. The VFD shall be CE marked in accordance with European Union (EU)
legislation and C-Tick marked in accordance with Australian Communications
Authority (ACA) regulations.
2. The VFD shall include a radio frequency suppression filter, within its
enclosure, to ensure compliance with both the following:
a. The VFD shall comply with the emission and immunity requirements of
IEC61800.3 2nd Edition 2004 for Category C1 (EN55011 Class B) products
with 50m screened motor cable up to 90kw.
b. The VFD shall comply with the emission and immunity requirements of
IEC61800.3 2nd Edition 2004 for Category C2 (EN55011 Class A1)
products with 150m screened motor cable from 110kw to 450kw and
above.
c. The VFD shall comply with the emission and immunity requirements of
IEC61800.3 2nd Edition 2004 for distance longer than 150m and above
with unshielded cables of unlimited length with standard EN55011, Group
1, Class B when using vsd in combination with special filter to meet the
higher requirement for longer distance.
d. VFD shall comply with 20V/m immunity according to EN (IEC)
e. 61000-4-3: 2006+A1+A2 from 80-1000Mhz.
C. The VFD manufacturer shall supply correct EMC installation recommendations to

ensure compliance with this specification.
D. The VFD design shall comprise a diode input bridge, fixed voltage DC link section with
both inductors and capacitors to form a filter, and inverting bridge comprising IGBTs
(Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors). All equipment must be housed within the VFD
enclosure.

E. The VFD shall monitor the output current on all three phases and the current protection
feature shall be sufficiently fast to allow the VFD to survive a continuous short circuit on
the output terminals without damage to any drive components.
F. The VFD shall protect itself against:

1. Input transients to VDE0160 class W2
2. Burst transients to IEC61000-4-4
3. Surge transients to IEC61000-4-5
4. Loss of mains phase (programmable to either trip or continue operation (with
or without auto derating) and initiate warning of this condition)
5. Loss of motor phase (3 phase measurement)
6. Grounding of any output phase
7. Loss of speed reference (with programmable ability to trip, stop, or continue
operation at last setting or preset speed).
G. The VFD shall use overriding frequency fold back control techniques to prevent damage
in the event of excessive load during either running or starting.
H. The VFD shall model the motor in its software to predict motor overheating without the
use of thermistors in the motor. When overheat is predicted, an alarm or warning shall
be initiated.
I. For motors fitted with thermistors, the VFD shall include a thermistor input as standard
to provide motor thermal protection without the need for external thermistor interface
relays.
J. The VFD shall exhibit near unity displacement fundamental power factor at all loads and
speeds, and should not require the addition of external AC/DC line reactors for power
factor improvement, harmonic control or prevention of zero voltage notching.
K. The output circuit shall be of such a design as to allow unlimited switching of the motor
circuit, at any load/speed without causing damage to the VFD. Otherwise an auxiliary
early break, late make contact must be supplied to the output disconnect switch and the
control wiring routed back to a safety circuit via conduit or cable tray.
L. VFDs shall have self adjusting modulation frequency control. The control form shall be
such as to allow the VFD to deliver full output at all times without derating, by optimizing
the switching frequency dependent on the output load.
M. Full galvanic isolation between power and control components shall be incorporated to
ensure compliance with VDE 0160 PELV (Protective Extra Low Voltage) to prevent
damage to BAS interface and ensure operator safety. Short circuiting of the control
terminals shall not damage the control card
N. The VFD shall be capable of automatically reconnecting to a spinning fan, forward or

reverse running, without tripping, following mains interruption or on transfer from bypass
running.
O. The VFD shall include a Smart Logic Controller within its enclosure that offers a wide
range of PLC functions that include logic operators, comparators and timer functions.
P. The VFD shall have an automatic “sleep” mode function timer complete with boost
function, operating when loads are below minimum settings.

Q. In order to support AHU diagnostics, the VFD shall have AHU Filters Condition
monitoring capability by connecting a pair hoses across the filters and display on its
local control panel the actual pressure drop across the filters. The VFD shall display
“Filter Dirty” alarm informing the maintenance team to clean the AHU filters if the
pressure drop across filters exceeds pre-determined values as defined by the quadratic
curve programming of the VFD under different flow conditions. Also, VFD shall display
“Filters Missing” alarm if the filters are removed for cleaning without stopping the AHU.
The VFD shall not require any external flow measurement device or any external
pressure transmitters for the filter condition monitoring.
R. In order to support AHU diagnostics, the VFD shall have AHU Air Flow measurements
capability by connecting a pair of hoses across the fan, measuring pressure developed
by the fan, utilizing the “k” value of the fan and air density. The VFD shall not require
any external flow measurement device or any external pressure transmitters for this
measurement.
S. The design shall include a full 3-zone, 3 setpoint PID controller as standard to provide
closed loop control direct from up to 3 signal transmitters without the need for external
signal conditioning. The PID controller shall permit the VFD to control the motor speed
based on the following feedback selections: highest/lowest, average, sum, difference, 3-
zone min, 3-zone max. VFDs without a 3-zone controller must add this capability to
their package.
T. The VFD shall not exhibit an inrush current when a ‘start’ signal is given, and current
must not exceed 110% at any time to prevent damage to connected equipment.
U. The VFD design shall include a motor preheat circuit to prevent condensation forming in
the motor during shutdown periods.
V. The VFD shall not be damaged if it is energized with a ‘start’ signal without a motor
connected.
W. The VFD shall provide as standard:

1. Heat sink over temperature protection.
2. Under voltage protection.
3. Over voltage protection.
4. 4 line LCD alpha-numeric display with free programmable text array capable
of displaying 4 operating variables simultaneously with all information
displayed in clear language, e.g. “Earth Fault”.
5. Display to be in 9 selectable languages.
6. VFD “On” light.
7. VFD “Warning” light.
8. VFD “Alarm” light.
9. Selectable display from 20 readouts including output current, voltage,
frequency, speed, power, motor thermal load %, VFD thermal load %, total
energy consumed kWh and total hours run.
10. Hand/Off/Auto or Local/Remote pushbuttons and raise and lower speed
pushbuttons shall be on the keypad as standard to allow control or testing and
commissioning of the VFD. If these are not included an H/O/A selector switch
and potentiometer must be added to the VFD control panel.
11. Rest pushbutton shall be on the keypad to enable local/manual resetting of
faults.
12. Auto Reset in event of trip condition with ability to program the number of
reset attempts (up to 20 or infinite) and the time between each attempt.

13. Ability to display setpoint and feedback (e.g. static duct pressure, air flow or
condenser water return temperature) in engineering units (e.g. Pa, m3/hour,
ºC)
X. VFD shall not include any buttons on the keypad allowing the motor direction to be
reversed.
Y. VFD shall incorporate a fault diagnostic memory storing the last 10 trips displayed in
alpha-numeric format. The data immediately preceeding the last fault shall also be
stored to assist fault finding.
Z. The VFD shall provide the following additional features as standard;

1. Auto ramping shall be employed to ensure “No Trip” ramping if too rapid
acceleration/deceleration is called for.
2. It shall be possible to select a “Run Permissive” function to accept a “system
ready” signal to ensure the VFD does not start until dampers or other auxiliary
equipment are in the proper state for VFD operation. The run permissive
circuit shall also be capable of sending an output signal as a start command
to actuate external equipment before allowing the VFD to start (e.g. damper
actuator). If this function is not included in the VFD, comparable control
circuits must be added to the VFD package.
3. The VFD shall be capable of autoderating when either the ambient
temperature is sustained above the nominal rating or when losing a mains
phase.
4. The VFD must annunciate the loss of running load indicative of mechanical
failures resulting from broken belt, coupler etc. If this function is not included,
delta-P switches across the fan or pump must be added and wired to the VFD
control system.
AA. The design technology and operator keypad shall be common through the whole series
of VFD offered. The VFD shall be factory pre-commissioned for building services use
and require minimal site setting.
BB. Real Time Clock (RTC). For applications without a BAS the VFD shall provide a RTC
option with the following functionality:
1. Ability to display current time and date on VFD display.
2. Capable of initiating functions including start/stop, change of speed and
change of setpoint (e.g. for night setback).
3. Capable of controlling VFD relay outputs for control of remote devices.
4. Provide up to 20 programmable events.
5. Ability to enable/disable the RTC by external control signal for disabling during
shut down periods (e.g. holidays).
6. The RTC option shall be installed inside the VFD to ensure it cannot
easily/accidentally be removed by operating or maintenance personnel
thereby ensuring once commissioned the VFD continues to operate according
to the RTC settings.
7. Maintain its setting with power removed from the VFD for up to 100 hours
allowing maintenance to be carried out without resetting the time.
8. When fitted with the RTC, the VFD shall date/time stamp the last 10 faults in
the fault log.
CC. Fire safety function. The VFD shall have a digital input which can be used in the event
of a fire signal from the fire system. Depending on the application and system design
the function of this input should force the VFD into one of the following operating states:
1. Stop the VFD
2. Start and run the VFD at a fixed (programmable) speed in the forward
direction.
3. Start and run the VFD at a fixed (programmable) speed in the reverse
direction (e.g. smoke extract)
4. Start and run the VFD at a fixed (programmable) speed in the forward
direction and if the VFD trips, automatically activate a relay output which can
be used to control a by-pass starter
DD. When operating in states b) or c) the VFD should continue to operate overriding all its
warnings and alarms, normal application parameter settings and motor protection
features in order to secure continued operation until such time that the fire command is
manually overridden or that a fire has rendered the VFD inoperable. In the event of
serious fault conditions, such as earth fault or short circuit fault on the VFD output, the
VFD should trip but then continuously attempt to automatically reset and restart, even if
that results in running to destruction.
EE. The VFD shall have proven serial communication protocol capabilities with BAS
systems to include Johnson Controls Metasys N2, Siemens FLN, Andover X-driver,
Modbus RTU, Lonworks and BACnet over IP. The VFD manufacturer shall be
responsible for technical support to the BAS vendor in the implementation of serial
communication interface to the BAS System. The BAS vendor shall be responsible for
the complete “integration and interoperability” of the VFD through the BAS via the serial
interface.
FF. When integrated into the BAS serial communication network the VFD’s hardware I/O
points shall be made available as remote I/O for the BAS. The VFD shall provide at
least the following status/control I/O points:
1. 6 x digital inputs
2. 2 x digital outputs (provided by relays with changeover volt free contacts
(rated for 240V AC) and on/off delay timers)
3. 2 x analogue inputs (each selectable for voltage or current signals, direct or
reverse acting, with the minimum and maximum range independently
scaleable from 0-10V DC and 0-20mA)
4. 1 x analogue output (0/4-20mA)
GG. The VFD shall have the facility to expand its I/O capability through the addition of option
modules. These should be available as factory mounted modules, with the complete
VSD including the modules tested at the manufacturer’s works and also available as
simple field mounted options using rigid connectors to plug into the VSD. The following
I/O points should be provided by these option modules:
1. Additional digital inputs
2. Additional digital outputs including additional relay outputs
3. Additional analogue inputs
4. Additional analogue outputs (0/4-20mA and 0-10V DC)
5. Pt1000/Ni1000 temperature sensor inputs
HH. It shall be possible to read the status of all digital and analogue inputs (including those
on I/O expansion modules) via the high level interface making them available as remote
inputs for the BAS.
II. It shall be possible to control all digital and analogue outputs (including those on the I/O
expansion modules) via the high level interface making them available as remote
outputs for control by the BAS. When controlled by the BAS in the event of the high
level interface network failing the digital/analogue outputs shall override to a
programmable default condition/value.
JJ. Voltage dip Ride Through. The VFD shall comply to voltage dip ride through
requirement and perform in accordance to the characteristic and meet the demands
stated in Semi F47 without the need of disabling any protective feature of the VFD.
KK. The VFD shall design the capacitor for 10 years life span without need to replace any
capacitor every 3 to 5 years.
2.04 MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The VFD shall be contained in a single enclosure having minimum ingress protection of
IP55 level for the VFD sizes up 90kW and IP54 level for the VFD sizes above 90kW.
The VFD shall incorporate all accessories necessary to meet the specification without
having to use a secondary enclosure. Any local / non-proprietary made enclosures will
be strictly unacceptable.
B. The VFD shall include load dependent in-built cooling fans. This increases life
expectancy of the in-built cooling fans. VFDs without this functionality shall include as a
part of their offer, extra costs for the heat sink cooling fans replacement every 3 years.
C. The operating keypad shall be detachable to allow upload/download function to copy

programming from one drive to another. An optional remote keypad kit shall be available
for mounting the keypad in a secondary fascia enclosure maintaining a minimum IP55
rating.
D. No rear access shall be necessary during normal service function.
E. The design of the VFD shall allow up to at least 100 meters of SWA (Single Wire
Armour) cable to be used between the VFD and the motor and allow the use of Fire
rated cable in the motor circuit for fire locations.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Devices shall be factory installed in controller enclosure, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Push-Button Stations, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: heavy-duty type.
C. Stop and Lockout Push-Button Station: Momentary-break, push-button station with a

factory-applied hasp arranged so padlock can be used to lock push button in depressed
position with control circuit open.
D. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable time-delay relays.
E. Standard Displays:
1. Output frequency (Hz).
2. Set-point frequency (Hz).
3. Motor current (amperes).
4. DC-link voltage (VDC).
5. Motor torque (percent).
6. Motor speed (rpm).
7. Motor output voltage (V).
F. Historical Logging Information and Displays:

1. Real-time clock with current time and date.
2. Running log of total power versus time.
3. Total run time.
4. Fault log, maintaining last four faults with time and date stamp for each.
A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested VFDs

before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, surfaces, and substrates to receive VFDs for compliance with
requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for conduit systems to verify actual locations of conduit

connections before VFD installation.
3.02 APPLICATIONS
A. Select features of each VFD to coordinate with ratings and characteristics of supply
circuit and motor; required control sequence; and duty cycle of motor, controller, and
load.
B. In application where the driver will be more than 33 cable meters from the motor
coordinate with the motor manufacturer to ensure that the motor is suitable for the
application or to provide a motor protecting dV/dT filter on the driver output to protect the
motor
C. Select horsepower rating of controllers to suit motor controlled.
D. Electrical Service: feed the drive directly from the main building switchboard or from a
feeder that is dedicated to mechanical loads. Isolation transformers or line reactors
maybe considered on installations where Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) limits cannot
be achieved as described above.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Anchor each VFD assembly to steel-channel sills arranged and sized according to
manufacturer's written instructions. Attach by bolting. Level and grout sills flush with
mounting surface.
B. Install VFDs on concrete bases.

"Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
3.04 CONCRETE BASES

B. Concrete base is specified in Division 26 Section "Common Work Results for Electrical,"
and concrete materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 03.
3.05 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify VFDs, components, and control wiring according to Division 26 Section

B. Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for VFDs, including control
sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished metal, and cover
instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of VFD units.
A. Install wiring between VFDs and remote devices according to Division 26 Section "Low-

applicable.
2. Connect selector switches with control circuit in both hand and automatic
positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts,
high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors.
3.07 CONNECTIONS

B. Ground equipment according to Division 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller element, bus, component,
connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

1. Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation.
Test and adjust controllers, components, and equipment.
2. Assist in field testing of equipment including pre-testing and adjusting of solid-
state controllers.
3.09 ADJUSTING
B. Ensure that the VFD programming and motor protective devices are properly calibrated
and set.
3.10 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain variable frequency drives. Refer to
Division 01 Section “Documentation and Training.”
B. Provide certified start up report for each VFD.
3.11 TRAINING
A. Provide On-site instruction with each VFD.
B. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train the Employer’s maintenance

maintenance.
advance notice.
5. All training aids shall be provided by trainer. Content to include care,
troubleshooting, servicing and operation of the equipment and systems installed
3.13 MAINTENANCE

END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 3100
SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAIC SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Scope of Work: The contractor shall be responsible for providing a complete and
operable Photovoltaic (PV) System On-Grid connection type that meets applicable
MEW (Ministry of Electricity and Water & Renewable energy) guidelines/regulations.
The contractor will be required to design the photovoltaic system, select the most
appropriate photovoltaic equipment, and install the photovoltaic system. The
contractor shall provide qualified and experienced staff for all aspects of the Project,
and such staff shall be specifically qualified and experienced in the engineering,
design, and installation of photovoltaic systems. The contractor shall be Qualified and
registered in MEW CCI and/or CCII EPC List. Preference shall be given to MEW
approved EPC firms with previous PAHW approvals.
1. Section 26 0500 - Common Requirements For Electrical Installations
2. Section 26 0526 - Earthing And Bonding For Electrical Systems
3. Section 26 0553 - Identification For Electrical Systems
4. Section 26 0519 - Low Voltage Electrical Cables
5. Section 26 0533 - Raceway And Boxes For Electrical Systems
6. Section 26 0536 - Cable Trays And Ladder For Electrical System
7. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices
8. Section 26 2413 - Switchboards
1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. All work, materials, and equipment shall comply with the rules and regulations of all
codes and ordinances of the local, state, and federal authorities having jurisdiction.
Such codes, when more restrictive, shall take precedence over these plans and
specifications. The specifications and standards listed below form part of this
specification. The system shall fully comply with the latest issue of these standards, if
applicable.
1. Latest MEW Solar PV Connection Guidelines
2. MEW - R1 "Regulations for Electrical Installations"
3. National Electrical Code - NFPA 70 (2017) - Article 690 - Solar Photovoltaic
4. National Electrical Safety Code - ANSI/IEEEC2-2002
5. OSHA
6. Outdoor enclosures shall be NEMA 3 (minimum) or equivalent.
7. ANSI/IEEE 519 1992 Guide for harmonic control and reactive compensation of
static power controllers
8. IEEE 1262 Recommended Practice for Qualifications of Photovoltaic Modules
9. IEEE 928-1986 Recommended Criteria for Terrestrial Photovoltaic Power
Systems
KEO/19-3262-0000 26 3100/1 Solar Photovoltaic System
10. IEC 61215 ed.2
11. IEC 61730
12. IEC 61727
13. IEC 61829
14. IEC 61701
15. IEC 61721
16. Electrical Protection Class II and ICE-guidelines.
17. ISO 9001 and ISO14001
18. UL 1741-2001 for Inverters and Charge Controllers
19. UL 1703 for Photovoltaic Modules
20. FCC Regulations Electromagnetic Interference
A. Contractor must include a description of the Proposed System. The System

description shall include the PV panel/module size (in kW and physical
dimensions) and layout, the mounting details of the arrays, the electrical
interconnection strategy, construction means and methods, and energy
production calculations. The contractor is responsible to verify the site conditions.
1. PV Panel/Module Size and Layout - Contractor shall include a description and
show a layout of all the PV panels/modules and all other System components.
2. PV Array Mounting Details - Contractor shall include a detailed description of,
and drawings of, the structural attachment details for the System. The solar
array shall be a floor mounted system.
3. Electrical Interconnection - Contractor shall include a description of the strategy
for the proposed System. This shall include single-line electrical drawings
showing the System output (voltage, phase and current) and the method of
connecting the System. The Contractor shall carefully inspect the electrical
system and design to ensure against harmonic distortion, fault protection
issues, and interconnect problems.
B. Selection of Photovoltaic System

1. Contractor must provide catalog cut sheets and drawings with the submittal to
show the type, style, and quantity of photovoltaic panels to be installed, the
method of mounting panels on the site, and location of panels and the grids the
panels are attached to.
2. The contractor shall submit all drawings and specifications for the Project to the
Engineer within the period stipulated in the project schedules. The drawings
and specifications shall show enough details as necessary to review the
documents for structural integrity, operational integrity, and interaction with the
existing building systems including but not limited to electrical systems and any
special foundation requirements for any components used in the contractors
proposed System for this Project, which shall be shown on the drawings.
a. Contractor shall provide a detailed engineering package for the array
including drawings, supporting calculations and related documentation.
Contractor shall submit the drawing package to the Engineer for approval.
b. Contractor shall furnish revised "as-built" drawings after completion of the
project.
c. Contractor shall furnish operation and maintenance (O&M) manuals for
the system.
d. Manuals shall be submitted at least one month prior to the project
completion for review and approval by the Engineer.

e. Contractor shall furnish and execute a detailed commissioning/quality
assurance plan for the project.
C. Engineering Design Package

1. Contractor shall develop a comprehensive design package. Drawing package
shall consist of the following drawings at a minimum:
a. Coversheet
b. Site plan
c. Symbols, abbreviations and notes
d. Mounting layouts & details
e. Structural details and elevations (As applicable)
f. Array layout with shading diagrams
g. Single-line DC / AC electrical diagrams
h. DC / AC cable routing layouts
i. Inverter arrangements and installation details
j. Grounding diagrams and details
2. Design Calculations package to include at minimum:
a. Design calculation for plant peak capacity and annual generation using
internationally approved software (such as; PV Syst,etc).
b. Structural and wind load calculations for PV Plant mounting solutions
proposed.
c. DC, AC voltage drop and sizing calculations.
d. Ground wiring calculations
3. Contractor shall furnish packages for review
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals

1. Furnish O&M manuals including the following information:
a. Manufacturer's O&M data for each component
b. System narrative description of operation
c. Warranty information with contact information
d. As-built drawings
e. Safe system operation information
f. Spare parts list
g. Testing & Commissioning test sheets
h. Final Solar Photovoltaic plant thermography report.
E. Testing and Commissioning Plan

1. Contractor shall develop and submit a detailed written testing and
commissioning plan that will consist of the following:
a. System installation checks.
b. System functional checks including all operational and safety checks.
c. Comprehensive performance test to verify system capacity has been
achieved.
d. Solar Photovoltaic Thermography procedure.
F. Photovoltaic array design criteria

1. General
a. Evaluate the peak kW generating capacity and the annual energy
generation of the proposed system (per installed unit).
b. Design of the Solar PV should maximize available area utilization to meet
system design peak capacity.
c. Design should achieve a minimum of 1600 kWh/kWp specific yield.
d. The solar arrays shall be rooftop.
e. System must fit within the area identified for the system.
f. Contractor must provide detailed solar simulation and yield analysis.
g. Solar PV warranties shall be as stated under Clause 3.03 of this
specification.
2. Array Layout
a. Array shall be located at the designated roof area. Contractor shall furnish
"PVSyst" energy simulation report using licensed package.
b. Array layout shall account for obstructions, access to equipment, egress
and safety perimeter clearances. Walking space shall be provided
throughout the PV array to facilitate installation, inspection and
maintenance access to all modules.
c. Array shall be designed to minimize shading of the solar modules. System
shall be designed so that shading will not occur between 9:00 am and
3:00 pm on winter solstice (shortest day of the year). Contractor shall
perform a detailed shading assessment, which will be required in their
design package submittal.
d. The array shall be mounted in such a way that the normal drainage of the
roof is not affected.
e. Array shall be designed to minimize fragmented layout to minimize cabling
voltage drop.
3. System Design Criteria
a. Climatic Conditions:
Climate conditions shall following conditions stated in MEW R6 & R7 latest
revisions.
b. Electrical Supply:
1) Voltage (3 phase 4 wire): 415V + 10% or - 6%
2) Voltage (single phase): 240V + 10% or -6%
3) Frequency: 50 Hz + or - 4%
4) Neutral: Solidly earthed
5) Fault level: 31MVA at 415 V
6) Fault operation: 0. 5s
Note: The tenderer shall submit along with the tender, catalogues, to prove that
the equipment rating of volts and frequency are as specified.
4. Contractor is responsible for any structural modifications necessary to support
the system.
5. Both of PV Panels and String Inverters shall be selected according to applicable
MEW Approved Vendor List.
G. Mounting System Details

1. Materials of construction shall be long-lasting with a service life of 20years or
greater. System shall be fabricated with corrosion resistant materials such as
aluminum, stainless steel or galvanized steel.
2. The System mounting structures, including the panels/modules, hardware and
attachments, shall be designed to withstand wind loads for the area. The solar
arrays shall maintain the structural integrity of basin covers and other related
systems.
3. Arrays shall be mounted at a South or South-facing angle that is as close to the
site's latitude as is reasonably possible.
4. Array mounting hardware shall be specific for the type of PV panels/modules
supplied.
5. Mounting rails, clips, legs, and other support components shall be 6105-T5
aluminum. All hardware shall be stainless steel.
6. The use of non-plated ferrous metals and any wood components for support
structures shall not be permitted.

7. Array spacing between individual modules/panels shall be kept to a minimum.
All mechanical hardware, conduit, junction boxes and other equipment shall be
concealed beneath or behind the support structures to provide a neat
appearance.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. The contractor shall submit drawings and specifications for approval before
commencement of works. Submittals should be in strict accordance with contract
requirements and as follows:
B. Product Data: contractor shall include data on features, components, ratings and
performance, which shall include but not be limited to a dimensioned outline plan and
elevation drawings of photovoltaic arrays and other specified components; the
physical and electrical characteristics of the individual solar panels, including
manufacturer name and model number; and the time-current characteristic curves for
protective devices.
C. Shop Drawings: contractor shall indicate fabrication details, installation details,

dimensions, weights, required clearances, means and methods of field assembly,
D. Field Test and Observation Reports: contractor shall indicate and interpret test results
and inspection records relative to compliance with performance requirements.
1.05 SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
A. This Section includes the photovoltaic equipment, including but not limited to the
following equipment and accessories:
1. Solar PV Modules
2. Solar Power Inverters
3. Mounting Systems and necessary hardware
4. Solar Cables and accessories
5. DC Junction boxes, combiner boxes (if any)
6. AC Combiners / DBs: Refer to relevant section(s) under Division 26
7. Protections and Disconnection devices: Refer to relevant section(s) under
Division 26
8. AC Cables: Refer to relevant section(s) under Division 26
9. Grounding System: Refer to relevant section(s) under Division 26
10. Electrical Containments: Refer to relevant section(s) under Division 26
11. Plant monitoring, graphical display system and off-site data transmission
system as required by the Project Owner.
12. Solar PV metering and protection panels for connection with building grid as
per MEW requirements (including metering, protection provisions). Refer to
Section 26 2413 - Switchboards
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cables and connecting materials

until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating
and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels
during the remainder of the construction period.
A. Refer to section “Environmental Conditions” in Division 28 0500 - Common work

results for electronic safety and security.
1.08 DELEGATED DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PHOTOVOLTAIC PANELS/MODULES
A. General Requirements for Solar PV Modules

1. Latest technology of Crystalline modules shall be used. The peak power rating
of the selected module in Wp has to be specified by the Solar PV Contractor.
Only +ve tolerance and PID free modules to be used in case of crystalline
modules. The Solar PV Contractor shall specify the module efficiency in terms
of percentage at standard test conditions (Peak Power, Wp). It shall be made
of high transmissivity glass and the front surface shall give high encapsulation
gain.
2. All materials used should have a proven history of reliability and stable
operation in external applications. It shall perform satisfactorily in relative
humidity up to 95% with temperatures ranging between -40° C and +85° C and
shall withstand gusts of up to 140 km/h on the surface of the module. Each and
every Solar PV module shall be checked for conformity with the relevant
standard and no negative tolerance shall be accepted with a factory acceptance
test (FAT) certificate.
B. Contractor must furnish a coordinated assembly of compatible components,

quantities, sizes, and ratings, as well as drawings.
C. A number of solar modules shall be connected in series and parallel to form a solar
array to give the required parameters.
1. Solar PV module conversion efficiency should be greater than 20% for
crystalline with solder free cells.
2. Each solar module shall be from latest production in the latest 2 years max. of
Contract award and have special manufacturer's warranties as indicated herein
under clause 3.03.
D. Only Grade-A Cell type is accepted.
E. The module shall have a back film to increase weather resistance and to aid light
absorption.

F. The solar module's glass shall be treated to improve transmission of Light and to
protect module against heat.
G. Maximum benchmark for Solar PV Module negative temperature coefficients (Pmax)

shall be:
1. Crystalline Modules: -0.42%/K
2. Max. NOCT +45Oc ±2Oc
H. For Framed Solar PV modules; the module own frame shall be supplied with holes or
slides for mechanical attachments/grounding and be made of anodized aluminum
alloy.
I. Electrical connection shall be made on a sturdy terminal bloc with min. IP67 junction
box in which at least three (3) by-pass diodes shall be incorporated to prevent hot
spots.
J. For Crystalline Modules: High-performance modules with crystalline, Four (4) bus-bar
cell technology minimum.
K. The electrical characteristics of the solar modules shall be stated with the solar
parameters and be listed on a non-removable sticker on the back side of the solar
module.
L. Solar PV Modules shall be manufactured in a facility with Automated Inline 100% EL

testing.
M. Solar PV modules shall demonstrate high performance at low irradiance conditions,

with average relative efficiency of 96.0% (or higher) from an irradiance of 1000 W/m2
to 200 W/m2 (AM 1.5, 25°C).
N. Site and panel temperatures shall be taken into account for the performance of the
solar modules.
O. The PV panels/modules shall be framed flat-plate crystalline technology.
P. The PV panels/modules shall meet or exceed the quality assurance and testing
requirements as applicable to standards listed under clause 1.02. The manufacturer
should be certified and registered to ISO 9001 and ISO 14001.
Q. The PV panel/module's electrical characteristics, including current voltage curves,

temperature coefficients of module power, voltage, and current shall be provided with
the panel/modules.
R. Power Tolerance of each module shall be within +3% of the rated power at Standard
Test Conditions which is Irradiance = 1000w/m2 cell temperature = 25 °C. Only +ve
tolerance modules shall be accepted.
S. Open Circuit Voltage (Voc) shall be within 10% of data sheet at Standard Test
Conditions. i) Module Power shall not be diminished more than 0.5% per degree C
above25-degreeC under full sun conditions.
2.02 PANEL/ MODULE MOUNTING SYSTEM & ACCESSORIES
A. General Requirements for Panel / Module Mounting System & Accessories

1. Mounting system is used for mounting solar modules on car / equipment sheds,
in open areas, on flat or inclined roof and / or on building façade; as per Project
Design. Mounting solution shall be universal in nature and shall enable the
installer to mount any module in practically any mounting situation.
2. The mounting structures shall be designed to sustain wind loading of up to 140
km/h. Other load factors have to be evaluated as per Site Conditions. It shall
also withstand the harsh environmental conditions prevailing in Kuwait.
3. The entire structure, including the array, shall be properly earthed; with
approved redundant paths.
4. The array structure should be designed in such a way that it occupies minimum
space without sacrificing the output from the PV Plant at the same time.
5. The structure shall be designed for easy replacement of any module.
6. Arrays azimuth and tilt shall be optimized as per site conditions and constraints
in order to achieve the minimum annual yield and STC peak capacity of the
plant as indicated herein.
Row spacing shall taking into considerations the potential shading from other
rows as well as the aerodynamic performance of the whole array.
8. Array mounting hardware shall be compatible with the type of Solar PV modules
supplied.
9. Exposed fasteners and sharp edges shall be minimized to prevent potential
injuries and/or damage to the PV modules and support structure.
All mechanical hardware, conduit, junction boxes and other equipment shall be
concealed beneath or behind the support structures to provide a neat
appearance.
11. The System layout shall provide adequate access for troubleshooting,
maintenance and ventilation.
12. Roof-mounted mounting system shall be designed in a way that does not
obstruct roof drainage.
13. Contractor shall provide the PV mounting structure to cater to the wind loading
as recommended by MEW and as recommended by international codes.
B. Quality Assurance
1. The system needs to be durable with special manufacturer's warranties as
indicated elsewhere in this section or other contract documents. The products
shall be long-lasting and highly resistant to corrosion forms inhibited by local
site conditions with a service life of 25 years or greater.
2. The mounting structure should be aesthetically acceptable.
3. Quality assurance & Environmental / HSE management shall be carried out by
the Manufacturer pursuant to DIN EN ISO 9001, ISO 14001 and OHSAS 18001
or other equivalent International Standards.
4. Solar Mounting systems from China origin are ONLY acceptable from
Manufacturers with proven track record worldwide and with existing Solar PV
installations in Kuwait, having In-house engineering and R&D facility, complying
with all technical specifications for mounting systems and listed in globally
recognized Stock Exchange. Proof MUST be submitted for project approvals in
Kuwait.
C. The contractor shall provide all hardware required for assembling the System and
attaching the System to the mounting structure.
D. The mounting system shall be suitable for commercial solar installations and shall be
manufactured by a specialist mounting company with at least 5 years' experience in
manufacturing and delivering solar racking and mounting systems. The Manufacturing
facility shall have ISO 9001, ISO 14001 and OHSAS 18001 certifications at minimum.
E. The mounting structure shall comply with the following Standards (as applicable); ISO
657, GB50009, JIS-G3192. Anodized Aluminum sections or profiles / accessories
(6005-T5 or 6105-TF Aluminum Alloy) with minimum anodic oxide film mean thickness
of 10 microns or better; may be used for the structure subject to compliance with the
following Standard JISC8955 or Equivalent.
F. Hot dipped galvanized sections of steel shall comply with the following Standards: BS
EN ISO 1461, ASTM A-123 or GBT13912. At all cases; the minimum mean coating
thickness of the galvanizing shall not be less than 85 microns for steel section
thickness upto 6.3mm, for steel section thickness 6.4mm the minimum mean coating
thickness shall not be less than 100 microns.
G. System shall be fabricated with corrosion resistant materials such as aluminum or hot-
dipped galvanized steel. Stainless steel fasteners with minimum SAE 304 grade; or
better; must be used.
H. The roof mounting system shall be a non-penetrating system and shall maintain the
structural integrity of roofs, basin covers and other related systems. Provide material
compatible with roof construction between mounting elements and roof surface, unless
specifically allowed by roofing manufacturer.
I. Ballast blocks (as applicable) shall be composed of fiberglass reinforced concrete or

heavy weight concrete blocks to sustain loads and insure long life. Other alternative
"Non-penetrative" methods can be accepted; subject to proving of structural / wind
load bearing capacity of the solution over the lifetime of the system.
J. The use of non-plated ferrous metals and any wood components for support structures
K. PV Module Standards:
1. IEC 61215 " Silicon terrestrial photovoltaic (PV) modules -Design qualification
and type approval".
2. IEC 61646 "Thin-film terrestrial photovoltaic (PV) modules - Design qualification
and type approval".
3. IEC 61730-1 "Photovoltaic (PV) module safety qualification - Part 1:
Requirements for construction".
4. IEC 61730-2 "Photovoltaic (PV) module safety qualification - Part 2:
Requirements for testing"
5. IEC/TS 62804-1: "Photovoltaic (PV) modules-test methods for the detection of
potential-inducted degradation - Part 1: Crystalline silicon".
6. UL 1703 "Standard for Flat-Plate Photovoltaic Modules and Panels".
7. IEC 61701 "Salt mist corrosion testing of photovoltaic (PV) Modules".
8. IEC 61345 "UV test for photovoltaic (PV) modules".
9. IEC 62716 "Photovoltaic (PV) modules - Ammonia corrosion testing".
10. IEC 61853-1 "Photovoltaic (PV) module performance testing and energy rating
- Part 1: Irradiance and temperature performance measurements and power
rating".
11. EN 50380 "Datasheet and nameplate information for photovoltaic modules".
12. EN 50548 "Junction boxes for photovoltaic modules".
13. IEC 60068-2-68 "Environmental testing - Part 2-68: Tests - Test L: Dust and
sand".

14. IEC 61829 "Crystalline silicon photovoltaic (PV) array - Onsite measurement of
I-V characteristics".
15. IEC 62446-1: "PV System test and commissioning".
16. ENA Standard G59/2.
17. BS 7430: "Code of practice for protective earthing od electrical installation".
18. Other components where not specified shall comply with the relevant IEC/Local
applicable standards.
L. PV Mounting Structure System Standards:

1. UL 2703 "Outline of Investigation for Mounting Systems, Mounting Devices,
Clamping/Retention Devices, and Ground Lugs for Use with Flat- Plate
Photovoltaic Modules and Panels".
2. UL 790 "Standard for Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings".
3. UL 1897 "Standard for Uplift Tests for Roof Covering Systems".
2.03 SOLAR INVERTERS
A. General Description:
1. Multiple solar inverters (String or Central) shall be utilized to invert DC power
from the photovoltaic modules into AC power for interconnection to the grid.
The chosen solar inverters shall have a wide input voltage range up to 1000V
DC and their AC output shall be compatible with the local grid at 3-phase rated
at 415V, 50Hz
2. Solar inverters shall be sourced from a single reliable supplier with products
that are compliant to international testing standards as included under clause
1.02 herein.
3. The Solar PV Contractor shall source grid tied inverters from a manufacturer
that has set up an office or maintenance service center in any of the GCC
countries.
4. The building electrical interconnection point shall be provided to the Solar PV
Contractor via a circuit breaker in an MLTB/ MSB panel that is capable of
handling the current generated by the photovoltaic system. The Solar PV
Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the required size of the circuit
breaker at the MLTP/ MSB with the appointed Electrical Contractor.
B. The DC power produced is fed to inverter for conversion into AC. In an On-grid system
AC power is fed to the Building grid at 415V three phases. Power generated from the
solar system during the daytime is utilized fully by powering the building loads from
MLTP/MSB.
C. Solar Inverters (String / Central) shall meet the following specifications as a minimum:
1. Integrated microprocessor based MPPT (More than single MPPT Input is
preferable)
2. Maximum efficiency of > 97.5% for string inverters and > 98% for central
inverters
3. European efficiency of > 97%
4. Total harmonic Distortion (THD) < 3%
5. Accessible DC disconnect switch to isolate the PV array from the inverter
6. Equipped with Ethernet communication or communication bus with equivalent
data transmission speed built into the inverter
7. SunSpec TCP communication

8. Equipped with (high quality & well-known brand) surge protection devices on
the DC side
9. Ambient temperature Operating Range: -25C to 60C.
10. Max. Relative Humidity (Non-Condensing): >95%
11. Protection rating: IP 65 (Outdoor type), IP 21 (Indoor type)
12. Single NEMA311 - gauge welded steel enclosure housing all system
components (i.e.AC/DC disconnects, isolation transformer, logic controls etc.).
Enclosure shall have a continuous rating of 50 degrees Celsius and produce
low audible noise (less than 8dB).
13. Load loss <1% of rated power and maximum loss in sleep mode shall be less
than 0.05%.
14. Unit wise & integrated data logging.
15. Power regulation in the event of thermal overloading.
16. Set point pre-selection for VAR control.
17. Solar inverters shall be equipped with a grid monitoring safety function which is
permanently activated after the inverters have been connected to the grid. This
function continuously monitors if the effective value of the grid voltage exceeds
or falls below the set parameter limit values. In addition, the grid frequency is
monitored in terms of the set parameter limit values during operation. The
inverters will synchronize their voltage and frequency outputs with the grid
parameters. If the value exceeds or falls below the limits, the line contactor and
the inverter bridge are immediately disconnected. The inverter change to the
failure-operating mode and the grid failure is signalized. The inverter will not
restart until the grid voltage is within the permitted limits. This feature makes
certain that the inverters remain turned off during maintenance at the grid in
order to ensure the safety of the personnel.
18. The inverter output shall be 415V Three-phase.
19. The Inverter shall be compatible with Module-level and/or string-level power
optimizer.
20. The inverter shall have nominal power factor greater than 0.99 at all times
21. The inverter shall stand ambient temperature of 45 degrees C.
D. The inverter shall be provided with following protections as minimum:

1. DC reverse polarity protection
2. AC short circuit protection
3. Ground fault detection, monitoring & protection.
4. Grid monitoring and anti-islanding
5. AC Over/Under Voltage
6. AC Over/Under frequency
7. Sync loss
8. Over temperature
9. AC and DC over current protection.
10. DC over-voltage
11. Cooling fan failure
12. Voltage surges.
13. DC Disconnect integral to inverter assembly.
E. The inverter shall be provided with Liquid Crystal display (LCD) to provide
instantaneous information for the following as minimum:
1. Power level
2. Daily and life time energy production
3. PV array voltage and current
4. Utility voltage and frequency
5. Time or line fault message.
F. The inverter shall be manufactured not earlier than (1) One year from Project
Enterprise Date or latest. The Inverters shall be furnished with special Manufacturer's
warranties as indicated elsewhere herein.
G. Contractor shall be responsible for identifying the existing service and applicable
inverter current source type suitable.
H. A DC disconnecting means shall be provided integral to each inverter rated at

1000VDC.
I. PV Solar Inverter standards:

1. IEC 62109-1 "Safety of power converters for use in photovoltaic power systems
- Part 1: General Requirements".
2. IEC 62109-2 "Safety of power converters for use in photovoltaic power systems
- Part 2: Particular requirements for inverters".
3. UL 1741 "Standard for Inverters, Converters, Controllers and Interconnection
System Equipment for Use with Distributed Energy Resources".
4. EN 50530 "Overall efficiency of grid connected photovoltaic inverters".
5. EN 50524 "Data sheet and name plate for photovoltaic inverters This European
Standard describes data sheet and name plate information for photovoltaic
inverters in grid parallel operation".
6. IEC 62116 "Utility-interconnected photovoltaic inverters - Test procedure of
islanding prevention measures".
2.04 DC CABLING
A. Rate DC cables for the maximum voltage and current of the PV array. Ensure account
is taken of the system voltage/currents of the series/parallel connected modules
making up the array. Include maximum output of the individual modules.
B. Select cables to withstand the environmental, voltage and current conditions at which
they may be expected to operate. Ensure the heating effects of current and solar gain
are considered.
C. The cable shall be two-layer construction with a low smoke halogen-free, flame
retardant and sunlight resistant cross-linked compound outer layer and halogen-free
thermoset polyolefin inner layer.
1. Suitable for continuous operating temperature of 90ºC Wet or Dry.
2. UL listed / TUV tested as Sunlight resistant.
3. Excellent UV and Ozone resistant
4. Suitable for wet, damp and humid locations.
5. Specially designed for excellent flexibility.
6. Compatible with all major connectors.
7. Cold bend and impact: -10º to +90ºC.
8. Applicable Listing:
a. TUV Certification 2 Pfg 1169/08.2007
b. TUV listed as PV1-F, 1000V (60038697)
c. UL listed as Type USE-2 or RHW-2: 600V (E76090)
d. 90ºC temperature rating: Temperature index in excess of 120ºC
e. RoHS Compliant.
D. Standards for cables and connectors for PV solar applications:

1. EN 50618 "Electric cables for photovoltaic systems".
2. EN 50521 "Connectors for photovoltaic systems - Safety requirements and
tests".
3. UL 6703 "Outline of Investigation for Connectors for Use in Photovoltaic
Systems".
4. UL 6703A "Outline of Investigation for Multi-Pole Connectors for Use in
Photovoltaic Systems".
5. CEI 20-91 "Fire retardant and halogen free electric cable with elastomeric
insulation and sheath for rated voltages not exceeding 1 000 V AV and 1 500
V DC for use in photovoltaic system (PV)".
6. AK 411.2.3 "Requirements for cables for PV systems".
7. 2 Pfg 1169 / 08.2007 "Requirements for cables for use in photovoltaic systems".
8. UL 854 "Standard for Service-Entrance Cables".
9. 2 Pfg 1940 / 11.12 "Requirements for cables for use on AC applications in
renewable energy systems".
10. UL 4703 "Outline of Investigation for Photovoltaic Wire".
2.05 DC ACCESSORIES: PLUG / SOCKET CONNECTORS (MC4 CONNECTOR OR

EQUIVALENT)
A. Rate DC cables for the maximum voltage and current of the PV array. Ensure account
is taken of the system voltage/currents of the series/parallel connected module making
up the array. Include maximum output of the individual modules.
B. Utilize plug and sockets to connect string and main dc cables.
C. Ensure connectors are dc rated.
D. Ensure connectors have the same or greater voltage and current ratings as the
string/dc main cable to which they are fitted.
E. Provide each plug and socket connector with an outdoor label bearing the wording:
'Do not disconnect DC plugs and sockets under load - turn off DC supply first'
F. Ensure labeling is clear, legible, and located so as to be easily visible, and durably
constructed and affixed to last.
G. Do not use connectors as the means for dc electrical isolation.
H. DC connectors should be dual qualified by TÜV and UL
I. Simple snap-lock mating mechanism
J. Internal locking mechanism protected by latch guards; requires a tool to unlock.
K. Touch-proof safety design
L. Minimum IP65 (IP 67 recommended) sealing protection against dust and water;
resistant to UV and ozone damage.
M. Contact resistance < 0.5mW
N. Connectors to guarantee Strain relief cable connections

O. NFPA 70 compliant (or equivalent European IEC standards)
P. Accommodate 2.5mm2 and 4 to 6mm2 (14 and 12 to 10 AWG) solar cable.
2.06 DC ISOLATORS
A. Provide a main DC isolation switch for each PV array, located as near as practically
possible to the inverter input unless provided already within the String Inverter or within
the MCB for the Central Inverters.
B. DC disconnecting switches shall be provided to isolate DC input circuits from the
C. inverters for inverter maintenance. Switches shall be installed near the inverter
locations and shall be clearly marked to indicate array number and inverter served.
D. Switches shall be suitable for DC safety switch applications in NEMA 1 enclosures for
indoor use and NEMA 3 enclosures for outdoor use.
E. Ensure that the switches are:

1. Fully comply with IEC 60947-3
2. double pole
3. rated for DC operation
4. load-break rated for system voltage and current maximum values
5. securable in the 'Off' position only
6. clearly show 'On' and 'Off' positions
7. clearly labeled as: 'PV System - Main DC Isolator'
8. clearly labeled 'DANGER, terminals may be live at any time'
F. Labels must be clear, easily visible and constructed so as to remain legible and in
place for the design lifespan of the system.
G. DC isolation methods and locations should enable the open circuit voltage Voc and
the short circuit current Isc to be safely measured.
2.07 SOLAR PV MODULES CLEANING MECHANISM
A. The Solar PV Contractor is fully responsible to develop a practical cleaning system
B. Solar PV Contractor can propose any practical cleaning / washing arrangements,

subject to the following:
1. Achieving considerable water savings.
2. Demonstration of cleaning efficiency.
3. Safe operation of the proposed arrangement; that do not cause damage to any
plant component (specially, PV Modules) or un-safe conditions of operation.
4. Demonstration of effective O&M preventive maintenance / cleaning schedules.
5. Technical Submittal of complete system components, cleaning supplies & tools
and detailed planning data of proposed resources (including cleaning
personnel) and tools during the lifetime of the project.
6. Estimated life cycle cost savings of proposed arrangement.

2.08 SOLAR PLANT MONITORING & GRAPHICAL DISPLAY SYSTEM
A. Solar PV Monitoring system shall be provided complete with all necessary hardware,
data-logger and software. The system should be capable of providing real-time
monitor and transmit (locally or remotely, as per Client's approval) the plant
performance data remotely and any 3rd party graphical display system as specified
hereunder. The minimum plant performance data shall include (but not limited to) the
following:
1. Performance Ratio - (Day, Week, Month and Year)
2. Energy Generation - (Day, Week, Month and Year)
3. Ambient Temperature - (Day, Week, Month and Year)
4. Module Temperature - (Day, Week, Month and Year)
5. Ambient temperature - Day, Week, Month and Year
6. Relative Humidity- (Day, Week, Month and Year)
7. Global Horizontal Irradiance - (Day, Week, Month and Year)
8. Irradiance on Collector Plane - (Day, Week, Month and Year)
B. High Quality Weather monitoring station needs to install in the plant near arrays in an
approved location by The Client with all necessary supporting hardware; from an
approved / reputable make. The station shall be robust, stand alone and low
maintenance installation to monitor the following at minimum:
1. Global Horizontal Irradiance
2. Collector plane Irradiance - Reference cell (or equivalent approved means)
3. Ambient temperature
4. Module temperature
5. Relative humidity
C. Solar PV Plant shall be furnished with Professional graphical Display system suitable
for Indoor installation. The system shall be complete with all display, built-in control
computer, adjustable mounting and cables/accessories hardware. The System
display should support IPS technology and LED for LCD Backlight technology with
minimum resolution of 1080p (Full HD). The system should have a minimum service
life of 30,000 Hours and should support animations and video files via all types of
interfaces including HDMI, DVI, VGA (HD-15), RJ 45 Ethernet (LAN), and WiFi. The
system should be furnished with adequate number of speaker output ports (min. 2)
and USB ports (min. 2) and shall be furnished with hand-held Remote Control. The
system should be "Energy Star" Qualified and to have Online Management
functionality with Individual Content & design capabilities and dynamic customizable
content according to user requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. System Installation shall conform to Manufacturers Installation Manual and approved

project drawings and specifications.
B. Installing contractor and subcontractors shall receive manufacturer authorized training

prior to commencing operations and provide proof of such authorized training to
Owners staff prior to commencing operations. The contractor shall ensure installing
subcontractors are familiar with manufacturer's installation guidelines.

C. Tie in point to the facilities electrical distribution system shall be selected to maximize
systems performance. Signage shall be applied in accordance the local regulations.
D. All required over-current protection devices shall be included in the system and
accessible for maintenance. Each shall have trip ratings no greater than the de-rated
amperage of the conductor it protects.
E. All mounting equipment shall be installed to the manufacturer's specifications.
F. Installation should be organized and neat. Module connections and wiring should be
neatly prepared and easily accessed by service persons.
G. All cables, conduit, exposed conductors, and electrical boxes should be secured and
supported according to code requirements.
H. System switching equipment shall have convenient access for resetting or repair
during electrical outages.
I. Site shall be maintained and kept secure, free of excessive debris and in safe condition
during the construction period.
J. Special attention shall be paid to minimizing the risk from exposed fasteners, sharp
edges, and potential damage to the modules or support structures. Corrosion
resistance and durability of the mechanical hardware shall be emphasized - the use
of stainless-steel fasteners and aluminum support structures are required. The use of
ferrous metals, wood, or plastic components is not acceptable.
3.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS
A. Deliver PV modules and system components to their final locations in protective

wrappings, containers, and other protection that will exclude dirt and moisture and
prevent damage from construction operations. Remove protection only after
equipment is safe from such hazards.
B. Modules may be delivered in containers that can be easily supported by the roof.
Contractor shall insure proper placement of point loads on the roof for equipment
staging and installation.
C. Contractor shall maintain the integrity of the roof surface during delivery, handling and
installation, including laying out mats, insulation/plywood layers, etc. Any damage to
the roof surface shall be identified and repaired by the contractor.
D. Each module shall be visually inspected for defects by the contractor and the Engineer
E. PV modules shall be free of dirt and construction debris prior to system start up
procedures.
3.03 WARRANTIES AND SERVICE
A. The Solar PV Contractor should also provide a warranty covering the complete PV
Plant; including mechanical structure, total electrical system of solar power plants;
against any manufacturing / design / installation defects for a period of Five (5) years.

B. The methods for implementing the Terms and Conditions of the warranty must be
clearly established and handled by the contractor throughout the term of the warranty
period.
C. Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights
Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in
addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by contractor under
requirements of the Contract Documents.
D. The warranty period will start from the date of successful Acceptance of the PV plant.
E. In Addition to the above system warranty; the following product warranties shall be
provided as indicated below:
F. PV Modules
1. The Contractor shall submit a written warranty signed by the manufacturer
agreeing to repair, restore or replace any defective equipment specified during
the warranty period. Manufacturer's materials and workmanship warranties
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Faulty operation of PV modules.
b. Defects in design, material, workmanship or manufacture that materially
impede their functioning
c. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of delivery.
2. Manufacturer's Special Minimum Power Output Warranty: Manufacturer agrees
to repair or replace components of PV modules that fail to exhibit the minimum
power output within specified warranty period. Special warranty, applying to
modules only, applies to materials only, on a prorated basis, for period
specified. Manufacturer's minimum power output warranties include, but are not
limited to, the following warranty periods, from date of delivery:
a. Power output warranty: minimum for 25 years from the date of taking over
certificate. Guaranteed power output performance shall ensure:
1) First year: degradation in power performance of the PV modules
does not exceed 1.5% of nominal rated power value at Standards
Test Condition (STC) as minimum.
2) The PV modules power degradation should be linear with a final
derating after 25Years by 80% of the nominal power rating at STC
as minimum.
3) PV String Combiner: 5 years from the date of taking over certificate.
Supplier must give an extendable warranty option. Proceeding shall
be at Employer discretion.
4) PV plant controller and monitoring equipment: 5years from the date
of taking over certificate. Supplier must give an extendable warranty
option. Proceeding shall be at Employer discretion.
5) Other equipment/system equipment: All other
equipment/components inside the PV solar system shall be provided
with two years' warranty from the date of taking over certificate.
G. Inverters
1. Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
components of inverters that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period. Manufacturer's materials and workmanship warranties include,
but are not limited to, the following:
a. Faulty operation of inverters

b. Defects in design, material, workmanship or manufacture that materially
impede their functioning
c. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Delivery.
H. Mounting Structure
1. Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
components of the mounting structure that fail in materials or workmanship
a. Manufacturer's materials and workmanship warranties include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1) Faulty operation of PV modules.
2) Defects in design, material, workmanship or manufacture that
materially impede their functioning
3) Warranty Period: 10 years from date of purchase.
I. Service
1. Qualifications
a. Contractor shall be locally based and have in-house first response
technicians certified by panel and inverter manufacturer. Contractor shall
demonstrate locally based service capabilities on the Project Team
Organization Chart.
b. During the contractual maintenance period, contractor shall conduct, and
document all recommended preventative maintenance. Preventative
maintenance shall include the following and be performed no less than
annually by direct qualified employees of the contractor:
1) Visual and mechanical inspection of all equipment
2) Random checking of mounting system operation
3) Verification of electrical dc continuity via ammeter readings
4) Inspection and replacement of all fuses.
5) A Preventative Maintenance plan shall be submitted to the Engineer
for review and approval prior to being included as part of the O&M
Manual.
3.04 ON-SITE SUPPLY OF SPARE MATERIALS
A. The contractor shall leave a supply of System materials on-site that match the products
that are installed in the System as follows:
1. PV Modules. 1% of used PV Module.
2. (1) Spare inverter from each model used (or main spare parts for the central
inverter).
3. DC Disconnect Switches. (1) for each model used in the System.
3.05 INTEGRATION AND WEB TECHNOLOGY.
A. The Solar System monitoring & recording controller must a use standard
communication protocols with public IP to insure full integration and live data
accessibility between project Solar System and existing Solar System at MEW HQ.
B. The Solar System monitoring & recording controller should provide extension module
and gateway web access permissions for Third Party controller at MEW Head Quarter
which operates with BACnet/IP communications for full communication and
integration.

C. Full database integration between system database and MEW HQ Oracle /SQL
database for live data uploading to MEW power server. The project database has to
be linked to MEW power server database with customized data points.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 3110
SOLAR ENERGY ELECTRICAL POWER GENERATION TESTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Specification IEC 62446 Grid Connected Photovoltaic systems - Minimum

Requirements for system documentation, commissioning tests and inspection
1.02 SUMMARY
1. Testing and commissioning.
2. Cold Commissioning.
3. Hot Commissioning.
4. Earthing.
5. Cables.
6. Electrical Equipment
7. Switchboards
8. Calibration.
9. Commissioning process documents.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 26 2413 - Switchboards
2. Section 26 0519 - Low Voltage Electrical Cables
3. Section 26 0526 - Earthing And Bonding For Electrical Systems
4. Section 26 3100 - Solar Photovoltaic System
5. Section 26 4113 - Lightning Protection for Structures
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. DC: Direct Current.
B. kV: Kilovolts
C. CT's: Current Transformers
1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Product Schedule: Indicate type, use, location, and termination locations.

KEO/19-3262-0000 26 3110 /1 Solar Energy Electrical Power Generation Testing
C. Switchgear to be tested and test results submitted according to protection grading
study and manufacturer requirements.
D. Complete Testing & Commissioning Plan
1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control reports from construction period.
B. Commissioning process documents.
C. Commissioning test results.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS – Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
A. All testing and commissioning to be executed in compliance with IEC 62446 Grid
Connected Photovoltaic systems - Minimum Requirements for system documentation,
commissioning tests and inspection.
B. All testing and commissioning to be executed in compliance with the Ministry of

Electricity and Water & Renewable Energy (MEW) "Conditions for Connecting Solar
Power to MEW Grid". The Contractor to ensure most recent edition is consulted. No
commissioning may be conducted without the consultation and approval of the
Company and the MEW.
C. All materials, labour, instruments and tools required for carrying out of the tests will be
supplied by the contractor.
D. Test, inspect and operate all equipment, materials and components, whether the tests
are detailed in this specification or not.
E. Test reports to be submitted in a neat and legible format. The report should specify
the component or system being tested, the test date and the test results.
3.02 COLD COMMISSIONING
A. Mechanical Completion test shall be conducted to indicate that all equipment is

installed and connected as per manufacturers' requirements and the design, including
bolt torque, cable connectors, screws, fixings, ballasts, foundations, enclosures, etc.
B. All trial tests, adjustments, calibration and balancing as required shall be conducted
by the Contractor.
C. Ensure phasing and phase rotation on all three-phase cables are the same throughout
the system.
D. Ensure that all DC cables are connected in the correct polarity.

E. Ensure that all cables are tested as per Section 26 0519 - Low Voltage Electrical
Cables to ensure intact insulation, conductor integrity and cable termination integrity
by employing relevant local and international standards for cable testing, e.g. Very
Low Frequency testing for XPLE-insulated cables and pressure testing for all other
cables.
F. PV modules cold-commissioning to be completed in accordance with IEC 62466.
3.03 HOT COMMISSIONING
A. PV generation system hot-commissioning to be completed in accordance with IEC

62466.
B. Inverter hot-commissioning to be completed in accordance with Manufacturer's

specifications and requirements and in accordance with IEC 62466.
C. Circuit breaker hot-commissioning to be completed in accordance with local and

relevant international standards, and as per manufacturer's specifications.
D. Metering to be commissioned in accordance with Manufacturer's requirements and

MEW requirements (if required).
E. Electrical Power and Control systems (SCADA, et al) to be commissioning in

accordance with Manufacturer's specifications.
F. Weather sensors to be installed, connected and commissioning in accordance with

Manufacturer's requirements and specifications.
3.04 EARTHNG
A. Conduct earthing tests to confirm compliance with the system design and local
standards and as per Section 26 0526 - Earthing And Bonding For Electrical Systems.
3.05 CABLES
A. Conduct cable continuity test on all cables installed.
B. Conduct a cable insulation resistance test to confirm insulation between phases and
phase to ground with all circuits installed and connected.
C. Cable sheath test.
3.06 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
A. Metering CT's should be commissioned as per the manufacturer's instruction details
B. Circuit breakers should be commissioned as per the manufacturers' instruction details,

Section 26 2413 - Switchboards, international standards and local installation
standards.
C. Protection relays should be commissioned as per the manufacturers' instruction

details, Section 26 2413 - Switchboards, international standards and local installation
standards.
3.07 SWITCHBOARDS
A. Carry out complete tests as per manufacturer's instruction details and all routine tests.
B. The test procedure shall be as follows:

1. Visual inspection to check creepage distance and clearances.
2. Check all conductors and cables are checked for proper routing.
3. Check all devices for proper mounting
4. Check mechanical operation for all devices such as door handles, hinges etc.
5. Spot check connections of screws and bolts for adequate contact.
6. Check if panel complies with design.
7. Ensure all insulation resistance exceeds 10 mega ohms by means of a Megger
Test, up to and including terminals.
8. Conduct Flash test on all main circuits at 2.5 kV for one (1) minute. Record
leakage current
9. In order to ensure insulation resistance has not been affected by the dielectric
test, repeat Megger test.
10. Check operation of all circuit breakers switches, contactors, etc.
11. Conduct Primary injection tests of all relays, CT's and indicating and metering
instruments.
C. The below checks are to be completed before energizing switchboards:

1. Equipment to be operated through all the functions required in the design.
2. Measure insulation resistance of all the buses, phase to phase and phase to
ground, with breakers connected and contacts open.
3. Check insulation between control circuit and ground.
4. Visually inspect relays and protective devices to verify settings comply with
manufacturer's instructions and the coordination study.
5. Check CT's and relays for polarity of connections.
6. Check interlock logic and simulate the operations
7. Manually operate breakers and adjust the main contact alignment and wiping
action in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
8. Before closing tie breakers, check the phasing on each side.
3.08 CALIBRATION
A. All meters should be calibrated and sealed in the presence of the client and the utility's
representative and as per MEW requirements, if required.
3.09 COMMISSIONING PROCESS DOCUMENTS
A. Prepare commissioning reports to record the following:

1. Procedures used.
2. Results that comply with requirements.
3. Results that do not comply with requirements, and corrective action taken to
achieve compliance with requirements.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 3120
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF SOLAR ENERGY
ELECTRICAL POWER GENERATION EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Compared to most other power generating technologies, PV plants have low

maintenance and servicing requirements. However, proper maintenance of a PV plant
is essential to optimize energy yield and maximize the life of the system. Cleaning and
maintenance shall be performed in a manner that maximizes the system's efficiency
and yields the contractual generation values.
B. Maintenance can be broken down as follows:

1. Scheduled or preventative maintenance - Planned in advance and aimed at
preventing faults from occurring, as well as keeping the plant operating at its
optimum level.
2. Unscheduled maintenance - Carried out in response to failures. Suitably
thorough scheduled maintenance should minimize the requirement for
unscheduled maintenance although, inevitably some failures still occur. A
robust and well-planned approach to both scheduled and unscheduled
maintenance is important.
C. Scheduled/Preventative Maintenance
1. The scheduling and frequency of preventative maintenance is dictated by a
number of factors. These include the technology selected, environmental
conditions of the site, warranty terms and seasonal variances. The scheduled
maintenance is generally carried out at intervals planned in accordance with
the manufacturers' recommendations, and as required by the equipment
warranties. Scheduled maintenance should be conducted during early morning
or evening.
2. Specific scheduled maintenance tasks are covered in the following sections.
a. Module Cleaning
1) Module cleaning shall be carried out manually by contractor's
manpower as per predetermined cleaning schedule which approved
by the engineer and following to recommendations of the
manufacturer of PV modules system and also when there is need
for cleaning like after each sand storm. All safety precautions shall
be taken into consideration while cleaning.
b. Module Connection Integrity
1) Checking module connection integrity is important for systems that
do not have string level monitoring. This is more likely for central
inverter systems for which no string monitoring at the
junction/combiner boxes has been designed. In such cases, faults
within each string of modules may be difficult to detect. Therefore,
KEO/19-3262-0000 26 3120/1 Operation and Maintenance of Solar Energy
the connections between modules within each string should be
checked periodically (this may include measuring the string current).
c. Junction or String Combiner Box (If any)
1) All junction boxes or string combiner boxes should be checked
periodically for water ingress, dirt or dust accumulation and integrity
of the connections within the boxes. Loose connections could affect
the overall performance of the PV plants. Any accumulation of water,
dirt or dust could cause corrosion or short circuit within the junction
box. Where string level monitoring is not used, periodic checks on
the integrity of the fuses in the junction boxes, combiner boxes and
in some cases, the module connection box should be conducted.
d. Hot Spots
1) Potential faults across the PV plants can often be detected through
thermography. This technique helps identify weak and loose
connections in junction boxes and inverter connections. It can also
detect hot spots within inverter components and along strings of
modules that are not performing as expected. Thermography should
be conducted by a trained specialist using a thermo-graphic camera.
e. Inverter Servicing
1) Generally, inverter faults are the most common cause of system
downtime in PV power plants. Therefore, the scheduled
maintenance of inverters should be treated as a centrally important
part of the O&M strategy. The maintenance requirements of
inverters vary with size, type and manufacturer. The specific
requirements of any particular inverter should be confirmed by the
manufacturer and used as the basis for planning the maintenance
schedule.
2) The preventative maintenance for an inverter should, as a minimum,
include:
a) Visual inspections.
b) Cleaning/replacing cooling fan filters. Removal of dust from
electronic components. Tightening of any loose connections.
c) Any additional analysis and diagnostics recommended by the
manufacturer.
f. Structural Integrity
1) The module mounting assembly, cable conduits and any other
structures built for the PV plants should be checked periodically for
mechanical integrity and signs of corrosion.
2) This will include an inspection of support structure foundations for
evidence of erosion from water run-off.
g. Balance of Plants
1) The remaining systems within PV power plants, including the
monitoring and security system, auxiliary power supplies, and
communication systems should be checked and serviced regularly.
Communications systems within the PV power plants and to the
power plants should be checked for signal strength and connection.

D. Typical PV Power Plants Maintenance Schedule
Inspection
Inspection Actions required
No Frequency
A Solar Modules
Once in a
1 Dust deposition Cleaning of modules
month
Module Junction box
Replace the Module
2 malfunction, visual 1 Month
in case of failure.
inspection
Improper Module Cable Replace the Cables /
3 1 Month
Connectors Connectors
De-lamination,
4 discoloration Replace the Module 1 Month
leading to low output
5 Module Cracks Replace the module 1 Month
Solar Module Mounting Structure
Check Fasteners –
take remedial
measures in case of
B Inspection of Mounting issues.
3 Month
Structure and Hardware
Check lugs of
earthing conductors
for corrosion –
change as needed.
C SSM - String Monitoring Box
Check for Loose cable Tighten the
1 3 Months
Termination connection
2 Fuse Failed Replace Fuse 3 Months
Check the
3 Surge Suppression Device connections - 3 Months
Replace if it is failed
SSM - String Monitoring Box (Out Put) Technical Parameters
D measured at >800 W/m²
1 Open Circuit Voltage (Voc) 3 Months
2 Output Current 3 Months
E Inverter (Input) Technical Parameters
1 DC Voltage @ Connection Point 3 Months

Inspection
No Frequency
2 SSM Current @ Connection Point 3 Months
F Inverter
Tighten the
1 Loose cable Termination 6 months
connection
2 Dust Deposition Cleaning Monthly
3 Cleaning of Air Filters Cleaning Monthly
4 Performance monitoring Visual Daily
5 Data Logging Daily
6 Report preparation Monthly

G Inverter (Out Put) Technical Parameters
1 Output Voltage 3 Months
2 Current 3 Months
3 Frequency 3 Months
4 Output Power 3 Months
H LV Panel
Tighten the
1 Loose cable termination
connection
2 Schedule maintenance as indicated by LV Panel
3 Dust Deposition Cleaning Monthly
4 Performance monitoring Visual Daily
I LV Panel (Out Put) Technical Parameters
1 Voltage Monthly
2 Current Monthly
3 Frequency Monthly
J Power Optimizer
Check for loose cable Tighten the
1 3 months
connection connection.

Inspection
No Frequency
Power Optimizer Replace the Power
2 1 month
malfunction Optimizer
As recommended by
K Cleaning system 1 month
Manufacturer.
L Emergency Break down As and when
Report on availability
of spare parts as
M Spare parts 1 month
required for the plants
to run
Cleaning with soft
N Irradiance Meter cleaning Daily
cloth
O Cable (AC & DC) Visual inspection 1 month
P SCADA Data Monitoring Daily
E. All periodic maintenance & inspections shall be done as specified by the equipment
manufacturers.
F. Unscheduled Maintenance
1. Unscheduled maintenance is carried out in response to failures. As such, the
key parameter when considering unscheduled maintenance is diagnosis,
speed of response and repair time. Although the shortest possible response is
preferable for increasing energy yield, this should be balanced against the likely
increased contractual costs of shorter response times.
2. The agreed response time shall be within 12 hours.
3. The majority of unscheduled maintenance issues are related to the inverters.
This can be attributed to their complex internal electronics, which are under
constant operation.
4. Depending on the nature of the fault, it may be possible to rectify the failure
remotely - this option is clearly preferable if possible.
5. Other common unscheduled maintenance requirements include:
a. Tightening cable connections that have loosened.
b. Replacing blown fuses. Repairing lightning damage.
c. Repairing equipment damaged by intruders or during module cleaning.
Rectifying SCADA faults.
d. Repairing mounting structure faults.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS – Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION – Not Used
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 3213
ENGINE GENERATOR SET WITH FUEL DAY TANK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of standby
diesel fuelled generators with the following features:
1. Diesel Engine
2. Unit Mounted Cooling System
3. Unit Mounted Control and Monitoring
4. Fresh air intake and exhaust air systems
5. Fuel supply, day tank, pumping and filtering
6. Batteries & battery chargers.
7. Grounding (Earthing).

2. Division 26 Section 26 0519 “LV Electrical Cables”
3. Division 26 Section 26 0526 “Earthing and Bonding of Electrical Systems”
4. Division 26 Section 26 3600 “Transfer Switches”
5. Division 23 Section 23 1113 “Facility Fuel Oil Piping”
6. Division 23 Section 23 3113 “Metal Ducts”
A. System Includes: Stand by-rated automatically started diesel engine coupled to an

A.C. generator unit. Engine and generator are factory-mounted and -aligned on a
structural steel skid. Subsystems and auxiliary components and equipment include, but
not in a way of limitation, engine starting equipment, fuel service tanks, fuel storage
tank, engine cooling system, exhaust silencing equipment and lubrication, catalyst
convertor, fuel transfer pumps sets, lifting pumps sets.
B. Functional Description: When the mode selector switch on the control and monitoring
panel is in the "automatic" position, remote control contacts in one or more separate
automatic transfer switches initiate the starting and stopping of the generator set. When
the mode selector switch is placed in the "manual" position, the generator set starts
manually. The "off" position of the same switch initiates shutdown of the generator set.
Upon specific malfunction of the generator set it shall be made to shut down
automatically and initiate alarms. Operation of a remote emergency stop switch also
shuts down the unit.
KEO/19-3262-0000 26 3213/1 Engine Generator Set With Fuel Day Tank

C. The Generator Master Control Panel shall be interfaced with the BAS through a serial
communication link to facilitate full remote monitoring of the Generators, fuel tanks and
fuel pumping system. Generator under frequency and overload alarms shall be available
at the BAS.
D. In the event of a mains power failure, the following actions shall be initiated
automatically from the BAS and or from the automatic transfer switch: All the major
loads that are connected to the Generator sets shall be set to “manual mode”, to be
restarted only manually by the operator and subsequently transferred to “automatic
mode”.
E. A BAS software flag shall be available for the operator to select either manual or
automatic restart after a power failure for all Low Voltage motors. If “Automatic” is
selected, then these motors shall be started sequentially, one process area at a time.
Automatic control sequences and timer-controlled operations shall also be resumed. If
the flag is set to “manual” then all controls shall be set to manual, and be ready for
restart by the operator.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Include Manufacturer’s product literature and performance data, sufficient
to verify compliance to specification requirements.
1. A paragraph by paragraph specification compliance statement, highlighting
thereby any deviations whatsoever and indicating the implications as applicable.
2. Dimensioned outline plan and elevation drawings of engine generator set and
other components specified.
3. Thermal damage curve for generator.
4. Time-current characteristic curves for generator protective device.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate fabrication details, dimensions, weights, loads, required

connection.
1. Design Calculations: Signed and sealed by a qualified Class ‘A’ professional
engineer. Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic
restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.
2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional
Class ‘A’ professional engineer. Detail fabrication, including anchorages and
attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include base weights.
3. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power and control connections and
differentiate between factory-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Field Test and Observation Reports: Indicate and interpret test results and inspection
records relative to compliance with performance requirements.
D. Certified Summary of Performance Tests: Demonstrate compliance with specified

requirement to meet performance criteria for sensitive loads.
E. Factory Test Reports: For units to be shipped for this Project, showing evidence of
compliance with specified requirements.
F. Exhaust Emissions Test Report: To show compliance with applicable regulations.
G. Sound measurement test report.

H. Certification of Torsional Vibration Compatibility: Comply with NFPA 110.
I. Field test report of tests specified in Part 3.
J. Maintenance Data: For each packaged engine generator and accessories to include in
the operation & maintenance manuals including the following:
1. List of tools and replacement items recommended to be stored at the Project for
ready access. Include part and drawing numbers, current unit prices, and source
of supply.
2. Detail operating instructions for both normal and abnormal conditions.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain packaged engine generator and auxiliary components

specified in this Section through one source from a single manufacturer regularly
engaged in the manufacture of such equipment.
B. The manufacturer should have a local agent with a proven successful experience record
in the installation, testing, commissioning and maintenance of diesel generators of the
size specified herein. The local agent should have a local spare parts warehouse where
all the generator regular consumables shall be available on shelf.
C. The agent should have been associated with the manufacturer for a minimum period of
five years.
D. Engine Exhaust Emissions Comply with applicable state and local government
requirements.
E. The emergency power supply system and its components shall be such as may be
properly maintained and serviced without the necessity of carrying expensive spare
parts stocks, or being subjected to interrupted service due to the lack of spare parts
F. An engine of the same model, bore, stroke and configuration, rated at the same or
higher bhp and rpm shall have performed satisfactorily (i.e. without failures involving a
major component, such as crankshaft, valve, cam shafts, piston, injector and the like) for
a minimum of 2000 hours of actual operation under average rated load conditions of
75% or greater over a two year period, either at the manufacturer's factory or a
stationary power plant.
G. A generator and generator switchgear components of the type to be used in conjunction

with the engine shall have had at least 2000 hours of satisfactory service at a minimum
average load of 90%.
H. Emergency generator set shall be designed to allow easy replacement of major items
subject to wear.
I. The size of the set shall be the same or next higher standard size nearest to the rating
specified, when operating at specified frequency, voltage, altitude and maximum
ambient temperature.
J. Provide factory test, startup by a supplier authorized by the manufacturer, and on-site
testing of the system.
K. The generator set manufacturer shall warrant all equipment provided under this section
so that there is one source for warranty and product service. Technicians specifically
trained and certified by the manufacturer to support the product and employed by the
generator set supplier shall service the generator sets.
L. Comply with applicable sustainable design standards and local authority requirements
for max. noise level and NO2 emission at adjacent property boundaries due to sound
and harmful gases emitted by Generator set.

1. NFPA 70 ( National Electric Code)
2. ISO8528 (Reciprocating internal combustion engines driven
alternating current generating sets)
3. NFPA 37 (Standard for Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion
Engines)
4. NFPA 110 (Standard for Emergency and Standby Power System)
5. BS EN 60034-1 Specification for rating and performance.
6. ISO3046-1 Declarations of power, fuel and oil consumptions, and test
methods.
7. BS EN 60034-5 Classification of degrees of protection provided by
enclosures for rotating machines.
8. ISO 60034-6 Classification of methods of cooling.
9. BS EN 60034-14 measurement, evaluation and limits of vibration severity
A. Deliver engine generator set and system components to their final locations in protective
wrappings, containers, and other protection that will exclude dirt and moisture and
prevent damage from construction operations. Remove protection only after equipment
is safe from such hazards.
A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of
other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and
shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor
under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or

replace packaged engine generator and auxiliary components that fail in materials or
C. Warranty Period: 2 years or manufacturer’s warranty period (whichever is greater) from

D. All components and their installations shall be free from defects. Any defective material

contents.
1. Indicator Lamps: Two for every six of each type used, but not less than two of
each.
2. Filters: four sets each of lubricating oil, fuel, and combustion-air filters.
3. Belt – four sets
4. Fuse – four sets
5. Tools recommended by the manufacturer – one set
C. Complete itemized list of different spare parts/tools for the emergency generator to be
included and priced by the contactors. The list shall be furnished by the generator
proposed vendor to ensure proper maintenance for two years.
D. Spare parts shall be delivered to the Owner’s central storage facility.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

use only firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of Engine Generator Set with Fuel Day
Tank, of types and capacities required which have been in satisfactory use in similar or
service for not less than ten (10) years and approved by the Architect/ Engineer.
2.2 EMERGENCY GENERATOR SET
A. Classification and Ratings:

1. The generator set shall be stand by-rated utilized during the interruption of
normal power, 240/415V, 3-phase, 4- wire, 50Hz at 0.8 power factor lagging.
2. The set shall have a power output rating as indicated on the drawings with
capacity as required to operate as a unit at 55ºC as evidenced by manufacturer
design calculations.
3. Efficiency: Not less than 90% at full load.
4. The Generator shall provide a source of electrical power of required capacity,
reliability and quality to loads within 10 seconds (type 10) following loss or failure
of the normal power supply as per NFPA 110. Means shall be provided for
automatically starting the prime mover of the generator on failure of the normal
supply.
B. Construction:
1. The engine generator set shall be complete with all necessary equipment and
accessories suitable for the intended services. Battery and battery charger to be
provided.
2. The set shall operate automatically and shall have all necessary apparatus and
instruments for proper control of the engine and generator and for voltage
regulation as specified.
3. The engine generator unit and accessory equipment shall be complete, ready for
operation after connection to wiring, fuel, exhaust and cooling systems.
4. All switches, lamps, and meters in the control system shall be oil-tight and
dust-tight, and the enclosure door shall be gasketed. There shall be no exposed
points in the control (with the door open) that operate in excess 50 volts.
5. The unit shall be mounted on a rigid, structural steel base, suitable for skidding..
6. Each major system component is equipped with a conspicuous nameplate of the
component manufacturer. Nameplate identifies manufacturer of origin and
address, and the model and serial number.
C. Performance
1. Voltage regulation shall be less than ± ½ % (steady state) and less than ±1% (no
load to full load). Random voltage variation with any steady load from no load to
full load shall not exceed ± ½ %.
2. Frequency regulation shall be isochronous from steady state no load to steady
state rated load. Random frequency variation with any steady load from no load
to full load shall not exceed ± ¼%.
3. The diesel engine-generator set shall be capable of single step load pick up of
100% nameplate kW and power factor, less applicable de-rating factors, with the
engine-generator set at operating temperature.
4. The generator set shall be capable of sustaining a minimum of 90% of rated no
load voltage with the specified kVA load at near zero power factor applied to the
generator set.
D. Connections
1. The generator set load connections shall be composed of silver or tin plated
copper bus bars, drilled to accept mechanical or compression terminations of the
number and type as shown on the drawings. Sufficient lug space shall be
provided for use with cables of the number and size as shown on the drawings.
2. Power connections to auxiliary devices shall be made at the devices, with
required protection located at a wall-mounted common distribution panel.
3. Generator set control interfaces to other system components shall be made on a
common, permanently labeled terminal block assembly.
E. Exciters:
1. Fast response type with a rotating 3-phase full wave bridge rectifier.
F. Voltage Regulator:
1. Hermetically sealed, silicon controlled rectifier type employing a zener reference
to give a voltage stability of 1.5% with allowance for up to 3% speed variation.
2. To provide automatic protection of the unit on 3 phase short circuits.
3. To include automatic under frequency protection to allow the generator to be
operated under load, at less than synchronous speeds, for engine start-up and
shutdown procedures. Switches and/or fuses shall not be used to give this
protection.
4. Transient variations shall be limited to a maximum 17% for a duration not
exceeding 0.25 seconds.
G. Manual Voltage Rheostat:
1. To be fitted to control panel for fine adjustments.
2.3 ENGINE
A. The engine shall be diesel, 4 cycle, radiator and fan cooled. The horsepower rating of
the engine at its minimum tolerance level shall be sufficient to drive the alternator and all
connected accessories. Two cycle engines are not acceptable.
B. The engine shall be direct injection, four stroke, 1500 RPM, naturally aspirated or
turbocharged diesel engine to provide sufficient output power for the generator.
C. An electronic governor system shall provide automatic isochronous frequency

regulation. The governing system dynamic capabilities shall be controlled as a function
of engine coolant temperature to provide fast, stable operation at varying engine
operating temperature conditions
D. The engine shall be with integral air cooled radiator and shall include air filter, fuel and
lubricating oil filters, water pump, fuel and lubricating oil pumps, oil cooler, governor,
flywheel, starter motor, tachometer, service hour counter, safety devices and all other
accessories. The air filter shall be of the dry element type. The fuel filters shall be
suitable for preventing all particles of 10 micron size or larger from passing.
E. A pressure type lubricating system with gear type oil pump and filters shall be fitted to
the engine. A graduated dipstick shall be provided, located in an accessible position.
F. A heat-exchanger must be fitted in the cooling-water circuit for cooling the lubricating-oil
and shall be capable of keeping lubricating-oil temperature within safe limits at all
conditions of load-requirements at worst climatic conditions. The drain connection for
draining of sump-oil must be brought on side of the generator base. Method of
lubrication should be fully described in the offer. It is preferable that the camshaft-
bearing lubrication be directly fed from the lubricating-oil pump and not through the main
bearing.
G. The governor shall be electronic type, arranged in parallel configuration to maintain an

isochronous load sharing, speed sensing and to respond to load changes which
minimize speed dip and recovery time. The governor system shall include the following:
1. Magnetic pick-up
2. Proportional actuators
3. Oil pressure switch
4. Control box
H. The engine shall run steadily at any load at its rated speed. Changes in speed shall
comply with ISO 8528 Class G2. The engine shall have safety devices for stopping the
engine and giving alarm in cases of high water temperature, low oil pressure and
overspeed.
I. Drain plugs and cocks for oil, water and fuel shall be provided in readily accessible
locations.
J. Emergency relief diaphragms shall be provided to obviate danger of crank case

explosions, fitted on the side remote from the generator.
K. Engine mounted wiring shall be by means of MICC cables properly fixed and protected
and terminating in a common terminal box mounted on the engine.
L. The diesel engine shall be derated according to ISO 3046 for operation in locations of
high ambient temperatures. Engine manufacturer's certificate for engine deration shall
be submitted to approval.
A. Provide vibration isolators, spring/pad type, quantity as recommended by the generator

set manufacturer. Isolators shall include seismic restraints if required by site location.
2.5 COOLING SYSTEM
A. The diesel engine generator set is cooled with an integral radiator (set mounted). The
radiator shall be heavy-duty tropical design with mechanically driven fan of sufficient
capacity to maintain safe operation at the site in worst climatic conditions. Coils shall be
of copper alloy tubing with copper fins.
B. The radiator shall be provided with fan guard and shall be connected by flexible
connections to engine water pipes.
C. A thermostatically controlled valve shall be provided in the cooling system to assist rapid
heating up of the water in the engine jacket when starting from cold. A thermostatically
controlled electric heater, suitable for connection to mains supply shall be located in the
cooling water circuit with 'ON/OFF' switch in the control panel. The heater shall be
capable of maintaining the whole of the cooling water at a temperature of 20 ºC with an
ambient temperature of 0 ºC. Indicating lamps in the control panel shall indicate when
heater is 'ON'. The heater shall be switched 'OFF' automatically when the engine starts
and switched 'ON' when it stops. The heater shall be connected through HRC fuses.
Heaters shall be easily removable for replacement.
2.6 ENGINE STARTER BATTERIES
A. Starting and control batteries shall be made of high performance lead acid, vented type,
24 volt DC, sized as recommended by the engine manufacturer, complete with battery
cables and connectors
B. Batteries size shall be heavy duty such that lead acid cells are not discharged below
75%.
C. Batteries output capacity shall be such that if the engine does not start at the first
attempt, there is sufficient starting attempts. The minimum number of repeat starts
required, each of 10sec duration, should be three.
D. Batteries charging shall be provided from a suitable full wave rectification static-charger
with auto trickle-charge enclosed in an adequately ventilated sheet steel case and
incorporated within the control panel with associated instruments and controls mounted
on front of panel.
E. An ammeter and voltmeter in the control panel shall indicate the state of the battery and
its charging rate.
F. The starting batteries of the diesel engines shall be at least dimensioned for at least four
start attempts and suitable for six hours continuous. The battery shall be provided with
re-charging equipment.
2.7 CONTROL PANEL:
A. Each generator control panel shall be electronic modular, generator-mounted type. The
control panel shall be environmentally sealed, solid-state, microprocessor based module
for engine control and AC metering. The control panel shall provide the following control
and monitoring features:
1. Automatic/manual start-stop engine control with programmable safety shut
downs and associated flashing LED indicators for low oil pressure, high coolant
temperature, overspeed, overcrank and emergency stop.
2. Cycle cranking adjustable 1-60 second crank/rest periods.
3. Cool down timer, adjustable 0 - 30 minutes.
4. LCD digital read out for: Engine oil pressure, coolant temperature, engine RPM,
system DC volts, engine running hours, generator AC volts, AC amperes and
frequency.
5. Control system diagnostic codes: Loss of engine speed signal, invalid engine
control switch signal, internal circuit fault, loss of coolant temperature signal.
6. Engine Control Switch
7. Voltmeter, ammeter, KWH meter, frequency meter, PF meter.
8. Voltmeter Phase Selector Switch
9. Emergency Stop Push Buttons
10. Indicator/Display Test Button
11. Voltage Adjust Potentiometer
12. Provision for interface through RS 485 port.
B. The control Panel shall include all interfaces necessary for proper operation with the
paralleling equipment provided under this contract. The generator set supplier shall be
responsible for complete compliance to all specification requirements for both the
generator set and the paralleling equipment.
2.8 FUEL OIL STORAGE
A. Comply with NFPA 30.
B. The fuel supply system shall be considered as mechanical support system for the diesel
generator set and indicated in the relevant Mechanical drawings. Refer Division 23
related Sections for compliance.
The system includes two types of fuel tanks.
1. Main fuel tank or storage fuel tank.
2. Each Generator room shall be provided with fuel oil tank (day tank). Refer to
Mechanical drawings for the capacity of the fuel oil tank.
C. Day Tank: Comply with UL 142, freestanding, factory-fabricated fuel tank assembly,
with integral, float-controlled transfer pump and the following features:
1. Tank Capacity: As recommended by engine manufacturer for an uninterrupted
period of 8 hours' operation at 100 percent of rated power output of engine-
generator system without being refilled
2. Pump Capacity: Exceeds maximum flow of fuel drawn by engine-mounted fuel
supply pump at 110 percent of rated capacity, including fuel returned from
engine.
3. Low-Level Alarm Sensor: Liquid-level device operates alarm contacts at 25
percent of normal fuel level. Provide interface to. BMS
4. High-Level Alarm Sensor: Liquid-level device operates alarm and redundant fuel
shutoff contacts at midpoint between overflow level and 100 percent of normal
fuel level. Provide interface to. BMS
5. Piping Connections: Factory-installed fuel supply and return lines from tank to
engine; local fuel fill, vent line, overflow line; and tank drain line with shutoff
valve.
6. Redundant High-Level Fuel Shutoff: Actuated by high-level alarm sensor in day
tank to operate a separate motor device that disconnects day-tank pump motor.
Sensor shall signal solenoid valve, located in fuel suction line between fuel
storage tank and day tank, to close. Both actions shall remain in shutoff state
until manually reset. Shutoff action shall initiate an alarm signal to control panel
but shall not shut down engine-generator set.
2.9 ENGINE EXHAUST SYSTEM
A. Associated engine exhaust system, except the silencers / mufflers as supplied with the
diesel engine, will be furnished and installed under the scope of Mechanical contract as
shown and indicated in the relevant drawing.
B. Muffler/Silencer: critical type, sized as recommended by engine manufacturer and

selected with exhaust piping system to not exceed engine manufacturer’s engine
backpressure requirements.
2.10 FRESH AIR INTAKE AND EXHAUST AIR SYSTEM
A. As part of the supply and installation of the diesel / alternator set, the Contractor shall
furnish and install the cooling and aspiration air intake.
B. The system includes the engine radiator exhaust air system plus that of the generator
room ventilation system. These shall be under the scope of HVAC contract as shown
and indicated in the relevant drawing.
C. The radiator exhaust ductworks shall be acoustically treated in accordance to standard

codes of practice for generating sets.
D. The acoustic treatment and ductwork system shall be such as not to reduce the
efficiency of the engine or output of the alternator.
2.11 INTERNAL CONTROL COMPONENTS
A. The following internal controls shall be provided within the master control section:
1. Programmable controller for interface with touchscreen, and to provide load
demand, load pick-up, and load shed functions.
2. Load pick-up output contacts, rated 10 A at 600 VAC (3 contacts per level).
3. Load shed output contacts, rated 10 A at 600 VAC (3 contacts per level).
4. Provide all other components required, such as properly sized current
transformers, transducers, terminal blocks, etc., for reliable system operation.
2.12 SYSTEM OPERATION:
A. Loss Of Normal Power:

1. System is given signal to start by receipt of start signal from automatic transfer
switch(es) or other remote device. On receipt of this signal, all generator sets
automatically and independently start, accelerate to rated frequency and build up
to rated voltage. The first start system monitors this process, and on finding a
generator set at 90% of rated voltage and frequency, automatically disables all
other units from closing to the bus, and closes the ready unit to the bus. At this
time first priority transfer switches begin the time delay transfer sequence, and on
it's completion transfer their loads to the system bus.
2. The priority (load add) controls prevent overloading of the system bus by
providing inhibit signals to prevent transfer of selected loads to the emergency
system until sufficient generating capacity is available on the bus, or until the
priority override switch on the touchscreen control is actuated.
3. After the first unit is closed to the bus, the control of the remaining units is
switched to the synchronizer in each generator paralleling control, which causes
the generator set to synchronize with the system bus, and then close to it at the
proper time.
4. As each unit closes to the bus, the unit assumes it's proportional share of the
total load on the bus.
B. Failure Of A Unit To Start Or Synchronize:

1. If a unit fails to start, after the overcrank time delay (in the generator set control)
has expired, the unit will be shut down, and an alarm will sound. The priority
control will prevent the lowest priority loads from being added to the system
without manual intervention. The priority override controls on the touchscreen
may be used by an operator to manually add low priority loads to the bus, if he
determines that generator capacity is available to serve the loads. Bus overload
monitoring shall protect the first priority loads in the event that the bus is
inadvertently overloaded due to operator error.
2. If a unit fails to synchronize, after a preset time delay, an alarm will sound, but
the unit will continue to attempt to synchronize until signaled to stop by manual
operation of the control switches on the generator set.
E. Bus Overload:
1. If a bus overload occurs for any reason, a load shed signal will be generated to
initiate load shedding in the system.
2. If the bus does not return to proper frequency within a predetermined period of
time, additional load shed signals will be generated.
F. Load Demand Mode:

1. When the system running in the emergency mode with the "load demand" switch
on the touchscreen in the "on" position, controls shall continuously monitor the
total load on the bus. If the total load on the bus falls below preset limits for a
period of 15 minutes, the controller will automatically shut down generator sets in
an operator predetermined order, until the minimum number of generators
required to operate the load remain on the bus. The purpose of this function is to
allow the generator sets to operate closer to their rated capacity, thereby
decreasing fuel consumption, and reducing wear on the system.
2. On sensing that the available bus capacity is being approached, the standby
units will automatically be restarted (in the reverse order of which they were shut
down) and paralleled with the bus to assume their proportional share of system
load.
G. Return of Normal Power

1. When all of the system start signals are removed from the generator sets, the
generator set paralleling breakers shall all open, and the generator sets shall
operate at no load for a cool down period. When the cool down period has been
completed, the generator sets shall shut down.

2. If a system start signal is received during the cool down period, one generator set
shall immediately close to the system bus and all other units shall synchronize to
it, as described in “Loss of Normal Power” above.
H. Distribution Equipment
1. Provide emergency feeder distribution breakers of the number and size as shown
on the project drawings.
2. The breakers provided shall be molded case breakers, motorized type, with
electronic trip units. Breakers shall be provided with lugs of the number and size
as shown on the project drawings.
3. The breakers shall be group-mounted in a distribution panel board which is bus
connected to the paralleling equipment. Provide equipment in enclosure with
sufficient space for cable connection, and with access as shown on the drawings.
2.13 SOUND PROOF CONTAINER
A. The container shall be brand new, suitably sized ISO standard container and shall have
enough space to house the generator set and its ancillaries.
B. It shall be fully weather proof and acoustic sound-proofed container/enclosure. It should

be extremely rugged construction to withstand the rough weather condition in Kuwait.
C. Air inlet and discharge flows are through sound attenuators positioned at each end of
the container and constructed in splitter or baffle form to achieve effective noise
absorption with minimum air resistance. Each sound attenuator incorporates fixed blade
weather louvers and bird guards.
D. The noise level shall be 85dbA @ 1 meter distance from the enclosure with the
generator set operating at 100% prime rating.
E. It shall incorporate personnel hinged access doors, with one single door on each side.
These have a peripheral compression seal and are fitted with heavy-duty single point
handle and fastener. It shall be fitted with internal panic release mechanism and all
doors are lockable. Emergency stop button shall also be fitted on the container exterior
and equipped with safety measures to prevent un-necessary operation.
F. The exhaust system pipe work shall be insulated with heat resistant material inside the
container.
G. Lube oil, engine breather and cooling water drain shall be piped out to the exterior of the
soundproof container. The lube oil, cooling water drain shall be plugged and a catch
basin shall be installed at the end of the engine breather pipe for excess oil.
H. A daily service tank of sufficient capacity for 8 hours full load operation shall be
integrated with the soundproof container base. It shall be fitted with strainers, control
cocks, drain cocks, piping to the engine, vents, all necessary fuel lines and fittings.
I. A load connection point with weather proof access cover shall be provided on the side of
the container. The bus bars shall be enclosed in a weather proof cabinet and flexible
cable of sufficient capacity shall connect the bus bars and the circuit breaker. The
external AC outlet plug point shall be installed inside the weather proof access cover.
J. The container shall be equipped with sufficient DC lighting with corresponding timer
switch and AC lighting necessary for inspection and maintenance inside the container.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, equipment foundations, and conditions, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting packaged
engine generator performance.
C. Verify actual locations of connections before packaged engine generator installation.
3.2 CONCRETE BASES
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated for packaged engine generators.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with packaged engine generator manufacturers' written installation and

alignment instructions.
B. Set packaged engine generator set on concrete bases.
C. Adjust metal supports or wedges until generator is level.
D. Install packaged engine generator to provide access for periodic maintenance, including
removal of drivers and accessories.
E. Install cooling-system piping, accessories, hangers and supports, and anchors for
complete installation.
F. Extend drain piping from heat exchangers to point of disposition.
G. Install exhaust-system piping for diesel engines. Extend to point of termination outside
structure. Size piping according to manufacturers written instructions.
H. Install condensate drain piping for diesel-engine exhaust system. Extend drain piping
from low points of exhaust system and from muffler to condensate traps and to point of
disposition.
I. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not
specified to be factory mounted.
J. Verify that electrical wiring is installed according to manufacturers' submittal and

installation requirements. Proceed with equipment startup only after wiring installation is
satisfactory.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Electrical wiring and connections are specified in Division 26 Section “Wiring Devices”

B. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components.
3.6 TESTING
A. Factory Test:
1. The Diesel Engine shall be tested at the manufacturer's plant for its output-power
and relevant temperatures. Test certificate to be submitted the complete
Generator Set. The test shall be performed on the actual unit which will be
delivered to the project site.
B. Field Tests:
1. Full performance test including speed and voltage regulations and the test shall
include the following to be performed at site before handing over:
a. Partial load test.
b. Full load test for three hours
c. 110% load test for one hour
2. Detailed records of the foregoing tests shall be submitted.
3. Test at site before taking over and after the sets are completely installed at the
site, full performance operation shall be carried out on the set at the worst
specified conditions in summer of 3 hrs of continuous running to the approval.
4. Provide a resistive load bank and make temporary connections for full load test, if
necessary.
5. Top up diesel fuel and all other liquids after field test completion.
6. The commissioning should be carried out by the Diesel Engine Manufacturer's
engineer or his Authorised Representative.
3.7 OFF-SITE / FACTORY WITNESS PERFORMANCE TEST VISITS TO THE COUNTRY

OF ORIGIN
A. Prior to shipment, all final performance test shall be witnessed at the factory. Contractor
shall arrange and pay for all related expenses for the team of four persons from PAAET,
including Travel, transportation, accommodation and per diem for seven days.
3.8 GUARANTEE & MAINTENANCE
B. The contractor during that period shall provide labor and parts maintenance on the
installed system. During that period, the contractor shall be responsible for the regular
inspection and maintenance as recommended by the manufacturer. Full maintenance
by skilled employees of the manufacturer's designated service organization for the life of
warranty. Include quarterly exercising to check for proper, starting, load transfer, and
running under load. Include routine preventive maintenance as recommended by
manufacturer and adjusting as required for proper operation. Maintenance agreements
shall include parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original
equipment.
C. Operation & Maintenance
1. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the satisfactory operation of diesel
generator installation during the operation and maintenance period and
thereafter during the maintenance (defect liability) period. He shall carry out
necessary inspection, preventive maintenance and testing to keep the sets ready
all the time. The set shall function satisfactorily during power failures. The
Contractor shall carry out routine testing. The testing shall be carried out in the
presence of Owner’s Representative. The Contractor shall provide all electrical
and mechanical spare parts, grease, lucubrating oils, touch-up paints, etc.,
required for the maintenance of the D/G Installation. The Contractor shall prepare
log-books listing full details of maintenance work and each log-book entry shall
be signed by the Owner’s Representative.
D. Guarantee Of Control System Operation

1. All components of control panel for the D/G set, relays, controls of all systems
mentioned in this specification shall be installed in an ambient temperature of
more than 55ºC, high relative humidity and dusty atmosphere.
2. The Contractor shall enclose with his offer a written assurance from the
manufacturer for the guarantee that all components of the Control System
(relays, diodes, pre-integrated circuits, semi-conductors, etc.) shall withstand,
operate continuously and effectively without troubles in this high temperatures
and climatic conditions.
3.9 TRAINING

maintenance.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 3353
STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This specification describes a three-phase continuous duty, on-line, double conversion,

solid-state uninterruptible power system, hereafter referred to as the UPS and single
phase rack mounted UPS. The UPS shall operate in conjunction with the existing
building electrical system to provide power conditioning, back-up and distribution for
critical electrical loads. The UPS shall consist of, as required by the project, the UPS
module, battery cabinet(s), and accessories as described in this specification. The UPS
system must be equipped with built in back feed protection.

3. Division 26 Section 26 2413 "Switchboars”
1.3 UPS DESCRIPTION
A. UPS Components: The UPS shall consist of the following main components:
1. UPS system with N Configuration module containing Rectifier(s), Inverter(s),
Battery Charger(s), Static Bypass, and associated Control and Monitor Panel.
2. Battery string(s), either internal or in external cabinets or Racks .
3. Non-matching wall mounted or floor standing maintenance bypass cabinets or
multi-module parallel tie cabinets.
B. UPS Module Modes of Operation: The UPS Module shall operate as an on-line, fully
automatic system in the following modes:
1. Normal: Utilising commercial AC power, the critical load shall be continuously
supplied by the Inverter. The Inverter shall power the load while regulating both
voltage and frequency. The Rectifier shall derive power from the commercial AC
source and shall supply DC power to the Inverter. Simultaneously, the Battery
Charger shall charge the battery.
2. Battery: Upon failure of the commercial AC power, the critical load shall continue
to be supplied by the Inverter, which shall obtain power from the batteries without
any operator intervention. There shall be no interruption to the critical load upon
failure or restoration of the commercial AC source.
3. Recharge: Upon restoration of the AC source, the Charger shall recharge the
batteries and simultaneously the Rectifier shall provide power to the Inverter.
KEO/19-3262-0000 26 3353/1 Static Uninterruptible Power Supply
This shall be an automatic function and shall cause no interruption to the critical
load.
4. Bypass: If the UPS module must be taken out of the Normal mode for overload,
load fault, or internal failures, the static bypass switch shall automatically transfer
the critical load to the commercial AC power. Return from Bypass mode to
Normal mode of operation shall be automatic. No-break transfer to and from
Bypass mode shall be capable of being initiated manually from the front panel.
5. Back feed Protection : The UPS systems must have built in back feed protection
complying to IEC 62040-1
6. Energy Saver: The UPS shall continuously monitor the voltage and frequency of
the bypass source. When the source parameters are within acceptable limits, the
UPS will utilise a minimal/optimal combination of its internal subsystems to
ensure acceptable power is always delivered to the critical load, at a system
efficiency of 99% or greater, over the range of 60% to 100% load. The Energy
Saver System shall be enabled by the user, and shall be adjustable. It shall
incorporate a “High Alert Mode” to automatically (without user intervention)
provide maximum power conditioning any time bypass source variation levels
exceed pre-set, adjustable limits. When Energy Saver System is utilised, the
UPS must attenuate ANSI C62.41-type line transients to within IEC and ITIC
limits. The Energy Saver System shall be able to distinguish between upstream
(utility) faults and downstream (load) faults, and react appropriately to protect and
support the critical load, without interruption.
7. Manual Bypass: The UPS shall include an internal manual maintenance bypass
switch that shall enable safe access to internal major assemblies whilst the load
is supplied by mains power.
1.4 REFERENCES

1. IEC 62040-1 General and Safety Requirements for UPS Systems
2. IEC 62040-2 Electromagnetic Compatibility Requirements.
3. IEC 62040-3 (International Electrotechnical Commission) –
Uninterruptible power systems (UPS) – Part 3: Method of
specifying the performance and test requirements.
4. IEEE 587 (ANSI C62.41) Category A & B (International Electrical and
Electronics Engineers) – Recommended practices on
surge voltages in low voltage power circuits.
5. CISPR 22: FCC Rules and Regulations 47, Part 15, Class A (Federal
Communications Commission) – Radio Frequency
Devices (prior to Feb 16, 2006).
6. MIL-HDBK-217E (Military Handbook) – Reliability prediction of electronics
equipment
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. The UPS shall be supplied with sufficient documentation, including the following
manuals:
1. Installation and Operation Manual: One copy of the installation and operation
manual shall be furnished. It shall possess sufficient detail and clarity to enable

the owner’s technicians or representatives to install and operate the UPS
equipment and accessories. The manual shall include the following major items:
a. UPS description
b. UPS site planning and unpacking
c. UPS installation
d. Optional accessory installation
e. UPS theory of operation
f. Operating procedures
g. System events
h. UPS maintenance
i. Performance and technical specifications
j. Wiring requirements and recommendations
k. Physical features and requirements
l. Cabinet dimensions
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. The UPS manufacturer shall have a minimum of twenty five years’ experience in the
design, manufacture and testing of solid-state UPS systems.
B. The UPS manufacturer shall have ISO 9001 certification for engineering/R&D,
manufacturing facilities and service organisation.
C. The UPS manufacturer shall maintain a staffed 7x24x365 call centre for technical and
emergency support either directly or through authorised service providers.
D. Spare Parts Support: Parts supplies shall be located in the field to provide 80% of all
emergency needs. The factory shall serve as the central stocking facility where a
dedicated supply of all parts shall be available within 24 hours.
E. Product Enhancement Program: The UPS manufacturer shall make available feature
upgrade service offerings to all users as they are developed. These upgrades shall be
available as optional field-installable kits.
F. Maintenance Contracts: A complete range of preventative and corrective maintenance

contracts shall be provided and offered with the proposal. Under these contracts, the
manufacturer shall maintain the user’s equipment to the latest factory revisions.
1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The UPS shall withstand any combination of the following external environmental
conditions without operational degradation.
1. Operating Temperature: 5 degrees C to +40 degrees C continuous without de-
rating (excluding batteries). UPS systems rated for continuous operation at 35
degree C with restrictions for operation at 40 deg C are not acceptable.
2. Storage Temperature: - 25 degrees C to + 55 degrees C . Prolonged storage
above +40 degrees C will cause rapid battery self-discharge.
3. Relative Humidity (operating and storage): 5-95% non-condensing.
4. Elevation:
a. Operational: 1000m maximum without de-rating. De-rate by 1% for every
100m above 1000m, to a maximum of 2000m.
b. Transportation: Capable of air transport, up to 15,000m.

1.8 SAFETY
A. The UPS Systems must be fully compliant with IEC 62040-1 with built in back feed
protection
1.9 WARRANTY

C. One-year service protection package shall include 7x24 on-site repair/replacement

labour for UPS parts and batteries; 7x24 technical support coverage; and 7x24 remote
monitoring service (with monthly reports for UPS and battery performance). Standard
response time shall be 8 hours from receipt of call. Manufacturer shall also offer, as an
option, 7x24 on-site service support with guaranteed response times of 4, or 2 hours in
certain major metropolitan areas. Additional preventive maintenance visits shall be
available as an option for both UPS and battery components.
D. Manufacturer shall also include Start-up services consisting of: 5x8 Start-up service of
UPS and batteries, with option for 7x24 Start-up. On-site user training, Site Audit,
installation and commissioning of monitoring service, and validation of one-year limited
factory warranty will be performed during the start-up.
E. Manufacturer shall also offer an optional service plan to provide 7x24 on-site coverage
(preventive and corrective) for UPS and batteries, guaranteed response time, remote
monitoring, Web access to service site history, annual Site Audit, UPS and battery
preventive maintenance visit, and discounts on upgrade and modification kits.
Manufacturer shall also provide an optional battery service plan to provide parts-and-
labour coverage for partial and full battery strings, either with preventive maintenance or
replacement coverage.

contents.
1. Fuses: One for every 10 of each type and rating, but not less than 1 of each.
2. Cabinet Ventilation Filters: One complete set.
3. One spare circuit board for each critical circuit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

use only firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of Static Uninterruptible Power Supply,
for not less than twenty five (25) years and approved by the Architect/ Engineer.
2.2 UPS MODULE STANDARD FEATURES
A. The UPS module shall consist of the following standard components

1. Uninterruptible Power Module (UPM), which includes:
a. Rectifier/Charger: The rectifier/charger shall convert incoming AC power
to regulated DC output for supplying the inverter and for charging the
battery. The rectifier/charger shall be a high-frequency PWM design,
using Insulated Gate Bi-polar Transistors (IGBTs). The modular design of
the UPS shall permit safe and fast removal and replacement of the
rectifier/charger module. Mean time to repair (MTTR) for the module shall
be no more than 30 minutes in order to return UPS to normal mode. The
rectifier/charger module shall also provide the following:
1) The rectifier shall be capable of drawing power from the utility with
a power factor of 0.99 under nominal conditions.
2) The rectifier shall feature protection circuitry that prevents the
IGBTs from sourcing current in excess of their published ratings.
b. Inverter: The inverter shall feature an IGBT pulse-width-modulation
(PWM) design with high speed switching. The inverter shall also have the
following features:
1) The inverter shall be capable of providing the specified quality
output power while operating from any DC source voltage (rectifier
or battery) within the specified DC operating range.
2) The inverter shall feature protection circuitry that prevents the
IGBTs from sourcing current in excess of their published ratings.
The modular design of the UPS shall permit safe and fast removal and
replacement of the Power Module, while in bypass. Mean time to repair
(MTTR) for the module shall be no more than 30 minutes in order to return
UPS to normal mode.
2. Static Bypass: The bypass shall serve as an alternative source of power for the
critical load when an abnormal condition prevents operation in normal mode.
The bypass shall consist of a fully rated, continuous duty, naturally commutated
static switch for high-speed transfers. The bypass shall feature the following
transfer and operational characteristics.
a. Transfers to bypass shall be automatically initiated for the following
conditions:
1) Output overload period expired.
2) Critical bus voltage out of limits.
3) Internal over temperature period expired.
4) Total battery discharge.
5) UPS failure.
b. Uninterrupted automatic re-transfer shall take place whenever the inverter
is capable of assuming the critical load.
c. Uninterrupted automatic re-transfers shall be inhibited for the following
conditions:
1) When transfer to bypass is activated manually or remotely.
2) In the event of multiple transfers/re-transfer operations the control
circuitry shall limit “cycling” to three (3) operations in any ten-
minute period. The third transfer shall lock the critical load on the
bypass source, for 60 minutes.
3) UPS failure.
d. Uninterrupted manual transfers shall be initiated from the control panel.
Uninterrupted manual transfers to bypass and from bypass shall be
possible with the inverter logic. During manual transfers to bypass mode,
the inverter must verify proper bypass operations before transferring the
critical load to the bypass.
e. All transfers to bypass shall be inhibited for the following conditions:
1) Bypass voltage out of limits (+10%, to -15% of nominal)
2) Bypass frequency out of limits (+/- 4 Hz, adjustable, factory set)
3) Bypass out of synchronisation
4) Bypass phase rotation / installation error
f. Static transfer time: No break, complete in less than 4ms.
g. The bypass shall be manually energised using the control panel or
remotely through a building alarm input.
B. Monitoring and control components: The following components shall provide monitor
and control capability:
1. Control panel: Colour LCD, Touch sensitive, with separate LED status indicators.
2. Alarm and metering display.
3. Building alarm monitoring.: ModBUS TCP
4. Communication ports: RS-232 and USB.
C. Battery management system: The UPS shall contain a battery management system
which has the following features:
1. The battery management system shall charge the batteries using an intermittent
charging cycle. The active battery charger states are constant-current (charge
mode), constant-voltage (float mode) and no-charge (rest mode). The charge
mode shall equalise and charge the batteries to near full capacity before entering
into float mode. In float mode a constant voltage float charge shall charge the
batteries for a minimum of 48 hours or until the batteries are fully charged. The
batteries are then put into rest mode. The battery shall be monitored whilst in rest
mode and the charge cycle shall automatically re-start should the battery voltage
drop below pre-determined levels. The charging control system shall activate an
alarm should the battery capacity drop below the pre-determined levels. The
charge cycle will automatically restart after a utility disturbance. The batteries
shall not be physically disconnected from the UPS DC bus during the charge
cycle and shall be available at all times to supply the inverter.
2. The battery management system shall automatically test the battery string(s) to
ensure that the battery is capable of providing greater that 80% of its rated
capacity. Testing the batteries shall not jeopardise the operation of the critical
load. Upon detection of the battery string(s) not capable of providing 80%, the
UPS system will alarm that the battery needs attention/replacement. The battery
test shall be able to detect the following:
a. Open battery string
b. Shorted battery string
c. Battery capacity (runtime) less than 80% of “new” battery capacity
D. Wiring Terminals: The UPS module shall contain terminals (adequately sized to
accommodate 90C wiring) for securing user wiring to the following locations:
1. Rectifier/charger input connections (4-wire plus ground)
2. Bypass input connections (4-wire plus ground, 400Vac)
3. DC link connections for battery cabinets (positive and negative plus ground).
4. AC output connections (4 wire plus ground)
2.3 PARALLEL UPS SYSTEMS
A. It shall be possible to parallel up to 4 UPS Systems in a distributed parallel

arrangement to increase capacity and/or add redundancy. Paralleling of UPS systems
of unlike rating shall be possible, provided that each UPS cabinet is configured with a
similar static bypass rating. Single UPS modules shall be capable of parallel operation
and shall not require any hardware modifications in order to be paralleled with other
modules in future.
B. For parallel UPS systems provide redundant load sharing mechanisms between
individual UPS systems to mitigate risk of loss of communication.
1. The redundant UPS system configuration must be fault tolerant without single
point of failure.
2. The load sharing between the UPS systems in the parallel configuration should
not be dependent on the parallel communication link.
3. Even in case of failure of the parallel communication cables or communication
interfaces, the UPS modules should continue to share the load equally, even if
the output load conditions change or loss of mains power occurs.
4. The load must be shared between the power modules within a UPS System in
single or parallel configuration
5. In the event of a parallel system communication error, when the UPS systems
are healthy , it must be possible to reinstate the parallel communication and
bring the installation to “ NORMAL OPERATION” without shutting down the UPS
systems forming the parallel configuration
2.4 UPS MODULE OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
A. The UPS system shall consist of the following options and accessories as required:
B. Network Adapter and UPS Power Monitoring Software: Optional PX Gateway card
adapter shall provide a communications interface between the UPS module and the
following network management systems.
1. SNMP v.1, v.3
2. Modbus TCP
3. BACnet/WS or /IP
4. IPv6
This capability shall allow the unit to be monitored remotely over an Ethernet network
using a standard web browser.
C. UPS Power Monitoring Software: This system shall continuously monitor critical power
elements associated with the UPS, using the communications port on each module and
a customer furnished PC. The system shall automatically alarm if any problems arise
and notify local or remote personnel of the alarm condition via email, page, or text
message
D. Relay Card: Serial dry contact card providing 4 isolated dry output contacts, 1 isolated
input.
E. Battery Cabinet: The battery cabinet shall feature valve regulated, high-rate discharge,
lead-acid batteries which provide energy to the support the critical load during a
momentary loss of input power to the rectifier. The batteries shall be flame retardant in
accordance with UL 94V2 requirements. The battery cabinet shall have the following
features:
1. The battery cabinet shall be the same depth and height as the UPS module.
2. The battery cabinet shall feature a mechanical enclosure of like appearance to
the UPS module and shall feature wheels. Each battery cabinet shall require
front access only for installation, service and maintenance. The battery cabinet
shall provide bottom or side cable entry.
3. Power wiring internal to each battery cabinet shall be factory provided. Each
battery cabinet shall feature up to 6 battery trays. Each battery tray shall be
firmly secured to the battery cabinet frame with fasteners. Each battery tray shall
be removable from the front of the battery cabinet.
4. Each battery cabinet shall feature a DC rated circuit breaker. The circuit breaker
within the battery cabinet shall only provide protection to the battery string within
that battery cabinet. For battery configurations involving multiple battery
cabinets, a battery string in one battery cabinet may be isolated from the DC link
via its circuit breaker without removing other battery strings from the DC link and
the UPS module.
5. The circuit breaker in each battery cabinet shall feature an A/B auxiliary switch.
The UPS module shall be capable of monitoring and alarming an open battery
cabinet circuit breaker condition.
6. The circuit breaker in each battery cabinet shall feature a 24VDC or 48VDC
shunt trip device. The shunt trip shall operate to trip the battery breaker(s) for an
emergency power off command or battery disable command.
7. Power and Control wiring between the co-located battery cabinet and the UPS
shall be factory provided with compression type connectors between cabinets.
8. Expected battery life: 10 year standby design life at 25oC or 200 complete full
load discharge cycles, whichever occurs first, when operated and maintained
within specifications.
9. Appropriately designed open rack system also shall be accepted.
2.5 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY RATINGS AND OPERATING

CHARACTERISTICS
A. UPS Continuous Ratings.

1. UPS Rating (max) is the maximum output possible from the UPS (for a load
power factor range of 0.8 lagging to 0.8 leading). The UPS shall not require de-
rating when supporting a leading power factor load of 0.8 or greater.
B. Rectifier/charger input:
1. Nominal three phase input voltage: 400 Vac:
2. 4-wire plus ground
3. Operating input voltage range: +20%, -15% of average nominal input voltage at
full load and +20%, -40% of average nominal input voltage at half load without
battery discharge.
4. For 50Hz systems, operating input frequency range shall be 45 to 65Hz.
5. Input power factor 0.99 lagging.
6. Normal input current limit: The UPS shall have the following programmable input
current limit settings while operating in normal mode:
a. Rectifier/charger input current limit shall be adjustable from 100 to 115%
of full-load input current.
b. Battery input current limit shall be adjustable from 5% to 7% of the UPS
full load input current regardless of the actual load on the UPS.
7. On generator input current limit: The UPS shall have the following
programmable input current limit settings while operating in normal mode on
generator:
a. Rectifier/charger input current limit shall be adjustable from 100% to 115%
of full-load input current.
b. Battery recharge input current limit shall be adjustable from 5% to 7% of
the UPS full load input current regardless of the actual load on the UPS.
8. Input current total harmonic distortion (THD) shall be less than 3% at nominal line
voltage and 5% nominal source impedance.
9. Power walk-in: Ramp-up to full utility load adjustable from 10 amps per second
to 1 amp per second.
C. Bypass input:
1. Synchronising bypass voltage range shall be +10, -15% of average nominal input
voltage.
2. Synchronising bypass frequency range is +/- 0.5hz to +/-4hz, user adjustable,
and is centred on the nominal frequency. Default setting is +/- 4hz.
3. Slew rate: 1hz per second, maximum.
4. Bypass and rectifier inputs can be supplied from out of phase sources if required.
5. Input surge withstand capability: The UPS shall be in compliance with IEEE 587
(ANSI C62.41), category A & B (6kV).
D. Rectifier/charger output:
1. Nominal DC voltage shall be either 486VDC (432 VDC open circuit battery
voltage) or either 540VDC (480 VDC open circuit battery voltage).
2. Steady state voltage regulation shall be +/- 0.5%.
3. Voltage ripple shall be less that 0.5% (peak-to-peak).
4. Capacity: The rectifier/charger shall support a fully loaded inverter and recharge
the battery to 90% of its full capacity within 10 times the discharge when input
current limit is set at maximum.
5. Low line operation: The rectifier/charger shall be capable of sharing the DC load
with the battery when the input voltage falls below the specified operation input
voltage range, the On Battery indicator shall enunciate operation in this mode.
6. DC sensing: Redundant DC voltage sensing methods shall be incorporated for
providing battery over-voltage protection.
7. Battery charger characteristics: The UPS battery charging system shall have the
following characteristics:
a. The charger shall be capable of being configured for several charge
modes including:
1) A charging mode that increases battery life by allowing the battery
to rest, reducing positive plate corrosion
2) A charging mode floating the battery at a set level, which can be
adjusted via software, used for flooded cell applications
a) Nominal Float Voltage: 2.25 V per cell.
b) Equalising Voltage: 2.38 V maximum per cell (adjustable).
b. UPS module will automatically adjust battery shutdown based upon
loading and battery capacity.
1) The UPS module shall automatically adjust the final discharge
voltage between 1.67 and 1.75 Volts per cell based on the existing
load and the rate and length of discharge.
2) The absolute minimum operational voltage is 1.67 V per cell
(adjustable).
E. UPS output in normal mode

1. Nominal output voltage 400V, 3-phase, 4-wire plus ground at the UPS output
terminals.
2. Steady-state voltage regulation (in inverter) shall be within +/- <1% average from
nominal output voltage.
3. Transient voltage response shall be per EN62040-3, Class 1, (< +/- 5% from
nominal voltage for 100% load step, full load re-transfers and full load drop on
battery).
4. Transient voltage recovery shall be compliant to CBEMA/ITIC Class 1.
5. Linear load harmonic distortion capability: Output voltage THD of less than 1%
for 100% linear load.
6. Non-linear load harmonic distortion capability: Output voltage THD of less than
5% for 100% non-linear load when tested using the non-linear load described in
IEC 62040-3 connected line to neutral.
7. Line synchronisation range shall be +/- 4Hz, adjustable to+/-0.5 Hz.
8. Frequency regulation shall be +/- 0.1Hz free running.
9. Frequency slew rate shall be 1 Hz/second maximum (adjustable).
10. Phase angle control:
a. Balanced linear load shall be <1 degree from nominal 120 degrees
11. Phase voltage control:
a. Balanced linear loads shall be +/- 1% from average phase voltage
b. Unbalanced linear loads shall be less than <2% from average phase
voltage for 100% load unbalanced
12. Overload current capability (with nominal line and fully charged battery):
a. Double Conversion mode: The unit shall maintain voltage regulation for
102% to <110% of resistive/inductive load for 10 minutes, 111% to <125%
for 60 seconds, and 126% to 150% for 10 seconds, >151% for 300ms.
b. Stored energy mode (typically on battery): The unit shall maintain voltage
regulation for 102% to <110% of resistive/inductive load for 10 minutes,
111% to <125% for 60 seconds, and >126% for 300ms
c. Energy Saver System operation: Continuous = 110%. Transient = 1000%
peak current for 10ms.
d. On bypass: Continuous = 125%. Transient = 1000% peak current for
10ms.
13. Fault clearing current capability: See section 13 above.
14. Static transfer time, inverter to bypass: No break, completed in less than 4ms.
15. Static transfer time, Energy Saver to inverter: No break, completed in less than
4ms maximum, typically <2ms.
16. Common mode noise attenuation:
a. -65dB up to 20kHz, -40db up to 100kHz

17. Acoustical noise: Noise generated by the UPS under normal operation shall not
exceed 65dbA at one metre from any operator surface, measured at 25 degrees
C and full load, per ISO 7779 standard.
18. EMI Suppression: The UPS shall meet CISPR22, and IEC62040-2 C3.
19. Electrostatic discharge (ESD): The UPS shall meet IEC61000-4-2 level 3; 4kV
contact/8kV air discharge.
a. Efficiency: The UPS incorporate 3-level power converter design for
highest possible efficiency. Efficiency shall be
b. >96% at full load, in double conversion
c. ≥96.5% at 75% load, in double conversion
d. >96% at 50% load and >95% at 25% load. In Double conversion
F. Battery
1. Each UPS System shall have a single battery bank compatible with N
configuration.
2. Battery bank shall consist of sufficient number of strings in parallel. Each battery
bank shall be rated to carry full load for 60 minutes at 25 degree C
G.
H. UPS Output with Energy Saver System option

1. The Energy Saver System acts to optimise the internal components of the UPS
power train to maximise system efficiency when the bypass source is within the
following (adjustable) limits: Voltage: +/-10%, and Frequency: +/-3Hz.
2. Nominal output voltage 400V, 3-phase, 4-wire plus ground at UPS output.
3. Steady-state voltage regulation shall be within +/- 10% from nominal output
voltage.
4. Line synchronisation range shall be +/- 3Hz, adjustable to +/- 5Hz.
5. Frequency regulation shall be +/-3Hz when bypass source is within the limits in
(1) above, and +/- 0.1Hz free running,
6. Overload current capability (with bypass source within the limits of (1) above)
Continuous: 110%, Transient: 1000% for 10msec.
7. Static transfer time: No break, typically completed in less than 2ms, including
detection time.
8. Acoustical noise: Noise generated by the UPS in Energy Saver System mode
operation shall not exceed 47dB at 100% load at one metre from any operator
surface, measured at 25 degrees C.
9. EMI Suppression: The UPS shall meet CISPR22, and IEC62040-2 C3.
10. Electrostatic discharge (ESD): The UPS shall meet IEC61000-4-2 level 3; 4kV
contact/8kV air discharge.
11. Efficiency: The UPS efficiency shall greater than 99%, over the range of 60% to
100% load; 98.5% over the range of 20 to 49% load.
2.6 MECHANICAL DESIGN
A. Enclosures: The UPS shall be housed in a free-standing double front enclosure (safety
shields behind door) equipped with wheels and levelling feet. The enclosure shall be
designed for critical applications. The front door shall have a lock to prevent
unauthorised entry.
1. The UPS enclosure dimensions shall not exceed:
a. 50kW to 150kW systems (or systems scalable to 100kW or 150kW) shall
measure 560mm Wide , 914mm Deep x 1876mm High.
b. 160kW and 200kW (or systems scalable to 200kW) shall measure 760mm
Wide , 914mm Deep x 1876mm High.
c. 300 kW (or systems scalable to 450 kW) shall measure 1890mm Wide ,
880mm Deep x 1880mm High.
d. 600 kW (or systems scalable to 1100 kW) shall measure 4450mm Wide ,
880mm Deep x 1880mm High.
B. Modular construction: The UPS shall be comprised of:

1. Universal Power Modules (UPM)s, each including the rectifier, inverter, and
battery converter power and control circuitry. The UPM shall be in a draw-out
assembly that can be quickly exchanged or replaced as necessary. Preferred
power module rating is minimum 50kW for up 200 kW UPS system and minimum
200 kW for up to 1100 kW UPS system.
C. Ventilation: The UPS and shall be designed for forced-air cooling. Air inlets shall be on
the front of the unit. Air outlet configuration for the UPS shall be exhaust at the rear of
the cabinet. 200mm of clearance shall be required for proper air circulation at the rear
of the UPS. A washable air filter shall be mounted in the front door of the UPS module.
An optional rear chimney attachment shall enable front to top ventilation if required.
D. No back or side clearance or access shall be required for servicing the system. The
side enclosure covers shall be capable of being located directly adjacent to a wall.
E. Front access: All serviceable subassemblies shall be modular and capable of being
replaced from the front of the UPS (front access only required). Side or rear access for
installation, service, repair or maintenance of the UPS system shall not be required.
F. Service area requirements: The system shall require no more than 900mm of front
service access room and shall not require side or rear access for service or installation.
2.7 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
A. Microprocessor controlled circuitry: The UPS controls shall have the following design
and operating characteristics:
1. Fully automatic operation of the UPS shall be provided through the use of
microprocessor controlled Digital Signal Processing. DSP shall eliminate
variances from component tolerance or drift, and provide consistent operational
responses.
2. All operating and protection parameters shall be firmware controlled, thus
eliminating a need for manual adjustments. The logic shall include system test
capability to facilitate maintenance and troubleshooting. Periodic maintenance
reminders shall be communicated to the User via the front panel display. Printed
circuit board replacement shall be possible without requiring calibration.
3. Start-up and transfers shall be automatic functions.
B. Digital Front Panel Display: The UPS control panel shall be a 7” touch sensitive, backlit
LCD front panel display that includes LED indicators for basic UPS status. Large,
luminous, colour coded LED pillars (vertical bars) shall show the UPS status (green,
amber, red), and be clearly visible up to 30m from the UPS. The LCD shall display:
1. UPS status (home screen): the LCD screen shall have a colour coded border
(header) that turns red on alarm, and shows basic UPS status in the header of
the display, visible at all times. The header shall alternately show UPS status
output voltage and battery time remaining, and be visible constantly in all display
screens. The home screen shall show load level, average efficiency, and power
consumption in kWh. The home screen shall show a system mimic diagram with
a colour-highlighted power path, operating mode, and active events.
2. Controls tab: Single button controls for turning the UPS on and off, transfer
to/from bypass, and enabling or disabling the battery charger, initiating a battery
test, and enabling or disabling Energy Saver System (ESS).
3. Metering tab: The metering screen shall show voltages currents, temperatures,
kW, kVA, and power factor (as applicable) for the UPS input, output, bypass
source, and battery. Colour coded (green, amber, red) bar graph indicators will
accompany power and temperature measurements
4. Logs tab: alarm/event queue, active alarms and alarm history, events, status
changes and commands, all timed to the 1/1000th second for tracking and
analysis.
5. Statistics tab: Numerically and graphically displays the savings afforded by ESS
operation over time in kWh.
6. Settings tab: shall provide button access to user adjustable settings such as, but
not limited to: date/time, building alarm designations, communications parameter
setup, UPS name, user passwords, and display language.
C. Control Panel Lamp Indicators: The UPS control panel shall provide the following
monitoring functions with indicator (icon) LED’s:
1. NORMAL: This green LED shall indicate that the commercial AC utility or
generator source is supplying power to the rectifier and the inverter is supporting
the critical load.
2. BYPASS: This amber LED shall indicate that the UPS has transferred the load
to the bypass circuit.
3. BATTERY: This amber LED shall indicate that the commercial AC utility or
generator source has failed and the battery is supplying power to the inverter,
which is supporting the load.
4. ALARM: This red LED and the accompanying audible alarm horn, shall indicate
that the UPS detects an alarm condition, outlined in detail in the Logs tab from
the home screen and in the operator’s manual.
D. Interface panel: The UPS shall be equipped with an interface panel, located behind a
protective cover, which provides the following signals and communication features in a
Class 2 environment:
1. Alarm contact: A dry contact for annunciating a summary alarm shall be
provided for customer use. This contact shall be Form “C” capable of supplying
both N/O and N/C contacts. Contact ratings shall be 5A max at a voltage not to
exceed 28VDC or 277VAC.
2. RS232 (EIA / TIA-232) and USB communications interfaces: Circuitry shall be
provided for one “host”, and one “device” USB connector, and one RS232 (EIA /
TIA-232) communication port for connection to automated service department
diagnostic tools. This port may be used with simple (“dumb”) terminals to gain
remote access to all unit operation information.
3. Building alarms: Five inputs shall be provided for monitoring the status of
external dry contacts. Building alarms shall be set up through the UPS
configuration mode function on the UPS front panel display or via the RS232
(EIA / TIA-232) port.
4. External Emergency Power Off contacts: Shall be provided to connect an
external remote emergency power off switch to shut down the UPS and de-
energise the critical load. Normally open or normally closed contacts shall be
acceptable.
2.8 COMMUNICATIONS

A. Communications Bay: The UPS shall be equipped with field configurable
communications bays that will accommodate three (3) plug-in communication devices
B. Remote Monitoring:
1. Optional WEB/SNMP communication capabilities will be available for all systems.
2. The UPS shall be able to be monitored remotely via communications devices.
UPS manufacturer shall provide optional communications devices capable of
communicating via various industry standard protocols such as RS232, SNMP,
BACnet and ModBus. Monitoring of UPS status may also be performed through
isolated dry contact Form C relays.
3. The UPS communication capability should be able to integrate into any industry
standard Building Management System (BMS) and/or Network Management
System (NMS). The UPS must also be able to be monitored via any standard
Internet browser.
4. All optional hardware interfaces shall be “Hot-swappable” (UPS maintains power
to critical applications while changing interfaces).
C. Shutdown:
1. There shall be a mechanism that provides graceful, orderly, unattended,
sequential shutdown of one or multiple computers powered by one UPS. This
shutdown shall be performed via in-network or out-of-network means. The order
of shutdown shall be user-defined, allowing the maximisation of runtime on
battery for more critical systems.
2. The UPS shall also be capable of interfacing with an operating system’s built-in
shutdown routine. This shall be done through a cable connection to the
communication interface card.
D. Notification:
1. There shall be a mechanism to send alerts to key personnel via email or SNMP
traps. An alarm notification may also be sent by a network message.
2.9 UPS MODULE PROTECTION AND SWITCHGEAR
A. Rectifier/Charger protection shall be provided through individual fusing of each phase.
B. 50-150kW non-scalable UPS: Battery protection shall be provided by fuses and a

thermal-magnetic moulded-case circuit breaker within the UPS. Standard external
battery cabinets (if used) shall include a thermal-magnetic moulded-case circuit breaker
within each or non-standard cabinets or racks shall include separately mounted external
protective devices.
C. Electronic current limiting circuitry and fuses in the Inverter circuit shall provide output
protection.
2.10 MULTI-MODULE PARALLEL SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
A. System Configuration:
1. The outputs of the parallel UPS modules shall be connected to the critical bus
within the UPS output distribution switchboard .
2. An external maintenance bypass switch shall be located either in a separate
enclosure or shall be incorporated in the UPS Output distribution board
B. Module Interconnections:
1. No inter-UPS module signals or control connections shall be required for
balanced UPS module load sharing.
2. No inter-UPS module signals or control connections shall be required for UPS
module selective tripping.
3. This wireless paralleling method shall not rely on information to be shared
between the UPS modules, thereby eliminating the need for inter-UPS module
communications.
4. This wireless selective tripping method shall not rely on information to be shared
between the UPS modules.
5. The external maintenance bypass switch shall include an interlock arrangement
with auxiliary contacts for each UPS module to ensure that each module is
operating on static bypass before the external maintenance bypass switch is
closed.
C. UPS Performance During Normal Operation:

1. The UPS modules shall not have a master/slave relationship.
2. Wireless selective tripping and load sharing shall eliminate a controls single point
of failure.
3. UPS modules shall share load equally to within <5% when operating normally.
4. The UPS shall feature constraints which do not permit it to be continuously
operated in a configuration where one UPS module is in bypass mode while
other UPS modules are in inverter mode and all UPS modules are connected to
the critical bus.
5. It shall be possible to continuously load all the UPS modules at 100% of the
individual UPS module ratings. UPS module redundancy shall be lost when the
load exceeds the rating of N-1 modules.
D. UPS Performance with a Faulty UPS Module:

1. In the event of a UPS module failure, the failed UPS module shall remove itself
from the critical bus. The remaining UPS modules shall immediately assume the
entire critical load.
2. The UPS shall not interrupt the flow of conditioned power to the critical load, if
one UPS module fails.
3. The UPS shall not interrupt the supply of power to the critical load, if a fuse in the
bypass circuit blows.
E. Load Sharing:
1. The UPS shall share the critical load between the UPS modules equally so that
each UPS module’s load is always within 5% of the others.
2. The UPS shall be capable of providing balanced load sharing without any inter-
UPS module connections.
3. Each UPS module shall need to monitor only its own input and output power in
order to remain phase locked with the other UPS modules. This wireless
paralleling method shall not rely on information to be shared between the UPS
modules.
F. Selective Tripping:
1. The UPS shall be able to selectively trip a failed UPS module off-line without any
inter-UPS module connections.
2. Each UPS module shall look only at itself to determine if a UPS module failure
has occurred. If a UPS module failure does occur, the faulty UPS module shall
identify its own internal failure and subsequently remove itself from the critical
bus by instantaneously shutting off the inverter and subsequently opening an

output contactor internal to the UPS module. This wireless selective tripping
method shall not rely on information to be shared between the UPS modules.
3. The selective trip method each UPS module employs to identify an internal
failure, shall require the UPS module to look for changes in UPS module output
voltage and output current data relative to recent output current and voltage data.
4. If a UPS module does isolate itself from the critical bus, due to an identified
internal failure, the UPS module shall try three times to restart. If the UPS module
successfully restarts and its output is stable and remains within specification
limits, it shall resynchronise with the critical bus and automatically reconnect itself
to the critical bus. The reconnected UPS module shall resume load sharing with
the other UPS modules and UPS level redundancy shall once again be available.
5. The selective trip controls within each UPS module shall be independent of the
inverter controls. The inverter controls within each UPS module shall also provide
selective tripping capability for removing a faulty UPS module from the critical
bus.
6. The selective trip controls within each UPS module shall be continuously
monitored to assure they are functioning properly. Failure of a UPS module’s
selective trip controls shall not impair its ability to parallel its output and share the
critical load with the other UPS module. A UPS module shall alarm if it
determines its selective trip controls have failed.
2.11 RACK MOUNTED UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
A. Rack Mounted UPS shall be provided and installed in IDF locations as indicated on the
drawings.
B. The UPS shall provide the following minimum performance and features:-
1. Output Power Capacity: 5kVA and 6kVA
2. Technology: On-line double-conversion with Power Factor
Correction (PFC) system
3. Nominal Voltage: 240V
4. Input voltage range: 100-276V
5. Input frequency range: 50/60 Hz +/- 5 Hz
6. Crest Factor: 3.1/90A
7. Efficiency at Full Load: Up to 94% in Online mode,
98% in Hi-Efficiency mode
8. Overload capacity: 102-130% : 120s, 130-150%: 30s,
125-150%: 10s, >150%: 100ms
9. Outputs: Terminal block + 2 controlled groups of 4 IEC
C13 (10A) + 2 IEC C19 (16A)
10. Battery Type: Maintenance-free sealed Lead-Acid leak
proof battery with suspended electrolyte
11. Battery autonomy: 30 minutes
12. Battery management: Temperature compensated charging method,
Automatic battery test and deep discharge
protection
13. Communication: 1 slot for Network-M2, Network-MS, ModBus-
MS
14. Noise level: <46dB
15. Safety: IEC/EN 62040-1, UL 1778 & CSA 22.2 (5 &
6kVA RT only)
16. EMC performance: IEC/EN 62040 -2 , IEC/EN 62040-3
17. Approvals: CE, CB report (TUV)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
3.2 COMMISSIONING
A. Factory start-up shall be provided on a 5x8 basis (7x24 optional). UPS

manufacturer/authorised service provider shall also offer the following optional services:
1. Pre-energise visit to inspect installation and provide guidance to installers as
required.
2. Post-start-up visit for alarm notification configuration, operator training, generator
testing, etc.
B. The following procedures and tests shall be performed by Field Service personnel
during the UPS start-up:
1. Visual Inspection:
a. Visually inspect all equipment for signs of damage or foreign materials.
b. Observe the type of ventilation, the cleanliness of the room, the use of
proper signs, and any other safety related factors.
2. Mechanical Inspection:
a. Check all the power connections for tightness.
b. Check all the control wiring terminations and plugs for tightness or proper
seating.
3. Electrical Pre-check:
a. Check the DC bus for a possible short circuit.
b. Check input and Bypass power for proper voltages and phase rotation.
c. Check all lamp test functions.
4. Initial UPS Start-up:
a. Verify that all the alarms are in a “go” condition.
b. Energise the UPS module and verify the proper DC, walk-up, and AC
phase on.
c. Check the DC link holding voltage, AC output voltages, and output
waveforms.
d. Check the final DC link voltage and Inverter AC output. Adjust if required.
e. Check for the proper synchronisation.
f. Check for the voltage difference between the Inverter output and the
Bypass source.
g. Optional on site full-load, step-load, and battery discharge tests using
supplier furnished load bank, shall also be offered.
5. Operational Training: Before leaving the site, the field service engineer shall
familiarise responsible personnel with the operation of the UPS. The UPS
equipment shall be available for demonstration of the modes of operation.
3.3 TRAINING

maintenance.
3.4 MAINTENANCE
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 3533
POWER FACTOR CORRECTION EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
This specification for capacitor banks to improve power factor in low voltage electrical
distribution systems, issued latest by the Ministry of Electricity and Water & Renewable Energy
(MEW), Kuwait, shall govern all government and private sector projects and installations
throughout the State of Kuwait as applicable under the Ministerial Decree No. 5/2010 dated
18th January 2010. The specification and/or any part thereof cannot be altered or amended
without the knowledge of the Ministry of Electricity & Water, Kuwait, and attention is drawn to
all Consumers/Owners, Consultants, Suppliers, Manufacturers and Contractors that while
specifying and making provision for such capacitor banks, the Ministry specification shall be
strictly adhered to in its full extent and the Ministry only will be the sole authority to give the
technical approval. Should there be a need to deviate from and/or to include any specific
requirement for a particular project; a written approval shall be obtained in all cases from the
Ministry of Electricity & Water. The Ministry has the right to take all administrative procedures
and legal implications of the violation of this resolution.
All previous issues of this specification and issue of any part or section thereof are now
obsolete and superseded by this present issue.
A. This specification covers the design, manufacture, assembly, testing at the

manufacturer’s works at country of origin before dispatch, installation details, site
testing, warranty, etc., of the Automatically Switched Low Voltage Capacitor Banks to be
installed and connected at the Main LV Distribution Board buses and/or at the Sub-main
Distribution Board buses of the electrical distribution systems or at the service intake of
the consumers, in order that the power factor can be maintained within 0.95 lagging and
unity, as to the regulations of the Ministry of Electricity and Water, Kuwait.

3. Division 26 Section 26 2413 "Switchboards".
1.03 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS IN KUWAIT
A. The equipment required shall be suitable for the electrical distribution systems, the
characteristics of which are:
1. System voltage 11 KV 415 volts.
KEO/19-3262-0000 26 3533/1 Power Factor Correction Equipment
2. System Highest Voltage 12 KV 457 volts.
3. Frequency 50 Hz. 50 Hz.
4. Neutral point Earthed solidly or through Solidly earthed
10.5 Ohms resistance.
5. Maximum fault level 31.5 kA at 12 KV 50 kA

6. Maximum fault duration 1.25 seconds 0.50 seconds.
1.04 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
A. All materials and equipment shall comply as a minimum:

1. With the latest relevant recommendations of the International Electro-Technical
Commission (IEC) or relevant standards/recommendations of American National
Standards Institution (ANSI), Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
(IEEE) and/or Underwriter Laboratories (UL), if available.
2. If (A) above is not available, with the latest relevant British Standard Specification
(B.S.S). This applies to quality of material, testing etc.. If standards as mentioned
above contradict with this specification, then the requirements of this
specification shall apply.
B. Manufacturers who manufacture materials and equipment based on standards other

than those mentioned under (i) above can do so provided they confirm that such
standards meet the requirements under (i) as a minimum and shall prove this if needed
by the Purchaser.
C. What is mentioned under (i) and (ii) above applies to wherever BSS is mentioned in the
different clauses of this specification.
1.05 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
A. Climatic conditions in Kuwait are rigorous and the summer season during which the
equipment will function under continuous maximum load conditions is long and shall be
considered to fall during the period starting from 15th April till 15th November. The
remainder of the year shall be considered as winter season since autumn and spring
seasons are very short in Kuwait.
B. The following are prevailing atmospheric conditions:

1. Ambient temperature in shade : Maximum 55 Degrees C (summer day)
2. : Minimum – 6 Degree C (winter night)
Maximum sun radiation
temperature as measured
with a black bulb thermometer : 85 Degrees C.
Average maximum ambient
temperature : 45 Degrees C.
C. Provides of high humidity are common and a humidity of 100% has been recorded at 30
degrees centigrade. However, high temperature is normally accompanied with low
humidity. Violent sand and dust storms occur with wind speeds up to 120 Km/hour, and
even on comparatively still days, fine dust is carried in suspension in the atmosphere.
The average rainfall in a year is 15 cms. but this can be concentrated into 2 or 3 severe
downpours.

D. The capacitors banks, series reactors, power factor controllers, power quality meters,
switchgear and other equipment called for in this specification must give continuous and
trouble free service under the arduous conditions mentioned above. The electrical
rooms wherein the capacitor banks will be installed shall have suitable air-conditioning
systems to ensure uninterrupted operation of these devices.
1.06 TECHNICAL STUDIES AND DETAILS OF RESPONSIBILITIES & REQUIREMENTS
A. The supplier/manufacturer/contractor before supplying and installing any capacitor

banks in any part of the electrical distribution systems, shall carry out a comprehensive
facility survey, study and cost analysis in order to ensure that maximum benefit is
derived from installing such capacitor banks with respect to the KVAR saving and power
quality improvement, and there will be no undue problems of any kind when the
capacitor bank is installed into a distribution system, in particular, problems arising from
harmonic currents due to the presence of non-linear loads in the system and/or from
harmonic resonance and capacitor switching transients.
B. The supplier/manufacturer/contractor shall be fully responsible for his equipment and

installation of capacitor banks into electrical distribution systems and in case of any
damage to any distribution system equipment like transformer, switchgears, cables, etc.
due to negligence to his work, improper study of the distribution system and/or
unsuitable equipment selection and installation, at any time starting from the initiation of
the installation works up to a period of three (3) years from the date of commissioning,
the supplier/manufacturer/contractor has to replace all damaged distribution system
equipment with new ones as approved by the Purchaser’s Engineer and at no extra cost
whatsoever. In addition, for any power failure due to such incidents, a penalty of
KD.100/- per hour will be charged from the supplier/manufacturer/contractor till the
power supply is satisfactorily reinstated after all repair and replacement works.
contents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

documents, use only firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of Power Factor
Correction Equipment, of types and capacities required which have been in satisfactory
use in similar or service for not less than ten (10) years and approved by the Engineer.

2.02 DETAILS OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A. POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITOR BANKS:

1. Type:
The power factor correction capacitor banks shall be three phase, of modular
design, shall be switched ON/OFF automatically in steps through the use of
Electromagnetic Contactors designed for capacitor switching or shall be Thyristor
controlled depending on the type of electrical loads and shall incorporate series
reactors for blocking harmonic current and to prevent resonance. The
supplier/manufacturer/contractor shall study the load profile before selecting the
suitable type of switching system.
2. Normal Rating:
The normal rating of the capacitor banks shall be the maximum continuous rating
at an ambient temperature of 52oC (Fifty-two degrees centigrade) as frequently
encountered in Kuwait during the peak summer days.
3. Applicable Standards:
Unless specified otherwise the capacitor banks shall conform in design, material,
construction and performance to the latest editions of the IEC standards, their
corresponding British/European (BS EN) or American (ANSI, UL) standards and
in particular to the following publications :
a. IEC 61921: Power capacitors – Low voltage power factor
correction banks.
b. IEC 60831-1: Shunt power capacitors of the self-healing type for
a.c. systems having a rated voltage up to and
including 1000 V - Part I: General – Performance,
testing and rating - Safety requirements - Guide for
installation and operation.
c. IEC 60831-2: Shunt power capacitors of the self-healing type for
a.c. systems having a rated voltage up to and
including 1000 V - Part 2: Ageing test, self-healing
test and destruction test.
d. IEC 61439-1: Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear
Assemblies - Part 1: General Rules
e. IEC 60076-6: Power transformers - Part 6: Reactors
f. IEC 60747-6: Semiconductor devices. Discrete devices. Part 6:
Thyristors.
g. IEC 60085-1: Electrical insulation – Thermal evaluation and
designation.
h. IEC 60664: Insulation coordination for equipment within low-
voltage systems.
i. IEC 60947-1: Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 1:
General rules
j. IEC 60947-2: Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 2:
Circuit-breakers.
k. IEC 60947-3: Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 3:
Switches, disconnectors, switch-disconnectors and
fuse-combination units.
l. IEC 60947-4-1: Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 4-1:
Contactors and motor starters.
m. IEC 60502-1: Power cables with extruded insulation and their
accessories for rated voltages from 1 kV (Um=1.2
kV) up to 30 kV (Um=36kV) Part-1: Cables for rated
voltages of 1 kV (Um=1.2 kV) and 3 kV (Um=3.6 kV).

n. IEC 60529: Degree of protection provided by enclosures (IP
code).
o. BS EN 14604: Smoke alarm devices.
p. UL 508A: Low voltage switched power factor correction banks
assembly.
q. UL 810: Low voltage capacitors.
r. IEEE 519-1992: IEEE Recommended Practices and Requirements
for Harmonic Control in Electric Power Systems.
In addition to the above listed standards, the regulations for electrical installations
issued by the Ministry of Electricity & Water, Kuwait shall also be adhered to.
4. Drawings and Information:
The consumer/owner and/or his consultant or contractor shall prepare and
furnish the following drawings and documents along with their submittal for
approval of the capacitor bank by the Ministry of Electricity & Water.
a. A copy of the load form which has been made available to the Electrical
Installation Department of the Ministry of Electricity & Water.
b. Project’s schematic diagram of the electrical distribution system.
c. Design calculations for KVAR capacity of the capacitor banks in originals
as per the Ministry of Electricity and Water & Renewable Energy (MEW)
practice, duly signed and stamped by the consultant/contractor and
manufacturer.
d. Design calculations for harmonic distortions in originals duly signed and
stamped by the consultant/contractor and manufacturer. A declaration
shall be submitted stating that active harmonic filters will be provided in
case the measurements after installation lead to such requirements.
e. Consultant/Contractor’s study report on the type of electrical load of the
project along with Supplier/Manufacturer’s recommendation on the
suitability of the proposed capacitor bank duly signed and stamped.
f. Manufacturer’s technical brochure/catalogues for various major
components.
g. Dimensional drawings showing constructional details of capacitor banks
with details of all components including schematics for protection and
controls of the capacitor bank.
h. Complete type test reports and certificates for a 400 KVAR capacitor
bank, capacitor units and other major components from independent test
laboratory (ASTA, KEMA or, CESI).
i. Technical manual giving installation, operation and maintenance
instructions
j. Supplier’s/manufacturer’s/contractor’s guarantee on the capacitor banks
in original letterhead for a period of three (3) years from the date of
commissioning for fully satisfactory operation and running of the
equipment and against any manufacturing defect and mal-functioning.
k. Letter of confirmation on the provision of air-conditioning for the
Electrical/LT room wherein the capacitor banks will be installed.
l. Declaration by the manufacturer/local agent that testing and
commissioning of the capacitor banks will be carried out by qualified and
trained manufacturer’s and/or local agent’s engineer/specialist.
m. Original payment receipt along with a copy of the same. Original receipt
will be returned after scrutinizing.
B. CAPACITOR UNITS:
The capacitor units required for the different types of low voltage capacitor banks shall
be Dry or Oil Capacitors, self-healing type with individual discharge resistors and shall
be protected against internal faults, over pressure, etc., and manufactured in full
compliance with and tested to the requirements of the International Electro-technical
Commission Publication No. IEC 60831, Part-1 and Part-2.
1. The capacitor units will be installed in an electrical distribution system having
system voltage of 415 volts (System highest voltage 457 volts) and shall be rated
at 525 volts or higher due to the voltage rise caused by connecting the detuned
series reactors and considering the worst temperature conditions encountered in
Kuwait.
2. The capacitor units shall be of single phase or three phase type.
3. The ambient temperature category of the capacitor units shall be -5/D as a
minimum to IEC Publication No. 60831, Part-1.
4. The capacitance of the capacitor units shall not differ from the rated capacitance
by more than –5 % to +10 % for units and banks up to 100 KVAR and –5 % to +5
% for units and banks above 100 KVAR.
5. The capacitors shall be of the self-healing type and the dielectric for dry capacitor
units shall be from low-loss metallised polypropylene film. The dielectric for oil
capacitor units shall be from double metallised paper and polypropylene or
metallised polypropylene having PCB-free oil impregnation.
6. The dry capacitor units shall be completely leakge proof and of dry type
construction without any filling of jelly, wax, etc.
7. The capacitor element casings for dry capacitor units shall be from Aluminum or
high temperature withstanding nonflammable material and for oil capacitor units
the casings shall be Aluminum.
8. The capacitor units shall have suitable adequate protection to ensure safe
disconnection from the circuit in case of an excessive internal temperature rise
and/or an abnormal increase of the internal pressure either by having an internal
fuse link combined with a secondary solid foil electrode or by an overpressure
disconnector device. The capacitor units with overpressure disconnector device
shall have visual indication for easy identification of damaged units with naked
eye.
9. The capacitors shall have permanently connected built-in discharge resistors to
ensure safe discharge of the capacitors to less than 50 volts in 1 minute after
switch off.
10. The total losses including discharge resistors to be less than 0.5 Watt/KVAR.
11. All exposed terminals and discharge resistors of the capacitor units shall be
adequately shrouded.
12. The capacitors shall be rated for a minimum of 130% continuous current
overload and 110% continuous voltage overload based on the Rated Voltage of
the capacitors.
13. Suitable rating plates from non-corrosive material shall be provided on each
capacitor unit giving fully detailed information as follows:
Capacitor Unit Rating Plate:
a. Manufacturer.
b. Serial number and manufacturing year.
c. Rated total output in kilovars (KVAR)
d. Rated voltage in volts (V).
e. Rated frequency in hertz (Hz).
f. Temperature category and temperature range.
g. Discharge device.
h. Reference of self-healing design.
i. Connection symbol.
j. Internal fuses (if provided).
k. Indication for the overpressure.
l. Insulation level in kilovolts (KV).
m. Reference to IEC 60831 (plus year of issue of the edition).
C. SERIES REACTORS TO PREVENT AMPLIFICATION OF SYSTEM HARMONICS:

The three phase series reactors to be connected in series with each capacitor unit for
blocking harmonic current and to prevent resonance shall be iron cored type with copper
windings. The reactor shall comply with the IEC Publication No. 60076-6.
1. The current ratings of the reactors shall be increased suitably to take into
account the effect of harmonics in the networks which could be generated by
variable speed drives, dimmers, elevators, UPS system, fax machines,
computers, fluorescent and other discharge lamps, etc. The offered reactors
shall be tested by harmonic current generating test equipment with magnitudes
corresponding to the maximum harmonic current magnitudes measured in any
distribution system. All necessary test reports for such tests and measurements
shall be submitted to the Purchaser for scrutiny and record purposes.
2. The reactor insulation shall be Class “H” rated at 180oC to IEC 60085-1. The
maximum temperature of the reactor at maximum continuous RMS amperage
shall be no higher than 145oC with a 55oC ambient. The maximum continuous
RMS amperage of the reactor shall be sized to match the maximum continuous
RMS amperage of the capacitors. The minimum reactor Q factor shall be 25.
3. The reactors shall be equipped with snap action thermostats to trip at 160oC and
shall be wired to the associated controller output contact. In the event of a
reactor over temperature the stage contactor shall open. There should be an
option of automatic re-closures or latching action. When a higher class of
insulation rated at 220oC is provided for the reactors, the snap action
thermostats shall be set to trip at 180oC.
4. The capacitors and the reactors combination shall be tuned below the third
harmonic frequency level. The supplier/manufacturer/contractor must ensure that
the compensation of reactive power at fundamental frequency is achieved along
with avoidance of resonance at harmonic frequency.
D. SWITCH-DISCONNECTORS:
1. The capacitor bank shall have a suitably rated switch-disconnector at the
incomer. The switchdisconnector shall be three-pole and shall fully comply with
the requirements of the IEC 60947-1 & 3. The rated insulation voltage of the
switch-disconnector shall be minimum 690 V and it shall be designed for
continuous operation in ambient temperatures of up to 52oC or shall be derated
accordingly. The rated operational current shall be at least 1.5 times the full load
current of the capacitor bank and the rated short time withstand current, 50 kA for
0.5 second. It shall have a class of duty AC-22B. It shall have a rotary front
operating door mounted handle and should be interlocked with the door to
ensure that the capacitor bank is de-energised when door is open.
2. Each stage of the capacitor bank shall have a suitably rated moulded case circuit
breaker (MCCB) or high rupturing capacity (HRC) fuses together with a thermal
magnetic overcurrent relay for overload protection. The circuit breaker and the
thermal magnetic overcurrent relay shall be adjusted to trip if the RMS current of
the stage exceeds 130%.
E. THYRISTOR SWITCHED CONTACTOR:

The thyristor switched contactor shall fully comply with and tested to the requirements of
the relevant IEC and/or BS specifications and shall be rated for 2200 PIV. They shall be
fully suitable for the extreme temperature and weather conditions prevailing in Kuwait
and guaranteed for fully satisfactory operation and running under such temperature and
weather conditions.

1. The thyristor switched contactor shall be capable of handling the continuous
current of 130% of the rated capacitor current at rated voltage of 415V. The
blocking voltage of the thyristor switch during off condition should be minimum
2200 Volt peak. Every thyristor switch should be capable of handling the dv/dt of
2000 Volts/µS. This is to avoid spurious turn off while powering up as well as due
to supply transients.
2. The thyristor switched contactor used shall turn on at zero differential voltage
across it. This zero differential voltage tolerance shall not exceed 6 Volts peak
value around zero.
3. The time delay between turn off and subsequent turn on should be as minimum
as possible and in the range of milliseconds. There should not be any discharge
devices across capacitor that can exceed the watt loss of more than 30 watt. The
capacitors should not be discharged to zero level before they are put back in the
circuit. The differential zero voltage sensing should even be able to capture the
zero voltage instance even when voltage across the capacitors is equal to the
peak of the mains voltage waveform. (This is to avoid wastage of energy stored
in capacitor while fast switching conditions.)
4. The thyristor switched contactor should be provided with adequate protections
against any external transients that creates current and/or voltage spikes.
Adequate arrangement like forced commutation and/or tuning reactors shall be
provided with every thyristor switched unit block to prevent the thyristors from
exceeding its i2t rating.
5. Over-Temperature of Heat-Sink:
6. The heat sink on which the thyristors are mounted shall be monitored
continuously for over temperature. The over temperature fault shall switch off the
thyristor switches put on the heat sink. The recommended trip level is at 800C.
This fault shall have an auto-restart function.
F. ELECTROMAGNETIC CONTACTOR:
1. The electromagnetic contactors shall be 660 Volts rated, of 3-pole type suitable
for switching 'on' and switching 'off' operations of capacitor banks and shall
comply with the requirements of the IEC 60947-1 & 4-1. The supplier shall
choose a contactor of a suitable operational current rating taking into
consideration the inrush current and the special considerations of capacitor
switching duty. Incidence of higher inrush current in the case of successive
switching of capacitor banks shall also be taken into account. The supplier shall
furnish data sheet of contactor in support of proper selection of the contactor
rating including the making and breaking current ratings. The contactors shall
isolate all three supply phases to the capacitor on switch off.
2. The rated voltage of control coil shall be 415V (phase-to-phase). This voltage is
subject to a variation of (+) 10% and (-) 15%. The contactors shall work
satisfactorily within this voltage range. The pickup voltage of coil shall be 60%
and drop out voltage shall not be more than 50% of rated voltage.
3. The mechanical endurance of the contactors shall not be less than 3 million
operating cycles at no load. The electrical endurance at normal utilization duty for
capacitor shall not be less than 200,000 operations.
4. The contactors shall be subject4d to routine and type tests as described in IEC
60947.
G. ACTIVE HARMONIC FILTERS FOR HARMONIC CURRENT FILTRATION:

1. The active harmonic filters shall be provided only if the measurements of total
harmonic current and voltage distortions after installation and commissioning of
the capacitor banks and energizing of full load exceed the limits specified in IEEE
519.
2. The active harmonic filters shall work on the principle of measurement of
harmonic currents and generate actively a harmonic spectrum in opposite phrase
to the measured distorting harmonic current thereby canceling the original
harmonics.
a. The rating of the active harmonic filters shall be so selected that the total
harmonic current and voltage distortion at the point of common coupling is
brought down to below the total harmonic current and voltage distortion
limits specified in IEEE 519, as extracted below.
b. Table 10-3 – Current Distortion Limits for General Distribution Systems
(120 V Through 69 000 V)
Maximum Harmonic Current Distortion in Percent of IL

Individual Harmonic Order (Odd Harmonics)
11<h< 17<h< 23<h<
Isc/IL <11 35<h TDD
17 23 35
<20* 4.0 2.0 1.5 0.6 0.3 5.0
20<50 7.0 3.5 2.5 1.0 0.5 8.0
50<10
10.0 4.5 4.0 1.5 0.7 12.0
0
100<1
12.0 5.5 5.0 2.0 1.0 15.0
000
>1000 15.0 7.0 6.0 2.5 1.4 20.0
Even harmonics are limited to 25% of the odd harmonic
limits above.
Current distortions that result in a dc offset, e.g., half-wave
converters, are not allowed.
*All power generation equipment is limited to these values
of current distortion, regardless of actual Isc/IL.
Where
Isc = maximum short-circuit current at PCC.
IL = maximum demand load current (fundamental frequency
component) at PCC.
Table 11-1 Voltage Distortion Limits
Total Voltage
Individual Voltage
Bus Voltage at PCC Distortion THD
Distortion (%)
(%)
69 kV and below 3.0 5.0
69.001 kV through
1.5 2.5
161 kV
161.001 kV and
1.0 1.5
above
NOTE – High-voltage systems can have up to 2.0% THD
where the cause is an HVDC terminal that will attenuate by
the time it is tapped for a user.
c. Should there be a large component of single phase non linear loads

present in a distribution system (offices, shopping malls, etc) then
measurements/calculations must be carried out to ascertain the
magnitude of the third harmonic current and provisions shall be made for
a suitably rated 3 phase, 4 wire active harmonic filters.

d. Should there be a large component of three phase non linear loads
present in a distribution system (Industrial loads with VFD’s etc) then
measurements/calculations must be carried out to ascertain the
magnitude of the third harmonic current and provisions shall be made for
a suitably rated, 3 Phase, 3 wire active harmonic filters.
e. The active harmonic filters shall be of parallel configuration.
f. The active harmonic filters shall monitor all three phases of the low
voltage line current in real time by means of a Digital Signal Processor
(DSP).
g. The output of the DSP unit in combination with a micro-controller based
system shall generate a pulse width modulated (PWM) signal to control
power modules based on IGBT (Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor)
technology which act as a current source.
h. The PWM signal shall be of fixed switching frequency.
i. The system shall be operated under closed loop control and shall have a
maximum response time of not more than 40 milliseconds. The control
system shall be such that the Active Filter cannot be overloaded.
j. Simultaneous filtering shall be provided for all harmonics up to the 50th
one.
k. The filtering efficiency shall be typically of better than 97%.
l. The operating power factor of the active harmonic filters shall be
programmable over the range 0.7 capacitive to 0.7 inductive.
m. The active harmonic filters shall be protected against over current, short-
circuit, thermal overload and IGBT bridge abnormal operation.
n. The design of the active harmonic filters shall be such that the current
rating of the filter system can be increased by the addition of extra power
modules.
o. Graphic monitoring of the wave shape shall be provided.
p. On-line harmonic analysis shall be provided.
q. After the installation of the active harmonic filters, harmonic
measurements shall be carried out to prove that the total harmonic
distortion is within IEEE 519 limits.
H. AUTOMATIC POWER FACTOR CONTROLLER:

1. The automatic power factor controller shall be microprocessor based VAR
Sensing type and shall comply with IEC 61326. The controller shall be able to
sense the reactive current requirement and switch on / off to the required stage
of the capacitor bank.
a. The automatic power factor controller shall maintain a targeted power
factor within 0.95 lagging and unity.
b. The controller shall be programmed to have different switching
sequences. In general, for 500, 450, 400 and 350 KVAR Capacitor Banks,
the sequences shall be respectively 1:1:2:2:2:2 (i.e.,
50/50/100/100/100/100 KVAR), 1;1:1:2:2:2 (i.e.,50/50/50/100/100/100
KVAR), 1:1:2:2:2 (i.e., 50/50/100/100/100 KVAR) and 1::2:2:2 (i.e.,
50/100/100/100 KVAR) and similar. Other switching sequences as per the
manufacturer’s recommendation shall also be considered.
c. The controller shall have provision for manual operation capability to
switch on/off the stages manually for maintenance and troubleshooting
purposes.
d. The controller shall sense current from a single phase and voltage from
two phases to compute the average 3-phase power factor and accordingly
compensate by switching in necessary capacitor stages.

e. The voltage input to the controller shall be direct or through a VT and shall
be protected by a fuse.
f. The controller shall be suitable for 1A or 5 A current input.
g. The voltage on the capacitor terminals may be particularly high at times of
light load conditions. In such cases, some or all of the capacitors shall be
switched out of circuit in order to prevent overstressing of the capacitors
and undue voltage increase in the distribution system.
h. The controller shall be easily programmable from front panel itself.
i. The controller shall be able to recognize the connection of CT and
Voltage and be able to automatically adjust itself to the phase angle
difference.
j. There should be a time delay of 120 seconds for switching on a capacitor
bank into circuit, from its last disconnection from the circuit.
k. The controller shall have LED/LCD display. On/Off status of each bank
shall be displayed on the controller using LEDs. Parameter in display
should be cyclic with suitable time delay. Necessary membrane key pad
for manual scrolling of display parameter shall be provided. The display
unit shall be easily visible without opening the doors of the capacitor bank
panel.
l. The controller shall have RS485 and/or RS232 facility for communication.
m. The automatic power factor controller in general shall have the following
measurements/displays and settings.
Measurements/Displays:
1) Current Power Factor and Target Power Factor.

2) True RMS line Voltage and Current (VRMS and IRMS).
3) Delta power (Reactive power exceeding or necessary with respect
to target PF)
4) Current at fundamental frequency (If0)
5) Harmonic current (Iharm)
6) Total harmonic distortion of current in percentage (THDI %) vii)
Instantaneous temperature
7) Active power, Reactive power and apparent power
8) Power of each stage/bank (kvar)
9) On/Off status of each stage/bank
10) Software version
11) MAX values encountered for
a) RMS voltage and current
b) Temperature
c) Active, reactive and apparent power
d) Total harmonic distortion of current %
12) Counters preferably for
a) Switching operation of each stage
b) Under voltage
c) Over current and voltage
d) Over temperature
e) Over compensation
f) Under compensation
g) Over THD current
n. Settings:
1) Target power factor
2) Reconnection time delay
3) Current transformer ratio
4) Over temperature limit
5) Total harmonic distortion of current (THDI%) limit
6) THDI intervention delay
7) THDI peak limit
8) Ventilation trigger temperature
9) Power (kVAR) for each stage/bank
10) Voltage of the capacitor banks
11) Network frequency
12) System mode (2 or 4 quadrants)
13) Tolerance sensibility to Cos phi regulation
14) Alarm reset time delay
15) External alarm relay
16) Reset of programming
17) Password
o. The automatic power factor controllers shall initiate alarms and warnings
in the following events.
1) Under compensation (Insufficient capacitor output and/or low
power factor)
2) Over compensation
3) Over current
4) Under voltage
5) Over voltage
6) Over temperature
7) Total harmonic distortion of current (THDI%) limits exceeded.
p. The automatic power factor controllers shall instantaneously switch off the
contactor/thyristor in the following contingencies.
1) Voltage above 457V
2) Voltage below 353V
3) Over temperature
4) Over compensation
5) Instances of spike current
Notes :
1. In case of i) to iv) above, normal automatic functioning of the capacitor bank will
resume after the specified values in all these cases are maintained for two
minutes.
2. In case of v) above, the Contactor/thyristor will not switch ON again till the fault
condition is attended to.
I. POWER QUALITY METERING:

1. For electrical installations having installed capacity of 2 MVA and more, a Power
Quality (PQ) Meter shall be installed in the Capacitor Bank Panels.
2. A separate power quality meter need not be provided when the automatic power
factor (APC) controller incorporates most of the salient features of the power
quality meter. Also, provision of a power quality meter is not required for smaller
electrical installations having installed capacity of less than 2 MVA.
3. The Power Quality (PQ) Meter shall be a micro-processor based, operating as an
intelligent unit to monitor and measure all the electrical parameters of the system.
The PQ Meter shall sense and monitor 3 Phase Currents, Neutral Current, 3
Phase Voltages, 3 Phase Power Factors, 3 Phase KW, KVA, KVAR, KW-HR,
KVA-HR, KVAR-HR, Capacitance of all 3 phases, Capacitance of each capacitor
and % THD. It shall be equipped with LCD display with graphic data display, Real
Time Clock (RTC) internal chip for date-time stamping of the events and data
logging functionality.
a. Compliance to Standards:
1) The power quality meters shall comply with one or more of the
following safety/construction standards:
a) IEC 61010-1 (EN 61010-1): Safety requirements for
electrical equipment for measurement, control and
laboratory use.
b) CSA C22.0 No 1010-1: Canadian Standards Association.
Certified by Canadian Standards Association (CSA).
c) iii) UL 61010B-1: Measuring, Testing and Signal
Generation Equipment
d) IEC 62052-11: Electricity metering equipment (AC) –
General requirements, tests and test conditions.
2) The power quality meters shall comply to the following
electromagnetic immunity standards:
a) IEC 1000-4-2 (EN61000-4-2/IEC801-2): Electrostatic
Discharge (B).
b) IEC 1000-4-3 (EN61000-4-3/IEC801-3): Radiated EM Field
Immunity (A).
c) IEC 1000-4-4 (EN61000-4-4/IEC801-4): Electric Fast
Transient (B).
d) IEC 1000-4-5 (EN61000-4-5/IEC801-5): Surge Immunity
(B).
e) IEC 1000-4-6 (EN61000-4-6/IEC801-6): Conducted
Immunity.
f) IEC 1000-4-12 (EN61000-4-12/IEC801-12): Immunity to
damped oscillatory waves.
g) IEC 1000-3-2 (EN61000-3-2): Limits for harmonic currents
emissions (equipment input current < 16 amps per phase).
h) IEC 1000-3-3 (EN61000-3-3): Limitation of voltage
fluctuations and flicker in low voltage supply systems for
equipment with rated current < 16 amps.
3) The power quality meter shall have a 3rd party certification proving
compliance to one or more of the following electromagnetic
emission standards:
a) FCC Part 15 Subpart B, Class A: Class A Digital Device,
Radiated Emissions.
b) ICES-003, Industry Canada, Interference Causing
Equipment Standard (ICES) Class A Digital Device,
Radiated/Conducted Emissions.
c) EN55011 (CISPR 11): Radiated/Conducted Emissions
(Group 1, Class A).
d) EN55022 (CISPR 22): Radiated/Conducted Emissions
(Class A).
4) Current/Voltage Inputs:
a) The current inputs for power quality meter shall be taken
from the current transformer on the LV board.
b) The power quality meter shall have adequate numbers of
voltage inputs and current inputs.
c) In its standard configuration, the meter shall be able to
accept 500VAC LL / 347VAC LN without using potential
transformers.
d) It shall be able to withstand 1500 VAC RMS continuously
without damaging the device.

e) It shall have adequate nominal and overcorrect current
ratings.
b. Measured Values:
1) The power quality meter shall provide at minimum the following
voltage, current, power, power factor and energy values:
a) Voltage: L–L Per-Phase, L-L 3-Phase Avg., L–N Per-Phase,
3-Phase Avg., Voltage Unbalance Factor
b) Current: Per-Phase, Neutral, 3-Phase Avg., 3-Phase
Demand Current (Average over a programmable integration
interval), Maximum 3-Phase Demand Current with date and
time.
c) Power: Real, Reactive, Apparent (Per-Phase, 3-Phase
Total)
d) Power Factor: True & Displacement (Per-Phase, 3-Phase
Total)
e) Energy: Accumulated, Incremental, Conditional (kWh,
kVARh, kVAh) (Signed/Absolute)
2) The power quality meter shall provide a minimum/maximum value
for any measured parameter.
3) The power quality meter shall be capable of deriving values for any
combination of measured or calculated parameter, using the
following arithmetic, trigonometric, and logic functions (or
equivalent PLC capabilities):
a) Arithmetic functions: division, multiplication, addition,
subtraction, power, absolute value, square root, average,
max, min, RMS, sum, sum-of-squares, unary minus, integer
ceiling, integer floor, modulus, exponent, PI.
b) Trigonometric functions: COS, SIN, TAN, ARCCOS,
ARCSIN, ARCTAN, LN, LOG10
c) Logic functions: =, =>, <=, <>, <, >, AND, OR, NOT, IF
d) Thermocouple linearization functions: Type J, Type K, Type
R, Type RTD, and Type T
e) Temperature conversion functions: C to F, F to C
c. Accuracy:
1) The power quality meters shall meet the following accuracy
classes.
a) ANSI C12.20 accuracy class 0.2.
b) IEC62053-22: Electricity metering equipment (AC) –
particular requirements – part 22: static meters for active
energy, accuracy class 0.2S.
c) IEC62053-23: Electricity metering equipment (AC) –
particular requirements – part 23: static meters for reactive
energy, accuracy class 1.
d. Sampling:
1) The power quality meter shall sample at 128 samples/cycle.
2) The meter shall be able to perform high speed sag/swell detection
of voltage disturbances on a half-cycle-by-half-cycle basis,
providing the duration of the disturbance, the minimum, maximum
and average value of the voltage for each phase during the
disturbance. Disturbances less than one cycle in duration can be
detected.
e. Display:
1) The power quality meter shall have a LCD display of reasonably
high level pixel value.
2) It shall support direct display of all parameters on the front panel.
3) It shall provide a trend display of any parameter internally recorded
at regular intervals.
4) It shall have a user programmable custom display that is capable
of displaying up to 20 quantities on a single screen.
5) It shall be able to display advanced graphical representations of
metering information including at minimum spectral components,
phasor diagrams, and trending charts.
6) It shall be able to display measurements in either IEC or IEEE
formats.
7) It shall be able to display the following front panel screens:
a) Numeric: Display 2, 3, 3 with timestamp, 4, 8, 10 or 20
parameters at a time.
b) Event Log: Display recent events written to the power
quality meter’s event log, including diagnostic events.
c) Nameplate: Display information in a tabular format (default
nameplates show owner, meter and power system details).
d) Trend Bar: Display up to 4 real time numeric parameters
along with their upper and lower extremes.
e) Histogram: Display harmonics content in histogram format,
including 2nd to 32nd harmonic, THD (total, even, odd);
current harmonics histogram screens display K Factor and
Crest Factor.
f) Phasor: Display phase information in phasor diagram
format, including phase, voltage and current magnitudes;
phasors that are too small in magnitude are shown as table
entries only.
f. Logging:
1) The power quality meter shall have at least 5 MB of user
programmable onboard data logging. Field Expansion shall be
possible.
2) The PMS will store all critical internal and revenue data upon
sudden power loss.
3) The meter shall have non-volatile memory.
4) It shall have a time-stamped event log with the following features:
a) Supports at least 500 events.
b) The number of records in the log is programmable.
c) Each event is recorded with the date and time of the event,
the cause and effect of the event, and the priority of the
event.
d) All events relating to set-point activity relay operation and
self-diagnostics is recorded in the event log.
e) Time stamps have a resolution of 1 millisecond.
f) Time stamps can be synchronized to within 100 ms
between devices on the same serial communications
medium.
g) Minimum event recording response time is ½ cycle (8.3ms
60Hz, 10ms 50Hz) for high speed events and 1 second for
other events.
h) The priority of set-point events is programmable.
5) The power quality meter shall be able to log any parameter in the
meter including min/max and waveforms.
g. Alarming:

1) The power quality meter shall have set-point driven alarming
capability.
2) It shall be able to generate an email on an alarm condition.
3) It shall have millisecond timestamp resolution on alarm entries.
4) It shall be able to readjust alarm set-points based on the alarm
quantity (Alarm Set-point Learning)
5) It shall support consecutive high-speed alarm conditions which
trigger on a cycle-by-cycle basis with no “dead” time between
events (i.e. no need for a rearming delay time between events).
6) It shall be able to operate relays on alarm conditions.
7) It shall be able to initiate data log captures on alarm conditions.
8) It shall be able to control digital output relays in an AND or an OR
configuration, using pulse mode or latch mode operation, for
control and alarm purposes.
9) It shall be able to combine any logical combination of any number
of available set-point conditions to control any internal or external
function or event.
J. REMOTE COMMUNICATION MODULE:

1. A remote communication module shall be provided for all capacitor banks in
electrical installations having installed capacity of 2 MVA and more in order that
data to ensure capacitor banks are operational and in healthy condition in
addition to all essential data related to the power quality including power factor,
harmonic current, total harmonic distortions, etc. can be transferred to the
Ministry of Electricity & Water’s Control Room Server for monitoring purposes
through interface with the automatic power factor controller and/or the power
quality meter.
2. The remote communication module shall be an integral of the capacitor bank or
an independent unit, housed in a separate protective enclosure and installed at a
suitable location in the LT/Electrical room.
3. It shall have facility to accept data from RS485/RS232 port to be able to interface
with the APF controller and/or the PQ meter.
4. It shall communicate on Modbus RTU or Modbus TCP/IP protocol or the
capacitor bank manufacturer shall provide suitable gateway to convert to one of
these protocols.
5. It shall be able to process data from different capacitor banks in case more than
one capacitor bank is installed at a particular site and shall have configurable
identification for each bank to sort data accordingly.
6. It shall have remote communication/data transfer facility using GPRS Modem
and update data at required intervals i.e. hourly, daily, weekly or monthly as
programmed and on demand. All operational costs for data transfer including the
SIM shall be borne by the Owner.
7. It shall have two way communication and onsite and remote programming
features.
8. It shall have configurable transmission parameters and shall be able to send
SMS in case of faults.
9. It shall have temperature sensor and facility for continuous measurement of room
temperature.
10. It shall have necessary battery backup to report in case of power failure.
K. CAPACITOR BANK PANEL:

1. The capacitor bank comprising of capacitor units, series reactors, automatic
power factor controller, power quality meter, electro-magnetic and/or thyristor
switched contactors, switch-disconnector, MCCBs, MCBs, etc. shall be housed in
a suitable metallic enclosure having a front door with a provision for locking
arrangement.
2. The capacitor bank panels shall not be an integral part of the main or sub-main
distribution boards, shall be isolated and free-standing type and installed
adjacent or close to the main or sub-main distribution boards.
3. The capacitor bank panels shall be ample dimensioned and components like
capacitors, series reactors, fuses, thyistors, etc. which produce significant
amount of heat shall have adequate clearances between them.
4. The enclosures of the capacitor bank panels shall be fabricated from pre hot dip
galvanized sheet steel of minimum thickness 2 mm. and having a zinc coating
thickness of 275 gm/sq.mm. (38.5 microns). Alternatively, Alu-zinc coated steel
having a coating thickness of minimum 25 microns shall be used for the
enclosures.
5. The capacitor bank panels shall be forced ventilated with suitably sized exhaust
fans.
6. The general arrangement of the capacitor bank panel can be made in sections,
which can be arranged in separate compartments or in a single configuration. In
case of separate compartments, these shall generally comprise of:
a. Bus-bar, main connection and/or main isolation;
b. Capacitor bank fuses or circuit-breakers and/or contactors;
c. Reactors for harmonic control purposes;
d. Capacitors;
e. Control fuses, terminals and controller.
7. The degree of protection of the enclosures shall be minimum IP21 in accordance
with IEC-60529. The compartment door(s) shall be fitted by robust weather-proof
stainless steel hinges and shall have suitable locking devices.
8. Each item on the front panel of the capacitor banks shall have a proper label of
adequate dimensions. These labels shall be made of suitable and approved
engraving material approximately 2 mm. thick having white surface with black
engraving. Alternative design of labels can be proposed subject to Purchaser’s
approval.
9. All other labels shall be from similar material and engraved in English. Full details
and locations of all labels shall be indicated on the drawings and shall be subject
to approval of the Purchaser.
10. All fixing screws for the different components shall be from stainless steel of
adequate size.
11. The capacitor bank enclosure after fabrication shall be applied with a two-
component polyamide cured zinc-rich epoxy primer (Hempadure Zinc 15360 or
equivalent) to a dry film thickness coating of minimum 40 microns and then with a
final coat of paint by using electrostatic dry powder epoxy polyester method of
painting to a film thickness of 80 microns.
12. Each capacitor bank panel shall be provided with a 200 mm. x 150 mm. electrical
danger sign of approved type from non-corrosive metal plate, which shall be fixed
on the outside of the right hand side door of the panel.
13. Substantial brass or stainless steel diagram and rating plates shall be provided
on the capacitor bank giving the following information as a minimum:
14. Capacitor Bank Rating Plate:
a. Manufacturer’s name & country of origin.
b. Serial number and type/model.
c. Date of manufacture.
d. Rated reactive power in kilovars (KVAR) / Number of switchable
Capacitors with capacity
e. Rated voltage in volts (V).
f. Rated frequency in hertz (Hz).
g. vii) Minimum and maximum ambient temperatures in degrees Celsius
(oC).
h. Degree of protection
i. Short circuit withstand strength in Amperes (A)
L. INTERNAL WIRING:
1. All small wiring within the capacitor banks shall be from 600/1000 volts grade, 2.5
sq. mm. single core cables insulated with Type-TI3 PVC as per Table 1, BS EN
50363-3:2005 or XLPE insulated and shall have stranded copper conductors. All
wiring shall be suitably terminated and fitted with identification ferrules and
marked with circuit numbers in accordance with “British Central Electricity
Authority Engineering Recommendations” S-12 standard numbers for small
wiring or similar approved standard. The trip circuits shall have an additional
ferrule coloured red and marked trip.
2. All terminal blocks shall be from an approved design and all exposed terminals
shall be enclosed by detachable covers. The trip circuit cables shall be coloured
black and the instrument transformer cables (C.Ts) coloured with their respective
phase colours. Alternatively, all small wiring can be uniform colour (e.g., grey) but
instrument transformer cables shall have additional coloured ferrules at both
ends of each conductor run (in accordance with their phase colours). The wiring
of the auxiliary circuits shall be segregated from the main circuit by heat resistant
tubes made of insulating material covered by earthed metallic partitions. Terminal
blocks, small wiring terminations, ferrules and wire numbering and colouring shall
be subject to the approval of the Purchaser.
M. PROVISION OF CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND CONTROL CT’S IN THE LV

DISTRIBUTION BOARDS FOR POWER SUPPPLY CONNECTION TO THE
CAPACITOR BANKS
1. It will be the consumer’s/owner’s and/or their consultant’s/contractor’s
responsibility to ensure that necessary circuit breaker and control current
transformers (CT’s) are provided and installed in the low voltage distribution
boards of the power distribution system so that the capacitor banks and controls
can be connected to the system.
2. Circuit Breakers:
a. Moulded case circuit breakers (MCCBs) inside the LV Boards to feed the
capacitor banks shall be provided and installed by the LV Board
manufacturer. The circuit breaker shall be a three pole moulded case
circuit breaker (MCCB), shall fully comply with the requirements of the IEC
60947-1 & 2 and shall be set to trip at 1.3 times the rated current of the
capacitor bank. The rated insulation voltage of the MCCB shall be
mimimum 660 V and it shall be designed for continuous operation in
ambient temperatures of up to 52oC or shall be derated accordingly. The
current rating shall be at least 1.5 times the full load current of the
capacitor bank and it shall have mechanical endurance of a minimum
1000 operations. It shall have a rotary front operating door mounted
handle and should be interlocked with the door to ensure that the
capacitor bank is de-energised when door is open.
3. Current Transformers:
a. Three (3) numbers of current transformers for sensing the load current (for
computation of KVAR) shall be provided and installed by the LV Board
manufacturer. The CTs shall be mounted on the bus-bars of the LV
Boards. The control CTs shall be suitable for continuous operation in
ambient temperatures of up to 52 Deg. C. The primary current rating shall
be suitable for the transformer full load current and secondary rating shall
be 5 amp or shall match the automatic power factor controller and/or
power quality meter requirements. These should be epoxy molded resin
cast CTs with bar primary. The inner diameter should be suitable for
connecting it around the bus-bar of the LV Boards. The VA rating of the
CTs shall not be less than 5 VA. The CTs shall be of 0.5S class accuracy
and shall have the current sensing linearity in the specified accuracy
range from 1% to 120% of its rated current. The terminations for the CTs
shall have the provision to short the CTs.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF CAPACITOR BANKS
A. The installation of the capacitor bank shall be generally in accordance with

manufacturer's recommendations. Clearance shall be provided around the capacitor
bank for safety and adequate ventilation. The design of the capacitor banks must be as
to facilitate easy alignment and erection on the site.
B. Provision of proper earthing of the metallic enclosure of the capacitor bank shall be
made. The capacitor banks at the Main LV Distribution Boards and Sub-main
Distribution Boards shall be connected to the earth ring bus by 1000 Volts grade cables
of adequate cross-sections.
C. The capacitor bank at the service intake of the consumers shall have an earthing
system consisting of a set of two (2) Nos. 1.5 metres (to make a 3.0 metres long rod) x
19 mm dia. copper bonded earth rods and connected by 1000 Volts grade insulated
cable of 70 sq. mm.. The earth rods are to be installed inside pre-cast hand holes of 30
cm. x 30 cm. clear opening and a depth of 55 cm. provided with a heavy duty concrete
cover to enable checking of the connection and measurement of the earth resistance.
D. The testing and commissioning of the capacitor banks shall always be carried out by
qualified and trained manufacturer’s and/or local agent’s engineer/specialist in full
compliance with the specification.
3.02 TESTS
A. GENERAL:
1. The supplier/manufacturer/contractor of the capacitor banks shall carry out the
tests specified in any applicable International Electro-technical Commission (IEC)
and/or British Standard (BS) Specifications, unless otherwise agreed upon and
such additional tests as in the opinion of the Purchaser or his representative are
necessary to determine that the works comply with the conditions of this
specification.
2. All instrument used for testing purposes, shall be calibrated by an approved
authority and calibration certificates shall be submitted along with the inspection
reports.
3. The test results/readings recorded during measurements and other observations
noted shall be compiled/tabulated separately for each item of equipment and
furnished to the Purchaser in a fully professional manner in three (3) complete
sets. Electronic copies of the reports shall also be submitted in three (3)
complete sets of compact disks (CDs).

B. TYPE TESTS:
1. The supplier/manufacturer/contractor of the capacitor banks shall submit
complete type test certificates and reports from an internationally recognized
independent testing laboratory (ASTA, KEMA or CESI) for the capacitor banks of
the specified design, construction and rating. The certificates and reports shall
not be older than five (5) years.
2. The following type tests shall be carried out as indicated against each equipment:
1) Individual Capacitor Units:
All type tests shall be carried out in an internationally recognized
independent testing laboratory (ASTA, KEMA or CESI) at their laboratory
of country of origin in accordance with the International Electro-technical
Commission (IEC) Publication No. IEC 60831 as per the relevant
clauses mentioned against each test. Every capacitor sample to which it
is intended to apply the type test shall first have withstood satisfactorily
the application of all the routine tests.
a) Thermal stability test (Cl.13).
b) Measurement of the tangent of the loss angle (tan δ) of the
capacitor at elevated temperature (Cl. 14).
c) Voltage test between terminals (Cl. 9.2)
d) Voltage test between terminals and container (Cl. 10.2).
e) Lightning impulse voltage test between terminals and
container (Cl. 15).
f) Discharge test (Cl. 16).
g) Ageing test (Cl. 17). (See Notes below) viii) Self-healing test
(Cl. 18). ix) Destruction test (Cl. 19).
Notes:
1. The temperature of the case during the ageing test shall be the maximum
ambient temperature i.e., 55oC plus the difference between the measured
temperature of the case and the cooling air temperature recorded at the end of
the thermal stability test carried out on an identical unit.
2. After placing the capacitor in the unheated enclosure, the thermostat shall be set
at a temperature equal to that as above.
1) Complete Capacitor Banks:
All type tests shall be carried out in an internationally recognized
independent testing laboratory (ASTA, KEMA or CESI) at their
laboratory of country of origin in accordance with the latest issues
of the International Electro-technical Commission (IEC)
Publication Nos. IEC 61921 and IEC 61439-1.
2) Design Verification Tests:
Design verification tests shall be carried out as per IEC 61439-1
to relevant clauses as mentioned against each test and shall
comprise the following:
3) Construction:
a) Strength of materials and parts tests (Cl. 10.2).
b) Degree of protection test for enclosures (Cl 10.3).
c) Clearances and creepage distances (Cl. 10.4).
d) Protection against electric shock and integrity of protective
circuits (Cl. 10.5).
e) Incorporation of switching devices and components (Cl.
10.6).
f) Internal electrical circuits and connections (Cl. 10.7).
g) Terminals for external conductors (Cl. 10.8).
4) Performance:
a) Dielectric properties (Cl. 10.9).
b) Temperature rise (Cl. 10.10.2) (See Notes below)
c) Short-circuit withstand strength (Cl. 10.11).
d) Electromagnetic compatibility (Cl. 10.12).
e) Mechanical operation (Cl. 10.13).
Notes:
1. The temperature rise test shall be carried out by the method of verification by
testing current at an ambient temperature of 52oC with all capacitor units,
detuned series reactors and other components assembled and connected and
injecting full load current.
2. Conditions of Cl. 7.2.1 of IEC 61921 shall apply.
1) Disconnectors, Series Reactors, Thyristors, Electro-magnetic
Contactor, Current Transformers:
Complete type test certificates for all major components, like
MCCBs, Series Reactors, Thyristors, Electro-magnetic Contactor,
Current Transformers, etc. shall be submitted as per the relevant
IEC/BS specifications.
2) Low Voltage Cables:
All type tests shall be carried out in accordance with the latest
IEC Publication No. 60502-1 and supplements.
C. ROUTINE TESTS:
a. All routine tests shall be carried out in accordance with the relevant
IEC/BS specifications. Routine test results shall be produced and must be
available at the time of delivery of the equipment.
1) Individual Capacitor Units:
All routine tests shall be carried out in accordance with the
International Electro-technical Commission (IEC) Publication No.
IEC 60831 as per the relevant clauses mentioned against each
test. Routine tests shall be carried out by the manufacturer on
every capacitor before delivery.
2) Capacitance measurement and output calculation (Cl. 7).
a) Measurement of the tangent of the loss angle (tan δ) of the
capacitor (Cl. 8).
b) Voltage test between terminals (Cl. 9.1).
c) Voltage test between terminals and container (Cl.10.1).
d) Test of the internal discharge device (Cl. 11).
e) Sealing test (Cl. 12).
3) Complete Capacitor Banks:
All routine tests shall be carried out in accordance with the latest
issues of the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)
Publication Nos. IEC 61921 and IEC 61439-1. Routine tests shall
be carried out by the manufacturer on every capacitor bank
before delivery.
b. Routine VerificationTests:
Routine verification tests shall be carried out as per IEC 61439-1 to
relevant clauses as mentioned against each test and shall comprise
the following:
1) Construction:
a) Clearances and creepage distances (Cl. 11.3).
b) Protection against electric shock and integrity of protective
circuits (Cl. 11.4).
c) Incorporation of built-in components (Cl. 11.5).
d) Internal electrical circuits and connections (Cl. 11.6).
e) Terminals for external conductors (Cl. 11.7).
f) Mechanical Operation (Cl. 11.8).
2) Performance:
a) Dielectric properties (Cl. 11.9).
b) Wiring, operational performance and function (Cl. 11.10).
A functional test of the complete capacitor bank control, protection and

interlocking schemes shall be carried out in the factory. These shall
include secondary injection tests on the protection relays.
D. SITE TESTS:
All site tests shall be carried out by qualified and trained manufacturer’s and/or
local agent’s engineer/specialist in the presence of and to the satisfaction of the
Purchaser or his representative. The following site tests/inspection shall be
carried out prior to energizing the capacitor banks:
a. Mechanical Tests:
1) Checking of panel conformity to drawing and Engineer’s
requirements.
2) Checking of all devices for proper mounting and all conductors and
cables for proper routing.
3) Checking of creepage and clearance distances.
4) Checking effectiveness of all mechanical devices, e.g. handles,
locks, interlocks, operating devices, etc.
5) Checking of all electrical connections for tightness/surface area
contacts.
6) Checking of Labels, Identifications, Nameplates, Danger Signs,
etc..
7) Checking of installation works of capacitor banks and cabling,
earthing, etc..
8) Checking of capacitor bank enclosure for overall workmanship and
smooth finish.
b. Electrical Tests:
1) Insulation resistance measurements on the buses, phase to phase
and phase to ground, with all breakers in the fully connected
position and contacts open. Insulation resistance shall exceed 10
megaohms.
2) Control circuit insulation resistance to ground.
3) Flash test all main circuit at 2.5 kV for one minute. Leakage current
shall be measured and recorded.
4) Repeat insulation resistance measurements to verify the same has
not been affected by the dielectric test.
5) Primary and secondary injection tests of all relays, CT’s and
indicating and metering instruments.
c. Functional Tests:
1) Functional test of all circuit breakers, switches, contactors, relays,
etc. and every circuit to verify correct operation.
2) Operate the equipment through all design functions, including
remote operation, actuation of alarm and indicating devices,
mechanical and electrical tripping and closing, and operation of the
protective devices.
3) Inspect all relays and protective devices, and verify settings in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

4) Inspect current transformers and relays for correct polarity of
connections and the installation of jumpers on unused current
transformer circuits.
5) Simulate the operations and check the logic of interlocks.
6) Manually close and trip each breaker checking and adjusting the
main contact alignment and wiring action in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions.
7) Check the phasing on each side tie breaker, before closing.
8) Test protective relay operation for incomer circuit breakers.
9) Measurement of the power factor and system harmonics before
and after commissioning of the capacitor bank
10) Data communication.
E. GUARANTEES
The supplier/manufacturer/contractor of the capacitor banks shall submit the following
guarantees:
1. Guarantee that all the capacitor banks and all parts and components thereof like,
capacitor units, series reactors, thyristor switched contactors, electromagnetic
contactors, power factor controllers, power quality meters, current transformers,
switch-disconnectors, MCCBs, Fuses, thermal magnetic overcurrent relays, etc.,
will give continuous trouble free service at Kuwait’s extreme ambient temperature
(52 deg C) and weather conditions (100% RH), and any capacitor bank and/or
any parts/components thereof that will fail, malfunction or burn out within a period
of three (3) years will be replaced and reinstalled free of charge.
2. The supplier/manufacturer/contractor shall further guarantee fully satisfactory
operation and running of the entire equipment for a period of three (3) years from
the date of commissioning.
Note:
1. The above guarantees shall be submitted by the manufacturer and/or local agent
on their original letterhead indicating the serial number of the capacitor bank(s)
duly signed and stamped by the manufacturer and/or local agent and the
contractor.
3.03 MAINTENANCE
system. During that period, the contractor shall be responsible for the regular
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 3600
TRANSFER SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes transfer switches rated 600 V and less, including the following:
1. Furnish and install automatic transfer & bypass-isolation switch (ATS/BPS)
system(s) with number of poles, amperage, voltage, withstand and close-on
ratings as shown on the plans. Each automatic transfer shall consist of an
inherently double throw power transfer switch mechanism and a microprocessor
controller to provide automatic operation. All automatic transfer & bypass-
isolation switches and controllers shall be the products of the same
manufacturer.
2. Bypass/isolation switches.
3. Remote annunciation systems.
4. Remote annunciation and control systems.
A. Division 26 Section "Engine Generators".
B. Related sections include but is not limited to:

2. Division 26 Section 26 0553 "Identification for Electrical Systems"
3. Division 26 Section 26 3213 “Engine Generator Set with Fuel Tank”
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, weights,
operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details showing minimum
clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed features and devices, and
material lists for each switch specified.
1. Single-Line Diagram: Show connections between transfer switch,
bypass/isolation switch, power sources, and load; and show interlocking
provisions for each combined transfer switch and bypass/isolation switch.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency,
1. Features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual.
2. List of all factory settings of relays; provide relay-setting and calibration
instructions, including software, where applicable.
KEO/19-3262-0000 26 3600/1 Transfer Switches
D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that capacitor
equipment will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section “Vibration and
Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.” Include the following:
1. Basis of Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual
2. The term “withstand” means “the unit will remain in place without separation of
any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified.”
3. The term “withstand” means “the unit will remain in place without separation of
any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the
unit will be fully operational after the seismic event.”
4. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment: Identify center of gravity and locate
the describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain a service center capable of providing training,
parts, and emergency maintenance repairs within a response period of less than eight
hours from time of notification.
B. Testing Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the manufacturer to supervise
on-site testing specified in Part 3.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain automatic transfer switches, bypass/isolation switches, and
non-automatic transfer switches through one source from a single manufacturer.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
E. Comply with IEC 947-2

1. UL 1008 Standard for Transfer Switch Equipment
2. IEC 60947-6-1 Low-voltage Switchgear and Controlgear; Multifunction
equipment; Automatic Transfer Switching Equipment
3. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code
4. NFPA 99 Essential Electrical Systems for Health Care Facilities
5. NFPA 110 Emergency and Standby Power Systems
6. IEEE Standard 446 IEEE Recommended Practice for Emergency and Standby
Power Systems for Commercial and Industrial Applications
7. NEMA Standard ICS10 (formerly ICS2-447) - AC Automatic Transfer Switches
8. UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment


1.07 COORDINATION
contents.
1. One percent minimum plus two replacements for each specialized part.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

documents, use only firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of Transfer Switches, of
2.02 MECHANICALLY HELD TRANSFER SWITCH
A. The transfer switch shall be electrically operated and mechanically held. The electrical
operator shall be a momentarily energized, single-solenoid mechanism. Main operators
which include overcurrent disconnect devices, linear motors or gears shall not be
acceptable. The switch shall be mechanically interlocked to ensure only two possible
positions, normal or emergency.
B. All transfer switch sizes shall use only one type of main operator for ease of
maintenance and commonality of parts.
C. The switch shall be positively locked and unaffected by momentary outages, so that
contact pressure is maintained at a constant value and contact temperature rise is
minimized for maximum reliability and operating life.
D. All main contacts shall be silver composition. Switches rated 800 amperes and above
shall have segmented, blow-on construction for high withstand and close-on capability
and be protected by separate arcing contacts.
E. Inspection of all contacts shall be possible from the front of the switch without
disassembly of operating linkages and without disconnection of power conductors.
Switches rated 600 amps and higher shall have front removable and replaceable
contacts. All stationary and moveable contacts shall be replaceable without removing
power conductors and/or bus bars.
F. Designs utilizing components of molded-case circuit breakers, contactors, or parts

thereof, which are not intended for continuous duty, repetitive switching or transfer
between two active power sources are not acceptable.
G. Neutral conductors shall be provided with fully rated overlapping neutral transfer
contacts. The neutrals of the normal and emergency power sources shall be connected
together only during the transfer and retransfer operation and remain connected
together until power source contacts close on the source to which the transfer is being
made. The overlapping neutral contacts shall not overlap for a period greater than 100
milliseconds. Neutral switching contacts which do not overlap are not acceptable.
H. Where neutral conductors are to be solidly connected as shown on the plans, a neutral
conductor plate with fully rated AL-CU pressure connectors shall be provided.
2.03 BYPASS-ISOLATION SWITCH
A. A two-way bypass-isolation switch shall provide manual bypass of the load to either
source and permit isolation of the automatic transfer switch from all source and load
power conductors. All main contacts shall be manually driven.
B. Power interconnections shall be silver-plated copper bus bar or tinned bus bar. The
only field installed power connections shall be at the service and load terminals of the
bypass-isolation switch. All control inter-wiring shall be provided with disconnect plugs.
C. Separate bypass and isolation handles shall be utilized to provide clear distinction
between the functions. Handles shall be permanently affixed and operable without
opening the enclosure door. Designs requiring insertion of loose operating handles or
opening of the enclosure door to operate are not acceptable.
D. Bypass to the load-carrying source shall be accomplished with no interruption of power

to the load (make before break contacts). Designs which disconnect the load when
bypassing are not acceptable. The bypass handle shall have three operating modes:
"Bypass to Normal," "Automatic," and "Bypass to Emergency." The operating speed of
the bypass contacts shall be the same as the associated transfer switch and shall be
independent of the speed at which the manual handle is operated. In the "Automatic"
mode, the bypass contacts shall be out of the power circuit so that they will not be
subjected to fault currents to which the system may be subjected.
E. The isolation handle shall provide three operating modes: "Closed," "Test," and "Open."
The "Test" mode shall permit testing of the entire emergency power system, including
the automatic transfer switches with no interruption of power to the load. The "Open"
mode shall completely isolate the automatic transfer switch from all source and load
power conductors. When in the "Open" mode, it shall be possible to completely
withdraw the automatic transfer switch for inspection or maintenance to conform to code
requirements without removal of power conductors or the use of any tools.
F. When the isolation switch is in the "Test" or "Open" mode, the bypass switch shall
function as a manual transfer switch.
G. Designs requiring operation of key interlocks for bypass isolation or ATSs which cannot
be completely withdrawn when isolated are not acceptable.
H. The ATS and Bypass will be in separate compartments segregated by an insulating

barrier. The ATS and Bypass Sections will have separate doors. ATSs/ Bypass using
back to back design or back to front Plug-in design are not acceptable.
2.04 MICROPROCESSOR CONTROLLER
A. The controller’s sensing and logic shall be provided by a single built-in microprocessor
for maximum reliability, minimum maintenance, and the ability to communicate serially
through an optional serial communication module.
B. A single controller shall provide twelve selectable nominal voltages for maximum
application flexibility and minimal spare part requirements. Voltage sensing shall be true
RMS type and shall be accurate to  1% of nominal voltage. Frequency sensing shall
be accurate to  0.2%. The panel shall be capable of operating over a temperature
range of -20 to +60 degrees C and storage from -55 to +85 degrees C.
C. The controller shall be connected to the transfer switch by an interconnecting wiring

harness. The harness shall include a keyed disconnect plug to enable the controller to
be disconnected from the transfer switch for routine maintenance. Sensing and control
logic shall be provided on multi-layer printed circuit boards. Interfacing relays shall be
industrial grade plug-in type with dust covers. The panel shall be enclosed with a
protective cover and be mounted separately from the transfer switch unit for safety and
ease of maintenance. The protective cover shall include a built-in pocket for storage of
the operator’s manuals.
D. All customer connections shall be wired to a common terminal block to simplify field-
wiring connections.
E. The controller shall meet or exceed the requirements for Electromagnetic Compatibility
(EMC) as follows:
1. EN 55011:1991 Emission standard - Group 1, Class A
2. EN 50082-2:1995 Generic immunity standard, from which:
3. EN 61000-4-2:1995 Electrostatic discharge (ESD) immunity
4. ENV 50140:1993 Radiated Electro-Magnetic field immunity
5. EN 61000-4-4: 1995 Electrical fast transient (EFT) immunity
6. EN 61000-4-5:1995 Surge transient immunity
7. EN 61000-4-6:1996 Conducted Radio-Frequency field immunity
2.05 ENCLOSURE
A. The ATS/BPS shall be furnished in a Type 1 enclosure unless otherwise shown on the
plans.
B. All standard and optional door-mounted switches and pilot lights shall be 16-mm
industrial grade type or equivalent for easy viewing & replacement. Door controls shall
be provided on a separate removable plate, which can be supplied loose for open type
units.
2.06 OPERATION
A. Controller Display and Keypad

1. A four line, 20 character LCD display and keypad shall be an integral part of the
controller for viewing all available data and setting desired operational
parameters. Operational parameters shall also be available for viewing and
limited control through the serial communications input port. The following
parameters shall only be adjustable via DIP switches on the controlller:
2. Nominal line voltage and frequency
3. Single or three phase sensing
4. Operating parameter protection
5. Transfer operating mode configuration (Open transition, Closed transition or
Delayed transition). All instructions and controller settings shall be easily
accessible, readable and accomplished without the use of codes, calculations, or
instruction manuals.
B. Voltage, Frequency and Phase Rotation Sensing

1. Voltage and frequency on both the normal and emergency sources (as noted
below) shall be continuously monitored, with the following pickup, dropout and
trip setting capabilities (values shown as % of nominal unless otherwise
specified):
Parameter Sources Dropout / Trip Pickup / Reset
Undervoltage N&E,3 70 to 98% 85 to 100%
Overvoltage N&E,3 102 to 115% 2% below trip
Underfrequency N&E 85 to 98% 90 to 100%
Overfrequency N&E 102 to 110% 2% below trip
Voltage unbalance N&E 5 to 20% 1% below dropout
2. Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be within ± 0.5% over an operating

temperature range of -20C to 60C.
3. Voltage and frequency settings shall be field adjustable in 1% increments either
locally with the display and keypad or remotely via serial communications port
access.
4. The controller shall be capable (when activated by the keypad or through the
serial port) of sensing the phase rotation of both the normal and emergency
sources. The source shall be considered unacceptable if the phase rotation is
not the preferred rotation selected (ABC or CBA).
5. Source status screens shall be provided for both normal & emergency to pro-vide
digital readout of voltage on all 3 phases, frequency, and phase rotation.
6. The controller shall include a user selectable algorithm to prevent repeated
transfer cycling to a source on an installation which experiences primary side,
single phase failures on a Grounded Wye – Grounded Wye transformer which
regenerates voltage when unloaded. The algorithm shall also inhibit retransfer to
the normal (utility) source upon detection of a single phasing condition until a
dedicated timer expires, the alternate source fails, or the normal source fails
completely and is restored during this time delay period. The time delays
associated with this feature shall be adjustable by the user through the controller
keypad and LCD.
C. Time Delays
1. An adjustable time delay of 0 to 6 seconds shall be provided to override
momentary normal source outages and delay all transfer and engine starting
signals. Capability shall be provided to extend this time delay to 60 minutes by
providing an external 24 VDC power supply.
2. A time delay shall be provided on transfer to emergency, adjustable from 0 to 60
minutes, for controlled timing of transfer of loads to emergency.
3. Two time delay modes (which are independently adjustable) shall be provided on
re-transfer to normal. One time delay shall be for actual normal power failures
and the other for the test mode function. The time delays shall be adjustable
from 0 to 60 minutes. Time delay shall be automatically bypassed if the
emergency source fails and the normal source is acceptable.
4. A time delay shall be provided on shut down of engine generator for cool down,
adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes.
5. A time delay activated output signal shall also be provided to drive an external
relay(s) for selective load disconnect control. The controller shall have the ability
to activate an adjustable 0 to 5 minute time delay in any of the following modes:
a. Prior to transfer only.
b. Prior to and after transfer.
c. Normal to emergency only.
d. Emergency to normal only.
e. Normal to emergency and emergency to normal.
f. All transfer conditions or only when both sources are available.
6. The controller shall also include the following built-in time delays for optional
Closed Transition and Delayed Transition operation:
a. 1 to 5 minute time delay on failure to synchronize normal and emergency
sources prior to closed transition transfer.
b. 0.1 to 9.99 second time delay on an extended parallel condition of both
power sources during closed transition operation.
c. 0 to 5 minute time delay for the load disconnect position for delayed
transition operation.
7. All time delays shall be adjustable in 1 second increments, except the extended
parallel time, which shall be adjustable in .01 second increments.
8. All time delays shall be adjustable by using the LCD display and keypad or with a
remote device connected to the serial communications port.
D. Additional Features
1. A three position momentary-type test switch shall be provided for the test /
automatic / reset modes. The test position will simulate a normal source failure.
The reset position shall bypass the time delays on either transfer to emergency
or retransfer to normal.
2. A SPDT contact, rated 5 amps at 30 VDC, shall be provided for a low-voltage
engine start signal. The start signal shall prevent dry cranking of the engine by
requiring the generator set to reach proper output, and run for the duration of the
cool down setting, regardless of whether the normal source restores before the
load is transferred.
3. Auxiliary contacts, rated 10 amps, 250 VAC shall be provided consisting of one
contact, closed when the ATS is connected to the normal source and one contact
closed, when the ATS is connected to the emergency source.

4. LED indicating lights (16 mm industrial grade, type 12) shall be provided; one to
indicate when the ATS is connected to the normal source (green) and one to
indicate when the ATS is connected to the emergency source (red).
5. LED indicating lights (16 mm industrial grade, type 12) shall be provided and
energized by controller outputs. The lights shall provide true source availability of
the normal and emergency sources, as determined by the voltage sensing trip
and reset settings for each source.
6. The following features shall be built-in to the controller, but capable of being
activated through keypad programming or the serial port only when required by
the user:
a. Provide the ability to select “commit/no commit to transfer” to determine
whether the load should be transferred to the emergency generator if the
normal source restores before the generator is ready to accept the load.
b. An Inphase monitor shall be provided in the controller. The monitor shall
control transfer so that motor load inrush currents do not exceed normal
starting currents, and shall not require external control of power sources.
The inphase monitor shall be specifically designed for and be the product
of the ATS manufacturer.
c. The controller shall be capable of accepting a normally open contact that
will allow the transfer switch to function in a non-automatic mode using an
external control device.
d. Engine Exerciser - The controller shall provide an internal engine
exerciser. The engine exerciser shall allow the user to program up to
seven different exercise routines. For each routine, the user shall be able
to:
1) Enable or disable the routine.
2) Enable or disable transfer of the load during routine.
3) Set the start time, .
4) time of day
5) day of week
6) week of month (1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, alternate or every)
7) Set the duration of the run.
At the end of the specified duration the switch shall transfer the load back
to normal and run the generator for the specified cool down period. A 10-
year life battery that supplies power to the real time clock in the event of a
power loss will maintain all time and date information.
7. The following feature shall be built - into the controller, but capable of being
activated through keypad programming or the communications interface port.
Note: The transfer switch will operate in a non-automatic mode with this feature
activated.
a. Terminals shall be provided for a remote contact which opens to signal
the ATS to transfer to emergency and for remote contacts which open to
inhibit transfer to emergency and/or retransfer to normal. Both of these
inhibit signals can be activated through the keypad or serial port.
b. System Status - The controller LCD display shall include a “System
Status” screen which shall be readily accessible from any point in the
menu by depressing the “ESC” key a maximum of two times. This screen
shall display a clear description of the active operating sequence and
switch position. For example,
1) Normal Failed
2) Load on Normal
3) TD Normal to Emerg
4) 2min15s
Controllers that require multiple screens to determine system status or

display “coded” system status messages, which must be explained by
references in the operator’s manual, are not permissible.
c. Self Diagnostics - The controller shall contain a diagnostic screen for the
purpose of detecting system errors. This screen shall provide information
on the status input signals to the controller which may be preventing load
transfer commands from being completed.
d. Communications Interface – The controller shall be capable of interfacing,
through an optional serial communication module, with a network of
transfer switches, locally (up to 4000 ft.) or remotely through modem serial
communications. Standard software specific for transfer switch
applications shall be available by the transfer switch manufacturer. This
software shall allow for the monitoring, control and setup of parameters.
e. Data Logging – The controller shall have the ability to log data and to
maintain the last 99 events, even in the event of total power loss. The
following events shall be time and date stamped and maintained in a non-
volatile memory:
1) Event Logging
a) Data and time and reason for transfer normal to emergency.
b) Data and time and reason for transfer emergency to normal.
c) Data and time and reason for engine start.
d) Data and time engine stopped.
e) Data and time emergency source available.
f) Data and time emergency source not available.
2) Statistical Data
a) Total number of transfers.
b) Total number of transfers due to source failure.
c) Total number of days controller is energized.
d) Total number of hours both normal and emergency sources
are available.
f. Communications Module - A full duplex RS485 interface shall be installed
in the ATS controller to enable serial communications. The serial
communications shall be capable of a direct connect or multi-drop
configured network. This module shall allow for the seamless integration
of existing or new communication transfer devices.
2.07 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Withstand and Closing Ratings

1. The ATS/BPS shall be rated to close on and withstand the available RMS
symmetrical short circuit current at the ATS/BPS terminals with the type of
overcurrent protection shown on the plans.
2. The ATS/BPS shall be UL listed in accordance with UL 1008 and be labeled in
accordance with that standard's 1½ and 3 cycle ratings. ATS/BPSs which are
not tested and labeled with 1½ and 3 cycle (any breaker) ratings and have
series, or specific breaker ratings only, are not acceptable.
B. Tests and Certification

1. The complete ATS/BPS shall be factory tested to ensure proper operation of the
individual components and correct overall sequence of operation and to ensure

that the operating transfer time, voltage, frequency and time delay settings are in
compliance with the specification requirements.
2. Upon request, the manufacturer shall provide a notarized letter certifying
compliance with all of the requirements of this specification including compliance
with the above codes and standards, and withstand and closing ratings. The
certification shall identify, by serial number(s), the equipment involved. No
exceptions to the specifications, other than those stipulated at the time of the
submittal, shall be included in the certification.
3. The ATS/BPS manufacturer shall be certified to ISO 9001 International Quality
Standard and the manufacturer shall have third party certification verifying quality
assurance in design/development, production, installation and servicing in
accordance with ISO 9001.
C. Service Representation
1. The ATS/BPS manufacturer shall maintain a national service organization of
company-employed personnel located throughout the contiguous United States.
The service center's personnel must be factory trained and must be on call 24
hours a day, 365 days a year.
2. The manufacturer shall maintain records of each switch, by serial number, for a
minimum of 20 years.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Floor-Mounting Switch: Anchor to floor by bolting.

1. Concrete Bases: 100 mm high, reinforced, with chamfered edges. Extend base
no more than 100mm in all directions beyond the maximum dimensions of
switch, unless otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic support.
B. Identify components according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical

Systems."
3.02 CONNECTIONS
A. Wiring to Remote Components: Match type and number of cables and conductors to
control and communication requirements of transfer switches as recommended by
manufacturer. Increase raceway sizes at no additional cost to Owner if necessary to
accommodate required wiring.

C. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section “Low voltage Electrical power

conductors and cables.”

inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including
connections. Report results in writing.

B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installation,
including connections, and to assist in testing.
2. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test
for compliance with requirements.
3. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test.
4. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with
insulation-resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits.
Use test voltages and procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply with
manufacturer's specified minimum resistance.
a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits.
b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and
integrity of barriers, covers, and safety features.
c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed.
d. Perform manual transfer operation.
5. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational
function for each switch at least three times.
a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches
and of emergency source with normal source available.
b. Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal
source.
c. Verify time-delay settings.
d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of
control settings.
e. Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic
transfer-switch operations.
f. Perform contact-resistance test across main contacts and correct values
exceeding 500 microhms and values for 1 pole deviating by more than 50
percent from other poles.
g. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting,
transfer time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power,
and engine cool-down and shutdown.
6. Ground-Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing of ground-fault protective devices
for power delivery from both sources.
a. Verify grounding connections and locations and ratings of sensors.

1. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test
for compliance with requirements.
2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test. Certify
compliance with test parameters.
3. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with
insulation-resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits.
Use test voltages and procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply with
manufacturer's specified minimum resistance.
a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits.
b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and
integrity of barriers, covers, and safety features.
c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed.
d. Perform manual transfer operation.
4. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational
function for each switch at least three times.

a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches
and of emergency source with normal source available.
b. Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal
source.
c. Verify time-delay settings.
d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of
control settings.
e. Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic
transfer-switch operations.
f. Perform contact-resistance test across main contacts and correct values
exceeding 500 microhms and values for 1 pole deviating by more than 50
percent from other poles.
g. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting,
transfer time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power,
and engine cool-down and shutdown.
5. Ground-Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing of ground-fault protective devices
for power delivery from both sources.
a. Verify grounding connections and locations and ratings of sensors.
D. Coordinate tests with tests of generator and run them concurrently.
E. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and
measured insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to
each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.
F. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
3.05 TRAINING

maintenance.
advance notice.
5. Coordinate this training with that for generator equipment.
3.06 MAINTENANCE
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 4113
LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes the lightning protection installation shall consist of air termination
network, down conductors, earthing and bonding to prevent side flashing.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For air terminals and mounting accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail lightning protection system, including air-terminal locations,

conductor routing and connections, and bonding and grounding provisions. Include
indications for use of raceway, data on how concealment requirements will be met, and
calculations required by BSEN 62305 for bonding of grounded and isolated metal
bodies.
C. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience.
D. Field inspection reports indicating compliance with specified requirements.
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage Specialist Lightning Protection Installer with a minimum

of 10 year experience in handling projects of comparable size, shall provide a lightning
protection system completely in accordance with all codes and standards referred in this
section.

1. BSEN 62305 (I – IV) : CENELEC standard for Lightning Protection
KEO/19-3262-0000 26 4113/1 Lightning Protection For Structures
2. BS EN 50164-1: Lightning Protection Components (LPC) Part 1: Requirements
for connection components.
3. BS EN 50164-2: Lightning Protection Components (LPC) Part 2: Requirements
for conductors and earth electrodes.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of lightning protection with installation of other building systems

and components, including electrical wiring, supporting structures and building
materials, metal bodies requiring bonding to lightning protection components, and
building finishes.
B. Coordinate installation of air terminals attached to roof systems with roofing

manufacturer and Installer.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
contents.
Contractor shall provide a list of spare part as part of Tender submission



PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

use only firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of Lightning Protection for Structures,
for not less than ten (10) years and approved by the Architect/ Engineer.
2.2 DESIGN PARAMETERS
A. The lightning protection installation shall consist of air termination
B. The Specialist Lightning Protection Installer shall submit the Risk Evaluation for R1 and
R2 and the achieved Lightning Protection Level (LPL) calculation based on BS EN
62305 - Part 2. SIRAC is not allowed. In the absence of such an evaluation,
employment of LPL - I will be deemed mandatory. The Specialist Lightning Protection
Installer shall then submit the shop drawings based on the achieved LPL and shall
employ the air termination network consisting of mesh of either 5m x 5m or less, in co-
ordination with rolling sphere (size as per the protection level). All the service entries to
the structure i.e. power line, telecom line, gas line, water line etc. shall be protected by
installing current surge protectors (either 25KA or 18.75KA or 12.5 KA rating, tested on
10/350µs wave form), depending on the Lightning Protection Level (LPL) to be used to
R
bring down the risk (R) below the tolerable risk level ( T ). Also based on the R2
calculation, the Type 2 over voltage SPDs must be installed in the downstream
Distribution boards.
2.3 AIR TERMINATION NETWORK
A. The Specialist Lightning Protection Installer shall use 25x3 mm bare copper tape of
99.99% purity (complying with BS EN 13601), (or PVC coated as the case may require,
complying with the same) to form the air-termination mesh on the uppermost part of the
structure (typically the roof) and ring conductor around the structure (the spacing
between the ring conductors shall depend on the size of the rolling sphere) to prevent
from side flashes.
B. Air termination network should be extended and it’s determined by using rolling sphere
method.

C. This method involves rolling an imaginary sphere of 20m or 30m or 45m or 60m radius
(depending on the Lightning Protection Level to be used) over structure to require
protection.
D. Typically, if LPL I is employed, then the first horizontal conductor shall be at 20m level
(from ground). From 20m to 120m, horizontal conductors shall be installed at every 20
meters or every 5 floors. From 120m up to 400 meters, horizontal conductors shall be
installed at every 10 meters or every 3 floors, from 400 meters and above, the horizontal
conductors shall be installed at every 5 meters or every floor. However, if the structure is
more than 120m in height then the top 20% of the building height is protected using ring
conductors every floor and then follow the above rule.
E. Based on the above the Specialist Lightning Protection Installer shall use 25x3mm
copper tape as ring conductor and this tape should be bonded to all down conductors
around the periphery and a branch conductor to be taken horizontally and all these
down conductors to be bonded to the aluminum cladding wall using bi-metallic clamps.
F. Any roof (e.g. staircase) on top of the main roof shall have air termination network and it
shall be connected to lower roof network.
G. All the fixing clips for the copper tape shall be metallic (complying with Class ‘H’ of the
electrical testing based on BSEN 50164) and shall be fixed at an interval of 500mm
(1000 mm fixing distance for fixing conductors on vertical surface up to 20m from the
ground level and on the horizontal surface i.e. roof).
H. The vertical terminals shall be installed to protect any equipment on the roof above the
air termination network at a calculated separation distances'. The zone of protection
accorded by the air terminal must be in accordance with the BSEN 62305 - part III of the
standard. The service lines from these equipment going inside the structure must be
bonded using either a Type 2 Over voltage SPD (surge protection device) or a Type 1
SPD, depending on the achievement of the separation distance 's'.
I. Refer lightning protection system layout drawings for the details of air termination
network. All air terminals shall be rigidly bonded together with the air termination copper
tape at the roof.
2.4 DOWN CONDUCTORS
A. The down conductors shall be placed around the periphery of the building. The number
and spacing of the down conductors shall be in accordance to the risk assessment
carried out as per the BSEN 62305 – part II. A minimum of two dedicated re-enforcing
bars shall be used as down conductors in each column. The minimum overlap
dimension to connect two re-bars shall be at least 20 times the diameter of the re-bar. If
it not practical to arc-weld two re-bars then suitable clamps should be used at a distance
of each 10cm till the above dimension is achieved. Re-enforcement bars in the
designated columns should be used as down conductors, with a suitable junction box to
be recessed at approx. 500mm above the ground for the test link..
B. The composite glass panel shall be bonded to all the down conductors at the various
slab levels as per the rolling sphere spacing by using bi-metallic clamps complying to
BSEN 50164.
C. The electrical continuity of the reinforcing bars shall be determined by electrical testing
between the uppermost part and the ground level. The overall electrical resistance
should not be greater than 0.2Ω, measured using test equipment suitable for this
purpose. If this value is not achieved, or it is not practical to conduct such testing, the
reinforcing bar shall not be used as a natural down conductor.
2.5 EARTHING SYSTEM
A. Sufficient number of earth electrodes shall be installed with proper hand hole and cover,
outside the building periphery or within the building Basement as shown on the drawing
and connected to related down conductor. Every down conductor shall be connected to
an earth electrode via test link in accordance with BSEN 62305 (Part I – IV) and every
electrode shall be interconnected with a perimeter ring conductor as part of the
integrated earthing system. The earthing shall be done as per local authorities
requirements. A minimum of 3000 mm solid copper electrode shall be provided with
each down conductor separately. However, the contractor shall submit the calculation
for deciding the number of earth rods in each earth pit. Wherever the soil resistivity is
low (typically below <50 Ωm), the contractor must use either solid copper rods or
stainless steel rods to ensure the longitivity of the earth termination network.
B. The complete Lightning Protection System measured at any point, should not exceed 10
ohms. With the test clamp disconnected, the resistance of each individual earth should
be no more than ten times the number of down conductors in the complete system.
C. The LV and the IT earth should in no case exceed 1 ohm.
D. The terminated head of each electrode shall be located in a light weight inspection pit. If
clear earth is not available, then the Specialist Lightning Protection Installer has to install
the earth pit inside the building using specially designed earth electrode seals. Where a
rod type earth electrode and inspection pit are to be installed inside a building making it
necessary that the foundation slab and therefore the water proof membrane be
penetrated, the Specialist Lightning Protection Installer or Contractor shall ensure the
building is protected against ingress of water through installation of an appropriate earth
rod seal.
E. The earth rod seal selected shall meet the requirements of IEC 62561-5, be designed
for use in concrete slabs of nominal thickness from 300 mm to 3000 mm and be capable
of withstanding water pressure up to 80 psi (5.5 Bar).
F. The earth rod seal shall provide an effective, reliable and watertight seal to both the
earth rod electrode and damp proof membrane. For best practice installation, an earth
rod seal capable of sealing the damp proof membrane between upper and lower
flanges.
G. Provide a concrete pit (outside the building)/Polymer pit (within the building Basement)
complete with a heavy duty concrete cover (outside the building) or Polymer cover
(within the building Basement) with recessed lifting hook to the Engineers written
approval, at the head of the earth rod, to protect the rod and allow access to
connections for testing.
2.6 SURGE PROTECTION FOR MAINS POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
A. The Specialist Lightning Protection Installer shall install suitable surge protectors at local
power distribution boards feeding vulnerable equipment, in order to protect these

against transients generated downstream of the protectors in Type 1, above. (These
transients may be the result of inductive coupling or electrical switching.)
B. Type 2 and Type 3 Protectors shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of:
1. BS EN 62305:2011 – Electrical & Electronics Systems Protection within
structures (Part 4),
2. BS 2914:1972 ‘Specification for surge diverters for alternating current power
circuits’,
3. IEEE C62.41-1991 ‘Recommended practice on surge voltages in low voltage AC
power circuits’.
C. Protectors for a given Location Category shall be rated for a High Exposure Level (as
defined by BS EN 62305 - 4), unless contrary information is available.
D. The protector must not interfere with or restrict the system’s normal operation. It should
not:
1. corrupt the normal mains power supply
2. break or shutdown the power supply during operation
3. have an excessive earth leakage current.
E. The protector shall be rated for a peak discharge current of no less than 10kA (8/20µs
waveform) between any two conductors (phase to neutral, phase to earth and neutral to
earth).
F. The protector shall limit the transient voltage to below equipment susceptibility levels.
Unless otherwise stated, the peak transient let-through voltage shall not exceed 600
volts, for protectors with a nominal working voltage of 230 or 240 volts, when tested in
accordance with BS EN 62305 Part - 4 (6kV 1.2/50 µs open circuit voltage, 3kA 8/20µs
short circuit current).
G. This peak transient let-through voltage shall not be exceeded for all combinations of
conductors:
1. phase to neutral
2. phase to earth
3. neutral to earth.
H. Mains protectors (installed in shunt/parallel) should have continuous indication of its
protection status and the presence of power. Status indication should clearly show per
phase:
1. full protection present reduced protection

2. replacement required no protection
3. failure of protector.
I. Remove indication of status (including loss of phase/supply) should also be possible via
a volt free contact. The status indication should warn of protection failure between all
combinations of conductors, including neutral to earth. (Otherwise a potentially
dangerous short circuit between neutral and earth could go undetected for some time.)
This should include early warning of excessive neutral to earth voltages. The protector
shall be supplied with detailed installation instructions. The installer must comply with
the installation practice detailed by the protector manufacturer.
J. Specialist Lightning Protection Installer also has to ensure, based on BSEN 62305 – IV,
that suitable coordinated over-voltage surge protection devices with an extra low let –

through voltage are used for protecting any terminal devices i.e. DBs feeding critical
services or even the local critical electrical gadget.
2.7 PROTECTION FOR DATA, SIGNAL AND TELEPHONE LINES
A. The Specialist Lightning Protection Installer shall also install transient overvoltage
protectors on all data communication/signal/telephone lines in order to protect
equipment connected to the line, against transient over voltage (Where data lines link
equipment in separate buildings, transient overvoltage protectors should be installed at
both ends of the line in order to protect both pieces of equipment.)
B. Protectors shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of:

1. BS EN 62305:2011 – Electrical & Electronics Systems Protection within
structures (Part 4),
2. CCITT IX K17 ‘Tests on power fed repeaters using solid-state devices in order to
check the arrangements for protection from external interference’.
C. Protectors shall be rated for Location Category - High Exposure Level (as defined by
BS EN 62305 – 4: 2006), unless contrary information dictates a lower Exposure Level.
D. The protector must not impair the system’s normal operation. It should not:
1. suppress the system’s normal signal voltage
2. restrict the system’s bandwidth or signal frequency
3. introduce excessive in-line resistance
4. cause signal reflections or impedance mismatches (high frequency systems
only).
E. The protector will have a low transient let-through voltage for tests conducted in
accordance with BS EN 62305 -4: 2006 (5kV 10/700µs test).
F. This let-through performance will be provided for all combinations of conductors:

1. signal line to signal line
2. signal line to screen/earth.
G. The protector shall be rated for a peak discharge current of 10kA.
H. The protector shall be supplied with detailed installation instructions. The installer must
comply with the installation practice detailed by the protector manufacturer. The
protector manufacturer should allow for the facility to mount and earth large numbers of
protectors through an accessory combined mounting and earthing kit.
2.8 EQUIPOTENTIAL BONDING
A. Lightning Protection Installer shall ensure proper co-ordination between the Structural ,
Civil , Electrical and the Cladding contractor.
B. All installation details shall be agreed with the Engineer prior to commencement of work.
The Specialist Lightning Protection Installer shall obtain an inspection certificate from
the manufacturer or its authorized representative towards the satisfactory installation of
the system and that proper material in accordance to the above standard has been
used.

C. Equipotential Bonding is the electrical interconnection of all the appropriate metallic
installation / parts, such that in the event of the lightning current flowing, no metallic part
is at a different voltage potential with respect to another. The metallic parts have to be
essentially at the same potential so that the risk of sparking or flash over is nullified. This
electrical interconnection shall be achieved by using specific bonding solid copper bar of
at least 50mm x 6mm cross section area. Bonding shall also incorporate the use of
surge protection devices where direct connection to the bonding bar is not suitable or
practical. The SPDs must be installed in such a way that they are readily accessible and
visible for inspection purposes.
D. For structures taller than 30 meters, the specialist lightning Protection installer shall
install the equipotential bonding at either the basement or the ground level and then
every 20 meters floor thereafter. Wherever protection of internal systems against over-
voltages caused by lightning discharge requires SPDs, these shall conform to BSEN
62305 – Part 4.
E. The gas, water and other metallic systems shall all be bonded directly to the equi-
potential bar located inside but close to the outer wall near the ground floor or basement
level. The power cable shall be bonded to the equi-potential bonding bar via a suitable
SPD. The screen of the antenna cable or any shielded power supply shall also be
bonded to the equipotential bar.
F. Service entry SPDs are for metallic electrical services only - gas and water do not fall
under this category. Metallic gas and water need to be directly bonded. The service
entry data and telecom lines can handle 2.5kA (10µs/350 µs) per line, so the specialist
lightning protection installer shall provide suitable SPDs in accordance to the above
specification as per the BSEN 62305 – Part 4
G. Since the service entrance SPDs are designed to protect against dangerous sparking
only as per BS EN 62305-3. The specialist lightning protection installer shall need to fit
additional protection at the sub-distribution and near equipment to protect electronic
equipment to BS EN 62305-4. Both types of SPD are a required in accordance with this
BS EN standard if the risk assessment demands this.
H. The bonding bar shall be located close to the main distribution board and shall be
connected to earth termination network at ≤ 1 ohm, with a very short length conductor
not exceeding 10 meters in length.
I. Please refer to the details for further clarification.
J. All the bonding bars at different levels shall be connected to each other, which in-turn is
earthed at 1 ohm.
K. Isolating spark gap (ISG) devices (to BS EN/ IEC 62561-3) suitable for equipotential
bonding of different earthing systems during transient activity shall be provided
2.9 MATERIALS
A. Materials shall comply in weight, size and composition with the requirements of BS EN
50164.
B. All surge protection devices to be used shall be from the same manufacturer who
supplies the structural lightning protection. Surge protectors shall be manufactured for

the specific type and voltage of the electrical service and shall provide clamping for both
normal (L-N) and common (L-N-G) mode protection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install lightning protection components and systems according to BS EN 62305.
B. Install conductors with direct paths from air terminals to ground connections. Avoid
sharp bends and narrow loops.
C. Conceal the following conductors:
D. System conductors.
E. Down conductors.
F. Interior conductors.
G. Conductors within normal view from exterior locations at grade within 60 m of building.
H. Notify Architect at least 48 hours in advance of inspection before concealing lightning

protection components.
I. Cable Connections: Use approved exothermic-welded connections for all conductor

splices and connections between conductors and other components, except those
above single-ply membrane roofing.
3.2 TESTING
A. On completion of the installation or of any modification to it, the following isolated and
combined measurement and / or checks has to be made and the results recorded in a
lightning protection system logbook.
B. The resistance to earth of each local earth electrode and in addition the resistance to
earth of the complete earth termination system.
C. Each local earth electrode has be measured in isolation and the test point between the
down conductor and the earth electrode in the disconnected position (isolated
measurement)
D. A further measurement has to be taken with the test point in the connected position
(combined measurement)
E. The results of visual check of all conductors, bonds and joints and their measured
electrical continuity.
F. If the resistance to earth of a lightning protection system exceeds 10 ohms, the value
must be reduced. Necessary remedial action needs to be taken to reduce the value
below or equal to 10 ohms.

G. The shop drawings must be approved by the manufacturer or the manufacturer’s
authorized representative, which has to be used for installation afterwards to ensure
total adherence to the standards and requirements. Also the manufacturer or the
manufacturer-authorized representative will have to survey and certify the installation to
ensure the standards.
H. The manufacturer or the manufacturer’s authorized representative will certify the bill of
materials, provided by the Specialist Lightning Protection Installer for the project.
I. The Specialist Lightning Protection Installer must submit the Test Certificates of the
materials used as per BSEN 50164, which should be attested in original by the
manufacturer or the manufacturer’s authorized representative.
3.3 RECORDS
A. The person has to keep on site or the following records, responsible for the upkeep of
the installation:
1. Approved shop drawings, showing the nature, dimensions, materials and position
of all component parts of the lightning protection system.
2. The nature of the soil and any special earthing arrangements.
3. The type and position of the earth electrodes, including reference electrodes.
4. The test conditions and the result obtained.
5. Any alteration, additions or repairs to the system.
6. The name of the person responsible for the installation upkeep.
7. A label should be attached at the origin of the electrical installation, worded as
follows
8. “This structure is provided with a lightning protection system in accordance with
BSEN 62305 and BSEN 50164 and the bonding to the services and the main
equi-potential bonding should be maintained accordingly”
3.5 MAINTENANCE
C. The periodic inspections and tests recommended will show what maintenance, if any is
needed. Tests have to be repeated at fixed intervals, as mentioned in the BSEN 62305
– Part III.

D. Particular attention should be given to the following :
1. Evidence of corrosion or conditions likely to lead to corrosion
2. Alterations and additions to the structure which may affect the lightning protection
system (e.g. erection of radio and television aerials, installation of crane tracks,
glass / window cleaning system etc)
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 5119
LED INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the following types of LED luminaires:
1. Cylinder.
2. Downlight.
3. Highbay, linear.
4. Highbay, nonlinear.
5. Linear industrial.
6. Lowbay.
7. Parking garage.
8. Recessed, linear.
9. Strip light.
10. Surface mount, linear.
11. Surface mount, nonlinear.
12. Suspended, linear.
13. Suspended, nonlinear.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
1. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

2. CRI: Color Rendering Index.
3. Fixture: See "Luminaire."
4. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating.
5. LED: Light-emitting diode.
6. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.
7. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.
KEO/19-3262-0000 26 5119/1 Led Interior Lighting


1. Arrange in order of luminaire designation.
2. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes.
3. Include physical description and dimensions of luminaires.
4. Include emergency lighting units, including batteries and chargers.
5. Include life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data.
6. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying
with IES "Lighting Measurements Testing and Calculation Guides" for each
luminaire type. The adjustment factors shall be for lamps and accessories
identical to those indicated for the luminaire as applied in this Project IES LM-79
and IES LM-80.
a. Manufacturers' Certified Data: Photometric data certified by
manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National
Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting
Products.
b. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated luminaires, photometric data
certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for
remaining luminaires shall be certified by manufacturer.
B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom luminaires.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details.
2. Include details of luminaire assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and
size of each field connection.
3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Samples: For each luminaire and for each color and texture with standard factory-
applied finish.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of luminaire with custom factory-applied
finishes.
1. Include Samples of luminaires and accessories involving color and finish
selection.
E. Samples for Verification: For each type of luminaire.

1. Include Samples of luminaires and accessories to verify finish selection.
F. Product Schedule: For luminaires and lamps.
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on
which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from
installers of the items involved:
1. Luminaires.
2. Suspended ceiling components.
3. Partitions and millwork that penetrate the ceiling or extend to within 300 mm of
the plane of the luminaires.
4. Structural members to which equipment and luminaires will be attached.
5. Initial access modules for acoustical tile, including size and locations.
6. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following:
a. Other luminaires.
b. Air outlets and inlets.
c. Speakers.
d. Sprinklers.
e. Access panels.
f. Ceiling-mounted projectors.
g. Fire alarm detectors
h. Lighting control devices
7. Moldings.
8. Coordinate "Qualification Data" Paragraph below with qualification requirements
in Section 01 4000 "Quality Requirements" and as may be supplemented in
"Quality Assurance" Article.
B. Qualification Data: For testing laboratory providing photometric data for luminaires.
C. Seismic Qualification Data: For luminaires, accessories, and components, from

manufacturer.
D. Product Certificates: For each type of luminaire.
E. Product Test Reports: For each type of luminaire, for tests performed by manufacturer
and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.
F. Sample warranty.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and lighting systems to include in
operation and maintenance manuals.
1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use British Standards, CIBSE
Society of Light and Lighting recommendations and manufacturers' codes.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Lamps (If applicable): Twenty for every 100 of each type and rating installed.
Furnish at least one of each type.
2. Glass, Acrylic, and Plastic Lenses, Covers, and Other Optical Parts: Five for
every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
3. Diffusers and Lenses: Five for every 100 of each type and rating installed.
Furnish at least one of each type.
4. Globes and Guards: Two for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish
at least one of each type.
5. Twenty units of each type luminaries installed
B. Spare parts shall be delivered to the Owner’s central storage facility.

A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Luminaire

manufacturer's laboratory that is accredited under the BS EN60598-1,2, and 3 for
Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
B. Provide luminaires from a single manufacturer for each luminaire type.
C. Each luminaire type shall be binned within a three-step MacAdam Ellipse to ensure
color consistency among luminaires.
D. Mockups: For interior luminaires in room or module mockups, complete with power and
control connections.
1. Obtain Architect's approval of luminaires in mockups before starting installations.
2. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard
for judging the completed Work.
3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the
Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves
such deviations in writing.
4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part
of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
A. Protect finishes of exposed surfaces by applying a strippable, temporary protective

covering before shipping.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of

luminaires that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
B. Warranty Period: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

use only firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of LED Interior Lighting, of types and
capacities required which have been in satisfactory use in similar or service for not less
than five (5) years and approved by the Architect/ Engineer.
A. Seismic Performance: Luminaires and lamps shall be labeled vibration and shock
resistant.
1. The term "withstand" means "the luminaire will remain in place without
separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the
luminaire will be fully operational during and after the seismic event."

B. Ambient Temperature: Minus 15 to plus 40 deg C.
1. Relative Humidity: Zero to 95 percent.
2.3 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS

BS7671, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
B. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps. Locate

labels where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal
viewing angles when lamps are in place.
1. Label shall include the following lamp characteristics:
a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type.
b. Lamp diameter, shape, size, wattage, and coating.
c. CCT and CRI.
C. Recessed luminaires shall comply with NEMA LE 4.
D. NRTL Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for
indicated class and division of hazard by an NRTL.
E. FM Global Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled
for indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global.
2.4 CYLINDER
A. Nominal Operating Voltage: 240 V ac.
B. Lamp:
1. Minimum allowable efficacy of 65 lm/W for general lighting.
2. CRI of minimum 80. CCT of 3000 K - 4000 K
3. Rated lamp life of 50,000 hours to L70.
4. Dimmable from 100 percent to 0 percent of maximum light output.
5. Internal driver.
6. User-Replaceable Lamps:
a. Bulb shape complying with BS EN60598-1,2, and 3.
b. Lamp base complying with BS EN60598-1,2, and 3 .
7. Lens Thickness: At least 3.175-mm minimum unless otherwise indicated.
C. Housings:
1. Refer to luminaire schedule.
D. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage
under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools.
Components are designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other
components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating
position.
E. Diffusers and Globes:

2. Acrylic Diffusers: One hundred percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance
to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.
3. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.
F. With integral mounting provisions.
G. Standards:
1. ENERGY STAR certified.
2. RoHS compliant.
3. UL Listing: Listed for damp location.
2.5 DOWNLIGHT
B. Lamp:
1. Minimum 250lm.
2. Minimum allowable efficacy of 65 lm/W.
3. CRI of minimum 80 . CCT of 3000 K - 4100 K.
6. Internal driver.
b. Lamp base complying with BS EN60598-1,2, and 3.
c. Lens Thickness: At least 3.175-mm minimum unless otherwise indicated.
C. Housings:
Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling
accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.

F. Standards:
2. RoHS compliant.
4. Recessed luminaires shall comply with BS EN60598-1,2, and 3.
2.6 HIGHBAY, LINEAR
A. Nominal Operating Voltage: 240V ac.
B. Lamp:
1. Minimum 250lm.
3. CRI of minimum 80 CCT of 3000K – 4000K
6. Internal driver.
C. Housings:
position.

F. Standards:
1. Part L Building Regulations compliant.
2.7 HIGHBAY, NONLINEAR
B. Lamp:
1. Minimum 250lm.
2. Minimum allowable efficacy of 65lm/W.
3. CRI of minimum 80. CCT of 3000 K -4100 K.
6. Internal driver.
C. Housings:
2. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light
leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without
use of tools. Components are designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses,
diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and
when secured in operating position.
D. Diffusers and Globes:


E. Standards:
2.8 LINEAR INDUSTRIAL .
A. Lamp:
1. Minimum 250 lm.
3. CRI of minimum 80. CCT of 3000K – 4000K.
6. Internal driver.
B. Housings:
C. Housing and Heat Sink Rating:

1. Class 1,
2. IP 54.
3. IP 66.
4. Marine and wet locations.
position.

G. Standards:
2.9 LOWBAY
B. Lamp:
1. Minimum 250lm.
3. CRI of minimum 65. CCT of 3000K-4000K.
6. Internal driver.
C. Housings:
position.

F. Standards:
2.10 PARKING GARAGE
B. Lamp:
1. Minimum 250 lm.
3. CRI of minimum 80. CCT of 3000 K-4000 K.
6. Internal driver.
C. Housings:
position.
G. Standards:
2.11 RECESSED, LINEAR
B. Lamp:
1. Minimum 250 lm.
3. CRI of minimum 80. CCT of 3000 K-4000 K.
6. Internal driver.
C. Housings:
position.

F. Standards:
2.12 STRIP LIGHT
B. Lamp:
1. Minimum 750 lm.
3. CRI of minimum 80. CCT of 3000 K 4000 K.
6. Internal driver.
C. Housings:
under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping of luminaire without use of
tools. Components are designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other
position.

F. Standards:
2.13 SURFACE MOUNT, LINEAR
B. Lamp:
1. Minimum 250 lm.
6. Internal driver.
C. Housings:
position.

F. Standards:
2.14 SURFACE MOUNT, NONLINEAR
A. Nominal Operating Voltage: 240v.
B. Lamp:
1. Minimum 250 lm.
6. Internal driver.
C. Housings:
position.

F. Standards:
2. RoHS compliant.
2.15 SUSPENDED, LINEAR
A. Nominal Operating Voltage240v.
B. Lamp:
1. Minimum 250 lm.
6. Internal driver.
C. Housings:
position.

F. Standards:
2.16 SUSPENDED, NONLINEAR
A. Nominal Operating Voltage 240v.
B. Lamp:
1. Minimum 250 lm.
6. Internal driver.
C. Housings:
position.

F. Standards:
2.17 MATERIALS
A. Metal Parts:
1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated.
3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.
2.18 METAL FINISHES
A. Variations in finishes are unacceptable in the same piece. Variations in finishes of

adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples
and if they can be and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
2.19 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT
A. Comply with requirements in Section 26 0529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical
Systems" for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle
supports.
B. Single-Stem Hangers: 13-mm steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy.
Finish same as luminaire.
C. Wires: BS 7671, soft temper, zinc-coated steel,2.68 mm.
D. Rod Hangers: 5-mm minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.
E. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to luminaire, line voltage, and equipment
with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
the Work.
B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire to verify actual locations of luminaire and electrical
connections before luminaire installation.
3.2 TEMPORARY LIGHTING

A. If approved by the Architect, use selected permanent luminaires for temporary lighting.
When construction is sufficiently complete, clean luminaires used for temporary lighting
and install new lamps.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with BS 7671.
B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Install lamps in each luminaire.
D. Supports:
1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight.
2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning and relamping.
3. Provide support for luminaire without causing deflection of ceiling or wall.
4. Luminaire-mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of
100 percent of luminaire weight and a vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire
weight.
E. Flush-Mounted Luminaires:
1. Secured to outlet box.
2. Attached to ceiling structural members at four points equally spaced around
circumference of luminaire.
3. Trim ring flush with finished surface.
F. Wall-Mounted Luminaires:
1. Do not attach luminaires directly to gypsum board.
G. Suspended Luminaires:
1. Ceiling Mount:
3. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 1200 mm, brace to limit swinging.
4. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Luminaires: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.
Support with approved outlet box and accessories that hold stem and provide
damping of luminaire oscillations. Support outlet box vertically to building
structure using approved devices.
5. Continuous Rows of Luminaires: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and
tubing or rod,wire support for suspension for each unit length of luminaire
chassis, including one at each end.
6. Do not use ceiling grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires
or rods to building structure.
H. Ceiling-Grid-Mounted Luminaires:
1. Secure to any required outlet box.
2. Secure luminaire to the luminaire opening using approved fasteners in a
minimum of four locations, spaced near corners of luminaire.
3. Use approved devices and support components to connect luminaire to ceiling
grid and building structure in a minimum of four locations, spaced near corners of
luminaire.
I. Comply with requirements in Section 26 0519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power

Conductors and Cables" for wiring connections.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements
for identification specified in Section 26 0553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after
electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation.
2. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper
operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to
normal.
B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and
inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.6 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Comply with requirements for startup specified in Section 26 0943.16 "Addressable-

Luminaire Lighting Controls."
B. Comply with requirements for startup specified in Section 26 0943.23 "Relay-Based

Lighting Controls."
3.7 ADJUSTING
A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial

Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting the direction of aim of luminaires to
suit occupied conditions. Make up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal hours
for this purpose. Some of this work may be required during hours of darkness.
1. During adjustment visits, inspect all luminaires. Replace lamps or luminaires that
are defective.
2. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and
supplies.
3. Adjust the aim of luminaires in the presence of the Architect.
3.8 MAINTENANCE
END OF SECTION

SECTION 27 1000
ANALOGUE TELEPHONE SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Complete telephone system of telephone outlets, wiring, draw in boxes etc. is to be

applied and ready to work except for telephone devices, which shall be supplied by the
owner.
1.02 REFERENCES:
A. References according to the latest relevant British Standards
B. All wiring of telephone works shall be according to the latest Ministry of Communication
(MOC) Regulations and Specifications
1.03 SCOPE OF WORKS:
A. Telephone work comprises the supply and installation of the following to provide a
telephone system in good working order as per MOC Regulations.
1. Telephone terminal cabinet and draw boxes
2. Telephone Socket outlets
3. Telephone cables
4. Conduits, cable trays and their accessories.
1.04 SUBMISSIONS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit working drawings of the system, for approval
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

provided shall be from the manufacturer listed in Section 26 6000 – Electrical Approved
Vendors List
2.02 TELEPHONE TERMINAL CABINETS AND DRAW BOX
A. Flush-mounting type
KEO/19-3262-0000 27 1000/1 Analogue Telephone System
B. Dust vermin proof
C. Lockable type (barrel lock). hinged door type which is completely flush mounted
D. To be provided with LSA Cat6 110-type connecting blocks with color coded strips
E. Draw boxes hinged door type, which is completely flush mounted. The external
telephone draw-in box to be weatherproof of (IP-54).
2.03 TELEPHONE SOCKET OUTLETS
A. Flush mount jacks for telephone shall be an eight-pin, eight conductor (8P8C) modular,
with an insulation displacement connector on the rear. They shall provide color-coding
for the T568B wiring schedule.
B. UTP Jacks shall meet or exceed ANSI/TIA/EIA Category 6 component compliance

through the frequency range of 1 to 250MHz
C. Be backwards compatible to allow lower performing categories of cables or connecting

hardware and support industry standards for T568A or T568B wiring options.
D. Be backwards compatible to allow lower performing categories of cables or connecting

hardware to operate to their full capacity.
E. Faceplates shall be a single gang as identified on drawings, Jacks shall be of the same
manufacturer.
F. All telephone socket-outlets shall be of same finishing as the power socket-outlets
2.04 TELEPHONE CABLES
A. Horizontal cabling shall be a 100 ohm, 23 AWG, 4-Pair, Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP),
of a LSZH construction, compliant with ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-C.2 for Category 6 / ISO
Class E performance, with swept frequency testing to at least 250 MHz. Cable
characteristics shall be as follows:
1. Conductor resistance at 20o C (max): 8.9 ohms/100m.
2. DC Resistance Unbalanced (max), Individual pair %: 3
3. Characteristics Impedance (Zc): 100 ohms (± 15%).
4. Delay Skew (max): 25 ns/100m
B. Have a construction comprised of 4-pairs of 0.57mm (0.022 in) (23AWG) solid bare
copper conductors utilizing a centre isolation member to maintain pair geometry for
optimal NEXT performance
C. Plenum rated
D. All copper components used in the horizontal system will be of the same manufacturer,
and will all be third party TESTED & VERIFIED to Cat 6 components, permanent link &
channel, complying with ANSI / TIA / EIA, ISO / IEC & CENELEC EN standards.
E. Each cable box/reel shall be individually tested by the manufacturer and be delivered
with manufacturer’s test results affixed.

F. The outermost jacket shall be indelibly printed by the manufacturer listing the name of
the manufacturer, UL rating, and incremental footage markings.
G. Cable sheath shall be Low Smoke Zero Halogen jacket, meeting IEC 60332-1 (flame
retardant), IEC 60754-2, IEC 601034 fire resistance standards and low smoke emission
compliance EN 50267-2-1.
2.05 CONDUITS, CABLE TRAY AND THEIR ACCESSORIES
A. Conduit, cable tray and their accessories shall be as specified elsewhere.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
3.02 GENERALLY
A. Installation shall be in accordance with the regulations of Ministry of Communications.
B. The general layout of ducts, cable tray and conduit and the positions of distribution
boxes shall be as shown on the drawings. Contractor shall co-ordinate with Laboratory
Benches supplier for exact location of entry of telephone and data services prior to
preparing shop drawings.
3.03 TELEPHONE TERMINAL CABINET AND DRAW BOX
A. Fix in location indicated on the Drawings and as directed by the Engineer.
3.04 TELEPHONE OUTLETS:
A. Fix where instructed by the Engineer or as per approved shop drawings. Telephone
socket locations are not final and these have to be coordinated with other trades and the
same to be finalized.
3.05 WIRING:
A. Fix and terminate all cables neatly.
B. Provide cable marking to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3.06 SEPARATE EARTHING
A. All drain wires shall be terminated on an earth pit, which ultimately shall be connected
by a conductor of minimum 16 sq. mm to an independent earthing system meant for the
telephone network. Such earthing shall be totally separate from the other earthing
systems of the building. Connection to the MDF/TTC post and the electrodes shall be of
the soldered type.

3.07 SITE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing:
1. Test the installation in accordance with the regulations of the Ministry of
Communication.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 27 1100
COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This section details the technical requirement for Communications Equipment Room
Fittings
B. Section Includes:
1. Backboards.
2. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.
3. Power strips.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Where required, terms are defined herein.

1. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.
2. RCDD: Registered communications distribution designer.
3. Service Provider: The operator of a telecommunications transmission service
delivered through access provider facilities.
4. TGB: Telecommunications grounding bus bar.
5. TMGB: Telecommunications main grounding bus bar.
A. Unless stated otherwise or specifically mentioned in this Section, the Contractor shall
comply with all the standards of quality of materials and workmanship as specified in
the relevant articles of the following sections:
1. Division 26 Section 26 0526 "Earthing and Bonding for Electrical Systems"
2. Division 26 Section 26 0529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems"
3. Division 26 Section 26 0533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems"
4. Division 26 Section 26 0536 "Cable Trays and Ladder for Electrical Systems"
5. Division 27 Section 271116 “Communications racks, frames, and enclosures”
6. Division 27 Section 27 1323 “Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling”
7. Division 27 Section 27 1513 "Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling"

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for equipment racks and cabinets.
2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics,
and furnished specialties and accessories.
KEO/19-3262-0000 27 1100/1 Communications Equipment Room Fittings
B. Shop Drawings: For communications equipment room fittings. Include plans,
elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of
2. Equipment Racks and Cabinets: Include workspace requirements and access
for cable connections.
3. Grounding: Indicate location of grounding bus bar and its mounting detail
showing standoff insulators and wall mounting brackets.
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.
A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on

staff.
1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings shall be under the direct
supervision of RCDD.
2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of
Registered Technician, who shall be present at all times when Work of this
Section is performed at Project site.
3. Field Inspector: Currently registered by BICSI as RCDD to perform the on-site
inspection.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications:

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to
supervise on-site testing.
A. All reference to standards, regulations and requirements of statutory bodies shall

mean the latest published editions at the time of contact.

1. Institute of Electrical & Electronics Engineers Eighteenth Edition
2. International Organization for Standards (ISO) 9001 - Quality Management
Systems - Requirements.
3. ANSI/TIA-569-E Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications
Pathways and Spaces


A. Refer to section “Climatic Condition” in Division 26 0500 - Common Requirements for

Electrical Installations.
1.010 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of communications equipment with

telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers. Coordinate service
entrance arrangement with local service provider.
1. Meet jointly with telecommunications and LAN equipment suppliers, local
exchange carrier representatives, and Owner to exchange information and
agree on details of equipment arrangements and installation interfaces.
2. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute them to other
participants.
3. Adjust arrangements and locations of distribution frames, cross-connects, and
patch panels in equipment rooms to accommodate and optimize arrangement
and space requirements of telephone switch and LAN equipment.
4. Adjust arrangements and locations of equipment with distribution frames, cross-
connects, and patch panels of cabling systems of other communications,
electronic safety and security, and related systems that share space in the
equipment room.
B. Coordinate location of power raceways and receptacles with locations of

communications equipment requiring electrical power to operate.


contents
1. Power strips – 4 nos
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

documents, use only firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of Communications
Equipment Room Fittings, of types and capacities required which have been in
satisfactory use in similar or service for not less than ten (10) years and approved by
the Engineer.
2.02 BACKBOARDS
A. Plywood, fire-retardant treated, 19 by 1200 by 2400 mm. Comply with requirements

for plywood backing panels specified in Division 06 Section 06 1000 "Rough
Carpentry" for plywood backing panels. For the Main Telecom Room, a minimum of
one wall shall be covered with plywood sheets, mounted vertically, with the bottom of
the plywood mounted 150 mm above the finished floor with the best side toward the
room. Plywood shall be permanently fastened to the wall by means of wall anchors
utilizing galvanized, zinc plated, or stainless steel hardware with a flat head. Finished
installation shall have flush appearance with countersunk screw heads to prevent
splitting of the plywood. Drywall screws are not acceptable. Comply with ANSI/TIA-
569-E
2.03 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A. Comply with requirements in Section 271116 "Communications Racks, Frames, and

Enclosures."
2.04 POWER STRIPS
A. Comply with requirements in Section 271116 "Communications Racks, Frames, and

Enclosures."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 ENTRANCE FACILITIES

A. Contact telecommunications service provider in coordination with Client IT Department
and arrange for installation of demarcation point, protected entrance terminals, and a
housing when so directed by service provider.
B. Install buried pathways complying with recommendations in ANSI/TIA-569-E,

"Entrance Facilities" Article.
C. Install buried entrance pathway complying with Division 26 Section 26 0543

"Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems."
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with BICSI's "Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual" for layout of

communications equipment spaces.
B. Comply with BICSI's "Information Technology Systems Installation Methods Manual"

for installation of equipment in communications equipment spaces.
C. Bundle, lace, and train conductors and cables to terminal points without exceeding
manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.
D. Coordinate layout and installation of communications equipment in racks and in room.

1. Meet jointly with the Client IT Department and the Engineer to exchange
information and agree on details of equipment configurations and installation
interfaces.
participants.
3. Adjust configurations and locations of distribution frames, cross-connects, and
patch panels in equipment rooms to accommodate and optimize configurations
and space requirements of communications equipment.
4. Adjust configurations and locations of equipment with distribution frames,
cross-connects, and patch panels of cabling systems of other communications,
electronic safety and security, and related systems that share space in
equipment room.
E. Coordinate location of power raceways and receptacles with locations of

F. Backboards:
1. Install from 150 mm to 2588 mm above finished floor. If plywood is fire rated,
ensure that fire-rating stamp is visible after installation.
2. Paint all sides of backboard with two coats of paint, leaving fire rating stamp
visible.
3. Comply with requirements for backboard installation in BICSI's "Information
Technology Systems Installation Methods Manual" and TIA-569-E.
3.03 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies.
Comply with requirements in Section 26 0500 - Common Requirements for Electrical
Installations
3.04 FIRESTOPPING
A. Comply with requirements in Section 07 8400 "Firestopping."
B. Comply with TIA-569-E, Annex A, "Firestopping."
C. Comply with BICSI's "Information Technology Systems Installation Methods Manual,"

"Firestopping Practices" Ch.
3.05 MAINTENANCE
B. The contractor during that period shall provide labor and parts warranty on the
A. The Contractor shall prepare fully detailed Operation and Maintenance Manuals for
the system and submit to the Engineer for his approval.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 27 1116
COMMUNICATIONS RACKS, FRAMES, AND ENCLOSURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This section details the technical requirement for Communications Racks, Frames,
and Enclosures
1. 19-inch equipment cabinets for Telecom Rooms
2. 19-inch equipment cabinets for Main Computer Room (MCR)
3. Rack mounted PDUs
4. Grounding
5. Labeling
1.02 DEFINITIONS

1. Basket Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of wire mesh bottom and
side rails.
4. RCDD: Registered communications distribution designer.
5. Service Provider: provider of external communications pathways
6. TGB: Telecommunications grounding bus bar.
7. TMGB: Telecommunications main grounding bus bar.
1. Division 26 Section 26 0526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems"
5. Division 27 Section 27 1100 “Communications Equipment Room Fittings”

KEO/19-3262-0000 27 1116/1 Communications Racks, Frames, and Enclosures
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for equipment racks and cabinets.
2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics,
certifications, standards compliance, and furnished specialties and
accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: For communications racks, frames, and enclosures. Include plans,
elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of
2. Equipment Racks and Cabinets: Include workspace requirements and access
for cable connections.
3. Grounding: Indicate location of TGB and its mounting detail showing standoff
insulators and wall-mounting brackets.
A. Qualification Data: For qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field
inspector.

staff.
1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings shall be under the direct
supervision of RCDD.
3. Field Inspector: Currently registered by BICSI as RCDD to perform the on-site
inspection.



1. Institute of Electrical & Electronics Engineers Eighteenth Edition
2. International Organization for Standards (ISO) 9001 - Quality Management
Systems - Requirements.
3. ANSI/TIA-569-E Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications
Pathways and Spaces


1.010 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of communications equipment with Owner's

telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers. Coordinate service
entrance arrangement with local service provider.
1. Meet jointly with telecommunications and LAN equipment suppliers, local
exchange carrier representatives, and Owner to exchange information and
agree on details of equipment arrangements and installation interfaces.
participants.
3. Adjust arrangements and locations of distribution frames, cross-connects, and
patch panels in equipment rooms to accommodate and optimize arrangement
and space requirements of telephone switch and LAN equipment.
4. Adjust arrangements and locations of equipment with distribution frames, cross-
connects, and patch panels of cabling systems of other communications,
electronic safety and security, and related systems that share space in the
equipment room.
B. Coordinate location of power raceways and receptacles with locations of


contents
1. Cable Management Accessories – 5 % of total quantity
2. Rack mounted PDUs – 5 % of total quantity
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Racks, Frames, and Enclosures Fittings, of types and capacities required which have
been in satisfactory use in similar or service for not less than ten (10) years and
approved by the Engineer.
2.02 19-INCH EQUIPMENT CABINETS
A. Description: Manufacturer-assembled four-post frame enclosed by side and top

panels and front and rear doors, designed for mounting telecommunications
equipment. Width is compatible with EIA/ECIA 310-E, 19-inch (482.6-mm) equipment
mounting with an opening of 17.72 inches (450 mm) between rails.
B. General Cabinet Requirements:

1. Modular units designed for telecommunications terminal support and
coordinated with dimensions of units to be supported.
2. Material: Steel.
3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked-polyester powder coat.
4. Color: Black/ Glacial White.
C. Cabinet Requirements for Telecom Rooms:

1. Cabinets: Provide freestanding equipment cabinets to store computer, data
storage, networking and security equipment in the data centers, computer
rooms and equipment rooms. Each cabinet enclosure shall have a rectangular
frame and removable top panel, side panels and doors. Installed cabinets shall
include thermal, power, and cable management accessories that control airflow
through the cabinet and keep network and power cables separate and
organized.
2. Cabinet Frame:
a. The cabinet frame shall be manufactured from steel and aluminum with
welded and bolted frame construction. The front and rear of the cabinet
shall be welded rectangular frames. The sides of the cabinet shall have
four slides, two at the top and two at the bottom.. The four slides shall be
bolted to the front and rear frames. The cabinet frame shall include
leveling feet and casters and label seals to cover any openings in the
frame.
b. Four slide cabinet frames shall support (1300 kg) of equipment when
supported on leveling feet and secured to the structural floor.
c. The cabinet shall be 79.4” (2016 mm) high by 31.5” (800 mm) wide by
31.5” (800 mm), deep
3. Equipment Mounting Rails: Each cabinet shall include two pairs of equipment
mounting rails. Mounting rails shall bolt to the side supports (slides) located
near the top and bottom of the frame and shall be fully adjustable in depth to
provide front and rear support for equipment. Equipment Mounting Rails shall
be spaced horizontally to support 19” (482.6 mm) wide EIA/ECA-310-E
compliant rack-mount equipment and shall provide up to 29.3” (745 mm) of rail-
to-rail depth for equipment. Mounting rails shall be square-punched according
to the EIA/ECA-310-E Universal hole pattern with equipment mounting holes
on alternating 5/8” – 5/8” – 1/2“ (15.9 mm – 15.9 mm – 12.7 mm) vertical hole
centers. Square-punched holes shall accept cage nut hardware with various
threads. Rack mount spaces or units (U) shall be 1-3/4” (44.45 mm) high and
shall be marked and numbered on the mounting rails. Numbering shall start at
the bottom of the rail. Mounting rails shall provide 42U for equipment. The
mounting rails shall be fully bonded to the frame without wiring. Wide surface
mounting rails will support 19” (482.6 mm) wide EIA/ECA-310-E compliant rack-
mount equipment without the need for panel adapters or spacers. Wide surface
mounting rails will each provide four 5.5”H x 2.0”W (140 mm x 51 mm)
clearance holes for front to rear cabling. Front to rear pass throughs will accept
optional cable grommets that facilitate a front to rear pathway, protect cabling
from cuts or abrasion, and maintain airflow.
4. Top Panel: The cabinet shall include a solid top panel with four cable openings,
one in each corner. Each opening shall be 4.5”W x 9.0”D (114 mm x 228 mm).
Each opening shall include a snap on plastic cover that can be cut to pass
cables. The top panel shall feature tool-less removal.
5. Side Panels: The cabinet shall include two solid side panels. Each side panel
will be formed as a half-height panel. The top panel will rest on top of the bottom
panel so that the panels stack to form a single panel when installed. Each side
panel shall have a single keyed latch located at the top center of the top half-
height panel for easy installation and removal. Side panel latches shall not
occlude the mounting surface of accessories.
6. Front Door: The cabinet shall include a single curved perforated metal front door with
quick-release hinge pins. The primary door panel shall be constructed using a single
perforated sheet (78% open at perforation) with a solid outer perimeter. The primary
door panel shall be embossed with a 4.6” (117 mm) diameter concave feature along
the entire vertical height and include a protruding logo badge. The door shall be
removable and reversible to open from the right or left. The front door shall have a
swing handle with a single-point cam latch and a keyed lock.
7. Rear Door: The cabinet shall include a double (vertically split) perforated metal
rear door with quick-release hinge pins. Each door panel shall be constructed
using a single perforated sheet (78% open at perforation) with a solid outer
perimeter. The doors shall be removable. The double rear door shall have a
swing handle with a two-point latch and a keyed lock.
8. Material/Construction: The front and rear of the cabinet frame, mounting rails,
top panel, side panels and doors shall be manufactured from steel. Covers for
cable openings shall be plastic. The front and rear of the cabinet shall be welded
rectangular frames. The front and rear cabinet frames, mounting rail supports,
mounting rails, doors and side panels shall assemble with hardware.
9. Grounding/Bonding: The mounting rails, top panel, side panels and doors shall
be electrically bonded to the cabinet frame. The cabinet frame shall have a
prepared location for attaching a grounding lug at the top and bottom of the
frame. All internal and external accessory mounting tracks shall provide a
bonding path to the main cabinet ground without the need for additional surface
preparation.
10. PDU Mounting Brackets: The cabinet shall include one pair of PDU mounting
brackets. The brackets shall be L-shaped, shall attach to the rear right or left
corner of the cabinet frame and shall include tool-less mounting points for two
vertical rack-mount power distribution units (PDUs) or power strips. Tool-less
mounting points will be spaced vertically 64.75” (1645 mm) apart. The brackets
will support two 2.2” (56 mm) wide or narrower PDUs or power strips side-by-
side or one 4.5” (114 mm) wide PDU. The brackets will orient the PDUs/power
strips so that the outlets on the PDUs/power strips face the center of the cabinet
frame. The brackets will occupy no more than 4.6” (117 mm) of space in the
rear corner of the cabinet.
11. Color/Finish: The cabinet frame, top panel, side panels, mounting rails and
doors shall be painted Glacier White or Black with epoxy-polyester hybrid
powder coat paint. Plastic components, hinges and door handles shall be black.
12. Included Hardware: The cabinet shall include (4) casters, (4) leveling feet, (4)
floor attachment brackets and a baying kit. The manufacturer of the cabinet
shall sell compatible equipment mounting hardware as an accessory.
13. Cable Management Accessories:
a. General Requirements: Each installed cabinet shall be equipped with
additional cable management accessories that provide a specific vertical
and front-to-rear pathway for cables and manage cable slack. Install and
align one vertical cable manager with the cable openings in the top and/or
bottom panel so that cable is supported as it enters or exits the cabinet.
Install and align additional vertical cable managers, as required. Install a
front-to-rear manager between the front and rear equipment mounting
rails in wider cabinets to provide a front-to-rear pathway for cables, if
required.
b. Finger Cable Manager: Each installed cabinet shall be equipped with a
vertical cable manager to organize network cables. The vertical cable
manager shall attach to the side of the equipment mounting rail in the
cabinet. The vertical cable manager shall have cable openings along the
side that align with each rack-mount unit (U) space on the mounting rail.
In 31.5” (800 mm) wide cabinets, the openings shall be sized to allow 48
patch cords to enter each rack-mount unit (U) space. The cable openings
shall be separated by plastic T-shaped cable guides to route cables into
each space. Hinged covers shall be included with managers in wider
cabinets.
c. Cable Lashing Bracket: Each installed cabinet shall be equipped with a
cable lashing bracket to secure network cables In cabinets with 4-slide
frames, the cable lashing bracket shall include one full-height bracket.The
cable lashing bracket shall attach in a vertical orientation to the slides on
the side of the cabinet frame and shall adjust in depth independent of the
equipment mounting rails.
D. Cabinet Requirements for MCR:

1. Provide freestanding equipment cabinets to store computer, data storage,
networking and security equipment in the data centers, computer rooms and
equipment rooms. Each cabinet enclosure shall have a rectangular frame and
removable top panel, side panels and doors. Installed cabinets shall include
thermal, power, and cable management accessories that control airflow through
the cabinet and keep network and power cables separate and organized.
2. Cabinet Frame:
a. The cabinet frame shall be manufactured from steel and aluminum with
welded and bolted frame construction. The front and rear of the cabinet
shall be welded rectangular frames. The sides of the cabinet shall have
six slides, two at the top, two at the middle and two at the bottom. The
slides shall be extruded aluminum supports formed with integral .53”W
(13.5 mm) x .25”D (6.4 mm) T-slots to create front-to-rear tracks that
accept drop-in hardware and allow quick attachment and easy depth
adjustment of equipment mounting rails and thermal, cable and power
management accessories. Each slide shall have three T-slots (one top,
two on the side) to provide attachment points on the top and inside of the
slides. The T-slots on the top surfaces of the extruded aluminum slides at
the top of the frame shall be accessible from the top exterior of the cabinet
and provide a structural mounting surface for roof mounted accessories.
The T-slots shall provide a fully bonded connection between internal and
external mounted accessories without the need of surface preparation.
The six slides shall be bolted to the front and rear frames. The cabinet
frame shall include leveling feet and casters and label seals to cover any
openings in the frame.
b. Six slide cabinet frames shall support 3000 lb (1360 kg) of equipment
when supported on leveling feet and secured to the structural floor.
c. The cabinet frame shall support up to 2250 lb (1020 kg) of equipment
when moved while supported on casters.
d. The cabinet shall be 79.4” (2016 mm) high by 31.5” (800 mm) wide by
51.2” (1300 mm) deep when casters, doors and side panels are installed.
The cabinet frame is 47.2” (1200 mm) deep without doors.
3. Equipment Mounting Rails:
a. Each cabinet shall include two pairs of equipment mounting rails.
Mounting rails shall bolt to the side supports (slides) located near the
top, middle and bottom of the frame and shall be fully adjustable in depth
to provide front and rear support for equipment. Equipment Mounting
Rails shall be spaced horizontally to support 19” (482.6 mm) wide
EIA/ECA-310-E compliant rack-mount equipment and shall provide up
to 45.1” (1145 mm) of rail-to-rail depth for equipment. Mounting rails shall
be square-punched according to the EIA/ECA-310-E Universal hole
pattern with equipment mounting holes on alternating 5/8” – 5/8” – 1/2“
(15.9 mm – 15.9 mm – 12.7 mm) vertical hole centers. Square-punched
holes shall accept cage nut hardware with various threads. Rack mount
spaces or units (U) shall be 1-3/4” (44.45 mm) high and shall be marked
and numbered on the mounting rails. Numbering shall start at the bottom
of the rail. Mounting rails shall provide 42U for equipment. The mounting
rails shall be fully bonded to the frame without wiring. Wide surface
mounting rails will support 19” (482.6 mm) wide EIA/ECA-310-E
compliant rack-mount equipment without the need for panel adapters or
spacers. Wide surface mounting rails will each provide four 5.5”H x
2.0”W (140 mm x 51 mm) clearance holes for front to rear cabling. Front
to rear pass throughs will accept optional cable grommets that facilitate
a front to rear pathway, protect cabling from cuts or abrasion, and
maintain an airflow barrier between the front and rear surfaces of the rail.

4. Top Panel: The cabinet shall include a solid top panel with four cable openings,
one in each corner. Each opening shall be 4.5”W x 9.0”D (114 mm x 228 mm).
Each opening shall include a snap on plastic cover that can be cut to pass
cables. The top panel shall feature tool-less removal.
5. Side Panels :The cabinet shall include two half-height, solid side panels. Each
side panel shall have a keyed latch located at the top center of the panel for
easy installation and removal.
6. Front Door: The cabinet shall include a single curved perforated metal front
door with quick-release hinge pins. The primary door panel shall be
constructed using a single perforated sheet (78% open at perforation) with a
solid outer perimeter. The primary door panel shall be embossed with a 4.6”
(117 mm) diameter concave feature along the entire vertical height and include
a protruding logo badge. The door shall be removable and reversible to open
from the right or left. The front door shall have a swing handle with a single-
point cam latch and a keyed lock.
Rear Door: The cabinet shall include a double (vertically split) perforated metal
rear door with quick-release hinge pins. Each door panel shall be constructed
using a single perforated sheet (78% open at perforation) with a solid outer
perimeter. The doors shall be removable. The double rear door shall have a
swing handle with a two-point latch and a keyed lock.
7. Material/Construction: The front and rear of the cabinet frame, mounting rails,
top panel, side panels and doors shall be manufactured from steel. The cabinet
side supports/slides shall be manufactured from aluminum extrusion. Covers
for cable openings shall be plastic. The front and rear of the cabinet shall be
welded rectangular frames. The front and rear cabinet frames, mounting rail
supports, mounting rails, doors and side panels shall assemble with hardware.
8. Grounding/Bonding : The mounting rails, top panel, side panels and doors shall
be electrically bonded to the cabinet frame. The cabinet frame shall have a
prepared location for attaching a grounding lug at the top and bottom of the
frame. All internal and external accessory mounting tracks shall provide a
bonding path to the main cabinet ground without the need for additional surface
preparation.
9. PDU Mounting Brackets: The cabinet shall include one pair of PDU mounting
brackets. The brackets shall be L-shaped, shall attach to the rear right or left
corner of the cabinet frame and shall include tool-less mounting points for two
vertical rack-mount power distribution units (PDUs) or power strips. Tool-less
mounting points will be spaced vertically 64.75” (1645 mm) apart. The brackets
will support two 2.2” (56 mm) wide or narrower PDUs or power strips side-by-
side or one 4.5” (114 mm) wide PDU. The brackets will orient the PDUs/power
strips so that the outlets on the PDUs/power strips face the center of the cabinet
frame. The brackets will occupy no more than 4.6” (117 mm) of space in the
rear corner of the cabinet.
10. Certifications: The cabinet shall be UL Listed under the NWIN category as an
Audio/Video, Information and Communications Technology Equipment
Cabinet, Enclosure and Rack Systems using the requirements in UL 2416.
11. Color/Finish :The cabinet frame, top panel, side panels, mounting rails and
doors shall be painted Glacier White or Black with epoxy-polyester hybrid
powder coat paint. Plastic components, hinges and door handles shall be black.
Included Hardware: The cabinet shall include (4) casters, (4) leveling feet, (4)
floor attachment brackets and a baying kit. The manufacturer of the cabinet
shall sell compatible equipment mounting hardware as an accessory.
12. Thermal Management Accessories
a. Each installed cabinet shall be equipped with additional thermal
management accessories that prevent the mixing of hot and cold air
within the cabinet and bypass airflow through or around the cabinet.
Thermal management accessories may include any combination of Air
Dam, Bottom Panel, Equipment Rail Grommet Kit, Snap-In Filler Panels,
Label Seal Kit, Air Director, Grommet-Sealed Side Panels and Baying
Seal Kits. If integrated into an Aisle Containment Solution, the cabinet
will also include Floor Seal Kits.
b. Air Dam : Each installed cabinet shall be equipped with an internal
airflow baffle to block airflow around the sides and top of equipment in
the cabinet. The baffle shall adjust in depth with the equipment mounting
rails and shall include a flexible seal against the side panels. The airflow
baffle shall seal the space at the front of the cabinet between the
equipment mounting rails and the sides and top of the cabinet enclosure.
c. Equipment Rail Grommet Kit: Each installed cabinet shall be equipped
with snap-in plastic covers over any cable openings in the equipment
mounting rails to block airflow through the cable openings.
d. Snap-In Filler Panels: Each installed cabinet shall be equipped with filler
(blanking) panels that seal any open rack-mount unit space (spaces not
occupied by other equipment). The filler (blanking) panels shall be made
of plastic and shall be designed to attach to square-punched equipment
mounting rails without hardware. The filler (blanking) panel design shall
allow the panels to be installed and removed from the equipment
mounting rails without tools. Panels shall be sized to fit 1U x 19” EIA and
2U x 19” EIA rack-mount panel spaces.
13. Cable Management Accessories
a. General Requirements: Each installed cabinet shall be equipped with
additional cable management accessories that provide a specific vertical
and front-to-rear pathway for cables and manage cable slack. Install and
align one vertical cable manager with the cable openings in the top
and/or bottom panel so that cable is supported as it enters or exits the
cabinet. Install and align additional vertical cable managers, as required.
Install a front-to-rear manager between the front and rear equipment
mounting rails in wider cabinets to provide a front-to-rear pathway for
cables, if required.
b. Finger Cable Manager: Each installed cabinet shall be equipped with a
vertical cable manager to organize network cables. The vertical cable
manager shall attach to the side of the equipment mounting rail in the
cabinet. The vertical cable manager shall have cable openings along the
side that align with each rack-mount unit (U) space on the mounting rail.
In 23.6” (600 mm) wide cabinets, the openings shall be sized to allow 24
patch cords to enter each rack-mount unit (U) space. In 27.6” (700 mm)
wide cabinets, 29.5” (750 mm) wide cabinets, and 31.5” (800 mm) wide
cabinets, the openings shall be sized to allow 48 patch cords to enter
each rack-mount unit (U) space. The cable openings shall be separated
by plastic T-shaped cable guides to route cables into each space.
Hinged covers shall be included with managers in wider cabinets.
c. Cable Lashing Bracket: Each installed cabinet shall be equipped with a
cable lashing bracket to secure network cables. In cabinets with 6-slide
frames, the cable lashing bracket shall include two half-height brackets.
In cabinets with 4-slide frames, the cable lashing bracket shall include
one full-height bracket. Each racket will be 1.6” (41 mm) wide with one
vertical column of attachment points for securing cable bundles with
Velcro straps or tie-wraps. The cable lashing bracket shall attach in a
vertical orientation to the slides on the side of the cabinet frame and shall
adjust in depth independent of the equipment mounting rails.
2.03 POWER STRIPS – POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS (PDU)
A. Rack Mounted PDU’s.

1. General PDU Information: The Rack-Mounted PDU shall be vertical, single-input
and able to be mounted within a freestanding equipment rack or cabinet that is used
to store computer, network and data storage equipment in a data center, computer
room or network/telecommunications equipment room. The PDU shall provide reliable
power distribution to equipment with optional local and remote monitoring capabilities.
2. Power Input (Plug)
The PDU shall include one (1) single input cord permanently attached to the
PDU and 10’ (3m) in length. The PDU shall have a nominal input voltage
range of: 220-240V Single Phase Input
The PDU input plug shall be:
a. [C20 Inlet – no power cord]
b. [L6-20P], [L6-30P]
c. [IEC 16A 2P+E], [IEC 32A 2P+E]
d. [L14-20P], [L14-30P]
e. [L15-20P], [L15-30P]
f. [L21-20P], [L21-30P]
g. [50A CS8365C 3P+E] or [60A IEC 3P+E]
h. [L22-20P], [L22-30P]
i. [IEC 16A 4P+E], [IEC 32A 4P+E]
3. Breakers: The PDU shall have [1], [2], [3] or [6] UL489 hydraulic magnetic breakers
fully rated to [16A] or [20A] each, [Single-Pole] or [Double-Pole] depending on input
plug type and UL requirements. The chassis design shall be minimized to reduce the
breaker box height and include flush mounted breakers to prevent accidental
discharge.
4. Power Output (Outlets)
a. The PDU shall have a mix of IEC C13 and IEC C19 outlets. The nominal
output voltage C13/C19 is 240V. Outlet layout should have alternating
phases to improve load balancing, cabinet airflow and reduce server
cord length.
b. The PDU shall have one these standard outlet combinations: (24) C13
(6) C19
5. Alternating of Phases
The PDU shall have outlets with alternating phases throughout the PDU in
order to facilitate load balancing, wiring and avoid circuit overload. This
feature should apply to both single phase and three phase PDUs.
6. Cable Management
Locking PDUs shall be equipped with a manual locking receptacle at each
IEC outlet on the PDU. Locking receptacles connect around the boot of each
IEC power cord in order to secure cords to the PDU. All locking outlets shall
be capable of working with standard power cords.
7. PDU Temperature Rating
The PDU shall be rated for use in high ambient air temperatures up to 149°F
(65°C) and suitable for use in hot aisle containment and ducted exhaust
cabinet applications.
8. Grounding/Bonding
The PDU shall have a grounded inlet/power plug and a separate external M5
threaded ground attachment point. The PDU shall include a grounding kit with
a 12”L (300 mm), #12 AWG, stranded copper grounding jumper.
9. Certifications
The PDU shall be UL Listed, and shall meet the applicable requirements of
the following certifications: UL, CSC C22.2 for Canada; CE for the EU; FCC
Part 15, Class A; EN 55022 and RoHS Compliant.
10. Color & Finish
The exterior of the PDU shall be painted black with epoxy-polyester hybrid
powder coat paint. Power outlets will be molded black. Color coded labels
shall identify the breakers and associated outlets.
11. Included Hardware
The PDU shall include (2) aluminum shoulder washers, (50) plastic power
cord managers or locking outlets and (1) grounding kit. Rack/cabinet
mounting brackets are sold separately.
12. PDU Type and Functionality
The PDU shall have one or more of the following main features, which are
further detailed in this document.
Local and remote monitored at PDU Breaker/Input and Outlet Level with
Control, optional locking outlets and IP Consolidation
13. Main Monitoring Features for:
a. Power Measurement: The PDU shall have a built-in power meter with
±1% metering accuracy. Power (kW), Energy (kWh), Voltage (V),
Current (A) and Power Factor (PF) will be measured at input and each
breaker.
b. Graphical Display
The PDU shall have a centrally located LCD display. The display screen
will present combined voltage, current, power (kW) for the PDU and
voltage, current, power (kW) and power factor values for each breaker
on the PDU. The display screen will also present line input current on
three-phase units. The display screen will present current values per
outlet for Monitored Pro and Switched Pro PDUs. Display screens and
options shall be navigated with three push buttons located under the
display. Alarms will be indicated by a flashing red LED above the display
and indicator on screen. The image on the display screen will rotate 180°
for easy viewing when the PDU is mounted with the power cord toward
the top of the rack/cabinet. The display can be used to setup PDU
Linking settings, fixed IP address and firmware update.
c. Temperature and Humidity Sensor Port
The PDU shall have a sensor port that will support up to two external
temperature and humidity sensors. When attached, the PDU will display
measured temperature and humidity values.
d. Ethernet Connection
The PDU shall have a 10/100 Mbps RJ45 Ethernet connection to allow
remote access using a web browser to view the built-in webpage or
automated monitoring with a third-party software or appliance that can
receive SNMP traps. The built-in webpage shall allow the user to view
detailed power, temperature and humidity readings; to set upper and
lower alarm limits for measured values; and to view summarized alarms.
For quick setup, users shall be able to enter the IP address using the
graphical display. The connection shall support an IPv4 or IPv6 address.
The PDU must also be capable of web authentication, multiple user
accounts, and download and export of data logs.
e. IP Consolidation
The PDU shall include two serial PDU Linking ports that allow multiple
PDUs to be connected in a continuous chain of up to 32 PDUs for IP
consolidation. All linked PDUs shall be remotely accessible though a
single, primary Ethernet connection on one of the linked PDUs using
either a third-party software (SNMP) or the built-in web interface (web
browser and IP address). The built-in web interface will list all connected
PDUs in a tree-like directory structure, allowing easy click-through to
view individual PDU details. All alarms will be summarized on a separate
tab. If a linked PDU is removed from the chain, an alarm will notify the
user. For redundancy, the linked PDUs will also support an optional,
alternate Ethernet connection from a second PDU. For quick setup,
users shall be able to select the PDU’s role within the chain (primary,
alternate or secondary) using the PDU’s local display. If the alternate
PDU assumes the primary role, an alarm will notify the user.
f. USB Port
The PDU shall include one USB port for installing firmware upgrades
locally. Firmware upgrades may also be installed using the network
connection or mass firmware update program.
g. Software integration to Third-Party Software
The PDU shall communicate with any third party DCIM, power
monitoring software or building management system through SNMP
protocol using the Ethernet connection. MIB files are available for
download from Chatsworth Products main website.
h. Built-in Web Interface
The PDU shall have a built-in interface that can be accessed through
any web browser using the PDU’s assigned IP address. For quick setup,
users shall be able to enter the IP address using the PDU’s graphical
display. The connection shall support an IPv4 or IPv6 address. Access
to the web interface shall be login protected. The PDU must be capable
of four user accounts and web authentication, data logging, and
download and export of data logs. The interface shall allow authorized
user accounts to view all monitored information including power,
temperature and humidity readings and summarized alarms; set upper
and lower alarm thresholds; change PDU and outlet names; designate
data to log and export recorded data. In addition, administrator accounts
shall also be able to create user or administrator accounts and setup
detailed network, SNMP and web authentication settings.
i. Outlet Monitoring and Grouping
The PDU shall measure voltage, current and power (kW) at each outlet.
The built-in webpage shall allow the user to name each outlet, to view
detailed power readings (voltage, current, kW) for each outlet; to set
upper and lower alarm limits for each outlet; to view summarized alarms;
and to group monitored outlets on individual and linked PDUs to see
combined power usage for redundantly powered or multiple pieces of
equipment.
j. Outlet Control and Grouping
The PDU shall have switched outlets that can be turned on, off or cycled
remotely. The built-in webpage shall allow the user to name each outlet,
to set on and cycle delays for each outlet, and to group switched outlets
on individual and linked PDUs to turn redundantly powered or multiple
pieces of equipment off or on with a single click. Each outlet should have
an LED indicating if the outlet is ON or OFF. In case of an alarm, the
LED should blink to facilitate location of the alarm.

2.04 GROUNDING
A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for

Electrical Systems." for grounding conductors and connectors.
B. Rack and Cabinet TGBs: Rectangular bars of hard-drawn solid copper, accepting
conductors ranging from No. 14 to No. 2/0 AWG, NRTL listed as complying with
UL 467, and complying with TIA-606-C. Predrilling shall be with holes for use with lugs
specified in this Section.
1. Cabinet-Mounted TGB: Terminal block, with stainless-steel or copper-plated
hardware for attachment to cabinet.
C. Telecommunications Main Bus Bar:

1. Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression or
exothermic-type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground
bus bar.
2. Ground Bus Bar: Copper, minimum 6 mm thick by 100 mm wide with 7.14-mm
holes spaced 28 mm apart.
3. Stand-Off Insulators: Comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V.
Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V.
D. Comply with TIA-607-D.
2.05 LABELING
A. Comply with ANSI/TIA-606-C for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks,
laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with BICSI TDMM for layout and installation of communications equipment
rooms.
B. Bundle, lace, and train conductors and cables to terminal points without exceeding
manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.
C. Coordinate layout and installation of communications equipment in racks and room.

1. Meet jointly with system providers, equipment suppliers, and Owner to
exchange information and agree on details of equipment configurations and
installation interfaces.
participants.
3. Adjust configurations and locations of distribution frames, cross-connects, and
patch panels in equipment spaces to accommodate and optimize configuration
and space requirements of telecommunications equipment.
4. Adjust configurations and locations of equipment with distribution frames,
cross-connects, and patch panels of cabling systems of other communications,
electronic safety and security, and related systems that share space in
equipment room.

D. Coordinate location of power raceways and receptacles with locations of
3.02 FIRESTOPPING
A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping. "Comply

with ANSI/TIA-569-E, Annex A, "Firestopping."
B. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.
3.03 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with ANSI/TIA-606-C.

Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems.
Comply with requirements in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting" for painting
backboards. For fire-resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label.
B. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type.
C. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA-606-C for
Class 4 level of administration including optional identification requirements of this
standard.
3.04 TRAINING
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train the Employer’s

maintenance personnel.
B. Train the Employer's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to

troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance. Training period shall be
minimum 3 days and longer if required to get the employer’s maintenance team
familiar with the products operation and maintenance.
C. Obtain employers staff signatures for attendance and submit as a record that the
D. Distribute copies of the operation and maintenance manuals during the training and
go thru the content in details. Please note the copies distributed during the training are
not the official copies to submitted for close out purposes.
E. Schedule training with the Employer, through Engineer, with at least 14 days' advance
notice.
testing and commissioning reports for the Engineers review outlining all deficiencies
and course of action. The contractor shall ensure all deficiencies outlined are rectified,

3.06 MAINTENANCE
END OF SECTION

SECTION 27 1323
COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This section details the technical requirement for Communications Optical Fiber
Backbone Cabling
1. Single-mode optical fiber cable
2. Multi-mode optical fiber cable
3. Optical fiber cable connecting hardware, patch panels, and cross-connects
(passive)
4. Cabling identification products.
5. Source quality control requirements for optical fiber cable.
1.02 DEFINITIONS

2. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their
interconnection or cross-connection.
4. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.
4. Division 27 Section 27 1100 - Communications Equipment Room Fittings
5. Division 27 Section 27 1116 “Communications Racks, Frames, and Enclosures”
1.04 OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING DESCRIPTION
A. Optical fiber backbone cabling system shall provide interconnections between

entrance facilities, MCR and Telecom Rooms in the telecommunications cabling
system structure. Cabling system consists of backbone cables, intermediate and main
KEO/19-3262-0000 27 1323/1 Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling

cross-connects, mechanical terminations, and patch cords or jumpers used for
backbone-to-backbone cross-connection.
B. Backbone cabling cross-connects shall be located in MCR. Bridged taps and splitters
shall not be used as part of backbone cabling.
B. Shop Drawings: Reviewed and stamped by RCDD.

1. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules, in software
and format selected by Owner.
2. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules that are part
of the cabling and asset identification system of the software.
3. Cabling administration drawings and printouts.
4. Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics including the following:
a. Telecommunications rooms plans and elevations.
b. Telecommunications pathways.
c. Telecommunications system access points.
d. Telecommunications grounding system.
e. Cross-connects.
f. Patch panels.
g. Patch cords.
5. Cross-connects and patch panels. Detail mounting assemblies, and show
elevations and physical relationship between the installed components.
C. Optical fiber cable testing plan.
A. Qualification Data: For RCDD installation supervisor, and field inspector.
B. Source quality-control reports.
C. Product Certificates: For each type of product.
D. Field quality-control reports.
A. Maintenance Data: For optical fiber cable, splices, and connectors to include in
B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:

2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with
data files.

1.08 TECHNICAL SUBMITTALS
A. The following section provides a summary of the mandatory requirements for the
technical submittal as a part of the tender response. This shall be accompanied by the
relevant manufacturer and installer documentation. The list outlined below is not
exhaustive and reference shall be made to the appropriate sections within this
document to ensure full compliance to all areas.
1. Manufacturer shall provide a list of the current applications and guaranteed
distances supported by the Fiber infrastructure.
2. All Passive Components in the SCS shall meet or exceed the relevant optical
fiber link specifications as detailed in the latest ANSI/TIA-568 and ISO 11801
series of standards.
3. Single mode fibre shall be Zero Water Peak Single mode (ZWP-SM) fiber. It
shall support next generation equipment and operate over the entire
wavelength range from 1280 nm to 1625 nm, removing the water peaks (high
attenuation) in the 1400 nm window, allowing up to 16 channels of CWDM
(Coarse Wave Division Multiplexing).
distances supported by the fiber infrastructure, including the number of MPO
and LC connectors.
5. Data Sheets for all specified products outlining compliance to the specifications
shall be provided.
6. Manufacturer shall guarantee that all current and future applications designed
to operate on a standards compliant cabling system, will be covered under the
terms and conditions of the Manufacturer’s warranty at the time of submission
of this project.
7. All components shall be manufactured solely by the proposed vendor. A full list
of the company’s manufacturing locations along with their ISO 9000
accreditations shall be included in the response. This includes all copper and
fiber cable and components.
8. Full details of the manufacturers’ 25-year Applications Assurance Warranty
shall be included within the response.
9. Full details of the installers’ credentials shall be provided, including up to date
manufacturers’ training requirements and CV’s of key personnel that will be
assigned to the project.
10. Full details of the manufacturers’ credentials shall be provided, including CV’s
of key personnel that will be assigned to the project.
11. The SCS Contractor shall comply with local authority requirements where these
take precedence over this specification. Where the SCS Contractor deters from
this course they are responsible for obtaining approvals from the relevant
authorities to change the requirement.

staff.
1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and Cabling
Administration Drawings , Cabling Administration Drawings, and field testing
program development by an RCDD.
Registered Technician or Level 2 Installer , who shall be present at all times
when Work of this Section is performed at Project site.

3. Testing Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-
site testing.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as specified

herein by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


1. Local country laws and codes, as well as local country Telecommunications
Regulations Authority regulations.
2. ANSI/TIA-568.0-E: Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer
Premises
3. ANSI/TIA-568.1-E: Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
Standard
4. ANSI/TIA-568-2.D: Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunication Cabling and
Components Standard
5. ANSI/TIA-568-3.D: Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard
6. ANSI/TIA-862-B: Structured Cabling Infrastructure Standard for Intelligent
Building Systems
7. ANSI/TIA-569-E: Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications
Pathways and Spaces
8. ANSI/TIA-606-C: Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications
Infrastructures
9. ANSI/TIA-758-B: Customer-owned Outside Plant Telecommunications
Infrastructure Standard
10. ANSI/TIA-942-A: Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Data Centers
11. ANSI/TIA -492 Series: SPECIFICATIONS FOR OPTICAL WAVEGUIDE
FIBERS ***INCLUDES ALL CURRENT TIA-492& TIA/EIA-492
STANDARDS***
12. ANSI/TIA-758-B: Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications
13. ANSI/TIA-607-D: Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding
(Earthing) for Customer Premises
14. ISO/IEC 11801:2010 (Ed. 2.2) - Edition 2, Amendment 2
15. TIA-492AAAE with support of short wavelength division multiplexing (SWDM)
by delivering laser-optimized modal bandwidth from 840 to 953 nanometers.
16. IEEE P802.3bz for 2.5GBASE-T and 5GBASE-T, increasing the Ethernet data
rates supported on the installed base of category 5e and category 6 cabling in
brown fields and only category 6A for green field installations.
17. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual 14th Edition
18. Automated Infrastructure Management (AIM) ISO/IEC 14763-2-1
19. Automated Infrastructure Management (AIM) ISO/IEC 18598
20. Automated Infrastructure Management (AIM) EN 50174-2
21. Power: IEEE 802.3af, at, bt (PoE, PoEP, 4PPoE)

1.011 SYSTEM INSTALLER CREDENTIALS
A. System Installers shall show competence in three main areas, as detailed below:
1. Company Experience.
2. Management, Design and Installation Experience.
3. Manufacturers Training Requirements.
B. Company Experience
1. The System Installer shall have a Registered Office in Kuwait for at least five
years.
2. The System Installer shall provide a valid trade license.
3. The System Installer shall provide three references of projects of a similar size
and nature, undertaken within the country.
C. Management, Design and Installation Experience

1. The System Installer shall utilize designers that have a formal industry
qualification such as the BICSI RCDD. Up to date certification shall be
submitted.
2. The System Installer shall utilize supervisors that have a formal industry
qualification such as BICSI RCDD or Technician. Up to date certification shall
be submitted.
3. The System Installer shall provide details of any sub-contract labor to be
involved in the project.
4. The System Installer shall provide adequate supervision of any subcontract
personnel. This should be by directly employed supervisors.
5. The System Installer shall provide CV’s of all key personnel to be involved in
the project. This should include Project Managers, Designers and Supervisors.
D. Manufacturers Training Requirements

1. Manufacturer training shall be a prerequisite of System Installer Compliance to
this response.
2. The System Installer shall provide details of the Manufacturers Training
Program, its content and its requirements.
3. The System Installer shall provide written confirmation from the manufacturer
that they are a current business partner and certified to carry out installations
and issue a warranty for the solution.
4. The System Installer shall provide current certificates for the manufacturers
design training requirements. These shall be relevant to the personnel involved
in the project.
installation training requirements. These shall be relevant to the personnel
6. The System Installer shall provide current certificates for the manufacturers AIM
training requirements. These shall be relevant to the personnel involved in the
project.
1.012 MANUFACTURERS CREDENTIALS
A. Manufacturers of the proposed solution shall show competence in three main areas,
as detailed below:
2. Regional Technical Support
3. Manufacturing Locations and Supply Chain

1. The Manufacturer shall provide a corporate overview of its business, including
Regional office locations and the number of employees in the Middle-East
region.
2. The Manufacturer shall have a Registered Office in the Middle East and been
operating within the local region for at least five years.
3. The Manufacturer shall provide five references of projects of a similar size and
nature, undertaken within the region.
4. The Manufacturer shall provide details of its participation in standards
development (such as TIA/ISO/IEEE). This shall include details of employees
participating in current standards development.
5. The Manufacturer shall provide details of its innovation program, including
current patents and its experience in the development of products and solutions
in the cabling infrastructure area.
C. Regional Technical Support

1. The Manufacturer shall provide an organizational chart showing the technical
support structure of its regional office.
2. The Manufacturer shall have a minimum of two current BICSI RCDD (or
equivalent) qualified support specialists within the region. Current certificates
shall be provided.
3. The Manufacturer shall provide CV’s of all key personnel to be involved in the
project.
D. Manufacturing Locations and Supply Chain

1. The Manufacturer shall confirm that all cable and products utilized for the
proposed solution are manufactured within these facilities.
2. The Manufacturer shall provide details/locations of its own global manufacturing
facilities, including current ISO 9000 certifications.
3. The Manufacturer shall provide details/locations of its own global distribution
facilities.
4. The Manufacturer shall provide details of its compliance to global and regional
directives such as RoHS and CPR within the EMEA.
5. The Manufacturer shall provide ISO certificates for all the factories and should
be match with country of origin letter provided for this project
A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site.

1. Test optical fiber cable to determine the continuity of the strand end to end. Use
optical fiber flashlight or optical loss test set.
2. Test optical fiber cable while on reels. Use an optical time domain reflectometer
to verify the cable length and locate cable defects, splices, and connector,
including the loss value of each. Retain test data and include the record in
maintenance data.



1.016 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications pathways and cabling with

telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers.
A. Coordinate telecommunication service entrance locations with the local service

provider.
B. Coordinate telecommunications outlet/connector locations with location of power

receptacles at each work area.
C. Coordinate power receptacles locations with racks containing active LAN equipment.
D. Coordinate racks locations with other systems equipment that might be sharing the
same room in order to insure efficient use of the shared space.

C. The solution shall include a 25 Year Extended Product and Applications Assurance
Warranty.
D. The installation shall receive the 25 Year Extended Product Warranty and Applications
Assurance when completed and registered by the Certified Installation Partner.
E. Any active equipment (AIM) within the solution shall include a 3 Year Warranty when
completed and registered by the Certified Installation Partner.
F. The Manufacturer shall give the following assurances during the Warranty Period:
1. The Registered System will meet or exceed the System Performance
Specifications
2. The Registered System will support Applications as specified in the Application
Performance Specifications.
3. The Registered System will support future Applications introduced during the
Warranty Period, to the extent such Applications are defined to operate in
conformance with the applicable Application Performance Specification for the
Registered System.
G. The Warranty should include both Parts and Labor.
H. The Manufacturer’s Warranty details and the Terms and Conditions shall be included
within the response.
contents.
1. Patch-Panel Units: 2% of each type.
2. Connecting Blocks: 2% of each type.
3. Tools recommended by the manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling, and Enclosures Fittings, of types and capacities
required which have been in satisfactory use in similar or service for not less than ten
(10) years and approved by the Engineer.
A. General Performance: Backbone cabling system shall comply with transmission

standards in ANSI/TIA-568-1.E, when tested according to test procedures of this
standard.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products
according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with
appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
C. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA-569-E.
D. Grounding: Comply with TIA-607-D.
2.03 PATHWAYS
A. General Requirements: Comply with ANSI/TIA-569-E. Grounding and bonding shall

comply with ANSI/TIA-607-D.
B. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical
Systems" for installation of conduits and wireways.
C. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Cable tray and Ladder for Electrical
D. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical
2.04 SINGLE MODE FIBER CABLES
A. Optical fibre cabling shall be available in internal, indoor/outdoor and outside plant
constructions for all fibre types.
B. The cable shall have a unique print string on the cable jacket. This unique identifier
shall also be used for on-line reference to a full set of factory tests that were performed
on a sample from the same mater reel. The test parameters shall include insertion
loss at 1310 and 1550 nm (Single mode). The on-line reference must be available on
the SCS manufacturers’ website, such that it can be accessed at any time.
C. Indoor/Outdoor Grade
1. Indoor/outdoor cabling must be available for campus based networks or those
requiring a simplified transition point between outdoor cabling and building
cable. Indoor/outdoor cabling shall meet the fire safety requirements of an
indoor environment, along with the rigors of an outdoor environment such as
extended temperature range, UV resistance and water blocking capabilities.
2. The fibre-optic SCS shall be available with a wide range of indoor/outdoor
cabling which include the following designs:
3. All dielectric stranded loose-tube
4. 250 micron buffered fibres up to 144 fibres
5. The LSZH Jacket must comply with the following Fire Safety standards:
a. ISO/IEC 60332-1: Vertical Flame Spread
b. ISO/IEC 60332-3c: Vertical Flame Spread
c. ISO/IEC 60754-2: Acidity
d. ISO/IEC 61034-2: Smoke Density
6. Indoor/outdoor LSZH cabling shall comply with appropriate sections of IEC
60794-2.

7. The SCS vendor shall provide a Declaration of Performance (DoP) letter for the
cable compliance with CPR Class Dca performance as minimum. The DoP
letter shall be accredited by a 3rd party laboratory.
D. Single mode Optical Fibre

1. Single mode fiber cables shall be ITU-T G.652.D compliant and support legacy
transport equipment and applications.
2. The solution shall support future applications by supporting enterprise campus
and metro backbone migrations to higher speeds and extended distances,
either serially or via multiple wavelengths.
3. The Single mode Fibre cable shall be Zero Water Peak, full spectrum single-
mode optical fiber cable. Manufacturer to confirm the full specification in writing,
including that this it opens up transmission over the previously unusable
wavelength range from 1360 nm to1460 nm known as the “Extended Band”or
E-band. It should be available in both indoor and outdoor grade specifications.
4. The optical fibre glass shall be manufactured from ultra-pure synthetic silica
glass. Single mode fibres manufactured from natural quartz will not be
accepted.
5. Single mode Optical Fibre Characteristics The following should be used as
reference values:
Optical Characteristics - Wavelength Specific
1310 nm 1385 nm 1550 nm
Max Attenuation 0.34 dB/km 0.31 dB/km 0.22 dB/km
Loose Tube Cable
Max Attenuation 0.50 dB/km 0.50 dB/km 0.50 dB/km
Tight Buffer Cable
Mode Field 9.2 ± 0.3 µm 9.6 ± 0.6 µm 10.4 ± 0.5 µm
Diameter
Group Refractive 1.467 1.468 1.468
Index
Dispersion, Max. 3.5 ps/(nm-km) from 1,285 to 18 ps/(nm-km)
1,330 nm
E. Applications Support, The cable shall support (but not limited to) the following
applications:
IEEE Applications
100Mb 100BASE-LX10
1G 1000BASE-LH
1000BASE-BX10
1000BASE-LX10
1000BASE-PX10-D
1000BASE-PX10-U
1000BASE-PX20-D
1000BASE-ZX
10G 10GBASE-LR
10BASE-LX4
10GBASE-ER
40G 40GBASE-LR4
100G 100GBASE-LR4

F. Specifications, the following should be used as reference values:
Cladding Diameter 125.0 ± 0.7 µm

Core/Clad Offset ≤ 0.5 µm
Coating Diameter (Uncoloured) 245.0 ± 10 µm
Coating Diameter (Coloured) 254.0 ± 7 µm
Coating/Cladding Concentricity Error, Max. 12 µm
Clad Non-Circularity ≤ 1.0 %
Proof Test 100 kpsi (0.69 Gpa)
Coating Strip Force 0.3 – 2.0 lbf (1.3 – 8.9 N)
Fibre Curl ≥4m
Dynamic fatigue Parameter (nd) ≥ 18
Macrobending, Max. (100 turns) 0.05 dB (1,310/1550 nm
@50mm)
0.05 dB (1,625 nm @ 60 mm)
Macrobending, Max. (1 turn @32 mm 0.05 @1,550 nm
mandrel)
2.05 MULTIMODE
A. The multimode fiber shall meet a minimum of one of the DMD templates listed within
this document, accounting for the wider inner and outer mask specifications when
compared with TIA 492AAAc and IEC 60793-2-10 standards. Published
documentation on this and Third party verification of the DMD test results and testing
methodology must be provided with the bid response.
B. OM4 Multimode
1. The multimode fibres shall fully meet or exceed the OM4 fibre specifications in
the following standards:
a. EN 50173-1:2011
b. ISO/IEC 11801:2010
c. IEC/EN 60793-2-10 (A1a fibre)
d. ANSI/TIA-492AAAD standards
2. The OM4 multimode fibre shall be manufactured with an inside vapour
deposition process such as the MCVD (Modified Chemical Vapour Deposition)
or PCVD (Plasma Clad Vapour Deposition) processes. Multimode fibres
produced with outside vapour deposition processes, such as OVD or VAD, will
not be accepted. Inside vapour deposition manufacturing processes results in
superior control of Refractive Index Profile required for high bandwidth.
3. Application Support: The OM4 Multimode Fibre SCS shall be capable of
supporting, at minimum, the following IEEE Ethernet applications:
802.3j 10BASE-F 10 Mb/s

802.3j 10BASE-FL 10 Mb/s
802.3u 100BASE-FX 100 Mb/s
802.3u 100BASE-SX 100 Mb/s
802.3z 1000BASE-SX 1000 Mb/s
802.3ae 10GBASE-SR 10Gb/s
802.3aq 10GBASE-LRM 10Gb/s with EDC
802.3ba 40GBASE-SR4 40 Gb/s
802.3ba 100GBASE-SR10 100 Gb/s
4. Additionally the OM4 Multimode Fibre SCS shall be capable of supporting the
following Fibre Channel Applications Standards, per Technical Committee 11
of INCITS:
1GFC
2GFC
4GFC
8GFC
10GFC
16GFC
5. The OM4 multimode fibre shall comply with the following physical
specifications:
Cladding Diameter 125 μm

Cladding Diameter Tolerance ±1.0 μm
Cladding NonCircularity, maximum 1%
Coating Diameter (Colored) 254 μm
Coating Diameter (Uncolored) 245 μm
Coating Diameter Tolerance (Colored) ±7 μm
Coating Diameter Tolerance (Uncolored) ±10 μm
Coating/Cladding Concentricity Error, maximum 6 μm
Core Diameter 50.0 μm
Core Diameter Tolerance ±2.5 μm

Core/Clad Offset, maximum 1.5 μm
Numerical Aperture 0.200 ± 0.015
Zero dispersion wavelength 1297  1316 nm
Zero dispersion slope ≤ 0.105 ps/nm2-km
Meets or exceeds
TIA/EIA-492AAAC-A
Maximum DMD (note: must comply with at least and IEC 60793-2-10
one of the 6 templates specified below A1a.2
850 nm See attached templates
1300 nm 0.88 ps/m
6. The OM4 multimode fibre shall meet the following requirements:
Maximum Fibre Cabled Loss 3.0 dB/km at 850 nm*

1.0 dB/km at 1300 nm*
Minimum Bandwidth 4700 MHz.km at 850 nm (DMD, laser)
500 MHz.km at 1300 nm (DMD, laser)
3500 MHz.km at 850 nm (OFL)
500 MHz.km at 1300 nm (OFL)
Operating Temperature -20°C to 50°C (-4°F to 122°F)*
Range (cabled fibre)
Storage Temperature Range 0°C to 50°C (32°F to 122°F) for LSZH
(cabled fibre) -40°C to 65°C (-40°F to 149°F) for others
Maximum Pulling Tension 90 kg
Minimum Tensile Strength 0.7 GPa (100,000 psi)
7. NOTE: this value reflects cabled fibre loss. Un-cabled fibre values will not be
accepted
8. The OM4 multimode fibres shall be colour coded to facilitate individual fibre
identification. Colour coding shall follow industry standard TIA-598-C Optical
Fibre Cable Color Coding
9. The coating shall be mechanically strippable.
10. Differential Mode Delay: The OM4 fibre shall meet a minimum of one of the
DMD templates listed below, accounting for the wider inner and outer mask
specifications when compared with TIA 492AAAc and IEC 60793-2-10
standards:
Template 850 nm DMD-Inner Mask 850 nm DMD-Outer Mask

(ps/m) Radius from 0 to 18 (ps/m)
μm) Radius from 0-23 μm
1 ≤ 0.23 ≤ 0.70
2 ≤0.24 ≤ 0.60
3 ≤0.25 ≤ 0.50
4 ≤0.26 ≤ 0.40
5 ≤0.27 ≤ 0.35
6 ≤0.33 ≤ 0.33
11. Differential Mode Delay Testing

a. The OM4 multimode fibre shall be tested in accordance with:
1) IEC/EN 60793-1-49
2) ANSI/TIA-455-220-A
3) ANSI/TIA-492AAAC-A
b. The following additional enhancements to the DMD tests must be made
to ensure high bandwidth:
Enhancement to IEC/EN 60793-1-49 and ANSI/TIA-492AAAC-A standards

Parameters Test Requirement
Speed of Laser 5 ps pulse width
Scan Resolution (Radial Increment) 1 µm
Inner Mask Radial Coverage 0 – 18 µm (no central hole)
Number of Quadrants Tested 4 quadrants
Test Length 300- 550 metres
c. Third party verification of the DMD test bench must be provided with the
bid response.

2.06 FIBRE OPTIC SHELVES
A. Fibre Optic Shelves shall be modular in design and available in Medium and High
Density Configurations and be available in 1U, 2U and 4U sizes that are compatible
with 19 inch mounting hardware.
B. The shelves shall be capable of the minimum density requirements:
Size Duplex LC Ports (Fiber MPO Ports (Fiber

Count) Count)
1U 48 (96) 32 (384)
2U 96 (192) 64 (768)
4U 192 (384) 128 (1536)
C. The shelves shall be available in both fixed and sliding configurations.
D. The shelves shall be designed to accept LC.
E. The shelves shall be designed to accept individual modules, adaptor panels and
cassettes for both Multimode and Singlemode solutions.
F. Shelves shall also be capable of accepting emerging solutions such as WBMMF.
G. The shelves shall provide adequate room for splice trays (Fusion & Mechanical) with
better cable management at the front and rear of the shelf.
H. Datacentre shall be designed with same capacity panels but MPO modules will be
used to connect pre terminated cables
2.07 FIBER OPTIC PATCH CORDS
A. Optical fibre cordage shall be available in simplex, duplex and fan-out configurations
and available in a variety of colors.
B. Optical fibre cordage shall be available in 1.6mm enhanced durability.
C. Single mode fibre patch cords shall be provided with OS2 fibre only.
D. OM4 Patch cords shall be provided .
E. Fibre cordage shall be indoor rated with e a LSZH.
F. The following connector types shall be available:

1. LC/UPC (SM/OM4), LC/APC (SM/OM4) compliant with IEC 61754-20 and TIA
604-10-A
2.08 FIBER OPTIC PIGTAILS
A. Optical fibre pigtails shall be available in standard 900 micron tight buffered or
ruggedized with additional strength elements.
B. Single mode fibre patch cords shall be provided with OS2 fibre only.

C. The following connector types shall be available:
1. LC/UPC (SM and MM), LC/APC (SM) compliant with IEC 61754-20 and TIA
604-10-A
2.09 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Comply with ANSI/TIA-606-C for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks,
laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables.
B. Factory test cables on reels according to ANSI/TIA-568-0.E.
C. Factory test single-mode optical fiber cables according to ANSI/TIA-526-7
D. Factory test multimode optical fiber cables according to ANSI/TIA-526-14-C and

ANSI/TIA-568-3.D.
E. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 ENTRANCE FACILITIES
A. Coordinate backbone cabling with the protectors and demarcation point provided by
communications service provider.
3.02 WIRING METHODS
A. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and cable trays except within consoles,
cabinets, desks, and counters and except in accessible ceiling spaces, in attics, and
in gypsum board partitions where unenclosed wiring method may be used . Conceal
raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces.
1. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings.
2. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Division 26
Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
B. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables within enclosures. Connect
to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on
bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS
A. Comply with requirements for demarcation point, pathways, cabinets, and racks
specified in Division 27 Section " Communications Racks, Frames, and Enclosures."
Drawings indicate general arrangement of pathways and fittings.

B. Comply with ANSI/TIA-569-E for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of
bends between pull points.
C. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical
D. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows whenever possible.
E. Pathway Installation in Communications Rooms:

1. Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard where a single piece
of plywood is installed, or in the corner of room where multiple sheets of
plywood are installed around perimeter walls of room.
2. Install cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these
positions.
3. Secure conduits to backboard when entering room from overhead.
4. Extend conduits 76 mm above finished floor.
5. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding
conductor to grounding system.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLES
A. General Requirements for Optical Fiber Cabling Installation:

1. Comply with TIA-568-1.E and TIA-568-3.D.
2. Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices."
3. Terminate all cables; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make
terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch
panels.
4. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not
exceeding 760 mm and not more than 150 mm from cabinets, boxes, fittings,
outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.
5. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to
prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by
manufacturer.
6. Bundle, lace, and train cable to terminal points without exceeding
manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in
BICSI ITSIMM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Use lacing bars and
distribution spools.
7. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not
splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard
cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.
8. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling.
Heat lamps shall not be used for heating.
9. In the communications equipment room, provide a 3-m long service loop on
each end of cable.
10. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable
pull tensions.
11. Cable may be terminated on connecting hardware that is rack or cabinet
mounted.
B. Open-Cable Installation:
1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications
spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.
2. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes,
ducts, or other potentially damaging items.
C. Installation of Cable Routed Exposed under Raised Floors:
1. Install plenum-rated cable only.
2. Install cabling after the flooring system has been installed in raised floor areas.
3. Coil cable 1800 mm long not less than 300 mm in diameter below each feed
point.
D. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.
3.05 FIRESTOPPING
A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Firestopping."
B. Comply with ANSI/TIA-569-E, Annex A, "Firestopping."
C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.
3.06 IDENTIFICATION

Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section
1. Administration Class: 4
2. Color-code cross-connect fields and apply colors to voice and data service
backboards, connections, covers, and labels.
B. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA-606-C for
Class 4 level of administration [ including optional identification requirements of this
standard].
C. See Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for additional

identification requirements. See Evaluations for discussion about TIA/EIA standard
as it applies to this Section.Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall
comply with TIA/EIA-606-C for Class 2 or Class 3 or Class 4 level of
administration including optional identification requirements of this standard .
D. Cable Schedule: Install in a prominent location in each equipment room and wiring
closet. List incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and
destinations. Protect with rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic
copy of final comprehensive schedules for Project.
E. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling

administration-point labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for
telecommunications closets, backbone pathways and cables, or entrance pathways
and cables, terminal hardware and positions, horizontal cables, work areas and
workstation terminal positions, grounding buses and pathways, and equipment
grounding conductors. Follow convention of ANSI/TIA-606-C. Furnish electronic
record of all drawings, in software and format selected by Client.
F. Cable and Wire Identification:

1. Label each cable within 100 mm of each termination and tap, where it is
accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated.
2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be
numbered at device if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected
and numbered within panel or cabinet.
3. Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each
cable at intervals not exceeding 4.5 m.
4. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel.
a. Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips and

identify each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or
cabinet to a building-mounted device with name and number of particular
device as shown.
b. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames.
5. Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets:
Label each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and
connecting hardware. Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice
and data communication cabling, use a different color for jacks and plugs of
each service.
G. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type with printing area and font color
that contrasts with cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in ANSI/TIA-
606-C, for the following:
1. Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flexes as cables are bent.
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

1. Visually inspect optical fiber cable jacket materials. Inspect cabling
terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-
coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance
with ANSI/TIA-568-1.E.
2. Visually confirm category marking of outlets, cover plates, outlet/connectors,
and patch panels.
3. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding,
equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components.
4. Optical Fiber Cable Tests:
a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in
ANSI/TIA-568-C.1. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified
by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.
b. Link End-to-End Attenuation Tests:
5. Optical Fiber Cable Performance Tests: Perform optical fiber end-to-end link
tests according to ANSI/TIA-5681.E and ANSI/TIA-568-3.D
D. Document data for each measurement. Data for submittals shall be printed in a
summary report that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred
from the instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted.
E. Remove and replace cabling where test results indicate that they do not comply with
specified requirements.
F. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and
inspections.
G. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.08 TRAINING

B. Train the Employer's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to

startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.
Training period shall be minimum 3 days and longer if required to get the employer’s
maintenance team familiar with the products operation and maintenance.
C. Obtain employers staff signatures for attendance and submit as a record that the
D. Distribute copies of the operation and maintenance manuals during the training and
E. Schedule training with the Employer, through Engineer, with at least 14 days' advance
notice.
The third Party testing agency shall submit the testing and commissioning reports for
the Engineers review outlining all deficiencies and course of action. The contractor
shall ensure all deficiencies outlined are rectified, retested, and certified by the third
party testing agency.
3.010 MAINTENANCE
END OF SECTION

SECTION 27 1513
COMMUNICATIONS COPPER HORIZONTAL CABLING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This section details the technical requirement for Communications Copper Horizontal
Cabling
1. Pathways
2. Cat6A U/UTP Cable Horizontal Cabling
3. Cable Bundling Materials
4. Cabling identification products.
5. Grounding
6. Source quality control requirements for twisted pair cable.
1.02 DEFINITIONS

1. Basket Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of wire mesh bottom and
side rails.
3. Consolidation Point: A location for interconnection between horizontal cables
extending from building pathways and horizontal cables extending into furniture
pathways.
4. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their
interconnection or cross-connection.
5. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
6. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.
8. MUTOA: Multiuser telecommunications outlet assembly, a grouping in one
location of several telecommunications outlet/connectors.
9. Outlet/Connectors: A connecting device in the work area on which horizontal
cable or outlet cable terminates.
10. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.
11. Jack: also commonly called an "outlet," it is the fixed, female connector.
12. Plug: also commonly called a "connector," it is the removable, male
telecommunications connector.
13. Screen: A metallic layer, either a foil or braid, placed around a pair or group of
conductors.
14. Shield: A metallic layer, either a foil or braid, placed around a pair or group of
conductors.
15. UTP, U/UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.
16. U/FTP: Unshielded/Foiled twisted pair.
17. FTP: Shielded twisted pair.
KEO/19-3262-0000 27 1513/1 Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling
18. F/FTP: Foiled/Foiled twisted pair.
19. F/UTP: Foiled/Unshielded twisted pair.
20. S/FTP: Screened/Foiled twisted pair.
21. S/UTP: Overall braid screened cable with unscreened twisted pairs.
22. SF/UTP: Screened Foiled/Unshielded twisted pair.
4. Division 27 Section 27 1100 - Communications Equipment Room Fittings
5. Division 27 Section 27 1116 “Communications Racks, Frames, and Enclosures”
1.04 COPPER HORIZONTAL CABLING DESCRIPTION
A. Horizontal cable cabling system shall provide interconnections between Micro

switches and the equipment, in the telecommunications cabling system structure.
1. Bridged taps and splices shall not be installed in the horizontal cabling.
B. Shop Drawings: Reviewed and stamped by RCDD

1. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules, in software
and format selected by Owner.
2. Cabling administration drawings and printouts.
3. Wiring diagrams and installation details of telecommunications equipment, to
show location and layout of telecommunications equipment, including the
following:
a. Telecommunications rooms plans and elevations.
b. Telecommunications pathways.
c. Telecommunications system access points.
d. Telecommunications grounding system.
e. Telecommunications conductor drop locations.
f. Typical telecommunications details.
g. Mechanical, electrical, and plumbing systems.
4. Cross-connects and patch panels. Detail mounting assemblies, and show
elevations and physical relationship between the installed components.
5. Cable tray layout, showing cable tray route to scale, with relationship between
the tray and adjacent structural, electrical, and mechanical elements. Include
the following:
a. Vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions.
b. Clearances for access above and to side of cable trays.
c. Vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or bottom of ceiling
structure.

d. Load calculations to show dead and live loads as not exceeding
manufacturer's rating for tray and its support elements.
C. Twisted pair cable testing plan.
D. Samples: For telecommunications jacks, jack assemblies and plugs, in specified

finish, one for each size and outlet configuration and faceplates for color selection and
evaluation of technical features.
A. Maintenance Data: For splices and connectors to include in maintenance manuals.
B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:

2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with
data files.
1.07 TECHNICAL SUBMITTALS
A. The following section provides a summary of the mandatory requirements for the
technical submittal as a part of the tender response. This shall be accompanied by the
relevant manufacturer and installer documentation. The list outlined below is not
exhaustive and reference shall be made to the appropriate sections within this
document to ensure full compliance to all areas.
1. The Registered SCS installation shall meet or exceed the permanent link
requirements of the latest ANSI/TIA-568 and ISO/IEC 11801 series of
standards
2. The Registered SCS shall meet or exceed the Category 6A Guaranteed
Channel Performance Claims provided by the Manufacturer. Manufacturers to
provide their Guaranteed Channel Performance Documentation for a full 4
connector, 100 meter channel. This should include Independent Test
Certificates (ETL/UL) showing ISO & TIA, Long & Short Channels.
3. All copper cabling shall be UTP throughout the channel with no shields or foils
included within the cable and component design. This includes cable, modules,
panels and cords.
distances supported by the copper infrastructure.
5. Data Sheets for all specified products outlining compliance to the specifications
shall be provided.
6. Manufacturer shall guarantee that all current and future applications designed
to operate on a standards compliant cabling system, will be covered under the
terms and conditions of the Manufacturer’s warranty at the time of submission
of this project.
7. All components shall be manufactured solely by the proposed vendor. A full list
of the company’s manufacturing locations along with their ISO 9000
accreditations shall be included in the response. This includes all copper and
fiber cable and components.
8. Full details of the manufacturers’ 25-year Applications Assurance Warranty
shall be included within the response.

9. Full details of the installers’ credentials shall be provided, including up to date
manufacturers’ training requirements and CV’s of key personnel that will be
assigned to the project.
10. Full details of the manufacturers’ credentials shall be provided, including CV’s
of key personnel that will be assigned to the project.
11. The SCS Contractor shall comply with local authority requirements where these
take precedence over this specification. Where the SCS Contractor deters from
this course they are responsible for obtaining approvals from the relevant
authorities to change the requirement.

staff.
1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and Cabling
Administration Drawings, Cabling Administration Drawings, and field testing
program development by an RCDD.
3. Testing Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-
site testing.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as specified

herein by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
D. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with ANSI/TIA-569-E.
E. Grounding: Comply with TIA-607-D.


1. Local country laws and codes, as well as local country Telecommunications
Regulations Authority regulations.
2. ANSI/TIA-568.0-E: Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer
Premises
3. ANSI/TIA-568.1-E: Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
Standard
4. ANSI/TIA-568-2.D: Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunication Cabling and
Components Standard
5. ANSI/TIA-568-3.D: Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard
6. ANSI/TIA-862-B: Structured Cabling Infrastructure Standard for Intelligent
Building Systems
7. ANSI/TIA-569-E: Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications
Pathways and Spaces
8. ANSI/TIA-606-C: Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications
Infrastructures
9. ANSI/TIA-758-B: Customer-owned Outside Plant Telecommunications
10. ANSI/TIA-942-A: Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Data Centers
11. ANSI/TIA -492 Series: SPECIFICATIONS FOR OPTICAL WAVEGUIDE
FIBERS ***INCLUDES ALL CURRENT TIA-492& TIA/EIA-492
STANDARDS***
12. ANSI/TIA-758-B: Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications
13. ANSI/TIA-607-D: Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding
(Earthing) for Customer Premises
14. ISO/IEC 11801:2010 (Ed. 2.2) - Edition 2, Amendment 2
15. TIA-492AAAE with support of short wavelength division multiplexing (SWDM)
by delivering laser-optimized modal bandwidth from 840 to 953 nanometers.
16. IEEE P802.3bz for 2.5GBASE-T and 5GBASE-T, increasing the Ethernet data
rates supported on the installed base of category 5e and category 6 cabling in
brown fields and only category 6A for green field installations.
17. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual 14th Edition
18. Automated Infrastructure Management (AIM) ISO/IEC 14763-2-1
19. Automated Infrastructure Management (AIM) ISO/IEC 18598
20. Automated Infrastructure Management (AIM) EN 50174-2
21. Power: IEEE 802.3af, at, bt (PoE, PoEP, 4PPoE)
1.010 SYSTEM INSTALLER CREDENTIALS
A. System Installers shall show competence in three main areas, as detailed below:
2. Management, Design and Installation Experience.
3. Manufacturers Training Requirements.
1. The System Installer shall have a Registered Office in Kuwait for at least five
years.
2. The System Installer shall provide a valid trade licence.
3. The System Installer shall provide three references of projects of a similar size
and nature, undertaken within the country.
C. Management, Design and Installation Experience

1. The System Installer shall utilise designers that have a formal industry
qualification such as the BICSI RCDD. Up to date certification shall be
submitted.
2. The System Installer shall utilise supervisors that have a formal industry
qualification such as BICSI RCDD or Technician. Up to date certification shall
be submitted.
3. The System Installer shall provide details of any sub-contract labor to be
4. The System Installer shall provide adequate supervision of any subcontract
personnel. This should be by directly employed supervisors.
5. The System Installer shall provide CV’s of all key personnel to be involved in
the project. This should include Project Managers, Designers and Supervisors.
D. Manufacturers Training Requirements

1. Manufacturer training shall be a prerequisite of System Installer Compliance to
this response.
2. The System Installer shall provide details of the Manufacturers Training
Program, its content and its requirements.
3. The System Installer shall provide written confirmation from the manufacturer
that they are a current business partner and certified to carry out installations
and issue a warranty for the solution.
design training requirements. These shall be relevant to the personnel involved
in the project.
installation training requirements. These shall be relevant to the personnel
6. The System Installer shall provide current certificates for the manufacturers AIM
training requirements. These shall be relevant to the personnel involved in the
project.
1.011 MANUFACTURERS CREDENTIALS
A. Manufacturers of the proposed solution shall show competence in three main areas,
as detailed below:
2. Regional Technical Support
3. Manufacturing Locations and Supply Chain
1. The Manufacturer shall provide a corporate overview of its business, including
Regional office locations and the number of employees in the Middle-East
region.
2. The Manufacturer shall have a Registered Office in the Middle East and been
operating within the local region for at least five years.
3. The Manufacturer shall provide five references of projects of a similar size and
nature, undertaken within the region.
4. The Manufacturer shall provide details of its participation in standards
development (such as TIA/ISO/IEEE). This shall include details of employees
participating in current standards development.
5. The Manufacturer shall provide details of its innovation program, including
current patents and its experience in the development of products and solutions
in the cabling infrastructure area.
C. Regional Technical Support

1. The Manufacturer shall provide an organizational chart showing the technical
support structure of its regional office.
2. The Manufacturer shall have a minimum of two current BICSI RCDD (or
equivalent) qualified support specialists within the region. Current certificates
shall be provided.
3. The Manufacturer shall provide CV’s of all key personnel to be involved in the
project.
D. Manufacturing Locations and Supply Chain

1. The Manufacturer shall confirm that all cable and products utilized for the
proposed solution are manufactured within these facilities.
2. The Manufacturer shall provide details/locations of its own global manufacturing
facilities, including current ISO 9000 certifications.
3. The Manufacturer shall provide details/locations of its own global distribution
facilities.
4. The Manufacturer shall provide details of its compliance to global and regional
directives such as RoHS and CPR within the EMEA.
5. The Manufacturer shall provide ISO certificates for all the factories and should
be match with country of origin letter provided for this project
A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site.

1. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits.


1.015 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications pathways and cabling with

telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers.
B. Coordinate telecommunications outlet/connector locations with location of power

receptacles at each work area.
C. Coordinate location of power raceways and receptacles with locations of

D. Coordinate racks locations with other systems equipment that might be sharing the
same room in order to insure efficient use of the shared space.


C. The solution shall include a 25 Year Extended Product and Applications Assurance
Warranty.
D. The installation shall receive the 25 Year Extended Product Warranty and Applications
Assurance when completed and registered by the Certified Installation Partner.
E. Any active equipment (AIM) within the solution shall include a 3 Year Warranty when
completed and registered by the Certified Installation Partner.
F. The Manufacturer shall give the following assurances during the Warranty Period:
1. The Registered System will meet or exceed the System Performance
Specifications
2. The Registered System will support Applications as specified in the Application
Performance Specifications.
3. The Registered System will support future Applications introduced during the
Warranty Period, to the extent such Applications are defined to operate in
conformance with the applicable Application Performance Specification for the
Registered System.
G. The Warranty should include both Parts and Labor.
H. The Manufacturer’s Warranty details and the Terms and Conditions shall be included
within the response.
contents.
1. Patch-Panel Units: 10% of each type.
2. Connecting Blocks: 10% of each type.
3. Device Plates: 10% of each type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS


Copper Horizontal Cabling, and Enclosures Fittings, of types and capacities required
which have been in satisfactory use in similar or service for not less than ten (10) years
and approved by the Engineer.
A. General Performance: Horizontal cabling system shall comply with transmission

standards in TIA-568-1.E, when tested according to test procedures of this standard.
B. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA-569-E.
C. Grounding: Comply with TIA-607-D
2.03 GENERAL CABLE CHARACTERISTICS
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified

testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing
agency.
1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
B. RoHS compliant.
2.04 PATHWAYS
A. General Requirements: Comply with ANSI/TIA-569-E. Grounding and bonding shall

comply with ANSI/TIA-607-D.
B. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical
C. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Cable tray and Ladder for Electrical
D. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical
2.05 CAT6A U/UTP CABLE HORIZONTAL CABLING
A. Furnish and install, complete with all accessories, a Category 6A/ Class EA
Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) Structured Cabling System (SCS). The SCS shall
serve as the transport infrastructure for data, wireless, video and voice telephony
signals throughout the network from designated demarcation points to outlets located
at various Desktop, Workstation, Computer Room, Intelligent Building facilities or other
locations as indicated on the contract drawings and described herein.

B. Performance Requirements: Category 6A standards set the minimum performance
requirements for a Category 6A installation to operate. The following outlines the
mandatory channel requirements for the solution:
1. Guaranteed Performance for 25 years
2. Shall consist of UTP components throughout the channel – no cable
foils/shields, metallic tapes or shielded cords are permitted.
3. Shall consist of channel components solely manufactured by the proposed
solution vendor. This includes cable, panels, modules and cords.
4. Shall guarantee significant channel margin over the entire swept frequency
range, from 1 to 500 MHz.
5. The Manufacturer shall provide printed and electronic independent 3rd Party
certification certificates (such as ETL Laboratories) for Guaranteed Worst Case,
Category 6A, Class EA Channels to both ISO and TIA standards according to
the full standards defined channel model (4 connectors over 100 metres). Test
Certificates for both long and short channel configurations to be submitted.
6. The Manufacturer shall provide a full list of tested and guaranteed copper
applications that are supported under the warranty, including the distances and
number of connectors supported.
7. Full support for applications up to 10Gb/s.
C. Performance of the Category 6A Solution

1. The following table shall be used for reference value
D. Category 6A Cable
1. The LSZH Cable shall meet or exceed the Category 6A/Class EA attenuation
and NEXT requirements in the latest ISO/IEC 11801(ISO/IEC 11801-1,
ISO/IEC 11801-2, ISO/IEC 11801-3, ISO/IEC 11801-4, ISO/IEC 11801-5,
ISO/IEC 11801-6 where applicable), CENELEC EN50173, IEC 60603-7-4,
IEEE 802.3 where applicable, and ANSI/TIA-568 standards. The cable shall be
composed of solid copper conductors insulated with non-halogen high-density
polyethylene and jacketed with a low smoke zero halogen compound. The
Cable LSZH jacket shall be compliant with CPR Class Dca as minimum. The
solution shall fully comply with Local/National Codes and Regulations.
2. When configured in worst-case 100 metre channels with full cross-connects
and consolidation points with the other products proposed, the cable shall be
capable of delivering the minimum guaranteed channel performance specified
in above Section
3. The length of each individual run of horizontal cable from the
telecommunications closet on each floor to the telecommunications outlet shall
not exceed 90 metres, and shall be continuous without any joints or splices.
4. Contractor shall observe the bending radius and pulling strength requirements
of the 4-pair UTP cable during handling and installation.
5. The cable shall be round in construction, with a maximum nominal diameter of
no more than 7.3 mm
6. The cable will consist of eight 23 AWG copper conductors. Copper-clad
aluminium is not permitted.
7. The cable shall be available in Low-Smoke, Zero Halogen (LSZH).
8. The LSZH version must comply with the following Fire Safety standards:
a. ISO/IEC 60332-3-22: Vertical Flame Spread
b. ISO/IEC 60754-2: Acidity
c. ISO/IEC 61034-2: Smoke Density
9. 3rd Party verification of the Fire Safety/ Environmental tests listed above must
be provided as part of the bid response.

10. The cable and cordage shall be UTP components that do not include internal
or external shields, screened components or drain wires.
11. The horizontal cable shall have a unique print string on the cable jacket. This
unique identifier shall also be used for on-line reference to a full set of factory
tests that were performed on a sample from the same mater reel. The test
parameters shall include NEXT, PSNEXT, Return Loss, Attenuation, ELFEXT
and PSELFEXT. The on-line reference must be available on the SCS vendor
public website, such that it can be accessed at any time.
12. The print string will also include markings in both meters and feet.
E. Category 6A Patch Cords

1. The Modular Patch Cord family shall consist of high bandwidth cords. Electrical
performance shall exceed the latest TIA and ISO/IEC Category 6A/Class EA
specifications and be fully backward compatible with Category 6, 5e and 5
connectors.
2. The UTP LSZH Modular Patch Cords shall consist of solid conductors.
3. They should also be available in a number of color options.
4. They shall consist of AWG 24-gauge cordage and assure excellent electrical
performance and low variability.
5. An anti-snag feature shall provide maximum protection from snagging during
moves and rearrangements.
F. Category 6A Patch Panels

1. The Patch Panels shall be modular in design, capable of utilizing individual
modules, ganged style adaptors (pre-terminated) or pre-populated
configurations.
2. The following provides the requirements and options that should available for
the design:
3. Available in 24-port or 48-Port Configurations in 1U or 2U sizes as standard.
4. Available in Angled or Standard Configurations.
5. Compatible with 19-inch mounting hardware as per IEC 60297.
6. Compliant with IEC 60603-7-4.
7. Integral termination managers at the rear of the panel shall be provided.
8. The panel shall provide adequate space for labeling.
9. 3rd Party test certification shall be provided to show component compliance to
the latest ISO and TIA standards for Category 6A performance.
10. When configured in a 4-connector channel, as specified within this document,
the panel shall be capable of delivering the minimum guaranteed channel
performance specified.
G. Face Plates
1. Faceplates shall be a single or double gang as identified on drawings, Jacks
shall be of the same manufacturer.
2. if required, to be coordinated with electrical contractor to match electrical
accessories finish
H. RJ45 Plug – Ceiling Connector Assembly

1. Shall be used to connect devices in the ceiling: IP cameras, Wi-Fi access points
and in-building wireless systems, LED lighting and sound masking systems
2. For installation in difficult-to-access areas
3. Shall be available in high-quality cable interconnection, available as a
standalone unit or pre-terminated to an RJ45 plug
4. Shall be ordered individually or with a UTP pigtail, in low smoke zero halogen
(LSZH) options
5. Category 6A UTP can be terminated in the ceiling connector
6. According to TIA-568.2-D and ISO/IEC 11801-1 standards:
a. The CCA module counts as an extra connector and if used should not
exceed the total 4 connections in a channel
b. The CCA connection module (without the plug and cordage) has tested
as an individual Category 6 or 6A component in the electrical lab using
standard discrete wire termination fixtures at both ends.
7. Shall be meet or exceed 10G performance
8. Filed termination using crimping tool is not recommended
2.06 CABLE BUNDLING MATERIALS
A. Provide hook and loop tape, 13mm Wide and of a length equal to 130% of the
circumference of the cable bundle.
B. Cable ties shall be of durable construction, UPVC a minimum of 6mm wide, and of a
length equal to 130% of the circumference of the cable bundle. Cable ties are to be
provided as per the recommendations of the cabling manufacturer.
C. When used in areas considered environmental air space, all bundling materials shall
be appropriately listed.
D. Cable bundles shall not to be over tightened such that deformation occurs to the
original geometry of the cables. Such practice will be rejected and damaged cables
shall be replaced at the Contractor’s cost.
E. Maximum 24 cables per bundle and cable wrap to be used to bundle the cable
F. the cable buddle is required all the way in the cable tray - from outlet to IDF /MDF
room
2.07 TROUGHS, TROUGH COVERS & DISTRIBUTION RINGS
A. Troughs shall be integral to all wall mounted connecting/termination blocks and

connected to the base of all vertical distribution fields.
B. Distribution Rings shall be integral to all wall mounted connecting/termination blocks

and shall be of the same type and manufacture of the terminal blocks.
C. Rings shall be constructed of a non-metallic, high-strength, fire-resistant extruded

material.
D. Trough Covers shall be provided for covering the patch cord field.
2.08 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Comply with TIA-606-C and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label
stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.
2.09 GROUNDING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Earthing and Bonding for Electrical
Systems." for grounding conductors and connectors.
B. Equipment Bonding Conductors shall be a minimum of a stranded, 16mm2, conductor,

with a green insulating jacket.
C. The Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing) system per ANSI-607 B

and guidelines is provided by the Contractor. The IT Contractor is responsible for
Grounding (Earthing) and bonding all IT related equipment and racks to the Grounding
(Earthing) system.
A. Factory test cables on reels according to TIA-568-1.E.
B. Factory test twisted pair cables according to TIA-568-2.D
C. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 WIRING METHODS
A. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and cable trays except within consoles,
cabinets, desks, and counters. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished
spaces.
1. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings.
2. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Division 26
Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
B. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables to terminal points with no
excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide
and use lacing bars and distribution spools.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS
A. Comply with requirements for demarcation point, pathways, cabinets, and racks
specified in Division 27 Section " Communications Racks, Frames, and Enclosures."
Drawings indicate general arrangement of pathways and fittings.
B. Comply with ANSI/TIA-569-E for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of
bends between pull points.
C. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical
D. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows whenever possible.
E. Pathway Installation in Communications Rooms:

1. Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard where a single piece
of plywood is installed, or in the corner of room where multiple sheets of
plywood are installed around perimeter walls of room.
2. Install cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these
positions.
3. Secure conduits to backboard when entering room from overhead or as per
project conditions.
4. Extend conduits 76 mm as minimum above finished floor.
5. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding
conductor to grounding system.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF TWISTED-PAIR HORIZONTAL CABLES
A. General Requirements for Cabling:

1. Comply with TIA-568.0.E, TIA-568-1.E, and TIA-568-2.D.
2. Comply with BICSI's "Information Transport Systems Installation Methods
Manual (ITSIMM), Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems," "Cable
Termination Practices" Section.
3. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated.
4. Do not untwist twisted pair cables more than 12mm from the point of termination
to maintain cable geometry.
5. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make
terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch
panels.
6. Consolidation points may be used only for making a direct connection to
equipment outlets:
a. Do not use consolidation point as a cross-connect point, as a patch
connection, or for direct connection to workstation equipment.
b. Locate consolidation points for twisted-pair cables at least 15m from
communications equipment room.
7. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not
exceeding 760 mm and not more than 150 mm from cabinets, boxes, fittings,
outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.
8. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, prevent straining connections, and prevent
bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer.
9. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding
manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in
BICSI Information Transport Systems Installation Methods Manual, Ch. 5,
"Copper Structured Cabling Systems," "Cable Termination Practices" Section.
Use lacing bars and distribution spools.
10. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not
splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard
cable if damaged during installation, and replace it with new cable.
11. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling.
Heat lamps shall not be used for heating.
12. In the communications equipment room, install a 3 m long service loop on each
end of cable.
13. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI Information Transport Systems Installation
Methods Manual, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems," "Pulling and
Installing Cable" Section. Monitor cable pull tensions.
14. The Electrical Services Subcontractor shall supply and install a substantial
amount of containment as detailed, or requested within the notes, on Electrical
containment drawings. This containment, regardless of size or location, shall
be deemed as ‘PRIMARY CONTAINMENT’. All other containment not shown
on the tender drawings, or requested within the notes, shall be deemed as
‘SECONDARY CONTAINMENT’ and will be designed and provided by the ICT
Contractor responsible for the wiring contained therein to the final devices. For
the avoidance of doubt, should the primary containment detailed not pass over
an ICT rack, the ICT Contractor shall provide secondary containment between
the primary containment and the ICT rack.
B. Open-Cable Installation:
1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications
spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.
2. Suspend copper cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 200 mm above
ceilings by cable supports not more than 1500 mm apart.
3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes,
ducts, or other potentially damaging items.
C. Installation of Cable Routed Exposed under Raised Floors:

1. Install plenum or equivalent rated cable only.
2. Install cabling after the flooring system has been installed in raised floor areas.
3. Coil cable 1800 mm long not less than 300 mm in diameter below each feed point.
D. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.
E. Separation from EMI Sources:

1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and ANSI/TIA-569-E for separating unshielded
copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources,
including electrical power lines and equipment.
2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic
raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be
as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 127 mm.
b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 300
mm.
c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 610 mm.
3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways
and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 64 mm.
mm.
4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways
and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits
or enclosures shall be as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement.
mm.
5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and
Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 1200 mm.
6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A
minimum of 127 mm.
3.04 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Firestopping."
B. Comply with ANSI/TIA-569-E, Annex A, "Firestopping."
C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.
D. Comply with local authorities / Civil Defense Department guidelines.
3.05 GROUNDING
A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical

Protection" Chapter.
B. Comply with ANSI-TIA-607-D.
C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to
wall allowing at least 50-mm clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect
grounding bus bar with a minimum 25mm2 grounding electrode conductor from
grounding bus bar to suitable electrical building ground.
D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than 16mm2
equipment grounding conductor.
3.06 IDENTIFICATION

Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section
1. Administration Class: Class 4.
2. Color-code cross-connect fields. Apply colors to voice and data service
backboards, connections, covers, and labels.
B. Using cable management system software specified in Part 2, develop Cabling

Administration Drawings for system identification, testing, and management. Use
unique, alphanumeric designation for each cable and label cable, jacks, connectors,
and terminals to which it connects with same designation. At completion, cable and
asset management software shall reflect as-built conditions.
C. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with ANSI/TIA-606-B
for Class 2 level of administration, including optional identification requirements of this
standard.
D. Cable Schedule: Post in prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet.
List incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations.
Protect with rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final
comprehensive schedules for Project.
E. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling

administration-point labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for
telecommunications closets, backbone pathways and cables, entrance pathways and
cables, terminal hardware and positions, horizontal cables, work areas and
workstation terminal positions, grounding buses and pathways, and equipment
grounding conductors.

F. Cable and Wire Identification:
2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be
numbered at device if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected
and numbered within panel or cabinet.
3. Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each
cable at intervals not exceeding 4.5 m.
4. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel.
a. Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips, and
identify each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or
cabinet to a building-mounted device with name and number of particular
device as shown.
b. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames.
5. Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets:
Label each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and
connecting hardware. Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice
and data communication cabling, use a different color for jacks and plugs of
each service.
G. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type with printing area and font color
that contrasts with cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in ANSI/TIA-
606-C.
1. Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flex as cables are bent.
A. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service

representative.

1. Visually inspect copper and optical fiber cable jacket materials for certification
markings. Inspect cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms
for compliance with color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling
connections for compliance with ANSI/TIA-568-1.E.
2. Visually confirm category marking of outlets, cover plates, outlet/connectors,
and patch panels.
3. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding,
equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components.
4. Test twisted pair cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent
faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in
connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross-connection.
a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in
ANSI/TIA-568-C.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with
performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex,
complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement
Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that
are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test
configuration.
5. Copper Cable Performance Tests:
a. Test for each outlet and MUTOA. Perform the following tests according
to ANSI/TIA-568-0.E and ANSI/TIA-568-2.D:
Wire map.
Length (physical vs. electrical, and length requirements).
Insertion loss.
Near-end crosstalk (NEXT) loss.
Power sum near-end crosstalk (PSNEXT) loss.
Equal-level far-end crosstalk (ELFEXT).
Power sum equal-level far-end crosstalk (PSELFEXT).
Return loss.
Propagation delay.
Delay skew.
6. Final Verification Tests: Perform verification tests for Copper systems after the
complete communications cabling and workstation outlet/connectors are
installed.
a. Voice Tests: These tests assume that dial tone service has been
installed. Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation
point. Go off-hook and listen and receive a dial tone. If a test number is
available, make and receive a local, long distance, and digital
subscription line telephone call.
b. Data Tests: These tests assume the Information Technology Staff has
a network installed and is available to assist with testing. Connect to the
network interface device at the demarcation point. Log onto the network
to ensure proper connection to the network.
D. Document data for each measurement. Data for submittals shall be printed in a
summary report that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred
from the instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted.
E. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and
inspections.
A. General
1. All testing shall conform to the latest release of the appropriate standards, the
manufacturer’s warranty criteria, and the project acceptance criteria.
2. The System Installer shall be responsible to repair or replace any cable that
does not meet specification with no additional cost to the project.
3. The System Installer shall review every test report for accuracy, completeness
and conformance to the Specifications.
4. After delivery of Materials to the Site, and prior to installation, all cables, cable
reels and shipping cartons shall be visually inspected to detect possible
damage incurred during the shipping and transport. Visibly damaged goods
should be immediately reported to the manufacturer for inspection.
5. All test results are required to be documented and submitted in hard copy
(summary only) and electronic (softcopy) format with the as-built
documentation.
6. The System Installer shall provide unaltered electronic test results submitted in
the original software format of the respective test equipment manufacturer. Text
files or files that have been imported into a word processor or other text editor
application shall not be acceptable.
7. The Customer Representative retains the right to be present at any or all
testing. The System Installer shall provide due notice prior to the beginning of
the testing process.
8. Engineer reserves the right to mandate re-termination or other reasonable
rework to improve the performance of any cabling indicated as being a
“marginal pass”.
9. The owner should have the ability to retrieve the factory test result of any
installed cable on site by using a unique number printed on the cable jacket.
B. Copper Testing
1. The test equipment shall comply with the following standards:
a. Compliant with proposed ISO (IEC WG9 Standard IEC61935-1) Level V
accuracy requirements to 1000 MHz
b. Supports the complete suite of Resistance Unbalance standards needed
for Power over Ethernet (PoE) – IEC61935-1 & 11801-1-4, IEEE
802.3af, IEEE 802.3at, ANSI/TIA-568-2.D
c. Next generation balance drafts – IEEE 802.3, TIA TR42.7
Test Standards
TIA Cat 6A per TIA 568-2.D
ISO/IEC Class EA certification per ISO/IEC 11801:2002 and
amendments
d. It shall be calibrated in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions

with latest calibration date submitted prior to testing.
e. It shall support the following test parameters (The selected test standard
determines the actual test parameters to be used and the frequency
range of the tests).
Test Parameters – The appropriate parameters for Cat 6A should be

followed
Wire Map, Length, Propagation Delay, Delay Skew, DC Loop
Resistance, Insertion Loss (Attenuation), Return Loss (RL), NEXT,
Attenuation-to-crosstalk Ratio (ACR-N), ACR-F (ELFEXT), Power
Sum ACR-F (ELFEXT), Power Sum NEXT, Power Sum ACR-N,
Power Sum Alien Near End Xtalk (PS ANEXT), Power Sum Alien
Attenuation Xtalk Ratio Far End (PS AACR-F)
f. Either Channel Testing or Permanent Link Testing shall be at the

discretion of the Customer Representative and the Manufacturer’s
Warranty requirements.
g. Full details of the test equipment shall be provided by the System
Installer but the preferred device shall be the Fluke DSX-5000 Cable
Analyzer.
3.09 TRAINING

B. End user training to be arranged for Automated infrastructure management solutions

by vendor.
C. Train the Employer's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to
startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.
Training period shall be minimum 3 days and longer if required to get the employer’s
maintenance team familiar with the products operation and maintenance.
D. Obtain employers staff signatures for attendance and submit as a record that the
E. Distribute copies of the operation and maintenance manuals during the training and
F. Schedule training with the Employer, through Engineer, with at least 14 days' advance
notice.
G. Train Owner's maintenance personnel in cable-plant management operations,

including changing signal pathways for different workstations, rerouting signals in
failed cables, and keeping records of cabling assignments and revisions when
extending wiring to establish new workstation outlets. Include training in cabling
administration software.
3.010 MAINTENANCE
END OF SECTION

SECTION 27 2133
WIFI SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Contractor scope shall be limited to containment, draw wires, back boxes and
coordination with all other trades.
1.02 RELATED DRAWINGS
A. Wifi Layout Drawings (Plans and Details) and Wifi Schematic Diagram Drawings.
B. Wifi System is identified in TT drawing series.

END OF SECTION
KEO/19-3262-0000 27 2133/1 WIFI System

SECTION 27 2223
IP DATA AND COMPUTER SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. IP Data and Computer Layout Drawings (Plans and Details) and Schematic Diagram
Drawings.
B. IP Data and Computer System is identified in TT drawing series.

END OF SECTION
KEO/19-3262-0000 27 2223/1 IP Data and Computer System

SECTION 27 4116
AV SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. AV Layout Drawings (Plans and Details) and AV Schematic Diagram Drawings.
B. AV System is identified in PA drawing series.

END OF SECTION
KEO/19-3262-0000 27 4116/1 Av System

SECTION 27 4133
SMATV, IPTV AND DIGITAL INFORMATION DISPLAY SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. SMATV, IPTV and Digital Information Display Layout Drawings (Plans and Details) and
System Schematic Diagram Drawings.
B. SMATV, IPTV and Digital Information Display System is identified in TV drawing series.

END OF SECTION
KEO/19-3262-0000 27 4133/1 SMATV, IPTV and Digital Information Display System

SECTION 27 4220
QUEUE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Queuing Management Layout Drawings (Plans and Details) and Schematic Diagram
Drawings.
B. Queuing Management System is identified in PA drawing series.

END OF SECTION
KEO/19-3262-0000 27 4220/1 Queue Management System

SECTION 27 5116
MASJID SOUND SYSTEM
GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The contractor shall supply, install, test, connect and commission a high quality fast-
acting Paging and Professional Sound System.
B. The Paging and Prof. Sound System shall comprise of Digital audio matrix controller,
Active DSP lone array speaker, Wall mount column Speakers, Professional outdoor
Horn speaker, Power Amplifier ,16 channel Digital mixer console, Wired Microphones,
Wireless Microphone, Audio rack and Microphone Stand, AM/FM tuner and Blu- ray
player.
C. Prior to placing order for any equipment, the contractor shall submit comprehensive
document comprising working drawings, catalogues and descriptive literature of
components, acoustic Study (using EASE Program) to meet with STI requirements of
0.5 on the STI scale.
D. The contractor shall be required to train and instruct client's personnel in the correct
use, operation, and supervision of the system, preferably prior to the handing over of
the project.
E. The contractor shall make sure that all power tapping of the speakers must be carried
out as specified, even if the acoustic calculations indicate less power tapings.
F. The Contractor shall stick sharply to the approved brands list; alternative brands shall
not be acceptable
1.02 DESIGN CONCEPT
A. The manufacture/installer shall provide five years’ warranty on the system.
B. The Audio Rack shall be located where indicated on the layout drawing
C. The Main Audio control unit shall consist of Audio DSP control unit with 6 Mic/Aux
inputs. The unit shall have minimum 10 configurable MIC /AUX (LINE) (both balanced)
input, volume and bass / treble control for each input. It shall be 19” rack mountable
unit. It shall have the ability to internal electronic muting that works via control input
terminal.
D. Digital Audio matrix based public address controller shall route the signals as required.
The PA System rack shall contain at least one digital Signaling Audio matrix unit with
inbuilt Automatic Gain controller, Mixer and Matrix.
KEO/19-3262-0000 27 5116/1 Masjid Sound System

E. Provision shall be considered in the main Audio rack to accept any 0dB Audio signal
from any receiver (in case of any remote broadcasting)
A. The equipment and installation supervision furnished under this specification is to be

provided by a manufacturer who has been engaged in production of this type of
equipment for at least ten (10) years and has a fully equipped service organization.
B. Manufacturing of the Public-Address headend product including the Controllers and

Amplifiers shall be from Europe Region or US, products with Far East origin shall not
be accepted.
1.04 TESTING
A. The Contractor shall carry out the measurement of STI and SPL at the Pre-
Commissioning Stage and provide reports for the Engineer Approvals. The Contractor
shall insure minimum of 0.5 STI at 0% occupancy and minimum of 86dB across the
tested area +/- 3dB. The Back-Ground Noise, SPL testing must be carried out with
Calibrated Professional Tools. SPL testing must be carried out via Pink Noise insertion
into the system and measured over an average of 10 seconds.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 DIGITAL AUDIO SIGNALING PROCESSOR UNIT (DSP)WITH IN-BUILT DANTE;
A. The DSP shall contain minimum of 10 Speaker Circuits and the system shall be Digital
Signaling processor driven of 24bits of 48 KHz capable of audio processing for quality
sound reproduction for background as well as foreground music.
B. The DSP shall have up to 12 analogue control inputs. Each control can be associated
to any of the variable audio processing functions.
C. The DSP shall have the following minimum Specification,

1. Minimum of 6 x 0dBu Audio inputs for Music sources.
2. Programmable input gain
3. Programmable delay Available on all outputs
4. Internal Scheduler
5. Frequency Range for 20 Hz – 20KHz
6. 48kHz/ Sampling rate, 24 bit
7. Parametric equalization: 4 bands on inputs, 10 bands on
8. outputs
9. Delay 1-5000ms in Outputs
10. 100 Volts speaker outputs (minimum of 10 Audio outputs)
11. Dual RJ45 Port for audio Streaming and Controller
12. DSP shall have Integral LCD
13. SIP protocol Compatibility.
14. PC Programming tool
15. 19” Rack mounting
16. Automatic Gain Control Feature, feedback killer, cross over,
17. Compressor and Peak limiter
18. Built in 10 Watt /8 Ohm Monitoring loudspeakers
19. SD Card for a storage of 2GB
20. Total critical path surveillance up to 200 event/fault log
21. Digital Message player up to 40 minutes
22. Inbuilt Dante interface.
23. Fiber optic Network
24. Dual TCP/IP port for redundancy.
2.02 POWER AMPLIFIER.
A. The Amplifier shall operate on 240 VAC and 24V DC input. The output stage utilizes
a specially wound transformer to allow full acoustic operation at high frequencies. The
Amplifier type shall be digital Class -D type.
B. Amplifier shall have electronic protection system against overcharge, short circuits,
and excessive heating. Besides, it shall include an energy savings system (STANDBY
mode) that automatically activates 30 seconds after detecting a lack of an input signal.
C. These units also have test inputs for connection of an ultrasonic remote control to test
the efficiency of connections. Balanced inputs allow the use of long cables without the
risk of humming or mains distortion.
D. The amplifier must have the minimum following characteristics:

1. Rated power output (L100V) shall be single/dual/Quad channel 240/500W.
2. Outputs shall be 8 / L100V
3. Distortion (1kHz/-3dBu,100W) shall be Lower than 0,1%
4. Selectable frequency response shall be 20 Hz. to 20 KHz. 80 Hz. to 20 KHz.
5. Input sensitivity shall be 0,775 V. (0 dBu).
6. Input impedance shall be 10 k.
7. S/N ratio shall be >80dB
8. Master volume shall be 0 - 100%
9. Maximum power consumption shall be 1200 W.
10. Main power supply shall be 110 - 230 VAC (50/60 Hz).
11. Battery power supply shall be 24 VDC - max. 24 A
2.03 WIRELESS MICROPHONES SYSTEM
A. Wireless Handheld Microphone: The unit shall be super cardioids dynamic

microphone with high acoustical performance operating in the UHF range 554 to
865MHz equipped with ON/OFF switch and LCD indicator.
1. The unit characteristics shall be:
a. Frequency response shall be 50 to 15 KHz.
b. Gain adjustment range shall be 25dB.
c. Power output shall be 30mW max.
d. Power requirement shall be 9v Alkaline battery.
e. Minimum Battery life shall be 8 Hours.
B. Tie Clip Microphone & Body pack

1. The unit shall be Omni directional lavaliere microphone with high acoustical
performance operating in the UHF range 554 to 885MHz, equipped with LCD
indicator.
a. Frequency response shall be 50 to 15 KHz
b. Gain adjustment range shall be 40dB
c. Power output shall be 30mW max.
d. Power requirement shall be 9v Alkaline battery
e. Minimum Battery life shall be at least 8 Hours
C. Diversity Receiver
1. The unit shall operate within the UHF range 554 – 865MHz and the Working
range shall be 300ft (92 m) equipped with large LCD indicator and antenna.
f. Frequency response shall be 50 to 15 KHz
g. Dynamic range shall be > 105dB
h. RF sensitivity shall be 1.26 mW for 12dB
i. Image rejection shall be 65dB
j. Spurious rejection shall be 75dB
k. System distortion shall be 0.3% (<1%) THD typical
3. Rack mounting kit for the diversity receivers shall be provided
2.04 WIRED HANDHELD MICROPHONE:
A. Wired Hand-held microphone shall be Dynamic Type.
B. It shall the minimum specification as follow:

1. Directionality: Supercardioide (one-way)
2. Sensitivity: -75 dB (0 dB=1 V/µBar)
3. Frequency Response: 60-18kHz
4. Impedance: 600ohm
5. Output: Balanced
6. Built-in Signal Switch : ON/OFF
7. Presentation : Metal
8. Output Connectors: Integral XLRM-type
C. Boom stand for the Microphone should be supplied, with adjustable height.
2.05 DIGITAL AUDIO MIC MIXER CONSOLE
D. The minimum specifications for the Audio mixer to be used in these facilities
E. shall be as follow:
1. 16-Channel Mixing Console
2. Max. 10 Mic / 16 Line Inputs (8 mono + 4 stereo)
3. 4 GROUP Buses + 1 Stereo Bus
4. 4 AUX (incl. FX)
5. “D-PRE” mic preamps with an inverted Darlington circuit
6. 1-Knob compressors
7. High-grade effects: SPX with 24 programs
8. 24-bit/192kHz 2in/2out USB Audio functions
9. Works with the iPad (2 or later) through the Apple iPad Camera Connection Kit
/ Lightning to USB Camera Adapter
10. Includes Cubase AI DAW software download version
11. PAD switch on mono inputs
12. +48V phantom power
13. XLR balanced outputs
14. Internal universal power supply for world-wide use
15. Rack Mount Kit Included
16. Metal chassis
2.06 EQUIPMENT RACK:
A. All central equipment shall be housed in 19” equipment racks sized to suit the proposed
equipment. Unused space shall be covered by 19” blanking panels. The equipment
racks shall provide the following features:
1. Welded steel frame
2. Front door
3. Steel and lockable Rear door
4. Steel and lockable Side panels
5. Transit castors
6. Leveling feet
7. Raised lid
8. Separate top plate for cable access
9. Field terminations on DIN terminals
10. At least 18U for Master voice alarm rack
2.07 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM LOUDSPEAKERS
A. 20-Watt Public Address Wall Mounted Column Speaker: The 20watts Wall mount column
speaker shall have the following as minimum specification:
1. 20W Rated power
2. 20W,10W, 5W & 2.5W Transformer tapings
3. Speaker shall be tapped at 30 Watts
4. 100V Line operation
5. 12Ω Driver impedance
6. 217Hz – 16.7kHz Effective frequency range
7. 100.3dB Sensitivity (1W/1m) peak
8. Dispersion (-6dB) @1kHz is 188º.
9. Dispersion (-6dB) @4kHz is 86º.
10. It shall be made in Europe.
B. 50watt Wall Mounted Column Speaker: The 50Watts Wall mount column speakers shall
have the following as minimum specification:
1. 50W Rated power
2. 50W,30W, 15W, 7.5W Transformer tapping’s
4. 8Ω Driver impedance
5. 110Hz – 18KHz frequency response
6. SPL @1m/1W peak shall be 102.8dB
7. 185-degree Dispersion horizontal angle @ 1kHz (-6 dB)
8. 33-degree dispersion vertical angle @ 1 KHz (-6 dB)
9. Color shall be RAL9006 ‘White Aluminium’
10. ABS Material
11. Indoor and Outdoor use.
12. IP 66 for Outdoor.
13. Materials shall be powder coated shock-resistant metal chassis and metal grille.
14. Mounting shall be using Swivel bracket.
C. Horn Speaker for Minaret: The Horn speaker for the Minaret shall have the following
as the minimum specifications:
1. 60W Rated power
2. 60W, 30W ,15W Transformer tapping’s
3. Tapped at 60Watts.
5. 160 – 11000 Hz Effective frequency range
6. 110dB Sensitivity (1W/1m) 100Hz – 10kHz bandwidth
7. 128dB Sensitivity (60W/1m) 100Hz – 10kHz bandwidth
8. 50OOpening Angle
9. Aluminum alloy.
D. 6W Ceiling Speaker Frameless Type: The 6W full range BGM ceiling speaker shall
have the following specification:
1. The speaker shall give 92dBdB@1W/1m Average sensitivity.
2. 6Watt transformer for 6/3/1.5 volt or voice coil/8 Ohm Direct)
3. Frequency Response shall 56 –18000 Hz.
4. SPL at 1W/1m, peak shall be 97dB.
5. SPL Pmax/4m, peak shall be 92.7 dB
6. The unit shall have 6.5”full range driver with frameless front grill.
7. Dispersion -6dB, 500Hz h/v shall be 180°.
8. Dispersion -6dB, 1KHz h/v 180° shall be 175°.
9. Mounting type shall be Quick-mount clamp.
10. Speaker shall be of European or USA/Canada origin, fast east products shall
not be accepted.
E. 20W Public Address Column Speaker

1. The Speaker shall have the following features:
a. 20W Rated power
b. 20W,15W,10W and 5W Transformer tapping’s
c. It shall be Tapped at 20W
d. 100V Line operation
e. Effective Frequency Range shall be 220 Hz-16.9KHZ.
f. 188-degree Dispersion angle @ 1kHz (-6 dB)
g. SPL @1m/1W peak shall be 100.3dB
h. Sensitivity at 1W/1m shall be minimum 92.5dB.
i. Mounting bracket shall be Swivel bracket.
j. Housing shall be using Aluminium material.
k. Speaker shall be of European or USA/Canada origin, fast east products
shall not be accepted
F. 20W Public Address Pendent Ceiling Loudspeaker

a. 20W Rated power
b. Tapped at 20 Watts
c. 20W, 15W, 10W, 5W, 2.5W Transformer tapping’s
e. 130Hz – 17.9kHz Effective frequency range
f. 100.8dB SPL Peak (1W/1m).
g. Sensitivity at 1W/1m shall be minimum 91.5dB.
h. Dispersion at 500Hz/-6dB shall be 360°.
i. Dispersion at 1KHz/-6dB shall be 163°
j. Speaker housing shall be UV-resistant ABS material.
G. 15W Public Address Horn Speaker

a. 15W Rated power
b. 15W,7.5W and 3.75W Transformer tapping’s
c. It shall be Tapped at 15W
e. Effective Frequency Range shall be 300 Hz-13.8KHZ
f. 130-degree Dispersion angle @ 1kHz (-6 dB)
g. SPL @1m/1W peak shall be 108.5dB
h. Mounting bracket shall be Steel U bracket.
i. Sensitivity at 1W/1m (100Hz – 10kHz bandwidth) shall be 91.3dB.
j. Material shall be robust ABS plastic housing.
k. EN54 Part 24 or UL Listed.
l. Speaker shall be of European or USA/Canada origin, fast east
products shall not be accepted.
H. Active Line Array Speaker for Main Men Prayer Hall
1. The unit shall consist of a solid aluminum extrusion containing a linear driver
arrangement of 8 sources. The single cone full range drivers shall be a size of
4”.
2. The line array shall have an internal DSP and microcontroller where audio
signals shall be processed. The DSP shall have a 100dB SNR and 50 MIPS.
The Line array speaker shall be powered from the Class-D power amplifier
240W RMS output power. The new audio algorithms of the digital signal
processor shall allow to modify the sound diffusion, adapting the response to
the acoustical requirements of the installation
3. The Line array speaker shall have the following main features:
a. Manual lobe switching between configuration A or B
b. Constant direct SPL in all audience area.
c. Dual audio input: 0dB or L100V.
d. In & out XLR audio socket for daisy chain topology connection.
e. Electronic vertical dispersion manipulation.
f. VOX detection for automatic power switch.
g. Tone control: Bass & treble.
h. Volume control.
i. 15 band graphic equalizer.
j. Speech filter for increasing intelligibility.
k. Mute option.
4. The DSP shall provide powerful pre-processing on all audio input channels,
such as 14-band Graphical Equalization, pre-delay, audio mute, volume and
auto-gain.
5. The mechanical construction shall be based in aluminum to ensure many years
of Reliable operation in high humidity environments. In the power Consumption
shall be designed for an optimize Consumption with 3 states: ON, MUTE,
STANDBY.
6. The enclosure shall be made of extruded aluminum and finished in an epoxy
powder coating standardized on RAL 1015.
7. The complete Array shall meet the following criteria:
a. Frequency response shall be 80Hz to 20 kHz.
b. Power Amplifier shall be Class–D(PWM)
c. Amplifier output power shall be 240W RMS.
d. Max SPL shall be 90dB.
e. Input sensitivity line 0dB (XLR) shall be balanced /unbalanced 0dB.
f. Input sensitivity 100V (Euro block) shall be Balanced.
g. Programmer socket shall be RJ45
h. Communication protocol shall be RS-485 half duplex.
i. Main voltage shall be 230VAC/ 50HZ.
j. Maximum power consumption shall be 400W
2.08 MEDIA PLAYER:
A. The Digital Audio Player shall be 19” rack mounted type where applicable. It shall be
equipped with a full function remote control with discs’ key and power ON/OFF. It shall
have independent Audio output and volume control for Music Player output and Radio
output.
B. The unit shall have two independent backlit LCD screens. One for control, navigation
in MP3 files and information on audio reproduction. The other screen shall show
information on the dial and selected pre-sets of the digital radio tuner.
C. The specification of the Audio Player shall be as follows: -

1. Form: Rack Mount.
2. Playing formats shall be CD /MP3/ AM/FM tuner.
3. Dual audio source; music player and FM tuner
4. CD, MP3 player and Bluetooth connectivity.
5. Line output: 500mV/1k.
6. Channel crosstalk shall be 65dB.
7. Dynamic range shall be 75dB.
8. SNR shall be 85dB
9. Frequency response: 20Hz to 20kHz
10. Frequency range (FM) 87.5 MHz - 108 MHz
11. Frequency range (AM) 522 Hz - 1620 kHz.
12. FM sensitivity shall be ≤10uA.
13. AM sensitivity shall be ≤100uA.
14. Power supply shall be 230V - 50Hz.
2.09 CABLES AND ACCESSORIES
A. ALL speakers Circuits should be of Vinyl-insulated Cable (Solid Copper Wire): 2 x ø

2.5 mm.
B. Required cables and equipment accessories, RF receiver, antenna, Subwoofer,

Loudspeaker, mixing console and power supply to interconnect all the Sound System
elements to an Integrated and completely functional system shall be provided.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTAL
A. The Contractor should submit the Execution drawings along with the system proposal
for Client and Consultant approval within 30- 60 days from his appointment’s letter as
sub-contractor for MEP work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. The installer should ensure that all wiring complies with the following:
1. Method of cable support should be such that circuit integrity will not be reduced
below that afforded by the cable used, such as termination, distance, etc.
2. Installation of equipment and devices that pertain to other work in the contract
shall be closely coordinated with the appropriate subcontractors.
3. The manufacturer’s authorized representative shall provide onsite supervision
of installation.
4. Speakers’ Brackets, covers and connectors should be provided by the systems’
manufacturer.
3.03 TESTING, COMMISSIONING AND HANDING OVER:
A. The complete installation shall be tested and commissioned by the equipment

manufacturer or his representative and the contractor shall demonstrate the operation
of the system to the engineer and the client's personnel
3.04 WARRANTY;
A. The contractor shall warrant the complete system wiring and equipment to be free from
inherent mechanical and electrical defects for a period of one year from the date of the
complete and certified test (Final Commissioning)
END OF SECTION

SECTION 27 5117
PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Public Address Layout Drawings (Plans and Details) and Schematic Diagram Drawings.
B. Public Address System is identified in PA drawing series.

END OF SECTION
KEO/19-3262-0000 27 5117/1 Public Address System

SECTION 27 5223
EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM FOR SPECIAL NEED PERSONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Work covered by this Section shall consist of furnishing labor, equipment, supplies,
materials, and testing unless otherwise specified, and in performing the following
operations recognized as necessary for the installation of the Standalone Emergency
Call System for Special Need Persons described on the Drawings and/or required by
1. Alarm Controller
2. Door Light with sounder
3. Pull Cord
4. Reset Point

1.03 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Detail the system including the following:

1. Cabling Diagrams: Single-line block diagrams showing cabling interconnection
of all components for this specific equipment. Include cable type for each
interconnection.
3. Station Installation Details: For built-in equipment; dimensioned and to scale.
4. Equipment Cabinet Drawings: Dimensioned and to scale.
C. Coordination Drawings: Detail system components that fit, match, and line up with
provisions made in equipment specified in other Sections or in separate contracts:
D. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that Emergency Call

System for Special Need Persons equipment complies with requirements.
E. Field Tests Reports and Observations: Include record of final adjustments certified by
Installer.
KEO/19-3262-0000 27 5223/1 Emergency Call System for Special Need Persons

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For Emergency Call System for Special Need
Persons equipment to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
Include the following:
1. Operating instructions.
2. Troubleshooting guide.
3. Wiring diagrams and terminal identification.
4. Equipment parts list.
5. Product data for types and sizes of wires and cables used.
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and

approved for installation of units required for this Project.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing equipment similar to

that indicated for this Project and that maintains technical support services capable of
providing user with training, parts, and emergency maintenance and repair with a 24-
hour-maximum response time.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain Emergency Call System for Special Need Persons
equipment through a single source authorized by manufacturer to distribute each
product.

1. BS 8300: Design of buildings and their approaches to meet the needs of disabled
people. Code of practice.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate wiring paths and maintenance access at locations listed below. Coordinate
trim features and finishes at these locations to present a unified design appearance.



A. Warranty Period: two years or manufacturer’s warranty period (whichever is greater)

contents.
1. Alarm Controller: 1 no.
2. Door Light with sounder – 1 no.
3. Pull Cord – 1 no.
4. Reset Point – 1 no.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

use only firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of Emergency Call System for Special
Need Persons, of types and capacities required which have been in satisfactory use in
similar or service for not less than five (5) years and approved by the Architect/
Engineer.
2.02 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTIONS
A. Alarm Controller
1. The Alarm Controller shall form the heart of the disabled toilet alarm system and
shall be provided complete power supply & alarm unit in one.
2. Under normal conditions, the Alarm Controller ‘on’ LED shall illuminate orange
and the sounder and LED shall be off. When the Ceiling Pull Switch is activated
within the toilet area, the Alarm Controller audible sounder and high visibility LED
shall operate. The Overdoor Light / Sounder shall operate, simultaneously. The
call may be reset at the Alarm Controller and/or at the Reset Point within the
toilet, depending on system configuration.
B. Door Light
1. Door lights shall be local alarm annunciators.
2. This unit shall be mounted on a wall at a strategic location outside the toilet to
attract attention in the event of an alarm.
3. Door light shall be fitted with Red and Green LED’s which mimic the re-
assurance indicator on the call points. The unit shall be fully addressable and
only connects to the Network. The unit shall be provided with 2 sets of DIL
switches, and the unit will respond to any device between the Lower and Higher
device address. The unit shall be with an integral sounder.
C. Pull Cord
1. Pull cords shall be used by users to activate disabled toilets alarms.
2. Pull cords shall be mounted inside the toilet to enable users to call for assistance.
3. They shall be fitted with 3 metre length of cord terminated with an easy to
operate ‘G’ style pull and twin re-assurance indicators.
D. Reset Point
1. Reset points shall be used to reset activated disabled toilets alarms.
2. These points shall be mounted on the wall inside toilet to try to ensure that an
operator attends the location in response to an alarm.
3. Reset points shall be fitted with vandal resistant reset buttons.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATIONS
A. Install cables without damaging conductors, shield, or jacket.
B. Do not bend cables, in handling or in installing, to smaller radii than minimums

recommended by manufacturer.
C. Pull cables without exceeding cable manufacturer's recommended pulling tensions.

1. Pull cables simultaneously if more than one is being installed in same raceway.
2. Use pulling compound or lubricant if necessary. Use compounds that will not
damage conductor or insulation.
3. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire or
cable grips, that will not damage media or raceway.
D. Install exposed raceways and cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed
structural members and follow surface contours. Secure and support cables by straps,
staples, or similar fittings designed and installed so as not to damage cables.
E. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make splices, taps, and terminations on numbered
terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, terminal cabinets, and equipment
enclosures. Install terminal cabinets where there are splices, taps, or terminations for
eight or more conductors.
F. Impedance and Level Matching: Carefully match input and output impedances and
signal levels at signal interfaces. Provide matching networks if required.
G. Identification of Conductors and Cables: Retain color-coding of conductors and apply

wire and cable marking tape to designate wires and cables so all media are identified in
coordination with system wiring diagrams. Label stations, controls, and indications
using approved consistent nomenclature.
2. Label exposed cables at intervals not exceeding 4.5 m.
3. Prepare cable administration drawings to show building floor plans with cable
administration point labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for
terminal hardware and positions, cables, stations and devices and equipment
grounding conductors.
3.02 GROUNDING
A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 - Earthing and Bonding for Electrical Systems"
for grounding conductors and connectors.

B. Test Procedure: Comply with the following:

1. Schedule tests a minimum of seven days in advance of performance of tests.
2. Report: Submit a written record of test results.
3. Operational Test: Perform an operational system test, and demonstrate proper
operations, adjustment, and sensitivity of the components.
C. Retesting: Rectify deficiencies indicated by tests and completely retest work affected by
such deficiencies at Contractor's expense. Verify by the system test that the total
system meets these Specifications and complies with applicable standards. Report
results in writing.
D. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly labeled, and interconnecting wires
and terminals are identified.
3.04 DEMONSTRATION

personnel and caregiver staff to adjust, operate, and maintain Emergency Call System
for Special Need Persons equipment.
3.05 MAINTENANCE

END OF SECTION

SECTION 28 1300
ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Access Control System Layout Drawings (Plans and Details) and Schematic Diagram
Drawings.
B. Access Control System is identified in CCTV drawing series.

END OF SECTION
KEO/19-3262-0000 28 1300/1 Access Control System

SECTION 28 1913
PARKING GUIDANCE SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Parking Guidance System Layout Drawings (Plans and Details) and Schematic Diagram
Drawings.
B. Parking Guidance System is identified in EL drawing series.

END OF SECTION
KEO/19-3262-0000 28 1913/1 Parking Guidance System

SECTION 28 2300
SECURITY VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM (CCTV)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Security Video Surveillance System (CCTV) Layout Drawings (Plans and Details) and
Security Video Surveillance System (CCTV) Schematic Diagram Drawings.
B. Security Video Surveillance System (CCTV) System is identified in CCTV drawing

series.

END OF SECTION
KEO/19-3262-0000 28 2300/1 Security Video Surveillance System (Cctv)

SECTION 28 3100
FIRE DETECTION & ALARM SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes the requirements for the installation, programming and
configuration of a complete intelligent analogue addressable network-based fire
detection and alarm system. The system shall include, but is not limited to:
1. Fire alarm control panel(s) including power supplies, battery chargers and
batteries.
2. Automatic and manually activated alarm initiating and notification devices and
appliances.
3. Automatic supervision devices and modules.
4. Automatic and manually activated voice evacuation subsystem.
5. Remote annunciator(s).
6. Conduits, wires and accessories required to furnish a complete and operational
system.
7. All conduit, wiring and accessories required to provide power to, and interconnect
with, devices supplied through other divisions including:
a. Electric and magnetic door holders.
b. Sprinkler system flow switches and supervisory switches.
c. Sprinkler system electrical and diesel pumps and fire water tanks.
d. Fire suppression system panels.
e. Elevator status and recall control panels.
f. Air handling units.
g. Smoke dampers and fans related to smoke control.
h. Electrical generator monitoring.
8. Equipment and labor not specifically referred to herein or on the plans, but which
are required to meet the functional intent of the system, shall be provided without
additional cost to the Owner. Refer to the tender drawings for the specific details.
9. Interface with BAS
10. Interface with Public address system
11. Interface with Elevators
12. Interface with Audio visual system
A. Division 14 Section “Electric Traction Elevators”
B. Division 25 Section “Building Automation System (BAS)”
C. Division 26 Section “Earthing and Bonding for Electrical Systems”
D. Division 26 Section “Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems”
KEO/19-3262-0000 28 3100/1 Fire Detection and Alarm System

E. Division 26 Section “Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems”
F. Division 26 Section “Cable Trays for Electrical Systems”
G. Division 26 Section “Identification for Electrical Systems”
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. FACP: Fire alarm control panel.
B. LED: Light-emitting diode.
C. KFF : Kuwait Fire Force
D. Definitions in NFPA 72 apply to fire alarm terms used in this Section.
1.04 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. All work, materials, and equipment shall comply with the rules and regulations of all
codes and ordinances of the local, state, and federal authorities having jurisdiction.
Such codes, when more restrictive, shall take precedence over these plans and
specifications. The specifications and standards listed below form part of this
specification. The system shall fully comply with the latest issue of these standards, if
applicable.
1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
a. NFPA72—National Fire Alarm Code
b. NFPA101—Life Safety Code
c. NFPA13—Sprinkler Systems
2. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
a. UL 864—UOJZ Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
b. UL 268—Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
c. UL 268A—Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications
d. UL 217—Smoke Detectors Single Station
e. UL 521—Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
f. UL 228—Door Holders for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
g. UL 464—Audible Signaling Appliances
h. UL 1638—Visual Signaling Appliances
i. UL 38—Manually Activated Signaling Boxes
j. UL 346—Water flow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
k. UL 1481—Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
l. UL 1711—Amplifiers for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
3. Local Civil Defense Department/ Fire Department (KFF) requirements.
B. System shall be listed by the national agencies as suitable for extinguishing release
applications. The system shall support release of high and low pressure CO2.
A. Comply with NFPA 72
B. Automatic Fire Alarm with Analogue Addressable Smoke / Heat detectors is to be

provided. The Automatic Analogue Addressable Fire Alarm System with all components
shall be UL listed complying with UL 864, 9th Edition.
C. Fire alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices:
1. Manual stations.
2. Smoke detectors.
3. Air sampling smoke detection.
4. Beam smoke detection.
5. Duct smoke detectors.
6. Heat detectors.
7. Linear heat detection.
8. Flame detectors.
9. Automatic sprinkler system flow detection.
10. Fire extinguishing system operation.
D. Fire alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:

1. Alarm notification appliances shall operate continuously.
2. Identify alarm at the FACP and remote annunciators.
3. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths.
4. Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders.
5. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.
6. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire alarm
mode.
7. Close smoke dampers in air ducts of system serving zone where alarm was
initiated.
8. Record events in the system memory.
9. Record events by the system printer.
10. Activate Elevator recall system.
11. Shut down of supply valves for fuel gas
E. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices or actions:
1. Operation of a fire-protection system valve tamper.
2. Fire Pump
3. Generator
F. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices or
actions:
1. Open circuits, shorts and grounds of wiring for initiating device, signaling line,
and notification-appliance circuits.
2. Opening, tampering, or removal of alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-
initiating devices.
3. Loss of primary power at the FACP.
4. Ground or a single break in FACP internal circuits.
5. Abnormal ac voltage at the FACP.
6. A break in standby battery circuitry.
7. Failure of battery charging.
8. Abnormal position of any switch at the FACP or annunciator.
9. Fire-pump power failure, including a dead-phase or phase-reversal condition.
10. Low-air-pressure switch operation on a dry-pipe or preaction sprinkler system.
G. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Ring trouble bell and annunciate at the
FACP and remote annunciator (repeater). Record the event on system printer.
H. System shall be capable of Control By Events programming and other special features
like cross-zoning, co-operative multitasking for decision making, etc.

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cables and connecting materials until
wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and
maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the
remainder of the construction period.
A. Refer to section “Environmental Conditions” in Division 28 0500 - Common work results

for electronic safety and security.
Contractor shall be fully responsible for the Fire Alarms and Heat Detectors System i.e.
final design, detailing of the works described herein, including (without limitation) the
comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, shall provide
a complete, and secure installation for heat detectors, coordination with all services
above the false ceiling ,kitchen appliances which shall meet the specified performance
and General design requirements as indicated in Contract Documents drawings
,Specifications and which shall be fit for their intended purpose. The Contractor shall
indemnify the Employer and Design Consultant from any and all claims, costs and
expenses arising from any loss or damage in connection with any error in or failure of
the Contractor’s designed portion of the Works.
B. The Contractor shall prepare detailed, fully-dimensioned construction drawings , the

reflected ceiling plans(that finalize the design intent) to ensure merit and dimensionally
correct placement of all detectors and other elements of the system necessary for
compliance, to reflect best-practice-approach, comply with applicable NFPA codes and
manufacturer’s recommendations and take into account particular site conditions, to the
full approval of the Authorities Having Jurisdiction over this Project.
1.09 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:
a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire alarm system design.
b. Certified by CDD
2. System Operation Description: Provide detailed description for this Project,
including method of operation and supervision of each type of circuit and
sequence of operations for manually and automatically initiated system inputs
and outputs. Manufacturer's standard descriptions for generic systems are not
acceptable.
3. Device Address List: Coordinate with final system programming.
4. Provide System riser diagram with device addresses, conduit sizes, and cable
and wire types and sizes.
5. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Include diagrams for
equipment and for system with all terminals and interconnections identified.
Show wiring color code.
6. Batteries: Provide size calculations.
7. Duct Smoke Detectors: Provide performance parameters and installation details
for each detector, verifying that each detector is listed for the complete range of
air velocity, temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is
operating.
8. Ductwork Coordination Drawings: Provide Plans, sections, and elevations of
ducts, drawn to scale and coordinating the installation of duct smoke detectors
and access to them. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and
support of sampling tubes, the detector housing, and remote status and alarm
indicators. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written
recommendations.
9. Floor Plans: Indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable
device. Show size and route of cable and conduits.
10. Provide Voltage drop calculations for wiring runs indicating cumulative current
draw and voltage drop from the panel to the last device in the loop
11. Provide cause and effect matrix.
12. Provide Mimic panel details.
C. Qualification Data: Provide installer.
D. Provide Field quality-control test reports.
E. Provide Operation and Maintenance Data for fire alarm system to include in emergency,
operation, maintenance manuals and daily, weekly, monthly, semiannual, annual
maintenance schedule. Comply with NFPA 72, Appendix A, recommendations for
Owner's manual. Include abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at the FACP.
F. Submittals to Authorities Having Jurisdiction: In addition to distribution requirements for

submittals specified in Division 01 Section "Submittals," make an identical submittal to
authorities having jurisdiction. To facilitate review, include copies of annotated Contract
Drawings as needed to depict component locations. Resubmit if required to make
clarifications or revisions to obtain approval. On receipt of comments from authorities
having jurisdiction, submit them to Architect for review.
G. Documentation:
1. Approval and Acceptance: Provide the "Record of Completion" form according to
NFPA 72 to Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Record of Completion Documents: Provide the "Permanent Records" according
to NFPA 72 to Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction. Format of the written
sequence of operation shall be the optional input/output matrix.
a. Provide 8 colored Hard copies on paper to Architect, and authorities
b. Provide 3 sets of Electronic media copies to Architect and authorities
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. Installer must possess a valid License and have a minimum of 5 years’
experience in the business of installing fire alarm systems.
2. Installer shall be the manufacturer or a local authorized representative of the
manufacturer with a proven track record of being responsive, providing accurate
and complete submittals, meeting project schedules, and being prepared for
system testing and acceptance.
3. Installer shall be able to provide a fully equipped and qualified factory-trained
repair technician at the job site for any request for emergency services within the
time stipulated under Guarantee. This service shall be available 24 hours a day
during the term of warranty.
4. Installer shall furnish evidence that the fire alarm equipment supplier has an
experienced and effective service organization, which carries a stock of repair
parts for the system to be furnished. The installer must be able to provide any
replacement part on site within 48 hours during the warranty period.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Equipment shall only be provided from firms regularly

engaged in design and manufacture of fire detection, alarm and communications
systems, components and accessories, of types, sizes, capacities and characteristics
required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less
than 5 years.
C. Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation of units required
for this Project
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories shall be Listed and labeled as

defined in BS / IEC Standards, and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and
marked for intended use.
contents.
B. Spare Parts shall be for 2 years of normal operational service.
C. Spare parts required shall include but not necessarily be limited to,
1. Lamps for Remote Indicating Lamp Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of
amount installed, but not less than 1 unit.
2. Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but not
less than 1 unit.
3. Smoke, Heat, and Flame Detectors: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount of
each type installed, but not less than 1 unit of each type.
4. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount of each type installed,
but not less than 1 unit of each type.
5. Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to lock and tamper proofed
components.
6. Audible and Visual Notification Appliances: One of each type installed.
7. Fuses: Two of each type installed in the system.
8. Manual Call Points: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but not less
than 1 unit.
9. Spare parts recommended by manufacturer.
D. Spare parts shall be delivered to the Owner’s central storage facility.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

use only firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of Fire Detection & Alarm System, of
for not less than five (5) years and approved by the Architect/ Engineer.
2.02 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (FACP)
1. Fully automatic fire detection and alarm as described in detail in this section and
as shown on the drawings. Fire alarm Contractor should coordinate with other
Contractors for number of points, signal, controls and compatibility, so that the
system should be able to monitor, control and graphics for all points and
functions.
2. Modular, power-limited design with electronic modules, UL 864 listed.
3. Addressable initiation devices that communicate device identity and status.
a. Smoke sensors shall additionally communicate sensitivity setting and
allow for adjustment of sensitivity at the FACP.
b. Temperature sensors shall additionally test for and communicate the
sensitivity range of the device.
4. Addressable control circuits for operation of mechanical equipment.
B. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human
operator at the FACP and addressable system components including annunciation and
supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the
programming and control menu.
1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, three line(s) of 80 characters,
minimum.
2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and
control commands; and to indicate control commands to be entered into the
system for control of smoke-detector sensitivity and other parameters.
C. Operator terminal at Fire Command Center:

1. Operator terminal shall consist of the central processing unit, display screen,
keyboard and printer.
2. Display screen shall have a minimum 21-inch (525mm) diagonal non-glare LCD /
LED screen.
3. Keyboard shall consist of alpha numeric and user/functional control keys.
4. Printer shall be the automatic type, printing the date, time and location for all
alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions.
D. Network
1. A collection Fire Alarm Control Panels, Annunciators, Web Server, Embedded
Gateway, BACnet Gateway, Modbus Gateway, Digital Voice Command (DVC)
and a computer based Color Graphic User Interface shall interface together
creating a high speed network system.
2. The Network shall be a true peer-to-peer communications architecture. Each
node stores its own program and communicates equally with all other nodes.
3. The Network shall be an IP based Ethernet architecture suitable for long range
use on fiber optic media or wire media.
4. The fire alarm system shall ensure BACnet/Modbus card for interface with the
Campus wide Command Center to enable monitoring of FA device level status
from the Campus wide Command Center.
E. Circuits:
1. Signaling Line Circuits: NFPA 72, Class A.
a. System Layout: Each signaling line circuit would be not be loaded more
than 70% of its recommended capacity. See NFPA 72, Table 3-7, for
selection criteria.
2. Notification-Appliance Circuits: NFPA 72, Class A.
3. Actuation of alarm notification appliances, annunciation, smoke control, elevator
recall, and actuation of suppression systems shall occur within 10 seconds after
the activation of an initiating device.
4. Electrical monitoring for the integrity of wiring external to the FACP for
mechanical equipment shutdown and magnetic door-holding circuits is not
required, provided a break in the circuit will cause doors to close and mechanical
equipment to shut down.
F. Smoke-Alarm Verification:
1. Initiate audible and visible indication of an "alarm verification" signal at the FACP.
2. Activate a listed and approved "alarm verification" sequence at the FACP and the
detector.
3. Record events by the system printer.
4. Sound general alarm if the alarm is verified.
5. Cancel FACP indication and system reset if the alarm is not verified.
G. Notification-Appliance Circuit: Operation shall sound in a temporal pattern. Retain one

of first two paragraphs below for buildings with elevators.
H. Elevator Controls: Heat detector operation shuts down elevator power by operating a
shunt trip in a circuit breaker feeding the elevator.
I. Elevator Controls: Water-flow alarm connected to sprinkler in an elevator shaft and

elevator machine room shuts down elevators associated with the location without time
delay.
1. A field-mounted relay actuated by the fire detector or the FACP closes the shunt
trip circuit and operates building notification appliances and annunciator.
J. Power Supply for Supervision Equipment: Supply for audible and visual equipment for
supervision of the ac power shall be from a dedicated dc power supply, and power for
the dc component shall be from the ac supply.
K. Alarm Silencing, Trouble, and Supervisory Alarm Reset: Manual reset at the FACP after
initiating devices are restored to normal.

1. Silencing-switch operation halts alarm operation of notification appliances and
activates an "alarm silence" light. Display of identity of the alarm zone or device
is retained.
2. Subsequent alarm signals from other devices or zones reactivate notification
appliances until silencing switch is operated again.
3. When alarm-initiating devices return to normal and system reset switch is
operated, notification appliances operate again until alarm silence switch is reset.
L. Walk Test: A test mode to allow one person to test alarm and supervisory features of
initiating devices. Enabling of this mode shall require the entry of a password. The
FACP and annunciators shall display a test indication while the test is underway. If
testing ceases while in walk-test mode, after a preset delay, the system shall
automatically return to normal.
M. Remote Smoke-Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Controls shall select specific

addressable smoke detectors for adjustment, display their current status and sensitivity
settings, and control of changes in those settings. Allow controls to be used to program
repetitive, time-scheduled, and automated changes in sensitivity of specific detector
groups. Record sensitivity adjustments and sensitivity-adjustment schedule changes in
system memory, and make a print-out of the final adjusted values on the system printer.
N. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, trouble,

and supervisory signals to a remote alarm station through a digital alarm communicator
transmitter , telephone lines,..
O. Service Modem: Ports shall be RS-232 for system printer and for connection to a dial-in
terminal unit.
1. The dial-in port shall allow remote access to the FACP for programming changes
and system diagnostic routines. Access by a remote terminal shall be by
encrypted password algorithm.
P. Printout of Events: On receipt of signal, print alarm, supervisory, and trouble events.
Identify zone, device, and function. Include type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or
trouble), and date and time of occurrence. Differentiate alarm signals from all other
printed indications. Also print system reset event, including the same information for
device, location, date, and time. Commands initiate the printing of a list of existing
alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions in the system and a historical log of events.
Q. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 220-V ac service and a power-supply module.
Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signal, supervisory
signal, supervisory and digital alarm communicator transmitter and shall be powered by
the 24-V dc source.
1. The alarm current draw of the entire fire alarm system shall not exceed 80
percent of the power-supply module rating.
2. Power supply shall have a dedicated fused safety switch for this connection at
the service entrance equipment. Paint the switch box red and identify it with
"FIRE ALARM SYSTEM POWER."
R. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries and automatic battery charger
and an automatic transfer switch.
1. Batteries: Battery shall be of the sealed, maintenance free type, 24-volt nominal
Vented, wet-cell pocket, plate nickel cadmium sized with 25 percent reserve
capacity for future expansion.

2. Battery shall have sufficient capacity to power the fire alarm system for not less
than 24 hours plus 30 (Thirty) minutes of alarm to an end voltage of 1.42 volts
per cell, upon a normal AC power failure.
3. Battery racks shall be steel with an alkali resistant finish.
4. Battery and Charger Capacity: Comply with NFPA 72.
S. Surge Protection:
1. Install surge protection on normal ac power for the FACP and its accessories.
Comply with Division 26 Section "Transient-Voltage Suppression for Low-Voltage
Electrical Power Circuits" for auxiliary panel suppressors.
2. Install surge protectors recommended by FACP manufacturer. Install on all
system wiring external to the building housing the FACP.
T. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic

or glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and
describe appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional
operation of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.
2.03 MANUAL FIRE ALARM BOXES
A. Description: UL listed; finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in

contrasting color. Station shall show visible indication of operation. Mounted on
recessed outlet box; if indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface
back box.
1. Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, breaking-
glass and pull-lever type. With integral addressable module, arranged to
communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FACP.
2. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch.
3. Indoor Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure, hinged at
the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. Lifting the cover actuates
an integral battery-powered audible horn intended to discourage false-alarm
operation.
4. Weatherproof Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure,
hinged at the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm.
2.04 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS
1. UL 268 listed/, operating at 24-V dc, nominal.
2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal,
alarm, or trouble) to the FACP.
3. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components shall be
mounted in a plug-in module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in
the fixed base for connection of building wiring.
4. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation
to restore them to normal operation.
5. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type. Indicating detector has operated and
power-on status.
6. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog-
addressable type, individually monitored at the FACP for calibration, sensitivity,
and alarm condition, and individually adjustable for sensitivity from the FACP.
a. Rate-of-rise temperature characteristic shall be selectable at the FACP for
8 or 11 deg C per minute.
b. Fixed-temperature sensing shall be independent of rate-of-rise sensing
and shall be settable at the FACP to operate at 57 or 68 deg C.
c. Provide multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor.
B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:

1. Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver.
2. Detector Sensitivity: Between 0.008 and 0.011 percent/mm smoke obscuration
when tested according to UL 268A.
C. Multi-Criteria Detector
1. Heat sensor, combination rate-of-rise and fixed temperature
2. Photoelectric Smoke sensor - Detector Sensitivity shall be between 0.008 and
0.011 percent/mm smoke obscuration when tested according to UL 268A / KFF
approved.
D. Beam-Type Smoke Detector: Each detector shall have the following features:
1. The projected beam type smoke detector shall be listed to UL 268 listed and
shall consist of up to two integrated transmitters, receiver detector heads and
single low level remote control unit.
2. The beam detector heads shall include an integral built-in laser pointer to assist
prism mounting.
3. The beam detector shall feature automatic gain control which will compensate for
gradual signal deterioration from dirt accumulation on the lenses.
4. The beams detector heads shall include self-correcting motorized head feature to
ensure unit is always receiving maximum signal available and shall automatically
compensate for building shift.
5. The unit shall include a low level remote display and control unit with LCD read-
out for set-up, reporting and testing of up to two separate detector heads.
6. The system shall be capable of programming alarm thresholds of 10% to 60% in
1% increments. The system shall be capable of programming delay to fault and
delay to alarm from 2 seconds to 30 seconds in 1 second increments.
7. Test and acceptance of the system shall be carried out by using the UL approved
internal electronic obscuration fire test. The projected beam type smoke detector
shall be a 4-wire 24 VDC device
E. Remote Air-Sampling Detector System: Includes air-sampling pipe network, a laser-

based photoelectric detector, a sample transport fan, and a control unit.
1. UL 268 listed, operating at 24-V dc, nominal.
2. Pipe Network: Electrical metallic tubing connects control unit with designated
sampling holes.
3. Smoke Detector: Particle-counting type with continuous laser beam. Sensitivity
adjustable to a minimum of three preset values.
4. Sample Transport Fan: Centrifugal type, creating a minimum static pressure of
12.5 Pa at all sampling ports.
5. Control Unit: Single or multi-zone unit as indicated. Provides same system
power supply, supervision, and alarm features as specified for the central FACP
plus separate trouble indication for airflow and detector problems.
6. Signals to the Central FACP: Any type of local system trouble is reported to the
central FACP as a composite "trouble" signal. Alarms on each system zone are
individually reported to the central FACP as separately identified zones.
F. Duct Smoke Detectors:

1. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:
a. Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver.
b. Detector Sensitivity: Between 0.008 and 0.011 percent/mm smoke
obscuration when tested according to UL 268A.
2. UL 268A listed, operating at 24-V dc, nominal.
4. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components shall be
mounted in a plug-in module that connects to a fixed base. The fixed base shall
be designed for mounting directly to the air duct. Provide terminals in the fixed
base for connection to building wiring.
a. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: UL listed for use with the supplied
detector. The enclosure shall comply with IP66.
5. Self-Restoring: Detectors shall not require resetting or readjustment after
actuation to restore them to normal operation.
6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type. Indicating detector has operated and
power-on status. Provide remote status and alarm indicator and test station
where indicated.
7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog-
addressable type, individually monitored at the FACP for calibration, sensitivity,
and alarm condition, and individually adjustable for sensitivity from the FACP.
8. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity.
9. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for
the specific duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied.
10. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit.
2.05 HEAT DETECTORS
A. General: UL 521 listed.
B. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 57 deg C

or rate-of-rise of temperature that exceeds 8 deg C per minute, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Mounting: Plug-in base, interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.
C. Heat Detector, Fixed-Temperature Type: Actuated by temperature that exceeds a fixed

temperature of 88 deg C.
D. Continuous Linear Heat-Detector System: Consists of detector cable and control unit.
1. Detector Cable: Rated detection temperature 68 deg C. Listed for "regular"
service and a standard environment. Cable includes two steel actuator wires
twisted together with spring pressure, wrapped with protective tape, and finished
with PVC outer sheath. Each actuator wire is insulated with heat-sensitive
material that reacts with heat to allow the cable twist pressure to short circuit
wires at the location of elevated temperature.
2. Control Unit: Two-zone or multi-zone unit as indicated. Provides same system
power supply, supervision, and alarm features as specified for the central FACP.
3. Signals to the Central FACP: Any type of local system trouble is reported to the
central FACP as a composite "trouble" signal. Alarms on each detection zone
are individually reported to the central FACP as separately identified zones.

2.06 FLAME DETECTORS
A. Ultraviolet type with solid-state amplifier-switching circuit set for 10-second delay, unless
2.07 LPG GAS DETECTORS
A. LPG Gas Detector 0-100% LEL, 4-20mA - Catalytic sensor - Explosion Proof Enclosure,
IP 65
B. The gas detector has a 12-24 Vdc power supply and a standard 4-20 mA 3-wiresoutput
and three relays
C. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,

or trouble) to the FACP.
2.08 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
A. Description: Equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system
connections.
1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-
mounting assembly.
B. Bells: Electric-vibrating, 24-V dc, under-dome type; with provision for housing the
operating mechanism behind the bell. Bells shall produce a sound-pressure level of 94
dBA, measured 3 m from the bell. 254-mm size, unless otherwise indicated. Bells are
weatherproof where indicated.
C. Sounders Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing
the operating mechanism behind a grille. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of
90 dBA, measured 3 m from the horn.
D. Strobes Visible Alarm Devices: Xenon strobe lights listed under UL 1971, with clear or
nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE"
is engraved in minimum 25-mm- high letters on the lens.
1. Rated Light Output: Candela Level as noted in the drawings..
2. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.
2.09 SPRINKLER SYSTEM REMOTE INDICATORS
A. Remote status and alarm indicator and test stations, with LED indicating lights. Light is
connected to flash when the associated device is in an alarm or trouble mode. Lamp is
flush mounted in a single-gang wall plate. A red, laminated, phenolic-resin identification
plate at the indicating light identifies, in engraved white letters, device initiating the
signal and room where the smoke detector or valve is located. For water-flow switches,

the identification plate also designates protected spaces downstream from the water-
flow switch.
2.10 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS-IF REQUIRED
A. Description: Units are equipped for wall or floor mounting as indicated and are complete
with matching door plate.
1. Electromagnet: Requires no more than 3 W to develop 111-N holding force.
2. Wall-Mounted Units: Flush mounted, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Rating: 24-V ac or dc.
4. Rating: 240V ac.
B. Material and Finish: Match door hardware.
2.11 REMOTE LCD ANNUNCIATOR
A. Provide Remote LCD Annunciator with the same “look and feel” as the FACP operator
interface. The Remote LCD Annunciator shall use the same Primary Acknowledge,
Silence, and Reset Keys, Status LEDs and LCD Display as the FACP.
B. Annunciator shall have super-twist LCD display with two lines of 40 characters each.
Annunciator shall be provided with four (4) programmable control switches and
associated LEDs.
C. Under normal conditions the LCD shall display a “SYSTEM IS NORMAL” message and
the current time and date.
D. Should an abnormal condition be detected the appropriate LED (Alarm, Supervisory or

Trouble) shall flash. The unit audible signal shall pulse for alarm conditions and sound
steady for trouble and supervisory conditions.
E. The LCD shall display the following information relative to the abnormal condition of a
point in the system:
1. 40 character custom location label.
2. Type of device (e.g., smoke, pull station, water flow).
3. Point status (e.g., alarm, trouble).
F. Operator keys shall be key switch enabled to prevent unauthorized use. The key shall
only be removable in the disabled position. Acknowledge, Silence and Reset operation
shall be the same as the FACP.
2.12 MIMIC PANELS
A. The mimic panel will be similar in style and finish to the control panel and be available in
A4 sized formats. It will be sighted in a conspicuous and well-lit area, preferably the
entrance where the fire-fighting team will arrive.
B. The panel will be a standard unit will all site specific information being programmed “on
site”, this information will be held on an EPROM integrated circuit, which may be
modified at a later date to encompass any site changes.

C. The panel will accept the 240V AC supply @ 50Hz, and have integral battery (12V) and
charger. The battery provided will be capable of maintaining a standby period of 24
hours (minimum) with a further 30 minutes, under full alarm/control load conditions.
D. Should a full discharge of the cells take place, then the system shall be capable of
completely re-charging the cell within a 24hr period.
E. The mimic panels shall be connected on the same 2-wire loop as the sensors and
sounders. Also within the panel, terminals will be provided to allow a loop spur
connection to be made as standard.
F. A CAD drawing of the area covered by the system shall locate between clear perspex
sheets and retained within the mimic lid, overlaying an array of hi-brightness LEDs. This
provides pin-point accuracy in determining the location of a fire and the flexibility to tailor
the Customers’ requirements.
G. The following options will be required as standard:

1. Steady or flashing illumination, being either in phase or anti-phase.
2. First fire flashing option.
3. 64 Zone display as standard.
4. The Electrical Contractor shall provide a site outline diagram to allow the Fire
Specialist Company to produce a CAD overlay drawing for the mimic panels.
2.13 ADDRESSABLE MONITOR MODULE
A. Shall connect one supervised initiating device circuit or zone of conventional alarm
initiating devices (any normally open dry contact device) to the fire alarm control panel
signaling line circuit Loop.
B. Module shall have ability to uniquely signal an open circuit.
C. The modules shall provide address-setting means on the module using rotary switches
or using neuron ID. The modules shall also store an internal identifying code that the
control panel shall use to identify the type of module.
D. The Monitor module shall be with1 input / 2 input / 3 input as indicated in drawings
E. Shall support Class A and Class B wiring and fully supervised
F. The module shall have an LED that is controlled by the panel to indicate module status.
Coded signals, transmitted from the panel, can cause the LED to blink, latch on, or latch
off.
G. Polling LED visible through the cover plate
H. The module shall mount in a standard electrical box or to a surface mounted backbox.
I. The module will use SEMS screws for easy wiring. Wiring terminals shall be easily
accessible for troubleshooting without removal from electrical box.
J. Shall be UL /KFF approved

2.14 ADDRESSABLE RELAY MODULE
A. Addressable relay modules shall allow a compatible control panel to switch discrete
contacts by code command.
B. The relay module shall provide Form-C contacts rated for a minimum of 2.0 Amps
resistive or 1.0 Amps inductive , which operate as a double pole double throw switch.
The module shall allow the control panel to switch these contacts on command.
C. The module shall not provide supervision for the notification appliance circuit (NAC).
D. Module shall have both normally open and normally closed connections available for
field wiring.
E. The modules shall provide address-setting means on the module using rotary switches
or using neuron ID . The modules shall also store an internal identifying code that the
F. The module shall have an LED that is controlled by the panel to indicate module status.
off.
G. Polling LED visible through the cover plate
H. The module shall mount in a standard electrical box or to a surface mounted backbox.
I. The module will use SEMS screws for easy wiring. Wiring terminals shall be easily
accessible for troubleshooting without removal from electrical box.
J. Shall support Class A and Class B wiring and fully supervised
K. Shall be UL /KFF approved
2.15 ADDRESSABLE CONTROL MODULE
A. Addressable control modules shall provide supervised monitoring of wiring to load

devices that require an external power supply to operate, such as horns, strobes, or
bells. Upon command from the control panel, the control module shall be able to
disconnect the supervision and connect the external power supply across the load
device.
B. The disconnection of the supervision shall provide verification to the panel that the
control relay state changed.
C. The external power supply shall always be relay isolated from the communication loop.
D. The control module shall transmit full analog measurement of the supervised wiring
back to the panel and can be used to detect impedance changes or other special test
functions.
E. Each control module shall support up to 1 amp of inductive or 2 amps of resistive

audible/visual signals. Audio/visual power shall be provided by a separate supervised
power loop from the main fire alarm control panel or from a supervised, remote power
supply.

F. The modules shall provide address-setting means on the module using rotary switches
or using neuron ID . The modules shall also store an internal identifying code that the
G. The module shall have an LED that is controlled by the panel to indicate module status.
off.
H. Polling LED visible through the cover plate
I. The module shall mount in a standard electrical box or to a surface mounted backbox.
J. The module will use SEMS screws for easy wiring. Wiring terminals shall be easily
accessible for troubleshooting without removal from electrical box
K. Shall support Class A and Class B wiring and fully supervised
L. Shall be UL /KFF approved
2.16 SMOKE CONTROL ANNUNCIATOR – if required
A. On/Auto/Off switches and status indicators (LEDS) shall be provided for monitoring and
manual control of each fan, damper, HVAC control unit, stairwell pressurization fan, and
smoke exhaust fan. To ensure compliance the units supplied shall meet the following UL
categories: UUKL, PAZX, UDTZ, QVAX as well as the requirements of NFPA 90A,
HVAC, and NFPA 92 & 92, Smoke Control. The control System shall be field
programmable for either NFPA 90A operation or NFPA 92 operation to allow for future
use and system expansion.
A. The OFF LED shall be Yellow, the ON LED shall be green, the Trouble/Fault LED shall
be Amber/Orange for each switch. The Trouble/Fault indicator shall indicate a trouble in
the control and/or monitor points associated with that switch. In addition, each group of
eight switches shall have two LEDS and one momentary switch which allow the
following functions: An Amber LED to indicate an OFF-NORMAL switch position, in the
ON or OFF position; A Green LED to indicate ALL AUTO switch position; A Local
Acknowledge/Lamp Test momentary switch.
B. Each switch shall have the capability to monitor and control two addressable inputs and
two addressable outputs. In all modes, the ON and OFF indicators shall continuously
follow the device status not the switch position. Positive feedback shall be employed to
verify correct operation of the device being controlled. Systems that indicate on/off/auto
by physical switch position only are not acceptable.
C. All HVAC switches (i.e., limit switches, vane switches, etc.) shall be provided and
installed by the HVAC contractor.
D. It shall be possible to meet the requirements mentioned above utilizing wall mounted
custom graphic.
2.17 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER
A. Listed and labeled according to UL 632.

B. Functional Performance: Unit receives an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from the
FACP, and automatically captures one or two telephone lines and dials a preset number
for a remote central station. When contact is made with the central station(s), the signal
is transmitted. The unit supervises up to two telephone lines. Where supervising 2
lines, if service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, the unit initiates a
local trouble signal and transmits a signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote
alarm receiving station over the remaining line. When telephone service is restored, unit
automatically reports that event to the central station. If service is lost on both
telephone lines, the local trouble signal is initiated.
C. Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger. Battery

capacity is adequate to comply with NFPA 72 requirements.
D. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central

station.
2.18 SYSTEM PRINTER
A. Listed and labeled as an integral part of the fire alarm system.
2.19 THIRD PARTY INTEGRATION
A. FACP should be capable to provide seamless integration to third party applications in

open protocol format using one of below mentioned protocols. .
B. BACnet Gateway
1. The BACnet Gateway shall utilize a Windows based operating system.
TheBACnet Gateway shall provide an interface between Fire Alarm Control
Panels and clients using BACnet/IP communications protocol.
2. The clients will be required to subscribe to Event Notification objects per FACP
andwill receive device information as BACnet objects via the subscription.
3. The BACnet Gateway shall be compatible with the FACP panels.
4. The BACnet Gateway shall monitor a single via the NUP port or monitor up to 14
nodes on the dedicated with a maximum combined object count of 15,000.
Multiple BACnet Gateways can be used for networks with more than 15 nodes
total.
5. The BACnet Gateway shall be PC programmable using the BACnet Gateway
6. Configuration Tool on a compatible computer that is using Windows® XP
Operating System.
C. Modbus Gateway
1. The Modbus Gateway shall utilize a Windows based operating system. The
Modbus Gateway provides a communications link between networks that use the
Modbus/TCP communications protocol and the FACP resident on a Fire network.
The Modbus protocol will be consistent with Modbus Application Protocol
Specification v1.1b.
2. The Modbus Gateway shall be compatible with the FACPs.
3. The Modbus Gateway shall monitor up to four compatible Fire network nodes
and provide data such as event type, active/ inactive, enabled/disabled,
acknowledged/ unacknowledged, device type, analog value (4-20mA module
only) and system troubles.
4. The Modbus Gateway will support reads of up to 100 registers at a time for digital
5. Values and 10 registers reads at a time for analog values.
6. The Modbus Gateway Configuration Tool, using a Windows® XP Operating
7. System compatible computer, will be used to configure the Modbus Gateway.
2.20 WIRE AND CABLE
A. Wire and cable for fire alarm systems shall be Fire Rated as per Local Civil Defense
requirements.
B. The wire and cable should Low smoke Zero Halogen type.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION.
A. Smoke or Heat Detector Spacing:

1. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 9 m
2. Spacing of heat detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction,
and for high ceiling areas, shall be determined based on guidelines and
recommendations in NFPA 72.
B. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than one meter from air-supply diffuser or return-air
opening.
C. Heat Detectors in Elevator Shafts: Coordinate temperature rating and location with
sprinkler rating and location.
D. Single-Station Smoke Detectors: Where more than one smoke alarm is installed within
a dwelling or suite, they shall be connected so that the operation of any smoke alarm
causes the alarm in all smoke alarms to sound.
E. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install near each smoke detector and each
sprinkler water-flow switch and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from
normal viewing position.
F. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 150 mm below the ceiling. Install
bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism
concealed behind a grille.
G. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.
H. FACP: Surface mount with tops of cabinets not more than 1800 mm above the finished
floor.
I. Annunciator (Repeater): Install with top of panel not more than 1800 mm above the
finished floor
3.02 WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Wiring Method:
1. Cables and raceways used for fire alarm circuits, and equipment control wiring
associated with the fire alarm system, may not contain any other wire or cable.
2. Fire-Rated Cables: Use of 2-hour fire-rated fire alarm cables.
3. Signaling Line Circuits: Power-limited fire alarm cables shall not be installed in
the same cable or raceway as signaling line circuits unless separated properly as
B. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as

recommended by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to
sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points
with no excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any
enclosure associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal
according to the system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-
on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.
C. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, cabinets,
or equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.
D. Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building
power wiring. Use one color-code for alarm circuit wiring and a different color-code for
supervisory circuits. Color-code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-
initiating circuits. Use different colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire
alarm system junction boxes and covers red.
E. Risers: Install at least two vertical cable risers to serve the fire alarm system. Separate
risers in close proximity to each other with a minimum 1-hour-rated wall, so the loss of
one riser does not prevent the receipt or transmission of signals from other floors or
zones.
F. Wiring to Remote Alarm Transmitting Device: 25-mm conduit between the FACP and
the transmitter. Install number of conductors and electrical supervision for connecting
wiring as needed to suit monitoring function.
3.03 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 26

Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Install instructions frame in a location visible from the FACP.
C. Paint power-supply disconnect switch red and label "FIRE ALARM."
3.04 GROUNDING
A. Ground the FACP and associated circuits. Install a ground wire from main service
ground to the FACP.

1. Before requesting final approval of the installation, submit a written statement
using the form for Record of Completion shown in NFPA 72.
2. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection listed in
NFPA 72. Certify compliance with test parameters. All tests shall be conducted
under the direct supervision of a NICET technician certified under the Fire Alarm
Systems program at Level III.
3. Visual Inspection: Conduct a visual inspection before any testing. Use as-built
drawings and system documentation for the inspection. Identify improperly
located, damaged, or nonfunctional equipment, and correct before beginning
tests.
4. Testing: Follow procedure and record results complying with requirements in
NFPA 72.
a. Detectors that are outside their marked sensitivity range shall be replaced.
5. Test and Inspection Records: Prepare according to NFPA 72, including
demonstration of sequences of operation.
3.06 ADJUSTING
A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial

purpose.
B. Follow-Up Tests and Inspections: After date of Substantial Completion, test the fire
alarm system complying with testing and visual inspection requirements in NFPA 72.
Perform tests and inspections listed for three monthly, and one quarterly, periods.
C. Semiannual Test and Inspection: Six months after date of Substantial Completion, test
the fire alarm system complying with the testing and visual inspection requirements in
NFPA 72. Perform tests and inspections listed for monthly, quarterly, and semiannual
periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.
D. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test the fire
alarm system complying with the testing and visual inspection requirements in NFPA 72.
Perform tests and inspections listed for monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual
periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

3.09 TRAINING

advance notice.
4. Comply with the CDD requirements of Demonstration and Training.
5. The Installer shall, after two weeks (minimum) written notification to the client 's /
owner’s representative, conduct a training session during which all maintenance
and operational aspects of the system will be described and demonstrated to
personnel selected by the client/owner. This will include O & M Alarm personnel,
and separate training for two shifts for 5 working days. The sessions shall be
conducted by a manufacturer's representative thoroughly familiar with the
characteristics of the installed system. Each individual session will be a
minimum of 4 hours of instruction: 2 hrs. Classroom and 2 hrs. hands-on training
at project site prior to occupancy.
3.10 MAINTENANCE
END OF SECTION

SECTION 31 1000
SITE CLEARING
PART 1 - GENERAL
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. The Contractor is fully
responsible for all permits according to the local regulations and shall bear all costs
A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and appliances and perform all necessary
operations to execute the work of this section. This section includes the following:
1. Clear site of trees, plant life and grass.
2. Remove complete root system of trees and shrubs.
3. Remove surface debris.
4. Disposal of removed materials away from site and in a legal manner in full
compliance with Local Authorities rules and regulations.
1. Protecting existing vegetation to remain.
2. Removing existing vegetation.
3. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil.
C. Related Sections: Related work to be coordinated and used in conjunction with this
1. Section 31 2000 - Earthworks
2. Section 31 2319 - Dewatering
3. Appendix A - Geotechnical Report
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile and typified by the lack of
organic matter and soil organisms.
B. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project
site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil; but in disturbed areas
such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.
C. Topsoil: Top layer of the soil profile consisting of existing native surface topsoil or
existing in-place surface soil and is the zone where plant roots grow.
D. Topsoil: Top layer of the soil profile consisting of existing native surface topsoil or
existing in-place surface soil and is the zone where plant roots grow. Its appearance is
generally friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than
underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects
more than 50 mm in diameter; and free of subsoil and weeds, roots, toxic materials, or
other non-soil materials.
KEO/19-3262-0000 31 1000/1 Site Clearing

E. Plant-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees, groups of trees, shrubs, or
other vegetation to be protected during construction, and indicated on Drawings.
F. Tree-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be

protected during construction. Refer to Section 01 2015 5639 "Temporary Tree and
Plant Protection".
G. Vegetation: Trees, shrubs, groundcovers, grass, and other plants.
1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to local code and regulations for disposal of debris.
B. Approval from local authorities for erection of site fence and signboards.
1.04 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP
A. Except for stripped topsoil and other materials indicated to be stockpiled or otherwise
remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and
shall be removed from Project site.
A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent
occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations.
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used
facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by
Owner or authorities having jurisdiction.
B. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones:

1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material.
2. Parking vehicles or equipment.
3. Foot traffic.
4. Erection of sheds or structures.
5. Impoundment of water.
6. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated.
7. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless
C. Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust towards protection zones.
D. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection
zones.
E. Soil Stripping, Handling, and Stockpiling: Perform only when the topsoil is dry or slightly
moist.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Satisfactory Soil Material: Requirements for satisfactory soil material are specified in
Section 31 2000 "Earth Moving" and Section 32 9113 "Soil Preparation".
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CLEARING
A. Access:
1. Clear areas required for access to site and execution of work.
B. Undergrowth
1. Clear site of bushes, shrub and undergrowth without disturbing subsoil.
2. Grub out and dispose of large roots.
C. Remove any curbs and other obstacles on site. Dispose of materials, away from site
and in a legal manner.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during
construction.
B. Locate and clearly identify trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to remain or to be
relocated. Wrap a 25-mm blue vinyl tie tape flag around each tree trunk at 1350 mm
above the ground.
C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.

1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to
Owner.
3.03 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
A. Provide temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures to prevent soil erosion

and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and
walkways, according to erosion- and sedimentation-control Drawings and requirements
of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by

construction activity do not enter or cross protection zones.
C. Inspect, maintain, and repair erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during

construction until permanent vegetation has been established.
D. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed
during removal.
3.04 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
A. General: Protect trees and plants remaining on-site according to requirements in

Section 01 5639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection."

B. Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated
that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect.
3.05 TOPSOIL STRIPPING
A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.
B. Strip topsoil to depth of 150 mm in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying

subsoil or other waste materials.
1. Remove subsoil and non-soil materials from topsoil, including clay lumps, gravel,
and other objects more than 50 mm in diameter; trash, debris, weeds, roots, and
other waste materials.
C. Stockpile topsoil away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade
and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust and
erosion by water.
1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 1800 mm.
2. Do not stockpile topsoil within protection zones.
3. Test stockpiled top soil in accordance to testing in section 32 9113 "Soil
Preparation".
4. Dispose of surplus topsoil. Surplus topsoil is that which exceeds quantity
indicated to be stockpiled or reused.
3.06 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials,

and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's
property.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 31 2000
EARTHWORKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
responsible for all permits according to the local regulations and shall bear all costs.
A. Furnish all labour, materials, tools and equipment and perform all services and
operations necessary for earthwork including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Destroy all ants' nests and vermin encountered during excavation.
2. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks and pavements.
3. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures.
4. Excavating and backfilling trenches for buried mechanical and electrical utilities
and pits for buried utility structures.
5. Excavation for utility connections.
6. Grading to level as per grading plans.
7. Compacted fill, preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade and precast pavers.
8. Disposal of surplus and waste materials.
B. The Contractor shall obtain all approvals, permits and pay all relevant fees (for 24hrs
day work schedule) associated with excavation and disposal of excavated materials.
C. Related Sections: Related work to be coordinated and used in conjunction with this
1. Section 02 3000 - Subsurface Investigation
2. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
3. Section 31 2319 - Dewatering.
4. Section 31 3116 - Termite Control
5. Section 31 5000 - Excavation Support and Protection.
6. Divisions 21, 22, 23, 26, 27, and 28 Sections for installing underground
mechanical and electrical utilities and buried mechanical and electrical
1.02 REFERENCES
the latest published editions at the time of contract. Product manufacture, testing and
installation shall comply with the following references unless otherwise stated in the
specification or otherwise approved, but not limited to:
1. ASTM D 448: Classification for Sizes of Aggregate for Road and Bridge
Construction.
2. ASTM C 422: Particle Size Analysis of Soils.
3. ASTM D 698: Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of
Soil Using Standard Effort 600 kN-m/m³.
4. ASTM D 1556: Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by
the Sand-Cone Method.
KEO/19-3262-0000 31 2000/1 Earthworks
5. ASTM D 1557: Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of
Soil Using Modified Effort 2,700 kN-m/m³.
6. ASTM D 2216: Laboratory Determination of Water (Moisture) Content of
Soil, Rock, and Soil Aggregate Mixtures.
7. ASTM D 2487: Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified
Soil Classification System)
8. ASTM D 2937: (R 1990) Density of Soil in Place by the drive-Cylinder
Method.
9. ASTM D 4253: Test Methods for Maximum Index Density of Soils Using a
Vibratory Table.
10. ASTM D 4318: Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils.
11. ASTM D 4754: Test Methods for Minimum Index Density of Soils and
Calculation of Relative Density.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Excavation: Removal of material encountered to elevations and the reuse or disposal of

material removed.
B. Unauthorized excavation: Removing materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or

dimensions without direction by the Engineer. Unauthorized excavation, as well as
remedial work directed by the Engineer, shall be at Contractor’s expense.
C. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs,

mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features
constructed above or below the ground surface.
D. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of

a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.
E. Backfill: Soil materials used to fill an excavation.
F. Bedding Course: Layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying
pipe.
G. Borrow: Soil material obtained off-site when sufficient approved soil material is not
available from excavations.
H. Unyielding Material: Unyielding material shall consist of rack and granular soils with
stones greater than 50 mm, in any dimension or as defined by the pipe manufacturer,
whichever is smaller.
I. Unstable Material: Unstable material shall consist of material too wet to properly work.
J. Drainage Course: Layer supporting slab-on-grade used to minimize capillary flow of

pore water.
K. Fill: Compacted structural fill to raise the grade to required level to receive foundation
and grade slab.
L. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.
M. Utilities include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as
underground services within buildings.
KEO/19-3262-0000 31 2000/2 Earthworks

N. Formation: Formation shall mean the surface of the ground after completion of any
excavation or filling operation.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
A. Construction Activity Pollution Prevention Plan to prevent pollution due to Soil Erosion,
Waterway Sedimentation and Airborne Dust Generation. A plan need to be drawn in line
with EPA Construction General Permit ,(Copy is available for inspection with the
Engineer ).The EPA’s Construction General Permit outlines requirements of NPDES (
National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System). The Affected Area need to be
graveled at perimeter and sloped inward. The entry of Vehicles need to be graveled to
prevent soil carry over.
B. Method Statement: Submit prior to starting work, description of methods sequence of

excavating, and the type of equipment proposed.
C. Technical Data:
1. Catalogues of heavy equipment used for excavation and earth removal.
D. Shop Drawings
1. Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer
2. Shop drawings including plan of complete site showing area and extent of
excavation, and capping of any existing underground utilities to remain.
a. Shop drawings shall show profiles, formation levels, pits, transitions etc.
E. Samples: For the following:

1. 14-kg samples sealed in airtight containers, of each proposed soil material from
on-site or borrow sources.
2. Water for soil compaction (1.5 litres).
F. Erosion control plan.
G. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated:
1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site and borrow soil material
proposed for fill and backfill.
2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698, ASTM D 1557 for each
on-site and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill.
3. Report of actual unconfined compressive strength and/or results of bearing tests
of each stratum testing.
4. Particle size analysis shall be in accordance with ASTM D422-63.
5. Sieve analysis shall be in accordance with ASTM C136 and ASTM D422 on
sieves conforming to ASTM E11.
6. Liquid Limit and Plasticity Index: One liquid limit and plasticity index shall be
performed for each sieve analysis. Liquid limit and plasticity index shall be in
accordance with ASTM D4318.
H. Pre-excavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining

construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be
misconstrued as damage caused by earthwork operations. Submit before earthwork
begins.
I. Excavation Supervisor: Allow for employing full time on site, an experienced and
qualified excavation supervisor. Submit with the Tender, full resume details of the
KEO/19-3262-0000 31 2000/3 Earthworks
Supervisor. No excavation shall start until the Engineer has approved the nominated
Supervisor.
A. Executer Qualifications: Executer with minimum 10 years proven experience in similar

job and extend required for this Project.
B. Testing and Inspection: Testing and inspection shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor and shall be performed at no additional cost to the Employer.
1. Testing Facilities: Test shall be performed by an approved commercial testing
laboratory. No work requiring testing will be permitted until the facilities have
been inspected and approved by the Engineer.
2. Notice Period: Provide agreed notice to enable the Engineer to be present, if so
desired, at whatever inspections or tests are performed.
a. Notice Period: No Less Than
b. Inspection on Site 1 Day.
c. Tests performed on Site 1 Day.
d. Material inspections or tests to be witnessed offsite 5 Days.
3. Accept responsibility for providing, controlling, calibrating and maintaining
inspection, measuring and test equipment suitable to demonstrate that the Works
comply with the specified requirement. Make this or similar equipment available
to the engineer whenever required for examination of the Works.
C. Records of weather conditions:

1. Keep a daily record of the maximum, minimum and average outside
temperatures.
2. Humidity of wind.
A. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities. Coordinate
with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active.
1. The location of known services shall be confirmed by trial pits prior to excavation
works.
2. Obtain the authorities’ existing services NOC to proceed with the earth works and
obtain all necessary information and drawings to identify the existing services.
B. Acquaintance With Existing Conditions

1. Through study of all contract documents, study of geotechnical report, previously
prepared for this project, and by careful examination of the site, become
informed as to the nature and location of the work, the nature of subsurface soil
conditions, the location of the groundwater table and groundwater conditions, the
character, quality and quantity of the materials to be encountered in excavations,
the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the
prosecution of the work, the general and local conditions, and all other matters
which can in any way affect the work.
2. Refer to Geotechnical Investigation Report, Appendix A
C. Subsurface Exploration Data

1. The data on indicated subsurface conditions are not intended as representations
or warranties of the accuracy or continuity between soil borings. It is expressly
understood that the Employer will not be responsible for interpretations or
KEO/19-3262-0000 31 2000/4 Earthworks
conclusions drawn therefrom by the Contractor. The data are made available for
the convenience of the Contractor.
2. Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may be made to
ascertain site conditions at no cost to the Employer.
D. Nature of Excavation:
1. Include for excavating in any type of ground encountered.
2. Include for breaking up rock materials, materials so firmly cemented as to
possess the characteristics of rock, concrete or masonry structures, or any other
hard or compacted materials encountered in excavations, all at the Contractor's
cost.
E. Protection
1. Barricade open excavations made as part of earthwork operations and post with
warning lights. Operate warning lights as recommended by the Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SOIL MATERIALS
A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not
available from excavations.
1. To be free from plastic fines and weakly cemented lumps of sand.
2. To be homogeneous and at the optimum moisture content for compaction
purposes when placed.
3. Sand layers which present liquefaction potential below structural filling must be
compacted so that they reach a minimum cone resistance of 5 MPa.
4. Any slopes required will be as shown on drawings.
5. Water: Water used for compacting fill shall be clean and free from oil, grease,
organic matter, suspended fine sediment and other deleterious substances.
B. Satisfactory Soil Materials:

1. Fill, Embankment and Subgrade within the Building Lines of Structures: Soil
Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM according to ASTM D2487
or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches (75
mm) in any dimension, debris, waste, vegetation and other deleterious matter.
2. In all other areas, satisfactory soil materials shall comply with ASTM D 2487 soil
classification groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP and SM and also shall include GC
and SC.
a. The soil shall contain less than 30% of the fines passing the 75
micrometer sieve and not more than 40% passing the 4.75 mm sieve.
b. The plasticity index of the fines faction shall be less than 12%.
C. Unsatisfactory Soil Materials: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups ML. MH, CL, CH,
OL, OH, and PT. Satisfactory subgrade soil which are rendered unsuitable by the
Contractor due to inadequate site and/or excavation drainage or due to negligence by
working (remolding) or compacting otherwise satisfactory in place subgrade soils under
adverse moisture conditions, as determined by the Geotechnical Engineer, and shall be
removed and replaced with satisfactory fill material or shall be worked or altered until
rendered suitable as determined by the Geotechnical Engineer at no additional cost to
the Employer.
KEO/19-3262-0000 31 2000/5 Earthworks

D. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel,
crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D2940/D2940M; with at least 90
percent passing a 37.5-mm sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a 0.075-mm
sieve.
E. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel,

crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D2940/D2940M; with at least 95
percent passing a 37.5-mm sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a 0.075-mm
sieve.
F. Engineered Fill (Structural Fill): Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or

crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D2940/D2940M;
with at least 90 percent passing a 37.5-mm sieve and not more than 12 percent
passing a 0.075-mm sieve.
1. Materials for structural fill shall consist of granular, well graded soils having a
maximum particle size of 75 mm and contain less than 12% by weight of material
passing the 75 micrometer sieve.
2. Where structural fill is used as a sub base material for slabs on grade without
lean mix blinding the surface shall be blinded with sand or crushed fine material
to form a smooth level surface with a tolerance of ± 20 mm.
3. The plasticity index of the fines fraction shall be less than 6%.
4. This material shall be defined as either soil classification GW or SW in
accordance with ASTM D2487, Method of Classification.
5. Structural fill shall be imported from local source and must have low sulfate and
chloride concentration not exceeding 1200 mg/L for sulfate and 500 mg/L for
chloride.
G. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel,

crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D2940/D2940M; except with 100
percent passing a 25-mm sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a 0.075-mm
sieve.
H. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed

gravel; ASTM D448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a
37.5-mm sieve and zero to 5 percent passing a 2.36-mm sieve.
I. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone
and natural sand; ASTM D448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent
passing a 25-mm sieve and zero to 5 percent passing a 4.75-mm sieve.
J. Sand: ASTM C33/C33M; fine aggregate.
K. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense
state.
2.01 EQUIPMENT
A. General
1. The equipment utilized in carrying out earthwork and related work shall be in
good working conditions, and the Contractor shall maintain them in such
condition for the duration of the Contract.
2. The Contractor shall supply adequate equipment as deemed necessary for the
proper execution of the Work.
KEO/19-3262-0000 31 2000/6 Earthworks

3. The Engineer shall have any piece of equipment removal that is not in good
working order. Removal shall be at the cost of the Contractor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine related work and surfaces before starting the work of this Section. Report in
writing, conditions, which will prevent the proper provision of this work. Beginning the
work of this Section without reporting unsuitable conditions shall constitute acceptance
of conditions by the Contractor. Any required removal, repair, or replacement of the
work caused by unsuitable conditions should be done at no additional cost to the
Employer.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage
caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards
created by earthwork operations.
B. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and

discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and
walkways.
C. Make provision for all temporary work, scaffolding, staging, timbering, strutting and other
works as may be necessary and required for the proper, safe and efficient performance
and construction of the works intended and all works incidental thereto in an expeditious
manner. Be responsible for any damage done to roads, mains, cables, including safety
to persons and property, by the execution of the work.
D. The cost of furnishing, placing and removing the temporary works shall be included in
the Tender for the work.
E. Examine related work and surfaces before starting the work of this Section. Report in
writing, conditions, which will prevent the proper provision of this work. Beginning the
work of this Section without reporting unsuitable conditions shall constitute acceptance
of conditions by the Contractor. Any required removal, repair, or replacement of the
work caused by unsuitable conditions should be done at no additional cost to the
Employer.
F. Be acquainted with all site conditions. Should utilities not shown on Drawings be found
during excavation, promptly submit Contractor’s proposed action. Failure to do so will
result in liability for any and all damage thereto arising from operations subsequent to
discovery of such utilities not shown on Drawings.
3.03 DEWATERING
A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on
prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.
B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water
accumulation.
KEO/19-3262-0000 31 2000/7 Earthworks
1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to
accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary
drainage ditches.
2. Dewatering system is specified in Section 31 2319.
3.04 EXCAVATION, GENERAL
A. Generally:
1. Excavate to the depths and profiles shown on the Drawings or as directed.
2. Allow sufficient working space where necessary for the erection of earthwork
support system.
3. Report any unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected work in
area, until notified to resume work.
4. Any soft material, or non compactable material found at the bottom of excavated
areas shall be removed and replaced with acceptable bedding material, placed in
lifts not exceeding 150mm and compacted as further described.
5. Unless otherwise described in the Contract, all topsoil to a minimum depth of
200mm shall be removed from the areas of cut and fill and, unless surplus to
requirements, stockpiled for re-use for the soiling of slopes of cuttings and
embankments, berms, verges, central reserves and for the provision of beds for
the cultivation of trees and shrubs.
6. The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for stockpiling of topsoil and/or
suitable material and for the provision of sites for the purpose. The permission of
the Engineer is necessary for proposed stockpiles within the Site Area.
7. The works are to be set out from the primary datum level(s) and setting out
point(s) indicated on the drawings or from information provided by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall submit his proposals for setting out and controlling the
alignment of the works, to the Engineer and obtain his approval prior to the start
of construction. The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer details of the level
and location of all temporary benchmarks and reference points that he
establishes.
B. Excavated Formations:
1. In made up ground excavate foundations down to a natural bearing formation of
undisturbed subsoil, unless otherwise instructed.
2. Obtain instructions if a natural bearing formation of undisturbed subsoil:
a. Is obtained at a lesser depth than that shown on the Soils Report.
b. Is not obtained at the depth shown on the Soils Report.
3. If, after inspection, formation becomes unsuitable for any reason, excavate
further and backfill with approved material all at the Contractor's expense.
C. Treatment of formations Generally:

1. Trim excavations to required profiles and levels.
2. Remove all loose material.
3.05 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES
A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance. Extend

excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete
formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.
1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation.
Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim
bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.
KEO/19-3262-0000 31 2000/8 Earthworks
2. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility
Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance.
Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended for bearing surface.
B. Permissible deviations from formation levels:

1. Beneath mass concrete foundations: 0 and -25mm
2. For slopes to embankments or cuttings the horizontal deviation between the top
and bottom of the slope will be within +5% and -5% of the true horizontal
component of the slope shown on or calculated from the drawings.
3. Beneath ground bearing slabs and reinforced concrete foundations: 0 and -
15mm
4. Embankments and cuttings: -50mm
5. Ground abutting external walls: ±15mm, but such as to ensure that finished level
is not less than 150mm below dpc.
3.06 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS
A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections,
elevations, and subgrades.
3.07 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES
A. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of
pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 300 mm higher
than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Clearance: 300 mm each side of pipe or conduit or as indicated.
B. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and
support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells,
joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove
projecting stones and sharp objects along trench subgrade.
1. For pipes and conduit less than 150 mm in nominal diameter and flat-bottomed,
multiple-duct conduit units, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and
conduit on an undisturbed subgrade.
2. For pipes and conduit 150 mm or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of
trench to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe circumference. Fill depressions with
tamped sand backfill.
3. Excavate trenches 150 mm deeper than elevation required in rock or other
unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course.
C. All manholes and other structures shall be founded on undisturbed ground or thoroughly
compacted ground. Excavation shall be carried out to the grade necessary.
D. Hand excavation must be applied along the parts where existing cables, water, gas and
oil mains, sewers etc. cross the trench or in the main roads where traffic is likely to be
unreasonably disturbed by the use of machines. In other places hand or machine
excavation may be used. Excavation by machine must not normally be executed
deeper than 15cm above the bottom of the trench. Be held responsible for making good
all damage to road surfaces and private lands caused by the other use of mechanical
excavators.
E. Excavate for utility connections by machine or micro-tunneling as required and

instructed by the local authorities.
KEO/19-3262-0000 31 2000/9 Earthworks
F. If, due to negligence or error, any excavations are taken down to a level lower than is
shown on the Drawings, fill in the void so formed to the proper level with approved
material in layers not exceeding 15 cm thick which shall be thoroughly compacted by
tamping. The finished subgrade shall be prepared accurately by means of hand tools.
If concrete is necessary for this filling, then provide this at no additional cost.
3.08 BRACED AND SHEETED EXCAVATION
A. Open-cut excavation should be braced and sheeted adequate to the strength design to
protect persons, property, traffic on the work or to prevent caving and harmful sinking.
Be responsible for adequacy of any required sheeting and bracing. Be responsible for
any accidents to people, any damage done to roads, mains, cables, pipes, sewers, etc.
by the execution of the work. When close sheeting is required, it shall be so driven as to
prevent adjacent soil from entering the excavation either below or through such
sheeting. Sheeting and bracing shall be provided as a standard for excavations 1.50m
and above depth. Where sheeting and bracing are used, trench widths shall be
increased accordingly. The strength design of the system of supports should be based
on the principles of soil mechanics as they apply to the materials encountered. Sheeting
and bracing must always comply with approved safety requirements.
B. The Engineer’s Representative reserves the right to order the sheeting to be driven to
the full depth of the excavation or to such additional depths as may be required for the
protection of the work.
C. Bracing must be removed when the backfilling has reached the respective levels of such
bracing. Sheeting must be removed after the backfilling has been completed or has
been brought up to such an elevation as to permit its safe removal.
3.09 APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE
A. Report when excavations have reached required subgrade.
B. Proof roll subgrade with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and
areas of excess yielding. Do not proof roll wet or saturated subgrades.
1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof-rolling in
direction perpendicular to first direction.
C. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by rain, accumulated water, or construction activities,

as directed.
3.10 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION
A. Backfill any excavations taken wider or deeper than required with mass concrete 3Mpa,
28-day cylinder compressive strength.
3.11 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and satisfactory excavated soil materials. Stockpile soil
materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface
water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations.
KEO/19-3262-0000 31 2000/10 Earthworks

3.12 BACKFILL
A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the
following:
1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing and
waterproofing.
2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for record documents.
3. Inspecting and testing underground utilities.
4. Removing concrete formwork.
5. Removing trash and debris.
6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting.
7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported
walls.
B. Place backfill in layers not exceeding 200mm.
3.13 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL
A. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape
bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and
for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.
B. Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 450 mm of bottom of footings with
satisfactory soil compacted in layers not exceeding 200mm; fill with concrete to
elevation of bottom of footings.
C. The trench for pipes to a depth of 30cm above the top of the pipe shall be backfilled by
hand or by approved mechanical methods. Use special care in placing this portion of
the backfill so as to avoid injuring or moving the pipe. The backfill material shall be
placed in 15cm layers and compacted by tamping.
D. Backfill under permanent pavement shall be placed in 15cm layers and compacted by
tamping. Power tampers of an effective approved type shall be used.
E. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.
F. Fill voids with approved backfill materials while shoring and bracing, and as sheeting is
removed.
G. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil material to final subgrade elevation.
H. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 300 mm below finished grade, except 150
mm below subgrade under pavements and slabs or as directed.
3.14 SOIL FILL
A. Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials,

obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface before placing fills.
B. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal
so fill material will bond with existing material.
C. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:

1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material.
KEO/19-3262-0000 31 2000/11 Earthworks
2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material.
3. Under building slabs, use engineered fill.
4. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.
3.15 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL
A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before
compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.
1. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy.
2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air-dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material
that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to
specified dry unit weight.
3.16 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS
A. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 200 mm in loose depth for
material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 100 mm in
loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.
B. Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations,
and uniformly along the full length of each structure.
C. Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight
according to ASTM D 1557:
1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and re-compact
top 300 mm of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95
percent.
2. Under planting areas, scarify and recompact top 150 mm below subgrade and
compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 90percent.
3. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at
90 percent.
3.17 GRADING
A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface
changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and
elevations indicated.
1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.
2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required
surface tolerances.
B. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 13 mm when tested

with a 3-m straightedge.
C. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding.
Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:
1. Planting areas or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 25 mm.
2. Pavements: Plus or minus 13 mm.
D. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 13 mm when tested

with a 3-m straightedge.
KEO/19-3262-0000 31 2000/12 Earthworks

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing

agency to perform field quality-control testing.
B. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work
C. Testing of fill Materials:

1. Comply with ASTM D1556 and ASTM D1557 as applicable, for executing tests.
2. ASTM D 2937 shall be used only for soft, fine-grained, cohesive soils.
3. Sieve analyses shall be performed in accordance with ASTM C 117, C 127, C
128, C 136, and D 422; sieves shall conform to ASTM E 11; and liquid limit and
plasticity index determinations shall be performed in accordance with ASTM D
4318.
4. Carry out density tests on representative samples prior to placing.
5. Carry out gradation of materials prior to placing as the work proceeds.
6. Carry out site density tests of materials as the work proceeds and as follows:
a. Engineered fill (Structural fill):
1) One test for each 500 cu.m placed.
2) One test whenever there is a change of gradation or placement
conditions.
b. General fill:
1) One test for each 3000 cu.m placed.
2) One test whenever there is a change of gradation or placement
conditions.
3) Execute site density tests for compaction at a minimum depth of
100mm below compacted surface.
4) Execute a full compaction test or a one-point compaction test in
conjunction with each site density determination.
5) Execute a gradation test with each site density test and whenever
there is an apparent change in material being placed.
6) Execute the following site density tests and laboratory moisture
density tests to evaluate compaction achieved:
a) One test for every 200-400 cu.m of back-fill in trenches or
surrounding structures.
b) One test for every full shift of compaction operations on
mass earthwork.
D. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree
of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to
depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.
3.19 PROTECTION
A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep
free of trash and debris.
B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially

completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due
to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.
1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed; reshape and
recompact.
KEO/19-3262-0000 31 2000/13 Earthworks

C. Where settling occurs before Defects Liability Period elapses, remove finished
surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match
adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent
possible.
3.20 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory
soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Employer’s property.
END OF SECTION
KEO/19-3262-0000 31 2000/14 Earthworks

SECTION 31 2319
DEWATERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
responsible for all permits according to the local regulations and shall bear all costs.
A. Work shall include, but not necessarily be limited to the following: Designing. furnishing,
installing, maintaining, operating, monitoring and removal of temporary dewatering
systems as required to lower and control water levels and hydrostatic pressures;
disposing of pumped water; constructing, maintaining, observing and removing of
equipment and instrumentation for control of the system, all to the approval of the
Engineer.
B. Dewatering includes lowering the water table and intercepting seepage which would
otherwise emerge from the slopes or bottom of the excavation; increasing the stability of
excavated slopes; preventing loss of material from beneath the slopes or bottom of the
excavation; improving the excavating and hauling characteristics of on soil; preventing
rupture or heaving of the bottom of an excavation; and disposing of pumped water.
C. Approval from Local EPA for discharge of any polluted water.
D. Preventing of surface water from entering the site from buildings, streets or the ground
surface and diverting the surface water away from the site.
E. The Contractor shall obtain all approvals, permits and pay all relevant fees (for 24hrs
day work schedule) associated with Dewatering.
F. Engage a geotechnical specialist, registered in Kuwait and approved by the Engineer,

who shall, based on his findings recommend the appropriate dewatering system and
procedures to eliminate any effect on the stability and safety of the adjacent structures
and pavements.
G. Removal of dewatering system when no longer required.
H. Related Sections: Related work to be coordinated and used in conjunction with this
1.02 DESIGN
A. The Contractor is responsible for the adequacy of the dewatering system. Design
dewatering systems to meet the following performance requirements.
KEO/19-3262-0000 31 2319/1 Dewatering

1. Effectively reduce the hydrostatic pressure and lower the groundwater levels
600mm below the bottom of blinding levels.
2. Develop a substantially dry and stable sub grade for the protection of subsequent
operations;
3. Does not result in damage to adjacent buildings, structures, utilities and other
work, included in this contract.
B. Methods may include sump pumping, single or multiple stage well point or jet eductor
well point systems, deep wells, or combinations thereof.
C. Locate dewatering facilities where they will not interfere with utilities and construction
work to be done by others.
D. Modify dewatering procedures, which cause, or threaten to cause, damage to new or

existing facilities, so as to prevent further damage. Modifications made at no additional
expense to the Employer.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Design of dewatering systems to be done by a Contractor who has demonstrated ability,

experience and specialized in the design, installation and operation of dewatering
systems:
1. Dewatering to be by an organization with long-term experience and proven ability
in dewatering of the type necessary for the work. Three technical supervisory
personnel of the dewatering organization shall have been actively involved in
dewatering work on five successful projects.
2. Provide names, current addresses and telephone numbers of persons who were
responsible for those five construction projects during the time dewatering work
was being done.
3. All dewatering systems to be designed under the supervision of a registered Civil
Engineer in the Country where the project is being executed and approved by the
Engineer.
B. Before installation of the dewatering systems, submit information and shop drawings to
the Engineer showing the following:
1. The proposed type of dewatering systems;
2. Arrangements, locations and depths of system components.
3. Methods of disposal of pumped water including approval of authorities.
4. During dewatering, record every 24 hours readings of groundwater observation.
C. Submit Method Statement for Engineer’s approval and shall include:

1. Layout of dewatering points and pumps.
2. Number of stand-by pumps.
3. Method of monitoring ground water levels
4. Method of disposal of ground water.
D. Field Test Report: Before starting excavation, submit test results and computation
demonstrating that dewatering system is capable of meeting performance requirements.
E. The Dewatering price shall include the following:

1. Full capacity standby generator to be provided at the site connected by control
panel, the same to be activated automatically in-case of any power failure to the
main power supply.
2. Full package up standby pumps to be provided at the site.
KEO/19-3262-0000 31 2319/2 Dewatering
3. All the pumps to be connected to control panel to indicate the pump condition
and to give the necessary alarm in case of any failure in the pump.
4. Full time skilled supervisor to be provided at the site for 24 hours/ day and 7
days/ week.
5. Proper monitoring system to be provided to monitor the U.G water table level.
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with water disposal requirements of authorities

1.05 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Surface Drainage: Intercept and divert precipitation, and surface water, away from
excavation through the use of dikes, ditches, pipes, sumps or other means.
B. Drainage of Excavated Areas: Provide and maintain ditches of adequate size to collect
surface and seepage water, which may enter the excavations. Divert the water into
sumps and drain or pump into a temporary conduit for discharge.
C. Abide by all regulations& requirements by local authorities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
(NOT APPLICABLE)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions affecting performance of Work under this Section.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 DEWATERING
A. Keep the Engineer advised of any changes made to accommodate field conditions and,
on completion of the dewatering system installation, revise and resubmit information
drawings, as necessary to show the installed configuration.
B. Organize dewatering operations to lower the groundwater level in excavations as

required for execution of the work, and to provide a stable, dry sub grade for the
execution of subsequent operations. Take all precautions to prevent disturbance of
foundation soils. Locate groundwater to facilitate collection of water samples.
C. Maintain the water level at such lower elevations that no danger to structures can occur
because of buildup of excessive hydrostatic pressure and maintain the water level a
minimum of 600mm below the bottom of blinding levels.
D. Monitor daily the depth of groundwater lowering by using observation wells and/or
piezometers.
1. Observation Wells:
KEO/19-3262-0000 31 2319/3 Dewatering
a. Provide, take measurements and maintain adequate number of observation
wells (piezometers) and such additional observation wells as may be
required by the Engineer.
b. Observe and record daily the elevation of the groundwater and peizometric
water levels in observation wells. Provide each observation wells
(piezometers) with high Level Indication Instrumentation having audio-
visual (Light and Sound) alarm buzzer. Alarm buzzer shall be operated
automatically when ground water level exceeds the specified controlled
water level.
c. Repair or replace observation wells that become inactive, damaged, or
destroyed within 24 hours. If required, suspend construction activities
areas where observation wells are not functioning properly until reliable
observations can be made. Add or remove water from observation well
risers to demonstrate that the observation wells are functioning properly.
d. Remove observation wells only when directed by the Engineer.
E. Survey nearby structures to ensure that detrimental settlements are not occurring at
these structures due to dewatering operations.
F. Provide, maintain and work such engines, pumps, pipe work, chutes and other things
necessary to keep sub-soil or accumulated water at a level below the bottom of the
permanent works for such periods as required for the Project and as directed. After
raising the water herein referred to, at once convey it away in such a manner as not to
cause any nuisance or injury.
G. Pumping must be done in such a way that fine-grained material is not washed out and
carried away. If necessary, a drainage filter should be arranged at the pumping shaft.
H. Provide standby equipment, installed and available, for immediate operation as may be
required, to adequately maintain the dewatering on a continuous basis in the event that
part of the system becomes inadequate or fails. In the event dewatering requirements
are not satisfied due to inadequacy or failure of the dewatering system, perform such
work as may be required to restore damaged structure and foundation soils at no
additional expense to the Employer.
I. Ensure that all pipes and structures when laid or constructed are secured against
floating by backfilling or by some other approved means. The site staff shall be alerted
at all times to take action necessary in the event of flooding.
J. Notify the Engineer in the event of a disturbance to the foundation soils caused by an
interrupted or inadequate dewatering system. Take all corrective measures necessary
at no additional expense.
K. Cap all dewatering wells upon completion of dewatering.
L. Dispose of water removed from excavation in a manner to avoid endangering public

health, property and portions of work under construction or completed. Dispose water in
a manner to avoid inconvenience to others engaged in the site. Provide sumps,
sedimentation tanks, and other flow control devices as required by governing
authorities.
M. Remove dewatering system only when directed by the Engineer and should meet the
following criteria;
1. Weight of structure exceeds the hydrostatic uplift due to water pressure by 25%.
a. The Contractor shall submit calculations to satisfy the above requirement.
KEO/19-3262-0000 31 2319/4 Dewatering
3.03 RECORDS
A. Observe and record daily the elevation of the groundwater during the period that the
dewatering system is in operation. Submit details on weekly basis.
END OF SECTION
KEO/19-3262-0000 31 2319/5 Dewatering

SECTION 31 3116
TERMITE CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and perform all operations and services
necessary in the treatment for termite control of backfill soil retaining walls; foundation
and grade slabs above water table.
B. Related Section: Related work to be coordinated and used in conjunction with this
1. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Treatments and application instructions.
B. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of termite control products certifying that

treatments furnished comply with requirements.
C. Soil Treatment Application Report: After application of termiticide is completed, submit

report, including the following as applicable:
1. Date and time of application.
2. Moisture content of soil before application.
3. Brand name and manufacturer of termiticide.
4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used.
5. Dilutions, methods, volumes, and rates of application used.
6. Areas of application.
7. Water source for application.
A. Applicator Qualifications: Applicator with minimum 5 years experience in termite control

treatment similar to that indicated for this Project and whose work has a record of
successful in-service performance.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides to comply with local

regulations.
A. Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water

saturated. Comply with requirements of local authorities.
KEO/19-3262-0000 31 3116/1 Termite Control
B. Restrictions: Do not apply soil treatment solution until excavating, filling and grading
operations are complete, except as otherwise as otherwise required in construction.
C. To ensure operation, do not apply soil treatment to excessively wet soils or during
inclement weather. Comply with handling and application instructions of the soil toxicant
manufacturer.
1.05 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, and grading and concreting
operations. Treat soil under footings, grade beams, and ground-supported slabs, before
construction.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Written warranty, signed by applicator and Contractor certifying that
termite control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment, will prevent
infestation of subterranean termites.
B. If subterranean termite activity is discovered during warranty period, Contractor will re-
treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation.
C. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.07 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Continuing Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months continuing

service including monitoring, inspection, and re-treatment for occurrences of termite
activity. Provide a standard continuing service agreement. State services, obligations,
conditions, and terms for agreement period; and terms for future renewal options.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SOIL TREATMENT
A. Termiticide: Provide termiticide complying with requirements of local authorities, in a

soluble or emulsible, concentrated formulation that dilutes with water or foaming agent,
and formulated to prevent termite infestation. Use only soil treatment solutions that are
not harmful to plants. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and
rate for the maximum termiticide concentration allowed for specific use.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for moisture content of the soil, interfaces with earthwork, slab and
foundation work, and other conditions affecting performance of termite control. Proceed
with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of local authorities and with
manufacturer's written instructions for preparing substrate. Remove all extraneous
sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials such as wood debris, tree stumps
and roots, stakes, formwork, and construction waste wood from soil and around
foundations.
B. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that
could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level
soil to be treated, except previously compacted areas under slabs and footings.
Termiticides may be applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended
by termiticide manufacturer.
C. Fit filling hose connected to water source at the site with a backflow preventer.
3.03 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT
A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of local authorities and with
manufacturer's written instructions for preparing substrate. Remove all extraneous
sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials
B. Post signs in areas of application to warn workers that soil termiticide treatment has
been applied. Remove signs after areas are covered by other construction.
C. Application: Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the
maximum specified concentration of termiticide, according to manufacturer’s
recommendation for the backfill soil material (from excavation or borrowed soil).
D. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading,

or other construction activities following application.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 31 5000
EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
responsible for all permits according to the local regulations and shall bear all costs
A. The Drawings show an indicative layout for works associated with excavation support
and protection of basement and foundations.
B. Design, furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment and perform all services and
operations necessary for the complete supply and installation of the following:
1. The excavation support and protection system shall be designed to allow for the
final excavation levels shown on the Drawings
2. Excavation support and protection system necessary to protect existing
buildings, streets, walkways, utilities, and other improvements and excavation
against loss of ground or caving embankments.
3. Inspection and maintenance of excavation support and protection system.
4. Minimum 20KPa construction surcharge load shall be considered in design of
shoring.
5. Removal of shoring and bracing, as required.
C. Delegated Design Responsibility: Notwithstanding the drawings and other information

provided to the Contractor, the Contractor shall be fully responsible for the design,
detailing of the works described herein, including (without limitation) the comprehensive
engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, and shall provide a complete,
and secure installation, which shall meet the specified performance and design
requirements indicated and which shall be fit for their intended purpose. The Contractor
indemnifies the Employer and Design Consultant from any and all claims, costs and
expenses arising from any loss or damage in connection with any error in or failure of
the Contractor’s designed portion of the Works.
D. Work of this Section is considered as Specialist Work.
E. Related Sections: Related work to be coordinated and used in conjunction with this
2. Section 31 1000 - Site Cleaning
4. Section 31 2319 - Dewatering.
KEO/19-3262-0000 31 5000/1 Excavation Support And Protection

A. Design, furnish, install, monitor and maintain excavation support and protection system
capable of supporting excavation sidewalls and of resisting soil and hydrostatic pressure
and superimposed and construction loads.
1. Provide professional engineering services needed to assume engineering
responsibility, including preparation of Shop Drawings and a comprehensive
engineering analysis by a qualified registered engineer.
2. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or other
means.
3. Install excavation support and protection systems without damaging existing
buildings, pavements, and other improvements adjacent to excavation.
B. Ground Anchors
1. Design and execution of ground anchorages shall comply with BS 8081 and BS
EN 1537.
2. Anchors shall be stressed anchors in soil or rock.
3. Temporary anchors shall be designed such that the minimum service life is not
less than two years.
4. The following minimum safety factors shall apply: Tendon = 1.6; Ground/grout
interface = 2.5; Proof load factor = 1.25.
5. The anchors shall be held in with wedges, or threaded bar with bearing plate and
bolt, no welding shall be allowed for this purpose.
6. Tension couplers shall be used for anchors longer than 12m. No welding of
anchor bars is permitted.
C. Ground Anchor - On-Site Tests

1. On-Site Suitability Tests shall be carried out in accordance with BS 8081and BS
EN 1537 on ground anchors constructed under identical conditions as the
working ground anchors shown on the shop drawings and loaded in the same
way to the same level. All ground anchors must be pre-stressed to 120 % and
locked of at 75% of design force. Ground anchors used for On-Site Suitability
Tests may be used in the works as provided for in BS 8081 and subject to the
approval of the Engineer. Unless directed otherwise by the Engineer the first
three anchorages of each category (in terms of geometry, ground type and load
capacity) shall be tested to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The results shall be
deemed to be satisfactory provided that they comply with the assessment criteria
for On-Site Suitability Tests given in BS 8081and BS EN 1537 in terms of proof
load-time data. Failure to comply with the assessment criteria shall require the
Contractor to revise his ground anchor proposals and/or undertake further testing
to the satisfaction of the Engineer until satisfactory results can be achieved. On-
Site Suitability Tests for each category of ground anchor shall be completed to
the satisfaction of the Engineer before any working anchors in each category are
installed.
2. The Contractor shall keep full records of all Proving and On-Site Suitability Tests
in accordance with this Specification. Copies of these records shall be provided
to the Engineer within 24 hours of completion of each test.
1.03 ENGINEERING AND DESIGN
A. Engineer the excavation support and protection system to prevent adjacent surfaces
such as roads, streets, sidewalks and landscaping from settling below their original, as
found levels and conditions.
B. Engineer excavation support and protection system to prevent damages to existing in

ground services such as water lines, sanitary sewer lines, storm sewer lines, hydro lines
and telephone lines and to ensure services are not disrupted without prior approval of
the service companies under whose jurisdiction those services come.
C. Engineer the excavation support and protection system to prevent the sides of the
excavation for the building, and the mechanical and electrical services to the building,
from caving in and from imposing loads on foundation walls and footings at least until 7
days after the Ground Floor slab bas been poured and all below grade waterproofing is
completed.
D. Engineer excavation support and protection system and tie-back systems to permit
unobstructed installation of membrane and wall reinforcement. Locate tie-backs away
from slab/foundation wall junction to ensure no interference with construction of the
foundation wall and waterproofing. Anchor heads must be recessed into the excavation
support and protection system.
E. Engineer excavation support and protection system to prevent any damage to existing
adjacent buildings, structures and Utilities.
F. Provide the Engineer with sufficient advance notice of engineering data information and
shop drawings submissions, shop fabrications, field installation and other phases of the
work of this Section to permit review and inspections of the Works for compliance with
the Contract Documents.
G. The Contractor shall be responsible for making prompt and continuous evaluations of
the test data and written weekly reports of the systems performance and whenever
necessary, taking immediate steps to correct any deficiencies in the capacities of
individual members or providing other corrective measures which may be required to
prevent damage or excessive movement.
H. For the stability and safety of the existing structures, engage a geotechnical specialist
registered in Kuwait, who shall, based on his findings submit a geotechnical summary
report, elaborating on the adequacy of the excavation supporting system, methods and
procedures of construction or any other precautions deemed to be necessary to secure
the stability and safety of the adjoining structures and pavement throughout the
construction stages.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
A. Engineering and Design Submissions – Upon issuance of Notice to Proceed:

Submit proposal drawings and structural calculations which clearly and fully detail the
systems and methods proposed by the Tenderer to accomplish the requirements of this
Section as well as the expected lateral displacement at the top of the excavation support
and protection system.
1. The proposal drawings and calculations shall bear the professional seal and
signature of the registered engineer described in this Section. The Engineer will
review the proposal for the Code Compliance.
2. The proposal shall be accompanied by the resumes and references of the
Tenderer, his foremen and his engineers.
B. The Contractor is to supply a method statement for the execution of the work endorsed by
a qualified Geotechnical Engineer.
C. Shop Drawings and Structural Calculations:

1. Shop drawings and structural calculations shall bear the official seal and
signature of the Contractor’s registered engineer described in this Section of the
Specifications.
2. Show engineering calculations, fabrication, installation, anchorage, tie-backs if
any, layout, member sizes, connection details, into rock anchoring, types, grades
and strengths of materials, standards for compliance of materials, excavations,
dewatering, any required removal or dismantling after use to comply with
authorities having jurisdiction, and relationships and/or connections to work of
other Sections of the Specifications. These drawings shall be sufficiently
complete for constructions purposes and for the Engineer’s checking of the
engineering and design and interface with other building systems and
components.
D. Approvals: The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all necessary permits from
all regulatory authorities having jurisdiction prior to commencement of shoring system
installation.
E. Photographs or videos, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of adjoining

construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by
the absence of, the installation of, or the performance of excavation support and
protection systems.
A. Regulations: Comply with codes and ordinances of local governing authorities.
B. Engineering: Have work of this Section engineered by a fully qualified registered

engineer with ten years minimum experience and licensed to design and engineer
geotechnical structures and excavation support and protection system in the Country
where the project is being executed. This engineer may be required to demonstrate
proven experience with the design and engineering of this type of work and shall submit
professional qualifications to the Engineer for approval.
C. The Contractor must be familiar with below grade soil and water conditions in the project
area and have proven experience with the type of work specified in this Section. The
Contractor’s site foreman must be familiar with below grade soil and water conditions in
the project area and have proven experience with direction workers in the type of work
specified in this Section.
D. Independent Testing Service: Employ an independent Testing company to provide

materials testing services during excavation support and protection system installation.
Payment for testing included under this Section shall be by the Contractor.
1.06 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Before starting work, verify governing dimensions and elevations. Verify condition of
adjoining properties. Take photographs to record any existing settlement or cracking of
structures, pavements, and other improvements. Prepare a list of such damages,
verified by dated photographs, and signed by Contractor and others conducting
investigation.
B. Survey adjacent structures and improvements, employing qualified Registered

Surveyor, establishing exact elevations, fixed points shall be established entirely along
the adjacent building perimeters to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and
record existing elevations.
1. During installation of excavation support and protection systems, regularly
resurvey benchmarks, maintaining an accurate log of surveyed elevations and
positions for comparison with original elevations and positions. Promptly notify if
changes in elevations or positions occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is
evident in adjacent construction.
2. Ensure that there is a procedure set for daily readings and monitoring of these
readings.
1.07 EXISTING UTILITIES
A. Protect and maintain existing active sewer, water, gas, electricity and other utility
services and structures outside the property line but within the working area.
B. Co-ordinate with all utilities authorities and pay all related fees for relocating the required
utilities, including all design and installations fees.
C. Notify municipal agencies and service utility companies and comply with requirements of
governing authorities and agencies for protection, relocation, removal, and
discontinuance of services.
1.08 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Work shall comply with all rules, regulations, laws and ordinances of all authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Obtain all necessary permits. Obtain written permission from adjoining property owners if
proposed systems of ground anchors will project beyond the vertical projection of the
contract limit lines. Submit such permissions with shop drawings.
C. Co-ordinate the design and placement of ground anchors with existing utilities to the
satisfaction of the affected authorities having jurisdiction and obtain all necessary
permits.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Material General: As described in the Contractor’s proposal drawings and documents

subject to the Engineer’s approval. Materials shall resist deterioration due to soil and
water conditions and shall provide strengths required by the engineering without any
short-term deterioration to those strengths.
B. Submit samples as requested by the Engineer for material submittal approval.
C. Provide materials that are either new or in serviceable condition.
D. Structural Steel: ASTM ASTM A 36/A 36M, ASTM A 690/A 690M or ASTM A 992/A
992M.

E. Steel Sheet Piling: ASTM A 328/A 328M, ASTM A 572/A 572M, or ASTM A 690/A
690M; with continuous interlocks.
F. Wood Lagging: Lumber, mixed hardwood, nominal rough thickness of 50 mm.

minimum.
G. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 722; ASTM A 615.
H. Strands: ASTM A 416.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage
caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards that
could develop during excavation support and protection system operations.
1. Shore, support and protect utilities encountered and designated to be retained.
B. Install excavation support and protection systems to ensure minimum interference with
roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks or other adjacent facilities without
permission from the authorities. Provide alternate routes around closed or
obstructed traffic ways if required.
C. Locate excavation support and protection systems clear of permanent construction so

that forming and finishing of concrete surfaces is not impeded.
D. Monitor excavation support and protection systems daily during excavation progress
and for as long as excavation remains open. Promptly correct bulges, breakage, or
other evidence of movement to ensure that excavation support and protection systems
remain stable.
E. Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by installing excavation support

and protection systems.
3.02 INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. Engage an Inspection and Testing Agency for quality control of work of this Section.
The cost of inspection and testing services shall by paid for under the works of this
Section by the Contractor. The Engineer, on acceptance of the excavation support and
protection system proposal, will establish the terms of reference for the Inspection and
Testing firm.
B. The Independent Testing Agency will conduct tests on materials used in the
construction of the system, including concrete, reinforcing steel, and tie-back anchors,
and report on compliance with the Contractor’s approval proposal.
3.03 REMEDIAL WORK
A. The Contractor for the work of this Section shall be responsible for all costs and pay all
costs for remedial work as may be necessary to adjust excavation support and
protection system so that required lines and levels are obtained. These costs would
include such items as total replacement of portions of the system not installed correctly
or greatly misaligned etc. The Contractor shall be liable for any delays to the
construction schedule and related costs to the Owner incurred due to the need for
remedial work.
3.04 EXCAVATION SUPPORT & PROTECTION SYSTEM REMOVAL
A. The Excavation Support and Protection System shall be required to be maintained in

good condition until a minimum of 7 days after the Ground Floor slab has been poured
and all below grade waterproofing and backfilling is complete, or as instructed by the
Engineer.
B. Co-operate and co-ordinate his work with all below grade trades and ensure their work
is complete or being sufficiently complete to avoid interference with, or damage to, any
part thereof during removal of the system.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 32 1116.16
SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A. All sub-base and base courses, whether aggregate, bitumen, or sand asphalt, shall be
furnished and installed as indicated on the Drawings
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Aggregate sub-base and base courses shall consist of natural and/or crushed, screened
fine and coarse aggregates blended to the specified gradation. The aggregates for sub-
base and base courses shall be blended in a central mixing plant, as specified in the
Standard Specifications. Alternatively, the desired gradation for the aggregate sub-base
and base courses may be achieved by processing through gradation screens at the
crusher or quarry.
B. Use and/or mixing of the site excavated materials or borrow materials with the supplied
aggregate materials for sub-base and base courses is not acceptable for the
construction of the aggregate sub-base or base course layers.
2.02 GRADATION TOLERANCE
A. The final gradation of aggregate sub-base and base courses delivered to site, as
proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer shall be subject to the
following tolerances during construction:
1. Passing 25mm sieve and larger ± 6%
2. Passing sieves 4.75mm (No. 4) to 19mm (No. ¾”) ± 5%
3. Passing sieves 425μm (No. 40) to 2mm (No. 10) ± 4%
4. Passing 75μm (No. 200) ± 2%
2.03 RECYCLED CRUSHED AGGREGATE SUB-BASE
A. General
1. The works described below shall consist of furnishing and placing one (1) or
more layers of Recycled Crushed Aggregate (RGA), including additives if
required, on a prepared surface in accordance with the Specifications and in
conformity with the lines, grades, thicknesses and typical cross-sections shown
on the plans or established by the Engineer.
B. Materials
KEO/19-3262-0000 32 1116.16/1 Subbase And Base Courses
1. Materials shall conform to the requirements for the class of "Recycled Crushed
Aggregate Base Course" specified on the plans or directed by the Engineer. All
RGA sub-base material shall be free from dirt, organic matter, shale or other
deleterious matter and shall be of such quality that it will bind readily to form a
firm stable sub-base.
2. Components: Crushed concrete aggregates shall consist of clean, hard, durable,
angular fragments of rock, concrete and sand fragments of uniform quality
complying with the general requirements specified in Clause 2.2,
3. The use of crusher fines passing the 4.75 sieve which are not produced from
crushing concrete, shall be subject to approval in writing by the Superintendent to
the proposed source and nature of these materials and the proposed amounts to
be added.
4. Physical Requirements: All base course RGA shall conform to the physical
requirements described below, for each Class of Aggregate.
5. Foreign material in the fraction retained on the 4.75 sieve shall not exceed the
percentages by mass specified:
Foreign Material Type %

High density materials such as metal, 3
glass, brick, and asphalt
Low density materials such as plastic, 1
rubber, plaster, clay lumps and other friable
material
Wood and other vegetable or 0.2
decomposable matter
C. Grading Requirements
1. The material for "Granular RGA Sub-base" shall conform to the requirements
specified for the class of sub-base noted on the plans. The requirements for each
class of sub-base are as follows:
2. Class A Sub-base: Class A Sub-base shall consist of well-graded RGA with sand
and silt, conforming to the following requirements:
a. ASTM (D1241-00)
b. Sieve Percent Passing
1) 50mm 100
2) 9.5mm 30 - 65
3) 4.75mm 25 – 55
4) 2.00mm 15 - 40
5) 0.425mm 8 - 20
6) 0.075mm 2-8
c. Loss by Abrasion Test (AASHTO T 96) 40% maximum
d. Liquid Limit (AASHTO T89) 25 maximum
e. Plasticity Index (AASHTO T 90) 4 maximum
f. Sand Equivalent (AASHTO T 176) 25 minimum
g. CBR on remoulded sample (BS 1377 120% minimum
h. Test 16) after 4 days soaking
3. Class B Sub-base: Class B Sub-base shall consist of uniform mixtures of RGA
with sand, silt and clay, conforming to the following requirements:

ASTM (D1241-00)
Percent Passing
Sieve Size
50.0mm 100
25.0mm 75 - 95
9.5mm 40 - 75
4.75mm 30 - 65
2.00mm 20 - 45
0.425mm 15 - 30
0.075mm 5 - 15
a. The grading is based on aggregates of uniform specific gravity, and the

percent passing the various sieves are subject to correction by the
Engineer when aggregates of varying specific gravities are used.
b. Loss by Abrasion Test (AASHTO T 96) 40% maximum
c. Liquid Limit (AASHTO T 89) 25 maximum
d. Plasticity Index (AASHTO T 90) 4 maximum
e. Sand Equivalent (AASHTO T 176) 25 minimum
f. CBR on remoulded sample (BS 1377 120% minimum
g. Test 16) after 4 days soaking
4. Class C Sub-base: Class C Sub-base shall consist of well-graded sand-RGA
conforming to the following requirements:
ASTM (D1241-00)
Percent Passing
Sieve Size
25.0mm 100
9.5mm 50 - 85
4.75mm 35 - 65
2.00mm 25 - 50
0.425mm 15 - 30
0.075mm 5 - 15
a. Loss by Abrasion Test (AASHTO T 96) 40% maximum

b. Liquid Limit (AASHTO T 89) 25 maximum
c. Plasticity Index (AASHTO T 90) 4 maximum
d. Sand Equivalent (AASHTO T 176) 25 minimum
e. CBR on remoulded sample (BS 1377 120% minimum
f. Test 16) after 4 days soaking
D. Acceptance
1. When the stationary plant method is used, the aggregate will be accepted
immediately following mixing, based on periodic samples taken from the pug mill
output. When a road mix method is used, the aggregate will be accepted after
necessary blending and before laying, based on samples taken from the
combined windrow for each layer. Acceptance of the material by the Engineer
does not constitute acceptance of the sub-base, only that the material is
approved for use in the sub-base.
E. Equipment
1. Equipment shall be according to the type and number outlined in the Contractor's
detailed Programme of Work, as approved by the Engineer.
F. Construction Requirements
1. Groundwater Levels and Protection: The Contractor must establish the high
water table levels (HWT) along the length of the road, relative to the accepted
National benchmark. Should the base of the proposed road be within 1 metre of
the HWT, an impermeable barrier will be required to be installed to prevent
groundwater coming in contact with the RGA sub-base.
2. Preparation of Subgrade: The Contractor shall, as part of the Work of sub-base,
prepare the sub grade. The formation of the subgrade will vary by either placing
the "Granular RGA Sub-base" on the roadway surface as previously constructed
or by excavating sufficient material from the roadway and placing the "Granular
RGA Sub-base" on the subgrade obtained thereby. In either case, the subgrade,
shall as hereinafter described, be brought to the lines, grades and typical section
shown on the plans for the bottom of the "Granular RGA Sub-base". All soft and
yielding material or other portions of the subgrade, which will not compact
readily, when rolled or tamped, shall be removed, and all loose rock or boulders
found in the excavation shall be removed or broken off to a depth of not less than
fifteen (15) centimetres below the surface of the subgrade. All holes or
depressions made by the removal of material, as described above, shall be filled
with approved material, and the whole subgrade brought to line and grade and
compacted to density designated on the plans or directed by the Engineer.
3. Spreading: Sub-base aggregates shall be spread on subgrade which has been
approved by the Engineer. Sub-base which has been placed on a subgrade not
approved by the Engineer shall be removed at the Contractor's expense.
4. Sub-base aggregate shall be spread on the approved subgrade in layers not
exceeding fifteen (15) centimetres in compacted depth. Spreading shall be done
by means of approved mechanical box spreaders, distributing the material to the
required width and loose thickness. Where the required sub-base thickness is
greater than fifteen (15) centimetres, the material shall be placed in layers of
equal thickness, in no case shall a layer be less than seven and one half (7.5)
centimetres thick. Under no circumstances shall Class A Sub-base be dumped in
a pile on the Subgrade.
5. The material shall be handled so as to avoid segregation. Segregated materials
shall be remixed until uniform. Suitable precautions shall be taken to prevent
rutting of the subgrade during the spreading of the sub-base materials. No
hauling or placement of material will be permitted when, in the judgment of the
Engineer, the weather or road conditions are such that the hauling operations will
cause cutting or rutting of the subgrade or cause contamination of the sub-base
material.
6. Compaction: The moisture content of the sub-base material shall be adjusted
prior to compaction, by watering with approved sprinkler trucks or by drying out,
as directed by the Engineer, to that required to obtain the specified density for
sub-base. Sub-base shall be compacted to an average value of 100% of the
M.D.D. as determined according to AASHTO T 180 Method D with no single
value below ninety eight (98%).
7. The sub-base aggregate shall be compacted by means of approved compaction
equipment progressing gradually from the outside towards the centre with each
succeeding pass uniformly over-lapping the previous pass. Rolling shall
continuous until the entire thickness of each layer is thoroughly and uniformly
compacted to the specified density. Rolling shall be accompanied by sufficient

blading in a manner approved by the Engineer, to insure a smooth surface free
from ruts or ridges and having the proper section and crown.
8. The surface of the material shall on completion of compaction be well closed,
free from movement under the compaction plant and free from compaction
planes, ridges, cracks, or loose materials.
9. Any area inaccessible to normal compaction equipment shall be compacted by
means of mechanical tampers until satisfactory compaction is obtained.
10. Each layer of sub-base course must be completely compacted and approved by
the Engineer, prior to the delivery of materials for a succeeding layer of sub-
base.
11. Compaction Trials: If directed by the Engineer, prior to the commencement of his
sub-base or aggregate base operations, the Contractor shall construct trial
lengths, not to exceed one (1) kilometre. The materials used in the trials shall be
those approved for use as sub-base or aggregate base, and the equipment used
shall be that according to the Contractor's approved detailed Programme of
Work.
12. The object of these trials is to determine the adequacy of the Contractor's
equipment, the loose depth measurements necessary to result in the specified
compacted layer depths, the field moisture content, and the relationship between
the number of compaction passes and the resulting density of the material.
13. Finishing: The Contractor shall programme his operations to avoid the drying out
of the sub-base during construction. If any layer of sub-base material, or part
thereof, is permitted to dry out after compaction, or does not conform to the
required density or finish, the Contractor, shall at his own expense, rework, water
or re-compact the material, as directed by the Engineer, to density specified,
before the next layer of sub-base or base course is superimposed thereon.
14. Immediately prior to the placing of the first layer on the sub-base, the final layer
of sub-base shall be at the specified density and to the required grade and
section. In order to maintain these requirements while placing the next course, it
may be necessary to water and reshape the surface of the sub-base, which Work
shall be at the Contractor's expense.
15. The surface of the finished sub-base will be tested with a three (3) metre straight-
edge by the Engineer at selected locations. The variation of the surface from the
testing edge of the straight-edge between any two (2) contacts with the surface
shall at no point exceed six (6) millimetres when measured in any direction. The
sub-base shall be compacted to the thickness and cross- section as shown on
the plans and shall not vary by more than six (6) millimetres from the required
elevation. All humps and depressions and thickness deficiencies exceeding the
specified tolerances shall be corrected by removing the defective Work or by
adding new material as directed by the Engineer.
G. Minimum Test Requirements

1. One sample every 1,000 Cu.m. shall be tested for Grading Plasticity Index, Sand
Equivalent Maximum Dry Density, C.B.R., Loss by Abrasion. One Situ Density
test every 300 sq.m. of Granular RGA Sub-base laid.
2.04 RECYCLED BLUE GLASS AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
A. General
1. The works described below shall consist of furnishing and placing one (1) or
more layers of recycled glass aggregate (RGA), including additives if required, on
a prepared surface in accordance with the Specifications and in conformity with

the lines, grades, thicknesses and typical cross-sections shown on the plans or
established by the Engineer.
B. Materials
1. Materials shall conform to the requirements for the class of "Recycled Crushed
Aggregate Base Course" specified on the plans or directed by the Engineer. All
RGA for base course shall consist of crushed rock, crushed concrete stone
fragments including sand.
2. Components: Crushed concrete aggregates shall consist of clean, hard, durable,
angular fragments of rock, concrete and sand fragments of uniform quality
complying with the general requirements specified in Clause 2.2.
3. The use of crusher fines passing the 4.75 sieve which are not produced from
crushing concrete, shall be subject to approval in writing by the Superintendent to
the proposed source and nature of these materials and the proposed amounts to
be added.
4. Physical Requirements: All base course RGA shall conform to the physical
requirements described below, for each Class of Aggregate.
5. Foreign material in the fraction retained on the 4.75 sieve shall not exceed the
percentages by mass specified:
Foreign Material Type %

High density materials such as metal, 3
glass, brick, and asphalt
Low density materials such as plastic, 1
rubber, plaster, clay lumps and other friable
material
Wood and other vegetable or 0.2
decomposable matter
6. Grading Requirements: Coarse materials for Glass Aggregate Base Course shall
conform to the following grading requirements:
ASTM (D2940)
Percent Passing
Sieve Size
50mm
100
37.5mm
95 - 100
19mm
70 – 92
9.5mm
50 – 70
4.75mm
35 – 55
0.60mm
12 – 25
0.075mm
0-8
a. Loss by Abrasion Test (AASHTO T 96) 40% maximum

b. Liquid Limit (AASHTO T89) 25 maximum
c. Plasticity Index (AASHTO T 90) 4 maximum
d. Sand Equivalent (AASHTO T 176) 25 minimum
e. CBR on remoulded sample (BS 1377 120% minimum
f. Test 16) after 4 days soaking
C. Acceptance
1. When the stationary plant method is used, the aggregate will be accepted
immediately following mixing, based on periodic samples taken from the pug mill
output. When a road mix method is used, the aggregate will be accepted after
necessary blending and before laying, based on samples taken from the
combined windrow for each layer. When the aggregate is a total aggregate, it
may be accepted at the crusher. Acceptance of the material by the Engineer
does not constitute acceptance of the base course, only that the material is
approved for use in the base course.
D. Equipment
1. Equipment shall be according to the type and number outlined in the Contractor's
detailed Programme of Work as approved by the Engineer.
E. Construction Requirements
1. Groundwater Levels and Protection: The Contractor must establish the high
water table levels (HWT) along the length of the road, relative to the accepted
National benchmark (New Abu Dhabi Datum (NADD)). Should the base of the
proposed road be within 1 metre of the HWT, an impermeable barrier will be
required to be installed to prevent groundwater coming in contact with the RGA.
2. Subgrade Preparation: The Contractor shall, as part of the Work and prior to the
delivery of materials for the base course, prepare the roadbed surface by
sprinkling blading, rolling and lightly scarifying where necessary, until the proper
crown is obtained. However, in the process of shaping the roadbed, the originally
compacting crust or top portion of the roadbed shall be disturbed as little as
possible. When completed and ready for base course construction the roadbed
shall be well compacted, smooth, hard and uniform, all irregularities having been
bladed out and rolled down.
F. Method of Construction
1. Handling of RGA: Handling of RGA, including the loading of trucks and
stockpiling, shall be effected in such a manner as to minimise segregation.
2. Combining Aggregates and Water: Aggregates for base course shall be
combined into a uniform mixture and water added only in a central mixing plant
before final placement of the material; Mixing and watering by windrows will not
be permitted. When binder is to be added, it shall be combined with the
aggregate base by thoroughly mixing binder and aggregate base in the central
mixing plant.
3. The moisture added to the aggregates shall be that required, as designated by
the Engineer, to obtain the specified density thereby preparing an aggregate
completely ready for compaction after spreading on the roadbed. In no case will
be wetting of aggregates in stockpiles or trucks be permitted.
4. Spreading and Combining Aggregates: Unless otherwise specified, aggregate for
base course shall be delivered to the roadbed as an uniform mixture and shall be
placed on the existing roadway, prepared sub-base or prepared subgrade, as the
case may be, in an uniform layer or layers not exceeding fifteen (15) centimetres
in compacted depth, including any binder that is to be blended on the road.
Spreading shall be done by means of approved self-propelled stone box
spreaders, distributing the material to the required width and loose thickness.
When the required base thickness is greater than fifteen (15) centimetres, the
materials shall be spread in layers of equal thickness.
5. The material shall be so handled, as to avoid segregation. If an aggregate
spreader causes segregation in the material, or leaves ridges or other
objectionable marks on the surface which cannot be eliminated easily or
prevented by adjustment of the spreader operation, the use of such spreader
shall be removed and replaced with well-graded material. No "skin" patching
shall be permitted.
6. No hauling or placement of material will be permitted when, in the judgment of
the Engineer, the weather or road conditions are such as hauling operations will
cause cutting or rutting of the road surface or cause contamination of the base
course material.
7. Compaction: If directed by the Engineer, prior to starting the aggregate base
operation, the Contractor shall construct trial lengths in accordance with
subparagraph 4.4 "Compaction Trials" in Section 3.2 "Granular Sub-base".
8. RGA shall be laid and compacted in a manner which will not result in segregation
of the material and at a moisture content which allows the compaction stated.
9. Immediately after placing, the base course material shall be compacted. The
material shall be compacted to an average density of 100% of M.D.D. as
determined according to AASHTO T 180 Method D with no single value below
ninety-eight (98%) percent. The Field determination of density shall be made in
accordance with AASHTO T 191. The percent of density shall be adjusted to
compensate for the weight and volume of aggregate larger than the aggregate
used in the compaction control test where applicable.
10. Rolling shall be continued until the entire thickness of each layer is thoroughly
and uniformly compacted to the density specified. The final rolling of the
compacted base course shall be done with a self-propelled roller. Rolling shall be
accompanied by sufficient blading in a manner approved by the Engineer, to
insure smooth surface, free from ruts or ridges and having the proper section and
crown. When additional water is required, it shall be added in the amount and
manner approved by the Engineer. Each layer of base course must be
completely compacted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer, prior to
the delivery of the materials for a succeeding layer. The surface of the material
shall be free from movement on completion of the compaction.
11. The surface of the finished base course will be tested with a three (3) metre
straight-edge by the Engineer at selected locations. The variation of the surface
from the testing edge of the straight-edge between any two (2) contacts with the
surface shall at no point exceed six (6) millimetres when measured in any
direction. The base course shall be compacted to the thickness and cross-
section as shown on the plans and shall not vary by more than five (5)
millimetres from the required elevation. All humps and depressions and thickness
deficiencies exceeding the specified tolerances shall be corrected by removing
the defective work or by adding new material, as directed by the Engineer.
12. If the material for the base course is laid and compacted in more than one (1)
layer, the Contractor shall plan and coordinate the Work in such a manner that
the previously placed and compacted layers be allowed ample time for drying
and development of sufficient stability, before vehicles hauling materials for the
succeeding layers or other heavy equipment are permitted on the base. Prior to
placing the succeeding layers of material, the top of the underlayer shall be made
sufficiently moist to insure bond between the layers. The edges and edge slopes
of the base course shall be bladed or otherwise dressed to conform to the lines
and dimensions shown on the plans and present straight, neat and workmanlike
lines and slopes as free of loose material as practicable.
13. The Contractor shall also plan the Work and handle the various operations so
that the least amount of water will be lost by evaporation from uncompleted
surfaces. If the Contractor delays placing of succeeding layers of base course
material to the extent that additional water must be applied to prevent ravelling or
excessive dripping, the application of such water shall be at the Contractor's
expense not be considered as the basis for a claim for additional compensation.
Water shall be applied at such times and in such quantities as directed by the
Engineer, and the Engineer shall have full authority to require the suspension of
all other Works on the project to insure the proper maintenance of previously
compacted material. If after the base is compacted, any areas are above or
below proper grade and true elevations, such areas shall be loosened and after
having had additional materials added or excess material removed, as the case
may require, shall be reconstructed as described herein. If after the base is
compacted, any areas fail to meet the specified density and gradation
requirements, they shall be loosened or removed as directed by the Engineer
and reconstructed as described herein.
G. Maintenance of Base Course

1. Following the construction of the aggregate base, the compacted base course
shall be maintained by the Contractor at his expense. The Contractor shall blade,
broom and otherwise maintain the base, keeping it free from ravelling, and other
defects until such time as the bituminous prime or other surface is applied. Water
shall be applied at such time and in such quantities as directed by the Engineer.
2. The Engineer shall determine when the surface of the base course is in the
proper condition to permit the bituminous prime and/or surfacing to be applied. If
the Contractor chooses not to apply the bituminous prime and/or surfacing at the
time, he must continue to maintain the surface of the base course, including the
application of necessary water, at his expense until such time as the bituminous
prime and/or surfacing is applied. Any additional expense incurred by the
Contractor because of his failure to apply the bituminous prime and/or surfacing
when so permitted by the Engineer will not be considered as the basis for a claim
for additional compensation.
H. Minimum Test Requirements

1. The Contractor shall test the crushed concrete and any approved components at
a frequency which is sufficient to ensure that the material supplied under the
contract complies with the specified requirements. The frequency shall not be
less than that shown in the Table below, except that the Engineer may agree to a
lower frequency where the Contractor has implemented a system of statistical
process control and can demonstrate that such lower frequency is adequate to
assure the quality of the product.
Minimum Frequency of Testing:

Test Minimum Frequency of Testing
Grading On each day - one per 300 tonnes or part thereof
Foreign Material
On each day - one per 300 tonnes or part thereof
Content
On each day - 3 No.
Moisture Content
One per 200 tonnes or part thereof on each day
Plasticity Index In each month - one per 5,000 tonnes or part thereof
California Bearing Prior to the commencement of work and when in the
Ratio opinion of the Engineer the nature of the material has
changed significantly
Once per month or when in the opinion of the
Los Angeles Abrasion Engineer the nature of the material has changed
significantly
2.05 CONCRETE WORKS
A. The concrete work shall be furnished and constructed in accordance with the
requirements of Section V, Concrete Works, of the ADM Standard Specifications and as
specified herein.
B. The concrete work shall include all formwork for ornamentation, all inserts embedded in
the concrete, and all grout as indicated on the Drawings and as directed by the
Engineer.
C. All materials shall comply with all requirements of Section V of the ADM Standard
Specifications and as specified herein.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. INSTALLATION
B. The subgrade and/or aggregate base course for pedestrian and vehicular concrete
paving blocks shall be prepared as per the Standard specifications and contract
drawings, as applicable.
C. After preparation of the subgrade or aggregate base course for the concrete paving
blocks, as applicable, place 5 cm of bedding sand complying with either the
requirements of BS 7533: Part 3:1997, Category III or as per the grading limits specified
in the table below.
Percentage Passing each

Sieve Size
Sieve (%)
5 mm 70-100
2.36 mm 30-60
1.18 mm 10-40
600 µm 5-30
300 µm 0-20
150 µm 0-10
75 µm 0-3
D. The bedding sand shall be uniformly mixed over the compacted subgrade or aggregate
base course, as applicable for pedestrian or vehicular areas, and screeded uniformly to
grade approximately 10 to 15 mm higher than required. Place the concrete paving
blocks in the approved pattern as close together as possible such that the spaces of the

joints are between 3 mm and 5 mm. It is important that the spaces be consistent so that
the pattern will remain constant.
E. The joints in the paving blocks shall be filled with sand complying BS 7533: Part 3: 1997
by sweeping in the jointing sand. The grading limits for the jointing sand specified in BS
7533: Part 3 are indicated in the table below.

Sieve Size
Sieve (%)
2.36 mm 100
1.18 mm 95-100
600 µm 50-100
300 µm 15-60
150 µm 0-15
75 µm 0-3
F. As an alternative to the jointing sand requirements of BS 7522: Part 3 indicated above,

the following grading stipulated in the table below shall be accepted.

Sieve Size
Sieve (%)
2.36 mm 100
1.18 mm 95-100
600 µm 50-100
300 µm 45-95
150 µm 0-30
75 µm 0-3
G. The concrete paving blocks shall then be tamped down with a mechanical plate vibrator
until pavers are uniformly level, true to grade and free of any movement. The
mechanical plate vibrator shall be equipped with a rubber pad on the tamping face to
minimize damage to the finish surface and appearance of the paving blocks.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 32 1318
EXPOSED AGGREGATE CONCRETE FINISHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to Work of this Section.
1. Integrally colored Concrete exterior concrete pavements.
A. Section 03 3000 – “Cast-in-Place Concrete”.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI):

1. ACI 301 - Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings.
2. ACI 302 IR - Recommended Practice for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction.
3. ACI 303.1 - Standard Specification for Cast-In-Place Architectural Concrete.
4. ACI 304 - Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and
Placing of Concrete.
5. ACI 305R - Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting.
6. ACI 306R - Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting.
7. ACI 316 - Recommendations for Construction of Concrete Pavements and
Bases.
B. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM C 494 -Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittal process to follow standard set out in Division 01.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's complete technical information sheets for the
following:
1. Color Admixture.
2. Concrete Surface Retarder.
3. Sealer.
4. Bonding Agent.
C. Design Mixes: For each type of concrete.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing full range of colors
available including decorative aggregate type and color.
KEO/19-3262-0000 32 1318/1 Exposed Aggregate Concrete Finishing
E. Qualification Data: For firms indicated in "Quality Assurance" article, including list of
completed projects.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer with at least 10-years experience in

manufacture of specified products.
B. Concrete Contractor Qualifications: Concrete work shall be performed by firm with five
years experience and must have successfully completed not less than 6 projects
comparable in scale and complexity.
1. Statement of Contractor Qualifications
2. Submit list of at least 5 completed projects including project name, project
address and owner contact information.
C. Comply with the requirements of ACI 301, ACI 302 IR, ACI 303.1, ACI 304, ACI 305,
ACI 306, and ACI 316.
D. Obtain each specified material from same source and maintain high degree of
consistency in workmanship throughout Project.
E. Notification of manufacturer's authorized representative shall be given at least 1-week

before start of Work.
F. Colored Exposed Aggregate Concrete Mockup:

1. Provide under provisions of Division 1.
2. At location on Project selected by Architect / Engineer, place and finish 3m x
3m area.
3. Construct mockup using processes and techniques intended for use on
permanent work, including curing procedures. Include samples of control,
construction, and expansion joints in sample panels. Individual workers who will
perform the work for the Project will produce mockup.
4. Accepted mockup provides visual standard for work of Section. Mockup shall
remain through completion of the work for use as a quality standard for finished
work.
5. Remove mockup when directed.
A. Products shall be delivered in original factory packaging, unopened and undamaged.

Packaging will bear identification of product, manufacturer’s identification and batch
numbers. A technical information sheet and MSDS should be available for each
product throughout the project.
B. Store the product in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations in a

location protected from damage, construction activity, and weather conditions.
1.07 JOB SITE CONDITIONS
A. Protection: Precautions shall be taken to protect surrounding areas and landscaping.
B. Schedule placement to minimize exposure to wind and hot sun

C. Avoid placement if rain, snow, or frost is forecast within a 24-hour period. Protect fresh
concrete from moisture and freezing.
D. Comply with professional practices described in ACI 305R and ACI 306R.
1.08 PRE-JOB CONFERENCE
A. One week prior to placement of concrete a meeting shall be held at the Contractors
site office to discuss the Project and application methods.
B. It is suggested that the Architect / Engineer, General Contractor, Construction

Manager, Subcontractor, Ready-Mix Concrete Representative, and a Manufacturer's
Representative be present.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers / Suppliers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturer/

suppliers to be approved by Landscape Architect.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Integral Color Admixture –Integral Color Admixture; colored admixture containing no

calcium chloride with UV resistant pigments or approved equivalent.
B. Concrete Retarder –Concrete Surface Retarder; ready to use liquid form surface
retarder for exposing the aggregates of the concrete or approved equivalent.
C. Clear Coat Sealer –Water Based Polyurethane Sealer or approved equivalent.
D. Bonding Agent –Bonding Slurry; ready to use, single component, polymer modified,
cement based slurry for adhering overlays and new concrete to existing concrete
surfaces or approved equivalent.
E. Dry Mix Concrete – Basis of Design: Factory blended concrete conforming to 2.4
Concrete Mix Design, treated with Integral Color Admixture or approved equivalent.
F. SUBSTITUTIONS: The use of products will be considered providing that Contractor

requests its use in writing within 14-days prior to bid date. This request shall be
accompanied by the following:
1. Certificate of compliance from material manufacturer stating that proposed
products meet or exceed requirements of this Section.
2. Documented proof that proposed materials have a 10-year proven record of
performance confirmed by at least 10 local projects that Architect / Engineer
can examine.
2.03 COLORS
A. Exposed Aggregate Concrete Colors:

1. Cement: shall be white.
2. Aggregate: Color as selected by Architect / Engineer, in size 5-10 mm.
Aggregates shall be seeded into the surface at the rate of 2 kg/SQM mixed into
dry form, factory-blended concrete.
3. Color Admixture: As selected by Architect / Engineer from the manufacturers /
suppliers Standard Color Selection Chart.
2.04 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
A. Minimum Cement Content: Refer to Section 03 3000 – Cast in Place Concrete
B. Slump of concrete shall be consistent throughout Project at 10 cm or less. At no time

shall slump exceed 12 cm. If super plasticizers or mid-range water reducers are
allowed, slump shall not exceed 20 cm.
C. Do not add calcium chloride to mix as it causes mottling and surface discoloration.
D. Supplemental admixtures shall not be used unless approved by manufacturer.
E. Do not add water to the mix in the field.
F. Maximum air content shall not exceed 3 percent.
G. Aggregates shall be maximum 10 mm in size.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Insure that the concrete substrate is free of moving cracks and honor all joints in the
substrate into the new concrete surface.
B. For a bonded slab construction, apply Bonding Slurry to existing concrete surface in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. For installation on a compacted subgrade, insure that the subgrade is properly

compacted and leveled.
D. Install polyethylene plastic sheeting and steel reinforcement as required by

Architect/Engineer and indicated in the drawings.
3.02 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Move concrete into place with square-tipped shovels or concrete rakes.
B. Concrete shall be struck to specified level with wood or metal straight edge.
C. The concrete surface shall be further leveled and consolidated with highway
magnesium straight edge and/or magnesium bull float.
D. Float concrete surfaces with wood or magnesium float or derby as soon as concrete
surface has taken its initial set and bleed water has dissipated from the surface. Do
not over work the concrete surface in order to avoid driving the aggregates down into
the concrete.
3.03 EXPOSING THE AGGREGATES
A. Once the concrete surface hardness has reached sufficient stiffness, apply Concrete
Surface Retarder in accordance with manufacturer instructions. Use a solvent-
resistant sprayer to apply the retarder to the surface.
B. Allow the concrete to set overnight or as permitted by weather conditions, then wash
the surface of the concrete to remove the top paste and expose the aggregates. For
best results use a high pressure washer. Take care not to use excessive pressure and
dislodge the aggregates.
C. Do not use plastic sheeting to cure the concrete. For best results use water flooding
to cure the concrete.
D. After the initial curing period, apply clear coat sealer in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
3.04 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect finish work under provisions of Division 1.
B. Prohibit foot or vehicular traffic on floor surface for at least 72 hours.
C. Barricade area to protect flooring.
D. Protect floor surface from damage until final inspection and acceptance by Owner.
3.05 TOLERANCES
A. Minor variations in color, aggregate distribution, and appearance are expected and
acceptable.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 32 1400
UNIT PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
1. Precast concrete curbs
2. Stone curbs
3. Precast concrete pavers
4. Natural Stone pavers
1. Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants" for Joint sealants for expansion joints of paving.
2. Section 31 2000 "Earth Moving" for Granular base under unit pavers.
3. Section 03 3000 "Cast in Place Concrete" for concrete base under unit pavers.
A. Product Data: For materials other than water and aggregates.
B. Product Data: For the following:

1. Precast and stone Pavers.
2. Mortar and grout materials.
3. Stone sealers
4. Precast concrete curbs.
5. Stone curbs.
C. Sieve Analyses: For aggregate setting-bed materials, according to ASTM C 136.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For the following:

1. Each type of unit paver indicated.
2. Joint materials involving color selection.
4. Granite for stone curbs.
E. Samples for Verification:

1. Full-size units of each type of unit paver indicated. Assemble no fewer than five
Samples of each type of unit on suitable backing and grout joints.
2. Joint materials.
3. Stone sealers
5. Stone curbs.

KEO/19-3262-0000 32 1400/1 Unit Paving
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of unit paver, joint material, and setting material
from single source with resources to provide materials and products of consistent quality
in appearance and physical properties.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
Mock up samples to be 3m x 3m for each paving type including interfaces as required
by the Architect.
1. Location of mock ups to be agreed with Architect.
2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at
time of Substantial Completion.
C. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Contractors site office.
A. Store pavers on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an
enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely
tied.
B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.
Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained
and contamination avoided.
A. Cold-Weather Protection: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with
ice or frost. Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. Remove and replace unit
paver work damaged by frost or freezing.
B. Weather Limitations for Mortar and Grout:

1. Cold-Weather Requirements: Comply with cold-weather construction
requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
2. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements
contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. Provide artificial shade and
windbreaks and use cooled materials as required. Do not apply mortar to
substrates with temperatures of 100 deg F (38 deg C) and higher.
a. When ambient temperature exceeds (38 deg C), or when wind velocity
exceeds (13 km/h) and ambient temperature exceeds (32 deg C), set
pavers within 1 minute of spreading setting-bed mortar.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE PAVERS
A. Concrete Pavers: Paving units complying with ASTM C 936and resistant to freezing
and thawing when tested according to ASTM C 67, made from normal-weight
aggregates.
KEO/19-3262-0000 32 1400/2 Unit Paving
2. Thickness: Refer to landscape drawings and material schedule for details
3. Face Size and Shape: Refer to landscape drawings and material schedule for
details
4. Finish: Refer to landscape drawings and material schedule for details
5. Color: Refer to landscape drawings and material schedule for details
B. Concrete Pavers: Solid paving units, made from normal-weight concrete with a
compressive strength not less than 41 MPa, water absorption not more than 5 percent
according to ASTM C 140, and no breakage and not more than 1 percent mass loss
when tested for freeze-thaw resistance according to ASTM C 67. Tactile pavers to be
accordance with UK standard: DD CEN/TS 15209:2008 - Tactile paving surface
indicators produced from concrete, clay and stone.
2. Thickness: Refer to landscape drawings and material schedule for details
3. Face Size and Shape: Refer to landscape drawings and material schedule for
details
4. Finish: Refer to landscape drawings and material schedule for details
5. Color: Refer to landscape drawings and material schedule for details
2.02 NATURAL STONE PAVERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: Contractor to

supply stone supplier’s details.
B. Color and Grain: Refer to Landscape Drawings and Details
C. Match Architect's samples for color, finish, and other stone characteristics relating to
aesthetic effects.
D. Thickness: Refer to landscape drawings and material schedule for details
E. Face Size: Refer to landscape drawings and material schedule for details
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Provide stone sealers for all natural stone and for concrete pavers within designated
food and beverage zones within the park.
1. Type: Impregnator solvent based sealer
2. Manufacturers:
3. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
4. Application: Apply to a clean dry, cured surface free from debris, dust, oil, grease
stains and the likes, in accordance to manufacturers direction. Apply repeat coats
if deemed necessary by the Architect. All surrounding materials and surfaces to
be properly protected from excess material.
5. Protect from traffic immediately after application until totally cured in accordance
to manufacturer's recommendations.
2.04 CURBS AND EDGE RESTRAINTS
KEO/19-3262-0000 32 1400/3 Unit Paving

A. Precast Concrete Curbs: Made from normal-weight concrete with a compressive
strength not less than 41 MPa and water absorption not more than 5 percent, in shapes
and sizes indicated.

the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
C. Color and Texture: Refer to landscape drawings and material schedule for details
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. The following fillers to be used as expansion joints between curbs at 10m intervals:
1. Compressible Foam Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1056,
Grade 2A1.
2.06 AGGREGATE SETTING-BED MATERIALS
A. Sand for Leveling Course: Sound, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone
complying with gradation requirements in ASTM C 33 for fine aggregate.
B. Sand for Joints: Fine, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone with 100 percent
passing No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve and no more than 10 percent passing No. 200 (0.075-
mm) sieve.
1. Provide sand of color needed to produce required joint color.
C. Separation Geotextile: Woven geotextile fabric, manufactured for separation

applications; made from polyolefin or polyesters, with elongation less than 50 percent;
complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods
referenced:
1. Survivability: Class 2, AASHTO M 288.
2. Apparent Opening Size: No. 60 (0.250-mm) sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751.
3. Permittivity: 0.02 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491.
4. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure, ASTM D 4355.
D. Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered with the EPA. Provide in
granular, liquid, or wettable powder form.
2.07 MORTAR SETTING-BED MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C. Sand: ASTM C 144.
2.08 GROUT MATERIALS
A. Standard Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, sanded.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
KEO/19-3262-0000 32 1400/4 Unit Paving
B. Grout Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
C. Water: Potable.
2.09 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General: Comply with referenced standards and with manufacturers' written instructions
for mix proportions, mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing times,
and other procedures needed to produce setting-bed and joint materials of uniform
quality and with optimum performance characteristics. Discard mortars and grout if they
have reached their initial set before being used.
B. Portland Cement-Lime Setting-Bed Mortar: Type M complying with ASTM C 270,

Proportion Specification.
C. Packaged Grout Mix: Proportion and mix grout ingredients according to grout
manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas indicated to receive paving, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Where pavers are to be installed over waterproofing, examine waterproofing installation,

with waterproofing Installer present, for protection from paving operations, including
areas where waterproofing system is turned up or flashed against vertical surfaces.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Preparation: Ensure that all underground utility lines are located and will not interfere
with the proposed edging installation before beginning work. Locate border line of
edging with string or other means to assure border straightness and curves as
designed.
B. Remove substances from concrete substrates that could impair mortar bond, including
curing and sealing compounds, form oil, and laitance.
C. Sweep concrete substrates to remove dirt, dust, debris, and loose particles.
D. Proof-roll prepared subgrade according to requirements in Section 31 2000 "Earth

Moving" to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Proceed with unit paver
installation only after deficient subgrades have been corrected and are ready to receive
base course for unit pavers.
3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not use unit pavers with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations, or other defects that
might be visible or cause staining in finished work.
KEO/19-3262-0000 32 1400/5 Unit Paving
B. Mix pavers from several pallets or cubes, as they are placed, to produce uniform blend
of colors and textures.
C. Cut unit pavers with Pavers shall be cut with a motor driven water-cooled, cut-off wheel
masonry saw using a diamond blade to provide clean, sharp, un-chipped edges. Cut
units to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without
cutting where possible. Hammer cutting is not acceptable.
1. For concrete pavers, a block splitter may be used.
D. Handle protective-coated brick pavers to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs
or edges of other units. If, despite these precautions, coating does contact bonding
surfaces of brick, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting brick.
E. Joint Pattern: All paver to be set out using fixed string lines off a fixed perpendicular or
aligned surface.
F. Pavers over Waterproofing: Exercise care in placing pavers and setting materials over
waterproofing so protection materials are not displaced and waterproofing is not
punctured or otherwise damaged. Carefully replace protection materials that become
displaced and arrange for repair of damaged waterproofing before covering with paving.
1. Provide joint filler at waterproofing that is turned up on vertical surfaces unless
otherwise indicated; where unfilled joints are indicated, provide temporary filler or
protection until paver installation is complete.
G. Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/32-inch (0.8-mm) unit-to-unit offset from flush (lippage)
nor 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3m) from level, or indicated slope, for finished surface of
paving.
H. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide for sealant-filled joints at locations and of widths
indicated on structural engineer’s drawings. Provide compressible foam filler as backing
for sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated; where unfilled joints are indicated,
provide temporary filler until paver installation is complete. Install joint filler before
setting pavers. Sealant materials and installation are specified in Section 07 9200 "Joint
Sealants."
I. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide cork joint filler at locations and of widths
indicated. Install joint filler before setting pavers. Make top of joint filler flush with top of
pavers.
J. Provide edge restraints as indicated. Install edge restraints before placing unit pavers.
1. Where pavers set in mortar bed are indicated as edge restraints for pavers set in
aggregate setting bed, install pavers set in mortar and allow mortar to cure
before placing aggregate setting bed and remainder of pavers. Cut off mortar
bed at a steep angle so it will not interfere with aggregate setting bed.
2. Where pavers embedded in concrete are indicated as edge restraints for pavers
set in aggregate setting bed, install pavers embedded in concrete and allow
concrete to cure before placing aggregate setting bed and remainder of pavers.
Hold top of concrete below aggregate setting bed.
K. Provide steps made of pavers as indicated. Install paver steps before installing adjacent
pavers.
1. Where pavers set in mortar bed are indicated for steps constructed adjacent to
pavers set in aggregate setting bed, install steps and allow mortar to cure before
placing aggregate setting bed and remainder of pavers. Cut off mortar bed at a
steep angle so it will not interfere with aggregate setting bed.
KEO/19-3262-0000 32 1400/6 Unit Paving
L. Cutting: Cut unit pavers with motor-driven masonry saw equipment to provide clean,
sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work
neatly. Use full units without cutting where possible. Hammer cutting is not acceptable.
Where cut pieces turn out to be less than 7.5cm in any dimension they shall be replaced
by 15cm x 25cm, cut to fit.
3.04 AGGREGATE SETTING-BED APPLICATIONS
A. Compact soil subgrade uniformly to at least 95 percent of ASTM D 698 / ASTM D 1557
laboratory density.
B. Proof-roll prepared subgrade to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding.
Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as
determined by Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.
C. Place separation geotextile over prepared subgrade, overlapping ends and edges at
least 12 inches (300 mm).
D. Place aggregate base, compact to 100 percent of ASTM D 1557 maximum laboratory
density, and screed to depth indicated.
E. Place leveling course and screed to a thickness of 1 to 1-1/2 inches (25 to 38 mm),
taking care that moisture content remains constant and density is loose and uniform
until pavers are set and compacted.
F. Treat leveling course with herbicide to inhibit growth of grass and weeds.
G. Set pavers with a minimum joint width as indicated on landscape detail drawings, being
careful not to disturb leveling base. If pavers have spacer bars, place pavers hand tight
against spacer bars. Use string lines to keep straight lines. Fill gaps between units that
exceed 30mm with pieces cut to fit from full-size unit pavers.
1. When installation is performed with mechanical equipment, use only unit pavers
with spacer bars on sides of each unit.
H. Vibrate pavers into leveling course with a low-amplitude plate vibrator capable of a
3500- to 5000-lbf (16- to 22-kN) compaction force at 80 to 90 Hz. Use vibrator with
neoprene mat on face of plate or other means as needed to prevent cracking and
chipping of pavers. Perform at least three passes across paving with vibrator.
1. Compact pavers when there is sufficient surface to accommodate operation of
vibrator, leaving at least 36 inches (900 mm) of un-compacted pavers adjacent to
temporary edges.
2. Before ending each day's work, compact installed concrete pavers except for 36-
inch (900 mm) width of un-compacted pavers adjacent to temporary edges
(laying faces).
3. As work progresses to perimeter of installation, compact installed pavers that are
adjacent to permanent edges unless they are within 36 inches (90 mm) of laying
face.
4. Before ending each day's work and when rain interrupts work, cover pavers that
have not been compacted and cover leveling course on which pavers have not
been placed with non-staining plastic sheets to protect them from rain.
I. Spread dry sand and fill joints immediately after vibrating pavers into leveling course.
Vibrate pavers and add sand until joints are completely filled, then remove excess sand.
Leave a slight surplus of sand on the surface for joint filling.
KEO/19-3262-0000 32 1400/7 Unit Paving
J. Do not allow traffic on installed pavers until sand has been vibrated into joints.
K. Repeat joint-filling process 30 days later.
3.05 MORTAR SETTING-BED APPLICATIONS
A. Saturate concrete sub-base with clean water several hours before placing setting bed.
Remove surface water about one hour before placing setting bed.
B. Apply mortar bed over bond coat; spread and screed mortar bed to uniform thickness at
sub-grade elevations required for accurate setting of pavers to finished grades
indicated.
C. Mix and place only that amount of mortar bed that can be covered with pavers before
initial set. Before placing pavers, cut back, bevel edge, and remove and discard setting-
bed material that has reached initial set.
D. Place pavers before initial set of cement occurs. Immediately before placing pavers on
mortar bed, apply uniform 1/16-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick bond coat to mortar bed or to back
of each paver with a flat trowel.
E. Tamp or beat pavers with a wooden block or rubber mallet to obtain full contact with
setting bed and to bring finished surfaces within indicated tolerances. Set each paver in
a single operation before initial set of mortar; do not return to areas already set or
disturb pavers for purposes of realigning finished surfaces or adjusting joints.
F. Spaced Joint Widths: Provide3/8-inch ()1/2-inch ()3/4-inch () nominal joint widths as

indicated on landscape detail drawings series with variations not exceeding plus or
minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).
G. Grouted Joints: Grout paver joints complying with ANSI A108.10.
H. Grout joints as soon as possible after initial set of setting bed.

1. Force grout into joints, taking care not to smear grout on adjoining surfaces.
2. Clean pavers as grouting progresses by dry brushing or rubbing with dry burlap
to remove smears before tooling joints.
3. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger
than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.
4. If tooling squeezes grout from joints, remove excess grout and smears by dry
brushing or rubbing with dry burlap and tool joints again to produce a uniform
appearance.
I. Cure grout by maintaining in a damp condition for seven days unless otherwise
recommended by grout or liquid-latex manufacturer.
3.06 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace unit pavers that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise
damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Provide new units to match adjoining
units and install in same manner as original units, with same joint treatment and with no
evidence of replacement.
KEO/19-3262-0000 32 1400/8 Unit Paving

B. Pointing: During tooling of joints, enlarge voids or holes and completely fill with grout.
Point joints at sealant joints to provide a neat, uniform appearance, properly prepared
for sealant application.
C. Cleaning: Remove excess grout from exposed paver surfaces; wash and scrub clean.
END OF SECTION
KEO/19-3262-0000 32 1400/9 Unit Paving

SECTION 32 1500
AGGREGATE SURFACING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 EXTENT OF WORKS
A. The works specified in this section cover all works necessary to prepare, construct and
finish the exterior hard landscape works of the development in coordination with soft
landscape, landscape lighting and other site works and contractors. Works include but
are not limited to the following as per drawings:
1. Dune sand.
2. Gravel surfacing.
A. Section 03 4000 - Precast Concrete for precast concrete curbs.
B. Section 12 9300 - Site Furnishings
C. Section 31 0000 - Earthworks
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. The following samples shall be supplied

1. Product data for the aggregate surfacing.
2. Samples for verification: Typical sample for type aggregate surfacing indicated;
3. Shop drawings including layout and and interface with adjacent units.
1.04 COMPLIANCE
A. All works shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the relevant safety
codes and Local Authority requirements for this work.
1.05 SUITABLE FOR UAE CONDITIONS
A. The Contractor shall supply at time of tender certification of suitability of all materials
and installation techniques for use in the United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.) including but not
limited to climatic conditions, expected maintenance regimes etc.
1.06 UNSPECIFIED WORKS
A. Where materials used in this section have been specified elsewhere in this document,
the relevant clauses shall apply to this section. Materials and workmanship that have not
KEO/19-3262-0000 32 1500/1 Aggregate Surfacing
been individually specified shall be of international first class quality and the minimum
standard acceptance shall be the relevant British Standard where applicable.
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.01 DUNE SAND
A. Multi-washed and triple-screened silica sand-based loose impact absorbing surface

(LIAS) as an effective surface in play areas.
1. Light beige in colour.
2. Non-staining and non-marking.
3. Free-draining allowing safe play throughout the year.
4. The product shall consist of silica sand with an even nominal particle size
distribution of 0.25 – 0.45 mm.
5. The product shall be pest, disease and weed free and not have been treated with
methyl bromide or any additives, colorants or dyes.
B. The product shall comply with BS EN 1176 and be installed to a layer thickness of 100
mm more than that found by laboratory testing to achieve the required critical fall height.
C. The product shall have been tested in accordance with the requirements of BS EN
1176.
2.02 GRAVEL SURFACING
A. Crushed limestone loosely laid over geotextile on compacted earth.
2.03 FILTER FABRIC
A. Filter fabric shall be laid under all aggregate surfaces to provide a free draining
separation layer between the associated sub-base and aggreagate surfacing lapped
300mm and secured at the joints.
B. Fabric shall be prefabricated consisting at least two different components; a three

dimensional polymer core, to act as the transport medium, and a geotextile filter fabric
minimum 140 g/m2 to allow liquids to pass into the core but preventing the surrounding
fill from washing in and clogging the core to meet the following criteria;
1. The fabric shall be robust and survive the design life of the structure
2. The filter fabric must prevent surrounding fill from entering the core
3. The fabric must not unduly deform and restrict the flow
4. It must have good chemical resistance.
5. Provides and maintains high volume flow paths for water and gases; maintaining
soil structure integrity
6. Filtration properties are suitable for most backfill types
7. Manufactured to high quality controls for consistent performance
8. Hydraulic Properties:
a. In-plane flow control
b. Filter flow rate control
9. Filter properties
a. Should be nonwoven thermally bonded geotextile filter fabric suitable for
the soil type

b. Tensile strength with high modulus (to resist deformation of the filter into
the core)
c. CBR puncture resistance Polymer of core and filter
d. Resistance to chemical and bacterial attack
e. Resistance to creep
f. UV stable
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces indicated to receive paving, with Installer present, for compliance with
Work under this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Proof-roll prepared subgrade surface to check for unstable areas and areas requiring
additional compaction. Do not proceed with installation until deficient subgrades have
been corrected.
3.03 AGGREGATE SURFACING
A. General:
1. The Contractor shall make full allowance for the installation of dune sand and
stone gravel where and as described further in the drawings and documents.
B. Installation
1. Aggregate surfacing shall be laid over filter fabric layer. Where placed in areas
without planting, aggegate surfacing shall be installed over a compacted – 95%
sub base. The Contractor shall supply a sample area for approval by the
Engineer.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 32 1716
MANUFACTURED TRAFFIC-CALMING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment and perform all services and operations
necessary for the complete supply and installation of supply and installation of the
following as per drawings.
1. Traffic painted markings.
2. Removable rubber speed bumps at Basement Parking area
B. Related Sections: Related work to be coordinated and used in conjunction with this
1. Section 07 1800 - Traffic Coatings
1.02 REFERENCES
the latest published editions at the time of contract unless otherwise indicated. Product
manufacture, testing and installation shall comply with the following references in the
specification or otherwise approved including:
1. ASTM D 412 Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and
Thermoplastic Elastomers - Tension
2. ASTM D 624 Standard Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional
Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers
3. ASTM D 792 Standard Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity
(Relative Density) of Plastics by Displacement
4. ASTM D 2240 Standard Test Method for Rubber Property – Durometer
Hardness
5. ASTM D 4280 Standard Specification for Extended Life Type,
Nonplowable, Raised Retroreflective Pavement Markers
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:
1. Construction details and dimensions.
2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in
other work and substrate preparation.
3. Material and finish descriptions.
B. Certificates Submittals
1. Traffic-calming devices shall be factory stamped as being in compliance
with local guidelines.
KEO/19-3262-0000 32 1716/1 Manufactured Traffic-Calming Devices

2. Submit certification from approved local certification body and/ or other
accredited international green building material products rating tool, for
the environmental friendly and sustainable products used. Certification
should spell out the material certification standards, rating and details, and
technical product information.
C. Prior to completion of the work, submit three sets of

1. All test reports for approved material.
2. Properly compile and file all Authority Approvals, Permits and Waivers.
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm with minimum 5 years experience in producing traffic

calming products similar to those indicated for this Project, with a record of successful
in-service performance.
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings

and fabrication to ensure proper fitting. Show recorded measurements on final shop
drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Submit a written warranty signed by Contractor agreeing to repair or replace Work under
this Section that fails in materials and workmanship at no additional cost within specified
warranty period.
1. Traffic markings 3 years
2. Speed bumps 2 years
3. Wheel stoppers 2 years
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Anchors and Inserts: use non-ferrous metal or hot-dipped galvanized anchors and
inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance.
Furnished inserts as required to be set into concrete or masonry work.
2.02 MARKING PAINT
A. Traffic Paint: Alkyd-resin ready mixed, complying with AASHTO M 248, type F
1. Color: White / Yellow.
B. Refer to Section 07 1800 - Traffic Coatings for marking on traffic coating.
2.03 REMOVABLE RUBBER SPEED BUMPS AT BASEMENT PARKING AREA
A. Speed Guards: Supply and installation of car-speed breakers including all speed guard
units and all fastening systems including long expansion bolts.
1. Size: 460 mm width x 75mm height at the centre, tapering to zero heights at the
ends. Length per unit is 250mm.
2. Units are installed with alternating yellow and black colour. A black colour
specific end unit has to be installed at each end of the speed-breaker.
3. Reflective red colour eyes (protected from wheel impact) must be incorporated in
each unit, on either sides.
4. Each unit is designed for an expansion bolt fixing on either side.
5. Physical properties of the rubber
a. Hardness (BS 903 A57) 68-73 shore A
b. Special gravity (BS 903 A1) 1.48 – 1.51
c. Tensile strength (BS 903 A2) 120 kg/cm2 (min)
d. Elongation at break (BS 903 A2) 400% (min)
e. Tear strength (BS 903 A3) 40 N/mm (min)
f. Ozone resistance (BS 903 A43) No cracks
g. Compression set (BS 903 A6) 20% max
6. The car speed-breakers shall be installed only after complete coating of the floor.
7. Fixing must be done with min galvanized steel bolt anchors compatible with
concrete floors. Expansion bolts must be minimum 100 mm long.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate all units and accessories, using mounting methods of the type
described and in compliance with the applicable standards.
1. Install speed guards and wheel stoppers as per recommendations of the
manufacturer.
A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to the manufacturer's instructions.
Protect units from damage until time for completion.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 32 1816.13
PLAYGROUND PROTECTIVE SURFACING
PART 1 - GENERAL
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Refer to
Hardscape Material schedule LS-GN-043.
A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, tools and equipment, and perform all operations
necessary for the complete supply and installation of play surface and edging as
indicated on schedule and drawings.
A. Section 03 4000 - Precast Concrete (for precast concrete curbs)
B. Section 31 0000 - Earthworks.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Critical Height: Standard measure of shock attenuation. According to CPSC No. 325,
this means "the fall height below which a life-threatening head injury would not be
expected to occur."
B. SBR: Styrene-butadiene rubber.
A. Impact Attenuation: According to ASTM F 1292.
B. Accessibility of Surface Systems: According to ASTM F 1951.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Show the following:

1. Installation details and accessories.
2. Colors and pattern of surfaces.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of playground surface system indicated.
1. Include similar Samples of playground surface system and accessories involving
color selection.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of playground surface system indicated.
KEO/19-3262-0000 32 1816.13/1 Playground Protective Surfacing
1. Provide stepped samples on backing large enough to illustrate build-up of
flooring.
E. Material Certificates: For each playground surface system product, signed by

manufacturers. Include the percentage of recycled content.
G. Maintenance Data: For playground surface system to include in maintenance manuals.
H. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to

ANSI Z34.1 for testing indicated.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain playground surface system materials through one source
1. Provide secondary materials including adhesives, primers and repair materials of
type and from source recommended by manufacturer of playground surface
system materials.
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted
weather conditions permit playground surface system installation to be performed
according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.
1.08 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of playground surface systems with other works.
1.09 WARRANTY

or replace components of playground surface system that fail in materials or
a. Reduction in impact attenuation.
b. Deterioration of surface and other materials beyond normal weathering.
2. Warranty Period: 10 years from Date of Taking Over Certificate.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CAST-IN-SITU RUBBER SAFETY SURFACING – PLAY SURFACE
A. Top and Base layers:

1. Top layer: comprising fine EPDM rubber granules bonded with an MDI based
binder. EPDM colours and designs as per drawings and match approved sample.
2. Base Layer: comprising graded, coarse black SBR granules bonded with an MDI
based binder.
B. Mix:
1. Base layer and top layer rubber granules mixed with MDI binder in precise ratios
as per manufacturer’s recommendation.
2. Base Layer: Mix base layer SBR with MDI binder at manufacturer advised ratios
and pour/screed to required thickness. Allow 24 hours for curing.
3. Top Layer: Mix top layer EPDM with MDI binder at manufacturer advised ratios
and pour/screed to required thickness. Allow 24 hours for curing before use.
C. Reinforced concrete bed: As per Section 03 3100.
D. Thickness: Minimum as indicated on drawings and as per manufacturer; s

recommendation based on the fall height of play equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces indicated to receive paving, with Installer present, for compliance with
Work under this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions
3.02 PREPARATION
A. General: Prepare substrates to receive surfacing products according to playground

surface system manufacturer's written instructions. Verify that substrates are sound and
without high spots, ridges, holes, and depressions.
B. Substrates: Provide sound surface free of laitance, efflorescence, curing compounds,

and other contaminants incompatible with playground surface system.
C. Repair unsatisfactory surfaces and fill holes and depressions.
D. Mechanically scarify or otherwise prepare substrates to achieve recommended degree

of roughness.
3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Comply with playground surface system manufacturer's written installation

instructions. Install playground surface system over area and in thickness indicated.
A. Testing Agency: A qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field
tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of completed applications of playground
surface system shall take place according to ASTM F 1292.
C. Remove and replace applications of playground surface system where test results
indicate that it does not comply with requirements.
D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to

determine compliance of replaced or additional work with requirements.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Prevent traffic over system for not less than 48 hours after installation.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 32 3249
EXTERIOR STONE CLADDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Refer to Hardscape
plan drawings series; Material schedule LS-GN-043; and Typical Hardscape details series.
A. Furnish all labour, materials, tools and equipment and perform all services and
operations necessary for the complete supply and installation of exterior stone cladding
and copings on walls with mechanical anchors or mortar and steel wires as shown on
landscape drawings.
B. Related Section: Related work to be coordinated and used in conjunction with this
1. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-place Concrete.
2. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants.
1.02 REFERENCES
the latest published editions at the time of contract. Product manufacture, testing and
installation shall comply with the following references unless otherwise stated in the
specification or otherwise approved.
1. ASTM A 276: Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.
2. ASTM C 97: Test Methods for Absorption and Bulk Specific Gravity of
Dimension Stone.
3. ASTM C 119: Terminology Relating to Dimension Stone.
4. ASTM C 99: Test methods for Modulus of Rupture of Dimensional stone.
5. ASTM C 144: Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
6. ASTM C 170: Test Method for Compressive Strength of Dimensional
Stone.
7. ASTM C 568: Specification for Limestone.
8. ASTM C 615: Specification for Granite Dimension Stone.
9. ASTM C 616: Specification for Quartz-Based Dimension Stone Sandstone
10. ASTM C 880: Test Method for Flexural Strength of Dimensional Stone.
11. ASTM C 1201: Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior
Dimension Stone Cladding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference
12. ASTM C 1242: Guide for the Selection, Design, and Installation of Exterior
Dimension Stone Anchors and Anchoring Systems.
13. ASTM C 1354: Test Method for Strength of Individual Stone Anchorages in
Dimension Stone.
14. ASTM E 488: Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry
Elements.
15. ASTM F 593: Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs.
16. ANSI A 118.3: Specifications for Epoxy Adhesive Grout.
17. ANSI A 118.4: Specifications for Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.
KEO/19-3262-0000 32 3249/1 Exterior Stone Cladding
A. Structural Performance: Provide exterior stone cladding system capable of withstanding

the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under
normal conditions.
B. Control of Corrosion and Staining: Prevent galvanic and other forms of corrosion as well
as staining by isolating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible
materials. Use materials that do not stain exposed surfaces of stone and joint materials.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. Polished Finish: Smooth finish that produces sharp, mirror like reflections. Reflected
images of overhead fluorescent tubes have straight lines without visible distortion when
viewed at arm’s length.
B. Honed Finish: Smooth, non reflective finish similar to that produced by grinding with a
400 to 1200 grit abrasive; with a gap not exceeding 0.13 mm when faces are tested for
flatness with a 600 mm straightedge.
C. Filled Finish: Travertine slabs, filled with cement or epoxy and then polished or honed
to produce typical finish.
D. Split face; A rugged, uneven, concave-convex finish that reveals reflections from the
crystal is produced by the splitting action of a guillotine.
E. Flamed Finish: Textured finish achieved by blowtorch – strength heat application to

create a deeply textured surface.
F. Bush-Hammered finish: A rough textures finish that is developed by pounding stone with
a hammer that has square end divided into number of pyramid points.
G. Antique Finish: Textured finish with stone tumbled with sand, pebbles or ball bearings
to create a weathered, textured, aged finish.
H. Definitions contained in ASTM C 119 apply to this Section.
1.05 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: For variety of stone, stone accessory, and other manufactured products
indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show details of fabrication and installation of stone cladding.

1. Complete details of the stone cladding system including materials, thicknesses
and finishes.
2. Dimensions of each unit including holes, openings recesses, changes in plane
and similar items.
3. Thicknesses and finishes of each unit, showing cutting, fitting, sinking, back
checking.
4. Joint locations, jointing methods and clearances, and clearances between the
units and the back-up or building framework.
5. Complete connection and insert details, methods of anchoring, and sizes of
anchorages, cramps, dowels, shelf angles, other support elements and framing,

including materials, size and length of welds, and detailed drawings and setting
information.
6. Provisions to accommodate allowable substrate and structural tolerances.
C. Stone for verification: Include five samples 300 x 300 mm for each color, finish and
variety of stone, showing the full range of variations in appearance characteristics.
A. Mockups: Before installing stone cladding, build mockups to verify selections made
under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials
and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using
materials indicated for the completed Work:
1. Locate mock-up in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as
directed by the Engineer and/or Landscape Architect.
2. Mockup shall be complete with adjoining material to the satisfaction of the
Engineer and/or Landscape Architect. If the required standard is not achieved,
the Contractor shall replace (at the contractors cost) until the required standard is
achieved as judged by the Engineer and/or Landscape Architect.
3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
4. Obtain written approval of mock-up from the Engineer and/or Landscape
Architect before starting paving.
5. Maintain mock-ups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard
for judging the completed Work.
6. Mock up shall become part of finished work if approved by the Engineer and/or
Landscape Architect at the time of Substantial Completion
A. Stones shall be carefully packed for shipment using all reasonable care and customary
precautions against damage in transit. Lift stone with wide-belt slings; do not use wire
rope or ropes that might cause staining. Move stone, if required, using dollies with
cushioned wood supports.
B. Polyethylene or other suitable plastic film shall be placed between wood and finished
surfaces of completely dry stone. No material which may cause staining or discoloration
shall be used for blocking or packing.
C. Each pallet shall bear the identification label with information regarding stone type, size,
thickness finish and Quarry Source/location/vendor information.
D. Deliver materials in undamaged condition.
E. Upon receipt at the site or storage yard, the pallets shall be stacked on platforms at
least 100 mm above the ground. Extreme care shall be taken to prevent staining or
discoloration during storage.
F. Store and handle stone and related materials to prevent deterioration or damage due to
moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, breaking, chipping, or other
causes. Arrange to distribute weight evenly and to prevent damage to stone. Use non-
staining, waterproof covers as an overall protective covering. Ventilate under covers to
prevent condensation.

A. Protect stone cladding during erection as follows:

1. Cover tops of dimension stone cladding installation with non-staining,
waterproofing sheeting at end of each day’s work. Cover partially completed
structures when work is not in progress. Extend cover a minimum of 600 mm
down both sides and hold securely in place.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. Submit a written warranty signed by Contractor and Installer agreeing to repair or

replace Work under this Section that fails in design, materials, workmanship, finish and
color at no additional cost to the Employer.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from the date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Refer to material schedule LS-GN-043and landscape details
2.02 AVAILABLE SUPPLIERS/MANUFACTURERS
A. Stone Suppliers
B. Adhesives and Grouting Materials
C. Sealers
2.03 STONE, GENERAL
A. Provide stone that is free of cracks, seams, and starts impairing structural integrity or
function.
B. Quarry stone in a manner to ensure as-quarried block orientations yield finished stone
with required characteristics.
C. All stone shall be of soundness, texture, graining, color, finish and tone matching the
approved sample.
D. Make stone slabs available for examination for appearance characteristics
2.04 STONE TYPES
A. Stone standard: ASTM C 615 for Granite P-14
B. Finish: Refer to material schedule drawing
C. Thickness: Refer to material schedule drawing - NID-IN-KEO-LS-GN-00004
D. Stone type:
2.05 PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF STONE
2.06 STONE ANCHORS AND ATTACHMENTS
A. Provide anchors and anchoring systems and attachments of type and size required to
support stone works and fabricated in accordance with ASTM C 1242 from the following
metals for conditions and anchors indicated below:
1. Stainless steel: ASTM A 666, Type 316, to support loads imposed without
exceeding allowable design stresses, for anchors in direct contact with stone and
the fasteners connecting them to other anchors and to building structure.
2.07 MORTAR MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II. Provide natural color or white
cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.
1. Low-Alkali Cement: Portland cement for use with limestone shall contain not
more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207.
C. Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard water emulsion, serving as replacement for

part or all of gaging water, of type specifically recommended by latex-additive
manufacturer for use with field-mixed portland cement mortar bed, and not containing a
retarder.
D. Water: Potable.
E. Grout shall be shrink free type and as recommended by the manufacturer for the type of
tiles. There shall be a preliminary trial area (for each type of tiles) grouted to check that
they can be cleaned off satisfactorily. Where it causes discoloration on tiles after
cleaning, apply a protective wax coating on tiles before grouting.
2.08 ANCHORS AND FASTENERS MORTAR INSTALLATION
A. Wire Tiebacks: 3.0-mm diameter, stainless steel wire. As deemed necessary by the
project engineer for all walls over 2m in height and stone over 20mm thk.
2.09 MORTAR MIXES
A. General: Comply with referenced standards and with manufacturers' written instructions
for mix proportions, mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time,
and other procedures needed to produce mortar of uniform quality and with optimum
performance characteristics.
1. Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,
retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures,
unless otherwise indicated. Do not use calcium chloride.
2. Combine and thoroughly mix cementitious materials, water, and aggregates in a
mechanical batch mixer, unless otherwise indicated. Discard mortar when it has
reached initial set.

B. Portland Cement-Lime Setting Mortar: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion
Specification, for types of mortar indicated below:
1. Set stone with Type S mortar.
C. Pointing Mortar: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, for types of mortar
indicated. Provide pointing mortar mixed to match samples approved by engineer
and/or Landscape architect. Or complying with the following:
1. Point stone with Type N mortar.
2.010 STONE FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate stone units in sizes and shapes required to comply with
requirements indicated, including details on Drawings and Shop Drawings.
B. For granite, comply with recommendations in NBGQA’s Specifications for Architectural

Granite.
C. Cut and drill sinkages and holes in stone for anchors, fasteners, supports, and lifting
devices as indicated or needed to set stone securely in place; shape beds to fit
supports.
D. Cut stone to produce pieces of thickness, size, and shape indicated and to comply with
fabrication and construction tolerances recommended by applicable stone association
or, if none, by stone source, for faces, edges, beds, and backs.
1. Cut stone to produce joints of uniform width and in locations indicated.
2. Clean backs of stone to remove rust stains, iron particles, and stone dust.
3. Factory fabricate corner/return units as one piece using stainless steel dowel as
required, set in epoxy resin.
4. Finish exposed faces and edges of stone to comply with requirements indicated
for finish and to match approved samples and mockups.
5. Carefully inspect finished stone units at fabrication plant for compliance with
requirements for appearance, material, and fabrication. Replace defective units.
6. Grade and mark stone for overall uniform appearance when assembled in place.
Natural variations in appearance are acceptable if installed stone units match
range of colors and other appearance characteristics represented in approved
samples and mockups.
7. Fabricate units straight and true to size and shape with edges and corners
precise and true so each unit complies with the following tolerances:
a. Dimensional Tolerances:
1) Thickness: 3 mm.
2) Face dimension: 1.5 mm.
3) Face variation from rectangular: 1.5 mm.
b. Flatness Tolerances: Variation from true plane or flat surfaces as
determined by a 1.2 m dimension in any direction shall not exceed the
following tolerances:
1) Polished finishes: 1 mm.
2) Flamed finishes: 1.5 mm.
3) Bush Hammered: 3-5mm.
4) Honed Finishes: 1mm.
2.011 FINISHES
A. Stone
1. Finishes shall be uniform and non-directional unless otherwise approved.
2. Finishing shall apply to all surfaces exposed in the finished work.
3. For finish type: Refer to material schedule drawing.
2.012 SURFACE SEALER
A. Surface sealer for stone: Colorless, breathable water repellent/impregnator which will
impart water repellent properties to stone, prevent damage from soiling, fungus and
mold growth. Product shall not affect the color and physical properties of stone initially
and over time. Sealer recommended by stone fabricator and acceptable to Engineer.
Seal back surfaces and edges of stone and cut edges prior to installation. Seal front
surfaces of stone after installation
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to receive exterior stone cladding and conditions under which stone
cladding will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions
detrimental to performance of dimension stone cladding.
corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Advise installers of other work about specific requirements for placement of inserts,
flashing reglets, and similar items to be used by stone cladding Installer for anchoring
and supporting of dimension stone cladding. Furnish installers of other work with
Drawings or templates showing locations of these items.
B. Protect exterior stone cladding during erection as follows:

1. Cover tops of exterior stone cladding installation with non-staining, waterproof
sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed structures when
work is not in progress. Extend cover a minimum of 600 mm down both sides
and hold securely in place.
C. Clean the face of stone surfaces that are dirty or stained by removing soil, stains, and
foreign materials before setting. Clean stone by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes
and then drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no
caustic or harsh materials or abrasives.
3.03 SETTING STONE CLADDING, GENERAL
A. Distribute units of acceptable ranging color or texture evenly over the entire installation
to avoid patches or streaks, to produce a homogeneous blending of all units. If an
acceptable pattern or grain direction is apparent, due to natural appearance of stone, or
finishing, install units so that pattern or grain is in one direction unless otherwise
directed.

B. Panels shall not be installed in a random manner without regard to variation in color.
Any lighter panels shall not be installed immediately adjacent to darker panels.
Managed blending is required so that the transition between the light range and dark
range of the color is not noticeable. Abrupt variations are not permitted.
C. Set stone work level, plumb, square and true with uniform joints, aligned and flush with
adjacent units. Chipped, broken or blemished units shall be rejected.
D. Cooperate fully with the masonry, cast-in-place concrete and structural steel sections
and schedule this work to coordinate with the work of those sections.
E. Execute dimension stone cladding installation by skilled mechanics and employ skilled
stone fitters at Project site to do necessary field cutting as stone is set.
1. Use power saws with diamond blades to cut stone. Produce lines cut straight
and true, with edges eased slightly to prevent snipping.
F. Set stone to comply with requirements indicated on Shop Drawings. Install anchors,
supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure stone
cladding in place. Shim and adjust anchors, supports, and accessories to set stone
accurately in locations indicated with uniform joints of widths indicated and with edges
and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances.
G. Stone veins in adjacent panels shall match and shall be uni-directional.
3.04 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces of walls, and external corners do
not exceed 3 mm in 3 m, 6mm in 6 m, or 9 mm in 12 m or more.
B. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Stone Units (Lipping): Do not exceed 1.5-mm
difference between planes of adjacent units.
3.05 SETTING STONE CLADDING WITH MORTAR
A. Stone Facing around water features: Set stone by adhering to plaster backing with
water-cleanable epoxy adhesive
B. Stone Facing: Set stone by adhering to leveling mortar backing with polymer-modified
adhesive.
1. Thin Bed Method: Install latex portland cement mortar in compliance with current
revisions of ANSI A108.02 (3.11), ANSI A108.5. Use the appropriate trowel
notch size to ensure proper bedding of the stone selected. Work the latex
portland cement mortar into good contact with the substrate and comb with
notched side of trowel. Spread only as much latex portland cement mortar as
can be covered while the mortar surface is still wet and tacky. When installing
spread latex portland cement mortar onto the back of (i.e. ‘back-butter’) each
piece/sheet in addition to trowelling latex portland cement mortar over the
substrate. Beat each piece/sheet into the latex portland cement mortar with a
beating block or rubber mallet to insure full bedding and flatness. Allow
installation to set until firm. Clean excess latex portland cement mortar from
stone face and joints between pieces.
C. Fixing of stone facing units shall be in the following sequence:

1. Establish correct datum line to the floor.
2. Gauge rods are to be set up to indicate the overall measurements of a given
number of stone units with specified joint widths.
3. Integral units are to be used throughout.
4. In general, start fixing from center of the wall and proceed in accordance with
shop drawings submitted by the contractor and approved by the Engineer.
5. Joints are to be truly aligned vertically and horizontally and of 1.00 mm width
unless otherwise indicated on Drawings or directed by the Engineer.
6. Provide suitable temporary supporting at top of each slab or tile after setting in
place to lines, always maintain slabs and tiles plumb.
7. Remove temporary supports and clean face of tiles of any splash.
8. Proceed with fixing overlaying next row in the same sequence.
D. Grout stone joints to comply with ANSI A108.10 and manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Grout joints as soon as possible after initial set of setting bed. Force grout into
joints, taking care not to smear grout on adjoining stone and other surfaces.
2. Cure grout as per manufacturer’s instructions.
3.06 JOINT-SEALANT INSTALLATION
A. Prepare joints and apply sealants of type and at locations indicated to comply with
applicable requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
3.07 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
A. Upon completion of installation of the work of this Section, allow examination for cracks
and other damage and defects in the installed stone. Replace defective units.
3.08 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone, defective
joints, and dimension stone cladding that does not match approved samples and
mockups. Damaged stone may be repaired if approved.
B. Replace in a manner that results in stone cladding's matching approved samples and
mockups, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.
C. Clean exterior stone, using clean water and stiff-bristle fiber brushes. Do not use wire
brushes, acid-type cleaning agents, cleaning agents containing caustic compounds or
abrasives, or other materials or methods that could damage stone.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 32 8100
AUTOMATIC IRRIGATION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
Refer to Irrigation layout, legends, typical details and irrigation notes.
1.01 SUMMARY
A. These specifications are in addition to the local municipal automatic irrigation

specification. Incase clashes were observed, Kuwait related specification shall
supersede the information indicated in this document.
B. It is the intent of the specifications and drawings that the finished irrigation system is
complete in every aspect and shall be ready for operation satisfactory to the owner.
C. The work shall include all materials, labor, services, transportation, and equipment
necessary to perform the work as indicated on the drawings, in these specifications,
and as necessary to complete the contract.
D. Best general practice and first-class materials are to be used for all contract works
whether expressly specified, noted or implied in the contract documents or as May
otherwise be required to undertake and complete the works in accordance with the
design intent of the contract documents. the apparent silence of the specification,
drawings or other contract documents as to any detail or the apparent omission from
them of a detailed description concerning any point, shall be regarded as meaning that
only the best general practice is to be used. All interpretations of the specifications will
be made on this basis.
1.02 APPARENT CONFLICT
The contractor shall seek clarification from the Engineer for any apparent conflict or
discrepancy between drawings, specifications, irrigation bill of quantities,
manufacturer’s recommendations and other contract documents, prior to commencing
work.
1.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The contractor will work with the design team to ensure that the work is complete. Do
not proceed with any aspect of the work which is unclear or which has not been
specifically authorized by the owner.
B. Due to the scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings,
sleeves, etc., which may be required. The contractor shall carefully investigate the
structural and finished conditions affecting all of his work and plan his work
accordingly, furnishing such fittings, etc. as may be required to meet such conditions.
KEO/19-3262-0000 32 8100/1 Automatic Irrigation System
Drawings are generally diagrammatic and indicative of the work to be installed. The
work shall be installed in such a manner as to avoid conflicts between irrigation
systems, planting, and architectural features.
C. All work called for on the drawings by notes or details shall be furnished and installed
whether or not specifically mentioned in the specifications. When an item is shown on
the plans but not shown on the specifications or vice versa, it shall be deemed to be
as shown on both. The owner’s authorized representative shall have final authority for
clarification.
D. The contractor shall not willfully install the irrigation system as shown on the drawings
when it is obvious in the field that obstructions, grade differences or discrepancies in
area dimensions exist that might not have been considered in engineering. Such
obstructions or differences should be brought to the attention of the owner’s authorized
representative as soon as detected.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings and irrigation documentations

1. Mainline drawings to include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following:
a. Location of irrigation point of connection such as municipal Tie in point,
existing water tank and pump room. Indicating the pressure and flow
available.
b. Buried pressure mainline routes and sizes.
c. Suspended pressure mainline routes and sizes – to be highlighted and
coordinated with MEP services.
d. Conduit route and size.
e. Sleeves locations and sizes.
f. Solenoid valve locations, flow, size and controller name.
g. Air release, master, flush, isolation and quick coupling valve locations
and sizes.
h. Weather station location.
i. Central control system location.
2. Sprinkler drawings to include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following:
a. Sprinklers types and locations.
b. Solenoid valve's location, flow, size and controller name.
c. Buried pressure lateral routes and sizes.
d. Suspended pressurized lateral routes and sizes – to be highlighted and
e. Sleeves locations and sizes.
3. Dripline drawings to include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following:
a. Hatches showing areas to receive dripline. This is for shrubs and gourd
cover.
b. Riser locations and numbers.
c. Solenoid valve's location, flow, size and controller name.
d. Buried pressure lateral routes and sizes.
e. Suspended pressure lateral routes and sizes – to be highlighted and
f. Sleeves locations and sizes.
4. Typical installation detail drawings to include, but not necessarily be limited to,
the following:

a. Typical installation details are to be drawn for all the irrigation elements
shown on the irrigation layouts and represented by symbol in the
legends.
5. Other documentation to include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following:
a. Plant water demand.
b. Operation timing schedule including valves and stations sequences.
c. Flow break down calculation for each specified solenoid valve.
B. Material
1. All Materials described in the specifications are to be submitted for approval
2. The contractor shall submit samples of all Materials, which are proposed to be
used in the system prior to their installation.
3. Any materials installed which are not approved may be rejected and the
contractor shall replace them, at his own cost, with acceptable items.
C. As-built record drawings

1. All record drawings shall be prepared using AutoCAD drafting software. No
manually drafted as-built record drawings shall be acceptable. The contractor
may obtain digital base files from the Engineer or owner’s authorized
representative.
2. The contractor shall also provide as-built record drawing information as adobe
acrobat pdf files. All digital files shall be provided on a stable, portable data
storage device clearly marked with the project name, file descriptions and date.
3. Record accurately on one set of drawings all changes in the work constituting
departures from the original contract drawings and the actual final installed
locations of all required components.
4. Prior to final inspection of work, submit record drawings to the Engineer or
owner’s authorized representative for review. Submit the as-built record
drawings plotted onto full sized, bond paper sheets for review by the Engineer
or owner’s authorized representative.
D. Operation and maintenance manual

1. Two individually bound copies of operation and maintenance manuals shall be
delivered to the Engineer or owner’s authorized representative at least 10
calendar days prior to final inspection. The manuals shall describe the material
installed and the proper operation of the irrigation system.
2. Each complete, bound manual shall include the following information:
a. Index sheet stating contractor's address and telephone number, duration
of guarantee period, list of equipment including names and addresses of
local manufacturer’s representatives.
b. Operating and maintenance instructions for all equipment.
c. Spare parts list and related manufacturer’s information for all equipment.
1.05 INSPECTIONS
A. The contractor shall permit the Engineer and owner’s authorized representative to visit
and inspect at all times any part of the work and shall provide safe access for such
visits.
B. The contractor shall be solely responsible for notifying the architect, owner, and
governing agencies, a minimum of 48 hours in advance, where and when the work is
ready for testing. Should any work be covered without testing or acceptance, it shall
be, if so ordered, uncovered at the contractor's expense.
C. Inspections will be required for the following at a minimum:
1. System layout.
2. Pressure test of irrigation mainline (2 hours at 8.62 bars (125 psi) or 120% of
static water pressure, whichever is greater.) mainline pressure loss during test
shall not exceed 0.14 bars (2 psi).
3. Final inspection prior to start of maintenance period.
4. Final inspection prior to turnover.
D. Site observations and testing will not commence without the field record drawings as
prepared by the contractor. Record drawings must complete and up to date for each
site visit.
E. Work that fails testing and is not accepted will be retested. Hourly rates and expenses
of the architect, owner’s authorized representative, and governing agencies for re-
inspection or retesting will be paid by the contractor at no additional expense to owner.
1.06 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. The contractor shall verify and be familiar with the locations, sizes and details of points
of connection provided as the source of water and electrical supply to the irrigation
system.
B. The contractor shall verify and be familiar with the existing irrigation systems in areas
adjacent to and within the project area of work.
C. Irrigation design is based on the available dynamic water pressure and flow shown on
the drawings. Contractor shall verify water pressure and flow on the project prior to the
start of construction. Should a discrepancy exist, notify the Engineer and owner has
authorized representative prior to beginning construction.
D. The contractor shall protect all existing utilities and features to remain on and adjacent
to the project site during construction. Contractor shall repair, at his own cost; all
damage resulting from his operations or negligence.
E. The irrigation contractor shall coordinate with the general contractor for installation of
required sleeves.
F. Prior to cutting into the soil, the contractor shall locate all cables, conduits, sewer septic
tanks, and other utilities as are commonly encountered underground and he shall take
proper precautions not to damage or disturb such improvements. If a conflict exists
between such obstacles and the proposed work, the contractor shall promptly notify
the Engineer and owner’s authorized representative, who will arrange for relocations.
The contractor will proceed in the same manner if a rock layer or any other such
conditions are encountered.
G. Contractor shall notify owner’s authorized representative if any existing system is

temporarily shut off, capped or modified. Provide 48-hour notice, prior to turning off or
modifying any existing irrigation system.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCES
A. All materials supplied for this project shall be new and free from any defects. All
defective materials shall be replaced immediately at no additional cost to the owner.

B. Manufacturer’s recommendations shall be followed in all cases.
C. Provide at least one English speaking person who shall be present at all times during
execution of this portion of the work and who shall be thoroughly familiar with the type
of materials being installed and the manufacturer's recommended methods of
installation and who shall direct all work performed under this section.
D. All local and municipal laws, rules and regulations governing or relating to any portion
of this work are hereby incorporated into and made a part of these specifications, and
their provisions shall be carried out by the contractor. Anything contained in these
specifications shall not be construed to conflict with any of the above rules and
regulations. However, when these specifications and drawings call for or describe
materials, workmanship, or construction of a better quality, higher standard, or larger
size than is required by the above rules and regulations, the provisions of these
specifications and drawings shall take precedence.
E. The contractor shall secure the required licenses and permits including payments of
charges and fees, give required notices to public authorities, verify permits secured or
arrangements made by others affecting the work of this section.
1.08 CLEAN UP AND DISPOSAL
A. Dispose of waste, trash, and debris shall be done in accordance with applicable laws
and ordinances and as prescribed by authorities.
B. Burning of trash and debris will not be permitted.
C. The contractor shall remove and dispose of rubbish and debris generated by his work
at frequent intervals or when ordered to do so by the owner’s authorized
representative.
D. At the time of completion, the entire site shall be cleared of tools, equipment, rubbish
and debris, which shall be disposed of off-site in a legal disposal area.
1.09 COMPLETION
A. At the time of the pre-maintenance period inspection, the architect, owner’s authorized
representative, and governing agencies will inspect the work, and if not accepted, will
prepare a list of items to be completed by the contractor. Punch list to be checked off
by contractor and submitted to the Engineer or owner’s authorized representative prior
to any follow-up meeting. This checked off list to indicate that all punch list items have
been incomplete. At the time of the post-maintenance period, the work will be re-
inspected and final acceptance will be made in writing by the architect, owner has
authorized representative, and governing agencies.
B. Any settling of trenches which may occur during the one-year period following
acceptance shall be repaired to the owner's satisfaction by the contractor without any
additional expense to the owner. Repairs shall include the complete restoration of all
damage to planting, paving or other improvements of any kind because of the settling
and subsequent repair work.
C. The owner’s authorized representative shall have the final authority on approving and
accepting all portions of the work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 INLINE FILTER– SECONDARY FILTRATION
A. Type: Screen
B. Standard: NA
C. Material:
1. Body: Plastic
2. Frame Polypropylene
3. Screen: Stainless steel 316
D. Flow rate:
Filter Size Up to Flow Rate (gpm)
1” 26
1.5” 88
2” 110
E. Manual screen removal Yes
F. Operating pressure: 8 bar
G. Filtration: 120 mesh
H. Size: 1,1.5 and 2 Inch
I. Housing dimensions:
Filter Size Depth (cm) Width (cm)
1” 17 19
1.5” 24 16
2” 25 27
J. Warranty: 3 years
2.02 UPVC PRESSURE PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Pipe:
1. Standard: BS EN ISO 1452-2:2009
2. Kitemark™ Approved: Yes
3. Class E&D
4. Joint:
A. Solvent Cements
B. Push Fit
5. Preferred color: Dark grey.
6. Preferred pipe segment length: 6m.
7. Warranty: 10 years
B. Fittings:
1. Standard: BS EN ISO 1452-3:2010
2. Kitemark™ Approved: Yes
2.03 UPVC SLEEVE
A. Standard: BS 3506:1969
B. Class: C
C. Preferred color: Black
D. Preferred pipe segment length: 6m
E. Warranty: 10 years
2.04 UPVC CONDUIT
A. Standard: BS 3506:1969
B. Class: E
C. Preferred color: Black
D. Preferred pipe segment length: 6m.
E. Warranty: 10 years
2.05 LDPE PIPELINE
A. Standard: BS1972-67
B. Material: LDPE
C. Class: C
D. Carbon black content: Min 2.8%
E. Color: Black
F. Size: ½”
G. Warranty: 5 years
2.06 STAPLE STAKE
A. Type: Support stake
B. Material: Polypropylene
C. Size: length: 22 cm
D. Warranty: 1 year
2.07 WARNING TAPE
A. Type: Detectable warning tape
B. Material: Polyester, aluminum foil and polyethylene
C. Color: Orange tape and black text
D. Chemical resistant: Yes
E. Text In Arabic and English: Yes
F. Minimum width: 150mm.
G. Warranty: 5 year
2.08 GATE VALVE - FLANGED
A. Type: Ductile iron, Short Body
B. Standard:
1. Body: EN-GJS-400-18
2. Bonnet: EN-GJS-400-18
3. Coating: 300 µ
4. Wedge: EN-GJS-400-18
5. Spindle: ST 1.4021
6. Flanges: BS EN 1092-2:1997
7. Test: EN1074
C. Pressure nominal: 16 bar
D. Stem: Non rising
E. Face to Face Short
F. Sizes: DN 50 to DN 200
G. Warranty: 10 years
2.09 GATE VALVE - THREADED
A. Type: Ductile iron , Short body
B. Standard
1. Body: EN-GIS-400-18
2. Bonnet: EN-GIS-400-18
3. Coating: 300 µ
4. Wedge: EN-GIS-400-18
5. Spindle: ST 1.4021
6. Threads: ISO 228
7. Test: EN1074
C. Pressure nominal: 16 bar
D. Close direction: Clockwise

E. Stem: Non rising
F. Warranty: 10 years
2.010 AIR RELEASE VALVE -FLANGED
A. Type: Double orifice
B. Standard:
1. Flange: BSEN 1092-2
2. Coating: DIN30677-2
C. Material:
1. Body: Coated ductile iron
2. Bonnet: Coated ductile iron
3. Bolts and nuts: Stainless steel
4. Gasket: EPDM
D. PN: 16 bar
E. Weight 24 kg
2.011 AIR RELEASE VALVE- THREADED
A. Type: Automatic, Single Orifice
B. Standard: NA
C. Material:
1. Body: Polyoxymethylen
2. Float: Polyoxymethylen
3. Seal: Elastomer
4. Orifice: Brass
5. Valve Plug Brass
6. Valve Seat: Brass
D. PN: 6 bar
E. Weight: 0.9 kg
2.012 SOLENOID VALVE
A. Valve:
1. Type: Forward flow design
2. Normally: Closed
3. Material:
a. Body: Glass filled nylon
b. Bonnet: Glass filled nylon
c. Diaphragm: EPDM
d. Bolt and nut: Stainless steel
4. Activation: Electric
5. Flow: 5-220 gpm
6. Maximum operating pressure: 220 psi
7. Burst pressure: 750 psi
8. Manual flow control: Yes
9. Special port for the solenoid: Yes
10. Self-cleaning metering rod: Yes
11. Internal & external manual bleed: Yes
12. Built in Schrader valve: Yes
B. Pressure regulator:
1. Serviceable under pressure Yes
2. Dial design Yes
3. Size: NA
2.013 QUICK COUPLING VALVE
A. Type: One-piece body design.
B. Material:
1. Body: Brass
2. Spring: Stainless steel
C. Nominal working pressure: 0.35 - 8 bar
D. Flow range: Starts from 10 gpm
E. Accessories to include:
Locking cover, hose swivel, key & hose
F. Warranty 3 years
2.014 IRRIGATION CONTROLLER
A. Power: Mains
B. Material: Plastic
C. Base station capacity: 100
D. Simultaneous station operation 15
E. Program number 99
F. Supports up to
1. 8 master valves. Yes
2. 8 flow sensors. Yes
G. Central control capable Yes
H. Learn flow Yes

I. Removable front panel Yes
J. Communication Cartridge integrated 4G cellular cartridge
K. Sim card integrated Yes
L. One year service data Yes
M. Warranty: 3 years
2.015 IRRIGATION SOFTWARE
A. Type Cloud
B. Control an unlimited number of unit Yes
C. Automatic software upgrade Yes
D. ET management /Global Weather Yes
E. Automated flow Email alarm Yes
F. PIN code protection Yes
G. The controller shall have also the following features:

1. All controller functions can be carried out from the central.
2. The ability to accept or reject programming changes made at the controllers by
field operators.
3. Administrators and users can be defined to allow access from the software to
specific controllers for specific people.
2.016 FLOW SENSOR
A. Impeller GFN
B. Inline type Yes
C. Electrical connection 18AWG
D. Compatible with the irrigation controller Yes
E. Designed for outdoor application Yes
F. Operating pressure 7 bar
G. Accuracy: ± 1%
H. Velocity: (0,15 - 9,2 meters) per second
I. Output: Pulse
J. Warranty: 1 Year
2.017 CABLES
A. Type: Irrigation control cable UF
B. Standard: UL listed
C. Material:
1. Insulation: Polyvinyl Chloride
2. Jacket: Impregnated Polyethylene
3. Conductor: Copper
D. Number of conductors: 2
E. Inner conductors rating: Up to 600 V
F. Temperature rating: -55° C to +60° C
G. Size: 14 AWG
H. Warranty: 1 year.
2.018 WIRE CONNECTOR
A. Type: Direct bury splice kit
B. Standard: NA
C. Material: Polypropylene
D. Rated: 600 volts.
E. Operating temperature: Up to 105°c.
F. Dimension:
1. Length: 9.4 cm
2. Diameter: 2.5 cm
G. Warranty: 1 year
2.019 POP-UP SPRAY SPRINKLER WITH ROTARY NOZZLE
A. Body:
1. Type: Pop up
2. Standard: NA
3. Material:
a. Body: Plastic
b. Stem: Plastic
c. Screen: Plastic
d. Spring: Stainless steel
e. Wiper seal: Elastomer
4. Built in:
a. Pressure regulator
b. Check valve
c. Two piece ratcheting mechanism
5. Debris pockets Yes
6. Zero flush seal on pop up Yes
7. Pre-installed flush plug Yes
8. Dimension:
a. Body height: 6”
b. Pop up height: 4”
c. Exposed diameter: 2.25”
d. Inlet: 0.5”
9. Female Threads Inlet Yes
B. Nozzle:
1. Type: MPR Rotary
2. Radius: 4 to 5.5 m and 5.5 to 7.5 m
3. Material:
a. Nozzle: Plastic
b. Filter: Plastic
c. Adjustment screw: Stainless steel
4. Optimum Operating Pressure 2.5 bar
5. Precipitation rate 15.2 mm/h
6. The angel of trajectory 1 to 30 degree
7. Radius reduction Yes
8. Removable screen filter Yes
9. Color coded Yes
2.020 POP-UP SPRAY SPRINKLER WITH BUBBLER
A. Body:
1. Type: Pop up
2. Standard: NA
3. Material:
a. Body: Plastic
b. Stem: Plastic
c. Screen: Plastic
d. Spring: Stainless steel
e. Wiper seal: Elastomer
4. Built in:
a. Pressure regulator
b. Check valve
c. Two piece ratcheting mechanism
5. Debris pockets Yes
6. Zero flush seal on pop up Yes
7. Pre-installed flush plug Yes
8. Dimension:
a. Body height: 6”
b. Pop up height: 4”
c. Exposed diameter: 2.25”
B. Bubbler:
1. Type: Pressure compensating
2. Flow: 0.25, and 0.5 gpm
3. Threads Female
4. Warranty: 1 year
2.021 ROOT WATERING SYSTEM
A. Basket:
1. Material Polyethylene
2. Length: 45 cm
3. Width 10 cm
4. Rigid mesh material Yes
5. Integrated bubbler Yes
6. Pre-configured with swing joint Yes
B. Grate
1. Material Polyethylene
2. Size 10 cm
3. Locking grate cover Yes
C. Bubbler:
1. Type: Pressure compensating
2. Check valve Yes
3. Flow: 0.25, and 0.5 gpm
4. Warranty: 1 year
2.022 ONLINE EMITTER FOR SUCCULENT
A. Type: Pressure compensating
B. Standard NA
C. Operating range – pressure: 1 to 3.5 bar
D. Self-flushing: Yes
E. UV-resistant Yes
F. Filtration required 150 to 200 MESH
G. Color coded Yes
H. Emitter discharge 1 AND 2gph
I. Barbed outlet retain 0.25” tubing Yes
2.023 ON SURFACE INLINE DRIP TUBING AND FITTINGS
A. Inline emitter:
1. Type: Inline
2. Standard ISO 9261:2004
3. Material: Plastic
4. Pressure compensating Yes
5. Flow Type Turbulent
6. Self-flushing Yes
7. Clogging resistant Yes
8. Constant flow range 0-60⁰
9. Coefficient of variation <5%
10. Operating pressure: 0.5 – 4.5 bar
11. Required filtration: 150 mesh
12. Flow: 3.5 l/h AND 2.4 l/h
13. Spacing 30.5 & 46 cm
B. Drip tubing:
1. Type: Drip tubing
2. Standard ISO 9261:2004
3. Material: LDPE
4. Minimum carbon black 2.8%
5. OD 16 mm
6. WTH 1.1 mm
C. Fittings:
1. Type Bush
2. Standard: NA
3. Material: High impact plastic & ABS
4. UV-resistant: Yes
5. Warranty: 3 Years
2.024 SUB-SURFACE INLINE DRIP TUBING, FITTINGS AND ACCESSORES
A. Inline emitter:
1. Type: Inline emitter
2. Standard: NA
3. Material:
A. Body: Polyethylene blend
B. Cover: Polyethylene blend
C. Diaphragm: Silicone
D. Copper Chip: Pure copper
4. Pressure compensating Yes
5. Flow Type Turbulent
6. Self-flushing Yes
7. Copper shield technology Yes
8. Clogging resistant Yes
9. Constant flow range 4-43⁰
10. Coefficient of variation <5%
11. Operating pressure: 0.58 – 4.14 bar
12. Required filtration Min: 120 mesh
13. Flow: 0.92 gph
14. Spacing 30 .5 cm
B. Drip tubing:
1. Type: Drip tubing
2. Standard NA
3. Material: LDPE
4. Minimum carbon black: UV protection
5. OD: 16 mm
6. WTH: 1.2 mm
C. Fittings
1. Type Insert
2. Standard NA
3. Material: Acetal thermoplastic
4. UV-resistant: Yes
D. Auxiliary equipment:
1. Operation indicator.
2. Secondary filtration.
3. Quick coupling valve.
4. Flush valve.
2.025 VALVE BOXES
A. Type: Grade Level
B. Standard NA
C. Loading Capabilities: 15 KN
D. Material:
1. Body & Cover: Nitrogen Foamed HDPE
2. Bolt and nut: Stainless steel
3. Identification tag: Aluminum
E. Duty: Light
F. Bolt Hex-bolt
G. Ultraviolet resistant property: Yes
H. Cover Type T type
I. Green color body and cover: Yes
J. Chemical resistant: Yes
K. Labeled in Arabic and English: Yes
L. Dimension:
Model No Length (cm) x Width (cm) Depth (cm) Application

910-10 25 DIA 25 Pull Box and Quick Coupling
Valve
1419-12 43 x 30 31 1.0” Solenoid valve Assembly
1.5” Solenoid valve Assembly
1324-15 64 x 40 39 2” Solenoid valve Assembly
1730-18 83 x 48 48 3” Solenoid valve Assembly

M. Warranty: 10 year
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Inspections:
1. Examine surfaces, substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements
of other sections in which that related work is specified, and determine if
surfaces, substrates not proceed with work of this Section until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. Starting
installation constitutes acceptance of surfaces substrates and conditions.
2. Verify that irrigation system may be installed in strict accordance with all
pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, the referenced standards,
and the manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Discrepancies:
1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Engineer or Owner’s
Authorized Representative.
2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all discrepancies
have been resolved.
C. Grades:
1. Before starting work, carefully check all grades to determine that work may
safely proceed, keeping within the specified material depths with respect to
finish grade 2. Final grades shall be accepted by the Engineer and Owner’s
Authorized Representative before work on this section will be allowed to begin.
D. Field Measurements:
1. Make all necessary measurements in the field to ensure precise fit of items in
accordance with the original design. Contractor shall coordinate the installation
of all Irrigation materials with all other work.
2. All scaled dimensions are approximate. The Contractor shall check and verify
all size dimensions prior to proceeding with work under this section.
3. Exercise extreme care in excavating and working near existing utilities.
Contractor shall be responsible for damages to utilities, which are caused by
his operations or neglect.
E. Diagrammatic Intent:
The Drawings are essentially diagrammatic. The size and location of equipment
and fixtures are drawn to scale where possible. Provide offsets in piping and
changes in equipment locations as necessary to conform to structures and to
avoid obstructions or conflicts with other work at no additional expense to
Owner.
F. Layout:
1. Prior to installation, the Contractor shall stake out all pressure supply lines,
routing and location of sprinkler heads, valves, points of connection, and
automatic controllers.
2. Layout irrigation system and make minor adjustments required due to
differences between Site and Drawings. Where piping is shown on Drawings
under paved areas, but running parallel and adjacent to planted areas, install
the piping in the planted areas.
G. Water Supply:
1. Prior to starting work, the Contractor shall verify the locations, sizes and type
of water connections provided for the irrigation connection. In the event of
discrepancy, immediately notify the Engineer or Owner’s Authorized
Representative.
2. Connections to, or the installation of, the water supply shall be at the locations
shown on the Drawings. Minor changes caused by actual site conditions shall
be made at no additional expense to Owner.
3.02 PIPING
A. Piping under existing pavement may be installed by jacking, boring, or hydraulic

driving. No hydraulic driving is permitted under asphalt pavement. Cutting or breaking
of existing pavement is not permitted.
B. Carefully inspect all pipe and fittings before installation, removing dirt, scale, burrs,
and reaming. Install pipe with all markings up for visual inspection and verification.
C. Remove and discard all dented and damaged pipe sections.
D. All lines shall have a minimum clearance of 100mm from each other and 300mm from
the lines of other trades.
E. Parallel lines shall not be installed directly over each other.
F. In solvent welding, use only the specified primer and solvent cement and make all
joints with accordance with the manufacturer's recommended methods including
wiping all excess solvent from each weld. Allow solvent welds at least 15 minutes
setup time before moving or handling and 24 hours curing time before filling.
G. Center load all plastic pipe prior to pressure testing.
H. All threaded plastic-to-plastic connections shall be assembled using Teflon tape or

Teflon paste.
I. For plastic-to-metal connections, work the metal connections first. Use a non-
hardening pipe dope an all threaded plastic-to-metal connections, except where noted
otherwise. All plastic-to-metal connections shall be made with metal female adapters.
3.03 CONTROLLER
A. The exact location of the controller shall be approved by the Engineer or Owner’s
Authorized Representative before installation. The electrical service shall be
coordinated with this location.
B. The controllers shall be installed as indicated on the Drawings and as recommended

by the manufacturer.
C. The contractor shall be responsible for the final electrical hook up to the irrigation
controller.
D. The contractor shall ground the controller as per the manufacturer’s

recommendations. Contractor shall provide resistance testing to prove that the
grounding measures installed meet with the manufacturer’s requirements.
E. The contractor shall provide for the initial programming of the controllers.
3.04 CONTROL WIRING
A. Low voltage control wiring shall occupy the same trench and shall be installed along
the same route as the pressure supply lines whenever possible. When routing with the
mainline is not possible, the control wiring shall be installed at the same depth below
grade as the mainline piping. More than one wire is placed in a trench; the wiring shall
be taped together in a bundle at intervals of 3m. Bundle shall be secured to the
mainline with tape at intervals of 6m.
B. All connections shall be of an approved type and shall occur in a valve box. Provide
a 900mm service loop at each connection.
3.05 VALVES
A. Gate valves, ball valves, check valves, automatic control valves, quick coupler valves,
and air release valves shall be installed as indicated on the Drawings and as per
manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Valve shall be installed in gravel, sand and shrub areas whenever possible and away
from other existing utility services.
C. Install all valves as indicated in the detail drawings.
3.06 VALVE BOXES
A. Valve boxes shall be installed as indicated on the Drawings and as per manufacturer’s
recommendations.
B. Valve boxes shall be installed in gravel, sand and shrub areas whenever possible and
away from other existing utility services
C. Each valve box shall be installed on a foundation of 20 mm gravel backfill, 0.06 cubic
meters minimum. The gravel shall be installed on top of a single layer of landscape
fabric and the fabric shall be wrapped up and over all outlets on the box sides to
prevent soil and sand from entering the valve box.
D. Valve boxes shall be installed with their tops 15 mm above the surface of surrounding
finish grade in lawn areas and 80mm above finish grade in ground cover areas.
E. Valve boxes shall be aligned and spaced evenly as indicated on the Drawings. All
valve boxes shall be installed with their edges parallel to all adjacent boxes. When
installed adjacent to paving or hardscape, the boxes shall be aligned parallel to the
hardscape and installed with offsets as indicated in the Drawings.
F. Valve boxes shall be secured with the required locking bolts, nuts and washers prior
to final turnover.
G. Valve boxes shall be left unlocked during testing and inspection.
3.07 IRRIGATION HEADS AND DRIP TUBING

A. Irrigation heads and drip tubing shall be installed as indicated on the Drawings and as
per manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Sprinkler nozzles shall be as indicated on the Drawings and as per manufacturer’s

recommendations. The Contractor shall replace all incorrectly installed nozzles at the
Architects direction at no additional cost to the owner.
C. Sprinkler heads shall be adjusted to completely cover the landscape area, providing
100% head-to-head coverage. Sprinkler heads shall be adjusted to prevent overspray
onto adjacent paving, buildings, walls and trees.
D. Drip tubing shall be staked in place using jute staples to prevent movement of the
tubing during back filling of the plant pits.
E. Spacing of heads and drip tubing shall not exceed maximum recommended by the
manufacturer.
3.08 DRIP IRRIGATION EQUIPMENT
A. Drip irrigation equipment shall be installed as per manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Drip system Y filters shall be clean frequently during the maintenance period to remove
rocks, sand and pipe cutting debris from the filter element.
3.09 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
Miscellaneous equipment shall be installed as per the manufacturer’s

recommendations.
3.010 FLUSHING THE SYSTEM
A. Prior to installation of irrigation heads and drip rings, the valves shall be opened and
a full head of water used to flush out the lines and risers.
B. Irrigation heads shall be installed after flushing the system has been completed.
C. Drip systems with flush valves shall be flushed immediately after the installation of the
drip tubing to insure removal of any debris in the pipelines.
3.011 ADJUSTING THE SYSTEM
A. Contractor shall adjust pressure regulators on the automatic control valves, align all
heads, and check the coverage of each system prior to coverage test.
B. The water pressure at the automatic control valve shall be adjusted to provide the
operating pressure indicated in the drawings at the farthest and highest head on the
valve zone.
C. If it is determined by the Engineer or Owner’s Authorized Representative that

additional adjustments or nozzle changes will be required to provide proper coverage,
all necessary changes or adjustments shall be made prior to any planting, and at no
expense to the Owner.

D. The entire system shall be operating properly before any planting operations
commence.
E. Automatic control valves are to be adjusted so that the drip tubing operates at the
pressure recommended by the manufacturer.
3.012 TESTING AND OBSERVATION
A. Do not allow or cause any of the work of this section to be covered up or enclosed
until it has been observed, tested and accepted by the Architect, Owner’s Authorized
Representative, and governing agencies.
B. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for notifying the Architect, Owner’s
Authorized Representative, and governing agencies, a minimum of 48 hours in
advance, where and when the work is ready for testing.
C. All constant pressure mainline piping shall be pressure tested. Pipes shall be tested
after center loading and generally with joints exposed. Center loading shall be
sufficient to prevent buckling or deformation due to application of pressure. Pressure
testing pressures and test duration shall be as indicated in these Specifications.
D. All mainline fittings shall be left exposed for the purpose of this test and shall be
inspected for evidence of leakage. Any major breaks in the mainline requiring
shutdown of the test shall cause the test to be re-run entirely.
E. When the irrigation system is completed, the Contractor shall perform a coverage test
of each system in its entirety to determine if the water coverage for the planted areas
is complete and adequate in the presence of the Architect. Coverage testing for
overhead spray irrigated areas shall be performed prior to any planting. Drip system
coverage testing shall be performed after the installation of the irrigation system and
planting.
F. The Contractor shall furnish all materials and perform all work required to correct any
inadequacies of coverage due to deviations from the plans, or where the system has
been willfully installed as indicated on the Drawings when it is obviously inadequate,
without bringing this to the attention of the Architect. The Engineer shall accept this
test and Owner’s Authorized Representative and accomplished before starting any
planting.
G. Each item of electrical equipment, cable and complete system shall be thoroughly
inspected and tested before finally placing in service under the full responsibility of the
Contractor. All tests shall be made in compliance with respective regulations,
recommendations and standards.
H. Any modifications or repairs deemed necessary upon completion of the tests should
be executed at the Contractor's expenses. Further tests shall be carried out on any
modified or repaired equipment until it is certified trouble free and acceptable for its
intended service. All testing shall be demonstrated to the Consultant in a timely
manner, mutually to be agreed.
I. Final inspection, pre-maintenance, will not commence without the hand drawn, field
copy as-built record drawings as prepared by the Contractor. Final inspection, pre-
turnover, will not commence without the AutoCAD based as-built record drawings as
prepared by the Contractor.
J. Final inspection, pre-turnover, will not commence without the required Contractor
turnover items indicated in the Specifications.
3.013 MAINTENANCE
A. During the maintenance period, the Contractor shall adjust and maintain the irrigation
system in an operational condition providing complete irrigation coverage to all
intended plantings.
B. During the maintenance period, the contractor shall clean and flush all drip system and
Y filters on a monthly basis.
3.014 COMPLETION CLEANING
A. Clean up shall be made as each portion of the work progresses. Refuse and excess
dirt shall be removed from the site, all walks and paving shall be broomed, and any
damage sustained on the work of others shall be repaired to original conditions.
B. Prior to final turnover, the Contractor shall provide a final cleanup of the site to the
satisfaction of the Engineer and the Owner’s Authorized Representative.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 32 9100
PLANTING PREPARATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Preparing planting areas as indicated on the plans and within the specifications.
B. The work specified in this section includes:

1. The removal of debris from the planter bed areas;
2. The supply and installation of temporary screens to planting areas as required;
3. Protection of existing works during construction;
4. The supply and installation of soil mix to all planter beds as shown on the
drawings.
A. Section 03 3100 - Structural Concrete.
B. Section 03 4000 - Precast Concrete.
C. Section 12 9300 - Site Furnishings.
D. Section 31 0000 - Earthworks
E. Section 32 1500 - Aggregate Surfacing.
F. Section 32 8000 - Irrigation System.
G. Section 32 9300 - Plants.
H. Section 32 9400 - Planting Accessories.
1.03 SAMPLE AREA AND INSPECTION
A. The Contractor shall arrange for the Engineer to inspect a sample area of minimum 3m2
installed planting medium for approval.
B. The Contractor shall arrange for the Engineer to inspect all levels for approval prior to
installation of irrigation.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall provide documents to the Engineer demonstrating supply of

planting medium according to this specification.
KEO/19-3262-0000 32 9100/1 Planting Preparation
B. The Contractor shall submit manufacturer’s certified analysis of all standard products,
including soil, fertilizers, peat, seed, inorganic and organic mulches and pesticides.
C. Samples:Submit samples of :
1. Agricultural Soil: 1 Kg.
2. Organic Soil Amendments; 0.25 Kg of each specified.
3. Inorganic Soil Amendments; 0.25 Kg of each specified.
4. Water: samples of landscape waters in use shall be submitted, as required for
suitability analysis of irrigation water.
D. Soils reports are to be submitted by the Contractor for all soils to be used for
landscaping purposes in the work. The Contractor shall arrange for an approved
independent analyst to prepare a physical and chemical analysis of the soil and
irrigation water to be used. The analysis shall also provide recommendations on soil
amendments and fertilizer applications. The report shall be submitted to the Engineer for
review and approval before soil is placed. In the case of imported soil, the report shall
be submitted at least 10 days prior to delivery to the site. The report shall identify the
source(s) from which imported soils are to be furnished. At a minimum, the soil shall be
analyzed for:
1. total salts (electro-conductivity of soil solution)
2. soil pH
3. exchangeable sodium, calcium, magnesium and potassium
4. available phosphates
5. organic matter as a percentage
6. available zinc, manganese, iron and boron and other trace elements
7. total sulphates
E. The soil analysis shall provide a recommendation for fertilizers and other amendment
requirements and quantities which when incorporated with the soil will provide the
required nutrient levels for vigorous plant growth.
F. During installation, soil samples shall be taken at the rate of one in every 20 delivered
loads or as directed by the Engineer, and analyzed. The results will be compared with
the original samples to ensure consistency and compatibility of supply.
1.05 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. The performance of the Contractor may be measured by the Employer or nominated

representative for future reference by the following criteria:
B. All planter preparation is supplied and installed in accordance with the relevant
specifications in this division 32.
A. Perform work with personnel with minimum five years experience in the work required of
this Section under direction of a skilled foreman.
B. All landscape materials shall be shipped with certificates of inspection as required by the
Engineer. All product manufacturer’s certified analysis for standard packaged products
used in the landscape planting work shall be submitted to the Engineer for review.

C. Soil-Testing Laboratory Qualifications: An independent laboratory with the experience
and capability to conduct the testing indicated and that specializes in types of tests to be
performed.
D. Topsoil Analysis: Furnish soil analysis by a qualified soil-testing laboratory stating

percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content; cation exchange
capacity; sodium absorption ratio; deleterious material; pH; and mineral and plant-
nutrient content of topsoil.
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.01 SOIL COMPOSITION
A. Soil shall be obtained from well drained arable land approved by the Engineer before its
use. It shall be free draining, non-toxic and capable of sustaining healthy plant growth.
Soil shall not contain calcium carbonate, subsoil, refuse, roots, noxious weeds,
phytotoxic materials, rocks, sticks, brush, litter, construction debris or any other
deleterious materials. Soil shall be supplied from approved resources from the
Municipality.
B. Agricultural Soil: Obtain the agricultural soil component of the planting soil mix from one
approved source. It shall conform to the following physical and chemical characteristics:
1. Physical Characteristics
a. Material passing a No. 10 sieve 100%
b. Material passing a No. 35 sieve 90 - 100%
c. Material passing a No. 140 sieve 0 - 10%
d. Material passing a No. 270 sieve 0 - 3%
2. Chemical Characteristics
a. Salinity (ECe x 1000) less than 2
b. SAR (Sodium Absorption Ratio) less than 1
c. Boron (saturation extract) less than 0.5 ppm
d. PH less than 8.0
3. Organic Amendment:
a. Physical Characteristics
1) Material passing 9.51mm (3/8") sieve 100%
2) Material passing 6.35mm (1/4") sieve 90 - 100%
3) Material passing 2.38mm (No. 8) sieve 50 - 60%
4) Material passing 0.50mm (No.35) sieve 0 - 20%
5) Bulk Density 300 - 400 kg/m3
b. Chemical Characteristics
1) Organic Matter greater than 85%
2) PH 5.0 - 6.5
3) Salinity (ECe x 1000) 0.5 - 2.0
4) Total Nitrogen 0.7 - 2.0
5) Available Phosphorous 100 - 500 ppm
6) CEC (meq/100 gms) 80 - 120 ppm
7) Boron (by hot water extraction) less than 5 ppm
8) SAR less than 2.0
9) Organic amendment shall be one of the following or approved
equal in manufacturer’s sealed containers and shall be nitrogen
stabilized.

a) Shredded Coconut Fiber: Coconut fiber shall be finely
shredded coconut fibre pith free from chemical additives,
sterilents and shall have more than 98% organic matter.
b) Sphagnum Peat: Peat shall have a PH from 3.7 to 5.5
depending on Ph of soil.
C. SOIL SAMPLES
1. Upon identification of every source of soil, representative samples of soil shall be
analysed for all the above characteristics and results compared with those from
the original sample. These results will then be submitted to the Engineer.
D. STORAGE
1. Soil shall be stored in heaps no greater than one and a half metres high. Soil
heaps shall be protected from undue compaction and no construction or waste
material shall be stored on or mixed with the soil.
E. Compound fertilizer: NPK 15:15:15 +Fe + Te (Trace Elements) added at a rate of 2

kg/m3 of a approved manufacturer.
F. Micronutrients shall be copper sulphate, zice sulphate, manganese sulphate, ferrous

sulphate.
G. Superphosphate Fertilizer: Single superphosphate with a minimum content of 18%

P205.
H. Soil Sulphur: Finely ground agricultural sulphur of not less than 90% purity.
I. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-

insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium.
J. Herbicide: As approved.
K. The planting soil mix for all types of planting shall be:
1. Agricultural Soil 75% by volume
2. Organic Soil Amendment 25% by volume
3. 1 kg/cu metre soil sulphur.
4. 2 kg/cu metre fertilizer.
L. Soil mixes will conform to the following requirements:

1. Salinity (ECe x 1000) less than 4.0
2. SAR less than 4.0
3. pH 6.5 to 7.5
4. Boron (by saturation extract) less than 1.0ppm
M. Soil Mixing Procedure:

1. Mix physical ingredients to a uniform mixture. The organic portion should be
moist (50% moisture content as received basis) but not overly wet to the point
where fertilizer particles cling to it. The agricultural soil should be moist (1 to 2%)
but not wet.
2. Mix fertilizer ingredients until homogeneous.
3. Apply fertilizer ingredients to the physical mixture and mix until homogeneous.
4. The resultant mix should be moistened to about 5-10%. The mix should be
covered if not to be utilized immediately. Soil mixes should not be stored for
periods longer than two (2) weeks.

N. Mix specified soil additives with soil at the rates specified. The soil shall be mixed
mechanically by an approved method to create a homogeneous mixture and a one-
kilogram sample of each batch shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. The
planting medium should be mixed prior to placement, stockpiled on site and protected
from any potential contamination.
O. Planting medium shall be applied in 300mm lightly compacted layers.
P. SOIL AMENDMENT / SOIL ADDITIVE FOR MOISTURE RETENTION

1. The soil additive shall be fully natural. No content of organic or synthetic
polymers, co-polymers or pozzolans shall be allowed.
2. The soil additive must not have any swelling properties.
3. The moisture retaining soil additive shall have a proven, successful history in the
UAE for at least 5 years.
4. Minimum 380 % WHC (Water Holding Capacity) is requested
5. The soil additive shall effectively reduce the consumption of irrigation water by
50% minimum for a period of at least 10 years.
6. Minimum 30 Meq/100gr CEC (cationic exchange capacity) is requested in order
to increase the storage capacity of the soil for the important nutrition elements.
7. High content on nutrition elements (N,P,K,Ca,Mg) and optimal concentration on
micro and trace elements (Fe, Mn, Mo, B, Zn, Cu) .
8. Supplier and Contractor’s Supervising Engineer need to be in attendance of
mixing and spreading of moisture retaining soil additive.
9. The soil additive shall be fully natural and should not contain organic or synthetic
polymers or co-polymers and should conform to the moisture retaining soil
additive properties table.
10. Moisture retaining soil additive composition table
Material Value
Rhyolitic tuff 80%
Natural phyllo silicates 18%
Natural cellulose 2%
compounds
Moisture retaining soil additive properties table

Property Value
WHC (Water Holding 380% minimum
Capacity)
CEC (Catonic Exchange 30 Meq/100gr minimum
Capacity)
nutrition elements
N 1580 mg/kg
P 693 mg/kg
K 7200 mg/kg
Ca & Mg 160 meq/kg
micro and trace elements
Fe 1793 ppm
Mn 178 ppm
Mo 1 ppm
Zn 15 ppm
Cu 5 ppm
11. No toxicity should be built up in the soil. High Fe content wanted to reduce pH
level of typical Gulf sand conditions.
12. Moisture retaining soil additive schedule
Location Application
palm pits 30kg per pit
tree pits 20kg per pit
large shrub pits 3kg per pit
Small shrub pits 1 kg per shrub
groundcover beds 3 kg per sqm
grass 3 kg per sqm
13. Final admixture specification shall be confirmed with an approved soil testing
agency.
2.02 WEED-CONTROL BARRIERS/ SEPARATION FABRIC
A. Polyethylene Sheeting: ASTM D 4397, black, 0.15-mm minimum thickness.
B. Nonwoven Fabric: Polypropylene or polyester fabric, 101g/sq. m minimum.
C. Composite Fabric: Woven, needle-punched polypropylene substrate bonded to a

nonwoven polypropylene fabric, 162 g/sq. m.
2.03 LANDSCAPE EDGING
A. Provide landscape edging as indicated on drawing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas and conditions affecting performance of Work under this
Section. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Protect all utilities, structures and vegetation during work.
B. Adjacent work installed under other sections of this specification, shall be kept clean and
free of soil, and other materials incidental to this work.
C. Provide barricades, temporary fencing, signs or policing as may be necessary for the
protection of all planted areas until they are accepted.
3.03 REMOVAL OF DEBRIS FROM PLANTING AREAS
A. The Contractor shall make full allowance for the removal of any debris from the planting
areas and remove this to a dump site unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall allow for dumping fees and transportation of debris as required.
B. If the Contractor is unclear as to the status of debris they shall seek clarification from the
Engineer.
3.04 EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS
A. Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular pits with sides sloped inward. Trim base leaving
center area raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage. Do not further
disturb base. Scarify sides of plant pit smeared or smoothed during excavation.
1. Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball diameter for balled and
burlapped stock.
2. Excavate at least 300 mm wider than root spread and deep enough to
accommodate vertical roots for bare-root stock.
3.05 SITE PREPARATION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor shall examine areas to receive landscaping for compliance with
requirements and conditions affecting performance of work in this Section. The
Contractor shall not proceed with plant operations until unsatisfactory conditions are
discussed with the Engineer and corrected.
B. The Contractor shall determine the location of above grade and underground utilities
and perform work in a manner which will avoid damage to them. Damage to
underground utilities shall be repaired at the Contractor’s expense.
C. When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble, adverse
drainage or obstructions, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer prior to planting.
D. The Contractor shall verify that sub-grades are as indicated in the project
documentation.
E. Grade stakes shall be maintained until removal of them is mutually agreed upon by all
parties concerned.
F. When grades are encountered that are detrimental to finished grading and planting
operations, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer prior to planting.
3.06 SUB-SURFACE GRADING
A. All perennial weeds shall be treated with an approved herbicide and the period of time
recommended by the manufacturer shall be allowed to elapse prior to commencing
grading operations.
B. Grading operations shall occur when the sub-soil is reasonably dry and workable.
C. Areas to be graded shall be graded to smooth flowing contours with all minor hollows
and ridges removed. Rock projections and boulders shall be removed and disposed of
at a location as agreed with the Engineer.
D. Non-cohesive, light subsoil shall be loosened with a 3-tine ripper to a depth of 300 mm
at 600 mm centres. Stiff clay and other cohesive subsoil shall be loosened with a single
tine ripper to a depth of 450 mm at 1 m centres.

E. A minimum of 300 mm of amended planting soil shall be spread uniformly over the
loosened area and incorporated into the sub-grade soil to obtain a uniform and well
pulverized soil mix.
3.07 FINISHED GRADING
A. Grades shall be brought to the finished ground levels as indicated on the Project
Drawings or as agreed with the Engineer to a tolerance of ± 12 mm. Grading shall be
carried out in such a manner that even gradients are formed between the spot levels
indicated on the Project Drawings. No depressions shall remain which could collect
standing water.
B. Soil shall be placed in lifts not greater than 150 mm in thickness.
C. The filled area shall be compacted to a minimum of 85% of maximum density as

determined in accordance with ASTM D 1577.
3.08 PLANTING MEDIUM SUPPLY AND INSTALLATION
A. The Contractor is responsible for the supply and installation of planting medium to the
planting areas as per the plans and details provided. The Contractor is responsible for
installing planting medium to all planter areas to meet the required levels and depths.
B. Planting medium shall be installed to achieve tolerances specified for finished level of
soil, and when reasonably dry and workable, graded to smooth, flowing contours with all
minor hollows and ridges removed. Finished ground level adjoining buildings shall be
kept 150mm below the level of the damp-proof course.
C. The Contractor shall ensure that planting medium levels allow for any expected
settlement following installation. Levels shown are finished following settlement. Planting
medium shall be graded back from edges. Planting medium shall be installed to allow
installation of mulch layer. No spill over edges shall be permitted.
D. The planting soil shall be placed in planting areas and compacted using water saturation
to the full mix depth. The area shall be levelled to within plus or minus 50mm and then
again be thoroughly irrigated with water to eliminate air pockets and settle soil. The soil
shall be evenly moistened to a depth of 300mm. After the irrigation system has been
installed, recompact and settle all disturbed areas and fine grade to a smooth
continuous grade. There shall be no uneven surfaces greater than plus or minus 15mm.
E. After a period of ten days, all germinating weeds shall be removed from the area and
the soil shall be relevelled to form a smooth continuous grade.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 32 9113
SOIL PREPARATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes planting soils and layered soil assemblies specified by composition of
the mixes.
1. Section 31 1000 "Site Clearing" for topsoil stripping and stockpiling.
2. Section 32 9200 "Turf and Grasses" for placing planting soil for turf and grasses.
3. Section 32 9300 "Plants" for placing planting soil for plantings.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. AAPFCO: Association of American Plant Food Control Officials.
B. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation. This
can be amended or un-amended soil as indicated.
C. CEC: Cation exchange capacity.
D. Compost: The product resulting from the controlled biological decomposition of organic
material that has been sanitized through the generation of heat and stabilized to the
point that it is beneficial to plant growth.
E. Imported Soil: Soil that is transported to Project site for use.
F. Layered Soil Assembly: A designed series of planting soils, layered on each other, that
together produce an environment for plant growth.
G. Manufactured Soil: Soil produced by blending soils, sand, stabilized organic soil
amendments, and other materials to produce planting soil.
H. NAPT: North American Proficiency Testing Program. An SSSA program to assist soil-,
plant- and water-testing laboratories through inter-laboratory sample exchanges and
statistical evaluation of analytical data.
I. Organic Matter: The total of organic materials in soil exclusive of un-decayed plant and
animal tissues, their partial decomposition products, and the soil biomass; also called
"humus" or "soil organic matter."
J. Planting Soil: Existing, on-site soil; imported soil; or manufactured soil that has been
modified as specified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil
mixture best for plant growth.
KEO/19-3262-0000 32 9113/1 Soil Preparation

K. RCRA Metals: Hazardous metals identified by the EPA under the Resource
Conservation and Recovery Act.
L. SSSA: Soil Science Society of America.
M. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the

top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.
N. Subsoil: Soil beneath the level of subgrade; soil beneath the topsoil layers of a naturally
occurring soil profile, typified by less than 1 percent organic matter and few soil
organisms.
O. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile. In
undisturbed areas, surface soil is typically called "topsoil"; but in disturbed areas such
as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.
P. USCC: U.S. Composting Council.
1.03 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Contractors site offices.

1. Include recommendations for application and use.
2. Include test data substantiating that products comply with requirements.
3. Include sieve analyses for aggregate materials.
B. Samples: For each bulk-supplied material, 4Ltr volume of each in sealed containers
labeled with content, source, and date obtained. Each Sample shall be typical of the lot
of material to be furnished; provide an accurate representation of composition, color,
and texture.
A. Qualification Data: For each testing agency.
B. Field quality-control reports.
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent, state-operated, or university-operated

laboratory; experienced in soil science, soil testing, and plant nutrition; with the
experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated; and that specializes in types
of tests to be performed.
1. Laboratories: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide testing by one of
the following:
2. Multiple Laboratories: At Contractor's option, work may be divided among
qualified testing laboratories specializing in physical testing, chemical testing,
and fertility testing.

B. Field Inspections, the following Hold & Witness points apply to the project for the
preparation and installation of soils. No further works to be carried until the following has
been inspected and approved in writing by the Architect or approved representative:
1. Submission of works construction programme.
2. Monthly progress reports.
3. Approval of all samples & materials.
4. Receipt of soil sampling for existing conditions and proposed planting sand /
sweet soil.
5. Excavated landscape areas.
6. Approval of final soil mix before leaving mixing staging area.
7. Excavated pits and percolation tests prior to planting.
1.07 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A. Preconstruction Soil Analyses:

1. For existing site soils, perform testing and furnish soil analysis with a written
report containing recommendations to remove / sterilize and or cap
contaminates by a qualified testing agency performing the testing according to
"Soil-Sampling Requirements" and "Testing Requirements" articles.
2. For each delivered load of sweet soil sand, perform testing and furnish soil
analysis with a written report containing soil-amendment and fertilizer
recommendations by a qualified testing agency performing the testing according
to "Soil-Sampling Requirements" and "Testing Requirements" articles.
a. Have testing agency identify and label samples and test reports according
to sample collection and labelling requirements.
1.08 SOIL-SAMPLING REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Extract soil samples according to requirements in this article.
B. Sample Collection and Labeling: Have samples taken and labeled by Contractor in
presence of Architect under the direction of the testing agency.
1. Number and Location of Samples:
a. Minimum of 1 per 5 HA representative soil samples from varied agreed
locations directed by Architect for existing soils.
b. Minimum of 1 sample per 1000m3 delivered load of sweet soil sand
delivered to site for mixing.
2. Procedures and Depth of Samples: According to USDA-NRCS's "Field Book for
Describing and Sampling Soils."
3. Division of Samples: Split each sample into two, equal parts. Send half to the
testing agency and half to Owner for its records.
4. Labeling: Label each sample with the date, location keyed to a site plan or other
location system, visible soil condition, and sampling depth.
1.09 TESTING REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Perform tests on soil samples according to requirements in this article.
B. Physical Testing:
1. Soil Texture: Soil-particle, size-distribution analysis by one of the following
methods according to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1-Physical and
Mineralogical Methods":
a. Sieving Method: Report sand-gradation percentages for very coarse,
coarse, medium, fine, and very fine sand; and fragment-gradation (gravel)
percentages for fine, medium, and coarse fragments; according to USDA
sand and fragment sizes.
b. Hydrometer Method: Report percentages of sand, silt, and clay.
2. Total Porosity: Calculate using particle density and bulk density according to
SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1-Physical and Mineralogical Methods."
3. Water Retention: According to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1-
Physical and Mineralogical Methods."
4. Saturated Hydraulic Conductivity: According to SSSA's "Methods of Soil
Analysis - Part 1-Physical and Mineralogical Methods"; at 85% compaction
according to ASTM D 698 (Standard Proctor).
C. Chemical Testing:
1. CEC: Analysis by sodium saturation at pH 7 according to SSSA's "Methods of
Soil Analysis - Part 3- Chemical Methods."
2. Clay Mineralogy: Analysis and estimated percentage of expandable clay
minerals using CEC by ammonium saturation at pH 7 according to SSSA's
"Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1- Physical and Mineralogical Methods."
3. Metals Hazardous to Human Health: Test for presence and quantities of RCRA
metals including aluminum, arsenic, barium, copper, cadmium, chromium, cobalt,
lead, lithium, and vanadium. If RCRA metals are present, include
recommendations for corrective action.
4. Phytotoxicity: Test for plant-available concentrations of phytotoxic minerals
including aluminum, arsenic, barium, cadmium, chlorides, chromium, cobalt,
copper, lead, lithium, mercury, nickel, selenium, silver, sodium, strontium, tin,
titanium, vanadium, and zinc.
D. Fertility Testing: Soil-fertility analysis according to standard laboratory protocol of SSSA

General Requirements including the following:
1. Percentage of organic matter.
2. CEC, calcium percent of CEC, and magnesium percent of CEC.
3. Soil reaction (acidity/alkalinity pH value).
4. Buffered acidity or alkalinity.
5. Nitrogen ppm.
6. Phosphorous ppm.
7. Potassium ppm.
8. Manganese ppm.
9. Manganese-availability ppm.
10. Zinc ppm.
11. Zinc availability ppm.
12. Copper ppm.
13. Sodium ppm[ and sodium absorption ratio].
14. Soluble-salts ppm.
15. Presence and quantities of problem materials including salts and metals cited in
the Standard protocol. If such problem materials are present, provide additional
recommendations for corrective action.
16. Other deleterious materials, including their characteristics and content of each.
E. Organic-Matter Content: Analysis using loss-by-ignition method according to SSSA's

"Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 3- Chemical Methods."
F. Recommendations for sweet sand soils: Based on the test results, state
recommendations for soil treatments and soil amendments to be incorporated to
produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy, viable plants indicated. Include, at
a minimum, recommendations for nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium fertilization,
and for micronutrients.
G. Recommendations for existing site soils: Based on the test results, state
recommendations for soil treatments to remove / sterilise and or cap contaminates.
A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers

showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and compliance
with local laws if applicable.
B. Bulk Materials:
1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and
pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants.
2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk
materials, discharge of soil-bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching
adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways.
3. Do not move or handle materials when they are wet.
4. Accompany each delivery of bulk fertilizers and soil amendments with
appropriate certificates.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PLANTING SOILS SPECIFIED BY COMPOSITION
A. General: Soil amendments, fertilizers, and rates of application specified in this article
are guidelines that may need revision based on testing laboratory's recommendations
after preconstruction soil analyses are performed.
B. Planting-Soil Type: As per described mix in clause 3 below. Mix to be blended in a

setting down facility area agreed with the Architect with sand, stabilized organic soil
amendments, and other materials to produce viable planting soil. No soils to be mixed
insitu, any soils mixed in situ will be rejected and be required to be removed from site
within 48hours at the contractors expense.
1. Additional Properties of Basic Soil before Amending: Sweet sand base to soil
mix to come from an approved Government / Municipality source. The contractor
to provide a certificate for each load arriving to the site soil mixing staging area.
Tests to be carried in accordance with clause 1.10 of this section prior to soil mix
being brought into planting areas.
2. Unacceptable Properties: Soil mixes shall not contain the following:
a. Unacceptable Materials: Concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks,
cement, plaster, building debris, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner,
turpentine, tar, roofing compound, acid, and other extraneous materials
that are harmful to plant growth.
b. Unsuitable Materials: Stones, roots, plants, sod, clay lumps, and pockets
of coarse sand that exceed a combined maximum of 5 percent by dry
weight of the manufactured soil.
c. Large Materials: Stones, clods, roots, clay lumps, and pockets of coarse
sand exceeding 38mm in any dimension.

3. Blended basic soil mix to contain the following soil amendments and fertilizers in
the following quantities:
a. Ratio of Loose Compost to Soil: 20% by volume of which 5% volume is
loose shredded coconut.
b. Volume of Sand: 80% by volume.
c. Volume of Soil Amendment: 30kg per m3 of items a + b.
d. AmendmentWeight of Agricultural Gypsum: 5kg per m3 of items a + b.
e. Weight of Superphosphate: 1kg per m3 of items a + b.
f. Weight of Commercial Fertilizer: 2kg per m3 of items a + b.
g. Weight of Slow-Release Fertilizer: 2kg per m3 of items a + b.
h. Weight of Organic Fertilizer: 1kg per m3 of items a + b.
2.02 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS
A. Lime: ASTM C 602, agricultural liming material containing a minimum of 80 percent

calcium carbonate equivalent. Use if recommended in soil testing report.
B. Sulfur: Granular, biodegradable, and containing a minimum of 90 percent elemental

sulfur, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through a No. 6 3.35-mm sieve and a
maximum of 10 percent passing through a No. 40 0.425-mm sieve. Use if
recommended in soil testing report
C. Agricultural Gypsum: Minimum 90 percent calcium sulfate, finely ground with 90

percent passing through a No. 50 0.30-mm sieve.
D. Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured, free of toxic materials, and according to
ASTM C 33/C 33M. Sand shall be sweet sand or marine washed sand free of calcium
carbonate, subsoil, refuse, roots, noxious weeds, phytotoxic materials, rocks, sticks,
brush, litter, construction debris or any other deleterious materials. The soil shall be
approved by the Engineer before its use. It shall be free draining, non-toxic and capable
of sustaining healthy plant growth. It should have good water holding capacity and
minimal runoff or erosion characteristics.
1. The sand will have the following composition:
Element Value
pH value: not less than 6.5 or not more than 8
Electrical conductivity: less than 2500 micromhos /cm
(2.5 dS / m) saturated extract at 25ºC
Free carbonates: less than 0.5% air dried
Chlorides: less than 200 ppm in saturated extract
Sulphates: less than 200 ppm in saturated extract
Exchangeable sodium: less than 15% in neutral
normal ammonium acetate
Boron: less than 1.5 ppm, hot water soluble
Sodium less than 250 ppm
Magnesium less than 100 ppm
Nitrates less than 75 ppm
2. Grading of material:
Seive Size (mm) % Mass Passing

5.000 100
2.380 65 to 100
1.180 45 to 100
0.600 35 to 80
0.300 5 to 48
0.150 0 to 15
0.075 0 to 3
2.03 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS
A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter produced by

composting green waste, and bearing USCC's "Seal of Testing Assurance," and as
follows:
1. Green Waste: Sewage sludge and animal waste not permitted.
2. Reaction: pH of 7.0 - 8.5.
3. Soluble-Salt Concentration: Less than 4 dS/m.
4. Moisture Content: 35 to 55 percent by weight.
5. Organic-Matter Content: 50 to 60 percent of dry weight.
6. Particle Size: Minimum of 98 percent passing through a 25mm sieve.
B. Shredded Coconut Fiber: Coconut fiber shall be finely shredded coconut fibre pith free
from chemical additives, sterilents and shall have more than 98% organic matter.
1. Physical Characteristics:
Seive Size (mm) % Mass Passing

9.51 100
6.35 90 - 100
2.38 50 - 60
0.50 0 - 20
Bulk Density 300 - 400kg per M3
2. Chemical Characteristics:
Element Value
Organic matter >85%
PH 5.0 - 6.5
Salinity (ECe x 1000) 0.5 - 2.0
Total Nitrogen 0.7 - 2.0
Available Phosphorous 100 - 500 ppm
CEC (meq/100 gms) 80 - 120 ppm
Boron (by hot water extraction) <5 ppm
SAR less than 2.0 <2.0
C. Soil Inoculant - Myccoriza: For individual planting pits consiting of select edendo and
ectomycorrhizae fungi to promote the rapid development of root growth
1. Application: To be applied to each Palm, tree and shrub pit in accordance with
manufacturers recommendations.
2. Manufacture: To be confirm and approved by Landscape Architect and Client.
2.04 FERTILIZERS
A. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 20 percent

available phosphoric acid.
B. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character,

consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic

sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following
composition:
1. Composition: 15 percent of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2
percent potassium, by weight.
C. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-

insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition:
1. Composition for general application in soil mix: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent
phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium, by weight.
2. Composition for addition to palm pits: 8 percent nitrogen, 8 percent
phosphorous, and 16 percent potassium, by weight.
D. Organic Fertiliser: 100% Natural and heat treated. The content of Organic matter and
plant nutrient elements of this fertiliser should not be less than 50%. Primary and
secondary elements as percentages and trace elementsas ppm should be indicated on
the packing.
2.05 ANTI-DESICCANT
A. Emulsion form for spray application to provide a protective film over plant surface and
permeable enough to permit transpiration. Application should be made prior to
transportation of palm, tree and plant material to project site.
1. Product: To be delivered in containers of the manufacturer, mixed according to
the manufacturer's directions. Manufacturer to be confirm and approved by
Landscape Architect and Client.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Place planting soil and fertilizers according to requirements in other Specification

Sections.
B. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout,
concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel,
paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in planting
soil.
C. Proceed with placement only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PLACING MANUFACTURED PLANTING SOIL OVER EXPOSED SUBGRADE
A. General: Apply manufactured soil on-site in its final, blended condition. Do not apply
materials or till if existing soil or subgrade is muddy or excessively wet.
B. Subgrade Preparation: Till subgrade to a minimum depth of 450 mm. Remove stones
larger than 75 mm in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous
matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
1. Apply approximately half the thickness of planting soil over prepared, loosened
subgrade. Mix thoroughly into top 50 mm of subgrade (unless soil testing for
existing site soil recommends for existing soils to be capped). Spread remainder
of planting soil.
C. Application: Spread planting soil to total depth as indicated on the planting detail
drawings, but not less than required to meet finish grades after natural settlement. Do
not spread if soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.
1. Lifts: Apply planting soil in lifts not exceeding 300 mm in loose depth for material
compacted by compaction equipment, and not more than 150 mm in loose depth
for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.
D. Compaction: Compact each lift of planting soil to 65 to 75 percent of maximum

Standard Proctor density according to ASTM D 698 (unless otherwise required by soils
report or for structural reasons).
E. Finish Grading: Bring soil to grades as indicated on drawings and to the final approval of
the Architect, using specificied soil mix.
1. Finish grading shall insure proper drainage of the site as determined by the
Architect.
2. Grade planting soil to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine
texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades
3. All areas shall be graded so that the final grades will be 25mm below adjacent
paved areas, sidewalks, valve boxes, headers, tree well grates, planter rims,
clean-outs, drains, manholes, etc., or as indicated on plans for turf, and 40mm for
shrubs and groundcovers.
4. Surface drainage shall be away from all building foundations.
5. Eliminate all erosion scars prior to commencing maintenance period.
6. Compact all soil to final grades: Minimum 65%, maximum 75%, .
3.03 APPLYING COMPOST TO SURFACE OF PLANTING SOIL
A. Finish Grading: Grade surface to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly
fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.
A. Soil will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
B. Prepare test and inspection reports at the descression of the Architect.
C. Label each sample and test report with the date, location keyed to a site plan or other
location system, visible conditions when and where sample was taken, and sampling
depth.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protection Zone: Identify protection zones according to Section 01 5639 "Temporary

Tree and Plant Protection."
B. Protect areas of in-place soil from additional compaction, disturbance, and

contamination. Prohibit the following practices within these areas except as required to
perform planting operations:
1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material.
2. Parking vehicles or equipment.
3. Vehicle traffic.
4. Foot traffic.
5. Erection of sheds or structures.
6. Impoundment of water.
7. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated.
C. If planting soil or subgrade is overcompacted, disturbed, or contaminated by foreign or

deleterious materials or liquids, remove the planting soil and contamination; restore the
subgrade as directed by Architect and replace contaminated planting soil with new
planting soil.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Protect areas adjacent to planting-soil preparation and placement areas from

contamination. Keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an
orderly condition.
B. Remove surplus soil and waste material including excess subsoil, unsuitable materials,
trash, and debris and legally dispose of them off Owner's property unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Dispose of excess subsoil and unsuitable materials on-site where directed by
Owner.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 32 9300
PLANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
Refer to Planting drawings series and Typical Planting details
1.01 SUMMARY
1. Plants.
2. Tree stabilization.
3. Landscape edgings.
1. Section 01 5639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection" for protecting, trimming,
pruning, repairing, and replacing existing trees to remain that interfere with, or
are affected by, execution of the Work.
2. Section 32 9200 "Turf and Grasses" for turf (lawn) and erosion-control materials.
3. Section 32 9113 - "Soil Preparation" for soil mixes
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation.
B. Balled and Burlapped Stock: Plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they
were grown, with a ball size not less than diameter and depth recommended by ANSI
Z60.1 for type and size of plant required; wrapped with burlap, tied, rigidly supported,
and drum laced with twine with the root flare visible at the surface of the ball as
recommended by ANSI Z60.1.
C. Balled and Potted Stock: Plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they are
grown and placed, unbroken, in a container. Ball size is not less than diameter and
depth recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required.
D. Container-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted plants grown in a container, with

a well-established root system reaching sides of container and maintaining a firm ball
when removed from container. Container shall be rigid enough to hold ball shape and
protect root mass during shipping and be sized according to ANSI Z60.1 for type and
size of plant required.
E. Fabric Bag-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted plants established and grown
in-ground in a porous fabric bag with well-established root system reaching sides of
fabric bag. Fabric bag size is not less than diameter, depth, and volume required by
ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant.
KEO/19-3262-0000 32 9300/1 Plants

F. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.
G. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or

mitigating a pest. Pesticides include insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides,
rodenticides, and molluscicides. They also include substances or mixtures intended for
use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant. Some sources classify herbicides
separately from pesticides.
H. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to
plants, animals, or people. Pests include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and
slugs), rodents, unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.
I. Planting Area: Areas to be planted.
J. Planting Soil: Existing, on-site soil; imported soil; or manufactured soil that has been
modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for
plant growth. See Section 32 9113 "Soil Preparation" for planting soils.
K. Plant; Plants; Plant Material: These terms refer to vegetation in general, including trees,
shrubs, vines, ground covers, ornamental grasses, bulbs, corms, tubers, or herbaceous
vegetation.
L. Root Flare: Also called "trunk flare." The area at the base of the plant's stem or trunk
where the stem or trunk broadens to form roots; the area of transition between the root
system and the stem or trunk.
M. Stem Girdling Roots: Roots that encircle the stems (trunks) of trees below the soil
surface.
N. Subgrade: The surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete,

or the top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.
1.03 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate final positions with all underground utility lines, chambers, openings,
structural footings and the like. All trees and palms to be staked during installation of
services to ensure clashes are avoided.
B. Coordination with Turf Areas (Lawns): Plant trees, shrubs, and other plants after finish
grades are established and before planting turf areas unless otherwise indicated.
1. When planting trees, shrubs, and other plants after planting turf areas, protect
turf areas, and promptly repair damage caused by planting operations.
1.04 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Contractors site office.

1. Plant Materials: Include quantities, sizes, quality, and sources for plant
materials.
KEO/19-3262-0000 32 9300/2 Plants

2. Plant Photographs: Include color photographs in digital 76- by 127-mm) print
place on A4 submittal sheet format for each required species and size of plant
material as it will be furnished to Project. Take photographs from an angle
depicting true size and condition of the typical plant to be furnished. Include a
scale rod or other measuring device in each photograph. For species where
more than 20 number plants are required, include a minimum of three
photographs showing the average plant, the best quality plant, and the worst
quality plant to be furnished. Identify each photograph with the full scientific
name of the plant, plant size, and name of the growing nursery.
3. Submit documentation to the Architect within 30 calendar days after date of
award of Contract to the General Contractor that all plant material is available.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all material listed on plant list. Any and all
substitutions due to availability issues shall be requested in writing prior to
confirmation of ordering. All materials shall be subject to observation by the
Architect at any time after confirmation of ordering.
B. Shop Drawings: For each of the following:

1. Temporary nursery to support all of the plants brought onto site for the Phase of
the project. The nursery facility should be large enough to cover 50% of the
anticipated tree, shrub and groundcover stock for the phase to be kept under
shade. Contractor to provide all associated method statements for the
implementation of the nursery. The nursery must follow the following criteria:
a. Have a level floor covered with a minimum of 200g woven geotextile
b. Have overhead green shade cloth providing 50% shade
c. Be constructed of steel tube and clamp system
d. Incorporate overhead or ground situated automatic irrigation system.
C. Method Statement: For the following:

1. Mixing of soil in contractors compound or off site and delivery to site.
D. Samples for Verification: For each of the following

1. Trees and Shrubs: Tree Samples of each variety and size delivered to site for
review. Maintain approved Samples on-site as a standard for comparison. Plants
shall be subject to observation and preliminary acceptance by the Architect at
place of growth or upon delivery for compliance with these specifications. Such
observation shall not impair the right of observation and rejection during progress
of the work. Tagging of plant material as may be conducted by the Architect is for
design intent only and does not constitute the Architect's approval of the plant
materials in regards to their health and vigor. The health and vigor of the plant
materials is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. Submit written request for
observation of plant material at place of growth to the Architect. Written request
shall state the place of growth and quantity of plants to be observed. The
Architect reserves the right to refuse observation at this time if, in his judgment,
photograph examples may suffice.
2. The Contractor shall submit color photographs of actual plant materials specified
on the drawings and being contract grown outside the Qatar or at nurseries in
Qatar other than the Contractor’s. This submittal shall occur monthly every 30
days prior to the proposed planting commencement date.
3. Organic Mulch: 1-L)tr volume of each organic mulch required; in sealed plastic
bags labeled with composition of materials by percentage of weight and source
of mulch. Each Sample shall be typical of the lot of material to be furnished;
provide an accurate representation of color, texture, and organic makeup.
4. Mineral Mulch: 2(.5 kg) of each mineral mulch required, in sealed plastic bags
labeled with source of mulch. Sample shall be typical of the lot of material to be
KEO/19-3262-0000 32 9300/3 Plants
delivered and installed on-site; provide an accurate indication of color, texture,
and makeup of the material.
5. Edging Materials and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard size, to verify color
selected.
6. Tree Frames and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard size delivered to site for
review, to verify design and color selected.
7. Root Barrier: Width of panel by (300 mm).
A. Qualification Data: For landscape Installer. Include list of similar projects completed by
Installer demonstrating Installer's capabilities and experience. Include project names,
addresses, and year completed, and include names and addresses of owners' contact
persons.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of manufactured product, from manufacturer, and
complying with the following:
1. Manufacturer's certified analysis of standard products.
2. Analysis of other materials by a recognized laboratory made according to
methods established by the Association of Official Analytical Chemists, where
applicable.
C. Pesticides and Herbicides: Product label and manufacturer's application instructions

specific to Project.
D. Non packaged bulk materials delivered to site: Submit a certificate, of delivery slip with
each delivery of material in bulk. Certificates shall state source, quantity, or weight, type
and analysis and date of delivery along with an analysis completed by an approved
independent testing laboratory - if requested by the Architect.
E. Plant Material: All Plant material to be delivered to site with a nursery growers
certificate.
A. Maintenance Data: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for

maintenance of plants during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required
maintenance periods.
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in

successful establishment of plants.
1. Professional Membership: Installer shall be a member in good standing of either
the Professional Landcare Network or the American Nursery and Landscape
Association.
2. Experience: Five years' experience in landscape installation in addition to
requirements in Section 01 4000 "Quality Requirements."
3. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-
time supervisor on Project site when work is in progress.
4. Personnel Certifications: Installer's field supervisor shall have certification in one
of the following categories from the Professional Landcare Network:
a. Landscape Industry Certified Technician - Exterior.
KEO/19-3262-0000 32 9300/4 Plants
b. Landscape Industry Certified Interior.
c. Landscape Industry Certified Horticultural Technician.
5. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial.
B. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of plants indicated, complying with
applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1.
1. Specimen plant materials may be observed at source prior to delivery to site if
determined appropriate by Architect.
2. Upon delivery of plant material to site:
a. All plant material shall be subject to observation and may be approved or
rejected the Architect or Owner’s Authorized Representative for quality,
size and variety prior to installation. Such approval shall not impair the
right of observation and rejection during the progress of work for size and
condition of ball or root mass, latent effects, diseases, pests or injuries.
b. If any defective or non-complying plants are found during observations,
they will be rejected.
c. All rejected plant material shall be removed from the site within a
minimum of 2 working days.
3. Workmanship: Observation of site at critical stages of work.
a. If applicable, observation of drainage material on-structure prior to
installation of soil separator if required.
b. If applicable observation of soil separator on-structure prior to installation
of soil.
c. Observation for approval of landscape finish grading and soil preparation
before
d. installation of plant material:
e. During this observation the Architect may request that samples of the
planting soil be analyzed by an approved laboratory to assure its
compliance with these Specifications.
f. Notification of exception shall be for the Contractor to correct deficiencies
in the soil preparation to render it in compliance with these specifications.
Corrections shall be made prior to any planting, or, at the Architect's
option, the installation of container sized plants may proceed if the
corrections can be made later without affecting the quality of the work.
The Contractor shall notify the Architect in writing when the deficiencies
g. Observation of planting installation.
h. Observation of tree staking/tree guying.
4. Material and Workmanship:
a. Observation by the Architect will be made at substantial
completion/delivery of all materials, construction and installation work
required by the Contract prior to commencement of the plant
establishment period. The plant establishment period shall not commence
until all deficiencies found by this observation have been corrected and
written notice of start of commencement has been received from the
Architect. All materials shall be installed prior to this observation with the
following exceptions:
1) Items waived by the Architect for this observation for reasons of
substantiated unavailability, or in appropriate season or weather.
2) Items which do not affect the health or growth of the plantings.
b. Periodic observation shall be made of the work of the Contract during
plant establishment period wherein the approval of monthly progress
payments will be contingent upon approved monthly quality reports by the
Owner’s Representative.
KEO/19-3262-0000 32 9300/5 Plants
C. Measurements: Measure according to ANSI Z60.1. Do not prune to obtain required
sizes.
1. Trees and Shrubs: Measure with branches and trunks or canes in their normal
position. Take height measurements from or near the top of the root flare for
field-grown stock and container-grown stock. Measure main body of tree or
shrub for height and spread; do not measure branches or roots tip to tip. Take
caliper measurements (150 mm) above the root flare for trees up to (100-mm)
caliper size, and (300 mm) above the root flare for larger sizes.
2. Other Plants: Measure with stems, petioles, and foliage in their normal position.
D. Plant Material Observation: Architect may observe plant material either at place of
growth or at site before planting for compliance with requirements for genus, species,
variety, cultivar, size, and quality. Architect may also observe trees and shrubs further
for size and condition of balls and root systems, pests, disease symptoms, injuries, and
latent defects and may reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during
progress of work. Remove rejected trees or shrubs immediately from Project site.
1. Notify Architect of sources of planting materials seven days in advance of
delivery to site.
A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers

showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of
compliance with local laws if applicable.
B. Bulk Materials:
1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and
pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants.
2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk
materials; discharge of soil-bearing water runoff; and airborne dust reaching
adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways.
3. Accompany each delivery of bulk materials with appropriate certificates.
4. The Contractor shall notify the Architect 7 calendar days in advance of delivery of
all plant materials and shall submit an itemized list of the plants in each delivery.
C. Deliver bare-root stock plants within 24 hours of digging. Immediately after digging up
bare-root stock, pack root system in wet straw, hay, or other suitable material to keep
root system moist until planting. Transport in covered, temperature-controlled vehicles,
and keep plants cool and protected from sun and wind at all times.
D. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root
systems from sun scald, drying, wind burn, sweating, whipping, and other handling and
tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy
their natural shape. Provide protective covering of plants during shipping and delivery.
Do not drop plants during delivery and handling.
E. Handle planting stock by root ball.
F. Store bulbs, corms, and tubers in a dry place at 60 to 65 deg F (until planting.
G. Apply antidesiccant to trees and shrubs using power spray to provide an adequate film
over trunks (before wrapping), branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect during
digging, handling, and transportation.
KEO/19-3262-0000 32 9300/6 Plants

1. If deciduous trees or shrubs are moved in full leaf, spray with antidesiccant at
nursery before moving and again two weeks after planting.
H. Wrap trees and shrubs with burlap fabric over trunks, branches, stems, twigs, and
foliage to protect from wind and other damage during digging, handling, and
transportation.
I. Deliver all plant blocks with legible identification labels, state correct plant name and
size indicated on plant list using durable waterproof labels with water-resistant ink which
will remain legible for at least 60 days.
J. All plants to be delivered to temporary shaded nursery for hardening off and storage
until planting zones are ready for implementation.
K. Move plants from temporary nursery to final planting area after preparations for planting
have been completed, and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than six
hours after moving, set plants and trees in their appropriate aspect (sun, filtered sun, or
shade), protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist.
1. Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, peat moss, sawdust, or other
acceptable material.
2. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of planting.
3. Water root systems of plants stored on-site deeply and thoroughly with a fine-
mist spray. Water as often as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist, but
not overly wet condition.
1.010 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual grade elevations, service and utility locations,
irrigation system components, and dimensions of plantings and construction contiguous
with new plantings by field measurements before proceeding with planting work.
B. Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of the following periods. Coordinate planting
periods with maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of
1. Planting Season: October - April
C. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be
obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to
manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.
1.011 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and accessories that
fail in materials, workmanship, or growth within specified warranty period.
a. Death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from abuse,
lack of adequate maintenance, or neglect by Owner.
b. Structural failures including plantings falling or blowing over.
c. Faulty performance of tree stabilization, edgings and tree grates.
d. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
2. Warranty Periods: From date of planting completion.
KEO/19-3262-0000 32 9300/7 Plants
a. Trees, Shrubs, Vines, and Ornamental Grasses: 12 months.
b. Ground Covers, Biennials, Perennials, and Other Plants: 12months.
c. Annuals: Three months.
3. Include the following remedial actions as a minimum:
a. Immediately remove dead plants and replace unless required to plant in
the succeeding planting season.
b. Replace plants that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy
condition at end of warranty period.
c. A limit of one replacement of each plant is required except for losses or
replacements due to failure to comply with requirements.
d. Provide extended warranty for period equal to original warranty period, for
replaced plant material.
e. Remove and replace defected material within 15days.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Refer to drawings LSC-TD-PL-501 Series, LSC-TD-PL-551 Series; Schedule LSC-TD-

GN-006; and Typical Planting details LSC-TD-LD-960.
2.02 PLANT MATERIAL
A. General: Furnish nursery-grown plants true to genus, species, variety, cultivar, stem
form, shearing, and other features indicated in Plant List, Plant Schedule, or Plant
Legend indicated on Drawings and complying with ANSI Z60.1; and with healthy root
systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully
branched, healthy, vigorous stock, densely foliated when in leaf and free of disease,
pests, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and
disfigurement.
1. Trees with damaged, crooked, or multiple leaders; tight vertical branches where
bark is squeezed between two branches or between branch and trunk ("included
bark"); crossing trunks; cut-off limbs more than (20 mm) in diameter; or with stem
girdling roots are unacceptable.
2. Collected Stock: Do not use plants harvested from the wild, from native stands,
from an established landscape planting, or not grown in a nursery unless
B. Provide plants of sizes, grades, and ball or container sizes complying with ANSI Z60.1
for types and form of plants required. Plants of a larger size may be used if acceptable
to Architect, with a proportionate increase in size of roots or balls. The size of the plants
shall correspond with that normally expected for species as specified on drawings. The
minimum acceptable size of all plants measured before pruning with the branches in
normal position, shall comply with the measurements, if any, specified on the drawings
in the list of plants to be furnished. Plants larger in size than specified may be used with
the approval of the Architect, but the use of larger plants shall not change the contract
price.
C. All plants not in compliance with the requirements herein specified, will be considered
defective and such plants, whether in place or not, shall be marked as rejected and
immediately removed from the site of the work and replaced with new plants at the
Contractor's expense. The plants shall be of the species, variety, size, and conditions
KEO/19-3262-0000 32 9300/8 Plants
specified herein or as shown on the drawings. Under no conditions shall there be any
substitutions of plants or sizes listed on the accompanying plans, except with the
express consent of the Architect.
D. Labeling: Label at least one plant of each variety, size, and caliper with a securely
attached, waterproof tag bearing legible designation of common name and full scientific
name, including genus and species. Include nomenclature for hybrid, variety, or
cultivar, if applicable for the plant.
E. If formal arrangements or consecutive order of plants is indicated on Drawings, select

stock for uniform height and spread, and number the labels to assure symmetry in
planting.
2.03 FERTILIZERS
A. Planting Tablets: Tightly compressed chip-type, long-lasting, slow-release, commercial-

grade planting fertilizer in tablet form. Tablets shall break down with soil bacteria,
converting nutrients into a form that can be absorbed by plant roots for a minimum of 60
days.
1. Size: To Architects approval.
2. Nutrient Composition: 5 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 5
percent potassium, by weight plus micronutrients.
B. Mycorrhiza to roots of all shrubs, trees and palms to manufacturers recommendations.
2.04 MULCHES
A. Organic Mulch: Free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing of trees
and shrubs, consisting of one of the following:
1. Type: Wood and bark chips or shedded palm - material to be approved by
Architect.
2. Size Range - Percent Passing Sieve Size:
a. 90-100% 25.4 mm
b. 80-100% 12.7 mm
c. 20-60% 6.35 mm
3. Color: Natural.
B. Mineral Mulch: Hard, durable stone, washed free of loam, sand, clay, and other foreign
substances, of the following type, size range, and color in areas specifically indicated on
drawings:
1. Type: Crushed stone or gravel Granite chips.
2. Size Range: As per material schedule.
3. Color: Uniform color range as per material schedule for Architects approval.
2.05 PESTICIDES
A. General: Pesticide registered and approved by the EPA and Qatar State, acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each
specific problem and as required for Project conditions and application. Do not use
restricted pesticides unless authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction.
KEO/19-3262-0000 32 9300/9 Plants

B. Pre-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Nonselective): Effective for controlling the
germination or growth of weeds within planted areas at the soil level directly below the
mulch layer.
C. Post-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Nonselective): Effective for controlling weed

growth that has already germinated.
2.06 TREE-STABILIZATION MATERIALS
A. Trunk-Stabilization Materials: Pipe Tree Stakes: Schedule 40 steel pipe, 50mm diameter
by 3000mm long with threaded cap primed and painted before installation with 2 coats
flat black exterior enamel. Touch up in field to match shop condition.
1. Cinch-Tie – Black virgin flexible vinyl meeting ASTm-D-412; with double
backlocking configuration; galvanized roofing nail, 2 1000mm length corded
rubber ties with bolts, nuts and 2 washers on each end.
2. Flags: Standard surveyor's plastic flagging tape, white, (150 mm) long.
3. Wood Deadmen: Pressure treated softwood timbers 750x100x50mm horizontals
secured to 2no. 100mm2 x 600mm stakes with 10x100mm galvanised lag
screws.
4. Guy Cables - Where used: Five strand - 4.8mm dia galvanised steel cable with
zinc-coated turnbuckles to a minimum of 75mm long with 2no. galvanised eye
bolts. Cables protected with reinforced green rubber garden hose. Cables
spaced at 120degree spacing around the tree.
B. Palm Planting Deadman Guying System:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, or
comparable product by the following:
2. RF4P 3LEG: Platipus below ground Tree Anchoring Rootball Fixing System with
Platipus Percussion Driven Earth Anchors and Plati-Mat for palm trees up to 12m
in height consisting of:
a. 3 x Rootball protection Plati-Mats with wire reinforcing
b. 3 x B61 anchors with galvanised wire rope tendons
c. 1 x 2-way ratchet tensioner with 10m galvanised wire rope
2.07 LANDSCAPE EDGINGS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, or comparable

product by one of the following:
1. Edging Size: 3.2mm x 100mm.
2. Stakes: Aluminum, ASTM B 221 ASTM B 221M, Alloy 6061-T6, approximately
(38 mm) wide by (305 mm) long.
3. Finish: Mill (natural aluminum).
2.08 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS
A. Wood Pressure-Preservative Treatment: AWPA U1, Use Category UC4a; acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction, and containing no arsenic or chromium.
B. Anti-desiccant: Water-insoluble emulsion, permeable moisture retarder, film forming, for

trees and shrubs. Deliver in original, sealed, and fully labeled containers and mix
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Burlap: Non-synthetic, biodegradable.

KEO/19-3262-0000 32 9300/10 Plants
D. Planter Drainage Gravel: Washed, sound crushed stone or gravel complying with
ASTM D 448. to bottom of tree pits and planters to be 10mm to 20mm pea gravel and of
clean, hard, sound, durable, uniform in quality, and free of any detrimental quantity of
soft, friable, thin, elongated, or laminated pieces, disintegrated material, organic matter,
oil, alkali, or other deleterious substance.
E. Planter Filter Fabric: Nonwoven geotextile manufactured for separation applications

and made of polypropylene, polyolefin, or polyester fibers or combination of them.
F. Subject to compliance with requirements, or comparable:
1. Properties:
Property/Test method Units Value
Mechanical Properties
Grab Tensille Strength ASTM D 4632
Strength @ Ultimate kN (lbs) 0.71 (160)
Elongation @ Ultimate % 50
Mullen Burst Strength kPa 2239
ASTM D 3786 (psi) (325)
Trapezoidal Tear Strength kN 0.27
ASTM D 4533 (lbs) (60)
Puncture Strength kN 0.42
ASTM D 4833 (lbs) (95)
UV Resistance after 500 hrs.
ASTM D 4355 5 strength 70
Hydraulic Properties
Apparent Opening Size US Sieve 70
(AOS) ADTM D 4751 mm 0.212
Permittivity
ASTM D 4491 soc 1.5
Flow Rate l/min/m' 4889
ASTM D 4491 (gal/min/ft') (120)
Packaging
Roll Width metres 4.6
Roll Length metres 4.6
G. Mycorrhizal Fungi: Dry, granular inoculant containing at least 5300 spores per lb 0.45
kg of vesicular-arbuscular mycorrhizal fungi and 95 million spores per lb 0.45 kg of
ectomycorrhizal fungi, 33 percent hydrogel, and a maximum of 5.5 percent inert
material.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive plants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements and conditions affecting installation and performance of the Work.
1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint
washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils,
gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has
been deposited in soil within a planting area.
KEO/19-3262-0000 32 9300/11 Plants

2. Verify that plants and vehicles loaded with plants can travel to planting locations
with adequate overhead clearance.
3. The Contractor will obtain Owner's Certification that final grades up to +/-30mm
have been established prior to commencing planting operations. Provide for
inclusion of all amendments, settling, etc. Contractor shall be responsible for
shaping all planting areas as indicated on plans or as directed by the Architect.
4. Suspend planting operations during periods of excessive soil moisture until the
moisture content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results.
5. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable or which is dusty.
B. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a

planting area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Architect and replace
with new planting soil.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions, deficiencies have been
corrected or plants replaced.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities and turf areas and
existing plants from damage caused by planting operations.
B. Install erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and

discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and
walkways.
C. Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple plantings. Stake
locations, outline areas, adjust locations when requested, and obtain Architect's
acceptance of layout before excavating or planting. Make minor adjustments as
required.
D. Lay out plants at locations directed by Architect. Stake locations of individual trees and
shrubs and outline areas for multiple plantings.
3.03 PLANTING AREA ESTABLISHMENT
A. General: Prepare planting area for soil placement and mix planting soil according to
Section 32 9113 "Soil Preparation".
B. Placing Planting Soil: Place premixed soil mix planting soil over exposed subgrade. No
insitu soil mixing allowed unless directed by Architect.
C. Before planting, obtain Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if
eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading.
D. Application of Mycorrhizal Fungi: At time directed by Architect, broadcast dry product

uniformly over prepared soil at application rate according to manufacturer's written
recommendations.
3.04 EXCAVATION FOR PALMS, TREES AND SHRUBS
A. Planting Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular planting pits.
KEO/19-3262-0000 32 9300/12 Plants

1. Excavate planting pits with sides sloping inward at a 45-degree angle.
Excavations with vertical sides are unacceptable. Trim perimeter of bottom
leaving center area of bottom raised slightly to support root ball and assist in
drainage away from center. Do not further disturb base. Ensure that root ball will
sit on undisturbed base soil to prevent settling. Scarify sides of planting pit
smeared or smoothed during excavation.
2. Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball diameter for balled and
burlapped, balled and potted, container-grown, fabric bag-grown stock.
3. Excavate at least (300 mm) wider than root spread and deep enough to
accommodate vertical roots for bare-root stock.
4. Do not excavate deeper than depth of the root ball, measured from the root flare
to the bottom of the root ball.
5. If area under the plant was initially dug too deep, add soil to raise it to the correct
level and thoroughly tamp the added soil to prevent settling.
6. Maintain angles of repose of adjacent materials to ensure stability. Do not
excavate subgrades of adjacent paving, structures, hardscapes, or other new or
existing improvements.
7. Only as many plants as can be planted on that same day shall be distributed in a
planting area.
8. All plant pits and soil mix shall be watered 2 hours before planting and
immediately after planting.
9. Maintain supervision of excavations during working hours.
10. Keep excavations covered or otherwise protected when unattended by Installer's
personnel.
11. If drain tile is indicated on Drawings or required under planting areas, excavate to
top of porous backfill over tile.
B. Backfill Soil: Subsoil and topsoil removed from excavations may be used as backfill soil
C. Obstructions: Notify Architect if unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental to trees or

shrubs are encountered in excavations.
1. Hardpan Layer: Drill (150-mm-) diameter holes, 600mm apart, into free-draining
strata or to a depth of (3 m), whichever is less, and backfill with free-draining
material.
D. Drainage: Notify Architect if subsoil conditions evidence unexpected water seepage or

retention in tree or shrub planting pits.
E. Fill excavations with water and allow to percolate away before positioning trees and
shrubs.
3.05 PALM PLANTING
A. Prior to Planting the Contractor must carry out the following inspections:
1. Verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball according to ANSI Z60.1. If root
flare is not visible, remove soil in a level manner from the root ball to where the
top-most root emerges from the trunk. After soil removal to expose the root flare,
verify that root ball still meets size requirements.
2. Roots: Remove stem girdling roots and kinked roots. Remove injured roots by
cutting cleanly; do not break.
3. Identify genus/species of all supplied palms including particular cultivar/variety.
4. Identify all supplied palms as male or female, fruiting/non-fruiting.
KEO/19-3262-0000 32 9300/13 Plants

5. Identify growing location/source of all supplied palm trees. This location/source
shall remain consistent for all palms supplied. Specific written approval shall be
required for palm trees sourced from other growing locations.
B. Planting Procedure:
1. Maximum duration of handling shall be 48 hours.
2. All root ball sizes shall be in proportion to height of tree, minimum root ball size
shall be 1 meter by 1.2 meter deep.
3. All trunk diameters shall be in proportion to tree height and all trunks shall be
straight with diamond cut pattern on trunks.
4. Anticipated caliper size variation ranges from 45cm to 60cm in diameter. Only
straight vertical trunks will be accepted.
5. All palm tree pits shall be excavated to 2 meters square by 2 meters deep.
6. Place designated soil mix at the bottom of the plant pit to range of depth from
300mm to 600mm depth.
7. At each hole, place 2 liters Myccoriza over designated soil mix layer.
8. Locate and stabilize each palm into the plant pit. Backfill perimeter of plant pit
with sweet sand to 500mm below the ultimate finish graded soil levels. Check
that palms are vertical/plumb and stabilized vertically.
9. Water in soil to remove air pockets and stabilize vertically for each palm.
10. Place additional 5 liters Myccoriza into the hole.
11. Backfill remaining sweet sand to finish grade and construct a water basin.
12. Check that finish soil levels at each palm are anticipated at range to Golf
construction finish grade, plus or minus150mm to 200mm.
13. All palms shall be guaranteed for a period of 720 days from the agreed upon
date of final acceptance. Mutually agreed periodic maintenance reviews and a
regular protocol for specific site visits will be reviewed with other team members
in order to establish acceptance protocols for water application and for
replacements of dead/ declining palm.
14. After palms have been installed for a period of 10 days, all palms shall be
checked and adjusted to straighten and to insure any trees that have shifted from
vertical axis.
15. Any appurtenant apparatus, such as slings, straps, eye buckles and paint on
trunks shall be completely removed in a manner that does not injure palm bark or
structure. No frond ties shall be removed until the supplier/contractor has
provided said instruction. All final trunk cleaning shall be done at the time frond
ties are removed.
3.06 TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PLANTING
A. Inspection: At time of planting, verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball according
to ANSI Z60.1. If root flare is not visible, remove soil in a level manner from the root ball
to where the top-most root emerges from the trunk. After soil removal to expose the
root flare, verify that root ball still meets size requirements.
B. Roots: Remove stem girdling roots and kinked roots. Remove injured roots by cutting
cleanly; do not break.
C. Balled and Burlapped Stock: Set each plant plumb and in center of planting pit or trench
with root flare (25mm) above adjacent finish grades.
1. Backfill: Mix. Designated planting soil mix - Section 32 9113 "Soil Preparation"
2. After placing some backfill around root ball to stabilize plant, carefully cut and
remove burlap, rope, and wire baskets from tops of root balls and from sides, but
do not remove from under root balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do
KEO/19-3262-0000 32 9300/14 Plants
not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting
operation.
3. Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and
air pockets. When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly
before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is
absorbed.
4. Place planting tablets equally distributed around each planting pit when pit is
approximately one-half filled. Place tablets beside the root ball about (25mm)
from root tips; do not place tablets in bottom of the hole.
a. Quantity: As indicated on Drawings
5. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of
soil.
D. Balled and Potted and Container-Grown Stock: Set each plant plumb and in center of
planting pit or trench with root flare (25mm) above adjacent finish grades.
1. Backfill: Designated planting soil mix - Section 32 9113 "Soil Preparation"
2. Carefully remove root ball from container without damaging root ball or plant.
absorbed.
approximately one-half filled. Place tablets beside the root ball about (25 mm)
a. Quantity: As per manufacturers recommendations.
soil.
E. Fabric Bag-Grown Stock: Set each plant plumb and in center of planting pit or trench
with root flare (25mm) above adjacent finish grades.
1. Backfill: Designated planting soil mix - Section 32 9113 "Soil Preparation"
2. Carefully remove root ball from fabric bag without damaging root ball or plant.
Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during
planting operation.
absorbed.
approximately one-half filled. Place tablets beside the root ball about (25mm)
a. Quantity: As per manufacturers recommentations.
soil.
F. Slopes: When planting on slopes, set the plant so the root flare on the uphill side is
flush with the surrounding soil on the slope; the edge of the root ball on the downhill side
will be above the surrounding soil. Apply enough soil to cover the downhill side of the
root ball.
3.07 TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PRUNING
A. Remove only dead, dying, or broken branches. Do not prune for shape.
KEO/19-3262-0000 32 9300/15 Plants

B. Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and vines as directed by Architect.
C. Do not apply pruning paint to wounds.
3.08 TREE STABILIZATION
A. Trunk Stabilization by Upright Staking and Tying: Install trunk stabilization as follows
unless otherwise indicated:
1. Upright Staking and Tying: Stake trees of (50mm through 125mm) caliper.
Stake trees of less than (50mm) caliper only as required to prevent wind tip out.
Use a minimum of one stake of length required to penetrate at least (450mm)
below bottom of backfilled excavation and to extend to the dimension indicated
on Drawings above grade. Set vertical stakes and space to avoid penetrating
root balls or root masses.
2. Upright Staking and Tying: Stake trees with three stakes for trees up to (3.6 m)
high and (63mm) or less in caliper (Unless otherwise directed by Architect); three
stakes for trees less than (4.2 m) high and up to (100 mm) in caliper. Space
stakes equally around trees.
3. Support trees with bands of flexible ties at contact points with tree trunk. Allow
enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree.
4. Support trees with two strands of tie wire, connected to the brass grommets of
tree-tie webbing at contact points with tree trunk. Allow enough slack to avoid
rigid restraint of tree.
B. Trunk Stabilization by Staking and Guying: Install trunk stabilization as follows unless
otherwise indicated on Drawings. Stake and guy trees more than (4.2 m) in height and
more than (75 mm) in caliper unless otherwise indicated.
1. Site-Fabricated, Staking-and-Guying Method: Install no fewer than three guys
spaced equally around tree.
a. Securely attach guys to stakes (760 mm) long, driven to grade. Adjust
spacing to avoid penetrating root balls or root masses. Provide
turnbucklefor each guy wire and tighten securely.
b. For trees more than (150 mm) in caliper, anchor guys to wood deadmen
buried at least (900 mm) below grade. Provide turnbuckles for each guy
wire and tighten securely.
c. Support trees with bands of flexible ties at contact points with tree trunk
and reaching to turnbuckles. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of
tree.
d. Support trees with guy cable, connected to the brass grommets of tree-tie
webbing at contact points with tree trunk and reaching to turnbuckle
compression spring. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree.
e. Attach flags to each guy wire, (760 mm) above finish grade.
f. Paint turnbuckles with luminescent white paint.
C. Palm dead man guying: Carry out in accordance with manufacturers details.
3.09 ROOT-BARRIER INSTALLATION
A. Install root barrier where trees are planted within 1200 mm of paving or other hardscape
elements, such as walls, curbs, and walkways, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
B. Align root barrier vertically, and run it linearly along and adjacent to the paving or other
hardscape elements to be protected from invasive roots.
KEO/19-3262-0000 32 9300/16 Plants
C. Install root barrier continuously for a distance of 2000 mm in each direction from the tree
trunk, for a total distance of (4000)mm per tree. If trees are spaced closer, use a single
continuous piece of root barrier.
1. Position top of root barrier according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
2. Overlap root barrier a minimum of (300 mm) at joints.
3. Do not distort or bend root barrier during construction activities.
4. Do not install root barrier surrounding the root ball of tree.
3.010 GROUND COVER AND PLANT PLANTING
A. Set out and space ground cover and plants other than trees, shrubs, and vines in even
rows with triangular spacing.
B. Use planting soil for backfill as per Section 32 9113 "Soil Preparation"
C. Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots.
D. For rooted cutting plants supplied in flats, plant each in a manner that minimally disturbs
the root system but to a depth not less than two nodes.
E. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation
around plants to hold water.
F. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil.
G. Protect plants from hot sun and wind; remove protection if plants show evidence of
recovery from transplanting shock.
3.011 PLANTING AREA MULCHING
A. Install weed-control barriers to temporary nursery area according to manufacturer's

written instructions. Completely overlap edges a minimum of (300mm) and secure
seams with 200mm galvanized pins.
B. Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting areas and other areas indicated.

1. Organic Mulch in Planting Areas: Apply 75-mm) average thickness of organic
mulch over whole surface of planting area, and finish 25mm below adjacent
finish grades / surfaces.
3.012 EDGING INSTALLATION
A. Aluminum Edging: Install aluminum edging where indicated according to manufacturer's

written instructions. Anchor with aluminum stakes spaced approximately (900 mm)
apart, driven below top elevation of edging.
B. Shovel-Cut Edging (where directed): Separate mulched areas from turf areas, curbs,
and paving with a 45-degree, (100mm to 150mm) deep, shovel-cut edge.
3.013 TREE GRATE INSTALLATION
KEO/19-3262-0000 32 9300/17 Plants

A. Tree Grates: Install according to manufacturer's written instructions. Set grate
segments flush with adjoining surfaces. Shim from supporting substrate with soil-
resistant plastic.
3.014 PLANT MAINTENANCE
A. Maintain plantings by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, mulching,

restoring planting saucers, adjusting and repairing tree-stabilization devices, resetting to
proper grades or vertical position, and performing other operations as required to
establish healthy, viable plantings.
B. Fill in, as necessary, soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other
processes. Replace mulch materials damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.
C. Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and soils free of
pests and pathogens or disease. Use integrated pest management practices when
possible to minimize use of pesticides and reduce hazards. Treatments include physical
controls such as hosing off foliage, mechanical controls such as traps, and biological
control agents.
3.015 PESTICIDE APPLICATION
A. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents according to
authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate
applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner
before each application is performed.
B. Pre-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Nonselective): Apply to tree, shrub, and

ground-cover areas according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Do not
apply to seeded areas.
C. Post-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Nonselective): Apply only as necessary to

treat already-germinated weeds and according to manufacturer's written
recommendations.
3.016 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT
A. General: Repair or replace existing or new trees and other plants that are damaged by
construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect.
1. Submit details of proposed pruning and repairs.
2. Perform repairs of damaged trunks, branches, and roots within 24 hours, if
approved.
3. Replace trees and other plants that cannot be repaired and restored to full-
growth status, as determined by Architect.
B. Remove and replace trees that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy
condition or are damaged during construction operations that Architect determines are
incapable of restoring to normal growth pattern within 15days of notification.
1. Provide new trees of same size as those being replaced with matching height,
spread and caliper.
2. Species of Replacement Trees: Same species being replaced.
KEO/19-3262-0000 32 9300/18 Plants

A. During planting, keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an
orderly condition. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil
onto roads, walks, or other paved areas.
B. Remove surplus soil and waste material including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash,
and debris and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
C. Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations and operations of other
contractors and trades. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods.
Treat, repair, or replace damaged plantings.
D. After installation and before Substantial Completion, remove nursery tags, nursery
stakes, tie tape, labels, wire, burlap, and other debris from plant material, planting areas,
and Project site.
3.018 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Maintenance Service for Trees and Shrubs: Provide maintenance by skilled employees
of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in "Plant Maintenance" Article. Begin
maintenance immediately after plants are installed and continue until plantings are
acceptably healthy and well established, but for not less than maintenance period
below:
1. Maintenance Period: 12 months from date of planting practical completion.
B. Maintenance Service for Ground Cover and Other Plants: Provide maintenance by
skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in "Plant Maintenance"
Article. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed and continue until
plantings are acceptably healthy and well established, but for not less than maintenance
period below:
1. Maintenance Period: 12 months from date of planting practical completion.
END OF SECTION
KEO/19-3262-0000 32 9300/19 Plants

SECTION 32 9400
PLANTING ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
1. Planting Screens
2. Pedestrian Screens
3. Tree Stakes & Ties
4. Root ball fixing systems
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS:
A. Division 4 - Masonry Anchoring and Reinforcing
B. Division 5 - Metals
C. Division 32 – Exterior Improvements
1.03 REFERENCES
A. General: Standards listed by reference, including revisions by issuing authority, form a

part of this specification section to extent indicated.
1. American Society for Testing and Material (ASTM International)
2. ASTM A380 - Practice for Cleaning and Descaling Stainless Steel Parts,
Equipment and Systems.
3. ASTM A492 - Specification for Stainless Steel Rope Wire.
4. ASTM A554 – Welded Mechanical Tubing.
5. ASTM A555 - Stainless Steel Wire.
6. ASTM F1145 - Specification for Turnbuckles, Swaged, Welded, Forged.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 01
Submittal Procedures Section.
1. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer’s product data sheet for specified products.
2. Shop Drawings: Show layout, sizes, dimensions, details, and installation of railing
frame components. Include Details of rope attachment, tensioning methods,
hardware, and tensioning and mounting methodology.
3. Samples: Submit samples of rope and/or hardware, as required by specifier.
4. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals:
KEO/19-3262-0000 32 9400/1 Planting Accessories
a. Test reports: Submit any test report demonstrating compliance with
intended use and code requirements.
b. Certificates: Submit manufacturer’s certificate that product meets or
exceeds specified requirements
5. Closeout Submittals: Submit the Following:
a. Warranty: Submit manufacturer’s standard warranty documents
b. Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer’s standard cleaning and
maintenance instructions to avoid detrimental actions to finishes and
performance.
A. Qualifications:
1. Installer Qualifications: Installer should be experienced in performing work of this
section and should have specialized in installation of work similar to that required
for this project.
B. Mock-Ups:
1. Install at project site or appropriate location a job mock-up using acceptable
products and manufacturer approved installation methods. Obtain Employer’s
and Engineer’s approval of product, application, and workmanship standards.
Comply with Division1 Quality Control Section.
2. Maintenance and Disposal: Maintain mock-up during construction for
workmanship comparison.
A. General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirements Sections Ordering: Comply with
manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid construction
delays.
B. Delivery: Deliver in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers,

identification labels intact.
C. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather
conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer.
Store cartons and panels in a secure location in a dry place at the project site.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit, for Employer’s acceptance, manufacturer’s standard

warranty document executed by authorized company official.
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.01 TEMPORARY PLANTING SCREENS
A. Whenever planting is in an exposed position, liable to strong wind conditions,

windbreaks shall be provided until such time as the planting is firmly established.
Screens shall be1750mm high plastic shelter net of 75% density supported on a

galvanised steel circular frame of adequate diameter so as not to disturb the growth of
the plant.
B. Hessian bands shall be 75mm wide to lengths necessary for wrapping tree trunks and
main branches.
2.02 PEDESTRIAN STRONG FENCE
A. The contractor shall supply, erect and maintain a pedestrian strong fence around lawn
areas until an established sward is attained. Once achieved the contractor shall remove
fence and arisings from site and refurbish any lawn as necessary. The Contractor shall
supply an installed sample of the proposed fencing system off-site for approval by the
Engineer.
2.03 TREE STAKES
A. All stakes shall be double stakes of timber, straight, free of projections and pointed at
one end. The stakes shall be pressure impregnated with non-injurious wood
preservative to be applied at least two weeks before use.
B. Stakes shall be as indicated on drawings; the length below ground to be one metre
minimum and the length above to be 1.8m, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
2.04 TREE TIES
A. Tree ties shall be fabricated from UV resistant material, be fully adjustable to allow for
tree growth and shall be:
1. Rainbow Chainlock Range C219 – Chainlock No.4 (25.4 x 2.5mm) or approved
equivalent and shall be of consistent type throughout the site as shown on
drawing.
2.05 ROOT BALL FIXING
A. Provide Root Ball protection mesh, anchors, galvanized tension cable, ratchet
tensioners as indicated on drawings or as recommended by the manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer’s product data, including product technical

bulletins, product catalogue installation instructions and product carton instructions for
installation.
3.02 EXAMINATION
A. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify mounting condition of previously installed surfaces

to ensure it is acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions. Do not begin installation until backup surfaces are in satisfactory condition.

3.03 PREPARATION
A. Supply items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting
templates, to appropriate sections.
B. Take field measurements after permanent end terminations are in place and prior to
preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, to ensure fitting of work.
3.04 INSTALLATION
A. Install cable plant support system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
the approved shop drawings.
B. Provide anchorage devices and fittings to secure to in-place construction; including

threaded fittings for concrete inserts, toggle bolts and through-bolts. Install all rope
assemblies plumb, level, square, and taut.
C. Anchor system to mounting surfaces as indicated on the drawings.
D. Separate dissimilar materials with bushings, grommets or washers to prevent electrolytic

corrosion.
E. Use manufacturer’s supplied mounting hardware.
F. Terminate and tension cable system in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
G. Ensure ropes are clean, and without kinks or sags.
H. After final adjustment provide tamper resistant locktight materials on all fittings.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas.
B. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions before

Employer's acceptance. Do not use chlorine-based or abrasive cleaners.
C. Remove from project site and legally dispose of construction debris associated with this
work.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Protection: Protect installed product from damage during subsequent construction

activities.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 32 9700
PLANTING MAINTENANCE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 EXTENT OF WORKS
A. The works specified in this section cover all works necessary to maintain the exterior
soft landscape works of the development in coordination with hard landscape, irrigation,
landscape lighting and other site works and contractors. The works shall be carried out
at areas detailed on drawings.
B. Furnish and supply all materials, equipment and labour for maintenance of all
landscaped areas installed as part of this contract.
C. The work shall include, but not be limited to mowing, weed control, insect control,
disease control, pruning, replacement of sub-standard or dead plant material.
D. Perform all work in a manner to comply with the original installation specifications.
1.02 GENERAL
A. The Contractor is responsible for the on-going maintenance of the exterior planted
areas. The Contractor is responsible for all maintenance during the contract period.
B. Begin maintenance of plant materials immediately after planting and continue until
termination of warranty period.
C. This contract includes a 24 month maintenance period from the date of Taking Over
Certificate. The Contractor is responsible for ensuring the continued good health and
good growth of all plants throughout the maintenance period. It is anticipated that the
Contractor will visit the site at least weekly and more frequently when needed such as
during dry periods to monitor the irrigation system or hand watering as required to
ensure the continued good health and growth of all plants.
D. Maintenance shall include measures necessary to establish and maintain plants in a

vigorous and healthy growing condition. Include the following:
1. Cultivation and weeding plant beds and tree pits. When herbicides are used for
weed control, apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remedy
damage resulting from use of herbicides.
2. Watering sufficient to saturate root system.
3. Pruning, including removal of dead or broken branches, and treatment of prune
wounds.
4. Disease and insect control.
KEO/19-3262-0000 32 9700/1 Planting Maintenance
E. The Contractor shall keep planted areas neat and tidy at all times. Remove any weeds
and rubbish. Remove any diseased or damaged plant or branch. Keep mulch in an
evenly graded condition and add extra mulch where necessary to maintain the standard
specified.
F. The Contractor shall include the cost of training personnel employed by the Employer
for the entire Maintenance period.
G. All chemicals, fertilizers, pesticides and herbicides shall be locked in specially designed
containers and maintained through the maintenance period to avoid spillage or
accidental inhalation. Pollution from spills or litter shall be removed from the
landscaping areas during normal maintenance.
H. Soil and Fertility: Use of fertilizers and soil additives are to be kept to an absolute
minimum. Soils are to have salinity levels and nutrient levels checked quarterly to inform
use of fertilizers.
1.03 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. The Contractor shall compile a comprehensive Operations and Maintenance Manual

consistent with the requirements of the UPC’s Pearls Rating System which will include
the following:
1. Pesticide/fungicide/Herbicide applications - including safety application rates and
procedure, schedules of pesticides/fungicides/herbicides.
2. Landscape Maintenance - including fertiliser descriptions application rates and
programmes.
3. Lawn Maintenance – including fertiliser descriptions, application rates and
programmes as well as mowing frequencies, oversowing, top dressing and other
necessary operations to ensure a dense, healthy, even turf is established and
maintained.
4. General Maintenance - including pruning, stakes and ties, berm work,
replacement and clean up.
5. Equipment Inventory, maintenance procedures and full manufacturer’s
B. This manual shall be submitted for approval at least two weeks prior to Date of Taking
Over Certificate.
1.04 REPORTING
A. The reporting procedure is to be as follows;

1. Weekly monitoring of all landscape material with written diary notes by the
maintenance staff.
2. Monthly report in writing to the Project Manager (or nominated representative) to
state:
a. Activities for the month following, their dates and times.
b. Any damage to plant material, irrigation system or other associated
landscape works.
c. Any plant material or other associated landscape works damaged and
needing to be replaced due to vandalism.
d. Any plant material or other associated landscape works being replaced by
the Contractor at his / her expense

PART 2 - PRODUCT AND EXECUTION
2.01 REPLACEMENT OF PLANTS
A. During the maintenance period the Contractor shall replace at the Contractor's expense
any dead or unhealthy plant material. This does not include the replacement of plants
removed or killed by vandalism by others. Any plants removed or killed by vandalism
shall be reported to the Engineer. The Engineer may instruct a variation for the
replacement of the plant material.
2.02 SOIL AND FERTILITY
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the supply, cartage and spreading of fertiliser.
B. A proprietary fertiliser suited to the species and approved by the Employer or nominated
representative shall be applied at 6 months, 12 months, 18 months, 24 months where
plants are showing signs of lack of fertility, or to ensure maximum health and vigour in
all grades of shrubbery as identified above.
2.03 WEEDS
A. The Contractor shall carry out detailed inspections of the planted areas at least
fortnightly and programme to control the weeds within twenty four (24) hours of the
inspection. Weeds shall be controlled manually unless approved otherwise by the
Employer or nominated representative. When hoeing/pulling care shall be taken to avoid
damage to plants and their roots. Where area is not mulched the top 20mm of soil is to
be cultivated to a fine tilth. The soil shall not be mixed with mulch when removing
weeds.
B. The required minimum standards is as follows:

1. At no time must any individual weed be larger than 50mm x 50mm x 30mm high.
Further at no time shall weeds that are 30mm x 30mm x 30mm in size exceed
more than ten (10) per square metre.
2. Weed control methods must meet the approval of the local authority weed
spraying conditions for type, notification and application technique. All methods
of weed control must be approved by the Contract Administrator.
2.04 MULCH
A. The Contractor will be responsible for the maintenance, top up, supply, cartage and
spreading of mulch to maintain a depth of 100mm at all times.
B. Mulching shall be carried out on an ongoing basis and at least 6 monthly to all palms
and garden areas unless specifically excluded.
C. The process of installation of mulch includes levelling of soil surface to remove humps
and hollows, and removal of weeds and grass prior to mulching. The Contractor shall
be responsible for controlling regrowth of weeds.
D. Plants must not be damaged or buried during the mulching process.
E. Mulch shall be:

1. 20-40mm natural coloured, locally sourced shredded hardwood mulch. Sample to
be supplied to Engineer for approval.
2. Mulch must be clean, free of sawdust and dirt. A sample of mulch shall be
supplied for approval by the Employer or nominated representative prior to
application.
F. The Contractor shall ensure that other materials including soil are not mixed with the
mulch during the work.
G. Edges shall be checked and rebuilt or repaired as necessary prior to mulching. Where
necessary the soil level shall be reduced. Edges shall hold mulch without spillage. The
edges shall not be damaged when placing the mulch.
H. Note that some garden areas may be sloping, and that mulches will require additional
maintenance to keep the edges in specification. Where mulched gardens are on a
slope, the Contractor shall maintain the mulch at 75mm depth across the whole garden.
The contractor shall rake mulch uphill from lower portions regularly to maintain the
specified mulch depth. Spilt mulches shall be collected and spread over adjacent
gardens on each visit.
I. When mulch is applied all low branches and foliage shall be lifted and mulch worked
around the plants. No mulch shall be spilled over the edges of gardens onto surrounding
surfaces. The mulch shall be spread evenly to the correct depth.
J. Where it is known that mulch affects certain species the Employer or nominated
representative shall instruct the Contractor to use alternative mulches approved by the
Employer or nominated representative.
2.05 PRUNING
A. Pruning will be required on shrubs and trees throughout the year to maintain a high
standard of presentation, display and plant vigour. Paths, roads, all other accessways
and windows are to be kept clear of excess growth.
B. Pruning to be carried out as part of maintenance as set out below;

1. The Contractor shall carry out detailed inspections of the shrubbery’s at least
fortnightly and programme necessary pruning to be carried out within twenty four
(24) hours of the inspection. A minimum equivalent of 5% of the scheduled
shrubbery area shall be pruned each month. The Contractor shall provide a
specific list of all areas and/or species pruned in the reports.
2. All weak, dead, diseased and damaged growth is to be removed and the
Contractor shall carry out pruning to maintain the desired shape and size. Visible
dieback is not acceptable. Dead or irrecoverable plants are to be removed and
replaced at the Contractors expense.
3. Pruning is not to be carried out during leaf burst or leaf fall. Pruning will be
carried out after flowering unless otherwise directed by the Employer or
nominated representative.
4. All pruning shall be undertaken to recognised horticultural practices and for
individual species to promote the natural form and habit of the plant.
C. The following pruning techniques shall be employed where appropriate:

1. Tips to be pinched back or pruned as appropriate for species to give desired
shape and size.
2. Form pruning of young plants to ensure compact form and shape.
3. Undercutting of groundcovers at edges generally.
4. Plants are to be pruned so that they do not smother neighbouring shrubs.
5. Remove dead leaves after dieback in winter and summer. Deadhead after
flowering season.
6. Deadhead and clip plants after spring and autumn growth flush/flowering period.
7. Prune to favour long term species.
8. Prune in accordance with design intent/plans where provided.
D. Pruning for form, shape and size is to be carried out within two weeks of an instruction
from the Employer or nominated representative at the Contractor’s expense.
E. In addition, pruning to provide adequate sight visibility at intersections and driveways is

required. This is to ensure the safety of pedestrians and motorists. Pruning for sight
visibility is to be carried out within two weeks upon an instruction from the Employer or
nominated representative at the Contractor’s expense.
F. All prunings shall be removed to waste as they arise leaving the gardens and
surrounding surfaces area in a clean and tidy condition.
G. Spent flowerheads are to be removed including but not limited to the following species:
Agapanthus, arthropodium.
H. The Contractor shall carry out detailed inspections of the shrubbery’s monthly and plan
to remove dead and irrecoverable plants within three (3) days of the inspection. The
Contractor shall report the removal of dead and irrecoverable plants in their monthly
report.
2.06 REQUIREMENTS FOR MAINTENANCE OF EACH PLANTING TYPOLOGY
A. GROUND COVERS:
1. Cleaning: Planted area must be clear of any litter, dust, sand, debris and spillage.
2. Edging: Ground cover area must be maintained well, around cabinets, kerbs,
plastic edging, planted areas, flower beds, lamp posts etc.
3. Trimming: Must be maintained in the required shape and structure and as per
instruction received from Engineer / Department
4. Patches & Gaps: Planted area must be free of any gaps / dry patches.
5. Weeds Control: Planted area must be well cultivated and free of any type of
weeds.
6. Health & Vigor: Planted area must be healthy & vigorous.
B. SHRUBS:
1. Cleaning: Area around shrubs including basins must be clear of any weeds, litter,
and debris.
2. Pruning: Shrubs must be free of diseased, dry, broken & malformed branches.
3. Shrub Basin: Shrub basins must be well constructed & cultivated.
4. Shrubs Stake: Newly planted shrubs must be supported by wooden stakes
5. Health & Vigour: Plants must be green, healthy, vigorous & free of dust.
6. Dead Shrubs: Any dead shrubs shall be removed and replaced by the same
type.
C. TREES:
1. Cleaning: Area around trees including basins must be clear of any weeds, litter,
and debris.

2. Pruning: Trees must be free of diseased, dry, broken, malformed, water sprouts
branches, branches growing towards main stem & suckers. Pruning of shade
trees to be kept to a minimum and as only as required so that the tree’s spread
can reach its maximum in order to satisfy the requirements of the Estidama LC-
R4: Outdoor thermal Comfort report and associated shade calculation.
3. Tree Basin: Tree basins must be well constructed & cultivated.
4. Tree Stake: Newly planted trees must be supported by wooden stakes.
5. Health & Vigour: Plants must be green, healthy, vigorous & free of dust.
6. Dead Trees: Any dead trees shall be removed and replaced by the same plant
species
D. PALMS:
1. Cleaning: Area around palms including basins must be clear of any weeds, litter,
and debris.
2. Remove Dead / Dry Fronds (Taseef): Dead and dry frond must be removed as
per the approved method statements.
3. Remove Fronds Basis (Takreeb): Frond basis must be removed as per the
approved method statements.
4. Palm Basin: Palm basin must be well constructed & cultivated.
5. Health & Vigour: Palms must be green, healthy, vigorous & free of dust.
6. Palms Off-Shoots (Suroom): All palm off-shoots must be removed according to
the approved method statement.
7. Palm Dry Stalk & Spathes: Dry male and female stalks and spathes (ezok) must
be removed.
8. Dead Palms: Any dead palms shall be removed and Replaced by the same plant
species.
E. HEDGES AND TOPIARY:

1. Hedges and topiary are to be clipped three times annually, to be programmed
throughout the year, after spring and autumn growth flushes or as directed by the
Engineer. This is to be included as part of the shrub pruning.
2. All the conditions for shrubbery maintenance shall apply, including but not limited
to soil and fertility, weeds, mulch, pruning, pests and diseases, irrigation,
planting.
3. Hedge alignment shall be corrected annually, and recut, trimmed or repaired as
necessary. Leading edges shall be checked with a string line and curves shall
be smooth and aligned without flat spots or pinches. Part or complete circles
shall be checked with stringlines set up on centre points. Alignment on formal
hedges shall not vary by more than +/-20mm over 2m from a straight line or
natural curve at the time of cutting.
4. Alignment for informal hedges shall not vary by more than +/-100mm over 2m
from a straight line or natural curve at the time of cutting.
5. All hedges shall be maintained to create a dense and even appearance. Any
dead or diseased plants shall be removed and replaced immediately with plants
of a grade close to that already established.
6. Hedge height and shape shall be maintained to the dimensions and
requirements described further in the plans and details.
2.07 TURF
A. The Contractor is responsible for ensuring that a clean, stone free, stable synthetic turf
system is established and maintained by the completion of the maintenance period.

Any remedial action to achieve this standard shall be carried out at the Contractor's
expense.
2.08 PLANT SUPPORTS
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the supply, cartage and placement of supports.
B. Prior to installation, the Contractor shall supply a sample of supports for approval by the
Engineer and Employer or nominated representative. These shall be inconspicuous and
matched throughout the Contract area. Guys, ties and supports shall be added,
replaced and adjusted as necessary to allow for growth and prevent chaffing. Ties shall
be tightened as necessary to support the plant. The Contractor shall ensure that all
stakes are sound and are sufficiently inserted to prevent lateral movement. Broken
stakes shall be replaced within 24 hours of discovery by the Contractor or notification by
the Engineer.
C. Stakes shall be installed and maintained taut and be the same height throughout the
Contract area, or lesser approved area.
D. The Contractor shall carry out detailed inspections of stakes monthly and plan to make
repairs, remove redundant tapes, tags, ties and other encumbrances to the satisfaction
of the staking specifications within twenty four (24) hours of the inspection.
E. Plants must be supported in such a way as to protect the plant and stem from damage.
F. The Contractor shall inspect and make good all damaged and defective stakes. The
Contractor shall check stakes for looseness, breaks and decay and replace as
necessary. If any plant has grown sufficiently to be self-supporting the Contractor shall
remove the support, ties and fill any holes with soil, lightly compacted.
G. Where chaffing has occurred, the Contractor shall reposition tie(s), insert a spacer or
replace the support to prevent further chaffing.
2.09 PLANT HEALTH, PESTS AND DISEASES
A. The Contractor is responsible for the monitoring and control of plant health, pests and
diseases within the Contract area. To affect this, the Contractor shall make inspections
in conjunction with other inspections and activities and arrange for eradication or
treatment of the health problem within five (5) days of inspection. Any health problem
shall be reported to the Employer or nominated representative.
B. The Contractor shall be pro active in the reporting and treatment of anything affecting
the well being of the plants. In particular significant adverse conditions, dieback or
browning of leaves, branches, or any other signs.
C. Where soil borne fungal disease such as Phytophora become evident the Contractor
shall supply and apply “Trichopel” pellets or approved equivalent according to
manufacturer’s recommendation to affected areas and other areas likely to be affected.
D. Where damage from desiccation or wind damage starts to occur an anti-transpirant shall
be applied. The Contractor shall allow to supply and apply Anti-transpirants or other
suitable treatment to prevent further desiccation in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.

E. The Contractor shall use pesticides in accordance with the Landscape Specification.
2.010 VEGETATION CONTROL – EDGES AND HARD SURFACES
A. Where reference is made to edges and/or hard surfaces elsewhere in this document,
this section shall apply.
1. EDGES
2. Edges include but are not limited to; All grass and garden edges, kerbs, paths,
structures including seats, tables and furniture, signs, statues and sculpture,
water features and ponds, rubbish bins, rocks, buildings, retainers, fences, the
interface between grass and the trunks of trees and shrubs, around trees, mulch
edges, poles, posts, cesspits, drains, roadways, footpaths and car parks, drains
and the like.
3. Edges shall be maintained so that they hold any loose materials from
encroaching onto neighbouring surfaces. Where materials do escape onto
surrounding surfaces they are to be removed or reused as appropriate.
B. HARD SURFACES
1. Hard surfaces include, but are not limited to, all paths, car parks and paved
areas, wooden decking, boardwalks, bridges, stone and retaining walls, drain
grates within the scheduled areas. These surfaces are to be maintained free of
weeds, grass and moss or other vegetative material and all loose soil, mulch, or
other material.
2.011 MEASURES FOR PROTECTION OF MARINE ENVIRONMENT
A. Where possible, eroding soil material, surface runoff and subsurface flow that may
transport soil contaminants into the marine environment, potentially causing such issues
as pollution, turbidity and eutrophication should be avoided.
B. The following points shall be followed:

1. Additives used for soil enrichment are to be natural and not contain chemicals,
plastic polymers or any dissolvable nutrients that may affect water quality or
affect nutrient balances.
2. Any soft landscaping areas subject to compaction during the construction period
where plants will be directly inserted in to the ground shall have the top layer
skimmed and replaced with a mixture of sand, silt and organic matter in all
places.
3. Rain water loops and collection pans shall be used to ensure nutrient laden
water from landscape additives do not enter the sewage system.
4. High quality pipes and fittings shall be used in the irrigation system. HDPE pipes
shall be used to minimise the number of joints to limit leakage.
5. All chemicals, fertilizers, pesticides and herbicides shall be locked in specially
designed containers and maintained through the maintenance period to avoid
spillage or accidental inhalation. Pollution from spills or litter shall be removed
from the landscaping areas during normal maintenance.
6. Use of fertilizers and soil additives are to be kept to an absolute minimum. Soils
are to have salinity levels and nutrient levels checked quarterly to inform use of
fertilizers.
2.012 REQUIRED STANDARDS

A. The Contractor shall carry out detailed inspections and programme vegetation control
and maintenance to ensure compliance with the specification is met at all times.
B. Vegetation shall be controlled so it does not exceed the maximum height and maximum
spread. At least 99 percent of the total edge length shall be satisfactorily treated and the
overall appearance of the garden/reserve shall be satisfactory.
C. NOTE: There are many instances where only either maximum height or maximum
spread are applicable at any edge.
D. Maximum Height: The maximum height in millimetres (mm) above firm ground level that
vegetation shall be allowed to reach at the edge defined in table below.
E. Maximum Spread: The maximum distance in millimetres (mm) that vegetation shall be
allowed to reach from the edge defined in table below.
Maximum Height Maximum Spread

mm mm
At Garden At Tree At Fence At Kerb & At Garden At Fence At Kerb &

Edges and Edges Footpath Edges Edges Footpath
Shrub and Other and Other
Trunks Edges Edges
50 50 50 35 50 50 50
F. Where manual methods of control are used the protruding vegetation shall be cut by use
of clippers or some other mechanical device that make a precise, even cut. A
proprietary edging machine shall be used against kerbs, concrete paths, mowing strips
etc.
G. Any spraying control methods shall use non-toxic materials approved by the Employer
or nominated representative in accordance with the Landscape Specification.
H. Where the edge is not defined the edge shall be controlled when the vegetation varies
more than the maximum spread defined in the Table over two (2) metres from a straight
line or natural curve.
I. All weeds shall be removed from within hard surfaces including but not limited to car
parks, walkways, paths etc. All moss shall be prevented from building up on paths such
that the path becomes slippery.
2.013 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. The performance of the Contractor may be measured by the Employer or nominated

representative for future reference by the following criteria:
1. Plants are maintained for long term display and health.
2. Fertilising is carried out in accordance with the softscape Specification and to
promote good health and continued plant survival.
3. Weeds are controlled within the specified number and size limits.
4. Mulch is applied and maintained in accordance with the softscape Specification.
5. Mulch to beds to a depth of 5cm.
6. Pruning is performed in accordance with the softscape Specification.
7. Hedges and topiary are clipped three times per year and are dense and even in
appearance and in accordance with the plant specification, plans and details.
8. Plants are supported in accordance with the softscape Specification.
9. Plant health, pests and diseases are monitored, and controlled in accordance
with the softscape Specification.
10. Palms are vertical, healthy and maintained in accordance with the softscape
Specification.
11. Turf areas are maintained in accordance with the softscape Specification.
12. All edges and hard surfaces are maintained in a neat and tidy manner and kept
within the allowable maximum height and spread parameters.
13. Palms and other plants are not damaged during maintenance operations.
14. Add nutrients as per soil test.
15. Prune any tree branches that interfere with public safety. Prune all trees yearly to
encourage strong, upward growth.
2.014 FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A. Prior to the completion of the maintenance period, a preliminary inspection shall be

undertaken by the Engineer. The time for this inspection shall be established in writing.
The quantity and types of plants installed and the acceptability of the plants shall be
determined. The warranty period will end with this inspection provided that the
Contractor has complied with the work required in this Section. The Contractor shall also
comply with the following requirements.
B. Dead, missing or defective plant material or turf shall be replaced. Replaced plants will
be of the same size and species as originally specified.
C. Weed plant beds and saucers. Prior to inspection treat these areas with an application
of approved pre-emergent herbicide.
D. Remove stakes, guy wires and wrappings from plants as directed by the Engineer.
E. Complete remedial measures as directed by the Engineer.
F. Repair damage caused while making plant or turf repairs.
G. A final inspection, if required, shall be undertaken by the Engineer to determine that the
deficiencies noted in the preliminary inspection have been corrected. The time for this
inspection shall be established in writing.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 33 1100
WATER DISTRIBUTION NETWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Water Distribution piping and related components outside the building for
potable water supply.
1. Section 03 3000 : Cast-in-Place Concrete
2. Section 31 2300 : Excavation
3. Section 31 2313 : Backfilling
4. Section 31 2333 : Trench Excavation, Pipe Installation and Backfill
5. Section 33 3328 : HDPE Pressure Pipe and Fittings
6. Section 33 3327 : Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings
1.3 REFERENCES
A. AWWA C 151 Ductile Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Moulds or Sand
Lined Moulds, for Water or Other Liquids.(ISO - 2531)
B. AWWA C 110 Ductile Iron and Grey Iron Fittings 75 mm (3 inch) through
1200 mm (48 inch) nom. dia. for Water and Other Liquids (ISO
- 2531)
C. AWWA C 111 Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron and Grey Iron Pressure
Pipe and Fittings
D. AWWA C 105 Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron piping for Water and
Other Liquids
E. AWWA C 104 Internal Cement Lining for Potable Water Supply Piping
F. AWWA C 106 Grooved and Shouldered type Joints
G. AWWA C 203 External Coating for Ductile Iron Pipes and Fittings
H. BS 8010 Code of practice for pipelines
I. BS 21 Pipe Threads (ANSI B 2.1)
J. BS 4375 PTFE Tape for Pipe Thread Sealing Application
K. BS 1560 / 4504 Circular flanges for pipes, valves and fittings - Class / PN
designated (ANSI B 16.5 / B 16.1 / B 16.24)
KEO/19-3262-0000 33 1100/1 Water Distribution Network

L. ANSI B 16.21 Non-metallic Gaskets for Pipe Flanges
M. BS 2080 Specifications for face-to-face, centre-to-face, end-to-end and

centre-to-end dimensions of valves (ANSI B 36.10)
N. BS 5150 Specification for Cast Iron Gate Valves
O. BS 5151 Specification for Cast Iron Gate (parallel slide) Valves for
General Purposes
P. BS 5152 Specification for Cast Iron Globe and Globe stop and Check
valves for general purposes purposes
Q. BS 5153 Specification for Cast Iron Check Valves for general purposes
R. BS 5155 Specification for Butterfly Valves
S. BS 5159 Specification for Cast Iron and Cast Steel Ball Valves for
General Purposes
T. BS 5163 Predominantly key operated Cast Iron Gate Valves for

Waterworks Purposes
U. BS 6755 Testing of Valves (ANSI B 16.34: Pressure-temperature rating

of valves)
V. BS 5834, Part 2 Specification for small Surface Boxes
W. BS 497 Cast Iron Covers and Frames
X. BS 1247 Manhole Step Irons (Malleable Cast Iron)
Y. BS 5328 Ready Mixed Concrete
Z. BS 9110 The Structural Use of Concrete
AA. AASHTO M 115 Asphalt for Damp-proofing and Waterproofing
BB. AASHTO T 180 Moisture Density Relations of Soils using 10 lbs 4.54 kg)
Rammer
CC. AWWA C 601 Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and
Wastewater
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data, samples and shop drawings shall be submitted in accordance with the
with relevant information highlighted (or irrelevant information struck out), along
with write up of selection criteria
2. General piping layout drawings to a scale not smaller than 1:1000 and detail
plans to a scale not smaller than 1:250, along with profiles to a suitable scale.
Indicate dimensions, method of field assembly and components.

3. Drawings of valve chambers, valve pits and the like to a scale of 1:100 / 1:50 as
appropriate. Indicate dimensions and methods of field assembly and
components.
4. Installation details of valves, vacuum breakers, air release valves, sleeves and
penetrations etc. to a scale of 1:20
5. Calculations / details to substantiate the shop drawings.
6. Thrust block details with locations indicated in the shop drawings and required
calculations for thrust blocks.
B. Coordination Drawings: For piping and specialties including relation to other services in
same area, drawn to scale. Show piping and specialty sizes and valves, specialty
locations and elevations.
C. Field quality-control reports.
D. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal and control wiring for alarms.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For water valves and specialties to include in
emergency, operation and maintenance manuals.
F. Project record documents of all works installed under this section shall be submitted in
accordance with the General Conditions of Contract.
G. Three (3) hard bound copies of “Operation and Maintenance Manual" shall be
submitted in accordance with the General Conditions of Contract, with complete data
for each piece of equipment installed, as detailed below:
1. Manual shall contain:
a. Table of contents
b. Material submittal with the Engineer's and local authorities’ approval
c. Manufacturer's installation instructions
d. Manufacturer's assembly details
e. Replacement, parts number listings and description
f. Preventive maintenance schedules listing frequency of service and or
replacement.
g. Lubrication materials, equivalents and schedules
h. Name and addresses of manufacturer, sales and service agency and
local representative / distributor including telephone and fax numbers
i. Names and address of Contractor's maintenance department, including
emergency contact telephone numbers
2. Contents of the manual shall be arranged in sections with tags, grouping each
class of equipment as piping, valves and control gear, pumps, controls, etc.
3. Contents of each section shall be arranged in sequence as listed above (Item 2)
H. Comprehensive, priced list of tools and spare parts clearly cross-referenced with As-
Built Drawings and Operation and Maintenance Manuals; as recommended by the
manufacturer. Prices offered shall be valid during the maintenance period.

A. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Comply with requirements of MEW
2. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction including MEW for water
service piping, including materials, hose threads, installation, and testing.
3. Comply with American Water Works Association (AWWA) requirements.
B. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
D. Valves and similar control gear shall have manufacturer's name, pressure rating and
size cast-on the valve body.
E. Equivalent British (BS), German (DIN), or Japanese (JIS) or other international

standards are acceptable, provided the Contractor substantiates their equivalence and
ensures their compatibility with other components of the system.
F. For each product specified, provide from the same manufacturer throughout, where
possible.
G. Test certificates from approved independent laboratories or testing agencies shall be

furnished at no extra cost if required by the Engineer.
H. Uniformity shall be maintained in respect of connection standards (threads or flanges)

throughout. Where this is not practical due to justifiable reasons, ensure compatibility,
by using appropriate adapters, conversion spools, mating flanges and the like, with the
written approval of the Engineer.
I. Requirements of product quality, workmanship, materials etc. are identified by

product(s) of a particular manufacturer and stated as “Ref. …”. This shall be construed
to include the term “or approved equal” as well.
A. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves, according to the following:

1. Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion.
2. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends and flange faces.
3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling.
B. During Storage: Use precautions for valves, according to the following:

1. Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for
storage.
2. Protect from weather. Store indoors and maintain temperature higher than
ambient dew point temperature. Support off the ground or pavement in
watertight enclosures when outdoor storage is necessary.
C. Handling: Use sling to handle valves if size requires handling by crane or lift. Rig
valves to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use hand wheels or stems as lifting
or rigging points.

D. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt,
debris, and moisture.
E. Valves shall be delivered and stored in shipping containers with labelling in place. Plug
and ball valves shall be kept in open position and gate / globe valves in closed position
to prevent damage to valve seats. Flange / thread protectors shall be retained on the
valves, until installation, to prevent damage to the flange faces / threads.
F. Protect stored piping from moisture and dirt. Store piping on elevated racks. Do not
exceed structural capacity of floor when storing inside.
G. Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt.
H. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and
bending.
1.7 THIRD PARTY CERTIFICATION
A. Test certificates from third party agencies shall be furnished in respect of the following:
1. Conformance of coating / lining materials with minimum requirements of
reference standards in respect of:
a. Impact strength, and
b. Chemical resistance as confirmed by immersion of the finished product in
acid, alkali and de-ionized water
2. Verification / certification of the physical dimensions and unit weights of
samples of pipes, fittings and valves
3. Hydraulic pressure tests of each piece of pipes, fittings and valves
4. Chemical composition of samples from each batch of pipes, fittings and
valves.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING
A. Ductile Iron PIPE AND FITTINGS
1. D.I pipe and fitting shall confirm to the requirements of Section 33 3327
2.2 GATE VALVES
A. AWWA, Cast-Iron Gate Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
approved by the concerned ministry.
2. Non-rising-Stem, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves:
a. Description: Gray- or ductile
b. -iron body and bonnet; with bronze or gray- or ductile-iron gate, resilient
seats, bronze stem, and stem nut.
1) Standard: AWWA C509.
2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 50 psig.
3) End Connections: Flanged joint.
4) Interior Coating: Complying with AWWA C550.
2.3 GATE VALVE ACCESSORIES AND SPECIALTIES
A. Valve Boxes: Comply with AWWA M44 for cast-iron valve boxes, if required. Include
top section, adjustable extension of length required for depth of burial of valve, plug and
bottom section with base that fits over valve and with a barrel approximately 5 inches
(125 mm) in diameter.
1. Operating Wrenches: Steel, tee-handle with one pointed end, stem of length to
operate deepest buried valve, and socket matching valve operating nut.
2.4 CHECK VALVES
A. AWWA Check Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
approved by the concerned ministry.
2. Description: Swing-check type with resilient seat. Include interior coating
according to AWWA C550 and ends to match piping.
a. Standard: AWWA C508.
b. Pressure Rating: 50 psig minimum
2.5 RELIEF VALVES
A. Air-Release Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products approved by
the concerned ministry.
2. Description: Hydro mechanical device to automatically release accumulated air.

a. Standard: AWWA C512.
b. Pressure Rating: 50 psig minimum
c. Body Material: Cast iron.
d. Trim Material: Stainless steel
2.6 CONCRETE VALVE CHAMBERS
A. Description: Precast, reinforced-concrete valve chambers as per AHJ requirement and

specifications.
1. Ladder: Galvanized step iron. For manholes deeper than 3m, ladders shall be
used instead of step irons.
2. Surface box: Surface box shall be of cast iron cover and frame with 225mm x
225mm clear opening size as shown on the drawing.
3. Manhole: Heavy duty ductile or cast iron frame and cover.
a. Dimension: 24-inch (610-mm) minimum diameter clear
2.7 THRUST BLOCKS AND PEDESTALS
A. Pillar hydrants and buried valves shall be supported on concrete pedestals resting on
undisturbed soil.
B. Buried piping shall be supported by concrete thrust blocks resting on undisturbed soil at
all changes of direction, size or elevation to counter the thrust forces.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EARTHWORK
A. Comply with excavating, trenching, and backfilling requirements in Division 31.
3.2 CO-ORDINATION
A. Contractor shall study all drawings and specifications and familiarize with the details
and the work of other trades.
B. Contractor shall ensure that the work under this section shall not interfere with those of
other trades and are compatible with them prior to placing orders, fabrication and
installation.
C. Templates, patterns, setting out plans and other items shall be furnished for
incorporation in the works of other trades. Contractor shall ensure timely placement of
sleeves, inserts and the like.
D. Where work is installed in close proximity to or will interfere with work of other trades,
the Contractor shall assist in working out satisfactory space arrangements. Composite
shop drawings shall be prepared, to a suitable scale, showing how the work is installed
in relation to the work of other trades.
E. Contractor shall resolve conflicts in requirements with other trades. Only those, which
cannot be solved without changes to structure or those, which involves major changes
to system design, shall be referred to the Engineer.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Pipes shall be cut perpendicular to the axis, with approved cutting tools, ends tapered
by a grinder and a fast drying coal tar coat shall be applied at the bared areas.
B. Scale and dirt, on inside and outside and weld splatter shall be removed before
assembly.
C. Coating on ductile iron pipes and fittings shall be repaired with approved paint
(recommended by the manufacturer) where factory coating has been damaged.
D. Piping connections to valves and equipment shall be made with flanges.
E. Spigot ends which joins the fitting sockets to form a locked mechanical joint as
specified for chamber piping shall be machined to have an annular groove into which
the locking ring is engaged. Contractor shall obtain the control gauges from the pipe
manufacturer to check the location and cross section of the groove before carrying out
the machining operation. It is recommended to carry this out in a workshop on a lathe
or to perform the work with an on-site machine. After the groove is machined a fast
drying coal tar coat shall be applied on the cut.
3.4 INSPECTION BEFORE INSTALLATION
A. Materials shall be carefully inspected and examined for cracks and other defects while
suspended above the trench immediately before installation in final position.

B. Materials, which do not conform to specification(s) or found to be defective or damaged
shall be rejected and removed from the works. If more than 10 % of the materials are
rejected the Engineer shall have the right to reject the whole consignment.
3.5 SETTING OUT
A. Existing ground shall be levelled along the line of piping installation, particularly at all
manholes, building connections and other appurtenances.
B. Sight rails shall be set in position, using a surveyor's level and temporary benchmarks,
properly established alongside the work. Practice of transferring levels by means of a
straight edge and spirit level shall not be allowed.
C. Where long lengths of piping are to be laid in trenches, sight rails shall be fixed across
the trench at intervals not exceeding 20 m, at a height equal to the length of the boning
rod to be used above the required invert level of the piping. There shall be no less than
three sight rails in position on each length of sewer or drain under construction at any
one gradient.
D. Deviations from given levels may not be greater than ± 20 mm and in gradients not
greater than 1/20 of the given gradient.
3.6 PIPE LAYING
A. Pipes shall be laid and connected at the required depth in straight line and true to the
gradient on an even foundation, for the full length of the barrel, with the sockets facing
up the gradient, including necessary fittings.
B. While jointing pipes, a mark shall be made to check the position of the end of the barrel.
In view of the flexibility of the joint, a gap 5 to 10 mm wide shall be left between the
ends of the pipes. Rubber rings shall be lubricated with graphite paste. When pipes are
laid in curves, the pipe may not be bent sideways until the connection has been made.
C. Piping shall be kept free of earth, dirt, and extraneous matter and clean every pipe after
installation by special cleaning tools approved by the Engineer. Contractor shall furnish
mirrors, lamps and necessary personnel as directed, to enable Engineer to inspect the
drainage pipeline at any time during construction.
D. Pipe shall not be laid when conditions are unsuitable, in the opinion of the Engineer.
A. Piping shall be installed in such a way that conserves space and does not interfere with
the use of space.
B. Minimum clearances shall be provided between piping covered by this Section and
those of other trades.
C. Pipes shall be handled with utmost care so as not to subject the pipes to shocks, which
may crack or break the internal lining. Pipes with damaged concrete lining shall not be
used.
D. Underground pipes shall be wrapped up with polyethylene sleeve before laying.

Adhesive tapes shall be used to secure the sleeve at socket and spigot ends. Plastic
coated wire shall be used to secure polyethylene sleeve at every one-third length of the
pipe.

E. After jointing is done and testing completed, encasement shall be pulled to close the
whole joint and be secured with plastic coated wire strapping. Pipes shall be laid with
the folded part of the polyethylene encasement at the crown of the piping.
F. Piping shall be protected against the ingress of foreign material before the pipe is
placed in the new line. If the fitting or valve cannot be placed into the trench and in
place, without getting earth into it, each end shall be covered with a heavy, tightly
woven canvas bag of suitable size before lowering them into the trench. The bag shall
be left there until the connection is to be made to the adjacent pipe.
G. If the pipe contains dirt, then the interior shall be cleaned and swabbed with a
bactericidal solution, formed from one of the compounds listed in AWWA C 601-54 or
approved equal. Chlorinated lime and water mixture shall not be used.
H. Water-Main Connection: Connect water main to the fresh water supply pipes from
pump room according to requirements of AHJ and of size and in location indicated on
the drawings.
I. Comply with MEW regulations for piping materials and installation.
J. Install ductile-iron, water-service piping according to AWWA C600 and AWWA M41.
1. Install encasement for piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.
K. Bury piping with depth of cover over top at least 30 inches (750 mm) below level of
maximum frost penetration, and according to the following unless otherwise indicated
on the drawings:
1. Under Driveways: With at least 36 inches (910 mm) of cover over top.
2. In Loose Gravelly Soil and Rock: With at least 12 inches (300 mm) of additional
cover.
L. Install piping by tunneling or jacking, or combination of both, under streets and other
obstructions that cannot be disturbed.
M. Install underground piping with restrained joints at horizontal and vertical changes in
direction. Use restrained-joint piping, thrust blocks, anchors, tie-rods and clamps, and
other supports.
A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special
fittings that have finish and pressure rating same as or higher than systems pressure
rating for aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.
B. Install unions adjacent to each valve in tubing NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.
C. Install flanges, flange adaptors, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves,

apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger end connections.
D. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from outside and inside of pipes, tubes, and fittings
before assembly.
E. Copper-Tubing, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Use proprietary crimping tool and procedure

recommended by copper, pressure-seal-fitting manufacturer.

F. Ductile-Iron Piping, Grooved Joints: Cut-groove pipe. Assemble joints with grooved-
end, ductile-iron-piping couplings, gaskets, lubricant, and bolts.
G. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable
for water service. Join flanges with bolts according to ASME B31.9.
H. Dissimilar Materials Piping Joints: Use adapters compatible with both piping materials,
with OD, and with system working pressure.
I. Do not use flanges or unions for underground piping.
3.9 ANCHORAGE INSTALLATION
A. Anchorage, General: Install water-distribution piping with restrained joints.

Anchorages and restrained-joint types that may be used shall include the following:
1. Concrete thrust blocks.
2. Locking mechanical joints.
3. Set-screw mechanical retainer glands.
4. Bolted flanged joints.
5. Pipe clamps and tie rods.
B. Apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion-resistant material to surfaces of

installed ferrous anchorage devices.
A. UL-Listed or FM-Approved Gate Valves Install each underground valve and valves in
vaults with stem pointing up and with vertical cast-iron indicator post.
B. MSS Valves: Install as component of connected piping system.

C. Support valves and piping, not direct buried, on concrete piers. Comply with
requirements for concrete piers in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete"
3.11 INSPECTION, TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
A. During the manufacture and installation and after completion of works; the system,
sections of the system or its components shall be tested in the presence of the
Engineer, as directed below or elsewhere. Contractor shall furnish testing instruments
and accessories as directed by the Engineer.
1. Basic materials for conformity with the specified standards
2. Supports and anchors for ability to withstand required loads
3. Piping in general for line, level, gradient and water tightness
B. Use test procedure prescribed by AHJ or, if method is not prescribed by AHJ, use
procedure described below.
C. Piping in chambers / tunnels shall be tested only after checking the proper installation
of fittings and the locking ring. Bolts shall be tightened correctly and no component that
may be detached (and cause accidents) when the piping is subjected to test pressure
shall be left loose.

D. Piping in trench shall not be tested before thrust blocks are constructed and partial
back filling is done at the midpoint of each pipe barrel. Only the joints shall be left
exposed to check leaks during testing.
E. Piping shall be tested in segments during the progress of the work. An official log book
shall be maintained for recording tests carried out, including sections of piping, test
pressure, date and approval signature of the Engineer’s representative witnessing the
test.
F. Piping shall be tested with water in sections not exceeding 200 m; after jointing and
been in position for at least 24 hours.
1. A minimum of two (2) nos. identical pressure gauges shall be installed at
extremities of the piping circuit to be tested
2. Provision shall be made for drainage of piping upon completion of testing to
avoid flooding of trenches or chambers
3. Piping shall be filled with clean fresh water, leaving all high points open to allow
for purging of air. A soaking period of at least 24 hours shall be allowed for
cement-lined pipes
4. System shall be pressure tested using manual pumps (Pressure testing using
motor driven pump shall not be permitted) in increments of 25 percent of the test
pressure
5. System shall not be over pressurized under any circumstance. If the test
pressure is close to the maximum permissible pressure of any of the system
components, calibrated pressure relief valves shall be installed in the tested
circuit. A standing period of 10 minutes shall be allowed after each pressure
increment
6. Valves and control devices shall be kept in the open position, during tests
7. After completion of test, valves shall be closed one-at-a-time, starting from the
pressure release end, so as to ensure tightness of the valve
8. Piping shall be tested with water at a pressure of 690 kPa (100 psig) or 1.5
times the system working pressure, whichever is greater, but limited to 1,379
kPa (200 psig), maintained for at least 8 hours. Pressure fluctuations due to
ambient temperature variations shall be recorded and allowed for by recording
the circuit temperature along with the pressure readings
9. Joints shall be checked for leaks by swabbing with a dry tissue. Drop in pressure
to the order of 10 kPa (1.5 psig) per hour, but without any visible leaks, shall be
considered as acceptable.
3.12 SERVICE AND UTILITY CONNECTIONS
A. Utility connections shall be executed using appropriate joints, after tests are completed
and temporary testing arrangement(s) be removed.
B. Contractor shall co-ordinate with relevant Sections, obtain all necessary information on
available utility mains, obtain approvals and permits, and pay all fees and expenses in
this respect.
1. Fresh Water - MEW Water Department
3.13 DISINFECTION
A. Fresh water lines, appurtenances and connections shall be disinfected in accordance

with the AWWA C 601 and as specified herein.
B. Chlorinating agent shall be supplied at the section to be chlorinated and shall be
injected through service connections to ensure treatment of the entire system being
disinfected. Temporary connections, necessary for chlorinating the piping system, shall
be installed as appropriate.
C. In addition to materials specified in AWWA C 601-54, calcium hypochlorite tablets,

attached by means of an approved adhesive to the soffit of the pipes as they are being
laid, will also be permitted as disinfecting agents. Amount of adhesive used shall be
limited to the minimum required for holding it in position. Tablets shall be of 5 grams in
weight and contain not less than 70 % of available chlorine. Adhesive shall be of a type
that will not impart taste, odours or toxicity to the water supply. Where use of calcium
hypochlorite tablets is intended, details of application must be submitted to the
Engineer for approval.
D. Proper care shall be exercised in the storage of liquid chlorine, hypochlorite or other
disinfecting agents. These shall be stored in tightly closed containers inaccessible to
children or unauthorized persons. Manufacturer's instructions shall be followed, to the
approval of the Engineer, in the storage and handling of these chemicals.
E. pH of water to be treated shall be adjusted to between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali
(caustic soda or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric acid) prior to the addition of the
disinfecting agent.
F. Water mixed with disinfectant, sufficient to produce between 5 to 10 ppm (mg/L) free
chlorine after 12 hours, shall be fed slowly into the pipeline and maintained for 12
hours. Dosage shall not be exceeded without the approval of the Engineer.
G. Treatment shall be repeated if final disinfectant residual tests less than 5 ppm after 12
hours, at any outlet.
3.14 SYSTEM FLUSHING AND CHARGING
A. System shall be flushed, until residual chlorine is equal to that of incoming water or 1.0
ppm, disposing off the water in a manner approved by the Engineer.
B. System shall be charged with water intended for the service and kept under pressure.
Pipe work shall never be left partially filled, under any circumstance.
C. Samples shall be taken no sooner than 24 hours after charging, from remote outlet(s)
and from the water entry and analysed in accordance with AWWA C 601 and results of
the analysis shall be submitted to the Engineer.
D. System shall be drained, flushing and re-charged, where results of water analysis are
not satisfactory.
3.15 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install continuous underground warning tape during backfilling of trench for

underground water-service piping. Locate below finished grade, directly over piping.
Underground warning tapes are specified in Division 31 Section “Trench Excavation,
Pipe Installation and Backfill”.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 33 1219
WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION FIRE HYDRANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENT
A. The Contractor shall provide wet-barrel fire hydrants, complete and operable in
accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
A. The Work of the following Section applies to the Work of this Section. Other Sections of
the Specifications, not referenced below, shall also apply to the extent required for
proper performance of this Work.
1. Section 01330 – Submittals.
2. Section 09980 – Linings and Protective Coatings for Concrete.
3. Section 15110 – Valves, General.
1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS
A. The following standards have been referenced in this Section of the Specifications:
1. ANSI/AWWA C503 Wet Barrel Fire Hydrants
2. AWWA C550 Protective Epoxy Interior Coatings for Valves and
Hydrants.
1.04 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. All submittals shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 01330.
B. Shop Drawings: Shop Drawings shall include the following information:

1. Drawings of hydrants, valves, elbows, thrust restraint, and arrangement of
breakaway flange.
2. Calculations for thrust restraint when applicable.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 WET-BARREL FIRE HYDRANTS
A. Construction: Fire hydrants where required by the Kuwait Fire Brigade, or indicted, shall
be of the wet-barrel type, in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C 503. Wet-Barrel Fire
Hydrants shall have a buried section of ductile iron or steel and a break-away flange
connected to the hydrant head. Each hydrant shall be isolated by an individual, buried
gate valve with cast iron box and cover. The hydrant head shall have a minimum of one
connection to suit the normal Kuwait Fire Brigade hose connectors and one 63mm hose
connection, except where otherwise required by the local fire department. The hose
connection shall be of brass or bronze. The hydrant inlet shall be not less than 150mm
KEO/19-3262-0000 33 1219/1 Water Utility Distribution Fire Hydrants
in diameter. The hose and steamer connections shall be provided with cast iron caps
and metal chains. All bolts, nuts, and washers shall be of Type 316 stainless steel,
unless otherwise required for structural reasons. The hydrants shall be tested to 20 Bar
Gauge and they shall be suitable for a working pressure of 10 Bar Gauge. All interior
and exterior surfaces shall be coated in accordance with AWWA C 550 and Section
09870 and painted ANSI safety yellow in accordance with local codes.
B. Fire hydrants shall comply with the requirements of NFPA.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. All fire hydrants shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s published
recommendations, AWWA Standards, and all applicable codes, All installations shall be
to the satisfaction of the Kuwait Fire Brigade and Kuwait Municipality.
B. All hydrant isolating valves with slip joints, friction type, or calked joint connections shall
be harnessed to the main pipe by means of welded steel harness sets, or clamps and
steel rods, designed for this purpose. All hydrants with other than flanged inlets shall be
installed with a concrete thrust block, calculated for the maximum expected water
pressure, with allowances for surge.
END OF SECTION
KEO/19-3262-0000 33 1219/2 Water Utility Distribution Fire Hydrants

SECTION 33 3000
SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This section specifies installation and testing for Sanitary Sewerage systems and
includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1. General Requirements
2. Pipe testing
3. Connections to existing pipelines
4. Over pumping and flow diversion.
B. For trench excavation, pipe installation, and backfill see Section 31 2315.

A. Section 01 1100 - Summary of Work
B. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures
C. Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements
D. Section 01 5250 - Site Safety and Security
E. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements
F. Section 01 7123 - Field Engineering
G. Section 02 4100 - Demolition
H. Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete
I. Section 03 4000 - Precast Concrete
J. Section 03 9000 - Testing of Water Retaining Structures
K. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications
L. Section 06 6200 - Glass Reinforced Plastic Fabrications
M. Section 07 1300 - Sheet Waterproofing
N. Section 09 9730 - Linings and Protective Coatings for Concrete
O. Section 31 2000 - Earth Moving
P. Section 31 2300 - Excavation and Fill
Q. Section 31 2315 - Trenching
R. Section 33 0522 - Microtunneling
S. Section 33 3101 - Reinforced Concrete Pipe and Fittings
T. Section 33 3102 - HDPE Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings
U. Section 33 3103 - Polymer Concrete Pipes
V. Section 33 3104 - Vitrified Clay Pipe
W. Section 33 3327 - Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings
X. Section 33 3328 - HDPE Pressure Pipe and Fittings
Y. Section 33 3330 - uPVC Pipe and Fittings
AA. Section 33 3913 - Sanitary Utility Sewerage Manholes, Frames, and Covers
AB. Section 33 4000 - Storm Drainage Utilities
1.03 REFERENCES
A. Product manufacture, testing and installation shall comply with the following references,
unless otherwise stated in the specifications, or unless otherwise approved by Engineer.
KEO/19-3262-0000 33 3000/1 Sanitary Sewerage Utilities

1. ASTM D2321 – Recommended practice for underground installation of flexible
thermoplastic sewer pipe.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. The following definitions shall pertain to words or phrases as utilized in this section.
1. "uPVC" shall mean unplasticised polyvinyl chloride.
2. HDPE" shall mean high density polyethylene.
3. "RCP" shall mean reinforced concrete pipe.
4. "DI" shall mean ductile iron.
5. "Pipe Surround" shall mean that material directly below, around and above the
pipe.
6. "Formation" shall mean the bottom of the trench excavation, or in some cases, fill
just below the pipe surround.
7. "Stanks" shall mean barriers to flowing water within granular pipe surround
material
A. The Contractor shall provide all labour, materials and equipment necessary for providing
a complete operating system.
B. Responsibility for the safety and soundness of all material shall rest with the Contractor.
C. Contractor is advised to carry out any tests (at his cost) needed to satisfy himself
regarding the soundness of the pipes, fittings and jointing materials prior to acceptance
testing by the Engineer.
D. Pipe materials to be utilised shall be as shown on the drawings, or as described in the
particular and general specifications.
E. Each type of pipe and fittings shall be furnished by a single manufacturer,
unless otherwise accepted by the Engineer.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Approval
1. The Contractor shall submit sufficient information to the Engineer, prior to
purchase according to Section 01 3300, in order to verify compliance with the
specifications. Such information shall include at least the following:
a. Manufacturers name
b. Suppliers name
c. Product name (if applicable)
d. Product description
e. Manufacturers technical data
f. Storage instructions
g. Installation instructions
B. Material samples shall be submitted as required in the relevant sections within

these specifications, or as requested by the Engineer.
C. Method Statements
1. The Contractor shall provide method statements meeting the requirements of
Section 01 4000, for at least the following activities, or as requested by the
Engineer.
a. Pipe testing.
b. Manhole and chamber construction.
c. Pump station connection.
d. Pipe installation including backfill compaction methods for flexible
(uPVC and HDPE) pipes.
D. Shop Drawings
1. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings according to Section 01 3300 for
at least the following items:
a. Manhole and chamber construction
b. Pump station construction.
1.07 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Prior to dispatch from the factory, the Contractor shall notify the time to allow the
engineer or his representatives to inspect and test the products, if so desired.
1. All notifications shall be made by written “Inspection Requests” in accordance
with Section 01 4000 – “Quality requirements”.
a. An advance copy may be taxed to the Engineers office, but the original
must arrive before the scheduled day of inspection.
2. Minimum notification times shall be as follows:
a. 24 hours on site
b. 72 hours for other areas within Kuwait
c. 3 Weeks outside of Kuwait.
B. “ Inspection Request” for at least the following items, shall be submitted to the Engineer
during the on-site installation work, prior to proceeding with the following activities.
Minimum notification time shall be 24 hours.
1. Pipe testing.
2. Backfilling.
3. Reinforcing Steel for Cast-in-situ Concrete.
4. Formwork for Cast-in-Situ Concrete.
5. Placing of Cast-in-Situ Concrete.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDING
A. General requirements for delivery, storage and handling of products and materials shall
be specified in Section 01 6000 – “Product Requirements”.
B. Specific requirements shall be as specified in the relevant specification section
governing the manufacture and installation of the material or product in question.
C. Additional requirements may be required as per the manufactures recommendations
and/or the directives of the Engineer.
1. Transportation, handling and storage shall at all times be performed in a manner
to avoid product damage.
2. Only nylon slings shall be allowed for lifting products. Steel chains, clamps or
cables shall not be allowed for lifting purposes, unless approved by the Engineer.
a. Steel chains or cables may be allowed for securing products during
transport of storage, provided protective padding or timber blocking is
utilized.
3. Do not store products directly on the ground, unless approved by the engineer.
4. Visually inspect all products upon delivery and report any damage to the
Engineer.
a. Any products damaged during delivery, storage or installation shall be
marked and set aside.
b. Proposals for repair of any damaged products shall be submitted in
writing to the Engineer for approval.
c. No repairs to damaged products shall be attempted, without the
d. Any damaged products deemed unsuitable for repair by the Engineer
shall be removed from site and replaced at the Contractors expense.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. RCP and fittings shall comply with the requirements of Section 33 3101 - "Reinforced
Concrete Pipe and Fittings".
B. Ductile Iron Pipes shall comply with the requirements of Section 33 3327 - "Ductile Iron
C. Polymer Concrete Pipes shall comply with the requirements of Section 33 3103 –
“Polymer Concrete Pipes”.
D. uPVC Pipes and fittings shall conform to the requirements of Section 33 3330 – “uPVC
Pipes and Fittings”.
E. HDPE Pipes and fittings shall conform to the requirements of Section 33 3102 – “HDPE
Gravity Sewer Pipes and Fittings” and Section 33 3328 – “HDPE Pressure Pipe and
Fittings”.
2.02 PIPE SURROUND
A. Pipe surround shall conform to the requirements of Section 31 2315 – “Trenching”, and
to the requirements of the specific pipe material specification.
2.03 GRP FABRICATIONS
A. GRP fabrication as listed below shall comply with the requirements of Section 06 6200.
1. Ladders and safety cages
2. Manhole benching, liner shafts
3. Wet well or chamber liners
4. Gratings
5. Sealing plates.
2.04 CONCRETE
A. Concrete and accessories shall comply with the relevant sections in Division 3 of these
specifications.
2.05 CONCRETE LININIGS AND COATINGS
A. Concrete linings and protective coatings shall comply with the requirements of Section
09 9730
2.06 WATER PROOFING
A. Water proofing shall comply with the requirements of Section 07 1300.
2.07 CAST IRON COVERS AND FRAMES

A. Manhole covers and frames, along with the following items shall comply with the
requirements of Section 33 3913.
1. Multi-part covers
2. Surface boxes
3. Sealing plates
2.08 VALVES, GATES, AND APPURTENANCES
A. Pumps, valves, gates and appurtenances shall comply with the requirements found in
other Divisions of these Specifications.
2.09 PIPELINE WARNING TAPE
A. Pipeline warning tape shall comply with the requirements of Section 31 2315.
2.010 PIPELINE MARKER POSTS
A. Pipeline marker posts shall comply with the requirements of Section 31 2315.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PIPE INSTALLATION
A. Trench excavation, pipe installation and backfill shall comply with Section 31 2315,
unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
3.02 CLEANING AND INSPECTION OF GRAVITY PIPELINES
A. For the purposes of cleaning and inspection, the term gravity 'pipelines' includes those
laid in heading or by pipe- jacking or microtunneling or similar techniques.
B. The Contractor shall submit for approval, his proposed method for cleaning the gravity
pipeline. Such cleaning system shall not damage the pipeline in any way.
C. During and after construction the Contractor shall take reasonable measures, including
the provision of stoppers plugs and headwalls where appropriate, to prevent the ingress
of deleterious matter into pipelines.
D. After backfilling pipe trenches and completing manholes, chambers, hatch boxes etc.,
and before the trench surfaces are reinstated, the interior of pipelines shall be cleaned
of silt and debris by approved methods for inspection by the Engineer as follows: -
1. Pipelines of 800mm nominal internal diameter and smaller shall have a loose
plug passed through them to show that they are clear of obstruction and free
from deflection. For flexible pipelines the loose plug shall be dimensioned to
suit the permissible minimum deflected diameter of the pipe.
2. Pipelines greater than 800mm nominal internal diameter will, after
cleaning, be inspected from the inside and the Contractor shall
provide a suitable trolley, ventilation and safety equipment, and any other
plant and labour necessary for this purpose, if required by the Engineer.
3. All pipelines will be inspected again before commissioning or taking over
(whichever is sooner) and, if required by the Engineer, shall be cleaned again in
whole or in part. The final precommissioning inspection for pipelines with
nominal internal diameter of 1800mm or less shall be by CCTV camera with
videocassette tape in accordance with Section 31 2315. The tape recordings
shall become the property of the Ministry. Pipelines with nominal internal
diameters greater than 1800mm shall be inspected at final precommissioning in
accordance with Item 2 (i.e. from inside by trolley).
E. After final pre-commissioning inspection, all pipelines to which flows will

not be immediately connected shall be plugged with purpose made removable
stoppers until such time as the pipelines are commissioned. A log recording the
installation date and location and the subsequent removal date of all stoppers
installed shall be maintained and countersigned by the Engineers Representative.
3.03 CLEANING OF PRESSURE MAINS
A. During and after construction the Contractor shall take reasonable measures, including
the provision of stoppers, plugs and headwalls where appropriate, to prevent the ingress
of deleterious matter into pipelines.
B. The Contractor shall clean the interior of each pipe joint as it is laid and install temporary
closure pieces on the ends of the pipeline whenever work is stopped or disrupted to
keep the pipeline clean.
C. Pressure lines shall be flushed with water until all silt and sand is removed and the line
flows clean prior to hydrostatic pressure testing.
D. All pressure lines that will transport chlorinated water (potable, treated effluent, etc.)
shall be subjected to disinfection with chlorine in accordance with the applicable
AWWA standards and EPA rules and regulations.
3.04 TESTING OF PIPELINES: GENERAL
A. For the purpose of inspection and testing, the term ‘pipelines’ includes those laid in
heading or by pipe-jacking or microtunneling, or similar techniques.
B. Prior to commencement of flushing or testing, approval shall be obtained to the quality
and methods of providing and disposing of all fluids used for flushing or testing purpose.
C. If permission is given to use new or existing pipelines or culverts which are not part of a
live system, they shall be thoroughly cleaned of all silt and any resulting damage made
good after use.
D. If lagoons for the storage of such fluids are permitted, they must be suitably protected
with fencing and attended by day and night to prevent access by the general public and
will not be sited adjacent to buildings. Approved means of preventing the formation of
mosquito larvae on the surface of the lagoons will be employed.
E. Testing of pipelines shall in all cases be carried out in the presence of the engineer. the
Contractor shall provide complete plant an all struts, thrust blocks, etc., as may be
necessary for effectively testing the pipelines to the specified pressures.
F. For both gravity and pressure pipelines, only testing of new or replaced sections of
pipelines and fittings will be required under the Contract, in accordance with this
Specification, unless detailed otherwise. Such testing will be carried out before making
final connections to the existing network. However, where tees or other fittings
are inserted into existing pipelines, and where lengths of pipeline are replaced, no
backfilling will be allowed at the tees or fittings or at the joints between new and existing
pipework until the pipeline has been returned to service and a visual inspection of all
such fittings and joints made with the network under pressure.
G. Should any inspection be unsatisfactory or any test fail, the Contractor shall
replace defective pipes, leaking joints or otherwise re-execute defective work as
instructed, following which, cleaning and testing will be repeated until the
Engineer certifies the pipeline to be satisfactory.

H. The Contractor shall take care that during periods of rainfall or flooding of trenches from
other causes, lengths of completed pipelines which have not been backfilled
may be subject to flotation.
He shall take precautions and measures to avoid any such flotation. If pipelines
are subject to flotation they shall be removed and completely relaid to the
Engineer's satisfaction.
I. General
1. The Contractor shall submit a method statement in accordance with Section 01
4000 for the Engineer's approval, covering details of his proposed
methods and programme for testing (including details of test equipment).
2. The Contractor shall provide all labour, materials and supplies necessary for
carrying out testing and cleaning including water, pumps, gauges, piped
connections, stop ends and all other temporary works. The Contractor shall also
include details for the disposal of water used for testing.
3. Gauges used for testing pressure pipelines shall either be of conventional
circular type, not less than 300mm diameter, calibrated in bars, or shall
have a digital indicator capable of reading increments of 0.1 bar.
4. Before any gauge is used, the Contractor shall arrange for it to be
checked independently and a recent certificate of its accuracy shall be
provided to the Engineer.
a. One additional gauge as above shall be handed over to the Engineer’s
representative for purposes of verification during testing.
b. The Contractor shall calibrate pressure gauges at regular intervals, as
required by the engineer, at no additional cost to the Ministry.
5. Pipelines shall be properly secured and supported before being put under test.
a. At pipe ends, provide for transmitting the end thrust into sides of the
trenches.
b. Ensure that anchorage of bends is sufficient and thrusts from all branch
outlets are properly restrained.
6. No testing will be permitted until then days after thrust blocks and other holding
down works have been completed, unless otherwise approved by the engineer.
7. Trenches may not be left open at joints prior to testing pipelines, except as
permitted by the Engineer, who may lay down certain restricting conditions.
8. The Contractor may at any stage of construction carry out such tests as he
considers desirable, to check materials and workmanship on the pipeline.
a. This shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligations to complete all
testing designated under the Contract.
9. All water required for testing and cleaning the pipelines shall be potable
water or irrigation water and shall be provided by the Contractor, at his cost.
10. All flexible pipelines (uPVC, HDPE) must be tested for deflection.
11. The Engineer shall have power to require the Contractor to vary any test
procedure or pressure, as the Engineer thinks fit, at no extra cost to the Ministry.
12. The Contractor shall submit an inspection request to the Engineer, in accordance
with Cl. 1.07 "Quality Control" to test a section of pipeline, after having satisfied
himself that the section of pipeline to be tested in the presence of the Engineer
is satisfactory in all aspects
13. The Contractor should note that neither the satisfactory testing of a pipeline,
section of a pipeline or any other pipework, nor the acceptance of such
testing by the Engineer or his representative, shall in any way relieve the
Contractor of any of his responsibilities and obligations under the Contract.
14. When leakage or infiltration exceeds the amount allowed by the specifications,
the Contractor shall, at his own expense, make the necessary repairs or
replacements in accordance with the specifications, to reduce the leakage
or infiltration to the specified limits.
15. Any individual detectable leaks shall be repaired, regardless of the results of the
test, unless otherwise accepted by the Engineer.
J. Deflection Testing
1. All flexible pipelines (HDPE, uPVC, etc) shall be subjected to deflection tests at
site, as detailed herein and in the particular pipe specification of these
documents.
a. The above requirement shall not apply to pipes 100mm dia. and smaller.
2. Deflection shall be calculated as a percentage of the difference between

the measured in-situ diameter (on any axis) and the stated non-deflected
diameter, divided by the non-deflected diameter.
a. A reduction in the diameter shall be considered to be a negative deflection.
3. Maximum deflection Criteria for Flexible Pipes (measured-In-Situ) shall be

as detailed in the particular pipe specification sections of these documents.
4. Pipe surround shall be removed from all sections of pipe failing to meet the
specified deflection criteria.
a. Undamaged pipes may be rebackfilled and tested again.
b. All action taken to correct the pipe deflection shall be at the Contractor’s
expense.
c. Relaid sections shall be tested in accordance with item number 3 above.
5. If the permanent set or deflection, after removal of pipe surround, exceeds the
limits set out above, the pipes shall be deemed to be damaged and will
therefore be rejected.
a. Pipes so rejected shall be indelibly marked, removed from the site and
replaced at the Contractor's expense.
3.05 TESTING OF GRAVITY PIPELINES
A. All non-pressure (gravity) pipelines of 800mm nominal internal diameter and smaller
shall be given a preliminary test when the pipeline is bedded and jointed but before
backfilling and a final test after backfilling. Unless otherwise instructed, non-pressure
pipelines shall be tested in sections between manholes. In addition, pipelines shown as
straight lines on the Project Drawings shall be subjected to a light test between
manholes to verify alignment.
1. Preliminary test for pipelines with 800mm internal diameter or less:
a. Air shall be pumped into the pipeline until a pressure of l00mm head of
water is indicated on a water manometer and the pressure shall not fall to
less than 75mm during a period of 5 minutes.
b. The Contractor will not be permitted to commence testing later than 4
hours after sunrise or earlier than 4 hours before sunset during the
summer period unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
2. Final test for pipelines with 800mm internal diameter or less:

a. The part of the pipeline under test shall be filled with water under
pressure to meet the requirements of Item ‘C’ below.
b. The test pressure shall be sustained for a period of 30 minutes and the
volume of water required to maintain the test pressure shall be
determined in an approved manner. The test will not be considered
satisfactory if the rate of loss of water from a full pipeline exceeds 1 litre

per hour per metre of diameter per 30 metres of length of pipeline under
test.
B. All non-pressure (gravity) pipelines larger than 800mm nominal internal diameter shall
be internally inspected, pressure tested and also tested for infiltration when laid below
the ground water table. Internal inspection shall be in accordance with Article 3.02.
1. The Contractor shall, carry out tests on every joint by means of an approved joint
testing apparatus or by hydrostatically testing the pipeline. Test pressures shall
be in accordance with item ‘C’ below.
a. The part of the pipeline under test shall be filled with water under
pressure to meet the requirements of Item ‘C’ below.
b. The test pressure shall be sustained for a period of 30 minutes and the
volume of water required to maintain the test pressure shall be
determined in an approved manner. The test will not be considered
satisfactory if the rate of loss of water from a full pipeline exceeds 1 litre
per hour per metre of diameter per 30 metres of length of pipeline under
test.
2. For any joint of a pipeline that fails this test additional joint sealing will be
required to be carried out by approved resin/gel/grout injection techniques at
the Contractor's cost.
3. The Contractor shall repair any joint with visible leakage.
C. Pipeline test pressures
Depth to invert Pressure

Less than 8.0m 1.2 bar
8m to 14m 2.0 bar
Greater than 14m Greater of: 1 bar above ground water
table or 2 bars
D.Infiltration Test:
1. The measured infiltration shall not exceed 1 litre per hour per metre diameter per
30 metres of length of pipeline under test.
a. Pipes 600mm and larger, and smaller sizes if directed by the Engineer,
laid below the groundwater table shall be subjected to an infiltration test.
b. The infiltration test shall be conducted after dewatering activities have
been suspended for at least 7 days.
c. The Contractor shall include in his method statement complete details
for the measurement of any infiltration
d. For any pipeline that fails the infiltration test the Contractor must
propose measures to remedy the situation and execute such measures
at his own cost to achieve compliance with this requirement.
2. For any joint of a pipeline with nominal internal diameter 600mm and greater,
which fails this test additional joint sealing will be required to be carried out by
approved resin/gel/grout injection techniques at the Contractor's cost.
3. The Contractor shall replace any joint with visible leakage.
E. Final Inspection:
1. After backfilling and prior to commissioning, all pipelines shall be inspected by
CCTV camera and a video recording taken of the survey.
2. The Contractor shall prepare a report of the pipelines in an approved format to
the satisfaction of the Engineer. Both the report and the video recording shall
become the property of the MPW.
3.06 CCTV INSPECTION OF PIPELINES
A. CCTV surveys shall be carried out on all gravity pipelines after backfilling in accordance
with specification Section 31 2315.
B. All pipelines shall be inspected by CCTV camera with a video recording taken of
the survey after backfilling and prior to commissioning in accordance with Section 31
2315.
C. The Contractor shall prepare a report of the pipelines in an approved format to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. Both the report and the video recording shall become the
property of the MPW.
D. The Contractor shall repair all defects discovered by the CCTV inspection at no cost to
the Ministry. The line segments so repaired shall be re-inspected by CCTV.
3.07 TESTING OF PRESSURE MAINS
A. All pressure mains shall be tested in sections not exceeding 1000 metres in length.
1. Each pipeline or section thereof shall be filled with water and all air removed as
far as possible.
2. The pressure shall be raised by pumping until the test pressure is reached and
the pressure shall be maintained at this pressure by further pumping until it is
steady
3. Pumping shall be stopped and the time taken for the observed pressure to fall by
one metre shall be recorded.
4. Pumping shall then be resumed and the quantity of water pumped in order to
restore the test pressure shall be recorded and pumping stopped.
5. The test shall be held at pressure for 2 hours without pumping and if the pressure
does not fall by more than 1 metre the pumping shall be resumed and the
quantity of water pumped in order to restore the test pressure shall be recorded
and the pumping stopped and the time recorded as 2 hours.
6. The rate of loss shall be calculated as the recorded quantity divided by the
recorded time of 2 hours.
7. Pressure testing against valves:
a. The Contractor should note that since valves cannot be guaranteed
to be perfectly driptight, testing against closed valves connected to
existing or operating systems shall not be permitted. Testing against
other closed valves (including air valves) not so connected may be
attempted if designed provided the valves are suitably anchored against
thrust.
b. Testing against valve chambers or other structures is prohibited.
c. No claims will be entertained on account of leaking valves, or any other
difficulties encountered, including the isolation of certain lengths of
pipework for testing.
8. The Contractor shall install air release cocks at all high points if not equipped
with air release valves at no cost to the Ministry if required to release trapped air
in order to pass the test.
9. The test pressure shall be such that the entire pipeline or section being
tested is subjected to 1.5 times the working pressure. When the pipeline is
connected to a pump and can be subjected to the pumps shutoff head

due to inline valves the working pressure shall be taken as the shut off head
of the pump at the elevation of the pump.
10. The loss shall not exceed 0.02 litre per mm diameter per kilometre per 24 hours
for each bar of head applied.
11. If the pipeline fails to pass the test, the faults shall be located and repaired and
the pipeline retested until it passes the pressure test at no additional cost to the
Ministry.
12. All exposed pipe, fittings, valves and joints shall be visually inspected
during the tests. Any visible leakage shall be repaired regardless of the volume.
13. In addition to any tests of individual joints or other interim tests which
may be specified elsewhere, the Contractor shall submit all parts of the
pipelines to a final test.
B. Pressure testing against valves

1. The Contractor should note that since valves cannot be guaranteed to be
perfectly driptight, testing against closed valves connected to existing or
operating systems shall not be permitted. Testing against other closed valves
(including air valves) not so connected may be attempted if desired provided the
valves are suitably anchored against thrust and rated for the full test pressure.
2. Testing against valve chambers or other structures will also be prohibited.
3. No claims will be entertained on account of leaking valves, or any other
difficulties encountered, including the isolation of certain lengths of pipework for
testing.
C. In addition to any tests of individual joints or other interim tests, which may be, specified
elsewhere, the Contractor shall submit all parts of the pipelines after all sections have
been joined to a final hydrostatic test at operating pressure.
1. The test shall be conducted as required for the individual sections except that the
test pressure shall be set at the actual operating pressure.
D. A precedent to the issue of a Certificate of Completion shall be that all valves

in the pipeline shall have been satisfactorily operated under working pressure and the
at the pipelines shall have been successfully pressure tested and cleaned.
3.08 INTERIM PRESSURE TESTING OF PRESSURE LINES

A. All pressure lines in the system shall be given an interim pressure
test after backfilling.
1. Unless noted otherwise, all pressure tests shall be conducted at 1.5
times the working pressure, or the maximum shut-off head, whichever is higher.
B. Pipeline shall be divided into sections not exceeding 1000m in length, unless otherwise
C. Contractor shall submit to the Engineer detailed procedures for performing
hydrostatic pressure tests for installed piping, fittings, valves, meters and
appurtenances.
D. If required, suitable stop ends (section of steel pipe about 0.5-1.0m long onto which a
closing plate has been welded) containing the necessary openings for accommodating
in- going water and out-coming air may be utilised during the test.
1. Stop end may also include an opening through which the test water may be
pumped from the line, if necessary.
2. Stop end may be jointed to the pipe to be tested by means of a standard
coupling, or other method approved by the Engineer.
3. Thrust blocks or temporary anchorages shall be provided to hold the stop
end in place against the test pressure.
4. Contractor may also use proprietary restrained joints in lieu of thrust blocks.
E. Procedures for performing hydrostatic pressure tests for each section of pipeline
shall form part of the Contractor’s Method Statement and shall include as a minimum:
1. Location and capacity of the test pump.
2. Test pressure at the pump as well as that at the highest and lowest points.
3. Procedures for venting the air from the pipeline.
4. Disposal of the water after satisfactory testing.
F. Each pipeline or section thereof shall be filled with water and all air removed as far as
possible.
1. If permanent air vents are not located at all high points, the Contractor shall
install suitable cocks at such points, so that the air can be expelled as the line is
filled with water.
G. Line shall be filled slowly to prevent possible water hammer.
H. Test pump and gauge shall be connected to the pipeline at a location other
than the highest point in the line, to facilitate the release of air from the highest point.
I. After filling and before application of the test pressure, maintain the test section at the
rated pressure for a standing period of not less than 24 hours, to achieve conditions as
stable as possible for testing.
1. The standing period will commence from the time at which the rated pressure
was reached successfully.
J. If neither appreciable movement of the pipeline, nor any leakage has been
observed during the standing period, the section shall be subjected to the specified test
pressure.
K. Pumping shall be resumed and the pressure slowly raised to the specified test pressure
at the highest point in the pipeline (or section under test), provided that the pressure at
the lowest point of the pipeline (or section under test) shall not exceed the
maximum allowable test pressure.
L. The specified test pressure shall be continuously maintained by the use of the pump for
a period of at least 4 hours and the amount of make up water required to
maintain the pressure shall be accurately measured and recorded (to the nearest 1/8
litre) regularly, at least every 30 minutes throughout the test.
M. Pipeline shall be deemed to have passed the test if:
1. No water is visibly coming out of the pipe or joints at any point.
2. Amount of make-up water required does not exceed the rate of 0.02 litre
per millimetre of pipe diameter, per kilometre of pipeline, per 24 hours for
each 1 bar head of pressure applied.
3. Maximum drop in pressure (during the last half hour of the test period,
when no further make-up water may be pumped in) shall not exceed 10% of the
maximum test pressure.
4. HDPE pressure pipeline testing shall follow the procedure detailed in Section 33
3328 - “HDPE Pressure Pipe and Fittings” to determine the passage or failure of
the pipeline.
N. Should a test fail, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, replace defective pipes or
fittings, repair leaking joints or otherwise rectify defective work.
O. Cleaning, inspection and testing shall then be repeated until the work is accepted by
the Engineer, at no extra cost to the Ministry.
3.09 FINAL PRESSURE TESTING OF PRESSURE LINES
A. After interim testing has been satisfactorily completed, all pressure lines shall be given a
final pressure test to be carried out on the entire length of the pipeline, after all sections
have been joined together.
B. Final pipeline test pressures and procedures shall be conducted as described
under interim pressure testing.

C. Valves and all pipeline appurtenances shall be hydraulically tested, together with
the pipeline in which they are installed.
D. Valves shall be tested for operation under working pressure.
1. Valves shall be adjusted so that they operate smoothly, seat properly and
are installed to tolerances recommended by the manufacturer.
3.10 SEWAGE MANHOLES AND WET WELLS
A. General
1. Unless noted otherwise, manholes shall be constructed on gravity sewers:
a. At each change of gradient or direction.
b. At each change in diameter.
c. At each intersection with other pipes.
d. At such other points as shown on the Drawings.
e. As directed by the Engineer.
2. Concrete work shall not begin until the pipe fittings to be cast into the manhole
walls, are on site. No "box outs" will be allowed, unless approved by the
Engineer.
a. Thereafter the manhole shall be cast, water-proofed and backfilled as
quickly as possible.
3. Channel inverts shall be accurately laid to meet pipe invert elevations.
4. Channel bends in the benching are to be as "slow" as possible, by
setting the manholes "off-center" at changes in direction.
5. All pipelines adjoining structures (i.e. at entries and exits to manholes) shall have
a flexible joint adjacent to each structure, as detailed on the drawings.
6. Unless noted otherwise, all sewage manholes shall have protective GRP
lining, benching and tops, conforming to Section 06 6200 "Glass
Reinforced Plastic Fabrications".
7. Benching shall be formed with in-situ C40/20 mass concrete with exposed
finish, protected by 12mm thick chemically resistant (epoxy) mortar to finished
levels.
8. Unless otherwise noted, all exterior surfaces below grade shall be covered
with waterproof membrane, in accordance with Section 07 1300.
9. Unless noted otherwise, all exterior exposed concrete surfaces shall be epoxy
coated according to Section 09 9730.
10. Manhole covers in traffic areas shall be set to the paved area profile and be flush
with the paved area surface.
11. Manhole covers located in non-traffic areas shall be set to an elevation as
shown on the drawings, or as directed by the Engineer.
12. Unless otherwise noted, all manhole covers exposed to sewage or sewage
gases shall incorporate a push fit GRP sealing plate.
13. Unless noted otherwise, hand railing shall be stainless steel Type 316.
a. All safety chains, fixing bolts and other hardware shall be stainless steel
Type 316.
b. Safety chains shall be 8mm nominal size, unless noted otherwise.
14. Where drop manholes are indicated they shall be as shown on the
Drawings and shall be formed where the upstream length of sewer enters a
manhole at a level 1 metre or greater above the manhole invert level.
15. All manholes shall be watertight on completion.
16. Manholes shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of this clause.
17. The Contractor shall take all measures, deemed necessary by the
Engineer, to ensure that manholes are not left in a flooded or unprotected
condition.

a. If the designated covers are not on site after placing the cover slab, a
temporary plywood cover shall be securely fitted in all openings.
B. Backdrops to Manholes (Pipes & Fittings)

1. These shall be constructed vertically adjacent to the external face of the
manhole shaft, in order to reach the invert level inside the manhole.
C. Demolition or Replacement of Manhole

1. Where an existing manhole is to be demolished, or removed, prior to the
construction of a new manhole, the existing manhole shall be demolished and
the debris removed to an approved location, in accordance with Section 02
4100.
2. Concrete cover slab shall be carefully broken to recover the frame and cover,
which shall be taken to the designated Ministry stores.
D. Manholes manufactured from Polymer Concrete shall meet the following minimum
standards and full details shall be submitted for review and approval by the Engineer.
1. All resin shall be vinylester.
2. Manhole structure shall have sufficient weight to prevent floatation.
E. Manhole covers shall be non-vented except for 10 percent of the total number. The 10
percent shall be vented and supplied with activated carbon filter baskets. The vented
units shall be installed where shown on the Project Drawings or as directed by
the Engineer.
3.11 PUMPING CHAMBERS AND OTHER STRUCTURES
A. General
1. For any pressure mains within the system, valve chambers and/or junction
chambers shall be constructed at each intersection with other pipes and at
other points as shown on the Drawings.
2. Concrete work shall not begin until the pipe fittings to be cast into the chamber
walls are on site.
a. Thereafter the chamber shall be cast, water-proofed and backfilled as
b. No. "box outs" will be allowed.
1. All pipes cast into chamber walls shall be fitted with a temporary
internal "jig" to ensure that proper alignment and flange orientation
is maintained between all interconnecting pipes and fittings during
casting
a. Jigs may be made from uPVC pipes, HDPE pipes or steel
tubing.
3. Short lengths of pipe with flexible joints shall be provided at entry and exit to all
chambers.
4. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, all exterior surfaces below grade shall be
covered with waterproof membrane, in accordance with Section 07 1300.
5. Unless otherwise noted, all interior and exterior exposed surfaces shall be epoxy
coated according to Section 09 9730.
6. Manhole covers in traffic areas shall be set to the paved area profile and be flush with
the paved area surface.
7. Manhole covers located in non-traffic areas shall be set to an elevation as shown on the
drawings, or as directed by the Engineer.
8. Hand railing, if shown on the drawings shall be aluminium.
a. All fixing bolts and other hardware shall be stainless steel Type 316.
9. Safety chains and other hardware as required shall be stainless steel Type 316.
a. Size shall be 8mm, unless noted otherwise.
10. All chambers shall be watertight on completion.
a. No testing for leakage of water into chambers shall be conducted, unless in the
opinion of the Engineer, it is deemed necessary.
11. The Contractor shall take all measures, deemed necessary by the Engineer, to
ensure that chambers are not left in a flooded or unprotected condition.
a. If the designated covers are not on site after placing the cover slab, a temporary
plywood cover shall be securely fitted in all openings.
3.12 MANHOLE TESTING
A. The Contractor shall test 10 percent of all manholes, to be selected at random by the
Engineer.
B. Manholes shall be hydrostatically tested to at least one metre above the crown of the
highest connection into the manhole being tested.
C. The selected manholes shall be tested for watertightness. Each manhole shall be filled
with clean water to the test level and shall stand for a period of three days, to allow for
absorption. The structure shall be considered satisfactory if, subsequent to this period,
there shall be no fall in level over a period of 24 hours (after making due allowance for
rainfall and evaporation) and no visible leaks.
D. Should a manhole fail to pass it shall be repaired and retested. If more than 2 percent
of the total manholes fail the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his
approval a proposal to correct the situation.
E. All cost associated with testing and repairs shall be of the Contractor's expense.
3.13 THRUST BLOCKS
A. For pressure mains, the Contractor shall construct thrust blocks at all
unrestrained changes in pipe direction greater than seven degrees as well as at
all tee and "Y" connections and/or at locations as shown on the drawings.
1. Thrust blocks shall be constructed to the dimensions shown on the Drawings,
unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
2. Thrust blocks are designed for the soil parameters designated in the applicable
soil report.
a. If actual ground conditions differ from the soil reports, the Engineer
shall be notified.
b. Where actual ground conditions do not meet anticipated soil
conditions, the Engineer may redesign the thrust block.
c. Where considerably better ground conditions, such as rock, are
encountered, the dimensions of a particular thrust block may be
reduced, with the Engineer’s approval.
d. Supporting calculations for any reduced size thrust blocks must be
submitted to the Engineer at least 72 hours before construction of that
particular thrust block commences.
3. Unless otherwise specified or directed, thrust blocks shall be provided on
pipelines laid to gradients steeper than 1:20.
a. Up to 1:15 every third pipe.
b. Up to 1:10 every second pipe.
c. At 1:5 every pipe shall be anchored.
4. Concrete shall extend to undisturbed ground on thrust faces (of thrust blocks) and on
both faces of anchor blocks.
5. Each thrust block shall be designed to have a sufficient bearing area and shall be
placed to transmit safely the unbalanced force to the surrounding area.
6. Thrust blocks shall be cast-in-place (Grade C40 concrete) between the pipe fitting
and the trench wall or trench bottom, as the case may be.
7. Bearing faces of the block shall be placed against freshly cut, undisturbed sound
material.
8. If the thrust exceeds the bearing value of the surrounding soil, the soil may be
precompacted, with the Engineer’s approval, before placing concrete.
9. All concrete shall be kept behind the sockets and flanges of fittings.
10. Formwork may be constructed, with the approval of the Engineer, wherever
necessary to confine the concrete to the prescribed dimensions for the thrust block.
a. All formwork timber shall be removed before testing.
11. Thrust blocks shall, unless otherwise shown, or directed by the Engineer, be so
placed that the pipes, fittings and joints will be accessible for repair.
3.14 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING PIPELINES:
A. At the locations shown on the Drawing, or directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall
connect the new pipelines to the existing pipelines or structures, but not until the new
works have passed the final tests.
B. Existing mains and service pipes shall only be cut using special equipment approved by
the Engineer.
1. Cuts shall be perpendicular to the centre line of the pipe and special care shall
be taken with respect to the location of the cut, to ensure that the new pipework
shown on the Drawings may be installed.
2. The Contractor shall agree with the Engineer, the exact length of existing
pipework to be removed.
C. The Contractor shall take every precaution to prevent any dirt or extraneous material
from entering the existing main or service pipe.
D. The Contractor shall have available, at the connection site, sufficient dewatering pumps
to keep the excavation dry at all times.
1. Work shall be carried out in a clean and efficient manner.
2. The Client may put the interconnection into use as soon as possible after
its installation and will carry out an inspection to detect any evidence of leakage.
a. Any remedial work necessary to eliminate leakage shall be carried
out by the Contractor.
b. No pipework shall be covered or backfilled until the Engineer is totally
satisfied that the interconnection is free of all leakage.
3.15 OVERPUMPING AND FLOW DIVERSION
A. The Contractor shall maintain sewage flow arising from any source.
1. The Contractor shall submit his proposed method of overpumping or flow
diversion to the Engineer for approval, prior to the start of construction.
2. The proposed method shall include proposed alignments and design
requirements of the discharge to the terminal point.
B. Contractor shall furnish, install and operate pumps, plugs, conduits and other equipment
required to divert flow around the pipe segment upon which work is to be performed.
1. Sewage shall not be allowed to flow into gutters, streets, or over sidewalks.
2. After the work has been completed, tested and accepted by the Engineer, flow
shall be restored to normal.
C. Pipe Stoppers

If permitted by the Engineer, sewage flow may be temporarily plugged off, using
an approved type of mechanical pipe stopper having a circumferential compressible
rubber ring.
1. Stopper shall be fully inserted inside the pipe before tightening up.
2. Suitable inflatable stoppers may be approved for small diameter pipes.
3. Stopper shall be as approved by Engineer.
D. Stopping off Flow

1. For work on any length of pipeline, the Contractor shall plug off all inlets
to the upstream manholes as required.
2. The next manhole upstream shall be used as a pumping sump, with the outlet to
that manhole also being plugged.
3. Where there is a possibility of storm water backup from downstream, the outlet to
the downstream manhole shall also be plugged.
4. Additional stoppers shall be used as necessary, to ensure safe working
conditions.
E. Pumping Equipment
Overpumping shall be carried out from one manhole to another located downstream.
1. Pumping system shall be of sufficient capacity to handle peak existing flow.
2. Pumping shall be done by the Contractor in such a manner that no damage to
public or private property results and no nuisance or public health problem is
created.
3. Pumped sewage shall be in an enclosed hose or pipe that is free of all leaks and
shall be re-inserted into the sewage system.
4. The Contractor shall verify the peak average flows ahead of time and shall
design his pumping system accordingly.
a. The Contractor shall submit his design for the Engineer's approval.
F. Submersible Portable Pump

1. A submersible electrically driven, non-clog pump shall be installed in the
manhole.
2. Pump shall be capable of handling all the required flow and any material likely to
be transported to the host manhole.
3. Pump shall be slender and capable of passing through the manhole cover.
4. Bottom side of the pump, i.e. suction inlet, shall be connected to a
suction stand constructed of cast iron or protected steel and resting on the
manhole bottom.
5. Discharge side of the pump shall be connected to the external pipe by means of
a flexible hose or other material, as deemed appropriate.
6. Pump shall be controlled by float switches installed to operate at levels pre-
G. Suction Lift Pump

1. In areas where the submersible pump described above is not sufficient to handle
the existing flow, the Contractor may use one or more suction lift pumps
installed temporarily on the street level, with suction hose(s) lifting from one or
more manholes as necessary.
2. Pumps shall be centrifugal, of a special design suitable for this work.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 33 3102
HDPE GRAVITY SEWER PIPE AND FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This section specifies the manufacture, installation and testing of HDPE gravity sewer
pipe and fittings.
1. Additional installation and field testing requirements will be found in the related
sections listed below.
1.02 DEFINITION
A. The following definitions shall pertain to words or phases as utilised in this Section.
1. HDPE shall mean High Density Polyethylene
2. Profile wall shall mean a pipe wall construction that presents an essentially
smooth surface in the waterway but includes ribs or other shapes, which can
be either solid or hollow that help brace the pipe against diametrical
deformation.
A. Related Section: Related work to be coordinated and used in conjunction with this
1. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures
2. Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements
3. Section 31 2300 - Excavation and Fill
4. Section 31 2315 - Trenching
5. Section 33 3000 - Sanitary Sewerage Utilities
6. Section 33 3913 - Sanitary Utility Sewerage Manholes, Frames, and
Covers
1.04 REFERENCES
A. Product manufacture, testing and installation shall comply with the following
references, unless otherwise stated in the specifications or unless otherwise approved
by the Engineer.
1. ASTM D2321 Standard Practice for Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for
Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications.
2. ASTM D2837-98A Standard Test Method for Obtaining Hydrostatic Design
Basis for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials.
3. ASTM D3350 Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastic Pipe and
Fittings Materials
4. ASTM F 894-95 Standard Specification for Polethylene (PE) Large
Diameter Profile Wall Sewer and Drain Pipe
5. ASTM D3350-99 Standard Specifications for Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and
Fittings Materials
KEO/19-3262-0000 33 3102/1 HDPE Gravity Sewer Pipe And Fittings

6. ASTM 585 Practice for Insertion or Flexible Polyethylene Pipe into
Existing Sewers
7. DIN 8074 HDPE Pipe Dimensions
8. WIS 4-35-01 Specification for Thermoplastics Structured Wall Pipes,
Joints and Couplers with a Smooth Bore for Gravity
Sewers for the Size Range 150-900 Inclusive
9. prEn 13476-1 Plastics piping systems for non-pressure
underground drainage and sewerage – Structured-wall
piping systems of unplasticized poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC-
U), polypropylene (PP) and polyethylene (PE)
B. HDPE pipes shall be installed by open cut methods only except when the plans
specifically detail insertion into an existing sewer.
A. Pipes
1. HDPE Gravity Sewer Pipes may be Solid Wall or Profile Wall.
2. Contractor shall submit calculations covering the soil pressure on the buried
pipe and restraint of expansion or contraction. Restraint anchors shall be
provided if required. Manholes may be regarded as such restraint blocks,
provided that they can be shown to provide the necessary resistance.
3. Where pressure pipe is designated for non-pressure applications, the minimum
SDR shall be supplied and manufacturing shall conform to the designated
pressure class, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
4. Pipes shall be suitable for sustained operating temperatures of up to 45°C.
5. Pipe lengths shall be in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations
as approved by the Engineer.
6. When pipe lengths greater than 6 m are supplied the socket depths shall be
greater than Amin specified in EN 13476-1 Table 6.
7. The Contractor shall provide the proper equipment and slings necessary to
handle the length of pipe being used.
8. Pipe bedding and pipe surround shall be as indicated on the Project Drawings
and Section 31 2315 of these specifications.
B. Joints
1. All joints shall be spigot and socket type with flexible elastomeric sealing rings.
a. Welded joints may not be used under any circumstances.
2. All elastomeric joint seals (rubber gaskets) shall be obtained from the pipe
manufacturer.
3. All joints shall be capable of withstanding a minimum external pressure of 50
Kpa without infiltration as per DIN 16961-2, in both the straight and misaligned
positions.
C. Special Fittings
1. All special fittings, even if manufactured elsewhere, shall be obtained from the
pipe manufacturer, unless approved otherwise by the Engineer.
2. Pipe system shall include double socket type HDPE couplings using
elastomeric joint seals that can be utilised anywhere along the barrel of the
pipe.
D. Markings of Pipes and Fittings

1. Each pipe, special or fitting shall be clearly marked at the place of manufacture
with the following information.
a. The name or distinctive mark of the manufacturer.
b. The date of manufacture.
c. The pressure rating (if applicable)
d. The nominal diameter
e. The manufacturing standard to which the product has been produced
f. The angle of bends or branches
g. Where appropriate, individual reference number
h. Number and mark of independent testing agency (if applicable)
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. All pipes and fittings shall be submitted for approval according to Section 01 3300.
B. Different sizes and types of pipes and fittings, even if from the same manufacturer,
shall be placed in separate submittals.
C. The manufacturer shall provide proof of successful past use of the proposed pipes
and fittings on work of a similar environment and scope to that for this Project.
D. As a minimum, the submittal shall include the following:
1. The Contractor shall develop and submit a Method Statement according to
Section 01 4000 - “Quality Requirements”, to cover all aspects of installation
of HDPE Pipes and Fittings
a. Product Data: Manufacturer’s Specifications and Installation
instructions. Test results that show compliance with the Contract
Documents.
b. Method Statement: Method Statement shall include details on
connection of pipe to manhole lining material to insure protection of
concrete on lined concrete manholes.
c. Shop Drawings: Detailed drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer
for approval. These shall show all relevant details including:
i. Connections at manholes
ii. Joining to existing mains
iii. Couplings and Thrust Blocks
iv. Stanks
v. Joint details
vi. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with samples of the
proposed connection between the pipe and manhole lining
when used with lined concrete manholes and provide testing
as required by the Engineer.
d. Samples:
i. One sample of each type
A. Prior to dispatch from the factory, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in
sufficient time to allow the Engineer, or his representative, to inspect the pipes and
fittings, if so desired.
1. All notifications shall be made by written Inspection Requests, in accordance
with Section 01 4000.
a. An advance copy may be faxed to the Engineer’s office, but the original
a. 24 hours on site
b. 72 hours for areas within Kuwait
c. 3 weeks outside of Kuwait
A. Pipes, fittings and specials shall be delivered, handled and stored according to
the manufacturer’s recommendations along with the following provisions:
2. Only nylon slings shall be allowed for lifting pipes and fittings. Steel chains,
clamps or cables shall not be allowed for lifting purposes.
a. Nylon slings shall be used for securing pipes during transport and storage.
b. Pipes shall be unloaded from trucks by crane. Under no
circumstances shall pipes be tipped onto the ground.
3. Do not store pipes on rough or rocky ground.
4. Pipes shall be stored under a shade, in such a manner as to allow air to circulate
freely among the pipes and thereby avoid excessive build up of heat in the pipes.
5. Visually inspect all pipes upon delivery and report any damage to the Engineer.
a. Any pipes damaged during delivery, storage or installation shall be
b. Proposals for repair of any damaged pipes shall be submitted in writing to
the Engineer for approval.
c. No repairs to damaged pipes shall be attempted without the Engineer’s
approval.
d. Any damaged pipes deemed unsuitable for repair by the Engineer
6. Elastomeric sealing rings (rubber gaskets) shall be stored in closed containers,
out of direct sunlight, until needed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. HDPE pipes shall be manufactured in metric sizes according to the relevant ISO
standards.
B. HDPE pipes shall be manufactured in accordance with the requirements of EN 13476-
1
C. HDPE pipes shall have a minimum Ring Stiffness of 8KN/m2 as tested per ISO 9969.
D. Elastomeric sealing rings (rubber gaskets) shall be made from EPDM.
E. Pipe sizes shall be as shown on the drawings, unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer.
1. The designated sizes on the drawings refer to nominal external diameters for
Solid Wall Pipes and internal diameter for profile wall pipes.
F. Gravity sewer pipes shall meet the following SDR requirements. 'SDR' is the Standard
Dimension Ratio, which is defined as the ratio of pipe diameter (measured at midpoint
of wall) to pipe wall thickness.
1. Solid Wall Pipes shall have a SDR of 18 or better.
2. Profile Wall Pipes shall have an effective SDR of 18 or better.
3. Profile Wall Pipes shall meet the following requirements in addition to the
specified SDR.
a. The tensile strength of the seam on spirally wound pipe shall be
measured in accordance with EN 13476-1 Table 15.
b. The minimum waterway thickness shall be equal to or greater e5
specified in Table 6 of EN 13476-1.

2.02 HDPE BASE RESIN MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
A. The base resin shall have a cell classification according to ASTM D 3350 for pipes
and injection molded fittings as follows. The selected resin shall also be capable of
meeting all other requirements within this specification. Compounds that have a
higher cell classification in one or more properties shall be acceptable provided the
other product requirements are met.
Property Cell Class

1 Resin Density 3
2 Melt Index 3
3 Flexural Modulus 5
4 Tensile Strength 4
5 ECSR 4
6 HDB NPR
7 Color & UV Code C
Legend: 1 – Minimum carbon black content shall be between 2-3%
B. The resin shall also meet the following requirements. The test shall be carried out in
the form of a solid wall pipe made from the relevant extrusion.
PROPERTY UNIT VALUE STANDARD ISO

Resistance to internal pressure MPa 3.9 4427
80oC water in water hoop stress
tested to 165 hours
Resistance to internal pressure MPa 2.8 4427
80oC water in water hoop stress
tested to 1000 hours
2.03 PIPE TESTING

A. Pipe shall be tested for ‘Resistance to Internal Puncture’ in accordance with WIS 4-
35-01 as detailed in Article 6.9 and Appendix B.
1. On profile wall pipes the point of impact shall be adjusted such that it is in the
thinnest section, typically in the middle of the hollow corrugation.
B. Pipe shall be tested for ‘Resistance to Water Jetting’ in accordance with WIS 4-35-01
as detailed in Article 6.10 and Appendix C.
1. The test shall be modified such that the minimum test pressure shall be 180 Bar.
C. Pipe shall be tested for ‘Resistance to Longitudinal Bending’ in accordance with WIS
4-35-01 as detailed in Article 6.11 and Appendix D.
2.04 PIPE BEDDING/SURROUND

A. Pipe bedding and pipe surround shall be strictly in accordance with ASTM
D2321- “Undereground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other
Gravity Flow Applications”.
1. The backfilling details are shown on the Typical Drawings.
2. All bedding, haunching and backfilling materials shall be placed in accordance
with ASTM D2321.
3. In all cases, the bedding, haunching and pipe surround (initial backfill)
shall be encased in geotextile membrane.
4. Where cover to the pipe is less than 1.2 metre, the pipe shall be encased in
Class C40 concrete (see Section 03 3000 of the Specifications).
5. Where pipes are to be laid beneath secondary roads, and material other than
Class A1 (ASTM D2321) is used from the top of the pipe surround up to the
road subgrade the backfill up to the road subgrade shall be compacted to a
minimum 95% M.D.D.
2.05 CONCRETE
A. Concrete and accessories shall comply with the relevant sections in Division 03 of
2.06 PIPELINE WARNING TAPE

A. Pipeline warning tape shall comply with the requirements of Section 31 2315.
2.07 PIPELINE MARKER POSTS

A. Pipeline marker posts shall comply with the requirements of Section 31 2315.
PART 3 - EXECUTION

A. Trench excavation, pipe installation and backfill shall comply with Section 31 2315
- “Trenching’’, unless this is at variance with the requirements set out herein, which
case the latter shall take precedence
B. Haunching and initial backfilling shall be carried out immediately after pipe has
been placed in the trench.
C. Pipes shall be checked by laser, sight rails or string line, for grade and level at the
ends of each pipe and at intervals not greater than 4 metres.
D. Where HDPE profile wall pipes are embedded in manhole walls, the minimum
embedded length of pipe shall be 2 x corrugation pitch or the lengths given in
the table below, whichever is the greater. A hydrophilic sealing ring shall be placed
around the pipe within the manhole wall, to ensure a watertight seal.
Nominal Pipe Diameter Minimum Embedded Length

(mm) (mm)
200 75
250 85
300 100
350 120
400 150
500 175
600 200
700 200
900 275
E. When the pipe is used with lined concrete manholes in sanitary sewers the lining of
the manhole and the pipe shall be connected in such a way as to prevent the
deterioration of the concrete.
3.02 CCTV INSPECTION

A. CCTV inspection shall be conducted on all completed pipelines in accordance
with Section 31 2315
3.03 PIPE TESTING

A. Pipe testing shall be in accordance with Section 33 3000.
B. Where hydrostatic water testing is undertaken, the pipes shall be tested in accordance
with Section 33 3000 of these specifications.
3.04 PIPE DEFLECTION

A. Installed pipes larger than 100mm diameter shall be measured for deflection. The
initial Bedding Acceptance test shall be conducted by a deflectometer for pipe sizes
DN 600mm and below and by manual measurement or deflectometer for pipelines of
DN greater than 600.
% Deflection Limits for HDPE Pipe

(Maximum Limits)
Diameter Pipe Acceptance Bedding Acceptance Installation Acceptance

(Notes 1 & 2) (Note 3) Acceptance (Note4)
DN 600mm and 5.0 2.5 3.0
smaller
DN Over 600mm 1.25* 0.625* 0.750*
* Numbers shown are the average of the vertical and horizontal deflections
individual measurements of either the vertical or horizontal diameter may
show deflections, by comparison to the reference diameter, of four times the
value listed above.
The mandrel shall have a cylindrical cross section, with a diameter not smaller
than 1mm less than the minimum acceptable pipe diameter, given in the table
above.
Notes:
1. Pipes whose deflection at any time has exceeded this value will not be
accepted for incorporation into the work. This test may utilise a mandrel and
shall be carried out not less than 1 year after completion of backfilling, but prior
to expiry of guarantee period.
2. The Contractor should note that 10 percent of the total installed cost
(pipe, bedding, backfill and testing) shall be withheld until completion of testing
of flexible pipe.
3. To be measured after placing of the surround material, and after
withdrawal of trench sheeting to above the crown of the pipe, but before
backfilling. For non-pressure pipes, the permissible percentage deflection
will be accepted only as an elongation of the vertical diameter, and no
reduction will be acceptable at this stage.
4. To be measured not less than four weeks after completion of backfilling.
5. The Contractor's attention is drawn to all applicable parts of Section 33 3000 -
"Sanitary Sewerage Utilities" for details of required tests.
3.05 DISPOSAL OF TESTING WATER
A. The water used in testing of pipelines shall be disposed of in a manner approved by

the Engineer.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 33 4000
STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Storm water surface drainage system is designed to collect, carry away and dispose off
the following:
1. Rain water discharge on the roofs and floors of buildings.
2. Rain water discharge on promenades, car parking areas and streets.
3. Sub-soil drainage from sand pits and planters.
B. This section specifies installation and testing for Storm Water Drainage and includes,
but is not limited to, the following:
1. Gullies, Drain Trenches and Manholes
2. Storm Water Drainage Lines
3. Cast iron accessories like Covers, Frames, Step Irons etc.
4. Storm Water Out-falls
C. For trench excavation, pipe installation, and backfill see Section 31 2315
A. Section 01 1100 - Summary of Work

B. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures
C. Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements
D. Section 01 5250 - Site Safety and Security
E. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements
F. Section 01 7123 - Field Engineering
G. Section 02 4100 - Demolition
H. Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete
I. Section 03 3005 - Concrete Batching and Delivery
J. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications
K. Section 07 1300 - Sheet Waterproofing
L. Section 22 0510 - Plumbing Systems
M. Section 31 2000 - Earth Moving
N. Section 31 2300 - Excavation and Fill
O. Section 31 2315 - Trenching
P. Section 33 3101 - Reinforced Concrete Pipe and Fittings
Q. Section 33 3102 - HDPE Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings
R. Section 33 3330 - uPVC Pipes and Fittings
S. Section 33 3913 - Sanitary Utility Sewerage Manholes, Frames, and Covers
1.03 REFERENCES
A. Product manufacture, testing and installation shall comply with the following
KEO/19-3262-0000 33 4000/1 Storm Drainage Utilities
references, unless otherwise stated in the specifications, or unless otherwise
1. DIN 807 - 4HD PE pipes; dimensions
2. DIN 8075 - HDPE pipes; general quality requirements
3. DIN 19535 - HDPE pipes and fittings for hot water resistant waste
and soil installations within buildings (ISO 8770 / 8772)
4. DIN 19537 - HDPE pipes and fittings for drainage and sewerage
5. BS 8500-1 - Concrete. Method o f specifying and guidance for
the specifier
6. BS 8500-2 - Concrete. Specification for constituent materials and
concrete
7. BS EN 206-1 - Concrete. Specification, performance, production and
conformity
8. BS 5911 - Pre-cast Concrete Pipes, Fittings and Ancillary
Products
9. BS 5911 Part 2 - Specification for Inspection Chambers and Street
Gullies
10. BS 5911 Part 100 - Specification for non-reinforced and reinforced pipes
and fittings with flexible joints
11. BS EN 681 - Elastomeric seals. Material requirements for pipe joint
seals used in water and drainage applications.
Vulcanized rubber.
12. BS EN 124 - Gully tops and manhole tops for vehicular and
Pedestrian areas. Design requirements, type testing,
marking, quality control
13. BS EN ISO 1461 - Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and
steel articles. Specifications and test methods
14. BS EN 13101 - Steps for underground man entry chambers.
Requirements, marking, testing and evaluation of
conformity
15. BS EN 1561 - Founding. Grey cast irons
16. BS 5493 - Code of Practice for protective coating of Iron and
Steel Structures against Corrosion
17. BS 3416 - Black B i t u m e n C o a t i n g S o l u t i o n s f o r Cold
Application (AASHTO M 115: Asphalt for Damp-
proofing and Water-proofing)
18. AASHTO T 180 -Moisture Density Relations of Soils using 10 lbs (4.54
kgs) Rammer
19. ASTM D2321 -Standard Practice for Installation of Thermo Plastic Pipes
for Sewers and other Gravity Flow Applications
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. The following definitions shall pertain to words or phrases as utilised in this section.
1. "uPVC" shall mean unplasticised polyvinyl chloride.
2. "HDPE" shall mean high density polyethylene.
3. "RCP" shall mean reinforced concrete pipe.
4. "DI" shall mean ductile iron.
5. "Pipe Surround" shall mean that material directly below, around and above the
pipe.
6. "Formation" shall mean the bottom of the trench excavation, or in some cases, fill
just below the pipe surround.
7. "Stanks" shall mean barriers to flowing water within granular pipe surround
material.
A. The Contractor shall provide all labour, materials and equipment necessary for
providing a complete operating system.
B. Responsibility for the safety and soundness of all material shall rest with the Contractor.
C. Contractor is advised to carry out any tests (at his cost) needed to satisfy
himself regarding the soundness of the pipes, fittings and jointing materials prior to
acceptance testing by the Engineer.
D. Pipe materials to be utilised shall be as shown on the Project Drawings, or as described
in the particular and general specifications.
E. Each type of pipe and fittings shall be furnished by a single manufacturer,
unless otherwise accepted by the Engineer.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Approval
1. The Contractor shall submit sufficient information to the Engineer, prior to
purchase according to Section 01 3300, in order to verify compliance with the
specifications. Such information shall include at least the following:
a. Manufacturers name
b. Suppliers name
c. Product name (if applicable)
d. Product description
e. Manufacturers technical data
f. Storage instructions
g. Installation instructions
B. Material samples shall be submitted as required in the relevant sections within these
specifications, or as requested by the Engineer.
C. Method Statements
1. The Contractor shall provide method statements meeting the requirements of
Section 01 4000, for at least the following activities, or as requested by the
Engineer.
a. Pipe testing.
b. Manhole and chamber construction.
c. Pipe installation including backfill compaction methods for flexible (uPVC
and HDPE) pipes.
D. Shop Drawings
1. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings according to Section 01 3300
including:
a. Manufacturers printed brochures and catalogues (one original and three
copies) with relevant information highlighted (or irrelevant information
struck out), along with write up of selection criteria
b. General piping layout drawings to a scale not smaller than 1:1000
c. Detailed piping layout plans to a scale of 1: 250 along with profiles
d. Builders work plans to a scale of 1:100 / 1:50 as required
e. Installation details of:
• Manholes, interceptors, sleeves and penetrations etc. to a scale of
1:50
• Manhole covers and items of similar nature to a scale of 1:10
f. Calculations / details to substantiate the shop drawings
E. Project record documents and As-built Drawings of all works installed under this section
shall be submitted in accordance with the General Conditions of Contract.
A. Requirements of the following shall be conformed to as appropriate:

1. Codes, ordinances, rules and regulations of the State of Kuwait and its lawful
enforcement agencies like Ministry of Public works
2. British Standard Code of Practice
3. ASTM D2321 - Recommended Practice for Underground Installation of
Flexible Thermoplastic Sewer Pipe.
4. Ministry of Public Works, Roads Administration,
Document III-1 General Specifications, September, 1987'
• This Specification modifies, adds to, or supercedes part of the General
Specification. If there is any conflict or inconsistency between the
documents, the requirements of the Particular Specification shall prevail
B. Materials to equivalent American (ASTM, ANSI), British (BS), German (DIN), or

Japanese (JIS) or other international standards shall be acceptable, provided that the
Contractor substantiates their equivalence and ensures their compatibility with other
components of the system. Copies of the current version of the reference standards
shall be submitted for comparison, if required by the Engineer.
C. The contractor shall submit the shop drawings and materials used for the works covered
by this Section, as approved by the Engineer, to the Roads and Drainage department of
the Ministry of Public Works (MPW) for their concurrence. MPW approval shall
be submitted to the Engineer prior to placing any order or proceeding with any
installation.
D. The Contractor shall obtain approval of the source of materials from the Engineer
and should arrange and pay for the testing of representative samples, under
supervision of the Engineer, to ascertain their compliance with the specified
requirements, prior shipment of the material to the site. The Contractor shall also
furnish the manufacturer’s test certificate(s) along with every consignment.
E. Storm water drainage works shall be executed by a contractor, engaged in the
installation and maintenance of similar systems as primary business for at least three
(3) immediately preceding years.
F. Each product specified shall be provided from the same manufacturer throughout,
where possible.
1.08 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prior to dispatch from the factory, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer, in
sufficient time to allow the Engineer or his representatives to inspect and test the
products, if so desired.
1. All notifications shall be made by written "Inspection Requests" in accordance
with Section 01 4000 - "Quality Requirements".
a. An advance copy may be faxed to the Engineers office, but the original

a. 24 hours on site
b. 72 hours for other areas within Kuwait
c. 3 Weeks outside of Kuwait.
B. "Inspection Requests" for at least the following items, shall be submitted to the Engineer
during the on-site installation work, prior to proceeding with the following
activities. Minimum notification time shall be 24 hours.
1. Pipe testing.
2. Backfilling.
3. Reinforcing Steel for Cast-in-Situ Concrete.
4. Formwork for Cast-in-Situ Concrete.
5. Placing of Cast-in-Situ Concrete
A. General requirements for delivery, storage and handling of products and materials shall
be as specified in Section 01 6000 - "Product Requirements".
B. Specific requirements shall be as specified in the relevant specification section
governing the manufacture and installation of the material or product in question.
C. Additional requirements may be required as per the manufactures
recommendations and/or the directives of the Engineer.
D. Products shall be delivered, handled and stored according to the
manufacturer’s recommendations along with the following provisions:
2. Only nylon slings shall be allowed for lifting products. Steel chains, clamps or
cables shall not be allowed for lifting purposes, unless approved by the Engineer.
a. Steel chains or cables may be allowed for securing products during
transport or storage, provided protective padding or timber blocking is
utilised.
3. Do not store products directly on the ground, unless approved by the

Engineer. Ensure adequate timber blocking is utilized to provide sufficient
support.
4. Visually inspect all products upon delivery and report any damage to the
Engineer.
a. Any products damaged during delivery, storage or installation shall be
b. Proposals for repair of any damaged products shall be submitted in writing
to the Engineer for approval.
c. No repairs to damaged products shall be attempted, without the
d. Any damaged products deemed unsuitable for repair by the Engineer
1.10 TRAFFIC REQUIREMENTS
A. Where temporary road closures, road diversions or construction detours are required,
the Contractor shall:
1. Execute the work at the time when the traffic is least congested. If, in the opinion
of the Engineer, the work may result in unacceptable inconvenience to traffic, the
work shall be carried out during the night time.
2. Carry ou t his various activities at such times and in such a manner
that no disturbance is caused to the public.
3. Provide safe pathways not less than 1.20 m wide for pedestrians and traffic lanes
not less than 3.5 m wide for vehicles, and control traffic by means of traffic
signals or by other means wherever required as approved by the Engineer.
4. Provide in all cases, fencing, signs, light signals, floodlights, and watchmen to
ensure that no mishaps will befall the public or properties in locations.
5. Reinstate to original condition and make good without delay.
1.11 AS-BUILT RECORDS
A. The Contractor shall maintain a continuous record of all field deviations from
the Drawings, if any, as approved by the Engineer. At the completion of the
Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a set of the latest revisions
of all plans and specifications marked to show the works "as built". A set shall
include 2 prints of all drawings together with the originals.
B. The Contractor shall prepare As built drawings of the work as
constructed/renovated including preparation of schedules, giving details such as
pipe diameters, and invert levels, all to be presented in a form approved by the
Engineer.
1.12 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES
A. The Contractor shall refer to and comply with the current regulations and specifications
of the service authorities before commencing any work adjacent to other utilities.
This requirement will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for taking every
precaution to avoid damage to these utilities and he shall be held responsible for the
cost of repair of all damage and other liability claims in accordance with the Conditions
of Contract and the Specification.
1.13 USE OF EXPLOSIVES
A. The use of explosives shall not be permitted in this Contract.
1.14 SUPPORT TO EXCAVATIONS
A. In accordance with the relevant sections of these Specifications, the Contractor

shall provide, install, and maintain supports to the sides of all excavations in a
way that prevents the sides from collapsing or from affecting in any way whatever as
a result of collapse of the sides of excavation and/or as a result of sliding.
1.15 PUBLIC SAFETY AND CONVENIENCE
A. The Contractor shall not deposit the earth obtained from excavation and/or store up
or deploy equipment, tools and plant necessary in locations that will affect the safety of
the public, public services, or properties and/or in such a way that impedes
traffic to pedestrians and any other works or public authorities or private concerns.
B. The Contractor will be held responsible for the sufficiency of his safety measures and
will be liable for keeping the Works safe at all times.
C. Nuisance from noise and dust:
1. The Contractor shall take all precautions, which, in the opinion of the Engineer,
are necessary to minimize nuisance arising from noise and dust when
working in the vicinity of residences, lecture halls and offices. All engine-driven
machines shall be fitted with efficient silencers, which are not necessarily
those supplied by the manufacturers of the engines or plant, and if
necessary, plant shall be screened with acoustic materials. If, in the
opinion of the Engineer, it is unreasonable or undesirable for pumps, or
concrete mixers to be driven by combustion engines, the Contractor shall,
when so required, provide electric motors to operate the plant.
2. Compressed air operated road breakers, tools, and ventilation equipment
shall be effectively muffled or shall be of a design having a low noise frequency.
3. The Contractor shall utilize submersible pumping plant, which is electrically
powered so as to avoid any nuisance or disturbance to the general public. The
pumping plant may be supplied with power from a diesel engine
generator which shall be acoustically insulated so that the emitted noise
level shall not exceed 65 dBA measured at a distance of 3m from the
equipment. The Engineer shall approve all the noise level near houses, and
sound installation procedures to keep the noise nuisance to the minimum.
1.16 DISPOSAL OF DEBRIS
A. The Contractor shall keep the constructions site neat and clean to the satisfaction of the
Engineer by daily removal of unwanted material arising from demolished pipes
and manholes, sewer cleaning, and excavations, rubbish, temporary installations,
and daily cleaning to remove windblown sand and other debris. All debris shall be
removed from the site to a public disposal location approved by the Municipality. The
disposal location may be at any distance from the project site, and may be changed
by the municipality during the time of construction. The Contractor shall determine any
requirements for the disposal of construction material at the approved location. The
Contractor shall allow for this in his rates.
B. Upon final completion of the Works, the Contractor shall clear away and remove from
the site all remaining constructional plant, surplus materials, rubbish, and temporary
works of every kind and leave the whole of the site clean to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
C. The Contractor shall pump out underground water and/or percolating water that
is encountered in the excavations and dispose of such water to places indicated by
the Engineer. The Engineer may allow the disposal of such water in rainwater
gullies providing there is no technical hindrance. The Contractor shall not dispose of
water into sewer pipes, roads, private property, or open areas such as parks or
undeveloped lots.
D. The Contractor shall provide all treatment units, power, chemicals and labor required to
remove hydrogen sulfide from pumped out water prior to discharge. Hydrogen
sulfide shall be treated and removed so that air quality and discharged
water quality is maintained within EPA standards at all times.
1.17 TEMPORARY FENCING
A. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, all open excavations and other hazardous
areas shall be totally enclosed from all sides by temporary fencing. Temporary fencing is
detailed on MPW Standard Drawing.
B. In all cases, locations of the temporary fencing proposed by the Contractor shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to installation. The Contractor shall not
commence any works until the associated temporary fencing is erected and the
installation has been approved by the Engineer.
C. Damaged sections of temporary fencing shall be repaired or replaced promptly
to maintain at all times the standard of fencing and installations as initially
approved. Temporary fencing shall not be removed from any location without
the prior written approval of the Engineer.
1.18 PROTECTION OF STREETS AND SIDEWALKS
A. The Contractor shall protect streets and sidewalks and shall repair damage caused
by construction activity. The Contractor shall comply with local rules and
regulations in connection with the use of streets.
B. Allow for protecting and maintaining all pipes, ducts and cables met in excavations,
for keeping all ditches gullies and channels clear and unobstructed and for making
good any change caused to public or private roads, paths, kerb and drains and paying
all cost and charges incurred.
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.01 MATERIALS - GENERAL
A. Materials supplied shall be manufactured to the latest edition of the reference

standards. Manufacturer's test certificate shall be furnished along with every
consignment.
B. Approval of the source of materials shall be obtained from the Engineer after
testing representative samples under his supervision to ascertain their compliance
with the specified requirements; prior to the importation of the material to the site.
2.02 CEMENT
A. Cement used for the drainage works shall be fresh and of approved quality
Portland sulphate resisting cement Type V, complying with the requirements of ASTM
C150.
2.03 CONCRETE FOR MANHOLES, DRAINAGE CHANNELS AND HORIZONTAL

GULLIES
A. Concrete elements of any class for drainage works, whether pre-cast or in-situ, shall be
carried out in accordance of Division 3.
B. Concrete shall be in accordance with Section 03 3005 and the following classes:
1. Class C 20 for bed or haunch or encasement to pipes
2. Class C 40 with nominal 10mm aggregate for benching, minimum 20 mm thick
with smooth hard finish
3. Class C 20 for blinding
4. Class C 40 for Reinforced Concrete works
2.04 WATER PROOFING
A. Water proofing shall comply with the requirements of Section 07 1300.
A. The Contractor shall make necessary arrangements to verify the conformity of pipes
to the specification requirements and tests outlined hereinafter, prior to
importing the concrete pipes to the site. The Engineer may, at his discretion, supervise
all such tests.
B. Pipes and fittings shall be in accordance with the following
1. Reinforced Concrete Pipe (RCP) and fittings shall comply with the
requirements of Section 33 3101 - “Reinforced Concrete Pipe and Fittings” as
modified herein.
2. Un-reinforced Concrete Pipe and Fittings shall comply with the requirements
herein.
3. uPVC Pipes and fittings shall confirm to the requirements of Section 33
3330 - “uPVC Pipe and Fittings”
4. HDPE Pipes and fittings shall confirm to the requirements of Section 33
3102 - “HDPE Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings”
2.06 CONCRETE PIPES
A. Concrete pipes shall be of sound manufacture and free from honeycombing.

B. Concrete pipes up to and including 600mm diameter maybe un-reinforced or
reinforced unless specifically specified as reinforced.
C. Concrete pipes greater than 600mm diameter shall be reinforced concrete pipes shall
be in accordance with Section 33 3101 - ”Reinforced Concrete Pipe and Fittings” with
the following exceptions
1. Storm water drainage pipes do not require internal plastic lining.
2. Reinforced concrete pipe for Storm Water Drainage shall be manufactured from
Type V Sulphate Resisting Cement.
D. Un-reinforced concrete pipe shall be as specified herein.
E. Manufacturer
1. Concrete pipes shall be purchased from the Cement Products Factory of the
National Industries Company (N.I.C.) of Kuwait, in so far as the pipes met the
Specifications, in particular with regard to Type V cement.
2. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to obtain pipes from another
source, capable of complying with the specification; if any of the pipes cannot be
supplied by the Cement Products Factory of N.I.C.
3. Contractor shall be responsible for securing the required quantities at the proper
time for the work and any delay in the supply and delivery thereof shall not
entitle a claim for extension of Contract period, nor for any additional expenses
on account of such delay.
2.07 UN-REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPES
A. Un-reinforced concrete pipes shall be of sound manufacture and

free from honeycombing.
B. Contractor shall make necessary arrangements to verify the conformity of pipes to
the specification requirements and tests outlined hereinafter, prior to importing the
concrete pipes to the site. Engineer may, at his discretion, supervise all such tests.
C. Un-reinforced concrete pipes having diameters 250 to 600 mm shall be tested
in accordance with reference standards. The minimum crushing test loads in kgf /
linear meter of effective length on the two edge bearing strength test performed
shall be as outlined in Table VI-1 below:
Table VI-1
Crushing strength of Un-reinforced Pipes
Nominal internal dia. Minimum crushing strength
of pipe in mm (kgf/Linear meter)
250 2350
300 2380
350 2600
400 2800
450 3000
500 3800
600 4000
D. In the event that, after installation, the pipe fail to meet the line test or other
requirements, the defective pipe shall be removed and replaced or encased with
minimum 150 mm thick Class C 20 concrete made from Type V cement as per ASTM
150.
E. Pipes of the above mentioned diameters shall be laid and protected in accordance with
the typical MPW Drawings (MPW No. RA / D / TP - 6) and Section 31 2315 -
“Trenching". Where these two standards conflict the most restrictive shall apply.
F. Pipes laid in depths less than one meter or more than five meters to top of pipe must be
encased in class C 20 concrete.
G. Joints for un-reinforced concrete pipes shall be elastomeric type rings, maintained
in place in such a manner that ensures watertight joints during the specified tests, and
the subsequent life of the installed pipes.
H. Pipes and joints shall have the following marked indelibly, immediately after taking from
the mould(s):
1. Name of manufacturer
2. Date of manufacture and serial number
3. Nominal diameter
I. Nominal diameters shall refer to internal diameters of pipes and the nominal length of a
pipe shall be the effective length of the installed pipe.
J. Internal and external surfaces of the pipes shall be smooth and without repair
patches. Pipes and joints shall be checked for dimensions and tolerances with
special gauges, supplied by the Contractor. Tolerances on the pipe dimensions shall
be as follows:
1. Nominal diameter: ± 5 mm for 250 to 500 mm nominal diameter
2. Free space between the grooves: ± 2 mm for 250 to 500 mm diameter
3. Wall thickness at the base at the sides and at the top: + 20 mm and - 10
mm. Consideration shall be given to the required clearance between the
grooves for proper jointing
4. Nominal length: ± 20 mm
2.08 HORIZONTAL GULLIES
A. Reinforced cement concrete structures constructed in place in accordance with

current MPW standard details.
2.09 VERTICAL GULLIES
A. Pre-cast units, purchased from the Cement Products Factory of the National
Industries Company (NIC) in Kuwait.
2.10 DRAINAGE CHANNELS
A. Reinforced cement concrete structures constructed in place in accordance with details

in the Project Drawings.
2.11 PRECAST MANHOLE RINGS
A. Lightly reinforced, sulphate resisting cement concrete rings of 150 mm thickness, 1,000
mm internal diameter and suitable length from the Cement Products Factory of
the National Industries Company (NIC) in Kuwait - class K 300.
B. Manhole rings shall be joined with the manhole shaft using sand cement mortar
(3:1). External walls shall be treated with three coats of liquid asphalt to a finished
thickness of not less than 2 mm.
C. Benching and coating of inner and outer surfaces of the manhole shall be similar to that
of the cast-in-situ manholes.
2.12 PRECAST MANHOLE COVER SLAB

A. These shall be of sulphate resisting, reinforced concrete and available from the Cement
Products Factory of the NIC in Kuwait - class K 300.
2.13 CAST IRON COVERS AND FRAMES

A. Cast iron covers for manholes shall be in accordance with Section 33 3913 - “Sanitary
Utility Sewerage Manholes, Frames, and Covers”
B. Prior to delivering any covers and frames to the site, submit two samples of each type to
be used for approval and carry out the required tests. Covers and frames used
shall conform to the approved samples. Approved samples shall be retained by the
Engineer until the completion of the Project.
2.14 STEP IRONS

A. Galvanized cast iron of not less than 1.45 kgs (3.20 lb) weight, 250 mm (10 inch) length
and 150 mm (6 inch) width.
2.15 PRISING AND LIFTING BARS

A. One set of prising and lifting bars of approved design shall be supplied by the
Contractor to the Owner with every one to one hundred (1-100) manhole covers
and frames installed, subject to a minimum of two (2) sets.
2.16 GRATES AND FRAMES FOR DRAINAGE CHANNEL AND GULLIES

A. Grates and frames for drainage channel shall be made of cast or ductile
iron in accordance with Section 33 3913 - “Sanitary Utility Sewerage Manholes,
Frames, and Covers”
2.17 STEELWORK
A. Steel work shall be fabricated from structural steel sections and fasteners,
all in accordance with Division 05
B. Unless otherwise specified, structural steel work shall be rust protected in
accordance with Section 09 9713 - “Steel Coatings”
2.18 STORM WATER OUTFALLS

A. Contractor shall verify the site conditions and integrate the storm water drainage works
as appropriate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 COORDINATION
A The Contractor shall notify other ministries and authorities whose service might
be affected by the Works regarding his program. He shall also submit every two
weeks details of the work contemplated for execution in order to enable the service
authorities to inspect and/or to indicate their service on the site to take any
measures deemed necessary.
B. The Contractor shall study Drawings and specifications and familiarize with the
structural and architectural details and the work of other trades.
C. It shall be ensured that the work under this section will not interfere with those of other
trades and are compatible with the architectural finishes, prior to placing
orders, fabrication and installation.
D. Other Sections shall be furnished with necessary templates, patterns, setting out
plans and other items for incorporation in the works or for leaving necessary provisions
for the work. Ensure timely placement of sleeves, inserts and the like.
E. Where work is installed in close proximity, to or will interfere with other works,
the Contractor shall assist in working out satisfactory space arrangements. Composite
shop drawings shall be prepared to a suitable scale, showing how the work is
installed in relation to the work of other trades.
F. Conflicts in requirements with other trades shall be resolved by the Contractor. Only
those conflicts, that cannot be solved without changes to structure or those
which involve changes to system design, shall be referred to the Engineer.
3.02 FACTORY TESTING OF UN-REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPES
A. Un-reinforced concrete pipe shall be subjected to the water tightness test as

described below, if required by the Engineer. Where this is not defined, tests shall
be conducted according to the applicable British standards.
1. After a minimum of seven (7) days from the pouring of the unreinforced
pipes, a maximum of 0.5 percent of the lot shall be subjected to a water
tightness test. The pipe shall be placed vertically with the socket down on
a water tight base and completely sealed. Thereafter the
pipe shall be filled with water to the top of the spigot. If the water level drops
more water shall be added until the concrete is saturated with water. During a
test period of 24 hours, in a place away from draught, the water level shall not
drop more than 5 mm. The water surface shall be covered with a thin layer of oil
during the test to avoid evaporation.
2. Immediately after the water tightness test, the unreinforced pipes shall be
tested to establish the crushing load per meter run, in accordance with BS EN
1916.
3. After a minimum of 28 days from the date of production, reinforced pipe shall
be tested for cracking and crushing strengths in accordance with the procedures
given in the Swedish Specifications.
4. Hydraulic tests of unreinforced concrete pipes shall be performed on 2 percent of
the pipes with internal diameters of 300 mm and on 1 percent of the pipes with
internal diameters of 400, 500 and 600 mm in accordance with BS EN 1916.
5. Water absorption test shall be carried out on unreinforced concrete
pipes in accordance with ASTM standards for testing permeability of concrete
pipes.
6. If the supply of the pipes includes delivery to a site located more than 25 Km
away from the plant, the water tightness test on the pipes shall be repeated on a
maximum of 0.5 percent of the pipes at the site.
7. When a pipe fails to pass a particular test, two other samples shall be selected
from the same batch and subjected to the test. Should either of these two pipes
fail to pass the test, the whole batch represented by these samples shall be
rejected.
8. All batches of pipes manufactured with materials or concrete which fail to pass
the required tests shall be rejected.
9. For convenience, pipes may be grouped in batches of 200 pieces and the
samples of pipes selected from these batches. The pipes so selected
shall be deemed to represent the batches and rejection shall apply to the
whole batch of 200 units.
10. Rejection of pipes due to defective materials shall include all pipes manufactured
with the materials represented by the samples of materials, which failed to
pass the required tests. All rejected pipes shall be stamped "rejected" in
a conspicuous location on the pipe.
3.03 INSPECTION BEFORE INSTALLATION
A. Materials shall be carefully inspected and examined for cracks and other defects
while suspended above the trench immediately before installation in final position.
B. Materials which do not conform to the specifications or which are found to be defective
or damaged shall be rejected and removed from the works. If more than 10 percent of
the materials are rejected, the Engineer has the right to reject the whole consignment.
A. Trench excavation, pipe installation and backfill shall comply with Section 31
2315, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
B. Jointing shall be in accordance with the requirements of the particular specifications
for the pipe being used and the following.
1. When jointing pipe, a mark shall be made to check the position of the end of
the barrel after the joint is made.
2. The rubber rings shall be lubricated with a lubricant approved by
the pipe manufacturer. Joint lubricant shall be delivered to the site in
unopened containers.
3. A gap of 5mm to 10mm shall be left between the ends of the pipes to allow for
joint flexibility.
4. The pipeline joints shall not be deflected when pipes are laid in curves, until the
join has been made.
3.05 CLEANING AND INSPECTION OF GRAVITY PIPELINES
A. For the purposes of cleaning and inspection, the term gravity 'pipelines' includes
those laid in heading or by pipe- jacking or microtunnelling or similar techniques.
B. The Contractor shall submit for approval, his proposed method for cleaning the
gravity pipeline. Such cleaning system shall not damage the pipeline in any way.
C. During and after construction the Contractor shall take reasonable measures,
including the provision of stoppers plugs and headwalls where appropriate, to prevent
the ingress of deleterious matter into pipelines.
D. After backfilling pipe trenches and completing manholes, chambers, hatch boxes etc.,
and before the trench surfaces are reinstated, the interior of pipelines shall be cleaned
of silt and debris by approved methods for inspection by the Engineer as follows:-
1. Pipelines of 800mm nominal internal diameter and smaller shall have a loose
plug passed through them to show that they are clear of obstruction and
free from deflection. For flexible pipelines the loose plug shall be
dimensioned to suit the permissible minimum deflected diameter of the pipe.
2. Pipelines greater than 800mm nominal internal diameter will, after
cleaning, be inspected from the inside and the Contractor shall provide
a suitable trolley, ventilation and safety equipment, and any other plant and
labour necessary for this purpose, if required by the Engineer.
3. All pipelines will be inspected again before commissioning or taking over
(whichever is sooner) and, if required by the Engineer, shall be cleaned again in
whole or in part.
E. After f i n a l p r e -commissioning inspection, all pipelines to which flows will

not be immediately connected shall be plugged with purpose made removable
stoppers until such time as the pipelines are commissioned. A log recording the
installation date and location and the subsequent removal date of all stoppers
installed shall be maintained and countersigned by the Engineers Representative.
3.06 TESTING OF PIPELINES: GENERAL
A. For the purposes of inspection and testing, the term 'pipelines' includes those laid
in heading or by pipe- jacking or microtunnelling or similar techniques.
B. Prior to commencement of testing, approval shall be obtained to the quality and
methods of providing and disposing of all fluids used for testing purposes.
C. If permission is given to use new or existing pipelines or culverts, which are not part of a
live system, they shall be thoroughly cleaned of all silt and any resulting damage made
good after use.
D. If lagoons for the storage of such fluids are permitted, they must be suitably
protected with fencing and attended by day and night to prevent access by the general
public and will not be sited adjacent to buildings. Approved means of preventing the
formation of mosquito larvae on the surface of the lagoons will be employed.
E. Testing of pipelines shall in all cases be carried out in the presence of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall provide complete plant and all struts, thrust blocks, etc., as
may be necessary for effectively testing the pipelines to the specified pressures.
F. Should any inspection be unsatisfactory or any test fail, the Contractor shall
replace defective pipes, leaking joints or otherwise re-execute defective work as
instructed, following which, cleaning and testing will be repeated until the
Engineer certifies the pipeline to be satisfactory.
G. The Contractor shall take care that during periods of rainfall or flooding of trenches from
other causes, lengths of completed pipelines, which have not been backfilled may
be subject to flotation. He shall take precautions and measures to avoid any such
flotation. If pipelines are subject to flotation they shall be removed and completely
relaid to the Engineer's satisfaction.
H. General
1. The Contractor shall submit a method statement in accordance with Section
01 4000 for the Engineer's approval, covering details of his proposed
methods and programme for testing (including details of test equipment).
2. The Contractor shall provide all labour, materials and supplies necessary for
carrying out testing and cleaning including water, pumps, gauges, piped
connections, stop ends and all other temporary works. The Contractor shall also
include details for the disposal of water used for testing.
3. Test pressure shall be measured by U-tube manometer or standing water
columns.
4. Pipelines shall be properly secured and supported before being put under test.
a. At pipe ends, provide for transmitting the end thrust into the sides of the
trenches.
b. Ensure that anchorage of bends is sufficient and thrusts from all branch
outlets are properly restrained.
5. The Contractor may at any stage of construction carry out such tests as he
considers desirable, to check materials and workmanship on the pipeline.
a. This shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligations to complete all
testing designated under the Contract.
6. All water required for testing and cleaning the pipelines shall be potable
water or irrigation water and shall be provided by the Contractor, at his cost.
7. All flexible gravity sewer pipelines (uPVC, HDPE) must be tested for deflection.
8. The Engineer shall have power to require the Contractor to vary any test
procedure or pressure, as the Engineer thinks fit, at no extra cost to the Ministry.
9. The Contractor shall submit an inspection request to the Engineer, in accordance
with Clause. 1.07 “Quality Control" to test a section of pipeline, after having
satisfied himself that the section of pipeline to be tested in the presence of
the Engineer is satisfactory in all aspects.
10. The Contractor should note that neither the satisfactory testing of a pipeline,
section of a pipeline or any other pipework, nor the acceptance of such
testing by the Engineer or his representative, shall in any way relieve the
Contractor of any of his responsibilities and obligations under the Contract.
11. When leakage or infiltration exceeds the amount allowed by the specifications,
the Contractor shall, at his own expense, make the necessary repairs or
replacements in accordance with the specifications, to reduce the leakage
or infiltration to the specified limits.
12. Any individual detectable leaks shall be repaired, regardless of the results of the
test, unless otherwise accepted by the Engineer.
I. Deflection Testing
1. All flexible gravity sewer pipelines (HDPE, uPVC, etc) shall be subjected to
deflection tests at site, as detailed herein and in the particular pipe
specification of these documents.
a. The above requirement shall not apply to pipes 100mm dia. and smaller.
2. Deflection shall be calculated as a percentage of the difference

between the measured in-situ diameter (on any axis) and the stated non-
deflected diameter, divided by the non-deflected diameter.
a. A reduction in the diameter shall be considered to be a negative
deflection.
3. Maximum deflection Criteria for Flexible Pipes (measured-In-Situ) shall be as

detailed in the particular pipe specification sections of these documents.
4. Pipe surround shall be removed from all sections of pipe failing to meet the
specified deflection criteria.
a. Undamaged pipes may be re-backfilled and tested again.
b. All action taken to correct the pipe deflection shall be at the Contractor’s
expense.
c. Re-laid sections shall be tested in accordance with item number 3 above.
5. If the permanent set or deflection, after removal of pipe surround, exceeds the
limits set out above, the pipes shall be deemed to be damaged and will
therefore be rejected.
a. Pipes so rejected shall be indelibly marked, removed from the site and
replaced at the Contractor's expense.
3.07 TESTING OF GRAVITY PIPELINES
A. All gravity pipelines of 800mm nominal internal diameter and smaller shall be given
a preliminary test when the pipeline is bedded and jointed but before backfilling and a
final test after backfilling. Unless otherwise instructed, non-pressure pipelines shall be
tested in sections between manholes. In addition, pipelines shown as straight
lines on the Project Drawings shall be subjected to a light test between manholes to
verify alignment.
1. Preliminary test for pipelines with 800mm internal diameter or less:
a. Air shall be pumped into the pipeline until a pressure of l00mm head of
water is indicated on a water manometer and the pressure shall not fall
by more than 75mm during a period of 5 minutes.
b. The Contractor will not be permitted to commence testing later than 4
hours after sunrise or earlier than 4 hours before sunset during the
summer period unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
2. Final test for pipelines with 800mm internal diameter or less:
a. Water test shall be conducted on segments of pipe between manholes.
b. The pipe work shall be completely filled with fresh water to a head of 1500
mm above the crown of the pipe at the highest end (not exceeding 6000
mm above the crown at the lowest end of the pipe work segment).
Steeply graded pipe work shall be tested in sections so as not exceed the
above limit.
c. Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, the test shall commence one
hour after the filling of the line, at which point the test column shall be
made up to the required test head.
d. The loss of water over a period of 30 minutes period shall be measured
by the addition of water to the test column.
e. The pipe work under test shall be deemed to have passed the test if the
loss of water does not exceed 0.12 liters per hour per 100 meters of
pipe per mm of internal diameter.
f. If the pipe work fails in the test or shows any signs of leakage, the
Contractor shall rectify the defects or replace the pipe work at his
expense.
g. The Contractor shall use only fresh water for the tests and
arrange for its transport in and out of the site.
B. All gravity pipelines larger than 800mm nominal internal diameter shall be
internally inspected, pressure tested and also tested for infiltration when laid below
the ground water table. Internal inspection shall be in accordance with Article 3.05.
1. The Contractor shall, carry out tests on every joint by means of an approved
joint testing apparatus or by hydrostatically testing the pipeline.
a. The pipe work shall be completely filled with fresh water to a head of 1500
mm above the crown of the pipe at the highest end (not exceeding 6000
mm above the crown at the lowest end of the pipe work segment). Steeply
graded pipe work shall be tested in sections so as not exceed the above
limit.
b. Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, the test shall commence one
hour after the filling of the line, at which point the test column shall be
made up to the required test head.
c. The loss of water over a period of 30 minutes period shall b measured
by the addition of water to the test column.
d. The pipe work under test shall be deemed to have passed the test if the
loss of water does not exceed 0.12 liters per hour per 100 meters of
pipe per mm of internal diameter.
2. For any joint of a pipeline that fails this test additional joint sealing will be
required to be carried out by approved resin/gel/grout injection techniques at
the Contractor's cost.
C. Infiltration Test:
1. The measured infiltration shall not exceed 0.12 liters per hour per 100 meters of
pipe per mm of internal diameter of pipeline under test.
a. Pipes 600mm and larger and smaller sizes if directed by the Engineer, laid
below the groundwater table shall be subjected to an infiltration test.
b. The infiltration test shall be conducted after dewatering activities have
been suspended for at least 7 days.
c. The Contractor shall include in his method statement complete details for the
measurement of any infiltration.
d. For any pipeline that fails the infiltration test the Contractor must
propose measures to remedy the situation and execute such measures at
his own cost to achieve compliance with this requirement.
2. For any joint of a pipeline with nominal internal diameter greater than 800mm,
which fails this test additional joint sealing will be required to be carried out by
approved resin/gel/grout injection techniques at the Contractor's cost.
3.08 MANHOLES
A. General
1. Unless noted otherwise, manholes shall be constructed on gravity sewers:
a. At each change of gradient or direction.
b. At each change in diameter.
c. At each intersection with other pipes.
d. At such other points as shown on the Drawings.
e. As directed by the Engineer.
2. Concrete work shall not begin until the pipe fittings to be cast into the manhole
walls, are on site. No "box outs" will be allowed, unless approved by the
Engineer.
a. Thereafter the manhole shall be cast, water-proofed and backfilled as
3. Channel inverts shall be accurately laid to meet pipe invert elevations.
4. Channel bends in the benching are to be as "slow" as possible, by
setting the manholes "off-center" at changes in direction.
5. All pipelines adjoining structures (i.e. at entries and exits to manholes) shall
have a flexible joint adjacent to each structure, as detailed on the drawings.
6 Benching shall be formed with in-situ C40/20 mass concrete with smooth
hard exposed finish.
7. Unless otherwise noted, all exterior surfaces below grade shall be covered
with waterproof membrane, in accordance with Section 07 1300.
8. Manhole covers in traffic areas shall be set to the paved area profile and be flush
with the paved area surface.
9. Manhole covers located in non-traffic areas shall be set to an elevation as shown
on the drawings, or as directed by the Engineer.
10. Where drop manholes are indicated they shall be as shown on the Drawings
and shall be formed where the upstream length of sewer enters a manhole at
a level 1 metre or greater above the manhole invert level.
11. All manholes shall be watertight on completion.
12. Manholes shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of this clause.
13. The Contractor shall take all measures, deemed necessary by the
Engineer, to ensure that manholes are not left in a flooded or unprotected
condition.
a. If the designated covers are not on site after placing the cover slab, a
temporary plywood cover shall be securely fitted in all openings.
B. Backdrops to Manholes (Pipes & Fittings)

1. These shall be constructed vertically adjacent to the external face of the
manhole shaft, in order to reach the invert level inside the manhole.
C. Demolition or Replacement of Manhole

1. Where an existing manhole is to be demolished, or removed, prior to the
construction of a new manhole, the existing manhole shall be demolished and
the debris removed to an approved location, in accordance with Section 02 4100.
2. Concrete cover slab shall be carefully broken to recover the frame and cover,
which shall be taken to the designated Ministry stores.
3.09 MANHOLE TESTING
A. The Contractor shall test 10 percent of all Storm Water Drainage System manholes, to
be selected at random by the Engineer.
B. Manholes shall be hydrostatically tested to at least one metre above the crown of the
highest connection into the manhole being tested.
C. The selected manholes shall be tested for watertightness. Each manhole shall be filled
with clean water to the test level and shall stand for a period of three days, to allow for
absorption. The
structure shall be considered satisfactory if, subsequent to this period, there shall be no
fall in level over a period of 24 hours (after making due allowance for rainfall
and evaporation) and no visible leaks.
D. Should a manhole fail to pass it shall be repaired and retested. If more than 2 percent
of the total manholes fail the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his
approval a proposal to correct the situation.
E. All cost associated with testing and repairs shall be of the Contractor's expense.
3.10 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING PIPELINES:
A. At the locations shown on the Drawing, or directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall
connect the new pipelines to the existing pipelines or structures, but not until the new
works have passed the final tests.
B. The Contractor shall take every precaution to prevent any dirt or extraneous material
from entering the existing main or service pipe.
C. The Contractor shall have available, at the connection site, sufficient dewatering pumps
to keep the excavation dry at all times.
1. Work shall be carried out in a clean and efficient manner.
2. The Client may put the interconnection into use as soon as possible
after its installation and will carry out an inspection to detect any evidence of
leakage.
a. Any remedial work necessary to eliminate leakage shall be carried out by
the Contractor.
b. No pipework shall be covered or backfilled until the Engineer is totally
satisfied that the interconnection is free of all leakage.
3.11 OVERPUMPING AND FLOW DIVERSION
A. The Contractor shall maintain Storm Water flow arising from any source.
1. The Contractor shall submit his proposed method of overpumping or flow
diversion to the Engineer for approval, prior to the start of construction.
2. The proposed method shall include proposed alignments and design
requirements of the discharge to the terminal point.
B. Contractor shall furnish, install and operate pumps, plugs, conduits and other equipment
required to divert flow around the pipe segment upon which work is to be performed.
1. After the work has been completed, tested and accepted by the Engineer, flow
shall be restored to normal.
END OF SECTION


2.2 - Prototypes-SPEC (DIV21-33) - 2022.07.19

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2.2 - Prototypes-SPEC (DIV21-33) - 2022.07.19

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PHASE 4 – TENDER DOCUMENTS

DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (UNDER SEPARATE COVER)

DIVISION 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS

SECTION 02 3000 SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION

SECTION 03 1000 CONCRETE FORMING & ACCESSORIES

SECTION 04 2200 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

SECTION 05 1200 STRUCTURAL STEEL

DIVISION 06 WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES

SECTION 06 1000 ROUGH CARPENTRY

DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

SECTION 07 1113 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

SECTION 08 1113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

SECTION 09 2116 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

SECTION 10 1413.13 INTERIOR SIGNAGE

SECTION 11 2429 FALL PROTECTION SYSTEMS

SECTION 12 2413 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES

DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 13 1213 SWIMMING POOLS AND WATER FEATURES

DIVISION 14 CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

SECTION 14 2100 ELEVATORS

SECTION 21 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION

SECTION 22 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

DIVISION 23 HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

SECTION 23 0100 HVAC SYSTEM – GENERAL DESCRIPTION

DIVISION 25 INTEGRATED AUTOMATION

SECTION 25 0000 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM

SECTION 26 0500 COMMON REQUIREMENT FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

DIVISION 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

SECTION 28 1300 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM

SECTION 31 1000 SITE CLEARING

DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

SECTION 32 1116.16 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES

SECTION 33 1100 WATER DISTRIBUTION NETWORK

VOLUME 2.4 - APPENDICES

APPENDIX A GEOTECHNICAL REPORT

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. This Section includes the following:

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient

F. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:

A. Product Data: For the following:

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

C. Electrical Characteristics for Fire-Suppression Equipment: Equipment of higher

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place

1.07 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Fire Protection Systems

1. Fire water storage tanks, pumps and pumping scheme.

KEO/19-3262-0000 21 0500/2 Common Work Results for Fire Suppression

C13 Gas Branch LGF + LLRF+LURF 253 253 hose reel

C2 Society Center At Roof (Fire):

KEO/19-3262-0000 21 0500/4 Common Work Results for Fire Suppression

2- Fire Pumps: End Suction pump (1W).

C7 & C7A Masjid At Roof (Fire) on masjed only:

C9 Health Care At BASEMENT:

C10 MOCI 1- Fire Tank:

2- Fire Pumps:End Suction pump (1W). (500

C12 Children Club AT BASEMENT

C13 Gas branch At Roof (Fire):

2. Automatic Sprinkler System

3. Wet Riser System

4. Hose Reel System and Fire Extinguishers